From 0b8ca6637be94f7814cafa7d01ad4699672ff336 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Darrell Anderson Date: Tue, 21 Jan 2014 22:06:48 -0600 Subject: Beautify docbook files --- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/about.docbook | 46 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/configtde.docbook | 290 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/contrib.docbook | 217 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/desktop.docbook | 106 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/filemng.docbook | 293 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/gettde.docbook | 70 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/index.docbook | 103 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/install.docbook | 894 +---- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/intro.docbook | 71 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/misc.docbook | 217 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/moreinfo.docbook | 225 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/nontdeapps.docbook | 45 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/notrelated.docbook | 210 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/panel.docbook | 77 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tdeapps.docbook | 205 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tips.docbook | 175 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/winmng.docbook | 82 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/glossary/index.docbook | 452 +-- .../tdebase/glossary/tdeprintingglossary.docbook | 1198 +----- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/advanced.docbook | 356 +- .../docs/tdebase/kate/configuring.docbook | 682 +--- .../docs/tdebase/kate/fundamentals.docbook | 757 +--- .../docs/tdebase/kate/highlighting.docbook | 579 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/index.docbook | 370 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/mdi.docbook | 284 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/menus.docbook | 1141 +----- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/part.docbook | 660 +--- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/plugins.docbook | 29 +- .../docs/tdebase/kate/regular-expressions.docbook | 1167 ++---- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook | 266 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook | 43 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook | 455 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook | 119 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook | 80 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook | 105 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook | 181 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook | 209 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook | 278 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook | 140 +- .../tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook | 214 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook | 234 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook | 112 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook | 152 +- .../tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook | 327 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook | 483 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook | 185 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook | 221 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook | 300 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook | 865 +---- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook | 216 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook | 261 +- .../tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook | 106 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook | 213 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmlaunch/index.docbook | 76 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook | 136 +- .../tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook | 126 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook | 342 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook | 166 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook | 91 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook | 250 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook | 181 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook | 325 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook | 363 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook | 110 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook | 334 +- .../tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook | 175 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook | 92 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook | 205 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook | 76 +- .../tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook | 321 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook | 138 +- .../tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook | 107 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook | 389 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook | 98 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook | 718 +--- .../tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook | 97 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/useragent/index.docbook | 156 +- .../kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook | 634 +--- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kfind/index.docbook | 363 +- .../docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/contact.docbook | 193 +- .../docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/help.docbook | 863 +---- .../docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/index.docbook | 58 +- .../docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/links.docbook | 85 +- .../docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/support.docbook | 82 +- .../docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/welcome.docbook | 89 +- .../docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/whatistde.docbook | 95 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kicker/index.docbook | 1995 +++------- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/devices/index.docbook | 73 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/dma/index.docbook | 101 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/index.docbook | 443 +-- .../tdebase/kinfocenter/interrupts/index.docbook | 111 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/ioports/index.docbook | 82 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/memory/index.docbook | 134 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/nics/index.docbook | 57 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/opengl/index.docbook | 76 +- .../tdebase/kinfocenter/partitions/index.docbook | 76 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pci/index.docbook | 94 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pcmcia/index.docbook | 58 +- .../tdebase/kinfocenter/processor/index.docbook | 83 +- .../tdebase/kinfocenter/protocols/index.docbook | 48 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/samba/index.docbook | 332 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/scsi/index.docbook | 90 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/sound/index.docbook | 75 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/usb/index.docbook | 59 +- .../docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/xserver/index.docbook | 68 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/klipper/index.docbook | 597 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kmenuedit/index.docbook | 551 +-- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/basics.docbook | 614 +--- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/bookmarks.docbook | 264 +- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/browser.docbook | 607 +--- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/commands.docbook | 2415 +++--------- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/config.docbook | 180 +- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/credits.docbook | 273 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/faq.docbook | 259 +- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/filemanager.docbook | 1462 ++------ .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/index.docbook | 103 +- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/introduction.docbook | 73 +- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/path-complete.docbook | 114 +- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/plugins.docbook | 245 +- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/save-settings.docbook | 150 +- .../docs/tdebase/konqueror/sidebar.docbook | 290 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konsole/index.docbook | 2461 +++---------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kpager/index.docbook | 423 +-- .../docs/tdebase/ksplashml/index.docbook | 1118 ++---- .../docs/tdebase/ksysguard/index.docbook | 603 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kwrite/index.docbook | 3462 ++++-------------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kxkb/index.docbook | 270 +- .../docs/tdebase/quickstart/index.docbook | 1393 ++----- .../docs/tdebase/tdedebugdialog/index.docbook | 177 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/audiocd.docbook | 253 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip.docbook | 42 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip2.docbook | 45 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/cgi.docbook | 42 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/data.docbook | 69 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/file.docbook | 34 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/finger.docbook | 69 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/fish.docbook | 106 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/floppy.docbook | 78 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ftp.docbook | 50 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gopher.docbook | 46 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gzip.docbook | 47 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/help.docbook | 30 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/http.docbook | 52 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/https.docbook | 33 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imap.docbook | 38 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imaps.docbook | 30 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/index.docbook | 25 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/info.docbook | 54 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/lan.docbook | 49 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ldap.docbook | 42 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mac.docbook | 72 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mailto.docbook | 34 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/man.docbook | 77 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mrml.docbook | 44 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/news.docbook | 32 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nfs.docbook | 53 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nntp.docbook | 62 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3.docbook | 25 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3s.docbook | 25 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/print.docbook | 230 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlan.docbook | 25 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlogin.docbook | 58 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/sftp.docbook | 38 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smb.docbook | 108 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smtp.docbook | 30 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/tar.docbook | 30 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/telnet.docbook | 30 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/thumbnail.docbook | 46 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdav.docbook | 73 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdavs.docbook | 30 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/add-printer-wiz.docbook | 273 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cups-config.docbook | 2416 +++--------- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cupsoptions.docbook | 796 +--- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/extensions.docbook | 63 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/external-command.docbook | 18 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/final-word.docbook | 72 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/getting-started.docbook | 155 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/highlights.docbook | 619 +--- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/index.docbook | 196 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpd.docbook | 22 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpr-bsd.docbook | 28 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lprng.docbook | 10 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/rlpr.docbook | 20 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/tech-overview.docbook | 300 +- .../docs/tdebase/tdeprint/theory.docbook | 631 +--- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdesu/index.docbook | 461 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/index.docbook | 1707 ++------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/tdmrc-ref.docbook | 3069 ++++------------ .../docs/tdebase/userguide/about-desktop.docbook | 534 +-- .../tdebase/userguide/first-impressions.docbook | 415 +-- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/getting-started.docbook | 566 +-- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/history.docbook | 163 +- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/index.docbook | 60 +- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/installation.docbook | 749 +--- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/intro.docbook | 18 +- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/more-help.docbook | 47 +- .../tdebase/userguide/notices-trademarks.docbook | 101 +- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/shortcuts.docbook | 297 +- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/staff.docbook | 130 +- .../docs/tdebase/userguide/ug-faq.docbook | 95 +- .../docs/tdebase/visualdict/index.docbook | 151 +- .../docs/tdeedu/klatin/adjectives.docbook | 591 ++- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/index.docbook | 569 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/nouns.docbook | 511 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/numbers.docbook | 393 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/pronouns.docbook | 665 ++-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/verbs.docbook | 3068 ++++++---------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/commands.docbook | 484 +-- .../docs/tdeedu/kmplot/configuration.docbook | 206 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/credits.docbook | 53 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kmplot/developer.docbook | 10 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kmplot/firststeps.docbook | 63 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/index.docbook | 99 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/install.docbook | 16 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kmplot/introduction.docbook | 36 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/menu.docbook | 196 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kmplot/reference.docbook | 235 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/using.docbook | 321 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/ai-contents.docbook | 223 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/altvstime.docbook | 69 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/astroinfo.docbook | 8 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/blackbody.docbook | 82 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-angdist.docbook | 34 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-apcoords.docbook | 39 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-dayduration.docbook | 24 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-ecliptic.docbook | 39 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-eqgal.docbook | 34 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-equinox.docbook | 31 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-geodetic.docbook | 39 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-horizontal.docbook | 34 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-julianday.docbook | 36 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-planetcoords.docbook | 37 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-precess.docbook | 37 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-sidereal.docbook | 30 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/calculator.docbook | 111 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cequator.docbook | 35 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/colorandtemp.docbook | 128 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/commands.docbook | 2181 +++-------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/config.docbook | 500 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cpoles.docbook | 64 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/credits.docbook | 106 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/csphere.docbook | 28 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/darkmatter.docbook | 80 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dcop.docbook | 255 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/details.docbook | 115 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dumpmode.docbook | 78 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ecliptic.docbook | 56 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/ellipticalgalaxies.docbook | 85 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/equinox.docbook | 45 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/faq.docbook | 136 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/flux.docbook | 54 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/geocoords.docbook | 69 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/greatcircle.docbook | 32 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/horizon.docbook | 30 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/hourangle.docbook | 47 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/index.docbook | 221 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/indi.docbook | 976 ++--- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/install.docbook | 146 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/jmoons.docbook | 31 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/julianday.docbook | 77 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/leapyear.docbook | 56 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/lightcurves.docbook | 215 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/luminosity.docbook | 40 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/magnitude.docbook | 62 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/meridian.docbook | 41 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/parallax.docbook | 67 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/precession.docbook | 55 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/quicktour.docbook | 301 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/retrograde.docbook | 29 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/scriptbuilder.docbook | 143 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/sidereal.docbook | 87 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/skycoords.docbook | 200 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/solarsys.docbook | 26 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/spiralgalaxies.docbook | 93 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/stars.docbook | 71 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kstars/timezones.docbook | 31 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/tools.docbook | 65 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/utime.docbook | 54 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/wut.docbook | 50 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/zenith.docbook | 44 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kturtle/getting-started.docbook | 237 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kturtle/glossary.docbook | 403 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/index.docbook | 261 +- .../tdeedu/kturtle/programming-reference.docbook | 1056 +----- .../docs/tdeedu/kturtle/translator-guide.docbook | 215 +- .../docs/tdeedu/kturtle/using-kturtle.docbook | 900 +---- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdelibs/tdespell/index.docbook | 229 +- .../tdemultimedia/kcontrol/kmixcfg/index.docbook | 84 +- .../tdenetwork/kcontrol/kcmktalkd/index.docbook | 78 +- .../docs/tdepim/kaddressbook/index.docbook | 108 +- .../docs/tdepim/kcontrol/kalarmd/index.docbook | 95 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kleopatra/index.docbook | 1830 ++-------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/configure.docbook | 1626 ++------- .../docs/tdepim/kmail/credits-and-licenses.docbook | 434 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/faq.docbook | 809 +---- .../docs/tdepim/kmail/getting-started.docbook | 660 +--- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/importing.docbook | 335 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/index.docbook | 177 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/intro.docbook | 73 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/menus.docbook | 2197 ++--------- .../docs/tdepim/kmail/using-kmail.docbook | 2754 +++----------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/commands.docbook | 1771 ++------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/credits.docbook | 83 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/faq.docbook | 357 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/gloss.docbook | 508 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/index.docbook | 162 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/install.docbook | 61 +- .../docs/tdepim/knode/introduction.docbook | 60 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/journey.docbook | 536 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/more.docbook | 282 +- .../docs/tdepim/knode/using-firststart.docbook | 3238 +++++------------ .../docs/tdepim/knode/using-morefeatures.docbook | 1525 ++------ .../docs/tdepim/knode/using-subscribing.docbook | 2807 ++++---------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knotes/index.docbook | 506 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/cervisia/index.docbook | 3842 ++++---------------- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/catman.docbook | 166 +- .../docs/tdesdk/kbabel/dictionaries.docbook | 554 +-- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/faq.docbook | 71 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/glossary.docbook | 243 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/index.docbook | 139 +- .../docs/tdesdk/kbabel/kbabeldict.docbook | 70 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/menu.docbook | 1744 ++------- .../docs/tdesdk/kbabel/preferences.docbook | 1106 +----- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/using.docbook | 924 +---- .../docs/tdesdk/kbugbuster/index.docbook | 67 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kompare/index.docbook | 67 +- .../docs/tdesdk/tdecachegrind/index.docbook | 930 ++--- .../docs/tdesdk/umbrello/authors.docbook | 53 +- .../umbrello/code_import_and_generation.docbook | 155 +- .../docs/tdesdk/umbrello/credits.docbook | 11 +- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/index.docbook | 56 +- .../docs/tdesdk/umbrello/introduction.docbook | 66 +- .../docs/tdesdk/umbrello/other_features.docbook | 67 +- .../docs/tdesdk/umbrello/uml_basics.docbook | 726 +--- .../tdesdk/umbrello/working_with_umbrello.docbook | 425 +-- .../tdeutils/kcontrol/kcmlowbatcrit/index.docbook | 79 +- 336 files changed, 24551 insertions(+), 92192 deletions(-) (limited to 'tde-i18n-en_GB') diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/about.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/about.docbook index 02fc73b3111..e407bc656d0 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/about.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/about.docbook @@ -5,64 +5,34 @@ --> -About this <acronym ->FAQ</acronym -> +About this <acronym>FAQ</acronym> -What can I do to help out with this FAQ? +What can I do to help out with this FAQ? -First, send us any errors that you may find. Also, any suggestions that you might have, are appreciated. Better yet, send us everything that you think is unclear, and if possible, send us what you think would be a clearer solution. Our email address is kde-doc-english@kde.org. +First, send us any errors that you may find. Also, any suggestions that you might have, are appreciated. Better yet, send us everything that you think is unclear, and if possible, send us what you think would be a clearer solution. Our email address is kde-doc-english@kde.org. -Second, send us your solutions of those frequently-asked questions which are still not in this FAQ. We will put them in as soon as possible. +Second, send us your solutions of those frequently-asked questions which are still not in this FAQ. We will put them in as soon as possible. -Last but not least, please make full use of this FAQ. Read this FAQ (and other relevant documentation) well before asking questions on the various &kde; mailing lists or newsgroups. +Last but not least, please make full use of this FAQ. Read this FAQ (and other relevant documentation) well before asking questions on the various &kde; mailing lists or newsgroups. -You might also want to consider becoming a FAQ maintainer. Please refer to for more details. +You might also want to consider becoming a FAQ maintainer. Please refer to for more details. -How do I become a FAQ maintainer? +How do I become a FAQ maintainer? -Actually, it is very easy to become an FAQ maintainer, and we are always in need of fresh blood. :-) Just send us an email at kde-doc-english@kde.org. +Actually, it is very easy to become an FAQ maintainer, and we are always in need of fresh blood. :-) Just send us an email at kde-doc-english@kde.org. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/configtde.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/configtde.docbook index 65168d58065..452e2bc04fd 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/configtde.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/configtde.docbook @@ -3,62 +3,24 @@ --> -Configuring &kde; +Configuring &kde; -How do I set the language used by &kde;? +How do I set the language used by &kde;? -There are two ways to set the language &kde; uses in the messages it will display: +There are two ways to set the language &kde; uses in the messages it will display: -Using the &kde; Control Centre -Fire up the &kde; Control Centre and select Regional & Accessibility followed by Country/Region & Language. You can select your language and location here. If &kde; cannot find a translation in the first language chosen, it will fall back on the default language. This is usually (American) English by default. -Using the &kde; Control Centre is the preferred way of choosing languages in &kde;. +Using the &kde; Control Centre +Fire up the &kde; Control Centre and select Regional & Accessibility followed by Country/Region & Language. You can select your language and location here. If &kde; cannot find a translation in the first language chosen, it will fall back on the default language. This is usually (American) English by default. +Using the &kde; Control Centre is the preferred way of choosing languages in &kde;. -Using the LANG environment variable -The second method uses the standard locale setting on your system. To change the language, simply set the environment variable LANG accordingly. For example, if your shell is bash, execute export LANG=de to set German as the language used. +Using the LANG environment variable +The second method uses the standard locale setting on your system. To change the language, simply set the environment variable LANG accordingly. For example, if your shell is bash, execute export LANG=de to set German as the language used. @@ -66,280 +28,98 @@ -Is there any keyboard switcher for international keyboards for &kde;? +Is there any keyboard switcher for international keyboards for &kde;? -Yes, you can configure it using the &kde; Control Centre Regional & Accessibility Keyboard Layout configuration page. +Yes, you can configure it using the &kde; Control Centre Regional & Accessibility Keyboard Layout configuration page. -How do I replace the standard text login screen with the &kde; login screen? +How do I replace the standard text login screen with the &kde; login screen? -Your distribution/&UNIX; flavour may have its own setup tools to change this (⪚ YaST on &SuSE; &Linux;). This will be the safest way to enable the &kde; login screen. However, if for some reason you do not wish to use these tools, the following instructions may be useful. -First, you need to change to the xdm runlevel (runlevel 5 on &RedHat; and &SuSE; systems) by editing your /etc/inittab file. In the file, you should have a line saying id:3:initdefault:. Change it to id:5:initdefault:. Now, at the end of the file, comment out the following line: x:5:respawn:/usr/bin/X11/xdm -nodaemon and replace it with x:5:respawn:/opt/kde/bin/tdm -nodaemon. The location of &tdm; may differ on your system. -For changes to take effect immediately, type init 5 (for &RedHat; systems) at the shell prompt. It is risky to initiate a graphical login without checking beforehand whether it works. If it fails to work, you would be in for a hard time getting back.... +Your distribution/&UNIX; flavour may have its own setup tools to change this (⪚ YaST on &SuSE; &Linux;). This will be the safest way to enable the &kde; login screen. However, if for some reason you do not wish to use these tools, the following instructions may be useful. +First, you need to change to the xdm runlevel (runlevel 5 on &RedHat; and &SuSE; systems) by editing your /etc/inittab file. In the file, you should have a line saying id:3:initdefault:. Change it to id:5:initdefault:. Now, at the end of the file, comment out the following line: x:5:respawn:/usr/bin/X11/xdm -nodaemon and replace it with x:5:respawn:/opt/kde/bin/tdm -nodaemon. The location of &tdm; may differ on your system. +For changes to take effect immediately, type init 5 (for &RedHat; systems) at the shell prompt. It is risky to initiate a graphical login without checking beforehand whether it works. If it fails to work, you would be in for a hard time getting back.... -For FreeBSD, you should edit the file /etc/ttys and change one of the lines that look like ttyv8 "/usr/X11R6/bin/xdm -nodaemon" xterm off secure to instead say ttyv8 "/usr/local/bin/tdm -nodaemon" xterm off secure. +For FreeBSD, you should edit the file /etc/ttys and change one of the lines that look like ttyv8 "/usr/X11R6/bin/xdm -nodaemon" xterm off secure to instead say ttyv8 "/usr/local/bin/tdm -nodaemon" xterm off secure. -I would like to click the &LMB; anywhere on the desktop and have the K menu displayed. +I would like to click the &LMB; anywhere on the desktop and have the K menu displayed. -Open the &kde; Control Centre and choose Desktop Behaviour. You can now choose the behaviour of mouse clicks on the desktop. To have the K menu open from a single &LMB; click, change the entry labelled Left button to say Application Menu. +Open the &kde; Control Centre and choose Desktop Behaviour. You can now choose the behaviour of mouse clicks on the desktop. To have the K menu open from a single &LMB; click, change the entry labelled Left button to say Application Menu. -Where do I find information regarding &kde; themes? +Where do I find information regarding &kde; themes? -Go to http://kde.themes.org/ or http://www.kde-look.org. +Go to http://kde.themes.org/ or http://www.kde-look.org. -How do I change &MIME; Types? +How do I change &MIME; Types? -If you are using &konqueror;, do this instead: first, open a &konqueror; window and choose SettingsConfigure Konqueror, then File Associations. Find the type you want to change (⪚ text/english or image/gif), and set the application preference order to whatever you want. +If you are using &konqueror;, do this instead: first, open a &konqueror; window and choose SettingsConfigure Konqueror, then File Associations. Find the type you want to change (⪚ text/english or image/gif), and set the application preference order to whatever you want. -&kde; (&tdm;) does not read my .bash_profile! +&kde; (&tdm;) does not read my .bash_profile! -The login managersxdm and &tdm; do not run a login shell, so .profile, .bash_profile, &etc; are not sourced. When the user logs in, xdm runs Xstartup as root and then Xsession as user. So the normal practice is to add statements in Xsession to source the user profile. Please edit your Xsession and .xsession files. +The login managersxdm and &tdm; do not run a login shell, so .profile, .bash_profile, &etc; are not sourced. When the user logs in, xdm runs Xstartup as root and then Xsession as user. So the normal practice is to add statements in Xsession to source the user profile. Please edit your Xsession and .xsession files. -How do I use &TrueType; fonts in &kde;? +How do I use &TrueType; fonts in &kde;? -You need to install &TrueType; font support into your &X-Window; configuration. Please take a look at x.themes.org for the fonts, and xfsft: &TrueType; Font Support For X11 or X-&TrueType; Server Project Home Page for the font servers. +You need to install &TrueType; font support into your &X-Window; configuration. Please take a look at x.themes.org for the fonts, and xfsft: &TrueType; Font Support For X11 or X-&TrueType; Server Project Home Page for the font servers. -If you have a bunch of &TrueType; fonts from &Microsoft; &Windows;, edit the XF86Config file to get the fonts from the font folder. Then just tell &kde; to use these new fonts with the font administrator utility. +If you have a bunch of &TrueType; fonts from &Microsoft; &Windows;, edit the XF86Config file to get the fonts from the font folder. Then just tell &kde; to use these new fonts with the font administrator utility. -Is it possible to enter, show and work with the Euro Symbol in &kde;? +Is it possible to enter, show and work with the Euro Symbol in &kde;? -Yes and no. For details, look here: http://www.koffice.org/kword/euro.php. +Yes and no. For details, look here: http://www.koffice.org/kword/euro.php. -How do I run a program at &kde; startup? +How do I run a program at &kde; startup? -There are many ways to do that. If what you want to do is to run some scripts that would set some environment variables (for example, to start gpg-agent, ssh-agent and others), you can put these scripts into $TDEHOME/env/ and make sure their names end in .sh. $TDEHOME is usually a folder named .kde (note the period at the beginning) in your home folder. If you want scripts to be executed for all &kde; users, you can put them under $TDEDIR/env/, where $TDEDIR is the prefix &kde; was installed to (you can find this out using the command tde-config --prefix). -If you wish to start a program after &kde; has started, you may want to use the Autostart folder. To add entries to the Autostart folder: -Open &konqueror;. +There are many ways to do that. If what you want to do is to run some scripts that would set some environment variables (for example, to start gpg-agent, ssh-agent and others), you can put these scripts into $TDEHOME/env/ and make sure their names end in .sh. $TDEHOME is usually a folder named .kde (note the period at the beginning) in your home folder. If you want scripts to be executed for all &kde; users, you can put them under $TDEDIR/env/, where $TDEDIR is the prefix &kde; was installed to (you can find this out using the command tde-config --prefix). +If you wish to start a program after &kde; has started, you may want to use the Autostart folder. To add entries to the Autostart folder: +Open &konqueror;. -Select GoAutostart from the menubar. +Select GoAutostart from the menubar. -Right-click in the window view area and select Create NewFileLink to Application +Right-click in the window view area and select Create NewFileLink to Application -Click on the Application tab in the window that appears and enter the name of the command to run in the Command text box. +Click on the Application tab in the window that appears and enter the name of the command to run in the Command text box. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/contrib.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/contrib.docbook index 8bff6911cd5..4a5a5a7b8ee 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/contrib.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/contrib.docbook @@ -6,241 +6,92 @@ -Contributing +Contributing -How can I contribute to &kde;? +How can I contribute to &kde;? -&kde; is a free software project that lives from voluntary contributions. Everybody is encouraged to contribute to &kde;. Not only programmers are welcome. There are many ways in which you can help to improve &kde;: +&kde; is a free software project that lives from voluntary contributions. Everybody is encouraged to contribute to &kde;. Not only programmers are welcome. There are many ways in which you can help to improve &kde;: -Test the software. -Send in bug reports. For more information on this, see How do I submit a bug report?. -Write documentation or help files. You can get some information by visiting the &kde; Editorial Team Home Page. -Translate programs, documentation, and help files. For more information on this, you should visit The &kde; Translators' and Documenters' Web Site. -Draw nice icons or compose sound effects. You can visit the &kde; artists page to find out more. -Write articles and books about &kde;. If you want to help spread the word about &kde;, simply send an email to kde-pr@kde.org. This will get you in touch with the &kde; public relations volunteers. -Program new &kde; applications. Please refer to for more information. -Of course, sponsors are also welcome. :-) +Test the software. +Send in bug reports. For more information on this, see How do I submit a bug report?. +Write documentation or help files. You can get some information by visiting the &kde; Editorial Team Home Page. +Translate programs, documentation, and help files. For more information on this, you should visit The &kde; Translators' and Documenters' Web Site. +Draw nice icons or compose sound effects. You can visit the &kde; artists page to find out more. +Write articles and books about &kde;. If you want to help spread the word about &kde;, simply send an email to kde-pr@kde.org. This will get you in touch with the &kde; public relations volunteers. +Program new &kde; applications. Please refer to for more information. +Of course, sponsors are also welcome. :-) -There are several places to look for more information if you want to get involved in the development. The first step is to subscribe to some of the mailing lists. You will soon see something that can be improved or added. +There are several places to look for more information if you want to get involved in the development. The first step is to subscribe to some of the mailing lists. You will soon see something that can be improved or added. -How do I submit a bug report? +How do I submit a bug report? -There is a bug tracking system available at http://bugs.kde.org. The system features a wizard to submit new bug reports and a list of all known bugs. -The easiest way to submit a bug is to select HelpReport Bug... from the menu bar of the application with the bug. This will open a small dialogue box with a link to the bug tracking system. Please make sure to follow the instructions of the bug reporting wizard. +There is a bug tracking system available at http://bugs.kde.org. The system features a wizard to submit new bug reports and a list of all known bugs. +The easiest way to submit a bug is to select HelpReport Bug... from the menu bar of the application with the bug. This will open a small dialogue box with a link to the bug tracking system. Please make sure to follow the instructions of the bug reporting wizard. -I want to program for &kde;. What should I do first? +I want to program for &kde;. What should I do first? -Everybody is encouraged to develop software for &kde;. What you should do first depends strongly on your experience, ⪚ whether you have already learned C++ or have experience with the &Qt; toolkit and so on. -To get into &kde; programming, you will need some basic tools: automake, autoconf, and egcs. You should look to http://developer.kde.org/ for more tips. -Another excellent resource for learning &kde; programming is the &Qt; online tutorials. These are installed along with &Qt;. To view them, open $QTDIR/doc/html/index.html in &konqueror; and bookmark it. The tutorials can be found under "Using Qt". The source code for each lesson can be found in the $QTDIR/tutorial directory. -There is, however, one thing that everybody interested in programming for &kde; should do: subscribe to the developers mailing list. To subscribe, you have to send an email to kde-devel-request@kde.org with the subject subscribe your_email_address. Please read How to subscribe/unsubscribe to these lists carefully. Everything said there applies to the development list as well. +Everybody is encouraged to develop software for &kde;. What you should do first depends strongly on your experience, ⪚ whether you have already learned C++ or have experience with the &Qt; toolkit and so on. +To get into &kde; programming, you will need some basic tools: automake, autoconf, and egcs. You should look to http://developer.kde.org/ for more tips. +Another excellent resource for learning &kde; programming is the &Qt; online tutorials. These are installed along with &Qt;. To view them, open $QTDIR/doc/html/index.html in &konqueror; and bookmark it. The tutorials can be found under "Using Qt". The source code for each lesson can be found in the $QTDIR/tutorial directory. +There is, however, one thing that everybody interested in programming for &kde; should do: subscribe to the developers mailing list. To subscribe, you have to send an email to kde-devel-request@kde.org with the subject subscribe your_email_address. Please read How to subscribe/unsubscribe to these lists carefully. Everything said there applies to the development list as well. -How do I get access to the CVS? +How do I get access to the CVS? -The &kde; project uses CVS to develop the core parts of the software. Usually, when you have changed one of the parts (⪚ fixed a bug), and you want to commit this change, the best way is to create a patch against a current snapshot and send this patch to the developer/maintainer of the respective program. -If you are doing this more or less regularly, you can ask Stephan Kulow, coolo@kde.org for direct access to the CVS server. But be aware that more users will slow down CVS access for all developers, so we want to keep the number of people with direct CVS access reasonably small. But feel free to ask! +The &kde; project uses CVS to develop the core parts of the software. Usually, when you have changed one of the parts (⪚ fixed a bug), and you want to commit this change, the best way is to create a patch against a current snapshot and send this patch to the developer/maintainer of the respective program. +If you are doing this more or less regularly, you can ask Stephan Kulow, coolo@kde.org for direct access to the CVS server. But be aware that more users will slow down CVS access for all developers, so we want to keep the number of people with direct CVS access reasonably small. But feel free to ask! -I am just curious. Can I have read-only access to the CVS? +I am just curious. Can I have read-only access to the CVS? -Yes. It is possible to get read-only access to the CVS repository with cvsup or cvs utility. You can find more information about how to set up cvsup for the &kde; repository from How to use cvsup to get &kde;. -In addition, anonymous CVS service is also available. To find out more about how to set up and use anonymous CVS, please see here. +Yes. It is possible to get read-only access to the CVS repository with cvsup or cvs utility. You can find more information about how to set up cvsup for the &kde; repository from How to use cvsup to get &kde;. +In addition, anonymous CVS service is also available. To find out more about how to set up and use anonymous CVS, please see here. -Are there any cvs mirror sites for &kde;? +Are there any cvs mirror sites for &kde;? -Yes. The main &kde; server is normally very busy. Please take a look at http://developer.kde.org/source/cvsupmirrors.html and http://developer.kde.org/source/anoncvs.html for the list of available mirrors. -Once you have selected a new cvsup server, simply replace +Yes. The main &kde; server is normally very busy. Please take a look at http://developer.kde.org/source/cvsupmirrors.html and http://developer.kde.org/source/anoncvs.html for the list of available mirrors. +Once you have selected a new cvsup server, simply replace *default host=cvs.kde.org - with + with *default host=cvsup.your.new.host - in your cvsup script. -The instructions to change the anoncvs server can be found on http://developer.kde.org/source/anoncvs.html, too. + in your cvsup script. +The instructions to change the anoncvs server can be found on http://developer.kde.org/source/anoncvs.html, too. -How do I go about translating &kde; programs into my native language? +How do I go about translating &kde; programs into my native language? -Look at the The &kde; Translators' and Documenters' Web Site to see whether your program is already translated (most are). Otherwise you will find information there on how to do it yourself. +Look at the The &kde; Translators' and Documenters' Web Site to see whether your program is already translated (most are). Otherwise you will find information there on how to do it yourself. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/desktop.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/desktop.docbook index 93bddd4bcad..a523f222b83 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/desktop.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/desktop.docbook @@ -5,55 +5,29 @@ --> -The desktop +The desktop -How do I add an application to the desktop? +How do I add an application to the desktop? -Just choose the desired application from the K menu and drag and drop it to the Desktop. -For applications not listed in the K menu, use the &RMB; on the desktop and choose Create NewFile Link to Application... and fill in the configuration for the application you want to link to. +Just choose the desired application from the K menu and drag and drop it to the Desktop. +For applications not listed in the K menu, use the &RMB; on the desktop and choose Create NewFile Link to Application... and fill in the configuration for the application you want to link to. -How do I mount/unmount a device from the desktop? +How do I mount/unmount a device from the desktop? -First, make sure you are allowed to mount/umount the relevant device as a user. -Then you can add any device via &RMB; on the desktop and then choosing Create New. +First, make sure you are allowed to mount/umount the relevant device as a user. +Then you can add any device via &RMB; on the desktop and then choosing Create New. @@ -61,90 +35,48 @@ -Where are the icons kept? +Where are the icons kept? -The icons can be found only in $TDEDIRS/share/icons or $HOME/.trinity/share/icons or $HOME/.kde2/share/icons. To use icons stored in other locations, you must either copy them into one of the above-mentioned fixed &kde; locations or make symlinks. +The icons can be found only in $TDEDIRS/share/icons or $HOME/.trinity/share/icons or $HOME/.kde2/share/icons. To use icons stored in other locations, you must either copy them into one of the above-mentioned fixed &kde; locations or make symlinks. -How do I use the mouse scroll wheel in &kde;? +How do I use the mouse scroll wheel in &kde;? -Mouse wheel support comes with &Qt; 2.0 and above, so &kde; based on that will automatically support the use of the mouse scroll wheel. +Mouse wheel support comes with &Qt; 2.0 and above, so &kde; based on that will automatically support the use of the mouse scroll wheel. -Why can't I get system sound to work, like for opening windows? +Why can't I get system sound to work, like for opening windows? -System sound currently does not work on non-FreeBSD and non-&Linux; systems. This is being worked on. If you use FreeBSD or &Linux;, you have found a bug, so please report it. +System sound currently does not work on non-FreeBSD and non-&Linux; systems. This is being worked on. If you use FreeBSD or &Linux;, you have found a bug, so please report it. -How do I launch applications in a particular desktop? +How do I launch applications in a particular desktop? -&kde; comes with a program called &kstart;. To start an xterm on the second desktop and then activate it use: kstart xterm. -Note that the option is important. It takes an argument which is a regular expression matching the title of the window to apply the settings to. -Please read kstart for more magic available with &kstart; (and there is an abundance). +&kde; comes with a program called &kstart;. To start an xterm on the second desktop and then activate it use: kstart xterm. +Note that the option is important. It takes an argument which is a regular expression matching the title of the window to apply the settings to. +Please read kstart for more magic available with &kstart; (and there is an abundance). -Where do I save my files if I want them to appear directly on the desktop? +Where do I save my files if I want them to appear directly on the desktop? -$HOME/Desktop. You might need to refresh your desktop after you have saved your files. +$HOME/Desktop. You might need to refresh your desktop after you have saved your files. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/filemng.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/filemng.docbook index b4c08665d1b..07619947f8e 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/filemng.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/filemng.docbook @@ -1,359 +1,142 @@ + "dtd/kdex.dtd"> --> -The File Manager and Web Browser +The File Manager and Web Browser -The file manager and web browser of &kde; is &konqueror;. The &konqueror; home page is located at http://www.konqueror.org where a &konqueror; specific FAQ can be found. +The file manager and web browser of &kde; is &konqueror;. The &konqueror; home page is located at http://www.konqueror.org where a &konqueror; specific FAQ can be found. -How do I use &konqueror; as a web browser with a proxy? +How do I use &konqueror; as a web browser with a proxy? -&konqueror; can be used with &HTTP; and &FTP; proxies. To set up the proxy server in &konqueror;, just select SettingsConfigure &konqueror;... from the &konqueror; menu and go to the Proxy tab. +&konqueror; can be used with &HTTP; and &FTP; proxies. To set up the proxy server in &konqueror;, just select SettingsConfigure &konqueror;... from the &konqueror; menu and go to the Proxy tab. -How can I change the appearance of a folder in &konqueror;? +How can I change the appearance of a folder in &konqueror;? -Right-click the folder, select Properties, click on the large icon in the dialogue which appears and choose another icon. -To change the icon displayed for entries in the TDE Menu, use the Menu Editor, located at SettingsMenu Editor. +Right-click the folder, select Properties, click on the large icon in the dialogue which appears and choose another icon. +To change the icon displayed for entries in the TDE Menu, use the Menu Editor, located at SettingsMenu Editor. -How can I do non-anonymous &FTP; transfers with &konqueror;? +How can I do non-anonymous &FTP; transfers with &konqueror;? -Normally, if you enter a &URL; like ftp://ftp.somehost.com, &konqueror; will attempt an anonymous login to the &FTP; server. If you want to login as a particular user, enter a &URL; like ftp://username@ftp.somehost.com instead. &konqueror; will ask for your password and connect to the server. +Normally, if you enter a &URL; like ftp://ftp.somehost.com, &konqueror; will attempt an anonymous login to the &FTP; server. If you want to login as a particular user, enter a &URL; like ftp://username@ftp.somehost.com instead. &konqueror; will ask for your password and connect to the server. - What are and in the Execute line? -They are used by all &kde; applications (since they are implemented in TDEApplication and all good &kde; programs create a TDEApplication object before they even look at the command line arguments). A standard line for a &kde; application looks like this: foo . Pretty confusing, but it has been designed in that way so that it can integrate legacy, non-&kde; applications as smoothly as possible. &konqueror;, when executing the line above, will extend the command to foo . Both the icon and the mini-icon as well as "The Foo" are properties defined in the .desktop file. If the icons are not defined, they simply default to the executable name foo. + What are and in the Execute line? +They are used by all &kde; applications (since they are implemented in TDEApplication and all good &kde; programs create a TDEApplication object before they even look at the command line arguments). A standard line for a &kde; application looks like this: foo . Pretty confusing, but it has been designed in that way so that it can integrate legacy, non-&kde; applications as smoothly as possible. &konqueror;, when executing the line above, will extend the command to foo . Both the icon and the mini-icon as well as "The Foo" are properties defined in the .desktop file. If the icons are not defined, they simply default to the executable name foo. -This way a user can change these things in &kmenuedit; for his or her applications. The option is important, because no user will accept that the menu item Editor starts something called kedit-0.9pl4-build47. Instead, he expects a window called Editor. Furthermore these names are localised, i.e. an American user launches CD-Player and gets a window called CD-Player while a German user launches CD-Spieler and gets a window called CD-Spieler. +This way a user can change these things in &kmenuedit; for his or her applications. The option is important, because no user will accept that the menu item Editor starts something called kedit-0.9pl4-build47. Instead, he expects a window called Editor. Furthermore these names are localised, i.e. an American user launches CD-Player and gets a window called CD-Player while a German user launches CD-Spieler and gets a window called CD-Spieler. -How do I specify the startup folder for &konqueror;? +How do I specify the startup folder for &konqueror;? -Using the &RMB;, click on the Home icon and choose Properties. Under the Application tab you will probably find something like kfmclient openProfile filemanagement; just append file:/whereever/you/want with the folder you would like &konqueror; to start in. +Using the &RMB;, click on the Home icon and choose Properties. Under the Application tab you will probably find something like kfmclient openProfile filemanagement; just append file:/whereever/you/want with the folder you would like &konqueror; to start in. -How do I import &Netscape; bookmarks? +How do I import &Netscape; bookmarks? -There is no need to import anything at all. &Netscape; bookmarks are automatically available under the Bookmarks menu in &konqueror; with no configuration on your part necessary. The Bookmark Editor is able to convert &Netscape; bookmarks to the format used by &konqueror;, if you want this. +There is no need to import anything at all. &Netscape; bookmarks are automatically available under the Bookmarks menu in &konqueror; with no configuration on your part necessary. The Bookmark Editor is able to convert &Netscape; bookmarks to the format used by &konqueror;, if you want this. -How do I fool a site into believing &konqueror; is &Netscape; or some other browser? +How do I fool a site into believing &konqueror; is &Netscape; or some other browser? -In &konqueror;, select SettingsConfigure Konqueror... and in the configuration dialogue, select Browser Identification. Default and site-specific browser identifications can be set from here. +In &konqueror;, select SettingsConfigure Konqueror... and in the configuration dialogue, select Browser Identification. Default and site-specific browser identifications can be set from here. -How do I configure &konqueror; to run &Java; applets? +How do I configure &konqueror; to run &Java; applets? -Choose SettingsConfigure &konqueror;... from &konqueror;'s menubar and then select Java & Javascript. Set the Path to Java executable correctly. If it doesn't work, please check the Konqueror + Java HOWTO. +Choose SettingsConfigure &konqueror;... from &konqueror;'s menubar and then select Java & Javascript. Set the Path to Java executable correctly. If it doesn't work, please check the Konqueror + Java HOWTO. -What is this new Smart policy for JavaScript web popups? +What is this new Smart policy for JavaScript web popups? -This new policy attempts to block intrusive JavaScript popup windows. If the user does not click on a button or submit a form to trigger the popup, then the popup is not permitted. Some sites will open a second new window from within the first and in that case, the second window will not show. +This new policy attempts to block intrusive JavaScript popup windows. If the user does not click on a button or submit a form to trigger the popup, then the popup is not permitted. Some sites will open a second new window from within the first and in that case, the second window will not show. -Why doesn't my banking site work with &konqueror;? It pops up a new window with the login screen in other browsers, but not in &konqueror;. +Why doesn't my banking site work with &konqueror;? It pops up a new window with the login screen in other browsers, but not in &konqueror;. -Make sure you have Javascript enabled, and the default JavaScript web popups policy set to Ask or Allow. The Smart policy is not always sufficient for some banks. Many banks also require &Java; support. You can find more help on enabling this at http://www.konqueror.org/. +Make sure you have Javascript enabled, and the default JavaScript web popups policy set to Ask or Allow. The Smart policy is not always sufficient for some banks. Many banks also require &Java; support. You can find more help on enabling this at http://www.konqueror.org/. -Why can't &konqueror; render &GIF; images? +Why can't &konqueror; render &GIF; images? -It is because you did not enable &GIF; support in &Qt;. Please see for more details. +It is because you did not enable &GIF; support in &Qt;. Please see for more details. -How do I rename files? +How do I rename files? -Simply right click on the file and select Rename or click once on an already selected file. The default keyboard shortcut to rename a file is F2. +Simply right click on the file and select Rename or click once on an already selected file. The default keyboard shortcut to rename a file is F2. -When I try to open a web page with &konqueror;, I get the message: There appears to be a configuration error. You have associated Konqueror with text/html, but it cannot handle this file type. +When I try to open a web page with &konqueror;, I get the message: There appears to be a configuration error. You have associated Konqueror with text/html, but it cannot handle this file type. -You need to make sure that the embedding settings for the text/html MIME type are correct: -In &konqueror;, go to SettingsConfigure Konqueror and then to the File Associations page. -Open text->html in the tree view. -Click on the Embedding tab. Make sure that Left Click Action is set to Show file in embedded viewer, and that TDEHTML (tdehtml) is at the top of Services Preference Order. +You need to make sure that the embedding settings for the text/html MIME type are correct: +In &konqueror;, go to SettingsConfigure Konqueror and then to the File Associations page. +Open text->html in the tree view. +Click on the Embedding tab. Make sure that Left Click Action is set to Show file in embedded viewer, and that TDEHTML (tdehtml) is at the top of Services Preference Order. -Try opening a website in Konqueror. It should now work. +Try opening a website in Konqueror. It should now work. -How do I configure the programs that &konqueror; uses to open different types of files? +How do I configure the programs that &konqueror; uses to open different types of files? -In order to configure file associations, you should go to the &kcontrolcenter; and choose the item File Associations under the category TDE Components. -Suppose the default PDF viewer is now &kghostview; and you would prefer to use KPDF as a viewer. You would simply type pdf in the search box at the top of the dialogue, choose pdf in the application group and move KPDF up. In the Embedding tab you can also choose which component other applications will use to display files (for example, when viewing files in &konqueror; or using &ark;'s embedded viewer). +In order to configure file associations, you should go to the &kcontrolcenter; and choose the item File Associations under the category TDE Components. +Suppose the default PDF viewer is now &kghostview; and you would prefer to use KPDF as a viewer. You would simply type pdf in the search box at the top of the dialogue, choose pdf in the application group and move KPDF up. In the Embedding tab you can also choose which component other applications will use to display files (for example, when viewing files in &konqueror; or using &ark;'s embedded viewer). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/gettde.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/gettde.docbook index a059b9b7204..6f250409f90 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/gettde.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/gettde.docbook @@ -5,106 +5,68 @@ --> -Getting &kde; +Getting &kde; -Where do I get &kde;? +Where do I get &kde;? -The main distribution site for &kde; is ftp.kde.org. However, this site is often under heavy load, so you might prefer to use download.kde.org which automatically redirects you to the mirror nearest to you. You can also have a look at the list of &kde; mirror sites. +The main distribution site for &kde; is ftp.kde.org. However, this site is often under heavy load, so you might prefer to use download.kde.org which automatically redirects you to the mirror nearest to you. You can also have a look at the list of &kde; mirror sites. -Are there &Linux; distributions that include &kde;? +Are there &Linux; distributions that include &kde;? -Yes, major &Linux; distributions already ship &kde;. As building a distribution takes some time, they might not always contain the latest version, but for a start or to avoid downloading from the Internet, they do provide a good starting point. -You can find an up-to-date list of distributions that ship with &kde; here. +Yes, major &Linux; distributions already ship &kde;. As building a distribution takes some time, they might not always contain the latest version, but for a start or to avoid downloading from the Internet, they do provide a good starting point. +You can find an up-to-date list of distributions that ship with &kde; here. -What is the current version? +What is the current version? -Currently, the latest stable version is 3.2 +Currently, the latest stable version is 3.2 -The &kde; 3.2 Info Page contains a lot of information specific to this release. +The &kde; 3.2 Info Page contains a lot of information specific to this release. -Where do I find &kde; snapshots? +Where do I find &kde; snapshots? -You can get the latest snapshots from ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/unstable/snapshots. You might also want to consider setting up your own CVS client in order to maintain the latest snapshot at all times. Please refer to Anonymous CVS and &kde; for further information. +You can get the latest snapshots from ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/unstable/snapshots. You might also want to consider setting up your own CVS client in order to maintain the latest snapshot at all times. Please refer to Anonymous CVS and &kde; for further information. -Where do I get &Qt;? +Where do I get &Qt;? -&Qt; is a product of the Norwegian company Trolltech. You can always get the latest &Qt; version from their &FTP; server. -And with most up-to-date &Linux; distributions, &Qt; is already included. Please see for the version of &Qt; you need. +&Qt; is a product of the Norwegian company Trolltech. You can always get the latest &Qt; version from their &FTP; server. +And with most up-to-date &Linux; distributions, &Qt; is already included. Please see for the version of &Qt; you need. -What is &Qt;, by the way? +What is &Qt;, by the way? -&Qt; is a C++-based class library to build user interfaces. It also includes many utility classes like string classes and classes to handle input and output. It provides most of the widgets you will see in a &kde; application: menus, buttons, sliders, &etc;. &Qt; is a cross-platform library that allows you to write code that will compile on &UNIX; systems as well as &Windows; and embedded devices. You can learn more about &Qt; at http://www.trolltech.com. +&Qt; is a C++-based class library to build user interfaces. It also includes many utility classes like string classes and classes to handle input and output. It provides most of the widgets you will see in a &kde; application: menus, buttons, sliders, &etc;. &Qt; is a cross-platform library that allows you to write code that will compile on &UNIX; systems as well as &Windows; and embedded devices. You can learn more about &Qt; at http://www.trolltech.com. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/index.docbook index 42bbbad73e4..ef21eec109a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/index.docbook @@ -3,8 +3,7 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + @@ -29,75 +28,40 @@ -&kde; Frequently Asked Questions +&kde; Frequently Asked Questions -The &kde; Team +The &kde; Team -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -1997 -1998 -1999 -2000 -2001 -2003 -2004 -The &kde; Team +1997 +1998 +1999 +2000 +2001 +2003 +2004 +The &kde; Team -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2004-09-07 -3.3 +2004-09-07 +3.3 -This is a compilation of the most frequently asked questions about the K Desktop Environment. Please report any bugs, inconsistencies, or omissions you find in this &FAQ; to kde-doc-english@kde.org. Please do not mail your questions to this list. Post them to the &kde; mailing lists and newsgroups instead. They are monitored for this &FAQ;. +This is a compilation of the most frequently asked questions about the K Desktop Environment. Please report any bugs, inconsistencies, or omissions you find in this &FAQ; to kde-doc-english@kde.org. Please do not mail your questions to this list. Post them to the &kde; mailing lists and newsgroups instead. They are monitored for this &FAQ;. -KDE -FAQ -question -answer +KDE +FAQ +question +answer @@ -118,35 +82,20 @@ &faq-contrib; -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -The current &FAQ; maintainers are: +The current &FAQ; maintainers are: -Rainer Endres endres@kde.org +Rainer Endres endres@kde.org -Many of the answers in this &FAQ; are taken from the various &kde; mailing lists and newsgroups. Here is a big thank you to all of you who have contributed answers that eventually appear in this &FAQ;. +Many of the answers in this &FAQ; are taken from the various &kde; mailing lists and newsgroups. Here is a big thank you to all of you who have contributed answers that eventually appear in this &FAQ;. -Special thanks go to the former &FAQ; maintainer, who has written most of the stuff in here, and did a tremendous job: Mr. Lee Wee Tiong +Special thanks go to the former &FAQ; maintainer, who has written most of the stuff in here, and did a tremendous job: Mr. Lee Wee Tiong -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk &underFDL; &documentation.index; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/install.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/install.docbook index 275f771253b..3b0d78aa90d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/install.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/install.docbook @@ -1,21 +1,12 @@ + "dtd/kdex.dtd"> --> -Installation instructions +Installation instructions -These are the generic installation instructions for the K Desktop Environment. Please complement your reading with the READMEs and INSTALLs that come along with the package. Please read them carefully and try to help yourself out if anything goes wrong. If you need further assistance, consider joining the &kde; mailing lists (see our web site instructions for joining the &kde; mailing lists) or newsgroups. +These are the generic installation instructions for the K Desktop Environment. Please complement your reading with the READMEs and INSTALLs that come along with the package. Please read them carefully and try to help yourself out if anything goes wrong. If you need further assistance, consider joining the &kde; mailing lists (see our web site instructions for joining the &kde; mailing lists) or newsgroups. @@ -23,396 +14,210 @@ -To the would-be converts +To the would-be converts -So you have heard the rumours. Or you have seen the screenshots. And you are dying to get hold of &kde;. But you know next to nothing about this whole alternative OS business. Don't worry! You only need to do some (well, maybe not some) reading, that's all! +So you have heard the rumours. Or you have seen the screenshots. And you are dying to get hold of &kde;. But you know next to nothing about this whole alternative OS business. Don't worry! You only need to do some (well, maybe not some) reading, that's all! -&kde; does not run on any version of &Microsoft; &Windows; or OS/2 (yet). To run &kde;, you need to have a &UNIX; system. Please refer to for more details. +&kde; does not run on any version of &Microsoft; &Windows; or OS/2 (yet). To run &kde;, you need to have a &UNIX; system. Please refer to for more details. -Decide on a platform and set it up for your system. This FAQ can not help you with this, since &kde; runs on many &UNIX; platforms. +Decide on a platform and set it up for your system. This FAQ can not help you with this, since &kde; runs on many &UNIX; platforms. -Finally, you are ready to commence the &kde; installation. Please start reading from the next section. To get &kde;, please refer to . Last but not least, if you encounter any problems while installing &kde;, please do not hesitate to make use of the &kde; mailing lists and newsgroups. But do bear this in mind: no question is too silly to ask, but some are too silly to answer, especially when they are already answered in this FAQ. -Good luck and have fun! +Finally, you are ready to commence the &kde; installation. Please start reading from the next section. To get &kde;, please refer to . Last but not least, if you encounter any problems while installing &kde;, please do not hesitate to make use of the &kde; mailing lists and newsgroups. But do bear this in mind: no question is too silly to ask, but some are too silly to answer, especially when they are already answered in this FAQ. +Good luck and have fun! -Available package formats +Available package formats -You can find several kinds of binary and source packages for different distributions and operating systems on the &kde-ftp;. The binary packages are not made by the &kde; Team, but by the distributors themselves, or some dedicated individuals. Please refer to &kde; Package Policy Explained for information about the &kde; Package Policy. The only official release is the source tar.bz2 packages. Please refer to the READMEs and INSTALLs in the several binaries folders. For a list of the available packages for a release, refer to the relevant info page. For the latest release this is the &kde; 3.2 Info Page. +You can find several kinds of binary and source packages for different distributions and operating systems on the &kde-ftp;. The binary packages are not made by the &kde; Team, but by the distributors themselves, or some dedicated individuals. Please refer to &kde; Package Policy Explained for information about the &kde; Package Policy. The only official release is the source tar.bz2 packages. Please refer to the READMEs and INSTALLs in the several binaries folders. For a list of the available packages for a release, refer to the relevant info page. For the latest release this is the &kde; 3.2 Info Page. -Prerequisites +Prerequisites -For &kde; 3.2, you need the &Qt; library version 3.2 or greater. Please make sure you download the correct &Qt;. You will also need the header files, if you want to compile &kde; yourself. They are all available, at no cost, from http://www.trolltech.com/download. In addition, there are optional libraries that might improve &kde; if installed on your system. An example is OpenSSL which will enable &konqueror; to browse web pages securely and is needed in a version ->=0.9.6. These should be provided by your distributor; if not, ask for an update. +For &kde; 3.2, you need the &Qt; library version 3.2 or greater. Please make sure you download the correct &Qt;. You will also need the header files, if you want to compile &kde; yourself. They are all available, at no cost, from http://www.trolltech.com/download. In addition, there are optional libraries that might improve &kde; if installed on your system. An example is OpenSSL which will enable &konqueror; to browse web pages securely and is needed in a version >=0.9.6. These should be provided by your distributor; if not, ask for an update. -Description of the base packages +Description of the base packages -The base distribution currently consists of eleven packages. Some are required, while others are optional. Each package is available in each of the aforementioned package formats. +The base distribution currently consists of eleven packages. Some are required, while others are optional. Each package is available in each of the aforementioned package formats. -tdelibs +tdelibs -Required -This package contains shared libraries that are needed by all &kde; applications. +Required +This package contains shared libraries that are needed by all &kde; applications. -tdebase +tdebase -Required -This package contains the base applications that form the core of the K Desktop Environment like the window manager, the terminal emulator, the control centre, the file manager, and the panel. +Required +This package contains the base applications that form the core of the K Desktop Environment like the window manager, the terminal emulator, the control centre, the file manager, and the panel. -&arts; +&arts; -Required -The &arts; sound server. A powerful, network transparent sound server. +Required +The &arts; sound server. A powerful, network transparent sound server. -tdeaddons +tdeaddons -Optional -Various plugins for &kate;, &kicker;, &knewsticker;, &konqueror; and &noatun; +Optional +Various plugins for &kate;, &kicker;, &knewsticker;, &konqueror; and &noatun; -tdeartwork +tdeartwork -Optional -Additional wallpapers, themes, styles, sounds ... +Optional +Additional wallpapers, themes, styles, sounds ... -tdebindings +tdebindings -Optional -Various bindings for other languages, including &Java;, Perl, Python, ... +Optional +Various bindings for other languages, including &Java;, Perl, Python, ... -tdegames +tdegames -Optional -Various games like &kmahjongg;, &ksnake;, &kasteroids;, and &kpatience;. +Optional +Various games like &kmahjongg;, &ksnake;, &kasteroids;, and &kpatience;. -tdegraphics +tdegraphics -Optional -Various graphics-related programs like &PostScript; previewer, &DVI; previewer, and a drawing program. +Optional +Various graphics-related programs like &PostScript; previewer, &DVI; previewer, and a drawing program. -tdeutils +tdeutils -Optional -Various desktop tools like a calculator, an editor and other nifty stuff. +Optional +Various desktop tools like a calculator, an editor and other nifty stuff. -tdemultimedia +tdemultimedia -Optional -Multimedia applications like a &CD; player and a mixer. +Optional +Multimedia applications like a &CD; player and a mixer. -tdenetwork +tdenetwork -Optional -Network applications. Currently contains the mail program &kmail;, the news reader &knode;, and several other network-related programs. +Optional +Network applications. Currently contains the mail program &kmail;, the news reader &knode;, and several other network-related programs. -tdeadmin +tdeadmin -Optional -System administration programs. +Optional +System administration programs. -tdeedu +tdeedu -Educational and entertaining applications for &kde;'s younger users. +Educational and entertaining applications for &kde;'s younger users. -tdetoys +tdetoys -Optional -Toys! +Optional +Toys! -tdevelop +tdevelop -Optional -A complete Integrated Development Environment for &kde; and Qt +Optional +A complete Integrated Development Environment for &kde; and Qt -&arts; and then tdelibs should be installed before everything else, and tdeaddons last. The other packages can be installed in any arbitrary order. +&arts; and then tdelibs should be installed before everything else, and tdeaddons last. The other packages can be installed in any arbitrary order. -Most package management tools will let you put all these packages in one folder and install them all at once, figuring out the dependencies as they go. +Most package management tools will let you put all these packages in one folder and install them all at once, figuring out the dependencies as they go. -Installation instructions for the different package formats +Installation instructions for the different package formats - -Please do not forget to read the README and INSTALL files if they are available. - + +Please do not forget to read the README and INSTALL files if they are available. + -Installation of the Debian packages +Installation of the Debian packages -The Debian packages install in accordance with the upcoming FHS (File Hierarchy Standard). +The Debian packages install in accordance with the upcoming FHS (File Hierarchy Standard). -become superuser -run dpkg for every package you want to install. +become superuser +run dpkg for every package you want to install. -Installation of the RPM packages +Installation of the RPM packages -To install binary <acronym ->RPM</acronym ->s -become superuser -execute rpm +To install binary <acronym>RPM</acronym>s +become superuser +execute rpm -Installation of the source .tar.bz2 files +Installation of the source .tar.bz2 files -Since there are always changes and updates to the way &kde; is compiled, please refer to Download and Install from Source for the most up to date installation instructions for the source packages. -The general approach should work in most cases though. -The source .tar.bz2 package installs into /usr/local/kde by default. You can override this setting by using the option of the configure script. +Since there are always changes and updates to the way &kde; is compiled, please refer to Download and Install from Source for the most up to date installation instructions for the source packages. +The general approach should work in most cases though. +The source .tar.bz2 package installs into /usr/local/kde by default. You can override this setting by using the option of the configure script. -unpack the packages with tar -change folder to the package folder: cd packagename -configure the package: ./configure Some packages (notably tdebase) have special configuration options that might be applicable to your installation. Type ./configure to see the available options. -build the package: make -install the package: su (if you aren't already root). If you already are, just type make . +unpack the packages with tar +change folder to the package folder: cd packagename +configure the package: ./configure Some packages (notably tdebase) have special configuration options that might be applicable to your installation. Type ./configure to see the available options. +build the package: make +install the package: su (if you aren't already root). If you already are, just type make . @@ -422,218 +227,78 @@ -Post-installation procedures +Post-installation procedures -First of all, please make sure that you have added &kde;'s binary installation folder (⪚ /usr/local/kde/bin) to your PATH and &kde;'s library installation folder to your LD_LIBRARY_PATH (only necessary on systems that do not support rpath; on &Linux; &ELF;, it should work without). This environment variable may be called differently on some systems, ⪚ it is called SHLIB_PATH on &IRIX;. Then set the environment variable TDEDIR to the base of your &kde; tree, ⪚ /usr/local/kde. Please bear in mind that it is unwise to set LD_LIBRARY_PATH blindly. In the vast majority of cases it is unnecessary and can do more harm than good. There is a web page written by Dave Barr explaining the evils of LD_LIBRARY_PATH and it can be found at http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/~barr/ldpath.html. +First of all, please make sure that you have added &kde;'s binary installation folder (⪚ /usr/local/kde/bin) to your PATH and &kde;'s library installation folder to your LD_LIBRARY_PATH (only necessary on systems that do not support rpath; on &Linux; &ELF;, it should work without). This environment variable may be called differently on some systems, ⪚ it is called SHLIB_PATH on &IRIX;. Then set the environment variable TDEDIR to the base of your &kde; tree, ⪚ /usr/local/kde. Please bear in mind that it is unwise to set LD_LIBRARY_PATH blindly. In the vast majority of cases it is unnecessary and can do more harm than good. There is a web page written by Dave Barr explaining the evils of LD_LIBRARY_PATH and it can be found at http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/~barr/ldpath.html. -Even though you can use most of the &kde; applications simply by calling them, you can only benefit fully from &kde;'s advanced features if you use the &kde; window manager and its helper programs. -In order to make it easy for you, we have provided a simple script called starttde which gets installed in $TDEDIR/bin and is therefore in your path. -Edit the file .xinitrc in your home folder (make a backup copy first!), remove everything that looks like calling a window manager, and insert starttde instead. Restart the &X-Server;. If you use &tdm;/xdm, you will have to edit the file .xsession instead of .xinitrc. And if there is no .xinitrc or .xsession in your home folder, simply create a new one with just one line containing starttde. Some systems (notably &RedHat; &Linux;) use .Xclients instead. - -This should present you with a new shining &kde; desktop. You can now start to explore the wonderful world of &kde;. In case you want to read some documentation first, there is a highly recommended Quick Start guide available. Furthermore, every application has an online help that is available via the help menu. +Even though you can use most of the &kde; applications simply by calling them, you can only benefit fully from &kde;'s advanced features if you use the &kde; window manager and its helper programs. +In order to make it easy for you, we have provided a simple script called starttde which gets installed in $TDEDIR/bin and is therefore in your path. +Edit the file .xinitrc in your home folder (make a backup copy first!), remove everything that looks like calling a window manager, and insert starttde instead. Restart the &X-Server;. If you use &tdm;/xdm, you will have to edit the file .xsession instead of .xinitrc. And if there is no .xinitrc or .xsession in your home folder, simply create a new one with just one line containing starttde. Some systems (notably &RedHat; &Linux;) use .Xclients instead. + +This should present you with a new shining &kde; desktop. You can now start to explore the wonderful world of &kde;. In case you want to read some documentation first, there is a highly recommended Quick Start guide available. Furthermore, every application has an online help that is available via the help menu. -Should I remove old version xyz before installing a new one? +Should I remove old version xyz before installing a new one? -In principle, this is not necessary. RPM and Debian packages should take care of all dependencies. -If you compile the source code yourself, you should take more care. Instructions for running two different versions of &kde; on the same system are given at http://developer.kde.org/build/kde2-and-kde3.html. However, please note that running two different versions of &kde; from source can lead to problems if you are not careful. +In principle, this is not necessary. RPM and Debian packages should take care of all dependencies. +If you compile the source code yourself, you should take more care. Instructions for running two different versions of &kde; on the same system are given at http://developer.kde.org/build/kde2-and-kde3.html. However, please note that running two different versions of &kde; from source can lead to problems if you are not careful. -How do I start &kde;? +How do I start &kde;? -The most comfortable method to start &kde; is to use the starttde script. Simply put the line starttde at the end of your .xsession file (or your .xinitrc or .Xclients file if you are not using &tdm; or xdm). Please also remove the lines that start your previous window manager. If there is no .xsession, .xinitrc, or .Xclients in your home folder, simply create a new one that contains just one line: starttde. +The most comfortable method to start &kde; is to use the starttde script. Simply put the line starttde at the end of your .xsession file (or your .xinitrc or .Xclients file if you are not using &tdm; or xdm). Please also remove the lines that start your previous window manager. If there is no .xsession, .xinitrc, or .Xclients in your home folder, simply create a new one that contains just one line: starttde. -Is it possible to install &kde; in a user folder? +Is it possible to install &kde; in a user folder? -Yes, you can install &kde; in any folder you want. What you have to do depends on the kind of packages you want to install: -Source packages -Configure and install the package using configure ; make; make install to install into /users/myhome/kde. -Add the following to your init files. Please note that if it is not necessary for you to set LD_LIBRARY_PATH, it is better to leave it out. +Yes, you can install &kde; in any folder you want. What you have to do depends on the kind of packages you want to install: +Source packages +Configure and install the package using configure ; make; make install to install into /users/myhome/kde. +Add the following to your init files. Please note that if it is not necessary for you to set LD_LIBRARY_PATH, it is better to leave it out. -For csh or tcsh: -setenv TDEDIR /users/myhome/kde +For csh or tcsh: +setenv TDEDIR /users/myhome/kde if ( $?LD_LIBRARY_PATH ) then setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH $TDEDIR/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH @@ -645,116 +310,54 @@ if ( ! $?LIBRARY_PATH ) then setenv LIBRARY_PATH $LD_LIBRARY_PATH endif -For bash: -TDEDIR=/users/myhome/kde +For bash: +TDEDIR=/users/myhome/kde PATH=$TDEDIR/bin:$PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$TDEDIR/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBRARY_PATH=$LD_LIBRARY_PATH export TDEDIR PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBRARY_PATH - + -<acronym ->RPM</acronym -> packages -rpm allows you to use the option to select the folder you want to install to. For example, executing rpm will install the package to /users/myhome/kde. +<acronym>RPM</acronym> packages +rpm allows you to use the option to select the folder you want to install to. For example, executing rpm will install the package to /users/myhome/kde. - -Although &kde; will run from a user folder, there are some problems with programs that require suid root, ⪚ the programs in the tdeadmin package. But since they are not meant to be run by users in the first place, this is nothing to worry about. -However, on systems using shadow passwords, the screensavers have to be suid root to enable password access for unlocking the screen, so this option will not work. - + +Although &kde; will run from a user folder, there are some problems with programs that require suid root, ⪚ the programs in the tdeadmin package. But since they are not meant to be run by users in the first place, this is nothing to worry about. +However, on systems using shadow passwords, the screensavers have to be suid root to enable password access for unlocking the screen, so this option will not work. + -starttde fails with can not connect to X server. What is wrong? +starttde fails with can not connect to X server. What is wrong? -You probably tried to start the X server with starttde. The X server is started with startx. starttde is the script that should be run from your .xinitrc, .xsession, or .Xclients to activate the window manager and the necessary server daemons for &kde;. See also . +You probably tried to start the X server with starttde. The X server is started with startx. starttde is the script that should be run from your .xinitrc, .xsession, or .Xclients to activate the window manager and the necessary server daemons for &kde;. See also . -&kde; on &AIX;? +&kde; on &AIX;? -IBM now officially support &kde; on &AIX;. You can find details at http://www.ibm.com/servers/aix/products/aixos/linux/index.html. There is also some older information at http://space.twc.de/~stefan/kde/aix.html. +IBM now officially support &kde; on &AIX;. You can find details at http://www.ibm.com/servers/aix/products/aixos/linux/index.html. There is also some older information at http://space.twc.de/~stefan/kde/aix.html. -&kde; on a laptop? +&kde; on a laptop? -If you can get &X-Window; to run on your laptop, you should not have any problem getting &kde; to run on it. In addition, you might find the following links helpful: +If you can get &X-Window; to run on your laptop, you should not have any problem getting &kde; to run on it. In addition, you might find the following links helpful: -http://www.linux-laptop.net/ +http://www.linux-laptop.net/ -http://www.sanpei.org/Laptop-X/note-list.html +http://www.sanpei.org/Laptop-X/note-list.html @@ -762,273 +365,114 @@ export TDEDIR PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBRARY_PATH -I have a neomagic chipset in my laptop. Is there anything special I should do to run &kde;? +I have a neomagic chipset in my laptop. Is there anything special I should do to run &kde;? -On some laptops using the 2160 chipset (MagicGraph 128XD) the following options in XF86Config are needed to avoid a lock-up of the graphic engine: -Option "XaaNoScanlineImageWriteRect" +On some laptops using the 2160 chipset (MagicGraph 128XD) the following options in XF86Config are needed to avoid a lock-up of the graphic engine: +Option "XaaNoScanlineImageWriteRect" Option "XaaNoScanlineCPUToScreenColorExpandFill" -If you have experienced desktop hangs while using &kde; please try this option. - +If you have experienced desktop hangs while using &kde; please try this option. + -I do not like the default &kde; folder after installation. How do I move it without breaking anything? +I do not like the default &kde; folder after installation. How do I move it without breaking anything? -Assuming the default is /opt/kde and you want to move it to /usr/local/kde, here's what you have to do: +Assuming the default is /opt/kde and you want to move it to /usr/local/kde, here's what you have to do: -change to superuser if you aren't already -mv /opt/kde /usr/local/kde -ln -s /usr/local/kde /opt/kde +change to superuser if you aren't already +mv /opt/kde /usr/local/kde +ln -s /usr/local/kde /opt/kde -This will put all your &kde; files in /usr/local/kde but everything is still accessible from /opt/kde. +This will put all your &kde; files in /usr/local/kde but everything is still accessible from /opt/kde. -What files can I delete from my &kde; install folder? Can all the *.h, *.c and *.o files be safely removed? +What files can I delete from my &kde; install folder? Can all the *.h, *.c and *.o files be safely removed? -There should not be any need to keep the .c and .o files, but you might want to keep the .h files, as they are used by includes if you ever want to compile your own &kde; programs. But if you wish to add patches to the source programs as they become available (rather than downloading everything again), then they should stay. +There should not be any need to keep the .c and .o files, but you might want to keep the .h files, as they are used by includes if you ever want to compile your own &kde; programs. But if you wish to add patches to the source programs as they become available (rather than downloading everything again), then they should stay. -Will I lose my current settings when I upgrade &kde;? +Will I lose my current settings when I upgrade &kde;? -No. In most cases &kde; will be able to transport your settings intact. You may need to reenter passwords in some applications (such as &kmail; or &knode;) but most other settings will be safe. +No. In most cases &kde; will be able to transport your settings intact. You may need to reenter passwords in some applications (such as &kmail; or &knode;) but most other settings will be safe. -There were mixed reports of results between some previous versions of &kde;. To be safe, you may like to back up your entire &kde; configuration. +There were mixed reports of results between some previous versions of &kde;. To be safe, you may like to back up your entire &kde; configuration. -Settings are kept in the $HOME/.trinity or $HOME/.kde2 subfolder in your home folder. Copy your old .kde/.kde2 folder to a backup location, install &kde; 3.2, and then copy back any necessary mail and news settings. That said, most people can make a direct upgrade, without removing the old .kde folder, without a hitch. -You can override the use of $HOME/.trinity by setting the $TDEHOME variable. +Settings are kept in the $HOME/.trinity or $HOME/.kde2 subfolder in your home folder. Copy your old .kde/.kde2 folder to a backup location, install &kde; 3.2, and then copy back any necessary mail and news settings. That said, most people can make a direct upgrade, without removing the old .kde folder, without a hitch. +You can override the use of $HOME/.trinity by setting the $TDEHOME variable. -I upgraded &kde; and it seemed to go fine, but when I start it, I get a blank grey screen, and nothing happens. There are errors in the console about DCOPserver. What's going on? +I upgraded &kde; and it seemed to go fine, but when I start it, I get a blank grey screen, and nothing happens. There are errors in the console about DCOPserver. What's going on? -&kde; uses several temporary files during its operation. These are usually to be found in the following locations: +&kde; uses several temporary files during its operation. These are usually to be found in the following locations: -~/.DCOPserver-* (there are usually two of these; one is a symlink to the other) -~/.trinity/socket-hostname -~/.trinity/tmp-hostname which is normally a symlink to the next file: -/tmp/tmp-kde-USER -~/.trinity/socket-hostname which is also normally a symlink to: -/tmp/tdesocket-USER +~/.DCOPserver-* (there are usually two of these; one is a symlink to the other) +~/.trinity/socket-hostname +~/.trinity/tmp-hostname which is normally a symlink to the next file: +/tmp/tmp-kde-USER +~/.trinity/socket-hostname which is also normally a symlink to: +/tmp/tdesocket-USER -If the symlinks get broken, usually because a cron or shutdown script is emptying out the /tmp folder, then strange things will happen. These files, and the symlinks, will all be created automatically at the start of &kde; so you can safely remove them while &kde; is not running. +If the symlinks get broken, usually because a cron or shutdown script is emptying out the /tmp folder, then strange things will happen. These files, and the symlinks, will all be created automatically at the start of &kde; so you can safely remove them while &kde; is not running. -If you are only getting a grey screen when you start &kde;, or if you get an error message telling you to Check your installation, then shut down X and delete all the files listed above, then try to restart X. +If you are only getting a grey screen when you start &kde;, or if you get an error message telling you to Check your installation, then shut down X and delete all the files listed above, then try to restart X. -Normally (&ie; when not upgrading between &kde; versions) it's quite safe to leave these files intact, and you may shave a few seconds off your &kde; startup time by doing so. +Normally (&ie; when not upgrading between &kde; versions) it's quite safe to leave these files intact, and you may shave a few seconds off your &kde; startup time by doing so. -Compiling tdebase gives me a bin/sh: msgfmt: command not found error! +Compiling tdebase gives me a bin/sh: msgfmt: command not found error! -You need the &GNU; msgfmt which is part of the &GNU; i18n package gettext. You should be able to download it from any &GNU; mirror. +You need the &GNU; msgfmt which is part of the &GNU; i18n package gettext. You should be able to download it from any &GNU; mirror. -How do I uninstall &kde; applications compiled from source? +How do I uninstall &kde; applications compiled from source? -You can uninstall your programs by typing make uninstall in the folder where you did make install. If you have already deleted that folder, then there is only one way, and it is not good: go to $TDEDIR/bin and start deleting files one by one. -If you expect to find yourself in this situation, you might want to consider a program such as &GNU; stow, found at http://www.gnu.org/software/stow/stow.html. +You can uninstall your programs by typing make uninstall in the folder where you did make install. If you have already deleted that folder, then there is only one way, and it is not good: go to $TDEDIR/bin and start deleting files one by one. +If you expect to find yourself in this situation, you might want to consider a program such as &GNU; stow, found at http://www.gnu.org/software/stow/stow.html. -What is up with &GIF; support? +What is up with &GIF; support? -This has to do with issues with Unisys' &LZW; patent. &GIF; support is turned off from &Qt; 1.44 onwards by default. When you want to use &GIF;s and have the relevant license, recompile &Qt; with &GIF; support. ./configure . +This has to do with issues with Unisys' &LZW; patent. &GIF; support is turned off from &Qt; 1.44 onwards by default. When you want to use &GIF;s and have the relevant license, recompile &Qt; with &GIF; support. ./configure . -How do I install &kde; themes? +How do I install &kde; themes? -Theme support in &kde; has been discontinued with this version. However, there are many opportunities to personalise and add eye candy to &kde; Look at, for example, Appearance & Themes in &kcontrol;. +Theme support in &kde; has been discontinued with this version. However, there are many opportunities to personalise and add eye candy to &kde; Look at, for example, Appearance & Themes in &kcontrol;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/intro.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/intro.docbook index 525629c101d..6b31d8982e0 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/intro.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/intro.docbook @@ -5,94 +5,57 @@ --> -Introduction +Introduction -What is &kde;? +What is &kde;? -&kde; is the K Desktop Environment. It is a project initiated by Matthias Ettrich in 1996. The aim of the &kde; project is to connect the power of the &UNIX; operating systems with the comfort of a modern user interface. -In short, &kde; will bring &UNIX; to the desktop! -If you want further information about &kde;, have a look at What is &kde;? +&kde; is the K Desktop Environment. It is a project initiated by Matthias Ettrich in 1996. The aim of the &kde; project is to connect the power of the &UNIX; operating systems with the comfort of a modern user interface. +In short, &kde; will bring &UNIX; to the desktop! +If you want further information about &kde;, have a look at What is &kde;? -On which platforms can I expect &kde; to work? +On which platforms can I expect &kde; to work? -&kde; is a Desktop Environment for all flavours of &UNIX;. While it is true that most &kde; developers use &Linux;, &kde; runs smoothly on a wide range of systems. You may, however, need to tweak the source code a bit to get &kde; to compile on a not-so-popular variant of &UNIX;, or if you are not using the &GNU; development tools, in particular the &gcc; compiler. -For an almost complete list of systems &kde; is running on, please refer to this list of systems for KDE +&kde; is a Desktop Environment for all flavours of &UNIX;. While it is true that most &kde; developers use &Linux;, &kde; runs smoothly on a wide range of systems. You may, however, need to tweak the source code a bit to get &kde; to compile on a not-so-popular variant of &UNIX;, or if you are not using the &GNU; development tools, in particular the &gcc; compiler. +For an almost complete list of systems &kde; is running on, please refer to this list of systems for KDE -Is &kde; a window manager? +Is &kde; a window manager? -No, &kde; is not a window manager. While &kde; includes a very sophisticated window manager (&twin;), &kde; is much more than that. It is a full-blown Integrated Desktop Environment. -&kde; provides a complete desktop environment, including a web browser, a file manager, a window manager, a help system, a configuration system, uncountable tools and utilities, and an ever increasing number of applications, including but not limited to mail and news clients, drawing programs, a &PostScript; and a &DVI; viewer and so forth. +No, &kde; is not a window manager. While &kde; includes a very sophisticated window manager (&twin;), &kde; is much more than that. It is a full-blown Integrated Desktop Environment. +&kde; provides a complete desktop environment, including a web browser, a file manager, a window manager, a help system, a configuration system, uncountable tools and utilities, and an ever increasing number of applications, including but not limited to mail and news clients, drawing programs, a &PostScript; and a &DVI; viewer and so forth. -Is &kde; a CDE, &Windows; 95 or &Mac; OS clone? +Is &kde; a CDE, &Windows; 95 or &Mac; OS clone? -No, &kde; is not a clone. Specifically &kde; is not a CDE or &Windows; clone. While the &kde; developers have and will continue to glean the best features from all existing desktop environments, &kde; is a truly unique environment that has and will continue to go its own way. +No, &kde; is not a clone. Specifically &kde; is not a CDE or &Windows; clone. While the &kde; developers have and will continue to glean the best features from all existing desktop environments, &kde; is a truly unique environment that has and will continue to go its own way. -Is &kde; free software? +Is &kde; free software? -Yes, &kde; is free software according to the &GNU; General Public Licence. All &kde; libraries are available under the LGPL making commercial software development for the &kde; desktop possible, but all &kde; applications are licensed under the GPL. -&kde; uses the &Qt; C++ crossplatform toolkit, which is also released (since version 2.2) under the GPL. -It is absolutely legal to make &kde; and &Qt; available on &CD-ROM; free of charge. No runtime fees of any kind are incurred. +Yes, &kde; is free software according to the &GNU; General Public Licence. All &kde; libraries are available under the LGPL making commercial software development for the &kde; desktop possible, but all &kde; applications are licensed under the GPL. +&kde; uses the &Qt; C++ crossplatform toolkit, which is also released (since version 2.2) under the GPL. +It is absolutely legal to make &kde; and &Qt; available on &CD-ROM; free of charge. No runtime fees of any kind are incurred. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/misc.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/misc.docbook index 103ad37b78a..d0047f27cad 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/misc.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/misc.docbook @@ -5,321 +5,192 @@ --> -Miscellaneous questions +Miscellaneous questions -Why does &kde; use &Qt;? +Why does &kde; use &Qt;? -&Qt; is a very sophisticated toolkit that provides everything that is needed to build a modern user interface. &Qt; is written in C++, thus allowing object-oriented development which ensures efficiency and code reuse in a project the size and scope of &kde;. In our opinion there is no better toolkit available for &UNIX; systems and that it would have been a grave mistake to try to build &kde; on anything but the best. +&Qt; is a very sophisticated toolkit that provides everything that is needed to build a modern user interface. &Qt; is written in C++, thus allowing object-oriented development which ensures efficiency and code reuse in a project the size and scope of &kde;. In our opinion there is no better toolkit available for &UNIX; systems and that it would have been a grave mistake to try to build &kde; on anything but the best. -Why does &kde; not use gtk, xforms, xlib, whatever? +Why does &kde; not use gtk, xforms, xlib, whatever? -There are a number of toolkits available. To provide a consistent user interface and to keep used resources such as memory to a minimum, &kde; can use only one of them. &Qt; was selected for the reasons mentioned above. +There are a number of toolkits available. To provide a consistent user interface and to keep used resources such as memory to a minimum, &kde; can use only one of them. &Qt; was selected for the reasons mentioned above. -But &Qt; isn't free, is it? +But &Qt; isn't free, is it? -It is! As of September 4, 2000, version 2.2 of the &Qt; libraries were licensed under the GPL, thereby fulfiling all aspects of free software. +It is! As of September 4, 2000, version 2.2 of the &Qt; libraries were licensed under the GPL, thereby fulfiling all aspects of free software. -Does &kde; have terminal emulators with transparent background? +Does &kde; have terminal emulators with transparent background? -Yes and no. &konsole; has the ability to simulate transparency by redrawing the background of the window inside the &konsole; window. This gives the illusion of transparency, but if you place &konsole; on top of another window, the transparency is lost. Eterm should work fine under &kde; if you desire more complete transparency. +Yes and no. &konsole; has the ability to simulate transparency by redrawing the background of the window inside the &konsole; window. This gives the illusion of transparency, but if you place &konsole; on top of another window, the transparency is lost. Eterm should work fine under &kde; if you desire more complete transparency. -How do I create icons for non-&kde; applications that I can put in the K menu? Where do these icons go? +How do I create icons for non-&kde; applications that I can put in the K menu? Where do these icons go? -Create them using your favourite image manipulator, for example, GIMP, or the &kde; Icon Editor and put them in $TDEDIR/share/icons(/mini) or $HOME/.trinity/share/icons(/mini). +Create them using your favourite image manipulator, for example, GIMP, or the &kde; Icon Editor and put them in $TDEDIR/share/icons(/mini) or $HOME/.trinity/share/icons(/mini). -What about &kde; programs that do not have icons? How do I get them into the menu? +What about &kde; programs that do not have icons? How do I get them into the menu? -Use &kmenuedit;. To access it use the &RMB; on the K button and select Menu Editor. +Use &kmenuedit;. To access it use the &RMB; on the K button and select Menu Editor. -Does &kde; have a graphical &FTP; client? +Does &kde; have a graphical &FTP; client? -Yes, and it is none other than your favourite file manager, &konqueror;. You can drag and drop remote files into local folders. +Yes, and it is none other than your favourite file manager, &konqueror;. You can drag and drop remote files into local folders. -How do I exit &kde;? +How do I exit &kde;? -Simply click on the K button and select Logout. In addition, if you right click on an empty area of the desktop, you will be presented with a menu containing logout as one of the options. Depending on your configuration of the &X-Window;, &Ctrl;&Alt;&Backspace; might also do the trick by killing the X server, but its use prevents session management and cannot be recommended. +Simply click on the K button and select Logout. In addition, if you right click on an empty area of the desktop, you will be presented with a menu containing logout as one of the options. Depending on your configuration of the &X-Window;, &Ctrl;&Alt;&Backspace; might also do the trick by killing the X server, but its use prevents session management and cannot be recommended. -Is there a program that checks for new mails at my ISP if and only if I am online? +Is there a program that checks for new mails at my ISP if and only if I am online? -&korn; will do the job. If you are not connected, it will just sit there (idling). +&korn; will do the job. If you are not connected, it will just sit there (idling). -Is it really necessary to upgrade to the latest version? +Is it really necessary to upgrade to the latest version? -We recommend to always use the latest stable release. If you don't, it will probably be difficult to get answers to your questions. If you have a problem with an old version, the answer will probably be Please upgrade and try again. Note that new versions also sometimes fix security problems. +We recommend to always use the latest stable release. If you don't, it will probably be difficult to get answers to your questions. If you have a problem with an old version, the answer will probably be Please upgrade and try again. Note that new versions also sometimes fix security problems. -How do I copy and paste in &kde;? +How do I copy and paste in &kde;? -The simplest method is to use your mouse: +The simplest method is to use your mouse: -Highlight the text you want to copy by holding down the &LMB; and dragging across the text. -Go to the destination area; depending on your configuration, you might need to click it using the &LMB; to give it focus. -Click the &MMB; to paste. If you have a two button mouse and are emulating a three button mouse, push both buttons simultaneously. +Highlight the text you want to copy by holding down the &LMB; and dragging across the text. +Go to the destination area; depending on your configuration, you might need to click it using the &LMB; to give it focus. +Click the &MMB; to paste. If you have a two button mouse and are emulating a three button mouse, push both buttons simultaneously. -How do I convert the default &RedHat; menus into a menu in the K menu? +How do I convert the default &RedHat; menus into a menu in the K menu? -Click on the K button and select SystemAppfinder. +Click on the K button and select SystemAppfinder. -What is CVS? +What is CVS? -It stands for Concurrent Versions System. It is a version control system and is based on RCS (Revision Control System), but offers more functionality. It is used to maintain source code under development. It will keep multiple versions of things (handy if you broke something and have to back up and get a clean old version), and allows people remote access over the Net to pick up the latest source code and even to check in new files if they have permission. It is also open source (you pay for support if you want it), and since it is free it is the system of choice for people writing more free products, such as &kde;. +It stands for Concurrent Versions System. It is a version control system and is based on RCS (Revision Control System), but offers more functionality. It is used to maintain source code under development. It will keep multiple versions of things (handy if you broke something and have to back up and get a clean old version), and allows people remote access over the Net to pick up the latest source code and even to check in new files if they have permission. It is also open source (you pay for support if you want it), and since it is free it is the system of choice for people writing more free products, such as &kde;. -Does &kde; support dual screen (Xinerama)? +Does &kde; support dual screen (Xinerama)? -Yes, you need to have a multi-headed X server (⪚ MetroX or XFree86 4.0 and above) and a &kde; ->= 2.2.1 +Yes, you need to have a multi-headed X server (⪚ MetroX or XFree86 4.0 and above) and a &kde; >= 2.2.1 -Why does Drag and Drop not work with Xinerama? +Why does Drag and Drop not work with Xinerama? -You should upgrade to XFree86 4.2.0 for this to work properly. +You should upgrade to XFree86 4.2.0 for this to work properly. -How do I check which version of &kde; I am using? +How do I check which version of &kde; I am using? -Fire up your &kde; Control Centre. It comes up with an Info Screen including the version of &kde; The &kde; version is also included in the application's About dialogue. +Fire up your &kde; Control Centre. It comes up with an Info Screen including the version of &kde; The &kde; version is also included in the application's About dialogue. -Can I write commercial software for &kde;? +Can I write commercial software for &kde;? -You can use the &kde; libraries to write commercial and closed source as well as commercial and open source software. If you write open source software you can use the &Qt; free edition. But if you write closed source software you may not use the &Qt; free edition; you need to obtain the &Qt; professional edition from Troll Tech. If you want more information, please contact Troll Tech directly. +You can use the &kde; libraries to write commercial and closed source as well as commercial and open source software. If you write open source software you can use the &Qt; free edition. But if you write closed source software you may not use the &Qt; free edition; you need to obtain the &Qt; professional edition from Troll Tech. If you want more information, please contact Troll Tech directly. -How do I go about creating themes and icons? +How do I go about creating themes and icons? -Go see http://artist.kde.org. +Go see http://artist.kde.org. -Is KLyX dead? +Is KLyX dead? -Yes. But future versions of LyX will be &GUI; independent. Check the progress of the various &GUI; frontends here. +Yes. But future versions of LyX will be &GUI; independent. Check the progress of the various &GUI; frontends here. -How can I get to know about development updates? +How can I get to know about development updates? -You might want to subscribe to the various &kde; mailing lists available, especially kde-cvs, which lists all commits done to the &kde; CVS repository. Check http://lists.kde.org if you want to read without subscribing. +You might want to subscribe to the various &kde; mailing lists available, especially kde-cvs, which lists all commits done to the &kde; CVS repository. Check http://lists.kde.org if you want to read without subscribing. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/moreinfo.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/moreinfo.docbook index ee77ff73614..a5fe88c3f7a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/moreinfo.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/moreinfo.docbook @@ -5,243 +5,108 @@ --> -Getting more information +Getting more information -Where is the &kde; homepage? +Where is the &kde; homepage? -The &kde; homepage is located at http://www.kde.org. If you prefer a local mirror, there are several to choose from. For a current list of web site mirrors sorted by location, please visit http://www.kde.org/mirrors/web.php. +The &kde; homepage is located at http://www.kde.org. If you prefer a local mirror, there are several to choose from. For a current list of web site mirrors sorted by location, please visit http://www.kde.org/mirrors/web.php. -Is there a &kde; mailing list? +Is there a &kde; mailing list? -There are several &kde; mailing lists. Each focuses on a different aspect of &kde;. Some are for developers, so they are not discussed in detail. Some of the more important lists that users might be interested in are: +There are several &kde; mailing lists. Each focuses on a different aspect of &kde;. Some are for developers, so they are not discussed in detail. Some of the more important lists that users might be interested in are: -kde -This is the main &kde; mailing list for general discussions. +kde +This is the main &kde; mailing list for general discussions. -kde-announce -This list is used to announce new versions of &kde; as well as new tools and applications. +kde-announce +This list is used to announce new versions of &kde; as well as new tools and applications. -kde-look -This is the list that deals with questions about look and feel, and general user interface considerations. +kde-look +This is the list that deals with questions about look and feel, and general user interface considerations. -For the complete list of mailing lists available, please refer to http://www.kde.org/mailinglists/. -Please note that it is not a good idea to ask questions which are already answered in this &FAQ;. +For the complete list of mailing lists available, please refer to http://www.kde.org/mailinglists/. +Please note that it is not a good idea to ask questions which are already answered in this &FAQ;. -How do I subscribe/unsubscribe to these lists? +How do I subscribe/unsubscribe to these lists? -To subscribe, send an email to list-request, that is: +To subscribe, send an email to list-request, that is: -kde-request@kde.org -kde-announce-request@kde.org -kde-user-request@kde.org -kde-look-request@kde.org +kde-request@kde.org +kde-announce-request@kde.org +kde-user-request@kde.org +kde-look-request@kde.org -The email must contain subscribe your_email_address in the subject. -To unsubscribe, send an email to list-request, that is: +The email must contain subscribe your_email_address in the subject. +To unsubscribe, send an email to list-request, that is: -kde-request@kde.org -kde-announce-request@kde.org -kde-user-request@kde.org -kde-look-request@kde.org +kde-request@kde.org +kde-announce-request@kde.org +kde-user-request@kde.org +kde-look-request@kde.org -The email must contain unsubscribe your_email_address in the subject. Never send subscribe/unsubscribe request to the mailing lists directly! Use the list-request instead. -There is also a complete list of all &kde;-related mailing lists, and a web interface for subscribing and unsubscribing located at http://master.kde.org/mailman/listinfo. +The email must contain unsubscribe your_email_address in the subject. Never send subscribe/unsubscribe request to the mailing lists directly! Use the list-request instead. +There is also a complete list of all &kde;-related mailing lists, and a web interface for subscribing and unsubscribing located at http://master.kde.org/mailman/listinfo. -Is there a mailing list archive? +Is there a mailing list archive? -Yes, there is a searchable mailing list archive hosted by Progressive Computer Concepts. The &URL; is http://lists.kde.org. There you will see a folder listing of the mailing lists. Note that you can only do a subject/author search at this level. You probably will not find what you want doing this kind of search. +Yes, there is a searchable mailing list archive hosted by Progressive Computer Concepts. The &URL; is http://lists.kde.org. There you will see a folder listing of the mailing lists. Note that you can only do a subject/author search at this level. You probably will not find what you want doing this kind of search. -To do a body search, you have to enter one of the mailing lists. Just click on the folder you want to search (⪚ kde or kde-user) and then the pull-down menu by the search box will default to Body searches. To be thorough, you should probably search the kde, kde-user, and kde-devel folders. +To do a body search, you have to enter one of the mailing lists. Just click on the folder you want to search (⪚ kde or kde-user) and then the pull-down menu by the search box will default to Body searches. To be thorough, you should probably search the kde, kde-user, and kde-devel folders. -Is there a newsgroup about &kde;? +Is there a newsgroup about &kde;? -Yes, there is! It is at comp.windows.x.kde. In addition, there is also a German newsgroup at de.alt.comp.kde. Please note that it is not a good idea to ask questions which are already answered in this &FAQ;. +Yes, there is! It is at comp.windows.x.kde. In addition, there is also a German newsgroup at de.alt.comp.kde. Please note that it is not a good idea to ask questions which are already answered in this &FAQ;. -Are there any other &kde;-related &FAQ;s? +Are there any other &kde;-related &FAQ;s? -Yes. Here is a list of them: +Yes. Here is a list of them: -&kde; &FAQ; -&konqueror; &FAQ; -aRts sound server documentation +&kde; &FAQ; +&konqueror; &FAQ; +aRts sound server documentation diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/nontdeapps.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/nontdeapps.docbook index 8f4b3df5350..44b0272aee4 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/nontdeapps.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/nontdeapps.docbook @@ -5,59 +5,24 @@ --> -&kde; with non-&kde; applications +&kde; with non-&kde; applications -My non-&kde; applications like &Emacs; and kterm are running amok with strange colours! +My non-&kde; applications like &Emacs; and kterm are running amok with strange colours! -Start the &kde; Control Centre and in Appearance & ThemesColours uncheck the Apply colours to non-TDE applications checkbox and click Apply. +Start the &kde; Control Centre and in Appearance & ThemesColours uncheck the Apply colours to non-TDE applications checkbox and click Apply. -How can I set my default web browser to be something other than &konqueror;? +How can I set my default web browser to be something other than &konqueror;? -If you are using &kde; 3.3 or later, open up the &kcontrolcenter; and navigate to the TDE ComponentsComponent Chooser panel. Select Web Browser from the list on the left, then select Open http and https URLs in the following browser: and type in the name of the browser (⪚ mozilla, firefox, opera, &etc;) in the textbox. +If you are using &kde; 3.3 or later, open up the &kcontrolcenter; and navigate to the TDE ComponentsComponent Chooser panel. Select Web Browser from the list on the left, then select Open http and https URLs in the following browser: and type in the name of the browser (⪚ mozilla, firefox, opera, &etc;) in the textbox. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/notrelated.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/notrelated.docbook index b780a37ec31..c1b5011ed6c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/notrelated.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/notrelated.docbook @@ -7,190 +7,84 @@ --> -Not really &kde;-related, but frequently asked nevertheless. +Not really &kde;-related, but frequently asked nevertheless. -How do I change the screen resolution? +How do I change the screen resolution? -Use &Ctrl;&Alt;+ and &Ctrl;&Alt;- to cycle through the resolutions you have defined in XF86Config (maybe under /etc/X11; poke around first). If you prefer to get your hands dirty, you can always edit the file directly. By placing your favourite resolution at the beginning (or making it the only one listed), &X-Window; will always start up with that resolution. Always make a backup copy of your XF86Config file before you start editing it. Errors in this file can render &X-Window; unusable. -These instructions are only valid if you are running version 3.3.x of the XFree86 server. If you are running XFree86 4.x, you must consult with the XFree86(TM): Home Page. +Use &Ctrl;&Alt;+ and &Ctrl;&Alt;- to cycle through the resolutions you have defined in XF86Config (maybe under /etc/X11; poke around first). If you prefer to get your hands dirty, you can always edit the file directly. By placing your favourite resolution at the beginning (or making it the only one listed), &X-Window; will always start up with that resolution. Always make a backup copy of your XF86Config file before you start editing it. Errors in this file can render &X-Window; unusable. +These instructions are only valid if you are running version 3.3.x of the XFree86 server. If you are running XFree86 4.x, you must consult with the XFree86(TM): Home Page. -How do I change the colour depth? +How do I change the colour depth? -There is no way you can do this on the fly. You can either start &X-Window; using startx where number can be 8, 16, 24 or 32, depending on the depth you want. Alternatively, if you are using xdm/&tdm;, you need to edit /etc/X11/xdm/Xservers (may vary) and enter :0 local /usr/X11R6/bin/X -bpp 16 for 16 bit colour depth. -You can also edit the XF86Config file and add a line like DefaultColorDepth number to Section "Screen". The next time you start X, it will run with the newly-configured colour depth. +There is no way you can do this on the fly. You can either start &X-Window; using startx where number can be 8, 16, 24 or 32, depending on the depth you want. Alternatively, if you are using xdm/&tdm;, you need to edit /etc/X11/xdm/Xservers (may vary) and enter :0 local /usr/X11R6/bin/X -bpp 16 for 16 bit colour depth. +You can also edit the XF86Config file and add a line like DefaultColorDepth number to Section "Screen". The next time you start X, it will run with the newly-configured colour depth. -What can I do if I am using a 2-button mouse? +What can I do if I am using a 2-button mouse? -Go buy a 3-button one, or use third button emulation. The third button is emulated by pressing both the &LMB; and the &RMB; together. You would need to enable in your XF86Config file. +Go buy a 3-button one, or use third button emulation. The third button is emulated by pressing both the &LMB; and the &RMB; together. You would need to enable in your XF86Config file. -What is a "sticky" window? +What is a "sticky" window? -In a virtual desktop environment with multiple virtual desktops, a "sticky" window will stay put on the screen when you switch between desktops, as if sticking to the glass of the screen. Xclock is a typical candidate for sticking, as you need to run only one instance of it, and it always stays with you. +In a virtual desktop environment with multiple virtual desktops, a "sticky" window will stay put on the screen when you switch between desktops, as if sticking to the glass of the screen. Xclock is a typical candidate for sticking, as you need to run only one instance of it, and it always stays with you. -How do I replace the "X" mouse pointer with an arrow? +How do I replace the "X" mouse pointer with an arrow? -The various types of cursor available in X are defined in X11/cursorfont.h. You can change it using xsetroot -cursor_name name_of_cursor. For example, I have the following in my .Xclients: -xsetroot -cursor_name left_ptr +The various types of cursor available in X are defined in X11/cursorfont.h. You can change it using xsetroot -cursor_name name_of_cursor. For example, I have the following in my .Xclients: +xsetroot -cursor_name left_ptr -This will create the common left-angled pointer. To see other alternatives, type xfd -fn cursor. And of course, do not forget that man xsetroot is your friend. +This will create the common left-angled pointer. To see other alternatives, type xfd -fn cursor. And of course, do not forget that man xsetroot is your friend. -How do I extract/install diff files? +How do I extract/install diff files? -To generate a context-diff suitable for patching, use diff -u old-file new-file > patchfile. To apply the diff to a file (i.e. "patch the file"), execute patch < patchfile. +To generate a context-diff suitable for patching, use diff -u old-file new-file > patchfile. To apply the diff to a file (i.e. "patch the file"), execute patch < patchfile. -How do I get &Linux; to mount the floppy device for use with both DOS and ext2 formatted floppies? +How do I get &Linux; to mount the floppy device for use with both DOS and ext2 formatted floppies? -Just specify the filesystem type as auto in /etc/fstab. Auto detection works fine for DOS and ext2. +Just specify the filesystem type as auto in /etc/fstab. Auto detection works fine for DOS and ext2. -How do I start &kde; with the Num Lock on? +How do I start &kde; with the Num Lock on? -Have you tried man setleds? In addition, you might want to edit your $HOME/.Xmodmap and put the following lines in: -! redefines numeric keypad to be used without NumLock +Have you tried man setleds? In addition, you might want to edit your $HOME/.Xmodmap and put the following lines in: +! redefines numeric keypad to be used without NumLock keycode 79 = 7 keycode 80 = 8 keycode 81 = 9 @@ -210,76 +104,39 @@ keycode 86 = plus ! deactivates NumLock key keycode 77 = -Other possible alternatives: +Other possible alternatives: -xkeycaps: right clicking should allow edits. You may have to do this as root. -man XF86Config and look under section Keyboard. -Install NumLockX, which is available from http://dforce.sh.cvut.cz/~seli/en/numlockx. +xkeycaps: right clicking should allow edits. You may have to do this as root. +man XF86Config and look under section Keyboard. +Install NumLockX, which is available from http://dforce.sh.cvut.cz/~seli/en/numlockx. -How do I take window or desktop screenshots? +How do I take window or desktop screenshots? -Use &ksnapshot;. +Use &ksnapshot;. -Is there a tool to make webpages? +Is there a tool to make webpages? -Yes, and there are a lot of them out there, including StarOffice, &Netscape; Composer, and XEmacs. There are also many &kde; applications. To find the most current list, go to kde-apps.org: The Latest in &kde; Applications and search for web development. Try as many as possible and choose the one most suitable to your needs. +Yes, and there are a lot of them out there, including StarOffice, &Netscape; Composer, and XEmacs. There are also many &kde; applications. To find the most current list, go to kde-apps.org: The Latest in &kde; Applications and search for web development. Try as many as possible and choose the one most suitable to your needs. -What do all those acronyms like AFAIK mean? +What do all those acronyms like AFAIK mean? -AAMOF: as a matter of fact +AAMOF: as a matter of fact AFAIK: as far as I know AISE: as I see it BFN: bye for now @@ -301,8 +158,7 @@ RTFM: read the fine manual SOP: standard operating procedure TIA: thanks in advance YMMV: your mileage may vary - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/panel.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/panel.docbook index e49ccb7189f..60718985eb0 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/panel.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/panel.docbook @@ -5,28 +5,16 @@ --> -The panel +The panel -How do I add applications to the &kde; panel (&kicker;)? +How do I add applications to the &kde; panel (&kicker;)? -There are several ways to add an application to the panel, of which the easiest is to right-click on the panel, and from the context menu which appears, select Panel MenuAddApplication Button and then the application for which you want to add a link. -For more ways of adding buttons to the panel, refer to the &kicker; Handbook. +There are several ways to add an application to the panel, of which the easiest is to right-click on the panel, and from the context menu which appears, select Panel MenuAddApplication Button and then the application for which you want to add a link. +For more ways of adding buttons to the panel, refer to the &kicker; Handbook. @@ -35,25 +23,13 @@ -My desktop panel has disappeared. How can I get it back? +My desktop panel has disappeared. How can I get it back? -The panel disappearing is usually due to it crashing. This is most often caused by loading an applet that has a fatal bug or due to a bad installation of &kde; and/or the panel. +The panel disappearing is usually due to it crashing. This is most often caused by loading an applet that has a fatal bug or due to a bad installation of &kde; and/or the panel. -The easiest way to get the panel back is to launch the Run Command window by pressing &Alt;F2 and entering kicker and then pressing the OK button. +The easiest way to get the panel back is to launch the Run Command window by pressing &Alt;F2 and entering kicker and then pressing the OK button. -If the panel continues to disappear, you may wish to either remove or edit by hand your $TDEHOME/share/config/kickerrc file, where $TDEHOME is usually ~/.trinity. If you choose to edit it by hand, start by removing the applet entry groups. +If the panel continues to disappear, you may wish to either remove or edit by hand your $TDEHOME/share/config/kickerrc file, where $TDEHOME is usually ~/.trinity. If you choose to edit it by hand, start by removing the applet entry groups. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tdeapps.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tdeapps.docbook index 5b22a3f79d8..d894f7d4c6f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tdeapps.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tdeapps.docbook @@ -5,128 +5,43 @@ --> -&kde; applications +&kde; applications -&kppp; +&kppp; -Many &kde; users report problems using &kppp;. But before you complain about &kppp;, make sure you have already checked the following: +Many &kde; users report problems using &kppp;. But before you complain about &kppp;, make sure you have already checked the following: -Can you dialup to your ISP without using &kppp;? If you cannot, then perhaps &kppp; is not the culprit after all. -Have you gone through the &kppp; documentation at least three times and followed its instructions and trouble-shooting suggestions? +Can you dialup to your ISP without using &kppp;? If you cannot, then perhaps &kppp; is not the culprit after all. +Have you gone through the &kppp; documentation at least three times and followed its instructions and trouble-shooting suggestions? -The &kppp; documentation can be accessed through the &kde; Help Centre. Last, but not least, the &kppp; homepage is at http://ktown.kde.org/~kppp/. -Now, if you still encounter problems, here's what might help you solve them: +The &kppp; documentation can be accessed through the &kde; Help Centre. Last, but not least, the &kppp; homepage is at http://ktown.kde.org/~kppp/. +Now, if you still encounter problems, here's what might help you solve them: -How do I change the &MTU; setting in &kppp;? -Open up the &kppp; dialogue box and select Setup. Choose an existing account and click Edit, or New to create a new dialup account. Select the Dial tab and click Arguments. Type what you want to change in the Argument textbox (⪚ mtu 296) and click Add. When you are satisfied, click Close. -To check whether the options took, do one of the following: +How do I change the &MTU; setting in &kppp;? +Open up the &kppp; dialogue box and select Setup. Choose an existing account and click Edit, or New to create a new dialup account. Select the Dial tab and click Arguments. Type what you want to change in the Argument textbox (⪚ mtu 296) and click Add. When you are satisfied, click Close. +To check whether the options took, do one of the following: -In a terminal window, run /sbin/ifconfig ppp0 and look at the reported &MTU; in the output. It should match your request. +In a terminal window, run /sbin/ifconfig ppp0 and look at the reported &MTU; in the output. It should match your request. -Add and (each on a separate line) to your /etc/ppp/options file and restart your &PPP; session. You will find debugging messages in /var/log/messages, including &MRU; and &MTU; settings. +Add and (each on a separate line) to your /etc/ppp/options file and restart your &PPP; session. You will find debugging messages in /var/log/messages, including &MRU; and &MTU; settings. -If you want, the &MRU; and &MTU; settings can be added to the options file, one complete setting per line, no quotes or dashes. +If you want, the &MRU; and &MTU; settings can be added to the options file, one complete setting per line, no quotes or dashes. -&kppp; connects at a slower speed than normal. -The following might do the trick: +&kppp; connects at a slower speed than normal. +The following might do the trick: -Try executing setserial spd_hi. -The default &MTU; value is 1500, which maybe too large for a dialup connection. Try changing it to a smaller value like 296 or 576. -Check in your $HOME/.trinity/share/config for the kppprc. Ensure the correct modem speed is actually defined there. - +Try executing setserial spd_hi. +The default &MTU; value is 1500, which maybe too large for a dialup connection. Try changing it to a smaller value like 296 or 576. +Check in your $HOME/.trinity/share/config for the kppprc. Ensure the correct modem speed is actually defined there. + @@ -134,86 +49,30 @@ -&konsole; +&konsole; -How do I page-up or page-down? -Use ShiftPage Up and ShiftPg Dn. +How do I page-up or page-down? +Use ShiftPage Up and ShiftPg Dn. -How do I perform a simple copy from &konsole; to anything else? -When I do a ls, first I select with the mouse the desired text, press &Ctrl;C, then I make the target application active, point the mouse to the relevant part and press &Ctrl;V. Alternatively, highlight the text by dragging with the &LMB; down and paste by clicking with the &MMB; (or both buttons if you are using a 2 button mouse with 3 button emulation). +How do I perform a simple copy from &konsole; to anything else? +When I do a ls, first I select with the mouse the desired text, press &Ctrl;C, then I make the target application active, point the mouse to the relevant part and press &Ctrl;V. Alternatively, highlight the text by dragging with the &LMB; down and paste by clicking with the &MMB; (or both buttons if you are using a 2 button mouse with 3 button emulation). -Why can't &konsole; find the 9x15 and the 2 console bitmap fonts installed with &kde;? +Why can't &konsole; find the 9x15 and the 2 console bitmap fonts installed with &kde;? -FontConfig must find the three fonts installed in: $TDEDIR/share/fonts. If the &kde; install does not install these fonts in a directory that already exists (⪚ /usr/share/fonts) then you must add this directory to the configuration file /etc/fonts/local.conf. This should be the first line after <fontconfig>. For example: +FontConfig must find the three fonts installed in: $TDEDIR/share/fonts. If the &kde; install does not install these fonts in a directory that already exists (⪚ /usr/share/fonts) then you must add this directory to the configuration file /etc/fonts/local.conf. This should be the first line after <fontconfig>. For example: <fontconfig> <dir>/usr/kde3/share/fonts</dir> </fontconfig> - After adding the directory, run (as root): fc-cache -v and check that it found the directory. + After adding the directory, run (as root): fc-cache -v and check that it found the directory. @@ -223,16 +82,10 @@ -&kmail; +&kmail; -&kmail; has its own home page at http://kmail.kde.org where an FAQ is available. +&kmail; has its own home page at http://kmail.kde.org where an FAQ is available. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tips.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tips.docbook index 9f7b4e80e26..af3d0ad2b57 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tips.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/faq/tips.docbook @@ -5,199 +5,84 @@ --> -Useful tips +Useful tips -Reading documentation in &kde; +Reading documentation in &kde; -Pop up the Run Command window (&Alt;F2 by default) and type: +Pop up the Run Command window (&Alt;F2 by default) and type: -man:command for man pages. It even unpacks on the fly if the man pages are gzipped. +man:command for man pages. It even unpacks on the fly if the man pages are gzipped. -info:command for info pages. +info:command for info pages. -help:kdeappname for &kde; application help pages. +help:kdeappname for &kde; application help pages. -You can also enter any of these in the Location text box in &konqueror;. -Or you can use the &kde; Help Centre if you are using &kde; 2. Simply start the &kde; Help Centre by clicking on the icon (the blue book with the yellow key) on the toolbar. Once the &kde; Help Centre has loaded, the window on the left will contain an entry called Unix manual pages. Click once on this entry, and you can browse through all the installed manual pages on your system. +You can also enter any of these in the Location text box in &konqueror;. +Or you can use the &kde; Help Centre if you are using &kde; 2. Simply start the &kde; Help Centre by clicking on the icon (the blue book with the yellow key) on the toolbar. Once the &kde; Help Centre has loaded, the window on the left will contain an entry called Unix manual pages. Click once on this entry, and you can browse through all the installed manual pages on your system. -Move or resize windows quickly +Move or resize windows quickly -To move a window, use &Alt;left mouse button. &Alt;right mouse button will resize the window. Last but not least, &Alt;middle mouse button raises/lowers the window. The &kde; Control Centre allows you to change these mouse bindings. +To move a window, use &Alt;left mouse button. &Alt;right mouse button will resize the window. Last but not least, &Alt;middle mouse button raises/lowers the window. The &kde; Control Centre allows you to change these mouse bindings. -Killing windows in &kde; +Killing windows in &kde; -There is a standard keybinding (&Ctrl;&Alt;&Esc;) that gives you a skull & crossbones cursor. Click that cursor on a window to kill it. The keybindings are viewable/changeable from the &kde; Control Centre. Using this option kills the program forcibly. Data may be lost, and some processes related to the program may remain active. Use only as a last resort. +There is a standard keybinding (&Ctrl;&Alt;&Esc;) that gives you a skull & crossbones cursor. Click that cursor on a window to kill it. The keybindings are viewable/changeable from the &kde; Control Centre. Using this option kills the program forcibly. Data may be lost, and some processes related to the program may remain active. Use only as a last resort. -What if something is so wrong that I ca not even get the skull & crossbones cursor? How do I get out of a total lockup? +What if something is so wrong that I ca not even get the skull & crossbones cursor? How do I get out of a total lockup? -These kind of locks tend to occur when an application locks up while it has a so called mouse/keyboard grab. When that happens you can try to select a virtual text console with &Ctrl;&Alt;F1 and login. With the following command you will get a list of all running processes: - - ps | more - -By killing the process that has the mousegrab, your desktop will come to life again. Unfortunately you ca not see which process that is, so you will have to find out through trial and error. To kill a process use: - - kill pid - -Here pid is the process id of the process, which is the first number on each line reported by ps . - -You can switch back to the desktop with &Ctrl;&Alt;F7 (or F8 through F9 depending on your operating system) to see if things work again. When you press &Alt;Tab you should get a response from the window manager. If not, you need to get back to the text console and try to kill another process. - -Good candidates to kill are: the application you were working with, &kicker;, &klipper; and &kdesktop;. +These kind of locks tend to occur when an application locks up while it has a so called mouse/keyboard grab. When that happens you can try to select a virtual text console with &Ctrl;&Alt;F1 and login. With the following command you will get a list of all running processes: + + ps | more + +By killing the process that has the mousegrab, your desktop will come to life again. Unfortunately you ca not see which process that is, so you will have to find out through trial and error. To kill a process use: + + kill pid + +Here pid is the process id of the process, which is the first number on each line reported by ps . + +You can switch back to the desktop with &Ctrl;&Alt;F7 (or F8 through F9 depending on your operating system) to see if things work again. When you press &Alt;Tab you should get a response from the window manager. If not, you need to get back to the text console and try to kill another process. + +Good candidates to kill are: the application you were working with, &kicker;, &klipper; and &kdesktop;. - Printing + Printing - ACLs - Abbreviation for Access Control Lists; ACLs are used to check for the access by a given (authenticated) user. A first rough support for ACLs for printing is available from &CUPS;; this will be refined in future versions. - Authentication + ACLs + Abbreviation for Access Control Lists; ACLs are used to check for the access by a given (authenticated) user. A first rough support for ACLs for printing is available from &CUPS;; this will be refined in future versions. + Authentication - AppSocket Protocol - AppSocket is a protocol for the transfer of print data, also frequently called "Direct TCP/IP Printing". &Hewlett-Packard; have taken AppSocket, added a few minor extensions around it and been very successful in renaming and marketing it under the brand "&HP; JetDirect"... -&HP; JetDirect Protocol Direct TCP/IP Printing + AppSocket Protocol + AppSocket is a protocol for the transfer of print data, also frequently called "Direct TCP/IP Printing". &Hewlett-Packard; have taken AppSocket, added a few minor extensions around it and been very successful in renaming and marketing it under the brand "&HP; JetDirect"... +&HP; JetDirect Protocol Direct TCP/IP Printing - APSfilter - APSfilter is used mainly in the context of "classical" &UNIX; printing (BSD-style LPD). It is a sophisticated shell script, disguised as an "all-in-one" filtering program. In reality, APSfilter calls "real filters" to do the jobs needed. It sends printjobs automatically through these other filters, based on an initial file-type analysis of the printfile. It is written and maintained by Andreas Klemm. It is similar to Magicfilter and mostly uses Ghostscript for file conversions. Some Linux Distributions (like &SuSE;) use APSfilter, others Magicfilter (like &RedHat;), some have both for preference selection (like *BSD). &CUPS; has no need for APSfilter, as it runs its own file type recognition (based on &MIME; types) and applies its own filtering logic. -Ghostscript Magicfilter &MIME;-Types printcap + APSfilter + APSfilter is used mainly in the context of "classical" &UNIX; printing (BSD-style LPD). It is a sophisticated shell script, disguised as an "all-in-one" filtering program. In reality, APSfilter calls "real filters" to do the jobs needed. It sends printjobs automatically through these other filters, based on an initial file-type analysis of the printfile. It is written and maintained by Andreas Klemm. It is similar to Magicfilter and mostly uses Ghostscript for file conversions. Some Linux Distributions (like &SuSE;) use APSfilter, others Magicfilter (like &RedHat;), some have both for preference selection (like *BSD). &CUPS; has no need for APSfilter, as it runs its own file type recognition (based on &MIME; types) and applies its own filtering logic. +Ghostscript Magicfilter &MIME;-Types printcap - Authentication - Proving the identity of a certain person (maybe via username/password or by means of a certificate) is often called authentication. Once you are authenticated, you may or may not get access to a requested ressource, possibly based on ACLs. - ACLs + Authentication + Proving the identity of a certain person (maybe via username/password or by means of a certificate) is often called authentication. Once you are authenticated, you may or may not get access to a requested ressource, possibly based on ACLs. + ACLs - Bi-directional communication - In the context of printing, a server or a host may receive additional information sent back from the printer (status messages &etc;), either upon a query or unrequested. AppSocket ( = &HP; JetDirect), &CUPS; and IPP support bi-directional communication, LPR/LPD and BSD-style printing do not... -AppSocket Protocol &CUPS; Direct TCP/IP Printing &HP; JetDirect IPP LPR/LPD + Bi-directional communication + In the context of printing, a server or a host may receive additional information sent back from the printer (status messages &etc;), either upon a query or unrequested. AppSocket ( = &HP; JetDirect), &CUPS; and IPP support bi-directional communication, LPR/LPD and BSD-style printing do not... +AppSocket Protocol &CUPS; Direct TCP/IP Printing &HP; JetDirect IPP LPR/LPD - BSD-style Printing - Generic term for different variants of the traditional &UNIX; printing method. Its first version appeared in the early 70s on BSD &UNIX; and was formally described in RFC 1179 only as late as 1990. At the time when BSD "remote" printing was first designed, printers were serially or otherwise directly connected devices to a host (with the Internet hardly consisting of more than 100 nodes!); printers used hole-punched, continuous paper, fed through by a tractor mechanism, with simple rows of ASCII text mechanically hammered on to the medium, drawn from a cardboard box beneath the table. It came out like a zig-zag folded paper "snake". Remote printing consisted of a neighbouring host in the next room sending a file asking for printout. How technology has changed! Printers generally use cut-sheet media, they have built-in intelligence to compute the raster images of pages after pages that are sent to them using one of the powerful page description languages (PDL). Many are network nodes in their own right, with CPU, RAM, a hard disk and their own Operation System, and are hooked to a net with potentially millions of users... It is a vast proof of the flexible &UNIX; concept for doing things, that it made "Line Printing" reliably work even under these modern conditions. But time has finally come now to go for something new -- the IPP. It is strong proof of the flexibility of &UNIX;; that "Line Printing" works reliably, even under these modern conditions. But time has finally come now to go for something new -- the IPP. -IPP &CUPS; LPR/LPD printing + BSD-style Printing + Generic term for different variants of the traditional &UNIX; printing method. Its first version appeared in the early 70s on BSD &UNIX; and was formally described in RFC 1179 only as late as 1990. At the time when BSD "remote" printing was first designed, printers were serially or otherwise directly connected devices to a host (with the Internet hardly consisting of more than 100 nodes!); printers used hole-punched, continuous paper, fed through by a tractor mechanism, with simple rows of ASCII text mechanically hammered on to the medium, drawn from a cardboard box beneath the table. It came out like a zig-zag folded paper "snake". Remote printing consisted of a neighbouring host in the next room sending a file asking for printout. How technology has changed! Printers generally use cut-sheet media, they have built-in intelligence to compute the raster images of pages after pages that are sent to them using one of the powerful page description languages (PDL). Many are network nodes in their own right, with CPU, RAM, a hard disk and their own Operation System, and are hooked to a net with potentially millions of users... It is a vast proof of the flexible &UNIX; concept for doing things, that it made "Line Printing" reliably work even under these modern conditions. But time has finally come now to go for something new -- the IPP. It is strong proof of the flexibility of &UNIX;; that "Line Printing" works reliably, even under these modern conditions. But time has finally come now to go for something new -- the IPP. +IPP &CUPS; LPR/LPD printing - &CUPS; - Abbreviation for Common UNIX Printing System; &CUPS; is the most modern &UNIX; and Linux printing system, also providing cross-platform print services to &Microsoft; &Windows; and Apple &MacOS; clients. Based on IPP, it does away with all the pitfalls of old-style BSD printing, providing authentication, encryption and ACLs, plus many more features. At the same time it is backward-compatible enough to serve all legacy clients that are not yet up to IPP, via LPR/LPD (BSD-style). &CUPS; is able to control any &PostScript; printer by utilizing the vendor-supplied PPD (PostScript Printer Description file), targeted originally for &Microsoft; Windows NT printing only. &kde; Printing is most powerful if based on &CUPS;. -ACLs Authentication BSD-style printing IPP TDEPrint LPR/LPD PPD + &CUPS; + Abbreviation for Common UNIX Printing System; &CUPS; is the most modern &UNIX; and Linux printing system, also providing cross-platform print services to &Microsoft; &Windows; and Apple &MacOS; clients. Based on IPP, it does away with all the pitfalls of old-style BSD printing, providing authentication, encryption and ACLs, plus many more features. At the same time it is backward-compatible enough to serve all legacy clients that are not yet up to IPP, via LPR/LPD (BSD-style). &CUPS; is able to control any &PostScript; printer by utilizing the vendor-supplied PPD (PostScript Printer Description file), targeted originally for &Microsoft; Windows NT printing only. &kde; Printing is most powerful if based on &CUPS;. +ACLs Authentication BSD-style printing IPP TDEPrint LPR/LPD PPD - &CUPS;-FAQ - Currently only available in German (translation is on the way), the &CUPS;-FAQ is a valuable resource to answer many questions that anyone new to &CUPS; printing might have at first. - TDEPrint Handbook + &CUPS;-FAQ + Currently only available in German (translation is on the way), the &CUPS;-FAQ is a valuable resource to answer many questions that anyone new to &CUPS; printing might have at first. + TDEPrint Handbook - &CUPS;-O-Matic - &CUPS;-O-Matic was the first "Third Party" plugin for the &CUPS; printing software. It is available on the Linuxprinting.org website to provide an online PPD-generating service. Together with the companion cupsomatic Perl-Script, that needs to be installed as an additional &CUPS; backend, it redirects output from the native pstops filter into a chain of suitable Ghostscript filters. Upon completion, it passes the resulting data back to a &CUPS; "backend" for sending to the printer. In this way, &CUPS;-O-Matic enables support for any printer known to have worked previously in a "classical" Ghostscript environment. If no native &CUPS; support for that printer is in sight... &CUPS;-O-Matic is now replaced by the more capable PPD-O-Matic. -cupsomatic PPD-O-Matic Foomatic + &CUPS;-O-Matic + &CUPS;-O-Matic was the first "Third Party" plugin for the &CUPS; printing software. It is available on the Linuxprinting.org website to provide an online PPD-generating service. Together with the companion cupsomatic Perl-Script, that needs to be installed as an additional &CUPS; backend, it redirects output from the native pstops filter into a chain of suitable Ghostscript filters. Upon completion, it passes the resulting data back to a &CUPS; "backend" for sending to the printer. In this way, &CUPS;-O-Matic enables support for any printer known to have worked previously in a "classical" Ghostscript environment. If no native &CUPS; support for that printer is in sight... &CUPS;-O-Matic is now replaced by the more capable PPD-O-Matic. +cupsomatic PPD-O-Matic Foomatic - cupsomatic - The Perl script cupsomatic (plus a working Perl installation on your system) is needed to make any &CUPS;-O-Matic (or PPD-O-Matic) generated PPD work with &CUPS;. It was written by Grant Taylor, author of the Linux Printing HOWTO and Maintainer of the printer database at the Linuxprinting.org website. -&CUPS;-O-Matic Foomatic cupsomatic + cupsomatic + The Perl script cupsomatic (plus a working Perl installation on your system) is needed to make any &CUPS;-O-Matic (or PPD-O-Matic) generated PPD work with &CUPS;. It was written by Grant Taylor, author of the Linux Printing HOWTO and Maintainer of the printer database at the Linuxprinting.org website. +&CUPS;-O-Matic Foomatic cupsomatic - Daemon - Abbreviation for Disk and execution monitor; Daemons are present on all &UNIX; systems to perform tasks independent of user intervention. Readers more familiar with &Microsoft; &Windows; might want to compare daemons and the tasks they are responsible with "services". One example of a daemon present on most legacy &UNIX; systems is the LPD (Line Printer Daemon); &CUPS; is widely seen as the successor to LPD in the &UNIX; world and it also operates through a daemon. - SPOOLing + Daemon + Abbreviation for Disk and execution monitor; Daemons are present on all &UNIX; systems to perform tasks independent of user intervention. Readers more familiar with &Microsoft; &Windows; might want to compare daemons and the tasks they are responsible with "services". One example of a daemon present on most legacy &UNIX; systems is the LPD (Line Printer Daemon); &CUPS; is widely seen as the successor to LPD in the &UNIX; world and it also operates through a daemon. + SPOOLing - Database, Linuxprinting.org - Already years ago, when Linux printing was still really difficult (only command line printing was known to most Linux users, no device specific print options were available for doing the jobs), Grant Taylor, author of the "Linux Printing HOWTO", collected most of the available information about printers, drivers and filters in his database. With the emerging &CUPS; concept, extending the use of PPDs even to non-PostScript printers, he realised the potential of this database: if one puts the different datablobs (with content that could be described along the lines "Which device prints with which Ghostscript or other filter?", "How well?", and "What command line switches are available?") into PPD-compatible files, he could have all the power of &CUPS; on top of the traditional printer "drivers". This has now developed into a broader concept, known as "Foomatic". Foomatic extends the capabilities of spoolers other than &CUPS; (LPR/LPD, LPRng, PDQ, PPR) to a certain degree ("stealing" some concepts from &CUPS;). The Linuxprinting Database is not a Linux-only stop -- people running other &UNIX; based OSes (like *BSD or &MacOS; X) will also find valuable information and software there. -Foomatic Linuxprinting database + Database, Linuxprinting.org + Already years ago, when Linux printing was still really difficult (only command line printing was known to most Linux users, no device specific print options were available for doing the jobs), Grant Taylor, author of the "Linux Printing HOWTO", collected most of the available information about printers, drivers and filters in his database. With the emerging &CUPS; concept, extending the use of PPDs even to non-PostScript printers, he realised the potential of this database: if one puts the different datablobs (with content that could be described along the lines "Which device prints with which Ghostscript or other filter?", "How well?", and "What command line switches are available?") into PPD-compatible files, he could have all the power of &CUPS; on top of the traditional printer "drivers". This has now developed into a broader concept, known as "Foomatic". Foomatic extends the capabilities of spoolers other than &CUPS; (LPR/LPD, LPRng, PDQ, PPR) to a certain degree ("stealing" some concepts from &CUPS;). The Linuxprinting Database is not a Linux-only stop -- people running other &UNIX; based OSes (like *BSD or &MacOS; X) will also find valuable information and software there. +Foomatic Linuxprinting database - Direct TCP/IP Printing - This is a method that often uses TCP/IP port 9100 to connect to the printer. It works with many modern network printers and has a few advantages over LPR/LPD, as it is faster and provides some "backchannel feedback data" from the printer to the host sending the job. -AppSocket Protocol &HP; JetDirect Protocol + Direct TCP/IP Printing + This is a method that often uses TCP/IP port 9100 to connect to the printer. It works with many modern network printers and has a few advantages over LPR/LPD, as it is faster and provides some "backchannel feedback data" from the printer to the host sending the job. +AppSocket Protocol &HP; JetDirect Protocol - Drivers, Printer Drivers - The term "printer drivers", used in the same sense as on the &Microsoft; &Windows; platform, is not entirely applicable to a Linux or &UNIX; platform. A "driver" functionality is supplied on &UNIX; by different modular components working together. At the core of the printer drivers are "filters". Filters convert print files from a given input format to another format that is acceptable to the target printer. In many cases filters may be connected to a whole filter "chain", where only the result of the last conversion is sent to the printer. The actual transfer of the print data to the device is performed by a "backend". -Filter PPDs + Drivers, Printer Drivers + The term "printer drivers", used in the same sense as on the &Microsoft; &Windows; platform, is not entirely applicable to a Linux or &UNIX; platform. A "driver" functionality is supplied on &UNIX; by different modular components working together. At the core of the printer drivers are "filters". Filters convert print files from a given input format to another format that is acceptable to the target printer. In many cases filters may be connected to a whole filter "chain", where only the result of the last conversion is sent to the printer. The actual transfer of the print data to the device is performed by a "backend". +Filter PPDs - Easy Software Products - Mike Sweet's company, which has contributed a few substantial software products towards the Free Software community; amongst them the initial version of Gimp-Print, the EPM software packaging tool and HTMLDOC (used by the "Linux Documentation Project" to build the PDF versions of the HOWTOs) -- but most importantly: &CUPS; (the 'Common &UNIX; Printing System'). ESP finance themselves by selling a commercial version of &CUPS;, called ESP PrintPro, that includes some professional enhancements. -&CUPS; ESP PrintPro ESP Gimp-Print + Easy Software Products + Mike Sweet's company, which has contributed a few substantial software products towards the Free Software community; amongst them the initial version of Gimp-Print, the EPM software packaging tool and HTMLDOC (used by the "Linux Documentation Project" to build the PDF versions of the HOWTOs) -- but most importantly: &CUPS; (the 'Common &UNIX; Printing System'). ESP finance themselves by selling a commercial version of &CUPS;, called ESP PrintPro, that includes some professional enhancements. +&CUPS; ESP PrintPro ESP Gimp-Print - Encryption - Encryption of confidential data is an all-important issue if you transfer it over the Internet or even within intranets. Printing via traditional protocols is not encrypted at all -- it is very easy to tap and eavesdrop ⪚ into &PostScript; or PCL data transfered over the wire. Therefore, in the design of IPP, provision was made for the easy plugin of encryption mechanisms (which can be provided by the same means as the encryption standards for HTTP traffic: SSL and TLS). -Authentication &CUPS; IPP SSL TLS + Encryption + Encryption of confidential data is an all-important issue if you transfer it over the Internet or even within intranets. Printing via traditional protocols is not encrypted at all -- it is very easy to tap and eavesdrop ⪚ into &PostScript; or PCL data transfered over the wire. Therefore, in the design of IPP, provision was made for the easy plugin of encryption mechanisms (which can be provided by the same means as the encryption standards for HTTP traffic: SSL and TLS). +Authentication &CUPS; IPP SSL TLS - Epson - Epson inkjets are among the best supported models by Free software drivers, as the company was not necessarily as secretive about their devices and handed technical specification documents to developers. The excellent print quality achieved by Gimp-Print on the Stylus series of printers can be attributed to this openness. They have also contracted Easy Software Products to maintain an enhanced version of Ghostscript ("ESP GhostScript") for improved support of their printer portfolio. - ESP Ghostscript + Epson + Epson inkjets are among the best supported models by Free software drivers, as the company was not necessarily as secretive about their devices and handed technical specification documents to developers. The excellent print quality achieved by Gimp-Print on the Stylus series of printers can be attributed to this openness. They have also contracted Easy Software Products to maintain an enhanced version of Ghostscript ("ESP GhostScript") for improved support of their printer portfolio. + ESP Ghostscript - Escape Sequences - The first ever printers printed ASCII data only. To initiate a new line, or eject a page, they included special command sequences, often carrying a leading [ESC]-character. &HP; evolved this concept through its series of PCL language editions until today, having now developed a full-blown Page Description Language (PDL) from these humble beginnings. -PCL PDL + Escape Sequences + The first ever printers printed ASCII data only. To initiate a new line, or eject a page, they included special command sequences, often carrying a leading [ESC]-character. &HP; evolved this concept through its series of PCL language editions until today, having now developed a full-blown Page Description Language (PDL) from these humble beginnings. +PCL PDL - ESC/P - Abbreviation for Epson Standard Codes for Printers. Besides &PostScript; and PCL, Epson's ESC/P printer language is one of the best known. -PCL &PostScript; hpgl + ESC/P + Abbreviation for Epson Standard Codes for Printers. Besides &PostScript; and PCL, Epson's ESC/P printer language is one of the best known. +PCL &PostScript; hpgl - ESP - Abbreviation for Easy Software Products; the company that developed &CUPS; (the "Common &UNIX; Printing System"). -Easy Software Products &CUPS; ESP PrintPro + ESP + Abbreviation for Easy Software Products; the company that developed &CUPS; (the "Common &UNIX; Printing System"). +Easy Software Products &CUPS; ESP PrintPro - ESP Ghostscript - A Ghostscript version that is maintained by Easy Software Products. It includes pre-compiled Gimp-Print drivers for many inkjets (plus some other goodies). ESP Ghostscript will produce photographic quality prints in many cases, especially with the Epson Stylus model series. ESP Ghostscript is GPL-software. -Easy Software Products &CUPS; ESP PrintPro + ESP Ghostscript + A Ghostscript version that is maintained by Easy Software Products. It includes pre-compiled Gimp-Print drivers for many inkjets (plus some other goodies). ESP Ghostscript will produce photographic quality prints in many cases, especially with the Epson Stylus model series. ESP Ghostscript is GPL-software. +Easy Software Products &CUPS; ESP PrintPro - ESP PrintPro - This professional enhancement to &CUPS; (the "Common &UNIX; Printing System") is sold by the developers of &CUPS; complete with more than 2,300 printer drivers for several commercial &UNIX; platforms. ESP PrintPro is supposed to work "out of the box" with little or no configuration for users or admins. ESP also sell support contracts for &CUPS; and PrintPro. These sales help to feed the programmers who develop the Free version of &CUPS;. - &CUPS; + ESP PrintPro + This professional enhancement to &CUPS; (the "Common &UNIX; Printing System") is sold by the developers of &CUPS; complete with more than 2,300 printer drivers for several commercial &UNIX; platforms. ESP PrintPro is supposed to work "out of the box" with little or no configuration for users or admins. ESP also sell support contracts for &CUPS; and PrintPro. These sales help to feed the programmers who develop the Free version of &CUPS;. + &CUPS; - Filter - Filters, in general, are programs that take some input data, work on it and pass it on as their output data. Filters may or may not change the data. Filters in the context of printing, are programs that convert a given file (destined for printing, but not suitable in the format it is presently) into a printable format. Sometimes whole "filter chains" have to be constructed to achieve the goal, piping the output of one filter as the input to the next. -Ghostscript RIP + Filter + Filters, in general, are programs that take some input data, work on it and pass it on as their output data. Filters may or may not change the data. Filters in the context of printing, are programs that convert a given file (destined for printing, but not suitable in the format it is presently) into a printable format. Sometimes whole "filter chains" have to be constructed to achieve the goal, piping the output of one filter as the input to the next. +Ghostscript RIP - Foomatic - Foomatic started out as the wrapper name for a set of different tools available from Linuxprinting.org These tools aimed to make the usage of traditional Ghostscript and other print filters easier for users and extend the filters' capabilities by adding more command line switches or explain the driver's execution data. Foomatic's different incarnations are &CUPS;-O-Matic, PPD-O-Matic, PDQ-O-Matic, LPD-O-Matic, PPR-O-Matic, MF-O-Matic and Direct-O-Matic. All of these allow the generation of appropriate printer configuration files online, by simply selection the suitable model and suggested (or alternate) driver for that machine. More recently, Foomatic gravitated towards becoming a "meta-spooling" system, that allows configuration of the underlying print subsystem through a unified set of commands (however, this is much more complicated than TDEPrint's &GUI; interface, which performs a similar task with regards to different print subsystems). -&CUPS;-O-Matic PPD-O-Matic cupsomatic + Foomatic + Foomatic started out as the wrapper name for a set of different tools available from Linuxprinting.org These tools aimed to make the usage of traditional Ghostscript and other print filters easier for users and extend the filters' capabilities by adding more command line switches or explain the driver's execution data. Foomatic's different incarnations are &CUPS;-O-Matic, PPD-O-Matic, PDQ-O-Matic, LPD-O-Matic, PPR-O-Matic, MF-O-Matic and Direct-O-Matic. All of these allow the generation of appropriate printer configuration files online, by simply selection the suitable model and suggested (or alternate) driver for that machine. More recently, Foomatic gravitated towards becoming a "meta-spooling" system, that allows configuration of the underlying print subsystem through a unified set of commands (however, this is much more complicated than TDEPrint's &GUI; interface, which performs a similar task with regards to different print subsystems). +&CUPS;-O-Matic PPD-O-Matic cupsomatic - Ghostscript - Ghostscript is a &PostScript; Raster Image Processor (RIP) in software, originally developed by L. Peter Deutsch. There is always a GPL version of Ghostscript available for free usage and distribution (mostly 1 year old) while the current version is commercially sold under another licence. Ghostscript is widely used inside the Linux and &UNIX; world for transforming &PostScript; into raster data suitable for sending to non-&PostScript; devices. -&PostScript; RIP + Ghostscript + Ghostscript is a &PostScript; Raster Image Processor (RIP) in software, originally developed by L. Peter Deutsch. There is always a GPL version of Ghostscript available for free usage and distribution (mostly 1 year old) while the current version is commercially sold under another licence. Ghostscript is widely used inside the Linux and &UNIX; world for transforming &PostScript; into raster data suitable for sending to non-&PostScript; devices. +&PostScript; RIP - Gimp-Print - Contrary to its name, Gimp-Print is no longer just the plugin to be used for printing from the popular Gimp program -- its codebase can also serve to be compiled into... *...a set of PPDs and associated filters that integrate seamlessly into &CUPS;, supporting around 130 different printer models, providing photographic output quality in many cases; *...a Ghostscript filter that can be used with any other program that needs a software-RIP; *...a library that can be used by other software applications in need of rasterising functions. -Lexmark Drivers RIP Ghostscript + Gimp-Print + Contrary to its name, Gimp-Print is no longer just the plugin to be used for printing from the popular Gimp program -- its codebase can also serve to be compiled into... *...a set of PPDs and associated filters that integrate seamlessly into &CUPS;, supporting around 130 different printer models, providing photographic output quality in many cases; *...a Ghostscript filter that can be used with any other program that needs a software-RIP; *...a library that can be used by other software applications in need of rasterising functions. +Lexmark Drivers RIP Ghostscript - &HP; - Abbreviation for Hewlett-Packard; one of the first companies to distribute their own Linux printer drivers. -- More recently, the Company has released their "HPIJS" package of drivers, including source code and a Free licence. This is the first printer manufacturer to do so. HPIJS supports most current models of HP Ink- and DeskJets. + &HP; + Abbreviation for Hewlett-Packard; one of the first companies to distribute their own Linux printer drivers. -- More recently, the Company has released their "HPIJS" package of drivers, including source code and a Free licence. This is the first printer manufacturer to do so. HPIJS supports most current models of HP Ink- and DeskJets. - &HP;/GL - Abbreviation for &HP; Graphical Language; a &HP; printer language mainly used for plotters; many CAD (Computer Aided Design) software programs output &HP;/GL files for printing. -ESC/P PCL &PostScript; + &HP;/GL + Abbreviation for &HP; Graphical Language; a &HP; printer language mainly used for plotters; many CAD (Computer Aided Design) software programs output &HP;/GL files for printing. +ESC/P PCL &PostScript; - &HP; JetDirect Protocol - A term branded by &HP; to describe their implementation of print data transfer to the printer via an otherwise "AppSocket" or "Direct TCP/IP Printing" named protocol. -AppSocket Protocol Direct TCP/IP Printing + &HP; JetDirect Protocol + A term branded by &HP; to describe their implementation of print data transfer to the printer via an otherwise "AppSocket" or "Direct TCP/IP Printing" named protocol. +AppSocket Protocol Direct TCP/IP Printing - IETF - Abbreviation for Internet Engineering Task Force; an assembly of Internet, software and hardware experts that discuss new networking technologies and very often arrive at conclusions that are regarded by many as standards. "TCP/IP" is the most famous example. IETF standards, as well as drafts, discussions, ideas and useful tutorials, are put in writing in the famous series of "RFCs", which are available to the public and included in most Linux and BSD distributions. -IPP PWG RFC + IETF + Abbreviation for Internet Engineering Task Force; an assembly of Internet, software and hardware experts that discuss new networking technologies and very often arrive at conclusions that are regarded by many as standards. "TCP/IP" is the most famous example. IETF standards, as well as drafts, discussions, ideas and useful tutorials, are put in writing in the famous series of "RFCs", which are available to the public and included in most Linux and BSD distributions. +IPP PWG RFC - IPP - Abbreviation for Internet Printing Protocol; defined in a series of RFCs accepted by the IETF with status "proposed standard"; was designed by the PWG. -- IPP is a completely new design for network printing, but it utilises a very well-known and proven method for the actual data transfer: HTTP 1.1! By not "re-inventing the wheel", and basing itself on an existing and robust Internet standard, IPP is able to relatively easily bolt other HTTP-compatible standard mechanisms into its framework: * Basic, Digest or Certificate authentication mechanisms; * SSL or TLS for encryption of transferred data; * LDAP for directory services (to publish data on printers, device-options, drivers, costs or also to the network; or to check for passwords while performing authentication). -&CUPS; PWG IETF RFC TLS + IPP + Abbreviation for Internet Printing Protocol; defined in a series of RFCs accepted by the IETF with status "proposed standard"; was designed by the PWG. -- IPP is a completely new design for network printing, but it utilises a very well-known and proven method for the actual data transfer: HTTP 1.1! By not "re-inventing the wheel", and basing itself on an existing and robust Internet standard, IPP is able to relatively easily bolt other HTTP-compatible standard mechanisms into its framework: * Basic, Digest or Certificate authentication mechanisms; * SSL or TLS for encryption of transferred data; * LDAP for directory services (to publish data on printers, device-options, drivers, costs or also to the network; or to check for passwords while performing authentication). +&CUPS; PWG IETF RFC TLS - TDEPrint - The new printing functionality of &kde; since version 2.2 consists of several modules that translate the features and settings of different available print subsystems (&CUPS;, BSD-style LPR/LPD, RLPR...) into nice &kde; desktop &GUI; windows and dialogues to ease their usage. Most important for day-to-day usage is "kprinter", the new &GUI; print command. -- Note: TDEPrint does not implement its own spooling mechanism or its own &PostScript; processing; for this it relies on the selected print subsystem -- however it does add some functionality of its own on top of this foundation... -BSD-style printing &CUPS; kprinter TDEPrint Handbook + TDEPrint + The new printing functionality of &kde; since version 2.2 consists of several modules that translate the features and settings of different available print subsystems (&CUPS;, BSD-style LPR/LPD, RLPR...) into nice &kde; desktop &GUI; windows and dialogues to ease their usage. Most important for day-to-day usage is "kprinter", the new &GUI; print command. -- Note: TDEPrint does not implement its own spooling mechanism or its own &PostScript; processing; for this it relies on the selected print subsystem -- however it does add some functionality of its own on top of this foundation... +BSD-style printing &CUPS; kprinter TDEPrint Handbook - TDEPrint Handbook... - ...is the name of the reference document that describes TDEPrint functions to users and administrators. You can load it into Konqueror by typing "help:/tdeprint" into the address field. The TDEPrint website is the resource for updates to this documentation, as well as PDF versions suitable for printing it. It is authored and maintained by Kurt Pfeifle. - &CUPS;-FAQ + TDEPrint Handbook... + ...is the name of the reference document that describes TDEPrint functions to users and administrators. You can load it into Konqueror by typing "help:/tdeprint" into the address field. The TDEPrint website is the resource for updates to this documentation, as well as PDF versions suitable for printing it. It is authored and maintained by Kurt Pfeifle. + &CUPS;-FAQ - kprinter - kprinter is the new powerful print utility that is natively used by all &kde; applications. Contrary to some common misconceptions, kprinter is not a &CUPS;-only tool, but supports different print subsystems. You can even switch to a different print subsystem "on the fly", in between two jobs, without re-configuration. Of course, due to the powerful features of &CUPS;, kprinter is best suited for use with a &CUPS; frontend. kprinter is the successor to "qtcups", which is no longer being actively maintained. It has inherited all the best features of qtcups and added several new ones. MOST IMPORTANT: you can use kprinter with all its features in all non-&kde; applications that allow a customized print command, like gv, Acrobat Reader, Netscape, Mozilla, Galeon, StarOffice, OpenOffice and all GNOME programs. kprinter can act as a "standalone" utility, started from an X-Terminal or a "Mini-CLI" to print many different files, from different folders, with different formats, in one job and simultaneously, without the need to first open the files in the applications! (File formats supported this way are &PostScript;, PDF, International and ASCII Text, as well as many different popular graphic formats, such as PNG, TIFF, JPEG, PNM, Sun RASTER, &etc;) - QtCUPS + kprinter + kprinter is the new powerful print utility that is natively used by all &kde; applications. Contrary to some common misconceptions, kprinter is not a &CUPS;-only tool, but supports different print subsystems. You can even switch to a different print subsystem "on the fly", in between two jobs, without re-configuration. Of course, due to the powerful features of &CUPS;, kprinter is best suited for use with a &CUPS; frontend. kprinter is the successor to "qtcups", which is no longer being actively maintained. It has inherited all the best features of qtcups and added several new ones. MOST IMPORTANT: you can use kprinter with all its features in all non-&kde; applications that allow a customized print command, like gv, Acrobat Reader, Netscape, Mozilla, Galeon, StarOffice, OpenOffice and all GNOME programs. kprinter can act as a "standalone" utility, started from an X-Terminal or a "Mini-CLI" to print many different files, from different folders, with different formats, in one job and simultaneously, without the need to first open the files in the applications! (File formats supported this way are &PostScript;, PDF, International and ASCII Text, as well as many different popular graphic formats, such as PNG, TIFF, JPEG, PNM, Sun RASTER, &etc;) + QtCUPS - Lexmark - was one of the first companies to distribute their own Linux printer drivers for some of their models. However, those drivers are binary only (no source code available), and therefore cannot be used to integrate into other Free printing software projects. + Lexmark + was one of the first companies to distribute their own Linux printer drivers for some of their models. However, those drivers are binary only (no source code available), and therefore cannot be used to integrate into other Free printing software projects. - Linuxprinting.org - Linuxprinting.org = not just for Linux; all &UNIX;-like OS-es, like *BSD and commercial Unices may find useful printing information on this site. This web site is the home for the interesting Foomatic project, that strives to develop the "Meta Print Spool and Driver Configuration Toolset" (being able to configure, through one common interface, different print subsystems and their required drivers) with the ability to transfer all queues, printers and configuration files seamlessly to another spooler without new configuration effort. -- Also, they maintain the Printing Database; a collection of driver and device information that enables everybody to find the most current information about printer models, and also generate online the configuration files for any spooler/driver/device combo known to work with one of the common Linux or &UNIX; print subsystems. - Linuxprinting database + Linuxprinting.org + Linuxprinting.org = not just for Linux; all &UNIX;-like OS-es, like *BSD and commercial Unices may find useful printing information on this site. This web site is the home for the interesting Foomatic project, that strives to develop the "Meta Print Spool and Driver Configuration Toolset" (being able to configure, through one common interface, different print subsystems and their required drivers) with the ability to transfer all queues, printers and configuration files seamlessly to another spooler without new configuration effort. -- Also, they maintain the Printing Database; a collection of driver and device information that enables everybody to find the most current information about printer models, and also generate online the configuration files for any spooler/driver/device combo known to work with one of the common Linux or &UNIX; print subsystems. + Linuxprinting database - Linuxprinting.org Database - ....Database containing printers and drivers that are suitable for them... ...a lot of information and documentation to be found... ...it is now also providing some tools and utilities for easing the integration of those drivers into a given system... ...the "Foomatic" family of utilities; being the toolset to make use of the database for most of the commonly used print subsystems, for generating "on the fly" working configurations for your printer model. - Foomatic + Linuxprinting.org Database + ....Database containing printers and drivers that are suitable for them... ...a lot of information and documentation to be found... ...it is now also providing some tools and utilities for easing the integration of those drivers into a given system... ...the "Foomatic" family of utilities; being the toolset to make use of the database for most of the commonly used print subsystems, for generating "on the fly" working configurations for your printer model. + Foomatic - LPR/LPD printing - LPR == some people translate Line Printing Request, others: Line Printer Remote. - BSD-style printing + LPR/LPD printing + LPR == some people translate Line Printing Request, others: Line Printer Remote. + BSD-style printing - Magicfilter - Similarly to the APSfilter program, Magicfilter provides automatic file type recognition functions and, base on that, automatic file conversion to a printable format, depending on the target printer. - APSfilter + Magicfilter + Similarly to the APSfilter program, Magicfilter provides automatic file type recognition functions and, base on that, automatic file conversion to a printable format, depending on the target printer. + APSfilter - &MIME;-Types - Abbreviation for Multipurpose (or Multimedia) Internet Mail Extensions; &MIME;-Types were first used to allow the transport of binary data (like mail attachments containing graphics) over mail connections that were normally only transmitting ASCII characters: the data had to be encoded into an ASCII representation. Later this concept was extended to describe a data format in a platform independent, but at the same time non-ambiguous, way. From &Windows; everybody knows the .doc extensions for &Microsoft; Word files. This is handled ambiguously on the &Windows; platform: .doc extensions are also used for simple text files or for Adobe Framemaker files. And if a real Word file is renamed with a different extension, it can no longer be opened by the program. &MIME; typed files carry a recognition string with them, describing their file format based on main_category/sub_category. Inside IPP, print files are also described using the &MIME; type scheme. &MIME; types are registered with the IANA (Internet Assigning Numbers Association) to keep them unambiguous. &CUPS; has some &MIME; types of its own registered, like application/vnd.cups-raster (for the &CUPS;-internal raster image format). -&CUPS; Easy Software Products ESP PrintPro Gimp-Print + &MIME;-Types + Abbreviation for Multipurpose (or Multimedia) Internet Mail Extensions; &MIME;-Types were first used to allow the transport of binary data (like mail attachments containing graphics) over mail connections that were normally only transmitting ASCII characters: the data had to be encoded into an ASCII representation. Later this concept was extended to describe a data format in a platform independent, but at the same time non-ambiguous, way. From &Windows; everybody knows the .doc extensions for &Microsoft; Word files. This is handled ambiguously on the &Windows; platform: .doc extensions are also used for simple text files or for Adobe Framemaker files. And if a real Word file is renamed with a different extension, it can no longer be opened by the program. &MIME; typed files carry a recognition string with them, describing their file format based on main_category/sub_category. Inside IPP, print files are also described using the &MIME; type scheme. &MIME; types are registered with the IANA (Internet Assigning Numbers Association) to keep them unambiguous. &CUPS; has some &MIME; types of its own registered, like application/vnd.cups-raster (for the &CUPS;-internal raster image format). +&CUPS; Easy Software Products ESP PrintPro Gimp-Print - PCL - Abbreviation for Printer Control Language; developed by &HP;. PCL started off in version 1 as a simple command set for ASCII printing; now, in its versions PCL6 and PCL-X, it is capable of printing graphics and colour -- but outside the &Microsoft; &Windows; realm and &HP-UX; (&HP;'s own brand of &UNIX;), it is not commonly used... -ESC/P &HP;/GL PDL &PostScript; + PCL + Abbreviation for Printer Control Language; developed by &HP;. PCL started off in version 1 as a simple command set for ASCII printing; now, in its versions PCL6 and PCL-X, it is capable of printing graphics and colour -- but outside the &Microsoft; &Windows; realm and &HP-UX; (&HP;'s own brand of &UNIX;), it is not commonly used... +ESC/P &HP;/GL PDL &PostScript; - PDL - Abbreviation for Page Description Language; PDLs describe, in an abstract way, the graphical representation of a page. - Before it is actually transferred into toner or ink laid down on to paper, a PDL needs to be "interpreted" first. In &UNIX;, the most important PDL is &PostScript;. -ESC/P &HP;/GL PCL &PostScript; + PDL + Abbreviation for Page Description Language; PDLs describe, in an abstract way, the graphical representation of a page. - Before it is actually transferred into toner or ink laid down on to paper, a PDL needs to be "interpreted" first. In &UNIX;, the most important PDL is &PostScript;. +ESC/P &HP;/GL PCL &PostScript; - Pixel - Abbreviation for Picture Element; this term describes the smallest part of a raster picture (either as printed on paper or as displayed on a monitor by cathode rays or LCD elements). As any graphical or image representation on those types of output devices is composed of pixels, the values of "ppi" (pixel per inch) and &dpi; (dots per inch) are one important parameter for the overall quality and resolution of an image. -Filter Ghostscript &PostScript; Raster + Pixel + Abbreviation for Picture Element; this term describes the smallest part of a raster picture (either as printed on paper or as displayed on a monitor by cathode rays or LCD elements). As any graphical or image representation on those types of output devices is composed of pixels, the values of "ppi" (pixel per inch) and &dpi; (dots per inch) are one important parameter for the overall quality and resolution of an image. +Filter Ghostscript &PostScript; Raster - PJL - Abbreviation for Print Job Language; developed by &HP; to control and influence default and per-job settings of a printer. It may not only be used for &HP;'s own (PCL-)printers; also many &PostScript; and other printers understand PJL commands sent to them inside a print job, or in a separate signal. - PCL + PJL + Abbreviation for Print Job Language; developed by &HP; to control and influence default and per-job settings of a printer. It may not only be used for &HP;'s own (PCL-)printers; also many &PostScript; and other printers understand PJL commands sent to them inside a print job, or in a separate signal. + PCL - &PostScript; - &PostScript; (often shortened to "PS") is the de-facto standard in the &UNIX; world for printing files. It was developed by Adobe and licensed to printer manufacturers and software companies. As the &PostScript; specifications were published by Adobe, there are also "Third Party" implementations of &PostScript; generating and &PostScript; interpreting software available (one of the best-known in the Free software world being Ghostscript, a powerful PS-interpreter). -ESC/P &HP;/GL PCL PPD + &PostScript; + &PostScript; (often shortened to "PS") is the de-facto standard in the &UNIX; world for printing files. It was developed by Adobe and licensed to printer manufacturers and software companies. As the &PostScript; specifications were published by Adobe, there are also "Third Party" implementations of &PostScript; generating and &PostScript; interpreting software available (one of the best-known in the Free software world being Ghostscript, a powerful PS-interpreter). +ESC/P &HP;/GL PCL PPD - PPD - Abbreviation for PostScript Printer Description; PPDs are ASCII files storing all information about the special capabilities of a printer, plus definitions of the (PostScript- or PJL-) commands to call on a certain capability (like print duplexing). As the explanation of the acronym reveals, PPDs were originally only used for &PostScript; printers. &CUPS; has extended the PPD concept to all types of printers. PPDs for &PostScript; printers are provided by the printer vendors. They can be used with &CUPS; and TDEPrint to have access to the full features of any &PostScript; printer. The TDEPrint Team recommends using a PPD originally intended for use with &Microsoft; Windows NT. PPDs for non-PostScript printers need a companion "filter" to process the &PostScript; print files into a format digestible for the non-PostScript target device. Those PPD/filter combos are not (yet) available from the vendors. After the initiative by the &CUPS; developers to utilise PPDs, the Free Software community was creative enough to quickly come up with support for most of the currently used printer models, through PPDs and classical Ghostscript filters. But note: the printout quality varies from "hi-quality photographic output" (using Gimp-Print with most Epson inkjets) to "hardly readable" (using Foomatic-enabled Ghostscript filters for models rated as "paperweight" in the Linuxprinting.org database). -&CUPS; Linuxprinting.org &PostScript; + PPD + Abbreviation for PostScript Printer Description; PPDs are ASCII files storing all information about the special capabilities of a printer, plus definitions of the (PostScript- or PJL-) commands to call on a certain capability (like print duplexing). As the explanation of the acronym reveals, PPDs were originally only used for &PostScript; printers. &CUPS; has extended the PPD concept to all types of printers. PPDs for &PostScript; printers are provided by the printer vendors. They can be used with &CUPS; and TDEPrint to have access to the full features of any &PostScript; printer. The TDEPrint Team recommends using a PPD originally intended for use with &Microsoft; Windows NT. PPDs for non-PostScript printers need a companion "filter" to process the &PostScript; print files into a format digestible for the non-PostScript target device. Those PPD/filter combos are not (yet) available from the vendors. After the initiative by the &CUPS; developers to utilise PPDs, the Free Software community was creative enough to quickly come up with support for most of the currently used printer models, through PPDs and classical Ghostscript filters. But note: the printout quality varies from "hi-quality photographic output" (using Gimp-Print with most Epson inkjets) to "hardly readable" (using Foomatic-enabled Ghostscript filters for models rated as "paperweight" in the Linuxprinting.org database). +&CUPS; Linuxprinting.org &PostScript; - PPD-O-Matic - PPD-O-Matic is a set of Perl scripts that run on the Linuxprinting.org web server and can be used online to generate PPDs for any printer that is known to print with Ghostscript. These PPDs can be hooked up to &CUPS;/TDEPrint, as well as used inside PPD-aware applications like StarOffice to determine all different parameters of your printjobs. It is now recommended, in most cases, to use "PPD-O-Matic" instead of the older &CUPS;-O-Matic. To generate a PPD, go to the printer database, select your printer model, follow the link to show the available Ghostscript filters for that printer, select one, click "generate" and finally save the file to your local system. Be sure to read the instructions. Make sure that your local system does indeed have Ghostscript and the filter, which you chose before generating the PPD, installed. -&PostScript; &CUPS;-O-Matic Linuxprinting.org Foomatic + PPD-O-Matic + PPD-O-Matic is a set of Perl scripts that run on the Linuxprinting.org web server and can be used online to generate PPDs for any printer that is known to print with Ghostscript. These PPDs can be hooked up to &CUPS;/TDEPrint, as well as used inside PPD-aware applications like StarOffice to determine all different parameters of your printjobs. It is now recommended, in most cases, to use "PPD-O-Matic" instead of the older &CUPS;-O-Matic. To generate a PPD, go to the printer database, select your printer model, follow the link to show the available Ghostscript filters for that printer, select one, click "generate" and finally save the file to your local system. Be sure to read the instructions. Make sure that your local system does indeed have Ghostscript and the filter, which you chose before generating the PPD, installed. +&PostScript; &CUPS;-O-Matic Linuxprinting.org Foomatic - printcap - In BSD-style print systems, the "printcap" file holds the configuration information; the printing daemon reads this file to determine which printers are available, what filters are to be user for each, where the spooling folder is located, if there are banner pages to be used, and so on... Some applications also depend on read access to the printcap file, to obtain the names of available printers. - BSD-style printing + printcap + In BSD-style print systems, the "printcap" file holds the configuration information; the printing daemon reads this file to determine which printers are available, what filters are to be user for each, where the spooling folder is located, if there are banner pages to be used, and so on... Some applications also depend on read access to the printcap file, to obtain the names of available printers. + BSD-style printing - Printer-MIB - Abbreviation for Printer-Management Information Base; the Printer-MIB defines a set of parameters that are to be stored inside the printer for access through the network. This is useful if many (in some cases, literally thousands) network printers are managed centrally with the help of SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). -PWG SNMP + Printer-MIB + Abbreviation for Printer-Management Information Base; the Printer-MIB defines a set of parameters that are to be stored inside the printer for access through the network. This is useful if many (in some cases, literally thousands) network printers are managed centrally with the help of SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). +PWG SNMP - PWG - Abbreviation for Printer Working Group; the PWG is a loose grouping of representatives of the printer industry that has, in the past years, developed different standards in relation to network printing. These were later accepted by the IETF as RFC standards, like the "Printer-MIB" and the IPP. -&PostScript; IPP Printer-MIB SNMP + PWG + Abbreviation for Printer Working Group; the PWG is a loose grouping of representatives of the printer industry that has, in the past years, developed different standards in relation to network printing. These were later accepted by the IETF as RFC standards, like the "Printer-MIB" and the IPP. +&PostScript; IPP Printer-MIB SNMP - print:/ TDEIO Slave - You can use a syntax of "print:/..." to get quick access to TDEPrint resources. Typing "print:/manager" as a Konqueror URL address gives administrative access to TDEPrint. Konqueror uses &kde;'s famous "KParts" technology to achieve that. -IO Slave KParts + print:/ TDEIO Slave + You can use a syntax of "print:/..." to get quick access to TDEPrint resources. Typing "print:/manager" as a Konqueror URL address gives administrative access to TDEPrint. Konqueror uses &kde;'s famous "KParts" technology to achieve that. +IO Slave KParts - Printer Database - . - Linuxprinting Database + Printer Database + . + Linuxprinting Database - Qt&CUPS; - Qt&CUPS; and KUPS were the predecessors of TDEPrint; they are now deprecated and no longer maintained. What was good in qtcups is all inherited by "kprinter", the new TDE print dialogue (which is much improved over qtcups); what you liked about kups is now all in the TDEPrint Manager (accessible via the KDE Control Centre or via the URL "print:/manager" from Konqueror) -- with more functionality and less bugs... Its former developer, Michael Goffioul, is now the developer of TDEPrint -- a very nice and productive guy and quick bug fixer... - kprinter + Qt&CUPS; + Qt&CUPS; and KUPS were the predecessors of TDEPrint; they are now deprecated and no longer maintained. What was good in qtcups is all inherited by "kprinter", the new TDE print dialogue (which is much improved over qtcups); what you liked about kups is now all in the TDEPrint Manager (accessible via the KDE Control Centre or via the URL "print:/manager" from Konqueror) -- with more functionality and less bugs... Its former developer, Michael Goffioul, is now the developer of TDEPrint -- a very nice and productive guy and quick bug fixer... + kprinter - Raster Image - Every picture on a physical medium is composed of a pattern of discrete dots in different colours and (maybe) sizes. This is called a "raster image". This is as opposed to a "vector image" where the graphic is described in terms of continuous curves, shades, forms and filled areas, represented by mathematical formula. Vector images normally have a smaller file size and may be scaled in size without any loss of information and quality --- but they cannot be output directly, but always have to be "rendered" or "rasterised" first to the given resolution that the output device is capable of... The rasterisation is done by a Raster Image Processor (RIP, often the Ghostscript software) or some other filtering instance. -Pixel Ghostscript &PostScript; Filter RIP + Raster Image + Every picture on a physical medium is composed of a pattern of discrete dots in different colours and (maybe) sizes. This is called a "raster image". This is as opposed to a "vector image" where the graphic is described in terms of continuous curves, shades, forms and filled areas, represented by mathematical formula. Vector images normally have a smaller file size and may be scaled in size without any loss of information and quality --- but they cannot be output directly, but always have to be "rendered" or "rasterised" first to the given resolution that the output device is capable of... The rasterisation is done by a Raster Image Processor (RIP, often the Ghostscript software) or some other filtering instance. +Pixel Ghostscript &PostScript; Filter RIP - RIP - Abbreviation for Raster Image Process(or); if used in the context of printing, "RIP" means a hardware or software instance that converts &PostScript; (or other print formats that are represented in one of the non-Raster PDLs) into a raster image format in such a way that it is acceptable for the "marking engine" of the printer. &PostScript; printers contain their own PostScript-RIPs. A RIP may or may not be located inside a printer. For many &UNIX; systems, Ghostscript is the package that provides a "RIP in software", running on the host computer, and pre-digesting the &PostScript; or other data to become ready to be sent to the printing device (hence you may perceive a "grain of truth" in the slogan "Ghostscript turns your printer into a &PostScript; machine", which of course is not correct in the true sense of the meaning). -Filter Ghostscript &PostScript; PDL Raster + RIP + Abbreviation for Raster Image Process(or); if used in the context of printing, "RIP" means a hardware or software instance that converts &PostScript; (or other print formats that are represented in one of the non-Raster PDLs) into a raster image format in such a way that it is acceptable for the "marking engine" of the printer. &PostScript; printers contain their own PostScript-RIPs. A RIP may or may not be located inside a printer. For many &UNIX; systems, Ghostscript is the package that provides a "RIP in software", running on the host computer, and pre-digesting the &PostScript; or other data to become ready to be sent to the printing device (hence you may perceive a "grain of truth" in the slogan "Ghostscript turns your printer into a &PostScript; machine", which of course is not correct in the true sense of the meaning). +Filter Ghostscript &PostScript; PDL Raster - RLPR (Remote LPR) - Abbreviation for Remote Line Printing Request; this is a BSD-style printing system, that needs no root privileges to be installed, and no "printcap" to work: all parameters may be specified on the command line. RLPR comes in handy for many laptop users who are working in frequently changing environments. This is because it may be installed concurrently with every other printing sub system, and allows a very flexible and quick way to install a printer for direct access via LPR/LPD. TDEPrint has an "Add Printer Wizard" to make RLPR usage even easier. The kprinter command allows switching to RLPR "on the fly" at any time. -TDEPrint kprinter printcap + RLPR (Remote LPR) + Abbreviation for Remote Line Printing Request; this is a BSD-style printing system, that needs no root privileges to be installed, and no "printcap" to work: all parameters may be specified on the command line. RLPR comes in handy for many laptop users who are working in frequently changing environments. This is because it may be installed concurrently with every other printing sub system, and allows a very flexible and quick way to install a printer for direct access via LPR/LPD. TDEPrint has an "Add Printer Wizard" to make RLPR usage even easier. The kprinter command allows switching to RLPR "on the fly" at any time. +TDEPrint kprinter printcap - SNMP - Abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol; SNMP is widely used to control all types of network node (Hosts, Routers, Switches, Gateways, Printers...) remotely. -PWG Printer-MIB + SNMP + Abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol; SNMP is widely used to control all types of network node (Hosts, Routers, Switches, Gateways, Printers...) remotely. +PWG Printer-MIB - SSL(3) encryption - Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer; SSL is a proprietary encryption method for data transfer over HTTP that was developed by Netscape. It is now being replaced by an IETF standard named TLS. - TLS + SSL(3) encryption + Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer; SSL is a proprietary encryption method for data transfer over HTTP that was developed by Netscape. It is now being replaced by an IETF standard named TLS. + TLS - SPOOLing - Abbreviation for Synchronous Peripheral Operations OnLine; SPOOLing enables printing applications (and users) to continue their work as the job is being taken care of by a system daemon, which stores the file at a temporary location until the printer is ready to print. - Daemon + SPOOLing + Abbreviation for Synchronous Peripheral Operations OnLine; SPOOLing enables printing applications (and users) to continue their work as the job is being taken care of by a system daemon, which stores the file at a temporary location until the printer is ready to print. + Daemon - TLS encryption - Abbreviation for Transport Layer Security; TLS is an encryption standard for data transfered over HTTP 1.1; it is defined in RFC 2246; although based on the former SSL development (from Netscape) it is not fully compatible with it. - SSL(3) + TLS encryption + Abbreviation for Transport Layer Security; TLS is an encryption standard for data transfered over HTTP 1.1; it is defined in RFC 2246; although based on the former SSL development (from Netscape) it is not fully compatible with it. + SSL(3) - System V-style printing - This is the second flavour of traditional &UNIX; printing (as opposed to BSD-style printing). It uses a different command set (lp, lpadmin,...) to BSD, but is not fundamentally different from it. However, the gap between the two is big enough to make the two incompatible, so that a BSD-client cannot simply print to a System V style print server without additional tweaking... IPP is supposed to resolve this weakness and more. -BSD-style printing IPP + System V-style printing + This is the second flavour of traditional &UNIX; printing (as opposed to BSD-style printing). It uses a different command set (lp, lpadmin,...) to BSD, but is not fundamentally different from it. However, the gap between the two is big enough to make the two incompatible, so that a BSD-client cannot simply print to a System V style print server without additional tweaking... IPP is supposed to resolve this weakness and more. +BSD-style printing IPP - TurboPrint - Shareware software providing photo quality printing for many inkjet printers. It is useful if you are unable to find a driver for your printer and may be hooked into either a traditional Ghostscript system or a modern &CUPS; system. - Gimp-Print + TurboPrint + Shareware software providing photo quality printing for many inkjet printers. It is useful if you are unable to find a driver for your printer and may be hooked into either a traditional Ghostscript system or a modern &CUPS; system. + Gimp-Print - XPP - Abbreviation for X Printing Panel; XPP was the first Free graphical print command for &CUPS;, written by Till Kamppeter, and in some ways a model for the "kprinter" utility in &kde;. + XPP + Abbreviation for X Printing Panel; XPP was the first Free graphical print command for &CUPS;, written by Till Kamppeter, and in some ways a model for the "kprinter" utility in &kde;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/advanced.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/advanced.docbook index 128a567ef87..44ef40da5df 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/advanced.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/advanced.docbook @@ -1,171 +1,65 @@ -&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Advanced Editing Tools +Advanced Editing Tools -Comment/Uncomment - -The Comment and Uncomment commands, available from the Tools menu allow you to add or remove comment markers to the selection, or the current line if no text is selected, it comments are supported by the format of the text you are editing. - -The rules for how commenting is done are defined in the syntax definitions, so if syntax highlighting is not used, commenting/uncommenting is not possible. - -Some formats define single line comment markers, some multi line markers and some both. If multi line markers are not available, commenting out a selection that does not fully include its last line is not possible. - -If a single line marker is available, commenting single lines is preferred where applicable, as this helps to avoid problems with nested comments. - -When removing comment markers, no uncommented text should be selected. When removing multiline comment markers from a selection, any whitespace outside the comment markers is ignored. - -comment To place comment markers, use the ToolsComment menu item or the related keyboard shortcut sequence, default is &Ctrl;#. - -uncomment To remove comment markers, use the ToolsUncomment menu item or the related keyboard shortcut, default is &Ctrl;&Shift;#. +Comment/Uncomment + +The Comment and Uncomment commands, available from the Tools menu allow you to add or remove comment markers to the selection, or the current line if no text is selected, it comments are supported by the format of the text you are editing. + +The rules for how commenting is done are defined in the syntax definitions, so if syntax highlighting is not used, commenting/uncommenting is not possible. + +Some formats define single line comment markers, some multi line markers and some both. If multi line markers are not available, commenting out a selection that does not fully include its last line is not possible. + +If a single line marker is available, commenting single lines is preferred where applicable, as this helps to avoid problems with nested comments. + +When removing comment markers, no uncommented text should be selected. When removing multiline comment markers from a selection, any whitespace outside the comment markers is ignored. + +comment To place comment markers, use the ToolsComment menu item or the related keyboard shortcut sequence, default is &Ctrl;#. + +uncomment To remove comment markers, use the ToolsUncomment menu item or the related keyboard shortcut, default is &Ctrl;&Shift;#. -Editing Command - -This tool, available from the ToolsEditing Command menu item, provides access to a small set of vi/vim-like commands for editing the text. It is a no nonsense tool for advanced or experienced users, but do not let that hold you back from experiencing its powers! - -Currently, the following commands are available: +Editing Command + +This tool, available from the ToolsEditing Command menu item, provides access to a small set of vi/vim-like commands for editing the text. It is a no nonsense tool for advanced or experienced users, but do not let that hold you back from experiencing its powers! + +Currently, the following commands are available: -time +time -This command will output the current time as known by your computer in the format HH:MM:SS - -To use it, launch the Editing Command Dialogue and type into the input box the word time +This command will output the current time as known by your computer in the format HH:MM:SS + +To use it, launch the Editing Command Dialogue and type into the input box the word time -char +char -This command allows you to insert literal characters by their numerical identifier, in decimal, octal or hexadecimal form. To use it launch the Editing Command dialogue and type char: [number] in the entry box, then hit OK. +This command allows you to insert literal characters by their numerical identifier, in decimal, octal or hexadecimal form. To use it launch the Editing Command dialogue and type char: [number] in the entry box, then hit OK. -<command ->char</command -> examples - -Input: char:234 -Output: ê -Input: char:0x1234 -Output: ê -Input: char:1232 -Output: ê +<command>char</command> examples + +Input: char:234 +Output: ê +Input: char:0x1234 +Output: ê +Input: char:1232 +Output: ê @@ -175,157 +69,54 @@ -replace, sed style -search, sed style -s///[ig] %s///[ig] +replace, sed style +search, sed style +s///[ig] %s///[ig] -This command does a sed-like search/replace operation on the current line, or on the whole file (%s///). - -In short, the text is searched for text matching the search pattern, the regular expression between the first and the second slash, and when a match is found, the matching part of the text is replaced with the expression between the middle and last part of the string. Parentheses in the search pattern create back references, that is the command remembers which part of the match matched in the parentheses; these strings can be reused in the replace pattern, referred to as \1 for the first set of parentheses, \2 for the second and so on. - -To search for a literal ( or ), you need to escape it using a backslash character: \(\) - -If you put an i at the end of the expression, the matching will be case insensitive. +This command does a sed-like search/replace operation on the current line, or on the whole file (%s///). + +In short, the text is searched for text matching the search pattern, the regular expression between the first and the second slash, and when a match is found, the matching part of the text is replaced with the expression between the middle and last part of the string. Parentheses in the search pattern create back references, that is the command remembers which part of the match matched in the parentheses; these strings can be reused in the replace pattern, referred to as \1 for the first set of parentheses, \2 for the second and so on. + +To search for a literal ( or ), you need to escape it using a backslash character: \(\) + +If you put an i at the end of the expression, the matching will be case insensitive. -Replacing text in the current line +Replacing text in the current line -Your friendly compiler just stopped, telling you that the class myClass mentioned in line 3902 in your source file is not defined. +Your friendly compiler just stopped, telling you that the class myClass mentioned in line 3902 in your source file is not defined. -"Buckle!" you think, it is of course MyClass. You go to line 3902, and instead of trying to find the word in the text, you launch the Editing Command Dialogue, enter s/myclass/MyClass/i, hit the OK button, save the file and compile – successfully without the error. +"Buckle!" you think, it is of course MyClass. You go to line 3902, and instead of trying to find the word in the text, you launch the Editing Command Dialogue, enter s/myclass/MyClass/i, hit the OK button, save the file and compile – successfully without the error. -Replacing text in the whole file - -Imagine that you have a file, in which you mention a Miss Jensen several times, when someone comes in and tells you that she just got married to Mr Jones. You want, of course, to replace each and every occurrence of Miss Jensen with Ms Jones. - -Launch the Editing Command dialogue, and type into the entry box: %s/Miss Jensen/Ms Jones/ and hit return, you are done. +Replacing text in the whole file + +Imagine that you have a file, in which you mention a Miss Jensen several times, when someone comes in and tells you that she just got married to Mr Jones. You want, of course, to replace each and every occurrence of Miss Jensen with Ms Jones. + +Launch the Editing Command dialogue, and type into the entry box: %s/Miss Jensen/Ms Jones/ and hit return, you are done. -A More Advanced Example - -This example makes use of back references as well as a word class (if you do not know what that is, please refer to the related documentation mentioned below). - -Suppose you have the following line: void MyClass::DoStringOps( String &foo, String &bar String *p, int &a, int &b ) +A More Advanced Example + +This example makes use of back references as well as a word class (if you do not know what that is, please refer to the related documentation mentioned below). + +Suppose you have the following line: void MyClass::DoStringOps( String &foo, String &bar String *p, int &a, int &b ) -Now you realise that this is not nice code, and decide that you want to use the const keyword for all address of arguments, those characterised by the & operator in front of the argument name. You would also like to simplify the white space, so that there is only 1 whitespace character between each word. - -Launch the Editing Command Dialogue, and enter: s/\s+(\w+)\s+(&)/ const \1 \2/g and hit the OK button. The g at the end of the expression makes the regular expression recompile for each match to save the backreferences. - -Output: void MyClass::DoStringOps( const String &foo, const String &bar String *p, const int &a, const int &b ) - -Mission completed! Now, what happened? Well, we looked for some white space (\s+) followed by one or more alphabetic characters (\w+) followed by some more whitespace (\s+) followed by an ampersand, and in the process saved the alphabetic chunk and the ampersand for reuse in the replace operation. Then we replaced the matching part of our line with one whitespace followed by const followed by one whitespace followed by our saved alphabetical chunk (\1) followed by one whitespace followed by our saved ampersand (\2) - -Now in some cases the alphabetical chunk was String, in some int, so using the character class \w and the + quantifier proved a valuable asset. +Now you realise that this is not nice code, and decide that you want to use the const keyword for all address of arguments, those characterised by the & operator in front of the argument name. You would also like to simplify the white space, so that there is only 1 whitespace character between each word. + +Launch the Editing Command Dialogue, and enter: s/\s+(\w+)\s+(&)/ const \1 \2/g and hit the OK button. The g at the end of the expression makes the regular expression recompile for each match to save the backreferences. + +Output: void MyClass::DoStringOps( const String &foo, const String &bar String *p, const int &a, const int &b ) + +Mission completed! Now, what happened? Well, we looked for some white space (\s+) followed by one or more alphabetic characters (\w+) followed by some more whitespace (\s+) followed by an ampersand, and in the process saved the alphabetic chunk and the ampersand for reuse in the replace operation. Then we replaced the matching part of our line with one whitespace followed by const followed by one whitespace followed by our saved alphabetical chunk (\1) followed by one whitespace followed by our saved ampersand (\2) + +Now in some cases the alphabetical chunk was String, in some int, so using the character class \w and the + quantifier proved a valuable asset. @@ -335,14 +126,7 @@ -This is extremely powerful, and though the actions can be undone by calling the Undo command several times (as required) I recommend you practise a bit before using this command for serious editing if you are not familiar with sed or perl regular expressions. +This is extremely powerful, and though the actions can be undone by calling the Undo command several times (as required) I recommend you practise a bit before using this command for serious editing if you are not familiar with sed or perl regular expressions. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/configuring.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/configuring.docbook index e682f0c5e0d..fd370c1aba5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/configuring.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/configuring.docbook @@ -1,89 +1,42 @@ - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Configuring &kate; +Configuring &kate; -Overview +Overview -configure -settings -preferences +configure +settings +preferences &kate; offers several means of tweaking the application to behave as desired. The most important ones are: -The Configuration Dialogue -The main configuration tool, allowing you to configure the &kate; application, the editor component and the usage of plugins. - - -The Settings Menu -Allows you to change often used settings, and to launch the configuration dialogues. - - -The View Menu -Allows you to split the current frame, as well as to display the icons and line numbers pane for the currently edited document. +The Configuration Dialogue +The main configuration tool, allowing you to configure the &kate; application, the editor component and the usage of plugins. + + +The Settings Menu +Allows you to change often used settings, and to launch the configuration dialogues. + + +The View Menu +Allows you to split the current frame, as well as to display the icons and line numbers pane for the currently edited document. -The embedded &konsole; is using the configuration defined in the &kcontrolcenter;, and may be configured by clicking the right mouse button and choosing from the Settings sub menu. +The embedded &konsole; is using the configuration defined in the &kcontrolcenter;, and may be configured by clicking the right mouse button and choosing from the Settings sub menu. -The Main Configuration Dialogue +The Main Configuration Dialogue @@ -91,83 +44,42 @@ -The &kate; configuration dialogue displays a tree of topics on the left, and a configuration page corresponding to the selected topic on the right. The tree groups the pages of the dialogue into logical groups. +The &kate; configuration dialogue displays a tree of topics on the left, and a configuration page corresponding to the selected topic on the right. The tree groups the pages of the dialogue into logical groups. -The &kate; group -This group contains pages to configure the main &kate; application +The &kate; group +This group contains pages to configure the main &kate; application -The General Page -Global Options for &kate; +The General Page +Global Options for &kate; -Application Mode +Application Mode -MDISDI -This group lets you choose between &kate; MDI and &kate; SDI mode, selecting the appropriate button. - &kate; MDI (Multiple Document Interface), which is the default mode, makes &kate; use a single window for all open files. You can choose the document to edit from the File List (docked into the &kate; window by default) or by selecting the document from the Document menu. -&kate; SDI (Single Document Interface) will make &kate; open each document in a window of its own, and the File List/File Selector will have a separate window. - If you change this setting, you will need to restart &kate; for it to take effect. +MDISDI +This group lets you choose between &kate; MDI and &kate; SDI mode, selecting the appropriate button. + &kate; MDI (Multiple Document Interface), which is the default mode, makes &kate; use a single window for all open files. You can choose the document to edit from the File List (docked into the &kate; window by default) or by selecting the document from the Document menu. +&kate; SDI (Single Document Interface) will make &kate; open each document in a window of its own, and the File List/File Selector will have a separate window. + If you change this setting, you will need to restart &kate; for it to take effect. -At Startup -These options determine how and if &kate; will restore your editing session when launched after a normal shutdown (if restored by the session manager, &kate; will always attempt to restore your session as close as possible to what it was when you last used &kate;). +At Startup +These options determine how and if &kate; will restore your editing session when launched after a normal shutdown (if restored by the session manager, &kate; will always attempt to restore your session as close as possible to what it was when you last used &kate;). -Reopen Files -If this option is enabled, files open when you last closed &kate; will be reopened. Bookmarks will be restored, and the cursor position, icon border and line numbers settings for the last editor used with the document will be re-established - - -Restore View Configuration -If this option is enabled, &kate; will attempt to restore your frames exactly as you left them. +Reopen Files +If this option is enabled, files open when you last closed &kate; will be reopened. Bookmarks will be restored, and the cursor position, icon border and line numbers settings for the last editor used with the document will be re-established + + +Restore View Configuration +If this option is enabled, &kate; will attempt to restore your frames exactly as you left them. @@ -176,55 +88,24 @@ This group lets you choose between &kate; -Restrict to single instance -Enabling this means you can only have one running instance of &kate; running at any given time. If you attempt to start another one, the current instance will take over and also open files as requested. For example, if you use &kate; for displaying sources for web pages in Konqueror, they will all be opened in an existing instance of &kate; if this option is enabled. +Restrict to single instance +Enabling this means you can only have one running instance of &kate; running at any given time. If you attempt to start another one, the current instance will take over and also open files as requested. For example, if you use &kate; for displaying sources for web pages in Konqueror, they will all be opened in an existing instance of &kate; if this option is enabled. -Show Contents While Resizing Frames If this option is enabled, the windows will be fully repainted while dragging the frame splitters. If unchecked, a so-called rubber band (indicating the new size of the frame) will be used instead. +Show Contents While Resizing Frames If this option is enabled, the windows will be fully repainted while dragging the frame splitters. If unchecked, a so-called rubber band (indicating the new size of the frame) will be used instead. -Sync Konsole with Active Document -This will cause the built-in &konsole; to cd into the directory of the active document when launched and when a new document gets the focus. If not enabled, you have to do all your navigation in the &konsole; on your own. - - - -Number of Recent Files -Unsurprisingly, this allows you to decide how long the Open Recent files menu should grow. +Sync Konsole with Active Document +This will cause the built-in &konsole; to cd into the directory of the active document when launched and when a new document gets the focus. If not enabled, you have to do all your navigation in the &konsole; on your own. + + + +Number of Recent Files +Unsurprisingly, this allows you to decide how long the Open Recent files menu should grow. @@ -234,126 +115,83 @@ This group lets you choose between &kate; -The Editor Group -This group contains all pages related to the editor component of &kate; +The Editor Group +This group contains all pages related to the editor component of &kate; -The <guilabel ->Colours</guilabel -> Page This page allows you to change the background and selection background colours of the editor. Initially, &kate; will use the colours as set in the &kcontrolcenter; Look'n'FeelColours page. - -To change a colour, press the associated button and select the desired colour in the colour chooser. - -Choosing the background colour may render Syntax Highlighted text unreadable. You should use a light colour for the background, and a dark colour for the selection background. -Otherwise, you will probably need to change the Default Styles. +The <guilabel>Colours</guilabel> Page This page allows you to change the background and selection background colours of the editor. Initially, &kate; will use the colours as set in the &kcontrolcenter; Look'n'FeelColours page. + +To change a colour, press the associated button and select the desired colour in the colour chooser. + +Choosing the background colour may render Syntax Highlighted text unreadable. You should use a light colour for the background, and a dark colour for the selection background. +Otherwise, you will probably need to change the Default Styles. -The Fonts Page +The Fonts Page -This page allows you to choose the default fonts for &kate;. The settings will be used for the &kwrite; and for viewing text files in &konqueror; as well. +This page allows you to choose the default fonts for &kate;. The settings will be used for the &kwrite; and for viewing text files in &konqueror; as well. -The page presents two tabs, one for the editor font and one for the printing font. Select a tab and choose the desired font. The default is to use the &kde; global setting for fixed font. +The page presents two tabs, one for the editor font and one for the printing font. Select a tab and choose the desired font. The default is to use the &kde; global setting for fixed font. -As it is not currently possible to use individual fonts for documents, nor to change the font for printing from the print dialogue, be careful. A fixed-width font is strongly recommended. +As it is not currently possible to use individual fonts for documents, nor to change the font for printing from the print dialogue, be careful. A fixed-width font is strongly recommended. -The Indent Page -This page allows you to change the behaviour of indentation. +The Indent Page +This page allows you to change the behaviour of indentation. -Indent Options +Indent Options -Auto indent +Auto indent -If checked, &kate; will automatically indent new lines equal to the previous line. If the previous line is blank, the nearest above line with contents is used. +If checked, &kate; will automatically indent new lines equal to the previous line. If the previous line is blank, the nearest above line with contents is used. -Indent with Spaces +Indent with Spaces -If checked, &kate; will indent with spaces rather than tabs. +If checked, &kate; will indent with spaces rather than tabs. -Backspace key indents +Backspace key indents -If this is checked, &kate; will unindent equal to the nearest above line with contents when you press the Backspace key if the part of the line preceding the cursor contains only whitespace. +If this is checked, &kate; will unindent equal to the nearest above line with contents when you press the Backspace key if the part of the line preceding the cursor contains only whitespace. -Tab key indents +Tab key indents -If this is checked, &kate; will indent the current line equal to the nearest above line with content when you press the Tab key, if the part of the line preceding the cursor contains only whitespace. +If this is checked, &kate; will indent the current line equal to the nearest above line with content when you press the Tab key, if the part of the line preceding the cursor contains only whitespace. -Keep extra spaces +Keep extra spaces -With this behaviour checked, &kate; will leave whitespace behind the cursor after indenting. +With this behaviour checked, &kate; will leave whitespace behind the cursor after indenting. @@ -362,42 +200,31 @@ This group lets you choose between &kate; -The Select Page +The Select Page -This page provides options for fine tuning the select behaviour of &kate; +This page provides options for fine tuning the select behaviour of &kate; -Select Options +Select Options -Persistent Selections +Persistent Selections -When Persistent Selections is enabled, key input will not cause the selection to be removed/diminished. -This option partly conflicts with the Overwrite Selection option. If both are enabled, pasting text or pressing any other keys than the arrow keys will cause the selection to be overwritten. +When Persistent Selections is enabled, key input will not cause the selection to be removed/diminished. +This option partly conflicts with the Overwrite Selection option. If both are enabled, pasting text or pressing any other keys than the arrow keys will cause the selection to be overwritten. -Overwrite Selection +Overwrite Selection -If this is enabled, any text insertion, whether typed or pasted will cause the selected text to be deleted and replaced with the inserted text. +If this is enabled, any text insertion, whether typed or pasted will cause the selected text to be deleted and replaced with the inserted text. @@ -405,12 +232,10 @@ This group lets you choose between &kate; -Mouse Autocopy +Mouse Autocopy -If enabled, any text selected by moving the mouse with the left button pressed will +If enabled, any text selected by moving the mouse with the left button pressed will be copied to the clipboard, ready for pasting. @@ -420,132 +245,81 @@ be copied to the clipboard, ready for pasting. -The Edit Page -This page contains miscellaneous options for fine-tuning the behaviour of the &kate; editor component. +The Edit Page +This page contains miscellaneous options for fine-tuning the behaviour of the &kate; editor component. -Editor Options +Editor Options -Word Wrap +Word Wrap -Word Wrap as used here means dynamically format the text by breaking lines at an appropriate place, rather than soft wrapping lines in the editor for easier reading. -If enabled, &kate; will insert a line break as defined by the End of Line setting for the document when the line extends the length set in Wrap Words At option described below. +Word Wrap as used here means dynamically format the text by breaking lines at an appropriate place, rather than soft wrapping lines in the editor for easier reading. +If enabled, &kate; will insert a line break as defined by the End of Line setting for the document when the line extends the length set in Wrap Words At option described below. -Wrap Words At +Wrap Words At -This option decides the max length of lines if the Word Wrap option is enabled. +This option decides the max length of lines if the Word Wrap option is enabled. -Replace Tabs with Spaces +Replace Tabs with Spaces -If enabled, &kate; will replace inserted Tab characters with a number of single whitespace characters as defined in Tab Width. +If enabled, &kate; will replace inserted Tab characters with a number of single whitespace characters as defined in Tab Width. -Remove trailing spaces +Remove trailing spaces -If enabled, &kate; will remove any whitespace at the rear end of a line each time the cursor is moved off that line. +If enabled, &kate; will remove any whitespace at the rear end of a line each time the cursor is moved off that line. -Tab/Indent Width +Tab/Indent Width -Sets the tab width, which is also used to decide the amount of indentation when Auto Indent is enabled, or indentation is otherwise called for. -Depending on the Indent settings indentation may be caused by pressing the Tab and Backspace keys, and activating the Edit Indent menu entry will call for indent as well. +Sets the tab width, which is also used to decide the amount of indentation when Auto Indent is enabled, or indentation is otherwise called for. +Depending on the Indent settings indentation may be caused by pressing the Tab and Backspace keys, and activating the Edit Indent menu entry will call for indent as well. -Auto Brackets +Auto Brackets -If this is enabled, &kate; will automatically insert a right bracket immediately to the right of the cursor when a left bracket is inserted from the keyboard. The supported bracket types are (, {, [and < +If this is enabled, &kate; will automatically insert a right bracket immediately to the right of the cursor when a left bracket is inserted from the keyboard. The supported bracket types are (, {, [and < -Group undos +Group undos -If enabled, &kate; will group any number of similar editing actions (for example typing, backspacing, pasting) in one entry in the undo history, so they can all be undone at once. +If enabled, &kate; will group any number of similar editing actions (for example typing, backspacing, pasting) in one entry in the undo history, so they can all be undone at once. @@ -553,28 +327,20 @@ be copied to the clipboard, ready for pasting. -Show Tabs +Show Tabs -If enabled, &kate; will draw a small dot at the start of a Tab character in the editor to indicate its presence. +If enabled, &kate; will draw a small dot at the start of a Tab character in the editor to indicate its presence. -Smart Home +Smart Home -This will make &kate; move the cursor to the first non-whitespace character of the current line rather than to the absolute beginning, when the Home key (or other key assigned to that function) is pressed. +This will make &kate; move the cursor to the first non-whitespace character of the current line rather than to the absolute beginning, when the Home key (or other key assigned to that function) is pressed. @@ -582,17 +348,11 @@ be copied to the clipboard, ready for pasting. -Page Up/Down moves cursor +Page Up/Down moves cursor -If enabled, the cursor will be moved to the first/last visible -line when Page Up/Page Down (or +If enabled, the cursor will be moved to the first/last visible +line when Page Up/Page Down (or other key assigned to those functions) is pressed, rather than being kept at its relative position. @@ -601,15 +361,11 @@ kept at its relative position. -Wrap Cursor +Wrap Cursor -If enabled, moving the cursor past the end of a line will cause it to continue to the next/previous line if any. -If not enabled, the cursor cannot be moved right of the beginning of the line, but it may be moved past the end of line, and when text is inserted &kate; will automatically insert whitespace up to that position. This is sometimes very handy for programmers, for example. +If enabled, moving the cursor past the end of a line will cause it to continue to the next/previous line if any. +If not enabled, the cursor cannot be moved right of the beginning of the line, but it may be moved past the end of line, and when text is inserted &kate; will automatically insert whitespace up to that position. This is sometimes very handy for programmers, for example. @@ -618,58 +374,34 @@ kept at its relative position. -The Keyboard Page +The Keyboard Page -Here you can configure the keyboard shortcuts for the internal commands of the &kate; editor component. These includes commands for moving around in the document and selecting text. For keys related to copying and pasting text, see The Configure Keys Dialogue +Here you can configure the keyboard shortcuts for the internal commands of the &kate; editor component. These includes commands for moving around in the document and selecting text. For keys related to copying and pasting text, see The Configure Keys Dialogue -You may change the keys for a command, or add an alternate key. +You may change the keys for a command, or add an alternate key. -To change the key(s) for a command, follow this procedure: +To change the key(s) for a command, follow this procedure: -Select the command for which you want to configure the keys. +Select the command for which you want to configure the keys. -Choose the None option in the pane below the list if you don't want a key for this command. -Choose the Default option to use the default key(s) for the command -Choose the Custom option to select a custom key for the command, or set an alternate one. +Choose the None option in the pane below the list if you don't want a key for this command. +Choose the Default option to use the default key(s) for the command +Choose the Custom option to select a custom key for the command, or set an alternate one. -If you choose the Custom option, the key entering button at the right of the pane will be enabled. To set a key, press it. The &kde; Define Shortcut Dialogue will appear. In this dialogue: +If you choose the Custom option, the key entering button at the right of the pane will be enabled. To set a key, press it. The &kde; Define Shortcut Dialogue will appear. In this dialogue: -Choose whether to set the default or alternate key. Default does not mean that you change the application default for this action, rather it sets the custom standard key for it. +Choose whether to set the default or alternate key. Default does not mean that you change the application default for this action, rather it sets the custom standard key for it. -Press the desired key sequence, it will be visualised for you in the dialogue for your confirmation. +Press the desired key sequence, it will be visualised for you in the dialogue for your confirmation. -If you are of an adventurous nature, try playing around with the Multikey option. Using it will allow you to have &Emacs;-like key sequences (one key enters a group, the next performs the action), apart from the fact that instead of just doing the job, &kde; will pop up a menu to choose from in an undefined and most likely inappropriate place. You will now be in no doubt as to whether pressing the next key in the sequence will work, or you have to type the menu accelerator (both will work). +If you are of an adventurous nature, try playing around with the Multikey option. Using it will allow you to have &Emacs;-like key sequences (one key enters a group, the next performs the action), apart from the fact that instead of just doing the job, &kde; will pop up a menu to choose from in an undefined and most likely inappropriate place. You will now be in no doubt as to whether pressing the next key in the sequence will work, or you have to type the menu accelerator (both will work). @@ -677,142 +409,77 @@ kept at its relative position. -The Spelling Page -This page allows you to configure how &tdespell; behaves with &kate; +The Spelling Page +This page allows you to configure how &tdespell; behaves with &kate; -The Highlighting Page +The Highlighting Page -This page allows you to fine tune the colour and syntax type selection of &kate; +This page allows you to fine tune the colour and syntax type selection of &kate; - + -For more in depth information on the syntax highlighting system, see ?? +For more in depth information on the syntax highlighting system, see ?? -The page consists of two tabs, one for setting the Default styles and one for managing the Highlight Modes. Both tabs display a list of contexts in which the default colours and font are used to visualise the look of each style. The context name is painted using the current properties of the context. +The page consists of two tabs, one for setting the Default styles and one for managing the Highlight Modes. Both tabs display a list of contexts in which the default colours and font are used to visualise the look of each style. The context name is painted using the current properties of the context. -The list has four or five columns, each with the following purpose: +The list has four or five columns, each with the following purpose: -Context -Displays the context name, painted using the style properties for the context. +Context +Displays the context name, painted using the style properties for the context. -Bold -The state of this checkbox decides if the context should be rendered using a boldface font. +Bold +The state of this checkbox decides if the context should be rendered using a boldface font. -Italic -The state of this checkbox decides if the context should be rendered using italic font. +Italic +The state of this checkbox decides if the context should be rendered using italic font. -Normal -This button displays the colour for drawing the style in normal mode, when the text is not selected that is. To change the colour, click the button. +Normal +This button displays the colour for drawing the style in normal mode, when the text is not selected that is. To change the colour, click the button. -Selected -This button displays the colour for drawing the style when the text is selected. To change the colour, click the button. +Selected +This button displays the colour for drawing the style when the text is selected. To change the colour, click the button. -Using Default -This checkbox, only available in the Highlight Modes tab shows if the style is using its default values. It will automatically become unchecked if you change any properties of the style. Check it to reset a style to using defaults. +Using Default +This checkbox, only available in the Highlight Modes tab shows if the style is using its default values. It will automatically become unchecked if you change any properties of the style. Check it to reset a style to using defaults. -The Default Styles Tab -To change any of the default styles, set its properties as desired. +The Default Styles Tab +To change any of the default styles, set its properties as desired. -The Highlight Modes Tab - -syntax highlighting, configuring Here you can change the most important properties of each available highlight mode. First, use the Highlight dropdown to choose a mode to work on. Highlight modes are initially chosen based on the &MIME; type and extension of the file. To change the list for the current selection, edit the File Extensions and Mime Types entries. Alternatively, press the wizard button to the right of the Mime Types entry. This will show a dialogue displaying all available &MIME; types to choose from. Using it will edit the &MIME; types as well as the file extensions. +The Highlight Modes Tab + +syntax highlighting, configuring Here you can change the most important properties of each available highlight mode. First, use the Highlight dropdown to choose a mode to work on. Highlight modes are initially chosen based on the &MIME; type and extension of the file. To change the list for the current selection, edit the File Extensions and Mime Types entries. Alternatively, press the wizard button to the right of the Mime Types entry. This will show a dialogue displaying all available &MIME; types to choose from. Using it will edit the &MIME; types as well as the file extensions. - + -The &MIME; type chooser dialogue displays a tree of available &MIME; types, with a description and the patterns for the &MIME; type. To include a &MIME; type, check the box beside it. +The &MIME; type chooser dialogue displays a tree of available &MIME; types, with a description and the patterns for the &MIME; type. To include a &MIME; type, check the box beside it. -You can change the style properties of any context as described above. +You can change the style properties of any context as described above. -At the bottom of the tab, below the highlight properties, you see a button labelled Download. Pressing it will attempt to connect to the &kate; website and fetch a list of available syntax highlight modes which you can update or add. +At the bottom of the tab, below the highlight properties, you see a button labelled Download. Pressing it will attempt to connect to the &kate; website and fetch a list of available syntax highlight modes which you can update or add. @@ -821,41 +488,20 @@ kept at its relative position. -The Plugins Group +The Plugins Group -plugins, configuring This group contains pages related to plugins. Apart from the Manager configuration page, some plugins provide individual configuration options. For information on these, see the documentation for the individual plugins. +plugins, configuring This group contains pages related to plugins. Apart from the Manager configuration page, some plugins provide individual configuration options. For information on these, see the documentation for the individual plugins. -The Plugin Manager Page - -This page provides the means of loading/unloading plugins, and minimal information about individual plugins. - -To load an unloaded plugin, select it in the Available Plugins pane and use the arrow buttons to move it to the Loaded Plugins pane. - -To unload a loaded plugin, select it in the Loaded Plugins pane and use the arrow buttons to move it to the Available buttons pane. - -To view a minimal description and information about a plugin, select it and the information will be available below the lists. +The Plugin Manager Page + +This page provides the means of loading/unloading plugins, and minimal information about individual plugins. + +To load an unloaded plugin, select it in the Available Plugins pane and use the arrow buttons to move it to the Loaded Plugins pane. + +To unload a loaded plugin, select it in the Loaded Plugins pane and use the arrow buttons to move it to the Available buttons pane. + +To view a minimal description and information about a plugin, select it and the information will be available below the lists. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/fundamentals.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/fundamentals.docbook index bf0979d4aa6..a73127b55e1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/fundamentals.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/fundamentals.docbook @@ -1,226 +1,95 @@ - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The Fundamentals +The Fundamentals -If you have ever used a text editor, you will have no problem using &kate;. In the next two sections, Starting &kate; and in Working with &kate;, we'll show you everything you need to get up and running quickly. +If you have ever used a text editor, you will have no problem using &kate;. In the next two sections, Starting &kate; and in Working with &kate;, we'll show you everything you need to get up and running quickly. -Starting &kate; +Starting &kate; -You can start &kate; from the TDE menu or from the command line. +You can start &kate; from the TDE menu or from the command line. -From the Menu -Open the &kde; program menu by clicking on the big K icon on the toolbar at the bottom left of your screen. This will raise the program menu. Move your cursor up the menu to the Editors menu item. A list of available editors will appear. Choose &kate;. - -Unless you configure &kate; not to, it will load the last files you edited. See Configuring &kate; to learn how to toggle this feature on and off. +From the Menu +Open the &kde; program menu by clicking on the big K icon on the toolbar at the bottom left of your screen. This will raise the program menu. Move your cursor up the menu to the Editors menu item. A list of available editors will appear. Choose &kate;. + +Unless you configure &kate; not to, it will load the last files you edited. See Configuring &kate; to learn how to toggle this feature on and off. -From the Command Line +From the Command Line -You can start &kate; by typing its name on the command line. If you give it a file name, as in the example below, it will open or create that file. +You can start &kate; by typing its name on the command line. If you give it a file name, as in the example below, it will open or create that file. -%kate +%kate -If you have an active connection, and permission, you can take advantage of &kde;'s network transparency to open files on the internet. +If you have an active connection, and permission, you can take advantage of &kde;'s network transparency to open files on the internet. -%kate +%kate -Command Line Options -&kate; accepts following command line options: +Command Line Options +&kate; accepts following command line options: -kate +kate -This lists the most basic options available at the command line. +This lists the most basic options available at the command line. -kate +kate -This lists the options available for changing the way &kate; interacts with &Qt;. +This lists the options available for changing the way &kate; interacts with &Qt;. -kate +kate -This lists the options available for changing the way &kate; interacts with &kde;. +This lists the options available for changing the way &kate; interacts with &kde;. -kate +kate -This lists all of the command line options. +This lists all of the command line options. -kate +kate -Lists &kate;'s authors in the terminal window. +Lists &kate;'s authors in the terminal window. -kate +kate -Lists version information for &Qt;, &kde;, and &kate;. Also available through kate +Lists version information for &Qt;, &kde;, and &kate;. Also available through kate -kate +kate -Shows licence information. +Shows licence information. @@ -228,529 +97,189 @@ -Drag and Drop -&kate; uses the &kde; Drag and Drop protocol. Files may be dragged and dropped onto &kate; from the Desktop, &konqueror; or some remote ftp site opened in one of &konqueror;'s windows. +Drag and Drop +&kate; uses the &kde; Drag and Drop protocol. Files may be dragged and dropped onto &kate; from the Desktop, &konqueror; or some remote ftp site opened in one of &konqueror;'s windows. -Working with &kate; -Quick Start will show you how to toggle four simple options that will let you configure some of &kate;'s more powerful features right away. Keystroke Commands lays out some of the default keystroke shortcuts for those who can't or don't want to use a mouse. +Working with &kate; +Quick Start will show you how to toggle four simple options that will let you configure some of &kate;'s more powerful features right away. Keystroke Commands lays out some of the default keystroke shortcuts for those who can't or don't want to use a mouse. -Quick Start +Quick Start -This section will describe some of the items on the Settings menu so that you can quickly configure &kate; to work the way you want it. +This section will describe some of the items on the Settings menu so that you can quickly configure &kate; to work the way you want it. -When you start &kate; for the first time you'll see two windows with white backgrounds. Above the two windows is a toolbar with the usual labelled icons. And above that, a menu bar. +When you start &kate; for the first time you'll see two windows with white backgrounds. Above the two windows is a toolbar with the usual labelled icons. And above that, a menu bar. -The left-hand window is a dockable side bar. It combines the Filelist and Fileselector windows. Switch between the two by clicking on the tabs at the top of the window. +The left-hand window is a dockable side bar. It combines the Filelist and Fileselector windows. Switch between the two by clicking on the tabs at the top of the window. -If you've started &kate; with a file, the right-hand window will show the file you are editing and the Filelist on the side bar will show the name of the file. Use the Fileselector window to open files. +If you've started &kate; with a file, the right-hand window will show the file you are editing and the Filelist on the side bar will show the name of the file. Use the Fileselector window to open files. -You can toggle the Filelist and Fileselector window on and off in Settings menu. This menu offers you your first glimpse into &kate;'s power and flexibility. In this section we'll look at four items: +You can toggle the Filelist and Fileselector window on and off in Settings menu. This menu offers you your first glimpse into &kate;'s power and flexibility. In this section we'll look at four items: -Show Toolbar +Show Toolbar -Toggles the toolbar on and off. +Toggles the toolbar on and off. -Show Filelist +Show Filelist -Toggles the Filelist on and off. If the Filelist/Fileselector window is not open, &kate; launches the side bar as a separate, undocked, window. To dock the window grab the two thin parallel lines above the tabs by clicking on them with your &LMB; and holding the button down. Drag the the window into &kate;'s editing window and release the &LMB; when you have positioned the Filelist/Fileselector window as you prefer. +Toggles the Filelist on and off. If the Filelist/Fileselector window is not open, &kate; launches the side bar as a separate, undocked, window. To dock the window grab the two thin parallel lines above the tabs by clicking on them with your &LMB; and holding the button down. Drag the the window into &kate;'s editing window and release the &LMB; when you have positioned the Filelist/Fileselector window as you prefer. -If you have grabbed the two parallel lines successfully your mouse pointer will turn into two crossed arrows as you drag. +If you have grabbed the two parallel lines successfully your mouse pointer will turn into two crossed arrows as you drag. -Show Fileselector +Show Fileselector -Toggles the Fileselector on and off. This menu item is the same as Show Filelist with one difference. Toggling it on launches the window with the Fileselector on top. +Toggles the Fileselector on and off. This menu item is the same as Show Filelist with one difference. Toggling it on launches the window with the Fileselector on top. -Show Console +Show Console -Toggles a console emulator on and off at the bottom of &kate;'s window. In other words, it gives you a command line within the application. +Toggles a console emulator on and off at the bottom of &kate;'s window. In other words, it gives you a command line within the application. -Keystroke Commands +Keystroke Commands -Many of &kate;'s keystroke commands (shortcuts) are configurable by way of the Settings menu. By default &kate; honours the following key bindings. +Many of &kate;'s keystroke commands (shortcuts) are configurable by way of the Settings menu. By default &kate; honours the following key bindings. -Insert -Toggle between Insert and Overwrite mode. When in insert mode the editor will add any typed characters to the text and push any previously typed data to the right of the text cursor. Overwrite mode causes the entry of each character to eliminate the character immediately to the right of the text cursor. +Insert +Toggle between Insert and Overwrite mode. When in insert mode the editor will add any typed characters to the text and push any previously typed data to the right of the text cursor. Overwrite mode causes the entry of each character to eliminate the character immediately to the right of the text cursor. -Left Arrow -Move the cursor one character to the left +Left Arrow +Move the cursor one character to the left -Right Arrow -Move the cursor one character to the right +Right Arrow +Move the cursor one character to the right -Up Arrow -Move the cursor up one line +Up Arrow +Move the cursor up one line -Down Arrow -Move the cursor down one line +Down Arrow +Move the cursor down one line -Page Up -Move the cursor up one page +Page Up +Move the cursor up one page -Page Down -Move the cursor down one page +Page Down +Move the cursor down one page -Backspace -Delete the character to the left of the cursor +Backspace +Delete the character to the left of the cursor -Home -Move the cursor to the beginning of the line +Home +Move the cursor to the beginning of the line -End -Move the cursor to the end of the line +End +Move the cursor to the end of the line -Delete -Delete the character to the right of the cursor (or any selected text) +Delete +Delete the character to the right of the cursor (or any selected text) -&Shift;Left Arrow -Mark text one character to the left +&Shift;Left Arrow +Mark text one character to the left -&Shift;Right Arrow -Mark text one character to the right +&Shift;Right Arrow +Mark text one character to the right -F1 -Help +F1 +Help -&Shift;F1 -What's this? +&Shift;F1 +What's this? -&Ctrl;F -Find +&Ctrl;F +Find -F3 -Find again +F3 +Find again -&Ctrl;B -Set a Bookmark +&Ctrl;B +Set a Bookmark -&Ctrl;C -Copy the marked text to the clipboard. +&Ctrl;C +Copy the marked text to the clipboard. -&Ctrl;N -New document +&Ctrl;N +New document -&Ctrl;P -Print +&Ctrl;P +Print -&Ctrl;Q -Quit - close active copy of editor +&Ctrl;Q +Quit - close active copy of editor -&Ctrl;R -Replace +&Ctrl;R +Replace -&Ctrl;S -Save your file. +&Ctrl;S +Save your file. -&Ctrl;V -Paste. +&Ctrl;V +Paste. -&Ctrl;X -Delete the marked text and copy it to the clipboard. +&Ctrl;X +Delete the marked text and copy it to the clipboard. -&Ctrl;Z -Undo +&Ctrl;Z +Undo -&Ctrl;&Shift;Z -Redo +&Ctrl;&Shift;Z +Redo @@ -761,72 +290,38 @@ -Getting Help +Getting Help -With &kate; +With &kate; -This manual +This manual -Offers detailed documentation on all menu commands, configuration options, tools, dialogues, plugins &etc; as well as descriptions of of the &kate; window, the editor and various concepts used in the application. - -Press F1 or use the Help Contents menu topic to view this manual. +Offers detailed documentation on all menu commands, configuration options, tools, dialogues, plugins &etc; as well as descriptions of of the &kate; window, the editor and various concepts used in the application. + +Press F1 or use the Help Contents menu topic to view this manual. -What's This Help +What's This Help -What's This help offers immediate help with single elements of graphical windows, such as buttons or other window areas. - -We strive to provide What's This help for any elements for which it makes sense. It is available throughout the configuration dialogue, and in many other dialogues as well. - -To employ What's This help, press &Shift;F1 or use the HelpWhat's This menu item to enable What's This mode. The cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark, and you can now click any element in the window to read the What's This help for that element, if it is available. +What's This help offers immediate help with single elements of graphical windows, such as buttons or other window areas. + +We strive to provide What's This help for any elements for which it makes sense. It is available throughout the configuration dialogue, and in many other dialogues as well. + +To employ What's This help, press &Shift;F1 or use the HelpWhat's This menu item to enable What's This mode. The cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark, and you can now click any element in the window to read the What's This help for that element, if it is available. -Help Buttons in Dialogues +Help Buttons in Dialogues -Some dialogues have a Help Button. Pressing it will start the &khelpcenter; and open the relevant documentation. +Some dialogues have a Help Button. Pressing it will start the &khelpcenter; and open the relevant documentation. @@ -834,13 +329,9 @@ -With Your Text Files +With Your Text Files -&kate; does not (yet!) provide any means for reading document related documentation. Depending on the file you are editing, you may find the Built in &konsole; helpful for viewing related &UNIX; manual pages or info documentation, or you can use &konqueror;. +&kate; does not (yet!) provide any means for reading document related documentation. Depending on the file you are editing, you may find the Built in &konsole; helpful for viewing related &UNIX; manual pages or info documentation, or you can use &konqueror;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/highlighting.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/highlighting.docbook index cef036728ef..2785ea10b09 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/highlighting.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/highlighting.docbook @@ -1,191 +1,103 @@ - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Working with Syntax Highlighting +Working with Syntax Highlighting -Overview +Overview -Syntax Highlighting is what makes the editor automatically display text in different styles/colours, depending on the function of the string in relation to the purpose of the file. In program source code for example, control statements may be rendered bold, while data types and comments get different colours from the rest of the text. This greatly enhances the readability of the text, and thus helps the author to be more efficient and productive. +Syntax Highlighting is what makes the editor automatically display text in different styles/colours, depending on the function of the string in relation to the purpose of the file. In program source code for example, control statements may be rendered bold, while data types and comments get different colours from the rest of the text. This greatly enhances the readability of the text, and thus helps the author to be more efficient and productive. - -A perl function, rendered with syntax highlighting. -A perl function, rendered with syntax highlighting. + +A perl function, rendered with syntax highlighting. +A perl function, rendered with syntax highlighting. - -The same perl function, without highlighting. -The same perl function, without highlighting. + +The same perl function, without highlighting. +The same perl function, without highlighting. -Of the two examples, which is easiest to read? +Of the two examples, which is easiest to read? -&kate; comes with a flexible, configurable and capable system for doing syntax highlighting, and the standard distribution provides definitions for a wide range of programming languages, markup and scripting languages and other text file formats. In addition you can provide your own definitions in simple &XML; files. +&kate; comes with a flexible, configurable and capable system for doing syntax highlighting, and the standard distribution provides definitions for a wide range of programming languages, markup and scripting languages and other text file formats. In addition you can provide your own definitions in simple &XML; files. -&kate; will automatically detect the right syntax rules when you open a file, based on the &MIME; Type of the file, determined by its extension, or, if it has none, the contents. Should you experience a bad choice, you can manually set the syntax to use from the DocumentsHighlight Mode menu. +&kate; will automatically detect the right syntax rules when you open a file, based on the &MIME; Type of the file, determined by its extension, or, if it has none, the contents. Should you experience a bad choice, you can manually set the syntax to use from the DocumentsHighlight Mode menu. -The styles and colours used by each syntax highlight definition, as well as which &MIME;types it should be used for, can be configured using the Highlight page of the Config Dialogue. +The styles and colours used by each syntax highlight definition, as well as which &MIME;types it should be used for, can be configured using the Highlight page of the Config Dialogue. -Syntax highlighting is there to enhance the readability of correct text, but you cannot trust it to validate your text. Marking text for syntax is difficult depending on the format you are using, and in some cases the authors of the syntax rules will be proud if 98% of text gets correctly rendered, though most often you need a rare style to see the incorrect 2%. +Syntax highlighting is there to enhance the readability of correct text, but you cannot trust it to validate your text. Marking text for syntax is difficult depending on the format you are using, and in some cases the authors of the syntax rules will be proud if 98% of text gets correctly rendered, though most often you need a rare style to see the incorrect 2%. -You can download updated or additional syntax highlight definitions from the &kate; website by clicking the Download button in the Highlight Page of the Config Dialogue. +You can download updated or additional syntax highlight definitions from the &kate; website by clicking the Download button in the Highlight Page of the Config Dialogue. -The &kate; Syntax Highlight System +The &kate; Syntax Highlight System -This section will discuss the &kate; syntax highlighting mechanism in more detail. It is for you if you want to know know about it, or if you want to change or create syntax definitions. +This section will discuss the &kate; syntax highlighting mechanism in more detail. It is for you if you want to know know about it, or if you want to change or create syntax definitions. -How it Works - -Whenever you open a file, one of the first things the &kate; editor does is detect which syntax definition to use for the file. While reading the text of the file, and while you type away in it, the syntax highlighting system will analyse the text using the rules defined by the syntax definition and mark in it where different contexts and styles begin and end. - -When you type in the document, the new text is analysed and marked on the fly, so that if you delete a character that is marked as the beginning or end of a context, the style of surrounding text changes accordingly. - -The syntax definitions used by the &kate; syntax highlighting system are &XML; files, containing -Rules for detecting the role of text, organised into context blocks -Keyword lists -Style Item definitions +How it Works + +Whenever you open a file, one of the first things the &kate; editor does is detect which syntax definition to use for the file. While reading the text of the file, and while you type away in it, the syntax highlighting system will analyse the text using the rules defined by the syntax definition and mark in it where different contexts and styles begin and end. + +When you type in the document, the new text is analysed and marked on the fly, so that if you delete a character that is marked as the beginning or end of a context, the style of surrounding text changes accordingly. + +The syntax definitions used by the &kate; syntax highlighting system are &XML; files, containing +Rules for detecting the role of text, organised into context blocks +Keyword lists +Style Item definitions -When analysing the text, the detection rules are evaluated in the order in which they are defined, and if the beginning of the current string matches a rule, the related context is used. The start point in the text is moved to the final point at which that rule matched and a new loop of the rules begins, starting in the context set by the matched rule. +When analysing the text, the detection rules are evaluated in the order in which they are defined, and if the beginning of the current string matches a rule, the related context is used. The start point in the text is moved to the final point at which that rule matched and a new loop of the rules begins, starting in the context set by the matched rule. -Rules +Rules -The detection rules are the heart of the highlighting detection system. A rule is a string, character or regular expression against which to match the text being analysed. It contains information about which style to use for the matching part of the text. It may switch the working context of the system either to an explicitly mentioned context or to the previous context used by the text. +The detection rules are the heart of the highlighting detection system. A rule is a string, character or regular expression against which to match the text being analysed. It contains information about which style to use for the matching part of the text. It may switch the working context of the system either to an explicitly mentioned context or to the previous context used by the text. -Rules are organised in context groups. A context group is used for main text concepts within the format, for example quoted text strings or comment blocks in program source code. This ensures that the highlighting system does not need to loop through all rules when it is not necessary, and that some character sequences in the text can be treated differently depending on the current context. +Rules are organised in context groups. A context group is used for main text concepts within the format, for example quoted text strings or comment blocks in program source code. This ensures that the highlighting system does not need to loop through all rules when it is not necessary, and that some character sequences in the text can be treated differently depending on the current context. -Context Styles and Keywords +Context Styles and Keywords -In some programming languages, integer numbers are treated differently than floating point ones by the compiler (the program that converts the source code to a binary executable), and there may be characters having a special meaning within a quoted string. In such cases, it makes sense to render them differently from the surroundings so that they are easy to identify while reading the text. So even if they do not represent special contexts, they may be seen as such by the syntax highlighting system, so that they can be marked for different rendering. +In some programming languages, integer numbers are treated differently than floating point ones by the compiler (the program that converts the source code to a binary executable), and there may be characters having a special meaning within a quoted string. In such cases, it makes sense to render them differently from the surroundings so that they are easy to identify while reading the text. So even if they do not represent special contexts, they may be seen as such by the syntax highlighting system, so that they can be marked for different rendering. -A syntax definition may contain as many styles as required to cover the concepts of the format it is used for. +A syntax definition may contain as many styles as required to cover the concepts of the format it is used for. -In many formats, there are lists of words that represent a specific concept. For example in programming languages, the control statements is one concept, data type names another, and built in functions of the language a third. The &kate; Syntax Highlighting System can use such lists to detect and mark words in the text to emphasise concepts of the text formats. +In many formats, there are lists of words that represent a specific concept. For example in programming languages, the control statements is one concept, data type names another, and built in functions of the language a third. The &kate; Syntax Highlighting System can use such lists to detect and mark words in the text to emphasise concepts of the text formats. -Default Styles +Default Styles -If you open a C++ source file, a &Java; source file and an HTML document in &kate;, you will see that even though the formats are different, and thus different words are chosen for special treatment, the colours used are the same. This is because &kate; has a predefined list of Default Styles, that are employed by the individual syntax definitions. +If you open a C++ source file, a &Java; source file and an HTML document in &kate;, you will see that even though the formats are different, and thus different words are chosen for special treatment, the colours used are the same. This is because &kate; has a predefined list of Default Styles, that are employed by the individual syntax definitions. -This makes it easy to recognise similar concepts in different text formats. For example comments are present in almost any programming, scripting or markup language, and when they are rendered using the same style in all languages, you do not have to stop and think to identify them within the text. +This makes it easy to recognise similar concepts in different text formats. For example comments are present in almost any programming, scripting or markup language, and when they are rendered using the same style in all languages, you do not have to stop and think to identify them within the text. -All styles in a syntax definition use one of the default styles. A few syntax definitions use more styles that there are defaults, so if you use a format often, it may be worth launching the configuration dialogue to see if some concepts are using the same style. For example there is only one default style for strings, but as the perl programming language operates with two types of strings, you can enhance the highlighting by configuring those to be slightly different. +All styles in a syntax definition use one of the default styles. A few syntax definitions use more styles that there are defaults, so if you use a format often, it may be worth launching the configuration dialogue to see if some concepts are using the same style. For example there is only one default style for strings, but as the perl programming language operates with two types of strings, you can enhance the highlighting by configuring those to be slightly different. @@ -193,74 +105,47 @@ -The Highlight Definition &XML; Format +The Highlight Definition &XML; Format -Overview - -This section is an overview of the Highlight Definition &XML; format. It will describe the main components and their meaning and usage, and go into detail with the detection rules. - -The formal definition, aka the DTD is stored in the file language.dtd which should be installed on your system in the folder $TDEDIR/share/apps/kate/syntax. +Overview + +This section is an overview of the Highlight Definition &XML; format. It will describe the main components and their meaning and usage, and go into detail with the detection rules. + +The formal definition, aka the DTD is stored in the file language.dtd which should be installed on your system in the folder $TDEDIR/share/apps/kate/syntax. -Main components of &kate; Highlight Definitions +Main components of &kate; Highlight Definitions -The General Section +The General Section -The General Section contains information on the comment format of the described language, and defines whether keywords are case sensitive. +The General Section contains information on the comment format of the described language, and defines whether keywords are case sensitive. -Highlighting +Highlighting -The Highlighting section contains all data required to analyse and render the text. This includes: +The Highlighting section contains all data required to analyse and render the text. This includes: -ItemDatas -Contains ItemData elements, each defining a style. +ItemDatas +Contains ItemData elements, each defining a style. -Keyword lists +Keyword lists -Each list has a name, and may contain any number of items. +Each list has a name, and may contain any number of items. -Contexts +Contexts -Contains contexts, which again contain the syntax detection rules. +Contains contexts, which again contain the syntax detection rules. @@ -275,347 +160,175 @@ -Highlight Detection Rules - -This section describes the syntax detection rules. - -Each rule can match zero or more characters at the beginning of the string they are asked to test. If the rule matches, the matching characters are assigned the style or attribute defined by the rule, and a rule may ask that the current context is switched. - -The attribute and context attributes are common to all rules. - -A rule looks like this: - -<RuleName attribute="(identifier)" context="(identifier|order)" [rule specific attributes] /> - -The attribute identifies the style to use for matched characters by name or index, and the context identifies the context to use from here. - -The attribute can be identified either by name, or by its zero-based index in the ItemDatas group. - -The context can be identified by: +Highlight Detection Rules + +This section describes the syntax detection rules. + +Each rule can match zero or more characters at the beginning of the string they are asked to test. If the rule matches, the matching characters are assigned the style or attribute defined by the rule, and a rule may ask that the current context is switched. + +The attribute and context attributes are common to all rules. + +A rule looks like this: + +<RuleName attribute="(identifier)" context="(identifier|order)" [rule specific attributes] /> + +The attribute identifies the style to use for matched characters by name or index, and the context identifies the context to use from here. + +The attribute can be identified either by name, or by its zero-based index in the ItemDatas group. + +The context can be identified by: -An identifier, currently only its zero-based index in the contexts group. +An identifier, currently only its zero-based index in the contexts group. -An order telling the engine to stay in the current context (#stay), or to pop back to a previous context used in the string (#pop). -To go back more steps, the #pop keyword can be repeated: #pop#pop#pop +An order telling the engine to stay in the current context (#stay), or to pop back to a previous context used in the string (#pop). +To go back more steps, the #pop keyword can be repeated: #pop#pop#pop -Some rules can have child rules which are then evaluated if and only if the parent rule matched. The entire matched string will be given the attribute defined by the parent rule. A rule with child rules looks like this: +Some rules can have child rules which are then evaluated if and only if the parent rule matched. The entire matched string will be given the attribute defined by the parent rule. A rule with child rules looks like this: -<RuleName (attributes)> +<RuleName (attributes)> <ChildRuleName (attributes) /> ... </RuleName> -Rule specific attributes varies and are described in the following list. +Rule specific attributes varies and are described in the following list. -The Rules in Detail +The Rules in Detail -DetectChar +DetectChar -Detect a single specific character. Commonly used for example to find the ends of quoted strings. -<DetectChar char="(character)" (common attributes) /> -The char attribute defines the character to match. +Detect a single specific character. Commonly used for example to find the ends of quoted strings. +<DetectChar char="(character)" (common attributes) /> +The char attribute defines the character to match. -Detect2Chars +Detect2Chars -Detect two specific characters in a defined order. -<Detect2Chars char="(character)" char1="(character)" (common attributes) /> -The char attribute defines the first character to match, char1 the second. +Detect two specific characters in a defined order. +<Detect2Chars char="(character)" char1="(character)" (common attributes) /> +The char attribute defines the first character to match, char1 the second. -AnyChar +AnyChar -Detect one character of a set of specified characters. -<AnyChar String="(string)" (common attributes) /> -The String attribute defines the set of characters. +Detect one character of a set of specified characters. +<AnyChar String="(string)" (common attributes) /> +The String attribute defines the set of characters. -StringDetect +StringDetect -Detect an exact string. -<StringDetect String="(string)" [insensitive="TRUE|FALSE;"] (common attributes) /> -The String attribute defines the string to match. The insensitive attribute defaults to FALSE and is fed to the string comparison function. If the value is TRUE insensitive comparing is used. +Detect an exact string. +<StringDetect String="(string)" [insensitive="TRUE|FALSE;"] (common attributes) /> +The String attribute defines the string to match. The insensitive attribute defaults to FALSE and is fed to the string comparison function. If the value is TRUE insensitive comparing is used. -RegExpr +RegExpr -Matches against a regular expression. -<RegExpr String="(string)" [insensitive="TRUE|FALSE;"] [minimal="TRUE|FALSE"] (common attributes) /> -The String attribute defines the regular expression. -insensitive defaults to FALSE and is fed to the regular expression engine. -minimal defaults to FALSE and is fed to the regular expression engine. -Because the rules are always matched against the beginning of the current string, a regular expression starting with a caret (^) indicates that the rule should only be matched against the start of a line. -See Regular Expressions for more information on those. +Matches against a regular expression. +<RegExpr String="(string)" [insensitive="TRUE|FALSE;"] [minimal="TRUE|FALSE"] (common attributes) /> +The String attribute defines the regular expression. +insensitive defaults to FALSE and is fed to the regular expression engine. +minimal defaults to FALSE and is fed to the regular expression engine. +Because the rules are always matched against the beginning of the current string, a regular expression starting with a caret (^) indicates that the rule should only be matched against the start of a line. +See Regular Expressions for more information on those. -Keyword +Keyword -Detect a keyword from a specified list. -<keyword String="(list name)" (common attributes) /> -The String attribute identifies the keyword list by name. A list with that name must exist. +Detect a keyword from a specified list. +<keyword String="(list name)" (common attributes) /> +The String attribute identifies the keyword list by name. A list with that name must exist. -Int +Int -Detect an integer number. -<Int (common attributes) /> -This rule has no specific attributes. Child rules are typically used to detect combinations of L and U after the number, indicating the integer type in program code. +Detect an integer number. +<Int (common attributes) /> +This rule has no specific attributes. Child rules are typically used to detect combinations of L and U after the number, indicating the integer type in program code. -Float +Float -Detect a floating point number. -<Float (common attributes) -/> -This rule has no specific attributes. +Detect a floating point number. +<Float (common attributes) +/> +This rule has no specific attributes. -HlCOct +HlCOct -Detect an octal point number representation. -<HlCOct (common attributes) /> -This rule has no specific attributes. +Detect an octal point number representation. +<HlCOct (common attributes) /> +This rule has no specific attributes. -HlCHex +HlCHex -Detect a hexadecimal number representation. -<Int (common attributes) /> -This rule has no specific attributes. +Detect a hexadecimal number representation. +<Int (common attributes) /> +This rule has no specific attributes. -HlCStringChar +HlCStringChar -Detect an escaped character. -<HlCStringChar (common attributes) -/> -This rule has no specific attributes. - -It matches letteral representations of invisible characters commonly used in program code, for example \n (newline) or \t (TAB). - -The following characters will match if they follow a backslash (\): abefnrtv"'?. Additionally, escaped hexadecimal numbers like for example \xff and escaped octal numbers, for example \033 will match. +Detect an escaped character. +<HlCStringChar (common attributes) +/> +This rule has no specific attributes. + +It matches letteral representations of invisible characters commonly used in program code, for example \n (newline) or \t (TAB). + +The following characters will match if they follow a backslash (\): abefnrtv"'?. Additionally, escaped hexadecimal numbers like for example \xff and escaped octal numbers, for example \033 will match. -RangeDetect +RangeDetect -Detect a string with defined start and end characters. -<RangeDetect char="(character)" char1="(character)" (common attributes) /> -char defines the character starting the range, char2 the character ending the range. -Useful to detect for example small quoted strings and the like, but note that since the hl engine works on one line at a time, this will not find strings spanning over a line break. +Detect a string with defined start and end characters. +<RangeDetect char="(character)" char1="(character)" (common attributes) /> +char defines the character starting the range, char2 the character ending the range. +Useful to detect for example small quoted strings and the like, but note that since the hl engine works on one line at a time, this will not find strings spanning over a line break. -LineContinue +LineContinue -Matches at end of line. -<LineContinue (common attributes) /> -This rule has no specific attributes. -This rule is useful for switching context at end of line. +Matches at end of line. +<LineContinue (common attributes) /> +This rule has no specific attributes. +This rule is useful for switching context at end of line. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/index.docbook index d9202e714c9..62956cc7782 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/index.docbook @@ -13,125 +13,70 @@ - + ]> -The &kate; Handbook +The &kate; Handbook -&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; -&Seth.Rothberg; &Seth.Rothberg.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; +&Seth.Rothberg; &Seth.Rothberg.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2000 -2001 -&Seth.Rothberg; +2000 +2001 +&Seth.Rothberg; -20022003 -&Anders.Lund; +20022003 +&Anders.Lund; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-01-26 -2.00.00 +2002-01-26 +2.00.00 -&kate; is a programmer's text editor for &kde; 2.2 and above. +&kate; is a programmer's text editor for &kde; 2.2 and above. -This handbook documents &kate; Version 1.0 +This handbook documents &kate; Version 1.0 -KDE -tdebase -Kate -text -editor -programmer -programming -projects -MDI -Multi -Document -Interface -terminal -console +KDE +tdebase +Kate +text +editor +programmer +programming +projects +MDI +Multi +Document +Interface +terminal +console -Introduction +Introduction -Welcome to &kate;, a programmer's text editor for &kde; version 2.2 and above. Some of &kate;'s many features include configurable syntax highlighting for languages ranging from C and C++ to HTML to bash scripts, the ability to create and maintain projects, a multiple document interface (MDI), and a self-contained terminal emulator. +Welcome to &kate;, a programmer's text editor for &kde; version 2.2 and above. Some of &kate;'s many features include configurable syntax highlighting for languages ranging from C and C++ to HTML to bash scripts, the ability to create and maintain projects, a multiple document interface (MDI), and a self-contained terminal emulator. -But &kate; is more than a programmer's editor. Its ability to open several files at once makes it ideal for editing &UNIX;'s many configuration files. This document was written in &kate;. +But &kate; is more than a programmer's editor. Its ability to open several files at once makes it ideal for editing &UNIX;'s many configuration files. This document was written in &kate;. - -Editing this manual... + +Editing this manual... @@ -153,253 +98,123 @@ -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kate;. Program copyright 2000, 2001, 2002 by the &kate; developer team. +&kate;. Program copyright 2000, 2001, 2002 by the &kate; developer team. -The &kate; team: +The &kate; team: -&Christoph.Cullmann; &Christoph.Cullmann.mail; -Project Manager & Core Developer +&Christoph.Cullmann; &Christoph.Cullmann.mail; +Project Manager & Core Developer -&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; -Core Developer, Perl syntax highlighting, documentation +&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; +Core Developer, Perl syntax highlighting, documentation -&Joseph.Wenninger; &Joseph.Wenninger.mail; -Core Developer, syntax highlighting +&Joseph.Wenninger; &Joseph.Wenninger.mail; +Core Developer, syntax highlighting -Michael Bartl michael.bartl1@chello.at -Core Developer +Michael Bartl michael.bartl1@chello.at +Core Developer -Phlip phlip_cpp@my-deja.com -The project compiler +Phlip phlip_cpp@my-deja.com +The project compiler -&Waldo.Bastian; &Waldo.Bastian.mail; -The cool buffer system +&Waldo.Bastian; &Waldo.Bastian.mail; +The cool buffer system -Matt Newell newellm@proaxis.com -Testing... +Matt Newell newellm@proaxis.com +Testing... -Michael McCallum gholam@xtra.co.nz -Core Developer +Michael McCallum gholam@xtra.co.nz +Core Developer -Jochen Wilhemly digisnap@cs.tu-berlin.de -KWrite Author +Jochen Wilhemly digisnap@cs.tu-berlin.de +KWrite Author -&Michael.Koch; &Michael.Koch.mail; -KWrite port to KParts +&Michael.Koch; &Michael.Koch.mail; +KWrite port to KParts -Christian Gebauer gebauer@bigfoot.com -Unspecified +Christian Gebauer gebauer@bigfoot.com +Unspecified -&Simon.Hausmann; &Simon.Hausmann.mail; -Unspecified +&Simon.Hausmann; &Simon.Hausmann.mail; +Unspecified -Glen Parker glenebob@nwlink.com -KWrite Undo History, KSpell integration +Glen Parker glenebob@nwlink.com +KWrite Undo History, KSpell integration -Scott Manson sdmanson@alltel.net -KWrite XML syntax highlighting support +Scott Manson sdmanson@alltel.net +KWrite XML syntax highlighting support -&John.Firebaugh; &John.Firebaugh.mail; -Various Patches +&John.Firebaugh; &John.Firebaugh.mail; +Various Patches -Many other people have contributed: +Many other people have contributed: -Matteo Merli merlim@libero.it -Highlighting for RPM Spec-Files, Diff and more +Matteo Merli merlim@libero.it +Highlighting for RPM Spec-Files, Diff and more -Rocky Scaletta rocky@purdue.edu -Highlighting for VHDL +Rocky Scaletta rocky@purdue.edu +Highlighting for VHDL -Yury Lebedev -Highlighting for SQL +Yury Lebedev +Highlighting for SQL -Chris Ross -Highlighting for Ferite +Chris Ross +Highlighting for Ferite -Nick Roux -Highlighting for ILERPG +Nick Roux +Highlighting for ILERPG -John Firebaugh -Highlighting for Java, and much more +John Firebaugh +Highlighting for Java, and much more -Carsten Niehaus -Highlighting for LaTeX +Carsten Niehaus +Highlighting for LaTeX -Per Wigren -Highlighting for Makefiles, Python +Per Wigren +Highlighting for Makefiles, Python -Jan Fritz -Highlighting for Python +Jan Fritz +Highlighting for Python -&Daniel.Naber; -Small bugfixes, XML plugin +&Daniel.Naber; +Small bugfixes, XML plugin -Documentation copyright 2000,2001 &Seth.Rothberg; &Seth.Rothberg.mail; +Documentation copyright 2000,2001 &Seth.Rothberg; &Seth.Rothberg.mail; -Documentation copyright 2002, 2003 &Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; +Documentation copyright 2002, 2003 &Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net &underFDL; &underGPL; &highlighting-appendix; @@ -407,8 +222,7 @@ ®exp-appendix; -Installation +Installation &install.intro.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/mdi.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/mdi.docbook index 38ddee1ee8e..76b3536507d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/mdi.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/mdi.docbook @@ -1,88 +1,38 @@ -&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Working With the &kate; <acronym ->MDI</acronym -> +Working With the &kate; <acronym>MDI</acronym> -Overview +Overview -Window, View, Document, Frame, Editor... What are they all in the terminology of &kate;, and how do you get the most out of it? This chapter will explain all of that, and even more. +Window, View, Document, Frame, Editor... What are they all in the terminology of &kate;, and how do you get the most out of it? This chapter will explain all of that, and even more. -The Main Window +The Main Window -Main window The &kate; Main Window is a standard &kde; application window, with the addition of dockable subwindows, or tool windows. It has a Menubar with all the common menus, and some more, and a toolbar providing access to commonly used commands. +Main window The &kate; Main Window is a standard &kde; application window, with the addition of dockable subwindows, or tool windows. It has a Menubar with all the common menus, and some more, and a toolbar providing access to commonly used commands. -The most important part of the window is the Editing Area, by default displaying a single text editor component, in which you can work with your documents. +The most important part of the window is the Editing Area, by default displaying a single text editor component, in which you can work with your documents. -The docking capabilities of the window is used for the tool windows: +The docking capabilities of the window is used for the tool windows: -The File List -The File Selector -The Built in Terminal Emulator +The File List +The File Selector +The Built in Terminal Emulator -And possibly other tool windows, for example provided by plugins. +And possibly other tool windows, for example provided by plugins. -Tool Windows The Tool Windows can be placed anywhere you want them inside or outside the main window by dragging the handle bar in the top of them with the &LMB; pressed, and stacked in shared tab windows if desired. +Tool Windows The Tool Windows can be placed anywhere you want them inside or outside the main window by dragging the handle bar in the top of them with the &LMB; pressed, and stacked in shared tab windows if desired. -When dragging a docked window, a black rectangle will be displayed to indicate where the window will be placed if you release the mouse button, unless you move the mouse cursor outside the main window, in which case the dragged window will become a free floating top level window. +When dragging a docked window, a black rectangle will be displayed to indicate where the window will be placed if you release the mouse button, unless you move the mouse cursor outside the main window, in which case the dragged window will become a free floating top level window. @@ -91,137 +41,60 @@ -The Editor area +The Editor area -Editing Area &kate; is capable of having more than one document open at the same time, and also of splitting the editing area into any number of frames, similar to how for example &konqueror; or the popular emacs text editor works. This way you can view several documents at the same time, or more instances of the same document, handy for example if your document contains definitions in the top that you want to see often for reference. Or you could view a program source header in one frame, while editing the implementation file in another. +Editing Area &kate; is capable of having more than one document open at the same time, and also of splitting the editing area into any number of frames, similar to how for example &konqueror; or the popular emacs text editor works. This way you can view several documents at the same time, or more instances of the same document, handy for example if your document contains definitions in the top that you want to see often for reference. Or you could view a program source header in one frame, while editing the implementation file in another. -When a document is available in more than one editor, changes made in one editor will immediately be reflected in the others as well. This includes changing the text as well as selecting text. Search operations or cursor movement is only reflected in the current editor. +When a document is available in more than one editor, changes made in one editor will immediately be reflected in the others as well. This includes changing the text as well as selecting text. Search operations or cursor movement is only reflected in the current editor. -It is currently not possible to have more instances of the same document open in the sense that one instance will be edited while the other will not. +It is currently not possible to have more instances of the same document open in the sense that one instance will be edited while the other will not. -When splitting an editor into two frames, it is divided into two equally sized frames, both displaying the current document of that editor. The new frame will be at the bottom (in the case of a horizontal split) or at the right (for a vertical split). The new frame gets the focus, which is visualised by a small green led in the focused frame. +When splitting an editor into two frames, it is divided into two equally sized frames, both displaying the current document of that editor. The new frame will be at the bottom (in the case of a horizontal split) or at the right (for a vertical split). The new frame gets the focus, which is visualised by a small green led in the focused frame. -The File List - -File list The file list displays a list of all documents currently open in &kate;. Modified files will have a small floppy disk icon on their left to indicate that state. - -If two or more files with the same name (located in different folders) are open, the names of the second will be prepended <2> and so on. The tool-tip for the file will display its full name including the path, allowing you to choose the desired one. To display a document in the currently active frame, click the document name in the list. - -The default location in the &kate; window is to the left of the editing area, in a dockable tab window shared with the File Selector. +The File List + +File list The file list displays a list of all documents currently open in &kate;. Modified files will have a small floppy disk icon on their left to indicate that state. + +If two or more files with the same name (located in different folders) are open, the names of the second will be prepended <2> and so on. The tool-tip for the file will display its full name including the path, allowing you to choose the desired one. To display a document in the currently active frame, click the document name in the list. + +The default location in the &kate; window is to the left of the editing area, in a dockable tab window shared with the File Selector. -The File Selector +The File Selector -File selector The File Selector is a folder viewer, allowing you to open files from a displayed folder in the current frame. +File selector The File Selector is a folder viewer, allowing you to open files from a displayed folder in the current frame. -From top down, the file selector consist of the following elements: +From top down, the file selector consist of the following elements: -A Toolbar +A Toolbar -This contains standard navigations tool buttons: +This contains standard navigations tool buttons: -Home -Pressing it will cause the folder view to cd to your home folder. +Home +Pressing it will cause the folder view to cd to your home folder. -Up -This will cause the folder view to cd to the immediate parent of the currently displayed folder if possible. +Up +This will cause the folder view to cd to the immediate parent of the currently displayed folder if possible. -Back -Causes the folder view to cd to the previously displayed folder in the history. This button is disabled, if there is no previous item. +Back +Causes the folder view to cd to the previously displayed folder in the history. This button is disabled, if there is no previous item. -Forward -Causes the folder view to cd to the next folder in the history. This button is disabled, if there is no next folder. +Forward +Causes the folder view to cd to the next folder in the history. This button is disabled, if there is no next folder. -Sync -This button will cause the folder view to cd to the folder of the currently active document if possible. This button is disabled, if the active document is a new, unsaved file, or the folder in which it resides can not be decided. +Sync +This button will cause the folder view to cd to the folder of the currently active document if possible. This button is disabled, if the active document is a new, unsaved file, or the folder in which it resides can not be decided. @@ -229,43 +102,24 @@ -A &URL; entry +A &URL; entry -Here you can type the path of a folder to browse. The &URL; entry maintains a list of previously typed paths. To choose one use the arrow button to the right of the entry. -The &URL; entry has folder auto-completion. The completion method can be set using the &RMB; menu of the text entry. - +Here you can type the path of a folder to browse. The &URL; entry maintains a list of previously typed paths. To choose one use the arrow button to the right of the entry. +The &URL; entry has folder auto-completion. The completion method can be set using the &RMB; menu of the text entry. + -A Folder View -This is a standard &kde; folder view. +A Folder View +This is a standard &kde; folder view. -A Filter Entry +A Filter Entry -The Filter entry allows you to enter a filter for the files displayed in the folder view. The filter uses standard globs; patterns must be separated by white space. Example: *.cpp *.h *.moc -To display all files, enter a single asterisk *. -The filter entry saves the last 10 filters entered between sessions, to use one, press the arrow button on the right of the entry and select the desired filter string. +The Filter entry allows you to enter a filter for the files displayed in the folder view. The filter uses standard globs; patterns must be separated by white space. Example: *.cpp *.h *.moc +To display all files, enter a single asterisk *. +The filter entry saves the last 10 filters entered between sessions, to use one, press the arrow button on the right of the entry and select the desired filter string. @@ -275,33 +129,13 @@ -The Built in Terminal Emulator - -Terminal emulator The built in Terminal Emulator is a copy of the &kde; &konsole; terminal application, for your convenience. It is available from the SettingsShow Terminal Emulator menu item or by pressing the F7 key, and will get the focus whenever displayed. Additionally, if the Sync &konsole; with active document option is enabled, it will change into the directory of the current document if possible when it is displayed, or when the current document changes. - -The default location in the &kate; window is at the bottom, below the editing area. - -You can configure the &konsole; using it's &RMB; menu, for more information, see the &konsole; manual. +The Built in Terminal Emulator + +Terminal emulator The built in Terminal Emulator is a copy of the &kde; &konsole; terminal application, for your convenience. It is available from the SettingsShow Terminal Emulator menu item or by pressing the F7 key, and will get the focus whenever displayed. Additionally, if the Sync &konsole; with active document option is enabled, it will change into the directory of the current document if possible when it is displayed, or when the current document changes. + +The default location in the &kate; window is at the bottom, below the editing area. + +You can configure the &konsole; using it's &RMB; menu, for more information, see the &konsole; manual. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/menus.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/menus.docbook index b59173e1e7c..b9d6d439ad1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/menus.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/menus.docbook @@ -1,663 +1,289 @@ - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Menu Entries +Menu Entries -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;N File New + &Ctrl;N File New -This command starts a new document in the editing window. In the Filelist on the left the new file is named Untitled. +This command starts a new document in the editing window. In the Filelist on the left the new file is named Untitled. - &Ctrl;O File Open + &Ctrl;O File Open -This command does not open a file. It launches &kde;'s open file dialogue box which waits for you to select the files you want to open. - -The open file dialogue box works like a simple version of &konqueror;. Use your &LMB; to click on a file name to select it. Double-click on a file name to open that file. Once you've selected a file name, you can also press the OK button to open the file. +This command does not open a file. It launches &kde;'s open file dialogue box which waits for you to select the files you want to open. + +The open file dialogue box works like a simple version of &konqueror;. Use your &LMB; to click on a file name to select it. Double-click on a file name to open that file. Once you've selected a file name, you can also press the OK button to open the file. -Select multiple files by holding down the &Ctrl; or the &Shift; key along with the &LMB;. &Ctrl;Left click selects one file at a time. &Shift;Left click selects a contiguous set of files. +Select multiple files by holding down the &Ctrl; or the &Shift; key along with the &LMB;. &Ctrl;Left click selects one file at a time. &Shift;Left click selects a contiguous set of files. -Clicking on a folder name in the file selection window opens that folder and displays its contents. Clicking on a file name shows a thumbnail view of the file in the preview window to the right of the file system window. +Clicking on a folder name in the file selection window opens that folder and displays its contents. Clicking on a file name shows a thumbnail view of the file in the preview window to the right of the file system window. -Use the buttons and combo box on the toolbar above the file selection window to move through the file system or to adjust the properties of the open file dialogue box. +Use the buttons and combo box on the toolbar above the file selection window to move through the file system or to adjust the properties of the open file dialogue box. -Below the file selection window is the Location combo box. Type the name of the file you want to edit here. If you click the arrow on the right of the drop down box, you can choose from recently used files. Open several files at once by quoting each file name. +Below the file selection window is the Location combo box. Type the name of the file you want to edit here. If you click the arrow on the right of the drop down box, you can choose from recently used files. Open several files at once by quoting each file name. -Below the Location combo box is the Filter combo box. Enter file masks here to filter the kinds of files shown in the selection window. For example, typing the filter *.txt and pressing Enter will limit the display to files with a .txt extension. The Filter combo contains a list of your most recently used filters. +Below the Location combo box is the Filter combo box. Enter file masks here to filter the kinds of files shown in the selection window. For example, typing the filter *.txt and pressing Enter will limit the display to files with a .txt extension. The Filter combo contains a list of your most recently used filters. -File Open Recent +File Open Recent -This command allows you to open a file from a submenu that contains a list of recently edited files. +This command allows you to open a file from a submenu that contains a list of recently edited files. - &Ctrl;S File Save + &Ctrl;S File Save -This command saves your file. Use it often. If the file is Untitled then Save becomes Save As. +This command saves your file. Use it often. If the file is Untitled then Save becomes Save As. -File Save As +File Save As -Name and rename files with this command. It launches the save file dialogue box. This dialogue works just as the open file dialogue box does. You can use it to navigate through your file system, preview existing files, or filter your file view with file masks. - -Type the name you want to give the file you are saving in the Location combo box and press the OK button. +Name and rename files with this command. It launches the save file dialogue box. This dialogue works just as the open file dialogue box does. You can use it to navigate through your file system, preview existing files, or filter your file view with file masks. + +Type the name you want to give the file you are saving in the Location combo box and press the OK button. - &Ctrl;L File Save All + &Ctrl;L File Save All -This command saves all open files. +This command saves all open files. - F5 File Reload + F5 File Reload -Reloads the active file from disk. This command is useful if another program or process has changed the file while you have it open in &kate; +Reloads the active file from disk. This command is useful if another program or process has changed the file while you have it open in &kate; -File Open with +File Open with -This command launches the open with dialogue box that allows you to select another application to open the active file. Your file will still be open in &kate;. +This command launches the open with dialogue box that allows you to select another application to open the active file. Your file will still be open in &kate;. - &Ctrl;P File Print + &Ctrl;P File Print -Print the active file. +Print the active file. - &Ctrl;W File Close + &Ctrl;W File Close -Close the active file with this command. If you have made unsaved changes, you will be prompted to save the file before &kate; closes it. +Close the active file with this command. If you have made unsaved changes, you will be prompted to save the file before &kate; closes it. -File Close All +File Close All -This command closes all the files you have open in &kate;. +This command closes all the files you have open in &kate;. -File New Window +File New Window -Opens another instance of &kate;. The new instance will be identical to your previous instance. +Opens another instance of &kate;. The new instance will be identical to your previous instance. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit -This command closes &kate; and any files you were editing. If you have made unsaved changes to any of the files you were editing, you will be prompted to save them. +This command closes &kate; and any files you were editing. If you have made unsaved changes to any of the files you were editing, you will be prompted to save them. -The <guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> Menu -The Edit menu contains a host of commands, all to work with the currently active document. +The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu +The Edit menu contains a host of commands, all to work with the currently active document. -Menu Entries +Menu Entries -&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo +&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo -Undo the last editing command (typing, copying, cutting etc.) -If grouped undo is enabled, this may undo several editing commands of the same type, like typing in characters. +Undo the last editing command (typing, copying, cutting etc.) +If grouped undo is enabled, this may undo several editing commands of the same type, like typing in characters. -&Ctrl;&Shift;Z Edit Redo +&Ctrl;&Shift;Z Edit Redo -Redo the last undo step. +Redo the last undo step. -&Ctrl;X Edit Cut +&Ctrl;X Edit Cut -Removes selected text if any, and places a copy of the removed text in the clipboard. +Removes selected text if any, and places a copy of the removed text in the clipboard. -&Ctrl;C Edit Copy +&Ctrl;C Edit Copy -Copies selected text, if any, to the clipboard. +Copies selected text, if any, to the clipboard. -&Ctrl;V Edit Paste +&Ctrl;V Edit Paste -Copies the first item in the clipboard into the editor at cursor position. -If Overwrite Selection is enabled, the pasted text will overwrite the selection, if any. +Copies the first item in the clipboard into the editor at cursor position. +If Overwrite Selection is enabled, the pasted text will overwrite the selection, if any. -&Ctrl;A Edit Select All +&Ctrl;A Edit Select All -Selects all text in the editor. +Selects all text in the editor. -&Ctrl;&Shift;A Edit Deselect +&Ctrl;&Shift;A Edit Deselect -Deselects the selected text in the editor if any. +Deselects the selected text in the editor if any. -F4 Edit Toggle Block Selection +F4 Edit Toggle Block Selection -Toggles Selection Mode. When the Selection Mode is BLOCK, you can make vertical selections, ie select column 5 to 10 in lines 9 to 15. -The status bar shows the current state of the Selection Mode, either NORM or BLK. +Toggles Selection Mode. When the Selection Mode is BLOCK, you can make vertical selections, ie select column 5 to 10 in lines 9 to 15. +The status bar shows the current state of the Selection Mode, either NORM or BLK. -&Ctrl;F Edit Find +&Ctrl;F Edit Find -Launch the Find Dialogue to allow you to search for text in the edited document. +Launch the Find Dialogue to allow you to search for text in the edited document. -F3 Edit Find Next +F3 Edit Find Next -Go to the nearest downwards match of the last text or regular expression searched for, starting from cursor position +Go to the nearest downwards match of the last text or regular expression searched for, starting from cursor position -&Shift;F3 Edit Find Previous +&Shift;F3 Edit Find Previous -Go to the nearest upwards match of the last text or regular expression searched for, starting from cursor position +Go to the nearest upwards match of the last text or regular expression searched for, starting from cursor position -&Ctrl;R Edit Replace +&Ctrl;R Edit Replace -Launch the Replace Dialogue to replace one or more instances of a defined text with something else. +Launch the Replace Dialogue to replace one or more instances of a defined text with something else. @@ -665,129 +291,54 @@ -&Ctrl;I Edit Indent +&Ctrl;I Edit Indent - -Adds one indent step to the current line, or all lines covered by a possible selection. -The indentation depends on the settings in the Indent Page of the Configuration Dialogue. + +Adds one indent step to the current line, or all lines covered by a possible selection. +The indentation depends on the settings in the Indent Page of the Configuration Dialogue. -&Ctrl;&Shift;I Edit Unindent +&Ctrl;&Shift;I Edit Unindent -Removes one indent step from the current line, or all lines covered by a possible selection. -The indentation depends on the settings in the Indent Page of the Configuration Dialogue. +Removes one indent step from the current line, or all lines covered by a possible selection. +The indentation depends on the settings in the Indent Page of the Configuration Dialogue. -&Ctrl;# Edit Comment +&Ctrl;# Edit Comment -Enclose or prepend the current line, or any selected text, with (a) comment marker(s), according to the rules defined by the syntax rules for the document. Does nothing if no comment rules are defined. -This is interesting mostly when working with source code, for example with C/C++, perl, python &etc;, as well as with markup text like HTML, &XML;, CSS and so on. +Enclose or prepend the current line, or any selected text, with (a) comment marker(s), according to the rules defined by the syntax rules for the document. Does nothing if no comment rules are defined. +This is interesting mostly when working with source code, for example with C/C++, perl, python &etc;, as well as with markup text like HTML, &XML;, CSS and so on. -&Ctrl;&Shift;# Edit +&Ctrl;&Shift;# Edit -Remove comment marker(s) from the current line, or a possible selection, according to the syntax rules for the document. -See also EditComment +Remove comment marker(s) from the current line, or a possible selection, according to the syntax rules for the document. +See also EditComment -&Ctrl;G Edit Go to line... +&Ctrl;G Edit Go to line... -Launches the Go To Line Dialogue, allowing you to enter the number of a line to find in the document +Launches the Go To Line Dialogue, allowing you to enter the number of a line to find in the document @@ -796,97 +347,44 @@ -The <guimenu ->Document</guimenu ->Menu -The Document menu has two purposes: +The <guimenu>Document</guimenu>Menu +The Document menu has two purposes: -Allowing you to change the document-specific settings for the currently active document. -Choosing which of the open documents to work on +Allowing you to change the document-specific settings for the currently active document. +Choosing which of the open documents to work on -A menu entry for each open document will be available below the entries documented here. Clicking one of these will bring the requested document to focus. If you have multiple frames, an editor for that document will be displayed in the currently active frame. +A menu entry for each open document will be available below the entries documented here. Clicking one of these will bring the requested document to focus. If you have multiple frames, an editor for that document will be displayed in the currently active frame. -Menu items +Menu items -&Alt;Left Document Back +&Alt;Left Document Back -This will bring the previous document in the stack in focus. If you have multiple frames, an editor for the document will be displayed in the currently active frame. The order is the order in which documents were opened, rather than a logical history. This behaviour may change in future versions of &kate;. +This will bring the previous document in the stack in focus. If you have multiple frames, an editor for the document will be displayed in the currently active frame. The order is the order in which documents were opened, rather than a logical history. This behaviour may change in future versions of &kate;. -&Alt;Right Document Forward +&Alt;Right Document Forward -This will bring the previous document in the stack in focus. If you have multiple frames, an editor for the document will be displayed in the currently active frame. -The order is the order in which the documents were opened, rather than a logical history. This behaviour may change in future versions of &kate;. +This will bring the previous document in the stack in focus. If you have multiple frames, an editor for the document will be displayed in the currently active frame. +The order is the order in which the documents were opened, rather than a logical history. This behaviour may change in future versions of &kate;. -Document Highlight Mode +Document Highlight Mode -The Highlight Mode menu allows you to manually decide which syntax rules to use for highlighting and comment'ing the active document. The menu groups the available syntax rule sets into logical groups. +The Highlight Mode menu allows you to manually decide which syntax rules to use for highlighting and comment'ing the active document. The menu groups the available syntax rule sets into logical groups. @@ -894,53 +392,27 @@ -Document End of Line +Document End of Line -This menu allows you to manually set the End of Line mode for the active document. Changing the mode will replace all line separators in the document with the character sequence for the new mode. +This menu allows you to manually set the End of Line mode for the active document. Changing the mode will replace all line separators in the document with the character sequence for the new mode. -The available modes are: +The available modes are: -Unix +Unix -On &UNIX; systems, end of line is a single newline character. +On &UNIX; systems, end of line is a single newline character. -DOS -On DOS (and &Windows;) systems, end of line is represented by a carriage return followed by a newline. +DOS +On DOS (and &Windows;) systems, end of line is represented by a carriage return followed by a newline. -Mac -On &Mac; systems, end of line is represented by a by a carriage return. +Mac +On &Mac; systems, end of line is represented by a by a carriage return. @@ -949,157 +421,69 @@ -The <guimenu ->View</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu -The View menu allows you to manage settings specific to the active editor, and to manage frames. +The View menu allows you to manage settings specific to the active editor, and to manage frames. -Menu Items +Menu Items -&Ctrl;&Shift;L View Split Vertical +&Ctrl;&Shift;L View Split Vertical -This will split the frame (which may be the main editing area) in two equally sized frames, the new one to the left of the current one. The new frame gets the focus, and will display the same document as the old one. -See also Working with the &kate; MDI +This will split the frame (which may be the main editing area) in two equally sized frames, the new one to the left of the current one. The new frame gets the focus, and will display the same document as the old one. +See also Working with the &kate; MDI -&Ctrl;&Shift;T View Split Horizontal +&Ctrl;&Shift;T View Split Horizontal -Splits the current frame (which may be the main editing area) in two equally sized frames, the new one at the bottom half. The new frame gets the focus, and displays the same document as the old one. -See also Working with the &kate; MDI +Splits the current frame (which may be the main editing area) in two equally sized frames, the new one at the bottom half. The new frame gets the focus, and displays the same document as the old one. +See also Working with the &kate; MDI -&Ctrl;&Shift;R View Close Current +&Ctrl;&Shift;R View Close Current -Closes the active frame. This is disabled, if there is only one frame (the main editing area). No documents get closed by closing a frame – they will still be available in the Documents Menu as well as in the File List. See also Working with the &kate; MDI +Closes the active frame. This is disabled, if there is only one frame (the main editing area). No documents get closed by closing a frame – they will still be available in the Documents Menu as well as in the File List. See also Working with the &kate; MDI -F6 View Show Icon Border +F6 View Show Icon Border -This is a toggle item. Setting it on checked will make the side of the active editor, and vice versa. +This is a toggle item. Setting it on checked will make the side of the active editor, and vice versa. -F11 View Show Line Numbers +F11 View Show Line Numbers -This is a toggle Item. Setting it on checked will make a pane displaying the line numbers of the document visible in the left border of the active editor, and vice versa. +This is a toggle Item. Setting it on checked will make a pane displaying the line numbers of the document visible in the left border of the active editor, and vice versa. -View Go +View Go @@ -1108,48 +492,22 @@ -F8 Next View +F8 Next View -Move focus to the next frame; the order is following order of creation rather than that of visual logic. This behaviour may change in a future version of &kate; -See also Working with the &kate; MDI +Move focus to the next frame; the order is following order of creation rather than that of visual logic. This behaviour may change in a future version of &kate; +See also Working with the &kate; MDI -&Shift;F8 Previous View +&Shift;F8 Previous View -Move focus to the previous frame; the order is following order of creation rather than that of visual logic. This behaviour may change in a future version of &kate; -See also Working with the &kate; MDI +Move focus to the previous frame; the order is following order of creation rather than that of visual logic. This behaviour may change in a future version of &kate; +See also Working with the &kate; MDI @@ -1166,59 +524,33 @@ -The <guimenu ->Bookmarks</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu> Menu -The Bookmarks menu allows you to work with the bookmarks in the currently active document. +The Bookmarks menu allows you to work with the bookmarks in the currently active document. -Below the entries described here, one entry for each bookmark in the active document will be available. The text will be the first few words of the marked line. Choose an item to move the cursor to the start of that line. The editor will scroll as necessary to make that line visible. +Below the entries described here, one entry for each bookmark in the active document will be available. The text will be the first few words of the marked line. Choose an item to move the cursor to the start of that line. The editor will scroll as necessary to make that line visible. -Menu Items +Menu Items -&Ctrl;B Bookmarks Toggle Bookmark +&Ctrl;B Bookmarks Toggle Bookmark -Sets or removes a bookmark in the current line of the active document. (If it's there, it is removed, otherwise one is set.) +Sets or removes a bookmark in the current line of the active document. (If it's there, it is removed, otherwise one is set.) -Bookmarks Clear Bookmarks +Bookmarks Clear Bookmarks -Clears (removes) all bookmarks of the active document. +Clears (removes) all bookmarks of the active document. @@ -1229,30 +561,12 @@ -The <guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> Menu - -The Tools menu contains commands of two categories: -Tools doing advanced editing of the current document, for example Editing Command. +The <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu + +The Tools menu contains commands of two categories: +Tools doing advanced editing of the current document, for example Editing Command. -Tools adding functionality to the application, for example the Find in Files tool. +Tools adding functionality to the application, for example the Find in Files tool. @@ -1262,62 +576,30 @@ -&Ctrl;M Edit Editing Command... +&Ctrl;M Edit Editing Command... - -Launch the Editing Command Dialogue + +Launch the Editing Command Dialogue -&Ctrl;&Shift;F Edit Find in Files... +&Ctrl;&Shift;F Edit Find in Files... -Launch the Find In Files Dialogue to search for a specified text in files on disk. +Launch the Find In Files Dialogue to search for a specified text in files on disk. -Edit Apply Word Wrap +Edit Apply Word Wrap - -Apply word wrap to ? according to the settings in the ? + +Apply word wrap to ? according to the settings in the ? @@ -1325,16 +607,10 @@ -Edit Spelling... +Edit Spelling... -Spell check the current document using the &kde; spell checker +Spell check the current document using the &kde; spell checker @@ -1346,111 +622,61 @@ -The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -The Settings menu allows you to change the properties of the main window, such as showing/hiding toolbars and boxes, and provides access to the configuration dialogues. +The Settings menu allows you to change the properties of the main window, such as showing/hiding toolbars and boxes, and provides access to the configuration dialogues. -Settings Show Toolbar +Settings Show Toolbar -Toggles the display of the main toolbar. +Toggles the display of the main toolbar. -Settings Show Filelist +Settings Show Filelist -Toggle the display of the &kate; Filelist +Toggle the display of the &kate; Filelist -Settings Show Fileselector +Settings Show Fileselector -Toggle the display of the &kate; File Selector +Toggle the display of the &kate; File Selector -F7 Settings Show Konsole +F7 Settings Show Konsole -Toggles the display of the built in terminal emulator. -When activated the first time, the terminal will be created. -When the terminal emulator is displayed, it will get the focus, so that you can start typing in commands immediately. If the Sync Konsole with Active Document option is enabled in the General Page of the Main configuration dialogue the shell session will change to the directory of the active document, if it is a local file. +Toggles the display of the built in terminal emulator. +When activated the first time, the terminal will be created. +When the terminal emulator is displayed, it will get the focus, so that you can start typing in commands immediately. If the Sync Konsole with Active Document option is enabled in the General Page of the Main configuration dialogue the shell session will change to the directory of the active document, if it is a local file. -Settings Configure Shortcuts +Settings Configure Shortcuts -Display the the familiar &kde; Keyboard Shortcut Configuration Dialogue. +Display the the familiar &kde; Keyboard Shortcut Configuration Dialogue. @@ -1458,34 +684,20 @@ -Settings Configure Toolbars +Settings Configure Toolbars -Display the the familiar &kde; Toolbar Configuration Dialogue. +Display the the familiar &kde; Toolbar Configuration Dialogue. -Settings Configure &kate; +Settings Configure &kate; -Launch the Main Configuration Dialogue +Launch the Main Configuration Dialogue @@ -1496,20 +708,11 @@ -The <guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu -The Help menu provides access to the online help available for &kate;; as well as to the usual about dialogues. +The Help menu provides access to the online help available for &kate;; as well as to the usual about dialogues. -As well as the standard &kde; Help menu items described below, if you have installed the tdeaddons package with additional &kate; plugins, you will have a menu entry to show the Plugins User Manuals. +As well as the standard &kde; Help menu items described below, if you have installed the tdeaddons package with additional &kate; plugins, you will have a menu entry to show the Plugins User Manuals. &help.menu.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/part.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/part.docbook index f0e11a9d57c..24d3c81be3d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/part.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/part.docbook @@ -1,303 +1,136 @@ - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Working with the &kate; editor +Working with the &kate; editor -Overview +Overview -The &kate; editor is the editing area of the &kate; window. This editor is also used by &kwrite;, and it can be used in &konqueror; for displaying text files from your local computer, or from the network. +The &kate; editor is the editing area of the &kate; window. This editor is also used by &kwrite;, and it can be used in &konqueror; for displaying text files from your local computer, or from the network. -The editor is composed of the following components: +The editor is composed of the following components: -The editing area -This is where the text of your document is located. +The editing area +This is where the text of your document is located. -The Scroll bars +The Scroll bars -The scroll bars indicate the position of the visible part of the document text, and can be used to move around the document. Dragging the scrollbars will not cause the insertion cursor to be moved. -The scroll bars are displayed and hidden as required. +The scroll bars indicate the position of the visible part of the document text, and can be used to move around the document. Dragging the scrollbars will not cause the insertion cursor to be moved. +The scroll bars are displayed and hidden as required. -The Icon Border +The Icon Border -The icon border is a small pane on the left side of the editor, displaying a small icon next to marked lines. -You can set or remove a bookmark in a visible line by clicking the &LMB; in the icon border next to that line. -The display of the icon border can be toggled using the View Show Icon Border menu item. +The icon border is a small pane on the left side of the editor, displaying a small icon next to marked lines. +You can set or remove a bookmark in a visible line by clicking the &LMB; in the icon border next to that line. +The display of the icon border can be toggled using the View Show Icon Border menu item. -The Line Numbers Pane +The Line Numbers Pane -The Line numbers pane shows the line numbers of all visible lines in the document. -The display of the Line Numbers Pane can be toggled using the View Show Line Numbers menu item. +The Line numbers pane shows the line numbers of all visible lines in the document. +The display of the Line Numbers Pane can be toggled using the View Show Line Numbers menu item. -Also in this Chapter: -Navigating in the Text -Working with the Selection -Copying and Pasting Text -Finding and Replacing Text -Using Bookmarks -Automatically Wrapping Text +Also in this Chapter: +Navigating in the Text +Working with the Selection +Copying and Pasting Text +Finding and Replacing Text +Using Bookmarks +Automatically Wrapping Text -Navigating in the Text +Navigating in the Text -This section is not yet documented. +This section is not yet documented. -Working with the Selection +Working with the Selection -There are two basic ways of selecting text in &kate;: using the mouse, and using the keyboard. +There are two basic ways of selecting text in &kate;: using the mouse, and using the keyboard. -To select using the mouse, hold down the &LMB; while dragging the mouse cursor from where the selection should start, to the desired end point. The text gets selected as you drag. +To select using the mouse, hold down the &LMB; while dragging the mouse cursor from where the selection should start, to the desired end point. The text gets selected as you drag. -Double-clicking a word will select that word. +Double-clicking a word will select that word. -Triple-clicking in a line will select the entire line. +Triple-clicking in a line will select the entire line. -If &Shift; is held down while clicking, text will be selected: +If &Shift; is held down while clicking, text will be selected: -If nothing is already selected, from the text cursor position to the mouse cursor position. -If there is a selection, from and including that selection to the mouse cursor position +If nothing is already selected, from the text cursor position to the mouse cursor position. +If there is a selection, from and including that selection to the mouse cursor position -When selecting text by dragging the mouse, the selected text is copied to the clipboard, and can be pasted by clicking the middle mouse button in the editor, or in any other application to which you want to paste the text. +When selecting text by dragging the mouse, the selected text is copied to the clipboard, and can be pasted by clicking the middle mouse button in the editor, or in any other application to which you want to paste the text. -To select using the keyboard, hold down the &Shift; key while using the navigation keys (The Arrow keys, Page Up, Page Down, Home and End, possibly in combination with &Ctrl; to extend the move of the text cursor). - -See also the section Navigating in the Text in this Chapter. - -To Copy the current selection, use the Edit Copy menu item or the keyboard shortcut (defaults to &Ctrl;C). - -To Deselect the current selection, use the Edit Deselect menu item, or the keyboard shortcut (default is &Ctrl;&Shift;A), or click with the &LMB; in the editor. +To select using the keyboard, hold down the &Shift; key while using the navigation keys (The Arrow keys, Page Up, Page Down, Home and End, possibly in combination with &Ctrl; to extend the move of the text cursor). + +See also the section Navigating in the Text in this Chapter. + +To Copy the current selection, use the Edit Copy menu item or the keyboard shortcut (defaults to &Ctrl;C). + +To Deselect the current selection, use the Edit Deselect menu item, or the keyboard shortcut (default is &Ctrl;&Shift;A), or click with the &LMB; in the editor. -Using Block Selection - -When Block Selection is enabled, you can make vertical selections in the text, meaning selecting limited columns from multiple lines. This is handy for working with tab separated lines for example. - -Block Selection can be toggled using the Edit Toggle Block Selection menu item. The default keyboard shortcut is F4 +Using Block Selection + +When Block Selection is enabled, you can make vertical selections in the text, meaning selecting limited columns from multiple lines. This is handy for working with tab separated lines for example. + +Block Selection can be toggled using the Edit Toggle Block Selection menu item. The default keyboard shortcut is F4 -Using Overwrite Selection +Using Overwrite Selection -If Overwrite Selection is enabled, typing or pasting text into the selection will cause the selected text to be replaced. If not enabled, new text will be added at the position of the text cursor. +If Overwrite Selection is enabled, typing or pasting text into the selection will cause the selected text to be replaced. If not enabled, new text will be added at the position of the text cursor. -Overwrite Selection is enabled by default. +Overwrite Selection is enabled by default. -To change the setting for this option, use the Select Page of the Configuration Dialogue. +To change the setting for this option, use the Select Page of the Configuration Dialogue. -Using Persistent Selection +Using Persistent Selection -When Persistent selection is enabled, typing characters or moving the cursor will not cause the Selection to become deselected. This means that you can move the cursor away from the selection and type text. +When Persistent selection is enabled, typing characters or moving the cursor will not cause the Selection to become deselected. This means that you can move the cursor away from the selection and type text. -Persistent Selection is disabled by default. +Persistent Selection is disabled by default. -Persistent Selection can be enabled in the Select Page of the Configuration Dialogue. +Persistent Selection can be enabled in the Select Page of the Configuration Dialogue. -If Persistent Selection and Overwrite Selection are both enabled, typing or pasting text when the text cursor is inside the selection will cause it to be replaced and deselected. +If Persistent Selection and Overwrite Selection are both enabled, typing or pasting text when the text cursor is inside the selection will cause it to be replaced and deselected. @@ -306,325 +139,152 @@ -Copying and Pasting Text - -To copy text, select it and use the Edit Copy menu item. Additionally, selecting text with the mouse will cause selected text to be copied to the clipboard. - -To paste the text currently in the clipboard, use the EditPaste menu item. - -Additionally, text selected with the mouse may be pasted by clicking the middle mouse button at the desired position. +Copying and Pasting Text + +To copy text, select it and use the Edit Copy menu item. Additionally, selecting text with the mouse will cause selected text to be copied to the clipboard. + +To paste the text currently in the clipboard, use the EditPaste menu item. + +Additionally, text selected with the mouse may be pasted by clicking the middle mouse button at the desired position. -If you are using the &kde; desktop, you can retrieve earlier copied text from any application using the &klipper; icon in the &kicker; icon tray. +If you are using the &kde; desktop, you can retrieve earlier copied text from any application using the &klipper; icon in the &kicker; icon tray. -Finding and Replacing Text +Finding and Replacing Text -The <guilabel ->Find Text</guilabel -> and <guilabel ->Replace Text</guilabel -> Dialogues +The <guilabel>Find Text</guilabel> and <guilabel>Replace Text</guilabel> Dialogues -The Find and Replace Text dialogues in &kate; are very much the same, except the Replace Text dialogue offers the means of entering a replacement string along with a few extra options. +The Find and Replace Text dialogues in &kate; are very much the same, except the Replace Text dialogue offers the means of entering a replacement string along with a few extra options. -The dialogues offer the following common options: +The dialogues offer the following common options: -Text to Find -This is where to enter the search string. The interpretation of the string depends on some of the options described below. +Text to Find +This is where to enter the search string. The interpretation of the string depends on some of the options described below. -Regular Expression +Regular Expression -If checked, the search string is interpreted as a regular expression. A button for using a graphical tool to create or edit the expression will be enabled. -See Regular Expressions for more on these. +If checked, the search string is interpreted as a regular expression. A button for using a graphical tool to create or edit the expression will be enabled. +See Regular Expressions for more on these. -Case Insensitive +Case Insensitive -If enabled, the search will be case insensitive. +If enabled, the search will be case insensitive. -Whole Words Only +Whole Words Only -If checked, the search will only match if there is a word boundary at both ends of the string matching, meaning not an alphanumeric character - either some other visible character or a line end. +If checked, the search will only match if there is a word boundary at both ends of the string matching, meaning not an alphanumeric character - either some other visible character or a line end. -From Beginning +From Beginning -If checked, the search will start at the beginning of the first line in the document, otherwise it will start at cursor position. +If checked, the search will start at the beginning of the first line in the document, otherwise it will start at cursor position. -Find Backwards +Find Backwards -If checked, the search will look for the first match above the starting point, either cursor position or the beginning of the document, if the From Beginning option is enabled. +If checked, the search will look for the first match above the starting point, either cursor position or the beginning of the document, if the From Beginning option is enabled. -The Replace Text Dialogue offers some additional options: +The Replace Text Dialogue offers some additional options: -Replace With -This is where to enter the replacement string. +Replace With +This is where to enter the replacement string. -Selected Text +Selected Text -This option is disabled if no text is selected, or if the Prompt on Replace option is enabled. If checked, all matches of the search string within the selected text will be replaced with the replace string. +This option is disabled if no text is selected, or if the Prompt on Replace option is enabled. If checked, all matches of the search string within the selected text will be replaced with the replace string. -Prompt on Replace -If checked, a small dialogue will prompt you for what to do for each time a match is found. It offers the following options: +Prompt on Replace +If checked, a small dialogue will prompt you for what to do for each time a match is found. It offers the following options: -Yes -Activate this to replace the current match (which is selected in the editor). +Yes +Activate this to replace the current match (which is selected in the editor). -No -Activate to skip the current match, and try to find another one. +No +Activate to skip the current match, and try to find another one. -All -Activate to cancel prompting, and just replace all matches. +All +Activate to cancel prompting, and just replace all matches. -Close -Activate this skip the current match and end the searching. +Close +Activate this skip the current match and end the searching. - + -There is currently no way to use minimal matching when searching for a regular expression. This will be added in a future version of &kate; +There is currently no way to use minimal matching when searching for a regular expression. This will be added in a future version of &kate; -Finding Text - -To find text, launch the Find Text Dialogue with &Ctrl;For from the Edit Find... menu item,enter a search string, set the options as desired and hit Ok. If no matches is found between the starting point for the search (either the text cursor position or the beginning of the document) you will be prompted for permission to continue from the start (or end, if you are searching backwards) of the document. - -If a match is found it is selected and the Find Text Dialogue is hidden, but stay tuned, finding further matches is very easy: - -To find the next match in the search direction, use the Edit Find Next command or press F3. - -To find the next match in the opposite direction, use the Edit Find Previous command or press &Shift;F3. - -If no match is found before reaching the document border, you will be prompted for permission to cross that. +Finding Text + +To find text, launch the Find Text Dialogue with &Ctrl;For from the Edit Find... menu item,enter a search string, set the options as desired and hit Ok. If no matches is found between the starting point for the search (either the text cursor position or the beginning of the document) you will be prompted for permission to continue from the start (or end, if you are searching backwards) of the document. + +If a match is found it is selected and the Find Text Dialogue is hidden, but stay tuned, finding further matches is very easy: + +To find the next match in the search direction, use the Edit Find Next command or press F3. + +To find the next match in the opposite direction, use the Edit Find Previous command or press &Shift;F3. + +If no match is found before reaching the document border, you will be prompted for permission to cross that. -Replacing Text - -To replace text, launch the Replace text Dialogue using the Edit Replace command, or the &Ctrl;R shortcut, enter a search string and optionally a replace string (if the replace string is empty, each match will be replaced with ""), set the options as desired and hit the Ok button. +Replacing Text + +To replace text, launch the Replace text Dialogue using the Edit Replace command, or the &Ctrl;R shortcut, enter a search string and optionally a replace string (if the replace string is empty, each match will be replaced with ""), set the options as desired and hit the Ok button. -If you are using a regular expression to find the text to replace, you can employ backreferences to reuse text captured in parenthesised subpatterns of the expression. -See for more on these. +If you are using a regular expression to find the text to replace, you can employ backreferences to reuse text captured in parenthesised subpatterns of the expression. +See for more on these. @@ -632,100 +292,48 @@ -Using Bookmarks +Using Bookmarks -The bookmarks feature allows you to mark certain lines, to be able to easily find them again. +The bookmarks feature allows you to mark certain lines, to be able to easily find them again. -You can set or remove a bookmark in a line in two ways: +You can set or remove a bookmark in a line in two ways: -Moving the insertion cursor to that line, and activate the BookmarksToggle Bookmark (&Ctrl;B) command. +Moving the insertion cursor to that line, and activate the BookmarksToggle Bookmark (&Ctrl;B) command. -Clicking in the Icon Border next to that line. +Clicking in the Icon Border next to that line. -Bookmarks are available in the Bookmarks menu. The individual bookmarks are available as menu items, labelled with the line number of the line with the bookmark, and the first few characters of the text in the line. To move the insertion cursor to the beginning of a bookmarked line, open the menu and select the bookmark. +Bookmarks are available in the Bookmarks menu. The individual bookmarks are available as menu items, labelled with the line number of the line with the bookmark, and the first few characters of the text in the line. To move the insertion cursor to the beginning of a bookmarked line, open the menu and select the bookmark. -If the Reopen Files option in the Config Dialogue is enabled (or if &kate; was started by the session manager), your bookmarks will be restored when the document is reopened. +If the Reopen Files option in the Config Dialogue is enabled (or if &kate; was started by the session manager), your bookmarks will be restored when the document is reopened. -Automatically Wrapping text - -This feature allows you to have the text formatted in a very simple way: the text will be wrapped, so that no lines exceed a maximum number of characters per line, unless there is a longer string of non-whitespace characters. - -To enable/disable it, check/uncheck the Word Wrap checkbox in the edit page of the configuration dialogue. - -To set the maximum line width (maximum characters per line), use the Wrap Words At option in the edit page of the configuration dialogue. - -If enabled, it has the following effects: -While typing, the editor will automatically insert a hard line break after the last whitespace character at a position before the maximum line width is reached. -While loading a document, the editor will wrap the text in a similar way, so that no lines are longer than the maximum line width, if they contain any whitespace allowing that. +Automatically Wrapping text + +This feature allows you to have the text formatted in a very simple way: the text will be wrapped, so that no lines exceed a maximum number of characters per line, unless there is a longer string of non-whitespace characters. + +To enable/disable it, check/uncheck the Word Wrap checkbox in the edit page of the configuration dialogue. + +To set the maximum line width (maximum characters per line), use the Wrap Words At option in the edit page of the configuration dialogue. + +If enabled, it has the following effects: +While typing, the editor will automatically insert a hard line break after the last whitespace character at a position before the maximum line width is reached. +While loading a document, the editor will wrap the text in a similar way, so that no lines are longer than the maximum line width, if they contain any whitespace allowing that. -There is currently no way to set word wrap for document types, or even to enable or disable the feature on document level. This will be fixed in a future version of &kate; +There is currently no way to set word wrap for document types, or even to enable or disable the feature on document level. This will be fixed in a future version of &kate; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/plugins.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/plugins.docbook index 6431b95829c..5f0bbaa1ffe 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/plugins.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/plugins.docbook @@ -1,32 +1,11 @@ - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Working with Plugins -This chapter will describe topics related to using plugins +Working with Plugins +This chapter will describe topics related to using plugins diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/regular-expressions.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/regular-expressions.docbook index c692da92cd5..5adc38a3f0c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/regular-expressions.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kate/regular-expressions.docbook @@ -1,491 +1,162 @@ -&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Regular Expressions +Regular Expressions -This Appendix contains a brief but hopefully sufficient and -covering introduction to the world of regular -expressions. It documents regular expressions in the form +This Appendix contains a brief but hopefully sufficient and +covering introduction to the world of regular +expressions. It documents regular expressions in the form available within &kate;, which is not compatible with the regular expressions of perl, nor with those of for example -grep. +grep. -Introduction - -Regular Expressions provides us with a way to describe some possible contents of a text string in a way understood by a small piece of software, so that it can investigate if a text matches, and also in the case of advanced applications with the means of saving pieces or the matching text. - -An example: Say you want to search a text for paragraphs that starts with either of the names Henrik or Pernille followed by some form of the verb say. - -With a normal search, you would start out searching for the first name, Henrik maybe followed by sa like this: Henrik sa, and while looking for matches, you would have to discard those not being the beginning of a paragraph, as well as those in which the word starting with the letters sa was not either says, said or so. And then of cause repeat all of that with the next name... - -With Regular Expressions, that task could be accomplished with a single search, and with a larger degree of preciseness. - -To achieve this, Regular Expressions defines rules for expressing in details a generalisation of a string to match. Our example, which we might literally express like this: A line starting with either Henrik or Pernille (possibly following up to 4 blanks or tab characters) followed by a whitespace followed by sa and then either ys or id could be expressed with the following regular expression: ^[ \t]{0,4}(Henrik|Pernille) sa(ys|id) - -The above example demonstrates all four major concepts of modern Regular Expressions, namely: +Introduction + +Regular Expressions provides us with a way to describe some possible contents of a text string in a way understood by a small piece of software, so that it can investigate if a text matches, and also in the case of advanced applications with the means of saving pieces or the matching text. + +An example: Say you want to search a text for paragraphs that starts with either of the names Henrik or Pernille followed by some form of the verb say. + +With a normal search, you would start out searching for the first name, Henrik maybe followed by sa like this: Henrik sa, and while looking for matches, you would have to discard those not being the beginning of a paragraph, as well as those in which the word starting with the letters sa was not either says, said or so. And then of cause repeat all of that with the next name... + +With Regular Expressions, that task could be accomplished with a single search, and with a larger degree of preciseness. + +To achieve this, Regular Expressions defines rules for expressing in details a generalisation of a string to match. Our example, which we might literally express like this: A line starting with either Henrik or Pernille (possibly following up to 4 blanks or tab characters) followed by a whitespace followed by sa and then either ys or id could be expressed with the following regular expression: ^[ \t]{0,4}(Henrik|Pernille) sa(ys|id) + +The above example demonstrates all four major concepts of modern Regular Expressions, namely: -Patterns -Assertions -Quantifiers -Back references +Patterns +Assertions +Quantifiers +Back references -The caret (^) starting the expression is an assertion, being true only if the following matching string is at the start of a line. - -The stings [ \t] and (Henrik|Pernille) sa(ys|id) are patterns. The first one is a character class that matches either a blank or a (horizontal) tab character; the other pattern contains first a subpattern matching either Henrik or Pernille, then a piece matching the exact string sa and finally a subpattern matching either ys or id - -The string {0,4} is a quantifier saying anywhere from 0 up to 4 of the previous. - -Because regular expression software supporting the concept of back references saves the entire matching part of the string as well as sub-patterns enclosed in parentheses, given some means of access to those references, we could get our hands on either the whole match (when searching a text document in an editor with a regular expression, that is often marked as selected) or either the name found, or the last part of the verb. - -All together, the expression will match where we wanted it to, and only there. - -The following sections will describe in details how to construct and use patterns, character classes, assertions, quantifiers and back references, and the final section will give a few useful examples. +The caret (^) starting the expression is an assertion, being true only if the following matching string is at the start of a line. + +The stings [ \t] and (Henrik|Pernille) sa(ys|id) are patterns. The first one is a character class that matches either a blank or a (horizontal) tab character; the other pattern contains first a subpattern matching either Henrik or Pernille, then a piece matching the exact string sa and finally a subpattern matching either ys or id + +The string {0,4} is a quantifier saying anywhere from 0 up to 4 of the previous. + +Because regular expression software supporting the concept of back references saves the entire matching part of the string as well as sub-patterns enclosed in parentheses, given some means of access to those references, we could get our hands on either the whole match (when searching a text document in an editor with a regular expression, that is often marked as selected) or either the name found, or the last part of the verb. + +All together, the expression will match where we wanted it to, and only there. + +The following sections will describe in details how to construct and use patterns, character classes, assertions, quantifiers and back references, and the final section will give a few useful examples. -Patterns +Patterns -Patterns consists of literal strings and character classes. Patterns may contain sub-patterns, which are patterns enclosed in parentheses. +Patterns consists of literal strings and character classes. Patterns may contain sub-patterns, which are patterns enclosed in parentheses. -Escaping characters +Escaping characters -In patterns as well as in character classes, some characters have a special meaning. To literally match any of those characters, they must be marked or escaped to let the regular expression software know that it should interpret such characters in their literal meaning. +In patterns as well as in character classes, some characters have a special meaning. To literally match any of those characters, they must be marked or escaped to let the regular expression software know that it should interpret such characters in their literal meaning. -This is done by prepending the character with a backslash (\). +This is done by prepending the character with a backslash (\). -The regular expression software will silently ignore escaping a character that does not have any special meaning in the context, so escaping for example a j (\j) is safe. If you are in doubt whether a character could have a special meaning, you can therefore escape it safely. +The regular expression software will silently ignore escaping a character that does not have any special meaning in the context, so escaping for example a j (\j) is safe. If you are in doubt whether a character could have a special meaning, you can therefore escape it safely. -Escaping of cause includes the backslash character it self, to literally match a such, you would write \\. +Escaping of cause includes the backslash character it self, to literally match a such, you would write \\. -Character Classes and abbreviations - -A character class is an expression that matches one of a defined set of characters. In Regular Expressions, character classes are defined by putting the legal characters for the class in square brackets, [], or by using one of the abbreviated classes described below. - -Simple character classes just contains one or more literal characters, for example [abc] (matching either of the letters a, b or c) or [0123456789] (matching any digit). - -Because letters and digits have a logical order, you can abbreviate those by specifying ranges of them: [a-c] is equal to [abc] and [0-9] is equal to [0123456789]. Combining these constructs, for example [a-fynot1-38] is completely legal (the last one would match, of cause, either of a,b,c,d, e,f,y,n,o,t, 1,2,3 or 8). - -As capital letters are different characters from their non-capital equivalents, to create a caseless character class matching a or b, in any case, you need to write it [aAbB]. - -It is of cause possible to create a negative class matching as anything but To do so put a caret (^) at the beginning of the class: - -[^abc] will match any character but a, b or c. - -In addition to literal characters, some abbreviations are defined, making life still a bit easier: +Character Classes and abbreviations + +A character class is an expression that matches one of a defined set of characters. In Regular Expressions, character classes are defined by putting the legal characters for the class in square brackets, [], or by using one of the abbreviated classes described below. + +Simple character classes just contains one or more literal characters, for example [abc] (matching either of the letters a, b or c) or [0123456789] (matching any digit). + +Because letters and digits have a logical order, you can abbreviate those by specifying ranges of them: [a-c] is equal to [abc] and [0-9] is equal to [0123456789]. Combining these constructs, for example [a-fynot1-38] is completely legal (the last one would match, of cause, either of a,b,c,d, e,f,y,n,o,t, 1,2,3 or 8). + +As capital letters are different characters from their non-capital equivalents, to create a caseless character class matching a or b, in any case, you need to write it [aAbB]. + +It is of cause possible to create a negative class matching as anything but To do so put a caret (^) at the beginning of the class: + +[^abc] will match any character but a, b or c. + +In addition to literal characters, some abbreviations are defined, making life still a bit easier: -\a -This matches the ASCII bell character (BEL, 0x07). +\a +This matches the ASCII bell character (BEL, 0x07). -\f -This matches the ASCII form feed character (FF, 0x0C). +\f +This matches the ASCII form feed character (FF, 0x0C). -\n -This matches the ASCII line feed character (LF, 0x0A, Unix newline). +\n +This matches the ASCII line feed character (LF, 0x0A, Unix newline). -\r -This matches the ASCII carriage return character (CR, 0x0D). +\r +This matches the ASCII carriage return character (CR, 0x0D). -\t -This matches the ASCII horizontal tab character (HT, 0x09). +\t +This matches the ASCII horizontal tab character (HT, 0x09). -\v -This matches the ASCII vertical tab character (VT, 0x0B). +\v +This matches the ASCII vertical tab character (VT, 0x0B). -\xhhhh - -This matches the Unicode character corresponding to the hexadecimal number hhhh (between 0x0000 and 0xFFFF). \0ooo (&ie;, \zero ooo) matches the ASCII/Latin-1 character corresponding to the octal number ooo (between 0 and 0377). +\xhhhh + +This matches the Unicode character corresponding to the hexadecimal number hhhh (between 0x0000 and 0xFFFF). \0ooo (&ie;, \zero ooo) matches the ASCII/Latin-1 character corresponding to the octal number ooo (between 0 and 0377). -. (dot) -This matches any character (including newline). +. (dot) +This matches any character (including newline). -\d -This matches a digit. Equal to [0-9] +\d +This matches a digit. Equal to [0-9] -\D -This matches a non-digit. Equal to [^0-9] or [^\d] +\D +This matches a non-digit. Equal to [^0-9] or [^\d] -\s -This matches a whitespace character. Practically equal to [ \t\n\r] +\s +This matches a whitespace character. Practically equal to [ \t\n\r] -\S -This matches a non-whitespace. Practically equal to [^ \t\r\n], and equal to [^\s] +\S +This matches a non-whitespace. Practically equal to [^ \t\r\n], and equal to [^\s] -\w -Matches any word character - in this case any letter or digit. Note that underscore (_) is not matched, as is the case with perl regular expressions. Equal to [a-zA-Z0-9] +\w +Matches any word character - in this case any letter or digit. Note that underscore (_) is not matched, as is the case with perl regular expressions. Equal to [a-zA-Z0-9] -\W -Matches any non-word character - anything but letters or numbers. Equal to [^a-zA-Z0-9] or [^\w] +\W +Matches any non-word character - anything but letters or numbers. Equal to [^a-zA-Z0-9] or [^\w] @@ -493,69 +164,31 @@ expressions of perl, nor with those of for example -The abbreviated classes can be put inside a custom class, for example to match a word character, a blank or a dot, you could write [\w \.] +The abbreviated classes can be put inside a custom class, for example to match a word character, a blank or a dot, you could write [\w \.] - The POSIX notation of classes, [:<class name>:] is currently not supported. + The POSIX notation of classes, [:<class name>:] is currently not supported. -Characters with special meanings inside character classes +Characters with special meanings inside character classes -The following characters has a special meaning inside the [] character class construct, and must be escaped to be literally included in a class: +The following characters has a special meaning inside the [] character class construct, and must be escaped to be literally included in a class: -] -Ends the character class. Must be escaped unless it is the very first character in the class (may follow an unescaped caret) +] +Ends the character class. Must be escaped unless it is the very first character in the class (may follow an unescaped caret) -^ (caret) -Denotes a negative class, if it is the first character. Must be escaped to match literally if it is the first character in the class. +^ (caret) +Denotes a negative class, if it is the first character. Must be escaped to match literally if it is the first character in the class. -- (dash) -Denotes a logical range. Must always be escaped within a character class. +- (dash) +Denotes a logical range. Must always be escaped within a character class. -\ (backslash) -The escape character. Must always be escaped. +\ (backslash) +The escape character. Must always be escaped. @@ -566,240 +199,110 @@ expressions of perl, nor with those of for example -Alternatives: matching <quote ->one of</quote -> - -If you want to match one of a set of alternative patterns, you can separate those with | (vertical bar character). - -For example to find either John or Harry you would use an expression John|Harry. +Alternatives: matching <quote>one of</quote> + +If you want to match one of a set of alternative patterns, you can separate those with | (vertical bar character). + +For example to find either John or Harry you would use an expression John|Harry. -Sub Patterns +Sub Patterns -Sub patterns are patterns enclosed in parentheses, and they have several uses in the world of regular expressions. +Sub patterns are patterns enclosed in parentheses, and they have several uses in the world of regular expressions. -Specifying alternatives - -You may use a sub pattern to group a set of alternatives within a larger pattern. The alternatives are separated by the character | (vertical bar). - -For example to match either of the words int, float or double, you could use the pattern int|float|double. If you only want to find one if it is followed by some whitespace and then some letters, put the alternatives inside a subpattern: (int|float|double)\s+\w+. +Specifying alternatives + +You may use a sub pattern to group a set of alternatives within a larger pattern. The alternatives are separated by the character | (vertical bar). + +For example to match either of the words int, float or double, you could use the pattern int|float|double. If you only want to find one if it is followed by some whitespace and then some letters, put the alternatives inside a subpattern: (int|float|double)\s+\w+. -Capturing matching text (back references) - -If you want to use a back reference, use a sub pattern to have the desired part of the pattern remembered. - -For example, it you want to find two occurrences of the same word separated by a comma and possibly some whitespace, you could write (\w+),\s*\1. The sub pattern \w+ would find a chunk of word characters, and the entire expression would match if those were followed by a comma, 0 or more whitespace and then an equal chunk of word characters. (The string \1 references the first sub pattern enclosed in parentheses) - - +Capturing matching text (back references) + +If you want to use a back reference, use a sub pattern to have the desired part of the pattern remembered. + +For example, it you want to find two occurrences of the same word separated by a comma and possibly some whitespace, you could write (\w+),\s*\1. The sub pattern \w+ would find a chunk of word characters, and the entire expression would match if those were followed by a comma, 0 or more whitespace and then an equal chunk of word characters. (The string \1 references the first sub pattern enclosed in parentheses) + + -Lookahead Assertions - -A lookahead assertion is a sub pattern, starting with either ?= or ?!. - -For example to match the literal string Bill but only if not followed by Gates, you could use this expression: Bill(?! Gates). (This would find Bill Clinton as well as Billy the kid, but silently ignore the other matches.) - -Sub patterns used for assertions are not captured. - -See also Assertions +Lookahead Assertions + +A lookahead assertion is a sub pattern, starting with either ?= or ?!. + +For example to match the literal string Bill but only if not followed by Gates, you could use this expression: Bill(?! Gates). (This would find Bill Clinton as well as Billy the kid, but silently ignore the other matches.) + +Sub patterns used for assertions are not captured. + +See also Assertions -Characters with a special meaning inside patterns +Characters with a special meaning inside patterns -The following characters have meaning inside a pattern, and must be escaped if you want to literally match them: +The following characters have meaning inside a pattern, and must be escaped if you want to literally match them: -\ (backslash) -The escape character. +\ (backslash) +The escape character. -^ (caret) -Asserts the beginning of the string. +^ (caret) +Asserts the beginning of the string. -$ -Asserts the end of string. +$ +Asserts the end of string. -() (left and right parentheses) -Denotes sub patterns. +() (left and right parentheses) +Denotes sub patterns. -{} (left and right curly braces) -Denotes numeric quantifiers. +{} (left and right curly braces) +Denotes numeric quantifiers. -[] (left and right square brackets) -Denotes character classes. +[] (left and right square brackets) +Denotes character classes. -| (vertical bar) -logical OR. Separates alternatives. +| (vertical bar) +logical OR. Separates alternatives. -+ (plus sign) -Quantifier, 1 or more. ++ (plus sign) +Quantifier, 1 or more. -* (asterisk) -Quantifier, 0 or more. +* (asterisk) +Quantifier, 0 or more. -? (question mark) -An optional character. Can be interpreted as a quantifier, 0 or 1. +? (question mark) +An optional character. Can be interpreted as a quantifier, 0 or 1. @@ -811,125 +314,58 @@ expressions of perl, nor with those of for example -Quantifiers - -Quantifiers allows a regular expression to match a specified number or range of numbers of either a character, character class or sub pattern. - -Quantifiers are enclosed in curly brackets ({ and }) and have the general form {[minimum-occurrences][,[maximum-occurrences]]} - -The usage is best explained by example: +Quantifiers + +Quantifiers allows a regular expression to match a specified number or range of numbers of either a character, character class or sub pattern. + +Quantifiers are enclosed in curly brackets ({ and }) and have the general form {[minimum-occurrences][,[maximum-occurrences]]} + +The usage is best explained by example: -{1} -Exactly 1 occurrence +{1} +Exactly 1 occurrence -{0,1} -Zero or 1 occurrences +{0,1} +Zero or 1 occurrences -{,1} -The same, with less work;) +{,1} +The same, with less work;) -{5,10} -At least 5 but maximum 10 occurrences. +{5,10} +At least 5 but maximum 10 occurrences. -{5,} -At least 5 occurrences, no maximum. +{5,} +At least 5 occurrences, no maximum. -Additionally, there are some abbreviations: +Additionally, there are some abbreviations: -* (asterisk) -similar to {0,}, find any number of occurrences. +* (asterisk) +similar to {0,}, find any number of occurrences. -+ (plus sign) -similar to {1,}, at least 1 occurrence. ++ (plus sign) +similar to {1,}, at least 1 occurrence. -? (question mark) -similar to {0,1}, zero or 1 occurrence. +? (question mark) +similar to {0,1}, zero or 1 occurrence. @@ -938,98 +374,39 @@ expressions of perl, nor with those of for example -Greed +Greed -When using quantifiers with no maximum, regular expressions defaults to match as much of the searched string as possible, commonly known as greedy behaviour. +When using quantifiers with no maximum, regular expressions defaults to match as much of the searched string as possible, commonly known as greedy behaviour. -Modern regular expression software provides the means of turning off greediness, though in a graphical environment it is up to the interface to provide you with access to this feature. For example a search dialogue providing a regular expression search could have a check box labelled Minimal matching as well as it ought to indicate if greediness is the default behaviour. +Modern regular expression software provides the means of turning off greediness, though in a graphical environment it is up to the interface to provide you with access to this feature. For example a search dialogue providing a regular expression search could have a check box labelled Minimal matching as well as it ought to indicate if greediness is the default behaviour. -In context examples +In context examples -Here are a few examples of using quantifiers +Here are a few examples of using quantifiers -^\d{4,5}\s -Matches the digits in 1234 go and 12345 now, but neither in 567 eleven nor in 223459 somewhere +^\d{4,5}\s +Matches the digits in 1234 go and 12345 now, but neither in 567 eleven nor in 223459 somewhere -\s+ -Matches one or more whitespace characters +\s+ +Matches one or more whitespace characters -(bla){1,} -Matches all of blablabla and the bla in blackbird or tabla +(bla){1,} +Matches all of blablabla and the bla in blackbird or tabla -/?> -Matches /> in <closeditem/> as well as > in <openitem>. +/?> +Matches /> in <closeditem/> as well as > in <openitem>. @@ -1039,164 +416,56 @@ expressions of perl, nor with those of for example -Assertions - -Assertions allows a regular expression to match only under certain controlled conditions. - -An assertion does not need a character to match, it rather investigates the surroundings of a possible match before acknowledging it. For example the word boundary assertion does not try to find a non word character opposite a word one at its position, instead it makes sure that there is not a word character. This means that the assertion can match where there is no character, &ie; at the ends of a searched string. - -Some assertions actually does have a pattern to match, but the part of the string matching that will not be a part of the result of the match of the full expression. - -Regular Expressions as documented here supports the following assertions: - - -^ (caret: beginning of string) -Matches the beginning of the searched string. The expression ^Peter will match at Peter in the string Peter, hey! but not in Hey, Peter! +Assertions + +Assertions allows a regular expression to match only under certain controlled conditions. + +An assertion does not need a character to match, it rather investigates the surroundings of a possible match before acknowledging it. For example the word boundary assertion does not try to find a non word character opposite a word one at its position, instead it makes sure that there is not a word character. This means that the assertion can match where there is no character, &ie; at the ends of a searched string. + +Some assertions actually does have a pattern to match, but the part of the string matching that will not be a part of the result of the match of the full expression. + +Regular Expressions as documented here supports the following assertions: + + +^ (caret: beginning of string) +Matches the beginning of the searched string. The expression ^Peter will match at Peter in the string Peter, hey! but not in Hey, Peter! -$ (end of string) -Matches the end of the searched string. - -The expression you\?$ will match at the last you in the string You didn't do that, did you? but nowhere in You didn't do that, right? +$ (end of string) +Matches the end of the searched string. + +The expression you\?$ will match at the last you in the string You didn't do that, did you? but nowhere in You didn't do that, right? -\b (word boundary) -Matches if there is a word character at one side and not a word character at the other. -This is useful to find word ends, for example both ends to find a whole word. The expression \bin\b will match at the separate in in the string He came in through the window, but not at the in in window. +\b (word boundary) +Matches if there is a word character at one side and not a word character at the other. +This is useful to find word ends, for example both ends to find a whole word. The expression \bin\b will match at the separate in in the string He came in through the window, but not at the in in window. -\B (non word boundary) -Matches wherever \b does not. -That means that it will match for example within words: The expression \Bin\B will match at in window but not in integer or I'm in love. +\B (non word boundary) +Matches wherever \b does not. +That means that it will match for example within words: The expression \Bin\B will match at in window but not in integer or I'm in love. -(?=PATTERN) (Positive lookahead) -A lookahead assertion looks at the part of the string following a possible match. The positive lookahead will prevent the string from matching if the text following the possible match does not match the PATTERN of the assertion, but the text matched by that will not be included in the result. -The expression handy(?=\w) will match at handy in handyman but not in That came in handy! +(?=PATTERN) (Positive lookahead) +A lookahead assertion looks at the part of the string following a possible match. The positive lookahead will prevent the string from matching if the text following the possible match does not match the PATTERN of the assertion, but the text matched by that will not be included in the result. +The expression handy(?=\w) will match at handy in handyman but not in That came in handy! -(?!PATTERN) (Negative lookahead) - -The negative lookahead prevents a possible match to be acknowledged if the following part of the searched string does match its PATTERN. -The expression const \w+\b(?!\s*&) will match at const char in the string const char* foo while it can not match const QString in const QString& bar because the & matches the negative lookahead assertion pattern. +(?!PATTERN) (Negative lookahead) + +The negative lookahead prevents a possible match to be acknowledged if the following part of the searched string does match its PATTERN. +The expression const \w+\b(?!\s*&) will match at const char in the string const char* foo while it can not match const QString in const QString& bar because the & matches the negative lookahead assertion pattern. @@ -1208,11 +477,9 @@ expressions of perl, nor with those of for example diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook index 7e2945de9fb..d6dc0909822 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook @@ -3,292 +3,140 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; -&Jost.Schenck; +&Mike.McBride; +&Jost.Schenck; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-04-01 -3.2 +2003-04-01 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -sound server -sound -aRts +KDE +KControl +sound server +sound +aRts -Sound System +Sound System -This control module is used to configure the settings for the &arts; sound server (the &kde; sound server). +This control module is used to configure the settings for the &arts; sound server (the &kde; sound server). -&arts; +&arts; -The top option, labelled Start aRts soundserver on KDE startup, enables (or disables) the &arts; sound server. +The top option, labelled Start aRts soundserver on KDE startup, enables (or disables) the &arts; sound server. -You can find out more about &arts; in general by typing help:/artsbuilder into the &konqueror; location bar, or by finding the &arts-builder; documentation in &khelpcenter;. +You can find out more about &arts; in general by typing help:/artsbuilder into the &konqueror; location bar, or by finding the &arts-builder; documentation in &khelpcenter;. -The rest of the panel consists of options for the &arts; sound server. +The rest of the panel consists of options for the &arts; sound server. -Enable network transparency +Enable network transparency -If this option is enabled, then sound requests from the network will be honoured by the sound server. If this option is disabled, the sound server will only honour requests from the local computer. +If this option is enabled, then sound requests from the network will be honoured by the sound server. If this option is disabled, the sound server will only honour requests from the local computer. -Exchange security and reference info over the X11 server -If you have enabled network transparency, this option will allow the exchange of security and reference information. If in doubt, and you have enabled network transparency, this option should be checked. +Exchange security and reference info over the X11 server +If you have enabled network transparency, this option will allow the exchange of security and reference information. If in doubt, and you have enabled network transparency, this option should be checked. -Run soundserver with realtime priority -Enabling this option will give the sound server priority over other applications, which will help alleviate any problems delivering uninterrupted sound. -This option may require permissions you do not have as a regular user. -This option also relies on certain real time support from your system which may not be available. -If you do not have the necessary permissions, or your system does not have the real time support necessary, enabling this option will not cause problems. +Run soundserver with realtime priority +Enabling this option will give the sound server priority over other applications, which will help alleviate any problems delivering uninterrupted sound. +This option may require permissions you do not have as a regular user. +This option also relies on certain real time support from your system which may not be available. +If you do not have the necessary permissions, or your system does not have the real time support necessary, enabling this option will not cause problems. -Autosuspend if idle for: +Autosuspend if idle for: -Normally &arts; locks the sound card device, so that other applications cannot use it. If you enable this option, then if &arts; has been idle for the amount of time you set, it will suspend itself, allowing any application access to the sound hardware. If &arts; receives another request, it will unsuspend, and continue as normal. Enabling this option may cause a small delay when you start an &arts; application. +Normally &arts; locks the sound card device, so that other applications cannot use it. If you enable this option, then if &arts; has been idle for the amount of time you set, it will suspend itself, allowing any application access to the sound hardware. If &arts; receives another request, it will unsuspend, and continue as normal. Enabling this option may cause a small delay when you start an &arts; application. -Display messages using: +Display messages using: -The application that will be used to display messages from the &arts; server. The default is artsmessage and this should probably not be changed unless you have thoroughly read the &arts; documentation. +The application that will be used to display messages from the &arts; server. The default is artsmessage and this should probably not be changed unless you have thoroughly read the &arts; documentation. -Message Display +Message Display -You can select how detailed the messages are that &arts; displays to you. You can choose to see only error messages, debug messages that are useful to the developers (you probably only want that level if you are a developer, or one has asked you to set this). Or you can choose to see generally informational messages when &arts; is doing something such as suspending itself. +You can select how detailed the messages are that &arts; displays to you. You can choose to see only error messages, debug messages that are useful to the developers (you probably only want that level if you are a developer, or one has asked you to set this). Or you can choose to see generally informational messages when &arts; is doing something such as suspending itself. -At the bottom of this page is a button that allows you to Test Sound. +At the bottom of this page is a button that allows you to Test Sound. -Sound I/O +Sound I/O -I/O means Input and Output, and this panel allows you to configure how &kde; and &arts; interact with your sound hardware. +I/O means Input and Output, and this panel allows you to configure how &kde; and &arts; interact with your sound hardware. -The first option you can configure in the Sound I/O panel is the Sound I/O method:. It tells &arts; which sound system to use for input and output of sound. Current choices are ALSA (Advanced &Linux; Sound Architecture), OSS (Open Sound System), ESD (Enlightenment Sound Daemon), no audio at all and autodetect. In most cases Autodetect will be perfect for you. +The first option you can configure in the Sound I/O panel is the Sound I/O method:. It tells &arts; which sound system to use for input and output of sound. Current choices are ALSA (Advanced &Linux; Sound Architecture), OSS (Open Sound System), ESD (Enlightenment Sound Daemon), no audio at all and autodetect. In most cases Autodetect will be perfect for you. -Other options are: +Other options are: -Enable full duplex operation -This option allows the sound server to play and record sound at the same time. This option should be enabled if you use applications (such as Internet telephones) which require simultaneous record and playback. +Enable full duplex operation +This option allows the sound server to play and record sound at the same time. This option should be enabled if you use applications (such as Internet telephones) which require simultaneous record and playback. -Use custom sound device: +Use custom sound device: -Normally, the sound server defaults to using the device called /dev/dsp for sound output. This should work in most cases. An exception is, for instance, if you are using devfs, then you should use /dev/sound/dsp instead. Other alternatives are things like /dev/dsp0 or /dev/dsp1 if you have a soundcard that supports multiple outputs or you have multiple soundcards. +Normally, the sound server defaults to using the device called /dev/dsp for sound output. This should work in most cases. An exception is, for instance, if you are using devfs, then you should use /dev/sound/dsp instead. Other alternatives are things like /dev/dsp0 or /dev/dsp1 if you have a soundcard that supports multiple outputs or you have multiple soundcards. -If you often use non-&arts; aware applications, and you have a soundcard that supports it, try setting &arts; to use a different device than /dev/dsp. This way, other applications will be able to use the default device, while &arts; is still running, without giving any error messages. +If you often use non-&arts; aware applications, and you have a soundcard that supports it, try setting &arts; to use a different device than /dev/dsp. This way, other applications will be able to use the default device, while &arts; is still running, without giving any error messages. -Use custom sampling rate: +Use custom sampling rate: -Normally, the sound server defaults to using a sampling rate of 44100 Hz (CD quality), which is supported on almost all hardware. If you are using certain Yamaha soundcards, you might need to configure this to 48000 Hz here; if you are using old SoundBlaster cards, like SoundBlaster Pro, you might need to change this to 22050 Hz. All other values are possible too and may make sense in certain contexts (&ie; professional studio equipment). +Normally, the sound server defaults to using a sampling rate of 44100 Hz (CD quality), which is supported on almost all hardware. If you are using certain Yamaha soundcards, you might need to configure this to 48000 Hz here; if you are using old SoundBlaster cards, like SoundBlaster Pro, you might need to change this to 22050 Hz. All other values are possible too and may make sense in certain contexts (&ie; professional studio equipment). -Other custom options: -There are some options offered by &arts; which may not be available in this control module, so you can add command line options here which will be passed directly to artsd. The options will be appended, so they will override the choices made in the GUI. To see the possible choices, open a &konsole; window, and type artsd . +Other custom options: +There are some options offered by &arts; which may not be available in this control module, so you can add command line options here which will be passed directly to artsd. The options will be appended, so they will override the choices made in the GUI. To see the possible choices, open a &konsole; window, and type artsd . -Sound quality: +Sound quality: -These settings allow you to configure the quality of the sounds that will be played. +These settings allow you to configure the quality of the sounds that will be played. -Note that a higher sound quality causes a higher CPU usage. -If you find sound is slow, or using too much CPU, try reducing this setting. +Note that a higher sound quality causes a higher CPU usage. +If you find sound is slow, or using too much CPU, try reducing this setting. -Audio Buffer Size (response time) -This slider determines how quickly the sound server can use your computer's resources. The faster the response time, the higher the CPU load will be. -I would recommend that you start with the sound server set at 250 ms, and use &kde; for a while. If you notice that the sound does not work correctly, increase the responsiveness one step at a time until the problems disappear. +Audio Buffer Size (response time) +This slider determines how quickly the sound server can use your computer's resources. The faster the response time, the higher the CPU load will be. +I would recommend that you start with the sound server set at 250 ms, and use &kde; for a while. If you notice that the sound does not work correctly, increase the responsiveness one step at a time until the problems disappear. @@ -297,13 +145,9 @@ -Mixer +Mixer -If you have installed the optional tdemultimedia package, a &kcontrol; panel allowing configuration of the mixer will also appear here. If installed, you can read about this in its own manual. +If you have installed the optional tdemultimedia package, a &kcontrol; panel allowing configuration of the mixer will also appear here. If installed, you can read about this in its own manual. &midi-kcontrol; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook index 5c2ae385ad5..b3e2fe90bce 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook @@ -1,47 +1,16 @@ -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -<acronym ->MIDI</acronym -> Configuration +<acronym>MIDI</acronym> Configuration -This module is used to determine which MIDI device &kde; should use. You can also install a MIDI wrapper around the device if you want. +This module is used to determine which MIDI device &kde; should use. You can also install a MIDI wrapper around the device if you want. -The use of this module is simple. Click once on the MIDI device that you would like to use from the list. +The use of this module is simple. Click once on the MIDI device that you would like to use from the list. -If you want to use a MIDI mapper, simply mark the checkbox below the list labelled Use MIDI Mapper. This will allow you to select the map in the text box below. You can click on the folder icon to browse your filesystem to find the map if you need it. +If you want to use a MIDI mapper, simply mark the checkbox below the list labelled Use MIDI Mapper. This will allow you to select the map in the text box below. You can click on the folder icon to browse your filesystem to find the map if you need it. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook index 904bd97986e..92572b7a831 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook @@ -2,179 +2,103 @@ - + ]>
-&Mark.Donohoe; -&Martin.R.Jones; - -&Mike.McBride; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mark.Donohoe; +&Martin.R.Jones; + +&Mike.McBride; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-28 -3.2 +2003-09-28 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -background -wallpaper +KDE +KControl +background +wallpaper -Background +Background -The Background module allows you to configure colours or wallpapers for your desktop background. +The Background module allows you to configure colours or wallpapers for your desktop background. -It is comprised of four areas: +It is comprised of four areas: -Desktop selection area +Desktop selection area -The background Preview Monitor +The background Preview Monitor -An area for determining the background colour +An area for determining the background colour -An area for selecting background images +An area for selecting background images -Selecting the desktop +Selecting the desktop -The drop down box labelled Setting for desktop: is used to select the desktop you want to configure. You can select any of the desktops individually, or you can select All Desktops and the changes you make will be applied to all desktops. +The drop down box labelled Setting for desktop: is used to select the desktop you want to configure. You can select any of the desktops individually, or you can select All Desktops and the changes you make will be applied to all desktops. -Preview Monitor +Preview Monitor -This is a preview window. It will give you a sense of what to expect with each change. +This is a preview window. It will give you a sense of what to expect with each change. - + -Background +Background -This section allows you to load a wallpaper on top of the colour gradient chosen in the section below. +This section allows you to load a wallpaper on top of the colour gradient chosen in the section below. -There are three choices available here: +There are three choices available here: -No Picture +No Picture -No picture background will be shown. The colour and pattern choices below will still take effect. +No picture background will be shown. The colour and pattern choices below will still take effect. -Picture +Picture -A single picture will be used as the background for the selected desktops. -How this picture is positioned and scaled can be fine tuned below. +A single picture will be used as the background for the selected desktops. +How this picture is positioned and scaled can be fine tuned below. -Slide show +Slide show -&kde; allows you to have an automatic slide show of wallpaper images. To enable this option, press the Setup... button. In the resulting dialogue you may choose any image or folder of images available on your computer, using the Add... button to navigate your file system. Remove will remove the currently selected entry from the list. - -You may choose the length of time any image is displayed in the Change picture after: box, and you may choose Show pictures in random order if you don't want them displayed in the order they are listed. - -Displaying wallpaper requires that the image be kept in memory. If you are low on memory, using a small, tiled image or none at all is recommended. - -Scaling or centreing a small image still requires an image the size of your display to be maintained in memory. +&kde; allows you to have an automatic slide show of wallpaper images. To enable this option, press the Setup... button. In the resulting dialogue you may choose any image or folder of images available on your computer, using the Add... button to navigate your file system. Remove will remove the currently selected entry from the list. + +You may choose the length of time any image is displayed in the Change picture after: box, and you may choose Show pictures in random order if you don't want them displayed in the order they are listed. + +Displaying wallpaper requires that the image be kept in memory. If you are low on memory, using a small, tiled image or none at all is recommended. + +Scaling or centreing a small image still requires an image the size of your display to be maintained in memory. @@ -182,192 +106,85 @@ -Options +Options - + -Centred -The image will be centred on the screen without changing the size of the image. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. +Centred +The image will be centred on the screen without changing the size of the image. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. -Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. +Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. -Centre Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upward, downward to the right, and to the left. - +Centre Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upward, downward to the right, and to the left. + -Centred Maxpect -The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. +Centred Maxpect +The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. -Tiled Maxpect +Tiled Maxpect -The image will be placed in the corner of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. If there is any space over, the image will be duplicated to fill it. +The image will be placed in the corner of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. If there is any space over, the image will be duplicated to fill it. -Scaled -The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit to all four corners. This may distort the image. +Scaled +The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit to all four corners. This may distort the image. -Centred Auto fit +Centred Auto fit -If the picture fits the desktop size, this mode works like the centred option. If the picture is larger than the desktop then it is scaled down to fit while keeping the aspect ratio. +If the picture fits the desktop size, this mode works like the centred option. If the picture is larger than the desktop then it is scaled down to fit while keeping the aspect ratio. - + -Colours: +Colours: -The first drop down box allows you to choose the type of colour, gradient, or pattern to display under (or in place of) wallpaper. -If you are going to be using a picture as a wallpaper, you can skip this section of the dialogue box. -However, if your chosen wallpaper does not cover the entire desktop, the chosen colours will still show in the remaining space. +The first drop down box allows you to choose the type of colour, gradient, or pattern to display under (or in place of) wallpaper. +If you are going to be using a picture as a wallpaper, you can skip this section of the dialogue box. +However, if your chosen wallpaper does not cover the entire desktop, the chosen colours will still show in the remaining space. -Single Colour -By choosing this mode, you select one colour using the first colour bar, and the entire background is covered with this one colour. +Single Colour +By choosing this mode, you select one colour using the first colour bar, and the entire background is covered with this one colour. -Horizontal Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. +Horizontal Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. -Vertical Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the bottom of the screen. +Vertical Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the bottom of the screen. -Pyramid Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the centre of the screen. +Pyramid Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the centre of the screen. -Pipecross Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different than the pyramid gradient. +Pipecross Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different than the pyramid gradient. -Elliptic Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Blend Colour in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Primary Colour as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. +Elliptic Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Blend Colour in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Primary Colour as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. -Pattern +Pattern -The rest of the list are the names of various patterns or textures you can choose. -Click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. - -Select the primary colour with the first colour bar. If you have chosen a pattern that requires two colours to be set the secondary colour can be set by pressing the appropriate button. +The rest of the list are the names of various patterns or textures you can choose. +Click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. + +Select the primary colour with the first colour bar. If you have chosen a pattern that requires two colours to be set the secondary colour can be set by pressing the appropriate button. @@ -378,33 +195,14 @@ -Blending: +Blending: -The drop down box labelled Blending: contains the options to make a smooth transition (blend) from the wallpaper as it changes to the background. +The drop down box labelled Blending: contains the options to make a smooth transition (blend) from the wallpaper as it changes to the background. -A drop down box allows you to select the blending mode. Many of the modes are similar to blending modes for background colours. Select your mode from the list, and the preview window shows you what it will look like. -The Balance slider adjusts the blending. The results can be seen in the preview window. -The Reverse roles can reverse the role of the picture and the background for some types of blending. +A drop down box allows you to select the blending mode. Many of the modes are similar to blending modes for background colours. Select your mode from the list, and the preview window shows you what it will look like. +The Balance slider adjusts the blending. The results can be seen in the preview window. +The Reverse roles can reverse the role of the picture and the background for some types of blending. @@ -415,70 +213,33 @@ -Advanced options -Located below the preview monitor is a button labeled Advanced Options.... - -To use an external program to determine and change the background of &kde;, simply select Use the following program for drawing the background. Available &kde; programs are listed, select one to enable it. To modify your choice, for example to change the refresh times, you may press the Modify... button. - -To add a third party application (⪚ XEarth you may use the Add... button. A dialogue will open allowing you to choose your application, and fill in other data about it. You may remove any entries from this list by selecting it and pressing the Remove button. - -Using third party external programs to modify or change the background is beyond the scope of this document, see their respective documentation for the format of command-line switches and other configuration information. - -Also in this section you may choose to set the colour of text that is used for icons on the desktop. If you find icon text difficult to read against a wallpaper or pattern, you can choose a solid colour to show beneath text, or enable a shadow under the text to enhance its appearance. - -Finally you can set the Size of the background cache:. The default (2048 KB) is usually a safe choice. +Advanced options +Located below the preview monitor is a button labeled Advanced Options.... + +To use an external program to determine and change the background of &kde;, simply select Use the following program for drawing the background. Available &kde; programs are listed, select one to enable it. To modify your choice, for example to change the refresh times, you may press the Modify... button. + +To add a third party application (⪚ XEarth you may use the Add... button. A dialogue will open allowing you to choose your application, and fill in other data about it. You may remove any entries from this list by selecting it and pressing the Remove button. + +Using third party external programs to modify or change the background is beyond the scope of this document, see their respective documentation for the format of command-line switches and other configuration information. + +Also in this section you may choose to set the colour of text that is used for icons on the desktop. If you find icon text difficult to read against a wallpaper or pattern, you can choose a solid colour to show beneath text, or enable a shadow under the text to enhance its appearance. + +Finally you can set the Size of the background cache:. The default (2048 KB) is usually a safe choice. -Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns - -A pattern is a picture file which &kde; uses as a template to draw your background. The picture file provides the shapes, but &kde; provides the colours. &kde; is packaged with several patterns, and you also can add new patterns. - -To add a new pattern that is available to every user on your computer, simply place the file in $TDEDIR/share/apps/kdesktop/patterns/ - -Copy a .desktop file from this folder, and name it the same as your new pattern image file. Modify the contents to suit your new pattern. - -To add a new pattern for a single user, add the files to $TDEHOME/share/apps/kdesktop/patterns/ - -For best results, the pattern should be a grayscale PNG file. +Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns + +A pattern is a picture file which &kde; uses as a template to draw your background. The picture file provides the shapes, but &kde; provides the colours. &kde; is packaged with several patterns, and you also can add new patterns. + +To add a new pattern that is available to every user on your computer, simply place the file in $TDEDIR/share/apps/kdesktop/patterns/ + +Copy a .desktop file from this folder, and name it the same as your new pattern image file. Modify the contents to suit your new pattern. + +To add a new pattern for a single user, add the files to $TDEHOME/share/apps/kdesktop/patterns/ + +For best results, the pattern should be a grayscale PNG file. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook index c2af7f9e516..e37c3ba5575 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook @@ -1,124 +1,53 @@ - + ]>
-Pat Dowler +Pat Dowler -Matthias Hoelzer +Matthias Hoelzer -Mike McBride +Mike McBride -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-16 -3.2 +2003-10-16 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -Bell -Settings +KDE +KControl +Bell +Settings -System bell +System bell -The system bell or beep is a feature of the X server, which attempts to make good use of the available hardware. +The system bell or beep is a feature of the X server, which attempts to make good use of the available hardware. -&kde; normally doesn't use the system bell; instead using its own system notifications, which could include log entries, message popups, or its own beep. You can configure these in the System Notifications &kcontrol; module. +&kde; normally doesn't use the system bell; instead using its own system notifications, which could include log entries, message popups, or its own beep. You can configure these in the System Notifications &kcontrol; module. -It isn't always possible for the X server to actually make a beep sound with exactly the parameters selected due to hardware limitations. For example, on most PCs, volume control is not very good so the X server seems to fake low volume with a reduced duration of the sound. Thus, if the settings don't seem to do anything, this is because the X server and/or the hardware don't support anything better. +It isn't always possible for the X server to actually make a beep sound with exactly the parameters selected due to hardware limitations. For example, on most PCs, volume control is not very good so the X server seems to fake low volume with a reduced duration of the sound. Thus, if the settings don't seem to do anything, this is because the X server and/or the hardware don't support anything better. -Users are able to set the following parameters for the bell: +Users are able to set the following parameters for the bell: - volume (percentage of maximum volume) - pitch (in Hz) - duration (in milliseconds) + volume (percentage of maximum volume) + pitch (in Hz) + duration (in milliseconds) -You can use the test button to hear how the current settings will sound. +You can use the test button to hear how the current settings will sound. -Section Authors -Pat Dowler, Matthias Hoelzer mhk@kde.org -Converted to KDE 2.0 by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Authors +Pat Dowler, Matthias Hoelzer mhk@kde.org +Converted to KDE 2.0 by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook index f0ec76562e9..6de5f958ac5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook @@ -2,91 +2,45 @@ - + ]>
- + -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -Konqueror -Cache +KDE +KControl +Konqueror +Cache -Cache +Cache -This module allows you to control the size of the local cache folder used by &konqueror;. Note that each user account on your computer has a separate cache folder, and this folder is not shared with other web browsers such as &Netscape;. +This module allows you to control the size of the local cache folder used by &konqueror;. Note that each user account on your computer has a separate cache folder, and this folder is not shared with other web browsers such as &Netscape;. -Storing local copies of web pages that you have visited allows &konqueror; to quickly load their contents on subsequent visits. It will only be necessary to reload the contents from the original site if they have changed since your last visit, or if you click the reload button in &konqueror;. +Storing local copies of web pages that you have visited allows &konqueror; to quickly load their contents on subsequent visits. It will only be necessary to reload the contents from the original site if they have changed since your last visit, or if you click the reload button in &konqueror;. -If you really don't want any of the web pages you visit to be stored on your computer, you can disable &konqueror;'s disk cache by clearing the checkbox labelled Use cache. +If you really don't want any of the web pages you visit to be stored on your computer, you can disable &konqueror;'s disk cache by clearing the checkbox labelled Use cache. -You can set here how aggressively &konqueror; keeps the cache up to date. Keep cache in sync means that &konqueror; will hit the cache for all objects, downloading them if they are not there, and then display the item from the cache. Use cache whenever possible means that &konqueror; will try the cache, and if an object is not there, it will directly download it for display. Offline browsing mode means that &konqueror; will try the cache, and if an object is not there, it will not attempt to download it from the Internet. +You can set here how aggressively &konqueror; keeps the cache up to date. Keep cache in sync means that &konqueror; will hit the cache for all objects, downloading them if they are not there, and then display the item from the cache. Use cache whenever possible means that &konqueror; will try the cache, and if an object is not there, it will directly download it for display. Offline browsing mode means that &konqueror; will try the cache, and if an object is not there, it will not attempt to download it from the Internet. -You can control the size of the cache by typing a number into the text box labelled Disk cache size. This is the average amount of space in kilobytes that the cache folder is allowed to use. When the cache grows too large, &konqueror; will delete older files to reduce the size of the cache folder. +You can control the size of the cache by typing a number into the text box labelled Disk cache size. This is the average amount of space in kilobytes that the cache folder is allowed to use. When the cache grows too large, &konqueror; will delete older files to reduce the size of the cache folder. -This is however, only an average, and during a browsing session the cache could become substantially larger. +This is however, only an average, and during a browsing session the cache could become substantially larger. -You can use the Clear Cache button to empty the cache at any time. +You can use the Clear Cache button to empty the cache at any time.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook index 9945e689c16..ba049c4068e 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook @@ -2,104 +2,53 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-19 -3.2 +2003-10-19 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -clock -date -time -set -configure +KDE +KControl +clock +date +time +set +configure -Date & Time +Date & Time -You can use this module to alter the system date and time, using a convenient graphical interface. +You can use this module to alter the system date and time, using a convenient graphical interface. -You must have system administrator (root) access to change the system date and time. If you do not have this access level, this module will only show you the current settings. +You must have system administrator (root) access to change the system date and time. If you do not have this access level, this module will only show you the current settings. -When you first start, you are in display mode only. To modify your settings, click on Administrator Mode. If you are logged in as root, you will go straight to the change dialogue. If not, &kde; will ask for a superuser password. +When you first start, you are in display mode only. To modify your settings, click on Administrator Mode. If you are logged in as root, you will go straight to the change dialogue. If not, &kde; will ask for a superuser password. -Modifying your settings - -You set the date using the left half of the module. Simply choose your month (the drop down box at the top), year (the spin box at the top), and the day of the month (simply click on the day in the calendar). - -You set the time using the spin boxes at the bottom of the clock. You can also directly enter your value. - -The time is represented in 24 hour format. If you want the system time to be set to 8:00 PM, you need to set the hour spinbox to 20 (8 + 12). If you want the system time set to 8:00 AM, you should set the hour spinbox to 8. - -To set a new time zone, simply select one from the drop down box at the bottom. - -When you have set the correct date and time, simply click Apply to make the changes permanent. +Modifying your settings + +You set the date using the left half of the module. Simply choose your month (the drop down box at the top), year (the spin box at the top), and the day of the month (simply click on the day in the calendar). + +You set the time using the spin boxes at the bottom of the clock. You can also directly enter your value. + +The time is represented in 24 hour format. If you want the system time to be set to 8:00 PM, you need to set the hour spinbox to 20 (8 + 12). If you want the system time set to 8:00 AM, you should set the hour spinbox to 8. + +To set a new time zone, simply select one from the drop down box at the bottom. + +When you have set the correct date and time, simply click Apply to make the changes permanent. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook index 9309da02b22..a4af7121ec2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook @@ -2,187 +2,92 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Mark.Donohoe; &Mark.Donohoe.mail; -&Martin.R.Jones; &Martin.R.Jones.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Mark.Donohoe; &Mark.Donohoe.mail; +&Martin.R.Jones; &Martin.R.Jones.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -colour +KDE +KControl +colour -Colours +Colours -Introduction +Introduction -The Colour Selection module is comprised of 4 sections: +The Colour Selection module is comprised of 4 sections: -The colour scheme preview. -The current Widget Colour. +The colour scheme preview. +The current Widget Colour. -The available Colour Schemes. -The contrast slider. +The available Colour Schemes. +The contrast slider. -A Widget is a commonly-used programmer's term for referring to User Interface elements such as buttons, menus, and scroll bars. You can think of them as the fundamental pieces that are assembled to make your application. +A Widget is a commonly-used programmer's term for referring to User Interface elements such as buttons, menus, and scroll bars. You can think of them as the fundamental pieces that are assembled to make your application. -Preview +Preview -This section of the dialogue demonstrates how a colour scheme applies to a sample selection of widgets. It provides you with a preview of your current colour choices. +This section of the dialogue demonstrates how a colour scheme applies to a sample selection of widgets. It provides you with a preview of your current colour choices. -A colour scheme consists of a set of 18 colours. +A colour scheme consists of a set of 18 colours. -Each of the widgets is labelled to help you identify how your changes will impact the colour scheme. +Each of the widgets is labelled to help you identify how your changes will impact the colour scheme. -<guilabel ->Widget Colour</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Widget Colour</guilabel> -The currently selected member of the colour scheme is shown in the combo box. This widget colour can be changed by clicking on the coloured box below the combo box. A colour selection dialogue will then appear, from which you may select a new colour. When you are happy with your colour selection, press OK in the colour selection dialogue. The colour will be updated in the Preview Area. +The currently selected member of the colour scheme is shown in the combo box. This widget colour can be changed by clicking on the coloured box below the combo box. A colour selection dialogue will then appear, from which you may select a new colour. When you are happy with your colour selection, press OK in the colour selection dialogue. The colour will be updated in the Preview Area. -You may select any member of the colour scheme from the colour combination box. +You may select any member of the colour scheme from the colour combination box. -<guilabel ->Contrast</guilabel -> Slider +<guilabel>Contrast</guilabel> Slider -The Contrast slider allows you to change the contrast between different shadings of the selected colours. +The Contrast slider allows you to change the contrast between different shadings of the selected colours. -The preview area instantly updates to show the effect of your change. +The preview area instantly updates to show the effect of your change. -<guilabel ->Colour Scheme</guilabel -> - -Various colour schemes are supplied with &kde;, and you are free to define your own. - -The three major colour components of each scheme are shown beside the name in the list. To preview a scheme in the larger preview area, click on its name in the list box. - -You can use the &kde;-supplied Colour Schemes as a starting point to devise your own Scheme. Click on the Save Scheme... button to store the colour scheme under a new name, then modify it. - -When such a user-created Colour Scheme is selected, changes to it (as shown in the Preview) can be saved with the Save Scheme... button; it can also be deleted with the Remove Scheme button. - -The &kde;-supplied Schemes themselves cannot be changed or deleted. - -You can use the Import Scheme... button to add new entries to the list. This might be colour schemes that you have created on another computer and saved, or colour schemes you have downloaded from a website. - -You can choose if you want &kde; to apply the colour scheme even to non-&kde; applications by enabling the Apply colours to non-TDE applications. Not all applications will allow this, but most do. +<guilabel>Colour Scheme</guilabel> + +Various colour schemes are supplied with &kde;, and you are free to define your own. + +The three major colour components of each scheme are shown beside the name in the list. To preview a scheme in the larger preview area, click on its name in the list box. + +You can use the &kde;-supplied Colour Schemes as a starting point to devise your own Scheme. Click on the Save Scheme... button to store the colour scheme under a new name, then modify it. + +When such a user-created Colour Scheme is selected, changes to it (as shown in the Preview) can be saved with the Save Scheme... button; it can also be deleted with the Remove Scheme button. + +The &kde;-supplied Schemes themselves cannot be changed or deleted. + +You can use the Import Scheme... button to add new entries to the list. This might be colour schemes that you have created on another computer and saved, or colour schemes you have downloaded from a website. + +You can choose if you want &kde; to apply the colour scheme even to non-&kde; applications by enabling the Apply colours to non-TDE applications. Not all applications will allow this, but most do. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook index c08cc498bcb..5d6bf669449 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook @@ -2,237 +2,128 @@ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -cookie +KDE +KControl +cookie -Cookies +Cookies -Cookies are a mechanism used by web sites to store and retrieve information using your browser. For example, a web site may allow you to customise the content and layout of the pages you see, so that your choices are persistent across different visits to that web site. +Cookies are a mechanism used by web sites to store and retrieve information using your browser. For example, a web site may allow you to customise the content and layout of the pages you see, so that your choices are persistent across different visits to that web site. -The web site is able to remember your preferences by storing a cookie on your computer. Then, on future visits, the web site retrieves the information stored in the cookie to format the content of the site according to your previously specified preferences. +The web site is able to remember your preferences by storing a cookie on your computer. Then, on future visits, the web site retrieves the information stored in the cookie to format the content of the site according to your previously specified preferences. -Thus, cookies play a very useful role in web browsing. Unfortunately, web sites often store and retrieve information in cookies without your explicit knowledge or consent. Some of this information may be quite useful to the web site owners, for example, by allowing them to collect summary statistics on the number of visits different areas of the web sites get, or to customise banner advertising. +Thus, cookies play a very useful role in web browsing. Unfortunately, web sites often store and retrieve information in cookies without your explicit knowledge or consent. Some of this information may be quite useful to the web site owners, for example, by allowing them to collect summary statistics on the number of visits different areas of the web sites get, or to customise banner advertising. -The cookies module of the &kcontrol; allows you to set policies for the use of cookies when you are browsing the web with the &konqueror; web browser. +The cookies module of the &kcontrol; allows you to set policies for the use of cookies when you are browsing the web with the &konqueror; web browser. -Note that the policies that you set using this control module will not apply to other web browsers such as &Netscape;. +Note that the policies that you set using this control module will not apply to other web browsers such as &Netscape;. -Policy +Policy -Using the Policy tab, you can configure the &kde; applications that will handle cookies. You can do this by specifying a general cookie policy as well as special cookie policies for certain domains or hosts. +Using the Policy tab, you can configure the &kde; applications that will handle cookies. You can do this by specifying a general cookie policy as well as special cookie policies for certain domains or hosts. -The top of the policy tab has a checkbox labeled Enable cookies. If you leave this unchecked cookies will be completely disabled. However, this may make browsing rather inconvenient especially as some web sites require the use of browsers with cookies enabled. +The top of the policy tab has a checkbox labeled Enable cookies. If you leave this unchecked cookies will be completely disabled. However, this may make browsing rather inconvenient especially as some web sites require the use of browsers with cookies enabled. -You will probably want to enable cookies and then set specific policies on how you want them to be handled. +You will probably want to enable cookies and then set specific policies on how you want them to be handled. -The first group of options create settings that apply to all cookies. +The first group of options create settings that apply to all cookies. -Only accept cookies from originating server +Only accept cookies from originating server -Some pages try to set cookies from servers other than the one you are seeing the HTML page from. For example, they show you advertisements, and the advertisements are from another computer, often one that belongs to a large advertising group. These advertisements may try to set a cookie which would allow them to track the pages you view across multiple web sites. -Disabling this option will mean only cookies that come from the same web server as you are explicitly connecting to will be accepted. +Some pages try to set cookies from servers other than the one you are seeing the HTML page from. For example, they show you advertisements, and the advertisements are from another computer, often one that belongs to a large advertising group. These advertisements may try to set a cookie which would allow them to track the pages you view across multiple web sites. +Disabling this option will mean only cookies that come from the same web server as you are explicitly connecting to will be accepted. -Automatically accept session cookies +Automatically accept session cookies -An increasingly common use for cookies is not to track your movements across many visits to a web site but to just follow what you do during one single visit. Session cookies are saved as long as you are looking at the site and deleted when you leave it. +An increasingly common use for cookies is not to track your movements across many visits to a web site but to just follow what you do during one single visit. Session cookies are saved as long as you are looking at the site and deleted when you leave it. -Web sites can use this information for various things, most commonly it is a convenience so that you do not have to keep logging in to view pages. For example, on a webmail site, without some kind of session ID, you would have to give your password again for each email you want to read. There are other ways to achieve this, but cookies are simple and very common. +Web sites can use this information for various things, most commonly it is a convenience so that you do not have to keep logging in to view pages. For example, on a webmail site, without some kind of session ID, you would have to give your password again for each email you want to read. There are other ways to achieve this, but cookies are simple and very common. -Enabling this option means that session cookies are always accepted, even if you don't accept any other kind, and even if you choose to reject cookies from a particular site, session cookies from that site will be accepted. +Enabling this option means that session cookies are always accepted, even if you don't accept any other kind, and even if you choose to reject cookies from a particular site, session cookies from that site will be accepted. -Treat all cookies as session cookies +Treat all cookies as session cookies -If this option is enabled, all cookies are treated as session cookies. That is, they are not kept when you leave the web site. +If this option is enabled, all cookies are treated as session cookies. That is, they are not kept when you leave the web site. -The definition of leave the web site is vague. Some cookies may hang around for a little while after you are no longer viewing any pages on a particular web site. This is normal. +The definition of leave the web site is vague. Some cookies may hang around for a little while after you are no longer viewing any pages on a particular web site. This is normal. -The section for Default Policy sets some further options that are mutually exclusive — you can choose only one of these options as the default, but you are free to set a different option for any specific web server. +The section for Default Policy sets some further options that are mutually exclusive — you can choose only one of these options as the default, but you are free to set a different option for any specific web server. -Ask for confirmation +Ask for confirmation -If this option is selected, you will be asked for confirmation every time a cookie is stored or retrieved. You can selectively accept or reject each cookie. The confirmation dialogue will also allow you to set a domain specific policy, if you do not want to confirm each cookie for that domain. +If this option is selected, you will be asked for confirmation every time a cookie is stored or retrieved. You can selectively accept or reject each cookie. The confirmation dialogue will also allow you to set a domain specific policy, if you do not want to confirm each cookie for that domain. -Accept all cookies +Accept all cookies -If this option is selected, all cookies will be accepted without asking for confirmation. +If this option is selected, all cookies will be accepted without asking for confirmation. -Reject all cookies +Reject all cookies -If this option is selected, all cookies will be rejected without asking for confirmation. +If this option is selected, all cookies will be rejected without asking for confirmation. -In addition to the default policy for handling of cookies, which you can set by selecting one of the three options described above, you can also set policies for specific host domains using the controls in the Domain Specific group. +In addition to the default policy for handling of cookies, which you can set by selecting one of the three options described above, you can also set policies for specific host domains using the controls in the Domain Specific group. -The Ask, Accept, or Reject policy can be applied to a specific domain by clicking on the New... button, which brings up a dialogue. In this dialogue, you can type the name of the domain (with a leading dot), then select the policy you want to apply to this domain. Note that entries may also get added while you are browsing, if the default policy is to ask for confirmation, and you choose a general policy for a specific host (for example, by selecting Reject all cookies from this domain when asked to confirm a cookie). +The Ask, Accept, or Reject policy can be applied to a specific domain by clicking on the New... button, which brings up a dialogue. In this dialogue, you can type the name of the domain (with a leading dot), then select the policy you want to apply to this domain. Note that entries may also get added while you are browsing, if the default policy is to ask for confirmation, and you choose a general policy for a specific host (for example, by selecting Reject all cookies from this domain when asked to confirm a cookie). -You can also select a specific host domain from the list and click the Change button to choose a different policy for that domain than the one shown in the list. +You can also select a specific host domain from the list and click the Change button to choose a different policy for that domain than the one shown in the list. -To delete a domain specific policy, choose a domain from the list, and then click the Delete button. The default policy will apply to domains which have been deleted from the list. +To delete a domain specific policy, choose a domain from the list, and then click the Delete button. The default policy will apply to domains which have been deleted from the list. -Management - -In the Management tab you can browse and selectively delete cookies that have been set in the past. - -In the upper part of this dialogue, you can see a list of domains displayed as a tree. Click on the little + next to a domain to see all cookies that have been set for this particular target domain. If you select one of these cookies, you will notice that its contents will show up in the frame Cookie Details below. - -By clicking the Delete button you can now delete the selected cookie. Click Delete All to delete all cookies stored. - -Choose Reload List to reload the list from your hard disk. You might want to do this if you have had the module open and are testing web sites or have made many changes in the module itself. +Management + +In the Management tab you can browse and selectively delete cookies that have been set in the past. + +In the upper part of this dialogue, you can see a list of domains displayed as a tree. Click on the little + next to a domain to see all cookies that have been set for this particular target domain. If you select one of these cookies, you will notice that its contents will show up in the frame Cookie Details below. + +By clicking the Delete button you can now delete the selected cookie. Click Delete All to delete all cookies stored. + +Choose Reload List to reload the list from your hard disk. You might want to do this if you have had the module open and are testing web sites or have made many changes in the module itself. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook index 0c4d8e716c4..65ec3b1d583 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook @@ -2,311 +2,159 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-10-17 -3.1 +2002-10-17 +3.1 -KDE -KControl -crypto -SSL -encryption +KDE +KControl +crypto +SSL +encryption -Encryption Configuration +Encryption Configuration -Introduction -Many applications within &kde; are capable of exchanging information using encrypted files and/or network transmissions. +Introduction +Many applications within &kde; are capable of exchanging information using encrypted files and/or network transmissions. -Use - -All encryption schemes are only as strong as their weakest link. In general, unless you have some previous training/knowledge, it is better to leave this module unchanged. - -The options within this module can be divided into two groups: - -Two options along the bottom of the module, Warn on entering SSL Mode and Warn on leaving SSL mode, allow you to determine if &kde; should inform you when you enter or leave SSL encryption. - -The remainder of the options are about determining which encryption methods to use, and which should not be used. Once you have selected the appropriate encryption protocols, simply click Apply to commit your changes. - -Only make changes to this module if specific information about the strength or weakness of a particular encryption method is given to you from a reliable source. +Use + +All encryption schemes are only as strong as their weakest link. In general, unless you have some previous training/knowledge, it is better to leave this module unchanged. + +The options within this module can be divided into two groups: + +Two options along the bottom of the module, Warn on entering SSL Mode and Warn on leaving SSL mode, allow you to determine if &kde; should inform you when you enter or leave SSL encryption. + +The remainder of the options are about determining which encryption methods to use, and which should not be used. Once you have selected the appropriate encryption protocols, simply click Apply to commit your changes. + +Only make changes to this module if specific information about the strength or weakness of a particular encryption method is given to you from a reliable source. -The <guilabel ->SSL</guilabel -> Tab - -The first option is Enable TLS support if supported by the server. TLS is Transport Layer Security, and is the newest version of SSL. It integrates better than SSL with other protocols, and it has replaced SSL in protocols such as POP3 and SMTP. - -Then next options are Enable SSL v2 and Enable SSL v3. These are the second and third revision of the SSL protocol, and it is normal to enable both. - -There are several different Ciphers available, and you can enable these separately in the lists labelled SSL v2 Ciphers to Use and SSL v3 Ciphers to Use. The actual protocol to use is negotiated by the application and the server when the connection is created. - -There are several Cipher Wizards to help you choose a set that is suitable for your use. +The <guilabel>SSL</guilabel> Tab + +The first option is Enable TLS support if supported by the server. TLS is Transport Layer Security, and is the newest version of SSL. It integrates better than SSL with other protocols, and it has replaced SSL in protocols such as POP3 and SMTP. + +Then next options are Enable SSL v2 and Enable SSL v3. These are the second and third revision of the SSL protocol, and it is normal to enable both. + +There are several different Ciphers available, and you can enable these separately in the lists labelled SSL v2 Ciphers to Use and SSL v3 Ciphers to Use. The actual protocol to use is negotiated by the application and the server when the connection is created. + +There are several Cipher Wizards to help you choose a set that is suitable for your use. -Most Compatible +Most Compatible -Select the settings found to be most compatible with the most servers. +Select the settings found to be most compatible with the most servers. -US Ciphers Only +US Ciphers Only -Select only the US strong (128 bit or greater) ciphers. +Select only the US strong (128 bit or greater) ciphers. -Export Ciphers Only +Export Ciphers Only -Select only the weak (56 bit or less) ciphers. +Select only the weak (56 bit or less) ciphers. -Enable All +Enable All -Select all ciphers and methods. +Select all ciphers and methods. -Finally, there are some general SSL settings. +Finally, there are some general SSL settings. -Use EGD +Use EGD -If selected, OpenSSL will be asked to use the entropy gathering daemon (EGD) for initialising the pseudo-random number generator. +If selected, OpenSSL will be asked to use the entropy gathering daemon (EGD) for initialising the pseudo-random number generator. -Use entropy file +Use entropy file -If selected, OpenSSL will be asked to use the given file as entropy for initialising the pseudo-random number generator. +If selected, OpenSSL will be asked to use the given file as entropy for initialising the pseudo-random number generator. -Warn on entering SSL mode +Warn on entering SSL mode -If selected, you will be notified when entering an SSL enabled site. +If selected, you will be notified when entering an SSL enabled site. -Warn on leaving SSL mode +Warn on leaving SSL mode -If selected, you will be notified when leaving an SSL based site. +If selected, you will be notified when leaving an SSL based site. -Warn on sending unencrypted data +Warn on sending unencrypted data -If selected, you will be notified before sending unencrypted data via a web browser. +If selected, you will be notified before sending unencrypted data via a web browser. -The <guilabel ->OpenSSL</guilabel -> Tab - -Here you can test if your OpenSSL libraries have been detected correctly by &kde;, with the Test button. - -If the test is unsuccessful, you can specify a path to the libraries in the field labelled Path to OpenSSL Shared Libraries. +The <guilabel>OpenSSL</guilabel> Tab + +Here you can test if your OpenSSL libraries have been detected correctly by &kde;, with the Test button. + +If the test is unsuccessful, you can specify a path to the libraries in the field labelled Path to OpenSSL Shared Libraries. -The <guilabel ->Your Certificates</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Your Certificates</guilabel> Tab -The list shows which certificates of yours &kde; knows about. You can easily manage them from here. +The list shows which certificates of yours &kde; knows about. You can easily manage them from here. -The <guilabel ->Authentication</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Authentication</guilabel> Tab -Not yet documented +Not yet documented -The <guilabel ->Peer SSL Certificates</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Peer SSL Certificates</guilabel> Tab -The list box shows which site and personal certificates &kde; knows about. You can easily manage them from here. +The list box shows which site and personal certificates &kde; knows about. You can easily manage them from here. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook index 43b1ffca305..e529e365342 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook @@ -2,153 +2,77 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-08 -3.2 +2003-10-08 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -desktop +KDE +KControl +desktop -Desktop +Desktop -<guilabel ->Appearance Tab</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Appearance Tab</guilabel> -Here you can configure how icons on your desktop appear. +Here you can configure how icons on your desktop appear. -Standard font: -This option can be used to change the typeface used on the desktop. Simply select your typeface from the dropdown box. +Standard font: +This option can be used to change the typeface used on the desktop. Simply select your typeface from the dropdown box. -Font size: -You can change the relative size of the text on the Desktop. +Font size: +You can change the relative size of the text on the Desktop. -Normal text colour: -This option lets you select the colour of normal (or unhighlighted) text. +Normal text colour: +This option lets you select the colour of normal (or unhighlighted) text. -Text background colour: -This option lets you select the background colour of normal text. If left unchecked, the text has a transparent background. If selected, you can choose the colour by pressing the button. +Text background colour: +This option lets you select the background colour of normal text. If left unchecked, the text has a transparent background. If selected, you can choose the colour by pressing the button. -Underline filenames: -Determines if file names are underlined on the Desktop. +Underline filenames: +Determines if file names are underlined on the Desktop. -<guilabel ->Multiple Desktops</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Multiple Desktops</guilabel> -&kde; offers you the possibility to have several virtual desktops. In this tab you can configure the number of desktops as well as their names. Just use the slider to adjust the number of desktops. You can assign names to the desktops by entering text into the text fields below. +&kde; offers you the possibility to have several virtual desktops. In this tab you can configure the number of desktops as well as their names. Just use the slider to adjust the number of desktops. You can assign names to the desktops by entering text into the text fields below. -If enable Mouse wheel over desktop switches desktop then scrolling the wheel over an empty space on the desktop will change the the next virtual desktop numerically, in the direction you scrolled (either up or down). +If enable Mouse wheel over desktop switches desktop then scrolling the wheel over an empty space on the desktop will change the the next virtual desktop numerically, in the direction you scrolled (either up or down). -<guilabel ->Paths</guilabel -> - -You can use this section to configure where Desktop files, Wastebin files, and Autostart files are stored on your computer as well as the standard path for documents. - -By changing the values in the first three of these paths, you will automatically move the files from their previous to their new location. - -Do not just delete the icons from the desktop. If you dislike them move them somewhere else in this module or hide them (with a dot in the front of the filename). If the paths in this dialogue do not exist when &kde; is started, they will be recreated. +<guilabel>Paths</guilabel> + +You can use this section to configure where Desktop files, Wastebin files, and Autostart files are stored on your computer as well as the standard path for documents. + +By changing the values in the first three of these paths, you will automatically move the files from their previous to their new location. + +Do not just delete the icons from the desktop. If you dislike them move them somewhere else in this module or hide them (with a dot in the front of the filename). If the paths in this dialogue do not exist when &kde; is started, they will be recreated. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook index 80ad24d9b3c..53aa4e1ffad 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook @@ -2,218 +2,113 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -desktop +KDE +KControl +desktop -Desktop Behaviour +Desktop Behaviour -<guilabel ->Desktop</guilabel -> Tab +<guilabel>Desktop</guilabel> Tab -Show icons on desktop +Show icons on desktop -Uncheck this option if you do not want to have icons on the desktop. Without icons the desktop may be somewhat faster, but you will no longer be able to drag files to the desktop. -This will not remove any files already stored on the desktop, they will instead be hidden. +Uncheck this option if you do not want to have icons on the desktop. Without icons the desktop may be somewhat faster, but you will no longer be able to drag files to the desktop. +This will not remove any files already stored on the desktop, they will instead be hidden. -If this is enabled, several further options become available: +If this is enabled, several further options become available: -Automatically line up icons -If this option is enabled, &kde; will align icons on a grid on the desktop. If it is not enabled, you may drop icons anywhere, and they will not be aligned for you. +Automatically line up icons +If this option is enabled, &kde; will align icons on a grid on the desktop. If it is not enabled, you may drop icons anywhere, and they will not be aligned for you. -Show hidden files -If this option is enabled, then all hidden files will appear on the desktop. Generally this only clutters your desktop area, but if you are often working with hidden files or folders, this can be useful. -Be very careful when deleting or modifying hidden files. Many of these files are configuration files and are essential for the correct operation of your computer. +Show hidden files +If this option is enabled, then all hidden files will appear on the desktop. Generally this only clutters your desktop area, but if you are often working with hidden files or folders, this can be useful. +Be very careful when deleting or modifying hidden files. Many of these files are configuration files and are essential for the correct operation of your computer. -Allow programs in desktop window +Allow programs in desktop window -Enabling this option allows you to set a program as your desktop background, for example xearth, or &kworldclock; +Enabling this option allows you to set a program as your desktop background, for example xearth, or &kworldclock; -Below these options you can see a list titled Show Icon Previews For. The &kde; desktop has a preview feature for many file types, including HTML files, images, &PostScript; and PDF, sound, web archives (if you have the appropriate &konqueror; plugin installed) and text files. - -if you enable previews for one of these, files of that particular file type will not be represented by standard icons on the desktop, but will instead be shown as miniature previews. On slow computers, the previews can take some time to show up, so you might not want to enable this feature. - -Finally there is Display device icons:. - -On some operating systems (&Linux; and FreeBSD, so far) &kde; can dynamically display icons for each mountable device you have available. This could be &CD-ROM; drives, floppy disk drives, or network shares. - -If you enable this, you can choose what kind, if any, of these devices you would like quick access icons to be displayed for. +Below these options you can see a list titled Show Icon Previews For. The &kde; desktop has a preview feature for many file types, including HTML files, images, &PostScript; and PDF, sound, web archives (if you have the appropriate &konqueror; plugin installed) and text files. + +if you enable previews for one of these, files of that particular file type will not be represented by standard icons on the desktop, but will instead be shown as miniature previews. On slow computers, the previews can take some time to show up, so you might not want to enable this feature. + +Finally there is Display device icons:. + +On some operating systems (&Linux; and FreeBSD, so far) &kde; can dynamically display icons for each mountable device you have available. This could be &CD-ROM; drives, floppy disk drives, or network shares. + +If you enable this, you can choose what kind, if any, of these devices you would like quick access icons to be displayed for. -Show tooltips +Show tooltips -Check this option if you would like to see tooltips for icons on the desktop as you hover the mouse over them. These tooltips display information about the file represented by the icon. Depending on the type of file, the information can range from simple file size and creation dates for unfamiliar file types, to complete meta information such as the content of tags for music files. +Check this option if you would like to see tooltips for icons on the desktop as you hover the mouse over them. These tooltips display information about the file represented by the icon. Depending on the type of file, the information can range from simple file size and creation dates for unfamiliar file types, to complete meta information such as the content of tags for music files. -Mouse button actions: +Mouse button actions: -The mouse button section allows you to determine what happens when you click one of the three mouse buttons on the Desktop (where there is no window). +The mouse button section allows you to determine what happens when you click one of the three mouse buttons on the Desktop (where there is no window). -Not all mice have three buttons. Two button mice can usually activate the Middle button by pressing both the Left and Right mouse buttons at the same time. +Not all mice have three buttons. Two button mice can usually activate the Middle button by pressing both the Left and Right mouse buttons at the same time. -For each of the three mouse buttons, you can select: +For each of the three mouse buttons, you can select: -No Action -When you use this mouse button, nothing happens. +No Action +When you use this mouse button, nothing happens. -Window list menu -This brings up a submenu with all the virtual desktops. Under each virtual desktop, you can select any window currently located on that desktop. Once selected, &kde; will switch to that desktop, and place the focus on that window. +Window list menu +This brings up a submenu with all the virtual desktops. Under each virtual desktop, you can select any window currently located on that desktop. Once selected, &kde; will switch to that desktop, and place the focus on that window. -Desktop Menu. -This brings up a submenu with commands specific to &kde;. You can create icons, edit bookmarks, cut and paste, run commands, configure &kde;, arrange icons, lock the session and log out of &kde;. The exact content of the menu varies depending on the current status of &kde;. +Desktop Menu. +This brings up a submenu with commands specific to &kde;. You can create icons, edit bookmarks, cut and paste, run commands, configure &kde;, arrange icons, lock the session and log out of &kde;. The exact content of the menu varies depending on the current status of &kde;. -Application Menu -This brings up the Application Menus (also know as the K Menus), so you can start a new application. +Application Menu +This brings up the Application Menus (also know as the K Menus), so you can start a new application. @@ -222,22 +117,11 @@ -Show menu bar at the top of the screeen: +Show menu bar at the top of the screeen: -This option determines whether there is a menu across the top of the &kde; Desktop similar to the style of &MacOS;. - -The default is None. If you select Desktop menu bar one static menu is shown at the top of the screen, displaying the desktop menu. Finally there is Current application's menu bar (Mac OS-style). If this option is selected, applications won't have their menu bar attached to their own window anymore. Instead, there is one menu bar at the top of the screen which shows the menus of the currently active application. You might recognise this behaviour from &MacOS;. +This option determines whether there is a menu across the top of the &kde; Desktop similar to the style of &MacOS;. + +The default is None. If you select Desktop menu bar one static menu is shown at the top of the screen, displaying the desktop menu. Finally there is Current application's menu bar (Mac OS-style). If this option is selected, applications won't have their menu bar attached to their own window anymore. Instead, there is one menu bar at the top of the screen which shows the menus of the currently active application. You might recognise this behaviour from &MacOS;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook index 2753da77908..cc60b7c1206 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook @@ -2,225 +2,75 @@ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -&Yves.Arrouye; &Yves.Arrouye.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +&Yves.Arrouye; &Yves.Arrouye.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-10-16 -3.1 +2002-10-16 +3.1 -KDE -KControl -enhanced browsing -web shortcuts -browsing +KDE +KControl +enhanced browsing +web shortcuts +browsing -Web Shortcuts +Web Shortcuts -Introduction - -&konqueror; offers some features to enhance your browsing experience. One such feature is Web Shortcuts. - -You may already have noticed that &kde; is very Internet friendly. For example, you can click on the Run menu item or type the keyboard shortcut assigned to that command (AltF2, unless you have changed it) and type in a URI. Uniform Resource Identifier. A standard way of referring to a resource such as a file on your computer, a World Wide Web address, an email address, etc.... - -Web shortcuts, on the other hand, let you come up with new pseudo URL schemes, or shortcuts, that basically let you parameterise commonly used URIs. For example, if you like the Google search engine, you can configure KDE so that a pseudo URL scheme like gg will trigger a search on Google. This way, typing gg:my query will search for my query on Google. - -One can see why we call these pseudo URL schemes. They are used like a URL scheme, but the input is not properly URL encoded, so one will type google:kde apps and not google:kde+apps. - -You can use web shortcuts wherever you would normally use URIs. Shortcuts for several search engines should already be configured on your system, but you can add new keywords and change or delete existing ones in the enhanced browsing control module. +Introduction + +&konqueror; offers some features to enhance your browsing experience. One such feature is Web Shortcuts. + +You may already have noticed that &kde; is very Internet friendly. For example, you can click on the Run menu item or type the keyboard shortcut assigned to that command (AltF2, unless you have changed it) and type in a URI. Uniform Resource Identifier. A standard way of referring to a resource such as a file on your computer, a World Wide Web address, an email address, etc.... + +Web shortcuts, on the other hand, let you come up with new pseudo URL schemes, or shortcuts, that basically let you parameterise commonly used URIs. For example, if you like the Google search engine, you can configure KDE so that a pseudo URL scheme like gg will trigger a search on Google. This way, typing gg:my query will search for my query on Google. + +One can see why we call these pseudo URL schemes. They are used like a URL scheme, but the input is not properly URL encoded, so one will type google:kde apps and not google:kde+apps. + +You can use web shortcuts wherever you would normally use URIs. Shortcuts for several search engines should already be configured on your system, but you can add new keywords and change or delete existing ones in the enhanced browsing control module. -Use +Use -There is a single tab in this control module. The title of the tab is Keywords. This tab features two main boxes, one for Internet Keywords and one for web shortcuts. +There is a single tab in this control module. The title of the tab is Keywords. This tab features two main boxes, one for Internet Keywords and one for web shortcuts. -Web Shortcuts - -The descriptive names of defined web shortcuts are shown in a listbox. As with other lists in &kde;, you can click on a column heading to toggle the sort order between ascending and descending, and you can resize the columns. - -If you double-click on a specific entry in the list of defined search providers, the details for that entry are shown in a popup dialogue. In addition to the descriptive name for the item, you can also see the URI which is used, as well as the associated shortcuts which you can type anywhere in &kde; where URIs are expected. A given search provider can have multiple shortcuts, each separated by a comma. - -The text boxes are used not only for displaying information about an item in the list of web shortcuts, but also for modifying or adding new items. - -You can change the contents of either the Search URI or the URI Shortcuts text box. Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to exit the dialogue with no changes. - -If you examine the contents of the Search URI text box, you will find that most, if not all of the entries have a in them. This sequence of two characters acts as a parameter, which is to say that they are replaced by whatever you happen to type after the colon character that is between a shortcut and its parameter. Let's consider some examples to clarify this idea. - -Suppose that the URI is http://www.google.com/search?q=\{@}, and gg is a shortcut to this URI. Then, typing gg:alpha is equivalent to http://www.google.com/search?q=alpha. You could type anything after the : character; whatever you have typed simply replaces the characters, after being converted to the appropriate character set for the search provider and then properly URL-encoded. Only the part of the search URI is touched, the rest of it is supposed to be properly URL-encoded already and is left as is. - -You can also have shortcuts without parameters. Suppose the URI was file:/home/me/mydocs/kofficefiles/kword and the shortcut was mykword. Then, typing mykword: is the same as typing the complete URI. Note that there is nothing after the colon when typing the shortcut, but the colon is still required in order for the shortcut to be recognised as such. - -By now, you will have understood that even though these shortcuts are called web shortcuts, they really are shortcuts to parameterised URIs, which can point not only to web sites like search engines but also to anything else that can be pointed to by a URI. Web shortcuts are a very powerful feature of navigation in &kde;. +Web Shortcuts + +The descriptive names of defined web shortcuts are shown in a listbox. As with other lists in &kde;, you can click on a column heading to toggle the sort order between ascending and descending, and you can resize the columns. + +If you double-click on a specific entry in the list of defined search providers, the details for that entry are shown in a popup dialogue. In addition to the descriptive name for the item, you can also see the URI which is used, as well as the associated shortcuts which you can type anywhere in &kde; where URIs are expected. A given search provider can have multiple shortcuts, each separated by a comma. + +The text boxes are used not only for displaying information about an item in the list of web shortcuts, but also for modifying or adding new items. + +You can change the contents of either the Search URI or the URI Shortcuts text box. Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to exit the dialogue with no changes. + +If you examine the contents of the Search URI text box, you will find that most, if not all of the entries have a in them. This sequence of two characters acts as a parameter, which is to say that they are replaced by whatever you happen to type after the colon character that is between a shortcut and its parameter. Let's consider some examples to clarify this idea. + +Suppose that the URI is http://www.google.com/search?q=\{@}, and gg is a shortcut to this URI. Then, typing gg:alpha is equivalent to http://www.google.com/search?q=alpha. You could type anything after the : character; whatever you have typed simply replaces the characters, after being converted to the appropriate character set for the search provider and then properly URL-encoded. Only the part of the search URI is touched, the rest of it is supposed to be properly URL-encoded already and is left as is. + +You can also have shortcuts without parameters. Suppose the URI was file:/home/me/mydocs/kofficefiles/kword and the shortcut was mykword. Then, typing mykword: is the same as typing the complete URI. Note that there is nothing after the colon when typing the shortcut, but the colon is still required in order for the shortcut to be recognised as such. + +By now, you will have understood that even though these shortcuts are called web shortcuts, they really are shortcuts to parameterised URIs, which can point not only to web sites like search engines but also to anything else that can be pointed to by a URI. Web shortcuts are a very powerful feature of navigation in &kde;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook index f4571453809..2497c28be53 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook @@ -2,128 +2,70 @@ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-09-01 -3.1.00 +2002-09-01 +3.1.00 -KDE -KControl -email -e-mail +KDE +KControl +email +e-mail -Email +Email -Introduction +Introduction -The email module of the &kcontrol; allows you to enter and save some basic email information. This information is used when performing functions related to email within &kde;, for example, when sending bug reports from the &kde; crash handler application. +The email module of the &kcontrol; allows you to enter and save some basic email information. This information is used when performing functions related to email within &kde;, for example, when sending bug reports from the &kde; crash handler application. -Programs such as &kmail;, which are used for reading and sending email, may offer many more options for customising the way in which email is handled. These options depend upon the specific program being used. &kmail;, for instance, offers its own configuration facilities. +Programs such as &kmail;, which are used for reading and sending email, may offer many more options for customising the way in which email is handled. These options depend upon the specific program being used. &kmail;, for instance, offers its own configuration facilities. -Some of the information needed for configuring email should have been provided by your internet service provider (ISP). If you are connected to a local network, then the system administrator of your network should be able to help you. +Some of the information needed for configuring email should have been provided by your internet service provider (ISP). If you are connected to a local network, then the system administrator of your network should be able to help you. -Use +Use -&kde; automatically establishes some of the information for this control module using the login information on the system. You will need to enter the remaining information. -Looking at the page from top to bottom, the options are: +&kde; automatically establishes some of the information for this control module using the login information on the system. You will need to enter the remaining information. +Looking at the page from top to bottom, the options are: -Full name -Type your full name as you would like it to appear in the email messages that you send. +Full name +Type your full name as you would like it to appear in the email messages that you send. -Organisation -If you work for a company or organisation, you can enter its name in this text box. +Organisation +If you work for a company or organisation, you can enter its name in this text box. -Email address -To be able to use email, you must enter your email address here. +Email address +To be able to use email, you must enter your email address here. -Reply-to address -If replies to your email messages should be sent to a different address, you can enter that address in this text box. +Reply-to address +If replies to your email messages should be sent to a different address, you can enter that address in this text box. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook index 4814541ce14..c2bdd26c078 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook @@ -2,134 +2,68 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -energy +KDE +KControl +energy -Energy +Energy -Introduction - -This module is useful for any computer having a monitor labelled Energy Star Compliant. (Energy Star Compliant equipment is equipment that can be configured to automatically enter a power saving mode when appropriate, without human intervention.) - -Energy Star Compliance can be applied to nearly any electrical device. This module, however, does not spin down hard drives, does not shutdown printers, &etc; These settings only affect the behaviour of your monitor. - -For information on shutting down components on a laptop, do not use this module. Instead, install tdeutils, and refer to the module entitled Laptop Power Control Centre, for details. - -In the case of computer monitors, the computer can control the monitor, switching it between four states: On, Standby, Suspend, and Off. - -The following list of states is a generalisation, and you may find that your monitor will differ from the descriptions below. - -ON is the normal operation of your monitor while you are using it. - -STANDBY is usually a minor power saving level. This setting usually involves blanking the screen, and not firing the electron gun, but keeping the electron gun energised and ready to go. When you need to use the monitor again, the monitor will come back on very quickly. - -SUSPEND is a very low power mode alternative. With most monitors the screen is blanked, the electron gun is shut down and the magnets that control the electron gun are powered down. While the power saving is substantial, to reactivate the monitor may take up to 10-15 seconds. The computer should always be able to return the monitor to On or Standby while in suspend mode. - -OFF, usually means just that. The computer monitor is turned off. This usually means that the computer will not be able to turn the monitor back on by itself. Obviously, this keeps power consumption to a bare minimum (zero). +Introduction + +This module is useful for any computer having a monitor labelled Energy Star Compliant. (Energy Star Compliant equipment is equipment that can be configured to automatically enter a power saving mode when appropriate, without human intervention.) + +Energy Star Compliance can be applied to nearly any electrical device. This module, however, does not spin down hard drives, does not shutdown printers, &etc; These settings only affect the behaviour of your monitor. + +For information on shutting down components on a laptop, do not use this module. Instead, install tdeutils, and refer to the module entitled Laptop Power Control Centre, for details. + +In the case of computer monitors, the computer can control the monitor, switching it between four states: On, Standby, Suspend, and Off. + +The following list of states is a generalisation, and you may find that your monitor will differ from the descriptions below. + +ON is the normal operation of your monitor while you are using it. + +STANDBY is usually a minor power saving level. This setting usually involves blanking the screen, and not firing the electron gun, but keeping the electron gun energised and ready to go. When you need to use the monitor again, the monitor will come back on very quickly. + +SUSPEND is a very low power mode alternative. With most monitors the screen is blanked, the electron gun is shut down and the magnets that control the electron gun are powered down. While the power saving is substantial, to reactivate the monitor may take up to 10-15 seconds. The computer should always be able to return the monitor to On or Standby while in suspend mode. + +OFF, usually means just that. The computer monitor is turned off. This usually means that the computer will not be able to turn the monitor back on by itself. Obviously, this keeps power consumption to a bare minimum (zero). -Use - -Using this module is very simple: - -If your monitor is Energy Star Compliant, then you should put a mark in the check box labeled Enable Display Energy Saving. This will activate the energy saving commands. - -The next three slider bars, tell the computer how many minutes of inactivity before automatically switching to a new state. These numbers can be adjusted with either the sliders, or the spin boxes. - -These times are not additive, but all start counting at zero. - -As an example: - -If you set the Standby Mode to 10 minutes, the Suspend mode to 20 minutes, and the Power off at 30 minutes, and you stop using your computer at 9:00, then the monitor will: Enter Standby mode at 9:10, enter Suspend mode at 9:20, and shut the power off at 9:30. - -When you are happy with the settings, click OK. +Use + +Using this module is very simple: + +If your monitor is Energy Star Compliant, then you should put a mark in the check box labeled Enable Display Energy Saving. This will activate the energy saving commands. + +The next three slider bars, tell the computer how many minutes of inactivity before automatically switching to a new state. These numbers can be adjusted with either the sliders, or the spin boxes. + +These times are not additive, but all start counting at zero. + +As an example: + +If you set the Standby Mode to 10 minutes, the Suspend mode to 20 minutes, and the Power off at 30 minutes, and you stop using your computer at 9:00, then the monitor will: Enter Standby mode at 9:10, enter Suspend mode at 9:20, and shut the power off at 9:30. + +When you are happy with the settings, click OK. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook index 91d669d56e7..75f7680ea13 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook @@ -2,374 +2,201 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-10-16 -3.1 +2002-10-16 +3.1 -KDE -KControl -file manager +KDE +KControl +file manager -File Manager +File Manager -In this module, you can configure various aspects of &konqueror;'s file manager functionality. +In this module, you can configure various aspects of &konqueror;'s file manager functionality. -&konqueror;'s web browser functionality has its own configuration modules. +&konqueror;'s web browser functionality has its own configuration modules. -Use +Use -The configuration options for the file manager are organised under tabs as follows: +The configuration options for the file manager are organised under tabs as follows: -Appearance -This tab contains options for customising the appearance of &konqueror; windows, such as the default font text colour. +Appearance +This tab contains options for customising the appearance of &konqueror; windows, such as the default font text colour. -Behaviour -This tab contains a couple of &konqueror; global options. +Behaviour +This tab contains a couple of &konqueror; global options. -Previews +Previews -On this tab, you can customise when &konqueror; should show previews. +On this tab, you can customise when &konqueror; should show previews. -Appearance +Appearance -The following settings determine how text and colours are displayed in &konqueror; File Manager mode windows. +The following settings determine how text and colours are displayed in &konqueror; File Manager mode windows. -Standard font: +Standard font: -This is the font used to display text such as file names in &konqueror; windows. +This is the font used to display text such as file names in &konqueror; windows. -Font size: +Font size: -Lets you control the size of text, while the Standard Font setting determines the font face used. +Lets you control the size of text, while the Standard Font setting determines the font face used. -Normal text colour: +Normal text colour: -Determines the standard text colour. +Determines the standard text colour. -Word-wrap icon text: +Word-wrap icon text: -When checked, long filenames will be wrapped onto multiple lines, rather than showing only the part of the filename that fits on a single line. +When checked, long filenames will be wrapped onto multiple lines, rather than showing only the part of the filename that fits on a single line. - If you uncheck this option, you can still see word-wrapped filenames by pausing the mouse pointer over the icon. + If you uncheck this option, you can still see word-wrapped filenames by pausing the mouse pointer over the icon. -Underline filenames: +Underline filenames: -When Underline filenames is checked, filenames will be underlined so that they look like links on a web page. +When Underline filenames is checked, filenames will be underlined so that they look like links on a web page. -Display file sizes in bytes: +Display file sizes in bytes: -The final check box on this page determines how &konqueror; displays file sizes, when you are in one of the file manager modes that normally shows this information. If you check the Display file sizes in bytes box then file sizes are always shown in bytes. If you leave it unchecked then file sizes are shown in bytes, kilobytes or megabytes, depending on their size. +The final check box on this page determines how &konqueror; displays file sizes, when you are in one of the file manager modes that normally shows this information. If you check the Display file sizes in bytes box then file sizes are always shown in bytes. If you leave it unchecked then file sizes are shown in bytes, kilobytes or megabytes, depending on their size. -Behaviour +Behaviour -<guilabel ->Misc Options</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Misc Options</guilabel> -Open folders in separate windows - If this option is checked, a new &konqueror; window will be created when you open a folder, rather than simply showing that folder's contents in the current window. +Open folders in separate windows + If this option is checked, a new &konqueror; window will be created when you open a folder, rather than simply showing that folder's contents in the current window. -Show network operations in a single window +Show network operations in a single window -If unchecked, and you download a file, a dialogue box will appear that shows the status of the download. +If unchecked, and you download a file, a dialogue box will appear that shows the status of the download. - Download Dialogue Box + Download Dialogue Box - - Download Dialogue Box + Download Dialogue Box - Individual Download Dialogue Box + Individual Download Dialogue Box -If you start a new transfer, another dialogue box will appear. (&Netscape; users will be familiar with this behaviour) +If you start a new transfer, another dialogue box will appear. (&Netscape; users will be familiar with this behaviour) -If checked, all transfer status windows will be grouped together under a single dialogue box. +If checked, all transfer status windows will be grouped together under a single dialogue box. - Download Dialogue Box + Download Dialogue Box - - Download Dialogue Box + Download Dialogue Box - Collected Download Dialogue Box + Collected Download Dialogue Box -If you choose to use the Collected download dialogue box, you can delete transfers by clicking once on the transfer you want to cancel, then clicking the Delete Button on the left. +If you choose to use the Collected download dialogue box, you can delete transfers by clicking once on the transfer you want to cancel, then clicking the Delete Button on the left. -Show file tips +Show file tips -Here you can control if, when moving the mouse over a file, you want to see a small popup window with additional information about that file. +Here you can control if, when moving the mouse over a file, you want to see a small popup window with additional information about that file. -Show previews in file tips +Show previews in file tips -Here you can control if the file tip should show a thumbnail preview of the file. +Here you can control if the file tip should show a thumbnail preview of the file. -Home URL -This is the &URL; (⪚ a folder or a web page) where &konqueror; will jump to when the Home button is pressed.The default is the users home folder, indicated with a ~. +Home URL +This is the &URL; (⪚ a folder or a web page) where &konqueror; will jump to when the Home button is pressed.The default is the users home folder, indicated with a ~. -You can set a path that is your Home URL by typing into the text field, or using the browse icon. The default is ~ which is a standard shortcut for your $HOME folder. When you choose the home icon on your panel, in a file open or save dialogue, or from within &konqueror; in file manager mode, this is the folder you will be shown. - -The Ask confirmation for setting tells &konqueror; what to do when you choose to Delete, Trash, or Shred a file in a &konqueror; window. If any box is checked, &konqueror; asks for confirmation before performing the corresponding action. +You can set a path that is your Home URL by typing into the text field, or using the browse icon. The default is ~ which is a standard shortcut for your $HOME folder. When you choose the home icon on your panel, in a file open or save dialogue, or from within &konqueror; in file manager mode, this is the folder you will be shown. + +The Ask confirmation for setting tells &konqueror; what to do when you choose to Delete, Trash, or Shred a file in a &konqueror; window. If any box is checked, &konqueror; asks for confirmation before performing the corresponding action. -Previews - -&konqueror; has a preview feature for many file types, including HTML files, images, &PostScript; and PDF, sound, web archives (if you have the appropriate &konqueror; plugin installed) and text files. - -If you enable previews for one of these, files of that particular file type will not be represented by standard icons in the filemanager, but will instead be shown as miniature previews. On slow computers, the previews can take some time to show up, so you might not want to enable this feature. - -In this module you can specify which protocols you wish the previews to be available for. Creating the previews requires that &konqueror; download at least part of the file, in order to create the preview. &konqueror;, like the rest of &kde; is entirely network transparent, and will treat a remote &FTP; folder just as if it was on your local hard drive. This can result in a delay, especially if you are viewing, for example, a folder full of images over a slow network connection. - -For each protocol, you can independently enable or disable previews. For example, you might enable previews for NFS mounted drives if you have a fast network, but disable them for &FTP; because your Internet connection is via a modem. - -You can further refine the maximum size file that &konqueror; will attempt to show a preview for. The default is 1 MB. In other words, by default, if a file is 900 kb in size, and the protocol you are viewing the folder with is enabled, then &konqueror; will create a preview icon for it. If the file is 1.1 MB in size, &konqueror; will not make a preview, even if the protocol is enabled. - -You can turn on and off previews on the fly from within &konqueror;, using the View menu. For example, if you normally want to see image previews on every protocol but find a particular server is very slow to send you the data, you might turn it off for the present, and turn it on again later. - -You may also like to enable the checkbox Increase size of previews relative to icons, in order to see more information in the thumbnails. - -Many image files already contain a thumbnail. You can enable the Use thumbnails embedded in files to make use of these. This will save time waiting for thumbnails to be created when viewing a folder full of images you have not previously seen in &konqueror;. +Previews + +&konqueror; has a preview feature for many file types, including HTML files, images, &PostScript; and PDF, sound, web archives (if you have the appropriate &konqueror; plugin installed) and text files. + +If you enable previews for one of these, files of that particular file type will not be represented by standard icons in the filemanager, but will instead be shown as miniature previews. On slow computers, the previews can take some time to show up, so you might not want to enable this feature. + +In this module you can specify which protocols you wish the previews to be available for. Creating the previews requires that &konqueror; download at least part of the file, in order to create the preview. &konqueror;, like the rest of &kde; is entirely network transparent, and will treat a remote &FTP; folder just as if it was on your local hard drive. This can result in a delay, especially if you are viewing, for example, a folder full of images over a slow network connection. + +For each protocol, you can independently enable or disable previews. For example, you might enable previews for NFS mounted drives if you have a fast network, but disable them for &FTP; because your Internet connection is via a modem. + +You can further refine the maximum size file that &konqueror; will attempt to show a preview for. The default is 1 MB. In other words, by default, if a file is 900 kb in size, and the protocol you are viewing the folder with is enabled, then &konqueror; will create a preview icon for it. If the file is 1.1 MB in size, &konqueror; will not make a preview, even if the protocol is enabled. + +You can turn on and off previews on the fly from within &konqueror;, using the View menu. For example, if you normally want to see image previews on every protocol but find a particular server is very slow to send you the data, you might turn it off for the present, and turn it on again later. + +You may also like to enable the checkbox Increase size of previews relative to icons, in order to see more information in the thumbnails. + +Many image files already contain a thumbnail. You can enable the Use thumbnails embedded in files to make use of these. This will save time waiting for thumbnails to be created when viewing a folder full of images you have not previously seen in &konqueror;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook index 700fdf00682..39a0fa18995 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook @@ -2,270 +2,129 @@ - + ]>
-File Associations +File Associations -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-13 -3.2 +2003-10-13 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -files association -association +KDE +KControl +files association +association -File Associations +File Associations -Introduction +Introduction -One of the most convenient aspects of &kde;, is its ability to automatically match a data file, with its application. As an example, when you click on your favourite &kword; document in &konqueror;, &kde; automatically starts &kword;, and automatically loads that file into &kword; so you can begin working on it. +One of the most convenient aspects of &kde;, is its ability to automatically match a data file, with its application. As an example, when you click on your favourite &kword; document in &konqueror;, &kde; automatically starts &kword;, and automatically loads that file into &kword; so you can begin working on it. -In the example above, the &kword; Data file is associated with &kword; (the application). These file associations are crucial to the functioning of &kde;. +In the example above, the &kword; Data file is associated with &kword; (the application). These file associations are crucial to the functioning of &kde;. -When &kde; is installed, it automatically creates hundreds of file associations to many of the most common data types. These initial associations are based on the most commonly included software, and the most common user preferences. +When &kde; is installed, it automatically creates hundreds of file associations to many of the most common data types. These initial associations are based on the most commonly included software, and the most common user preferences. -Unfortunately, &kde; can not: +Unfortunately, &kde; can not: -predict every possible combination of software and data files -prepare for file formats not yet invented -or predict everyone's favourite application for certain file formats +predict every possible combination of software and data files +prepare for file formats not yet invented +or predict everyone's favourite application for certain file formats -You can change your current file associations or add new file associations using this module. +You can change your current file associations or add new file associations using this module. -Each file association is recorded as a mime type. &MIME; stands for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. It allows a computer to determine the type of file, without opening and analysing the format of each and every file. +Each file association is recorded as a mime type. &MIME; stands for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. It allows a computer to determine the type of file, without opening and analysing the format of each and every file. -How to use this module +How to use this module -The file associations are organised into several categories, and at a minimum you will have: +The file associations are organised into several categories, and at a minimum you will have: -Application -Audio -Image -Inode -Message -Multipart -Print -Text -Video +Application +Audio +Image +Inode +Message +Multipart +Print +Text +Video -All of the file associations are sorted into one of these categories. +All of the file associations are sorted into one of these categories. -There is also an overview category All, which displays all the file types in one list, without categorising them. +There is also an overview category All, which displays all the file types in one list, without categorising them. -There is no functional difference between any of the categories. These categories are designed to help organise your file associations, but they do not alter the associations in any way. +There is no functional difference between any of the categories. These categories are designed to help organise your file associations, but they do not alter the associations in any way. -The categories are listed in the box labelled Known Types. +The categories are listed in the box labelled Known Types. -You can explore each of these categories, and see the file associations contained within each one, by simply double-clicking on the category name. You will be presented with a list of the associated mime-types under that category. +You can explore each of these categories, and see the file associations contained within each one, by simply double-clicking on the category name. You will be presented with a list of the associated mime-types under that category. -You can also search for a particular &MIME; type by using the search box. The search box is labelled Find filename pattern and is located above the category list. +You can also search for a particular &MIME; type by using the search box. The search box is labelled Find filename pattern and is located above the category list. -Simply type the first letter of the &MIME; type you are interested in. The categories are automatically expanded, and only the mime-types that include that letter are displayed. +Simply type the first letter of the &MIME; type you are interested in. The categories are automatically expanded, and only the mime-types that include that letter are displayed. -You can then enter a second character and the mime-types will be further limited to mime types containing those two characters. +You can then enter a second character and the mime-types will be further limited to mime types containing those two characters. -Adding a new mime type - -If you want to add a new &MIME; type to your file associations, you can click on the Add... button. A small dialogue box will appear. You select the category from the drop down box, and type the &MIME; name in the blank labelled Type name. Click OK to add the new mime type, or click Cancel to not add any new mime-types. +Adding a new mime type + +If you want to add a new &MIME; type to your file associations, you can click on the Add... button. A small dialogue box will appear. You select the category from the drop down box, and type the &MIME; name in the blank labelled Type name. Click OK to add the new mime type, or click Cancel to not add any new mime-types. -Removing a mime type +Removing a mime type -If you want to remove a &MIME; type, simply select the &MIME; type you want to delete by clicking once with the mouse on the &MIME; type name. Then click the button labelled Remove. The &MIME; type will be deleted immediately. +If you want to remove a &MIME; type, simply select the &MIME; type you want to delete by clicking once with the mouse on the &MIME; type name. Then click the button labelled Remove. The &MIME; type will be deleted immediately. -Editing a mime types properties +Editing a mime types properties -Before you can edit a &MIME; types property, you must first specify which &MIME; type. Simply browse through the categories until you find the &MIME; type you want to edit, then click once on it with the mouse. +Before you can edit a &MIME; types property, you must first specify which &MIME; type. Simply browse through the categories until you find the &MIME; type you want to edit, then click once on it with the mouse. -As soon as you have selected the &MIME; type, the current values of the &MIME; type will appear in the module window. +As soon as you have selected the &MIME; type, the current values of the &MIME; type will appear in the module window. -You will notice the current values are split into two tabs: General and Embedding +You will notice the current values are split into two tabs: General and Embedding -General +General -There are 4 properties for each &MIME; type in this tab: +There are 4 properties for each &MIME; type in this tab: -Mime Type Icon is the icon that will be visible when using &konqueror; as a file manager. -Filename Patterns is a search pattern which &kde; will use to determine the &MIME; type. -Description is a short description of the file type. This is for your benefit only. -Application Preference Order determines which applications will be associated with the specified &MIME; type. +Mime Type Icon is the icon that will be visible when using &konqueror; as a file manager. +Filename Patterns is a search pattern which &kde; will use to determine the &MIME; type. +Description is a short description of the file type. This is for your benefit only. +Application Preference Order determines which applications will be associated with the specified &MIME; type. -Embedding Tab +Embedding Tab -The Embedding tab allows you to determine if an file will be viewed within a &konqueror; window, or by starting the application. +The Embedding tab allows you to determine if an file will be viewed within a &konqueror; window, or by starting the application. @@ -273,211 +132,83 @@ -Changing the Icon +Changing the Icon -To change the icon, simply click on the Icon button. A dialogue box will appear, which will show you all available icons. Simply click once with the mouse on the icon of your choice, and click OK. +To change the icon, simply click on the Icon button. A dialogue box will appear, which will show you all available icons. Simply click once with the mouse on the icon of your choice, and click OK. -Editing the mime-type patterns - -The box labelled Filename Patterns, determines what files will be included within this mime-type. - -Usually, files are selected based on their suffix. (Examples: Files that end with .wav are sound files, using the WAV format and files that end in .c are program files written in C). - -You should enter your filename mask in this combo box. - -The asterisk (*) is a wildcard character that will be used with nearly every mime type mask. A complete discussion of wildcards is beyond the scope of this manual, but it is important to understand that the asterisk (in this context), matches any number of characters. As an example: *.pdf will match Datafile.pdf, Graphics.pdf and User.pdf, but not PDF, Datafile.PDF, or .pdf. - -It is very beneficial to have multiple masks. One for lower case, one for upper case, &etc; This will help ensure that &kde; can determine the file type more accurately. +Editing the mime-type patterns + +The box labelled Filename Patterns, determines what files will be included within this mime-type. + +Usually, files are selected based on their suffix. (Examples: Files that end with .wav are sound files, using the WAV format and files that end in .c are program files written in C). + +You should enter your filename mask in this combo box. + +The asterisk (*) is a wildcard character that will be used with nearly every mime type mask. A complete discussion of wildcards is beyond the scope of this manual, but it is important to understand that the asterisk (in this context), matches any number of characters. As an example: *.pdf will match Datafile.pdf, Graphics.pdf and User.pdf, but not PDF, Datafile.PDF, or .pdf. + +It is very beneficial to have multiple masks. One for lower case, one for upper case, &etc; This will help ensure that &kde; can determine the file type more accurately. -Editing a mime types description. +Editing a mime types description. -You can type a short description of the &MIME; type in the text box labelled Description. This label is to help you, it does not affect the function of the &MIME; type. +You can type a short description of the &MIME; type in the text box labelled Description. This label is to help you, it does not affect the function of the &MIME; type. -Editing the application associations - -There are four buttons (Move Up, Move Down, Add and Remove) and a combo box (which lists the applications) which are used to configure the applications. - -The combo box lists all of the applications associated with a specific &MIME; type. The list is in a specific order. The top application is the first application tried. The next application down the list is the second, etc. - -What do you mean there is more than one application per &MIME; type? Why is this necessary? - -We started out by saying that &kde; comes preconfigured with hundreds of file associations. The reality is, each system that &kde; is installed on has a different selection of applications. By allowing multiple associations per &MIME; type, &kde; can continue to operate when a certain application is not installed on the system. - -As an example: -For the &MIME; type pdf, there are two applications associated with this file type. The first program is called PS Viewer. If your system does not have PS Viewer installed, then &kde; automatically starts the second application Adobe Acrobat Reader. As you can see, this will help keep &kde; running strong as you add and subtract applications. - -We have established that the order is important. You can change the order of the applications by clicking once with the mouse on the application you want to move, and then clicking either Move Up or Move Down. This will shift the currently selected application up or down the list of applications. - -You can add new applications to the list by clicking the button labelled Add. A dialogue box will appear. Using the dialogue box, you can select the application you want to use for this mime type. Click OK when you are done, and the application will be added to the current list. - -You can remove an application (thereby ensuring that the application will never run with this &MIME; type by clicking once on the name of the application, and clicking the Remove button. - -It is a good idea to use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to adjust the unwanted application to a lower position in the list, rather than deleting the application from the list entirely. Once you have deleted an application, if your preferred application should become compromised, there will not be an application to view the data document. +Editing the application associations + +There are four buttons (Move Up, Move Down, Add and Remove) and a combo box (which lists the applications) which are used to configure the applications. + +The combo box lists all of the applications associated with a specific &MIME; type. The list is in a specific order. The top application is the first application tried. The next application down the list is the second, etc. + +What do you mean there is more than one application per &MIME; type? Why is this necessary? + +We started out by saying that &kde; comes preconfigured with hundreds of file associations. The reality is, each system that &kde; is installed on has a different selection of applications. By allowing multiple associations per &MIME; type, &kde; can continue to operate when a certain application is not installed on the system. + +As an example: +For the &MIME; type pdf, there are two applications associated with this file type. The first program is called PS Viewer. If your system does not have PS Viewer installed, then &kde; automatically starts the second application Adobe Acrobat Reader. As you can see, this will help keep &kde; running strong as you add and subtract applications. + +We have established that the order is important. You can change the order of the applications by clicking once with the mouse on the application you want to move, and then clicking either Move Up or Move Down. This will shift the currently selected application up or down the list of applications. + +You can add new applications to the list by clicking the button labelled Add. A dialogue box will appear. Using the dialogue box, you can select the application you want to use for this mime type. Click OK when you are done, and the application will be added to the current list. + +You can remove an application (thereby ensuring that the application will never run with this &MIME; type by clicking once on the name of the application, and clicking the Remove button. + +It is a good idea to use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to adjust the unwanted application to a lower position in the list, rather than deleting the application from the list entirely. Once you have deleted an application, if your preferred application should become compromised, there will not be an application to view the data document. -Embedding -By clicking on the Embedding tab, you are presented with three radio buttons in the Left click action group. These determine how &konqueror; views the selected &MIME; type: +Embedding +By clicking on the Embedding tab, you are presented with three radio buttons in the Left click action group. These determine how &konqueror; views the selected &MIME; type: -Show file in embedded viewer -If this is selected, the file will be shown within the &konqueror; window. -Show file in separate viewer -This will cause a separate window to be created when showing this mime-type. -Use group settings. -This will cause the mime-type to use the settings for the mime-type group. (if you are editing an audio mime type, then the settings for the audio group are used). +Show file in embedded viewer +If this is selected, the file will be shown within the &konqueror; window. +Show file in separate viewer +This will cause a separate window to be created when showing this mime-type. +Use group settings. +This will cause the mime-type to use the settings for the mime-type group. (if you are editing an audio mime type, then the settings for the audio group are used). -Below this is a listbox labelled Services Preference Order. - -When you are in &konqueror;, you can right mouse click, and a menu will with an entry labelled Preview with... will appear. This box lists the applications that will appear, in the order they will appear, under this menu. - -You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order. +Below this is a listbox labelled Services Preference Order. + +When you are in &konqueror;, you can right mouse click, and a menu will with an entry labelled Preview with... will appear. This box lists the applications that will appear, in the order they will appear, under this menu. + +You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order. -Making changes permanent +Making changes permanent -When you are done making any changes to mime types, you can click Apply to make your changes permanent, but keep you in this module. +When you are done making any changes to mime types, you can click Apply to make your changes permanent, but keep you in this module. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook index a379b8d94a2..ac3b120830d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook @@ -2,171 +2,74 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -fonts +KDE +KControl +fonts -Fonts +Fonts -This module is designed to allow you to easily select different fonts for different parts of the &kde; Desktop. +This module is designed to allow you to easily select different fonts for different parts of the &kde; Desktop. -The panel consists of different font groups to give you a lot of flexibility in configuring your fonts: +The panel consists of different font groups to give you a lot of flexibility in configuring your fonts: -General: Used everywhere the other font groups do not apply - -Fixed width: Anywhere a non-proportional font is specified - - - -Toolbar: Font used in &kde; application toolbars - -Menu: Font used in &kde; application menus - -Window title: Font used in the window title - -Taskbar: Font used in the taskbar panel applet - -Desktop: Font used on the desktop to label icons +General: Used everywhere the other font groups do not apply + +Fixed width: Anywhere a non-proportional font is specified + + + +Toolbar: Font used in &kde; application toolbars + +Menu: Font used in &kde; application menus + +Window title: Font used in the window title + +Taskbar: Font used in the taskbar panel applet + +Desktop: Font used on the desktop to label icons -Each font has a corresponding Choose... button. By clicking on this button, a dialogue box appears. You can use this dialogue box to choose a new font, font style, size and character set. Then press OK. - -An example of the font you have chosen will be displayed in the space between the font group name and the choose button. - -When you are done, simply click OK, and all necessary components of &kde; will be restarted so your changes can take affect immediately. - -The Adjust All Fonts... button allows you to quickly set properties for all the fonts selected above. A font selection dialogue similar to the standard one will appear, but you will notice checkboxes that allow you to change the Font, Font style or Size independently of each other. You can choose any one, two, or three of these options, and they will be applied to all the font groups. - -For example, if you have selected several different font faces above, and realise they are all a size too big (this often happens when you change screen resolution, for instance), you can apply a new font size to all the fonts, without affecting your customised font faces and styles. +Each font has a corresponding Choose... button. By clicking on this button, a dialogue box appears. You can use this dialogue box to choose a new font, font style, size and character set. Then press OK. + +An example of the font you have chosen will be displayed in the space between the font group name and the choose button. + +When you are done, simply click OK, and all necessary components of &kde; will be restarted so your changes can take affect immediately. + +The Adjust All Fonts... button allows you to quickly set properties for all the fonts selected above. A font selection dialogue similar to the standard one will appear, but you will notice checkboxes that allow you to change the Font, Font style or Size independently of each other. You can choose any one, two, or three of these options, and they will be applied to all the font groups. + +For example, if you have selected several different font faces above, and realise they are all a size too big (this often happens when you change screen resolution, for instance), you can apply a new font size to all the fonts, without affecting your customised font faces and styles. -Anti-alias text - -To use anti-aliasing, simply place a mark in the checkbox labelled Use anti-aliasing for fonts. This enables two more options. -Placing a mark in the checkbox will allow you to specify which range of fonts will not be anti-aliased. This range is specified with the two combo boxes on the same line. - -You can also choose the method that &kde; uses to create an anti-alias look to your fonts. If you are not familiar with the individual methods, you should leave this option alone. - -The ability to use anti-aliased fonts and icons requires that you have support in both X and the &Qt; toolkit, that you have suitable fonts installed, and that you are using the built-in font serving capabilities of the X server. If you still are having problems, please contact the appropriate &kde; mailing list, or check the FAQ. +Anti-alias text + +To use anti-aliasing, simply place a mark in the checkbox labelled Use anti-aliasing for fonts. This enables two more options. +Placing a mark in the checkbox will allow you to specify which range of fonts will not be anti-aliased. This range is specified with the two combo boxes on the same line. + +You can also choose the method that &kde; uses to create an anti-alias look to your fonts. If you are not familiar with the individual methods, you should leave this option alone. + +The ability to use anti-aliased fonts and icons requires that you have support in both X and the &Qt; toolkit, that you have suitable fonts installed, and that you are using the built-in font serving capabilities of the X server. If you still are having problems, please contact the appropriate &kde; mailing list, or check the FAQ. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook index d9a4ee29875..62a141f1118 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook @@ -2,214 +2,83 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; - -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; + +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2002-10-17 -3.1 +2002-10-17 +3.1 -KDE -KControl -Help Index -Index +KDE +KControl +Help Index +Index -Help Index - -At the time of writing, for most installations of &kde; the entire search engine function in &khelpcenter; is disabled, and settings made in this &kcontrol; module will have no effect. We hope to have it back in a future release. - -&kde; comes with a lot of documentation for applications and components. While it is possible to just browse the manuals until you find that piece of information you're looking for, this may be a very time-consuming task. To make this easier for you, &kde; offers fulltext search using a program called ht://dig. It works quite similar to search engines on the web, in fact some search engines you now might even use it. Just click on the Search tab in the &khelpcenter;, enter the word you are looking for, click Search and enjoy! - -However, to make use of this feature, ht://dig has to be installed on your system and &kde; has to be configured to make us of it. This control module tries to help you doing the latter. If you haven't installed ht://dig and it wasn't shipped with your operating system you have to get ht://dig yourself. Have a look at the ht://dig homepage on how to download and install it. - -When you first start, you are in display mode only. To modify your settings, click on Administrator Mode. If you are logged in as root, you will go straight to the change dialogue. If not, &kde; will ask for a superuser password. - - -Use - -There are two important things to tell &kde; so it can make use of the fulltext search engine: +Help Index + +At the time of writing, for most installations of &kde; the entire search engine function in &khelpcenter; is disabled, and settings made in this &kcontrol; module will have no effect. We hope to have it back in a future release. + +&kde; comes with a lot of documentation for applications and components. While it is possible to just browse the manuals until you find that piece of information you're looking for, this may be a very time-consuming task. To make this easier for you, &kde; offers fulltext search using a program called ht://dig. It works quite similar to search engines on the web, in fact some search engines you now might even use it. Just click on the Search tab in the &khelpcenter;, enter the word you are looking for, click Search and enjoy! + +However, to make use of this feature, ht://dig has to be installed on your system and &kde; has to be configured to make us of it. This control module tries to help you doing the latter. If you haven't installed ht://dig and it wasn't shipped with your operating system you have to get ht://dig yourself. Have a look at the ht://dig homepage on how to download and install it. + +When you first start, you are in display mode only. To modify your settings, click on Administrator Mode. If you are logged in as root, you will go straight to the change dialogue. If not, &kde; will ask for a superuser password. + + +Use + +There are two important things to tell &kde; so it can make use of the fulltext search engine: -where to find the ht://dig programs KDE uses for fulltext search -where to search +where to find the ht://dig programs KDE uses for fulltext search +where to search -The <application ->ht://dig</application -> Programs - -There are three programs &kde; needs that come with ht://dig: htdig, htsearch and htmerge. For each program you have to provide the full path including the program name, for example: /usr/bin/htdig. - -Where exactly these programs are installed depends on your operating system or your distribution. However, there are some good guesses you might want to try: +The <application>ht://dig</application> Programs + +There are three programs &kde; needs that come with ht://dig: htdig, htsearch and htmerge. For each program you have to provide the full path including the program name, for example: /usr/bin/htdig. + +Where exactly these programs are installed depends on your operating system or your distribution. However, there are some good guesses you might want to try: -htdig and htmerge are often found in /usr/bin/ or in something like /usr/local/www/htdig/bin/. - -the htsearch command is often found in a sub folder called cgi-bin, for example /usr/local/httpd/cgi-bin/. +htdig and htmerge are often found in /usr/bin/ or in something like /usr/local/www/htdig/bin/. + +the htsearch command is often found in a sub folder called cgi-bin, for example /usr/local/httpd/cgi-bin/. -To find out where for example htdig is installed you can always type whereis htdig on the console. whereis will look for the specified command in the standard execution path folders. However, folders like cgi-bin are often not in the standard execution path. +To find out where for example htdig is installed you can always type whereis htdig on the console. whereis will look for the specified command in the standard execution path folders. However, folders like cgi-bin are often not in the standard execution path. -Scope and Search Paths - -In this section you can choose which help resources should be indexed, &ie; made available to the search engine. - -In the Scope frame you can select some typical resources you want to be indexed, &ie; the &kde; help files, and the information offered by the man and info commands. Note that some of those may still be disabled, which means that support for them has not been added yet. - -Maybe you have additional files you want to access using the &khelpcenter; fulltext search feature. For example, you might have an HTML reference installed in /home/jdoe/docs/selfhtml. By adding this path to the list of additional search paths you make this documentation available to &khelpcenter;'s fulltext search, too. Just click on the Add button and a file dialogue will ask you for an additional search folder. Select /home/jdoe/docs/selfhtml and click OK. To remove an additional search path, just select it and click Delete. - -Your changes to the scope and additional search paths will not take effect if you don't click on the Build index button. +Scope and Search Paths + +In this section you can choose which help resources should be indexed, &ie; made available to the search engine. + +In the Scope frame you can select some typical resources you want to be indexed, &ie; the &kde; help files, and the information offered by the man and info commands. Note that some of those may still be disabled, which means that support for them has not been added yet. + +Maybe you have additional files you want to access using the &khelpcenter; fulltext search feature. For example, you might have an HTML reference installed in /home/jdoe/docs/selfhtml. By adding this path to the list of additional search paths you make this documentation available to &khelpcenter;'s fulltext search, too. Just click on the Add button and a file dialogue will ask you for an additional search folder. Select /home/jdoe/docs/selfhtml and click OK. To remove an additional search path, just select it and click Delete. + +Your changes to the scope and additional search paths will not take effect if you don't click on the Build index button. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook index eb875630a9e..058866d77f6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook @@ -2,305 +2,137 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -icon +KDE +KControl +icon -Icons +Icons -Introduction +Introduction -&kde; comes with a full set of icons in several sizes. These icons are being used all over &kde;: the desktop, the panel, the &konqueror; file manager, in every toolbar of every &kde; application, etc. The icons control module offers you very flexible ways of customising the way &kde; handles icons. You can: +&kde; comes with a full set of icons in several sizes. These icons are being used all over &kde;: the desktop, the panel, the &konqueror; file manager, in every toolbar of every &kde; application, etc. The icons control module offers you very flexible ways of customising the way &kde; handles icons. You can: -install and choose icon themes -choose different icon sizes -assign effects to icons (for example make them semi-transparent or colourise them) -configure these settings for each of the different places icons will be used in: for example the desktop, toolbars &etc; +install and choose icon themes +choose different icon sizes +assign effects to icons (for example make them semi-transparent or colourise them) +configure these settings for each of the different places icons will be used in: for example the desktop, toolbars &etc; -Please note that some of these settings may depend on your selected icon theme. &kde; comes with two icon themes by default, &kde;-Classic (HiColour) and Crystal SVG. There is also a low colour theme in the tdeartwork package, along with others. +Please note that some of these settings may depend on your selected icon theme. &kde; comes with two icon themes by default, &kde;-Classic (HiColour) and Crystal SVG. There is also a low colour theme in the tdeartwork package, along with others. -<guilabel ->Theme</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Theme</guilabel> -Starting at the top, you can see some example icons. These change in appearance depending on the icon theme you select. Most default installations will have only one icon theme available, the &kde; default Crystal SVG theme. There are others contained separately in the tdeartwork package, and you can download more from the Internet. +Starting at the top, you can see some example icons. These change in appearance depending on the icon theme you select. Most default installations will have only one icon theme available, the &kde; default Crystal SVG theme. There are others contained separately in the tdeartwork package, and you can download more from the Internet. -Use the Install New Theme... to browse to the location of newly downloaded themes, and they will then become available to select from above. +Use the Install New Theme... to browse to the location of newly downloaded themes, and they will then become available to select from above. -Advanced - -Looking at this second page of the icons control module, you will see two areas: - - - -An area labelled Use of Icon. Here you can choose which particular usage of icons you want to configure, for example Toolbar or Panel. - - - A preview area where you can see how icons of the selected kind will look using the current settings. Note that the state of this preview also depends on the icon state selected in the effects below (do not worry about that now, we will explain that below). +Advanced + +Looking at this second page of the icons control module, you will see two areas: + + + +An area labelled Use of Icon. Here you can choose which particular usage of icons you want to configure, for example Toolbar or Panel. + + + A preview area where you can see how icons of the selected kind will look using the current settings. Note that the state of this preview also depends on the icon state selected in the effects below (do not worry about that now, we will explain that below). -When you want to configure icons, first select the usage of icons you want to configure. Change the settings until you like the preview. You can then choose a different icon usage and configure that. At the end, if you are satisfied with your settings, click OK or Apply to take the changes in effect. +When you want to configure icons, first select the usage of icons you want to configure. Change the settings until you like the preview. You can then choose a different icon usage and configure that. At the end, if you are satisfied with your settings, click OK or Apply to take the changes in effect. -There are two further options to consider, Size and Effects. +There are two further options to consider, Size and Effects. -Icon Size - -You have two options relating to icon sizes. First, you can choose from a list of icon sizes. Second, you can tell &kde; to draw all pixels using double sized pixels. The largest icon sizes are especially useful for visually impaired people. - -Which sizes will be offered by the icon size listbox depends on the icon theme you have selected in the icon themes control module. For example, the low colour icon theme only offers the sizes 16 and 32 for desktop icons and 16, 22 and 32 for toolbar icons. The HiColour theme offers icon sizes 16, 32 and 48 as well as sizes from 64 to 128. However, as &kde; can not have all these icon sizes in store, icons using size 64 to 128 will be automatically generated which may result in a loss of quality. - -If the icon sizes offered by your chosen icon theme are not enough for you, there is still the option Double-sized pixels. If this option is selected, all icons will have double sized pixels, &ie; a 2x2 block instead of normal pixels. While this makes it possible to achieve very large icon sizes, the quality is poor: icons will look blocky, an effect you may remember if you've grown up using a Sinclair ZX Spectrum or similar. If this is an option for you, using the large sizes offered by &kde;'s HiColour icon theme will always result in a much better quality than using the low colour icon theme with double sized pixels. +Icon Size + +You have two options relating to icon sizes. First, you can choose from a list of icon sizes. Second, you can tell &kde; to draw all pixels using double sized pixels. The largest icon sizes are especially useful for visually impaired people. + +Which sizes will be offered by the icon size listbox depends on the icon theme you have selected in the icon themes control module. For example, the low colour icon theme only offers the sizes 16 and 32 for desktop icons and 16, 22 and 32 for toolbar icons. The HiColour theme offers icon sizes 16, 32 and 48 as well as sizes from 64 to 128. However, as &kde; can not have all these icon sizes in store, icons using size 64 to 128 will be automatically generated which may result in a loss of quality. + +If the icon sizes offered by your chosen icon theme are not enough for you, there is still the option Double-sized pixels. If this option is selected, all icons will have double sized pixels, &ie; a 2x2 block instead of normal pixels. While this makes it possible to achieve very large icon sizes, the quality is poor: icons will look blocky, an effect you may remember if you've grown up using a Sinclair ZX Spectrum or similar. If this is an option for you, using the large sizes offered by &kde;'s HiColour icon theme will always result in a much better quality than using the low colour icon theme with double sized pixels. -You can also choose animated icons. Many of the icons have animations associated with them. Enable the checkbox labelled Animate Icons, to enable this effect, but note that it may appear slow or jerky if your graphics card is old or you are low on memory. +You can also choose animated icons. Many of the icons have animations associated with them. Enable the checkbox labelled Animate Icons, to enable this effect, but note that it may appear slow or jerky if your graphics card is old or you are low on memory. -Effects +Effects -Finally you can configure certain filters to be applied on icons which are in one of three states: +Finally you can configure certain filters to be applied on icons which are in one of three states: -Default -This is how the icon will look normally. +Default +This is how the icon will look normally. -Active: -This is how the icon will look when the mouse cursor is over the icon. +Active: +This is how the icon will look when the mouse cursor is over the icon. -Disabled: -This is how the icon will look if its corresponding action is disabled, &ie; clicking on it will not lead to any result. +Disabled: +This is how the icon will look if its corresponding action is disabled, &ie; clicking on it will not lead to any result. -Select one of these states, and press the Set Effect... button to configure a corresponding icon effect. Please note that this configuration will only affect icons of the currently selected Use of Icon category (see above): configuring an effect for active icons, while Toolbar icon usage is selected, will not affect active icons used in other places. - -Below the list of icon states there are two options: you can configure an effect and you can select the Semi-transparent option, which will make the background shine through the icon. To the right of the effects list box there's a setup button to pass additional parameters to a filter. - -The following effects can be applied to icons: +Select one of these states, and press the Set Effect... button to configure a corresponding icon effect. Please note that this configuration will only affect icons of the currently selected Use of Icon category (see above): configuring an effect for active icons, while Toolbar icon usage is selected, will not affect active icons used in other places. + +Below the list of icon states there are two options: you can configure an effect and you can select the Semi-transparent option, which will make the background shine through the icon. To the right of the effects list box there's a setup button to pass additional parameters to a filter. + +The following effects can be applied to icons: -No Effect: -Icons will be used without applying any effect. +No Effect: +Icons will be used without applying any effect. -To Grey: -This filter will apply a greyish look to the icon. Click Setup... to configure the intensity of this filter. Note that it is customary for most user interfaces to use this effect for disabled icons only. +To Grey: +This filter will apply a greyish look to the icon. Click Setup... to configure the intensity of this filter. Note that it is customary for most user interfaces to use this effect for disabled icons only. -Colourise: -Icons will be coloured using a custom colour. For example, you may configure active icons (&ie; the icon the mouse cursor is over) to shine golden. Click Setup... to configure the used colour and the intensity of the colouring. +Colourise: +Icons will be coloured using a custom colour. For example, you may configure active icons (&ie; the icon the mouse cursor is over) to shine golden. Click Setup... to configure the used colour and the intensity of the colouring. -Gamma: -A different gamma value will be applied to all icons. If you're no photographer and don't know what Gamma is: it's quite similar to what people call contrast. Just play around with the gamma settings by clicking on Setup... to get a feeling for this effect. +Gamma: +A different gamma value will be applied to all icons. If you're no photographer and don't know what Gamma is: it's quite similar to what people call contrast. Just play around with the gamma settings by clicking on Setup... to get a feeling for this effect. -Desaturate: -Icons will be drawn desaturated. This is quite similar to the Colour setting on your television. Click Setup... to configure the amount of desaturation. +Desaturate: +Icons will be drawn desaturated. This is quite similar to the Colour setting on your television. Click Setup... to configure the amount of desaturation. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook index b599c16d500..9e4982aac59 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook @@ -2,233 +2,126 @@ - + ]> -The &kcontrolcenter; +The &kcontrolcenter; -Michael McBride
mpmcbride7@yahoo.com
 +Michael McBride
mpmcbride7@yahoo.com
 -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-02-02 -3.00.00 +2002-02-02 +3.00.00 -This documentation describes &kde;'s control centre. +This documentation describes &kde;'s control centre. -KDE -kcontrol -configuration -settings -module +KDE +kcontrol +configuration +settings +module -The &kcontrolcenter; +The &kcontrolcenter; -The &kcontrolcenter; (from now on referred to simply as the control centre) provides you with a centralised and convenient way to configure all of your &kde; settings. +The &kcontrolcenter; (from now on referred to simply as the control centre) provides you with a centralised and convenient way to configure all of your &kde; settings. -The control centre is made up of multiple modules. Each module is a separate application, but the control centre organises all of these programs into a convenient location. +The control centre is made up of multiple modules. Each module is a separate application, but the control centre organises all of these programs into a convenient location. -Each control centre module can be executed individually +Each control centre module can be executed individually -See section entitled Running individual control centre modules for more information. +See section entitled Running individual control centre modules for more information. -The control centre groups the configuration modules into categories, so they are easy to locate. Within each category, the control centre shows all the modules in a list, so it is easier to find the right configuration module. +The control centre groups the configuration modules into categories, so they are easy to locate. Within each category, the control centre shows all the modules in a list, so it is easier to find the right configuration module. -Using The &kcontrolcenter; +Using The &kcontrolcenter; -This next section details the use of the control centre itself. For information on individual modules, please see Control Centre Modules +This next section details the use of the control centre itself. For information on individual modules, please see Control Centre Modules -Starting the &kcontrol; +Starting the &kcontrol; -The &kcontrolcenter; can be started 3 ways: +The &kcontrolcenter; can be started 3 ways: - + -By selecting K ButtonControl Centre from the &kde; Panel. +By selecting K ButtonControl Centre from the &kde; Panel. -By pressing &Alt;F2. - -This will bring up a dialogue box. Type kcontrol, and click Run. +By pressing &Alt;F2. + +This will bring up a dialogue box. Type kcontrol, and click Run. -You can type kcontrol & at any command prompt. - - - -All three of these methods are equivalent, and produce the same result. +You can type kcontrol & at any command prompt. + + + +All three of these methods are equivalent, and produce the same result. - -The &kcontrolcenter; Screen + +The &kcontrolcenter; Screen -When you start the control centre, you are presented with a window, which can be divided into 3 functional parts. +When you start the control centre, you are presented with a window, which can be divided into 3 functional parts. -Screenshot +Screenshot - + - Screenshot + Screenshot -The &kde; Control Centre Screen +The &kde; Control Centre Screen - + -Across the top is a menubar. The menubar will provide you with quick access to most of &kcontrolcenter;'s features. The menus are detailed in The &kde; Control Centre Menus. +Across the top is a menubar. The menubar will provide you with quick access to most of &kcontrolcenter;'s features. The menus are detailed in The &kde; Control Centre Menus. -Along the left hand side, is a column. This is a where you choose which module to configure. You can learn how to navigate through the modules in the section called Navigating Modules. +Along the left hand side, is a column. This is a where you choose which module to configure. You can learn how to navigate through the modules in the section called Navigating Modules. -The main panel shows you some system information. +The main panel shows you some system information. -In this example, we are running &kde; 2.99, we started &kcontrolcenter; as user adridg, the computer is named aramis, it is a FreeBSD system, Version 4.4-RELEASE, on a Pentium. +In this example, we are running &kde; 2.99, we started &kcontrolcenter; as user adridg, the computer is named aramis, it is a FreeBSD system, Version 4.4-RELEASE, on a Pentium. -The &kcontrol; Menus +The &kcontrol; Menus -This next section gives you a brief description of what each menu item does. +This next section gives you a brief description of what each menu item does. -<guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu -The File menu has a single entry. +The File menu has a single entry. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Closes the control centre. +Closes the control centre. @@ -237,161 +130,75 @@ -<guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu - -These options determine how the module selection looks and behaves. - - - -View Mode +<guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu + +These options determine how the module selection looks and behaves. + + + +View Mode -Determines whether to use Tree view, or Icon view for your modules. - -With Tree view, each submenu appears as an indented list. - -With Icon view, when you click on a category, the categories disappear and are replaced with the module list. You then use the up button to return to the categories. +Determines whether to use Tree view, or Icon view for your modules. + +With Tree view, each submenu appears as an indented list. + +With Icon view, when you click on a category, the categories disappear and are replaced with the module list. You then use the up button to return to the categories. - -ViewIcon size + +ViewIcon size -Using this option, you can choose Small, Medium, or Large icons to select your modules. - -This menu item only controls the icon size if you are in Icon View. If you choose Tree View, the Small icon size will be used, no matter what size was previously selected in Icon View. +Using this option, you can choose Small, Medium, or Large icons to select your modules. + +This menu item only controls the icon size if you are in Icon View. If you choose Tree View, the Small icon size will be used, no matter what size was previously selected in Icon View. - - + + -<guimenu ->Modules</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Modules</guimenu> Menu -The modules menu is a shortcut to take you directly to any module in the control centre. +The modules menu is a shortcut to take you directly to any module in the control centre. -<guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu &help.menu.documentation; -Exiting The &kde; Control Centre +Exiting The &kde; Control Centre -You can exit the control centre one of three ways: +You can exit the control centre one of three ways: -Select File Quit from the menu bar. +Select File Quit from the menu bar. -Type &Ctrl;Q on the keyboard. +Type &Ctrl;Q on the keyboard. -Click on the Close button on the frame surrounding the control centre. +Click on the Close button on the frame surrounding the control centre. -Running Individual Modules - -You can run individual modules without running kcontrol by selecting K Button Preferences from the &kde; panel. You can then select the module you want to run in the submenus. +Running Individual Modules + +You can run individual modules without running kcontrol by selecting K Button Preferences from the &kde; panel. You can then select the module you want to run in the submenus. @@ -400,335 +207,186 @@ -The &kcontrol; Modules +The &kcontrol; Modules -In order to make it as easy as possible, the &kcontrol; has organised similar options into groups. Each group is called a module. When you click on the name of a module in the left window, you will be presented with the options of the module on the right. +In order to make it as easy as possible, the &kcontrol; has organised similar options into groups. Each group is called a module. When you click on the name of a module in the left window, you will be presented with the options of the module on the right. -Each module will have some or all of the following buttons: +Each module will have some or all of the following buttons: -Help +Help -This button will give you help specific to the current module. The button will show you a short summary help page in the left window. At the bottom of that window, you can click on a link to get more detailed help. +This button will give you help specific to the current module. The button will show you a short summary help page in the left window. At the bottom of that window, you can click on a link to get more detailed help. -Use Defaults +Use Defaults -This button will restore this module to its default values. You must click OK to save the options. +This button will restore this module to its default values. You must click OK to save the options. -Apply +Apply -Clicking this button will save all changes to &kde;. If you have changed anything, clicking Apply will cause the changes to take effect. +Clicking this button will save all changes to &kde;. If you have changed anything, clicking Apply will cause the changes to take effect. -Reset +Reset -This button will Reset the module. The exact effect will depend on the module. +This button will Reset the module. The exact effect will depend on the module. - + -You must save the options of one module using Apply before you can change to a different module. -If you try to change without saving your options, you will be asked if you want to save your changes, or discard them. +You must save the options of one module using Apply before you can change to a different module. +If you try to change without saving your options, you will be asked if you want to save your changes, or discard them. -Navigating Modules +Navigating Modules -This is a list of the standard configuration modules (sorted by category) provided by the KDE base package. Please note that there may be many more modules on your system if you have installed additional software. +This is a list of the standard configuration modules (sorted by category) provided by the KDE base package. Please note that there may be many more modules on your system if you have installed additional software. +--> @@ -738,189 +396,60 @@ -Laptop Modules Notes - -In order to use the laptop modules, you must have the kernel APM package installed in your kernel. Useful information on how to do this can be found at http://www.cs.utexas.edu/users/kharker/linux-laptop/apm.html and in the Battery Powered Linux mini-HOWTO at http://metalab.unc.edu/LDP/HOWTO/mini/Battery-Powered.html. - -If you want the suspend and standby menu commands to work then you should install the &Linux; apmd package (version 2.4 or later). If you want to use them from non-root accounts you must mark the apm command set uid root. - -To do this, log on as root and enter: - -%chown ;chmod +Laptop Modules Notes + +In order to use the laptop modules, you must have the kernel APM package installed in your kernel. Useful information on how to do this can be found at http://www.cs.utexas.edu/users/kharker/linux-laptop/apm.html and in the Battery Powered Linux mini-HOWTO at http://metalab.unc.edu/LDP/HOWTO/mini/Battery-Powered.html. + +If you want the suspend and standby menu commands to work then you should install the &Linux; apmd package (version 2.4 or later). If you want to use them from non-root accounts you must mark the apm command set uid root. + +To do this, log on as root and enter: + +%chown ;chmod -By doing this you will allow any user of your system to put it into suspend or standby states - if you are the only user, this should not be a problem. - -Also note that any program which has root access, can be a potential security problem. You should carefully determine if there are any security concerns before giving any program root permissions. +By doing this you will allow any user of your system to put it into suspend or standby states - if you are the only user, this should not be a problem. + +Also note that any program which has root access, can be a potential security problem. You should carefully determine if there are any security concerns before giving any program root permissions. -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kcontrol; -Program copyright 1997-2001 The &kcontrolcenter; Developers -Contributors: +&kcontrol; +Program copyright 1997-2001 The &kcontrolcenter; Developers +Contributors: -Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org -Matthias Elter elter@kde.org +Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org +Matthias Elter elter@kde.org -Documentation copyright 2000 Michael McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com +Documentation copyright 2000 Michael McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com -Contributors: +Contributors: -Paul Campbell paul@taniwha.com -Helge Deller deller@kde.org -Mark Donohoe -Pat Dowler -Duncan Haldane duncan@kde.org -Steffen Hansen stefh@mip.ou.dk. -Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org -Martin Jones mjones@kde.org -Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de -Jonathan Singer jsinger@leeta.net -Thomas Tanghus tanghus@earthling.net -Krishna Tateneni tateneni@pluto.njcc.com -> -Ellis Whitehead ewhitehe@uni-freiburg.de +Paul Campbell paul@taniwha.com +Helge Deller deller@kde.org +Mark Donohoe +Pat Dowler +Duncan Haldane duncan@kde.org +Steffen Hansen stefh@mip.ou.dk. +Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org +Martin Jones mjones@kde.org +Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de +Jonathan Singer jsinger@leeta.net +Thomas Tanghus tanghus@earthling.net +Krishna Tateneni tateneni@pluto.njcc.com> +Ellis Whitehead ewhitehe@uni-freiburg.de -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook index 0de44832cbb..d95215e5e29 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook @@ -2,202 +2,82 @@ - + ]>
- -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English + +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-09-01 -3.01.00 +2002-09-01 +3.01.00 -KDE -KControl -accessibility +KDE +KControl +accessibility -Accessibility +Accessibility -Introduction +Introduction -This module is designed to help users who have difficulty hearing audible cues, or who have difficulty using a keyboard. +This module is designed to help users who have difficulty hearing audible cues, or who have difficulty using a keyboard. -The module is divided into two tabs: Bell and Keyboard. +The module is divided into two tabs: Bell and Keyboard. -<guilabel ->Bell</guilabel -> - -This panel is divided into an Audible Bell section and a Visible Bell section. - -The top check box labelled Use System Bell, determines whether the normal System bell rings. If this option is disabled, the System bell will be silenced. - -The next check box down can be used to play a different sound whenever the system bell is triggered. To activate, place a mark in the check box labelled Use customised bell, and enter the complete pathname to the sound file in the text box labelled Sound to Play. If you want, you can select the Browse button to navigate through your filesystem to find the exact file. - -For those users who have difficulty hearing the System bell, or those users who have a silent computer, &kde; offers the visible bell. This provides a visual signal (inverting the screen or flashing a colour across it) when the system bell would normally sound. - -To use the visible bell, first place a mark in the check box labelled Use visible bell. - -You can then select between Invert screen, or Flash screen. If you select Invert screen, all colours on the screen will be reversed. If you choose Flash screen, you can choose the colour by clicking the button to the right of the Flash screen selection. - -The slider bar can be used to adjust the duration of the visible bell. The default value is 500ms, or half a second. +<guilabel>Bell</guilabel> + +This panel is divided into an Audible Bell section and a Visible Bell section. + +The top check box labelled Use System Bell, determines whether the normal System bell rings. If this option is disabled, the System bell will be silenced. + +The next check box down can be used to play a different sound whenever the system bell is triggered. To activate, place a mark in the check box labelled Use customised bell, and enter the complete pathname to the sound file in the text box labelled Sound to Play. If you want, you can select the Browse button to navigate through your filesystem to find the exact file. + +For those users who have difficulty hearing the System bell, or those users who have a silent computer, &kde; offers the visible bell. This provides a visual signal (inverting the screen or flashing a colour across it) when the system bell would normally sound. + +To use the visible bell, first place a mark in the check box labelled Use visible bell. + +You can then select between Invert screen, or Flash screen. If you select Invert screen, all colours on the screen will be reversed. If you choose Flash screen, you can choose the colour by clicking the button to the right of the Flash screen selection. + +The slider bar can be used to adjust the duration of the visible bell. The default value is 500ms, or half a second. -<guilabel ->Keyboard</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel> -There are three sections to this panel. +There are three sections to this panel. -Use Sticky Keys +Use Sticky Keys -If this option is enabled, the user can press and release the &Shift;, &Alt; or &Ctrl; keys, and then press another key to get a key combo (example: &Ctrl; &Alt; Del could be done with &Ctrl; then &Alt; then Del). - -Also in this section is a check box labelled Lock Sticky Keys. If this check box is enabled, the &Alt;, &Ctrl; and &Shift; keys stay selected until they are de-selected by the user. - -As an example: +If this option is enabled, the user can press and release the &Shift;, &Alt; or &Ctrl; keys, and then press another key to get a key combo (example: &Ctrl; &Alt; Del could be done with &Ctrl; then &Alt; then Del). + +Also in this section is a check box labelled Lock Sticky Keys. If this check box is enabled, the &Alt;, &Ctrl; and &Shift; keys stay selected until they are de-selected by the user. + +As an example: -With Lock Sticky Keys disabled: +With Lock Sticky Keys disabled: -The user presses the &Shift; key, then presses the F key. The computer translates this into &Shift;F. Now if the user types a p, the computer interprets this as the letter p (no shift). +The user presses the &Shift; key, then presses the F key. The computer translates this into &Shift;F. Now if the user types a p, the computer interprets this as the letter p (no shift). -With Lock Sticky Keys enabled: +With Lock Sticky Keys enabled: -The user presses the &Shift; key, then presses the F key. The computer translates this into &Shift;F. Now if the user types a p, the computer interprets this as the letter P (&Shift;P). +The user presses the &Shift; key, then presses the F key. The computer translates this into &Shift;F. Now if the user types a p, the computer interprets this as the letter P (&Shift;P). @@ -205,24 +85,16 @@ -Slow keys +Slow keys -If this option is enabled, the user must hold the key down for a specified period of time (adjustable with the slider) before the keystroke will be accepted. This helps prevent accidental key strokes. +If this option is enabled, the user must hold the key down for a specified period of time (adjustable with the slider) before the keystroke will be accepted. This helps prevent accidental key strokes. -Bounce keys +Bounce keys -If this option is enabled, the user must wait a specified delay (configurable with the slider) before the next key press can be accepted. This prevents accidental multiple key strokes. +If this option is enabled, the user must wait a specified delay (configurable with the slider) before the next key press can be accepted. This prevents accidental multiple key strokes. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook index 34b33d4c1d7..48968426957 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook @@ -2,134 +2,70 @@ - + ]>
-&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -CSS -Stylesheets -Accessibility +KDE +CSS +Stylesheets +Accessibility -Stylesheets +Stylesheets -Introduction - -CSS style sheets affect the way web pages appear. CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets. - -&kde; can use its own stylesheet, based on simple defaults and the colour scheme you are using for your desktop. &kde; can also use a stylesheet that you have written yourself. Finally, you can specify a stylesheet in this module. The options presented in this module are tuned for accessibility purposes, especially for people with reduced vision. - -Your choices here affect every &kde; application that renders HTML with &kde;'s own renderer, which is called tdehtml. These include &kmail;, &khelpcenter; and of course &konqueror;. Choices here do not affect other browsers such as &Netscape;. - -The module has two pages, General, where you can choose which stylesheet to use, and Customise where you can design an accessibility stylesheet. +Introduction + +CSS style sheets affect the way web pages appear. CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets. + +&kde; can use its own stylesheet, based on simple defaults and the colour scheme you are using for your desktop. &kde; can also use a stylesheet that you have written yourself. Finally, you can specify a stylesheet in this module. The options presented in this module are tuned for accessibility purposes, especially for people with reduced vision. + +Your choices here affect every &kde; application that renders HTML with &kde;'s own renderer, which is called tdehtml. These include &kmail;, &khelpcenter; and of course &konqueror;. Choices here do not affect other browsers such as &Netscape;. + +The module has two pages, General, where you can choose which stylesheet to use, and Customise where you can design an accessibility stylesheet. -General +General -This page contains the following options: +This page contains the following options: -Use default stylesheet +Use default stylesheet -&kde; will use the default stylesheet. Some of the colours will default to those defined in your chosen colour scheme. Most settings are easily overridden by the page you are viewing. +&kde; will use the default stylesheet. Some of the colours will default to those defined in your chosen colour scheme. Most settings are easily overridden by the page you are viewing. -Use user-defined stylesheet +Use user-defined stylesheet -&kde; will use a stylesheet that you have written yourself. You can use the browse button to locate the stylesheet on your system. CSS files traditionally have a .css extension, but this is not required. +&kde; will use a stylesheet that you have written yourself. You can use the browse button to locate the stylesheet on your system. CSS files traditionally have a .css extension, but this is not required. -Use accessibility stylesheet defined in "Customise"-tab +Use accessibility stylesheet defined in "Customise"-tab -Use the settings defined in the Customise tab. Enabling this option will enable the options on the Customise page. +Use the settings defined in the Customise tab. Enabling this option will enable the options on the Customise page. @@ -137,143 +73,84 @@ -Customise +Customise -Here you can set up a user stylesheet. The options available are only a subset of the instructions you can add in a stylesheet, and they are geared towards people with reduced vision, to allow users to create a stylesheet that makes web pages and the &kde; help files more readable. +Here you can set up a user stylesheet. The options available are only a subset of the instructions you can add in a stylesheet, and they are geared towards people with reduced vision, to allow users to create a stylesheet that makes web pages and the &kde; help files more readable. -The options on this page are disabled unless you chose Use accessibility stylesheet defined in "Customise"-tab on the previous page. +The options on this page are disabled unless you chose Use accessibility stylesheet defined in "Customise"-tab on the previous page. -<guilabel ->Font Family</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Font Family</guilabel> -Base family +Base family -Choose a font family to use for body text. +Choose a font family to use for body text. -Use same family for all text +Use same family for all text -If you enable this, then the same font family will be used for all text, regardless of the settings on the page you are viewing. This is useful for pages which have used a decorative or hard to read font for headlines. +If you enable this, then the same font family will be used for all text, regardless of the settings on the page you are viewing. This is useful for pages which have used a decorative or hard to read font for headlines. -Font Size +Font Size -Base Font Size +Base Font Size -This is the default size for text on the page. Many web sites set their font sizes relative to this default, using larger or +1 to make the text bigger, and smaller or -1 to make the text smaller. -Many people design their web pages on platforms where the ordinary default text size is too large for the average user to read, so it is very common to come across web pages that have forced the font smaller in this way. -This setting will allow you to set the default font to a comfortable size, so that the relative sizes are also enlarged enough to be comfortable. -Do not forget you can also have &konqueror; enforce a minimum size, so that text is never too small to read. Set that under Behaviour, in the Web Browser section in &kcontrol;. +This is the default size for text on the page. Many web sites set their font sizes relative to this default, using larger or +1 to make the text bigger, and smaller or -1 to make the text smaller. +Many people design their web pages on platforms where the ordinary default text size is too large for the average user to read, so it is very common to come across web pages that have forced the font smaller in this way. +This setting will allow you to set the default font to a comfortable size, so that the relative sizes are also enlarged enough to be comfortable. +Do not forget you can also have &konqueror; enforce a minimum size, so that text is never too small to read. Set that under Behaviour, in the Web Browser section in &kcontrol;. -Use same size for all elements +Use same size for all elements -If you enable this option, then all text will be rendered at your specified font size, regardless of the instructions the page contains. Relative font sizes as discussed earlier, and even specific instructions that text should be rendered at a certain size will be overridden here. +If you enable this option, then all text will be rendered at your specified font size, regardless of the instructions the page contains. Relative font sizes as discussed earlier, and even specific instructions that text should be rendered at a certain size will be overridden here. -Colours +Colours -Black on White +Black on White -Many people with reduced vision find black text on a white screen gives the most contrast, and is easiest to read. If this applies to you, you can set this here. +Many people with reduced vision find black text on a white screen gives the most contrast, and is easiest to read. If this applies to you, you can set this here. -White on Black +White on Black -Many other people with reduced vision find the opposite to be true, that white text on a black screen is easier to read. +Many other people with reduced vision find the opposite to be true, that white text on a black screen is easier to read. -Custom +Custom -Still other people find that pure black and white, in either order, is difficult to read. You can set custom colours here for both the Background and the Foreground. +Still other people find that pure black and white, in either order, is difficult to read. You can set custom colours here for both the Background and the Foreground. -Use same colour for all text +Use same colour for all text -Many web sites use a different, often contrasting colour for headings or other flourishes. If this interferes with your ability to read the content, you can enable this checkbox to have &kde; use the colours you have set above for all text. +Many web sites use a different, often contrasting colour for headings or other flourishes. If this interferes with your ability to read the content, you can enable this checkbox to have &kde; use the colours you have set above for all text. @@ -281,29 +158,19 @@ -Images +Images -Suppress images +Suppress images -If you do not want to view images, you can turn this off here. +If you do not want to view images, you can turn this off here. -Suppress background images +Suppress background images -One major problem for reduced vision users is that background images do not give sufficient contrast to allow them to read the text. You can disable background images here, independently of your choice above to view all images. +One major problem for reduced vision users is that background images do not give sufficient contrast to allow them to read the text. You can disable background images here, independently of your choice above to view all images. @@ -311,19 +178,13 @@ -Preview +Preview -The Preview allows you to see the effect of your changes. A window will pop up, showing how several types of headings will appear with your stylesheet, and a sentence in the default body text. +The Preview allows you to see the effect of your changes. A window will pop up, showing how several types of headings will appear with your stylesheet, and a sentence in the default body text. -This should allow you to fine tune your stylesheet until you have something that you can comfortably read. +This should allow you to fine tune your stylesheet until you have something that you can comfortably read. -Happy surfing! +Happy surfing! diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook index 882d3a14a6e..f5211c2a084 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook @@ -2,113 +2,49 @@ - + ]>
-&Craig.Drummond; &Craig.Drummond.Mail; +&Craig.Drummond; &Craig.Drummond.Mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-22 -3.2 +2003-10-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -fonts +KDE +KControl +fonts -Font Installer +Font Installer -This module is responsible for installing (and uninstalling) fonts. The installer will configure X (XFree86), XRender, (anti-aliasing), and Ghostscript (printing), for any TrueType (.ttf) and Type1 (.pfa, .pfb) fonts that you care to install - bitmap (.bdf, .pcf, .snf), and Speedo (.spd), fonts will also be installed, but these can only used by X. +This module is responsible for installing (and uninstalling) fonts. The installer will configure X (XFree86), XRender, (anti-aliasing), and Ghostscript (printing), for any TrueType (.ttf) and Type1 (.pfa, .pfb) fonts that you care to install - bitmap (.bdf, .pcf, .snf), and Speedo (.spd), fonts will also be installed, but these can only used by X. -When the module is started by a normal (non-root) user, then the settings will refer to their personal configuration, and installed fonts will be available to them only. For root, the settings will usually refer to the system-wide configuration, and as such any installed fonts should be available to all users. -If you install fonts as a normal user and notice the fonts used for display (and for print preview) do not match those of the printed output - then you should re-install the fonts system-wide (i.e. as root). This can occur because when printing the output is sent to a printer queue - and when the system comes to actually send the information to the printer, it is running as a different user (usually lp), and cannot find the font files. -To install fonts, simply select the "Add Fonts" button - this will produce a file dialogue, then just locate the fonts to install. Likewise, to remove a font, simply highlight a font and press the "Delete" button. -Fonts may also be "disabled" - this basically just "hides" the font file, so that the font system cannot "see" it. To enable/disable fonts, just highlight the required fonts, and select the "Enable" or "Disable" button. +When the module is started by a normal (non-root) user, then the settings will refer to their personal configuration, and installed fonts will be available to them only. For root, the settings will usually refer to the system-wide configuration, and as such any installed fonts should be available to all users. +If you install fonts as a normal user and notice the fonts used for display (and for print preview) do not match those of the printed output - then you should re-install the fonts system-wide (i.e. as root). This can occur because when printing the output is sent to a printer queue - and when the system comes to actually send the information to the printer, it is running as a different user (usually lp), and cannot find the font files. +To install fonts, simply select the "Add Fonts" button - this will produce a file dialogue, then just locate the fonts to install. Likewise, to remove a font, simply highlight a font and press the "Delete" button. +Fonts may also be "disabled" - this basically just "hides" the font file, so that the font system cannot "see" it. To enable/disable fonts, just highlight the required fonts, and select the "Enable" or "Disable" button. -Using Konqueror -You can also use Konqueror to install fonts via drag-and-drop. To do this just type fonts:/ into Konqueror's Location bar. -As a normal (non-root) user, this will produce 2 top-level folders: +Using Konqueror +You can also use Konqueror to install fonts via drag-and-drop. To do this just type fonts:/ into Konqueror's Location bar. +As a normal (non-root) user, this will produce 2 top-level folders: -Personal - this will display your personal fonts. +Personal - this will display your personal fonts. -System - this will display the system wide fonts. If you drag-n-drop a font on to the folders here, you will be asked for the root password in order to install the font. +System - this will display the system wide fonts. If you drag-n-drop a font on to the folders here, you will be asked for the root password in order to install the font. -If you drop a font over fonts:/, then you will be asked whether this should go into "Personal", or "System". -As root, just the contents of the system font folder will be displayed - as root does not have any "personal" fonts. +If you drop a font over fonts:/, then you will be asked whether this should go into "Personal", or "System". +As root, just the contents of the system font folder will be displayed - as root does not have any "personal" fonts.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook index 0626c66b40d..a1dcd8fe5f1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook @@ -2,8 +2,7 @@ - + ]>
@@ -11,257 +10,139 @@ -&Jonathan.Singer; &Jonathan.Singer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Jonathan.Singer; &Jonathan.Singer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -konsole -terminal +KDE +KControl +konsole +terminal -&konsole; +&konsole; -In this module, you can configure basic settings for &konsole;, the &kde; terminal. You can also easily create new schemata (appearance files) for &konsole;. +In this module, you can configure basic settings for &konsole;, the &kde; terminal. You can also easily create new schemata (appearance files) for &konsole;. -This module contains several tab pages: General, Schema, Session and Write Daemon. +This module contains several tab pages: General, Schema, Session and Write Daemon. -<guilabel ->General</guilabel -> +<guilabel>General</guilabel> -This tab page allows you to configure aspects of &konsole;'s functions. It contains the following options: +This tab page allows you to configure aspects of &konsole;'s functions. It contains the following options: -Use Konsole as default terminal application +Use Konsole as default terminal application -If you wish to have &kde; use another terminal application by default, uncheck this box and enter the preferred application (wterm, rxvt, &etc;) in the text field below. +If you wish to have &kde; use another terminal application by default, uncheck this box and enter the preferred application (wterm, rxvt, &etc;) in the text field below. -Show Terminal Size when Resizing +Show Terminal Size when Resizing -By default, &konsole; will show the size (in characters) of the window when you are resizing, allowing you to make the window a specific size. Uncheck this box to turn off this behaviour. +By default, &konsole; will show the size (in characters) of the window when you are resizing, allowing you to make the window a specific size. Uncheck this box to turn off this behaviour. -Show Frame +Show Frame -Draw an inner frame around the inside of the &konsole; window. +Draw an inner frame around the inside of the &konsole; window. -Confirm quit with open sessions +Confirm quit with open sessions -When set, a warning appears when you try to close a &konsole; window with multiple sessions. +When set, a warning appears when you try to close a &konsole; window with multiple sessions. -Blinking Cursor -If you have trouble spotting the cursor in the &konsole; window, you can have it blink to draw your attention. +Blinking Cursor +If you have trouble spotting the cursor in the &konsole; window, you can have it blink to draw your attention. -Line Spacing -Change the space between lines of text. +Line Spacing +Change the space between lines of text. -Consider the following characters part of a word when double clicking -It is a common &UNIX; behaviour to select a whole word when you double click on it, however, the computer's idea of a word may differ from yours. Add characters here that you would like to be considered always to be part of a word. For example, adding the @ character will allow you to double click to select an entire email address. +Consider the following characters part of a word when double clicking +It is a common &UNIX; behaviour to select a whole word when you double click on it, however, the computer's idea of a word may differ from yours. Add characters here that you would like to be considered always to be part of a word. For example, adding the @ character will allow you to double click to select an entire email address. -Schema +Schema -The Schema page will allow you to easily create, edit and save schemata, with text and background colouring, transparency and background images. +The Schema page will allow you to easily create, edit and save schemata, with text and background colouring, transparency and background images. + ]>
-&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -launch feedback -cursor -busy +KDE +KControl +launch feedback +cursor +busy -Launch Feedback +Launch Feedback -Sometimes it is reassuring to know that your computer didn't just ignore your command, and something is happening behind the scenes. In this module you can configure visible feedback to help you know if you really hit that icon or not. +Sometimes it is reassuring to know that your computer didn't just ignore your command, and something is happening behind the scenes. In this module you can configure visible feedback to help you know if you really hit that icon or not. -The traditional way to indicate that your computer is busy is to modify the cursor, and you can turn this on by choosing a Busy Cursor checkbox. +The traditional way to indicate that your computer is busy is to modify the cursor, and you can turn this on by choosing a Busy Cursor checkbox. -With this option enabled, your cursor will have an icon attached to it for a short time, when a new application is being launched. You can configure how long this icon is displayed beside your cursor with the Startup indication timeout (seconds): spinbox. The default is 30 seconds. +With this option enabled, your cursor will have an icon attached to it for a short time, when a new application is being launched. You can configure how long this icon is displayed beside your cursor with the Startup indication timeout (seconds): spinbox. The default is 30 seconds. -There are several variations of busy cursor available, including a blinking cursor, a bouncing cursor or a passive icon with no animation. +There are several variations of busy cursor available, including a blinking cursor, a bouncing cursor or a passive icon with no animation. -Traditional &kde; launch notification has taken another form, which you can also enable and disable here. Normally when you start an application, it gets an immediate entry in the taskbar, with the icon replaced by a spinning hourglass to let you know something is happening. You can toggle this behaviour on and off with the Enable Taskbar Notification checkbox, and when it's enabled, you can set a time in the Startup indication timeout (seconds): spinbox. +Traditional &kde; launch notification has taken another form, which you can also enable and disable here. Normally when you start an application, it gets an immediate entry in the taskbar, with the icon replaced by a spinning hourglass to let you know something is happening. You can toggle this behaviour on and off with the Enable Taskbar Notification checkbox, and when it's enabled, you can set a time in the Startup indication timeout (seconds): spinbox. -Not all applications that you start will eventually show a window, or an entry in the taskbar. Some of them, for example, are docked into the &kde; system tray. Alternatively, it might be that you sent it off to a different virtual desktop, and Show all windows is unchecked in the &kcontrolcenter; module Taskbar. Setting a timeout ensures that, even in these cases, you can still get launch feedback, but also that it will go away when the job is done. +Not all applications that you start will eventually show a window, or an entry in the taskbar. Some of them, for example, are docked into the &kde; system tray. Alternatively, it might be that you sent it off to a different virtual desktop, and Show all windows is unchecked in the &kcontrolcenter; module Taskbar. Setting a timeout ensures that, even in these cases, you can still get launch feedback, but also that it will go away when the job is done.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook index 7ebe5b1ce1f..3e94eba9142 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook @@ -2,143 +2,69 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -system notification -notification +KDE +KControl +system notification +notification -System Notification Settings +System Notification Settings -&kde;, like all applications, needs to inform the user when a problem occurs, a task is completed, or something has happened. &kde; uses a set of System Notifications to keep the user informed on what is happening. +&kde;, like all applications, needs to inform the user when a problem occurs, a task is completed, or something has happened. &kde; uses a set of System Notifications to keep the user informed on what is happening. -Using this module, you can determine what &kde; does to communicate each event. +Using this module, you can determine what &kde; does to communicate each event. -The panel consists of a large list of specific events which need to be communicated to the user. This list is organised into a tree, so that you can rapidly find the notification you are looking for. +The panel consists of a large list of specific events which need to be communicated to the user. This list is organised into a tree, so that you can rapidly find the notification you are looking for. -To configure a notification, simply click on a group, which will open up a subgroup. You can click on subgroups, which may lead to more subgroups, or it may lead to a list of notifications. +To configure a notification, simply click on a group, which will open up a subgroup. You can click on subgroups, which may lead to more subgroups, or it may lead to a list of notifications. -Once you have found the notification you are looking for, double-click on the notification. +Once you have found the notification you are looking for, double-click on the notification. -You will be presented with 4 options: +You will be presented with 4 options: -Log to file -This will tell &kde; to add the notification to the end of a file. Once you place a mark in front of this option, you can enter a filename at the bottom of the module. If you click on the folder to the right of the blank, you can browse through your filesystem and select the file you want. +Log to file +This will tell &kde; to add the notification to the end of a file. Once you place a mark in front of this option, you can enter a filename at the bottom of the module. If you click on the folder to the right of the blank, you can browse through your filesystem and select the file you want. -Play sound -When this notification is activated, &kde; will play a sound. Once you place a mark in front of this option, you can enter a filename at the bottom of the module. -If you click on the folder to the right of the blank, you can browse through your filesystem and select the file you want. -By clicking the arrow button to the right of the folder button, you can hear the sound. - -Maybe you want to use a special media player to play sound files, ⪚ because you use sound files in a special format or you don't use the &arts; sound daemon. In that case, check the Use external player option and enter the full path and name of the program you want to use into the text field. +Play sound +When this notification is activated, &kde; will play a sound. Once you place a mark in front of this option, you can enter a filename at the bottom of the module. +If you click on the folder to the right of the blank, you can browse through your filesystem and select the file you want. +By clicking the arrow button to the right of the folder button, you can hear the sound. + +Maybe you want to use a special media player to play sound files, ⪚ because you use sound files in a special format or you don't use the &arts; sound daemon. In that case, check the Use external player option and enter the full path and name of the program you want to use into the text field. -Show messagebox -When this notification is activated, a message box appears in the middle of the screen to inform the user of the message. +Show messagebox +When this notification is activated, a message box appears in the middle of the screen to inform the user of the message. -Standard error output -When this notification is activated, the message is sent to the standard output. +Standard error output +When this notification is activated, the message is sent to the standard output. -You are not limited to choosing one option, you can use any combination of these four options for each notification. - -You can turn off (or on) all sounds at once, for all installed applications, with the Enable All Sounds or Disable All Sounds Button. Which of these you see depends on the current status. +You are not limited to choosing one option, you can use any combination of these four options for each notification. + +You can turn off (or on) all sounds at once, for all installed applications, with the Enable All Sounds or Disable All Sounds Button. Which of these you see depends on the current status. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook index 7bac2d4cff6..78f911433ae 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook @@ -2,149 +2,79 @@ - + ]>
-&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-13 -3.2 +2003-10-13 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -session +KDE +KControl +session -Session Manager +Session Manager -Use +Use -In this control module you can configure &kde;'s session manager. +In this control module you can configure &kde;'s session manager. -Session management refers to &kde;'s ability to save the state of applications and windows when you log out of &kde; and restore them when you log back in. +Session management refers to &kde;'s ability to save the state of applications and windows when you log out of &kde; and restore them when you log back in. -The General section contains one setting: +The General section contains one setting: -Confirm logout +Confirm logout -If this option is checked, when logging out, &kde; will display a dialogue asking for confirmation. In this dialogue you can also choose whether you want to restore your current session when you login the next time. +If this option is checked, when logging out, &kde; will display a dialogue asking for confirmation. In this dialogue you can also choose whether you want to restore your current session when you login the next time. -You may choose one of three options on what should happen when you log into &kde;: +You may choose one of three options on what should happen when you log into &kde;: -Restore previous session -If this option is checked, &kde; will save your current session's state when you logout. &kde; will restore your session on the next login, so you can continue to work with a desktop just like you left it. +Restore previous session +If this option is checked, &kde; will save your current session's state when you logout. &kde; will restore your session on the next login, so you can continue to work with a desktop just like you left it. -Restore manually saved session -Instead of restoring &kde; to the state it was when you logged out last, it will be restored to a specific state that you have saved manually. +Restore manually saved session +Instead of restoring &kde; to the state it was when you logged out last, it will be restored to a specific state that you have saved manually. -Start with an empty session +Start with an empty session -If you choose this option, &kde; will never restore sessions that it has saved. +If you choose this option, &kde; will never restore sessions that it has saved. -You can configure what should happen by default when you log out of &kde;. These options are not possible on all operating systems, and they require the use of &tdm; as your login manager. +You can configure what should happen by default when you log out of &kde;. These options are not possible on all operating systems, and they require the use of &tdm; as your login manager. -The options available are self explanatory, if you are in doubt, leave the default settings. They are: +The options available are self explanatory, if you are in doubt, leave the default settings. They are: -Login as different user (this is the default) -Turn off computer -Restart computer +Login as different user (this is the default) +Turn off computer +Restart computer -Finally, you can enter a colon (:) separated list of applications that should not be saved in sessions, and therefore will not be started when restoring a session. For example xterm:konsole. +Finally, you can enter a colon (:) separated list of applications that should not be saved in sessions, and therefore will not be started when restoring a session. For example xterm:konsole. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook index 5d05a331969..a1961c33027 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook @@ -2,321 +2,137 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -style +KDE +KControl +style -Style +Style -Introduction - -This module is used to configure how the individual widgets are drawn by &kde;. - -A Widget is a commonly-used programmer's term for referring to User Interface elements such as buttons, menus, and scroll bars. You can think of them as the fundamental pieces that are assembled to make your application. - -You can configure how the widgets are drawn with this module, but to change the colour of the widgets, you should refer to the section entitled Colours. - -This panel is divided into three tabs: Style, Effects, Miscellaneous. +Introduction + +This module is used to configure how the individual widgets are drawn by &kde;. + +A Widget is a commonly-used programmer's term for referring to User Interface elements such as buttons, menus, and scroll bars. You can think of them as the fundamental pieces that are assembled to make your application. + +You can configure how the widgets are drawn with this module, but to change the colour of the widgets, you should refer to the section entitled Colours. + +This panel is divided into three tabs: Style, Effects, Miscellaneous. -<guilabel ->Style</guilabel -> tab +<guilabel>Style</guilabel> tab -The top list box, labelled Widget Style contains a list of the pre-defined styles. Each style has a name, and a brief description. +The top list box, labelled Widget Style contains a list of the pre-defined styles. Each style has a name, and a brief description. -To change styles, simply click on the style name, and a preview of the style will be displayed in the preview box below the style list. +To change styles, simply click on the style name, and a preview of the style will be displayed in the preview box below the style list. -The other options available here are: +The other options available here are: - -Show icons on buttons + +Show icons on buttons -If this option is selected, action buttons (like OK and Apply will have a small icon located within them to act as a visual reference. If this option is not selected, then only the text of the button will appear in the button. - - - - -Enable tooltips +If this option is selected, action buttons (like OK and Apply will have a small icon located within them to act as a visual reference. If this option is not selected, then only the text of the button will appear in the button. + + + + +Enable tooltips -This will toggle tooltips off and on. - - - - -Menubar on the top of the screen in the style of MacOS +This will toggle tooltips off and on. + + + + +Menubar on the top of the screen in the style of MacOS -This will turn on a menubar at the top of the screen. This menubar will reflect the menu options of the active application. - - +This will turn on a menubar at the top of the screen. This menubar will reflect the menu options of the active application. + + -<guilabel ->Effects</guilabel -> tab -If you click on the Effects tab, you will see the panel is divided into two sections. -At the top of the first section, is a checkbox labelled Enable GUI effects. If there is no mark in front of this checkbox, then all visual effects of this panel are disabled. To edit any of these effects, simply place a mark in this checkbox. - -Below that checkbox, are 4 combo boxes: +<guilabel>Effects</guilabel> tab +If you click on the Effects tab, you will see the panel is divided into two sections. +At the top of the first section, is a checkbox labelled Enable GUI effects. If there is no mark in front of this checkbox, then all visual effects of this panel are disabled. To edit any of these effects, simply place a mark in this checkbox. + +Below that checkbox, are 4 combo boxes: -Combobox effects -This combobox has two options. If this option is set to Animate then when a combo box is selected, it will appear to scroll down. If Disable is selected, then the combobox list appears instantly. +Combobox effects +This combobox has two options. If this option is set to Animate then when a combo box is selected, it will appear to scroll down. If Disable is selected, then the combobox list appears instantly. -Tool Tip Effect -This combobox has three options. If this option is set to Animate then when a tool tip appears, it will have a short animation. If Fade is selected, the tool tip appears to fade from the background. If Disable is selected, then the tool tip appears instantly. +Tool Tip Effect +This combobox has three options. If this option is set to Animate then when a tool tip appears, it will have a short animation. If Fade is selected, the tool tip appears to fade from the background. If Disable is selected, then the tool tip appears instantly. -Menu Effect -This combobox has four options. If this option is set to Animate then when a menu list appears, it will appear to scroll downward. If Fade is selected, the menu list appears to fade from the background. If Make Transparent is selected, the menu list will have a transparent look to it. The details of that transparency is configured in the next part of the dialogue. If Disable is selected, then the menu list appears instantly. +Menu Effect +This combobox has four options. If this option is set to Animate then when a menu list appears, it will appear to scroll downward. If Fade is selected, the menu list appears to fade from the background. If Make Transparent is selected, the menu list will have a transparent look to it. The details of that transparency is configured in the next part of the dialogue. If Disable is selected, then the menu list appears instantly. -Menu tear-off handles -If this option is set to Disable, then no menus can be separated from the application. If Application Level is selected, then it is left up to each individual application to determine which menus can be torn separated from the application. -Many applications do not have tear off menus. You cannot tell &kde; to force an application to allow tear off menus. This is determined by the authors of the application. +Menu tear-off handles +If this option is set to Disable, then no menus can be separated from the application. If Application Level is selected, then it is left up to each individual application to determine which menus can be torn separated from the application. +Many applications do not have tear off menus. You cannot tell &kde; to force an application to allow tear off menus. This is determined by the authors of the application. -The next checkbox, labelled Menu drop shadow is used to toggle the drop shadow behind all &kde; menus. A drop shadow is a dark, soft line on the bottom and right sides of the menu, which give the menus the appearance that the menu is lifted off the application, and the menu is creating a shadow on the application. +The next checkbox, labelled Menu drop shadow is used to toggle the drop shadow behind all &kde; menus. A drop shadow is a dark, soft line on the bottom and right sides of the menu, which give the menus the appearance that the menu is lifted off the application, and the menu is creating a shadow on the application. -The next section only applies if the combobox labelled Menu Effect is set to Make Transparent. You can use the combo box labelled Menu transparency type to select the method &kde; uses to generate the transparency. You can use the slider to determine the level of transparency in menus. A preview is visible on the right side of this section. +The next section only applies if the combobox labelled Menu Effect is set to Make Transparent. You can use the combo box labelled Menu transparency type to select the method &kde; uses to generate the transparency. You can use the slider to determine the level of transparency in menus. A preview is visible on the right side of this section. -<guilabel ->Miscellaneous</guilabel -> tab - -This small section has six options. - - - - -Highlight buttons under mouse. +<guilabel>Miscellaneous</guilabel> tab + +This small section has six options. + + + + +Highlight buttons under mouse. -If there is a mark in this checkbox, when the mouse pointer is above a toolbar button, that button will be highlighted with a square around the button. This is a good visual indicator of which button will be selected with a mouse click. - - - - -Transparent toolbars when moving +If there is a mark in this checkbox, when the mouse pointer is above a toolbar button, that button will be highlighted with a square around the button. This is a good visual indicator of which button will be selected with a mouse click. + + + + +Transparent toolbars when moving -As the title suggests, if this option is selected, the toolbars will be transparent when you are moving them around on the screen. - - - - -Text position +As the title suggests, if this option is selected, the toolbars will be transparent when you are moving them around on the screen. + + + + +Text position -This combo box lets you determine where on the button the text name of the button will appear as the default. If Icon Only is selected, then there is no text on the tool bar buttons. If Text Only is selected, then the buttons icon is replaced with a text name of the button. If Text Alongside Icons is selected, then the name of the button will be placed to the right of the icon. If Text Under Icons is selected, the default will be to have the text of the button below the icon. -This option only specifies the default location. Each application can override the setting used in this panel. - - +This combo box lets you determine where on the button the text name of the button will appear as the default. If Icon Only is selected, then there is no text on the tool bar buttons. If Text Only is selected, then the buttons icon is replaced with a text name of the button. If Text Alongside Icons is selected, then the name of the button will be placed to the right of the icon. If Text Under Icons is selected, the default will be to have the text of the button below the icon. +This option only specifies the default location. Each application can override the setting used in this panel. + + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook index 326f9102474..3858ec96524 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook @@ -2,174 +2,92 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-10-08 -3.2 +2002-10-08 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -taskbar -configure +KDE +KControl +taskbar +configure -Taskbar +Taskbar -<guilabel ->Taskbar</guilabel -> - -The taskbar is a quick way to switch between applications. The taskbar can be located in the panel (default), or outside the panel on the desktop. - -This module has options to control how the taskbar operates: - -Show windows from all desktops, determines if all open windows are included in the taskbar or not. By default, the taskbar only shows the open windows on the current desktop. If this option is enabled, the taskbar will show all open windows on all desktops. - -Using the Show window list button option, you can enable a little button to be shown in the taskbar: this button will open a popup menu offering access to applications on other desktops as well as some useful actions, like Unclutter Windows. - -Sort tasks by virtual desktop changes the sort order of the icons on the taskbar, so that windows on virtual desktop 1 are shown first (to the left, or at the top of the taskbar), followed by windows on virtual desktop 2, and so on. - -You can disable the application icons, and show just the text. You might want to do this to save space on your taskbar, for example. - -You can have the taskbar Show only minimised windows. In this case, when you minimise a window, it will show up on the taskbar, and when you open it again, its taskbar entry will disappear. - -Group similar tasks allows you to save some space on your taskbar, by only showing one icon for each running application, no matter how many windows are shown. You can click on the icon to display a menu of all the windows that are available. This is most useful when you have enabled Show all windows. +<guilabel>Taskbar</guilabel> + +The taskbar is a quick way to switch between applications. The taskbar can be located in the panel (default), or outside the panel on the desktop. + +This module has options to control how the taskbar operates: + +Show windows from all desktops, determines if all open windows are included in the taskbar or not. By default, the taskbar only shows the open windows on the current desktop. If this option is enabled, the taskbar will show all open windows on all desktops. + +Using the Show window list button option, you can enable a little button to be shown in the taskbar: this button will open a popup menu offering access to applications on other desktops as well as some useful actions, like Unclutter Windows. + +Sort tasks by virtual desktop changes the sort order of the icons on the taskbar, so that windows on virtual desktop 1 are shown first (to the left, or at the top of the taskbar), followed by windows on virtual desktop 2, and so on. + +You can disable the application icons, and show just the text. You might want to do this to save space on your taskbar, for example. + +You can have the taskbar Show only minimised windows. In this case, when you minimise a window, it will show up on the taskbar, and when you open it again, its taskbar entry will disappear. + +Group similar tasks allows you to save some space on your taskbar, by only showing one icon for each running application, no matter how many windows are shown. You can click on the icon to display a menu of all the windows that are available. This is most useful when you have enabled Show all windows. -<guilabel ->Actions</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Actions</guilabel> -The next set of options allow you to customise the actions performed with different mouse clicks on taskbar icons. +The next set of options allow you to customise the actions performed with different mouse clicks on taskbar icons. -You can select any action from the list for the &LMB;, the &MMB; and the &RMB;. +You can select any action from the list for the &LMB;, the &MMB; and the &RMB;. -The options available are: +The options available are: -Show Task List +Show Task List -Show the list of tasks grouped under the icon you have clicked on. If there is only one task or window for that icon, it will become the active window. -This is the default action for the &LMB;. +Show the list of tasks grouped under the icon you have clicked on. If there is only one task or window for that icon, it will become the active window. +This is the default action for the &LMB;. -Cycle Through Windows +Cycle Through Windows -If there is more than one task grouped under the icon, switch from one to the next, until you release the button (&ie; when you have reached the window you are looking for). If there is only one task or window for that icon, it will become the active window. +If there is more than one task grouped under the icon, switch from one to the next, until you release the button (&ie; when you have reached the window you are looking for). If there is only one task or window for that icon, it will become the active window. -This is the default action for the &MMB; if window grouping is enabled. +This is the default action for the &MMB; if window grouping is enabled. -Show Operations Menu +Show Operations Menu -Show the operations menu for the application. This allows you to minimise, maximize, &etc;, move windows between desktops, and close windows. You can perform these actions on all windows grouped under that icon, or on any single window, by choosing it from the submenu. -This is the default action for the &RMB;. +Show the operations menu for the application. This allows you to minimise, maximize, &etc;, move windows between desktops, and close windows. You can perform these actions on all windows grouped under that icon, or on any single window, by choosing it from the submenu. +This is the default action for the &RMB;. -Raise Task, Lower Task, Minimise Task +Raise Task, Lower Task, Minimise Task -These three options make sense only if window grouping is disabled. They are fairly self-explanatory. Raise means to make active, bring to the front, and give focus. Lower means, send to the back, and give focus to whichever window is now on top. +These three options make sense only if window grouping is disabled. They are fairly self-explanatory. Raise means to make active, bring to the front, and give focus. Lower means, send to the back, and give focus to whichever window is now on top. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook index 320d43bcdaf..5da87605348 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook @@ -2,108 +2,59 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -keyboard +KDE +KControl +keyboard -Keyboard +Keyboard -This module allows you to choose how your keyboard works. +This module allows you to choose how your keyboard works. -The actual effect of setting these options depends upon the features provided by your keyboard hardware and the X server on which &kde; is running. As an example, you may find that changing the key click volume has no effect because that feature is not available on your system. +The actual effect of setting these options depends upon the features provided by your keyboard hardware and the X server on which &kde; is running. As an example, you may find that changing the key click volume has no effect because that feature is not available on your system. -Advanced +Advanced -Enable keyboard repeat +Enable keyboard repeat -When this option is selected, pressing and holding down a key emits the same character repeatedly until the key is released. Pressing and holding the key will have the same effect as pressing it multiple times in succession. -Almost all users will want to have this option enabled, because it makes navigating through documents with the arrow keys significantly easier. +When this option is selected, pressing and holding down a key emits the same character repeatedly until the key is released. Pressing and holding the key will have the same effect as pressing it multiple times in succession. +Almost all users will want to have this option enabled, because it makes navigating through documents with the arrow keys significantly easier. -NumLock on KDE Startup +NumLock on KDE Startup -You can choose to either always Turn on or Turn off the NumLock when &kde; starts, or you can choose to have &kde; leave NumLock at whatever it was set to before KDE started up. +You can choose to either always Turn on or Turn off the NumLock when &kde; starts, or you can choose to have &kde; leave NumLock at whatever it was set to before KDE started up. -Key click volume: +Key click volume: -If supported, this option allows you to hear audible clicks from your computer's speakers when you press the keys on your keyboard. In essence, this simulates the click of a mechanical type-writer. You can change the loudness of the key click feedback by dragging the slider button or by clicking the up/down arrows on the spin-button. Setting the volume to 0% turns off the key click. -Many computers won't support this function. -Very few people would choose to enable this option, since it generally annoys everyone else in the room. However, if your heart yearns for the pre-soft-key era, this may help you to re-experience the warm sentimentality of days-gone-by. +If supported, this option allows you to hear audible clicks from your computer's speakers when you press the keys on your keyboard. In essence, this simulates the click of a mechanical type-writer. You can change the loudness of the key click feedback by dragging the slider button or by clicking the up/down arrows on the spin-button. Setting the volume to 0% turns off the key click. +Many computers won't support this function. +Very few people would choose to enable this option, since it generally annoys everyone else in the room. However, if your heart yearns for the pre-soft-key era, this may help you to re-experience the warm sentimentality of days-gone-by. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook index ea1405b79b7..46a0ce85692 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook @@ -2,244 +2,104 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-13 -3.00.00 +2002-02-13 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -key bindings -bindings -shortcuts +KDE +KControl +key bindings +bindings +shortcuts -Shortcuts - - -Introduction - -While most of the functionality offered by &kde; can be accessed using a simple point and click interface, many people prefer using the keyboard for some tasks. Pressing something like &Ctrl;F is often just faster than moving your hands off the keyboard to the mouse, opening the Edit menu and selecting Find. - -As different people have different preferences about keyboard shortcuts, &kde; offers full customisation of key bindings. A key binding or shortcut is a combination of an action with a key or a combination of keys. +Shortcuts + + +Introduction + +While most of the functionality offered by &kde; can be accessed using a simple point and click interface, many people prefer using the keyboard for some tasks. Pressing something like &Ctrl;F is often just faster than moving your hands off the keyboard to the mouse, opening the Edit menu and selecting Find. + +As different people have different preferences about keyboard shortcuts, &kde; offers full customisation of key bindings. A key binding or shortcut is a combination of an action with a key or a combination of keys. -Use - -In the Shortcuts control module you will see a list of key schemes, a list of key bindings in the currently selected scheme and a frame where you can customise the currently selected key binding. Also, you will see a tab for Global shortcuts and one for Application shortcuts. +Use + +In the Shortcuts control module you will see a list of key schemes, a list of key bindings in the currently selected scheme and a frame where you can customise the currently selected key binding. Also, you will see a tab for Global shortcuts and one for Application shortcuts. -Global Shortcuts and Application Shortcuts - -Global shortcuts and application shortcuts work just the same. Actually, in a certain way application shortcuts are global as well. The only difference is: +Global Shortcuts and Application Shortcuts + +Global shortcuts and application shortcuts work just the same. Actually, in a certain way application shortcuts are global as well. The only difference is: -Global shortcuts are shortcuts for actions that make sense even when no application is opened. These shortcuts usually refer to actions like switching desktops, manipulating windows etc. -Application shortcuts refer to actions that are often available in applications, such as Save, Print, Copy etc. +Global shortcuts are shortcuts for actions that make sense even when no application is opened. These shortcuts usually refer to actions like switching desktops, manipulating windows etc. +Application shortcuts refer to actions that are often available in applications, such as Save, Print, Copy etc. -Please note, that the application shortcuts configured here are only the standard actions often found in applications. Most applications will define their own actions as well, for which you have to customise key bindings using the application's key bindings dialogue. +Please note, that the application shortcuts configured here are only the standard actions often found in applications. Most applications will define their own actions as well, for which you have to customise key bindings using the application's key bindings dialogue. -Configuring Key Bindings +Configuring Key Bindings -Configuring key bindings is pretty easy. In the middle of the key bindings control module you'll find a list of available actions. If there's a key binding configured for that action you'll find it right next to it. Just select the action you want to configure. +Configuring key bindings is pretty easy. In the middle of the key bindings control module you'll find a list of available actions. If there's a key binding configured for that action you'll find it right next to it. Just select the action you want to configure. -After you've selected an action you'll notice that most of the controls below the action list are enabled. There you can configure a combination of keys or maybe no key binding at all for the selected action. +After you've selected an action you'll notice that most of the controls below the action list are enabled. There you can configure a combination of keys or maybe no key binding at all for the selected action. -No key: the selected action will not be associated with any key. - -Default key: the selected action will be associated with &kde;'s default value. This is a good choice for most actions, as &kde; comes with reasonable key bindings we have thought about. - -Custom key: if this option is enabled, you can create a key combination for the selected action. Just select any modifiers (&ie; &Shift;, &Ctrl;, or &Alt;) and then select a key: just click on the key symbol and after that press the key you want to assign to this key combination. +No key: the selected action will not be associated with any key. + +Default key: the selected action will be associated with &kde;'s default value. This is a good choice for most actions, as &kde; comes with reasonable key bindings we have thought about. + +Custom key: if this option is enabled, you can create a key combination for the selected action. Just select any modifiers (&ie; &Shift;, &Ctrl;, or &Alt;) and then select a key: just click on the key symbol and after that press the key you want to assign to this key combination. -As with all control modules, your changes won't take in effect until you click OK or Apply. Click Cancel to discard all changes. +As with all control modules, your changes won't take in effect until you click OK or Apply. Click Cancel to discard all changes. -Configuring Schemes - -A key binding scheme is a set of key bindings that you can access using its name. &kde; comes with one pre-defined key binding scheme called KDE default for 3 modifiers. In addition to that scheme, you'll always see a scheme named Current scheme that stands for the set of key bindings you are using right now (&ie; not the current settings you are playing with, but what you've been using up to now). - -When you are playing with the key bindings for the first time you don't have to be afraid of changing the default bindings: &kde; won't let you overwrite the defaults, so you can always switch back to the factory presets. By choosing Current scheme you can return to the set of key bindings you've been using up to now. However, be careful not to select a scheme when you've made changes to the key bindings you don't want to lose. - -When you are satisfied with a set of key bindings you've created, you may want to save them to a scheme of your own, so that you can still experiment with the bindings and always return to a certain scheme. You can always do this by clicking on the Add button. You will be prompted for a name and then the new scheme will appear in the key schemes listbox. You can remove your own schemes again by selecting a scheme and clicking the Remove button. Click the Save changes button to save any changes you have made to the currently selected scheme. Note that you can not remove or save changes to KDE default or to Current scheme. - -If you want to save your changes while a read-only scheme is selected, you always have to add a new scheme first! If you select one of your own schemes because you want to save the changes to that one, the control module will switch to the key bindings of that scheme, discarding your changes. +Configuring Schemes + +A key binding scheme is a set of key bindings that you can access using its name. &kde; comes with one pre-defined key binding scheme called KDE default for 3 modifiers. In addition to that scheme, you'll always see a scheme named Current scheme that stands for the set of key bindings you are using right now (&ie; not the current settings you are playing with, but what you've been using up to now). + +When you are playing with the key bindings for the first time you don't have to be afraid of changing the default bindings: &kde; won't let you overwrite the defaults, so you can always switch back to the factory presets. By choosing Current scheme you can return to the set of key bindings you've been using up to now. However, be careful not to select a scheme when you've made changes to the key bindings you don't want to lose. + +When you are satisfied with a set of key bindings you've created, you may want to save them to a scheme of your own, so that you can still experiment with the bindings and always return to a certain scheme. You can always do this by clicking on the Add button. You will be prompted for a name and then the new scheme will appear in the key schemes listbox. You can remove your own schemes again by selecting a scheme and clicking the Remove button. Click the Save changes button to save any changes you have made to the currently selected scheme. Note that you can not remove or save changes to KDE default or to Current scheme. + +If you want to save your changes while a read-only scheme is selected, you always have to add a new scheme first! If you select one of your own schemes because you want to save the changes to that one, the control module will switch to the key bindings of that scheme, discarding your changes. -Modifier Keys - -Different keyboards offer different sets of modifier keys. A &Mac; keyboard, for example, does not have a &Ctrl; key, and instead has an Option key. Here you can see what the available modifier keys for the current keyboard are. - -If you enable Macintosh keyboard the list of modifiers will change. - -If you have enabled the &Mac; keyboard, you can further enable MacOS-style modifier usage, to make &kde; behave more like &MacOS;. - -Finally, you can change what a keypress sends to the &X-Server; in the X Modifier Mapping section. A common example is to reconfigure the Caps Lock key, which is rarely used, to be another &Ctrl; key. This is especially nice if you are a touch typist, as Caps Lock is much easier to reach than either of the &Ctrl; keys on a standard keyboard. +Modifier Keys + +Different keyboards offer different sets of modifier keys. A &Mac; keyboard, for example, does not have a &Ctrl; key, and instead has an Option key. Here you can see what the available modifier keys for the current keyboard are. + +If you enable Macintosh keyboard the list of modifiers will change. + +If you have enabled the &Mac; keyboard, you can further enable MacOS-style modifier usage, to make &kde; behave more like &MacOS;. + +Finally, you can change what a keypress sends to the &X-Server; in the X Modifier Mapping section. A common example is to reconfigure the Caps Lock key, which is rarely used, to be another &Ctrl; key. This is especially nice if you are a touch typist, as Caps Lock is much easier to reach than either of the &Ctrl; keys on a standard keyboard. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook index 8e3bfc2a446..b5f4c1a673d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook @@ -2,8 +2,7 @@ - + ]>
@@ -11,170 +10,76 @@ - Lauri Watts - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
KDE British Conversion + Lauri Watts + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
KDE British Conversion -2002-02-16 -3.00.00 +2002-02-16 +3.00.00 -KDE -kcontrol -Themes +KDE +kcontrol +Themes -Theme Manager +Theme Manager -With this module you can install, view, and even create, &kde; themes. +With this module you can install, view, and even create, &kde; themes. -This page is divided into two tabs: Installer, Contents. +This page is divided into two tabs: Installer, Contents. -Installer +Installer -Here you can install, preview and create &kde; themes. Themes created this way may not cover all the configurable options that &kde; has to offer. However, they do cover most options and are a great way to get started. +Here you can install, preview and create &kde; themes. Themes created this way may not cover all the configurable options that &kde; has to offer. However, they do cover most options and are a great way to get started. -On the left, you can see a list of themes that &kde; is aware of. Selecting one of the names will change the preview image in the middle of the pane, to give you a small taste of what the theme looks like. Any information the author has provided about the theme, for example, a longer or more descriptive name, is displayed in the bottom of the pane. +On the left, you can see a list of themes that &kde; is aware of. Selecting one of the names will change the preview image in the middle of the pane, to give you a small taste of what the theme looks like. Any information the author has provided about the theme, for example, a longer or more descriptive name, is displayed in the bottom of the pane. -Along with the normal &kcontrol; buttons at the bottom, you have four new ones to the right of the module. Add... allows you to add a new theme to the list on the left. Pressing it will open a normal &kde; file dialogue, where you can browse to the location of themes you have downloaded or created. +Along with the normal &kcontrol; buttons at the bottom, you have four new ones to the right of the module. Add... allows you to add a new theme to the list on the left. Pressing it will open a normal &kde; file dialogue, where you can browse to the location of themes you have downloaded or created. -The Save As... button allows you to save an existing theme with a new name, for example to allow you to easily modify it without damaging the original. It is strongly recommended that you use this if you intend creating themes by hand, you can get very unexpected results if there are errors in a theme file. +The Save As... button allows you to save an existing theme with a new name, for example to allow you to easily modify it without damaging the original. It is strongly recommended that you use this if you intend creating themes by hand, you can get very unexpected results if there are errors in a theme file. -Create will create a theme that contains your current desktop settings. Themes created this way are fairly unsophisticated, but they are a very good start to learning to make your own. +Create will create a theme that contains your current desktop settings. Themes created this way are fairly unsophisticated, but they are a very good start to learning to make your own. -Finally, it's very easy to collect alot of themes that look rather nice on a website, but aren't to your taste once you've tried them. The Remove... will remedy this situation, removing the theme from the list on the left. +Finally, it's very easy to collect alot of themes that look rather nice on a website, but aren't to your taste once you've tried them. The Remove... will remedy this situation, removing the theme from the list on the left. -Contents - -This page works together with the previous one, allowing you to custom fit a theme to your own needs. - -Not all themes contain instructions (or images) for all the configurable parts of &kde;. For example, some contain a colour scheme, a desktop wallpaper, and a style for the panel, but they don't have any icons or Window Decoration instructions. - -Another common situation is to find you have finally got your own icon theme, colour scheme or window decoration arrangement just so, and although you'd like to try out a theme, you don't want to mess up your current installation. - -Using this page, you can see immediately what categories of changes the theme will make, and you can enable or disable its effects on those categories. - -The list under the heading Work on the following parts will show you a checkbox to the left if the theme is going to affect that item, and to the right if the theme actually contains any contents for that category. - -You can use the Clear button to clear all the checkboxes, and the Invert button to check all the checkboxes that are currently empty, and clear those that were checked. - -For example, the Eclipse theme that comes with a base &kde; installation contains contents for all the configurable items, and is by default set up to change them all to its own settings. The MGBreizh theme contains contents for everything except the icons. The Technical theme, which you can find in the tdeartwork package, contains only the icons, so if you were to install MGBreizh, and then Technical, you would find you still had mostly the MGBreizh theme in place, but with new icons. - -Taking this same scenario, what if you really didn't want the MGBreizh theme anymore, and wanted to remove it, and just use the Technical icon theme with a plain desktop? - -You have two choices here. You can check the Uninstall parts of previous theme box, and then any installed theme will be entirely removed before the new one is installed. Or you could just install the Default theme, which really isn't a theme, it's more of a theme cleaner - it removes all other themes, and resets all your desktop theme settings to the &kde; default appearance. +Contents + +This page works together with the previous one, allowing you to custom fit a theme to your own needs. + +Not all themes contain instructions (or images) for all the configurable parts of &kde;. For example, some contain a colour scheme, a desktop wallpaper, and a style for the panel, but they don't have any icons or Window Decoration instructions. + +Another common situation is to find you have finally got your own icon theme, colour scheme or window decoration arrangement just so, and although you'd like to try out a theme, you don't want to mess up your current installation. + +Using this page, you can see immediately what categories of changes the theme will make, and you can enable or disable its effects on those categories. + +The list under the heading Work on the following parts will show you a checkbox to the left if the theme is going to affect that item, and to the right if the theme actually contains any contents for that category. + +You can use the Clear button to clear all the checkboxes, and the Invert button to check all the checkboxes that are currently empty, and clear those that were checked. + +For example, the Eclipse theme that comes with a base &kde; installation contains contents for all the configurable items, and is by default set up to change them all to its own settings. The MGBreizh theme contains contents for everything except the icons. The Technical theme, which you can find in the tdeartwork package, contains only the icons, so if you were to install MGBreizh, and then Technical, you would find you still had mostly the MGBreizh theme in place, but with new icons. + +Taking this same scenario, what if you really didn't want the MGBreizh theme anymore, and wanted to remove it, and just use the Technical icon theme with a plain desktop? + +You have two choices here. You can check the Uninstall parts of previous theme box, and then any installed theme will be entirely removed before the new one is installed. Or you could just install the Default theme, which really isn't a theme, it's more of a theme cleaner - it removes all other themes, and resets all your desktop theme settings to the &kde; default appearance. -Section Author - -This section was written by Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org. - -KDE British Conversion Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Author + +This section was written by Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org. + +KDE British Conversion Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook index 258f0edda9d..a5cf378baee 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook @@ -2,8 +2,7 @@ - + ]>
@@ -11,323 +10,123 @@ -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-14 3.2 - KDE - KControl - locale - country - language +2003-10-14 3.2 + KDE + KControl + locale + country + language -Country and Language +Country and Language -This module of the &kde; control centre allows you select customisation options that depend on the region of the world that you happen to live in. There are five different pages in this module, each of which is described in detail in the following sections. +This module of the &kde; control centre allows you select customisation options that depend on the region of the world that you happen to live in. There are five different pages in this module, each of which is described in detail in the following sections. -In most cases, you can simply select the country you live in, and the other options will be set in an appropriate manner. +In most cases, you can simply select the country you live in, and the other options will be set in an appropriate manner. -Below the pages of this module, you can see a preview of what the settings look like. In addition to positive and negative numbers, you can see how positive and negative currency values, long and short dates, and times are displayed. When you change any of the settings, the preview shows the effects of the changes before you apply them. +Below the pages of this module, you can see a preview of what the settings look like. In addition to positive and negative numbers, you can see how positive and negative currency values, long and short dates, and times are displayed. When you change any of the settings, the preview shows the effects of the changes before you apply them. -Locale +Locale -On this page, there are two lists, from which you can select the country and languages that you want to use. +On this page, there are two lists, from which you can select the country and languages that you want to use. -When you click on the Country list, a menu pops up showing major groups of countries. You can select one of these regions and see a list of the countries that are available for that region. +When you click on the Country list, a menu pops up showing major groups of countries. You can select one of these regions and see a list of the countries that are available for that region. -If the language for the country you have selected is available on your system, it will be selected automatically. For instance, choosing Germany as the country will select German as the language, if it is available. +If the language for the country you have selected is available on your system, it will be selected automatically. For instance, choosing Germany as the country will select German as the language, if it is available. -Numbers +Numbers -On this page, you can select options for how numbers are displayed. The defaults are selected automatically based on the country which is currently selected. +On this page, you can select options for how numbers are displayed. The defaults are selected automatically based on the country which is currently selected. -In the text box labelled Decimal symbol, you can type the character that you want to use to separate the decimal portion of numbers. You could put anything here you wanted to, but really, . and , are the two characters that make the most sense. +In the text box labelled Decimal symbol, you can type the character that you want to use to separate the decimal portion of numbers. You could put anything here you wanted to, but really, . and , are the two characters that make the most sense. -Similarly, you can choose the character which is used to group units of thousands in numbers. If no character, not even a space, is present, then there will be no separator for thousands. +Similarly, you can choose the character which is used to group units of thousands in numbers. If no character, not even a space, is present, then there will be no separator for thousands. -Finally, you can choose what character should be prefixed to positive and negative numbers respectively. For example, the default for English is not to have any prefix for positive numbers, and a - for negative numbers. +Finally, you can choose what character should be prefixed to positive and negative numbers respectively. For example, the default for English is not to have any prefix for positive numbers, and a - for negative numbers. -Money +Money -Unlike the display of ordinary numbers, conventions for currency values do vary from region to region. However, you will find that the defaults are probably fine. +Unlike the display of ordinary numbers, conventions for currency values do vary from region to region. However, you will find that the defaults are probably fine. -The character or characters representing the currency symbol are based on the country that is currently selected. The decimal symbol and thousands separator work as they do for numbers. The text box labelled Fract digits allows you to specify the number of fractional digits used in displaying currency values. +The character or characters representing the currency symbol are based on the country that is currently selected. The decimal symbol and thousands separator work as they do for numbers. The text box labelled Fract digits allows you to specify the number of fractional digits used in displaying currency values. -For both positive and negative currency values, you can control whether the currency symbol appears before or after the numeric value, and how the sign of the value is distinguished in the display. Note that the symbols used for the sign of currency values are the same as those used for other numeric values. +For both positive and negative currency values, you can control whether the currency symbol appears before or after the numeric value, and how the sign of the value is distinguished in the display. Note that the symbols used for the sign of currency values are the same as those used for other numeric values. -If the checkbox labelled Prefix currency symbol is selected, the currency symbol appears before the numeric value. If this checkbox is cleared, then the currency symbol appears after the numeric value. +If the checkbox labelled Prefix currency symbol is selected, the currency symbol appears before the numeric value. If this checkbox is cleared, then the currency symbol appears after the numeric value. -There are five choices for the way in which the sign of the currency value is handled: +There are five choices for the way in which the sign of the currency value is handled: -The Parens around option displays the numeric value within a pair of parentheses. -The Before quantity money option displays the sign before the numeric value, but after any currency symbol that may be present. -The After quantity money option displays the sign after the numeric value, but before any currency symbol that may be present. -The Before money option displays the sign before the numeric value as well as any currency symbol that may be present. -The After money option displays the sign after the numeric value as well as any currency symbol that may be present. +The Parens around option displays the numeric value within a pair of parentheses. +The Before quantity money option displays the sign before the numeric value, but after any currency symbol that may be present. +The After quantity money option displays the sign after the numeric value, but before any currency symbol that may be present. +The Before money option displays the sign before the numeric value as well as any currency symbol that may be present. +The After money option displays the sign after the numeric value as well as any currency symbol that may be present. -Time and Dates +Time and Dates -If you use a different calendar system than Gregorian, you can choose this from the first dropdown box. +If you use a different calendar system than Gregorian, you can choose this from the first dropdown box. -On the rest of this page, there are text boxes for the time, long date, and short date, in which you can type format strings to control the way in which times and dates are displayed. +On the rest of this page, there are text boxes for the time, long date, and short date, in which you can type format strings to control the way in which times and dates are displayed. -Except for the special codes described below, any other characters in the format strings are displayed literally. The special codes consist of a % sign followed by a character, as shown in the list of codes below: +Except for the special codes described below, any other characters in the format strings are displayed literally. The special codes consist of a % sign followed by a character, as shown in the list of codes below: -Time format codes: +Time format codes: - HH - The hour according to a 24-hour clock, using two digits (00 to 23). - hH - The hour according to a 24-hour clock, using one or two digits (0 to 23). - PH (uppercase eye) - The hour according to a 12-hour clock, using two digits (01 to 12). - pH (lowercase ell) - The hour according to a 12-hour clock, using one or two digits (1 to 12). - MM - The current minute using two digits (00 to 59). - SS - The current second using two digits (00 to 59). - AMPM - Either am or pm depending on the hour. Useful with PH or pH. + HH - The hour according to a 24-hour clock, using two digits (00 to 23). + hH - The hour according to a 24-hour clock, using one or two digits (0 to 23). + PH (uppercase eye) - The hour according to a 12-hour clock, using two digits (01 to 12). + pH (lowercase ell) - The hour according to a 12-hour clock, using one or two digits (1 to 12). + MM - The current minute using two digits (00 to 59). + SS - The current second using two digits (00 to 59). + AMPM - Either am or pm depending on the hour. Useful with PH or pH. -Date format codes: +Date format codes: - YYYY - The year, using 4 digits. - YY - The year, using 2 digits. - MM - The month, using 2 digits (01 to 12). - mM - The month, using 1 or 2 digits (1 to 12). - MONTH - The name of the month. - SHORTMONTH - The abbreviated name of the month. - DD - The day, using 2 digits (01 to 31). - dD - The day, using 1 or 2 digits (1 to 31). - WEEKDAY - The name of the weekday. - SHORTWEEKDAY - The abbreviated name of the weekday. + YYYY - The year, using 4 digits. + YY - The year, using 2 digits. + MM - The month, using 2 digits (01 to 12). + mM - The month, using 1 or 2 digits (1 to 12). + MONTH - The name of the month. + SHORTMONTH - The abbreviated name of the month. + DD - The day, using 2 digits (01 to 31). + dD - The day, using 1 or 2 digits (1 to 31). + WEEKDAY - The name of the weekday. + SHORTWEEKDAY - The abbreviated name of the weekday. -Finally, there's a combobox labelled First day of the week which lets you select which day is the first one of the week in your country. +Finally, there's a combobox labelled First day of the week which lets you select which day is the first one of the week in your country. -Other -You can select the default paper format with the combo box labelled Paper Format. - -Use the drop down box labelled Measure system to select Imperial or Metric systems of measurement. +Other +You can select the default paper format with the combo box labelled Paper Format. + +Use the drop down box labelled Measure system to select Imperial or Metric systems of measurement. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook index f8a56db1571..92117c513ec 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook @@ -2,330 +2,154 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Brad.Hards; &Brad.Hards.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Brad.Hards; &Brad.Hards.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2004-10-09 -3.03.00 +2004-10-09 +3.03.00 -This is the documentation for the &kde; &kcontrol; module that configures mice and other pointing devices. +This is the documentation for the &kde; &kcontrol; module that configures mice and other pointing devices. -KDE -KControl -mouse +KDE +KControl +mouse -Mouse - -This module allows you to configure your pointing device. Your pointing device may be a mouse, a track ball, a touch-pad, or another piece of hardware that performs a similar function. - -This module is divided into several tabs: General, Cursor Theme, Advanced and Mouse Navigation. +Mouse + +This module allows you to configure your pointing device. Your pointing device may be a mouse, a track ball, a touch-pad, or another piece of hardware that performs a similar function. + +This module is divided into several tabs: General, Cursor Theme, Advanced and Mouse Navigation. -<guilabel ->General</guilabel -> +<guilabel>General</guilabel> -Button Order -If you are left-handed, you may prefer to swap the functions of the left and right buttons on your pointing device by choosing the Left handed option. If your pointing device has more than two buttons, only those that function as the left and right buttons are affected. For example, if you have a three-button mouse, the middle button is unaffected. +Button Order +If you are left-handed, you may prefer to swap the functions of the left and right buttons on your pointing device by choosing the Left handed option. If your pointing device has more than two buttons, only those that function as the left and right buttons are affected. For example, if you have a three-button mouse, the middle button is unaffected. -Reverse scroll direction -With this checkbox selected, the scroll wheel (if any) will work in the opposite direction (so that if rolling the top of the scroll wheel towards you previously causes a scroll down, then it will now cause a scroll up). This may be useful to handle a unusual setup of the X server. +Reverse scroll direction +With this checkbox selected, the scroll wheel (if any) will work in the opposite direction (so that if rolling the top of the scroll wheel towards you previously causes a scroll down, then it will now cause a scroll up). This may be useful to handle a unusual setup of the X server. -Double-click to open files and folders (select icons on first click) +Double-click to open files and folders (select icons on first click) -If this option is not checked, icons/files will be opened with a single click of the left mouse-button. This default behaviour is consistent with what you would expect when you click links in most web browsers. If checked however, icons/files will be opened with a double click, while a single click will only select the icon or file. This is the behaviour you may know from other desktops or operating systems. +If this option is not checked, icons/files will be opened with a single click of the left mouse-button. This default behaviour is consistent with what you would expect when you click links in most web browsers. If checked however, icons/files will be opened with a double click, while a single click will only select the icon or file. This is the behaviour you may know from other desktops or operating systems. -Single-click to open files and folders +Single-click to open files and folders -This is the default setting for &kde;. Clicking once on an icon will open it. To select you can drag around the icon(s) or &Ctrl;Right click, or simply click and hold to drag it. You can also enable automatic selection of icons using the Automatically select icons checkbox, discussed below. +This is the default setting for &kde;. Clicking once on an icon will open it. To select you can drag around the icon(s) or &Ctrl;Right click, or simply click and hold to drag it. You can also enable automatic selection of icons using the Automatically select icons checkbox, discussed below. -Change pointer shape over icons +Change pointer shape over icons -When this option is checked, the shape of the mouse pointer changes whenever it is over an icon. +When this option is checked, the shape of the mouse pointer changes whenever it is over an icon. -This option should be checked in most situations. It gives more visual feedback and says, in essence, if you click here, something will happen. +This option should be checked in most situations. It gives more visual feedback and says, in essence, if you click here, something will happen. -Automatically select icons +Automatically select icons -As noted above, if you have Single-click to open files and folders selected, you can select icons by dragging around them, or by using &Ctrl;Right click. If you routinely need to select icons, you may want to enable this checkbox, which will allow icons to be selected automatically by pausing over the icon. The Delay: slider determines how long is required before the automatic selection takes effect. +As noted above, if you have Single-click to open files and folders selected, you can select icons by dragging around them, or by using &Ctrl;Right click. If you routinely need to select icons, you may want to enable this checkbox, which will allow icons to be selected automatically by pausing over the icon. The Delay: slider determines how long is required before the automatic selection takes effect. -Visual feedback on activation +Visual feedback on activation -When this option is checked, &kde; gives you visual feedback whenever you click on something and activate it. +When this option is checked, &kde; gives you visual feedback whenever you click on something and activate it. -<guilabel ->Cursor Theme</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Cursor Theme</guilabel> -This tab allows you to select from a number of cursor themes. A preview of the cursor display is shown above the listbox. +This tab allows you to select from a number of cursor themes. A preview of the cursor display is shown above the listbox. -The features provided by this tab may not be available on some systems. Your system may need to be updated to support cursor themes. +The features provided by this tab may not be available on some systems. Your system may need to be updated to support cursor themes. -If you have additional cursor themes available to you, you can install and remove them using the buttons below the listbox. Note that you cannot remove the default themes. +If you have additional cursor themes available to you, you can install and remove them using the buttons below the listbox. Note that you cannot remove the default themes. -Advanced +Advanced -Pointer acceleration +Pointer acceleration -This option allows you to change the relationship between the distance that the mouse pointer moves on the screen and the relative movement of the physical device itself (which may be a mouse, track-ball, or some other pointing device.) - -A high value for the acceleration multiplier will lead to large movements of the mouse pointer on the screen, even when you only make a small movement with the physical device. - -A multiplier between 1x and 3x will works well for many systems. With a multiplier over 3x the mouse pointer may become difficult to control. +This option allows you to change the relationship between the distance that the mouse pointer moves on the screen and the relative movement of the physical device itself (which may be a mouse, track-ball, or some other pointing device.) + +A high value for the acceleration multiplier will lead to large movements of the mouse pointer on the screen, even when you only make a small movement with the physical device. + +A multiplier between 1x and 3x will works well for many systems. With a multiplier over 3x the mouse pointer may become difficult to control. -Pointer threshold +Pointer threshold -The threshold is the smallest distance that the mouse pointer must move on the screen before acceleration has any effect. If the movement is within the threshold, the mouse pointer moves as if the acceleration were set to 1x. - -Thus, when you make small movements with the physical device (⪚ mouse), you still have fine control of the mouse pointer on the screen, whereas larger movements of the physical device will move the mouse pointer rapidly to different areas on the screen. - -You can set the threshold value by dragging the slider button or by clicking the up/down arrows on the spin-button to the left of the slider. - -In general, the higher you set the Pointer acceleration value, the higher you'll want to set the Pointer threshold value. For example, A Pointer threshold of 4 pixels may be appropriate for a Pointer Acceleration of 2x, but 10 pixels might be better for 3x. +The threshold is the smallest distance that the mouse pointer must move on the screen before acceleration has any effect. If the movement is within the threshold, the mouse pointer moves as if the acceleration were set to 1x. + +Thus, when you make small movements with the physical device (⪚ mouse), you still have fine control of the mouse pointer on the screen, whereas larger movements of the physical device will move the mouse pointer rapidly to different areas on the screen. + +You can set the threshold value by dragging the slider button or by clicking the up/down arrows on the spin-button to the left of the slider. + +In general, the higher you set the Pointer acceleration value, the higher you'll want to set the Pointer threshold value. For example, A Pointer threshold of 4 pixels may be appropriate for a Pointer Acceleration of 2x, but 10 pixels might be better for 3x. -Double click interval +Double click interval -This is the maximum amount of time between clicks for &kde; to register a double click. If you click twice, and the time between those two clicks is less than this number, &kde; recognises that as a double click. If the time between these two clicks is greater than this number, &kde; recognises those as two separate single clicks. +This is the maximum amount of time between clicks for &kde; to register a double click. If you click twice, and the time between those two clicks is less than this number, &kde; recognises that as a double click. If the time between these two clicks is greater than this number, &kde; recognises those as two separate single clicks. -Drag start time and Drag start distance +Drag start time and Drag start distance -If you click with the mouse drag within the time specified in Drag start time, and move a distance equal to or greater than the number (of pixels) specified in Drag start distance &kde; will drag the selected item. +If you click with the mouse drag within the time specified in Drag start time, and move a distance equal to or greater than the number (of pixels) specified in Drag start distance &kde; will drag the selected item. -Mouse wheel scrolls by +Mouse wheel scrolls by -If you have a wheel mouse, use the slider to determine how many lines of text one step of the mouse wheel will scroll. +If you have a wheel mouse, use the slider to determine how many lines of text one step of the mouse wheel will scroll. @@ -334,97 +158,52 @@ -<guilabel ->Mouse Navigation</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Mouse Navigation</guilabel> -This tab allows you to configure the keyboard number pad keys as a mouse-type device. This may be useful when you are working on a device without another pointing device, or where you have no other use for the number pad. +This tab allows you to configure the keyboard number pad keys as a mouse-type device. This may be useful when you are working on a device without another pointing device, or where you have no other use for the number pad. -Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad) +Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad) -To enable keyboard mouse mode, you need to select the checkbox labelled Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad). When you do this, the other settings will become enabled, and you can customise the keyboard pointer behaviour further, if required. -The various keys on the number pad move in the direction you would expect. Note that you can move diagonally as well as up, down, left and right. The 5 key emulates a click to a pointer button, typically &LMB;. You change which button is emulated by using the / key (which makes it &LMB;), * key (which makes it &MMB;) and - (which makes it &RMB;). Using the + emulates a doubleclick to the selected pointer button. You can use the 0 key to emulate holding down the selected pointer button (for easy dragging), and then use the . to emulate releasing the selected pointer button. +To enable keyboard mouse mode, you need to select the checkbox labelled Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad). When you do this, the other settings will become enabled, and you can customise the keyboard pointer behaviour further, if required. +The various keys on the number pad move in the direction you would expect. Note that you can move diagonally as well as up, down, left and right. The 5 key emulates a click to a pointer button, typically &LMB;. You change which button is emulated by using the / key (which makes it &LMB;), * key (which makes it &MMB;) and - (which makes it &RMB;). Using the + emulates a doubleclick to the selected pointer button. You can use the 0 key to emulate holding down the selected pointer button (for easy dragging), and then use the . to emulate releasing the selected pointer button. -Acceleration delay +Acceleration delay -This is the time (in milliseconds) between the initial key press and the first repeated motion event for mouse key acceleration. +This is the time (in milliseconds) between the initial key press and the first repeated motion event for mouse key acceleration. -Repeat interval +Repeat interval -This is the time in milliseconds between repeated motion events for mouse key acceleration. +This is the time in milliseconds between repeated motion events for mouse key acceleration. -Acceleration time +Acceleration time -This is the number of key events before the pointer reaches a maximum speed for mouse key acceleration. +This is the number of key events before the pointer reaches a maximum speed for mouse key acceleration. -Maximum speed +Maximum speed -This is the maximum speed in pixels per key event the pointer can reach for mouse key acceleration. +This is the maximum speed in pixels per key event the pointer can reach for mouse key acceleration. -Acceleration profile +Acceleration profile -This is the slope of the acceleration curve for mouse key acceleration. +This is the slope of the acceleration curve for mouse key acceleration. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook index bb7c2e8fc55..c9517512ca5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook @@ -2,132 +2,76 @@ - + ]>
-&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-10-16 -3.1 +2002-10-16 +3.1 -KDE -tdebase -kcontrol -network -timeouts +KDE +tdebase +kcontrol +network +timeouts -Preferences +Preferences -Here you can set timeout values. You might want to tweak them if your connection is very slow, but the default settings are appropriate for most users. +Here you can set timeout values. You might want to tweak them if your connection is very slow, but the default settings are appropriate for most users. -Here Timeout Values are the length of time an application should wait for an answer from a network operation. +Here Timeout Values are the length of time an application should wait for an answer from a network operation. -You can configure the following timeouts: +You can configure the following timeouts: -Socket Read +Socket Read -Some applications use sockets to communicate. You can think of a socket as a water tap; while it is open, water (or in our case, data) comes out, without any interaction. If something stops this flow of data, the application will wait for more to come. This could be a very long time, but you can configure a maximum time for an application to wait with this option. -This setting will only apply to &kde; applications, of course. +Some applications use sockets to communicate. You can think of a socket as a water tap; while it is open, water (or in our case, data) comes out, without any interaction. If something stops this flow of data, the application will wait for more to come. This could be a very long time, but you can configure a maximum time for an application to wait with this option. +This setting will only apply to &kde; applications, of course. -Proxy Connect +Proxy Connect -Sets how long to wait for a connection to a proxy server, if one is configured. +Sets how long to wait for a connection to a proxy server, if one is configured. -Server Connect +Server Connect -Sets how long to wait for a connection to a remote server. +Sets how long to wait for a connection to a remote server. -Server Response +Server Response -Sets how long to wait for a reply from a remote server. +Sets how long to wait for a reply from a remote server. -You can configure FTP Options here. At present there is just one option, Enable Passive Mode (PASV). - -Passive &FTP; is often required when you are behind a firewall. Many firewalls only permit connections that were initiated from the inside. Passive &FTP; is controlled by the client, which makes it usable through firewalls. +You can configure FTP Options here. At present there is just one option, Enable Passive Mode (PASV). + +Passive &FTP; is often required when you are behind a firewall. Many firewalls only permit connections that were initiated from the inside. Passive &FTP; is controlled by the client, which makes it usable through firewalls.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook index 9b28919dd8a..193d74f4465 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook @@ -2,316 +2,132 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-08 -3.2 +2003-10-08 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -panel +KDE +KControl +panel -Panel +Panel -The &kde; panel (often referred to as &kicker;) is the bar that you'll usually find at the bottom of the screen when you start up &kde; for the first time. The panel gives you quick access to applications and makes it easier for you to organise your desktop. Using the &kde; panel you can: +The &kde; panel (often referred to as &kicker;) is the bar that you'll usually find at the bottom of the screen when you start up &kde; for the first time. The panel gives you quick access to applications and makes it easier for you to organise your desktop. Using the &kde; panel you can: -launch applications using the K menu or the application buttons -switch desktops using the panel's pager applet +launch applications using the K menu or the application buttons +switch desktops using the panel's pager applet -switch active windows, and minimise or maximise them +switch active windows, and minimise or maximise them -browse folder using the browser menu functionality -access panel applets that extend the panel's functionality, offering for example mixers, clocks or a system monitor +browse folder using the browser menu functionality +access panel applets that extend the panel's functionality, offering for example mixers, clocks or a system monitor -Arrangement - -In the Arrangement tab you can configure the size and position of the panel. - -In the section labelled Position is a set of 12 small buttons arranged in a square. Each button corresponds to a location for the panel. Click on a button and notice where the panel is located on the preview monitor to the right. - -Generally, the available space in kicker is used more efficiently if the panel is aligned horizontally, &ie; attached to the top or bottom screen border. - -In the section labelled Length, you can use the combo box and slider to adjust the minimum length of the panel. If you place a mark in the checkbox labeled Expand as required to fit contents, the panel will become longer if more space is needed. When less space is required on the panel, the panel will shrink down to the minimum size. If there is no mark in the checkbox, then the panel is fixed to the length specified in this section. - -The final section of this table is labeled Size, and refers to the height of the panel. The panel's size can be Tiny, Small, Medium, Large or Custom. If you choose Custom mode, you can resize &kicker; by specifying a height in the combobox. - -If you have multiple monitors, you can configure the panel for each screen entirely independently. If you are not sure which screen is which, Press the Identify and a number will appear centred on each screen. - -Then simply choose the screen you wish to configure from the drop down box labelled Xinerama screen, or choose All Screens to have identical configurations on each. +Arrangement + +In the Arrangement tab you can configure the size and position of the panel. + +In the section labelled Position is a set of 12 small buttons arranged in a square. Each button corresponds to a location for the panel. Click on a button and notice where the panel is located on the preview monitor to the right. + +Generally, the available space in kicker is used more efficiently if the panel is aligned horizontally, &ie; attached to the top or bottom screen border. + +In the section labelled Length, you can use the combo box and slider to adjust the minimum length of the panel. If you place a mark in the checkbox labeled Expand as required to fit contents, the panel will become longer if more space is needed. When less space is required on the panel, the panel will shrink down to the minimum size. If there is no mark in the checkbox, then the panel is fixed to the length specified in this section. + +The final section of this table is labeled Size, and refers to the height of the panel. The panel's size can be Tiny, Small, Medium, Large or Custom. If you choose Custom mode, you can resize &kicker; by specifying a height in the combobox. + +If you have multiple monitors, you can configure the panel for each screen entirely independently. If you are not sure which screen is which, Press the Identify and a number will appear centred on each screen. + +Then simply choose the screen you wish to configure from the drop down box labelled Xinerama screen, or choose All Screens to have identical configurations on each. -Hiding - -Depending on your screen resolution you may find that the panel takes away too much of your precious screen real estate. To save screen space, the panel offers manual hiding of the panel, an auto hide feature, and the ability to allow other windows to lay on top of the panel. These features are selected in the section entitled Hide Mode. - -The Hide Mode section has three options: +Hiding + +Depending on your screen resolution you may find that the panel takes away too much of your precious screen real estate. To save screen space, the panel offers manual hiding of the panel, an auto hide feature, and the ability to allow other windows to lay on top of the panel. These features are selected in the section entitled Hide Mode. + +The Hide Mode section has three options: -Only hide when panel-hiding button is clicked -When this option is selected, the panel will remain visible at the location you defined unless you click on the button at the far right (for horizontally oriented) or bottom (for vertically oriented) button. This button has an arrow on it pointed to the edge of the screen. - -Once clicked, the panel will disappear. If the button is clicked again, the panel will re-appear at the same location. +Only hide when panel-hiding button is clicked +When this option is selected, the panel will remain visible at the location you defined unless you click on the button at the far right (for horizontally oriented) or bottom (for vertically oriented) button. This button has an arrow on it pointed to the edge of the screen. + +Once clicked, the panel will disappear. If the button is clicked again, the panel will re-appear at the same location. -Hide automatically -If this option is selected, then the panel will automatically disappear after the number of seconds specified in the combo box below the option. To make the panel reappear, simply move the mouse pointer to the edge of the screen where the panel is located, and the panel will reappear immediately. - -If you place a mark in the checkbox labelled Show panel when switching desktops, the panel will automatically reappear when you switch desktops. (The panel will disappear again after the specified number of seconds.) +Hide automatically +If this option is selected, then the panel will automatically disappear after the number of seconds specified in the combo box below the option. To make the panel reappear, simply move the mouse pointer to the edge of the screen where the panel is located, and the panel will reappear immediately. + +If you place a mark in the checkbox labelled Show panel when switching desktops, the panel will automatically reappear when you switch desktops. (The panel will disappear again after the specified number of seconds.) -Allow other windows to cover the panel -As this option's label implies, the panel is always on the desktop when this option is selected. It is now possible, however, for application windows to lay on top of the panel. - -To restore the panel, simply move the mouse cursor to the screen location specified in the drop box labeled Raise when the pointer touches the screen's:. You can change this value by selecting one of the choices provided in the drop down box. - -Once the panel has moved back on top of the application window, it will stay there until the application window becomes active again. +Allow other windows to cover the panel +As this option's label implies, the panel is always on the desktop when this option is selected. It is now possible, however, for application windows to lay on top of the panel. + +To restore the panel, simply move the mouse cursor to the screen location specified in the drop box labeled Raise when the pointer touches the screen's:. You can change this value by selecting one of the choices provided in the drop down box. + +Once the panel has moved back on top of the application window, it will stay there until the application window becomes active again. -The next section down is labelled Panel-Hiding Buttons. It consists of two check boxes: Show left panel-hiding button and Show left panel-hiding button. Use these checkboxes to show and hide the left and right manual panel hiding buttons. - -If there is no mark in the checkbox labeled Animate panel hiding, then whenever the toolbar is hidden, is simply disappears. If there is a mark in the check box, then the panel appears to slide off the edge of the screen. - -You can determine how quickly the panel appears to move by adjusting the slider from Fast to Slow. +The next section down is labelled Panel-Hiding Buttons. It consists of two check boxes: Show left panel-hiding button and Show left panel-hiding button. Use these checkboxes to show and hide the left and right manual panel hiding buttons. + +If there is no mark in the checkbox labeled Animate panel hiding, then whenever the toolbar is hidden, is simply disappears. If there is a mark in the check box, then the panel appears to slide off the edge of the screen. + +You can determine how quickly the panel appears to move by adjusting the slider from Fast to Slow. -Menus +Menus -In the Menus tab you can configure the panel menu's behaviour. This affects the TDE menu you will often use to launch applications, the browser menus you can use to access folders and other menus like the recent documents menu. +In the Menus tab you can configure the panel menu's behaviour. This affects the TDE menu you will often use to launch applications, the browser menus you can use to access folders and other menus like the recent documents menu. -The TDE Menu frame offers you some options to configure the K menu's functionality. This frame consists of 4 items: +The TDE Menu frame offers you some options to configure the K menu's functionality. This frame consists of 4 items: -The Menu item format: radio buttons have three options. This determines how the application name (&ie; &konqueror;, &kword;, &etc;) and the description (&ie; Web Browser, Word Processor, &etc;) are displayed on the TDE menu. - -The Optional Sub Menus checkboxes allow you to determine which special menu items appear in the TDE Menu. -The Bookmarks menu allows you to quickly select from the same bookmarks that are available in &konqueror;. -The Find menu offers access to the &kfind; application to search for local files, and a quick link to a search engine to search for things on the Internet. - -The Preferences menu allows you to launch each &kcontrol; module directly from the TDE menu. -The Print System menu provides several menu entries to help manage the printer(s) attached to your system. -The Quick Browser menu gives you quick links to locations on your hard drive. -The Recent Documents menu lists the most recently edited documents and will automatically launch the application to edit or view this document. -The Terminal Sessions menu provides menu items to launch several different types of terminal programs (command line interfaces). +The Menu item format: radio buttons have three options. This determines how the application name (&ie; &konqueror;, &kword;, &etc;) and the description (&ie; Web Browser, Word Processor, &etc;) are displayed on the TDE menu. + +The Optional Sub Menus checkboxes allow you to determine which special menu items appear in the TDE Menu. +The Bookmarks menu allows you to quickly select from the same bookmarks that are available in &konqueror;. +The Find menu offers access to the &kfind; application to search for local files, and a quick link to a search engine to search for things on the Internet. + +The Preferences menu allows you to launch each &kcontrol; module directly from the TDE menu. +The Print System menu provides several menu entries to help manage the printer(s) attached to your system. +The Quick Browser menu gives you quick links to locations on your hard drive. +The Recent Documents menu lists the most recently edited documents and will automatically launch the application to edit or view this document. +The Terminal Sessions menu provides menu items to launch several different types of terminal programs (command line interfaces). -Show side image will add a small image to the side of the menu. This is purely decorative. - -The Edit TDE Menu button launches the &kde; menu editor. +Show side image will add a small image to the side of the menu. This is purely decorative. + +The Edit TDE Menu button launches the &kde; menu editor. -In the QuickBrowser Menus area you can configure whether the panel's browser menus will show hidden files or not (hidden files on unix systems are those whose filenames begin with a dot) as well as how many files at most will be shown in a browser menu. The latter option may be especially useful if you have a rather small screen resolution, as then the browser menus will quickly fill up your screen when you browse folders containing many files. - -The quick start section in the TDE menu offers quick access to programs you have used often or recently. In the Quick Start Menu Items frame you can choose whether this section will show the most recently or the most frequently used programs. Using the option Maximum number of entries combo box, you can configure how many programs the quick start section will remember. +In the QuickBrowser Menus area you can configure whether the panel's browser menus will show hidden files or not (hidden files on unix systems are those whose filenames begin with a dot) as well as how many files at most will be shown in a browser menu. The latter option may be especially useful if you have a rather small screen resolution, as then the browser menus will quickly fill up your screen when you browse folders containing many files. + +The quick start section in the TDE menu offers quick access to programs you have used often or recently. In the Quick Start Menu Items frame you can choose whether this section will show the most recently or the most frequently used programs. Using the option Maximum number of entries combo box, you can configure how many programs the quick start section will remember. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook index 562d2f264a9..4efbd76d42f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook @@ -2,170 +2,75 @@ - + ]>
-Mike McBride -Jost Schenck -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +Mike McBride +Jost Schenck +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2003-10-06 -3.2 +2003-10-06 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -panel +KDE +KControl +panel -Panel +Panel -Here you can configure the panel's overall appearance. +Here you can configure the panel's overall appearance. -You can also have the icons themselves zoom out when the mouse is over them, with the Enable icon zooming option. You can choose to have tooltips appear when your mouse button is over an icon, by enabling the Show tooltips option. +You can also have the icons themselves zoom out when the mouse is over them, with the Enable icon zooming option. You can choose to have tooltips appear when your mouse button is over an icon, by enabling the Show tooltips option. -Button Backgrounds - -The &kde; panel supports so-called Button Backgrounds. This means that the buttons shown on the panel will be drawn using configurable images. To enable button backgrounds, simply choose the button type from the list, and change the drop down box to the colour image you would like to use. Choose Default to return to an unstyled button. If you choose Custom colour, the colour button next to the drop down list will be enabled. Click on it to select a custom colour to use. +Button Backgrounds + +The &kde; panel supports so-called Button Backgrounds. This means that the buttons shown on the panel will be drawn using configurable images. To enable button backgrounds, simply choose the button type from the list, and change the drop down box to the colour image you would like to use. Choose Default to return to an unstyled button. If you choose Custom colour, the colour button next to the drop down list will be enabled. Click on it to select a custom colour to use. -<guilabel ->Panel Background</guilabel -> - -Enable transparency to turn the entire panel transparent. The desktop background will show through instead of a solid colour panel. - -There will still be small handles beside each applet, to allow you to locate, move, and configure them. These can be turned off in the Advanced Options... - -If you check Enable background image a picture that will be used to draw the panel's background, just as you can use a picture for the desktop background. You can specify an image file in the line edit box below or choose one by clicking on the Browse button. You'll see a preview of the selected picture on the right. - -The image can be tinted on-the-fly by enabling the option Colour to match the desktop colour scheme. You might use a greyscale texture that is tinted in this manner, to create a particular effect. +<guilabel>Panel Background</guilabel> + +Enable transparency to turn the entire panel transparent. The desktop background will show through instead of a solid colour panel. + +There will still be small handles beside each applet, to allow you to locate, move, and configure them. These can be turned off in the Advanced Options... + +If you check Enable background image a picture that will be used to draw the panel's background, just as you can use a picture for the desktop background. You can specify an image file in the line edit box below or choose one by clicking on the Browse button. You'll see a preview of the selected picture on the right. + +The image can be tinted on-the-fly by enabling the option Colour to match the desktop colour scheme. You might use a greyscale texture that is tinted in this manner, to create a particular effect. -<guilabel ->Advanced Options...</guilabel -> - -The Hide button size: option allows you to choose a width in pixels for the hide buttons, if they are visible. - -The panel itself has several default sizes set, which you can switch between by simply dragging the edge of it, or by &RMB; clicking on an empty space in the panel, choosing Size and selecting the desired size from the submenu. If you enable Allow Drag and Drop resizing of panels then by choosing Custom in the panel menu, you can drag the panel edge to any size you like. - -Applet handles are normally visible beside each applet on the panel, so that it is clear where to click to configure them, or to get to the panel menu. You can instead have them Fade out, or hide unless you hover the mouse over them, or you can choose to Hide them completely. - -Finally, if the panel is transparent, you can tint it with a colour of your choice. The slider allows you to choose how opaque the tint is. At the lowest end, there is no tint visible, while at the highest, the panel is not transparent at all. +<guilabel>Advanced Options...</guilabel> + +The Hide button size: option allows you to choose a width in pixels for the hide buttons, if they are visible. + +The panel itself has several default sizes set, which you can switch between by simply dragging the edge of it, or by &RMB; clicking on an empty space in the panel, choosing Size and selecting the desired size from the submenu. If you enable Allow Drag and Drop resizing of panels then by choosing Custom in the panel menu, you can drag the panel edge to any size you like. + +Applet handles are normally visible beside each applet on the panel, so that it is clear where to click to configure them, or to get to the panel menu. You can instead have them Fade out, or hide unless you hover the mouse over them, or you can choose to Hide them completely. + +Finally, if the panel is transparent, you can tint it with a colour of your choice. The slider allows you to choose how opaque the tint is. At the lowest end, there is no tint visible, while at the highest, the panel is not transparent at all. -Section Author -This section written by: Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de -Minor update by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com - -Some new options added by Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org - -Jonathan Riddellkde-en-gb@jriddell.org +Section Author +This section written by: Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de +Minor update by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com + +Some new options added by Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org + +Jonathan Riddellkde-en-gb@jriddell.org diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook index 486f35b7c11..d433efdc682 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook @@ -2,101 +2,53 @@ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-16 -3.2 +2003-10-16 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -password +KDE +KControl +password -Passwords +Passwords -Introduction +Introduction -This module of the &kcontrol; gives you options for configuring the way in which the &tdesu; program treats passwords. &tdesu; will ask you for a password when you try to carry out some privileged actions, such as changing the date/time stored in your system clock, or adding new users on your computer. +This module of the &kcontrol; gives you options for configuring the way in which the &tdesu; program treats passwords. &tdesu; will ask you for a password when you try to carry out some privileged actions, such as changing the date/time stored in your system clock, or adding new users on your computer. -Privileged actions such as those described above can only be carried out by root or a user with administrator permissions on your system. You will need to enter the password for the root account when you want to carry out such actions. +Privileged actions such as those described above can only be carried out by root or a user with administrator permissions on your system. You will need to enter the password for the root account when you want to carry out such actions. -The options in this module do not affect the behaviour of passwords in other programs such as &kmail;. +The options in this module do not affect the behaviour of passwords in other programs such as &kmail;. -Use - -There are two configuration options for passwords. The first is to control the visual feedback that you receive when you type a password. The actual characters in the password are never shown on the screen. You can choose to have each character represented by a * character. If you want to make it harder for someone who might be watching your screen to figure out how many characters there are in the password, you can choose to have each character in the password be represented by three asterisks rather than just one. Still another option is not to have any visual feedback at all, so nothing appears on the screen when you type a password. - -If you work in a reasonably secure environment, you can check the option labelled Remember Passwords, and then choose a time period in minutes using the spinner labelled Timeout. (You can either type a number between 5 and 1200 minutes, or use the arrows on the spinner.) - -If the Remember passwords option has been selected, tdesu will not ask you for a password for the length of time specified, after you have given the password once. Keep in mind, however, that this makes your workstation less secure. - -You should avoid selecting the Remember passwords option if you are working in an insecure area, such as a publicly accessible workstation. Also, note that choosing a shorter timeout may be better if you are in a less secure environment. +Use + +There are two configuration options for passwords. The first is to control the visual feedback that you receive when you type a password. The actual characters in the password are never shown on the screen. You can choose to have each character represented by a * character. If you want to make it harder for someone who might be watching your screen to figure out how many characters there are in the password, you can choose to have each character in the password be represented by three asterisks rather than just one. Still another option is not to have any visual feedback at all, so nothing appears on the screen when you type a password. + +If you work in a reasonably secure environment, you can check the option labelled Remember Passwords, and then choose a time period in minutes using the spinner labelled Timeout. (You can either type a number between 5 and 1200 minutes, or use the arrows on the spinner.) + +If the Remember passwords option has been selected, tdesu will not ask you for a password for the length of time specified, after you have given the password once. Keep in mind, however, that this makes your workstation less secure. + +You should avoid selecting the Remember passwords option if you are working in an insecure area, such as a publicly accessible workstation. Also, note that choosing a shorter timeout may be better if you are in a less secure environment. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook index ac3eb8e7490..89100936044 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook @@ -3,8 +3,7 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + ]>
@@ -12,186 +11,93 @@ -&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2002-02-11 -3.00.00 +2002-02-11 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -proxy -proxies +KDE +KControl +proxy +proxies -Proxies +Proxies -Introduction +Introduction -Proxies are programs running on a computer that acts a server on the network you are connected to (whether by modem or other means). These programs receive &HTTP; and &FTP; requests, retrieve the relevant files from the internet, and pass them on to the client computer that made the requests. +Proxies are programs running on a computer that acts a server on the network you are connected to (whether by modem or other means). These programs receive &HTTP; and &FTP; requests, retrieve the relevant files from the internet, and pass them on to the client computer that made the requests. -When you have configured a proxy, &HTTP; and/or &FTP; requests are re-routed through the computer that is acting as a proxy server. However, you can also select specific hosts which should be contacted directly, rather than through the proxy server. If you are on a local network, for example, access to local hosts probably doesn't need to go through a proxy server. +When you have configured a proxy, &HTTP; and/or &FTP; requests are re-routed through the computer that is acting as a proxy server. However, you can also select specific hosts which should be contacted directly, rather than through the proxy server. If you are on a local network, for example, access to local hosts probably doesn't need to go through a proxy server. -You should only need to configure a proxy server if your network administrator requires it (if you are a dial-up user, that would be your internet service provider or ISP). Otherwise, especially if you are feeling a bit confused about this proxy business, but everything seems to be fine with your internet connection, you don't need to change anything. +You should only need to configure a proxy server if your network administrator requires it (if you are a dial-up user, that would be your internet service provider or ISP). Otherwise, especially if you are feeling a bit confused about this proxy business, but everything seems to be fine with your internet connection, you don't need to change anything. -Use +Use -The first option on the page is a checkbox labelled Use proxy. +The first option on the page is a checkbox labelled Use proxy. -Check this box to enable the use of proxy servers for your internet connection. +Check this box to enable the use of proxy servers for your internet connection. -Please note that using proxy servers is optional, but has the benefit or advantage of giving you faster access to data on the internet. +Please note that using proxy servers is optional, but has the benefit or advantage of giving you faster access to data on the internet. -If you are uncertain whether or not you need to use a proxy server to connect to the internet, please consult with your internet service provider's setup guide or your system administrator. +If you are uncertain whether or not you need to use a proxy server to connect to the internet, please consult with your internet service provider's setup guide or your system administrator. -If you have selected to use a proxy, you have several methods to configure the settings for it. +If you have selected to use a proxy, you have several methods to configure the settings for it. -Automatically detected script file +Automatically detected script file -Select this option if you want the proxy setup configuration script file to be automatically detected and downloaded. -This option only differs from the next choice in that it does not require you to supply the location of the configuration script file. Instead, it will be automatically downloaded using Web Access Protocol Discovery (WAPD). - -If you have a problem using this setup, please consult the FAQ section at http://www.konqueror.org for more information. +Select this option if you want the proxy setup configuration script file to be automatically detected and downloaded. +This option only differs from the next choice in that it does not require you to supply the location of the configuration script file. Instead, it will be automatically downloaded using Web Access Protocol Discovery (WAPD). + +If you have a problem using this setup, please consult the FAQ section at http://www.konqueror.org for more information. -Specified script file +Specified script file -Select this option if your proxy support is provided through a script file located at a specific address. You can then enter the address in the location text box, or use the folder icon to browse to it. +Select this option if your proxy support is provided through a script file located at a specific address. You can then enter the address in the location text box, or use the folder icon to browse to it. -Preset environment variables +Preset environment variables -Some systems are setup with $HTTP_PROXY to allow graphical as well as non-graphical applications to share the same proxy configuration information. -If you know this applies to you, select this option and click on the Setup... button to provide the environment variable names used to set the address of the proxy server(s). +Some systems are setup with $HTTP_PROXY to allow graphical as well as non-graphical applications to share the same proxy configuration information. +If you know this applies to you, select this option and click on the Setup... button to provide the environment variable names used to set the address of the proxy server(s). -Manually specified settings +Manually specified settings -Select this option, and click on the Setup... to manually setup the location of the proxy servers to be used. - -If you choose this option, another dialogue will pop up. - -The complete addressing information for the proxy includes both the internet address and a port number. You should enter these into the relevant text boxes. The arrow button copies the information from the HTTP line to the FTP line, in order to help save some typing. - -If there are hosts which you can connect to without going through the proxy server, you can press Add to add the names of these hosts, separated by in the text box labelled No Proxy For:. For example, hosts that are on your local network can probably be contacted directly. - -You can also choose Only use proxy for entries in this list. - -Check this box to reverse the use of the exception list, &ie; the proxy servers will only be used when the requested &URL; matches one of the addresses listed here. - -This features is useful if all you need is a proxy to access a few specific sites, for example, an internal intranet. If you have more complex requirements you might want to use a configuration script. +Select this option, and click on the Setup... to manually setup the location of the proxy servers to be used. + +If you choose this option, another dialogue will pop up. + +The complete addressing information for the proxy includes both the internet address and a port number. You should enter these into the relevant text boxes. The arrow button copies the information from the HTTP line to the FTP line, in order to help save some typing. + +If there are hosts which you can connect to without going through the proxy server, you can press Add to add the names of these hosts, separated by in the text box labelled No Proxy For:. For example, hosts that are on your local network can probably be contacted directly. + +You can also choose Only use proxy for entries in this list. + +Check this box to reverse the use of the exception list, &ie; the proxy servers will only be used when the requested &URL; matches one of the addresses listed here. + +This features is useful if all you need is a proxy to access a few specific sites, for example, an internal intranet. If you have more complex requirements you might want to use a configuration script. @@ -199,24 +105,11 @@ -<guilabel ->Authorisation</guilabel -> - -Here you can choose between two types of authentication, if your proxy requires it. You can have Prompt as needed, the default, in which case &konqueror; will only ask for a username or password if it needs to. - -The other option is Use automatic login. Select this option if you have already set up a login entry for your proxy server in the $TDEDIR/share/config/kionetrc file. +<guilabel>Authorisation</guilabel> + +Here you can choose between two types of authentication, if your proxy requires it. You can have Prompt as needed, the default, in which case &konqueror; will only ask for a username or password if it needs to. + +The other option is Use automatic login. Select this option if you have already set up a login entry for your proxy server in the $TDEDIR/share/config/kionetrc file. &socks-kcontrol; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook index 6463d9b0c07..c8ee36dd9ae 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook @@ -1,81 +1,29 @@ -&Lauri.Watts; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -SOCKS +SOCKS -SOCKS is a protocol to execute proxy requests for a client. SOCKS is capable of authentication and encryption of traffic, and is often found in corporate settings, as opposed to home users. For more information about SOCKS, see the NEC website +SOCKS is a protocol to execute proxy requests for a client. SOCKS is capable of authentication and encryption of traffic, and is often found in corporate settings, as opposed to home users. For more information about SOCKS, see the NEC website -With this module you can enable most of the network aware &kde; applications to transparently use SOCKS. +With this module you can enable most of the network aware &kde; applications to transparently use SOCKS. -Setting up of a SOCKS client is outside the scope of this document, and the differences between the commonly used ones are very large. If you already have a working SOCKS implementation, allowing you to use commandline clients (for example, if lynx or ftp are already working) then you can simply check the Enable SOCKS support checkbox. +Setting up of a SOCKS client is outside the scope of this document, and the differences between the commonly used ones are very large. If you already have a working SOCKS implementation, allowing you to use commandline clients (for example, if lynx or ftp are already working) then you can simply check the Enable SOCKS support checkbox. -When this box is checked, several further options become available to you. +When this box is checked, several further options become available to you. -First, you should select which of the various SOCKS clients you have installed on your computer. &kde; will attempt to find this out by itself, if you choose Auto detect. If you know the client you have, you could choose either NEC Socks or Dante. If you have a custom built SOCKS library to use, you can select Use custom library and then enter the path to it in the Path field. +First, you should select which of the various SOCKS clients you have installed on your computer. &kde; will attempt to find this out by itself, if you choose Auto detect. If you know the client you have, you could choose either NEC Socks or Dante. If you have a custom built SOCKS library to use, you can select Use custom library and then enter the path to it in the Path field. -If you want &kde; to auto detect the SOCKS library in use, but you suspect it isn't looking in the right places or you have installed it in a non-standard location, then you can add further paths to be searched in the bottom of this panel. Use the Add and Remove to add or remove paths. +If you want &kde; to auto detect the SOCKS library in use, but you suspect it isn't looking in the right places or you have installed it in a non-standard location, then you can add further paths to be searched in the bottom of this panel. Use the Add and Remove to add or remove paths. -At any time while filling in this module, you can press the Test button, and &kde; will report immediately with a message box to tell you if it could find and initialise SOCKS or not. +At any time while filling in this module, you can press the Test button, and &kde; will report immediately with a message box to tell you if it could find and initialise SOCKS or not. -Changes made here will not affect any applications that are already open. You will need to close and restart them before they are able to connect via SOCKS. +Changes made here will not affect any applications that are already open. You will need to close and restart them before they are able to connect via SOCKS. -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook index 1705b5249c0..e841382b86b 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook @@ -2,284 +2,129 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-09-19 -3.01.00 +2002-09-19 +3.01.00 -KDE -KControl -screensaver -screen saver +KDE +KControl +screensaver +screen saver -Screen Saver +Screen Saver -Using this module, you can choose your screen saver, determine how much time must pass before the screen saver is activated, and add or remove password protection to your screen saver. +Using this module, you can choose your screen saver, determine how much time must pass before the screen saver is activated, and add or remove password protection to your screen saver. -Choosing the screen saver, and configuring its options - -In the Settings box is a check box labeled Start screen saver automatically. This box must have a mark in it, or &kde; will not launch any screen saver and it will not allow you to adjust the settings of your screen saver. - -Along the left side is a list of all available screen savers. You can select a screen saver by simply clicking on its name. Once you have selected a screen saver, you will see a small preview on the monitor on the right. - -The preview monitor will often show the screen saver larger than it is when the screen saver is activated. This is done on purpose, since many of the details of the screen savers would be unintelligible if actually scaled down to such a small size. - -Each screen saver has a different set of setup options. By clicking on Setup..., a dialogue box will appear with all available options. As you adjust the options, the preview box in the dialog box will show you what effect you will achieve with the current settings. - -When you are done setting up your screen saver, click OK. Clicking Cancel will erase any changes you made in this dialogue box, and return you to the screen saver module. - -Clicking the About button will give you the Copyright and Author information if you are interested. - -When you think you have all the options set the way you want, simply click on Test to immediately start the screen saver exactly as it will appear. +Choosing the screen saver, and configuring its options + +In the Settings box is a check box labeled Start screen saver automatically. This box must have a mark in it, or &kde; will not launch any screen saver and it will not allow you to adjust the settings of your screen saver. + +Along the left side is a list of all available screen savers. You can select a screen saver by simply clicking on its name. Once you have selected a screen saver, you will see a small preview on the monitor on the right. + +The preview monitor will often show the screen saver larger than it is when the screen saver is activated. This is done on purpose, since many of the details of the screen savers would be unintelligible if actually scaled down to such a small size. + +Each screen saver has a different set of setup options. By clicking on Setup..., a dialogue box will appear with all available options. As you adjust the options, the preview box in the dialog box will show you what effect you will achieve with the current settings. + +When you are done setting up your screen saver, click OK. Clicking Cancel will erase any changes you made in this dialogue box, and return you to the screen saver module. + +Clicking the About button will give you the Copyright and Author information if you are interested. + +When you think you have all the options set the way you want, simply click on Test to immediately start the screen saver exactly as it will appear. -Setting the time, priority and passwords for screen savers. - -Below the Preview Monitor, is the Start screen saver automatically check box, and a spin box which determines the period of inactivity before the screen saver should be started. You can enter any number from 1-120 minutes in this box. - -Enable the check box Make the screen saver aware of power management if you do not want the screensaver to start while you watch TV or movies on your monitor. - -Below that is a check box labelled Require password to stop screen saver. If it is checked, when you click a key or click a mouse button to end the screen saver and return to your work, you must enter a password. The password used is the same password you used to login to your machine. If there is no mark in the check box, no password is required to return to your desktop. - -Finally, there is a slider labelled Priority. If your screen saver appears jumpy, you should increase the priority closer to the High end. This will tell your computer to devote more time to the screen saver, and less time to other tasks. +Setting the time, priority and passwords for screen savers. + +Below the Preview Monitor, is the Start screen saver automatically check box, and a spin box which determines the period of inactivity before the screen saver should be started. You can enter any number from 1-120 minutes in this box. + +Enable the check box Make the screen saver aware of power management if you do not want the screensaver to start while you watch TV or movies on your monitor. + +Below that is a check box labelled Require password to stop screen saver. If it is checked, when you click a key or click a mouse button to end the screen saver and return to your work, you must enter a password. The password used is the same password you used to login to your machine. If there is no mark in the check box, no password is required to return to your desktop. + +Finally, there is a slider labelled Priority. If your screen saver appears jumpy, you should increase the priority closer to the High end. This will tell your computer to devote more time to the screen saver, and less time to other tasks. -Using a non-&kde; screen saver +Using a non-&kde; screen saver -&kde; does not prevent another screen saver from working. To use a different screen saver, such as xscreensaver, simply disable the &kde; Screen Saver, and set up your other screen saver program normally. +&kde; does not prevent another screen saver from working. To use a different screen saver, such as xscreensaver, simply disable the &kde; Screen Saver, and set up your other screen saver program normally. -Removing and restoring a screen saver from your system - -If you want to remove a screen saver from the list in this Control Centre Module, you will need to rename a file on your system. - -Working as a root user is a potentially dangerous situation. While unlikely, it is entirely possible to do permanent damage to your system while working as root. - -Be very careful following the next set of directions - -To delete a screen saver, type the following commands: - -bash$ cd +Removing and restoring a screen saver from your system + +If you want to remove a screen saver from the list in this Control Centre Module, you will need to rename a file on your system. + +Working as a root user is a potentially dangerous situation. While unlikely, it is entirely possible to do permanent damage to your system while working as root. + +Be very careful following the next set of directions + +To delete a screen saver, type the following commands: + +bash$ cd $TDEDIR/share/applnk/System/ScreenSavers -bash$ ls - - -This will give you a list of files. You will notice similarities between some of the file names and that of the screen saver you want to remove. Simply rename the file of similarly named desktop file to a name which does not end in desktop. - -Example: -bash$ cd +bash$ ls + + +This will give you a list of files. You will notice similarities between some of the file names and that of the screen saver you want to remove. Simply rename the file of similarly named desktop file to a name which does not end in desktop. + +Example: +bash$ cd $TDEDIR/share/applnk/System/ScreenSavers -bash$ mv KSpace.desktop KSpace.backup - - -Will remove Space (GL) from the list - -You must close the &kcontrolcenter; entirely and restart it before the changes will be seen. - -To restore the disabled screen saver, simply rename the file back to its original name: - -bash$ cd +bash$ mv KSpace.desktop KSpace.backup + + +Will remove Space (GL) from the list + +You must close the &kcontrolcenter; entirely and restart it before the changes will be seen. + +To restore the disabled screen saver, simply rename the file back to its original name: + +bash$ cd $TDEDIR/share/applnk/System/ScreenSavers -bash$ mv KSpace.backup KSpace.desktop - +bash$ mv KSpace.backup KSpace.desktop + -Restart the &kcontrolcenter;, and the screen saver is back in the list. +Restart the &kcontrolcenter;, and the screen saver is back in the list. -Advanced Settings: Grace period - -There is a five second grace period after the screen saver begins before a password is required even if Require password is checked. -Locking the desktop manually, by clicking the lock icon in the &kde; panel, causes the password protection to engage immediately with no grace period. -To alter the grace period setting, you need to manually edit the configuration file. To do so: -$ cd ~/.trinity/share/config -Now, using a text editor (the example uses &kate;, the &kde; text editor), load the kdesktoprc. -$ kate kdesktoprc -Search through the file for the section labelled [Screensaver]. -Look through all lines in the section for an entry entitled LockGrace. -If the entry exists, you can edit the value of the entry. -[Screensaver] +Advanced Settings: Grace period + +There is a five second grace period after the screen saver begins before a password is required even if Require password is checked. +Locking the desktop manually, by clicking the lock icon in the &kde; panel, causes the password protection to engage immediately with no grace period. +To alter the grace period setting, you need to manually edit the configuration file. To do so: +$ cd ~/.trinity/share/config +Now, using a text editor (the example uses &kate;, the &kde; text editor), load the kdesktoprc. +$ kate kdesktoprc +Search through the file for the section labelled [Screensaver]. +Look through all lines in the section for an entry entitled LockGrace. +If the entry exists, you can edit the value of the entry. +[Screensaver] LockGrace=3000 -The value of the entity represents the duration of the grace period in milliseconds. An entry of 3000, would change the grace period to 3 seconds. You can set the value of the entry to any number between zero (no grace period) and 300000 (5 minutes). -If the entry does not exist, simply add the entry to the end of the section. +The value of the entity represents the duration of the grace period in milliseconds. An entry of 3000, would change the grace period to 3 seconds. You can set the value of the entry to any number between zero (no grace period) and 300000 (5 minutes). +If the entry does not exist, simply add the entry to the end of the section. -Any changes to the configuration entry take effect immediately. +Any changes to the configuration entry take effect immediately. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook index 0c6c183792a..7b2f23b2f22 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook @@ -2,80 +2,36 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -Windows shares +KDE +KControl +Windows shares -Windows Shares +Windows Shares -Introduction - -In many small local area networks, the SMB protocol is used to offer network services. Names like &Windows; Network or &Windows; for Workgroups Network or LanManager are often used as well. Using SMB you can access so-called shares (&ie; folders made available by the server) as well as printers. - -&kde; comes with built-in support for the SMB protocol. As &kde; is network-transparent that means you can access SMB shares from everywhere you can access your local files, for example in the &konqueror; file manager and in the file dialogue. To make use of this you should provide &kde; with some information on your SMB network. But do not worry, this is normally pretty simple as, for example, all the Windows clients in your network need and have the same information. +Introduction + +In many small local area networks, the SMB protocol is used to offer network services. Names like &Windows; Network or &Windows; for Workgroups Network or LanManager are often used as well. Using SMB you can access so-called shares (&ie; folders made available by the server) as well as printers. + +&kde; comes with built-in support for the SMB protocol. As &kde; is network-transparent that means you can access SMB shares from everywhere you can access your local files, for example in the &konqueror; file manager and in the file dialogue. To make use of this you should provide &kde; with some information on your SMB network. But do not worry, this is normally pretty simple as, for example, all the Windows clients in your network need and have the same information. @@ -86,18 +42,7 @@ very cool thing (TM) btw. If you want to write some documentation for this one too, have a look at tdenetwork/lanbrowsing/lisa/README and contact me if you have questions. --> -For the SMB protocol to work, it is required to have Samba correctly installed. If you have an NT domain controller, you will need at least Samba version 2.0 or higher. If you want to access &Windows; 2000 shares, you will need Samba version 2.0.7 or higher. Older versions may work too, but have not been tested. +For the SMB protocol to work, it is required to have Samba correctly installed. If you have an NT domain controller, you will need at least Samba version 2.0 or higher. If you want to access &Windows; 2000 shares, you will need Samba version 2.0.7 or higher. Older versions may work too, but have not been tested. @@ -105,48 +50,15 @@ or file dialog manual --> -Use - -Although there are a lot of insecure SMB networks out there which allow access to anyone, in principle you have to authenticate yourself to access the services of an SMB server. By default, &kde; will use the data entered in the Default user name and Default password fields to authenticate itself on SMB hosts. If you leave the field Default user name empty, &kde; will try to access SMB hosts without a username. If you leave the default password empty, it will try without a password. If &kde; is unsuccessful accessing the host using these settings, you will be asked for a username and a password. - -While it makes things more comfortable if &kde; stores your SMB password, this may be a security problem. If you are using SMB in a security conscious environment, you should not store your password here but rather enter it anew every time you need to access an SMB host. - -In the Workgroup field, you can enter your workgroup name. If you don't know it, ask your system administrator or have a look at other already configured machines in your network. However, in most cases providing the workgroup name is not required, so you probably can also leave this empty. - -If the option Show hidden shares is checked, shares ending with a $ will be shown. +Use + +Although there are a lot of insecure SMB networks out there which allow access to anyone, in principle you have to authenticate yourself to access the services of an SMB server. By default, &kde; will use the data entered in the Default user name and Default password fields to authenticate itself on SMB hosts. If you leave the field Default user name empty, &kde; will try to access SMB hosts without a username. If you leave the default password empty, it will try without a password. If &kde; is unsuccessful accessing the host using these settings, you will be asked for a username and a password. + +While it makes things more comfortable if &kde; stores your SMB password, this may be a security problem. If you are using SMB in a security conscious environment, you should not store your password here but rather enter it anew every time you need to access an SMB host. + +In the Workgroup field, you can enter your workgroup name. If you don't know it, ask your system administrator or have a look at other already configured machines in your network. However, in most cases providing the workgroup name is not required, so you probably can also leave this empty. + +If the option Show hidden shares is checked, shares ending with a $ will be shown. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook index 4578d3b55c8..67ff42190f2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook @@ -2,133 +2,66 @@ - + ]>
-&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-13 -3.2 +2003-10-13 +3.2 -KDE -Spelling -dictionary +KDE +Spelling +dictionary -Spell Checker +Spell Checker -The configuration options available here are used by all &kde; applications that use &tdespell;, which is a front end to ispell or aspell. +The configuration options available here are used by all &kde; applications that use &tdespell;, which is a front end to ispell or aspell. -Create root/affix combinations not in dictionary +Create root/affix combinations not in dictionary -Selecting this option allows the spell checker to register as correct combinations of root words with suffixes or prefixes even if the particular combination is not listed in its dictionary database of words. +Selecting this option allows the spell checker to register as correct combinations of root words with suffixes or prefixes even if the particular combination is not listed in its dictionary database of words. -Consider run-together words as spelling errors -If this is selected, then words that appear in the dictionary separately, but have been run together, are considered to be spelling errors. For example, even though alarm and clock might be in your dictionary, if alarmclock is not, it will be flagged as a spelling error. +Consider run-together words as spelling errors +If this is selected, then words that appear in the dictionary separately, but have been run together, are considered to be spelling errors. For example, even though alarm and clock might be in your dictionary, if alarmclock is not, it will be flagged as a spelling error. -Dictionary: +Dictionary: -Choose from the available dictionaries, which one to use for &tdespell;. +Choose from the available dictionaries, which one to use for &tdespell;. -Encoding: +Encoding: -You should select the one that matches the character set you are using. In some cases, dictionaries will support more than one encoding. A dictionary might, for example, accept accented characters when Latin1 is selected, but accept email-style character combinations (like 'a for an accented a) when 7-Bit-ASCII is selected. Please see your dictionary's distribution for more information. +You should select the one that matches the character set you are using. In some cases, dictionaries will support more than one encoding. A dictionary might, for example, accept accented characters when Latin1 is selected, but accept email-style character combinations (like 'a for an accented a) when 7-Bit-ASCII is selected. Please see your dictionary's distribution for more information. -Client: +Client: -You can choose which of the installed client applications on your system to use. For example, you can choose ispell. +You can choose which of the installed client applications on your system to use. For example, you can choose ispell. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook index 4c7deb25248..62b7ea24e4c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook @@ -3,339 +3,146 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -konqueror -browsing +KDE +KControl +konqueror +browsing -Browsing With &konqueror; +Browsing With &konqueror; -The &konqueror; Browser module of &kcontrol; allows you to select various options for the appearance and behaviour of &konqueror;, the integrated web browser of &kde;. +The &konqueror; Browser module of &kcontrol; allows you to select various options for the appearance and behaviour of &konqueror;, the integrated web browser of &kde;. -Behaviour - -The first option you can enable on this page is Enable completion of forms. If you check this box, &konqueror; will try to remember what you answer to form questions, and will try to fill in forms for you with the answers you previously used. - -You can configure the number of form items &konqueror; remembers with the slider below labelled Maximum completions - -Of course, anything &konqueror; fills in a form with, you can still edit before submitting the form! - -The next option is Change cursor over links. If this option is selected, the shape of the cursor will change (usually to a hand) whenever it moves over a hyperlink. This makes it easy to identify links, especially when they are in the form of images. - -&konqueror; defaults to a single window per page, but has the capability to open multiple tabs inside a single window. &konqueror; also, by default, has a &MMB; shortcut to open any link in a new window. If you enable Open links in new tab instead of in new window you can &MMB; click on a link to have it open in a new tab. - -If you are using tabbed browsing, you can choose if a newly opened tab becomes the active (front) tab, or goes to the back. On a slow internet connection, or while browsing a page that has a list of headlines or other links in a list, you may like to have the new tabs load in the background while you continue reading. In this case, leave this setting disabled. If you prefer to go straight to the new page, leaving the old one in the background to return to later, enable it. - -If you close a window in &konqueror; that has multiple tabs open, &konqueror; will ask you if you're sure that you meant to close it. You can toggle on and off this behaviour with the Confirm when closing windows with multiple tabs checkbox. - -As a convenience feature, if you enable Right click goes back in history, then clicking an empty area (&ie; not a link) in the &konqueror; window will act as if you pressed the Back button on the toolbar. - -The checkbox labelled Automatically load images, allows you to control whether images on web pages are loaded by default. Unless you have a very slow connection, you will probably want to leave this option selected, as there are many web pages that are difficult to use without images. If you don't select the option to automatically load images, you can still view the text on the page, and then load the images if you need them. - -Enabling Allow automatic delayed reloading/redirecting allows websites to send you to another page without your interaction. In many cases, this is a convenience. For example, the website has moved to a new URL. Many webmasters in this situation will put up a page on the old site, telling you that it has moved and you may like to change your bookmark, and then automatically move you along to the new website. However, such features can be confusing, or annoying, when misused, and so you may wish to disable it. - -The next setting is Underline links:. You can choose to underline links Always. If this option is selected, any text on web pages that acts as a link will be shown in an underlined font. While many web pages do use colour to distinguish text that acts as a link, underlining makes it very easy to spot links. - -If you don't like underlined links, you can choose Never, so that no links are underlined. Or you can choose a middle ground, Hover, so that links are underlined when the mouse cursor is resting over them, and not underlined the rest of the time. - -Many web pages use animated gif images, and these can be very annoying, and in some cases, quite a drain on your system resources. The Animations option lets you choose when animations are enabled. The default is enabled, but you can set this to disabled, or to run the animation only once, even if the file itself contains instructions that the animation should run more times, or continuously. +Behaviour + +The first option you can enable on this page is Enable completion of forms. If you check this box, &konqueror; will try to remember what you answer to form questions, and will try to fill in forms for you with the answers you previously used. + +You can configure the number of form items &konqueror; remembers with the slider below labelled Maximum completions + +Of course, anything &konqueror; fills in a form with, you can still edit before submitting the form! + +The next option is Change cursor over links. If this option is selected, the shape of the cursor will change (usually to a hand) whenever it moves over a hyperlink. This makes it easy to identify links, especially when they are in the form of images. + +&konqueror; defaults to a single window per page, but has the capability to open multiple tabs inside a single window. &konqueror; also, by default, has a &MMB; shortcut to open any link in a new window. If you enable Open links in new tab instead of in new window you can &MMB; click on a link to have it open in a new tab. + +If you are using tabbed browsing, you can choose if a newly opened tab becomes the active (front) tab, or goes to the back. On a slow internet connection, or while browsing a page that has a list of headlines or other links in a list, you may like to have the new tabs load in the background while you continue reading. In this case, leave this setting disabled. If you prefer to go straight to the new page, leaving the old one in the background to return to later, enable it. + +If you close a window in &konqueror; that has multiple tabs open, &konqueror; will ask you if you're sure that you meant to close it. You can toggle on and off this behaviour with the Confirm when closing windows with multiple tabs checkbox. + +As a convenience feature, if you enable Right click goes back in history, then clicking an empty area (&ie; not a link) in the &konqueror; window will act as if you pressed the Back button on the toolbar. + +The checkbox labelled Automatically load images, allows you to control whether images on web pages are loaded by default. Unless you have a very slow connection, you will probably want to leave this option selected, as there are many web pages that are difficult to use without images. If you don't select the option to automatically load images, you can still view the text on the page, and then load the images if you need them. + +Enabling Allow automatic delayed reloading/redirecting allows websites to send you to another page without your interaction. In many cases, this is a convenience. For example, the website has moved to a new URL. Many webmasters in this situation will put up a page on the old site, telling you that it has moved and you may like to change your bookmark, and then automatically move you along to the new website. However, such features can be confusing, or annoying, when misused, and so you may wish to disable it. + +The next setting is Underline links:. You can choose to underline links Always. If this option is selected, any text on web pages that acts as a link will be shown in an underlined font. While many web pages do use colour to distinguish text that acts as a link, underlining makes it very easy to spot links. + +If you don't like underlined links, you can choose Never, so that no links are underlined. Or you can choose a middle ground, Hover, so that links are underlined when the mouse cursor is resting over them, and not underlined the rest of the time. + +Many web pages use animated gif images, and these can be very annoying, and in some cases, quite a drain on your system resources. The Animations option lets you choose when animations are enabled. The default is enabled, but you can set this to disabled, or to run the animation only once, even if the file itself contains instructions that the animation should run more times, or continuously. -Fonts - -Under this tab, you can select various options related to the use of fonts. Although the shapes and sizes of fonts are often part of the design of a web page, you can select some default settings for &konqueror; to use. - -The first thing you can set here is the font size. There are two settings which work together to allow you a comfortable browsing experience. - -Firstly, you can set a Minimum Font Size. This means, even if the font size is set specifically in the page you are viewing, &konqueror; will ignore that instruction and never show smaller fonts than you set here. - -Next you can set a Medium Font Size. This is not only the default size of text, used when the page doesn't specify sizes, but it is also used as the base size that relative font sizes are calculated against. That is, the HTML instruction smaller, it means smaller than the size you set for this option. - -For either option, you can select the exact font size in points by using the up/down spin control (or just typing) next to the option label. - -These options are independent of each other. Pages that do not set a font size, or ask for the default, will display with the size you set from Medium Font Size, while any pages that ask for a size smaller than your Minimum Font Size setting will instead show that size. The one does not affect the other. - -The remaining options are for the fonts to be associated with different types of markup used in HTML pages. Note that many web pages may override these settings. If you click anywhere on a control which shows a font name, a list of font names appears, and you can select a different font if you like. (If there are a lot of fonts, a vertical scrollbar appears in the list to allow you to scroll through all of the fonts.) +Fonts + +Under this tab, you can select various options related to the use of fonts. Although the shapes and sizes of fonts are often part of the design of a web page, you can select some default settings for &konqueror; to use. + +The first thing you can set here is the font size. There are two settings which work together to allow you a comfortable browsing experience. + +Firstly, you can set a Minimum Font Size. This means, even if the font size is set specifically in the page you are viewing, &konqueror; will ignore that instruction and never show smaller fonts than you set here. + +Next you can set a Medium Font Size. This is not only the default size of text, used when the page doesn't specify sizes, but it is also used as the base size that relative font sizes are calculated against. That is, the HTML instruction smaller, it means smaller than the size you set for this option. + +For either option, you can select the exact font size in points by using the up/down spin control (or just typing) next to the option label. + +These options are independent of each other. Pages that do not set a font size, or ask for the default, will display with the size you set from Medium Font Size, while any pages that ask for a size smaller than your Minimum Font Size setting will instead show that size. The one does not affect the other. + +The remaining options are for the fonts to be associated with different types of markup used in HTML pages. Note that many web pages may override these settings. If you click anywhere on a control which shows a font name, a list of font names appears, and you can select a different font if you like. (If there are a lot of fonts, a vertical scrollbar appears in the list to allow you to scroll through all of the fonts.) -Below this, you can set a Font size adjustment for this encoding. Sometimes the fonts you want to use for a particular encoding or language are much larger or smaller than average, so you can use this setting to bring them into line. +Below this, you can set a Font size adjustment for this encoding. Sometimes the fonts you want to use for a particular encoding or language are much larger or smaller than average, so you can use this setting to bring them into line. -You can set a default encoding that &konqueror; should assume pages are when rendering them. The default setting is Use language encoding, but you can change it to any encoding available in the list. +You can set a default encoding that &konqueror; should assume pages are when rendering them. The default setting is Use language encoding, but you can change it to any encoding available in the list. -&Java; and JavaScript - -&Java; allows applications to be downloaded and run by a web browser, provided you have the necessary software installed on your machine. Many web sites make use of &Java; (for example, online banking services or interactive gaming sites). You should be aware that running programs from unknown sources could pose a threat to the security of your computer, even if the potential extent of the damage is not great. - -The checkboxes under Global Settings allows you to turn &Java; support on for all web sites by default. You can also select to turn &Java; on or off for specific hosts. To add a policy for a specific host, click the Add... button to bring up a dialogue in which you can type the host name and then choose to accept or reject &Java; code from that particular host, which will add the domain to the list on the left of the page. - -You can select a host in the list, and click the Change... button to choose a different policy for that host. Clicking the Delete button removes the policy for the selected host; after deletion, the global settings will then apply to that host. You can import policies from a file by clicking the Import... button. To save the current list to a compressed archive file, click the Export... button. - -Finally, the group of controls labelled Java Runtime Settings allows you to set some options for the way in which &Java; should run. These options are useful for diagnosing problems, or if you are a &Java; developer, and should not normally need adjusting. - -If you select the Show Java Console option, &konqueror; will open a console window from which &Java; applications can read and write text. While most &Java; applications will not require such a console, it could be helpful in diagnosing problems with &Java; applications. - -Use TDEIO will cause the JVMto use &kde;'s own TDEIO transports for network connections. - -Use security manager is normally enabled by default. This setting will cause the JVM to run with a Security Manager in place. This will keep applets from being able to read and write to your file system, creating arbitrary sockets, and other actions which could be used to compromise your system. Disable this option at your own risk. You can modify your $HOME/.java.policy file with the &Java; policytool utility to give code downloaded from certain sites more permissions. - -The Shutdown Applet Server when inactive checkbox allows you to save resources by closing the &Java; Applet Server when it is not in use, rather than leaving it running in the background. Leaving this disabled may make &Java; applets start up faster, but it will use system resources when you are not using a &Java; applet. If you enable this, you can set a timeout. - -You can either opt to have &konqueror; automatically detect the &Java; installation on your system, or specify the path to the installation yourself by selecting Use user-specified Java. You may want to choose the latter method, for instance, if you have multiple &Java; installations on your system, and want to specify which one to use. If the &Java; Virtual Machine you are using requires any special startup options, you can type them in the text box labelled Additional Java Arguments. +&Java; and JavaScript + +&Java; allows applications to be downloaded and run by a web browser, provided you have the necessary software installed on your machine. Many web sites make use of &Java; (for example, online banking services or interactive gaming sites). You should be aware that running programs from unknown sources could pose a threat to the security of your computer, even if the potential extent of the damage is not great. + +The checkboxes under Global Settings allows you to turn &Java; support on for all web sites by default. You can also select to turn &Java; on or off for specific hosts. To add a policy for a specific host, click the Add... button to bring up a dialogue in which you can type the host name and then choose to accept or reject &Java; code from that particular host, which will add the domain to the list on the left of the page. + +You can select a host in the list, and click the Change... button to choose a different policy for that host. Clicking the Delete button removes the policy for the selected host; after deletion, the global settings will then apply to that host. You can import policies from a file by clicking the Import... button. To save the current list to a compressed archive file, click the Export... button. + +Finally, the group of controls labelled Java Runtime Settings allows you to set some options for the way in which &Java; should run. These options are useful for diagnosing problems, or if you are a &Java; developer, and should not normally need adjusting. + +If you select the Show Java Console option, &konqueror; will open a console window from which &Java; applications can read and write text. While most &Java; applications will not require such a console, it could be helpful in diagnosing problems with &Java; applications. + +Use TDEIO will cause the JVMto use &kde;'s own TDEIO transports for network connections. + +Use security manager is normally enabled by default. This setting will cause the JVM to run with a Security Manager in place. This will keep applets from being able to read and write to your file system, creating arbitrary sockets, and other actions which could be used to compromise your system. Disable this option at your own risk. You can modify your $HOME/.java.policy file with the &Java; policytool utility to give code downloaded from certain sites more permissions. + +The Shutdown Applet Server when inactive checkbox allows you to save resources by closing the &Java; Applet Server when it is not in use, rather than leaving it running in the background. Leaving this disabled may make &Java; applets start up faster, but it will use system resources when you are not using a &Java; applet. If you enable this, you can set a timeout. + +You can either opt to have &konqueror; automatically detect the &Java; installation on your system, or specify the path to the installation yourself by selecting Use user-specified Java. You may want to choose the latter method, for instance, if you have multiple &Java; installations on your system, and want to specify which one to use. If the &Java; Virtual Machine you are using requires any special startup options, you can type them in the text box labelled Additional Java Arguments. -JavaScript - -Despite the name, JavaScript is not related at all to &Java;. - -The first part of this page works the same as the &Java; page settings. - -The checkboxes under Global Settings allow you to turn JavaScript support on for all web sites by default. You can also select to turn JavaScript on or off for specific hosts. To add a policy for a specific host, click the Add... button to bring up a dialogue in which you can type the host name and then choose to accept or reject JavaScript code from that particular host, which will add the domain to the list on the left of the page. - -You can select a host in the list, and click the Change... button to choose a different policy for that host. Clicking the Delete button removes the policy for the selected host; after deletion, the global settings will then apply to that host. You can import policies from a file by clicking the Import... button. To save the current list to a compressed archive file, click the Export... button. - -The final set of options on this page determine what happens when a page uses JavaScript for specific actions. - -You can individually enable or disable the ability of JavaScript to manipulate your windows by moving, resizing or changing focus. You can also disable JavaScript from changing the status bar text, so that for instance, you can always see where links will take you when clicked.The choices for these options are Allow and Ignore. - -For opening a new window, there is even more control. You can set &konqueror; to Allow all such requests, Ask each time a request is made, or Deny all popup requests. - -The Smart setting will only allow JavaScript popup windows when you have explicitly chosen a link that creates one. +JavaScript + +Despite the name, JavaScript is not related at all to &Java;. + +The first part of this page works the same as the &Java; page settings. + +The checkboxes under Global Settings allow you to turn JavaScript support on for all web sites by default. You can also select to turn JavaScript on or off for specific hosts. To add a policy for a specific host, click the Add... button to bring up a dialogue in which you can type the host name and then choose to accept or reject JavaScript code from that particular host, which will add the domain to the list on the left of the page. + +You can select a host in the list, and click the Change... button to choose a different policy for that host. Clicking the Delete button removes the policy for the selected host; after deletion, the global settings will then apply to that host. You can import policies from a file by clicking the Import... button. To save the current list to a compressed archive file, click the Export... button. + +The final set of options on this page determine what happens when a page uses JavaScript for specific actions. + +You can individually enable or disable the ability of JavaScript to manipulate your windows by moving, resizing or changing focus. You can also disable JavaScript from changing the status bar text, so that for instance, you can always see where links will take you when clicked.The choices for these options are Allow and Ignore. + +For opening a new window, there is even more control. You can set &konqueror; to Allow all such requests, Ask each time a request is made, or Deny all popup requests. + +The Smart setting will only allow JavaScript popup windows when you have explicitly chosen a link that creates one. -Plugins - -The first setting here is Enable Plugins globally. If you disable this checkbox, then &konqueror; will not use any plugins. If you enable it, then any installed and configured plugins that it can find will be used by &konqueror; - -You can also restrict &konqueror; to Only allow HTTP and HTTPS URLs for plugins by checking the box. +Plugins + +The first setting here is Enable Plugins globally. If you disable this checkbox, then &konqueror; will not use any plugins. If you enable it, then any installed and configured plugins that it can find will be used by &konqueror; + +You can also restrict &konqueror; to Only allow HTTP and HTTPS URLs for plugins by checking the box. &nsplugins-kcontrol; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook index 1e6ada4226a..84d50b0c398 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook @@ -1,99 +1,43 @@ -&Netscape; Plugins +&Netscape; Plugins -Introduction +Introduction -As &Netscape;'s Navigator has been a web browsing standard for many years, so-called &Netscape; plugins have appeared that allow rich web content. Using those plugins, web sites can contain PDF files, flash animations, video, &etc; With &konqueror;, you can still use these plugins to take advantage of rich web content. +As &Netscape;'s Navigator has been a web browsing standard for many years, so-called &Netscape; plugins have appeared that allow rich web content. Using those plugins, web sites can contain PDF files, flash animations, video, &etc; With &konqueror;, you can still use these plugins to take advantage of rich web content. -&Netscape; plugins should not be confused with &konqueror; plugins. The latter ones specifically extend &konqueror;'s functionality; they are normally not used to display rich web content. +&Netscape; plugins should not be confused with &konqueror; plugins. The latter ones specifically extend &konqueror;'s functionality; they are normally not used to display rich web content. -Scan - -&konqueror; has to know where your &Netscape; plugins are installed. This can be in several places, &ie; you might have system-wide plugins in /opt/netscape/plugins and your personal plugins in $HOME/.netscape/plugins. However, &konqueror; will not automatically use the installed plugins: it first has to scan a list of folders. You can initiate the scan by clicking Scan for new plugins. Alternatively, you can enable Scan for new plugins at &kde; startup so &konqueror; will scan the appropriate folders every time &kde; starts up, to see whether new plugins have been installed. - -Enabling Scan for new plugins at &kde; startup can considerably slow down the startup procedure, and is known to give difficulty on certain installations. Turn this option off if you experience problems. - -To find plugins, &konqueror; will look in the folders specified in the Scan Folders frame. When you use this control module for the first time, this list will already be filled with reasonable paths that should work on most operating systems. If you need to provide a new path, click the New button; then you can either enter the new path in the text edit box to the left, or choose a folder using the file dialogue by clicking the New... button. As scanning the folders can take a little time, you might want to remove folders from the list where you know that no plugins are installed: do this by selecting a folder and clicking Remove. Using the Up and Down buttons you can change the order in which folders will be scanned by moving the selected folder up or down. - -As usual, click Apply to save your changes permanently. +Scan + +&konqueror; has to know where your &Netscape; plugins are installed. This can be in several places, &ie; you might have system-wide plugins in /opt/netscape/plugins and your personal plugins in $HOME/.netscape/plugins. However, &konqueror; will not automatically use the installed plugins: it first has to scan a list of folders. You can initiate the scan by clicking Scan for new plugins. Alternatively, you can enable Scan for new plugins at &kde; startup so &konqueror; will scan the appropriate folders every time &kde; starts up, to see whether new plugins have been installed. + +Enabling Scan for new plugins at &kde; startup can considerably slow down the startup procedure, and is known to give difficulty on certain installations. Turn this option off if you experience problems. + +To find plugins, &konqueror; will look in the folders specified in the Scan Folders frame. When you use this control module for the first time, this list will already be filled with reasonable paths that should work on most operating systems. If you need to provide a new path, click the New button; then you can either enter the new path in the text edit box to the left, or choose a folder using the file dialogue by clicking the New... button. As scanning the folders can take a little time, you might want to remove folders from the list where you know that no plugins are installed: do this by selecting a folder and clicking Remove. Using the Up and Down buttons you can change the order in which folders will be scanned by moving the selected folder up or down. + +As usual, click Apply to save your changes permanently. -Plugins +Plugins -In this tab, you can see a list of the &Netscape; plugins found by &konqueror;, displayed as a tree. Double click on a plugin to fold it out and you'll see that the different mime types this plugin can handle will be displayed as branches. Fold out a mime type to see its info. +In this tab, you can see a list of the &Netscape; plugins found by &konqueror;, displayed as a tree. Double click on a plugin to fold it out and you'll see that the different mime types this plugin can handle will be displayed as branches. Fold out a mime type to see its info. -This tab is mostly for informational purposes. The only configurable option is Use artsdsp to pipe plugin sound through aRts, which is enabled by default. Disable this if you wish plugins to use their own method for sounds, and you have configured &arts; in such a way that third-party applications can do so (for example, by having it exit when idle, or by having it use a custom sound device on modern soundcards which allow this.) +This tab is mostly for informational purposes. The only configurable option is Use artsdsp to pipe plugin sound through aRts, which is enabled by default. Disable this if you wish plugins to use their own method for sounds, and you have configured &arts; in such a way that third-party applications can do so (for example, by having it exit when idle, or by having it use a custom sound device on modern soundcards which allow this.) -Section Author - -This section written by: Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de - -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Author + +This section written by: Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de + +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook index a54991df318..8c5f5ea55f6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook @@ -2,504 +2,216 @@ - + ]>
-&Thomas.Tanghus; &Thomas.Tanghus.mail; -&Steffen.Hansen; &Steffen.Hansen.mail; -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Thomas.Tanghus; &Thomas.Tanghus.mail; +&Steffen.Hansen; &Steffen.Hansen.mail; +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-13 -3.00.00 +2002-02-13 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -TDM configuration -login manager -login +KDE +KControl +TDM configuration +login manager +login -Login Manager - -Using this module, you can configure the &kde; graphical login manager, &tdm;. You can change how the login screen looks, who has access using the login manager and who can shutdown the computer. - -In order to organise all of these options, this module is divided into five sections: Appearance, Font, Background, Sessions, Users and Convenience. - -You can switch between the sections using the tabs at the top of the window. - -If you are not currently logged in as a superuser, you will need to click the Administrator Mode Button. You will then be asked for a superuser password. Entering a correct password will allow you to modify the settings of this module. +Login Manager + +Using this module, you can configure the &kde; graphical login manager, &tdm;. You can change how the login screen looks, who has access using the login manager and who can shutdown the computer. + +In order to organise all of these options, this module is divided into five sections: Appearance, Font, Background, Sessions, Users and Convenience. + +You can switch between the sections using the tabs at the top of the window. + +If you are not currently logged in as a superuser, you will need to click the Administrator Mode Button. You will then be asked for a superuser password. Entering a correct password will allow you to modify the settings of this module. -Appearance +Appearance -From this page you can change the visual appearance of &tdm;, &kde;'s graphical login manager. +From this page you can change the visual appearance of &tdm;, &kde;'s graphical login manager. -The greeting string is the title of the login screen. If the string contains the word HOSTNAME it will be translated to the domainless name of the machine &tdm; is installed on. +The greeting string is the title of the login screen. If the string contains the word HOSTNAME it will be translated to the domainless name of the machine &tdm; is installed on. -You can then choose to show either the current system time, a logo or nothing special in the login box. Make your choice in the radio buttons labelled Logo area. Using the Positions setting, you can choose to either centre the content of the logo area or to position it using fixed coordinates. +You can then choose to show either the current system time, a logo or nothing special in the login box. Make your choice in the radio buttons labelled Logo area. Using the Positions setting, you can choose to either centre the content of the logo area or to position it using fixed coordinates. -If you chose Show logo you can now choose a logo: +If you chose Show logo you can now choose a logo: -Drop an image file on the image button. +Drop an image file on the image button. -Click on the image button and select a new image from the image chooser dialogue. +Click on the image button and select a new image from the image chooser dialogue. -If you do not specify a logo the default $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/kdelogo.png will be displayed. +If you do not specify a logo the default $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/kdelogo.png will be displayed. -While &kde;'s style depends on the settings of the user logged in, the style used by &tdm; can be configured using the GUI Style option. +While &kde;'s style depends on the settings of the user logged in, the style used by &tdm; can be configured using the GUI Style option. -Below that, you have two dropdown boxes to choose the language and the country for your login box. +Below that, you have two dropdown boxes to choose the language and the country for your login box. -Font - -From this section of the module you can change the fonts used in the login window. - -You can select three different font styles from the drop down box (Greeting, Fail, Standard). When you click on the Change font button a dialogue appears from which you can select the new characteristics for the font style. +Font + +From this section of the module you can change the fonts used in the login window. + +You can select three different font styles from the drop down box (Greeting, Fail, Standard). When you click on the Change font button a dialogue appears from which you can select the new characteristics for the font style. -The Greeting font is the font used for the title (Greeting String). +The Greeting font is the font used for the title (Greeting String). -The Fail font is used when a login fails. +The Fail font is used when a login fails. -The Standard font is used in all other places in the login window. +The Standard font is used in all other places in the login window. -An example of each font can be seen in the Example Box. +An example of each font can be seen in the Example Box. -Background +Background -Here you can change the desktop background which will be displayed when a user logs in. You can have a single colour or an image as a background. If you have an image as the background and select centre, the selected background colour will be used around the image if it isn't large enough to cover the entire desktop. +Here you can change the desktop background which will be displayed when a user logs in. You can have a single colour or an image as a background. If you have an image as the background and select centre, the selected background colour will be used around the image if it isn't large enough to cover the entire desktop. -The background colours and effects are controlled by the options on the tab labelled Background and you select a background image and its placement from the options on the tab labelled Wallpaper. +The background colours and effects are controlled by the options on the tab labelled Background and you select a background image and its placement from the options on the tab labelled Wallpaper. -To change the default background colour(s) simply click either of the colour buttons and select a new colour. +To change the default background colour(s) simply click either of the colour buttons and select a new colour. -The dropdown box above the colour buttons provides you with several different blend effects. Choose one from the list, and it will be previewed on the small monitor at the top of the window. Your choices are: +The dropdown box above the colour buttons provides you with several different blend effects. Choose one from the list, and it will be previewed on the small monitor at the top of the window. Your choices are: -Flat -By choosing this mode, you select one colour (using the colour button labelled Colour 1), and the entire background is covered with this one colour. +Flat +By choosing this mode, you select one colour (using the colour button labelled Colour 1), and the entire background is covered with this one colour. -Pattern -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). You then select a pattern by clicking Setup. This opens a new dialogue window, which gives you the opportunity to select a pattern. Simply click once on the pattern of your choice, then click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Background: Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. +Pattern +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). You then select a pattern by clicking Setup. This opens a new dialogue window, which gives you the opportunity to select a pattern. Simply click once on the pattern of your choice, then click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Background: Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. -Background Program -By selecting this option, you can have &kde; use an external program to determine the background. This can be any program of your choosing. For more information on this option, see the section entitled Background: Using an external program. +Background Program +By selecting this option, you can have &kde; use an external program to determine the background. This can be any program of your choosing. For more information on this option, see the section entitled Background: Using an external program. -Horizontal Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. +Horizontal Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. -Vertical Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the bottom of the screen. +Vertical Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the bottom of the screen. -Pyramid Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. +Pyramid Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. -Pipecross Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different then the pyramid gradient. +Pipecross Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different then the pyramid gradient. -Elliptic Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 2 in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 1 as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. +Elliptic Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 2 in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 1 as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. -The setup button is only needed for if you select Background program or Patterns. In these instances, another window will appear to configure the specifics. -Wallpaper -To select a new background image first, click on the Wallpapers tab, then you can either select an image from the drop-down list labelled Wallpaper or select Browse... and select an image file from a file selector. - -The image can be displayed in six different ways: +The setup button is only needed for if you select Background program or Patterns. In these instances, another window will appear to configure the specifics. +Wallpaper +To select a new background image first, click on the Wallpapers tab, then you can either select an image from the drop-down list labelled Wallpaper or select Browse... and select an image file from a file selector. + +The image can be displayed in six different ways: -No wallpaper -No image is displayed. Just the background colours. - +No wallpaper +No image is displayed. Just the background colours. + -Centred -The image will be centred on the screen. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. +Centred +The image will be centred on the screen. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. -Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. +Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. -Centre Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upward, downward to the right, and to the left. +Centre Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upward, downward to the right, and to the left. -Centred Maxpect -The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. +Centred Maxpect +The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. -Scaled -The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit all four corners. +Scaled +The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit all four corners. -Sessions - -Allow to shutdown -Use this dropdown box to choose who is allowed to shut down: +Sessions + +Allow to shutdown +Use this dropdown box to choose who is allowed to shut down: -None: No one can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. You must be logged in, and execute a command. +None: No one can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. You must be logged in, and execute a command. -All: Everyone can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. +All: Everyone can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. -Root only: &tdm; requires that the root password be entered before shutting down the computer. -Console only: The user must be at this console, to shut down the computer. +Root only: &tdm; requires that the root password be entered before shutting down the computer. +Console only: The user must be at this console, to shut down the computer. -Commands -Use these 3 blanks to define the exact shutdown command. -The shutdown command defaults to: - -/sbin/shutdown - -The restart command defaults to: - -/sbin/reboot - -The Console mode (which restarts the computer as a console only terminal) defaults to: - -/sbin/init - -When Show boot options is enabled, &tdm; will on reboot offer you options for the lilo boot manager. For this feature to work, you will need to supply the correct paths to your lilo command and to lilo's map file. +Commands +Use these 3 blanks to define the exact shutdown command. +The shutdown command defaults to: + +/sbin/shutdown + +The restart command defaults to: + +/sbin/reboot + +The Console mode (which restarts the computer as a console only terminal) defaults to: + +/sbin/init + +When Show boot options is enabled, &tdm; will on reboot offer you options for the lilo boot manager. For this feature to work, you will need to supply the correct paths to your lilo command and to lilo's map file. -Session types - -Define which session types should be accessible from the login window. - -For more information on this subject, look at /etc/X11/xdm/Xsession to find your xdm setup files. Also review the xdm man pages, especially under the SESSION PROGRAM section. - -To add a session, type its name in the blank entitled New types, and click Add new. - -To remove a session, select the session from the list and click Remove. +Session types + +Define which session types should be accessible from the login window. + +For more information on this subject, look at /etc/X11/xdm/Xsession to find your xdm setup files. Also review the xdm man pages, especially under the SESSION PROGRAM section. + +To add a session, type its name in the blank entitled New types, and click Add new. + +To remove a session, select the session from the list and click Remove. @@ -507,210 +219,98 @@ -Users +Users -From here you can change the way users are represented in the login window. +From here you can change the way users are represented in the login window. -As you look on this window, you will see three lists (All users, selected users, and no-show users). You also see an image box, and a set of options along the right side of the window. +As you look on this window, you will see three lists (All users, selected users, and no-show users). You also see an image box, and a set of options along the right side of the window. -The first thing you must decide, is if you are going to show users or not. +The first thing you must decide, is if you are going to show users or not. -If you choose to show users, then the login window will show images (which you select), of a list of users. When someone is ready to login, they select their user name/image, enter their password, and they are granted access. +If you choose to show users, then the login window will show images (which you select), of a list of users. When someone is ready to login, they select their user name/image, enter their password, and they are granted access. -If you choose not to show users, then the login window will be more traditional. Users will need to type their username, and password to gain entrance. This is the preferred way if you have many users on this terminal. +If you choose not to show users, then the login window will be more traditional. Users will need to type their username, and password to gain entrance. This is the preferred way if you have many users on this terminal. -To show (and sort) or not to show users +To show (and sort) or not to show users -Along the right edge of the window are two check boxes: +Along the right edge of the window are two check boxes: -If Show users is selected, you have chosen to show images of users, instead of making them type their login name. +If Show users is selected, you have chosen to show images of users, instead of making them type their login name. -If Sort users is selected, then the list of users will be sorted alphabetically in the login window. If unchecked, users will be listed in the same order as they are on this page. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +If Sort users is selected, then the list of users will be sorted alphabetically in the login window. If unchecked, users will be listed in the same order as they are on this page. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -How to determine which users to show and which users to hide +How to determine which users to show and which users to hide -Below the user image box, and above the Show users check box, is a set of two radio buttions: +Below the user image box, and above the Show users check box, is a set of two radio buttions: -Show only selected users: If this option is selected, only the users contained in the list labelled Selected Users, will be displayed in the login window. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -Show all users but no-show users: If this option is selected, all users will be listed, except those users contained in the list entitled No show users. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +Show only selected users: If this option is selected, only the users contained in the list labelled Selected Users, will be displayed in the login window. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +Show all users but no-show users: If this option is selected, all users will be listed, except those users contained in the list entitled No show users. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -Select users +Select users -This page contains three listboxes. The large listbox on the left shows all the users on the system which might be a genuine user. +This page contains three listboxes. The large listbox on the left shows all the users on the system which might be a genuine user. -The top rightmost listbox shows the selected users and the bottom rightmost listbox shows the users we don't want displayed in the login window. +The top rightmost listbox shows the selected users and the bottom rightmost listbox shows the users we don't want displayed in the login window. -To move a user from one listbox to another you click on the username in the listbox and click >> to move the user from the leftmost box the the rightmost box or << to move the user from the rightmost box to the leftmost box. +To move a user from one listbox to another you click on the username in the listbox and click >> to move the user from the leftmost box the the rightmost box or << to move the user from the rightmost box to the leftmost box. -Images - -This section of the manual only applies if Show users is selected. If it is not, this image box has no effect. - -Every user on the system can be represented by a image. The image for the user is kept in a file called $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/$USER.xpm. If the user doesn't have such a file the file $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/default.xpm will be used instead. - -To assign a new image to a user just select the user in one of the listboxes and either drop an imagefile on the image button to the right or click on the image button and select a new image from the image selector. - -If no user is currently selected you will be asked if you want to change the default image. - -The replacement is performed by a &konqueror; process so if the image file already exists you will be prompted by &konqueror; if you want to replace it. If you confirm the image will be replaced - you will not have to press the Apply button. +Images + +This section of the manual only applies if Show users is selected. If it is not, this image box has no effect. + +Every user on the system can be represented by a image. The image for the user is kept in a file called $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/$USER.xpm. If the user doesn't have such a file the file $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/default.xpm will be used instead. + +To assign a new image to a user just select the user in one of the listboxes and either drop an imagefile on the image button to the right or click on the image button and select a new image from the image selector. + +If no user is currently selected you will be asked if you want to change the default image. + +The replacement is performed by a &konqueror; process so if the image file already exists you will be prompted by &konqueror; if you want to replace it. If you confirm the image will be replaced - you will not have to press the Apply button. -Convenience +Convenience -In the convenience tab you can configure some options that make life easier for lazy people, like auto login or disabling passwords. +In the convenience tab you can configure some options that make life easier for lazy people, like auto login or disabling passwords. -Please think more than twice before using these options. Every option in the convenience tab is well-suited to seriously compromise your system security. Practically, these options are only to be used in a completely non-critical environment, ⪚ a private computer at home. +Please think more than twice before using these options. Every option in the convenience tab is well-suited to seriously compromise your system security. Practically, these options are only to be used in a completely non-critical environment, ⪚ a private computer at home. -Automatic Login - -Automatic login will give anyone access to a certain account on your system without doing any authentication. You can enable it using the option Enable auto-login. - -Automatic login comes in two flavours: truly automatic login acts like you would expect automatic login to, &ie; &tdm; will automatically login without expecting any input from the user. Enable this using the Truly automatic login option. If this option is not enabled, &tdm; will start normally, enabling you to login as any user, and will only perform automatic login if you kill the X server, ⪚ by pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;Backspace. - -You can choose the account to be used for automatic login in the list below. +Automatic Login + +Automatic login will give anyone access to a certain account on your system without doing any authentication. You can enable it using the option Enable auto-login. + +Automatic login comes in two flavours: truly automatic login acts like you would expect automatic login to, &ie; &tdm; will automatically login without expecting any input from the user. Enable this using the Truly automatic login option. If this option is not enabled, &tdm; will start normally, enabling you to login as any user, and will only perform automatic login if you kill the X server, ⪚ by pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;Backspace. + +You can choose the account to be used for automatic login in the list below. -Password-less Login - -Using this feature, you can allow certain users to login without having to provide their password. Enable this feature using the Enable password-less logins option. - -Below this option you will see a list of users for which a password is required, as well as a (by default, empty) list of users that do not need to provide a password. When Enable password-less logins is enabled, you can move users from one list into the other, by selecting them and then clicking the >> and << buttons. - -Again, this option should only be used in a safe environment. If you enable it on a rather public system you should take care that only users with heavy access restrictions are granted password-less login, ⪚ guest. - -The Automatically login after X server crash option allows you to skip the authentication procedure when your X server accidentally crashed. Show previous user will show the name of the last login already entered into the login field in &tdm;. Some site administrators would consider even this a possible security weakness, because potential attackers then know at least one valid login. +Password-less Login + +Using this feature, you can allow certain users to login without having to provide their password. Enable this feature using the Enable password-less logins option. + +Below this option you will see a list of users for which a password is required, as well as a (by default, empty) list of users that do not need to provide a password. When Enable password-less logins is enabled, you can move users from one list into the other, by selecting them and then clicking the >> and << buttons. + +Again, this option should only be used in a safe environment. If you enable it on a rather public system you should take care that only users with heavy access restrictions are granted password-less login, ⪚ guest. + +The Automatically login after X server crash option allows you to skip the authentication procedure when your X server accidentally crashed. Show previous user will show the name of the last login already entered into the login field in &tdm;. Some site administrators would consider even this a possible security weakness, because potential attackers then know at least one valid login. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook index b4194089571..a7731676695 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook @@ -2,87 +2,48 @@ - + ]>
-&Rik.Hemsley; &Rik.Hemsley.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Rik.Hemsley; &Rik.Hemsley.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-28 -3.2 +2003-09-28 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -twin -window -border -theme -style +KDE +KControl +twin +window +border +theme +style -Window Decoration +Window Decoration -General +General -This module allows you to select a style for the borders around windows. +This module allows you to select a style for the borders around windows. -Each style has a different look, but also a different feel. Some have (sometimes invisible) resize borders all around the edge, which make resizing easier but moving more difficult. Some have no borders on certain edges. One (BII) even has a dynamically sized and positioned title element. +Each style has a different look, but also a different feel. Some have (sometimes invisible) resize borders all around the edge, which make resizing easier but moving more difficult. Some have no borders on certain edges. One (BII) even has a dynamically sized and positioned title element. -You are encouraged to experiment with the different styles until you find one which best suits your pattern of work. +You are encouraged to experiment with the different styles until you find one which best suits your pattern of work. -Choose a window decoration style from the drop down box at the top of the screen to see a preview of it in the lower pane. +Choose a window decoration style from the drop down box at the top of the screen to see a preview of it in the lower pane. -If there are any configurable options for the theme you chose on the first page, they will become available below the preview... +If there are any configurable options for the theme you chose on the first page, they will become available below the preview... + ]>
-Browser Identification +Browser Identification -&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -user agent -browser -identification +KDE +KControl +user agent +browser +identification -Browser Identification +Browser Identification -Introduction +Introduction -When &konqueror; connects to a web site to retrieve information, some basic identifying information is sent to the web site in the form of a User Agent header. +When &konqueror; connects to a web site to retrieve information, some basic identifying information is sent to the web site in the form of a User Agent header. -Because of minor differences in the way that different web browsers function, web sites that rely too much on a single browser may sometimes not display as intended when viewed using another browser. Some web sites are smart enough to examine the contents of the user agent header and incorporate this information in the HTML code so that the content is displayed correctly regardless of the browser used. +Because of minor differences in the way that different web browsers function, web sites that rely too much on a single browser may sometimes not display as intended when viewed using another browser. Some web sites are smart enough to examine the contents of the user agent header and incorporate this information in the HTML code so that the content is displayed correctly regardless of the browser used. -However, you may find that some web sites refuse to function correctly unless you are using a browser recognised as proper by that site. In these cases, you may find it necessary to fool the web site by having &konqueror; report itself to be another browser by means of the user agent header. +However, you may find that some web sites refuse to function correctly unless you are using a browser recognised as proper by that site. In these cases, you may find it necessary to fool the web site by having &konqueror; report itself to be another browser by means of the user agent header. -Use - -In this module you can configure the type of browser that &konqueror; will report itself to be. You can control this information by web site. Usually, the list box that is labeled Site/Domain Specific Identification will be empty, so that &konqueror; will always use its default useragent string. - -You can disable the sending of a user agent entirely, by unchecking the Send identification checkbox. This may cause strange behaviour on some sites, and may even deny you access to some websites, so disable this with caution. - -To configure a new agent binding, press the New... button. Type the name of the server or a domain in the text box at the top of the dialogue that pops up, which is labelled When browsing the following site. - -Note that you can not use the wildcard character * in this text box. However, the string kde.org will match all hosts in the domain kde.org - -After typing the name of the server, type in the identifying string in the next combo box, which is labeled Use the following identity:, or choose a string from the list. If you don't choose a string from the list, you will need to know what a valid string from the browser looks like. For example, you could type Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 4.0). - -In the field labelled Alias (description) you can enter a descriptive name for the configured binding, ⪚ Netscape Navigator 4.75 on Linux for the useragent string Mozilla/4.75 (X11; U; Linux 2.2.14 i686). - -You can click on an existing entry in the Configured agent bindings list, and then modify the contents of the text boxes, followed by clicking Change.... - -The Delete button can be used to delete the selected entry in the list of configured agent bindings. The Delete All will remove all the configured user agent strings. Click the Apply to take your changes in effect. - -You can use the checkboxes at the top of the screen to build a user agent that is uniquely yours, by choosing your own combination of operating system name and version, platform, processor type, and language. - -In all cases, the user agent that is being sent by default is displayed in bold text at the top of the page. +Use + +In this module you can configure the type of browser that &konqueror; will report itself to be. You can control this information by web site. Usually, the list box that is labeled Site/Domain Specific Identification will be empty, so that &konqueror; will always use its default useragent string. + +You can disable the sending of a user agent entirely, by unchecking the Send identification checkbox. This may cause strange behaviour on some sites, and may even deny you access to some websites, so disable this with caution. + +To configure a new agent binding, press the New... button. Type the name of the server or a domain in the text box at the top of the dialogue that pops up, which is labelled When browsing the following site. + +Note that you can not use the wildcard character * in this text box. However, the string kde.org will match all hosts in the domain kde.org + +After typing the name of the server, type in the identifying string in the next combo box, which is labeled Use the following identity:, or choose a string from the list. If you don't choose a string from the list, you will need to know what a valid string from the browser looks like. For example, you could type Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 4.0). + +In the field labelled Alias (description) you can enter a descriptive name for the configured binding, ⪚ Netscape Navigator 4.75 on Linux for the useragent string Mozilla/4.75 (X11; U; Linux 2.2.14 i686). + +You can click on an existing entry in the Configured agent bindings list, and then modify the contents of the text boxes, followed by clicking Change.... + +The Delete button can be used to delete the selected entry in the list of configured agent bindings. The Delete All will remove all the configured user agent strings. Click the Apply to take your changes in effect. + +You can use the checkboxes at the top of the screen to build a user agent that is uniquely yours, by choosing your own combination of operating system name and version, platform, processor type, and language. + +In all cases, the user agent that is being sent by default is displayed in bold text at the top of the page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook index 6812a8d7013..8e49122c52d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook @@ -2,457 +2,221 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2004-05-04 -3.2 +2004-05-04 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -actions -window placement -window size +KDE +KControl +actions +window placement +window size -Window Behaviour - -In the upper part of this control module you can see several tabs: Focus, Actions, Moving and Advanced. In the Focus panel you can configure how windows gain or lose focus, &ie; become active or inactive. Using Actions you can configure how windows react to mouse clicks. Moving allows you to configure how windows move and place themselves when started. The Advanced options cover some specialized options involving moving windows between desktops and window shading. +Window Behaviour + +In the upper part of this control module you can see several tabs: Focus, Actions, Moving and Advanced. In the Focus panel you can configure how windows gain or lose focus, &ie; become active or inactive. Using Actions you can configure how windows react to mouse clicks. Moving allows you to configure how windows move and place themselves when started. The Advanced options cover some specialized options involving moving windows between desktops and window shading. -Please note that the configuration in this module will not take effect if you don't use &kde;'s native window manager, &twin;. If you do use a different window manager, please refer to its documentation for how to customise window behaviour. +Please note that the configuration in this module will not take effect if you don't use &kde;'s native window manager, &twin;. If you do use a different window manager, please refer to its documentation for how to customise window behaviour. -Focus +Focus -The focus of the desktop refers to the window which the user is currently working on. The window with focus is often referred to as the active window. +The focus of the desktop refers to the window which the user is currently working on. The window with focus is often referred to as the active window. -Focus does not necessarily mean the window is the one at the front — this is referred to as raised, and although this is configured here as well, focus and raising of windows are configured independently. +Focus does not necessarily mean the window is the one at the front — this is referred to as raised, and although this is configured here as well, focus and raising of windows are configured independently. -Focus Policy +Focus Policy -There are four methods &kde; can use to determine the current focus: +There are four methods &kde; can use to determine the current focus: -Click to Focus +Click to Focus -A window becomes active when you click into it. +A window becomes active when you click into it. -Focus follows mouse +Focus follows mouse -Moving the mouse pointer actively over a normal window activates it. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will receive the focus, without you having to point the mouse at them explicitly. - -In other window managers, this is sometimes known as Sloppy focus follows mouse. +Moving the mouse pointer actively over a normal window activates it. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will receive the focus, without you having to point the mouse at them explicitly. + +In other window managers, this is sometimes known as Sloppy focus follows mouse. -Focus under mouse +Focus under mouse -The window that happens to be under the mouse pointer becomes active. If the mouse is not over a window (for instance, it's on the desktop) the last window that was under the mouse has focus. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will not receive the focus, you must move the mouse over them to type. +The window that happens to be under the mouse pointer becomes active. If the mouse is not over a window (for instance, it's on the desktop) the last window that was under the mouse has focus. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will not receive the focus, you must move the mouse over them to type. -Focus strictly under mouse +Focus strictly under mouse -Similar to Focus under mouse, but even more strict with its interpretation. Only the window under the mouse pointer is active. If the mouse pointer is not over a window, no window has focus. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will not receive the focus, you must move the mouse over them to type. - -Note that Focus under mouse and Focus strictly under mouse prevent certain features, such as the &Alt; walk-through-windows dialogue, from working properly. +Similar to Focus under mouse, but even more strict with its interpretation. Only the window under the mouse pointer is active. If the mouse pointer is not over a window, no window has focus. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will not receive the focus, you must move the mouse over them to type. + +Note that Focus under mouse and Focus strictly under mouse prevent certain features, such as the &Alt; walk-through-windows dialogue, from working properly. -Once you have determined the focus policy, there are the window raising options. +Once you have determined the focus policy, there are the window raising options. -By placing a mark in front of Auto Raise, &kde; can bring a window to the front if the mouse is over that window for a specified period of time. This is very useful with the Focus follows Mouse option. You can determine the delay by using the slider bar/spin box combination. +By placing a mark in front of Auto Raise, &kde; can bring a window to the front if the mouse is over that window for a specified period of time. This is very useful with the Focus follows Mouse option. You can determine the delay by using the slider bar/spin box combination. -Setting the delay too short will cause a rapid fire changing of windows, which can be quite distracting. Most people will like a delay of 100-300 ms. This is responsive, but it will let you slide over the corners of a window on your way to your destination without bringing that window to the front. +Setting the delay too short will cause a rapid fire changing of windows, which can be quite distracting. Most people will like a delay of 100-300 ms. This is responsive, but it will let you slide over the corners of a window on your way to your destination without bringing that window to the front. -If you do not use Auto Raise, make sure the Click Raise option has a mark in front of it. You will not be happy with both Auto Raise and Click Raise disabled, the net effect is that windows are not raised at all. +If you do not use Auto Raise, make sure the Click Raise option has a mark in front of it. You will not be happy with both Auto Raise and Click Raise disabled, the net effect is that windows are not raised at all. -<guilabel ->Navigation</guilabel -> - -In the Navigation frame you can configure the way switching between applications or desktops using &Alt;Tab or &Ctrl;Tab. - -Switching applications using &Alt; Tab, &ie; holding down &Alt; while repeatedly pressing the Tab key, can take place in &kde; mode or in CDE mode: in &kde; mode you will see a box in the middle of the screen showing you the currently selected application while you are still holding down the &Alt; key. In CDE mode focus goes to each new window as it's selected. - -Next there is an option where you can choose to Traverse windows on all desktops or not. With this enabled, switching windows with &Alt;Tab will show all windows, on all desktops, and take you to the appropriate desktop for the window you select. With it disabled, only windows on your current desktop are selectable with &Alt;Tab, and you must use &Ctrl;Tab to switch to other desktops yourself. - -If you check the Desktop navigation wraps around checkbox, then after you reach the last desktop, pressing Tab again will select the first desktop again. - -Many people name their virtual desktops according to their purpose or some other naming scheme. You may find it convenient to select the Popup desktop name on desktop switch, so you can quickly tell that you've switched to the right one. +<guilabel>Navigation</guilabel> + +In the Navigation frame you can configure the way switching between applications or desktops using &Alt;Tab or &Ctrl;Tab. + +Switching applications using &Alt; Tab, &ie; holding down &Alt; while repeatedly pressing the Tab key, can take place in &kde; mode or in CDE mode: in &kde; mode you will see a box in the middle of the screen showing you the currently selected application while you are still holding down the &Alt; key. In CDE mode focus goes to each new window as it's selected. + +Next there is an option where you can choose to Traverse windows on all desktops or not. With this enabled, switching windows with &Alt;Tab will show all windows, on all desktops, and take you to the appropriate desktop for the window you select. With it disabled, only windows on your current desktop are selectable with &Alt;Tab, and you must use &Ctrl;Tab to switch to other desktops yourself. + +If you check the Desktop navigation wraps around checkbox, then after you reach the last desktop, pressing Tab again will select the first desktop again. + +Many people name their virtual desktops according to their purpose or some other naming scheme. You may find it convenient to select the Popup desktop name on desktop switch, so you can quickly tell that you've switched to the right one. -Actions +Actions -In this panel you can configure what happens to windows when a mouse is clicked on them. This panel is divided into four sections. +In this panel you can configure what happens to windows when a mouse is clicked on them. This panel is divided into four sections. -<guilabel ->Titlebar double-click</guilabel -> - -This section provides a single dropdown box. You can select either Shade, several variations of Maximise or Lower. - -Selecting Maximise causes &kde; to maximise the window whenever you doubleclick on the titlebar. You can further choose to maximise windows only horizontally or only vertically. - -Shade, on the other hand, causes the window to be reduced to simply the titlebar. Double clicking on the titlebar again, restores the window to its normal size. +<guilabel>Titlebar double-click</guilabel> + +This section provides a single dropdown box. You can select either Shade, several variations of Maximise or Lower. + +Selecting Maximise causes &kde; to maximise the window whenever you doubleclick on the titlebar. You can further choose to maximise windows only horizontally or only vertically. + +Shade, on the other hand, causes the window to be reduced to simply the titlebar. Double clicking on the titlebar again, restores the window to its normal size. -You can have windows automatically unshade when you simply place the mouse over their shaded titlebar. Just check the Enable Hover check box in the Advanced tab of this module. This is a great way to reclaim desktop space when you're cutting and pasting between a lot of windows, for example. +You can have windows automatically unshade when you simply place the mouse over their shaded titlebar. Just check the Enable Hover check box in the Advanced tab of this module. This is a great way to reclaim desktop space when you're cutting and pasting between a lot of windows, for example. -<guilabel ->Titlebar & Frame</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Titlebar & Frame</guilabel> -This section allows you to determine what happens when you single click on the titlebar or frame of a window. Notice that you can have different actions associated with the same click depending on whether the window is active or not. +This section allows you to determine what happens when you single click on the titlebar or frame of a window. Notice that you can have different actions associated with the same click depending on whether the window is active or not. -For each combination of mousebuttons, modifiers, Active and Inactive, you can select the most appropriate choice. The actions are as follows: +For each combination of mousebuttons, modifiers, Active and Inactive, you can select the most appropriate choice. The actions are as follows: -Activate +Activate -Make this window active. +Make this window active. -Lower +Lower -Will move this window to the bottom of the display. This will get the window out of the way. +Will move this window to the bottom of the display. This will get the window out of the way. -Nothing +Nothing -Just like it says. Nothing happens. +Just like it says. Nothing happens. -Operations Menu +Operations Menu -Will bring up a small submenu, where you can choose window related commands (&ie; Maximise, Minimise, Close, &etc;). +Will bring up a small submenu, where you can choose window related commands (&ie; Maximise, Minimise, Close, &etc;). -Raise +Raise -Will bring the window to the top of the display. All other windows which overlap with this one, will be hidden below it. +Will bring the window to the top of the display. All other windows which overlap with this one, will be hidden below it. -Toggle Raise and Lower +Toggle Raise and Lower -This will raise windows which are not on top, and lower windows which are already on top. +This will raise windows which are not on top, and lower windows which are already on top. -<guilabel ->Inactive Inner Window</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Inactive Inner Window</guilabel> -This part of the module, allows you to configure what happens when you click on an inactive window, with any of the three mouse buttons. +This part of the module, allows you to configure what happens when you click on an inactive window, with any of the three mouse buttons. -Your choices are as follows: +Your choices are as follows: -Activate, Raise and pass click +Activate, Raise and pass click -This makes the clicked window active, raises it to the top of the display, and passes a mouse click to the application within the window. +This makes the clicked window active, raises it to the top of the display, and passes a mouse click to the application within the window. -Activate and pass click +Activate and pass click -This makes the clicked window active and passes a mouse click to the application within the window. +This makes the clicked window active and passes a mouse click to the application within the window. -Activate +Activate -This simply makes the clicked window active. The mouse click is not passed on to the application within the window. +This simply makes the clicked window active. The mouse click is not passed on to the application within the window. -Activate and Raise +Activate and Raise -This makes the clicked window active and raises the window to the top of the display. The mouse click is not passed on to the application within the window. +This makes the clicked window active and raises the window to the top of the display. The mouse click is not passed on to the application within the window. @@ -460,92 +224,54 @@ -<guilabel ->Inner Window, titlebar and frame</guilabel -> - -This bottom section, allows you to configure additional actions, when a modifier key (by default &Alt;) is pressed, and a mouse click is made on a window. - -Once again, you can select different actions for Left, Middle and Right button clicks. - -Your choices are: +<guilabel>Inner Window, titlebar and frame</guilabel> + +This bottom section, allows you to configure additional actions, when a modifier key (by default &Alt;) is pressed, and a mouse click is made on a window. + +Once again, you can select different actions for Left, Middle and Right button clicks. + +Your choices are: -Lower +Lower -Will move this window to the bottom of the display. This will get the window out of the way. +Will move this window to the bottom of the display. This will get the window out of the way. -Move +Move -Allows you to drag the selected window around the desktop. +Allows you to drag the selected window around the desktop. -Nothing +Nothing -Just like it says. Nothing happens. +Just like it says. Nothing happens. -Raise +Raise -Will bring the window to the top of the display. All other windows which overlap with this one, will be hidden below it. +Will bring the window to the top of the display. All other windows which overlap with this one, will be hidden below it. -Resize +Resize -Allows you to change the size of the selected window. +Allows you to change the size of the selected window. -Toggle Raise and Lower +Toggle Raise and Lower -This will raise windows which are not on top, and lower windows which are already on top. +This will raise windows which are not on top, and lower windows which are already on top. @@ -555,102 +281,55 @@ -<guilabel ->Moving</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Moving</guilabel> -<guilabel ->Windows</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Windows</guilabel> -The options here determine how windows appear on screen when you are moving them. Most of these options exact a price in performance, so if you want to streamline your desktop, you should turn them off. However, if you have a fast computer, they may make your day a little more pleasant, so leave them on. +The options here determine how windows appear on screen when you are moving them. Most of these options exact a price in performance, so if you want to streamline your desktop, you should turn them off. However, if you have a fast computer, they may make your day a little more pleasant, so leave them on. -Display content in moving windows +Display content in moving windows -Enable this option if you want a window's content to be fully shown while moving it, instead of just showing a window skeleton. The result may not be satisfying on slow computers without graphic acceleration. +Enable this option if you want a window's content to be fully shown while moving it, instead of just showing a window skeleton. The result may not be satisfying on slow computers without graphic acceleration. -Display content in resizing windows +Display content in resizing windows -Enable this option if you want a window's content to be shown while resizing it, instead of just showing a window skeleton. The result, again, may not be satisfying on slower computers. +Enable this option if you want a window's content to be shown while resizing it, instead of just showing a window skeleton. The result, again, may not be satisfying on slower computers. -Display window geometry when moving or resizing +Display window geometry when moving or resizing -Enable this option if you want a popup tooltip to tell you the size in pixels of a window as you resize it. +Enable this option if you want a popup tooltip to tell you the size in pixels of a window as you resize it. -Animate minimise and restore +Animate minimise and restore -Enable this option if you want an animation shown when windows are minimised or restored. -With the slider, you can set the speed of the animation. +Enable this option if you want an animation shown when windows are minimised or restored. +With the slider, you can set the speed of the animation. -Allow moving and resizing of maximised windows +Allow moving and resizing of maximised windows -When enabled, this feature activates the border of maximised windows, and allows you to move or resize them just as you can normal windows. +When enabled, this feature activates the border of maximised windows, and allows you to move or resize them just as you can normal windows. -Placement: +Placement: -The placement policy determines where a new window will appear on the desktop. Smart will try to achieve a minimum overlap of windows, Cascade will cascade the windows, and Random will use a random position. Centred will open all new windows in the centre of the screen, and Zero-Cornered will open all windows with their top left corner in the top left corner of the screen. +The placement policy determines where a new window will appear on the desktop. Smart will try to achieve a minimum overlap of windows, Cascade will cascade the windows, and Random will use a random position. Centred will open all new windows in the centre of the screen, and Zero-Cornered will open all windows with their top left corner in the top left corner of the screen. @@ -660,50 +339,32 @@ -<guilabel ->Snap Zones</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Snap Zones</guilabel> -The rest of this page allows you to configure the Snap Zones. These are like a magnetic field along the side of the desktop and each window, which will make windows snap alongside when moved near. +The rest of this page allows you to configure the Snap Zones. These are like a magnetic field along the side of the desktop and each window, which will make windows snap alongside when moved near. -Border snap zone: +Border snap zone: -Here you can set the snap zone for screen borders. Moving a window within the configured distance will make it snap to the edge of the desktop. +Here you can set the snap zone for screen borders. Moving a window within the configured distance will make it snap to the edge of the desktop. -Window snap zone: +Window snap zone: -Here you can set the snap zone for windows. As with screen borders, moving a window near to another will make it snap to the edge as if the windows were magnetised. +Here you can set the snap zone for windows. As with screen borders, moving a window near to another will make it snap to the edge as if the windows were magnetised. -Snap windows only when overlapping +Snap windows only when overlapping -If checked, windows will not snap together if they are only near each other, they must be overlapping, by the configured amount or less. +If checked, windows will not snap together if they are only near each other, they must be overlapping, by the configured amount or less. @@ -712,54 +373,31 @@ -Advanced +Advanced -In the Advanced panel you can do more advanced fine tuning to the window behaviour. +In the Advanced panel you can do more advanced fine tuning to the window behaviour. -Shading +Shading -Animate +Animate -If this option is enabled, shading, or rolling up a window until just the title bar is shown, will be animated. +If this option is enabled, shading, or rolling up a window until just the title bar is shown, will be animated. -Enable hover +Enable hover -If this option is enabled, a shaded window will un-shade automatically when the mouse pointer has been over the title bar for some time. Use the slider to configure the delay un-shading. +If this option is enabled, a shaded window will un-shade automatically when the mouse pointer has been over the title bar for some time. Use the slider to configure the delay un-shading. -Finally, you can configure Active Desktop Borders. If this is enabled, moving the mouse to a screen border will change your desktop. This is useful if you want to drag windows from one desktop to another. - -You can set this option to Disabled, which is the default, to Only when moving windows, or to Always enabled in which case just pushing your mouse against the side of the screen will switch you to a new desktop. +Finally, you can configure Active Desktop Borders. If this is enabled, moving the mouse to a screen border will change your desktop. This is useful if you want to drag windows from one desktop to another. + +You can set this option to Disabled, which is the default, to Only when moving windows, or to Always enabled in which case just pushing your mouse against the side of the screen will switch you to a new desktop. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kfind/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kfind/index.docbook index 85fe5d4a78c..91682d60755 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kfind/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kfind/index.docbook @@ -4,241 +4,113 @@ - + ]> -The &kfind; Handbook +The &kfind; Handbook -&Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2001 -&Dirk.Doerflinger; +2001 +&Dirk.Doerflinger; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2004-04-11 -1.20.01 +2004-04-11 +1.20.01 -&kfind; is &kde;'s file find utility. +&kfind; is &kde;'s file find utility. -KDE -tdeutils -kfind -find -search +KDE +tdeutils +kfind +find +search -Introduction +Introduction -&kfind; is the &kde; file find utility. +&kfind; is the &kde; file find utility. -Launching &kfind; +Launching &kfind; -The Find Files tool is a useful method of searching for specific files on your computer, or for searching for files that match a pattern. An example of this could include searching for files of a particular type or with certain letters in the filename. You can load this utility by clicking on Find Files. This will launch &kfind;. +The Find Files tool is a useful method of searching for specific files on your computer, or for searching for files that match a pattern. An example of this could include searching for files of a particular type or with certain letters in the filename. You can load this utility by clicking on Find Files. This will launch &kfind;. -Finding Files +Finding Files -The Name/Location Tab - -When starting &kfind;, you will see a quite simple window. Type in the name of the file you are searching in the textbox labelled Named:. Choose a folder where you want to search by typing it in the field Look in: or by clicking Browse... and press Enter or click Find. If Include subfolders is checked all subfolders starting from your chosen folder will be searched too. The results will be displayed in the box below. - -You can use the following wildcards: +The Name/Location Tab + +When starting &kfind;, you will see a quite simple window. Type in the name of the file you are searching in the textbox labelled Named:. Choose a folder where you want to search by typing it in the field Look in: or by clicking Browse... and press Enter or click Find. If Include subfolders is checked all subfolders starting from your chosen folder will be searched too. The results will be displayed in the box below. + +You can use the following wildcards: -The Asterisk * +The Asterisk * -The asterisk stands for any number of missing characters (even zero), that means ⪚ searching for marc* may find the files marc, marc.png and marc_must_not_read_this.kwd. mar*.kwd may find marketplace.kwd and marc_must_not_read_this.kwd. +The asterisk stands for any number of missing characters (even zero), that means ⪚ searching for marc* may find the files marc, marc.png and marc_must_not_read_this.kwd. mar*.kwd may find marketplace.kwd and marc_must_not_read_this.kwd. -The Question Mark ? +The Question Mark ? -In contrast to the asterisk, the question mark stands for exactly one character, so mar? will find marc, but marc? will not find anything, as our files are called marc and marc.png. You can put as many question marks in the term as you want, it will find exactly that number of characters. +In contrast to the asterisk, the question mark stands for exactly one character, so mar? will find marc, but marc? will not find anything, as our files are called marc and marc.png. You can put as many question marks in the term as you want, it will find exactly that number of characters. -Of course you can combine those two wildcard symbols in a search term. +Of course you can combine those two wildcard symbols in a search term. -The Contents Tab +The Contents Tab -File type +File type -Here you can specify the type of file you are searching for. +Here you can specify the type of file you are searching for. -Containing text +Containing text -Type in the word or phrase the files you are searching for must contain. Note: If you do this in a large folder or checked Include subfolders in the Name/Location tab, this may take a long time. +Type in the word or phrase the files you are searching for must contain. Note: If you do this in a large folder or checked Include subfolders in the Name/Location tab, this may take a long time. -This option will not work for all files listed under File type. Only the following file types are supported: -Text files, ⪚ source code and README files -KWord >= 1.2 -KPresenter >= 1.2 -KSpread >= 1.2 -OpenOffice.org Writer -OpenOffice.org Impress -OpenOffice.org Calc +This option will not work for all files listed under File type. Only the following file types are supported: +Text files, ⪚ source code and README files +KWord >= 1.2 +KPresenter >= 1.2 +KSpread >= 1.2 +OpenOffice.org Writer +OpenOffice.org Impress +OpenOffice.org Calc @@ -248,37 +120,17 @@ -Case sensitive +Case sensitive -If you enable this option, &kfind; will only find files with the exact case matching, ⪚ MARC will only match MARC, not Marc. +If you enable this option, &kfind; will only find files with the exact case matching, ⪚ MARC will only match MARC, not Marc. -Regular expression -If you have installed the &kregexpeditor; tool from the tdeutils package, you will have this additional option. Enabling it will allow you to search for a regexp or regular expression. A regexp is a way to specify conditions for your search, and they can be very complex, and equally they can be very powerful. If you are unfamiliar with regular expressions, you can choose Edit Regular Expression to open &kregexpeditor;. This tool allows you to construct your set of conditions graphically, and then generates the expression for you. - -&kregexpeditor; is a very useful tool, and can be used from within many &kde; applications other than &kfind;. You can find more information from within its own help file. +Regular expression +If you have installed the &kregexpeditor; tool from the tdeutils package, you will have this additional option. Enabling it will allow you to search for a regexp or regular expression. A regexp is a way to specify conditions for your search, and they can be very complex, and equally they can be very powerful. If you are unfamiliar with regular expressions, you can choose Edit Regular Expression to open &kregexpeditor;. This tool allows you to construct your set of conditions graphically, and then generates the expression for you. + +&kregexpeditor; is a very useful tool, and can be used from within many &kde; applications other than &kfind;. You can find more information from within its own help file. @@ -289,44 +141,30 @@ -The Properties Tab +The Properties Tab -Here you can refine your search. These are the special refinements you can choose: +Here you can refine your search. These are the special refinements you can choose: -Find all files created or modified +Find all files created or modified -Here you can either enter two dates, between which the files were created or modified, or specify a time period. +Here you can either enter two dates, between which the files were created or modified, or specify a time period. -File size is +File size is -Here you can specify if the file has to be at least or as most as big as the size you entered in the following box. +Here you can specify if the file has to be at least or as most as big as the size you entered in the following box. -Files owned by user, Files owned by group +Files owned by user, Files owned by group -Here you can specify user and group names. +Here you can specify user and group names. @@ -338,120 +176,77 @@ -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kfind; +&kfind; -Program copyright: +Program copyright: -Developers +Developers -Martin Hartig +Martin Hartig -Stephan Kulow coolo@kde.org +Stephan Kulow coolo@kde.org -Mario Weilguni mweilguni@sime.com +Mario Weilguni mweilguni@sime.com -Alex Zepeda jazepeda@pacbell.net +Alex Zepeda jazepeda@pacbell.net -Miroslav Flídr flidr@kky.zcu.cz +Miroslav Flídr flidr@kky.zcu.cz -Harri Porten porten@kde.org +Harri Porten porten@kde.org -Dima Rogozin dima@mercury.co.il +Dima Rogozin dima@mercury.co.il -Carsten Pfeiffer pfeiffer@kde.org +Carsten Pfeiffer pfeiffer@kde.org -Hans Petter Bieker bieker@kde.org +Hans Petter Bieker bieker@kde.org -Waldo Bastian bastian@kde.org +Waldo Bastian bastian@kde.org -Documentation copyright 2001 &Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; +Documentation copyright 2001 &Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net &underFDL; &underBSDLicense; -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &kfind; +How to obtain &kfind; &install.intro.documentation; -Requirements +Requirements -In order to successfully use &kfind;, you need &kde; 3.x. +In order to successfully use &kfind;, you need &kde; 3.x. -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation &install.compile.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/contact.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/contact.docbook index c164370fb32..c4cdd5b35b1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/contact.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/contact.docbook @@ -1,100 +1,48 @@ -2002-01-18 3.00.00 -Contact the &kde; team +2002-01-18 3.00.00 +Contact the &kde; team -Mailing lists +Mailing lists -&kde; has several mailing lists up. See below for some of the most useful. Older articles can be found in the mailing list archive. +&kde; has several mailing lists up. See below for some of the most useful. Older articles can be found in the mailing list archive. -kde -For general discussion, users helping each other. +kde +For general discussion, users helping each other. -kde-announce -Announcements of new &kde; applications +kde-announce +Announcements of new &kde; applications -kde-devel -For developers. +kde-devel +For developers. -kde-artists -Creating icons and other artwork +kde-artists +Creating icons and other artwork -kde-doc-english -For people interested in writing documentation for &kde;. +kde-doc-english +For people interested in writing documentation for &kde;. -tde-i18n-doc -Internationalisation and documentation issues +tde-i18n-doc +Internationalisation and documentation issues -http://i18n.kde.org/teams/ -For localised information, which may include user email lists and websites, check the translation teams page at the above &URL;. +http://i18n.kde.org/teams/ +For localised information, which may include user email lists and websites, check the translation teams page at the above &URL;. @@ -102,117 +50,58 @@ -Contacting the &kde; developers +Contacting the &kde; developers -On this page, you can find links to &kde; related web sites. +On this page, you can find links to &kde; related web sites. -The K Desktop Environment is developed by a large group of people around the world. Our main communication channel is the Internet. For general questions, you will be best served by asking on the mailing lists mentioned in the previous section, and contact addresses for individual developers can be found in the documentation of their individual application. +The K Desktop Environment is developed by a large group of people around the world. Our main communication channel is the Internet. For general questions, you will be best served by asking on the mailing lists mentioned in the previous section, and contact addresses for individual developers can be found in the documentation of their individual application. -Please visit our Official Representatives page for official enquiries regarding &kde; (⪚ interviews). +Please visit our Official Representatives page for official enquiries regarding &kde; (⪚ interviews). -More information about &kde; is available at &kde-http;. +More information about &kde; is available at &kde-http;. -Other &kde; websites include: +Other &kde; websites include: -www.kde.org -&kde;'s official website +www.kde.org +&kde;'s official website -developer.kde.org -The &kde; developers centre +developer.kde.org +The &kde; developers centre -webcvs.kde.org -A web interface to the &kde; CVS repository +webcvs.kde.org +A web interface to the &kde; CVS repository -i18n.kde.org -&kde;'s internationalisation and documentation server +i18n.kde.org +&kde;'s internationalisation and documentation server -ftp.kde.org -The main &kde; &FTP; server. Please have a look at the link below to find a mirror site in your geographic region. +ftp.kde.org +The main &kde; &FTP; server. Please have a look at the link below to find a mirror site in your geographic region. -www.kde.org/mirrors -&kde; web and &FTP; mirror sites +www.kde.org/mirrors +&kde; web and &FTP; mirror sites -www.kde-apps.org -A directory of &kde; applications. +www.kde-apps.org +A directory of &kde; applications. -www.kde-look.org -&kde; themes, icons, and other items to change the look of your desktop. +www.kde-look.org +&kde; themes, icons, and other items to change the look of your desktop. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/help.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/help.docbook index 372573d1e1b..88ff0f7c915 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/help.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/help.docbook @@ -1,183 +1,88 @@ -2002-02-03 0.08.00 -&kde; Help System User Manual +2002-02-03 0.08.00 +&kde; Help System User Manual -&kde; Help System +&kde; Help System -The &kde; help system is designed to make accessing the common &UNIX; help systems (man and info) simple, as well as the native &kde; documentation (&XML;). +The &kde; help system is designed to make accessing the common &UNIX; help systems (man and info) simple, as well as the native &kde; documentation (&XML;). -All base &kde; applications come fully documented, thanks to the efforts of the Documentation team. If you would like to help, please write to the Documentation coordinator, Lauri Watts, at lauri@kde.org for information. No experience is required, just enthusiasm and patience. - -If you would like to help translating &kde; documentation to your native language, the Translation coordinator is Thomas Diehl, thd@kde.org, and he would also welcome the help. More information, including the coordinators for each language team, can be found on the Internationalisation web site, and in the Contact section of this document. +All base &kde; applications come fully documented, thanks to the efforts of the Documentation team. If you would like to help, please write to the Documentation coordinator, Lauri Watts, at lauri@kde.org for information. No experience is required, just enthusiasm and patience. + +If you would like to help translating &kde; documentation to your native language, the Translation coordinator is Thomas Diehl, thd@kde.org, and he would also welcome the help. More information, including the coordinators for each language team, can be found on the Internationalisation web site, and in the Contact section of this document. -Installation +Installation -&khelpcenter; is an integral part of the &kde; Base installation, and is installed with every copy of &kde;. It can be found in the tdebase package, and is available from the &kde-ftp;, or will be found in your operating system tdebase package. +&khelpcenter; is an integral part of the &kde; Base installation, and is installed with every copy of &kde;. It can be found in the tdebase package, and is available from the &kde-ftp;, or will be found in your operating system tdebase package. -Invoking Help - -&khelpcenter; can be called in several ways: - - - -From the Help menu - -The most common will probably be from within an application. Choose Help Contents to open that application's help file, at the contents page. +Invoking Help + +&khelpcenter; can be called in several ways: + + + +From the Help menu + +The most common will probably be from within an application. Choose Help Contents to open that application's help file, at the contents page. -From the K menu +From the K menu -Choose the big K in your panel, and select Help to open &khelpcenter;, starting at the default welcome page. - +Choose the big K in your panel, and select Help to open &khelpcenter;, starting at the default welcome page. + -From the panel +From the panel -By default, the &kicker; panel contains an icon to call &khelpcenter;. Again, the default welcome page is displayed. - +By default, the &kicker; panel contains an icon to call &khelpcenter;. Again, the default welcome page is displayed. + -From the command line +From the command line -&khelpcenter; may be started using a &URL; to display a file. &URL;s have been added for info and man pages also. You can use them as follows: +&khelpcenter; may be started using a &URL; to display a file. &URL;s have been added for info and man pages also. You can use them as follows: -An application help file - -khelpcenter -Opens the &kedit; help file, at the contents page. +An application help file + +khelpcenter +Opens the &kedit; help file, at the contents page. -A local &URL; -khelpcenter +A local &URL; +khelpcenter -A Man page +A Man page -khelpcenter +khelpcenter -An Info page +An Info page -khelpcenter +khelpcenter -Invoking khelpcenter with no parameters opens the default welcome page. +Invoking khelpcenter with no parameters opens the default welcome page. @@ -185,200 +90,104 @@ -The &khelpcenter; interface - -The &khelpcenter; interface consists of two panes of information. - -The toolbar and menus are explained further in . - -Documents contain their own navigation tools, enabling you to move either sequentially through a document, using Next, Previous, and Home links, or to move around in a less structured manner, using hyperlinks. - -Links can take you to other parts of the same document, or to a different document, and you can use the Back (Left pointing arrow) or Forward (Right pointing arrow) icons on the toolbar to move through the documents you have viewed in this session. - -The two panes display the contents of the help system, and the help files themselves, on the left and right respectively. +The &khelpcenter; interface + +The &khelpcenter; interface consists of two panes of information. + +The toolbar and menus are explained further in . + +Documents contain their own navigation tools, enabling you to move either sequentially through a document, using Next, Previous, and Home links, or to move around in a less structured manner, using hyperlinks. + +Links can take you to other parts of the same document, or to a different document, and you can use the Back (Left pointing arrow) or Forward (Right pointing arrow) icons on the toolbar to move through the documents you have viewed in this session. + +The two panes display the contents of the help system, and the help files themselves, on the left and right respectively. -The <guilabel ->Contents</guilabel -> pane - -The Contents pane in &khelpcenter; is displayed on the left hand side of the window. As you might expect, you can move the splitter bar, to make sure you can comfortably read the contents of either pane. - -The Contents pane is further divided into two tabs, one containing a menu showing all the help information &khelpcenter; is aware of, and the other contains the &kde; glossary of terms. +The <guilabel>Contents</guilabel> pane + +The Contents pane in &khelpcenter; is displayed on the left hand side of the window. As you might expect, you can move the splitter bar, to make sure you can comfortably read the contents of either pane. + +The Contents pane is further divided into two tabs, one containing a menu showing all the help information &khelpcenter; is aware of, and the other contains the &kde; glossary of terms. -The <guilabel ->Contents</guilabel -> Menu +The <guilabel>Contents</guilabel> Menu -The Contents contains the following default entries: +The Contents contains the following default entries: -Introduction -Welcome to &kde; - an introduction to the K Desktop Environment. +Introduction +Welcome to &kde; - an introduction to the K Desktop Environment. -Introduction to &kde; +Introduction to &kde; -The &kde; Quickstart guide. Contains a tour of the &kde; Interface and specific help and tips on how to work smarter with &kde;. +The &kde; Quickstart guide. Contains a tour of the &kde; Interface and specific help and tips on how to work smarter with &kde;. -&kde; User's manual +&kde; User's manual -The &kde; User's manual is an in-depth exploration of &kde;, including installation, configuration and customisation, and use. - +The &kde; User's manual is an in-depth exploration of &kde;, including installation, configuration and customisation, and use. + -Application manuals +Application manuals -Native &kde; application documentation. All &kde; applications have documentation in &XML; format, which are converted to HTML when you view them. This section lists all the &kde; applications with a brief description and a link to the full application documentation. -The applications are displayed in a tree structure that echoes the default structure of the K menu, making it easy to find the application you are looking for. - +Native &kde; application documentation. All &kde; applications have documentation in &XML; format, which are converted to HTML when you view them. This section lists all the &kde; applications with a brief description and a link to the full application documentation. +The applications are displayed in a tree structure that echoes the default structure of the K menu, making it easy to find the application you are looking for. + -&UNIX; manual pages +&UNIX; manual pages -&UNIX; man pages are the traditional on-line documentation format for &UNIX; systems. Most programs on your system will have a man page. In addition, man pages exist for programming functions and file formats. - +&UNIX; man pages are the traditional on-line documentation format for &UNIX; systems. Most programs on your system will have a man page. In addition, man pages exist for programming functions and file formats. + -Browse info pages +Browse info pages -TeXinfo documentation is used by many &GNU; applications, including gcc (the C/C++ compiler), emacs, and many others. +TeXinfo documentation is used by many &GNU; applications, including gcc (the C/C++ compiler), emacs, and many others. -Tutorials +Tutorials -Short, task based or informational tutorials. +Short, task based or informational tutorials. -The &kde; FAQ +The &kde; FAQ -Frequently asked questions about &kde;, and their answers. +Frequently asked questions about &kde;, and their answers. -&kde; on the web +&kde; on the web -Links to &kde; on the web, both the official &kde; website, and other useful sites. +Links to &kde; on the web, both the official &kde; website, and other useful sites. -Contact Information +Contact Information -Information on how to contact &kde; developers, and how to join the &kde; mailing lists. +Information on how to contact &kde; developers, and how to join the &kde; mailing lists. -Supporting &kde; +Supporting &kde; -How to help, and how to get involved. +How to help, and how to get involved. @@ -386,24 +195,14 @@ - + ]> -The &khelpcenter; +The &khelpcenter; -The &kde; Team -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +The &kde; Team +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-01-18 -3.00.00 +2002-01-18 +3.00.00 -&kde; is a powerful graphical desktop environment for &UNIX; workstations. A &kde; desktop combines ease of use, contemporary functionality and outstanding graphical design with the technological superiority of the &UNIX; operating system. +&kde; is a powerful graphical desktop environment for &UNIX; workstations. A &kde; desktop combines ease of use, contemporary functionality and outstanding graphical design with the technological superiority of the &UNIX; operating system. -KDE -tdebase -khelpcenter -kdehelp -help -help centre -KDE help centre +KDE +tdebase +khelpcenter +kdehelp +help +help centre +KDE help centre diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/links.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/links.docbook index 51e671a605c..644f2322d50 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/links.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/links.docbook @@ -1,90 +1,15 @@ -2000-10-02 -1.94.00 +2000-10-02 +1.94.00 -&kde; on the web +&kde; on the web -The K Desktop Environment is developed by a large group of developers around the world. Our main communication channel is the Internet. Please find links to &kde; related web sites on this page. +The K Desktop Environment is developed by a large group of developers around the world. Our main communication channel is the Internet. Please find links to &kde; related web sites on this page. - www.kde.org &kde;'s official website kde.themes.org &kde; themes developer.kde.org The &kde; developers centre webcvs.kde.org A web interface to the &kde; CVS repository i18n.kde.org &kde;'s internationalisation and documentation server ftp.kde.org The main &kde; &FTP; server. Please have a look at the link below to find a mirror site in your geographic region. www.kde.org/mirrors.html &kde; &FTP; mirror sites + www.kde.org &kde;'s official website kde.themes.org &kde; themes developer.kde.org The &kde; developers centre webcvs.kde.org A web interface to the &kde; CVS repository i18n.kde.org &kde;'s internationalisation and documentation server ftp.kde.org The main &kde; &FTP; server. Please have a look at the link below to find a mirror site in your geographic region. www.kde.org/mirrors.html &kde; &FTP; mirror sites diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/support.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/support.docbook index c15b43176d2..432d41b1eb8 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/support.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/support.docbook @@ -1,101 +1,63 @@ -2002-03-04 2.02.00 -Supporting &kde; +2002-03-04 2.02.00 +Supporting &kde; -Supporting &kde; +Supporting &kde; -If you are new to &kde;, the &kde; project might look like big machinery to you. Undoubtedly, &kde; is no longer a small project, nevertheless it is very important to realise that it is easy to make a difference in the &kde; world. +If you are new to &kde;, the &kde; project might look like big machinery to you. Undoubtedly, &kde; is no longer a small project, nevertheless it is very important to realise that it is easy to make a difference in the &kde; world. -There is always a need for dedicated developers, graphic artists, sound engineers, translators and documentation writers. Consider jumping aboard this exciting international project and make yourself a name in the software world. +There is always a need for dedicated developers, graphic artists, sound engineers, translators and documentation writers. Consider jumping aboard this exciting international project and make yourself a name in the software world. -Along the way you will make countless friends and acquaintances all over the world. Also, the satisfaction that stems from doing actual hands-on work, that will benefit an uncountable number of users world-wide, and from seeing an unparalleled project grow, is hard to beat. Please consider joining and supporting &kde; and hop aboard this exciting journey towards a free and open alternative computing platform. +Along the way you will make countless friends and acquaintances all over the world. Also, the satisfaction that stems from doing actual hands-on work, that will benefit an uncountable number of users world-wide, and from seeing an unparalleled project grow, is hard to beat. Please consider joining and supporting &kde; and hop aboard this exciting journey towards a free and open alternative computing platform. -How to get started +How to get started -Subscribe to the &kde; mailing lists that interest you. - -Read the mailing list archives in order to get a feel for &kde; development. - -Learn how to program using the &kde; application framework and join the friendly &kde; developers' community. +Subscribe to the &kde; mailing lists that interest you. + +Read the mailing list archives in order to get a feel for &kde; development. + +Learn how to program using the &kde; application framework and join the friendly &kde; developers' community. -Supporting financially +Supporting financially -The &kde; team is working very hard on providing you with the best desktop available for the &UNIX; operating system. &kde; is available for free and will always be available for free, including each and every line of its source code, for everyone to modify and distribute. If you enjoy and use &kde; please consider supporting the &kde; Project financially. &kde; is in constant need of funds in order to finance its operations. +The &kde; team is working very hard on providing you with the best desktop available for the &UNIX; operating system. &kde; is available for free and will always be available for free, including each and every line of its source code, for everyone to modify and distribute. If you enjoy and use &kde; please consider supporting the &kde; Project financially. &kde; is in constant need of funds in order to finance its operations. -If your busy schedule or skills do not permit you to be actively involved in &kde; development, please consider supporting &kde; financially by sending a donation to: +If your busy schedule or skills do not permit you to be actively involved in &kde; development, please consider supporting &kde; financially by sending a donation to: -You can send standard US cheques to the following address: +You can send standard US cheques to the following address: -K Desktop Environment e.V. +K Desktop Environment e.V. Mirko Boehm 2029 Chadds Ford Drive Reston, VA 20191 USA -Use "KDE e.V. - Mirko Boehm" in the "Pay to the order of..." line. +Use "KDE e.V. - Mirko Boehm" in the "Pay to the order of..." line. -From Europe, you may remit your donation to (be aware of a fee if wiring from outside of Germany): +From Europe, you may remit your donation to (be aware of a fee if wiring from outside of Germany): -K Desktop Environment e.V. +K Desktop Environment e.V. Account-Nr. 0 66 64 46 BLZ 200 700 24 Deutsche Bank 24 -Please contact Mirko Boehm kde-ev-treasurer@kde.org if you have any questions. +Please contact Mirko Boehm kde-ev-treasurer@kde.org if you have any questions. -Your contribution is very much appreciated. Thank you! +Your contribution is very much appreciated. Thank you! diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/welcome.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/welcome.docbook index 59a12630834..2f5a467b997 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/welcome.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/welcome.docbook @@ -1,95 +1,50 @@ -2002-01-18 3.00.00 -Welcome to &kde; +2002-01-18 3.00.00 +Welcome to &kde; - The &kde; team welcomes you to user-friendly &UNIX; computing. + The &kde; team welcomes you to user-friendly &UNIX; computing. -Welcome to the K Desktop Environment +Welcome to the K Desktop Environment -Information about &kde; +Information about &kde; -&kde; is a powerful graphical desktop environment for &UNIX; workstations. A &kde; desktop combines ease of use, contemporary functionality and outstanding graphical design with the technological superiority of the &UNIX; operating system. +&kde; is a powerful graphical desktop environment for &UNIX; workstations. A &kde; desktop combines ease of use, contemporary functionality and outstanding graphical design with the technological superiority of the &UNIX; operating system. -What is the K Desktop Environment? +What is the K Desktop Environment? -Contacting the &kde; Project +Contacting the &kde; Project -Supporting the &kde; Project +Supporting the &kde; Project -Useful links +Useful links -Getting the most out of &kde; +Getting the most out of &kde; -General documentation +General documentation -A Quick Start Guide to the Desktop +A Quick Start Guide to the Desktop -&kde; User's guide +&kde; User's guide -Frequently asked questions +Frequently asked questions -Basic applications - -Desktop Panel - -Control Centre - -File Manager +Basic applications + +Desktop Panel + +Control Centre + +File Manager diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/whatistde.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/whatistde.docbook index 8ab7799675b..8439e58bc71 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/whatistde.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/khelpcenter/whatistde.docbook @@ -1,100 +1,55 @@ -2002-01-18 3.00.00 -What is &tde;? +2002-01-18 3.00.00 +What is &tde;? -What is &tde;? +What is &tde;? -&tde; is a desktop environment. In other words, &tde; is a collection of programs, technologies and documentation that attempt to make life easier for computer users. &tde; is targeted at &UNIX; workstations. It features network transparency and a contemporary work philosophy. +&tde; is a desktop environment. In other words, &tde; is a collection of programs, technologies and documentation that attempt to make life easier for computer users. &tde; is targeted at &UNIX; workstations. It features network transparency and a contemporary work philosophy. -The creators of the K Desktop Environment are a world-wide group of software engineers. This group's major goal in free software development is to provide high quality software that empowers the user with easy control of his computer's resources. +The creators of the K Desktop Environment are a world-wide group of software engineers. This group's major goal in free software development is to provide high quality software that empowers the user with easy control of his computer's resources. -&tde; seeks to fill the need for an easy to use desktop for &UNIX; workstations, similar to the desktop environments found under &MacOS; or &Windows; 95/NT. &tde; meets the requirement of users for an easy to use work environment. Tools used to reach this end are: enhanced inter-application communication, component reuse, global drag and drop, uniform look and feel and many more. Thus, &tde; offers much more than the traditional &UNIX; window managers. +&tde; seeks to fill the need for an easy to use desktop for &UNIX; workstations, similar to the desktop environments found under &MacOS; or &Windows; 95/NT. &tde; meets the requirement of users for an easy to use work environment. Tools used to reach this end are: enhanced inter-application communication, component reuse, global drag and drop, uniform look and feel and many more. Thus, &tde; offers much more than the traditional &UNIX; window managers. -Stability, scaleability and openness are qualities which have made &UNIX; the undisputed choice for the information technology professional for many years. &tde; builds on top of this excellent base framework and brings new, much needed qualities: usability, user friendliness and beauty! &tde; was the first, and stays the forefront player in bringing these qualities to &UNIX;, which constituted for years, the premier platform for server computers and scientific institutions, but wasn't very attractive for desktop users. +Stability, scaleability and openness are qualities which have made &UNIX; the undisputed choice for the information technology professional for many years. &tde; builds on top of this excellent base framework and brings new, much needed qualities: usability, user friendliness and beauty! &tde; was the first, and stays the forefront player in bringing these qualities to &UNIX;, which constituted for years, the premier platform for server computers and scientific institutions, but wasn't very attractive for desktop users. -Without &UNIX; the Internet would not exist, or at least would have a vastly different form. &UNIX; has not, until now, addressed the needs of the average computer user. This fact is particularly unfortunate, since a number of implementations of &UNIX; (&Linux;, FreeBSD, NetBSD, &etc;) are freely available on the Internet, all of which are of exceptional quality and stability. +Without &UNIX; the Internet would not exist, or at least would have a vastly different form. &UNIX; has not, until now, addressed the needs of the average computer user. This fact is particularly unfortunate, since a number of implementations of &UNIX; (&Linux;, FreeBSD, NetBSD, &etc;) are freely available on the Internet, all of which are of exceptional quality and stability. -&tde; The Desktop Environment +&tde; The Desktop Environment -In combination with a free implementation of &UNIX;, &tde; provides to the world an open and completely free desktop computing platform either at home or at work. +In combination with a free implementation of &UNIX;, &tde; provides to the world an open and completely free desktop computing platform either at home or at work. -This platform is available to anyone free of charge including its source code for anyone to modify. +This platform is available to anyone free of charge including its source code for anyone to modify. -While there will always be room for improvement we believe we have now delivered a viable alternative to some of the more commonly found and commercial operating systems/desktops combinations available today. It is our hope that the combination of &UNIX; and &tde; will finally bring the same open, reliable, stable, and monopoly free computing to the average computer user that scientists and computing professionals world-wide have enjoyed for years. +While there will always be room for improvement we believe we have now delivered a viable alternative to some of the more commonly found and commercial operating systems/desktops combinations available today. It is our hope that the combination of &UNIX; and &tde; will finally bring the same open, reliable, stable, and monopoly free computing to the average computer user that scientists and computing professionals world-wide have enjoyed for years. -&tde; The Application Development Framework +&tde; The Application Development Framework -&tde; focuses on the user's needs, but it's obvious that this focus is more easily achieved by also giving developers the best tools. &tde; code contains, and comes with, some of the best development technologies of the modern computing age. +&tde; focuses on the user's needs, but it's obvious that this focus is more easily achieved by also giving developers the best tools. &tde; code contains, and comes with, some of the best development technologies of the modern computing age. -Authoring applications under &UNIX;/X11 used to be an extremely tedious and labour intensive process. &tde; recognises the fact that a computing platform is only as good as the number of first class applications available to the users of that particular platform. +Authoring applications under &UNIX;/X11 used to be an extremely tedious and labour intensive process. &tde; recognises the fact that a computing platform is only as good as the number of first class applications available to the users of that particular platform. -&tde; defines new technologies in &DCOP; and KParts, created to offer a component document model and technology. Together with the complete &tde; libraries programming interface, &DCOP;/KParts are set in direct competition with other similar technologies like &Microsoft; MFC/COM/ActiveX technologies. The excellent quality and the high level of refinement of &tde;'s application programming interface (API) enables developers to focus on original and interesting issues and avoid reinventing the wheel. +&tde; defines new technologies in &DCOP; and KParts, created to offer a component document model and technology. Together with the complete &tde; libraries programming interface, &DCOP;/KParts are set in direct competition with other similar technologies like &Microsoft; MFC/COM/ActiveX technologies. The excellent quality and the high level of refinement of &tde;'s application programming interface (API) enables developers to focus on original and interesting issues and avoid reinventing the wheel. -&tde; The Office Application Suite - -In its current form, &tde; provides, apart from the essential desktop component applications, a suite of powerful office programs known to the world by the name &koffice;. - -&koffice; is based on the &tde; &DCOP;/KParts technologies. It currently contains: a word processor with desktop publishing capabilities (&kword;), a spreadsheet application (&kspread;) and accompanying charting program (&kchart;), a presentation program (&kpresenter;) and a vector drawing program (&kontour;). Tying things together is the KOffice Workspace, an integrated shell to ease the use of the &koffice; components in conjunction with each other. Additional components include an email client, a news reader, and a powerful PIM (Personal Information Manager - an organiser). - -While some of those components are still in alpha development, others are already extremely powerful. For example, &kpresenter;, &tde;'s presentation application, was successfully used at the 5th International &Linux; Congress in Cologne, Germany to deliver a &tde; presentation. - -We would like to invite you to learn more about &tde; and &koffice;. +&tde; The Office Application Suite + +In its current form, &tde; provides, apart from the essential desktop component applications, a suite of powerful office programs known to the world by the name &koffice;. + +&koffice; is based on the &tde; &DCOP;/KParts technologies. It currently contains: a word processor with desktop publishing capabilities (&kword;), a spreadsheet application (&kspread;) and accompanying charting program (&kchart;), a presentation program (&kpresenter;) and a vector drawing program (&kontour;). Tying things together is the KOffice Workspace, an integrated shell to ease the use of the &koffice; components in conjunction with each other. Additional components include an email client, a news reader, and a powerful PIM (Personal Information Manager - an organiser). + +While some of those components are still in alpha development, others are already extremely powerful. For example, &kpresenter;, &tde;'s presentation application, was successfully used at the 5th International &Linux; Congress in Cologne, Germany to deliver a &tde; presentation. + +We would like to invite you to learn more about &tde; and &koffice;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kicker/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kicker/index.docbook index 7f9cb31571d..fd8340cdbed 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kicker/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kicker/index.docbook @@ -11,253 +11,152 @@ -The &kicker; Handbook +The &kicker; Handbook -&Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -20012002 -&Dirk.Doerflinger; +20012002 +&Dirk.Doerflinger; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-03-01 -3.00.00 +2002-03-01 +3.00.00 -&kicker; is the &kde; application starter panel and is also capable of some useful applets and extensions. It usually resides on the bottom of the desktop. +&kicker; is the &kde; application starter panel and is also capable of some useful applets and extensions. It usually resides on the bottom of the desktop. -KDE -Kicker -tdebase -panel -application -starter +KDE +Kicker +tdebase +panel +application +starter -Introduction +Introduction -&kicker; is the application launcher panel of the K Desktop Environment. Besides the K Menu, where you can start applications, &kicker; is also capable of running docked applets like the pager, the taskbar or the clock, and extensions, such as child panels. +&kicker; is the application launcher panel of the K Desktop Environment. Besides the K Menu, where you can start applications, &kicker; is also capable of running docked applets like the pager, the taskbar or the clock, and extensions, such as child panels. -&kicker; usually resides on the bottom of the desktop, but it can also be moved to any other border. Please report any problems or feature requests to the &kde; mailing lists. +&kicker; usually resides on the bottom of the desktop, but it can also be moved to any other border. Please report any problems or feature requests to the &kde; mailing lists. -Using &kicker; +Using &kicker; -This is what you see on a freshly installed &kde;, assuming that you skipped KPersonaliser. If you are using lower resolution, some of the icons may not appear immediately. To cater for those smaller resolutions, the screenshot below is divided in two parts. +This is what you see on a freshly installed &kde;, assuming that you skipped KPersonaliser. If you are using lower resolution, some of the icons may not appear immediately. To cater for those smaller resolutions, the screenshot below is divided in two parts. -Here's a screenshot of the left side of &kicker; +Here's a screenshot of the left side of &kicker; -Screenshot Left +Screenshot Left -Here's a screenshot of the left side of &kicker; +Here's a screenshot of the left side of &kicker; -And here's the right side +And here's the right side -Screenshot Right +Screenshot Right -And here's the right side +And here's the right side -Of course, this is only one way &kicker; might appear on the screen. There are many more configurations available. +Of course, this is only one way &kicker; might appear on the screen. There are many more configurations available. -A quick tour for new &kde; users +A quick tour for new &kde; users -If you are experienced with this kind of application launcher, you can ignore this chapter and move on to &kicker; basics. +If you are experienced with this kind of application launcher, you can ignore this chapter and move on to &kicker; basics. -The main use of &kicker; is starting applications. This is done by clicking icons, either from the panel or from the K Menu. &kicker; shows some more things too, so let's see. +The main use of &kicker; is starting applications. This is done by clicking icons, either from the panel or from the K Menu. &kicker; shows some more things too, so let's see. -Having a look at the screenshots above, there are from left to right: +Having a look at the screenshots above, there are from left to right: -The K Menu +The K Menu -It is used for launching applications and some other useful things. Refer to The K Menu for more information. +It is used for launching applications and some other useful things. Refer to The K Menu for more information. -Application start icons +Application start icons -Here are some icons of commonly used applications. They can be moved and removed and others can be added. Some of them have a special meaning, which you can read more about in &kicker; basics. Resting the mouse over an icon without clicking shows the name and a short description of that application, if you have set that in the Settings Dialogue. +Here are some icons of commonly used applications. They can be moved and removed and others can be added. Some of them have a special meaning, which you can read more about in &kicker; basics. Resting the mouse over an icon without clicking shows the name and a short description of that application, if you have set that in the Settings Dialogue. -The Pager applet +The Pager applet -This displays a small view of the virtual desktops. Clicking one section of it will activate that desktop. Please refer to Applets. +This displays a small view of the virtual desktops. Clicking one section of it will activate that desktop. Please refer to Applets. -The Taskbar +The Taskbar -All running applications are displayed as buttons in the taskbar. Clicking an application's button will bring this application on top. If it was on top before, it will be iconified. As always, more information in Applets. +All running applications are displayed as buttons in the taskbar. Clicking an application's button will bring this application on top. If it was on top before, it will be iconified. As always, more information in Applets. -Lock/Logout +Lock/Logout -This applet contains two small buttons. The one with the luggage lock on it locks your session if you ever leave your &kde; unattended and don't want anybody else to have access to it; the other one shuts down &kde; and the X-Server. +This applet contains two small buttons. The one with the luggage lock on it locks your session if you ever leave your &kde; unattended and don't want anybody else to have access to it; the other one shuts down &kde; and the X-Server. -System Tray +System Tray -The system tray is able to swallow some kind of applications like - in this case - &klipper;. There are also more useful apps for the system tray. You can click the applications either with the left or the right mousebutton and see what's happening. +The system tray is able to swallow some kind of applications like - in this case - &klipper;. There are also more useful apps for the system tray. You can click the applications either with the left or the right mousebutton and see what's happening. -Clock +Clock -The Clock applet is - of course - a small, useful clock. It can have various styles, have a look at the applets section for more information. +The Clock applet is - of course - a small, useful clock. It can have various styles, have a look at the applets section for more information. -The hide button +The hide button -This button lets you fade out &kicker; for having more space on the screen. When &kicker; is faded out, only the hide button will remain in order to fade in &kicker; again. +This button lets you fade out &kicker; for having more space on the screen. When &kicker; is faded out, only the hide button will remain in order to fade in &kicker; again. -This was only the description of &kicker; on its initial launch. It can be configured in many ways and styles and more applets can be added. There are even some extensions like the external taskbar you can add. See &kicker; basics, Applets and Extensions for more information. +This was only the description of &kicker; on its initial launch. It can be configured in many ways and styles and more applets can be added. There are even some extensions like the external taskbar you can add. See &kicker; basics, Applets and Extensions for more information. @@ -265,103 +164,44 @@ -&kicker; basics +&kicker; basics -General usage - -As mentioned before, there are a lot of things that can be added to &kicker;. This section will tell you everything about application starting, folder browsing and adding some kinds of applets and extensions. Lots of things can be done from the context menu or from Configure Panel in the K Menu. +General usage + +As mentioned before, there are a lot of things that can be added to &kicker;. This section will tell you everything about application starting, folder browsing and adding some kinds of applets and extensions. Lots of things can be done from the context menu or from Configure Panel in the K Menu. -Adding applications +Adding applications -There are three different ways to add an application to &kicker;: +There are three different ways to add an application to &kicker;: -Drag and Drop +Drag and Drop -Simply drag any file from &konqueror; into &kicker; and it's there. This works also from the K Menu with any entry. You can change the attributes like optional command line parameters or the icon by clicking it with the right mouse button and choosing Preferences from the context menu. +Simply drag any file from &konqueror; into &kicker; and it's there. This works also from the K Menu with any entry. You can change the attributes like optional command line parameters or the icon by clicking it with the right mouse button and choosing Preferences from the context menu. -Using the context menu to add a &kde; application +Using the context menu to add a &kde; application -Click the right mousebutton on any free space in &kicker; and choose Add and then Button . There you can choose an application which will be added in the place you clicked. +Click the right mousebutton on any free space in &kicker; and choose Add and then Button . There you can choose an application which will be added in the place you clicked. -Using the context menu to add a non-&kde;-application +Using the context menu to add a non-&kde;-application -Non-&kde;-applications ⪚ xosview or xemacs. +Non-&kde;-applications ⪚ xosview or xemacs. -Click the right mousebutton on any free space in &kicker; and choose Add, Special Button and then Non-KDE Application . Choose the application you want to add. In the newly appearing window, you can append an optional command line, have the application start from a terminal, and choose the icon which will appear in &kicker; by clicking the gear . If you don't choose an icon, the application will use the gear as a default. +Click the right mousebutton on any free space in &kicker; and choose Add, Special Button and then Non-KDE Application . Choose the application you want to add. In the newly appearing window, you can append an optional command line, have the application start from a terminal, and choose the icon which will appear in &kicker; by clicking the gear . If you don't choose an icon, the application will use the gear as a default. -Applications can be moved or removed by &RMB; click and choosing Move or Remove. You can also move an icon by clicking &MMB; if you have one. Another way to remove an application is by clicking the &RMB; on any free space and then choosing Remove, Button and then the application you want to be removed. +Applications can be moved or removed by &RMB; click and choosing Move or Remove. You can also move an icon by clicking &MMB; if you have one. Another way to remove an application is by clicking the &RMB; on any free space and then choosing Remove, Button and then the application you want to be removed. @@ -369,308 +209,123 @@ -Adding Folders +Adding Folders -Folders can be added by simply dragging a folder to any free space of &kicker;. Quick Browsers can also be added from the context menu or the K Menu. +Folders can be added by simply dragging a folder to any free space of &kicker;. Quick Browsers can also be added from the context menu or the K Menu. -There are two different ways to have a folder in &kicker;, you can choose between them in the menu appearing after dropping. Omitting this menu, it will be added as a file manager URL. +There are two different ways to have a folder in &kicker;, you can choose between them in the menu appearing after dropping. Omitting this menu, it will be added as a file manager URL. -Add as file manager &URL; +Add as file manager &URL; -Choosing this will add a link to the selected folder. Clicking this folder icon will open &konqueror; displaying the contents of this folder. +Choosing this will add a link to the selected folder. Clicking this folder icon will open &konqueror; displaying the contents of this folder. -Add as Quick Browser +Add as Quick Browser -If you add a folder this way, it will be displayed as a submenu of &kicker;. This submenu contains Open in File Manager, which does the same as a file manager &URL;, and Open in Terminal, which opens a terminal with this folder as working path. Also, this submenu contains the contents of that folder. Sub-folders are displayed as new submenus like the Quick Browser itself. The maximum number of displayed elements can be set in the Settings Dialogue. Quick Browsers can also be added from the context menu of &kicker; and then choosing Add and Special Button. +If you add a folder this way, it will be displayed as a submenu of &kicker;. This submenu contains Open in File Manager, which does the same as a file manager &URL;, and Open in Terminal, which opens a terminal with this folder as working path. Also, this submenu contains the contents of that folder. Sub-folders are displayed as new submenus like the Quick Browser itself. The maximum number of displayed elements can be set in the Settings Dialogue. Quick Browsers can also be added from the context menu of &kicker; and then choosing Add and Special Button. -Both kinds of folders can be moved or removed by &RMB; click and choosing Move or Remove. You can also move an icon by clicking &MMB; if you have one. Another way to remove a folder is by clicking the &RMB; on any free space and then choosing Remove, Button and then the folder you want to be removed. - -File manager &URL;s can also be configured from the context-menu, just like any other folder anywhere in &kde; +Both kinds of folders can be moved or removed by &RMB; click and choosing Move or Remove. You can also move an icon by clicking &MMB; if you have one. Another way to remove a folder is by clicking the &RMB; on any free space and then choosing Remove, Button and then the folder you want to be removed. + +File manager &URL;s can also be configured from the context-menu, just like any other folder anywhere in &kde; -Special Icons - -Some icons in &kicker; have a special meaning. They are added by choosing Add and then Special Button of the context-menu. +Special Icons + +Some icons in &kicker; have a special meaning. They are added by choosing Add and then Special Button of the context-menu. -The K Menu Icon - - The TDE Menu icon is one of the most necessary icons in &kicker;. As you might guess, it opens the K Menu, which you can learn more about in The TDE Menu. +The K Menu Icon + + The TDE Menu icon is one of the most necessary icons in &kicker;. As you might guess, it opens the K Menu, which you can learn more about in The TDE Menu. - -The Window List - - Clicking this icon will show the Window List. Its first entry, Unclutter Windows, tries to move the windows on your active desktop in a way to see as many as possible. - -Cascade Windows puts all windows on the active desktop over each others, the most recently on top and the others sorted by the time they where last used. Below those entries is a list of all currently running applications, grouped by the desktops on which they are running. Clicking on the name of a desktop will switch to that one, clicking an application will also activate it. + +The Window List + + Clicking this icon will show the Window List. Its first entry, Unclutter Windows, tries to move the windows on your active desktop in a way to see as many as possible. + +Cascade Windows puts all windows on the active desktop over each others, the most recently on top and the others sorted by the time they where last used. Below those entries is a list of all currently running applications, grouped by the desktops on which they are running. Clicking on the name of a desktop will switch to that one, clicking an application will also activate it. -The Bookmarks Icon +The Bookmarks Icon - The Bookmarks icon provides fast access to your bookmarks. They appear in the same way as if you click the Bookmarks menu in &konqueror;. Clicking a bookmark in the menu will launch &konqueror; with the URL which is behind that bookmark. + The Bookmarks icon provides fast access to your bookmarks. They appear in the same way as if you click the Bookmarks menu in &konqueror;. Clicking a bookmark in the menu will launch &konqueror; with the URL which is behind that bookmark. -The Recent Documents Icon +The Recent Documents Icon - This menu shows the most recently used documents (works only with &kde; applications for the moment). Clicking the element Clear History will remove those entries, what may be useful for privacy reasons. + This menu shows the most recently used documents (works only with &kde; applications for the moment). Clicking the element Clear History will remove those entries, what may be useful for privacy reasons. -The Desktop Access Icon +The Desktop Access Icon - The Desktop Access icon lets you have quick access to all the things you have on your desktop by minimising all currently open applications. Clicking it once will toggle it to show the desktop. The icon will remain pressed until you either click it again, what will restore your minimised apps, or reactivate an application from the taskbar. + The Desktop Access icon lets you have quick access to all the things you have on your desktop by minimising all currently open applications. Clicking it once will toggle it to show the desktop. The icon will remain pressed until you either click it again, what will restore your minimised apps, or reactivate an application from the taskbar. -The Quick Browser Item +The Quick Browser Item -Adding a Quick Browser icon will open a dialogue which will let you choose a path and an icon, which will appear as a Quick Browser menu. Refer to the Adding Folders section for more information about quick browsers. +Adding a Quick Browser icon will open a dialogue which will let you choose a path and an icon, which will appear as a Quick Browser menu. Refer to the Adding Folders section for more information about quick browsers. -The Non-KDE Application Item +The Non-KDE Application Item -The Add Non-KDE Application lets you add an application which doesn't appear in the K menu to &kicker;. Refer to Adding Applications for more information about Non-&kde; Applications. +The Add Non-KDE Application lets you add an application which doesn't appear in the K menu to &kicker;. Refer to Adding Applications for more information about Non-&kde; Applications. -The Terminal Sessions Icon +The Terminal Sessions Icon - This icon provides a menu of the available Terminal sessions, just as &konsole; does when you click and hold its New Session button. + This icon provides a menu of the available Terminal sessions, just as &konsole; does when you click and hold its New Session button. -The Printing System Icon +The Printing System Icon -This icon gives you direct access to &kde;'s printing system. Clicking the &LMB; on the icon opens a menu which gives you the following options: -Add Printer...:This will start &kde;'s Add Printer Wizard which allows you to simply add a new printer to your system. +This icon gives you direct access to &kde;'s printing system. Clicking the &LMB; on the icon opens a menu which gives you the following options: +Add Printer...:This will start &kde;'s Add Printer Wizard which allows you to simply add a new printer to your system. -TDE Print Settings This item will open the TDE Print Configuration dialogue. +TDE Print Settings This item will open the TDE Print Configuration dialogue. -Configure Server +Configure Server -Print ManagerThis item starts the Printing Manager, &kde;'s main printing control centre. +Print ManagerThis item starts the Printing Manager, &kde;'s main printing control centre. -Print Browser (&konqueror;)This item will start &konqueror; with the print:/ io-slave to browse all kinds of printers. +Print Browser (&konqueror;)This item will start &konqueror; with the print:/ io-slave to browse all kinds of printers. -Print a file...This item opens a dialogue which lets you easily print one or more files. +Print a file...This item opens a dialogue which lets you easily print one or more files. @@ -684,226 +339,110 @@ -Removing all kinds of icons - -Clicking the &RMB; on any icon, no means if it's for an application, a folder or a special icon, or clicking the small arrow on the handle, and then choosing Remove from the appearing context menu will remove the icon from &kicker;. -Another way of removing icons is clicking the &RMB; on any free space in &kicker; and choosing Remove and then Button or Special Button. You can then choose the button you want to remove in the submenu. +Removing all kinds of icons + +Clicking the &RMB; on any icon, no means if it's for an application, a folder or a special icon, or clicking the small arrow on the handle, and then choosing Remove from the appearing context menu will remove the icon from &kicker;. +Another way of removing icons is clicking the &RMB; on any free space in &kicker; and choosing Remove and then Button or Special Button. You can then choose the button you want to remove in the submenu. -Please note that removing an icon from &kicker; won't remove the application on the disk! +Please note that removing an icon from &kicker; won't remove the application on the disk! -Adding Applets - -&kicker; comes with a set of applets like the taskbar or the mini-pager. Those can be added either from the submenu Configure Panel of the K Menu or from the context menu by choosing Add and then Applet. - -Applets can be moved by dragging them on their handle with holding the &LMB; mouse button, or the &MMB; mouse button, or by choosing Move from the context menu. - -You can learn more about the applets in the section Applets. +Adding Applets + +&kicker; comes with a set of applets like the taskbar or the mini-pager. Those can be added either from the submenu Configure Panel of the K Menu or from the context menu by choosing Add and then Applet. + +Applets can be moved by dragging them on their handle with holding the &LMB; mouse button, or the &MMB; mouse button, or by choosing Move from the context menu. + +You can learn more about the applets in the section Applets. -Removing Applets -Applets can be removed by choosing Remove from the context menu, which appears when the &RMB; is clicked on the applet's handle (left or top side of the applet) or in some applets allover the applet. The same menu appears when clicking the small arrow on the applet's handle. +Removing Applets +Applets can be removed by choosing Remove from the context menu, which appears when the &RMB; is clicked on the applet's handle (left or top side of the applet) or in some applets allover the applet. The same menu appears when clicking the small arrow on the applet's handle. -Adding Extensions +Adding Extensions -There is also the possibility to add external extensions to &kicker;, like the external taskbar, the Dock Application Bar for WindowMaker dock-applications, Kasbar, an iconic kind of taskbar and even child panels which behave like new instances of &kicker;. +There is also the possibility to add external extensions to &kicker;, like the external taskbar, the Dock Application Bar for WindowMaker dock-applications, Kasbar, an iconic kind of taskbar and even child panels which behave like new instances of &kicker;. -All extensions can be moved to any border of the screen by dragging them with the &LMB; on the small fade-out handles on the left or top side of the extensions. These fade-out handles can also be used for fading out the extension. The child panel can also be dragged by clicking with the &LMB; on any empty space on it. +All extensions can be moved to any border of the screen by dragging them with the &LMB; on the small fade-out handles on the left or top side of the extensions. These fade-out handles can also be used for fading out the extension. The child panel can also be dragged by clicking with the &LMB; on any empty space on it. -More about extensions can be read in the extensions section. +More about extensions can be read in the extensions section. -Removing Extensions - -You can remove extensions by clicking Remove in their context menu, usually located in the fade-out handles. +Removing Extensions + +You can remove extensions by clicking Remove in their context menu, usually located in the fade-out handles. -Configuring Application Buttons - -Every application starter has some preferences you can set from their context menu. Usually applications and folders have the same preferences as in &konqueror;. Only the applications which are located in the K Menu (for experienced users: those which have a *.desktop in the applnk dir) have a special kind of config dialogue. +Configuring Application Buttons + +Every application starter has some preferences you can set from their context menu. Usually applications and folders have the same preferences as in &konqueror;. Only the applications which are located in the K Menu (for experienced users: those which have a *.desktop in the applnk dir) have a special kind of config dialogue. -The <guilabel ->General</guilabel -> Tab - -Here you can see some stats about the application link. You can also choose an icon by clicking on the icon button and change the filename of the link file. This may be useful if you want the icon on the panel behave different to the analogue one in the K Menu. +The <guilabel>General</guilabel> Tab + +Here you can see some stats about the application link. You can also choose an icon by clicking on the icon button and change the filename of the link file. This may be useful if you want the icon on the panel behave different to the analogue one in the K Menu. -The <guilabel ->Permissions</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Permissions</guilabel> Tab -Here you can set the permissions of the link file. Please refer to the manuals or handbooks of your operating system for more about permissions. +Here you can set the permissions of the link file. Please refer to the manuals or handbooks of your operating system for more about permissions. -The <guilabel ->Execute</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Execute</guilabel> Tab -You can set the behaviour of the application when it's executed on this page. +You can set the behaviour of the application when it's executed on this page. -Command +Command -Usually, there is only the name of the binary that has to be started when clicking on the icon. You can search for another application to be started by clicking the Browse button and/or add special command line parameters to the application. +Usually, there is only the name of the binary that has to be started when clicking on the icon. You can search for another application to be started by clicking the Browse button and/or add special command line parameters to the application. -Panel Embedding +Panel Embedding -This feature is not implemented yet. +This feature is not implemented yet. - +Execute on click field.--> -Run in terminal +Run in terminal -If this box is checked, the application will be executed in a terminal window. You can also add special Terminal options. +If this box is checked, the application will be executed in a terminal window. You can also add special Terminal options. -Run as different user +Run as different user -Checking this option will let the application start with the permission of the user you typed in the field Username. You will be prompted for the user's password on application start. This option may be very useful if you want to start some applications as superuser. +Checking this option will let the application start with the permission of the user you typed in the field Username. You will be prompted for the user's password on application start. This option may be very useful if you want to start some applications as superuser. @@ -911,20 +450,11 @@ executed when clicking on the swallowed application by typing it's name in the -The <guilabel ->Application</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Application</guilabel> Tab -If you set a name and a comment, they will be shown as tooltips of the start icons in the style Name - Comment. +If you set a name and a comment, they will be shown as tooltips of the start icons in the style Name - Comment. -In the File Types section you can choose what kinds of filetypes are handled by this application. Please refer to &konqueror; handbook for more about this. +In the File Types section you can choose what kinds of filetypes are handled by this application. Please refer to &konqueror; handbook for more about this. @@ -933,552 +463,259 @@ executed when clicking on the swallowed application by typing it's name in the -Configuring &kicker; - -This section describes the ways &kicker; can be configured. It's only about the basic &kicker; settings, configuration of the applets are described in their sections - -You can change the settings by either clicking Settings in the context menu or the submenu Configure Panel of the K Menu or in the &kcontrol; in the module Look & Feel. +Configuring &kicker; + +This section describes the ways &kicker; can be configured. It's only about the basic &kicker; settings, configuration of the applets are described in their sections + +You can change the settings by either clicking Settings in the context menu or the submenu Configure Panel of the K Menu or in the &kcontrol; in the module Look & Feel. -Please note that the settings in the General and the Look & Feel tabs only affect to the main panel while the behaviour of extensions is set in the Extensions tab. +Please note that the settings in the General and the Look & Feel tabs only affect to the main panel while the behaviour of extensions is set in the Extensions tab. -The Panel Section +The Panel Section -<guilabel ->General</guilabel -> - -In the General tab you can configure some basic functionality of the &kde; panel (&ie; functionality you'd find in other panel applications as well; later we'll come to the more interesting features). - -In the Panel Location frame you can choose which screen border the panel should be attached to. Please note that usually the available space is used more efficiently if the panel is aligned horizontally, &ie; attached to the top or bottom screen border. If you want to play around with different settings you can change the panel's position even easier by dragging the panel from one border to the other. - -The Alignment group lets you define, where &kicker; is located when the size is set to less than 100%. This can also be done by dragging &kicker; with the &LMB; to the place you want to have it. - -The panel's style can be tiny, small, medium or large. Depending on which applets you use you may find that some applets work better at different panel sizes. You can also change the size by moving the mousepointer over the upper border of &kicker; (assuming &kicker; is at the bottom of your screen) and dragging it while holding the &LMB;. When you do that, the style settings will switch to Custom +<guilabel>General</guilabel> + +In the General tab you can configure some basic functionality of the &kde; panel (&ie; functionality you'd find in other panel applications as well; later we'll come to the more interesting features). + +In the Panel Location frame you can choose which screen border the panel should be attached to. Please note that usually the available space is used more efficiently if the panel is aligned horizontally, &ie; attached to the top or bottom screen border. If you want to play around with different settings you can change the panel's position even easier by dragging the panel from one border to the other. + +The Alignment group lets you define, where &kicker; is located when the size is set to less than 100%. This can also be done by dragging &kicker; with the &LMB; to the place you want to have it. + +The panel's style can be tiny, small, medium or large. Depending on which applets you use you may find that some applets work better at different panel sizes. You can also change the size by moving the mousepointer over the upper border of &kicker; (assuming &kicker; is at the bottom of your screen) and dragging it while holding the &LMB;. When you do that, the style settings will switch to Custom -Please note, that switching manually to Custom doesn't have any effect and otherwise that you don't need to switch to custom to be able to resize &kicker; manually. +Please note, that switching manually to Custom doesn't have any effect and otherwise that you don't need to switch to custom to be able to resize &kicker; manually. -Some people may not want to have &kicker; take the whole width or height of their screen. The slider Percentage of desktop width/height to be used changes this behaviour. If you decrease the percentage, &kicker; will either appear aligned left or top of the screen, depending on its location. Checking the checkbox Expand to fit required size makes sure that &kicker; is at least as big as needed to show every icon and applet. +Some people may not want to have &kicker; take the whole width or height of their screen. The slider Percentage of desktop width/height to be used changes this behaviour. If you decrease the percentage, &kicker; will either appear aligned left or top of the screen, depending on its location. Checking the checkbox Expand to fit required size makes sure that &kicker; is at least as big as needed to show every icon and applet. -<guilabel ->Hiding</guilabel -> - -Depending on your screen resolution you may find that the panel takes away too much of your precious screen real estate. To save screen space, the panel offers an auto hide feature. When this feature is enabled, the panel will hide when the mouse cursor has not been moved over it for a configurable amount of time. If you move the mouse to the panel's screen border it will show up again. Check the Enable automatic hide option in the Automatic Hide frame to enable this feature. Using the Delay in seconds slider you can configure the amount of time the panel will wait before it hides. The checkbox Show panel when switching desktop makes sure that the panel will be shown on the new chosen desktop. Otherwise, if there are too many applets and icons on &kicker;, two small scroll buttons will be displayed to scroll the whole panel. - -When the panel's hide buttons are enabled you'll see buttons on both sides of the panel, with arrows showing to the screen border. If you click on one of these buttons, the panel will slide away in that direction. After that, you'll see a remaining show button in that corner, which will make the panel show again. Check the appropriate checkbox if you want the hide buttons to show up on any side of &kicker;. Using the slider you can change the width of the buttons. - -Using the Manual Hide Animation (for the hide buttons) and Auto Hide Animation (for the auto hide functionality) options you can configure whether the panel will softly slide away or just disappear. You can enable or disable both animations using the Enable options and you can change the speed of the animation using the sliders. +<guilabel>Hiding</guilabel> + +Depending on your screen resolution you may find that the panel takes away too much of your precious screen real estate. To save screen space, the panel offers an auto hide feature. When this feature is enabled, the panel will hide when the mouse cursor has not been moved over it for a configurable amount of time. If you move the mouse to the panel's screen border it will show up again. Check the Enable automatic hide option in the Automatic Hide frame to enable this feature. Using the Delay in seconds slider you can configure the amount of time the panel will wait before it hides. The checkbox Show panel when switching desktop makes sure that the panel will be shown on the new chosen desktop. Otherwise, if there are too many applets and icons on &kicker;, two small scroll buttons will be displayed to scroll the whole panel. + +When the panel's hide buttons are enabled you'll see buttons on both sides of the panel, with arrows showing to the screen border. If you click on one of these buttons, the panel will slide away in that direction. After that, you'll see a remaining show button in that corner, which will make the panel show again. Check the appropriate checkbox if you want the hide buttons to show up on any side of &kicker;. Using the slider you can change the width of the buttons. + +Using the Manual Hide Animation (for the hide buttons) and Auto Hide Animation (for the auto hide functionality) options you can configure whether the panel will softly slide away or just disappear. You can enable or disable both animations using the Enable options and you can change the speed of the animation using the sliders. -<guilabel ->Look & Feel</guilabel -> - -Using the Look & Feel tab you can configure the panel's overall appearance. - -The &kde; panel supports so-called tiled buttons. This means that the buttons shown on the panel will be drawn using configurable images. To enable button tiling, check the Enable background tiles option in the Look & Feel tab. Then you can configure tiles for certain kinds of buttons. - -For every kind of panel button there is a frame offering an Enabled option to enable or disable tiled images. If tiles are enabled for this kind of button, you can choose a tile in the combo box below and the box on the right will show a preview of this tile. - -The different kinds of buttons are: +<guilabel>Look & Feel</guilabel> + +Using the Look & Feel tab you can configure the panel's overall appearance. + +The &kde; panel supports so-called tiled buttons. This means that the buttons shown on the panel will be drawn using configurable images. To enable button tiling, check the Enable background tiles option in the Look & Feel tab. Then you can configure tiles for certain kinds of buttons. + +For every kind of panel button there is a frame offering an Enabled option to enable or disable tiled images. If tiles are enabled for this kind of button, you can choose a tile in the combo box below and the box on the right will show a preview of this tile. + +The different kinds of buttons are: -TDE Menu Tiles +TDE Menu Tiles -The icon for the TDE Menu will be displayed as a tile +The icon for the TDE Menu will be displayed as a tile -Quickbrowser Tiles +Quickbrowser Tiles -The icons for Quickbrowsers will be displayed as tiles +The icons for Quickbrowsers will be displayed as tiles -Application Launcher Tiles +Application Launcher Tiles -The icons which start applications will be displayed as tiles +The icons which start applications will be displayed as tiles -Legacy Application Tiles +Legacy Application Tiles -The icons for legacy applications will be displayed as tiles +The icons for legacy applications will be displayed as tiles -Window List Tiles +Window List Tiles -The Window List icon will be displayed as a tile +The Window List icon will be displayed as a tile -Desktop Access Tiles +Desktop Access Tiles -The Desktop Access icon will be displayed as a tile +The Desktop Access icon will be displayed as a tile -Enabling the switch Enable icon zooming will give you the effect that &kicker;'s icons will grow bigger when hovering with the mouse. This effect will not appear when the size of &kicker; is set bigger than medium. +Enabling the switch Enable icon zooming will give you the effect that &kicker;'s icons will grow bigger when hovering with the mouse. This effect will not appear when the size of &kicker; is set bigger than medium. -If Show tooltips is checked, small descriptions of the icons or applets will be shown when the mousepointer rests over an icon for some seconds. +If Show tooltips is checked, small descriptions of the icons or applets will be shown when the mousepointer rests over an icon for some seconds. -The Background Image is a picture that will be used to draw the panel's background, just like you can use a picture for the desktop background. Check the Enable background image option to enable this feature. You can specify an image file in the line edit box below or choose one by clicking on the Browse button. You'll see a preview of the selected picture on the right. +The Background Image is a picture that will be used to draw the panel's background, just like you can use a picture for the desktop background. Check the Enable background image option to enable this feature. You can specify an image file in the line edit box below or choose one by clicking on the Browse button. You'll see a preview of the selected picture on the right. -Menus - -In the Menus tab you can configure the panel menu's behaviour. This affects the K menu you will often use to launch applications, the browser menus you can use to access folders and other menus like the recent documents menu. - -The TDE Menu Layout frame offers you some options to configure the K menu's functionality. The Show "Bookmarks" submenu and Show "Recent Documents" submenu options will enable submenus showing your konqueror bookmarks and the last documents you've opened using &kde; applications respectively. The Show "Quick Browser" submenu option will enable a browser menu. Enabling the Show side image checkbox will display a neat image on the left side of the K menu. If the option Detailed menu entries is set, th K menu will show a small description besides the name of the application. -Within the TDE Menu Layout you can also define which dynamic menus should be displayed in the K menu by moving them from Available Menus to Selected Menus using the <<. They can be removed the same way by using the >>. - -In the Browser Menus frame you can configure whether the panel's browser menus will show hidden files or not (hidden files on UNIX systems are those whose filenames begin with a dot) as well as how many files at most will be shown in a browser menu; the latter option may be especially useful if you have a rather small screen resolution, as the browser menus would otherwise quickly fill up your screen when you browse folders containing many files. - -The quick start section in the K menu offers quick access to programs you have used often or recently. In the "Quick Start" section contains frame you can choose whether this section will show the most recently or the most frequently used programs. Using the option Max number of "Quick Start" entries you can configure how many programs the quick start section will remember. +Menus + +In the Menus tab you can configure the panel menu's behaviour. This affects the K menu you will often use to launch applications, the browser menus you can use to access folders and other menus like the recent documents menu. + +The TDE Menu Layout frame offers you some options to configure the K menu's functionality. The Show "Bookmarks" submenu and Show "Recent Documents" submenu options will enable submenus showing your konqueror bookmarks and the last documents you've opened using &kde; applications respectively. The Show "Quick Browser" submenu option will enable a browser menu. Enabling the Show side image checkbox will display a neat image on the left side of the K menu. If the option Detailed menu entries is set, th K menu will show a small description besides the name of the application. +Within the TDE Menu Layout you can also define which dynamic menus should be displayed in the K menu by moving them from Available Menus to Selected Menus using the <<. They can be removed the same way by using the >>. + +In the Browser Menus frame you can configure whether the panel's browser menus will show hidden files or not (hidden files on UNIX systems are those whose filenames begin with a dot) as well as how many files at most will be shown in a browser menu; the latter option may be especially useful if you have a rather small screen resolution, as the browser menus would otherwise quickly fill up your screen when you browse folders containing many files. + +The quick start section in the K menu offers quick access to programs you have used often or recently. In the "Quick Start" section contains frame you can choose whether this section will show the most recently or the most frequently used programs. Using the option Max number of "Quick Start" entries you can configure how many programs the quick start section will remember. -Applets +Applets -Applets are small plugins that extend the panel's functionality. &kde; comes with some applets but they may be provided by third parties as well. +Applets are small plugins that extend the panel's functionality. &kde; comes with some applets but they may be provided by third parties as well. -Panel applets can be started using two different ways: internally or externally. While internal is the preferred way to load applets, this can raise stability or security problems when you are using poorly programmed third-party applets. To address these problems, applets can be marked trusted. You might want to configure the panel to treat trusted applets different from untrusted ones. Your options are: +Panel applets can be started using two different ways: internally or externally. While internal is the preferred way to load applets, this can raise stability or security problems when you are using poorly programmed third-party applets. To address these problems, applets can be marked trusted. You might want to configure the panel to treat trusted applets different from untrusted ones. Your options are: -Load only trusted applets internal: All applets but the ones marked trusted will be loaded using an external wrapper application. +Load only trusted applets internal: All applets but the ones marked trusted will be loaded using an external wrapper application. -Load startup config applets internal: The applets shown on &kde; startup will be loaded internally, others will be loaded using an external wrapper application. -Load all applets internal: will load all applets internally, regardless of whether they're trusted or not. +Load startup config applets internal: The applets shown on &kde; startup will be loaded internally, others will be loaded using an external wrapper application. +Load all applets internal: will load all applets internally, regardless of whether they're trusted or not. -For stability and security reasons, we recommend using one of the first two options and that you mark only those applets as 'trusted' that come with the &kde; base packages. +For stability and security reasons, we recommend using one of the first two options and that you mark only those applets as 'trusted' that come with the &kde; base packages. -To mark applets trusted or untrusted you can move them from one of the shown listboxes to the other. Just try selecting an applet in the list of trusted applets and click the >> button. This will move the selected applet to the other list, while clicking the << button will move the selected applet of the list of available applets to the list of trusted ones. +To mark applets trusted or untrusted you can move them from one of the shown listboxes to the other. Just try selecting an applet in the list of trusted applets and click the >> button. This will move the selected applet to the other list, while clicking the << button will move the selected applet of the list of available applets to the list of trusted ones. -Extensions -In this section you can change the behaviour of the . Simply choose one of your extensions (⪚ Child Panel) from the listbox on the left side and adjust its settings. Those are very similar to the settings on the and the tabs. - -The Panel Location group sets the location of the chosen extension. If the option Enable automatic hide is checked, the extension will be faded out automatically after the time in seconds set with the slider Delay in seconds. Marking the checkbox Show panel when switching desktop lets the extension show up after a desktop change. - -You can toggle which hide buttons the chosen extension should have with the checkboxes in the group Hide Buttons. The slider Hide Button Size sets the size of the appearing hide buttons. +Extensions +In this section you can change the behaviour of the . Simply choose one of your extensions (⪚ Child Panel) from the listbox on the left side and adjust its settings. Those are very similar to the settings on the and the tabs. + +The Panel Location group sets the location of the chosen extension. If the option Enable automatic hide is checked, the extension will be faded out automatically after the time in seconds set with the slider Delay in seconds. Marking the checkbox Show panel when switching desktop lets the extension show up after a desktop change. + +You can toggle which hide buttons the chosen extension should have with the checkboxes in the group Hide Buttons. The slider Hide Button Size sets the size of the appearing hide buttons. -The Taskbar Section +The Taskbar Section -This section changes the settings of the taskbar. Changes affect the external taskbar and also taskbar applets on &kicker; or child-panels. +This section changes the settings of the taskbar. Changes affect the external taskbar and also taskbar applets on &kicker; or child-panels. -Show all windows +Show all windows -If this box is checked, the taskbar will show all running apps of every desktop. Otherwise, only the applications of the current desktop are shown. +If this box is checked, the taskbar will show all running apps of every desktop. Otherwise, only the applications of the current desktop are shown. -Show windows list button +Show windows list button -Checking this box will show the small window list button. +Checking this box will show the small window list button. -Group similar tasks +Group similar tasks - This is a feature introduced in &kde; version 2.2. If the option Group similar tasks is set, several instances of the same application are grouped together in one taskbar button. - -You can define the mouse actions of the taskbar buttons with the settings in the Actions. Each action can be one of the following: + This is a feature introduced in &kde; version 2.2. If the option Group similar tasks is set, several instances of the same application are grouped together in one taskbar button. + +You can define the mouse actions of the taskbar buttons with the settings in the Actions. Each action can be one of the following: -Show Task List +Show Task List -Clicking with the mouse button will open a menu displaying all tasks in that group. If you click an entry of that menu with any mouse button, the corresponding application will become active. +Clicking with the mouse button will open a menu displaying all tasks in that group. If you click an entry of that menu with any mouse button, the corresponding application will become active. -Show Operations Menu +Show Operations Menu -Clicking with the mousebutton will open a menu with all applications of that group, where every application has its window menu as a submenu and there are some group specific entries like Close All which closes all applications of that group, All to Desktop which lets you define on which desktop the whole group appears and Maximise All, Minimise All and Restore All which appends those actions to all applications of that group. +Clicking with the mousebutton will open a menu with all applications of that group, where every application has its window menu as a submenu and there are some group specific entries like Close All which closes all applications of that group, All to Desktop which lets you define on which desktop the whole group appears and Maximise All, Minimise All and Restore All which appends those actions to all applications of that group. -Cycle Through Windows -If this action is chosen, each click with the mousebutton on the taskbar button will activate one of that group's applications, one after each others. +Cycle Through Windows +If this action is chosen, each click with the mousebutton on the taskbar button will activate one of that group's applications, one after each others. -Activate Task +Activate Task -Activate Task: Clicking with the mousebutton will activate the first application in that group without opening the group menu. +Activate Task: Clicking with the mousebutton will activate the first application in that group without opening the group menu. -Raise Task +Raise Task -The first application of that group will be put in the foreground without giving focus to it. +The first application of that group will be put in the foreground without giving focus to it. -Lower Task +Lower Task -The first application of that group will be put in the background. It won't lose the focus. +The first application of that group will be put in the background. It won't lose the focus. -Minimise Task +Minimise Task -The first application of that group will be minimised. If it is already minimised, it will be restored again. +The first application of that group will be minimised. If it is already minimised, it will be restored again. -Please note that some of these settings only have effect if a taskbar button contains more than one application. +Please note that some of these settings only have effect if a taskbar button contains more than one application. -Sort tasks by virtual desktop +Sort tasks by virtual desktop -Checking this box will sort all taskbar buttons in a group for each desktop, otherwise they are sorted by the order they are started. This will not affect grouped tasks if they are spread over more than one desktop. +Checking this box will sort all taskbar buttons in a group for each desktop, otherwise they are sorted by the order they are started. This will not affect grouped tasks if they are spread over more than one desktop. -Show application icons +Show application icons -If this box is checked, every taskbar button will have the icon of the running application beside its title. +If this box is checked, every taskbar button will have the icon of the running application beside its title. @@ -1489,71 +726,36 @@ format="PNG"/> -The <guimenu ->K</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>K</guimenu> Menu -The K Menu is one of the central elements of &kicker;. +The K Menu is one of the central elements of &kicker;. -There are five main groups in the K Menu which will be described now from bottom to top. +There are five main groups in the K Menu which will be described now from bottom to top. -The <acronym ->KDE</acronym -> Group +The <acronym>KDE</acronym> Group -This group is for the common &kde; things in the K Menu. +This group is for the common &kde; things in the K Menu. -Logout +Logout -This entry is used to finish the &kde; session. It also shuts down the &X-Window; session. +This entry is used to finish the &kde; session. It also shuts down the &X-Window; session. -Lock Session +Lock Session -With this entry you can lock your session if you don't want anybody else to access your desktop. If you have set a screensaver, it will appear when locked, otherwise the screen will turn black. If you hit any key, you will be prompted for your user password. This is independent from the screensaver's password settings. +With this entry you can lock your session if you don't want anybody else to access your desktop. If you have set a screensaver, it will appear when locked, otherwise the screen will turn black. If you hit any key, you will be prompted for your user password. This is independent from the screensaver's password settings. -Configure Panel +Configure Panel -In this submenu you can change the settings of &kicker;, described in the Configuring &kicker; section, add things to &kicker; (see in &kicker; Basics for more) and start the Menu Editor. You can also reach the Help Menu, but as you are reading this, you probably found it yourself. +In this submenu you can change the settings of &kicker;, described in the Configuring &kicker; section, add things to &kicker; (see in &kicker; Basics for more) and start the Menu Editor. You can also reach the Help Menu, but as you are reading this, you probably found it yourself. @@ -1561,73 +763,41 @@ format="PNG"/> -Run Command +Run Command -This will bring up a small but powerful application start dialogue. +This will bring up a small but powerful application start dialogue. -In the standard case, you just type in a command and press Enter or click Run. But there is also an Options button which will bring up some starting options to the command window. +In the standard case, you just type in a command and press Enter or click Run. But there is also an Options button which will bring up some starting options to the command window. -Run in terminal +Run in terminal -Checking this box will let the application start in a terminal which means that you will be able to see any command-line messages the application may give. +Checking this box will let the application start in a terminal which means that you will be able to see any command-line messages the application may give. -Run as a different user +Run as a different user -If this box is checked, you can specify a user with whose permission the application should run in the Username textfield. If you specify another user, you will have to give a password at the box below. +If this box is checked, you can specify a user with whose permission the application should run in the Username textfield. If you specify another user, you will have to give a password at the box below. -Run with different priority +Run with different priority -Check this option to run with a different priority. A higher priority will tell the operating system to give more processing time to the applications. You can use the slider to change the priority. If you want to give your app a higher priority than the default one (middle position), you will need to enter the root password below. +Check this option to run with a different priority. A higher priority will tell the operating system to give more processing time to the applications. You can use the slider to change the priority. If you want to give your app a higher priority than the default one (middle position), you will need to enter the root password below. -Scheduler +Scheduler -The Scheduler is the part of the operating system which processes will run and which have to wait. Usually, an application will run with normal schedule, which means it can use the processing time it gets from the operating system, but you can also set it to Realtime. This means that the application has all the process time until it gives it away. You will need to enter the root password to use Realtime. +The Scheduler is the part of the operating system which processes will run and which have to wait. Usually, an application will run with normal schedule, which means it can use the processing time it gets from the operating system, but you can also set it to Realtime. This means that the application has all the process time until it gives it away. You will need to enter the root password to use Realtime. -This can be dangerous. If the application hangs and can't give up the processor, the complete system might hang. +This can be dangerous. If the application hangs and can't give up the processor, the complete system might hang. @@ -1638,47 +808,29 @@ format="PNG"/> -Browsers +Browsers -This group contains some very useful browsers. It can also contain dynamic menus as described in the Menus section of &kicker;'s settings. +This group contains some very useful browsers. It can also contain dynamic menus as described in the Menus section of &kicker;'s settings. -Quick Browser +Quick Browser -This submenu contains quick browsers for three very useful folders: home, root, and system configuration. +This submenu contains quick browsers for three very useful folders: home, root, and system configuration. -Recent Documents +Recent Documents -This menu shows the most recently used documents (works only with &kde; applications for the moment). Clicking the element Clear History will remove those entries, what may be useful for privacy reasons. +This menu shows the most recently used documents (works only with &kde; applications for the moment). Clicking the element Clear History will remove those entries, what may be useful for privacy reasons. -Bookmarks +Bookmarks -This submenu shows your personal bookmarks just like &konqueror; does. Refer to the &konqueror; Handbook for more help on this. +This submenu shows your personal bookmarks just like &konqueror; does. Refer to the &konqueror; Handbook for more help on this. @@ -1687,156 +839,90 @@ format="PNG"/> -The Application Group +The Application Group -The submenus for application starting are located in this group. You can use &kmenuedit; to add, remove or move the entries. Applications will have a short description if the option Detailed menu entries is enabled in the settings. +The submenus for application starting are located in this group. You can use &kmenuedit; to add, remove or move the entries. Applications will have a short description if the option Detailed menu entries is enabled in the settings. -The most recently used applications +The most recently used applications -This group holds either the most recently or the most frequently used applications. See the Menus Configuration section for more about that. +This group holds either the most recently or the most frequently used applications. See the Menus Configuration section for more about that. -Applets - -Applets are small applications running inside of &kicker;. Almost everything besides the application starter buttons are applets. They can be added from the context menu or from the submenu Configure Panel by choosing Add and the Applet. Every applet contains a small arrow in its handle. Clicking it will bring up a menu which lets you move or remove it, set the Preferences, if there are any and set the preferences of &kicker;. +Applets + +Applets are small applications running inside of &kicker;. Almost everything besides the application starter buttons are applets. They can be added from the context menu or from the submenu Configure Panel by choosing Add and the Applet. Every applet contains a small arrow in its handle. Clicking it will bring up a menu which lets you move or remove it, set the Preferences, if there are any and set the preferences of &kicker;. -The Taskbar Applet +The Taskbar Applet -The taskbar applet shows buttons for the running applications. The application, which has the focus, is shown as a pressed button. If an application is minimised, the title displayed in the taskbar will fade to grey. +The taskbar applet shows buttons for the running applications. The application, which has the focus, is shown as a pressed button. If an application is minimised, the title displayed in the taskbar will fade to grey. -If you click on the button of the active application, it will be minimised. This means also that if you click twice on an inactive application, it will also be minimised. +If you click on the button of the active application, it will be minimised. This means also that if you click twice on an inactive application, it will also be minimised. -A click with the &RMB; on a button will show the standard application menu. Only the entry To current desktop differs: if you have set the taskbar to show the applications of all desktops, you can move this app to the current desktop. +A click with the &RMB; on a button will show the standard application menu. Only the entry To current desktop differs: if you have set the taskbar to show the applications of all desktops, you can move this app to the current desktop. -There is also a small icon on the left or top side of the taskbar, which opens a menu. This is called the windows list icon. The menu's first entry, Unclutter Windows, tries to move the windows on your active desktop in a way to see as many as possible. Cascade Windows puts all windows on the active desktop over each others, the most recently on top and the others sorted by the time they where last used. +There is also a small icon on the left or top side of the taskbar, which opens a menu. This is called the windows list icon. The menu's first entry, Unclutter Windows, tries to move the windows on your active desktop in a way to see as many as possible. Cascade Windows puts all windows on the active desktop over each others, the most recently on top and the others sorted by the time they where last used. -Below those entries is a list of all currently running applications, grouped by the desktops on which they are running. Clicking on the name of a desktop will switch to that one, clicking an application will also activate it. You can specify the mouse behaviour. Please refer to Taskbar settings for more about that. +Below those entries is a list of all currently running applications, grouped by the desktops on which they are running. Clicking on the name of a desktop will switch to that one, clicking an application will also activate it. You can specify the mouse behaviour. Please refer to Taskbar settings for more about that. -Configuring the Taskbar Applet +Configuring the Taskbar Applet -You can configure the taskbar by clicking the &RMB; on the small move handle. -Please refer to for details about the preferences of the taskbar. +You can configure the taskbar by clicking the &RMB; on the small move handle. +Please refer to for details about the preferences of the taskbar. -The Mini-Pager Applet +The Mini-Pager Applet -This little applet shows a preview of the desktops and lets you also choose by a click with the &LMB; which desktop you want to use. +This little applet shows a preview of the desktops and lets you also choose by a click with the &LMB; which desktop you want to use. -There is also a very useful context menu: +There is also a very useful context menu: -Preview +Preview -This option lets the mini pager appear as a tiny preview of the desktops with symbolic rectangles for the running applications. +This option lets the mini pager appear as a tiny preview of the desktops with symbolic rectangles for the running applications. -Number +Number -If this option is chosen, the pager will show the numbers of the desktops +If this option is chosen, the pager will show the numbers of the desktops -Name +Name -This will let the pager show the names of the desktops, which can be set in the preferences or from Control Centre. +This will let the pager show the names of the desktops, which can be set in the preferences or from Control Centre. -Enable Desktop Preview +Enable Desktop Preview -If this option is checked, a small button will be shown which shows a bigger preview of the running desktops. If you click an application in that preview, it will be activated. +If this option is checked, a small button will be shown which shows a bigger preview of the running desktops. If you click an application in that preview, it will be activated. -Preferences +Preferences -Here you can set the number of desktops you want to have and the names of them. +Here you can set the number of desktops you want to have and the names of them. @@ -1845,71 +931,48 @@ format="PNG"/> -The Clock Applet +The Clock Applet -As you might already guess, the clock applet is a small clock which resides in &kicker;. +As you might already guess, the clock applet is a small clock which resides in &kicker;. -A click with the &LMB; on the clock will show a small calendar. You can use the single arrows to switch the months or the double arrows for switching years. This won't have any effect of your date settings, it's just for your information. +A click with the &LMB; on the clock will show a small calendar. You can use the single arrows to switch the months or the double arrows for switching years. This won't have any effect of your date settings, it's just for your information. -There are some things you can do with the clock applet. This can be done from the context menu. +There are some things you can do with the clock applet. This can be done from the context menu. -<guisubmenu ->Type</guisubmenu -> +<guisubmenu>Type</guisubmenu> -There are four ways the clock can appear: +There are four ways the clock can appear: -Plain +Plain -This lets the clock appear as a simple text that shows the time in plain text. +This lets the clock appear as a simple text that shows the time in plain text. -Digital +Digital -This lets the clock appear as a digital clock showing the time in the well known seven segment style. +This lets the clock appear as a digital clock showing the time in the well known seven segment style. -Analogue +Analogue -If this is set, the clock will be displayed as an old styled analogue clock. +If this is set, the clock will be displayed as an old styled analogue clock. -This may only be useful if you set &kicker; to normal or large size. +This may only be useful if you set &kicker; to normal or large size. -Fuzzy +Fuzzy -This is a very unorthodox style of time display. Try it out, it is really funny! +This is a very unorthodox style of time display. Try it out, it is really funny! @@ -1917,100 +980,45 @@ format="PNG"/> -<guimenuitem ->Preferences</guimenuitem -> +<guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> -Here you can set some general preferences of the clock applet. +Here you can set some general preferences of the clock applet. -General +General -In the Clock Type settings you can choose between the clock styles like in the context menu. +In the Clock Type settings you can choose between the clock styles like in the context menu. -The Date group lets you pick font and colour of the date, which is shown when activated for the specific clock type. +The Date group lets you pick font and colour of the date, which is shown when activated for the specific clock type. -The Plain Clock Tab +The Plain Clock Tab -In the Options section you can check if you want to have the date and/or the seconds shown. In Colours you can choose if you want the common &kde; look or your own custom colours and font. +In the Options section you can check if you want to have the date and/or the seconds shown. In Colours you can choose if you want the common &kde; look or your own custom colours and font. -The Digital Clock Tab +The Digital Clock Tab -In the Options section you can check if you want to have the date, the seconds and/or blinking dots shown. In Colours you can choose if you want the common LCD-Look or your own custom colours. +In the Options section you can check if you want to have the date, the seconds and/or blinking dots shown. In Colours you can choose if you want the common LCD-Look or your own custom colours. -The Analogue Clock Tab +The Analogue Clock Tab -In the Options section you can check if you want to have the date and/or seconds shown. In Colours you can choose if you want the common LCD-Look or your own custom colours. You can also set the level of antialiasing, which means that lines will get blurred a little bit to prevent steps in the drawing. High quality antialiasing may catch some system load on low-end systems. Draw Frame will display the clock a little bit sunken in the panel. +In the Options section you can check if you want to have the date and/or seconds shown. In Colours you can choose if you want the common LCD-Look or your own custom colours. You can also set the level of antialiasing, which means that lines will get blurred a little bit to prevent steps in the drawing. High quality antialiasing may catch some system load on low-end systems. Draw Frame will display the clock a little bit sunken in the panel. -The Fuzzy Clock Tab +The Fuzzy Clock Tab -In the Options section you can check if you want to have the date shown. There is also a slider to set the Fuzziness. This cannot be described in the documents, just do your own experiments. In Colours you can choose the colours and the font of the fuzzy clock. +In the Options section you can check if you want to have the date shown. There is also a slider to set the Fuzziness. This cannot be described in the documents, just do your own experiments. In Colours you can choose the colours and the font of the fuzzy clock. @@ -2019,208 +1027,122 @@ format="PNG"/> -<guimenuitem ->Adjust Date and Time</guimenuitem -> +<guimenuitem>Adjust Date and Time</guimenuitem> -This option starts the Country & Language configuration module of the &kcontrol;. +This option starts the Country & Language configuration module of the &kcontrol;. -You will need the super user password for adjusting date and time. +You will need the super user password for adjusting date and time. -<guimenuitem ->Date and Time Format</guimenuitem -> +<guimenuitem>Date and Time Format</guimenuitem> -This will open the Date and Time module of &kcontrol; where you can set your formats. There aren't any special permissions needed for that. +This will open the Date and Time module of &kcontrol; where you can set your formats. There aren't any special permissions needed for that. -<guisubmenu ->Copy</guisubmenu -> +<guisubmenu>Copy</guisubmenu> -If you need to paste the actual date and/or time in another application (⪚ in a text editor), you can copy it to the clipboard with this function. After selecting one of the available formats, the actual date and/or time is placed in the clipboard using the appropriate format. +If you need to paste the actual date and/or time in another application (⪚ in a text editor), you can copy it to the clipboard with this function. After selecting one of the available formats, the actual date and/or time is placed in the clipboard using the appropriate format. -The Quick Launcher Applet - -This is a compressed application launcher. It is very useful especially if the panel is set to normal or large size. You can add applications by drag and drop or from the context menu. The context menu is also used to remove an application. +The Quick Launcher Applet + +This is a compressed application launcher. It is very useful especially if the panel is set to normal or large size. You can add applications by drag and drop or from the context menu. The context menu is also used to remove an application. -The System Tray Applet +The System Tray Applet -The System Tray is used to dock some special applications like ⪚ &klipper; or &kteatime;. +The System Tray is used to dock some special applications like ⪚ &klipper; or &kteatime;. -Lock/Logout Applet -This little applet contains two buttons. The luggage lock is used to lock the session if you ever want to leave your &kde; unattended and don't want anybody to access it. The off switch is used to close your &kde; session. +Lock/Logout Applet +This little applet contains two buttons. The luggage lock is used to lock the session if you ever want to leave your &kde; unattended and don't want anybody to access it. The off switch is used to close your &kde; session. -The Application Launcher Applet +The Application Launcher Applet -This applet provides a simple command line embedded in &kicker;. Nothing more, nothing less. +This applet provides a simple command line embedded in &kicker;. Nothing more, nothing less. -The Runaway Process Catcher Applet +The Runaway Process Catcher Applet -This applet shows a smiley which will get angry when any process catches up too much system resources. If an application uses too much, a messagebox will appear and ask you how to handle that application. +This applet shows a smiley which will get angry when any process catches up too much system resources. If an application uses too much, a messagebox will appear and ask you how to handle that application. -Clicking it with the &LMB; will show a configuration dialogue. Here you can set the Update interval, which is set in seconds, and the CPU load threshold. At the moment, there is no real advice for setting this up, you will have to do some experimenting. These settings will probably change in a future release. There is also a section Programs to ignore where you can add applications that use many resources naturally, ⪚ compilers or 3D renderers. +Clicking it with the &LMB; will show a configuration dialogue. Here you can set the Update interval, which is set in seconds, and the CPU load threshold. At the moment, there is no real advice for setting this up, you will have to do some experimenting. These settings will probably change in a future release. There is also a section Programs to ignore where you can add applications that use many resources naturally, ⪚ compilers or 3D renderers. -&klipper; Applet +&klipper; Applet -This applet does exactly the same like the &klipper; residing in the system tray. It has the advantage, that it consumes a little bit less system resources, which only matters on really slow systems, but has the disadvantage, that it uses more space than &klipper; in the system tray. You can read more about that in the manual for &klipper; +This applet does exactly the same like the &klipper; residing in the system tray. It has the advantage, that it consumes a little bit less system resources, which only matters on really slow systems, but has the disadvantage, that it uses more space than &klipper; in the system tray. You can read more about that in the manual for &klipper; -Extensions - -There are also some features that run outside of &kicker;, the extensions. They are added from the submenu Configure Panel of the K Menu or the context menu by choosing Add and then Extensions. You can move them to any screenborder by dragging them at the small fadeout on their side and remove it by right clicking on that button and choose Remove. Clicking these buttons with the &LMB; fades the extension out or in, just like the main &kicker;. - -The style of the extensions can be configured in the section of &kicker;'s preferences. +Extensions + +There are also some features that run outside of &kicker;, the extensions. They are added from the submenu Configure Panel of the K Menu or the context menu by choosing Add and then Extensions. You can move them to any screenborder by dragging them at the small fadeout on their side and remove it by right clicking on that button and choose Remove. Clicking these buttons with the &LMB; fades the extension out or in, just like the main &kicker;. + +The style of the extensions can be configured in the section of &kicker;'s preferences. -The External Taskbar Extension +The External Taskbar Extension -The external taskbar is just the same as the taskbar applet with the only difference that it provides its own panel. Refer to the taskbar applet section for help about it. +The external taskbar is just the same as the taskbar applet with the only difference that it provides its own panel. Refer to the taskbar applet section for help about it. -The Child Panel Extension +The Child Panel Extension -This is just a panel like &kicker; itself, where you can add all the stuff &kicker; is also capable. So you can have as many &kicker;s as you want. Just add a child panel and add applications and applets to it. +This is just a panel like &kicker; itself, where you can add all the stuff &kicker; is also capable. So you can have as many &kicker;s as you want. Just add a child panel and add applications and applets to it. -The <application ->KasBar</application -> Extension - -The KasBar is an iconic replacement of the taskbar. It always shows the icons of all currently running applications on any desktop, they can be chosen by clicking with the &LMB;. The active window is highlighted, minimised windows will show a little triangle pointing downwards instead of the square in the lower right of the icons. A triangle pointing to the right indicates that the application is shaded. +The <application>KasBar</application> Extension + +The KasBar is an iconic replacement of the taskbar. It always shows the icons of all currently running applications on any desktop, they can be chosen by clicking with the &LMB;. The active window is highlighted, minimised windows will show a little triangle pointing downwards instead of the square in the lower right of the icons. A triangle pointing to the right indicates that the application is shaded. -The Dock Application Bar Extension +The Dock Application Bar Extension -The Dock Application Bar is an external bar which lets WindowMaker applications be docked. Just run your dockable WindowMaker programs, if the Dock Application Bar is running, they will be automatically docked. +The Dock Application Bar is an external bar which lets WindowMaker applications be docked. Just run your dockable WindowMaker programs, if the Dock Application Bar is running, they will be automatically docked. -Command Reference +Command Reference -The Panel +The Panel -There is only one standard shortcut available in &kicker;: +There is only one standard shortcut available in &kicker;: -&Alt;F1 +&Alt;F1 -Opens the K Menu +Opens the K Menu @@ -2230,182 +1152,107 @@ format="PNG"/> -Questions and Answers +Questions and Answers -How can I add applications, applets or anything else to the panel? +How can I add applications, applets or anything else to the panel? -Click the &RMB; on any free space in &kicker; and choose Add. From appearing submenu you can choose, what you want to add. See in Kicker Basics for more about that. +Click the &RMB; on any free space in &kicker; and choose Add. From appearing submenu you can choose, what you want to add. See in Kicker Basics for more about that. -Can I have an external Taskbar just like in &kde; 1? +Can I have an external Taskbar just like in &kde; 1? -Yes, you can just click the &RMB; on any empty space in &kicker; and then choose Add, Extension and the External Taskbar. +Yes, you can just click the &RMB; on any empty space in &kicker; and then choose Add, Extension and the External Taskbar. -How can I move &kicker; to another screen border? +How can I move &kicker; to another screen border? -Simply drag it by holding the &LMB; on any empty space in &kicker; to any screen border. +Simply drag it by holding the &LMB; on any empty space in &kicker; to any screen border. -How can I move extensions to another screen border? +How can I move extensions to another screen border? -Just drag it by holding the &LMB; on the small handles on the left or the top of the extension. +Just drag it by holding the &LMB; on the small handles on the left or the top of the extension. -I want the taskbar to show all applications I'm running, independent on which desktop it is. Is that possible? +I want the taskbar to show all applications I'm running, independent on which desktop it is. Is that possible? -Yes, click the &RMB; on the small handle of the taskbar, then choose Preferences and check Show all windows in the appearing dialogue. +Yes, click the &RMB; on the small handle of the taskbar, then choose Preferences and check Show all windows in the appearing dialogue. -How can I access the K Menu without using the mouse? +How can I access the K Menu without using the mouse? -Simply press &Alt;F1 and it will appear. +Simply press &Alt;F1 and it will appear. -Is there a way to add a menu containing all desktop icons to &kicker;? +Is there a way to add a menu containing all desktop icons to &kicker;? -Just fire up &konqueror;, go to your home folder and drag the KDesktop icon to any free space of &kicker;, then choose Add as Quick Browser from the appearing menu. +Just fire up &konqueror;, go to your home folder and drag the KDesktop icon to any free space of &kicker;, then choose Add as Quick Browser from the appearing menu. -How can I change the colour and style of &kicker;? +How can I change the colour and style of &kicker;? -You can change the colours of the panel with the global colour module of the Control Centre or you can style the panel itself, see in for more about that. +You can change the colours of the panel with the global colour module of the Control Centre or you can style the panel itself, see in for more about that. -Why is the clock showing the wrong time? +Why is the clock showing the wrong time? -On some &RedHat;systems, the clock always shows the time in GMT. This is a bug in the system setup, and not directly related to &kicker;. However, to solve it, just create this symbolic link: ln /usr/share/zoneinfo /usr/lib/zoneinfo. +On some &RedHat;systems, the clock always shows the time in GMT. This is a bug in the system setup, and not directly related to &kicker;. However, to solve it, just create this symbolic link: ln /usr/share/zoneinfo /usr/lib/zoneinfo. -Is it possible to change the K button of the panel to another picture? +Is it possible to change the K button of the panel to another picture? -Look for $HOME/.trinity/share/apps/kicker/pics/go.png and $HOME/.trinity/share/apps/kicker/pics/mini/go.png and replace them. Do not forget to flatten the replacements to one layer, or else you will not see anything. Create the folders if they do not already exist. Then restart &kicker;. +Look for $HOME/.trinity/share/apps/kicker/pics/go.png and $HOME/.trinity/share/apps/kicker/pics/mini/go.png and replace them. Do not forget to flatten the replacements to one layer, or else you will not see anything. Create the folders if they do not already exist. Then restart &kicker;. -Why is my Settings menu not working? +Why is my Settings menu not working? -Your menu entries may be mixed up for some reason. Simply run tdebuildsycoca on a commandline. +Your menu entries may be mixed up for some reason. Simply run tdebuildsycoca on a commandline. @@ -2413,52 +1260,40 @@ format="PNG"/> -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kicker; +&kicker; -Program copyright 1999-2000 The KDE Team (www.kde.org). +Program copyright 1999-2000 The KDE Team (www.kde.org). -&Matthias.Elter; &Matthias.Elter.mail; +&Matthias.Elter; &Matthias.Elter.mail; -&Matthias.Ettrich; &Matthias.Ettrich.mail; +&Matthias.Ettrich; &Matthias.Ettrich.mail; -&Wilco.Greven; &Wilco.Greven.mail; +&Wilco.Greven; &Wilco.Greven.mail; -&Rik.Hemsley; &Rik.Hemsley.mail; +&Rik.Hemsley; &Rik.Hemsley.mail; -&Daniel.M.Duley; &Daniel.M.Duley.mail; +&Daniel.M.Duley; &Daniel.M.Duley.mail; -&Preston.Brown; &Preston.Brown.mail; +&Preston.Brown; &Preston.Brown.mail; -Documentation copyright 2001, 2002 &Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; +Documentation copyright 2001, 2002 &Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; &underFDL; &underBSDLicense; &documentation.index; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/devices/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/devices/index.docbook index af32239a9b1..f41d740c669 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/devices/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/devices/index.docbook @@ -2,81 +2,44 @@ - + ]>
-Device Information +Device Information -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -device -system information +KDE +KControl +device +system information -Device Information +Device Information -This page displays information about the available devices, +This page displays information about the available devices, -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, device information cannot be displayed yet. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, device information cannot be displayed yet. -On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/devices and /proc/misc, which are only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. Devices are listed by group (Character, Block, or Miscellaneous). The device major number is listed, followed by an identifying label. +On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/devices and /proc/misc, which are only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. Devices are listed by group (Character, Block, or Miscellaneous). The device major number is listed, followed by an identifying label. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/dma/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/dma/index.docbook index 50832841ba1..e5d6b30d0cc 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/dma/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/dma/index.docbook @@ -2,107 +2,46 @@ - + ]>
-<acronym ->DMA</acronym -> Channel Information +<acronym>DMA</acronym> Channel Information -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -DMA -system information +KDE +KControl +DMA +system information -<acronym ->DMA</acronym -> Channel Information +<acronym>DMA</acronym> Channel Information -This page displays information about the DMA (Direct Memory Access) Channels. A DMA channel is a direct connection that allows devices to transfer data to and from memory without going through the processor. Typically, i386-architecture systems (PC's) have eight DMA channels (0-7). +This page displays information about the DMA (Direct Memory Access) Channels. A DMA channel is a direct connection that allows devices to transfer data to and from memory without going through the processor. Typically, i386-architecture systems (PC's) have eight DMA channels (0-7). - The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, DMA Channel information cannot be displayed yet. + The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, DMA Channel information cannot be displayed yet. -On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/dma, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. +On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/dma, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. -A list of all currently-registered (ISA bus) DMA channels that are in use is shown. The first column shows the DMA channel, and the second column shows the device which uses that channel. +A list of all currently-registered (ISA bus) DMA channels that are in use is shown. The first column shows the DMA channel, and the second column shows the device which uses that channel. -Unused DMA channels are not listed. +Unused DMA channels are not listed. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/index.docbook index f3659e6b590..4a86a640893 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/index.docbook @@ -1,213 +1,113 @@ KInfoCenter"> +KInfoCenter"> - + ]> -The &infocenter; +The &infocenter; -Michael McBride
mpmcbride7@yahoo.com
 +Michael McBride
mpmcbride7@yahoo.com
 -2002-07-03 -3.10.00 +2002-07-03 +3.10.00 -This documentation describes &kde;'s information centre. +This documentation describes &kde;'s information centre. -KDE -kinfocenter -system -information -module +KDE +kinfocenter +system +information +module -The &infocenter; +The &infocenter; -The &infocenter; (from now on referred to simply as the information centre) provides you with a centralised and convenient overview of your &kde; and system settings. +The &infocenter; (from now on referred to simply as the information centre) provides you with a centralised and convenient overview of your &kde; and system settings. -The information centre is made up of multiple modules. Each module is a separate application, but the information centre organises all of these programs into a convenient location. +The information centre is made up of multiple modules. Each module is a separate application, but the information centre organises all of these programs into a convenient location. -Using The &infocenter; +Using The &infocenter; -This next section details the use of the information centre itself. For information on individual modules, please see Info Centre Modules +This next section details the use of the information centre itself. For information on individual modules, please see Info Centre Modules -Starting the &infocenter; +Starting the &infocenter; -The &infocenter; can be started 3 ways: +The &infocenter; can be started 3 ways: - + -By selecting K ButtonSystemInfo Centre from the &kde; Panel. +By selecting K ButtonSystemInfo Centre from the &kde; Panel. -By pressing &Alt;F2. - -This will bring up a dialogue box. Type kinfocenter, and click Run or press Enter. +By pressing &Alt;F2. + +This will bring up a dialogue box. Type kinfocenter, and click Run or press Enter. -You can type kinfocenter & at any command prompt. - - - -All three of these methods are equivalent, and produce the same result. +You can type kinfocenter & at any command prompt. + + + +All three of these methods are equivalent, and produce the same result. - -The &infocenter; Screen + +The &infocenter; Screen -When you start the information centre, you are presented with a window, which can be divided into 3 functional parts. +When you start the information centre, you are presented with a window, which can be divided into 3 functional parts. -Across the top is a menubar. The menubar will provide you with quick access to most of &infocenter;'s features. The menus are detailed in The &kde; Info Centre Menus. +Across the top is a menubar. The menubar will provide you with quick access to most of &infocenter;'s features. The menus are detailed in The &kde; Info Centre Menus. -Along the left hand side, is a column. This is a where you choose which module to investigate. You can learn how to navigate through the modules in the section called Navigating Modules. +Along the left hand side, is a column. This is a where you choose which module to investigate. You can learn how to navigate through the modules in the section called Navigating Modules. -The main panel shows you some system information. +The main panel shows you some system information. + --> -The &infocenter; Menus +The &infocenter; Menus -This next section gives you a brief description of what each menu item does. +This next section gives you a brief description of what each menu item does. -<guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu -The File menu has a single entry. +The File menu has a single entry. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Closes the info centre. +Closes the info centre. @@ -216,47 +116,27 @@ FreeBSD system, Version 4.4-RELEASE, on a Pentium. -<guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu &help.menu.documentation; -Exiting The &kde; Information Centre +Exiting The &kde; Information Centre -You can exit the info centre one of three ways: +You can exit the info centre one of three ways: -Select File Quit from the menu bar. +Select File Quit from the menu bar. -Type &Ctrl;Q on the keyboard. +Type &Ctrl;Q on the keyboard. -Click on the Close button on the frame surrounding the info centre. +Click on the Close button on the frame surrounding the info centre. @@ -267,116 +147,61 @@ FreeBSD system, Version 4.4-RELEASE, on a Pentium. -The &infocenter; Modules +The &infocenter; Modules -Navigating Modules +Navigating Modules -This is a list of the standard configuration modules (sorted by category) provided by the &kde; base package. Please note that there may be many more modules on your system if you have installed additional software. +This is a list of the standard configuration modules (sorted by category) provided by the &kde; base package. Please note that there may be many more modules on your system if you have installed additional software. -DMA-Channels +DMA-Channels -Devices +Devices -IO-Ports +IO-Ports -Interrupts +Interrupts -Memory +Memory -Network Interfaces +Network Interfaces -PCI +PCI -PCMCIA +PCMCIA -Partitions +Partitions -Processor +Processor -Protocols +Protocols -SCSI +SCSI -Samba Status Information +Samba Status Information -Sound +Sound -USB Devices +USB Devices -X-Server +X-Server @@ -387,125 +212,39 @@ FreeBSD system, Version 4.4-RELEASE, on a Pentium. -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&infocenter; -Program copyright 1997-2001 The &infocenter; Developers -Contributors: +&infocenter; +Program copyright 1997-2001 The &infocenter; Developers +Contributors: -Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org -Matthias Elter elter@kde.org +Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org +Matthias Elter elter@kde.org -Documentation copyright 2000 Michael McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com +Documentation copyright 2000 Michael McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com -Contributors: +Contributors: -Paul Campbell paul@taniwha.com -Helge Deller deller@kde.org -Mark Donohoe -Pat Dowler -Duncan Haldane duncan@kde.org -Steffen Hansen stefh@mip.ou.dk. -Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org -Martin Jones mjones@kde.org -Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de -Jonathan Singer jsinger@leeta.net -Thomas Tanghus tanghus@earthling.net -Krishna Tateneni tateneni@pluto.njcc.com -> -Ellis Whitehead ewhitehe@uni-freiburg.de +Paul Campbell paul@taniwha.com +Helge Deller deller@kde.org +Mark Donohoe +Pat Dowler +Duncan Haldane duncan@kde.org +Steffen Hansen stefh@mip.ou.dk. +Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org +Martin Jones mjones@kde.org +Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de +Jonathan Singer jsinger@leeta.net +Thomas Tanghus tanghus@earthling.net +Krishna Tateneni tateneni@pluto.njcc.com> +Ellis Whitehead ewhitehe@uni-freiburg.de -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/interrupts/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/interrupts/index.docbook index b9efbf5cffa..a13f30e4833 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/interrupts/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/interrupts/index.docbook @@ -2,116 +2,49 @@ - + ]>
-Interrupt Request (<abbrev ->IRQ</abbrev ->) Lines +Interrupt Request (<abbrev>IRQ</abbrev>) Lines -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -IRQ -interrupts -system information +KDE +KControl +IRQ +interrupts +system information -Interrupt Request (<abbrev ->IRQ</abbrev ->) Lines in Use +Interrupt Request (<abbrev>IRQ</abbrev>) Lines in Use -This page displays information about the Interrupt Request Lines in use, and the devices that use them. +This page displays information about the Interrupt Request Lines in use, and the devices that use them. -An IRQ is a hardware line used in a PC by (ISA bus) devices like keyboards, modems, sound cards, &etc;, to send interrupt signals to the processor to tell it that the device is ready to send or accept data. Unfortunately, there are only sixteen IRQ's (0-15) available in the i386 (PC) architecture for sharing among the various ISA devices. +An IRQ is a hardware line used in a PC by (ISA bus) devices like keyboards, modems, sound cards, &etc;, to send interrupt signals to the processor to tell it that the device is ready to send or accept data. Unfortunately, there are only sixteen IRQ's (0-15) available in the i386 (PC) architecture for sharing among the various ISA devices. -Many hardware problems are the result of IRQ conflicts, when two devices try to use the same IRQ, or software is misconfigured to use a different IRQ from the one a device is actually configured for. +Many hardware problems are the result of IRQ conflicts, when two devices try to use the same IRQ, or software is misconfigured to use a different IRQ from the one a device is actually configured for. -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, IRQ information cannot be displayed yet. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, IRQ information cannot be displayed yet. -On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/interrupts, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. +On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/interrupts, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. -The first column, is the IRQ number. The second column, is the number of interrupts that have been received since the last reboot. The third column shows the type of interrupt. The fourth, identifies the device assigned to that interrupt. +The first column, is the IRQ number. The second column, is the number of interrupts that have been received since the last reboot. The third column shows the type of interrupt. The fourth, identifies the device assigned to that interrupt. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/ioports/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/ioports/index.docbook index e26155a5c4b..1bc9f83fca4 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/ioports/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/ioports/index.docbook @@ -2,89 +2,49 @@ - + ]>
-I/O Port +I/O Port -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -ioports -system information +KDE +KControl +ioports +system information -Input/Output Port Information +Input/Output Port Information -This page displays information about the I/O ports. +This page displays information about the I/O ports. -I/O Ports are memory addresses used by the processor for direct communication with a device that has sent an interrupt signal to the processor. +I/O Ports are memory addresses used by the processor for direct communication with a device that has sent an interrupt signal to the processor. -The exchange of commands or data between the processor and the device takes place through the I/O port address of the device, which is a hexadecimal number. No two devices can share the same I/O port. Many devices use multiple I/O port addresses, which are expressed as a range of hexadecimal numbers. +The exchange of commands or data between the processor and the device takes place through the I/O port address of the device, which is a hexadecimal number. No two devices can share the same I/O port. Many devices use multiple I/O port addresses, which are expressed as a range of hexadecimal numbers. -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, I/O port information can not yet be displayed. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, I/O port information can not yet be displayed. -On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/ioports which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. A list of all currently-registered I/O port regions that are in use is shown. +On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/ioports which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. A list of all currently-registered I/O port regions that are in use is shown. -The first column is the I/O port (or the range of I/O ports), the second column identifies the device that uses these I/O ports. +The first column is the I/O port (or the range of I/O ports), the second column identifies the device that uses these I/O ports. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/memory/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/memory/index.docbook index ad31d42788b..90ddf62057a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/memory/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/memory/index.docbook @@ -2,139 +2,73 @@ - + ]>
-Memory Information +Memory Information -&Mike.McBride; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-13 -3.00.00 +2002-02-13 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -memory -system information +KDE +KControl +memory +system information -Memory Information +Memory Information -This module displays the current memory usage. It is updated constantly, and can be very useful for pinpointing bottlenecks when certain applications are executed. +This module displays the current memory usage. It is updated constantly, and can be very useful for pinpointing bottlenecks when certain applications are executed. -Memory Types - -The first thing you must understand, is there are two types of memory, available to the operating system and the programs that run within it. - -The first type, is called physical memory. This is the memory located within the memory chips, within your computer. This is the RAM (for Random Access Memory) you bought when you purchased your computer. - -The second type of memory, is called virtual or swap memory. This block of memory, is actually space on the hard drive. The operating system reserves a space on the hard drive for swap space. The operating system can use this virtual memory (or swap space), if it runs out of physical memory. The reason this is called swap memory, is the operating system takes some data that it doesn't think you will want for a while, and saves that to disk in this reserved space. The operating system then loads the new data you need right now. It has swapped the not needed data, for the data you need right now. Virtual or swap memory is not as fast as physical memory, so operating systems try to keep data (especially often used data), in the physical memory. - -The total memory, is the combined total of physical memory and virtual memory. +Memory Types + +The first thing you must understand, is there are two types of memory, available to the operating system and the programs that run within it. + +The first type, is called physical memory. This is the memory located within the memory chips, within your computer. This is the RAM (for Random Access Memory) you bought when you purchased your computer. + +The second type of memory, is called virtual or swap memory. This block of memory, is actually space on the hard drive. The operating system reserves a space on the hard drive for swap space. The operating system can use this virtual memory (or swap space), if it runs out of physical memory. The reason this is called swap memory, is the operating system takes some data that it doesn't think you will want for a while, and saves that to disk in this reserved space. The operating system then loads the new data you need right now. It has swapped the not needed data, for the data you need right now. Virtual or swap memory is not as fast as physical memory, so operating systems try to keep data (especially often used data), in the physical memory. + +The total memory, is the combined total of physical memory and virtual memory. -Memory Information Module +Memory Information Module -This window is divided into a top and bottom section +This window is divided into a top and bottom section -The top section shows you the total physical memory, total free physical memory, shared memory, and buffered memory. +The top section shows you the total physical memory, total free physical memory, shared memory, and buffered memory. -All four values are represented as the total number of bytes, and as the number of megabytes (1 megabyte = slightly more than 1,000,000 bytes) +All four values are represented as the total number of bytes, and as the number of megabytes (1 megabyte = slightly more than 1,000,000 bytes) -The bottom section shows you three graphs: +The bottom section shows you three graphs: -Total Memory (this is the combination of physical and virtual memory). -Physical Memory -Virtual memory, or Swap Space. +Total Memory (this is the combination of physical and virtual memory). +Physical Memory +Virtual memory, or Swap Space. -The green areas are free, and the red areas are used. +The green areas are free, and the red areas are used. -The exact values of each type of memory are not critical, and they change regularly. When you evaluate this page, look at trends. +The exact values of each type of memory are not critical, and they change regularly. When you evaluate this page, look at trends. -Does your computer have plenty of free space (green areas)? If not, you can increase the swap size or increase the physical memory. +Does your computer have plenty of free space (green areas)? If not, you can increase the swap size or increase the physical memory. -Also, if your computer seems sluggish: is your physical memory full, and does the hard drive always seem to be running? This suggests that you do not have enough physical memory, and your computer is relying on the slower virtual memory for commonly used data. Increasing your physical memory will improve the responsiveness of your computer. +Also, if your computer seems sluggish: is your physical memory full, and does the hard drive always seem to be running? This suggests that you do not have enough physical memory, and your computer is relying on the slower virtual memory for commonly used data. Increasing your physical memory will improve the responsiveness of your computer. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/nics/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/nics/index.docbook index fa687819ae1..bccbc49f639 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/nics/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/nics/index.docbook @@ -2,67 +2,38 @@ - + ]>
-Network Interfaces +Network Interfaces -&Lauri.Watts; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-11 -3.00.00 +2002-02-11 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -Network -Interfaces +KDE +KControl +Network +Interfaces -Network Interfaces +Network Interfaces -This page displays information about the network interfaces installed in your computer. +This page displays information about the network interfaces installed in your computer. -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, this information can not yet be displayed. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, this information can not yet be displayed. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/opengl/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/opengl/index.docbook index 3e114ff0a24..8c01cb7cdd6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/opengl/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/opengl/index.docbook @@ -2,88 +2,42 @@ - + ]>
-<acronym ->OpenGL</acronym -> +<acronym>OpenGL</acronym> -IlyaKorniykok_ilya@ukr.net -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +IlyaKorniykok_ilya@ukr.net +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English - - + + -KDE -KControl -OpenGL -system information +KDE +KControl +OpenGL +system information -OpenGL +OpenGL -This page displays information about installed OpenGL implementation. OpenGL (for "Open Graphics Library") is a cross-platform, hardware independent interface for 3D graphics. +This page displays information about installed OpenGL implementation. OpenGL (for "Open Graphics Library") is a cross-platform, hardware independent interface for 3D graphics. -GLX is the binding for OpenGL to X Window system. +GLX is the binding for OpenGL to X Window system. -DRI (Direct Rendering Infrastucture) provides hardware acceleration for OpenGL. You must have a videocard with 3D accelerator and properly installed driver for this. +DRI (Direct Rendering Infrastucture) provides hardware acceleration for OpenGL. You must have a videocard with 3D accelerator and properly installed driver for this. -Read more at the official OpenGL site http://www.opengl.org +Read more at the official OpenGL site http://www.opengl.org diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/partitions/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/partitions/index.docbook index 4ef630e0a2f..43a65b35afe 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/partitions/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/partitions/index.docbook @@ -2,82 +2,44 @@ - + ]>
-Partition Information +Partition Information -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -drive partition -system information +KDE +KControl +drive partition +system information -Partition Information +Partition Information -This page displays information about partitions on your hard drives. +This page displays information about partitions on your hard drives. -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, partition information cannot be displayed yet. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, partition information cannot be displayed yet. -On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/partitions, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the (2.1.x or later) kernel. +On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/partitions, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the (2.1.x or later) kernel. -The first two columns are the major and minor numbers respectively. The third column is the number of blocks (usually 1 block = 1024 bytes). The fourth column is a label for the device. +The first two columns are the major and minor numbers respectively. The third column is the number of blocks (usually 1 block = 1024 bytes). The fourth column is a label for the device. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pci/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pci/index.docbook index 47b2a9b2ed4..8b97e588876 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pci/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pci/index.docbook @@ -2,100 +2,44 @@ - + ]>
-<acronym ->PCI</acronym ->-bus and Installed <acronym ->PCI</acronym -> Cards +<acronym>PCI</acronym>-bus and Installed <acronym>PCI</acronym> Cards -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -PCI -system information +KDE +KControl +PCI +system information -<acronym ->PCI</acronym ->-bus and Installed <acronym ->PCI</acronym -> Cards +<acronym>PCI</acronym>-bus and Installed <acronym>PCI</acronym> Cards -This page displays information about the PCI-bus and installed PCI cards, and other devices that use the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus. +This page displays information about the PCI-bus and installed PCI cards, and other devices that use the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus. -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, PCI-information can not yet be displayed. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, PCI-information can not yet be displayed. -On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/pci which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. A listing of all PCI devices found during kernel initialisation, and their configuration, is shown. +On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/pci which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. A listing of all PCI devices found during kernel initialisation, and their configuration, is shown. -Each entry begins with a bus, device and function number. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +Each entry begins with a bus, device and function number. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pcmcia/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pcmcia/index.docbook index 8c55c7980ab..8fc1a2adf94 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pcmcia/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/pcmcia/index.docbook @@ -2,67 +2,35 @@ - + ]>
-<acronym ->PCMCIA</acronym -> +<acronym>PCMCIA</acronym> -&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -Laptop -PCMCIA +KDE +KControl +Laptop +PCMCIA -<acronym ->PCMCIA</acronym -> +<acronym>PCMCIA</acronym> -This module displays information about PCMCIA Cards +This module displays information about PCMCIA Cards -The exact information is system dependent. On most systems no information is displayed at all. +The exact information is system dependent. On most systems no information is displayed at all.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/processor/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/processor/index.docbook index c76fb5654dd..a4c73596ba5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/processor/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/processor/index.docbook @@ -2,88 +2,45 @@ - + ]>
-Processor Information +Processor Information -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -CPU -processor -system information +KDE +KControl +CPU +processor +system information -Processor Information +Processor Information -This page displays information about the system Central Processing Unit (CPU). +This page displays information about the system Central Processing Unit (CPU). -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, processor information cannot be displayed yet. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, processor information cannot be displayed yet. -On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/cpuinfo, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. +On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/cpuinfo, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. -The exact contents of the window will depend on the CPU(s) in your machine, but the window is organised into two columns. The first column is the parameter, and the second column is the value of that parameter. +The exact contents of the window will depend on the CPU(s) in your machine, but the window is organised into two columns. The first column is the parameter, and the second column is the value of that parameter. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/protocols/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/protocols/index.docbook index 3596a0bc521..48c761edff1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/protocols/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/protocols/index.docbook @@ -2,59 +2,33 @@ - + ]>
-Protocols +Protocols -&Lauri.Watts; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -KDE -Protocols -IOSlaves +KDE +Protocols +IOSlaves -Protocols +Protocols -On the left of the panel you will see a list of the IOSlaves that are installed on your system. IOSlaves are how &kde; applications talk to other computers, other applications, or act on files. +On the left of the panel you will see a list of the IOSlaves that are installed on your system. IOSlaves are how &kde; applications talk to other computers, other applications, or act on files. -Clicking on an IOSlave name will display some help information about that IOSlave, such as how to use it, and what it does. +Clicking on an IOSlave name will display some help information about that IOSlave, such as how to use it, and what it does. -The protocols module is purely informational, you cannot change any settings here. +The protocols module is purely informational, you cannot change any settings here.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/samba/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/samba/index.docbook index c636e2c010c..bc0513467f6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/samba/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/samba/index.docbook @@ -2,307 +2,123 @@ - + ]>
-Samba Status Information +Samba Status Information -&Alexander.Neundorf; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English - - -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +&Alexander.Neundorf; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English + + +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -Samba -system information +KDE +KControl +Samba +system information -Samba Status Information - -The Samba and NFS Status Monitor is a front end to the programs smbstatus and showmount. Smbstatus reports on current Samba connections, and is part of the suite of Samba tools, which implements the SMB (Session Message Block) protocol, also called the NetBIOS or LanManager protocol. - -This protocol can be used to provide printer sharing or drive sharing services on a network including machines running the various flavours of &Microsoft; &Windows;. - -showmount is part of the NFS software package. NFS stands for Network File System and is the traditional &UNIX; way to share folders over the network. In this case the output of showmount is parsed. On some systems showmount is in /usr/sbin, check if you have showmount in your PATH. +Samba Status Information + +The Samba and NFS Status Monitor is a front end to the programs smbstatus and showmount. Smbstatus reports on current Samba connections, and is part of the suite of Samba tools, which implements the SMB (Session Message Block) protocol, also called the NetBIOS or LanManager protocol. + +This protocol can be used to provide printer sharing or drive sharing services on a network including machines running the various flavours of &Microsoft; &Windows;. + +showmount is part of the NFS software package. NFS stands for Network File System and is the traditional &UNIX; way to share folders over the network. In this case the output of showmount is parsed. On some systems showmount is in /usr/sbin, check if you have showmount in your PATH. -Exports - -On this page you can see a big list which shows the currently active connections to Samba shares and NFS exports of your machine. The first column shows you whether the resource is a Samba (SMB) share or a NFS export. The second column contains the name of the share, the third the name of the remote host, which accesses this share. The remaining columns have only a meaning for Samba-shares. - -The fourth column contains the User ID of the user, who accesses this share. Note that this does not have to be equal to the &UNIX; user ID of this user. The same applies for the next column, which displays the group ID of the user. - -Each connection to one of your shares is handled by a single process (smbd), the next column shows the process ID (pid) of this smbd. If you kill this process the connected user will be disconnected. If the remote user works from &Windows;, as soon as this process is killed a new one will be created, so he will almost not notice it. - -The last column shows how many files this user has currently open. Here you see only, how many files he has open just now, you don't see how many he copied or formerly opened &etc; +Exports + +On this page you can see a big list which shows the currently active connections to Samba shares and NFS exports of your machine. The first column shows you whether the resource is a Samba (SMB) share or a NFS export. The second column contains the name of the share, the third the name of the remote host, which accesses this share. The remaining columns have only a meaning for Samba-shares. + +The fourth column contains the User ID of the user, who accesses this share. Note that this does not have to be equal to the &UNIX; user ID of this user. The same applies for the next column, which displays the group ID of the user. + +Each connection to one of your shares is handled by a single process (smbd), the next column shows the process ID (pid) of this smbd. If you kill this process the connected user will be disconnected. If the remote user works from &Windows;, as soon as this process is killed a new one will be created, so he will almost not notice it. + +The last column shows how many files this user has currently open. Here you see only, how many files he has open just now, you don't see how many he copied or formerly opened &etc; -Imports +Imports -Here you see which Samba- and NFS-shares from other hosts are mounted on your local system. The first column shows wether it is a Samba- or NFS-share, the second column displays the name of the share, and the third shows where it is mounted. +Here you see which Samba- and NFS-shares from other hosts are mounted on your local system. The first column shows wether it is a Samba- or NFS-share, the second column displays the name of the share, and the third shows where it is mounted. -The mounted NFS-shares you should see on &Linux; (this has been tested), and it should also work on &Solaris; (this has not been tested). +The mounted NFS-shares you should see on &Linux; (this has been tested), and it should also work on &Solaris; (this has not been tested). - -Log - -This page presents the contents of your local samba log file in a nice way. If you open this page, the list will be empty. You have to press the Update button, then the samba log file will be read and the results displayed. Check whether the samba log file on your system is really at the location as specified in the input line. If it is somewhere else or if it has another name, correct it. After changing the file name you have to press Update again. - -Samba logs its actions according to the log level (see smb.conf). If loglevel = 1, samba logs only when somebody connects to your machine and when this connection is closed again. If log level = 2, it logs also if somebody opens a file and if he closes the file again. If the log level is higher than 2, yet more stuff is logged. - -If you are interested in who accesses your machine, and which files are accessed, you should set the log level to 2 and regularly create a new samba log file (⪚ set up a cron task which once a week moves your current samba log file into another folder or something like that). Otherwise your samba log file may become very big. - -With the four checkboxes below the big list you can decide, which events are displayed in the list. You have to press Update to see the results. If the log level of your samba is too low, you won't see everything. - -By clicking on the header of one column you can sort the list by this column. + +Log + +This page presents the contents of your local samba log file in a nice way. If you open this page, the list will be empty. You have to press the Update button, then the samba log file will be read and the results displayed. Check whether the samba log file on your system is really at the location as specified in the input line. If it is somewhere else or if it has another name, correct it. After changing the file name you have to press Update again. + +Samba logs its actions according to the log level (see smb.conf). If loglevel = 1, samba logs only when somebody connects to your machine and when this connection is closed again. If log level = 2, it logs also if somebody opens a file and if he closes the file again. If the log level is higher than 2, yet more stuff is logged. + +If you are interested in who accesses your machine, and which files are accessed, you should set the log level to 2 and regularly create a new samba log file (⪚ set up a cron task which once a week moves your current samba log file into another folder or something like that). Otherwise your samba log file may become very big. + +With the four checkboxes below the big list you can decide, which events are displayed in the list. You have to press Update to see the results. If the log level of your samba is too low, you won't see everything. + +By clicking on the header of one column you can sort the list by this column. -Statistics - -On this page you can filter the contents of the third page for certain contents. - -Let's say the Event field (not the one in the list) is set to Connection, Service/File is set to *, Host/User is set to *, Show expanded service info is disabled and Show expanded host info is disabled. - -If you press Update now, you will see how often a connection was opened to share * (&ie; to any share) from host * (&ie; from any host). Now enable Show expanded host info and press Update again. Now you will see for every host which matches the wildcard *, how many connections were opened by him. - -Now press clear. - -Now set the Event field to File Access and enable Show expanded service info and press Update again. - -Now you will see how often every single file was accessed. If you enable Show expanded host info too, you will see how often every single user opened each file. - -In the input lines Service/File and Host/User you can use the wildcards * and ? in the same way you use them at the command line. Regular expressions are not recognised. - -By clicking on the header of a column you can sort the list by this column. This way you can check out which file was opened most often, or which user opened the most files or whatever. +Statistics + +On this page you can filter the contents of the third page for certain contents. + +Let's say the Event field (not the one in the list) is set to Connection, Service/File is set to *, Host/User is set to *, Show expanded service info is disabled and Show expanded host info is disabled. + +If you press Update now, you will see how often a connection was opened to share * (&ie; to any share) from host * (&ie; from any host). Now enable Show expanded host info and press Update again. Now you will see for every host which matches the wildcard *, how many connections were opened by him. + +Now press clear. + +Now set the Event field to File Access and enable Show expanded service info and press Update again. + +Now you will see how often every single file was accessed. If you enable Show expanded host info too, you will see how often every single user opened each file. + +In the input lines Service/File and Host/User you can use the wildcards * and ? in the same way you use them at the command line. Regular expressions are not recognised. + +By clicking on the header of a column you can sort the list by this column. This way you can check out which file was opened most often, or which user opened the most files or whatever. -Section Author +Section Author -Module copyright 2000: Michael Glauche and &Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; +Module copyright 2000: Michael Glauche and &Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; -Originally written by: Michael Glauche +Originally written by: Michael Glauche -Currently maintained by: &Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; +Currently maintained by: &Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; -Contributors -Conversion to kcontrol applet: -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; &Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel.mail; -Use of TDEProcess instead of popen, and more error checking: -&David.Faure; &David.Faure.mail; -Conversion to tdecmodule, added tab pages 2,3,4, bug fixed: -&Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; +Contributors +Conversion to kcontrol applet: +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; &Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel.mail; +Use of TDEProcess instead of popen, and more error checking: +&David.Faure; &David.Faure.mail; +Conversion to tdecmodule, added tab pages 2,3,4, bug fixed: +&Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; -Documentation copyright 2000 &Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; +Documentation copyright 2000 &Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; -Documentation translated to docbook by &Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +Documentation translated to docbook by &Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/scsi/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/scsi/index.docbook index 43c77e0ee37..1f7feb0c476 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/scsi/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/scsi/index.docbook @@ -2,97 +2,45 @@ - + ]>
-<acronym ->SCSI</acronym -> Interface Information +<acronym>SCSI</acronym> Interface Information -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -SCSI -system information +KDE +KControl +SCSI +system information -<acronym ->SCSI</acronym -> Interface Information +<acronym>SCSI</acronym> Interface Information -This page displays information about Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) Interfaces and the attached SCSI devices. +This page displays information about Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) Interfaces and the attached SCSI devices. -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems SCSI information cannot be displayed yet. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems SCSI information cannot be displayed yet. -On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/scsi/scsi, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. A listing of all SCSI devices known to the kernel is shown. +On &Linux;, this information is read from /proc/scsi/scsi, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the kernel. A listing of all SCSI devices known to the kernel is shown. -The devices are sorted numerically by their host, channel, and ID numbers. +The devices are sorted numerically by their host, channel, and ID numbers. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/sound/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/sound/index.docbook index ed86203c637..a3ee3cc6a83 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/sound/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/sound/index.docbook @@ -2,82 +2,43 @@ - + ]>
-Soundcard Information +Soundcard Information -&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; -&Helge.Deller; -&Duncan.Haldane; -&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Matthias.Hoelzer-Kluepfel; +&Helge.Deller; +&Duncan.Haldane; +&Mike.McBride; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -soundcard -system information +KDE +KControl +soundcard +system information -Soundcard Information +Soundcard Information -This page displays information about any soundcards installed in the system. +This page displays information about any soundcards installed in the system. -The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, soundcard information cannot be displayed yet. +The exact information displayed is system-dependent. On some systems, soundcard information cannot be displayed yet. -On &Linux;, this information is read either from /dev/sndstat, if present, or from /proc/sound, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the (2.1.x or later) kernel. +On &Linux;, this information is read either from /dev/sndstat, if present, or from /proc/sound, which is only available if the /proc pseudo-filesystem is compiled into the (2.1.x or later) kernel. -The user cannot modify any settings on this page. +The user cannot modify any settings on this page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/usb/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/usb/index.docbook index 8da4dafa7fd..6ae4510551e 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/usb/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/usb/index.docbook @@ -2,72 +2,37 @@ - + ]>
-<acronym ->USB</acronym -> +<acronym>USB</acronym> - + -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KControl -USB -System Information +KControl +USB +System Information -<acronym ->USB</acronym -> +<acronym>USB</acronym> -This module allows you to see the devices attached to your USB bus(es). +This module allows you to see the devices attached to your USB bus(es). -This module is for information only, you cannot edit any information you see here. +This module is for information only, you cannot edit any information you see here.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/xserver/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/xserver/index.docbook index 71c7428594b..4f9906f190b 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/xserver/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kinfocenter/xserver/index.docbook @@ -2,79 +2,45 @@ - + ]>
-X Server Information +X Server Information -&Mike.McBride; +&Mike.McBride; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -X server -system information +KDE +KControl +X server +system information -X Server Information +X Server Information -This screen is useful for getting specific information about your X server and the current session of X. +This screen is useful for getting specific information about your X server and the current session of X. -When you open this module, you are presented with some information. The left hand side of the window is organised into a tree. Some of the elements have a plus sign in front of the label. Clicking this sign opens a submenu related to the label. Clicking on a minus sign in front of a label hides the submenu. +When you open this module, you are presented with some information. The left hand side of the window is organised into a tree. Some of the elements have a plus sign in front of the label. Clicking this sign opens a submenu related to the label. Clicking on a minus sign in front of a label hides the submenu. -The right hand side of the window contains the individual values for each of the parameters on the left. +The right hand side of the window contains the individual values for each of the parameters on the left. -The information presented will vary depending on your setup. +The information presented will vary depending on your setup. -Some setups may not be able to determine some or all of the parameters. +Some setups may not be able to determine some or all of the parameters. -You can not change any values from this menu. It is for information only. +You can not change any values from this menu. It is for information only.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/klipper/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/klipper/index.docbook index 25e9fcaec9b..ed7a04ec42c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/klipper/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/klipper/index.docbook @@ -4,257 +4,123 @@ - + ]> -The &klipper; Handbook +The &klipper; Handbook -&Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; - -&Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; + +&Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2000-2003 -&Philip.Rodrigues; +2000-2003 +&Philip.Rodrigues; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2003-09-18 -2.92.00 +2003-09-18 +2.92.00 -&klipper; is the &kde; clipboard cut & paste utility. +&klipper; is the &kde; clipboard cut & paste utility. -KDE -Klipper -tdebase -clipboard +KDE +Klipper +tdebase +clipboard -Introduction -&klipper; is the &kde; clipboard utility. It stores clipboard history, and allows you to link clipboard contents to application actions. Please report any problems or feature requests to Carsten Pfeiffer &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail;. +Introduction +&klipper; is the &kde; clipboard utility. It stores clipboard history, and allows you to link clipboard contents to application actions. Please report any problems or feature requests to Carsten Pfeiffer &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail;. -Using &klipper; +Using &klipper; -Basic Usage +Basic Usage -The &klipper; icon. +The &klipper; icon. -The &klipper; icon +The &klipper; icon -To display the clipboard history, click on the &klipper; icon in the &kde; panel, or press &Ctrl;&Alt;V . Previous clipboard entries are shown at the top of the pop-up menu which appears. Selecting one of these copies it to the clipboard, from where it can be pasted into any &kde; or X application as usual. - -To remove &klipper; from your panel, open the pop-up menu and select Quit. A dialogue will ask you whether &klipper; should start automatically when you log in. +To display the clipboard history, click on the &klipper; icon in the &kde; panel, or press &Ctrl;&Alt;V . Previous clipboard entries are shown at the top of the pop-up menu which appears. Selecting one of these copies it to the clipboard, from where it can be pasted into any &kde; or X application as usual. + +To remove &klipper; from your panel, open the pop-up menu and select Quit. A dialogue will ask you whether &klipper; should start automatically when you log in. -Actions - -&klipper; can perform actions on the contents of the clipboard, based on whether they match a particular regular expression. For example, any clipboard contents starting with http:// can be passed to &Netscape; or &konqueror; as &URL;s to open. - -To use this feature, just copy a &URL; or filename to the clipboard. If there is a matching regular expression in &klipper;'s list, a menu will appear showing you the options you have (⪚ Open &URL; in &konqueror;, open &URL; in &Netscape;). Use the mouse or keyboard to select the option you want, and &klipper; will run the program you have selected, opening the address pointed to by the clipboard contents. - -If you do not want to perform any actions on the clipboard contents, select Do Nothing on the pop-up menu to return to what you were doing before. If you leave the menu, it will disappear, leaving you to continue your work. You can change the time that the menu remains for in the Configure Klipper... dialogue, with the option Timeout for action pop-ups under the General tab. +Actions + +&klipper; can perform actions on the contents of the clipboard, based on whether they match a particular regular expression. For example, any clipboard contents starting with http:// can be passed to &Netscape; or &konqueror; as &URL;s to open. + +To use this feature, just copy a &URL; or filename to the clipboard. If there is a matching regular expression in &klipper;'s list, a menu will appear showing you the options you have (⪚ Open &URL; in &konqueror;, open &URL; in &Netscape;). Use the mouse or keyboard to select the option you want, and &klipper; will run the program you have selected, opening the address pointed to by the clipboard contents. + +If you do not want to perform any actions on the clipboard contents, select Do Nothing on the pop-up menu to return to what you were doing before. If you leave the menu, it will disappear, leaving you to continue your work. You can change the time that the menu remains for in the Configure Klipper... dialogue, with the option Timeout for action pop-ups under the General tab. -Actions can be disabled completely by clicking on &klipper; and selecting Actions Enabled, or by pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;X. - -Clipboard contents which match a regular expression can also be edited before performing an action on them. Select Edit contents... on the &klipper; pop-up menu, and you can change the clipboard contents in the dialogue which appears, before clicking the OK button to run the appropriate action. - -Pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;R shows the pop-up menu to repeat the last action which &klipper; performed. +Actions can be disabled completely by clicking on &klipper; and selecting Actions Enabled, or by pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;X. + +Clipboard contents which match a regular expression can also be edited before performing an action on them. Select Edit contents... on the &klipper; pop-up menu, and you can change the clipboard contents in the dialogue which appears, before clicking the OK button to run the appropriate action. + +Pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;R shows the pop-up menu to repeat the last action which &klipper; performed. -Clipboard/Selection Behaviour +Clipboard/Selection Behaviour -General -&klipper; can be used to set the behaviour of the clipboard and selection in &kde;. - -The &X-Window; uses two separate clipboard buffers: the selection and the clipboard. Text is placed in the selection buffer by simply selecting it, and can be pasted with the middle mouse button. To place text in the clipboard buffer, select it and press &Ctrl;X or &Ctrl;C . Text from the clipboard buffer is pasted using &Ctrl;V or by selecting EditPaste . +General +&klipper; can be used to set the behaviour of the clipboard and selection in &kde;. + +The &X-Window; uses two separate clipboard buffers: the selection and the clipboard. Text is placed in the selection buffer by simply selecting it, and can be pasted with the middle mouse button. To place text in the clipboard buffer, select it and press &Ctrl;X or &Ctrl;C . Text from the clipboard buffer is pasted using &Ctrl;V or by selecting EditPaste . -Changing Clipboard/Selection Behaviour -In order to change clipboard/selection behaviour, select Configure Klipper... from the &klipper; pop-up menu, and in the dialogue box that appears, select the General tab. Selecting Separate clipboard and selection makes the clipboard and selection function as completely separate buffers as described above. With this option set, the option Ignore selection will prevent &klipper; from including the contents of the selection in its clipboard history and from performing actions on the contents of the selection. Selecting Synchronise contents of the clipboard and the selection causes the clipboard and selection buffers to always be the same, meaning that text in the selection can be pasted with either the middle mouse button or the key combination &Ctrl;V , and similarly for text in the clipboard buffer. +Changing Clipboard/Selection Behaviour +In order to change clipboard/selection behaviour, select Configure Klipper... from the &klipper; pop-up menu, and in the dialogue box that appears, select the General tab. Selecting Separate clipboard and selection makes the clipboard and selection function as completely separate buffers as described above. With this option set, the option Ignore selection will prevent &klipper; from including the contents of the selection in its clipboard history and from performing actions on the contents of the selection. Selecting Synchronise contents of the clipboard and the selection causes the clipboard and selection buffers to always be the same, meaning that text in the selection can be pasted with either the middle mouse button or the key combination &Ctrl;V , and similarly for text in the clipboard buffer. @@ -265,141 +131,76 @@ selected, the clipboard functions in the &UNIX; mode; if not, the -Configuring Klipper +Configuring Klipper -Viewing the Configuration Dialogue +Viewing the Configuration Dialogue -To view or change &klipper;'s settings, open the &klipper; pop-up menu, and select Configure Klipper.... The &klipper; configuration dialogue will appear. Its contents are described below. +To view or change &klipper;'s settings, open the &klipper; pop-up menu, and select Configure Klipper.... The &klipper; configuration dialogue will appear. Its contents are described below. -General Options +General Options -Popup menu at mouse-cursor position -Make the &klipper; pop-up menus appear at the position of the mouse cursor, instead of their default position (in the &kde; Panel). Useful if you use the mouse more than the keyboard. +Popup menu at mouse-cursor position +Make the &klipper; pop-up menus appear at the position of the mouse cursor, instead of their default position (in the &kde; Panel). Useful if you use the mouse more than the keyboard. -Save clipboard contents on exit If this option is on, the clipboard history will be saved when &klipper; exits, allowing you to use it next time &klipper; starts. +Save clipboard contents on exit If this option is on, the clipboard history will be saved when &klipper; exits, allowing you to use it next time &klipper; starts. -Remove whitespace when executing actions -If selected, any whitespace (spaces, tabs, &etc;) at the beginning and end of the clipboard contents will be removed before passing the clipboard contents to an application. This is useful, for example, if the clipboard contains a &URL; with spaces which, if opened by a web browser, would cause an error. +Remove whitespace when executing actions +If selected, any whitespace (spaces, tabs, &etc;) at the beginning and end of the clipboard contents will be removed before passing the clipboard contents to an application. This is useful, for example, if the clipboard contains a &URL; with spaces which, if opened by a web browser, would cause an error. -Replay actions on an item selected from history -If this is switched on, selecting an item from the history causes &klipper; to display the actions pop-up on that item, if appropriate. +Replay actions on an item selected from history +If this is switched on, selecting an item from the history causes &klipper; to display the actions pop-up on that item, if appropriate. -Prevent empty clipboard -If selected, the clipboard will never be empty: &klipper; will insert the most recent item from the clipboard history into the clipboard instead of allowing it to be empty. +Prevent empty clipboard +If selected, the clipboard will never be empty: &klipper; will insert the most recent item from the clipboard history into the clipboard instead of allowing it to be empty. -Ignore selection -Sets the clipboard mode. See . +Ignore selection +Sets the clipboard mode. See . - + -Synchronise contents of the clipboard and the selection -Sets the clipboard mode. See . +Synchronise contents of the clipboard and the selection +Sets the clipboard mode. See . - + -Separate clipboard and selection -Sets the clipboard mode. See . +Separate clipboard and selection +Sets the clipboard mode. See . - + -Timeout for Action pop-ups -Set the time that a pop-up menu will remain for if you do nothing with it. +Timeout for Action pop-ups +Set the time that a pop-up menu will remain for if you do nothing with it. -Clipboard history size -Sets the number of items that are stored in the clipboard history. +Clipboard history size +Sets the number of items that are stored in the clipboard history. @@ -407,128 +208,37 @@ selected, the clipboard functions in the &UNIX; mode; if not, the -Actions Options +Actions Options -Editing Expressions/Actions -On the Actions tab, double-click the regular expression or action that you want to edit. An in-place text editing box will appear in which the text can be edited as you wish. Make sure you press Enter when you are done. +Editing Expressions/Actions +On the Actions tab, double-click the regular expression or action that you want to edit. An in-place text editing box will appear in which the text can be edited as you wish. Make sure you press Enter when you are done. -Adding Expressions/Actions -Click the Add Action button to add a regular expression for &klipper; to match. &klipper; uses &Qt;'s QRegExp, which understands most regular expressions as you would use in grep or egrep for instance. -You can add a description of the regular expression type (⪚ HTTP URL) by left clicking in the Description column. - -You can find detailed information about the use of QRegExp regular expressions at http://doc.trolltech.com/qregexp.html#details. Note that &klipper; does not support the wildcard mode mentioned on this page. - -Edit the regular expression as described above. To add a command to execute, right click, select Add Command and edit the command which appears in the tree under the regular expression. - -Note that %s in the command line is replaced with the clipboard contents, ⪚ if your command definition is kedit %s and your clipboard contents are /home/phil/textfile, the command kedit /home/phil/textfile will be run. To include %s in the command line, escape it with a backslash, as so: \%s. +Adding Expressions/Actions +Click the Add Action button to add a regular expression for &klipper; to match. &klipper; uses &Qt;'s QRegExp, which understands most regular expressions as you would use in grep or egrep for instance. +You can add a description of the regular expression type (⪚ HTTP URL) by left clicking in the Description column. + +You can find detailed information about the use of QRegExp regular expressions at http://doc.trolltech.com/qregexp.html#details. Note that &klipper; does not support the wildcard mode mentioned on this page. + +Edit the regular expression as described above. To add a command to execute, right click, select Add Command and edit the command which appears in the tree under the regular expression. + +Note that %s in the command line is replaced with the clipboard contents, ⪚ if your command definition is kedit %s and your clipboard contents are /home/phil/textfile, the command kedit /home/phil/textfile will be run. To include %s in the command line, escape it with a backslash, as so: \%s. -Advanced... -Brings up the Disable Actions for windows of type WM_CLASS dialogue. -Some programs, such as &konqueror;, use the clipboard internally. If you get unwanted &klipper; pop-ups all the time when using a certain application, do the following: +Advanced... +Brings up the Disable Actions for windows of type WM_CLASS dialogue. +Some programs, such as &konqueror;, use the clipboard internally. If you get unwanted &klipper; pop-ups all the time when using a certain application, do the following: -Open the application. -From a terminal, run xprop | grep WM_CLASS and then click on the window of the application you are running. -The first string after the equals sign is the one to enter. +Open the application. +From a terminal, run xprop | grep WM_CLASS and then click on the window of the application you are running. +The first string after the equals sign is the one to enter. -Once the WM_CLASS is added, no more actions will be generated for windows of that application. +Once the WM_CLASS is added, no more actions will be generated for windows of that application. @@ -536,44 +246,23 @@ selected, the clipboard functions in the &UNIX; mode; if not, the -Shortcuts Options +Shortcuts Options -The shortcuts tab allows you to change the keyboard shortcuts which are used to access &klipper; functions. You can change the shortcut to one of three things: +The shortcuts tab allows you to change the keyboard shortcuts which are used to access &klipper; functions. You can change the shortcut to one of three things: -None -The selected action cannot be accessed directly from the keyboard +None +The selected action cannot be accessed directly from the keyboard -Default -The selected action uses &klipper;'s default key. These are the shortcuts referred to in this manual. +Default +The selected action uses &klipper;'s default key. These are the shortcuts referred to in this manual. -Custom -The selected action is assigned to the keys you choose. -To choose a custom key for the action you have selected, click on the representation of a key in the lower right of the screen to activate it, and type the desired key combination on your keyboard, as in any &kde; application. +Custom +The selected action is assigned to the keys you choose. +To choose a custom key for the action you have selected, click on the representation of a key in the lower right of the screen to activate it, and type the desired key combination on your keyboard, as in any &kde; application. @@ -581,87 +270,51 @@ selected, the clipboard functions in the &UNIX; mode; if not, the -Credits and Licence - -&klipper; -Program copyright 1998 Andrew Stanley-Jones asj@cban.com -Program copyright 1998-2000 &Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; -Currently maintained by &Carsten.Pfeiffer; - -Documentation copyright 2000-2003 &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; +Credits and Licence + +&klipper; +Program copyright 1998 Andrew Stanley-Jones asj@cban.com +Program copyright 1998-2000 &Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; +Currently maintained by &Carsten.Pfeiffer; + +Documentation copyright 2000-2003 &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; &underFDL; &underGPL; -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &klipper; +How to obtain &klipper; &install.intro.documentation; -Compilation and Installation -&klipper; should compile and install along with the tdebase package, and appear on your &kde; panel (&kicker;) when you run &kde; 3. If it does not appear, you can start it by selecting Panel MenuAddAppletKlipper in any context menu in &kicker;, the &kde; Panel. +Compilation and Installation +&klipper; should compile and install along with the tdebase package, and appear on your &kde; panel (&kicker;) when you run &kde; 3. If it does not appear, you can start it by selecting Panel MenuAddAppletKlipper in any context menu in &kicker;, the &kde; Panel. -&klipper; icon +&klipper; icon - Screenshot + Screenshot + ]> -The &kmenuedit; Handbook +The &kmenuedit; Handbook -&Milos.Prudek; &Milos.Prudek.mail; - -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Milos.Prudek; &Milos.Prudek.mail; + +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2000 -&Milos.Prudek; +2000 +&Milos.Prudek; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2000-12-14 -0.00.01 +2000-12-14 +0.00.01 -&kmenuedit; allows editing of the &kde; Main menu. +&kmenuedit; allows editing of the &kde; Main menu. -KDE -KDE Menu Editor -kmenuedit -application -program -menu -kicker +KDE +KDE Menu Editor +kmenuedit +application +program +menu +kicker -Introduction - -&kmenuedit; allows editing of &kde; Main menu. - -&kmenuedit; can be started either by right-clicking the K Button, or by choosing Menu Edit from the System submenu of the Main menu. - -&kmenuedit; allows you to: +Introduction + +&kmenuedit; allows editing of &kde; Main menu. + +&kmenuedit; can be started either by right-clicking the K Button, or by choosing Menu Edit from the System submenu of the Main menu. + +&kmenuedit; allows you to: -View and edit current Main menu -Cut, Copy and paste menu items -Create and delete submenus +View and edit current Main menu +Cut, Copy and paste menu items +Create and delete submenus -Using &kmenuedit; +Using &kmenuedit; -The left application panel shows the Main menu structure. When you browse items in the left panel, the right panel shows detailed information for the highlighted menu item. +The left application panel shows the Main menu structure. When you browse items in the left panel, the right panel shows detailed information for the highlighted menu item. -General program information +General program information -Name -This is the name of your program as it appears in the Main menu. It can be different from the real executable name. For instance the name of mc executable is "Midnight Commander". +Name +This is the name of your program as it appears in the Main menu. It can be different from the real executable name. For instance the name of mc executable is "Midnight Commander". -Comment -Describe the program in greater detail in this field. This is entirely optional. +Comment +Describe the program in greater detail in this field. This is entirely optional. -Command -This is the name of the executable program. Make sure that you have permission to run the program. +Command +This is the name of the executable program. Make sure that you have permission to run the program. -Type -This field is similar to the Comment field. Describe the type of your program here. +Type +This field is similar to the Comment field. Describe the type of your program here. -Work Path -Specify the work path of the program. This will be the current path when the program launches. It does not need to be the same as the executable location. +Work Path +Specify the work path of the program. This will be the current path when the program launches. It does not need to be the same as the executable location. -Icon List - Click this icon to display a choice of icons. Choose an icon for your program. +Icon List + Click this icon to display a choice of icons. Choose an icon for your program. -Run in Terminal -You must check this if your program requires terminal emulator in order to run. This mainly applies to console applications. +Run in Terminal +You must check this if your program requires terminal emulator in order to run. This mainly applies to console applications. -Terminal Options -Put all terminal options in this field. +Terminal Options +Put all terminal options in this field. -Run as different user -If you want to run this program as a different user (not you), check this checkbox, and provide the username in the Username field. +Run as different user +If you want to run this program as a different user (not you), check this checkbox, and provide the username in the Username field. -You can assign a special keyboard shortcut to launch your program. +You can assign a special keyboard shortcut to launch your program. -Click the empty button to the right of the Current key checkbox and press the key combination on your keyboard that you want to be assigned to your program. +Click the empty button to the right of the Current key checkbox and press the key combination on your keyboard that you want to be assigned to your program. -A dialogue box will pop up, allowing you to assign a second keybinding to the same item by checking the Alternate button. This might be useful, for example, if you often switch keyboard maps, and some shortcuts are not as convenient to type at all times. +A dialogue box will pop up, allowing you to assign a second keybinding to the same item by checking the Alternate button. This might be useful, for example, if you often switch keyboard maps, and some shortcuts are not as convenient to type at all times. -Click the x to clear the shortcut, if you made a mistake. Check the Multi-Key box if you want to assign a shortcut that uses more than one key. +Click the x to clear the shortcut, if you made a mistake. Check the Multi-Key box if you want to assign a shortcut that uses more than one key. -By default the Auto-Close box is checked, and the dialogue will close when you have selected a keybinding. Uncheck it if you want the dialogue to stay open. +By default the Auto-Close box is checked, and the dialogue will close when you have selected a keybinding. Uncheck it if you want the dialogue to stay open. - + -Menu Reference +Menu Reference - File New Item Adds new menu item. + File New Item Adds new menu item. -File New Submenu -Adds new submenu. +File New Submenu +Adds new submenu. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Quits &kmenuedit;. + &Ctrl;Q File Quit +Quits &kmenuedit;. - &Ctrl;X Edit Cut -Cuts the current menu item to the clipboard. If you want to move menu item, you should first cut it to the clipboard, move to the destination place using the left panel, and use the Paste function to paste the menu item from the clipboard. + &Ctrl;X Edit Cut +Cuts the current menu item to the clipboard. If you want to move menu item, you should first cut it to the clipboard, move to the destination place using the left panel, and use the Paste function to paste the menu item from the clipboard. - &Ctrl;C Edit Copy -Copies the current menu item to the clipboard. You can later use the Paste function to paste the copied menu itemfrom the clipboard to its destination. You can paste the same item many times. + &Ctrl;C Edit Copy +Copies the current menu item to the clipboard. You can later use the Paste function to paste the copied menu itemfrom the clipboard to its destination. You can paste the same item many times. - &Ctrl;V Edit Paste -Paste menu item from the clipboard to currently selected place in the Main menu. You must first use Cut or Copy before you can Paste. + &Ctrl;V Edit Paste +Paste menu item from the clipboard to currently selected place in the Main menu. You must first use Cut or Copy before you can Paste. - Edit Delete -Deletes currently selected menu item. + Edit Delete +Deletes currently selected menu item. &help.menu.documentation; -Glossary +Glossary -Terminal emulator +Terminal emulator -Terminal emulator is simply a windowed shell; this is known as command line window in some other environments. If you want to use the shell, you should know at least a few of the system-level commands for your operating system. +Terminal emulator is simply a windowed shell; this is known as command line window in some other environments. If you want to use the shell, you should know at least a few of the system-level commands for your operating system. -Applet -A small application that occupies very little memory and screen space, and at the same time gives you some useful information or provides a control shortcut. For instance the Clock applet shows current time and date (and even a month diary if you click it), and System Monitor applet shows how busy your machine currently is in real-time. +Applet +A small application that occupies very little memory and screen space, and at the same time gives you some useful information or provides a control shortcut. For instance the Clock applet shows current time and date (and even a month diary if you click it), and System Monitor applet shows how busy your machine currently is in real-time. -Legacy Application +Legacy Application -An X-window application which was not written with &kde; in mind. Such applications run fine in &kde;. However, they are not warned automatically when you shut down your &kde; session. You therefore must not forget to save documents open in these applications before you log out from &kde;. Additionally, many of these applications do not support copying and pasting from &kde; compliant applications. &Netscape; 4.x browser is a prominent example of such application Some GNOME applications may provide limited interoperability with the &kde;.. +An X-window application which was not written with &kde; in mind. Such applications run fine in &kde;. However, they are not warned automatically when you shut down your &kde; session. You therefore must not forget to save documents open in these applications before you log out from &kde;. Additionally, many of these applications do not support copying and pasting from &kde; compliant applications. &Netscape; 4.x browser is a prominent example of such application Some GNOME applications may provide limited interoperability with the &kde;.. -Console Application +Console Application -Application originally written for non-graphic, text oriented environment. Such applications run fine in &kde;. They must run within console emulator, like &konsole;. They are not warned automatically when you shut down your &kde; session. You therefore must not forget to save documents open in these applications before you log out from the &kde;. - -Console applications support copying and pasting from KDE-compliant applications.Simply mark the text in the console application with your mouse, switch to the KDE-compliant application and press &Ctrl; V to paste the text. If you want to copy from &kde; application to a console application, first mark the text with your mouse, press &Ctrl; C, switch to the console application and press the middle button on your mouseIf your mouse does not have a middle button, you must press left and right button at the same time. This is called middle button emulation and it must be supported by your operating system to work.. +Application originally written for non-graphic, text oriented environment. Such applications run fine in &kde;. They must run within console emulator, like &konsole;. They are not warned automatically when you shut down your &kde; session. You therefore must not forget to save documents open in these applications before you log out from the &kde;. + +Console applications support copying and pasting from KDE-compliant applications.Simply mark the text in the console application with your mouse, switch to the KDE-compliant application and press &Ctrl; V to paste the text. If you want to copy from &kde; application to a console application, first mark the text with your mouse, press &Ctrl; C, switch to the console application and press the middle button on your mouseIf your mouse does not have a middle button, you must press left and right button at the same time. This is called middle button emulation and it must be supported by your operating system to work.. @@ -547,47 +201,28 @@ fileref="icon_sets.png" format="PNG"/> -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kmenuedit; -Program copyright © 2002, &Raffaele.Sandrini; +&kmenuedit; +Program copyright © 2002, &Raffaele.Sandrini; -Contributors: +Contributors: -&Matthias.Elter; &Matthias.Elter.mail; - Original Author +&Matthias.Elter; &Matthias.Elter.mail; - Original Author -&Matthias.Ettrich; &Matthias.Ettrich.mail; +&Matthias.Ettrich; &Matthias.Ettrich.mail; -&Daniel.M.Duley; &Daniel.M.Duley.mail; +&Daniel.M.Duley; &Daniel.M.Duley.mail; -&Preston.Brown; &Preston.Brown.mail; +&Preston.Brown; &Preston.Brown.mail; -Documentation copyright © 2000 &Milos.Prudek; +Documentation copyright © 2000 &Milos.Prudek; -Updated for &kde; 3.0 by &Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; 2002 +Updated for &kde; 3.0 by &Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; 2002 -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net &underFDL; &underGPL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/basics.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/basics.docbook index 9ef927158d5..88312563854 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/basics.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/basics.docbook @@ -2,590 +2,174 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-20 3.2 - -&konqueror; Basics - -Like all &kde; applications, &konqueror; is highly configurable. This document describes how &konqueror; behaves with the normal, default, settings. -A three button mouse can be useful when you are running &konqueror; or any other &kde; application. If your mouse only has two buttons then you should be able to set your system up so that you can simulate a &MMB; by pressing both buttons at the same time. -If you are used to having to double-click to perform an action, then take care, because in common with the rest of &kde;, &konqueror; defaults to single-clicking. +2003-10-20 3.2 + +&konqueror; Basics + +Like all &kde; applications, &konqueror; is highly configurable. This document describes how &konqueror; behaves with the normal, default, settings. +A three button mouse can be useful when you are running &konqueror; or any other &kde; application. If your mouse only has two buttons then you should be able to set your system up so that you can simulate a &MMB; by pressing both buttons at the same time. +If you are used to having to double-click to perform an action, then take care, because in common with the rest of &kde;, &konqueror; defaults to single-clicking. -Starting &konqueror; +Starting &konqueror; -Being a combined File Manager and Browser, &konqueror; will automatically switch between the two modes as needed when it is running, but it is convenient to be able to choose which mode is to be used when you start it up. +Being a combined File Manager and Browser, &konqueror; will automatically switch between the two modes as needed when it is running, but it is convenient to be able to choose which mode is to be used when you start it up. -If you have a house shaped icon on the panel or desktop, then left click on it to open &konqueror; as a file manager. - -Or left click on world shaped icon on the panel or desktop to open &konqueror; in browser mode. - -From the K menu, select InternetKonqueror Web Browser to start it as a browser, or Home to launch &konqueror; in file manager mode. - -&Alt;F2 will open a Run Command dialogue box, type konqueror (lower case) and press Enter or the Run button to start in file manager mode, or just enter a &URL; such as http://www.konqueror.org to start &konqueror; as a browser. +If you have a house shaped icon on the panel or desktop, then left click on it to open &konqueror; as a file manager. + +Or left click on world shaped icon on the panel or desktop to open &konqueror; in browser mode. + +From the K menu, select InternetKonqueror Web Browser to start it as a browser, or Home to launch &konqueror; in file manager mode. + +&Alt;F2 will open a Run Command dialogue box, type konqueror (lower case) and press Enter or the Run button to start in file manager mode, or just enter a &URL; such as http://www.konqueror.org to start &konqueror; as a browser. -&konqueror; is also started automatically when you left click on a desktop icon that represents a folder, such as a hard disk drive or the Trash icon. +&konqueror; is also started automatically when you left click on a desktop icon that represents a folder, such as a hard disk drive or the Trash icon. -The Parts of &konqueror; +The Parts of &konqueror; -A brief look at the main parts of &konqueror;'s window: +A brief look at the main parts of &konqueror;'s window: - + -Here's a screenshot of &konqueror; +Here's a screenshot of &konqueror; -The Titlebar is the strip across the top of &konqueror;'s window, and operates in the same way as for other &kde; applications. Right click on the central portion to bring up the neat Titlebar menu. - -The Menubar is the strip containing the names of the drop-down menus. Left click on a name to alternately show and hide that menu, or use &Alt;the underlined letter in the name as a hot key, for example &Alt;E to show the Edit menu. The various menus are described in the Menubar section of this document. - -The Toolbar contains icons for commonly used operations. Left clicking on an icon will activate it. If you have enabled tooltips in the Control Centre Appearance & ThemesStyle dialogue a brief description of what that icon does will appear when you hover the pointer over it. - -Some icons, for example the Up and Back icons in the previous screenshot, have a small black triangle at their bottom right corner. If you hold the &LMB; pressed while the cursor is over this type of icon a small dropdown menu will appear. Right clicking on the Toolbar will bring up the Toolbar Menu which you can use to change the Toolbar's appearance and position. - -The Location Toolbar shows the path to the directory, &URL; or file being viewed. You can type a path or &URL; here and press &Enter; or left click on the Go icon at the right hand end of the Location Toolbar to go to it. The black icon at the left hand end of the Location Toolbar clears the text entry box. - -The Bookmark Toolbar is the area under the Location Toolbar in the previous screenshot. You can add frequently used bookmarks here, see the Organising Your Bookmarks section of this document. - -The Window is the main area of &konqueror; and can show you the contents of a directory, web page, document or image. Using the Window menu you can split &konqueror;'s main window into one or more separate views, useful for drag and drop operations, or set it to contain two or more tabbed views. - -The Status Bar runs across the bottom of the &konqueror;'s window and often shows general information about whatever the mouse pointer is hovering over. If you have split the main window into a number of views you will get an Status Bar for each view, and it will include a small green light at the left hand end to show which is the active view. Right clicking on the Status Bar brings up the Status Bar Right Mouse Button Menu. - -Don't worry if your &konqueror; doesn't look exactly like this screenshot, it is highly configurable. In particular: +The Titlebar is the strip across the top of &konqueror;'s window, and operates in the same way as for other &kde; applications. Right click on the central portion to bring up the neat Titlebar menu. + +The Menubar is the strip containing the names of the drop-down menus. Left click on a name to alternately show and hide that menu, or use &Alt;the underlined letter in the name as a hot key, for example &Alt;E to show the Edit menu. The various menus are described in the Menubar section of this document. + +The Toolbar contains icons for commonly used operations. Left clicking on an icon will activate it. If you have enabled tooltips in the Control Centre Appearance & ThemesStyle dialogue a brief description of what that icon does will appear when you hover the pointer over it. + +Some icons, for example the Up and Back icons in the previous screenshot, have a small black triangle at their bottom right corner. If you hold the &LMB; pressed while the cursor is over this type of icon a small dropdown menu will appear. Right clicking on the Toolbar will bring up the Toolbar Menu which you can use to change the Toolbar's appearance and position. + +The Location Toolbar shows the path to the directory, &URL; or file being viewed. You can type a path or &URL; here and press &Enter; or left click on the Go icon at the right hand end of the Location Toolbar to go to it. The black icon at the left hand end of the Location Toolbar clears the text entry box. + +The Bookmark Toolbar is the area under the Location Toolbar in the previous screenshot. You can add frequently used bookmarks here, see the Organising Your Bookmarks section of this document. + +The Window is the main area of &konqueror; and can show you the contents of a directory, web page, document or image. Using the Window menu you can split &konqueror;'s main window into one or more separate views, useful for drag and drop operations, or set it to contain two or more tabbed views. + +The Status Bar runs across the bottom of the &konqueror;'s window and often shows general information about whatever the mouse pointer is hovering over. If you have split the main window into a number of views you will get an Status Bar for each view, and it will include a small green light at the left hand end to show which is the active view. Right clicking on the Status Bar brings up the Status Bar Right Mouse Button Menu. + +Don't worry if your &konqueror; doesn't look exactly like this screenshot, it is highly configurable. In particular: -You can use the Settings menu to choose whether to show or hide the Menubar, Main Toolbar, Location Toolbar and Bookmark Toolbar, or even to add an Extra Toolbar. -You can also flatten the toolbars by left clicking on the vertical lines at the left hand end of the bars, or move them around by holding the &LMB; down while you drag these bars around. -This screenshot does not show the optional Navigation Panel. +You can use the Settings menu to choose whether to show or hide the Menubar, Main Toolbar, Location Toolbar and Bookmark Toolbar, or even to add an Extra Toolbar. +You can also flatten the toolbars by left clicking on the vertical lines at the left hand end of the bars, or move them around by holding the &LMB; down while you drag these bars around. +This screenshot does not show the optional Navigation Panel. -For more details of how to change &konqueror;'s appearance, see the Configuring &konqueror; section +For more details of how to change &konqueror;'s appearance, see the Configuring &konqueror; section -Tooltips and What's This? - -You can find out a lot about how &konqueror; works without needing to read this entire document if you take advantage of Tooltips and the What's This? feature. - -If Tooltips have been enabled in &kde; (TDE menu Control CentreAppearance & ThemesStyle, Style dialogue) then when you hover the mouse pointer over a Toolbar or Navigation Panel button it should bring up a terse description of what that button does. - -What's This? is invoked by the Menubar HelpWhat's This? item, by &Shift;F1, or by just &LMB; clicking on the question mark near the top right hand corner of &konqueror;'s window. It changes the cursor to show a question mark alongside the arrow. - -When this question mark is visible, a &LMB; click won't actually do anything until you have clicked on a control (or the text alongside it) that supports What's This?, in which case it will display a reasonably comprehensive description of what the control is supposed to do. Most of the dialogue boxes that &konqueror; brings up support the What's This? feature. +Tooltips and What's This? + +You can find out a lot about how &konqueror; works without needing to read this entire document if you take advantage of Tooltips and the What's This? feature. + +If Tooltips have been enabled in &kde; (TDE menu Control CentreAppearance & ThemesStyle, Style dialogue) then when you hover the mouse pointer over a Toolbar or Navigation Panel button it should bring up a terse description of what that button does. + +What's This? is invoked by the Menubar HelpWhat's This? item, by &Shift;F1, or by just &LMB; clicking on the question mark near the top right hand corner of &konqueror;'s window. It changes the cursor to show a question mark alongside the arrow. + +When this question mark is visible, a &LMB; click won't actually do anything until you have clicked on a control (or the text alongside it) that supports What's This?, in which case it will display a reasonably comprehensive description of what the control is supposed to do. Most of the dialogue boxes that &konqueror; brings up support the What's This? feature. -<mousebutton ->Left</mousebutton -> and <mousebutton ->Middle</mousebutton -> Mouse Button Actions - -If you click the &LMB; on an item in &konqueror;'s window that item will be activated. Thus +<mousebutton>Left</mousebutton> and <mousebutton>Middle</mousebutton> Mouse Button Actions + +If you click the &LMB; on an item in &konqueror;'s window that item will be activated. Thus -Left click on an icon in the Toolbar to do whatever that icon is supposed to do. -Left click on an item in the Menubar to make that menu drop down. -Left click on a menu item to do that thing. -Left click on an icon in the Bookmark Toolbar to open that &URL;. -Left click on a link in a web page to make &konqueror; follow that link. -Left click on a folder icon or name and &konqueror; will descend into (show the contents of) that folder. -Left click on a file name or icon and &konqueror; will do whatever it thinks appropriate, based on the file type. In general this means opening HTML pages, or previewing text, image or KOffice files, showing them within &konqueror;'s window (Preview means that you can see the file but not change it). - -&konqueror; decides what the file type is by matching the filename extension against a list of known types. If that fails it tries to guess the type from the file contents. You can change the list of known file types and associated actions with the File Associations page of the SettingsConfigure Konqueror... dialogue. +Left click on an icon in the Toolbar to do whatever that icon is supposed to do. +Left click on an item in the Menubar to make that menu drop down. +Left click on a menu item to do that thing. +Left click on an icon in the Bookmark Toolbar to open that &URL;. +Left click on a link in a web page to make &konqueror; follow that link. +Left click on a folder icon or name and &konqueror; will descend into (show the contents of) that folder. +Left click on a file name or icon and &konqueror; will do whatever it thinks appropriate, based on the file type. In general this means opening HTML pages, or previewing text, image or KOffice files, showing them within &konqueror;'s window (Preview means that you can see the file but not change it). + +&konqueror; decides what the file type is by matching the filename extension against a list of known types. If that fails it tries to guess the type from the file contents. You can change the list of known file types and associated actions with the File Associations page of the SettingsConfigure Konqueror... dialogue. -Clicking the &MMB; on a file or folder name or icon does essentially the same as left clicking except that it usually does it in a new &konqueror; window, unless the Open links in new tab instead of in new window box has been checked in the Behaviour page of the SettingsConfigure Konqueror... dialogue. - -Holding the &Shift; key down while pressing the &MMB; will open the link in the background. -If you click the &MMB; when the mouse cursor is over a blank part of the main view (not over a link or file name or icon) &konqueror; will copy the contents of the clipboard into the Location Toolbar and try to use that as a &URL;. +Clicking the &MMB; on a file or folder name or icon does essentially the same as left clicking except that it usually does it in a new &konqueror; window, unless the Open links in new tab instead of in new window box has been checked in the Behaviour page of the SettingsConfigure Konqueror... dialogue. + +Holding the &Shift; key down while pressing the &MMB; will open the link in the background. +If you click the &MMB; when the mouse cursor is over a blank part of the main view (not over a link or file name or icon) &konqueror; will copy the contents of the clipboard into the Location Toolbar and try to use that as a &URL;. -<mousebutton ->Right</mousebutton -> Mouse Button Menus - -Clicking the &RMB; on almost any part of &konqueror;'s window will bring up an appropriate context menu. - -If you have enabled the Right click goes back in history option in &konqueror;'s configuration settings a simple right click is equivalent to clicking on the Back button. In this case you can access the context menu by moving the mouse with the right button held down. +<mousebutton>Right</mousebutton> Mouse Button Menus + +Clicking the &RMB; on almost any part of &konqueror;'s window will bring up an appropriate context menu. + +If you have enabled the Right click goes back in history option in &konqueror;'s configuration settings a simple right click is equivalent to clicking on the Back button. In this case you can access the context menu by moving the mouse with the right button held down. -On the Titlebar -Right clicking on any free area of the Titlebar brings up the Titlebar Menu, allowing you to control the position of &konqueror;'s window as well as the decoration applied to all &kde; program windows. +On the Titlebar +Right clicking on any free area of the Titlebar brings up the Titlebar Menu, allowing you to control the position of &konqueror;'s window as well as the decoration applied to all &kde; program windows. -On the Main Toolbar -Right click on any free area of the Toolbar to bring up the Toolbar Menu. You can use it to control whether the Toolbar is at the top, bottom, left or right of &konqueror;'s window. You can also use the Toolbar Menu to set the size of the buttons on the Toolbar, and whether they are shown as icons, text or both. +On the Main Toolbar +Right click on any free area of the Toolbar to bring up the Toolbar Menu. You can use it to control whether the Toolbar is at the top, bottom, left or right of &konqueror;'s window. You can also use the Toolbar Menu to set the size of the buttons on the Toolbar, and whether they are shown as icons, text or both. -On the Location Toolbar -Right click in the &URL; entry box area to perform Cut, Copy, Paste or Clear operations in this area, or to change the automatic Text Completion features. +On the Location Toolbar +Right click in the &URL; entry box area to perform Cut, Copy, Paste or Clear operations in this area, or to change the automatic Text Completion features. -On the Bookmark Toolbar -If you have the Bookmark Toolbar showing, then right click on any free part of it to bring up the Bookmark Toolbar Menu which lets you change its position and whether items are shown as text, icons, or both. +On the Bookmark Toolbar +If you have the Bookmark Toolbar showing, then right click on any free part of it to bring up the Bookmark Toolbar Menu which lets you change its position and whether items are shown as text, icons, or both. -Within a View -If you right click on any free area of a view then you will get a menu that contains, among other options, the Up, Back, Forward and Reload navigation commands. +Within a View +If you right click on any free area of a view then you will get a menu that contains, among other options, the Up, Back, Forward and Reload navigation commands. -On a File or Folder -This is a most useful feature. Right clicking on the name or icon of any file or folder not only selects that item but also brings up a menu allowing you to Cut, Move, Copy or Remove the item in various ways, add it to your Bookmarks, open it with the program of your choice or preview it, rename it, or edit the file type or properties. +On a File or Folder +This is a most useful feature. Right clicking on the name or icon of any file or folder not only selects that item but also brings up a menu allowing you to Cut, Move, Copy or Remove the item in various ways, add it to your Bookmarks, open it with the program of your choice or preview it, rename it, or edit the file type or properties. -On the Status Bar -Right click on the Status Bar at the bottom of a window or view to add or remove a view within &konqueror;'s window. +On the Status Bar +Right click on the Status Bar at the bottom of a window or view to add or remove a view within &konqueror;'s window. -Viewing Help, Man and Info Pages - -You can view &kde; Help and &UNIX; Man and Info pages directly in &konqueror;, without having to start up KHelpCentre. - -To view a &kde; Help page, enter help:/application name (for example help:/kmail to view the &kmail; documentation.) into &konqueror;'s Location Toolbar window. - -If you want to read &UNIX; Man pages &konqueror; makes it easy. For example type man:/touch or #touch into the Location Toolbar to see the page for the touch command. - -To browse through &UNIX; Info pages, entering info:/dir takes you to Info's top level directory, then it's just a matter of clicking on the right links to find the page you want. Alternatively, use info:/command name to go straight to the Info page you want. - -Unfortunately, &kde; Help pages are stored in such a way that they cannot be viewed in other browsers. If you really need to do this your only recourse is to go online and visit http://docs.kde.org. +Viewing Help, Man and Info Pages + +You can view &kde; Help and &UNIX; Man and Info pages directly in &konqueror;, without having to start up KHelpCentre. + +To view a &kde; Help page, enter help:/application name (for example help:/kmail to view the &kmail; documentation.) into &konqueror;'s Location Toolbar window. + +If you want to read &UNIX; Man pages &konqueror; makes it easy. For example type man:/touch or #touch into the Location Toolbar to see the page for the touch command. + +To browse through &UNIX; Info pages, entering info:/dir takes you to Info's top level directory, then it's just a matter of clicking on the right links to find the page you want. Alternatively, use info:/command name to go straight to the Info page you want. + +Unfortunately, &kde; Help pages are stored in such a way that they cannot be viewed in other browsers. If you really need to do this your only recourse is to go online and visit http://docs.kde.org. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/bookmarks.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/bookmarks.docbook index f2ce152d90a..3425b85dd10 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/bookmarks.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/bookmarks.docbook @@ -1,235 +1,47 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-11-05 3.2 - -Using Bookmarks - -Although you can use &konqueror;'s bookmarks to record the locations of your own files and folders, they are most useful when you are surfing the Web, letting you build up a list of useful sites. - -To open the Bookmarks menu you may either left click on the Bookmarks menu or use the &Alt;B shortcut. Once the list is visible, you can navigate through it with the arrow keys or with your mouse, then press &Enter; or left click to visit the selected location. - -To add a new item to the list use Bookmarks Add Bookmark or &Ctrl;B or right click on a clear space in the web page or folder view and select Bookmark this Location from the pop up menu. - -The Bookmarks list can contain subfolders containing other bookmarks, you can create these with Bookmarks New Bookmark Folder... . To add a bookmark into a subfolder rather than into the main Bookmark list, select the folder from within the Bookmarks list and use the Add Bookmark item in that folder. - -You can also access your bookmarks from the Navigation Panel. +2003-11-05 3.2 + +Using Bookmarks + +Although you can use &konqueror;'s bookmarks to record the locations of your own files and folders, they are most useful when you are surfing the Web, letting you build up a list of useful sites. + +To open the Bookmarks menu you may either left click on the Bookmarks menu or use the &Alt;B shortcut. Once the list is visible, you can navigate through it with the arrow keys or with your mouse, then press &Enter; or left click to visit the selected location. + +To add a new item to the list use Bookmarks Add Bookmark or &Ctrl;B or right click on a clear space in the web page or folder view and select Bookmark this Location from the pop up menu. + +The Bookmarks list can contain subfolders containing other bookmarks, you can create these with Bookmarks New Bookmark Folder... . To add a bookmark into a subfolder rather than into the main Bookmark list, select the folder from within the Bookmarks list and use the Add Bookmark item in that folder. + +You can also access your bookmarks from the Navigation Panel. -The Bookmark Editor - -The BookmarksEdit Bookmarks option opens the Bookmark Editor. -This shows a tree view of your bookmarks and bookmark subfolders. As is usual for tree views in &kde;, subfolders are shown with a small square at the left of the folder name; if the square contains a + sign left clicking on it will expand the view to show the contents of that subfolder and the + sign will change to -, left clicking on the - sign will collapse the subfolder view. - -To select an item in the list you can left click on it, or you can navigate through the list by using the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to move around, Right arrow to expand a subfolder and Left arrow to collapse it. - -You can move an item to a different place in the list by using the normal Drag and Drop or Cut and Paste methods. The order in which the items appear in the Bookmark Editor is the order they will appear in the Bookmarks drop down list. The Insert Insert Separator option can be used to insert separating lines into the list wherever you wish. - -A new subfolder can be created at the selected point in the list by using the Create New Folder... option in the Insert menu or from the drop down menu you get when you right click on an item in the main part of the window, or with &Ctrl;N - -To change the name of a bookmark or folder select it then press F2 or choose the Rename item from the Edit menu or the pop up menu that appears when you right click on the item. Similarly, you can edit the &URL; by pressing F3 or choosing the Change URL menu item. - -The Bookmark Editor lets you import bookmarks from a range of other browsers into &konqueror;'s bookmark list, putting them into a new folder or replacing all current bookmarks. To do this select Import from the File menu. The FileExport option can be used to export &konqueror;'s bookmarks to a &Netscape; or Mozilla browser. - -If you often use the &Netscape; browser as well as &konqueror;, then rather than importing your &Netscape; bookmarks into &konqueror; it is better to select the Show Netscape Bookmarks in Konqueror Windows item in the Settings menu. If you do this any updates to &Netscape;'s bookmarks are automatically seen by &konqueror;. - -To select which bookmark subfolder is used to hold the Bookmark Toolbar items select the subfolder then choose Set as Toolbar Folder from the Edit menu. - -If you are tidying up your bookmarks and have forgotten what a particular web page is, you can easily open it from within the Bookmark Editor by right clicking on the item and selecting Open in Konqueror from the pop up menu. If you just want to check that the &URL; is still valid select Check Status instead. - -Don't forget to save your changes with FileSave or &Ctrl;S before you leave the Bookmark Editor. - +The Bookmark Editor + +The BookmarksEdit Bookmarks option opens the Bookmark Editor. +This shows a tree view of your bookmarks and bookmark subfolders. As is usual for tree views in &kde;, subfolders are shown with a small square at the left of the folder name; if the square contains a + sign left clicking on it will expand the view to show the contents of that subfolder and the + sign will change to -, left clicking on the - sign will collapse the subfolder view. + +To select an item in the list you can left click on it, or you can navigate through the list by using the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to move around, Right arrow to expand a subfolder and Left arrow to collapse it. + +You can move an item to a different place in the list by using the normal Drag and Drop or Cut and Paste methods. The order in which the items appear in the Bookmark Editor is the order they will appear in the Bookmarks drop down list. The Insert Insert Separator option can be used to insert separating lines into the list wherever you wish. + +A new subfolder can be created at the selected point in the list by using the Create New Folder... option in the Insert menu or from the drop down menu you get when you right click on an item in the main part of the window, or with &Ctrl;N + +To change the name of a bookmark or folder select it then press F2 or choose the Rename item from the Edit menu or the pop up menu that appears when you right click on the item. Similarly, you can edit the &URL; by pressing F3 or choosing the Change URL menu item. + +The Bookmark Editor lets you import bookmarks from a range of other browsers into &konqueror;'s bookmark list, putting them into a new folder or replacing all current bookmarks. To do this select Import from the File menu. The FileExport option can be used to export &konqueror;'s bookmarks to a &Netscape; or Mozilla browser. + +If you often use the &Netscape; browser as well as &konqueror;, then rather than importing your &Netscape; bookmarks into &konqueror; it is better to select the Show Netscape Bookmarks in Konqueror Windows item in the Settings menu. If you do this any updates to &Netscape;'s bookmarks are automatically seen by &konqueror;. + +To select which bookmark subfolder is used to hold the Bookmark Toolbar items select the subfolder then choose Set as Toolbar Folder from the Edit menu. + +If you are tidying up your bookmarks and have forgotten what a particular web page is, you can easily open it from within the Bookmark Editor by right clicking on the item and selecting Open in Konqueror from the pop up menu. If you just want to check that the &URL; is still valid select Check Status instead. + +Don't forget to save your changes with FileSave or &Ctrl;S before you leave the Bookmark Editor. + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/browser.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/browser.docbook index 1590932907e..62bd773a736 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/browser.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/browser.docbook @@ -2,580 +2,189 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-11-05 3.2 +2003-11-05 3.2 -&konqueror; the Web Browser +&konqueror; the Web Browser - + -Browsing www.konqueror.org +Browsing www.konqueror.org -Connecting to the Internet +Connecting to the Internet -Once you are connected to the Internet you can use &konqueror; to browse the Web just as easily as you can use it to handle your local files. Just type a &URL; into the Location Toolbar window, press &Enter;, and you are away! +Once you are connected to the Internet you can use &konqueror; to browse the Web just as easily as you can use it to handle your local files. Just type a &URL; into the Location Toolbar window, press &Enter;, and you are away! -If you use a dial-up modem connection, then you will be using &kppp; or a similar dialler program to make the connection. - -If your machine is connected to a local area network (LAN) that gives you a proxy connection to the Internet then you will have to set &konqueror; up for the proxy connection. This can be done with the Proxy page of the SettingsConfigure Konqueror... dialogue. - -If you are lucky enough to have a high speed cable connection, then the service provider will probably give you an external cable modem which needs an ethernet connection to your machine. Unfortunately the details of how to establish the connection depend on the service provider and to some extent on which Linux/&UNIX; distribution you are using. Some ISPs connect their customers to the Internet through a proxy server, in which case you will have to set up &konqueror; to use it. You may find it useful to search the archives of your distribution's user group mailing list for help. +If you use a dial-up modem connection, then you will be using &kppp; or a similar dialler program to make the connection. + +If your machine is connected to a local area network (LAN) that gives you a proxy connection to the Internet then you will have to set &konqueror; up for the proxy connection. This can be done with the Proxy page of the SettingsConfigure Konqueror... dialogue. + +If you are lucky enough to have a high speed cable connection, then the service provider will probably give you an external cable modem which needs an ethernet connection to your machine. Unfortunately the details of how to establish the connection depend on the service provider and to some extent on which Linux/&UNIX; distribution you are using. Some ISPs connect their customers to the Internet through a proxy server, in which case you will have to set up &konqueror; to use it. You may find it useful to search the archives of your distribution's user group mailing list for help. -An error message such as Unknown Host usually means that &konqueror; cannot find a connection to the Internet or that you have entered an incorrect &URL;. +An error message such as Unknown Host usually means that &konqueror; cannot find a connection to the Internet or that you have entered an incorrect &URL;. -Surfing and Searching - -Once you have a connection to the Internet, you can surf with &konqueror; just as you can with any other browser. - -Type a &URL; into the Location Toolbar window, press &Enter; or left click on the Go button at the right hand end of the Location Toolbar, and &konqueror; will download and display that page. If you have visited the page before, &konqueror;'s Automatic Text Completion feature can help you type the &URL; a second time, or you could look through the History page in the Navigation Panel. If you want to use one of the web's search engines, &konqueror;'s Web Shortcuts feature can make this easier. - -Left click on a link in the page to go there. - -To open a link in a new instance of &konqueror;, leaving the old page still visible, &MMB; click on the link or right click on it and select the Open in New Window option. - -You could also select the multiple view mode with &Ctrl;&Shift;L or the Menubar Window Split View Left/Right option which will let you see different pages at the same time. This can be useful if you are looking through a complicated set of HTML pages, but make sure the little link box at the bottom right hand corner is empty when you are doing this. -Tabbed Browsing will let you hold a number of pages in one &konqueror; window and quickly switch between them with a single mouse click. -To go back to the previous page use the &Alt;Left Arrow shortcut, the Back button on the Toolbar, or the Menubar Go Back option. -Similarly, once you have gone back you can go forward by using &Alt;Right Arrow, the Forward button, or the Menubar Go Forward option. - -If you want to stop the download for any reason then use the Esc key, the Toolbar Stop button or the Menubar View Stop item. - -When you are viewing a web page you should see two new icons in the Toolbar, looking like magnifying glasses with small + and - symbols. Use these to adjust the size of the text in the page if you find it difficult to read. How well this works will depend on how the web page has been constructed. +Surfing and Searching + +Once you have a connection to the Internet, you can surf with &konqueror; just as you can with any other browser. + +Type a &URL; into the Location Toolbar window, press &Enter; or left click on the Go button at the right hand end of the Location Toolbar, and &konqueror; will download and display that page. If you have visited the page before, &konqueror;'s Automatic Text Completion feature can help you type the &URL; a second time, or you could look through the History page in the Navigation Panel. If you want to use one of the web's search engines, &konqueror;'s Web Shortcuts feature can make this easier. + +Left click on a link in the page to go there. + +To open a link in a new instance of &konqueror;, leaving the old page still visible, &MMB; click on the link or right click on it and select the Open in New Window option. + +You could also select the multiple view mode with &Ctrl;&Shift;L or the Menubar Window Split View Left/Right option which will let you see different pages at the same time. This can be useful if you are looking through a complicated set of HTML pages, but make sure the little link box at the bottom right hand corner is empty when you are doing this. +Tabbed Browsing will let you hold a number of pages in one &konqueror; window and quickly switch between them with a single mouse click. +To go back to the previous page use the &Alt;Left Arrow shortcut, the Back button on the Toolbar, or the Menubar Go Back option. +Similarly, once you have gone back you can go forward by using &Alt;Right Arrow, the Forward button, or the Menubar Go Forward option. + +If you want to stop the download for any reason then use the Esc key, the Toolbar Stop button or the Menubar View Stop item. + +When you are viewing a web page you should see two new icons in the Toolbar, looking like magnifying glasses with small + and - symbols. Use these to adjust the size of the text in the page if you find it difficult to read. How well this works will depend on how the web page has been constructed. -Tabbed Browsing -By using this feature you can make &konqueror; load multiple web pages in the same window, and switch between them using tabbed pages. This way, you can preload a page in the background while you carry on reading another. - -To use tabbed browsing, right click on a link and choose Open in New Tab from the drop down menu. The page will be downloaded and displayed as normal, but with tabs across the top of the view, one tab for each page. Left click on a tab to view that page, or you can use the shortcuts &Ctrl;[ and &Ctrl;] to cycle through the tab pages. - -The Open in Background Tab option in the &RMB; menu also downloads the page and shows a new tab for it, but the new page will not be displayed until you left click on the tab. - -If you check the Open links in new tab instead of in new window box in the Web Behaviour page of the SettingsConfigure Konqueror... dialogue, &MMB; clicking on a link will open it in a new tab page and if you hold the &Shift; key down while clicking the &MMB; the link will be opened in a background tab page. - -Right clicking on a tab will bring up a menu with the following options: +Tabbed Browsing +By using this feature you can make &konqueror; load multiple web pages in the same window, and switch between them using tabbed pages. This way, you can preload a page in the background while you carry on reading another. + +To use tabbed browsing, right click on a link and choose Open in New Tab from the drop down menu. The page will be downloaded and displayed as normal, but with tabs across the top of the view, one tab for each page. Left click on a tab to view that page, or you can use the shortcuts &Ctrl;[ and &Ctrl;] to cycle through the tab pages. + +The Open in Background Tab option in the &RMB; menu also downloads the page and shows a new tab for it, but the new page will not be displayed until you left click on the tab. + +If you check the Open links in new tab instead of in new window box in the Web Behaviour page of the SettingsConfigure Konqueror... dialogue, &MMB; clicking on a link will open it in a new tab page and if you hold the &Shift; key down while clicking the &MMB; the link will be opened in a background tab page. + +Right clicking on a tab will bring up a menu with the following options: -New Tab -This opens a new, blank, tabbed page view. You can then download a web page into it by typing the &URL; into the Location Bar or by making a selection from the Bookmark Toolbar or the Navigation Panel history page. +New Tab +This opens a new, blank, tabbed page view. You can then download a web page into it by typing the &URL; into the Location Bar or by making a selection from the Bookmark Toolbar or the Navigation Panel history page. -Duplicate Tab -To create a duplicate tabbed page. +Duplicate Tab +To create a duplicate tabbed page. -Detach Tab -This option removes the selected tabbed page from the current &konqueror; window and opens it in a new instance of &konqueror;. +Detach Tab +This option removes the selected tabbed page from the current &konqueror; window and opens it in a new instance of &konqueror;. -Close Tab -To close the selected tab page. +Close Tab +To close the selected tab page. -Reload -Reloads the content of the current tab. +Reload +Reloads the content of the current tab. -Reload all Tabs -Reloads the content of every tab. +Reload all Tabs +Reloads the content of every tab. -Switch to Tab -Displays a submenu showing all other tabs. Choosing a tab from this list makes it the active tab. +Switch to Tab +Displays a submenu showing all other tabs. Choosing a tab from this list makes it the active tab. -Close Other Tabs -To close all but the selected tab page. +Close Other Tabs +To close all but the selected tab page. -Web Shortcuts If enabled, &konqueror;'s Web Shortcuts feature lets you submit a query directly to a search engine or similar web site without having to visit the site first. For example, entering gg:konqueror into the Location Bar and pressing &Enter; will ask Google to search for items related to &konqueror;. To see what Web Shortcuts are available, and perhaps add your own, use SettingsConfigure Konqueror... to open the Settings dialogue box and click on the Web Shortcuts icon. +Web Shortcuts If enabled, &konqueror;'s Web Shortcuts feature lets you submit a query directly to a search engine or similar web site without having to visit the site first. For example, entering gg:konqueror into the Location Bar and pressing &Enter; will ask Google to search for items related to &konqueror;. To see what Web Shortcuts are available, and perhaps add your own, use SettingsConfigure Konqueror... to open the Settings dialogue box and click on the Web Shortcuts icon. -Browser Identification -When &konqueror; connects to a web site it sends some brief browser identification information, known as the User Agent string. Many web sites use this information to customise the pages that they send back, based on the strengths and weaknesses of different browsers. -Unfortunately, some badly designed sites refuse to work properly unless you are using a browser that the site recognizes as a valid one, even though if given a chance, &konqueror; will work satisfactorily with the vast majority of web pages. -To overcome this problem, you can change the browser identification information that &konqueror; sends for specific sites or domains by selecting Settings Configure Konqueror... to bring up the Settings dialogue box and clicking the Browser Identification icon. -Problems with getting a web page to work properly may also be due to its use of &Java; or JavaScript. If you suspect that this may be the case check that they have been enabled in the Java & JavaScript section of the Settings dialogue box. +Browser Identification +When &konqueror; connects to a web site it sends some brief browser identification information, known as the User Agent string. Many web sites use this information to customise the pages that they send back, based on the strengths and weaknesses of different browsers. +Unfortunately, some badly designed sites refuse to work properly unless you are using a browser that the site recognizes as a valid one, even though if given a chance, &konqueror; will work satisfactorily with the vast majority of web pages. +To overcome this problem, you can change the browser identification information that &konqueror; sends for specific sites or domains by selecting Settings Configure Konqueror... to bring up the Settings dialogue box and clicking the Browser Identification icon. +Problems with getting a web page to work properly may also be due to its use of &Java; or JavaScript. If you suspect that this may be the case check that they have been enabled in the Java & JavaScript section of the Settings dialogue box. -Saving and Printing Web Items - -When you are viewing a web page you can save it (or at least the basic HTML or similar source text) to your local disk with LocationSave As.... If the page you are viewing uses frames, then you will also be given the LocationSave Frame As... option. Left click in the frame you want to save first. - -If the page uses a background image, you can get and save that with the LocationSave Background Image As... option. - -But if what you really want is that glorious picture of the latest Ferrari, then right clicking on the image will give you a drop-down menu with a Save Image As... option. Be sure to respect the owner's copyright, and ask for permission before using any pictures saved this way for anything other than your own viewing pleasure. - -If you right click on a link (which may be a picture) and select Save Link As... from the pop up menu the basic HTML or similar source text will be downloaded and saved on your local disk. - -Right clicking on a link (which may be a picture) and choosing Copy Link Location will copy the &URL; of the link to the clipboard so you can then paste it into, say, an e-mail to a friend telling her about this wonderful new site. - -Right clicking on a picture and choosing Copy Image Location copies the &URL; of the picture to the clipboard. - -To save a complete web page, including images, select Archive Web Page... from the Tools menu. Note that this feature is provided by a plugin and may not have been installed on your system. The web page will be saved as a single file with a .war extension and can be opened by left clicking on the filename in &konqueror; running in File Manager mode. - -Printing a copy of the page you are viewing is easily done with the Menubar Location Print... or Print Frame option or with the Toolbar Print button. +Saving and Printing Web Items + +When you are viewing a web page you can save it (or at least the basic HTML or similar source text) to your local disk with LocationSave As.... If the page you are viewing uses frames, then you will also be given the LocationSave Frame As... option. Left click in the frame you want to save first. + +If the page uses a background image, you can get and save that with the LocationSave Background Image As... option. + +But if what you really want is that glorious picture of the latest Ferrari, then right clicking on the image will give you a drop-down menu with a Save Image As... option. Be sure to respect the owner's copyright, and ask for permission before using any pictures saved this way for anything other than your own viewing pleasure. + +If you right click on a link (which may be a picture) and select Save Link As... from the pop up menu the basic HTML or similar source text will be downloaded and saved on your local disk. + +Right clicking on a link (which may be a picture) and choosing Copy Link Location will copy the &URL; of the link to the clipboard so you can then paste it into, say, an e-mail to a friend telling her about this wonderful new site. + +Right clicking on a picture and choosing Copy Image Location copies the &URL; of the picture to the clipboard. + +To save a complete web page, including images, select Archive Web Page... from the Tools menu. Note that this feature is provided by a plugin and may not have been installed on your system. The web page will be saved as a single file with a .war extension and can be opened by left clicking on the filename in &konqueror; running in File Manager mode. + +Printing a copy of the page you are viewing is easily done with the Menubar Location Print... or Print Frame option or with the Toolbar Print button. -&FTP; - -&FTP;, or File Transfer Protocol, is one of the the earliest, and still perhaps the best, way of transferring files between computers over the Internet. - -With &FTP; you can see files and folders on the distant computer just as if they were on your own system, download them onto your computer using &konqueror;'s normal Copy and Paste or Drag 'n Drop methods and, if allowed, upload files from your machine to the other computer's filesystem. To try it, type the &URL; - -ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde +&FTP; + +&FTP;, or File Transfer Protocol, is one of the the earliest, and still perhaps the best, way of transferring files between computers over the Internet. + +With &FTP; you can see files and folders on the distant computer just as if they were on your own system, download them onto your computer using &konqueror;'s normal Copy and Paste or Drag 'n Drop methods and, if allowed, upload files from your machine to the other computer's filesystem. To try it, type the &URL; + +ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde -into the Location Toolbar and press &Enter;. As long as you are connected to the Internet, and as long as the &kde;'s &FTP; site is not too busy, you should end up seeing the /pub/kde folder at &kde-ftp; - -Although, strictly speaking, &FTP; &URL;s should be entered starting with ftp:// and WWW &URL;s starting with http:// &konqueror; is usually smart enough to figure out what is meant, and insert these characters for you if you leave them out. - -When you access an &FTP; site it will usually need some form of username and password from you. To simplify things, most &FTP; sites that offer files for free downloading will accept the word anonymous as a username and your email address as a password, and to make your life even easier &konqueror; will automatically supply these without troubling you. - -If you try to access an &FTP; site that does not need a proper username or password but which is too busy to accept any more connections, &konqueror; often interprets the busy message as a request for a name and password and will therefore pop up a dialogue box asking you to supply them. - -Sites that are more concerned with security will need a proper username and password, in which case &konqueror; will ask you for them or you can include the username in the &URL; you type into the Location Toolbar, as for example - -ftp://username@ftp.cia.org +into the Location Toolbar and press &Enter;. As long as you are connected to the Internet, and as long as the &kde;'s &FTP; site is not too busy, you should end up seeing the /pub/kde folder at &kde-ftp; + +Although, strictly speaking, &FTP; &URL;s should be entered starting with ftp:// and WWW &URL;s starting with http:// &konqueror; is usually smart enough to figure out what is meant, and insert these characters for you if you leave them out. + +When you access an &FTP; site it will usually need some form of username and password from you. To simplify things, most &FTP; sites that offer files for free downloading will accept the word anonymous as a username and your email address as a password, and to make your life even easier &konqueror; will automatically supply these without troubling you. + +If you try to access an &FTP; site that does not need a proper username or password but which is too busy to accept any more connections, &konqueror; often interprets the busy message as a request for a name and password and will therefore pop up a dialogue box asking you to supply them. + +Sites that are more concerned with security will need a proper username and password, in which case &konqueror; will ask you for them or you can include the username in the &URL; you type into the Location Toolbar, as for example + +ftp://username@ftp.cia.org -&konqueror; will then prompt you for the password. +&konqueror; will then prompt you for the password. -&konqueror; can also support automatic logins as specified in a .netrc file. Details of how to enable this feature are given at http://www.konqueror.org/faq.html#netrc +&konqueror; can also support automatic logins as specified in a .netrc file. Details of how to enable this feature are given at http://www.konqueror.org/faq.html#netrc -&URL;s with Port Numbers -If you specify a port number in your &URL;, as in for example http://intranet.corp.com:1080, you might get the error message Access to restricted port in POST denied. This is done for security reasons. If you nevertheless need to access a server on this port, just add a key line +&URL;s with Port Numbers +If you specify a port number in your &URL;, as in for example http://intranet.corp.com:1080, you might get the error message Access to restricted port in POST denied. This is done for security reasons. If you nevertheless need to access a server on this port, just add a key line OverridePorts=CommaSeparatedListOfAllowedPorts - to $TDEDIR/share/config/tdeio_httprc or ~/.trinity/share/config/tdeio_httprc. -For example OverridePorts=23,15 - (it should not include any embedded spaces). -&konqueror; will reject the following ports (the list is hardcoded in tdelibs/tdeio/tdeio/job.cpp): -1, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 25, 37, 42, 43, 53, 77, 79, 87, 95, 101, 102, 103, 104, 109, 110, 111, 113, 115, 117, 119, 123, 135, 139, 143, 179, 389, 512, 513, 514, 515, 526, 530, 531, 532, 540, 556, 587, 601, 989, 990, 992, 993, 995, 1080, 2049, 4045, 6000, 6667 + to $TDEDIR/share/config/tdeio_httprc or ~/.trinity/share/config/tdeio_httprc. +For example OverridePorts=23,15 + (it should not include any embedded spaces). +&konqueror; will reject the following ports (the list is hardcoded in tdelibs/tdeio/tdeio/job.cpp): +1, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 25, 37, 42, 43, 53, 77, 79, 87, 95, 101, 102, 103, 104, 109, 110, 111, 113, 115, 117, 119, 123, 135, 139, 143, 179, 389, 512, 513, 514, 515, 526, 530, 531, 532, 540, 556, 587, 601, 989, 990, 992, 993, 995, 1080, 2049, 4045, 6000, 6667 diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/commands.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/commands.docbook index 60410bfd441..1fa5132d764 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/commands.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/commands.docbook @@ -2,81 +2,38 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-11-06 3.2 - -Command Reference - -The shortcut key combinations shown in this chapter are the default ones. They can of course be changed. +2003-11-06 3.2 + +Command Reference + +The shortcut key combinations shown in this chapter are the default ones. They can of course be changed. -Special Shortcuts -There are some useful shortcuts that are not shown in any of the menus: +Special Shortcuts +There are some useful shortcuts that are not shown in any of the menus: -F6 +F6 -Sets the focus to the text entry box in the Location Toolbar. +Sets the focus to the text entry box in the Location Toolbar. -&Ctrl;] +&Ctrl;] -Activate the next tab page. +Activate the next tab page. -&Ctrl;[ +&Ctrl;[ -Activate the previous tab page. +Activate the previous tab page. @@ -86,273 +43,77 @@ -The Menubar Note that some menu entries only appear when they are applicable to the file you currently have open in &konqueror;. For example, the EditFind... item will not appear when you are viewing the contents of a directory. +The Menubar Note that some menu entries only appear when they are applicable to the file you currently have open in &konqueror;. For example, the EditFind... item will not appear when you are viewing the contents of a directory. -The <guimenu ->Location</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Location</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;N Location New Window -Open another &konqueror; window. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;N Location New Tab -Open another &konqueror; tab, containing a blank page. - - - - &Ctrl;D Location Duplicate Window -Open another &konqueror; window, duplicating the current one. - - - - &Ctrl;O Location Open Location... -Open a folder or file by entering its path (for example /home/pam or /home/pam/fred.txt) in a simple dialogue box. - - - -Location Send Link -Send an email containing a link to the current location. - - - -Location Send File -Send an email containing the selected file as an attachment. - - - - -Location Save Background Image As... + &Ctrl;N Location New Window +Open another &konqueror; window. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;N Location New Tab +Open another &konqueror; tab, containing a blank page. + + + + &Ctrl;D Location Duplicate Window +Open another &konqueror; window, duplicating the current one. + + + + &Ctrl;O Location Open Location... +Open a folder or file by entering its path (for example /home/pam or /home/pam/fred.txt) in a simple dialogue box. + + + +Location Send Link +Send an email containing a link to the current location. + + + +Location Send File +Send an email containing the selected file as an attachment. + + + + +Location Save Background Image As... -Only applies if you are viewing a web page with a background image. Opens the Save As dialogue box to let you save the background image file to your own computer. +Only applies if you are viewing a web page with a background image. Opens the Save As dialogue box to let you save the background image file to your own computer. - &Ctrl;S Location Save As... -Only applies if you are viewing a document or web page, uses the Save As... dialogue box to let you save a copy to your own computer. - - - -Location Save Frame As... -Similar to Save As... but for use with a web site that uses frames. - - - - &Ctrl;P Location Print... -Print. - - - -Location Print Frame -Print selected frame of a Web page. - - - -Location Open With Netscape/Mozilla -Open the web page you are viewing in &konqueror; with &Netscape;/Mozilla as well. - - - - &Ctrl;Q Location Quit -Close down this instance of &konqueror;. + &Ctrl;S Location Save As... +Only applies if you are viewing a document or web page, uses the Save As... dialogue box to let you save a copy to your own computer. + + + +Location Save Frame As... +Similar to Save As... but for use with a web site that uses frames. + + + + &Ctrl;P Location Print... +Print. + + + +Location Print Frame +Print selected frame of a Web page. + + + +Location Open With Netscape/Mozilla +Open the web page you are viewing in &konqueror; with &Netscape;/Mozilla as well. + + + + &Ctrl;Q Location Quit +Close down this instance of &konqueror;. @@ -360,467 +121,118 @@ -The <guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> Menu - -Most items in the Menubar Edit menu can also be found by &RMB; clicking on a free area of a view. +The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu + +Most items in the Menubar Edit menu can also be found by &RMB; clicking on a free area of a view. - &Ctrl;Z Edit Undo -Sometimes lets you reverse a mistaken action. - - - - &Ctrl;X Edit Cut -Puts selected item(s) into the clipboard. If you then do a a Paste the item(s) will be moved from the original location to the new one. - - - - &Ctrl;C Edit Copy -Copy selected item(s) to the clipboard. - - - - &Ctrl;V Edit Paste -Paste item(s) from clipboard to the currently viewed folder. - - - -F2 Edit Rename -Lets you rename a file or folder without having to open the Properties... dialogue box. - - - - -Delete Edit Move to Trash -Move selected item(s) to the Wastebin folder. - - - - &Shift;Delete Edit Delete -Delete the selected item(s). - - - -F7 Edit Copy Files -Copy the selected item(s) to another folder. - - - -Edit Move Files -Move the selected item(s) to another folder. - - - -Edit Create New -Create a link to an application, URL, Floppy or &CD-ROM; device, or create a new Folder or text or HTML file. See the Create New...section for more details. - - - -Edit Edit File Type... -Open the Edit File Type dialogue box - - - -Edit Properties.. -Open the Edit Properties dialogue box - - - -EditSelection -Contains a number of options for changing the items selected in the &konqueror; window: - - &Ctrl;+ Edit Selection Select... -Together with the Unselect..., Unselect All and Invert Selection commands, this provides an easy and powerful way of selecting multiple files. -It brings up a simple dialogue box where you can enter a file name using the wild card characters * and ?, for example entering *.html will select all files ending with .html while ?a* will select all files which have the letter a as the second character in their filename. - - - - &Ctrl;- Edit Selection Unselect... -Unselect files or folders via a dialogue similar to the one used by Select.... - - - - &Ctrl;U Edit Selection Unselect All -Unselect all selected files or folders. - - - - &Ctrl;* Edit Selection Invert Selection -Invert current selection. - - - - &Ctrl;A Edit Selection Select All -Selects all text in a HTML page or in a text page being previewed, you can then Copy it and Paste it into a text editor. + &Ctrl;Z Edit Undo +Sometimes lets you reverse a mistaken action. + + + + &Ctrl;X Edit Cut +Puts selected item(s) into the clipboard. If you then do a a Paste the item(s) will be moved from the original location to the new one. + + + + &Ctrl;C Edit Copy +Copy selected item(s) to the clipboard. + + + + &Ctrl;V Edit Paste +Paste item(s) from clipboard to the currently viewed folder. + + + +F2 Edit Rename +Lets you rename a file or folder without having to open the Properties... dialogue box. + + + + +Delete Edit Move to Trash +Move selected item(s) to the Wastebin folder. + + + + &Shift;Delete Edit Delete +Delete the selected item(s). + + + +F7 Edit Copy Files +Copy the selected item(s) to another folder. + + + +Edit Move Files +Move the selected item(s) to another folder. + + + +Edit Create New +Create a link to an application, URL, Floppy or &CD-ROM; device, or create a new Folder or text or HTML file. See the Create New...section for more details. + + + +Edit Edit File Type... +Open the Edit File Type dialogue box + + + +Edit Properties.. +Open the Edit Properties dialogue box + + + +EditSelection +Contains a number of options for changing the items selected in the &konqueror; window: + + &Ctrl;+ Edit Selection Select... +Together with the Unselect..., Unselect All and Invert Selection commands, this provides an easy and powerful way of selecting multiple files. +It brings up a simple dialogue box where you can enter a file name using the wild card characters * and ?, for example entering *.html will select all files ending with .html while ?a* will select all files which have the letter a as the second character in their filename. + + + + &Ctrl;- Edit Selection Unselect... +Unselect files or folders via a dialogue similar to the one used by Select.... + + + + &Ctrl;U Edit Selection Unselect All +Unselect all selected files or folders. + + + + &Ctrl;* Edit Selection Invert Selection +Invert current selection. + + + + &Ctrl;A Edit Selection Select All +Selects all text in a HTML page or in a text page being previewed, you can then Copy it and Paste it into a text editor. - &Ctrl;F Edit Find... -Find a text string in a text page you are previewing or in an HTML page. - - - -F3 Edit Find Next -Find the next occurrence of the text string in the text or HTML page. - - - -Edit Go to Line... -Go to a particular line number in a text page you are previewing. + &Ctrl;F Edit Find... +Find a text string in a text page you are previewing or in an HTML page. + + + +F3 Edit Find Next +Find the next occurrence of the text string in the text or HTML page. + + + +Edit Go to Line... +Go to a particular line number in a text page you are previewing. @@ -829,367 +241,114 @@ -The <guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu -View View Mode... -Selects Icon, MultiColumn, Tree, Detailed List or Text view mode. - - - -View Use index.html -If a selected folder contains a file index.html, it will be opened as a web page rather than showing the folder as a list of files. - - - -View Lock to current location -Lock to current location. +View View Mode... +Selects Icon, MultiColumn, Tree, Detailed List or Text view mode. + + + +View Use index.html +If a selected folder contains a file index.html, it will be opened as a web page rather than showing the folder as a list of files. + + + +View Lock to current location +Lock to current location. -View Unlock all views -Unlock all views. - - - -View Link View -Link current view to others in a multiple view window. - - - -F5 View Reload -Reload. +View Unlock all views +Unlock all views. + + + +View Link View +Link current view to others in a multiple view window. + + + +F5 View Reload +Reload. -Esc View Stop -Stop load (particularly useful when web browsing). - - - -View Icon Size -Select size of icons used when viewing a folder in Icon Mode. - - - -View Sort -Choose order in which items are presented in the window when in Icon or MultiColumn View mode. +Esc View Stop +Stop load (particularly useful when web browsing). + + + +View Icon Size +Select size of icons used when viewing a folder in Icon Mode. + + + +View Sort +Choose order in which items are presented in the window when in Icon or MultiColumn View mode. -View Case Insensitive Sort -Choose whether the sort order in Tree, Detailed List or Text View modes is case sensitive. - - - -&Ctrl;U View View Document Source -View document source text. -Only available if you are viewing a document or HTML page. +View Case Insensitive Sort +Choose whether the sort order in Tree, Detailed List or Text View modes is case sensitive. + + + +&Ctrl;U View View Document Source +View document source text. +Only available if you are viewing a document or HTML page. -View View Frame Source -View frame source text -Only applies if you are viewing a web site that uses frames. Similar to View Document Source. +View View Frame Source +View frame source text +Only applies if you are viewing a web site that uses frames. Similar to View Document Source. -&Ctrl;I View View Document Information -View document information, such as title, &URL;, and &HTTP; headers used in retrieving the document. -Only available if you are viewing an HTML page. +&Ctrl;I View View Document Information +View document information, such as title, &URL;, and &HTTP; headers used in retrieving the document. +Only available if you are viewing an HTML page. -View Security... -Tells you whether the current browser connection is secured with SSL and lets you bring up the Cryptography Configuration... dialogue box. Left clicking on the Menubar padlock icon does the same thing. - - -View Set Encoding -Set encoding -Allows you to choose the character encoding used to display HTML pages. Auto is usually the best choice. - - - -View Preview -Lets you choose to show thumbnails of images, text files or HTML pages instead of the normal icons in Icon or MultiColumn View modes. - - - -View Show Hidden Files -Show hidden (dot) files. - - - -View Show details... -Lets you choose which file and folder details are shown in Tree, Detailed List and Text views. - - - - -View Background Colour... -Select background colour for the File Manager mode. - - - -View Background Image... -Select background image for the File Manager mode. +View Security... +Tells you whether the current browser connection is secured with SSL and lets you bring up the Cryptography Configuration... dialogue box. Left clicking on the Menubar padlock icon does the same thing. + + +View Set Encoding +Set encoding +Allows you to choose the character encoding used to display HTML pages. Auto is usually the best choice. + + + +View Preview +Lets you choose to show thumbnails of images, text files or HTML pages instead of the normal icons in Icon or MultiColumn View modes. + + + +View Show Hidden Files +Show hidden (dot) files. + + + +View Show details... +Lets you choose which file and folder details are shown in Tree, Detailed List and Text views. + + + + +View Background Colour... +Select background colour for the File Manager mode. + + + +View Background Image... +Select background image for the File Manager mode. @@ -1197,175 +356,54 @@ -The <guimenu ->Go</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Go</guimenu> Menu - &Alt;Up Arrow Go Up -Go up a level in the folder hierarchy. - - - - &Alt;Left Arrow Go Back -Go back to the previous view. - - - - &Alt;Right Arrow Go Forward -You can only go forward if you've just gone back. - - - - &Ctrl;Home Go Home URL -Go to your home folder. - - - -Go Applications -Open the folder holding your applications. - - - -Go Trash -Open your Trash folder in a separate window. - - - -Go Templates -Open the Templates folder in a separate window. - - - -Go Autostart -Open your Autostart folder in a separate window. - - - -Go Most Often Visited + &Alt;Up Arrow Go Up +Go up a level in the folder hierarchy. + + + + &Alt;Left Arrow Go Back +Go back to the previous view. + + + + &Alt;Right Arrow Go Forward +You can only go forward if you've just gone back. + + + + &Ctrl;Home Go Home URL +Go to your home folder. + + + +Go Applications +Open the folder holding your applications. + + + +Go Trash +Open your Trash folder in a separate window. + + + +Go Templates +Open the Templates folder in a separate window. + + + +Go Autostart +Open your Autostart folder in a separate window. + + + +Go Most Often Visited -Displays a submenu showing the &URL;s you visit most often. Selecting one of these will make &konqueror; open that &URL;. +Displays a submenu showing the &URL;s you visit most often. Selecting one of these will make &konqueror; open that &URL;. @@ -1374,389 +412,126 @@ -The <guimenu ->Bookmarks</guimenu -> Menu - -See the section Using Bookmarks in this manual for a fuller description of these menu items. +The <guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu> Menu + +See the section Using Bookmarks in this manual for a fuller description of these menu items. - &Ctrl;B Bookmarks Add Bookmark -Add current selection to your bookmarks. - - - -Bookmarks Bookmark Tabs as Folder... + &Ctrl;B Bookmarks Add Bookmark +Add current selection to your bookmarks. + + + +Bookmarks Bookmark Tabs as Folder... -Create a bookmark folder containing links to all of the &URL;s currently open in &konqueror; tabs. +Create a bookmark folder containing links to all of the &URL;s currently open in &konqueror; tabs. -Bookmarks Edit Bookmarks... -Open the Bookmark Editor. - - - -Bookmarks New Bookmark Folder... -Create a new folder in your Bookmarks folder. +Bookmarks Edit Bookmarks... +Open the Bookmark Editor. + + + +Bookmarks New Bookmark Folder... +Create a new folder in your Bookmarks folder. -The <guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu - &Alt;F2 Tools Run Command... -Run a program by entering its name in a simple dialogue box. - - - - &Ctrl;T Tools Open Terminal -Open a &konsole; terminal window. - - - -Tools Find File... -Open the &kfind; application. + &Alt;F2 Tools Run Command... +Run a program by entering its name in a simple dialogue box. + + + + &Ctrl;T Tools Open Terminal +Open a &konsole; terminal window. + + + +Tools Find File... +Open the &kfind; application. -If you have &konqueror; plugins installed there will be additional entries in the Tools menu. See the &konqueror; Plugins chapter for further details. +If you have &konqueror; plugins installed there will be additional entries in the Tools menu. See the &konqueror; Plugins chapter for further details. -The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu - -See also the section Saving Settings and Profiles. +The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu + +See also the section Saving Settings and Profiles. - &Ctrl;M Settings Show Menubar -Show/Hide the menubar. - - - -Settings Toolbars -Opens a sub menu where you can choose to show or hide the various Toolbars. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift; F Settings Full Screen Mode + &Ctrl;M Settings Show Menubar +Show/Hide the menubar. + + + +Settings Toolbars +Opens a sub menu where you can choose to show or hide the various Toolbars. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift; F Settings Full Screen Mode -Changes &konqueror; to full screen mode, in which the &konqueror; window takes up the whole screen, and does not have the usual window decorations. To exit full screen mode, click on the Exit Full Screen Mode icon on the toolbar, or press &Ctrl;&Shift; F. +Changes &konqueror; to full screen mode, in which the &konqueror; window takes up the whole screen, and does not have the usual window decorations. To exit full screen mode, click on the Exit Full Screen Mode icon on the toolbar, or press &Ctrl;&Shift; F. -Settings View Properties Saved in Folder -Save View properties to current folder. If this is selected, a .directory file will be written in the current directory storing the settings you last used to view the directory. These settings are then loaded when you open the directory in &konqueror;. - - - -Settings Remove Folder Properties -Remove settings stored in folder by View Properties Saved in Folder. - - - -Settings Load View Profile -Load the settings associated with a particular view profile. - - - -Settings Save View Profile "ProfileName"... -Save the current settings to the current view profile. - - - -Settings Configure View Profiles... -Lets you change an existing view profile or create a new one. - - - -Settings Configure Shortcuts... Lets you see and change &konqueror;'s shortcut key bindings, i.e. the associations between actions such as Copy and keys or combinations of keys such a &Ctrl;V. If you do this take care not to duplicate an existing shortcut. - - - -Settings Configure Toolbars... Lets you configure the Main, Extra and Location Toolbars. See the section Changing Bars. - - -Settings Configure &konqueror;... -Lets you configure the File manager, File Associations, Browser, Internet Keywords, Cookies, Proxies, Cryptography, User Agent, or Toolbars by bringing up the appropriate dialogue box. - - - -Settings Configure Spell Checking... +Settings View Properties Saved in Folder +Save View properties to current folder. If this is selected, a .directory file will be written in the current directory storing the settings you last used to view the directory. These settings are then loaded when you open the directory in &konqueror;. + + + +Settings Remove Folder Properties +Remove settings stored in folder by View Properties Saved in Folder. + + + +Settings Load View Profile +Load the settings associated with a particular view profile. + + + +Settings Save View Profile "ProfileName"... +Save the current settings to the current view profile. + + + +Settings Configure View Profiles... +Lets you change an existing view profile or create a new one. + + + +Settings Configure Shortcuts... Lets you see and change &konqueror;'s shortcut key bindings, i.e. the associations between actions such as Copy and keys or combinations of keys such a &Ctrl;V. If you do this take care not to duplicate an existing shortcut. + + + +Settings Configure Toolbars... Lets you configure the Main, Extra and Location Toolbars. See the section Changing Bars. + + +Settings Configure &konqueror;... +Lets you configure the File manager, File Associations, Browser, Internet Keywords, Cookies, Proxies, Cryptography, User Agent, or Toolbars by bringing up the appropriate dialogue box. + + + +Settings Configure Spell Checking... -Displays the spell checking configuration dialogue box, in which you can change settings associated with spell checking in &konqueror;. +Displays the spell checking configuration dialogue box, in which you can change settings associated with spell checking in &konqueror;. @@ -1766,236 +541,63 @@ -The <guimenu ->Window</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Window</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;&Shift;L Window Split View Left/Right -Split View Left/Right. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;T Window Split View Top/Bottom -Split View Top/Bottom. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;R Window Remove Active View -Remove Active View. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;N Window New Tab -Open a new, empty, tab page. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;D Window Duplicate Current Tab -Open a duplicate tab page. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;B Window Detach Current Tab -Show the current tab page in a new instance of &konqueror;. - - - - &Ctrl;W Window Close Current Tab -Close the current tab page. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;Left Window Move Tab Left -Move the current tab one place left in the list of tabs. - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;Left Window Move Tab Right -Move the current tab one place right in the list of tabs. - - - -Window Show Terminal Emulator -Open a small text terminal view at the bottom of the main window. - - - - F9 Window Show Navigation Panel -Toggles the display of the &konqueror; navigation panel. See . + &Ctrl;&Shift;L Window Split View Left/Right +Split View Left/Right. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;T Window Split View Top/Bottom +Split View Top/Bottom. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;R Window Remove Active View +Remove Active View. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;N Window New Tab +Open a new, empty, tab page. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;D Window Duplicate Current Tab +Open a duplicate tab page. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;B Window Detach Current Tab +Show the current tab page in a new instance of &konqueror;. + + + + &Ctrl;W Window Close Current Tab +Close the current tab page. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;Left Window Move Tab Left +Move the current tab one place left in the list of tabs. + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;Left Window Move Tab Right +Move the current tab one place right in the list of tabs. + + + +Window Show Terminal Emulator +Open a small text terminal view at the bottom of the main window. + + + + F9 Window Show Navigation Panel +Toggles the display of the &konqueror; navigation panel. See . @@ -2003,111 +605,38 @@ -The <guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu -Help &konqueror; Handbook -View this document. - - - - &Shift;F1 Help What's This? -Draws a question mark (?) beside the mouse pointer, clicking on a window item such as the Stop button will then display a brief explanation. See Tooltips and What's This? . - - - -Help &konqueror; Introduction -Revisit the introductory pages that you got when &konqueror; was first started. - - - -Help Report Bug... -Report bug. - - - -Help About &konqueror;... -Display some brief information about &konqueror;'s version number, authors and licence agreement. - - - -Help About KDE... -Show some information about the version of &kde; that you are running. +Help &konqueror; Handbook +View this document. + + + + &Shift;F1 Help What's This? +Draws a question mark (?) beside the mouse pointer, clicking on a window item such as the Stop button will then display a brief explanation. See Tooltips and What's This? . + + + +Help &konqueror; Introduction +Revisit the introductory pages that you got when &konqueror; was first started. + + + +Help Report Bug... +Report bug. + + + +Help About &konqueror;... +Display some brief information about &konqueror;'s version number, authors and licence agreement. + + + +Help About KDE... +Show some information about the version of &kde; that you are running. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/config.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/config.docbook index 473ab9af051..e0896d4091a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/config.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/config.docbook @@ -2,188 +2,68 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-11-06 3.2 +2003-11-06 3.2 -Configuring &konqueror; +Configuring &konqueror; -In common with the rest of &kde;, &konqueror; is highly configurable, so you can really get the look and feel that best fits your needs and wishes. +In common with the rest of &kde;, &konqueror; is highly configurable, so you can really get the look and feel that best fits your needs and wishes. -Toolbars - -When &kde; is newly installed, &konqueror;'s window contains a Menubar, Main and Location Toolbars and possibly a Bookmark Toolbar. - -Maybe you don't need all these toolbars. To hide one of them, go into the SettingsToolbars menu and uncheck its box. To show a hidden toolbar, just check the box. - -The Menubar itself can be toggled on and off with the shortcut key combination &Ctrl;M. +Toolbars + +When &kde; is newly installed, &konqueror;'s window contains a Menubar, Main and Location Toolbars and possibly a Bookmark Toolbar. + +Maybe you don't need all these toolbars. To hide one of them, go into the SettingsToolbars menu and uncheck its box. To show a hidden toolbar, just check the box. + +The Menubar itself can be toggled on and off with the shortcut key combination &Ctrl;M. -On the left hand end of each bar you can see some vertical lines. By &LMB; clicking on them, you flatten the bar, meaning that it is hidden but can be quickly restored by clicking on the now horizontal lines. You can also drag a bar into a new position with these lines. - -If you right click on a Toolbar, you will get a menu to configure this bar. You can choose the orientation, text position and icon size - -The icons shown in the various bars can be changed by using the Settings Configure Toolbars... option, which brings up the Configure Toolbars dialogue box. The Main and Extra Toolbars are divided into sections, such as Main Toolbar <&konqueror;>, Main Toolbar <tdehtmlpart> and Extra Toolbar <tdehtmlsettingsplugin>. The number and type of these sections will depend on whether &konqueror; is in Web Browser or File Manager mode and whether you have &konqueror; plugins installed. +On the left hand end of each bar you can see some vertical lines. By &LMB; clicking on them, you flatten the bar, meaning that it is hidden but can be quickly restored by clicking on the now horizontal lines. You can also drag a bar into a new position with these lines. + +If you right click on a Toolbar, you will get a menu to configure this bar. You can choose the orientation, text position and icon size + +The icons shown in the various bars can be changed by using the Settings Configure Toolbars... option, which brings up the Configure Toolbars dialogue box. The Main and Extra Toolbars are divided into sections, such as Main Toolbar <&konqueror;>, Main Toolbar <tdehtmlpart> and Extra Toolbar <tdehtmlsettingsplugin>. The number and type of these sections will depend on whether &konqueror; is in Web Browser or File Manager mode and whether you have &konqueror; plugins installed. -Shortcuts -To change the shortcut key arrangements used by &konqueror; select SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... . This will launch a dialogue box as shown below. +Shortcuts +To change the shortcut key arrangements used by &konqueror; select SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... . This will launch a dialogue box as shown below. -Shortcut config screenshot 1 +Shortcut config screenshot 1 -Search through the combo box to find the action you want to add or change the shortcut keys for and select it by left clicking on the name. You will then be able to change the shortcut by selecting the None, Default or Custom radio button or by clicking on the large button in the Shortcut for Selected Action area. -The Define Shortcut dialogue box will then open. +Search through the combo box to find the action you want to add or change the shortcut keys for and select it by left clicking on the name. You will then be able to change the shortcut by selecting the None, Default or Custom radio button or by clicking on the large button in the Shortcut for Selected Action area. +The Define Shortcut dialogue box will then open. -Shortcut config screenshot 2 +Shortcut config screenshot 2 -Choose whether you want to change the Primary or Alternate shortcut then press the key combination you want to act as the shortcut, for example &Ctrl;&Shift;S. If the Auto-Close box is checked the dialogue will vanish as soon as you enter the key combination, otherwise it will remain until you press OK or Cancel. Clicking on the little black icon with a white cross in it clears the shortcut. +Choose whether you want to change the Primary or Alternate shortcut then press the key combination you want to act as the shortcut, for example &Ctrl;&Shift;S. If the Auto-Close box is checked the dialogue will vanish as soon as you enter the key combination, otherwise it will remain until you press OK or Cancel. Clicking on the little black icon with a white cross in it clears the shortcut. -User Defined Menus -You can add your own pop up menu to &konqueror; so that pressing one key combination will make the menu appear then pressing a second key, or using the Up arrow and Down arrow keys and pressing Enter, will select an item from it. -To do this add a Custom shortcut for each of the actions you want to appear in the menu and in the Define Shortcut dialogue check the Multi-Key box, press the key combination that you want to bring up your new menu then, separately, press the key that will choose that item from the menu. +User Defined Menus +You can add your own pop up menu to &konqueror; so that pressing one key combination will make the menu appear then pressing a second key, or using the Up arrow and Down arrow keys and pressing Enter, will select an item from it. +To do this add a Custom shortcut for each of the actions you want to appear in the menu and in the Define Shortcut dialogue check the Multi-Key box, press the key combination that you want to bring up your new menu then, separately, press the key that will choose that item from the menu. -Other Settings -Selecting Settings Configure Konqueror... brings up a dialogue box which you can use to control most aspects of &konqueror;'s behaviour. It contains several sections which are selected by left clicking on one of the icons at the left of the dialogue box. -Pressing the Help button will give you detailed instructions about how to use each of these sections, or you can use the What's This? feature. +Other Settings +Selecting Settings Configure Konqueror... brings up a dialogue box which you can use to control most aspects of &konqueror;'s behaviour. It contains several sections which are selected by left clicking on one of the icons at the left of the dialogue box. +Pressing the Help button will give you detailed instructions about how to use each of these sections, or you can use the What's This? feature. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/credits.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/credits.docbook index 88f895f231f..921b8e36475 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/credits.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/credits.docbook @@ -2,307 +2,154 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-11-06 3.2 +2003-11-06 3.2 -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&konqueror;. Program copyright 1999-2003, the &konqueror; developers: +&konqueror;. Program copyright 1999-2003, the &konqueror; developers: -&David.Faure; &David.Faure.mail; -developer (parts, I/O lib) and maintainer +&David.Faure; &David.Faure.mail; +developer (parts, I/O lib) and maintainer -&Simon.Hausmann; &Simon.Hausmann.mail; -developer (framework, parts) +&Simon.Hausmann; &Simon.Hausmann.mail; +developer (framework, parts) -&Michael.Reiher; &Michael.Reiher.mail; -developer (framework) +&Michael.Reiher; &Michael.Reiher.mail; +developer (framework) -&Mattias.Welk; &Mattias.Welk.mail; -developer +&Mattias.Welk; &Mattias.Welk.mail; +developer -&Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; -developer (list views) +&Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; +developer (list views) -&Michael.Brade; &Michael.Brade.mail; -developer (list views, I/O lib) +&Michael.Brade; &Michael.Brade.mail; +developer (list views, I/O lib) -&Lars.Knoll; &Lars.Knoll.mail; -developer (HTML rendering engine) +&Lars.Knoll; &Lars.Knoll.mail; +developer (HTML rendering engine) -&Antti.Koivisto; &Antti.Koivisto.mail; -developer (HTML rendering engine) +&Antti.Koivisto; &Antti.Koivisto.mail; +developer (HTML rendering engine) -&Dirk.Mueller; &Dirk.Mueller.mail; -developer (HTML rendering engine) +&Dirk.Mueller; &Dirk.Mueller.mail; +developer (HTML rendering engine) -&Peter.Kelly; &Peter.Kelly.mail; -developer (HTML rendering engine, JavaScript) +&Peter.Kelly; &Peter.Kelly.mail; +developer (HTML rendering engine, JavaScript) -&Waldo.Bastian; &Waldo.Bastian.mail; -developer (HTML rendering engine, I/O lib) +&Waldo.Bastian; &Waldo.Bastian.mail; +developer (HTML rendering engine, I/O lib) -&Matt.Koss; &Matt.Koss.mail; -developer (I/O lib) +&Matt.Koss; &Matt.Koss.mail; +developer (I/O lib) -&Alex.Zepeda; &Alex.Zepeda.mail; -developer (I/O lib) +&Alex.Zepeda; &Alex.Zepeda.mail; +developer (I/O lib) -&Stephan.Kulow; &Stephan.Kulow.mail; -developer (I/O lib) +&Stephan.Kulow; &Stephan.Kulow.mail; +developer (I/O lib) -&Richard.J.Moore; &Richard.J.Moore.mail; -developer (&Java; applet support) +&Richard.J.Moore; &Richard.J.Moore.mail; +developer (&Java; applet support) -Dima Rogozin dima@mercury.co.il -developer (&Java; applet support) +Dima Rogozin dima@mercury.co.il +developer (&Java; applet support) -Wynn Wilkes wynnw@calderasystems.com -developer (&Java;2 manager support and other major improvements to applet support) +Wynn Wilkes wynnw@calderasystems.com +developer (&Java;2 manager support and other major improvements to applet support) -&Harri.Porten; &Harri.Porten.mail; -developer (JavaScript) +&Harri.Porten; &Harri.Porten.mail; +developer (JavaScript) -Stefan Schimanski schimmi@kde.org -developer (&Netscape; plugin support) +Stefan Schimanski schimmi@kde.org +developer (&Netscape; plugin support) -&Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; -developer (framework) +&Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; +developer (framework) -&George.Staikos; &George.Staikos.mail; -developer (SSL support) +&George.Staikos; &George.Staikos.mail; +developer (SSL support) -Dawit Alemayehu adawit@kde.org -developer (I/O lib, Authentication support) +Dawit Alemayehu adawit@kde.org +developer (I/O lib, Authentication support) -&Torsten.Rahn; &Torsten.Rahn.mail; -Graphics / icons +&Torsten.Rahn; &Torsten.Rahn.mail; +Graphics / icons -Torben Weis weis@kde.org -kfm author +Torben Weis weis@kde.org +kfm author -&Joseph.Wenninger; &Joseph.Wenninger; -developer (navigation panel framework) +&Joseph.Wenninger; &Joseph.Wenninger; +developer (navigation panel framework) -Documentation copyright 2000-2003 +Documentation copyright 2000-2003 -&Erwan.Loisant; &Erwan.Loisant.mail; -&Pamela.Roberts; &Pamela.Roberts.mail; +&Erwan.Loisant; &Erwan.Loisant.mail; +&Pamela.Roberts; &Pamela.Roberts.mail; -Documentation updated for &kde; 3.2 by &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail;. -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +Documentation updated for &kde; 3.2 by &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail;. +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net &underFDL; &underGPL; -Can I run &konqueror; from another window manager? +Can I run &konqueror; from another window manager? -Just install &Qt;, tdelibs and tdebase, and from your favourite window manager, launch &konqueror;. It should work just fine, but if it doesn't (&kde; developers don't test that case often), report it to http://bugs.kde.org and try running tdeinit before running &konqueror;, it usually helps. +Just install &Qt;, tdelibs and tdebase, and from your favourite window manager, launch &konqueror;. It should work just fine, but if it doesn't (&kde; developers don't test that case often), report it to http://bugs.kde.org and try running tdeinit before running &konqueror;, it usually helps. -Where does &konqueror; keep all its configuration data? -Generally in the ~/.trinity folder (this may be ~/.trinity3 on your system, depending on how &kde; 3 was installed). Do not alter these files unless you really know what you are doing. +Where does &konqueror; keep all its configuration data? +Generally in the ~/.trinity folder (this may be ~/.trinity3 on your system, depending on how &kde; 3 was installed). Do not alter these files unless you really know what you are doing. -The ~/.trinity/share/apps/konqueror/profiles folder holds individual files containing settings for each of your profiles. +The ~/.trinity/share/apps/konqueror/profiles folder holds individual files containing settings for each of your profiles. -Your bookmarks are held in ~/.trinity/share/apps/konqueror/bookmarks.xml -Cookies are held in ~/.trinity/share/apps/kcookiejar/cookies -Your history, as used for the auto-completion feature, is in ~/.trinity/share/config/konq_history +Your bookmarks are held in ~/.trinity/share/apps/konqueror/bookmarks.xml +Cookies are held in ~/.trinity/share/apps/kcookiejar/cookies +Your history, as used for the auto-completion feature, is in ~/.trinity/share/config/konq_history -In the folder ~/.trinity/share/config/ the files konqiconviewrc, konqlistviewrc and konquerorrc hold a whole lot of general configuration settings. +In the folder ~/.trinity/share/config/ the files konqiconviewrc, konqlistviewrc and konquerorrc hold a whole lot of general configuration settings. -The folder ~/.trinity/share/cache/http/ contains the browser cache. +The folder ~/.trinity/share/cache/http/ contains the browser cache. -The Navigation Panel uses the files and subfolders in ~/.trinity/share/apps/konqsidebartng +The Navigation Panel uses the files and subfolders in ~/.trinity/share/apps/konqsidebartng -Any folder specific view settings are put into .directory files in the individual folders. +Any folder specific view settings are put into .directory files in the individual folders. -How do I clear out the history file? -There are two histories: +How do I clear out the history file? +There are two histories: -One is used for text completion in the Location Toolbar text entry box. To clear this right click on the text entry box and select Clear History . +One is used for text completion in the Location Toolbar text entry box. To clear this right click on the text entry box and select Clear History . -The other is the log of visited locations. Select the History page in the Navigation Panel, right click on an entry and choose Remove Entry to remove just that entry or Clear History to delete all entries. +The other is the log of visited locations. Select the History page in the Navigation Panel, right click on an entry and choose Remove Entry to remove just that entry or Clear History to delete all entries. @@ -177,106 +61,33 @@ url="http://www.konqueror.org/i18n.html" -How do I enable, disable or clear the browser cache? -If you select Cache in the dialogue launched by selecting SettingsConfigure Konqueror... , you will be presented with a dialogue box that lets you disable the cache, clear it or set its size, and change the caching policy. +How do I enable, disable or clear the browser cache? +If you select Cache in the dialogue launched by selecting SettingsConfigure Konqueror... , you will be presented with a dialogue box that lets you disable the cache, clear it or set its size, and change the caching policy. -How can I change the timeout values used by &konqueror; when web browsing? -In the Control Centre Internet & Network Preferences page. +How can I change the timeout values used by &konqueror; when web browsing? +In the Control Centre Internet & Network Preferences page. -How do I set my home page - the page loaded on startup? -Start &konqueror; with the Web Browser icon on the panel. Open the page you want to be loaded in any new Web Browser window and select Save View Profile "Web Browsing" from the Settings menu. +How do I set my home page - the page loaded on startup? +Start &konqueror; with the Web Browser icon on the panel. Open the page you want to be loaded in any new Web Browser window and select Save View Profile "Web Browsing" from the Settings menu. -All new &konqueror; windows that are started with the Web Browser icon on the panel, or from the location menu, and new empty tabs, will now start at this page. +All new &konqueror; windows that are started with the Web Browser icon on the panel, or from the location menu, and new empty tabs, will now start at this page. -This does not change the behaviour of the Home button on the &konqueror; toolbar, which will continue to take you to the &URI; defined in the &konqueror; configuration module. You can reach that module from within &konqueror;, via SettingsConfigure KonquerorBehaviour. By default this is set to ~, which is your Home folder. You may set this to any &URI;, either local or remote, and pressing the Home icon on the toolbar will display it. +This does not change the behaviour of the Home button on the &konqueror; toolbar, which will continue to take you to the &URI; defined in the &konqueror; configuration module. You can reach that module from within &konqueror;, via SettingsConfigure KonquerorBehaviour. By default this is set to ~, which is your Home folder. You may set this to any &URI;, either local or remote, and pressing the Home icon on the toolbar will display it. -To have &konqueror; start up with no page loaded, use about:blank. +To have &konqueror; start up with no page loaded, use about:blank. -I can't find the answer to my question here. +I can't find the answer to my question here. -Take a look at http://www.konqueror.org/faq.html or http://www.konqueror.org/konq-java.html. +Take a look at http://www.konqueror.org/faq.html or http://www.konqueror.org/konq-java.html. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/filemanager.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/filemanager.docbook index 055ca263f62..a8c396a7824 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/filemanager.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/filemanager.docbook @@ -1,534 +1,157 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English - 2003-10-28 3.2 - -&konqueror; the File Manager +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English + 2003-10-28 3.2 + +&konqueror; the File Manager -Folders and Paths -In &UNIX; and &Linux; all folders are arranged in a simple inverted tree structure descending and branching down from from a single top level folder. This means that you can get from any folder to any other by going up until you reach a common point then down through the appropriate subfolders until you reach your target. - -The position of any file or folder in the tree can be described by its path, which is a simple list of the folders you would have to descend through to get to the target folder or file. For example /home/pam is the subfolder pam of the subfolder home of the top level folder, and /home/pam/words.txt is the file words.txt in that subfolder. The leading / in these paths represents the top level folder. - -Every folder accessible by your system, including those on other hard disk partitions, your floppy and &CD-ROM;, will appear in the tree descending from /, their exact paths will depend on how your system was set up (see also the section on Floppy and &CD-ROM; Drives). -Every user on a &UNIX; / &Linux; system has their own home folder to hold their personal files and settings, for example /home/jon and /home/mary. The symbol ~ is often used to represent the user's home folder, so that ~/letter.txt refers to the file letter.txt in my home folder. -Note that the term directory is often used instead of folder. +Folders and Paths +In &UNIX; and &Linux; all folders are arranged in a simple inverted tree structure descending and branching down from from a single top level folder. This means that you can get from any folder to any other by going up until you reach a common point then down through the appropriate subfolders until you reach your target. + +The position of any file or folder in the tree can be described by its path, which is a simple list of the folders you would have to descend through to get to the target folder or file. For example /home/pam is the subfolder pam of the subfolder home of the top level folder, and /home/pam/words.txt is the file words.txt in that subfolder. The leading / in these paths represents the top level folder. + +Every folder accessible by your system, including those on other hard disk partitions, your floppy and &CD-ROM;, will appear in the tree descending from /, their exact paths will depend on how your system was set up (see also the section on Floppy and &CD-ROM; Drives). +Every user on a &UNIX; / &Linux; system has their own home folder to hold their personal files and settings, for example /home/jon and /home/mary. The symbol ~ is often used to represent the user's home folder, so that ~/letter.txt refers to the file letter.txt in my home folder. +Note that the term directory is often used instead of folder. -View Modes -In File Manager mode, &konqueror; shows you what files and subfolders are held in a folder, and can provide you with some information about them. -The path of the folder you are looking at is shown in the Titlebar, and also in the Location Toolbar, prefixed with file: to indicate that the folder is part of your computer's normal file system. For example file:/home/pam. - -The way that &konqueror; displays the files and folders depends mainly on your choice of View Mode. This can be selected from the ViewView Mode sub menu, which gives you the following options: +View Modes +In File Manager mode, &konqueror; shows you what files and subfolders are held in a folder, and can provide you with some information about them. +The path of the folder you are looking at is shown in the Titlebar, and also in the Location Toolbar, prefixed with file: to indicate that the folder is part of your computer's normal file system. For example file:/home/pam. + +The way that &konqueror; displays the files and folders depends mainly on your choice of View Mode. This can be selected from the ViewView Mode sub menu, which gives you the following options: -Icon View -Displays the name and a suitable icon for each file or folder. +Icon View +Displays the name and a suitable icon for each file or folder. -MultiColumn View -Similar to Icon View except that the display is neatly formatted into regular columns. +MultiColumn View +Similar to Icon View except that the display is neatly formatted into regular columns. -Detailed List View -Displays each file or folder on a separate line, as a small icon followed by the file or folder name followed by information about the item. The amount of information shown is controlled by the ViewShow Details sub menu settings. +Detailed List View +Displays each file or folder on a separate line, as a small icon followed by the file or folder name followed by information about the item. The amount of information shown is controlled by the ViewShow Details sub menu settings. -Text View -Similar to Detailed List View except that icons are not shown and the first character in each line will be / if the item is a folder. +Text View +Similar to Detailed List View except that icons are not shown and the first character in each line will be / if the item is a folder. -Tree View -This option is useful for navigating through the folder tree below the current folder. The display is similar to Detailed List View except that the start of each line will show a small + sign in a box if the item is a folder. Left clicking on the box will expand the display to show the contents of that folder. +Tree View +This option is useful for navigating through the folder tree below the current folder. The display is similar to Detailed List View except that the start of each line will show a small + sign in a box if the item is a folder. Left clicking on the box will expand the display to show the contents of that folder. -Info List View -Similar to Detailed List View except that, where applicable, it shows the number of lines, words and characters and file format for each file. +Info List View +Similar to Detailed List View except that, where applicable, it shows the number of lines, words and characters and file format for each file. -The default file icons shown in Icon View and MultiColumn View modes can be replaced by small preview images of the file contents, see the section File Previews of this handbook for more details. +The default file icons shown in Icon View and MultiColumn View modes can be replaced by small preview images of the file contents, see the section File Previews of this handbook for more details. -File Tip Info -Checking the Show file tips box in the Behaviour page of the &konqueror; Configuration dialogue causes a small pop up information window to appear when the mouse pointer is hovered over a file or folder name or icon in Icon View or MultiColumn View mode. -If the Show previews in file tips checkbox is checked the pop up window will also show a small image of the file contents. +File Tip Info +Checking the Show file tips box in the Behaviour page of the &konqueror; Configuration dialogue causes a small pop up information window to appear when the mouse pointer is hovered over a file or folder name or icon in Icon View or MultiColumn View mode. +If the Show previews in file tips checkbox is checked the pop up window will also show a small image of the file contents. -File Previews -Selecting ViewPreview from the Menubar will bring up a sub menu that lets you enable file previews for certain types of file. -Generally this means that the file's icon will be replaced by a small image showing the file contents. -If file preview is enabled for Sound Files the file will be played whenever the mouse cursor is hovering over the file name or icon. -Note that file previews are only available in Icon View and MultiColumn View modes. -Because &konqueror; has to read much more data than just the file name details to generate a preview, file previews may not be appropriate when viewing files on a floppy or from a remote system. The Previews page of the File Manager Configuration dialogue allows you to disable file previews for protocols such as ftp where reading the extra data would take too long. +File Previews +Selecting ViewPreview from the Menubar will bring up a sub menu that lets you enable file previews for certain types of file. +Generally this means that the file's icon will be replaced by a small image showing the file contents. +If file preview is enabled for Sound Files the file will be played whenever the mouse cursor is hovering over the file name or icon. +Note that file previews are only available in Icon View and MultiColumn View modes. +Because &konqueror; has to read much more data than just the file name details to generate a preview, file previews may not be appropriate when viewing files on a floppy or from a remote system. The Previews page of the File Manager Configuration dialogue allows you to disable file previews for protocols such as ftp where reading the extra data would take too long. -Navigation -To get to a file with &konqueror; you first need to navigate through the folder tree to find the folder containing that file. +Navigation +To get to a file with &konqueror; you first need to navigate through the folder tree to find the folder containing that file. -To move between folders you can simply step up and down the tree: +To move between folders you can simply step up and down the tree: -To descend into a subfolder left click on its name or icon, or if you have selected it (see below) then just press Enter. -To go up the folder tree, click on the Up button in the Toolbar, or use&Alt;Up Arrow, or use the Menubar GoUp option. +To descend into a subfolder left click on its name or icon, or if you have selected it (see below) then just press Enter. +To go up the folder tree, click on the Up button in the Toolbar, or use&Alt;Up Arrow, or use the Menubar GoUp option. -To select a file or folder in the displayed folder without opening it in any way use the up and down arrow keys to move through the items. The selected item will be highlighted and some information about it will be displayed in the Status Bar. - -Setting the View Mode to Tree View can help you locate folders in the tree below the current folder. In this mode each folder is shown with a small box at the left. If the box contains a + sign, left clicking on the box (not on the folder name or icon) will display a sub tree showing files and subfolders contained in that folder. The small box will then change to show a - sign. Left click on that to collapse the sub tree. Once you have found the folder you are looking for, left click on the folder name or icon to open it. - -The Navigation Panel can also help you find your way around the file system. - -You can go directly to any folder by typing its path into the Location Toolbar window or into the dialogue box invoked by the Menubar LocationOpen Location item or by &Ctrl; O. &konqueror;'s Text Completion feature may be useful when you do this. Don't forget that in &Linux; / &UNIX; file and folder names are case sensitive. - -Once you have moved to a new folder you can go back to your previous choice by using the Toolbar Back button, the Menubar Go Back item, or &Alt;Left Arrow. - -Once you have gone back you can go forward. Use the Toolbar Forward button, the Menubar Go Forward item or &Alt;Right Arrow. - -Holding the &LMB; pressed while the mouse pointer is over the Toolbar Up, Back or Forward buttons brings up a menu of recently visited locations. +To select a file or folder in the displayed folder without opening it in any way use the up and down arrow keys to move through the items. The selected item will be highlighted and some information about it will be displayed in the Status Bar. + +Setting the View Mode to Tree View can help you locate folders in the tree below the current folder. In this mode each folder is shown with a small box at the left. If the box contains a + sign, left clicking on the box (not on the folder name or icon) will display a sub tree showing files and subfolders contained in that folder. The small box will then change to show a - sign. Left click on that to collapse the sub tree. Once you have found the folder you are looking for, left click on the folder name or icon to open it. + +The Navigation Panel can also help you find your way around the file system. + +You can go directly to any folder by typing its path into the Location Toolbar window or into the dialogue box invoked by the Menubar LocationOpen Location item or by &Ctrl; O. &konqueror;'s Text Completion feature may be useful when you do this. Don't forget that in &Linux; / &UNIX; file and folder names are case sensitive. + +Once you have moved to a new folder you can go back to your previous choice by using the Toolbar Back button, the Menubar Go Back item, or &Alt;Left Arrow. + +Once you have gone back you can go forward. Use the Toolbar Forward button, the Menubar Go Forward item or &Alt;Right Arrow. + +Holding the &LMB; pressed while the mouse pointer is over the Toolbar Up, Back or Forward buttons brings up a menu of recently visited locations. -Finding Files and Folders - -If you don't know or can't remember where a file or folder is within your system, then use the Toolbar Find File button or the Menubar ToolsFind File... option. This will embed the file finder application &kfind; into &konqueror;'s window. See the &kfind; Handbook for help in using &kfind;. - -If the name of a file or folder begins with a period (dot), then it is a hidden file or folder, and will not normally be shown by &konqueror;. To see hidden files or folders use the Menubar ViewShow Hidden Files option. -Another reason &konqueror; may not show the file or folder you are looking for is that you may have the View Filter plugin set to display only certain types of file. +Finding Files and Folders + +If you don't know or can't remember where a file or folder is within your system, then use the Toolbar Find File button or the Menubar ToolsFind File... option. This will embed the file finder application &kfind; into &konqueror;'s window. See the &kfind; Handbook for help in using &kfind;. + +If the name of a file or folder begins with a period (dot), then it is a hidden file or folder, and will not normally be shown by &konqueror;. To see hidden files or folders use the Menubar ViewShow Hidden Files option. +Another reason &konqueror; may not show the file or folder you are looking for is that you may have the View Filter plugin set to display only certain types of file. -Floppy and &CD-ROM; Drives - -Any floppy disk, &CD; drive or other hard disk partition that you have on your system will usually appear in the / , /mnt or /auto folder, having a path something like /mnt/floppy or /cdrom. The details will depend on how your system was set up. - -&UNIX; / &Linux; requires that you mount a floppy disk or &CD-ROM; when you have inserted it into the drive, and mount other hard disk partitions when you want to access them. You also need to unmount a floppy disk or &CD-ROM; before removing it to register that it is no longer available. - -How you do this will depend on how your system: +Floppy and &CD-ROM; Drives + +Any floppy disk, &CD; drive or other hard disk partition that you have on your system will usually appear in the / , /mnt or /auto folder, having a path something like /mnt/floppy or /cdrom. The details will depend on how your system was set up. + +&UNIX; / &Linux; requires that you mount a floppy disk or &CD-ROM; when you have inserted it into the drive, and mount other hard disk partitions when you want to access them. You also need to unmount a floppy disk or &CD-ROM; before removing it to register that it is no longer available. + +How you do this will depend on how your system: -You may have an Automount facility, in which case you don't have to bother about explicitly mounting and unmounting, although you may find that the &CD-ROM; occasionally starts up by itself for no apparent reason. - -You may have Floppy, &CD-ROM; and hard disk icons on your desktop, in which case &LMB; click on the icon to mount it. Doing this should also bring up a &konqueror; window showing the contents of the floppy, &CD-ROM; or partition. To unmount, right click on the icon and choose the Unmount item. Visit the section Create New... in this Handbook to see how to create such an icon. - -Or you can do it the traditional way by typing into a text console window: - -mount /mnt/floppy +You may have an Automount facility, in which case you don't have to bother about explicitly mounting and unmounting, although you may find that the &CD-ROM; occasionally starts up by itself for no apparent reason. + +You may have Floppy, &CD-ROM; and hard disk icons on your desktop, in which case &LMB; click on the icon to mount it. Doing this should also bring up a &konqueror; window showing the contents of the floppy, &CD-ROM; or partition. To unmount, right click on the icon and choose the Unmount item. Visit the section Create New... in this Handbook to see how to create such an icon. + +Or you can do it the traditional way by typing into a text console window: + +mount /mnt/floppy + --> -to mount, for example, the floppy drive, and +to mount, for example, the floppy drive, and -umount /mnt/floppy - -to unmount it (umount not unmount). - -Rather than having to open a text console to type the mount or umount commands, you may prefer to use &konqueror;'s ToolsExecute Shell Command (&Ctrl;E) feature. +umount /mnt/floppy + +to unmount it (umount not unmount). + +Rather than having to open a text console to type the mount or umount commands, you may prefer to use &konqueror;'s ToolsExecute Shell Command (&Ctrl;E) feature. @@ -538,730 +161,215 @@ on separate lines -Deleting Files and Folders +Deleting Files and Folders -&konqueror; gives you two ways to dispose of an unwanted file or folder: +&konqueror; gives you two ways to dispose of an unwanted file or folder: -You can move it to the Trash folder, which is the safest method as you can get it back if you realise that you have made a mistake. - -You can just plain Delete it, which removes the entry from the folder and adds the disk area occupied by the file(s) to the system's list of free disk areas, in the same way as the rm command. +You can move it to the Trash folder, which is the safest method as you can get it back if you realise that you have made a mistake. + +You can just plain Delete it, which removes the entry from the folder and adds the disk area occupied by the file(s) to the system's list of free disk areas, in the same way as the rm command. -The simplest way to remove a file or folder is to position the mouse pointer over its name or icon and press the &RMB;, which will bring up a menu containing the options Move to Wastebin and Delete. - -Or, if you have selected the item, the Menubar Edit menu will give you the choice of Move to Wastebin and Delete options. - -Del will move the selected item or items to the Wastebin. - -&Shift;Del will really, truly and irrevocably delete the selected item or items. - -You won't be able to remove a file or folder if you do not have the necessary permissions, see the section on Super User Mode for further details. +The simplest way to remove a file or folder is to position the mouse pointer over its name or icon and press the &RMB;, which will bring up a menu containing the options Move to Wastebin and Delete. + +Or, if you have selected the item, the Menubar Edit menu will give you the choice of Move to Wastebin and Delete options. + +Del will move the selected item or items to the Wastebin. + +&Shift;Del will really, truly and irrevocably delete the selected item or items. + +You won't be able to remove a file or folder if you do not have the necessary permissions, see the section on Super User Mode for further details. -Moving and Copying +Moving and Copying -To copy a file or subfolder between folders you can: +To copy a file or subfolder between folders you can: -Position the mouse pointer over its name or icon and hold down the &RMB;, which will bring up a menu containing the Copy option. Choose that. - -Or if the item is selected you can use the Copy button on the Toolbar or the Menubar Edit Copy item, or the &Ctrl;C shortcut key combination. - -Navigate to the folder you want to copy the item into then Paste the item into the new folder by using the Toolbar Paste button or the Menubar Edit Paste option or the &Ctrl;V shortcut, or by moving the mouse pointer to a clear area of the window and holding the &RMB; down to bring up a menu containing the Paste option. +Position the mouse pointer over its name or icon and hold down the &RMB;, which will bring up a menu containing the Copy option. Choose that. + +Or if the item is selected you can use the Copy button on the Toolbar or the Menubar Edit Copy item, or the &Ctrl;C shortcut key combination. + +Navigate to the folder you want to copy the item into then Paste the item into the new folder by using the Toolbar Paste button or the Menubar Edit Paste option or the &Ctrl;V shortcut, or by moving the mouse pointer to a clear area of the window and holding the &RMB; down to bring up a menu containing the Paste option. -Moving a file or subfolder between folders can be done in the same way as copying, except that you choose the Cut option or &Ctrl;X instead of Copy. The item that you have Cut will be removed from the original folder when you do the Paste into the new folder. - -You can also copy or move selected item(s) to another folder by using Edit Copy Files (F7) or EditMove Files (F8), or by selecting Copy To or Move To from the drop down menu you get when you right click on an file or folder name in the File Manager window. - -You may not be able to copy or move a file or folder if you don't have the necessary permissions. See the section on Super User Mode for further details. +Moving a file or subfolder between folders can be done in the same way as copying, except that you choose the Cut option or &Ctrl;X instead of Copy. The item that you have Cut will be removed from the original folder when you do the Paste into the new folder. + +You can also copy or move selected item(s) to another folder by using Edit Copy Files (F7) or EditMove Files (F8), or by selecting Copy To or Move To from the drop down menu you get when you right click on an file or folder name in the File Manager window. + +You may not be able to copy or move a file or folder if you don't have the necessary permissions. See the section on Super User Mode for further details. -Using Drag 'n Drop - -&konqueror; also supports Drag and Drop copying and moving of files and folders. - -You can do this by having two instances of &konqueror;, one showing the folder you want to copy from, the other showing the target folder. Position the mouse pointer over the item you wish to copy or move, then, holding the &LMB; pressed, drag it to a clear space in the target folder. Release the button and you will be presented with a menu choice of Copy or Move. Take care to drop the item into an empty area of the target folder view - dropping it on top of another file name or icon can cause problems. - -You can also set up &konqueror; to show more than one folder within its window and drag & drop between them. +Using Drag 'n Drop + +&konqueror; also supports Drag and Drop copying and moving of files and folders. + +You can do this by having two instances of &konqueror;, one showing the folder you want to copy from, the other showing the target folder. Position the mouse pointer over the item you wish to copy or move, then, holding the &LMB; pressed, drag it to a clear space in the target folder. Release the button and you will be presented with a menu choice of Copy or Move. Take care to drop the item into an empty area of the target folder view - dropping it on top of another file name or icon can cause problems. + +You can also set up &konqueror; to show more than one folder within its window and drag & drop between them. - + -Split Views for Drag & Drop +Split Views for Drag & Drop -This screenshot illustrates the use of the Menubar Window Split View Left/Right option, also available with the shortcut &Ctrl;&Shift;L , to split the main &konqueror; window into two views, each showing the contents of a different folder. - -To be able to show different folders in each view they should not be linked; the little boxes at the bottom right of each view should be empty. - -The active view, that is the one whose path is shown in the Location Toolbar and which responds to navigation and Menubar commands, is shown by the little green light in the bottom left corner. To make a view active, left click on an empty area of the view or on its Status Bar. - -To remove an active view from &konqueror;'s window use the &Ctrl;&Shift;R shortcut, or the Menubar Window Remove Active View option, or &RMB; click on the Status Bar and choose the Remove Active View option from the resulting menu. - -If you use &konqueror; tabs, you can drag and drop between tabs by dragging the file to the tab label, without letting go yet. The destination tab will pop to the front, allowing you to continue dragging and then drop the file. +This screenshot illustrates the use of the Menubar Window Split View Left/Right option, also available with the shortcut &Ctrl;&Shift;L , to split the main &konqueror; window into two views, each showing the contents of a different folder. + +To be able to show different folders in each view they should not be linked; the little boxes at the bottom right of each view should be empty. + +The active view, that is the one whose path is shown in the Location Toolbar and which responds to navigation and Menubar commands, is shown by the little green light in the bottom left corner. To make a view active, left click on an empty area of the view or on its Status Bar. + +To remove an active view from &konqueror;'s window use the &Ctrl;&Shift;R shortcut, or the Menubar Window Remove Active View option, or &RMB; click on the Status Bar and choose the Remove Active View option from the resulting menu. + +If you use &konqueror; tabs, you can drag and drop between tabs by dragging the file to the tab label, without letting go yet. The destination tab will pop to the front, allowing you to continue dragging and then drop the file. -Duplicate File Names -If you try to paste a file into a folder that already contains a file with the same name, &konqueror; will pop up a dialogue box warning you that the file already exists. You can then choose to: +Duplicate File Names +If you try to paste a file into a folder that already contains a file with the same name, &konqueror; will pop up a dialogue box warning you that the file already exists. You can then choose to: -Overwrite the old file with the newly copied one. The Overwrite All button can be used if you have copied multiple items. -Cancel the paste operation by pressing the Skip or Skip All button. -Give the file that is being copied a different name. You can do this by typing a new name into the text entry box or get &konqueror; to Propose one. When you have done this press the Rename button. +Overwrite the old file with the newly copied one. The Overwrite All button can be used if you have copied multiple items. +Cancel the paste operation by pressing the Skip or Skip All button. +Give the file that is being copied a different name. You can do this by typing a new name into the text entry box or get &konqueror; to Propose one. When you have done this press the Rename button. -Selecting Multiple Files - -You sometimes want to delete, copy or move a number of files that are similar in some way. For example you may wish to move all of the .png graphics files from one folder to another. &konqueror; makes this easy by letting you select multiple files based on similarities in their file names. - -Use the Menubar EditSelection Select... item or the shortcut &Ctrl;+. This brings up a little dialogue box in which you enter a filename containing the wildcard characters *, which matches any number of characters, and ? which matches a single character. Press OK and &konqueror; will highlight all files with matching names. For example; +Selecting Multiple Files + +You sometimes want to delete, copy or move a number of files that are similar in some way. For example you may wish to move all of the .png graphics files from one folder to another. &konqueror; makes this easy by letting you select multiple files based on similarities in their file names. + +Use the Menubar EditSelection Select... item or the shortcut &Ctrl;+. This brings up a little dialogue box in which you enter a filename containing the wildcard characters *, which matches any number of characters, and ? which matches a single character. Press OK and &konqueror; will highlight all files with matching names. For example; -flag*.png will select all filenames starting with the letters flag and ending with .png. -memo?.txt will select memo1.txt and memo9.txt but not memo99.txt. +flag*.png will select all filenames starting with the letters flag and ending with .png. +memo?.txt will select memo1.txt and memo9.txt but not memo99.txt. -When you have selected a range of files, you can narrow down the selection by uing the Menubar Edit Unselect... option or &Ctrl;- to specify which of the selected files should be removed from the selection. - -Use &Ctrl;U or the Menubar Edit Unselect All option or just &LMB; click on a clear area of the view to cancel the selection. - -You can even invert the selection: that is, deselect all selected files and select those that were previously unselected. Use the Menubar EditInvert Selection option or &Ctrl;* to do this. - -A number of useful shortcut keys can be used in list, tree and text view modes: +When you have selected a range of files, you can narrow down the selection by uing the Menubar Edit Unselect... option or &Ctrl;- to specify which of the selected files should be removed from the selection. + +Use &Ctrl;U or the Menubar Edit Unselect All option or just &LMB; click on a clear area of the view to cancel the selection. + +You can even invert the selection: that is, deselect all selected files and select those that were previously unselected. Use the Menubar EditInvert Selection option or &Ctrl;* to do this. + +A number of useful shortcut keys can be used in list, tree and text view modes: -Space +Space -Toggle the current selection. +Toggle the current selection. -Insert +Insert -Toggle the current selection and move down to the next item. +Toggle the current selection and move down to the next item. -&Ctrl;Up Arrow, &Ctrl;Down Arrow, &Ctrl;Home, &Ctrl;End, &Ctrl;Page Up, &Ctrl;Page Down +&Ctrl;Up Arrow, &Ctrl;Down Arrow, &Ctrl;Home, &Ctrl;End, &Ctrl;Page Up, &Ctrl;Page Down -Move the selection, toggling the selection of everything on the way. +Move the selection, toggling the selection of everything on the way. -&Shift;Up Arrow, &Shift;Down Arrow, &Shift;Home, &Shift;End, &Shift;Page Up, &Shift;Page Down +&Shift;Up Arrow, &Shift;Down Arrow, &Shift;Home, &Shift;End, &Shift;Page Up, &Shift;Page Down -Deselect everything, then move the selection, selecting everything on the way. +Deselect everything, then move the selection, selecting everything on the way. -Once you have selected the right files then the normal delete, copy or move commands will act on all of the selected files at once. - -Depending on your keyboard type and locale, you may find that the &Ctrl;+, &Ctrl;- and &Ctrl;* shortcuts only work with the Numeric keypad +, - and * keys. +Once you have selected the right files then the normal delete, copy or move commands will act on all of the selected files at once. + +Depending on your keyboard type and locale, you may find that the &Ctrl;+, &Ctrl;- and &Ctrl;* shortcuts only work with the Numeric keypad +, - and * keys. -Create New +Create New -When &konqueror; is in File Manager mode, picking Create New from the Edit menu or from the context menu you get by &RMB; clicking on a free area in a folder view gives you a submenu letting you create any of the following in the current folder: +When &konqueror; is in File Manager mode, picking Create New from the Edit menu or from the context menu you get by &RMB; clicking on a free area in a folder view gives you a submenu letting you create any of the following in the current folder: -FileLink To Application... -This option is most useful if you want to create an icon that will open a particular application. It opens a dialogue box with three tabbed pages. The first, General, is where you choose an icon and the text that will appear with it. The second page, Permissions, lets you select who can use or modify the icon. In the Application page you must enter the Command that will run the application, for example, kedit to start up the &kedit; text editor. kedit /home/pam/todo.txt would open the file /home/pam/todo.txt in &kedit;. Advanced options such as the file types which the application can open are also available from this page. - -To make the application icon appear on your desktop, create the link in your ~/Desktop folder (this may be called something slightly different depending on how &kde; was installed on your system) or get to the Create New... sub menu by right clicking on a free area of the desktop instead of within &konqueror;'s window. - -If you have a lot of specialised application links and don't want to clutter up the desktop, then why not create them in your Applications folder. You can get there in &konqueror; by choosing Go Applications. Then create a single icon on your desktop to open your Applications folder, which is usually in ~/.trinity/share/applnk. - -To put an application link icon into the panel, first create it in the Applications folder then drag the icon onto a clear area of the panel. +FileLink To Application... +This option is most useful if you want to create an icon that will open a particular application. It opens a dialogue box with three tabbed pages. The first, General, is where you choose an icon and the text that will appear with it. The second page, Permissions, lets you select who can use or modify the icon. In the Application page you must enter the Command that will run the application, for example, kedit to start up the &kedit; text editor. kedit /home/pam/todo.txt would open the file /home/pam/todo.txt in &kedit;. Advanced options such as the file types which the application can open are also available from this page. + +To make the application icon appear on your desktop, create the link in your ~/Desktop folder (this may be called something slightly different depending on how &kde; was installed on your system) or get to the Create New... sub menu by right clicking on a free area of the desktop instead of within &konqueror;'s window. + +If you have a lot of specialised application links and don't want to clutter up the desktop, then why not create them in your Applications folder. You can get there in &konqueror; by choosing Go Applications. Then create a single icon on your desktop to open your Applications folder, which is usually in ~/.trinity/share/applnk. + +To put an application link icon into the panel, first create it in the Applications folder then drag the icon onto a clear area of the panel. -FileLink To Location (URL)... -This lets you create an icon to open &konqueror; at a particular folder or web page. As with Link To Application... you can make the application icon appear on your desktop by creating the link in your ~/Desktop folder or going to the Create New... sub menu by right clicking on a free area of the desktop. When you first create it the text shown with the icon will be the full path or &URL;. You can change it by right clicking on the icon, selecting Properties... and entering the preferred text in the General tab page. +FileLink To Location (URL)... +This lets you create an icon to open &konqueror; at a particular folder or web page. As with Link To Application... you can make the application icon appear on your desktop by creating the link in your ~/Desktop folder or going to the Create New... sub menu by right clicking on a free area of the desktop. When you first create it the text shown with the icon will be the full path or &URL;. You can change it by right clicking on the icon, selecting Properties... and entering the preferred text in the General tab page. -DeviceFloppy Device... -Use this option to create an icon that will mount a floppy disk and open an instance of &konqueror; showing the disk's contents. To unmount the disk when you have finished with it right click on the icon and select Unmount. In practice it doesn't have to be a floppy disk but can be any hard disk or partition on your system that is not normally mounted. In most cases you will want to create the icon on your desktop. +DeviceFloppy Device... +Use this option to create an icon that will mount a floppy disk and open an instance of &konqueror; showing the disk's contents. To unmount the disk when you have finished with it right click on the icon and select Unmount. In practice it doesn't have to be a floppy disk but can be any hard disk or partition on your system that is not normally mounted. In most cases you will want to create the icon on your desktop. -Hard Disk... -This option is similar to Floppy Device... but for a hard disk drive or partition. +Hard Disk... +This option is similar to Floppy Device... but for a hard disk drive or partition. -CD/DVD-ROM Device... -This option is similar to Floppy Device... but for a CD or DVD drive. +CD/DVD-ROM Device... +This option is similar to Floppy Device... but for a CD or DVD drive. -Folder... -An easy way of creating a new (sub)folder. +Folder... +An easy way of creating a new (sub)folder. -Text File... -Use this to create an ordinary, empty, text file. A dialogue box will be opened for you to enter the name of your new file. +Text File... +Use this to create an ordinary, empty, text file. A dialogue box will be opened for you to enter the name of your new file. -HTML File... -Creates a skeleton HTML source file. When you type the new file's name into the dialogue box it is probably best to give it a .html extension to avoid confusion. +HTML File... +Creates a skeleton HTML source file. When you type the new file's name into the dialogue box it is probably best to give it a .html extension to avoid confusion. -Presentation Document... -Creates a skeleton &koffice; &kpresenter; document. Give its name a .kpr extension. +Presentation Document... +Creates a skeleton &koffice; &kpresenter; document. Give its name a .kpr extension. -Text Document... -Creates a skeleton KOffice &kword; document using the standard &kword; style template. Give its name a .kwd extension. +Text Document... +Creates a skeleton KOffice &kword; document using the standard &kword; style template. Give its name a .kwd extension. -Spread Sheet Document... -Use this to create a new KOffice &kspread; spreadsheet file, and name it with a .ksp extension. +Spread Sheet Document... +Use this to create a new KOffice &kspread; spreadsheet file, and name it with a .ksp extension. -Illustration Document... -Creates a new KOffice &kontour; document. Name it with the extension .kil. +Illustration Document... +Creates a new KOffice &kontour; document. Name it with the extension .kil. @@ -1269,174 +377,56 @@ on separate lines -Changing Names and Permissions - -The easiest way to change the name of a file or folder is to right click on it and select Rename. - -To change the name or permissions of a file or folder right click on its name or icon and select the Properties... item, or if you have selected the file or folder, then you can use the Menubar Edit Properties option. - -This will bring up the Properties dialogue box with two tabbed pages: +Changing Names and Permissions + +The easiest way to change the name of a file or folder is to right click on it and select Rename. + +To change the name or permissions of a file or folder right click on its name or icon and select the Properties... item, or if you have selected the file or folder, then you can use the Menubar Edit Properties option. + +This will bring up the Properties dialogue box with two tabbed pages: -General, which gives you some information about the item and lets you change its name and, for a folder, the associated icon. -Permissions, which shows you the item's ownership and access permissions and lets you change the permissions. +General, which gives you some information about the item and lets you change its name and, for a folder, the associated icon. +Permissions, which shows you the item's ownership and access permissions and lets you change the permissions. -Copy and Rename -If you want to make a copy of an existing file with a different name, perhaps as a backup, in the same folder as the original file, do a normal Copy then when you Paste it a dialogue box will pop up complaining that the file already exists. Just type the new name into the dialogue's text box and press the Rename button (or if you are feeling lazy pressing the Propose button will generate a new name for you). +Copy and Rename +If you want to make a copy of an existing file with a different name, perhaps as a backup, in the same folder as the original file, do a normal Copy then when you Paste it a dialogue box will pop up complaining that the file already exists. Just type the new name into the dialogue's text box and press the Rename button (or if you are feeling lazy pressing the Propose button will generate a new name for you). -Super User Mode - -If you are running as a normal user and try to access files outside of your own home folder you will often be prevented from doing so and get an error message such as Access Denied. - -To access these files you need to be logged in as the system administrator, often known as the Super User or root. - -Rather than logging out then in again, you can launch &konqueror; from the K Menu in Super User mode by selecting SystemFile Manager - Super User Mode . You will be asked for the root login password but as long as you can provide that &konqueror; will be started up with full access privileges to all files on your system. - -Take care. As Super User (root), you have complete control of your system, and a wrong command can easily do irrevocable damage. -Also, connecting to the internet as root is an extremely bad idea, as it seriously increases your vulnerability to malicious hacking. +Super User Mode + +If you are running as a normal user and try to access files outside of your own home folder you will often be prevented from doing so and get an error message such as Access Denied. + +To access these files you need to be logged in as the system administrator, often known as the Super User or root. + +Rather than logging out then in again, you can launch &konqueror; from the K Menu in Super User mode by selecting SystemFile Manager - Super User Mode . You will be asked for the root login password but as long as you can provide that &konqueror; will be started up with full access privileges to all files on your system. + +Take care. As Super User (root), you have complete control of your system, and a wrong command can easily do irrevocable damage. +Also, connecting to the internet as root is an extremely bad idea, as it seriously increases your vulnerability to malicious hacking. -At the Command Line - -Although &konqueror; is a very powerful and flexible GUI file manager, there are occasions when the experienced &Linux; / &UNIX; user wants to get down to the basics and work at the text command line level. - -She could, of course, open an instance of &konsole;, perhaps with &konqueror;'s Menubar ToolsOpen Terminal option or with &Ctrl;T. -If she only wants to launch a program or view a &URL;, the ToolsRun Command (&Alt;F2) option may be easier. - -ToolsExecute Shell Command... (&Ctrl; E) opens a small command line dialogue window where you can enter a shell command such as ps -ax | grep tdeinit . Note that it does not support full featured terminal control characters, so applications such as top and less will not work properly, but it is available immediately without the delay involved in starting &konsole;. - -For more complex operations, &konqueror; has another nice feature; the Menubar WindowShow Terminal Emulator option, which opens up a terminal window as a new view within &konqueror;. As long as the link icon is visible at the bottom right corner of each view, the terminal will follow any folder changes you make in the normal file manager view. +At the Command Line + +Although &konqueror; is a very powerful and flexible GUI file manager, there are occasions when the experienced &Linux; / &UNIX; user wants to get down to the basics and work at the text command line level. + +She could, of course, open an instance of &konsole;, perhaps with &konqueror;'s Menubar ToolsOpen Terminal option or with &Ctrl;T. +If she only wants to launch a program or view a &URL;, the ToolsRun Command (&Alt;F2) option may be easier. + +ToolsExecute Shell Command... (&Ctrl; E) opens a small command line dialogue window where you can enter a shell command such as ps -ax | grep tdeinit . Note that it does not support full featured terminal control characters, so applications such as top and less will not work properly, but it is available immediately without the delay involved in starting &konsole;. + +For more complex operations, &konqueror; has another nice feature; the Menubar WindowShow Terminal Emulator option, which opens up a terminal window as a new view within &konqueror;. As long as the link icon is visible at the bottom right corner of each view, the terminal will follow any folder changes you make in the normal file manager view. - + -Including the terminal emulator +Including the terminal emulator diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/index.docbook index e66a34fb8fa..5faf81a696c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/index.docbook @@ -16,84 +16,47 @@ - + ]> - + -The &konqueror; Handbook +The &konqueror; Handbook -&Pamela.Roberts; &Pamela.Roberts.mail; +&Pamela.Roberts; &Pamela.Roberts.mail; -The KDE Team -Developers - - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +The KDE Team +Developers + + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2000 2002 -Erwan Loisant -Pamela Roberts +2000 2002 +Erwan Loisant +Pamela Roberts -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-09-22 -3.1 +2002-09-22 +3.1 -&konqueror; is &kde;'s advanced File Manager, Web Browser and Universal Viewing Application. +&konqueror; is &kde;'s advanced File Manager, Web Browser and Universal Viewing Application. -KDE -Konqueror -Kdebase -File Manager -Browser -Viewer +KDE +Konqueror +Kdebase +File Manager +Browser +Viewer @@ -115,28 +78,16 @@ -Installation +Installation -&konqueror; is part of the tdebase package which an essential part of &kde;. +&konqueror; is part of the tdebase package which an essential part of &kde;. -For instructions on acquiring &kde; please see http://www.kde.org. +For instructions on acquiring &kde; please see http://www.kde.org. -For further information about &konqueror; you might like to visit http://www.konqueror.org. +For further information about &konqueror; you might like to visit http://www.konqueror.org. -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/introduction.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/introduction.docbook index 35fe37f780c..503d36e5b8c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/introduction.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/introduction.docbook @@ -1,77 +1,22 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-20 3.2 +2003-10-20 3.2 -Overview +Overview -&konqueror; is an advanced file manager for the K Desktop Environment, providing file management functions ranging from simple cut/copy and paste operations to advanced local and remote network file browsing. Folder contents can be displayed in a variety of text and icon view modes, which can include thumbnail preview images of file contents. File and folder properties can easily be examined and changed and applications launched with a simple click of the &LMB;. +&konqueror; is an advanced file manager for the K Desktop Environment, providing file management functions ranging from simple cut/copy and paste operations to advanced local and remote network file browsing. Folder contents can be displayed in a variety of text and icon view modes, which can include thumbnail preview images of file contents. File and folder properties can easily be examined and changed and applications launched with a simple click of the &LMB;. -&konqueror; is an HTML 4.01 compliant web browser with built in support for JavaScript (ECMA-262), CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) and bidirectional scripts (such as Arabic and Hebrew). It provides support for the secure running of &Java; applets, &Netscape; plugins for viewing &Flash;, &RealAudio; and &RealVideo; and SSL for secure communications. Advanced features include automatic &URL; and form completion, the ability to import bookmarks from other browsers and tabbed browsing. +&konqueror; is an HTML 4.01 compliant web browser with built in support for JavaScript (ECMA-262), CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) and bidirectional scripts (such as Arabic and Hebrew). It provides support for the secure running of &Java; applets, &Netscape; plugins for viewing &Flash;, &RealAudio; and &RealVideo; and SSL for secure communications. Advanced features include automatic &URL; and form completion, the ability to import bookmarks from other browsers and tabbed browsing. -&konqueror; is also an excellent full featured FTP client. +&konqueror; is also an excellent full featured FTP client. -&konqueror; is a universal viewing application, capable of displaying images and documents without having to launch another application. It does this by embedding components (&kde; Parts) provided by other applications; from &kview; for image viewing, &kdvi; for DVI viewing, &kghostview; for &PostScript; documents and from the various &koffice; applications for their document types. +&konqueror; is a universal viewing application, capable of displaying images and documents without having to launch another application. It does this by embedding components (&kde; Parts) provided by other applications; from &kview; for image viewing, &kdvi; for DVI viewing, &kghostview; for &PostScript; documents and from the various &koffice; applications for their document types. -&konqueror; is a fully customisable application which anyone can configure to suit their own needs, from changing the overall style and the sizes of text and icons to selecting which items appear in the Menubar, changing the number and positions of the toolbars and even defining new shortcut key combinations. Different configuration profiles can be saved for easy recall as needed. +&konqueror; is a fully customisable application which anyone can configure to suit their own needs, from changing the overall style and the sizes of text and icons to selecting which items appear in the Menubar, changing the number and positions of the toolbars and even defining new shortcut key combinations. Different configuration profiles can be saved for easy recall as needed. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/path-complete.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/path-complete.docbook index 7d2bd6da42b..cbc4ad5ea27 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/path-complete.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/path-complete.docbook @@ -2,125 +2,45 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English - 2003-11-05 3.2 +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English + 2003-11-05 3.2 -Automatic Text Completion +Automatic Text Completion -You can get &konqueror; to help you enter a path or &URL; into the Location Toolbar by enabling one of the Text Completion features. To do this right click on a clear part of the Location Toolbar text entry box and select Text Completion from the pop up menu. This will let you choose between the following options: +You can get &konqueror; to help you enter a path or &URL; into the Location Toolbar by enabling one of the Text Completion features. To do this right click on a clear part of the Location Toolbar text entry box and select Text Completion from the pop up menu. This will let you choose between the following options: -None -What you get is what you type. +None +What you get is what you type. -Manual -When you have typed part of a path or &URL;, pressing &Ctrl;E will complete the entry if it is possible to do so unambiguously. +Manual +When you have typed part of a path or &URL;, pressing &Ctrl;E will complete the entry if it is possible to do so unambiguously. -Automatic -As you type into the Location Toolbar window &konqueror; will automatically extend what you type to complete one possible path or &URL;, highlighting the characters it has added. Continue typing if that is not what you wanted or press &Enter; to accept it. +Automatic +As you type into the Location Toolbar window &konqueror; will automatically extend what you type to complete one possible path or &URL;, highlighting the characters it has added. Continue typing if that is not what you wanted or press &Enter; to accept it. -Dropdown List -A drop-down window will appear as you type, showing the possible matches to what you have typed so far. When the path or &URL; that you want appears in the window double click on it with the &LMB;. You can also use the Down Arrow and Up Arrow keys to select it then press &Enter;. +Dropdown List +A drop-down window will appear as you type, showing the possible matches to what you have typed so far. When the path or &URL; that you want appears in the window double click on it with the &LMB;. You can also use the Down Arrow and Up Arrow keys to select it then press &Enter;. -Short Automatic -This is like Automatic mode except that it only extends what you have typed as far as the next / symbol in the path or &URL;. Press &Ctrl;E to accept the suggestion, &Enter; when the complete path or &URL; is shown. +Short Automatic +This is like Automatic mode except that it only extends what you have typed as far as the next / symbol in the path or &URL;. Press &Ctrl;E to accept the suggestion, &Enter; when the complete path or &URL; is shown. -You should try out these different modes and pick the one that suits you best. -The history of recently visited &URL;s that &konqueror; uses for the Text Completion function can be viewed and edited in the History page of the Navigation Panel. +You should try out these different modes and pick the one that suits you best. +The history of recently visited &URL;s that &konqueror; uses for the Text Completion function can be viewed and edited in the History page of the Navigation Panel. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/plugins.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/plugins.docbook index abf027f72b7..2ad71f8a8c0 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/plugins.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/plugins.docbook @@ -2,265 +2,86 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-09-22 3.1 +2002-09-22 3.1 -Plugins +Plugins -&Netscape; Plugins +&Netscape; Plugins -Currently, &konqueror; supports &Netscape; 4.x plugins. +Currently, &konqueror; supports &Netscape; 4.x plugins. -Selecting Settings Configure Konqueror...Plugins will give you a dialogue box with two tabbed pages; Scan and Plugins. +Selecting Settings Configure Konqueror...Plugins will give you a dialogue box with two tabbed pages; Scan and Plugins. -The Scan page controls how &kde; scans for new &Netscape; plugins, either manually by pressing the Scan for New Plugins button or automatically each time &kde; starts up. +The Scan page controls how &kde; scans for new &Netscape; plugins, either manually by pressing the Scan for New Plugins button or automatically each time &kde; starts up. -The scan is done by looking through the folders listed in the Scan Folders list for .so files containing plugin code. It examines every such file to find out which MIME types the plugin supports. It then creates MIME type definitions for &kde; in the user's ~/.trinity/share/mimelnk folder to make other applications aware of them. +The scan is done by looking through the folders listed in the Scan Folders list for .so files containing plugin code. It examines every such file to find out which MIME types the plugin supports. It then creates MIME type definitions for &kde; in the user's ~/.trinity/share/mimelnk folder to make other applications aware of them. -The Plugins page shows you the &Netscape; plugins that &kde; has found, and for each plugin it lists the MIME types and the filename suffixes it uses to recognise them. +The Plugins page shows you the &Netscape; plugins that &kde; has found, and for each plugin it lists the MIME types and the filename suffixes it uses to recognise them. -The dialogue box also contains a checkbox Enable plugins globally which you can use to enable or disable plugins that can be contained in HTML pages (these can be considered a security risk). +The dialogue box also contains a checkbox Enable plugins globally which you can use to enable or disable plugins that can be contained in HTML pages (these can be considered a security risk). -&konqueror; Plugins +&konqueror; Plugins -The package tdeaddons contains several useful plugins that interact with &konqueror; in various ways. These are explained briefly below, more detailed information may be obtained by looking through the Konqueror Plugins section in the &kde; Help Centre. +The package tdeaddons contains several useful plugins that interact with &konqueror; in various ways. These are explained briefly below, more detailed information may be obtained by looking through the Konqueror Plugins section in the &kde; Help Centre. -Web Page Translation -This uses AltaVista's BabelFish site to translate the current HTML page to whatever language you want (within reason). It can be launched with ToolsTranslate Web Page. +Web Page Translation +This uses AltaVista's BabelFish site to translate the current HTML page to whatever language you want (within reason). It can be launched with ToolsTranslate Web Page. -Folder View Filter -This is controlled by ToolsView Filter and allows you to choose which types of item are displayed in a folder. +Folder View Filter +This is controlled by ToolsView Filter and allows you to choose which types of item are displayed in a folder. -DOM Tree Viewer -Selecting ToolsShow DOM Tree opens a new window which displays the document object model (DOM) of the current HTML page. +DOM Tree Viewer +Selecting ToolsShow DOM Tree opens a new window which displays the document object model (DOM) of the current HTML page. -HTML Validator -This is started with ToolsValidate Web PageValidate HTML. It uses the W3C HTML validator to validate the current page, very useful when creating web pages. +HTML Validator +This is started with ToolsValidate Web PageValidate HTML. It uses the W3C HTML validator to validate the current page, very useful when creating web pages. -CSS Validator -Started with ToolsValidate Web PageValidate CSS, it uses the W3C CSS validator to validate the current page's Cascading Style Sheets. +CSS Validator +Started with ToolsValidate Web PageValidate CSS, it uses the W3C CSS validator to validate the current page's Cascading Style Sheets. -HTML Settings -Select ToolsHTML Settings to enable or disable a number of HTML settings without going through the Settings dialogue. +HTML Settings +Select ToolsHTML Settings to enable or disable a number of HTML settings without going through the Settings dialogue. -Image Gallery -In File Manager mode, you can select ToolsCreate Image Gallery to create an HTML page with thumbnails of all the images in the current folder. By default the HTML page is called images.html and the thumbnails are put into a new thumbs folder. +Image Gallery +In File Manager mode, you can select ToolsCreate Image Gallery to create an HTML page with thumbnails of all the images in the current folder. By default the HTML page is called images.html and the thumbnails are put into a new thumbs folder. -User Agent Changer -Select ToolsChange Browser Identification to get a menu that allows you to change the User Agent string without going through the Settings dialogue procedure. +User Agent Changer +Select ToolsChange Browser Identification to get a menu that allows you to change the User Agent string without going through the Settings dialogue procedure. -Archive Web Page -Invoked with Tools Archive Web Page, this tool creates an archive (.war ) file containing the web page being viewed including the images. Left click on the archive file name to view the saved page. +Archive Web Page +Invoked with Tools Archive Web Page, this tool creates an archive (.war ) file containing the web page being viewed including the images. Left click on the archive file name to view the saved page. -Navigation Panel Media Player -This is a simple media player, embedded as a tab page in the Navigation Panel. You can drag songs or videos onto this page to play them. +Navigation Panel Media Player +This is a simple media player, embedded as a tab page in the Navigation Panel. You can drag songs or videos onto this page to play them. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/save-settings.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/save-settings.docbook index 75cee3aa13d..e16730b4ad2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/save-settings.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/save-settings.docbook @@ -2,153 +2,27 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-11-06 3.2 +2003-11-06 3.2 -Saving Settings & Profiles +Saving Settings & Profiles -General Settings -When you close down &konqueror; your current View menu settings (such as the View Mode, Use index.html and Show Hidden Files items) are automatically saved as the default options to be used next time &konqueror; is started. +General Settings +When you close down &konqueror; your current View menu settings (such as the View Mode, Use index.html and Show Hidden Files items) are automatically saved as the default options to be used next time &konqueror; is started. -But you can also specify different View menu settings for an individual folder. To do this check the View Properties Saved in Folder box in the Settings menu, change the View settings to whatever you want then uncheck the View Properties saved in Folder box. Doing this creates a .directory file in that folder to hold the folder View settings. Use the SettingsRemove Folder Properties option to remove the folder specific settings (or just delete the .directory file). -One nice use of this feature is if you have a folder full of pictures. You can set that particular folder to display thumbnails of the pictures (by choosing Icon View and PreviewShow Previews from the View menu) when you open it, while not displaying images as thumbnails in other folders. +But you can also specify different View menu settings for an individual folder. To do this check the View Properties Saved in Folder box in the Settings menu, change the View settings to whatever you want then uncheck the View Properties saved in Folder box. Doing this creates a .directory file in that folder to hold the folder View settings. Use the SettingsRemove Folder Properties option to remove the folder specific settings (or just delete the .directory file). +One nice use of this feature is if you have a folder full of pictures. You can set that particular folder to display thumbnails of the pictures (by choosing Icon View and PreviewShow Previews from the View menu) when you open it, while not displaying images as thumbnails in other folders. -View Profiles -&konqueror; can save a whole set of options as a View Profile. Some view profiles are part of the standard &konqueror; installation, such as Web Browsing and File Management, but you can add your own, too. +View Profiles +&konqueror; can save a whole set of options as a View Profile. Some view profiles are part of the standard &konqueror; installation, such as Web Browsing and File Management, but you can add your own, too. -To modify a view profile (say, the Web Browsing profile), load the profile with SettingsLoad View ProfileWeb Browsing , and change the &konqueror; settings to whatever you want. Now select SettingsSave View Profile "Web Browsing".... In the dialogue which appears, you can change the name of the profile, which will create a new profile with that name, or you can leave the name as it is to modify the current profile. If you select Save URLs in profile, the current &URL; will be loaded when you load that view profile. This functions in a similar way to the Home Page in many web browsers. If you want &konqueror; to start up with an empty window enter about:blank into the location bar before saving the profile. +To modify a view profile (say, the Web Browsing profile), load the profile with SettingsLoad View ProfileWeb Browsing , and change the &konqueror; settings to whatever you want. Now select SettingsSave View Profile "Web Browsing".... In the dialogue which appears, you can change the name of the profile, which will create a new profile with that name, or you can leave the name as it is to modify the current profile. If you select Save URLs in profile, the current &URL; will be loaded when you load that view profile. This functions in a similar way to the Home Page in many web browsers. If you want &konqueror; to start up with an empty window enter about:blank into the location bar before saving the profile. -You can create a desktop icon to start &konqueror; with your new profile. First create a desktop icon by dragging the &konqueror; icon from the K menu onto the desktop and selecting Copy Here. Then right click on the new icon, select Properties... and change Program Name in the Execute tab page to kfmclient , MyNewProfile being what you called the new profile. Then in the General tab page change the name to something like MyNewProfile and pick a more suitable icon. +You can create a desktop icon to start &konqueror; with your new profile. First create a desktop icon by dragging the &konqueror; icon from the K menu onto the desktop and selecting Copy Here. Then right click on the new icon, select Properties... and change Program Name in the Execute tab page to kfmclient , MyNewProfile being what you called the new profile. Then in the General tab page change the name to something like MyNewProfile and pick a more suitable icon. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/sidebar.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/sidebar.docbook index 1bc3cf4e8dd..351ca096f33 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/sidebar.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konqueror/sidebar.docbook @@ -2,315 +2,113 @@ -&Pamela.Roberts; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Pamela.Roberts; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-09-22 3.1 +2002-09-22 3.1 -The Navigation Panel +The Navigation Panel -The Navigation Panel appears as a separate view at the left of &konqueror;'s window. It can be invoked with Window Show Navigation Panel or toggled on and off with the F9 key. +The Navigation Panel appears as a separate view at the left of &konqueror;'s window. It can be invoked with Window Show Navigation Panel or toggled on and off with the F9 key. - + -With the Navigation Panel +With the Navigation Panel -It contains a number of tabbed pages; left click on a tab's icon to view that page. Left clicking on the icon for the visible page will collapse the Navigation Panel so that only the tab icons are visible. +It contains a number of tabbed pages; left click on a tab's icon to view that page. Left clicking on the icon for the visible page will collapse the Navigation Panel so that only the tab icons are visible. -Bookmarks -This page shows a tree view of your Bookmarks. Left click on an item to open it in the main view. +Bookmarks +This page shows a tree view of your Bookmarks. Left click on an item to open it in the main view. -History -This page shows a tree view of your browsing History. Left clicking on an item will open it in the main view, or you can open it in a new &konqueror; window by right clicking and selecting New Window from the pop up menu. -You can remove an item from the history by right clicking on it and selecting Remove Entry . Selecting Clear History... will clear out the entire history. -The pop up menu you get when you right click on any entry in the History page also gives you the option of choosing whether the entire history is sorted by name or by date. -Selecting Preferences... from this pop up menu brings up the History Sidebar control module. This can be used to set the maximum size of your history and set a time after which items are automatically removed. You can also set different fonts for new and old &URL;s. The Detailed tooltips checkbox controls how much information is displayed when you hover the mouse pointer over an item in the history page. +History +This page shows a tree view of your browsing History. Left clicking on an item will open it in the main view, or you can open it in a new &konqueror; window by right clicking and selecting New Window from the pop up menu. +You can remove an item from the history by right clicking on it and selecting Remove Entry . Selecting Clear History... will clear out the entire history. +The pop up menu you get when you right click on any entry in the History page also gives you the option of choosing whether the entire history is sorted by name or by date. +Selecting Preferences... from this pop up menu brings up the History Sidebar control module. This can be used to set the maximum size of your history and set a time after which items are automatically removed. You can also set different fonts for new and old &URL;s. The Detailed tooltips checkbox controls how much information is displayed when you hover the mouse pointer over an item in the history page. -Home Folder -This page shows a tree view of the subfolders your home folder. Note that hidden folders (those with names beginning with a dot) are not shown. Left click on an item to open it in the main view, or right click to display a pop up menu allowing you to open the subfolder in a new window or as a new tab page of the main view. +Home Folder +This page shows a tree view of the subfolders your home folder. Note that hidden folders (those with names beginning with a dot) are not shown. Left click on an item to open it in the main view, or right click to display a pop up menu allowing you to open the subfolder in a new window or as a new tab page of the main view. -Network -This page is intended to show a tree view of your important network connections, although local folders can also be included. Again, you can left click on an item to open it in the main view or right click to bring up a menu with a wider range of possibilities. -The folders shown in the Network page are held in the folder ~/.trinity/share/apps/konqsidebartng/virtual_folders/remote/, and you can make new ones just as you would make any other subfolder. The items within these folders are held as .desktop files and can be created with &konqueror;'s Create New Link to Location (URL)... option. +Network +This page is intended to show a tree view of your important network connections, although local folders can also be included. Again, you can left click on an item to open it in the main view or right click to bring up a menu with a wider range of possibilities. +The folders shown in the Network page are held in the folder ~/.trinity/share/apps/konqsidebartng/virtual_folders/remote/, and you can make new ones just as you would make any other subfolder. The items within these folders are held as .desktop files and can be created with &konqueror;'s Create New Link to Location (URL)... option. -Root Folder -The Root Folder tree has the path /, and is the base folder of your system's local files. If you expand the Root folder you will find another folder called root. This belongs to the system administrator or Super User and is her home folder. You will also find a folder called home, in which you should be able to find your own Home folder again. +Root Folder +The Root Folder tree has the path /, and is the base folder of your system's local files. If you expand the Root folder you will find another folder called root. This belongs to the system administrator or Super User and is her home folder. You will also find a folder called home, in which you should be able to find your own Home folder again. -Services -This page provides quick access to the following services: -The Audio CD Browser. -Devices. This shows your hard disc partitions, floppy and &CD-ROM;. Left click on a device or partition name to mount it and display its contents in the main view. A mounted device or partition can be unmounted by right clicking on the device name and selecting Unmount from the pop up menu. -The LAN Browser allows you to browse other machines connected to your Local Area Network. -The Print System Browser tree gives you quick access to &kde;'s print manager Kprinter. +Services +This page provides quick access to the following services: +The Audio CD Browser. +Devices. This shows your hard disc partitions, floppy and &CD-ROM;. Left click on a device or partition name to mount it and display its contents in the main view. A mounted device or partition can be unmounted by right clicking on the device name and selecting Unmount from the pop up menu. +The LAN Browser allows you to browse other machines connected to your Local Area Network. +The Print System Browser tree gives you quick access to &kde;'s print manager Kprinter. -The Navigation Panel configuration can be changed by right clicking on the empty area below the bottom tab icon or by left clicking on the Configuration Button icon (the top icon in the previous screenshot, it may not be present in your setup). Doing this brings up a menu with the following options: +The Navigation Panel configuration can be changed by right clicking on the empty area below the bottom tab icon or by left clicking on the Configuration Button icon (the top icon in the previous screenshot, it may not be present in your setup). Doing this brings up a menu with the following options: -Add New -This option lets you add a new tab page to the Navigation Panel. The new page can contain the Sidebar Media Player (a &konqueror; Plugin feature) or a new Folder tree view. +Add New +This option lets you add a new tab page to the Navigation Panel. The new page can contain the Sidebar Media Player (a &konqueror; Plugin feature) or a new Folder tree view. -Multiple Views -Selecting this option splits the Navigation Panel so that two tab pages can be seen at once. +Multiple Views +Selecting this option splits the Navigation Panel so that two tab pages can be seen at once. -Show Tabs Left -This option lets you choose whether the tab icons are shown at the left or right of the Navigation Panel. +Show Tabs Left +This option lets you choose whether the tab icons are shown at the left or right of the Navigation Panel. -Show Configuration Button -Use this option to show or hide the Configuration Button icon. +Show Configuration Button +Use this option to show or hide the Configuration Button icon. -Right clicking on a tab icon brings up a menu with the following options: +Right clicking on a tab icon brings up a menu with the following options: -Set URL -Only available for folder pages, this option lets you change the &URL; (path) of the folder viewed in that page. +Set URL +Only available for folder pages, this option lets you change the &URL; (path) of the folder viewed in that page. -Set Icon -To change the tab icon. +Set Icon +To change the tab icon. -Remove -To remove the tab page from the Navigation Panel. +Remove +To remove the tab page from the Navigation Panel. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konsole/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konsole/index.docbook index a29b1a8b4cd..07e3f0ec371 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konsole/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/konsole/index.docbook @@ -10,512 +10,177 @@ -The &konsole; Handbook +The &konsole; Handbook -&Jonathan.Singer; &Jonathan.Singer.mail; - -&Waldo.Bastian; &Waldo.Bastian.mail; - -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Jonathan.Singer; &Jonathan.Singer.mail; + +&Waldo.Bastian; &Waldo.Bastian.mail; + +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -200020012002 -&Jonathan.Singer; +200020012002 +&Jonathan.Singer; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-10-05 -1.20.00 +2002-10-05 +1.20.00 -This document is the user handbook for the &konsole; application. -&konsole; is an X terminal emulator for &kde;. +This document is the user handbook for the &konsole; application. +&konsole; is an X terminal emulator for &kde;. -KDE -konsole -tdebase -command -line +KDE +konsole +tdebase +command +line -Introduction to &konsole; +Introduction to &konsole; -What is a terminal? &UNIX; operating systems were originally designed as text-only systems, controlled by keyboard commands -- what is known as a command-line interface (CLI). The &X-Window; and &kde; and other projects have since added the graphical interface you are now using. However, the underlying CLI system is still there, and is frequently the easiest, fastest and most powerful way to perform many tasks. &konsole; is what is known as an X terminal emulator, often referred to as a terminal or a shell. It gives you the equivalent of an old-fashioned text screen on your desktop, but one which can easily share the screen with your graphical applications. Windows users may be familiar with the MS-DOS Prompt utility, which has the analogous function of offering a DOS command-line under &Windows;. (Although the &UNIX; CLIs offer far more power and ease of use than does DOS!) - -Explaining the use of the &UNIX; CLI is beyond the scope of this document, as it would require a lengthy book. Fortunately, many such books are available in every language in any good bookstore or library. There are also tutorials available on the Internet. Enjoy &kde;, but don't be shy about learning to use the command-line! You will find that even learning just the basics will make your computer use much more efficient and enjoyable. +What is a terminal? &UNIX; operating systems were originally designed as text-only systems, controlled by keyboard commands -- what is known as a command-line interface (CLI). The &X-Window; and &kde; and other projects have since added the graphical interface you are now using. However, the underlying CLI system is still there, and is frequently the easiest, fastest and most powerful way to perform many tasks. &konsole; is what is known as an X terminal emulator, often referred to as a terminal or a shell. It gives you the equivalent of an old-fashioned text screen on your desktop, but one which can easily share the screen with your graphical applications. Windows users may be familiar with the MS-DOS Prompt utility, which has the analogous function of offering a DOS command-line under &Windows;. (Although the &UNIX; CLIs offer far more power and ease of use than does DOS!) + +Explaining the use of the &UNIX; CLI is beyond the scope of this document, as it would require a lengthy book. Fortunately, many such books are available in every language in any good bookstore or library. There are also tutorials available on the Internet. Enjoy &kde;, but don't be shy about learning to use the command-line! You will find that even learning just the basics will make your computer use much more efficient and enjoyable. -What makes &konsole; special? &konsole;'s advanced features include simple configuration and the ability to use multiple terminal shells in a single window, making for a less cluttered desktop. +What makes &konsole; special? &konsole;'s advanced features include simple configuration and the ability to use multiple terminal shells in a single window, making for a less cluttered desktop. -Using &konsole;, a user can open: +Using &konsole;, a user can open: -&Linux; console sessions -Shell sessions -Screen sessions -Midnight Commander file manager sessions -Root console sessions -Root Midnight Commander sessions +&Linux; console sessions +Shell sessions +Screen sessions +Midnight Commander file manager sessions +Root console sessions +Root Midnight Commander sessions -These sessions can be renamed to help you keep track of all your shells, or signalled (STOP, CONT, HUP, INT, TERM, KILL). - -For more control over &konsole;, a user can: +These sessions can be renamed to help you keep track of all your shells, or signalled (STOP, CONT, HUP, INT, TERM, KILL). + +For more control over &konsole;, a user can: -hide/show the menubar, toolbar, scrollbar and/or frame -select the size of a &konsole; window, fonts, colour schemes, and key mapping -change location of the scrollbar or hide the scrollbar +hide/show the menubar, toolbar, scrollbar and/or frame +select the size of a &konsole; window, fonts, colour schemes, and key mapping +change location of the scrollbar or hide the scrollbar -All chosen settings can be made the default for forthcoming sessions by saving them. - -For those with a deep interest in the taxonomy of free X terminals, there are two others of this kind: xterm, the original, written even before X itself (a month or two), and xvt, a lightweight xterm clone, on which most other currently available derivatives (notably eterm) are based. - -After a decade, &konsole; is the first rewrite from the ground up. While xterm has definitely been hacked to death (its README begins with the words Abandon All Hope, Ye Who Enter Here), &konsole; offers a fresh start using contemporary technologies and understanding of X. +All chosen settings can be made the default for forthcoming sessions by saving them. + +For those with a deep interest in the taxonomy of free X terminals, there are two others of this kind: xterm, the original, written even before X itself (a month or two), and xvt, a lightweight xterm clone, on which most other currently available derivatives (notably eterm) are based. + +After a decade, &konsole; is the first rewrite from the ground up. While xterm has definitely been hacked to death (its README begins with the words Abandon All Hope, Ye Who Enter Here), &konsole; offers a fresh start using contemporary technologies and understanding of X. -Use of &konsole; +Use of &konsole; -Startup +Startup -When &konsole; is started, an application (typically a &UNIX; shell) runs in the window. Simply type at the prompt. +When &konsole; is started, an application (typically a &UNIX; shell) runs in the window. Simply type at the prompt. -&konsole; Screen +&konsole; Screen -&konsole; Screen +&konsole; Screen -A Tip of the Day window may also appear on startup, offering hints on the use of &konsole;. If you do not wish to receive tips, uncheck the Show tips on startup box. +A Tip of the Day window may also appear on startup, offering hints on the use of &konsole;. If you do not wish to receive tips, uncheck the Show tips on startup box. -History - -As lines scroll off the top of the screen, they can be reviewed by moving the scroll bar upwards, scrolling with a mouse wheel or through the use of the &Shift;Page Up (to move back a page), &Shift;Page Down (to move forward a page), &Shift;Up (to move up a line) and &Shift;Down (to move down a line) keys (provided the History option is on). - -In addition, &konsole; mimics the FreeBSD console when scroll lock is pressed. When scroll lock is on, ordinary in- and output from the shell is suspended, and you can scroll through the history with Page Up, Page down, and Up Arrow and Down Arrow. +History + +As lines scroll off the top of the screen, they can be reviewed by moving the scroll bar upwards, scrolling with a mouse wheel or through the use of the &Shift;Page Up (to move back a page), &Shift;Page Down (to move forward a page), &Shift;Up (to move up a line) and &Shift;Down (to move down a line) keys (provided the History option is on). + +In addition, &konsole; mimics the FreeBSD console when scroll lock is pressed. When scroll lock is on, ordinary in- and output from the shell is suspended, and you can scroll through the history with Page Up, Page down, and Up Arrow and Down Arrow. -Sessions -If you often have to log into remote machines, or always run a similar set of terminal applications, you can use &konsole;'s Session feature along with &kde;'s session management to automate a lot of this for you. Let's take the following example: You often have open an ssh session to the machine administration ready for generic administration tasks. You may have noticed the New button on &konsole;'s tab bar contains a menu if you click and hold on it, and you can choose new session types here. We are going to add new entries to this menu. -Click on the menu entry SettingsConfigure Konsole -Choose the Session tab. - - -Fill in the first entry with a name. This is the name that will show in the menu, and will be the default label instead of Shell when you start a session of this type. - -Enter a command just as you normally would if you opened a new shell and were going to issue that command. For our first example above, you might type ssh administration. - -On the lower part of the panel, configure this session's appearance. You can have a different font, colour scheme, and $TERM type for each session. - -Press the Save Session... button. A dialogue will ask you to confirm the filename. - -Press OK. +Sessions +If you often have to log into remote machines, or always run a similar set of terminal applications, you can use &konsole;'s Session feature along with &kde;'s session management to automate a lot of this for you. Let's take the following example: You often have open an ssh session to the machine administration ready for generic administration tasks. You may have noticed the New button on &konsole;'s tab bar contains a menu if you click and hold on it, and you can choose new session types here. We are going to add new entries to this menu. +Click on the menu entry SettingsConfigure Konsole +Choose the Session tab. + + +Fill in the first entry with a name. This is the name that will show in the menu, and will be the default label instead of Shell when you start a session of this type. + +Enter a command just as you normally would if you opened a new shell and were going to issue that command. For our first example above, you might type ssh administration. + +On the lower part of the panel, configure this session's appearance. You can have a different font, colour scheme, and $TERM type for each session. + +Press the Save Session... button. A dialogue will ask you to confirm the filename. + +Press OK. -You should now be able to press and hold the New button on the tab bar, and select your new session type from the list. A new shell session will open within the &konsole; window, with the result of your executed command. In our example, you will be at an ssh passphrase prompt, and when you provide your passphrase, you will be logged into the remote machine. You can avoid this step also, by using ssh-agent, but that is a topic for another goodie. Perhaps you want to remotely tail your http error logs on a webserver, you could use a commandline something like ssh webserver tail /var/log/httpd-error.log. -You can use this to execute local commands as well. Try creating a session where the command is tail /var/log/messages. In this case, exiting the running application will close the shell session as well. -One really nice use of this feature is if you find you always have the same set of open sessions, &kde; can open them all for you automatically when you start a new &kde; session. Simply have them open as you like when you exit &kde;, and they will be saved with your &kde; session, and restored just like any other application when you restart &kde;. +You should now be able to press and hold the New button on the tab bar, and select your new session type from the list. A new shell session will open within the &konsole; window, with the result of your executed command. In our example, you will be at an ssh passphrase prompt, and when you provide your passphrase, you will be logged into the remote machine. You can avoid this step also, by using ssh-agent, but that is a topic for another goodie. Perhaps you want to remotely tail your http error logs on a webserver, you could use a commandline something like ssh webserver tail /var/log/httpd-error.log. +You can use this to execute local commands as well. Try creating a session where the command is tail /var/log/messages. In this case, exiting the running application will close the shell session as well. +One really nice use of this feature is if you find you always have the same set of open sessions, &kde; can open them all for you automatically when you start a new &kde; session. Simply have them open as you like when you exit &kde;, and they will be saved with your &kde; session, and restored just like any other application when you restart &kde;. -Mouse Buttons +Mouse Buttons -Left +Left -Clicking the left button is passed as an event to the application running in the emulation, if it is mouse-aware. If a program will react on mouse clicks, &konsole; indicates this by showing an arrow cursor. If not, an I-beam (bar) cursor is shown. +Clicking the left button is passed as an event to the application running in the emulation, if it is mouse-aware. If a program will react on mouse clicks, &konsole; indicates this by showing an arrow cursor. If not, an I-beam (bar) cursor is shown. -Holding the left button down and dragging the mouse over the screen with a mouse-unaware application running will mark a region of the text. While dragging, the marked text is displayed reversed for visual feedback. Select Copy from the Edit menu to copy the marked text to the clipboard for further use within &konsole; or another application. The selected text can also be dragged and dropped into compatible applications. Click on the selected text and drag it to the desired location. (Depending on your &kde; settings, you may need to hold the &Ctrl; key while dragging. +Holding the left button down and dragging the mouse over the screen with a mouse-unaware application running will mark a region of the text. While dragging, the marked text is displayed reversed for visual feedback. Select Copy from the Edit menu to copy the marked text to the clipboard for further use within &konsole; or another application. The selected text can also be dragged and dropped into compatible applications. Click on the selected text and drag it to the desired location. (Depending on your &kde; settings, you may need to hold the &Ctrl; key while dragging. -Normally, new-line characters are inserted at the end of each line selected. This is best for cut and paste of source code, or the output of a particular command. For ordinary text, the line breaks are often not important. One might prefer, however, for the text to be a stream of characters that will be automatically re-formatted when pasted into another application. To select in text-stream mode, hold down the &Ctrl; key while selecting normally. +Normally, new-line characters are inserted at the end of each line selected. This is best for cut and paste of source code, or the output of a particular command. For ordinary text, the line breaks are often not important. One might prefer, however, for the text to be a stream of characters that will be automatically re-formatted when pasted into another application. To select in text-stream mode, hold down the &Ctrl; key while selecting normally. -Double-click with the left button to select a word; triple-click to select an entire line. +Double-click with the left button to select a word; triple-click to select an entire line. -If the upper or lower edge of the text area is touched while marking, &konsole; scrolls up or down, eventually exposing text within the history buffer. The scrolling stops when the mouse stops moving. +If the upper or lower edge of the text area is touched while marking, &konsole; scrolls up or down, eventually exposing text within the history buffer. The scrolling stops when the mouse stops moving. -After the mouse is released, &konsole; attempts to keep the text in the clipboard visible by holding the marked area reversed. The marked area reverts back to normal as soon as the contents of the clipboard change, the text within the marked area is altered or the left mouse button is clicked. +After the mouse is released, &konsole; attempts to keep the text in the clipboard visible by holding the marked area reversed. The marked area reverts back to normal as soon as the contents of the clipboard change, the text within the marked area is altered or the left mouse button is clicked. -To mark text on a mouse-aware application (Midnight Commander, for example) the &Shift; key has to be pressed when clicking. +To mark text on a mouse-aware application (Midnight Commander, for example) the &Shift; key has to be pressed when clicking. -Middle +Middle -Pressing the middle button pastes text currently in the clipboard. Holding down the &Ctrl; key as you press the middle button pastes the text and sends it to &konsole;. +Pressing the middle button pastes text currently in the clipboard. Holding down the &Ctrl; key as you press the middle button pastes the text and sends it to &konsole;. -If you have a mouse with only two buttons, pressing both the left and right buttons together emulates the middle button of a three button mouse. +If you have a mouse with only two buttons, pressing both the left and right buttons together emulates the middle button of a three button mouse. -Right +Right -The right button brings up a menu with the Show Menubar, Copy, Paste, Send Signal, Detach (or Attach) Session, Rename Session..., Bookmarks Settings and Close Session menu items. The &Ctrl; right button brings up the Session menu. +The right button brings up a menu with the Show Menubar, Copy, Paste, Send Signal, Detach (or Attach) Session, Rename Session..., Bookmarks Settings and Close Session menu items. The &Ctrl; right button brings up the Session menu. @@ -523,735 +188,237 @@ -Menu Bar - -The menubar is at the top of the &konsole; window. It can be hidden and restored by toggling Show Menubar in the Settings menu. When the menubar is hidden, Show Menubar can be reached by right clicking in the window or by &Alt;&Ctrl;M . +Menu Bar + +The menubar is at the top of the &konsole; window. It can be hidden and restored by toggling Show Menubar in the Settings menu. When the menubar is hidden, Show Menubar can be reached by right clicking in the window or by &Alt;&Ctrl;M . -<guimenu ->Session</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Session</guimenu> Menu -SessionNew Shell -Open a new session with a terminal shell. &Alt;&Ctrl;N can also be used, as described in more detail below. - - -SessionNew Linux Console -Open a new session emulating a text-only &Linux; system. -See the file README.linux.console in the &konsole; source package for detailed information on how the &Linux; console differs from a typical &UNIX; console. If this doesn't mean anything to you, you almost certainly don't need to worry about it. +SessionNew Shell +Open a new session with a terminal shell. &Alt;&Ctrl;N can also be used, as described in more detail below. + + +SessionNew Linux Console +Open a new session emulating a text-only &Linux; system. +See the file README.linux.console in the &konsole; source package for detailed information on how the &Linux; console differs from a typical &UNIX; console. If this doesn't mean anything to you, you almost certainly don't need to worry about it. -SessionNew Midnight Commander -Open a new session with the Midnight Commander file browser. +SessionNew Midnight Commander +Open a new session with the Midnight Commander file browser. -Session New Root Console +Session New Root Console -Open a new session with a terminal shell, as the root user. - -After being prompted for the root password, the # prompt appears, indicating that the user is working with root privileges. This is frequently necessary for installing new software and other system maintenance, but care should be taken to avoid accidental damage. +Open a new session with a terminal shell, as the root user. + +After being prompted for the root password, the # prompt appears, indicating that the user is working with root privileges. This is frequently necessary for installing new software and other system maintenance, but care should be taken to avoid accidental damage. -Session New Root Midnight Commander +Session New Root Midnight Commander -Open a new session with the Midnight Commander file browser, as the root user. -After being prompted for the root password, the # prompt appears under the browser window, indicating that the user is working with root privileges. Again, working as root is frequently necessary but care should be taken to avoid accidental damage. +Open a new session with the Midnight Commander file browser, as the root user. +After being prompted for the root password, the # prompt appears under the browser window, indicating that the user is working with root privileges. Again, working as root is frequently necessary but care should be taken to avoid accidental damage. -SessionNew Screen Session -Open a new session with the Screen virtual terminal manager. See man for more information. - - -Session New Shell at Bookmark -Start a new terminal shell, in a folder chosen from the bookmark list. - - - -Session Close Session -Close the current session. - - - -Session Quit -Quit &konsole;, closing all sessions and any applications launched from them. +SessionNew Screen Session +Open a new session with the Screen virtual terminal manager. See man for more information. + + +Session New Shell at Bookmark +Start a new terminal shell, in a folder chosen from the bookmark list. + + + +Session Close Session +Close the current session. + + + +Session Quit +Quit &konsole;, closing all sessions and any applications launched from them. -You can also open a new session with a key shortcut. By default, &Alt;&Ctrl;N is used. You can also define your own key shortcuts through the Settings Configure Shortcuts... menu command. - -The files with a *.keytab extension in $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole also define keyboard shortcuts. Use the Settings Keyboard menu command to choose a keytab file. The file README.KeyTab contains more information on defining shortcuts. - -The list of available sessions may differ from those listed here. &konsole; detects your installed programs and customises the list to reflect the available options. - -Finally, note that the session types can be modified, and new types created, by using the configuration dialogue, reached from the Settings Configure Konsole... menu entry. +You can also open a new session with a key shortcut. By default, &Alt;&Ctrl;N is used. You can also define your own key shortcuts through the Settings Configure Shortcuts... menu command. + +The files with a *.keytab extension in $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole also define keyboard shortcuts. Use the Settings Keyboard menu command to choose a keytab file. The file README.KeyTab contains more information on defining shortcuts. + +The list of available sessions may differ from those listed here. &konsole; detects your installed programs and customises the list to reflect the available options. + +Finally, note that the session types can be modified, and new types created, by using the configuration dialogue, reached from the Settings Configure Konsole... menu entry. -<guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu -EditCopy -Copy the selected text to the clipboard. - - - -EditPaste -Paste text from the clipboard at the cursor location. - - - -Edit Send Signal -Send Signal - Send the specified signal to the shell process, or other process, that was launched when the new session was started.Currently available signals are: +EditCopy +Copy the selected text to the clipboard. + + + +EditPaste +Paste text from the clipboard at the cursor location. + + + +Edit Send Signal +Send Signal - Send the specified signal to the shell process, or other process, that was launched when the new session was started.Currently available signals are: -STOP -to stop process +STOP +to stop process -CONT -continue if stopped +CONT +continue if stopped -HUP -hangup detected on controlling terminal, or death of controlling process +HUP +hangup detected on controlling terminal, or death of controlling process -INT -interrupt from keyboard +INT +interrupt from keyboard -TERM -termination signal +TERM +termination signal -KILL -kill signal +KILL +kill signal -USR1 -user signal 1 +USR1 +user signal 1 -USR2 -user signal 2 +USR2 +user signal 2 -Refer to your system manual pages for further details by giving the command man . - - - -EditClear Terminal -Clear all text from the session window.. - - - - -EditReset and Clear Terminal -Start a new session in the window.. - - - - -EditFind in History... -Find a word or string of text in the current history. Options allow case sensitive or backwards searches, and the use of regular expressions in searches. Press the Edit button to use the &kde; graphical editor to create a regular expression. - - - - -EditFind Next -Move to the next instance of the text for which you are searching. - - - - - -EditFind Previous -Move to the previous instance of the text for which you are searching. - - - - - -EditSave History As... -Save the current history as a text file. - - - - -EditClear History -Clear the history for the current session. - - - -EditClear All Histories -Clear the history for all sessions. - +Refer to your system manual pages for further details by giving the command man . + + + +EditClear Terminal +Clear all text from the session window.. + + + + +EditReset and Clear Terminal +Start a new session in the window.. + + + + +EditFind in History... +Find a word or string of text in the current history. Options allow case sensitive or backwards searches, and the use of regular expressions in searches. Press the Edit button to use the &kde; graphical editor to create a regular expression. + + + + +EditFind Next +Move to the next instance of the text for which you are searching. + + + + + +EditFind Previous +Move to the previous instance of the text for which you are searching. + + + + + +EditSave History As... +Save the current history as a text file. + + + + +EditClear History +Clear the history for the current session. + + + +EditClear All Histories +Clear the history for all sessions. + -<guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu -ViewDetach Session -Open the current session in a separate window. The name of the session is displayed on the titlebar of the new window. Close the new window to restore the session to its original place, or right-click on the new window and select Attach Session. Note that if the main window is closed, any detached sessions will be closed with it. - - - -ViewRename Session... -Open a dialogue box allowing you to change the name of the current session. The name is displayed on the session tab. &Alt;&Ctrl;S can also be used. - - - -ViewMonitor for Activity -Flag the current session so it will show an alert if activity occurs. An icon of a lit light bulb will appear in the session's tab. Use this to alert you if something happens while you are working in another session. The time before an alert can be modified in the &konsole; preferences. - - - -ViewMonitor for Silence -Flag the current session so it will show an alert if no activity occurs for 10 seconds. An icon of a dark light bulb will appear in the session's tab. Use this to alert you if a task stops while you are working in another session. The time before an alert can be modified in the &konsole; preferences. - - - -ViewSend Input to All Sessions -Flag the current session so any commands entered into it will be sent to all sessions. The session will have a small icon in its tab to remind you to be careful of what you enter! rm -rf *, for instance, is probably not a good idea. - - - - -ViewMove Session Left -Move the tab of the current session one tab to the left. - - - -ViewMove Session Right -Move the tab of the current session one tab to the right. -&Shift; Left and &Shift; Right can be also be used to move between sessions. - - - -View Session icons... -At the bottom of the menu is a list of the available sessions. Selecting one makes that session active.You can also use the &Shift;Left/&Shift;Right keys to cycle through the available sessions. +ViewDetach Session +Open the current session in a separate window. The name of the session is displayed on the titlebar of the new window. Close the new window to restore the session to its original place, or right-click on the new window and select Attach Session. Note that if the main window is closed, any detached sessions will be closed with it. + + + +ViewRename Session... +Open a dialogue box allowing you to change the name of the current session. The name is displayed on the session tab. &Alt;&Ctrl;S can also be used. + + + +ViewMonitor for Activity +Flag the current session so it will show an alert if activity occurs. An icon of a lit light bulb will appear in the session's tab. Use this to alert you if something happens while you are working in another session. The time before an alert can be modified in the &konsole; preferences. + + + +ViewMonitor for Silence +Flag the current session so it will show an alert if no activity occurs for 10 seconds. An icon of a dark light bulb will appear in the session's tab. Use this to alert you if a task stops while you are working in another session. The time before an alert can be modified in the &konsole; preferences. + + + +ViewSend Input to All Sessions +Flag the current session so any commands entered into it will be sent to all sessions. The session will have a small icon in its tab to remind you to be careful of what you enter! rm -rf *, for instance, is probably not a good idea. + + + + +ViewMove Session Left +Move the tab of the current session one tab to the left. + + + +ViewMove Session Right +Move the tab of the current session one tab to the right. +&Shift; Left and &Shift; Right can be also be used to move between sessions. + + + +View Session icons... +At the bottom of the menu is a list of the available sessions. Selecting one makes that session active.You can also use the &Shift;Left/&Shift;Right keys to cycle through the available sessions. @@ -1259,73 +426,30 @@ -<guimenu ->Bookmarks</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu> Menu -BookmarksAdd Bookmark -Add the current location to the bookmark list. - - - -BookmarksEdit Bookmarks -Edit the bookmark list. - - - -BookmarksNew Bookmark Folder... -Add a new folder to the bookmark list. +BookmarksAdd Bookmark +Add the current location to the bookmark list. + + + +BookmarksEdit Bookmarks +Edit the bookmark list. + + + +BookmarksNew Bookmark Folder... +Add a new folder to the bookmark list. -The bookmark list is displayed at the bottom of the menu. Select a bookmark to change to that location. +The bookmark list is displayed at the bottom of the menu. Select a bookmark to change to that location. -You can use the bookmark editor to manually add URLs like ssh://user@host or telnet://host to open remote connections. +You can use the bookmark editor to manually add URLs like ssh://user@host or telnet://host to open remote connections. @@ -1333,292 +457,84 @@ -<guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -SettingsShow Menubar -Show or hide the menubar. - - - -SettingsShow Toolbar -Show or hide the toolbar. - - - -Settings Scrollbar -Control location of scrollbar: none, left, or right. - - - -Settings Fullscreen -Toggle window between full-screen and normal size. - - - -Settings Bell -Set the system bell to a &kde; System Notification or a visible flash, or turns it off. - - - -Settings Font -Set font and font size -Select the Custom option to use any combination of font, size and style. The README.fonts file in the &konsole; source package gives tips on which fonts will work well. - - - -Settings Keyboard -Choose desired keymapping. -The list of these keymappings is taken from $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole/*.keytab. The file $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole/README.KeyTab describes the keytab format in more detail. Add to or modify these files to match your needs. - - - -Settings Schema -Set colours of text and background. -The list of these schemata is taken from $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole/*.schema. The file $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole/README.Schema describes the schema format in more detail. Add to or modify these files to match your needs. You can also create custom schema through the preferences dialogue at Settings Configure Konsole.... +SettingsShow Menubar +Show or hide the menubar. + + + +SettingsShow Toolbar +Show or hide the toolbar. + + + +Settings Scrollbar +Control location of scrollbar: none, left, or right. + + + +Settings Fullscreen +Toggle window between full-screen and normal size. + + + +Settings Bell +Set the system bell to a &kde; System Notification or a visible flash, or turns it off. + + + +Settings Font +Set font and font size +Select the Custom option to use any combination of font, size and style. The README.fonts file in the &konsole; source package gives tips on which fonts will work well. + + + +Settings Keyboard +Choose desired keymapping. +The list of these keymappings is taken from $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole/*.keytab. The file $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole/README.KeyTab describes the keytab format in more detail. Add to or modify these files to match your needs. + + + +Settings Schema +Set colours of text and background. +The list of these schemata is taken from $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole/*.schema. The file $TDEDIR/share/apps/konsole/README.Schema describes the schema format in more detail. Add to or modify these files to match your needs. You can also create custom schema through the preferences dialogue at Settings Configure Konsole.... -Settings Size -Set size of text area (given in columns x rows). - - - -Settings History... -Open a dialogue where you can configure the history. The Enable checkbox toggles saving of lines that have scrolled off the top of the window. You can enter the Number of lines to remember in the text field, or use the spinner buttons to increase or decrease the number in steps of 100 lines. The Defaults button will reset the history to 1000 lines. Setting this value to 0 will cause all history to be saved. Press OK to save your changes, or Cancel to close the dialogue without saving your settings. The Help button will open this manual, and display the text you're reading right now. - - - -SettingsSave Settings -Save the current settings as the new defaults. - - - -SettingsSave Sessions Profile... -Save the current set of sessions under a name you choose. The profile can then be used by starting &konsole; from the command-line with the --profile and the name of the profile. +Settings Size +Set size of text area (given in columns x rows). + + + +Settings History... +Open a dialogue where you can configure the history. The Enable checkbox toggles saving of lines that have scrolled off the top of the window. You can enter the Number of lines to remember in the text field, or use the spinner buttons to increase or decrease the number in steps of 100 lines. The Defaults button will reset the history to 1000 lines. Setting this value to 0 will cause all history to be saved. Press OK to save your changes, or Cancel to close the dialogue without saving your settings. The Help button will open this manual, and display the text you're reading right now. + + + +SettingsSave Settings +Save the current settings as the new defaults. + + + +SettingsSave Sessions Profile... +Save the current set of sessions under a name you choose. The profile can then be used by starting &konsole; from the command-line with the --profile and the name of the profile. -SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... -Customise keyboard shortcuts for &konsole; commands. +SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... +Customise keyboard shortcuts for &konsole; commands. -SettingsConfigure &konsole;... -Open the &kcontrolcenter; module, allowing many additional changes to &konsole;'s interface and behaviour, including the creation of custom schemas and modification of the available sessions. +SettingsConfigure &konsole;... +Open the &kcontrolcenter; module, allowing many additional changes to &konsole;'s interface and behaviour, including the creation of custom schemas and modification of the available sessions. @@ -1626,100 +542,31 @@ -<guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu - F1Help Konsole Handbook -Open the table of contents of this document. - - - -Help Tip of the Day... -Display a helpful tip about the use of &konsole;. Check the Show on start box to display a tip each time &konsole; is started. - - -HelpReport Bug... -Submit a bug report or a feature request for &konsole;. - - - -HelpAbout Konsole... -Information about &konsole;'s author - - - -HelpAbout KDE... -Information about the KDE project + F1Help Konsole Handbook +Open the table of contents of this document. + + + +Help Tip of the Day... +Display a helpful tip about the use of &konsole;. Check the Show on start box to display a tip each time &konsole; is started. + + +HelpReport Bug... +Submit a bug report or a feature request for &konsole;. + + + +HelpAbout Konsole... +Information about &konsole;'s author + + + +HelpAbout KDE... +Information about the KDE project @@ -1728,468 +575,165 @@ -Toolbar - -The toolbar is at the bottom of the &konsole; window. - -It can be hidden and restored by toggling Show Toolbar in the Settings menu or by clicking the textured handle at the side of the bar. The bar contains a New icon and icons for the current sessions. Clicking New opens a new Shell session. -Double-clicking a session tab opens a dialogue box enabling you to change the name of that session. &Alt;&Ctrl;S can also be used to rename the active session. -Clicking an existing session's icon makes that session active. When the toolbar is hidden, &Shift; Left and &Shift; Right can be used to move between sessions. +Toolbar + +The toolbar is at the bottom of the &konsole; window. + +It can be hidden and restored by toggling Show Toolbar in the Settings menu or by clicking the textured handle at the side of the bar. The bar contains a New icon and icons for the current sessions. Clicking New opens a new Shell session. +Double-clicking a session tab opens a dialogue box enabling you to change the name of that session. &Alt;&Ctrl;S can also be used to rename the active session. +Clicking an existing session's icon makes that session active. When the toolbar is hidden, &Shift; Left and &Shift; Right can be used to move between sessions. -Command-line Options +Command-line Options -When &konsole; is started from the command-line, various options can be specified to modify its behaviour. +When &konsole; is started from the command-line, various options can be specified to modify its behaviour. - -List the various options - - - - name -Set the name that appears in the titlebar - - - - -Start with a login shell environment. What that does varies depending on your system, but generally it means that files such as ~/.profile or ~/.bash_profile will be read. (If that doesn't mean anything to you, don't worry about it, but keep in the back of your mind for when you realise you need it.) - - - - title -Set the window title - - - - terminal -Sets the environment variable TERM to the specified value. Read man for more information on TERM. - - - - -Ignored - - - - -Prevent &konsole; from closing when an exit command is issued in the only session window. - - - - -Disable the saving of lines that scroll off the top of the window - - - - -Start &konsole; without a menubar - - - - -Start &konsole; without a toolbar - - - - -Start &konsole; without a frame - - - - -Start &konsole; without a scrollbar - - - - -Start &konsole; without Xft antialiasing. Antialiasing of a small font may be difficult to read. - - - - CCxLL -Start a terminal window of CC Columns and LL lines - - - - type -Start a session of the given type rather than the default. - - - - file -Start &konsole; using a specified .keytab file to customise key bindings. - - - - file -Start &konsole; using a saved set of sessions. - - - - file -Start &konsole; using a specified .schema file to customise appearance. - - - - file -Allow the use of extended DCOP commands to paste text into sessions. - - - - dir -Open with dir as the working folder. - - - - command -Execute command instead of shell. + +List the various options + + + + name +Set the name that appears in the titlebar + + + + +Start with a login shell environment. What that does varies depending on your system, but generally it means that files such as ~/.profile or ~/.bash_profile will be read. (If that doesn't mean anything to you, don't worry about it, but keep in the back of your mind for when you realise you need it.) + + + + title +Set the window title + + + + terminal +Sets the environment variable TERM to the specified value. Read man for more information on TERM. + + + + +Ignored + + + + +Prevent &konsole; from closing when an exit command is issued in the only session window. + + + + +Disable the saving of lines that scroll off the top of the window + + + + +Start &konsole; without a menubar + + + + +Start &konsole; without a toolbar + + + + +Start &konsole; without a frame + + + + +Start &konsole; without a scrollbar + + + + +Start &konsole; without Xft antialiasing. Antialiasing of a small font may be difficult to read. + + + + CCxLL +Start a terminal window of CC Columns and LL lines + + + + type +Start a session of the given type rather than the default. + + + + file +Start &konsole; using a specified .keytab file to customise key bindings. + + + + file +Start &konsole; using a saved set of sessions. + + + + file +Start &konsole; using a specified .schema file to customise appearance. + + + + file +Allow the use of extended DCOP commands to paste text into sessions. + + + + dir +Open with dir as the working folder. + + + + command +Execute command instead of shell. -For instance: +For instance: -bash$ - konsole - 90x25 - -starts a &konsole; window with 90 columns and 25 rows, with no history +bash$ + konsole + 90x25 + +starts a &konsole; window with 90 columns and 25 rows, with no history -&konsole; also accepts generic &Qt; and &kde; options: +&konsole; also accepts generic &Qt; and &kde; options: - -List Qt-specific options - - - -List KDE-specific options - - - -List all options - - - -Show the authors' names - - - -Show the version number - - - -Show licence information + +List Qt-specific options + + + +List KDE-specific options + + + +List all options + + + +Show the authors' names + + + +Show the version number + + + +Show licence information @@ -2198,38 +742,23 @@ -Credits and Copyright +Credits and Copyright -&konsole; is maintained by &Waldo.Bastian; &Waldo.Bastian.mail; +&konsole; is maintained by &Waldo.Bastian; &Waldo.Bastian.mail; -The application &konsole; Copyright © 1997-2002 &Lars.Doelle; &Lars.Doelle.mail; +The application &konsole; Copyright © 1997-2002 &Lars.Doelle; &Lars.Doelle.mail; -This document was written by &Jonathan.Singer; &Jonathan.Singer.mail; +This document was written by &Jonathan.Singer; &Jonathan.Singer.mail; -Originally converted to DocBook SGML by &Mike.McBride; and &Lauri.Watts; +Originally converted to DocBook SGML by &Mike.McBride; and &Lauri.Watts; -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net &underFDL; &underGPL; -&konsole; on non-&Linux; platforms +&konsole; on non-&Linux; platforms -Information on building &konsole; on platforms other than &Linux; is available in the README.ports file in the &konsole; source package. It provides a list of experts for certain platforms (Tru64, &Solaris;, OpenBSD) and requests volunteers from other &UNIX; platforms. +Information on building &konsole; on platforms other than &Linux; is available in the README.ports file in the &konsole; source package. It provides a list of experts for certain platforms (Tru64, &Solaris;, OpenBSD) and requests volunteers from other &UNIX; platforms. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kpager/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kpager/index.docbook index 038eb916f0b..59d211a2651 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kpager/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kpager/index.docbook @@ -4,262 +4,145 @@ - + ]> -The &kpager; Handbook +The &kpager; Handbook -&Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; - -&Antonio.Larrosa.Jimenez; &Antonio.Larrosa.Jimenez.mail; - -&Matthias.Elter; &Matthias.Elter.mail; - -&Matthias.Ettrich; &Matthias.Ettrich.mail; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Dirk.Doerflinger; &Dirk.Doerflinger.mail; + +&Antonio.Larrosa.Jimenez; &Antonio.Larrosa.Jimenez.mail; + +&Matthias.Elter; &Matthias.Elter.mail; + +&Matthias.Ettrich; &Matthias.Ettrich.mail; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2000 -&Dirk.Doerflinger; +2000 +&Dirk.Doerflinger; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2001-01-28 -0.02.00 +2001-01-28 +0.02.00 -&kpager; gives you a thumbnail view of all virtual desktops. +&kpager; gives you a thumbnail view of all virtual desktops. -KDE -pager -kpager -desktop -overview +KDE +pager +kpager +desktop +overview -Introduction +Introduction -&kpager; gives you a thumbnail sketch of all your desktops. It is a handy tool to let you see, resize or close windows on any desktop and move windows around within or between desktops. +&kpager; gives you a thumbnail sketch of all your desktops. It is a handy tool to let you see, resize or close windows on any desktop and move windows around within or between desktops. -Using &kpager; +Using &kpager; -Here's a screenshot of &kpager; +Here's a screenshot of &kpager; - Screenshot + Screenshot -More &kpager; features +More &kpager; features -&kpager; can show all virtual desktops and the applications within them. It can be used to chose an application or even to move applications within virtual desktops or to others. +&kpager; can show all virtual desktops and the applications within them. It can be used to chose an application or even to move applications within virtual desktops or to others. -Command Reference +Command Reference -The main &kpager; window +The main &kpager; window -Using the mouse +Using the mouse -In &kpager; you can activate applications by clicking them with the left button. +In &kpager; you can activate applications by clicking them with the left button. -The middle button of the mouse can be used for dragging applications within &kpager;. Applications can either be moved within a virtual desktop or to another one. +The middle button of the mouse can be used for dragging applications within &kpager;. Applications can either be moved within a virtual desktop or to another one. -Clicking the right mouse button anywhere in &kpager; will open a context menu. +Clicking the right mouse button anywhere in &kpager; will open a context menu. -The Context Menu - -The context menu depends on where the right mouse button is clicked: If it is clicked on the empty background of &kpager;, it only has two items: Configure KPager and Quit. Otherwise, if clicked on a window, there are also the name and the icon of the application, and Minimise, Maximise, To Desktop and Close are displayed. See below for a detailed description of the menu items. +The Context Menu + +The context menu depends on where the right mouse button is clicked: If it is clicked on the empty background of &kpager;, it only has two items: Configure KPager and Quit. Otherwise, if clicked on a window, there are also the name and the icon of the application, and Minimise, Maximise, To Desktop and Close are displayed. See below for a detailed description of the menu items. - -Maximise - -Maximises the application window to the whole desktop. This item only appears if right clicked on an application window. + +Maximise + +Maximises the application window to the whole desktop. This item only appears if right clicked on an application window. - -Minimise - -Iconifies the application. This item only appears if right clicked on an application window. + +Minimise + +Iconifies the application. This item only appears if right clicked on an application window. - -To Desktop - -Sends the application window to the chosen virtual desktop. This item only appears if right clicked on an application window. + +To Desktop + +Sends the application window to the chosen virtual desktop. This item only appears if right clicked on an application window. - -Close - -Closes the clicked application. This item only appears if right clicked on an application window. + +Close + +Closes the clicked application. This item only appears if right clicked on an application window. - -Configure Pager - -Opens the settings dialogue. + +Configure Pager + +Opens the settings dialogue. - -Quit - -Quits &kpager;. + +Quit + +Quits &kpager;. @@ -268,121 +151,56 @@ -The Settings Dialogue +The Settings Dialogue -Here's a screenshot of the settings dialogue +Here's a screenshot of the settings dialogue - Screenshot + Screenshot -In the settings dialogue you will find five check boxes and two groups of radio buttons. +In the settings dialogue you will find five check boxes and two groups of radio buttons. -Enable Window Dragging -If this box is checked, you can drag windows inside of &kpager; with the &MMB;. Windows can be dragged over the desktop or even to another desktop. +Enable Window Dragging +If this box is checked, you can drag windows inside of &kpager; with the &MMB;. Windows can be dragged over the desktop or even to another desktop. -Show Name -If this box is checked, the names of the desktops are shown in the main view of &kpager;. +Show Name +If this box is checked, the names of the desktops are shown in the main view of &kpager;. -Show Number -If this box is checked, the numbers of the desktops are shown in the main view of &kpager;. If it is checked together with the Show Name box, the name is displayed with ordinals, e.g. 1. Desktop. +Show Number +If this box is checked, the numbers of the desktops are shown in the main view of &kpager;. If it is checked together with the Show Name box, the name is displayed with ordinals, e.g. 1. Desktop. -Show Background -If this box is checked, the wallpaper of each desktop - if set - will be shown as backgrounds in &kpager;, too. +Show Background +If this box is checked, the wallpaper of each desktop - if set - will be shown as backgrounds in &kpager;, too. -Show Windows -If this box is checked, the applications on the desktops are shown in &kpager; as small views. Otherwise, &kpager; will remain empty, just for choosing the virtual desktops. +Show Windows +If this box is checked, the applications on the desktops are shown in &kpager; as small views. Otherwise, &kpager; will remain empty, just for choosing the virtual desktops. -Type of Window -This group of radio buttons sets the kind of view for the application window views. Plain will show just empty rectangles with the proportions of the application window, Icon will show them with their standard icon and Pixmap with a small view of the contents of the application window. Note that using the pixmap mode is only recommended for very fast machines. +Type of Window +This group of radio buttons sets the kind of view for the application window views. Plain will show just empty rectangles with the proportions of the application window, Icon will show them with their standard icon and Pixmap with a small view of the contents of the application window. Note that using the pixmap mode is only recommended for very fast machines. -Layout -In this group the layout of the &kpager; main view can be set. Classical will show &kpager; in a 2xn grid like pager applications in some other window managers, Horizontal will show the virtual desktops in a horizontal view and Vertical in a vertical row, which may perfectly fit on the side of the desktop. +Layout +In this group the layout of the &kpager; main view can be set. Classical will show &kpager; in a 2xn grid like pager applications in some other window managers, Horizontal will show the virtual desktops in a horizontal view and Vertical in a vertical row, which may perfectly fit on the side of the desktop. @@ -391,61 +209,35 @@ -Questions and Answers +Questions and Answers -Why could I need &kpager;? +Why could I need &kpager;? -&kpager; can be used as an alternative to the pager applet in the panel. It has the advantage of being resizeable and within this able to show icon or pixmap views of the running applications, move the windows across desktops and run outside of the panel. +&kpager; can be used as an alternative to the pager applet in the panel. It has the advantage of being resizeable and within this able to show icon or pixmap views of the running applications, move the windows across desktops and run outside of the panel. -How can I change the behaviour of &kpager;? +How can I change the behaviour of &kpager;? -Clicking the right mouse button anywhere within &kpager; lets you chose Configure from the context menu for displaying the settings dialogue +Clicking the right mouse button anywhere within &kpager; lets you chose Configure from the context menu for displaying the settings dialogue -Windows are transparent by default, how do I turn this off? +Windows are transparent by default, how do I turn this off? -Currently, you cannot turn that option off within the config dialogue, but you can do it manually like this: - -Open the file $TDEHOME/share/config/kpagerrc with any text editor like &kedit; or vi. If you have no rights to write that file, you may need to do it as root or contact your system administrator. In this file you will have to add a new key with the name windowTransparentMode with a number as value. Values are: +Currently, you cannot turn that option off within the config dialogue, but you can do it manually like this: + +Open the file $TDEHOME/share/config/kpagerrc with any text editor like &kedit; or vi. If you have no rights to write that file, you may need to do it as root or contact your system administrator. In this file you will have to add a new key with the name windowTransparentMode with a number as value. Values are: -0 - No transparent windows at all. -1 - Only maximised windows are transparent. -2 - all windows are transparent (default). +0 - No transparent windows at all. +1 - Only maximised windows are transparent. +2 - all windows are transparent (default). @@ -456,44 +248,31 @@ -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kpager; +&kpager; -Program copyright 2000 Antonio Larrosa larrosa@kde.org +Program copyright 2000 Antonio Larrosa larrosa@kde.org -Documentation copyright 2000 by Dirk Doerflinger ddoerflinger@web.de +Documentation copyright 2000 by Dirk Doerflinger ddoerflinger@web.de &underFDL; &underGPL; -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &kpager; +How to obtain &kpager; &install.intro.documentation; -Requirements +Requirements -As &kpager; is part of the &package; package, you will just need an installation of the main &kde; packages. +As &kpager; is part of the &package; package, you will just need an installation of the main &kde; packages. -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation &install.compile.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/ksplashml/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/ksplashml/index.docbook index 7308d911061..2b3c23b5f52 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/ksplashml/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/ksplashml/index.docbook @@ -9,200 +9,98 @@ -The &ksplash; Handbook +The &ksplash; Handbook -&Teemu.Rytilahti; &Teemu.Rytilahti.mail; - -&Brian.C.Ledbetter; &Brian.C.Ledbetter.mail; - -&Ravikiran.Rajagopal; &Ravikiran.Rajagopal.mail; - -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +&Teemu.Rytilahti; &Teemu.Rytilahti.mail; + +&Brian.C.Ledbetter; &Brian.C.Ledbetter.mail; + +&Ravikiran.Rajagopal; &Ravikiran.Rajagopal.mail; + +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2003 -Teemu Rytilahti +2003 +Teemu Rytilahti -2003-04 -Ravikiran Rajagopal +2003-04 +Ravikiran Rajagopal -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2003-01-10 -1.01.00 +2003-01-10 +1.01.00 -&ksplash; is a nice splash screen that shows the progress of an application that is loading. +&ksplash; is a nice splash screen that shows the progress of an application that is loading. -KDE -tdebase -ksplash -ksplashml -splashscreen -eye candy +KDE +tdebase +ksplash +ksplashml +splashscreen +eye candy -Introduction +Introduction -&ksplash; is a nice splash screen that shows the progress of an application that is loading. Please report any problems or feature requests to the &kde; mailing lists. The principal features of &ksplash;: +&ksplash; is a nice splash screen that shows the progress of an application that is loading. Please report any problems or feature requests to the &kde; mailing lists. The principal features of &ksplash;: -Themeable -Uses plugins to be completely customisable -Can be used by any application that uses DCOP +Themeable +Uses plugins to be completely customisable +Can be used by any application that uses DCOP -This handbook will show you how to create themes for use with plugins that are already available. If none of the plugins available satisfy your tastes, you can learn how to customise the appearance of &ksplash; completely by writing a plugin in C++. +This handbook will show you how to create themes for use with plugins that are already available. If none of the plugins available satisfy your tastes, you can learn how to customise the appearance of &ksplash; completely by writing a plugin in C++. -Using themes - -To use themes from KDE-Look, extract them to ~/.trinity/share/apps/ksplash/Themes/ for a single user, or to $TDEDIR/share/apps/ksplash/Themes/ to make them available to all users of your system. - -You can also use the Splash Screen module under Appearance in the &kde; control centre to do this automatically. +Using themes + +To use themes from KDE-Look, extract them to ~/.trinity/share/apps/ksplash/Themes/ for a single user, or to $TDEDIR/share/apps/ksplash/Themes/ to make them available to all users of your system. + +You can also use the Splash Screen module under Appearance in the &kde; control centre to do this automatically. -Using the &kcontrol; Module - -This module allows you to install, test and remove &ksplash; themes. - -Down the side of the module is a list of currently available &ksplash; themes. As you select one, a preview will display in the main part of the window. When you have selected the one you wish to use, press OK or Apply. Press Cancel to exit the module without making changes, and Defaults to restore the system default splash screen. - -To install new modules, press Add..., and find the theme on your computer. You do not have to unpack theme files, you can safely select the compressed theme file. Installing a theme does not make it the theme in use until you select it in the list and press either OK or Apply. - -Although you can see a preview of the splash screen, you may like to see how it looks in real use, for instance to see what the animation looks like. You can test themes by selecting them in the list and clicking the Test button. - -You can also remove themes you no longer wish to use, by selecting them and pressing the Remove button. Note that your user account may not have the right to remove themes installed system-wide. It is also recommended you do not uninstall the Default splash screen. +Using the &kcontrol; Module + +This module allows you to install, test and remove &ksplash; themes. + +Down the side of the module is a list of currently available &ksplash; themes. As you select one, a preview will display in the main part of the window. When you have selected the one you wish to use, press OK or Apply. Press Cancel to exit the module without making changes, and Defaults to restore the system default splash screen. + +To install new modules, press Add..., and find the theme on your computer. You do not have to unpack theme files, you can safely select the compressed theme file. Installing a theme does not make it the theme in use until you select it in the list and press either OK or Apply. + +Although you can see a preview of the splash screen, you may like to see how it looks in real use, for instance to see what the animation looks like. You can test themes by selecting them in the list and clicking the Test button. + +You can also remove themes you no longer wish to use, by selecting them and pressing the Remove button. Note that your user account may not have the right to remove themes installed system-wide. It is also recommended you do not uninstall the Default splash screen. -How to make themes for &ksplash; +How to make themes for &ksplash; -General -Making your own themes for &ksplash; is easy. After you have finished your themes you can post them on the KDE-Look so that others can use it. +General +Making your own themes for &ksplash; is easy. After you have finished your themes you can post them on the KDE-Look so that others can use it. -Identifying your theme - -Let us create a theme called MyCoolTheme. For the theme to be recognised by &ksplash;, it should be stored in a folder called MyCoolTheme under ~/.trinity/apps/ksplash/Themes/. It should have a file called Theme.rc, containing the settings of the theme. You can specify large numbers of special things to theme, change the plugin engine to use, and so on. You do not have to use all the settings available; usually, the settings have an acceptable default value. The basic syntax for entries in the Theme.rc file is [option] = [value] You can find the definitions of the various options in the following sections. +Identifying your theme + +Let us create a theme called MyCoolTheme. For the theme to be recognised by &ksplash;, it should be stored in a folder called MyCoolTheme under ~/.trinity/apps/ksplash/Themes/. It should have a file called Theme.rc, containing the settings of the theme. You can specify large numbers of special things to theme, change the plugin engine to use, and so on. You do not have to use all the settings available; usually, the settings have an acceptable default value. The basic syntax for entries in the Theme.rc file is [option] = [value] You can find the definitions of the various options in the following sections. -Simple <filename ->Theme.rc</filename -> file -[KSplash Theme: MyCoolTheme] +Simple <filename>Theme.rc</filename> file +[KSplash Theme: MyCoolTheme] Name = MyCoolTheme Description = A nice theme using XpLike engine Version = 1.0 @@ -214,176 +112,107 @@ Welcome Text = Loading KDE -After specifying the name, the description and the author of the theme, you should first choose a theme engine (also known as a plugin). Then, you can customise various features of the theme engine by assigning key-value pairs as in the example file above. +After specifying the name, the description and the author of the theme, you should first choose a theme engine (also known as a plugin). Then, you can customise various features of the theme engine by assigning key-value pairs as in the example file above. -It is important that the name of the directory under which the theme files are stored (~/.trinity/apps/ksplash/Themes/MyCoolTheme in our case) and the identifier ([KSplash Theme: MyCoolTheme] in our case) of the theme in the Theme.rc file are identical. Otherwise, &ksplash; will not recognise the theme. +It is important that the name of the directory under which the theme files are stored (~/.trinity/apps/ksplash/Themes/MyCoolTheme in our case) and the identifier ([KSplash Theme: MyCoolTheme] in our case) of the theme in the Theme.rc file are identical. Otherwise, &ksplash; will not recognise the theme. -Background files - -When &ksplash; starts, it tries to find a background image for your current screen resolution, if the theme engine uses one. The background image file should be named in the following format: Background-WWWxHHH.png. - -For example, you might use a file called Background-1024x768. If the background image for your screen resolution cannot be found, it tries to resize the original Background.png or the file specified in Theme.rc to suit the current resolution. Resizing on-the-fly will certainly take some time, so you should provide background images for at least the following sizes: 1280x1024, 1024x768 and 800x600. +Background files + +When &ksplash; starts, it tries to find a background image for your current screen resolution, if the theme engine uses one. The background image file should be named in the following format: Background-WWWxHHH.png. + +For example, you might use a file called Background-1024x768. If the background image for your screen resolution cannot be found, it tries to resize the original Background.png or the file specified in Theme.rc to suit the current resolution. Resizing on-the-fly will certainly take some time, so you should provide background images for at least the following sizes: 1280x1024, 1024x768 and 800x600. -Options for Theme Engines +Options for Theme Engines -Standard Theme +Standard Theme -Standard Theme Options +Standard Theme Options -Name -Argument -Explanation +Name +Argument +Explanation -Statusbar Position -[top/bottom] -Toggles the position of the statusbar on the screen. Default is bottom. +Statusbar Position +[top/bottom] +Toggles the position of the statusbar on the screen. Default is bottom. -Statusbar Visible -[true/false] -Indicates whether the statusbar should be shown. Default is true. +Statusbar Visible +[true/false] +Indicates whether the statusbar should be shown. Default is true. -Progress Visible -[true/false] -Indicates whether loading progress should be shown. Default is true. +Progress Visible +[true/false] +Indicates whether loading progress should be shown. Default is true. -Statusbar Font -[fontname] -The font used in statusbar. Default is Helvetica. +Statusbar Font +[fontname] +The font used in statusbar. Default is Helvetica. -Statusbar Font Size -[size] -The font size for the statusbar. Default is 16. +Statusbar Font Size +[size] +The font size for the statusbar. Default is 16. -Statusbar Font Bold -[true/false] -Indicates whether the statusbar font should be bold. Default is true. +Statusbar Font Bold +[true/false] +Indicates whether the statusbar font should be bold. Default is true. -Statusbar Font Italic -[true/false] -Indicates whether the statusbar font should be italic. Default is false. +Statusbar Font Italic +[true/false] +Indicates whether the statusbar font should be italic. Default is false. -Statusbar Foreground -[color] -The foreground colour of statusbar. Default is white. +Statusbar Foreground +[color] +The foreground colour of statusbar. Default is white. -Statusbar Background -[color] -The background colour of statusbar. Default is black. +Statusbar Background +[color] +The background colour of statusbar. Default is black. -Statusbar Icon -[true/false] -Indicates whether the statusbar should have an icon. +Statusbar Icon +[true/false] +Indicates whether the statusbar should have an icon. -Icons Visible -[true/false] -Indicates whether icons should be visible. Default is true. +Icons Visible +[true/false] +Indicates whether icons should be visible. Default is true. -Icons Jumping -[true/false] -Indicates whether icons should be jumping. Default is true. +Icons Jumping +[true/false] +Indicates whether icons should be jumping. Default is true. -Icon Position -[0-3,10-13] -Position where the icons are shown. Default is bottom-left. +Icon Position +[0-3,10-13] +Position where the icons are shown. Default is bottom-left. -Splash Screen -[name] -Changes the splash screen image that is shown. +Splash Screen +[name] +Changes the splash screen image that is shown. @@ -391,137 +220,88 @@ Welcome Text = Loading KDE -Redmond theme +Redmond theme
-Redmond theme options +Redmond theme options -Name -Argument -Explanation +Name +Argument +Explanation -Background Image -[filename] -User defined background image to use. +Background Image +[filename] +User defined background image to use. -User Icon -[Iconname] -Name of standard icon to show for user. Default is go. +User Icon +[Iconname] +Name of standard icon to show for user. Default is go. -Welcome Text -[text] -Text shown in splash screen. Default is "Welcome". +Welcome Text +[text] +Text shown in splash screen. Default is "Welcome". -Username Text -[text] -Text shown instead of user's real name. +Username Text +[text] +Text shown instead of user's real name. -Welcome Text Position -[x,y] -Position on the screen where the Welcome Text is shown. +Welcome Text Position +[x,y] +Position on the screen where the Welcome Text is shown. -Username Text Position -[x,y] -Position on the screen where the username is shown. +Username Text Position +[x,y] +Position on the screen where the username is shown. -Action Text Position -[x,y] -Position on the screen where the current action is shown. +Action Text Position +[x,y] +Position on the screen where the current action is shown. -Icon Position -[x,y] -Position on the screen where the user icon is shown. +Icon Position +[x,y] +Position on the screen where the user icon is shown. -Show Welcome Text -[true/false] -Toggles showing of welcome text. Default is true. +Show Welcome Text +[true/false] +Toggles showing of welcome text. Default is true. -Show Welcome Shadow -[true/false] -Toggles showing of welcome text's shadow. Default is true. +Show Welcome Shadow +[true/false] +Toggles showing of welcome text's shadow. Default is true. -Show Username -[true/false] -Toggles showing of username. Default is true. +Show Username +[true/false] +Toggles showing of username. Default is true. -Show Action -[true/false] -Toggles showing of action currently being performed. Default is true. +Show Action +[true/false] +Toggles showing of action currently being performed. Default is true. -Show Icon -[true/false] -Indicates whether icon should be shown. Default is true +Show Icon +[true/false] +Indicates whether icon should be shown. Default is true -Use TDM User Icon -[true/false] -Show user's login icon. Default is true. +Use TDM User Icon +[true/false] +Show user's login icon. Default is true. @@ -529,68 +309,45 @@ Welcome Text = Loading KDE -MacX Theme +MacX Theme
-MacX Theme Options +MacX Theme Options -Name -Argument -Explanation +Name +Argument +Explanation -Icon Size Minimum -[size] -Assign the minimum size for icons. Default is 16. +Icon Size Minimum +[size] +Assign the minimum size for icons. Default is 16. -Icon Size Maximum -[size] -Assign the maximum size for icons. Default is 64. +Icon Size Maximum +[size] +Assign the maximum size for icons. Default is 64. -Optimised Icon Rendering -[true/false] -Optimise icon rendering. Default is true. +Optimised Icon Rendering +[true/false] +Optimise icon rendering. Default is true. -Progress Bar Visible -[true/false] -Default is true. +Progress Bar Visible +[true/false] +Default is true. -Progress Bar Position -[top/bottom] -Toggles whether statusbar should be in bottom or top. Default is bottom. +Progress Bar Position +[top/bottom] +Toggles whether statusbar should be in bottom or top. Default is bottom. -Icons Jumping -[true/false] -Indicates whether icons should be jumping. Default is false. +Icons Jumping +[true/false] +Indicates whether icons should be jumping. Default is false. @@ -598,52 +355,35 @@ Welcome Text = Loading KDE -MacClassic Theme +MacClassic Theme
-MacClassic Theme Options +MacClassic Theme Options -Name -Argument -Explanation +Name +Argument +Explanation -Icon Position -[0-3,10-13] -Position of the icons on the screen. Default is bottom left. +Icon Position +[0-3,10-13] +Position of the icons on the screen. Default is bottom left. -Icons Jumping -[true/false] -Indicates whether icons should be jumping. Default is false. +Icons Jumping +[true/false] +Indicates whether icons should be jumping. Default is false. -Icons Visible -[true/false] -Indicates whether icons should be visible. Default is true. +Icons Visible +[true/false] +Indicates whether icons should be visible. Default is true. -Splash Screen -[name] -Changes the splash screen image that is shown. +Splash Screen +[name] +Changes the splash screen image that is shown. @@ -651,84 +391,55 @@ Welcome Text = Loading KDE -2k theme +2k theme
-2k theme options +2k theme options -Name -Argument -Explanation +Name +Argument +Explanation -Title Background Colour -[color] -The background colour of title. Default is dark blue. +Title Background Colour +[color] +The background colour of title. Default is dark blue. -Title Foreground Colour -[color] -The foreground colour of title. Default is white. +Title Foreground Colour +[color] +The foreground colour of title. Default is white. -Status Text Colour -[color] -The colour of status texts. Default is the same as Title Background Colour. +Status Text Colour +[color] +The colour of status texts. Default is the same as Title Background Colour. -Rotator Colour 1 -[color] -Defines the colour of rotator 1. Default is dark blue. +Rotator Colour 1 +[color] +Defines the colour of rotator 1. Default is dark blue. -Rotator Colour 2 -[color] -Defines the colour of rotator 2. Default is cyan. +Rotator Colour 2 +[color] +Defines the colour of rotator 2. Default is cyan. -Rotator Speed -[value] -Defines the speed of the rotator. Default is 30. +Rotator Speed +[value] +Defines the speed of the rotator. Default is 30. -Window Title -[text] -Specifies the title text of the window. +Window Title +[text] +Specifies the title text of the window. -Logo File -[filename] -Defines the logo used. +Logo File +[filename] +Defines the logo used. @@ -738,33 +449,22 @@ Welcome Text = Loading KDE -Using &ksplash; From Within Your Own Application +Using &ksplash; From Within Your Own Application -In this chapter, we describe a simple method for using &ksplash; as the splash screen for your &kde; application. If you do not develop applications for &kde;, you can skip this chapter. +In this chapter, we describe a simple method for using &ksplash; as the splash screen for your &kde; application. If you do not develop applications for &kde;, you can skip this chapter. -Basic Requirements - -Your &kde; application must be &DCOP;-aware. &DCOP; is the &kde; technology used to communicate between applications. If you use the standard &kde; application framework, this is taken care of automatically. For information about &DCOP; and related &kde; technologies, please visit the &kde; developers' corner. +Basic Requirements + +Your &kde; application must be &DCOP;-aware. &DCOP; is the &kde; technology used to communicate between applications. If you use the standard &kde; application framework, this is taken care of automatically. For information about &DCOP; and related &kde; technologies, please visit the &kde; developers' corner. -Starting &ksplash; +Starting &ksplash; -Before your application starts its computation intensive work, or before it starts loading plugins, &etc;, invoke &ksplash; as follows: +Before your application starts its computation intensive work, or before it starts loading plugins, &etc;, invoke &ksplash; as follows: -DCOPClient *c = kapp->dcopClient(); +DCOPClient *c = kapp->dcopClient(); QString error; QCString KSplashName; int pid = 0; @@ -777,50 +477,39 @@ if (kapp->startServiceByDesktopName("ksplash", args, &error, &KSplash } -We will assume that there is only one instance of &ksplash; running. Other cases are slightly more complex. Please see the &DCOP; documentation for further details. +We will assume that there is only one instance of &ksplash; running. Other cases are slightly more complex. Please see the &DCOP; documentation for further details. -Showing messages +Showing messages -Before you show any messages, you need to set up the number of steps you will show. For example, the &kde; startup procedure uses 7 steps. +Before you show any messages, you need to set up the number of steps you will show. For example, the &kde; startup procedure uses 7 steps. -QByteArray data; +QByteArray data; QDataStream arg(data,IO_WriteOnly); arg << someNumber; if (!(c->send(KSplashName, "KSplashIface", "setStartupItemCount(int)", data)) // Some error processing here. -Whenever you want to display a message with or without an icon, use +Whenever you want to display a message with or without an icon, use -arg << QString("iconName") << QString("programName") << QString("Some description"); +arg << QString("iconName") << QString("programName") << QString("Some description"); if (!(c->send(KSplashName, "KSplashIface", "programStarted(QString,QString,QString)", data)) { // Some error processing here. } -Each time you call programStarted, the steps completed is incremented. When your program has finished its startup, do the following to make the splash screen go away: +Each time you call programStarted, the steps completed is incremented. When your program has finished its startup, do the following to make the splash screen go away: -if (!(c->send(KSplashName, "KSplashIface", "startupComplete()", data)) +if (!(c->send(KSplashName, "KSplashIface", "startupComplete()", data)) { // Some error processing here. } -That's it! You don't need anything more to take advantage of all that &ksplash; has to offer you. +That's it! You don't need anything more to take advantage of all that &ksplash; has to offer you. @@ -829,65 +518,25 @@ if (kapp->startServiceByDesktopName("ksplash", args, &error, &KSplash -Writing new &ksplash; plugins +Writing new &ksplash; plugins -Writing new &ksplash; plugins is not difficult. In this chapter, we will write a simple plugin that will emulate the splash screen of a well known operating system. This tutorial assumes that you know the basics of C++, and a little bit of KDE/Qt programming. +Writing new &ksplash; plugins is not difficult. In this chapter, we will write a simple plugin that will emulate the splash screen of a well known operating system. This tutorial assumes that you know the basics of C++, and a little bit of KDE/Qt programming. -Basic Requirements -We will create a plugin called 2k. The plugin name is used in various places, and is important that you consistently use it so that the plugin is recognised by &ksplash;. &ksplash; plugins are actually dynamically loadable libraries with the following naming convention: +Basic Requirements +We will create a plugin called 2k. The plugin name is used in various places, and is important that you consistently use it so that the plugin is recognised by &ksplash;. &ksplash; plugins are actually dynamically loadable libraries with the following naming convention: -The library should be named as ksplash+lowercasethemename. For our theme, it will be ksplash2k. -It should have a corresponding desktop file which is named as ksplash+lowercasethemename.desktop. For our theme, it will be ksplash2k.desktop. -Finally, the object that is returned by the library should be a class which is named Theme+themename. For our example, it will be Theme2k. +The library should be named as ksplash+lowercasethemename. For our theme, it will be ksplash2k. +It should have a corresponding desktop file which is named as ksplash+lowercasethemename.desktop. For our theme, it will be ksplash2k.desktop. +Finally, the object that is returned by the library should be a class which is named Theme+themename. For our example, it will be Theme2k. -Do not worry about it if you don't understand all of the above. We will consider each of those points in detail later. The other very important detail is that the plugin class should be derived from ThemeEngine. +Do not worry about it if you don't understand all of the above. We will consider each of those points in detail later. The other very important detail is that the plugin class should be derived from ThemeEngine. -Building the skeleton framework -We will use the &kde; application framework which will take care of building the plugin and will provide us with platform independence without any work on our part. To do that, make sure you have the tdesdk package installed. Run the command kapptemplate to produce an application named "2k". It will create a toplevel folder which contains generic files such as AUTHORS, &etc;. We are most interested in the subfolder called 2k. Go into that subfolder and delete all the files there. Now we have the skeleton we require. -The next step is to create a .desktop file which, when installed, will tell &ksplash; that our plugin is available. Consistent with the naming conventions laid out in the preceding section, create a file called ksplash2k.desktop in that folder. It should contain the following lines: - +Building the skeleton framework +We will use the &kde; application framework which will take care of building the plugin and will provide us with platform independence without any work on our part. To do that, make sure you have the tdesdk package installed. Run the command kapptemplate to produce an application named "2k". It will create a toplevel folder which contains generic files such as AUTHORS, &etc;. We are most interested in the subfolder called 2k. Go into that subfolder and delete all the files there. Now we have the skeleton we require. +The next step is to create a .desktop file which, when installed, will tell &ksplash; that our plugin is available. Consistent with the naming conventions laid out in the preceding section, create a file called ksplash2k.desktop in that folder. It should contain the following lines: + [Desktop Entry] Encoding=UTF-8 Type=Service @@ -898,94 +547,29 @@ X-TDE-Library=ksplash2k X-KSplash-Default=true X-KSplash-PluginName=2k X-KSplash-ObjectName=Theme2k - + -The Encoding, Type, Comment and ServiceTypes are the same for all plugins. The plugin name and the library name follow the conventions noted earlier. The entry X-KSplash-Default takes a boolean value which determines whether it is shown in the control panel configuration module by default. Except for some very rare cases, it should be true. +The Encoding, Type, Comment and ServiceTypes are the same for all plugins. The plugin name and the library name follow the conventions noted earlier. The entry X-KSplash-Default takes a boolean value which determines whether it is shown in the control panel configuration module by default. Except for some very rare cases, it should be true. -Declaration of plugin class -Now that we have the preliminary work done, let us get into the actual fun part - creating a class that will provide the behaviour we want. While we are free to make this class do almost anything we want it to do, there are a few restrictions. +Declaration of plugin class +Now that we have the preliminary work done, let us get into the actual fun part - creating a class that will provide the behaviour we want. While we are free to make this class do almost anything we want it to do, there are a few restrictions. -Plugin classes must inherit the ThemeEngine class. -Plugin classes must be named according to the rule: Theme+PluginName. -Plugin classes should provide a static function called names that returns a list of names by which it can be invoked. -If the plugin can be configured in the control centre module, it should provide a ThemeEngineConfig-based class for the configuration. -Plugin classes must override at least one of the virtual functions slotSetText, slotSetPixmap, slotUpdateProgress and slotUpdateSteps to make it usable. -The constructor should take the form ThemeEngine( QWidget *parent, const char *name, const QStringList &args ) so that it can be used with KGenericFactory. +Plugin classes must inherit the ThemeEngine class. +Plugin classes must be named according to the rule: Theme+PluginName. +Plugin classes should provide a static function called names that returns a list of names by which it can be invoked. +If the plugin can be configured in the control centre module, it should provide a ThemeEngineConfig-based class for the configuration. +Plugin classes must override at least one of the virtual functions slotSetText, slotSetPixmap, slotUpdateProgress and slotUpdateSteps to make it usable. +The constructor should take the form ThemeEngine( QWidget *parent, const char *name, const QStringList &args ) so that it can be used with KGenericFactory. -The last requirement may seem complicated, but, as we will see later, by adding a single line to your source files, you can usually ignore it. +The last requirement may seem complicated, but, as we will see later, by adding a single line to your source files, you can usually ignore it. -Code for the header file -Given the constaints, we will now see what the header file theme2k.h looks like this: +Code for the header file +Given the constaints, we will now see what the header file theme2k.h looks like this: -Listing for <filename ->theme2k.h</filename -> -#ifndef __THEME2K_H__ +Listing for <filename>theme2k.h</filename> +#ifndef __THEME2K_H__ #define __THEME2K_H__ #include <qlabel.h> @@ -1049,50 +633,20 @@ private: #endif -Let us analyse the listing above. The Theme2k class satisfies the naming conventions, and is inherited from ThemeEngine. It provides a Theme2k::names(), and has a constructor that takes the required parameters: Theme2k( QWidget *, const char *, const QStringList& ); and also provides a simple Theme2k::slotSetText() method. For the moment, do not worry about the RotWidget class. It is a small widget that provides some eye candy for the user. Our plugin is very simple and does not display any icons or show a progressbar. If you would like to display icons, override the slotSetPixmap function. Similar functions exist for setting the progressbar range (slotUpdateSteps) and incrementing(slotUpdateProgress) the current step. +Let us analyse the listing above. The Theme2k class satisfies the naming conventions, and is inherited from ThemeEngine. It provides a Theme2k::names(), and has a constructor that takes the required parameters: Theme2k( QWidget *, const char *, const QStringList& ); and also provides a simple Theme2k::slotSetText() method. For the moment, do not worry about the RotWidget class. It is a small widget that provides some eye candy for the user. Our plugin is very simple and does not display any icons or show a progressbar. If you would like to display icons, override the slotSetPixmap function. Similar functions exist for setting the progressbar range (slotUpdateSteps) and incrementing(slotUpdateProgress) the current step. -Implementation of the plugin -We will examine only the relevant parts of the implementation. For a listing of the whole implementation, please see the appendix. The first thing we will do is to get the library requirement out of the way: +Implementation of the plugin +We will examine only the relevant parts of the implementation. For a listing of the whole implementation, please see the appendix. The first thing we will do is to get the library requirement out of the way: -Library requirement -K_EXPORT_COMPONENT_FACTORY( ksplash2k, KGenericFactory<Theme2k> ); +Library requirement +K_EXPORT_COMPONENT_FACTORY( ksplash2k, KGenericFactory<Theme2k> ); -The macro K_EXPORT_COMPONENT_FACTORY is declared in kgenericfactory.h. Onwards to the constructor! Since this is a very simple plugin, the constructor is pretty straightforward. +The macro K_EXPORT_COMPONENT_FACTORY is declared in kgenericfactory.h. Onwards to the constructor! Since this is a very simple plugin, the constructor is pretty straightforward. -Plugin constructor -Theme2k::Theme2k( QWidget *parent, const char *name, const QStringList &args ) +Plugin constructor +Theme2k::Theme2k( QWidget *parent, const char *name, const QStringList &args ) :ThemeEngine( parent, name, args ) { readSettings(); @@ -1100,15 +654,10 @@ private: } -The method readSettings() illustrates the proper way to obtain your theme settings. (You do want people to use your plugins in their themes, don't you?) +The method readSettings() illustrates the proper way to obtain your theme settings. (You do want people to use your plugins in their themes, don't you?) -Obtaining theme settings -void Theme2k::readSettings() +Obtaining theme settings +void Theme2k::readSettings() { if( !mTheme ) return; @@ -1137,25 +686,14 @@ private: } -Since we like our users, we provide sensible defaults for parameters that are not present in the theme file. Note that we should always set our group to "KSplash Theme: themename" to remain compatible with future theme specifications. The initUI() method is not very interesting, as it merely builds up the widgets. Please see the appendix for details. +Since we like our users, we provide sensible defaults for parameters that are not present in the theme file. Note that we should always set our group to "KSplash Theme: themename" to remain compatible with future theme specifications. The initUI() method is not very interesting, as it merely builds up the widgets. Please see the appendix for details. -Compiling the plugin -Since we decided to use the &kde; framework for compiling the plugin, we need to create a Makefile.am. It should look like this: +Compiling the plugin +Since we decided to use the &kde; framework for compiling the plugin, we need to create a Makefile.am. It should look like this: -Listing of <filename ->Makefile.am</filename -> -INCLUDES = $(all_includes) +Listing of <filename>Makefile.am</filename> +INCLUDES = $(all_includes) kde_module_LTLIBRARIES = ksplash2k.la @@ -1174,103 +712,67 @@ themedir = $(kde_datadir)/ksplash/Themes/2k theme_DATA = Theme.rc Preview.png -For more information on writing Makefile.am files for &kde;, please see the &kde; developers' website. The only thing of note is that we provide a default theme based on this plugin, and provide a preview image for it. As a matter of courtesy to your users, you should provide an example Theme.rc file illustrating the use of the various options. +For more information on writing Makefile.am files for &kde;, please see the &kde; developers' website. The only thing of note is that we provide a default theme based on this plugin, and provide a preview image for it. As a matter of courtesy to your users, you should provide an example Theme.rc file illustrating the use of the various options. -Questions and Answers +Questions and Answers &reporting.bugs; &updating.documentation; -I can't find any themes that work in &ksplash;. Why is that? +I can't find any themes that work in &ksplash;. Why is that? -You probably don't have the correct plugins for the theme. The plugins are in the kde-artwork package. Download and install it, and try then again. +You probably don't have the correct plugins for the theme. The plugins are in the kde-artwork package. Download and install it, and try then again. -What is file Theme.rc and how do I make one? +What is file Theme.rc and how do I make one? -Theme.rc is the file where you can specify a theme's settings. For more information, take a look at How to make themes for &ksplash;. +Theme.rc is the file where you can specify a theme's settings. For more information, take a look at How to make themes for &ksplash;. -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&ksplash; +&ksplash; -Program Copyright © 2003 &Ravikiran.Rajagopal; &Ravikiran.Rajagopal.mail; +Program Copyright © 2003 &Ravikiran.Rajagopal; &Ravikiran.Rajagopal.mail; -Contributors -&Brian.C.Ledbetter; &Brian.C.Ledbetter.mail; +Contributors +&Brian.C.Ledbetter; &Brian.C.Ledbetter.mail; -Documentation Copyright © 2003 &Teemu.Rytilahti; &Teemu.Rytilahti.mail; +Documentation Copyright © 2003 &Teemu.Rytilahti; &Teemu.Rytilahti.mail; &underFDL; &underGPL; -Installation +Installation -Requirements +Requirements -In order to successfully use &ksplash;, you need &kde; version 3.2 or higher. Some themes may require specific plugins. If a theme does not work, please contact the theme author to find out where to obtain the appropriate plugin. +In order to successfully use &ksplash;, you need &kde; version 3.2 or higher. Some themes may require specific plugins. If a theme does not work, please contact the theme author to find out where to obtain the appropriate plugin. -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation &install.compile.documentation; -Source code +Source code -Listing of <filename ->theme2k.cpp</filename -> -#include <qlabel.h> +Listing of <filename>theme2k.cpp</filename> +#include <qlabel.h> #include <qwidget.h> #include <tdeapplication.h> @@ -1377,12 +879,8 @@ void Theme2k::readSettings() -Listing of <filename ->rotwidget.h</filename -> -#ifndef __ROTWIDGET_H__ +Listing of <filename>rotwidget.h</filename> +#ifndef __ROTWIDGET_H__ #define __ROTWIDGET_H__ #include <qlabel.h> @@ -1421,12 +919,8 @@ protected: -Listing of <filename ->rotwidget.cpp</filename -> -#include <kdebug.h> +Listing of <filename>rotwidget.cpp</filename> +#include <kdebug.h> #include <kdialogbase.h> #include <kpixmapeffect.h> diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/ksysguard/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/ksysguard/index.docbook index 49c19b2d9a5..2ca53be8c21 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/ksysguard/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/ksysguard/index.docbook @@ -4,659 +4,318 @@ - + ]> -The &ksysguard; Handbook +The &ksysguard; Handbook -&Chris.Schlaeger;&Chris.Schlaeger.mail; - -&Chris.Schlaeger;&Chris.Schlaeger.mail; - -&Tobias.Koenig;&Tobias.Koenig.mail; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Chris.Schlaeger;&Chris.Schlaeger.mail; + +&Chris.Schlaeger;&Chris.Schlaeger.mail; + +&Tobias.Koenig;&Tobias.Koenig.mail; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2000 -&Chris.Schlaeger; +2000 +&Chris.Schlaeger; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2000-12-14 -1.00.00 +2000-12-14 +1.00.00 -&ksysguard; is a network enabled task manager and system monitor application, with the additional functionality of top. +&ksysguard; is a network enabled task manager and system monitor application, with the additional functionality of top. -KDE -KSysGuard -process monitor -top -ps +KDE +KSysGuard +process monitor +top +ps -Introduction +Introduction -&ksysguard; is the &kde; Task Manager and Performance Monitor. It features a client/server architecture that allows monitoring of local as well as remote hosts. The graphical front end uses so-called sensors to retrieve the information it displays. A sensor can return simple values or more complex information like tables. For each type of information, one or more displays are provided. Displays are organised in work sheets that can be saved and loaded independently from each other. So, &ksysguard; is not only a simple task manager but also a very powerful tool to control large server farms. +&ksysguard; is the &kde; Task Manager and Performance Monitor. It features a client/server architecture that allows monitoring of local as well as remote hosts. The graphical front end uses so-called sensors to retrieve the information it displays. A sensor can return simple values or more complex information like tables. For each type of information, one or more displays are provided. Displays are organised in work sheets that can be saved and loaded independently from each other. So, &ksysguard; is not only a simple task manager but also a very powerful tool to control large server farms. -Using &ksysguard; +Using &ksysguard; -Getting started - -&ksysguard; can be started from the start menu, using the entry KDE System Guard in the Systems menu. Alternatively, you can start it by typing ksysguard in a terminal. - -The &ksysguard; main window consists of a menu bar, an optional tool bar and status bar, the sensor browser and the work space. When first started you see your local machine listed as localhost in the sensor browser and 2 pages in the work space area. This is the default setup. - -This default setup is sufficient enough for an inexperienced user to do some system management. An experienced user or even a system administrator of a large computer lab has different needs. To address a wide range of users, &ksysguard; is highly flexible. +Getting started + +&ksysguard; can be started from the start menu, using the entry KDE System Guard in the Systems menu. Alternatively, you can start it by typing ksysguard in a terminal. + +The &ksysguard; main window consists of a menu bar, an optional tool bar and status bar, the sensor browser and the work space. When first started you see your local machine listed as localhost in the sensor browser and 2 pages in the work space area. This is the default setup. + +This default setup is sufficient enough for an inexperienced user to do some system management. An experienced user or even a system administrator of a large computer lab has different needs. To address a wide range of users, &ksysguard; is highly flexible. -The Sensor Browser +The Sensor Browser -The sensor browser displays the registered hosts and their sensors in a tree form. Click on the tree handles to open or close a branch. Each sensor monitors a certain system value. +The sensor browser displays the registered hosts and their sensors in a tree form. Click on the tree handles to open or close a branch. Each sensor monitors a certain system value. -Connecting to other hosts - -To connect to a new host use Connect Hosts from the File menu. A dialogue box will appear and allows you to enter the name of the host you want to connect to. Below the name you can choose the connection method. The default is ssh, the secure shell. Alternatively the rsh, the remote shell, or the daemon mode can be used. Click OK to establish the connection. Shortly afterwards the new host will appear in the sensor browser and you can browse the list of sensors. - -To establish a connection, a program called ksysguardd, that can be started in the following two modes, must be installed on the new host. +Connecting to other hosts + +To connect to a new host use Connect Hosts from the File menu. A dialogue box will appear and allows you to enter the name of the host you want to connect to. Below the name you can choose the connection method. The default is ssh, the secure shell. Alternatively the rsh, the remote shell, or the daemon mode can be used. Click OK to establish the connection. Shortly afterwards the new host will appear in the sensor browser and you can browse the list of sensors. + +To establish a connection, a program called ksysguardd, that can be started in the following two modes, must be installed on the new host. -daemon mode +daemon mode -You can start ksysguardd at boot time in Daemon mode by adding -d as the argument. In this case, you have to select daemon mode at the connection dialogue of ksysguard. A disadvantage of this connection type is that you won't be able to kill or renice a process with the Process Controller and the data exchange over network won't be encrypted. +You can start ksysguardd at boot time in Daemon mode by adding -d as the argument. In this case, you have to select daemon mode at the connection dialogue of ksysguard. A disadvantage of this connection type is that you won't be able to kill or renice a process with the Process Controller and the data exchange over network won't be encrypted. -shell mode +shell mode -In this mode ksysguardd is started at connecting time by ksysguard. To make that possible, its location needs to be included in your PATH. Unfortunately the ssh does not source your .profile file, so your regular PATH setting will not be available. Instead it uses a default PATH like /bin:/usr/bin. Since it is very likely that &kde; is not installed in these folders you need to create or update a file in your home folder. The file is called environment and needs to be in a hidden folder called .ssh. See the manual page for ssh for more details. The file needs to contain a line similar to: - -PATH=/bin:/usr/bin:/opt/kde/bin +In this mode ksysguardd is started at connecting time by ksysguard. To make that possible, its location needs to be included in your PATH. Unfortunately the ssh does not source your .profile file, so your regular PATH setting will not be available. Instead it uses a default PATH like /bin:/usr/bin. Since it is very likely that &kde; is not installed in these folders you need to create or update a file in your home folder. The file is called environment and needs to be in a hidden folder called .ssh. See the manual page for ssh for more details. The file needs to contain a line similar to: + +PATH=/bin:/usr/bin:/opt/kde/bin -assuming that ksysguardd can be found under /opt/kde/bin/ksysguardd. - -When using ssh you should make sure that you have your identity.pub installed on the remote machine and the host key of the remote machine is already registered on your machine. The easiest way to check this is to type ssh in a shell. If you are greeted by ksysguardd you can type quit and everything is in order. +assuming that ksysguardd can be found under /opt/kde/bin/ksysguardd. + +When using ssh you should make sure that you have your identity.pub installed on the remote machine and the host key of the remote machine is already registered on your machine. The easiest way to check this is to type ssh in a shell. If you are greeted by ksysguardd you can type quit and everything is in order. -For experts: ksysguardd is a very small program that is only linked against the libc. So it can also be used on machines that do not have a fully blown &kde; installation, such as servers. If you choose the custom command option in the host connector you need to specify the complete command to start ksysguardd. +For experts: ksysguardd is a very small program that is only linked against the libc. So it can also be used on machines that do not have a fully blown &kde; installation, such as servers. If you choose the custom command option in the host connector you need to specify the complete command to start ksysguardd. -Disconnecting hosts - -To disconnect from a host, select the host in the sensor browser and choose Disconnect Host from the File menu. If you still have sensors in use, the display frames will be greyed and the displays won't update any longer. +Disconnecting hosts + +To disconnect from a host, select the host in the sensor browser and choose Disconnect Host from the File menu. If you still have sensors in use, the display frames will be greyed and the displays won't update any longer. -The Work Space - -The work space is organised as work sheets. Select New from the File menu to create a new work sheet. A dialogue will appear where you can set the name, the dimension and the update interval of the work sheet. To remove a work sheet again, select Close from the File menu. Any modifications will be saved to the work sheet file. If a work sheet has never been saved, you will be asked for a file name. Work sheets consist of cells organised as a grid. - -Each cell can be filled with a display for one or more sensors. You can fill a cell by dragging a sensor from the sensor browser and dropping it over the cell. If there is more than one type of display available for that type of sensor, a popup menu will appear. You can then select which display you prefer to use. Certain types of displays can display more than one sensor. Add more sensors to a display by dragging them over from the sensor browser and dropping them over the already existing display. - -Work sheets can be configured by clicking Configure Worksheet at the Edit menu. In the appearing dialogue you can set the dimension and the update interval. This update interval is used by all displays of the worksheet, which has the use update interval of worksheet set in its timer configuration dialogue. - -The entry Configure Style of the Settings menu gives you the possibility to configure the global style attributes and apply them to the current active worksheet. - -Displays can be configured by clicking with the right mouse button on them. A popup menu appear where you can select whether you want to change the properties of that display, remove it from the work sheet, change its update interval type and value or pause and restart its updating. +The Work Space + +The work space is organised as work sheets. Select New from the File menu to create a new work sheet. A dialogue will appear where you can set the name, the dimension and the update interval of the work sheet. To remove a work sheet again, select Close from the File menu. Any modifications will be saved to the work sheet file. If a work sheet has never been saved, you will be asked for a file name. Work sheets consist of cells organised as a grid. + +Each cell can be filled with a display for one or more sensors. You can fill a cell by dragging a sensor from the sensor browser and dropping it over the cell. If there is more than one type of display available for that type of sensor, a popup menu will appear. You can then select which display you prefer to use. Certain types of displays can display more than one sensor. Add more sensors to a display by dragging them over from the sensor browser and dropping them over the already existing display. + +Work sheets can be configured by clicking Configure Worksheet at the Edit menu. In the appearing dialogue you can set the dimension and the update interval. This update interval is used by all displays of the worksheet, which has the use update interval of worksheet set in its timer configuration dialogue. + +The entry Configure Style of the Settings menu gives you the possibility to configure the global style attributes and apply them to the current active worksheet. + +Displays can be configured by clicking with the right mouse button on them. A popup menu appear where you can select whether you want to change the properties of that display, remove it from the work sheet, change its update interval type and value or pause and restart its updating. -Signal Plotter +Signal Plotter -The signal plotter prints samples of one or more sensors over time. If, several sensors are displayed, the values are piled in different colours. If the display is large enough a grid will be displayed to show the range of the plotted samples. By default, the automatic range mode is active so the minimum and maximum values will be set automatically. Sometimes you want fixed minimum and maximum values. In that case, you can deactivate automatic range mode and set the values in the properties dialogue. +The signal plotter prints samples of one or more sensors over time. If, several sensors are displayed, the values are piled in different colours. If the display is large enough a grid will be displayed to show the range of the plotted samples. By default, the automatic range mode is active so the minimum and maximum values will be set automatically. Sometimes you want fixed minimum and maximum values. In that case, you can deactivate automatic range mode and set the values in the properties dialogue. -Multimeter +Multimeter -The multimeter displays the sensor values as a digital meter. In the properties dialogue you can specify a lower and upper limit. If the range is exceeded, the display is coloured in the alarm colour. +The multimeter displays the sensor values as a digital meter. In the properties dialogue you can specify a lower and upper limit. If the range is exceeded, the display is coloured in the alarm colour. -Process Controller +Process Controller -The Process Controller gives you a list of processes on your system. The list can be sorted by each column. Just press the left mouse button at the head of the column. +The Process Controller gives you a list of processes on your system. The list can be sorted by each column. Just press the left mouse button at the head of the column. -The list shows the following information about each process. Please note that not all properties are available on every operating system. +The list shows the following information about each process. Please note that not all properties are available on every operating system. -Name -The name of the executable that started the process. +Name +The name of the executable that started the process. -PID -The Process ID. A unique number for each process. +PID +The Process ID. A unique number for each process. -PPID -The Process ID of the process parent. +PPID +The Process ID of the process parent. -UID -The ID of the user that started the process. +UID +The ID of the user that started the process. -GID -The ID of the group the process belongs to. +GID +The ID of the group the process belongs to. -Status -The process status. +Status +The process status. -User% +User% -The processor load of the process in user space (in percent). +The processor load of the process in user space (in percent). -System% +System% -The processor load of the process in system space (in percent). +The processor load of the process in system space (in percent). -Nice -The scheduling priority. +Nice +The scheduling priority. -VmSize -The total amount of virtual memory used by the process (in kBytes). +VmSize +The total amount of virtual memory used by the process (in kBytes). -VmRss -The total amount of physical memory used by the process (in kBytes). +VmRss +The total amount of physical memory used by the process (in kBytes). -Login -The login name of the user that started the process. +Login +The login name of the user that started the process. -Command -The complete start command of the process. +Command +The complete start command of the process. -Underneath the table you find four buttons which will be described now from left to right. +Underneath the table you find four buttons which will be described now from left to right. -The <guibutton ->Tree</guibutton -> View +The <guibutton>Tree</guibutton> View -The tree view has been designed to show the relationships between the running processes. A process that is started by another process is called the child of that process. A tree is an elegant way to show this parent-child relationship. The init process is the ancestor of all processes. +The tree view has been designed to show the relationships between the running processes. A process that is started by another process is called the child of that process. A tree is an elegant way to show this parent-child relationship. The init process is the ancestor of all processes. -If you are not interested in the children of a particular process you can click on the little box to the left of the parent and the subtree will collapse. Another click on that box will unfold the subtree again. +If you are not interested in the children of a particular process you can click on the little box to the left of the parent and the subtree will collapse. Another click on that box will unfold the subtree again. -The Process Filter +The Process Filter -The Process Filter can be used to reduce the number of processes displayed in the table. You can filter out processes you are not interested in. Currently you can display all processes, system processes only, user processes only or your processes only. +The Process Filter can be used to reduce the number of processes displayed in the table. You can filter out processes you are not interested in. Currently you can display all processes, system processes only, user processes only or your processes only. -The <guibutton ->Refresh</guibutton -> Button +The <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> Button -This button can be used to force an immediate update of the process list. +This button can be used to force an immediate update of the process list. -The <guibutton ->Kill</guibutton -> Button +The <guibutton>Kill</guibutton> Button -If you have selected one or more processes you can press the kill button to kill them. A so called SIGKIL is sent to the processes which causes them to terminate immediately. If these applications still have unsaved data this data will be lost. So use this button with care. +If you have selected one or more processes you can press the kill button to kill them. A so called SIGKIL is sent to the processes which causes them to terminate immediately. If these applications still have unsaved data this data will be lost. So use this button with care. -BarGraph +BarGraph -The bargraph displays the sensor values as dancing bars. In the properties dialogue you can specify minimum and maximum values of range and a lower and upper limit. If the range is exceeded, the display is coloured in the alarm colour. +The bargraph displays the sensor values as dancing bars. In the properties dialogue you can specify minimum and maximum values of range and a lower and upper limit. If the range is exceeded, the display is coloured in the alarm colour. -Sensor Logger +Sensor Logger -The sensor logger does not display any values, but logs them in a file with additional date and time information. For each sensor you can specify a lower and upper limit in the properties dialogue. If the range is exceeded, the entry of the sensor table is coloured in the alarm colour and a knotify event is sent. +The sensor logger does not display any values, but logs them in a file with additional date and time information. For each sensor you can specify a lower and upper limit in the properties dialogue. If the range is exceeded, the entry of the sensor table is coloured in the alarm colour and a knotify event is sent. -Log File - -The log file monitor displays the content of a file ⪚ /var/log/messages. In the properties dialogue, you can compose a list of regular expressions that will be compared with the content of the file. If one of the expressions match, a knotify event will be sent. +Log File + +The log file monitor displays the content of a file ⪚ /var/log/messages. In the properties dialogue, you can compose a list of regular expressions that will be compared with the content of the file. If one of the expressions match, a knotify event will be sent. -List View +List View -The listview displays the data of some sensors in the form of a table. +The listview displays the data of some sensors in the form of a table. -Configuring <application ->ksysguardd</application -> +Configuring <application>ksysguardd</application> -The graphical front-end is available on any platform that &kde; runs on. The back-end is at the moment available on the following flavours of &UNIX;: +The graphical front-end is available on any platform that &kde; runs on. The back-end is at the moment available on the following flavours of &UNIX;: -&Linux; 2.x -For ksysguardd to work it is necessary to compile the &Linux; Kernel with the /proc Filesystem enabled. This is the default setting and most &Linux; Distributions have it already. +&Linux; 2.x +For ksysguardd to work it is necessary to compile the &Linux; Kernel with the /proc Filesystem enabled. This is the default setting and most &Linux; Distributions have it already. -FreeBSD -The ksysguardd program needs to be owned by the kmem group and needs to have the setgid bit set. +FreeBSD +The ksysguardd program needs to be owned by the kmem group and needs to have the setgid bit set. -&Solaris; -To be written +&Solaris; +To be written -Support for other platforms is in progress. Your help is greatly appreciated. +Support for other platforms is in progress. Your help is greatly appreciated. -Credits and Licences - -&ksysguard; is currently developed and maintained by Chris Schläger cs@kde.org. &ksysguard; is a rewrite of KTop, the KDE 1.x task manager. Several other people have worked on KTop: +Credits and Licences + +&ksysguard; is currently developed and maintained by Chris Schläger cs@kde.org. &ksysguard; is a rewrite of KTop, the KDE 1.x task manager. Several other people have worked on KTop: -A. Sanda alex@darkstar.ping.at -Ralf Mueller ralf@bj-ig.de -Bernd Johannes Wuebben wuebben@math.cornell.edu -Nicolas Leclercq nicknet@planete.net +A. Sanda alex@darkstar.ping.at +Ralf Mueller ralf@bj-ig.de +Bernd Johannes Wuebben wuebben@math.cornell.edu +Nicolas Leclercq nicknet@planete.net -The porting to other platforms than &Linux; was done by: +The porting to other platforms than &Linux; was done by: -FreeBSD: Hans Petter Bieker zerium@traad.lavvu.no &underFDL; &underGPL; +FreeBSD: Hans Petter Bieker zerium@traad.lavvu.no &underFDL; &underGPL; + + ]> - - - -The &kwrite; Handbook - -&Thad.McGinnis; &Thad.McGinnis.mail; - -&Christoph.Cullmann; &Christoph.Cullmann.mail; - -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English + + + +The &kwrite; Handbook + +&Thad.McGinnis; &Thad.McGinnis.mail; + +&Christoph.Cullmann; &Christoph.Cullmann.mail; + +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -20002001 -&Thad.McGinnis; +20002001 +&Thad.McGinnis; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2004-08-27 -2.00.00 +2004-08-27 +2.00.00 -&kwrite; is a text editor for &kde; +&kwrite; is a text editor for &kde; -KDE -KWrite -text -editor +KDE +KWrite +text +editor -Introduction +Introduction -&kwrite; is more than a text editor for the &kde; Desktop. It is meant to be a programmer's editor, and could be considered as at least a partial alternative to more powerful editors. It may be best used in conjunction with &konqueror; for source file browsing for different languages. &kwrite; also works very well as a simple text editor. One of &kwrite;'s main features is the colourised syntax, customised for many different programming languages such as: C/C++, &Java;, Python, Perl, Bash, Modula 2, HTML, and Ada. +&kwrite; is more than a text editor for the &kde; Desktop. It is meant to be a programmer's editor, and could be considered as at least a partial alternative to more powerful editors. It may be best used in conjunction with &konqueror; for source file browsing for different languages. &kwrite; also works very well as a simple text editor. One of &kwrite;'s main features is the colourised syntax, customised for many different programming languages such as: C/C++, &Java;, Python, Perl, Bash, Modula 2, HTML, and Ada. - -Some Fundamentals + +Some Fundamentals -&kwrite; is very simple to use. Anyone that has used a text editor should have no problems. +&kwrite; is very simple to use. Anyone that has used a text editor should have no problems. - -Drag and Drop + +Drag and Drop -&kwrite; uses the &kde; Drag and Drop protocol. Files may be dragged and dropped onto &kwrite; from the Desktop, &konqueror; or some remote &FTP; site opened in one of &konqueror;'s windows. +&kwrite; uses the &kde; Drag and Drop protocol. Files may be dragged and dropped onto &kwrite; from the Desktop, &konqueror; or some remote &FTP; site opened in one of &konqueror;'s windows. - -Command Line Options - -Though &kwrite; may most often be started from the KDE program menu, or a desktop icon, it can also be opened at the command line prompt of a terminal window. There are a few useful options that are available when doing this. - - -Specify a File - -By specifying the path and name of a particular file the user can have &kwrite; open (or create) that file immediately upon startup. This option might look something like the following: - -% kwrite - + +Command Line Options + +Though &kwrite; may most often be started from the KDE program menu, or a desktop icon, it can also be opened at the command line prompt of a terminal window. There are a few useful options that are available when doing this. + + +Specify a File + +By specifying the path and name of a particular file the user can have &kwrite; open (or create) that file immediately upon startup. This option might look something like the following: + +% kwrite + -Specify a file on the internet - -The above-mentioned method could even be used to open files on the internet (if the user has an active connection at the time.) An example of this might look like the following: - -% kwrite - +Specify a file on the internet + +The above-mentioned method could even be used to open files on the internet (if the user has an active connection at the time.) An example of this might look like the following: + +% kwrite + -Other Command Line Options +Other Command Line Options -The following command line help options are available +The following command line help options are available - -kwrite -This lists the most basic options available at the command line. - - -kwrite -This lists the options available for changing the way &kwrite; interacts with &Qt;. - - -kwrite -This lists the options available for changing the way &kwrite; interacts with &kde;. - - -kwrite -This lists all of the command line options. - - -kwrite -Lists &kwrite;'s authors in the terminal window - - -kwrite -Lists version information for &Qt;, &kde;, and &kwrite;. Also available through kwrite - - + +kwrite +This lists the most basic options available at the command line. + + +kwrite +This lists the options available for changing the way &kwrite; interacts with &Qt;. + + +kwrite +This lists the options available for changing the way &kwrite; interacts with &kde;. + + +kwrite +This lists all of the command line options. + + +kwrite +Lists &kwrite;'s authors in the terminal window + + +kwrite +Lists version information for &Qt;, &kde;, and &kwrite;. Also available through kwrite + + - - - -Key Bindings - -Many of the key bindings (shortcuts) are configurable by way of the Settings menu. By default &kwrite; honours the following key bindings. - - - - - -Insert -Toggle between Insert and Overwrite mode. When in insert mode the editor will add any typed characters to the text while pushing along any data to the right of the text cursor. Overwrite mode causes the entry of each character to eliminate the character immediately to the right of the text cursor. - - -Left Arrow -Move the cursor one character to the left - - -Right Arrow -Move the cursor one character to the right - - -Up Arrow -Move the cursor up one line - - -Down Arrow -Move the cursor down one line - - -Page Up -Move the cursor up one page + + + +Key Bindings + +Many of the key bindings (shortcuts) are configurable by way of the Settings menu. By default &kwrite; honours the following key bindings. + + + + + +Insert +Toggle between Insert and Overwrite mode. When in insert mode the editor will add any typed characters to the text while pushing along any data to the right of the text cursor. Overwrite mode causes the entry of each character to eliminate the character immediately to the right of the text cursor. + + +Left Arrow +Move the cursor one character to the left + + +Right Arrow +Move the cursor one character to the right + + +Up Arrow +Move the cursor up one line + + +Down Arrow +Move the cursor down one line + + +Page Up +Move the cursor up one page - -Page Down -Move the cursor down one page - - -Backspace -Delete the character to the left of the cursor - - -Home -Move the cursor to the beginning of the line - - -End -Move the cursor to the end of the line - - -Delete -Delete the character to the right of the cursor (or any selected text) - - -&Shift;Left Arrow -Mark text one character to the left - - -&Shift;Right Arrow -Mark text one character to the right - - -F1 -Help - - -&Shift;F1 -What's this? - - -&Ctrl;F -Find - - -F3 -Find again - - -&Ctrl;C -Copy the marked text to the clipboard. - - -&Ctrl;B -Set a Bookmark - - -&Ctrl;N -New document - - -&Ctrl;P -Print - + +Page Down +Move the cursor down one page + + +Backspace +Delete the character to the left of the cursor + + +Home +Move the cursor to the beginning of the line + + +End +Move the cursor to the end of the line + + +Delete +Delete the character to the right of the cursor (or any selected text) + + +&Shift;Left Arrow +Mark text one character to the left + + +&Shift;Right Arrow +Mark text one character to the right + + +F1 +Help + + +&Shift;F1 +What's this? + + +&Ctrl;F +Find + + +F3 +Find again + + +&Ctrl;C +Copy the marked text to the clipboard. + + +&Ctrl;B +Set a Bookmark + + +&Ctrl;N +New document + + +&Ctrl;P +Print + -&Ctrl;Q -Quit - close active copy of editor +&Ctrl;Q +Quit - close active copy of editor -&Ctrl;R -Replace +&Ctrl;R +Replace -&Ctrl;S -Invokes the Save command. +&Ctrl;S +Invokes the Save command. -&Ctrl;V -Paste the clipboard text into line edit. - - -&Ctrl;X -Delete the marked text and copy it to the clipboard. - - -&Ctrl;Z -Undo - - -&Ctrl;&Shift;Z -Redo - - - - - - - - -The Menu Entries - - -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu - - - - +&Ctrl;V +Paste the clipboard text into line edit. + + +&Ctrl;X +Delete the marked text and copy it to the clipboard. + + +&Ctrl;Z +Undo + + +&Ctrl;&Shift;Z +Redo + + + + + + + + +The Menu Entries + + +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu + + + + - &Ctrl;N File New + &Ctrl;N File New -This starts a new Document in the editor. If there is a current document with unsaved changes the user is given a chance to save it. - - - - +This starts a new Document in the editor. If there is a current document with unsaved changes the user is given a chance to save it. + + + + - &Ctrl;O File Open... - + &Ctrl;O File Open... + -Displays a standard &kde; Open File dialogue. Use the file view to select the file you want to open, and click on Open to open it. You can find more information about the &kde; Open File dialogue in the &kde; User Guide. +Displays a standard &kde; Open File dialogue. Use the file view to select the file you want to open, and click on Open to open it. You can find more information about the &kde; Open File dialogue in the &kde; User Guide. - + - + -File Open Recent - +File Open Recent + -This is a shortcut to open recently saved documents. Clicking on this item opens a list to the side of the menu with several of the most recently saved files. Clicking on a specific file will open it in &kwrite; - if the file still resides at the same location. +This is a shortcut to open recently saved documents. Clicking on this item opens a list to the side of the menu with several of the most recently saved files. Clicking on a specific file will open it in &kwrite; - if the file still resides at the same location. - + - &Ctrl;S File Save - + &Ctrl;S File Save + -This saves the current document. If there has already been a save of the document then this will overwrite the previously saved file without asking for the user's consent. If it is the first save of a new document the save as dialogue (described below) will be invoked. - - - - +This saves the current document. If there has already been a save of the document then this will overwrite the previously saved file without asking for the user's consent. If it is the first save of a new document the save as dialogue (described below) will be invoked. + + + + -File Save As... - +File Save As... + -This allows a document to be saved with a new file name. This is done by means of the file dialogue box described above in the Open section of this help file. +This allows a document to be saved with a new file name. This is done by means of the file dialogue box described above in the Open section of this help file. - + - &Ctrl;P File Print... - - -Opens a simple print dialogue allowing the user to specify what, where, and how to print - - + &Ctrl;P File Print... + + +Opens a simple print dialogue allowing the user to specify what, where, and how to print + + - + - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit -This will close the editor window, if you have more than one instance of &kwrite; running, through the New View or New Window menu items, those instances will not be closed. +This will close the editor window, if you have more than one instance of &kwrite; running, through the New View or New Window menu items, those instances will not be closed. - + - + - + - -The <guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> Menu + +The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu - + -&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo - -This is used to eliminate or reverse the most recent user action or operation. - - - - -&Ctrl;&Shift;Z EditRedo - -This will reverse the most recent change (if any) made using Undo - - - - - - -&Ctrl;X EditCut - -This command deletes the current selection and places it on the clipboard. The clipboard is a feature of KDE that works invisibly to provide a way to transfer data between applications. - - - - -&Ctrl;C EditCopy - -This copies the currently selected text to the clipboard so that it may be pasted elsewhere. The clipboard is a feature of KDE that works invisibly to provide a way to transfer data between applications. - - - - -&Ctrl;V EditPaste - -This will insert the contents of the clipboard at the cursor position. The clipboard is feature of KDE that works invisibly to provide a way to transfer data between applications. - - - - -&Ctrl;A EditSelect All - -This will select the entire document. This could be very useful for copying the entire file to another application. - - - - - - +actions. + + //--> + + +&Ctrl;X EditCut + +This command deletes the current selection and places it on the clipboard. The clipboard is a feature of KDE that works invisibly to provide a way to transfer data between applications. + + + + +&Ctrl;C EditCopy + +This copies the currently selected text to the clipboard so that it may be pasted elsewhere. The clipboard is a feature of KDE that works invisibly to provide a way to transfer data between applications. + + + + +&Ctrl;V EditPaste + +This will insert the contents of the clipboard at the cursor position. The clipboard is feature of KDE that works invisibly to provide a way to transfer data between applications. + + + + +&Ctrl;A EditSelect All + +This will select the entire document. This could be very useful for copying the entire file to another application. + + + + + + - &Ctrl;G Edit Go to line - -This opens the goto line dialogue box which is used to have the cursor jump to a particular line (specified by number) in the document. The line number may be entered directly into the text box or graphically by clicking on the up or down arrow spin controls at the side of the text box. The little up arrow will increase the line number and the down arrow decrease it. There is also a slide control to the right of the text box which allows the user to move the goto point in the document in an analogue manner. - + &Ctrl;G Edit Go to line + +This opens the goto line dialogue box which is used to have the cursor jump to a particular line (specified by number) in the document. The line number may be entered directly into the text box or graphically by clicking on the up or down arrow spin controls at the side of the text box. The little up arrow will increase the line number and the down arrow decrease it. There is also a slide control to the right of the text box which allows the user to move the goto point in the document in an analogue manner. + - -&Ctrl;F EditFind - -This opens the find dialogue which is used to specify the Text to Find in the document. There is small text box for entering the search pattern which also doubles as a dropdown box. Clicking on the dropdown arrow at the side of the box makes available other recent search patterns. Other parameters are included to make the search more efficient. Selecting Case Sensitive will limit finds to entries that match the case (upper or lower) of each of the characters in the search pattern. Find Backwards directs the search to proceed in an upwardly direction. The Selected Text option keeps the search within currently selected text. Checking Whole Words Only prevents the search from stopping on words that contain the searched for pattern. The Search from Cursor option begins the search from the current position of the cursor within the document rather than from the beginning. - - - - -F3 EditFind Next - - - -This repeats the last find operation, if any, without calling the find dialogue box. - + +&Ctrl;F EditFind + +This opens the find dialogue which is used to specify the Text to Find in the document. There is small text box for entering the search pattern which also doubles as a dropdown box. Clicking on the dropdown arrow at the side of the box makes available other recent search patterns. Other parameters are included to make the search more efficient. Selecting Case Sensitive will limit finds to entries that match the case (upper or lower) of each of the characters in the search pattern. Find Backwards directs the search to proceed in an upwardly direction. The Selected Text option keeps the search within currently selected text. Checking Whole Words Only prevents the search from stopping on words that contain the searched for pattern. The Search from Cursor option begins the search from the current position of the cursor within the document rather than from the beginning. + + + + +F3 EditFind Next + + + +This repeats the last find operation, if any, without calling the find dialogue box. + - &Shift;F3 Edit Find Previous + &Shift;F3 Edit Find Previous -This repeats the last find operation, if any, without calling the find dialogue box, and searching backwards instead of forwards through the document. +This repeats the last find operation, if any, without calling the find dialogue box, and searching backwards instead of forwards through the document. - -&Ctrl;R EditReplace - -This command opens the replace dialogue box. The replace dialogue is almost identical to the above-mentioned find dialogue. In addition to the features in the find dialogue it contains a Replace With: text entry/dropdown box. Using this dialogue the user can specify both the text to be found and text with which to replace it. The additional Prompt On Replace option allows the user to have &kwrite; ask for confirmation before each replacement. + +&Ctrl;R EditReplace + +This command opens the replace dialogue box. The replace dialogue is almost identical to the above-mentioned find dialogue. In addition to the features in the find dialogue it contains a Replace With: text entry/dropdown box. Using this dialogue the user can specify both the text to be found and text with which to replace it. The additional Prompt On Replace option allows the user to have &kwrite; ask for confirmation before each replacement. +//--> - - - -The <guimenu ->Bookmarks</guimenu -> Menu - + + + +The <guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu> Menu + -Bookmarks Clear All Bookmarks - - -This command will remove all the markers from the document as well as the list of markers which is appended at the bottom of this menu item. - - +Bookmarks Clear All Bookmarks + + +This command will remove all the markers from the document as well as the list of markers which is appended at the bottom of this menu item. + + -At the bottom of this menu, a list of markers appears if any markers are available for this window. +At the bottom of this menu, a list of markers appears if any markers are available for this window. - + - -The <guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> Menu + +The <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu -ToolsSpelling... - -This initiates the spell checking program - a program designed to help the user catch and correct any spelling errors. Clicking on this entry will start the checker and bring up the speller dialogue box through which the user can control the process. There are four settings lined up vertically in the centre of the dialogue with their corresponding labels just to the left. Starting at the top they are: +ToolsSpelling... + +This initiates the spell checking program - a program designed to help the user catch and correct any spelling errors. Clicking on this entry will start the checker and bring up the speller dialogue box through which the user can control the process. There are four settings lined up vertically in the centre of the dialogue with their corresponding labels just to the left. Starting at the top they are: -Unknown word: -Here, the spell checker indicates the word currently under consideration. This happens when the checker encounters a word not in its dictionary - a file containing a list of correctly spelled words against which it compares each word in the editor. +Unknown word: +Here, the spell checker indicates the word currently under consideration. This happens when the checker encounters a word not in its dictionary - a file containing a list of correctly spelled words against which it compares each word in the editor. -Replace with: -If the checker has any similar words in its dictionary the first one will be listed here. The user can accept the suggestion, type in his or her own correction, or choose a different suggestion from the next box. +Replace with: +If the checker has any similar words in its dictionary the first one will be listed here. The user can accept the suggestion, type in his or her own correction, or choose a different suggestion from the next box. -Suggested Words: -The checker may list here a number of possible replacements for the word under consideration. Clicking on any one of the suggestions will cause that word to be entered in the Replacement: box, above. +Suggested Words: +The checker may list here a number of possible replacements for the word under consideration. Clicking on any one of the suggestions will cause that word to be entered in the Replacement: box, above. -Language: -If you have installed multiple dictionaries, here you can select which dictionary/language should be used. +Language: +If you have installed multiple dictionaries, here you can select which dictionary/language should be used. -On the right side of the dialogue box are 5 buttons that allow the user to control the spell check process. They are: +On the right side of the dialogue box are 5 buttons that allow the user to control the spell check process. They are: -Add to Dictionary -Pressing this button adds the word in the Misspelled Word: box to the checker's dictionary. This means that in the future the checker will always consider this word to be correctly spelled. +Add to Dictionary +Pressing this button adds the word in the Misspelled Word: box to the checker's dictionary. This means that in the future the checker will always consider this word to be correctly spelled. -Replace -This button has the checker replace the word under consideration in the document with the word in the Replacement: box. +Replace +This button has the checker replace the word under consideration in the document with the word in the Replacement: box. -Replace All -This button causes the checker to replace not only the current Unknown word: but to automatically make the same substitution for any other occurrences of this Misspelled Word: in the document. +Replace All +This button causes the checker to replace not only the current Unknown word: but to automatically make the same substitution for any other occurrences of this Misspelled Word: in the document. -Ignore -Activating this button will have the checker move on without making any changes. +Ignore +Activating this button will have the checker move on without making any changes. -Ignore All -This button tells the checker to do nothing with the current Unknown word: and to pass over any other instances of the same word. This only applies to the current spell check run. If the checker is run again later it will stop on this same word. +Ignore All +This button tells the checker to do nothing with the current Unknown word: and to pass over any other instances of the same word. This only applies to the current spell check run. If the checker is run again later it will stop on this same word. - +the center of the progress bar.//--> - +linkend="show-statusbar">status bar is the horizontal strip at the bottom +of the editor just outside of the text entry area.//--> -Three more buttons are located horizontally along the bottom of the spell check dialogue. They are: +Three more buttons are located horizontally along the bottom of the spell check dialogue. They are: -Help -This invokes the KDE help system starting at the &kwrite; help pages (this document). +Help +This invokes the KDE help system starting at the &kwrite; help pages (this document). -Finished -This button ends the spell check process, and returns to the document. +Finished +This button ends the spell check process, and returns to the document. -Cancel -This button cancels the spell check process, all modifications are reverted, and you will return to your document. +Cancel +This button cancels the spell check process, all modifications are reverted, and you will return to your document. - - &Ctrl;I ToolsIndent - -This increases the paragraph's indentation by one step. The size of the step depends on the indentation settings. - - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;I ToolsUnindent - -This reduces the paragraph's indentation by one step. The size of the step depends on the indentation settings. - - - - -ToolsClean Indentation -Not yet implemented - - - - - &Ctrl;D ToolsComment -This adds one space to the beginning of the line where the text cursor is located or to the beginning of any selected lines. + + &Ctrl;I ToolsIndent + +This increases the paragraph's indentation by one step. The size of the step depends on the indentation settings. + + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;I ToolsUnindent + +This reduces the paragraph's indentation by one step. The size of the step depends on the indentation settings. + + + + +ToolsClean Indentation +Not yet implemented + + + + + &Ctrl;D ToolsComment +This adds one space to the beginning of the line where the text cursor is located or to the beginning of any selected lines. - &Ctrl;&Shift;D ToolsUncomment -This removes one space (if any exist) from the beginning of the line where the text cursor is located or from the beginning of any selected lines. + &Ctrl;&Shift;D ToolsUncomment +This removes one space (if any exist) from the beginning of the line where the text cursor is located or from the beginning of any selected lines. @@ -1913,181 +706,71 @@ of the editor just outside of the text entry area. -The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -Settings Show Toolbar - - -When checked, this displays a moveable toolbar containing buttons used to initiate frequently used commands. When unchecked the toolbar is hidden. - +Settings Show Toolbar + + +When checked, this displays a moveable toolbar containing buttons used to initiate frequently used commands. When unchecked the toolbar is hidden. + - -SettingsShow Statusbar - -When checked, this displays a small bar at the bottom of the editor containing information about the status of the current document. When unchecked the statusbar is hidden. - - - - -SettingsShow Path - -When selected, this displays in the title bar the path (its location in the file system) of the current document. When unchecked the path is hidden. - - - - -Settings Configure Editor... + +SettingsShow Statusbar + +When checked, this displays a small bar at the bottom of the editor containing information about the status of the current document. When unchecked the statusbar is hidden. + + + + +SettingsShow Path + +When selected, this displays in the title bar the path (its location in the file system) of the current document. When unchecked the path is hidden. + + + + +Settings Configure Editor... -This menu item opens a dialogue whereby several different settings may be adjusted. - +This menu item opens a dialogue whereby several different settings may be adjusted. + - -SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... - -This command opens a dialogue box whereby the key bindings may be changed. A display window at the top of the dialogue box shows the list of commands (actions) that can have keyboard shortcuts. Below the display are three radio buttons. The user may choose between No Key, Default Key, and Custom Key. (Note that a set of radio buttons only allows the selection of one of the offered items - in the way that buttons on a car radio only offer the selection of one preset station. Also, the Default Key selection is only available for those commands that actually have a 'default' shortcut.) Selecting the Custom Key option activates the three check boxes and key button at the bottom of the dialogue. The user may then select a key combination for the command in question by means of the check boxes and key button. For example, with the About KDE command selected in the display window, the user could select &Ctrl; and Alt, click on the key button, and then press the K key on the keyboard. This would mean that anytime he or she held down the &Ctrl; and Alt buttons and pressed K (while using &kwrite;) the About KDE display box would be called. - - - - -SettingsConfigure Toolbars... -This will open the dialogue whereby the toolbar configuration may be changed. The user can choose which shortcut buttons should appear on the toolbar. A display window on the left lists the commands available to placed on the toolbar. A display on the right lists those commands already on the toolbar. A set of four arrow buttons between the two displays manipulates the selections. The right pointing arrow places any command selected in the left pane onto the right pane, i.e., it is added to the toolbar. The left arrow does just the opposite, removing any action selected in the right window from the toolbar. The up and down pointing arrows change the position of an action selected in the right window which changes the position of its button in the toolbar. - + +SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... + +This command opens a dialogue box whereby the key bindings may be changed. A display window at the top of the dialogue box shows the list of commands (actions) that can have keyboard shortcuts. Below the display are three radio buttons. The user may choose between No Key, Default Key, and Custom Key. (Note that a set of radio buttons only allows the selection of one of the offered items - in the way that buttons on a car radio only offer the selection of one preset station. Also, the Default Key selection is only available for those commands that actually have a 'default' shortcut.) Selecting the Custom Key option activates the three check boxes and key button at the bottom of the dialogue. The user may then select a key combination for the command in question by means of the check boxes and key button. For example, with the About KDE command selected in the display window, the user could select &Ctrl; and Alt, click on the key button, and then press the K key on the keyboard. This would mean that anytime he or she held down the &Ctrl; and Alt buttons and pressed K (while using &kwrite;) the About KDE display box would be called. + + + + +SettingsConfigure Toolbars... +This will open the dialogue whereby the toolbar configuration may be changed. The user can choose which shortcut buttons should appear on the toolbar. A display window on the left lists the commands available to placed on the toolbar. A display on the right lists those commands already on the toolbar. A set of four arrow buttons between the two displays manipulates the selections. The right pointing arrow places any command selected in the left pane onto the right pane, i.e., it is added to the toolbar. The left arrow does just the opposite, removing any action selected in the right window from the toolbar. The up and down pointing arrows change the position of an action selected in the right window which changes the position of its button in the toolbar. + +linkend="pref-highlighting"/>. + --> +//--> - - + + - - + + - - - - - -The <guimenuitem ->Help</guimenuitem -> Menu &help.menu.documentation; + + //--> + + + + + +The <guimenuitem>Help</guimenuitem> Menu &help.menu.documentation; - -Configure &kwrite; - -Selecting SettingsConfigure Editor from the menu brings up the Configure Editor dialogue box. This dialogue can be used to alter a number of different settings. The settings available for change vary according to which category the user chooses from a vertical list on the left side of the dialogue. By means of three buttons along the bottom of the box the user can control the process. - -She or he may invoke the Help system, accept the current settings and close the dialogue by means of the OK button, or Cancel the process. The categories Colours, Fonts Indent, Select, Edit, Spelling and Highlighting are detailed below. + +Configure &kwrite; + +Selecting SettingsConfigure Editor from the menu brings up the Configure Editor dialogue box. This dialogue can be used to alter a number of different settings. The settings available for change vary according to which category the user chooses from a vertical list on the left side of the dialogue. By means of three buttons along the bottom of the box the user can control the process. + +She or he may invoke the Help system, accept the current settings and close the dialogue by means of the OK button, or Cancel the process. The categories Colours, Fonts Indent, Select, Edit, Spelling and Highlighting are detailed below. -Colours - -This section provides access to two different colour settings, described below. Each of these settings may be changed by clicking on its corresponding button. These are special wide buttons that are the colour of the current setting. Clicking on one of the buttons calls a special colour dialogue box used to change the setting. - -The colour dialogue box provides a convenient and graphical way to select a colour. In the upper left of the box is a rectangular display of a spectrum of colours. To the immediate right of this, is vertical bar displaying a range of intensity from the most dark at the bottom to the most light at the top. The user may select and adjust a colour by clicking in these two boxes. Clicking in the rectangular display selects a particular mix of red, green, and blue colours and in the vertical bar selects a level of intensity (value). The various colour attributes are displayed in numerical form in small text boxes located directly below the spectral rectangle and the user can see them change as the colour is adjusted. These attributes include the mix of the basic colour components (red, green, and blue) as well as hue and saturation levels. Alternatively the user can enter figures directly in these boxes. There is also a square at the bottom centre of the dialogue box which displays the colour which is under consideration at any time. To the right of this display is another text box labelled HTML: This shows the user the colour code that would be used to specify the particular displayed colour in HTML code which is widely used for web pages. - -In addition to the above, the colour dialogue allows the capture of any colour currently displayed on the desktop or in another program. Clicking on the button with the dropper icon (located on the right side of the dialogue box,) changes the shape of the mouse cursor to a set of crosshairs. Clicking again will pick up the colour attributes of whatever colour is displayed under the cross hairs. - -Furthermore the user has the option of adding any colour to a personal palette of Custom Colours by clicking on the wide button labelled Add to Custom Colours (which is located directly above the display square.) This adds the current colour to the custom colour palette. This palette and any other available palettes can be displayed using the drop down selection box located directly above the palette display at the top right of the dialogue box. Besides the custom colours, the user can access a number of pre-prepared palettes. - - - - -Background -Here the user can specify a colour for the general background of &kwrite;. - - - -Selected -This allows the user to select a colour to be used for indicating selected (or highlighted) portions of the document. - - +Colours + +This section provides access to two different colour settings, described below. Each of these settings may be changed by clicking on its corresponding button. These are special wide buttons that are the colour of the current setting. Clicking on one of the buttons calls a special colour dialogue box used to change the setting. + +The colour dialogue box provides a convenient and graphical way to select a colour. In the upper left of the box is a rectangular display of a spectrum of colours. To the immediate right of this, is vertical bar displaying a range of intensity from the most dark at the bottom to the most light at the top. The user may select and adjust a colour by clicking in these two boxes. Clicking in the rectangular display selects a particular mix of red, green, and blue colours and in the vertical bar selects a level of intensity (value). The various colour attributes are displayed in numerical form in small text boxes located directly below the spectral rectangle and the user can see them change as the colour is adjusted. These attributes include the mix of the basic colour components (red, green, and blue) as well as hue and saturation levels. Alternatively the user can enter figures directly in these boxes. There is also a square at the bottom centre of the dialogue box which displays the colour which is under consideration at any time. To the right of this display is another text box labelled HTML: This shows the user the colour code that would be used to specify the particular displayed colour in HTML code which is widely used for web pages. + +In addition to the above, the colour dialogue allows the capture of any colour currently displayed on the desktop or in another program. Clicking on the button with the dropper icon (located on the right side of the dialogue box,) changes the shape of the mouse cursor to a set of crosshairs. Clicking again will pick up the colour attributes of whatever colour is displayed under the cross hairs. + +Furthermore the user has the option of adding any colour to a personal palette of Custom Colours by clicking on the wide button labelled Add to Custom Colours (which is located directly above the display square.) This adds the current colour to the custom colour palette. This palette and any other available palettes can be displayed using the drop down selection box located directly above the palette display at the top right of the dialogue box. Besides the custom colours, the user can access a number of pre-prepared palettes. + + + + +Background +Here the user can specify a colour for the general background of &kwrite;. + + + +Selected +This allows the user to select a colour to be used for indicating selected (or highlighted) portions of the document. + + -Fonts +Fonts -Here you can choose the default font for &kwrite;. You can choose from any font available on your system, and set a default size and encoding. A sample text displays at the bottom of the dialogue, so you can see the effect of your choices. +Here you can choose the default font for &kwrite;. You can choose from any font available on your system, and set a default size and encoding. A sample text displays at the bottom of the dialogue, so you can see the effect of your choices. - -Indent - - - -Auto Indent This causes new lines to begin with the same indentation level as the previous line. - - - -Indent With Spaces This replaces tabs with the number of spaces selected in the Tab Width window in the Edit section of the preferences dialogue. - - - -Backspace Key Indents -This allows the backspace key to be used to indent. - - - -Tab Key Indents This allows the tab key to be used to indent. - - - -Keep Extra Spaces -Indentations of more than the selected number of spaces will not be shortened. - - - - + +Indent + + + +Auto Indent This causes new lines to begin with the same indentation level as the previous line. + + + +Indent With Spaces This replaces tabs with the number of spaces selected in the Tab Width window in the Edit section of the preferences dialogue. + + + +Backspace Key Indents +This allows the backspace key to be used to indent. + + + +Tab Key Indents This allows the tab key to be used to indent. + + + +Keep Extra Spaces +Indentations of more than the selected number of spaces will not be shortened. + + + + - -Edit - - -Static Word Wrap -Word wrap is a feature that causes the editor to automatically start a new line of text and move (wrap) the cursor to the beginning of that new line. &kwrite; will automatically start a new line of text when the current line reaches the length specified by the Wrap Words At: option. - - - -Wrap Words At:If the Word Wrap option is selected this entry determines the length (in characters) at which the editor will automatically start a new line. - - - -Replace Tabs By Spaces &kwrite; will replace any tabs with the number of spaces indicated in the Tab Width: entry. - - - -Tab Width If the Replace Tabs By Spaces option is selected this entry determines the number of spaces with which the editor will automatically replace tabs. - - - -Remove Trailing Spaces -&kwrite; will automatically eliminate extra spaces at the ends of lines of text. - - -Auto Brackets When the user types a left bracket ([, (, or {) &kwrite; automatically enters the right bracket (}, ), or ]) to the right of the cursor. + +Edit + + +Static Word Wrap +Word wrap is a feature that causes the editor to automatically start a new line of text and move (wrap) the cursor to the beginning of that new line. &kwrite; will automatically start a new line of text when the current line reaches the length specified by the Wrap Words At: option. + + + +Wrap Words At:If the Word Wrap option is selected this entry determines the length (in characters) at which the editor will automatically start a new line. + + + +Replace Tabs By Spaces &kwrite; will replace any tabs with the number of spaces indicated in the Tab Width: entry. + + + +Tab Width If the Replace Tabs By Spaces option is selected this entry determines the number of spaces with which the editor will automatically replace tabs. + + + +Remove Trailing Spaces +&kwrite; will automatically eliminate extra spaces at the ends of lines of text. + + +Auto Brackets When the user types a left bracket ([, (, or {) &kwrite; automatically enters the right bracket (}, ), or ]) to the right of the cursor. - Show Tabs -The editor will display a symbol to indicate the presence of a tab in the text. - + Show Tabs +The editor will display a symbol to indicate the presence of a tab in the text. + -Page Up/Down Moves Cursor -This option changes the behaviour of the cursor when the user presses the Page Up or Page Down key. If unselected the text cursor will maintain its relative position within the visible text in &kwrite; as new text becomes visible as a result of the operation. So if the cursor is in the middle of the visible text when the operation occurs it will remain there (except when one reaches the beginning or end.) With this option selected, the first key press will cause the cursor to move to either the top or bottom of the visible text as a new page of text is displayed. +Page Up/Down Moves Cursor +This option changes the behaviour of the cursor when the user presses the Page Up or Page Down key. If unselected the text cursor will maintain its relative position within the visible text in &kwrite; as new text becomes visible as a result of the operation. So if the cursor is in the middle of the visible text when the operation occurs it will remain there (except when one reaches the beginning or end.) With this option selected, the first key press will cause the cursor to move to either the top or bottom of the visible text as a new page of text is displayed. -Wrap Cursor -When this option is chosen, moving the cursor with the arrow keys off the end of a line (to the right) causes it to jump down to the beginning of the next line. Likewise when the cursor is moved past the beginning of a line (to the left) it jumps up to the end of the preceding line. When this option is not selected, moving the cursor right past the end of a line merely causes it to continue horizontally in the same line and trying to move it left past the beginning does nothing. -When this option is chosen, clicking with the mouse past the end of a line of text will place the insert cursor at the end of the text, and not in the place you clicked. This avoids accidentally adding an empty space in the middle of text, and is the default behaviour of most editors. +Wrap Cursor +When this option is chosen, moving the cursor with the arrow keys off the end of a line (to the right) causes it to jump down to the beginning of the next line. Likewise when the cursor is moved past the beginning of a line (to the left) it jumps up to the end of the preceding line. When this option is not selected, moving the cursor right past the end of a line merely causes it to continue horizontally in the same line and trying to move it left past the beginning does nothing. +When this option is chosen, clicking with the mouse past the end of a line of text will place the insert cursor at the end of the text, and not in the place you clicked. This avoids accidentally adding an empty space in the middle of text, and is the default behaviour of most editors. -Undo steps: Here the user may specify the number of steps &kwrite; will retain in memory for purposes of undoing entries and actions. This means that the higher the number of steps set the more memory &kwrite; will use for this. Setting this entry to 10 would mean that the user would be be able reverse the last ten operations, i.e. click the undo button 10 times and obtain results. +Undo steps: Here the user may specify the number of steps &kwrite; will retain in memory for purposes of undoing entries and actions. This means that the higher the number of steps set the more memory &kwrite; will use for this. Setting this entry to 10 would mean that the user would be be able reverse the last ten operations, i.e. click the undo button 10 times and obtain results. - -Credits and Licences + +Credits and Licences -&kwrite; Copyright 2001 by the &kate; team. +&kwrite; Copyright 2001 by the &kate; team. -Based on the original &kwrite;, which was Copyright 2000 by Jochen Wilhelmy digisnap@cs.tu-berlin.de +Based on the original &kwrite;, which was Copyright 2000 by Jochen Wilhelmy digisnap@cs.tu-berlin.de -Contributions: +Contributions: -&Christoph.Cullmann; &Christoph.Cullmann.mail; +&Christoph.Cullmann; &Christoph.Cullmann.mail; -Michael Bartl michael.bartl1@chello.at +Michael Bartl michael.bartl1@chello.at -Phlip phlip_cpp@my-deja.com +Phlip phlip_cpp@my-deja.com -&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; +&Anders.Lund; &Anders.Lund.mail; -Matt Newell newellm@proaxis.com +Matt Newell newellm@proaxis.com -&Joseph.Wenninger; &Joseph.Wenninger.mail; +&Joseph.Wenninger; &Joseph.Wenninger.mail; -Jochen Wilhely digisnap@cs.tu-berlin.de +Jochen Wilhely digisnap@cs.tu-berlin.de -&Michael.Koch; &Michael.Koch.mail; +&Michael.Koch; &Michael.Koch.mail; -&Christian.Gebauer; &Christian.Gebauer.mail; +&Christian.Gebauer; &Christian.Gebauer.mail; -&Simon.Hausmann; &Simon.Hausmann.mail; +&Simon.Hausmann; &Simon.Hausmann.mail; -Glen Parker glenebob@nwlink.com +Glen Parker glenebob@nwlink.com -Scott Manson sdmanson@altel.net +Scott Manson sdmanson@altel.net -&John.Firebaugh; &John.Firebaugh.mail; +&John.Firebaugh; &John.Firebaugh.mail; -Original documentation by &Thad.McGinnis; &Thad.McGinnis.mail; +Original documentation by &Thad.McGinnis; &Thad.McGinnis.mail; -This version of the &kwrite; Handbook is based on the original by &Cristian.Tibirna; &Cristian.Tibirna.mail; +This version of the &kwrite; Handbook is based on the original by &Cristian.Tibirna; &Cristian.Tibirna.mail; -Converted to docbook/proofreading by &Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +Converted to docbook/proofreading by &Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net -&underFDL; &underGPL; +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +&underFDL; &underGPL; &documentation.index; - + + ]> -The &kxkb; Handbook +The &kxkb; Handbook -&Andriy.Rysin; &Andriy.Rysin.mail; - -&Andriy.Rysin; &Andriy.Rysin.mail; - -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +&Andriy.Rysin; &Andriy.Rysin.mail; + +&Andriy.Rysin; &Andriy.Rysin.mail; + +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2003 -&Andriy.Rysin; +2003 +&Andriy.Rysin; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2003-08-23 -1.01.00 +2003-08-23 +1.01.00 -&kxkb; is a keyboard layout switching utility based on X11 xkb extension. +&kxkb; is a keyboard layout switching utility based on X11 xkb extension. -KDE -kxkb -keyboard -layout +KDE +kxkb +keyboard +layout -Introduction +Introduction -&kxkb; is the &kde; keyboard layout switching utility. It is based on X11 xkb extension and allows to use different keyboard layouts for inputing text. &kxkb; features keyboard layout indicator. +&kxkb; is the &kde; keyboard layout switching utility. It is based on X11 xkb extension and allows to use different keyboard layouts for inputing text. &kxkb; features keyboard layout indicator. -Using &kxkb; +Using &kxkb; -Getting Started - -&kxkb; starts automatically and stays in system tray as a flag with 2 or 3 letter abbreviation of layout name on top of it if more than one layout is defined or Show indicator for single layout option is turned on. - -When &kxkb; is running you can change layouts clicking on its tray icon with the mouse or pressing its keyboard shortcut. Keyboard shortcut or mouse click will switch to next layout or alternatively you can &RMB; click the &kxkb; icon and select layout from the list. - -&RMB; clicking on the &kxkb; icon you can start its configuration by selecting Configure... or by opening Control Centre and selecting Localisation/Keyboard Layout. Alternatively, you can start it by typing tdecmshell keyboard_layout in a terminal. +Getting Started + +&kxkb; starts automatically and stays in system tray as a flag with 2 or 3 letter abbreviation of layout name on top of it if more than one layout is defined or Show indicator for single layout option is turned on. + +When &kxkb; is running you can change layouts clicking on its tray icon with the mouse or pressing its keyboard shortcut. Keyboard shortcut or mouse click will switch to next layout or alternatively you can &RMB; click the &kxkb; icon and select layout from the list. + +&RMB; clicking on the &kxkb; icon you can start its configuration by selecting Configure... or by opening Control Centre and selecting Localisation/Keyboard Layout. Alternatively, you can start it by typing tdecmshell keyboard_layout in a terminal. -Configuring &kxkb; +Configuring &kxkb; -General Information -KXKB Configuration consists of two tabs: Layout Configuration and XKB Options which are mutually independent. The first one defines layouts you want to use and their options and second defines parameters for Xkb extension on which &kxkb; is based. Xkb options are property of X and are not handled in any way by kxkb - it just sets it up. -&kxkb; configuration does not change anything in XFree86 configuration files and Layout settings from XFree86 configuration are overridden by &kxkb; if option is turned on. -To make your XFree86 configuration work you have to turn off both in layout configuration tab and in Xkb options configuration tab (for the latter the same effect can be reached if is turned off and none of xkb options are set). -&kxkb; does most of its actions through setxkbmap command. You can see the commandline to be executed for each active layout when you select it and, on the xkb options tab, its available xkb option set. +General Information +KXKB Configuration consists of two tabs: Layout Configuration and XKB Options which are mutually independent. The first one defines layouts you want to use and their options and second defines parameters for Xkb extension on which &kxkb; is based. Xkb options are property of X and are not handled in any way by kxkb - it just sets it up. +&kxkb; configuration does not change anything in XFree86 configuration files and Layout settings from XFree86 configuration are overridden by &kxkb; if option is turned on. +To make your XFree86 configuration work you have to turn off both in layout configuration tab and in Xkb options configuration tab (for the latter the same effect can be reached if is turned off and none of xkb options are set). +&kxkb; does most of its actions through setxkbmap command. You can see the commandline to be executed for each active layout when you select it and, on the xkb options tab, its available xkb option set. -Layout Configuration -In layout configuration dialogue the list of available layouts on your left. You have to choose each layout you want to use and add them (one by one) to the list of active layouts on the right. You can also change the order in which active layouts will be switched when toggled by keyboard shortcut or mouse button. The first layout in the list becomes default layout. -Some layouts have several variants. Layout variants usually represent different key maps for the same language. For example, Ukrainian layout might have four variants: basic, winkeys (as in Windows), typewriter (as in typewriters) and phonetic (each Ukrainian letter is placed on a transliterated latin one). If your layout is multi-variant one you can the variant in combobox below the active layouts list. -Keyboard model setting is independent of your keyboard layout and refers to the "hardware" model, i.e. the way your keyboard is manufactured. Modern keyboards that come with your computer usually have two extra keys and are referred to as "104-key" models, which is probably what you want if you don't know what kind of keyboard you have. -You can also choose switching policy for keyboard layout. By default it's all applications will share the same current layout. means each application will have it's own layout and switching layout while you are working with one application will not impact layout for any others. will make every window have its own layout even if they belong to the same program. -If you set only one active layout, at startup kxkb configures the keyboard and exits thus its indicator will not appear. If you still want kxkb indicator select option. +Layout Configuration +In layout configuration dialogue the list of available layouts on your left. You have to choose each layout you want to use and add them (one by one) to the list of active layouts on the right. You can also change the order in which active layouts will be switched when toggled by keyboard shortcut or mouse button. The first layout in the list becomes default layout. +Some layouts have several variants. Layout variants usually represent different key maps for the same language. For example, Ukrainian layout might have four variants: basic, winkeys (as in Windows), typewriter (as in typewriters) and phonetic (each Ukrainian letter is placed on a transliterated latin one). If your layout is multi-variant one you can the variant in combobox below the active layouts list. +Keyboard model setting is independent of your keyboard layout and refers to the "hardware" model, i.e. the way your keyboard is manufactured. Modern keyboards that come with your computer usually have two extra keys and are referred to as "104-key" models, which is probably what you want if you don't know what kind of keyboard you have. +You can also choose switching policy for keyboard layout. By default it's all applications will share the same current layout. means each application will have it's own layout and switching layout while you are working with one application will not impact layout for any others. will make every window have its own layout even if they belong to the same program. +If you set only one active layout, at startup kxkb configures the keyboard and exits thus its indicator will not appear. If you still want kxkb indicator select option. -If you leave active layout list empty keyboard layouts will be disabled +If you leave active layout list empty keyboard layouts will be disabled -XKB Options Configuration -Xkb options allow you to select behaviour of your keyboard. These options are not handled by &kxkb; but may help tune your keyboard to your needs. +XKB Options Configuration +Xkb options allow you to select behaviour of your keyboard. These options are not handled by &kxkb; but may help tune your keyboard to your needs. -Troubleshooting +Troubleshooting -Common Problems +Common Problems -If you switch to some layout and you can not see some characters from your layout as you type, please check your local settings. ⪚ ~/.i18n or /etc/sysconfig/i18n, locale you have before starting kde applications must have an encoding which contains characters from your layout. For example, to enter ukrainian symbols you must have encoding KOI8-U, CP1251 or UTF-8. The last one is a good choice to try for most of the languages if you have such a problem. +If you switch to some layout and you can not see some characters from your layout as you type, please check your local settings. ⪚ ~/.i18n or /etc/sysconfig/i18n, locale you have before starting kde applications must have an encoding which contains characters from your layout. For example, to enter ukrainian symbols you must have encoding KOI8-U, CP1251 or UTF-8. The last one is a good choice to try for most of the languages if you have such a problem. -If kxkb does not switch with keyboard shortcut when you switch it to some layout but switching with mouse is ok may mean that your layout does not contain the key assigned in shortcut. +If kxkb does not switch with keyboard shortcut when you switch it to some layout but switching with mouse is ok may mean that your layout does not contain the key assigned in shortcut. -In XFree86 prior to version 4.3.0 non-latin layouts mutually included latin group and this group was the default thus pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;k always yielded the right combination. From version 4.3.0 by default all layouts contain only one group thus non-latin layouts may not work here. +In XFree86 prior to version 4.3.0 non-latin layouts mutually included latin group and this group was the default thus pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;k always yielded the right combination. From version 4.3.0 by default all layouts contain only one group thus non-latin layouts may not work here. -Possible solutions are: +Possible solutions are: -add your layout to $nonlatin or $oldlayouts lists in /etc/X11/xkb/rules/xfree86 or the location of the xkb rules on your computer. +add your layout to $nonlatin or $oldlayouts lists in /etc/X11/xkb/rules/xfree86 or the location of the xkb rules on your computer. -Change the shortcut to something language neutral, ⪚ &Ctrl;Menu +Change the shortcut to something language neutral, ⪚ &Ctrl;Menu -Turn on the option to include the us group in your layout (effectively the same as solution 1). +Turn on the option to include the us group in your layout (effectively the same as solution 1). @@ -232,64 +122,26 @@ -Files and Layout Descriptions +Files and Layout Descriptions -<application ->xkb</application -> Files and Layouts - -All available keyboard layouts are described in /etc/X11/xkb/rules/xfree86.lst (and /etc/X11/xkb/rules/xfree86.xml since XFree86 4.3.0), the layouts themselves can be found in /etc/X11/xkb/symbols/pc (or /etc/X11/xkb/symbols for XFree86 4.2.x and older). Note that the location of these files may differ depending on your operating system and distribution. - -&kxkb; now uses the xkb extension instead of xmodmap, so to define your own layout you have to get one from /etc/X11/xkb/symbols which is closest to what you want to get (or /etc/X11/xkb/symbold/pc for XFree86 4.3.0), rename it to something you like and edit it. Then just add the name to /etc/X11/xkb/rules/xfree86.lst (and for XFree86 4.3.0 or later it is a good idea to add the name also to /etc/X11/xkb/ruls/xfree86.xml - some packages already use it, not &kxkb; though yet) kxkb will pick it up on restart. Note: you have to be root to edit those files. +<application>xkb</application> Files and Layouts + +All available keyboard layouts are described in /etc/X11/xkb/rules/xfree86.lst (and /etc/X11/xkb/rules/xfree86.xml since XFree86 4.3.0), the layouts themselves can be found in /etc/X11/xkb/symbols/pc (or /etc/X11/xkb/symbols for XFree86 4.2.x and older). Note that the location of these files may differ depending on your operating system and distribution. + +&kxkb; now uses the xkb extension instead of xmodmap, so to define your own layout you have to get one from /etc/X11/xkb/symbols which is closest to what you want to get (or /etc/X11/xkb/symbold/pc for XFree86 4.3.0), rename it to something you like and edit it. Then just add the name to /etc/X11/xkb/rules/xfree86.lst (and for XFree86 4.3.0 or later it is a good idea to add the name also to /etc/X11/xkb/ruls/xfree86.xml - some packages already use it, not &kxkb; though yet) kxkb will pick it up on restart. Note: you have to be root to edit those files. -Credits and Licences +Credits and Licences -&kxkb; is currently developed and maintained by Andriy Rysin rysin@kde.org. Several other people have worked on kxkb: +&kxkb; is currently developed and maintained by Andriy Rysin rysin@kde.org. Several other people have worked on kxkb: -Shaheed Haque srhaque@iee.org -Ilya Konstantinov kde-devel@future.galanet.net +Shaheed Haque srhaque@iee.org +Ilya Konstantinov kde-devel@future.galanet.net &underFDL; &underGPL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/quickstart/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/quickstart/index.docbook index 6d3404a9284..91a053116e2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/quickstart/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/quickstart/index.docbook @@ -4,606 +4,292 @@ - + ]> -An Introduction to &kde; +An Introduction to &kde; -The KDE Team +The KDE Team -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2004-08-28 -3.00.00 +2004-08-28 +3.00.00 -1999200020012002 -The KDE Team +1999200020012002 +The KDE Team -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -An introduction to the K Desktop Environment -Quick Start Guide to &kde; +An introduction to the K Desktop Environment +Quick Start Guide to &kde; -KDE -quick start -introduction +KDE +quick start +introduction -Introduction - -This document is a brief introduction to the K Desktop Environment. It will familiarise you with some of the basic features of &kde;. - -This guide is far from covering all aspects of the K Desktop or even most of them. It will only describe some of the most basic ways to accomplish a few of the most common tasks. - -We assume that you are already familiar with at least one graphical user interface, for example CDE, Geos, GEM, &NeXTSTEP;, &Mac;, OS/2 or &Microsoft; &Windows;. So we will not explain the usage of the mouse or the keyboard but concentrate on hopefully more interesting things. +Introduction + +This document is a brief introduction to the K Desktop Environment. It will familiarise you with some of the basic features of &kde;. + +This guide is far from covering all aspects of the K Desktop or even most of them. It will only describe some of the most basic ways to accomplish a few of the most common tasks. + +We assume that you are already familiar with at least one graphical user interface, for example CDE, Geos, GEM, &NeXTSTEP;, &Mac;, OS/2 or &Microsoft; &Windows;. So we will not explain the usage of the mouse or the keyboard but concentrate on hopefully more interesting things. -An Overview of &kde; +An Overview of &kde; -This section is for users who prefer to learn by exploring and want only a brief orientation to get started. Later sections provide a more thorough introduction to the environment, with helpful hints and shortcuts. If you are impatient to get started, skim this section, go play for a bit, then come back and peruse the other sections of this guide as needed. +This section is for users who prefer to learn by exploring and want only a brief orientation to get started. Later sections provide a more thorough introduction to the environment, with helpful hints and shortcuts. If you are impatient to get started, skim this section, go play for a bit, then come back and peruse the other sections of this guide as needed. -&kde; provides a highly configurable desktop environment. This overview assumes that you are using the default environment. +&kde; provides a highly configurable desktop environment. This overview assumes that you are using the default environment. -The &kde; Desktop +The &kde; Desktop -A typical &kde; desktop consists of several parts: +A typical &kde; desktop consists of several parts: -A panel at the bottom of the screen, used to start applications and switch between desktops. Among other things, it contains the &kmenu;, a large &ticon; which displays a menu of applications to start when clicked. +A panel at the bottom of the screen, used to start applications and switch between desktops. Among other things, it contains the &kmenu;, a large &ticon; which displays a menu of applications to start when clicked. -A taskbar, by default embedded in the panel, used to switch between and manage currently running applications. Click on an application on the taskbar to switch to the application. - +A taskbar, by default embedded in the panel, used to switch between and manage currently running applications. Click on an application on the taskbar to switch to the application. + -The desktop itself, on which frequently used files and folders may be placed. &kde; provides multiple desktops, each of which has its own windows. Click on the numbered buttons on the panel to switch between desktops. +The desktop itself, on which frequently used files and folders may be placed. &kde; provides multiple desktops, each of which has its own windows. Click on the numbered buttons on the panel to switch between desktops. -Ready, Set, Go! +Ready, Set, Go! -Here are a few quick tips to get you up and running. +Here are a few quick tips to get you up and running. -To start an application, click on the &ticon; button on the panel (called the &kmenu;) and choose an item from the menu. +To start an application, click on the &ticon; button on the panel (called the &kmenu;) and choose an item from the menu. -Click the icon that looks like a folder with a picture of a house on the panel to access the files in your home folder using &konqueror;, &kde;'s File Manager utility. +Click the icon that looks like a folder with a picture of a house on the panel to access the files in your home folder using &konqueror;, &kde;'s File Manager utility. -Choose TDE menu System Konsole to get a &UNIX; command prompt, or press &Alt; F2 to get a mini command prompt window to execute a single command. +Choose TDE menu System Konsole to get a &UNIX; command prompt, or press &Alt; F2 to get a mini command prompt window to execute a single command. -Choose the SettingsControl Centre item on the &kmenu; to configure &kde;. - +Choose the SettingsControl Centre item on the &kmenu; to configure &kde;. + -Press &Alt;Tab to switch between applications and &Ctrl;Tab to switch between desktops using the keyboard. - +Press &Alt;Tab to switch between applications and &Ctrl;Tab to switch between desktops using the keyboard. + -Use the &RMB; mouse button to access context menus for the panel, desktop, and most &kde; applications. - +Use the &RMB; mouse button to access context menus for the panel, desktop, and most &kde; applications. + -Launching Applications +Launching Applications -Using the &kmenu; and the Panel +Using the &kmenu; and the Panel -At the bottom of the screen you will find the desktop panel, which is called &kicker;. You use the panel to launch applications. Have a look at the button on the left with a large &ticon;. +At the bottom of the screen you will find the desktop panel, which is called &kicker;. You use the panel to launch applications. Have a look at the button on the left with a large &ticon;. -This button is called the &kmenu;. It has a small arrow on the top to indicate that it will pop up a menu if you click on it. Just do it! The pop-up offers you easy access to all &kde; applications installed on your computer system. +This button is called the &kmenu;. It has a small arrow on the top to indicate that it will pop up a menu if you click on it. Just do it! The pop-up offers you easy access to all &kde; applications installed on your computer system. -Customising &kicker; +Customising &kicker; -If you use one application or tool very often, then you may want to have even faster access to it, of course. In this case, you can add a single application, or an entire sub-menu of the &kmenu;, as a special quick-launch button, on to the panel. If you want to reach the &kfind; application directly via a launch button, simply choose TDE menu Panel Menu Add Button Find Files (By this we mean that you should first click the &kmenu;, then select Panel Menu, where the small arrow to the right indicates that another menu will pop up. In this menu, choose Add, then Button, and in the next sub-menu, Find Files). +If you use one application or tool very often, then you may want to have even faster access to it, of course. In this case, you can add a single application, or an entire sub-menu of the &kmenu;, as a special quick-launch button, on to the panel. If you want to reach the &kfind; application directly via a launch button, simply choose TDE menu Panel Menu Add Button Find Files (By this we mean that you should first click the &kmenu;, then select Panel Menu, where the small arrow to the right indicates that another menu will pop up. In this menu, choose Add, then Button, and in the next sub-menu, Find Files). -You can add an entire menu this way, or one of the &ticon; button sub-menus. For example, if you have &koffice; installed and want quick access to all the &koffice; applications, without having to navigate through the &kmenu;, then instead of choosing an application, click on the Add this menu menu entry. Now you will have instant access to all the &koffice; applications, without having to put an icon for each on the panel. +You can add an entire menu this way, or one of the &ticon; button sub-menus. For example, if you have &koffice; installed and want quick access to all the &koffice; applications, without having to navigate through the &kmenu;, then instead of choosing an application, click on the Add this menu menu entry. Now you will have instant access to all the &koffice; applications, without having to put an icon for each on the panel. -You can move all items of the panel around with the Move command of the context menu. Just click with the third mouse button (the third mouse button is normally the right button, but if you have configured your mouse differently, for example for left-handers, it might also be the left one). A menu will pop up where you can choose Move. Now move the mouse and see how the icon follows while still staying on the panel. When you are done, simply hit the first mouse button (by default the left one). As you may have noticed, there is also a menu entry Remove in case you are tired of a certain launch button on your desktop. +You can move all items of the panel around with the Move command of the context menu. Just click with the third mouse button (the third mouse button is normally the right button, but if you have configured your mouse differently, for example for left-handers, it might also be the left one). A menu will pop up where you can choose Move. Now move the mouse and see how the icon follows while still staying on the panel. When you are done, simply hit the first mouse button (by default the left one). As you may have noticed, there is also a menu entry Remove in case you are tired of a certain launch button on your desktop. -Using Context menus - -This leads us to another interesting topic: in many places, you can click the right mouse button to display a context menu with choices that are applicable to the item you clicked. It is therefore always a good idea to try out the third mouse button on something, if you do not know what to do with it. Even the background of the desktops has such a menu! +Using Context menus + +This leads us to another interesting topic: in many places, you can click the right mouse button to display a context menu with choices that are applicable to the item you clicked. It is therefore always a good idea to try out the third mouse button on something, if you do not know what to do with it. Even the background of the desktops has such a menu! -Other Panel features - -There are other interesting things possible with the panel. One may be important if you have a low resolution on your monitor: it is the hide-and-show function, activated by clicking on the small arrowed button, which is at one or both ends of the panel. - -Perhaps you just don't like the panel extending the full width of the screen. That's easily changed! &RMB; on an empty space in the panel, and choose Configure Panel.... In the &kcontrol; dialogue that pops up, you can choose Length on the Appearance tab, and use the slider there to set the panel to less than 100% width. - -If you're following along, and have that dialogue open anyway, then feel free to play with all the options, and use the Apply to see the effect they have. You can easily reset everything to the default configuration, by simply pressing the Use Defaults button. - -By the way, if you are not sure what a certain button does in &kde;, just move the mouse pointer over it and wait for a short while: &kde; has a built-in mini context help, called tool tips, which explains the functionality of such controls in a few words. +Other Panel features + +There are other interesting things possible with the panel. One may be important if you have a low resolution on your monitor: it is the hide-and-show function, activated by clicking on the small arrowed button, which is at one or both ends of the panel. + +Perhaps you just don't like the panel extending the full width of the screen. That's easily changed! &RMB; on an empty space in the panel, and choose Configure Panel.... In the &kcontrol; dialogue that pops up, you can choose Length on the Appearance tab, and use the slider there to set the panel to less than 100% width. + +If you're following along, and have that dialogue open anyway, then feel free to play with all the options, and use the Apply to see the effect they have. You can easily reset everything to the default configuration, by simply pressing the Use Defaults button. + +By the way, if you are not sure what a certain button does in &kde;, just move the mouse pointer over it and wait for a short while: &kde; has a built-in mini context help, called tool tips, which explains the functionality of such controls in a few words. -But I want my command line back! - -Just calm down, there is nothing to fear. &kde; does not want to take your beloved (and sometimes very effective) command line away from you. You can move your files with the desktop, but you can also use the &UNIX; commands you are accustomed to. In fact,&kde; puts command line power at your fingertips, in perhaps some surprising places. - -&kde; provides a very sophisticated command line window called &konsole;. Choose TDE menu System Konsole to start it. This may be something you want on your panel: luckily it is already there in the default configuration! +But I want my command line back! + +Just calm down, there is nothing to fear. &kde; does not want to take your beloved (and sometimes very effective) command line away from you. You can move your files with the desktop, but you can also use the &UNIX; commands you are accustomed to. In fact,&kde; puts command line power at your fingertips, in perhaps some surprising places. + +&kde; provides a very sophisticated command line window called &konsole;. Choose TDE menu System Konsole to start it. This may be something you want on your panel: luckily it is already there in the default configuration! -Sometimes, you only want to enter one command on the command line. In these cases, you do not need a full-blown terminal. Just hit &Alt;F2 and you get a small command line where you can enter one command. The command line window will disappear afterwards, but it remembers your command. - -When you pop up this window (which we call minicli by the way) and hit the Up arrow, you can browse through all the commands you have previously entered. Also, you can enter &URL;s in minicli to open a &konqueror; window with the specified &URL;. - -&konqueror; and the editor &kate; can both display terminal windows, which behave just like &konsole;. In &konqueror;, you can turn this on with the menu choice WindowShow Terminal Emulator. The embedded terminal will display at the bottom of your &konqueror; window, and the really clever thing is that it will follow your clicks in the file manager view, changing folder as you do. In &kate; you can display a terminal with the menu choice SettingsShow Console. +Sometimes, you only want to enter one command on the command line. In these cases, you do not need a full-blown terminal. Just hit &Alt;F2 and you get a small command line where you can enter one command. The command line window will disappear afterwards, but it remembers your command. + +When you pop up this window (which we call minicli by the way) and hit the Up arrow, you can browse through all the commands you have previously entered. Also, you can enter &URL;s in minicli to open a &konqueror; window with the specified &URL;. + +&konqueror; and the editor &kate; can both display terminal windows, which behave just like &konsole;. In &konqueror;, you can turn this on with the menu choice WindowShow Terminal Emulator. The embedded terminal will display at the bottom of your &konqueror; window, and the really clever thing is that it will follow your clicks in the file manager view, changing folder as you do. In &kate; you can display a terminal with the menu choice SettingsShow Console. -To display a &UNIX; man page, enter man:command in minicli, where command is the name of a &UNIX; command. +To display a &UNIX; man page, enter man:command in minicli, where command is the name of a &UNIX; command. -To search for a word or words on the Google search engine, you can try entering gg:word or words. There are a whole lot more of these shortcut commands, and you can even add your own! Take a look in &kcontrol;, in the tab Web Browsing Enhanced Browsing. +To search for a word or words on the Google search engine, you can try entering gg:word or words. There are a whole lot more of these shortcut commands, and you can even add your own! Take a look in &kcontrol;, in the tab Web Browsing Enhanced Browsing. -Finally, there's a way to have your command line always available, no matter what you're doing - add one to your &kicker; panel! - -Simply &RMB; click on an empty space in the panel, and choose Panel Add Applet Application Launcher. This will embed a mini-cli directly into your panel, complete with command history. - -So, in conclusion, the command line is never far from view when you're using &kde;. +Finally, there's a way to have your command line always available, no matter what you're doing - add one to your &kicker; panel! + +Simply &RMB; click on an empty space in the panel, and choose Panel Add Applet Application Launcher. This will embed a mini-cli directly into your panel, complete with command history. + +So, in conclusion, the command line is never far from view when you're using &kde;. -Working with Windows +Working with Windows -If you have not already done so, start an application using the &kmenu;; say, Find Files. +If you have not already done so, start an application using the &kmenu;; say, Find Files. -A window! What now? +A window! What now? -Well, usually people work inside windows, but sometimes you may want to manipulate windows. Here's a quick overview of some of the most common window related functions: +Well, usually people work inside windows, but sometimes you may want to manipulate windows. Here's a quick overview of some of the most common window related functions: -Move a window +Move a window -Drag the window's title bar, or hold the &Alt; key down and drag anywhere in the window. - +Drag the window's title bar, or hold the &Alt; key down and drag anywhere in the window. + -Resize a window: +Resize a window: -Drag the window's border, or hold the &Alt; key down and drag with the &RMB; anywhere in the window. +Drag the window's border, or hold the &Alt; key down and drag with the &RMB; anywhere in the window. -Maximise a window +Maximise a window -Click the maximise button in the title bar (in the default decoration it is the square, next to the X) to make the window fill the screen, or if the window is already maximised, to shrink it back to its original size. Clicking with the &MMB; maximises the window vertically, and with the &RMB;, horizontally. +Click the maximise button in the title bar (in the default decoration it is the square, next to the X) to make the window fill the screen, or if the window is already maximised, to shrink it back to its original size. Clicking with the &MMB; maximises the window vertically, and with the &RMB;, horizontally. -Iconify a window +Iconify a window -Click the iconify button in the title bar (next to Maximise) to hide the window. Restore it by clicking on the window's icon in the taskbar. - +Click the iconify button in the title bar (next to Maximise) to hide the window. Restore it by clicking on the window's icon in the taskbar. + -Switch between windows +Switch between windows -Aside from the usual mouse click to switch to another window, you can use &Alt; Tab to switch windows. See below for more techniques. +Aside from the usual mouse click to switch to another window, you can use &Alt; Tab to switch windows. See below for more techniques. -Title bar buttons +Title bar buttons -&kde; windows have some pretty standard buttons on their title bars which give you fast access to some common operations. The default button layout looks like this: +&kde; windows have some pretty standard buttons on their title bars which give you fast access to some common operations. The default button layout looks like this: -On the left side: +On the left side: -A menu button. This usually shows a mini icon for the application. Click on it to get a window operations menu. Shortcut: &Alt;F3 opens the window menu. +A menu button. This usually shows a mini icon for the application. Click on it to get a window operations menu. Shortcut: &Alt;F3 opens the window menu. -A sticky button, with a picture of a tack. What the heck is this? Stay tuned! - +A sticky button, with a picture of a tack. What the heck is this? Stay tuned! + -On the right side: +On the right side: -An iconify button. +An iconify button. -A maximise button. +A maximise button. -A close button. This closes the window. Shortcut: &Alt;F4. +A close button. This closes the window. Shortcut: &Alt;F4. -Switching between windows +Switching between windows -Now that we know how to deal with windows, we encourage you to open some other windows using the panel, since we will now discuss how to switch between different windows. Since this is such a common activity, &kde; offers several ways to do it; pick your favourite! +Now that we know how to deal with windows, we encourage you to open some other windows using the panel, since we will now discuss how to switch between different windows. Since this is such a common activity, &kde; offers several ways to do it; pick your favourite! -Many window systems require you to click the mouse in another window to begin using it. This is &kde;'s default behaviour, termed Click To Focus focus policy. But you can also configure your desktop in a way that moving the mouse pointer on to a window will activate it. This is called Focus Follows Mouse. If you select this policy using the &kde; Control Centre, the window under the mouse pointer is always the active one. It doesn't necessarily come to the front automatically, but you can still click on to the title bar or the border of a window or, a &kde; special, you can use the &Alt; key and click the &MMB; anywhere on the window to raise it. +Many window systems require you to click the mouse in another window to begin using it. This is &kde;'s default behaviour, termed Click To Focus focus policy. But you can also configure your desktop in a way that moving the mouse pointer on to a window will activate it. This is called Focus Follows Mouse. If you select this policy using the &kde; Control Centre, the window under the mouse pointer is always the active one. It doesn't necessarily come to the front automatically, but you can still click on to the title bar or the border of a window or, a &kde; special, you can use the &Alt; key and click the &MMB; anywhere on the window to raise it. -Here are some other methods to switch windows: +Here are some other methods to switch windows: -Pick a window from the window list menu. To open the menu, click the &MMB; on an empty area of the desktop, or click the icon with several windows on the panel, or finally click the up arrow at the left hand end of the taskbar in the panel. - +Pick a window from the window list menu. To open the menu, click the &MMB; on an empty area of the desktop, or click the icon with several windows on the panel, or finally click the up arrow at the left hand end of the taskbar in the panel. + -Hold down the &Alt; key and press Tab to cycle through the windows. - +Hold down the &Alt; key and press Tab to cycle through the windows. + -Use the taskbar (see below). +Use the taskbar (see below). @@ -611,276 +297,144 @@ -Using the Taskbar - -The taskbar displays a list of small icons, one for each window on the desktop. In the default &kde; setup the taskbar is located inside the panel, but it can also be located at the top or the bottom of the screen. - -The taskbar is very powerful. In the default configuration, if you have more than one window from the same application open, they will be grouped, so that you see one icon per application in the taskbar. - -A simple &LMB; click on the taskbar button will pop up a list of the open windows for that application and you can choose the window you want to use. Choosing one of these entries with the left will bring you to the selected window immediately. Click on a taskbar entry with the right and you will see a menu allowing you to operate on all the windows grouped under that icon, or each window individually. - -You can choose to see all the windows on all the desktops in your taskbar, no matter which desktop you are currently viewing, or to only see the icons for the desktop you are looking at. You can also choose to ungroup the icons, so that each open window will have its own icon in the taskbar. These and many more options are available simply by right clicking on the taskbar handle (the small textured bar at the left hand side) and choosing Configure Taskbar.... - -The icons on the taskbar resize themselves to make room for applications, so you can fit many more applications than you might think. Making the panel wider will let the taskbar icons take on a row and column layout, but they will still resize to fit more icons. +Using the Taskbar + +The taskbar displays a list of small icons, one for each window on the desktop. In the default &kde; setup the taskbar is located inside the panel, but it can also be located at the top or the bottom of the screen. + +The taskbar is very powerful. In the default configuration, if you have more than one window from the same application open, they will be grouped, so that you see one icon per application in the taskbar. + +A simple &LMB; click on the taskbar button will pop up a list of the open windows for that application and you can choose the window you want to use. Choosing one of these entries with the left will bring you to the selected window immediately. Click on a taskbar entry with the right and you will see a menu allowing you to operate on all the windows grouped under that icon, or each window individually. + +You can choose to see all the windows on all the desktops in your taskbar, no matter which desktop you are currently viewing, or to only see the icons for the desktop you are looking at. You can also choose to ungroup the icons, so that each open window will have its own icon in the taskbar. These and many more options are available simply by right clicking on the taskbar handle (the small textured bar at the left hand side) and choosing Configure Taskbar.... + +The icons on the taskbar resize themselves to make room for applications, so you can fit many more applications than you might think. Making the panel wider will let the taskbar icons take on a row and column layout, but they will still resize to fit more icons. -Using Virtual Desktops +Using Virtual Desktops -Now, what was that sticky thing? +Now, what was that sticky thing? -It may happen that you have more windows open than space on your desktop. In this case you have three possibilities: +It may happen that you have more windows open than space on your desktop. In this case you have three possibilities: -Leave all windows open (cluttered desktop) +Leave all windows open (cluttered desktop) -Iconify those windows which you do not need at present and use the taskbar or &Alt; Tab to switch between them (still a bit confusing and much work!) - +Iconify those windows which you do not need at present and use the taskbar or &Alt; Tab to switch between them (still a bit confusing and much work!) + -Recommended: Do what a real operating system does if there is not enough physical memory: Use virtual memory, in this case virtual desktops. +Recommended: Do what a real operating system does if there is not enough physical memory: Use virtual memory, in this case virtual desktops. -The third option is the way to go! &kde; can handle several different desktops, each with its own windows. The default configuration provides four desktops. You can switch between the virtual desktops easily with a click on one of the desktop buttons on the panel. Also &Ctrl;F1...F4 will send you to the corresponding desktop immediately, or &Ctrl; Tab will cycle through the desktops. - -Virtual desktops are very nice. But sometimes you want a window to be present on every desktop. This could be, for example, a small chat window, an alarm clock or whatever. In this case you can use the above mentioned sticky button which will pin the window on the background so that it will appear on every virtual desktop. - -The sticky button can also be used to move a window from one virtual desktop to another one: push the sticky pin on the window, switch to a different desktop, and release the pin by pushing it again. You can achieve the same result by using the context pop-up menu of the window's entry in the taskbar (menu item To Current Desktop) or the To Desktop option on the window operations menu. +The third option is the way to go! &kde; can handle several different desktops, each with its own windows. The default configuration provides four desktops. You can switch between the virtual desktops easily with a click on one of the desktop buttons on the panel. Also &Ctrl;F1...F4 will send you to the corresponding desktop immediately, or &Ctrl; Tab will cycle through the desktops. + +Virtual desktops are very nice. But sometimes you want a window to be present on every desktop. This could be, for example, a small chat window, an alarm clock or whatever. In this case you can use the above mentioned sticky button which will pin the window on the background so that it will appear on every virtual desktop. + +The sticky button can also be used to move a window from one virtual desktop to another one: push the sticky pin on the window, switch to a different desktop, and release the pin by pushing it again. You can achieve the same result by using the context pop-up menu of the window's entry in the taskbar (menu item To Current Desktop) or the To Desktop option on the window operations menu. -Managing your files +Managing your files -A common metaphor of graphical desktops is the use of folders to represent directories on your hard disk. Folders contain files and other folders. A &kde; application called &konqueror;, the K File Manager, uses this metaphor to help you manage your files. +A common metaphor of graphical desktops is the use of folders to represent directories on your hard disk. Folders contain files and other folders. A &kde; application called &konqueror;, the K File Manager, uses this metaphor to help you manage your files. -Using &konqueror; +Using &konqueror; -The first time you start &kde;, a window with lots of icons in it appears. This is a &konqueror; window displaying the files in your home folder (the area where your personal files are stored). The pathname of the folder is displayed under the window's tool bar. If you do not see such a window now, click the icon on the panel that looks like a folder with a picture of a house. +The first time you start &kde;, a window with lots of icons in it appears. This is a &konqueror; window displaying the files in your home folder (the area where your personal files are stored). The pathname of the folder is displayed under the window's tool bar. If you do not see such a window now, click the icon on the panel that looks like a folder with a picture of a house. -To open a file or folder, simply click it once with the &LMB;. You can also choose WindowShow Navigation Panel from the menu to display the folder hierarchy for more direct navigation. Or you can edit the path displayed under the toolbar to get to a specific folder quickly. +To open a file or folder, simply click it once with the &LMB;. You can also choose WindowShow Navigation Panel from the menu to display the folder hierarchy for more direct navigation. Or you can edit the path displayed under the toolbar to get to a specific folder quickly. -Opening Files +Opening Files -&kde; comes with a set of applications to view and edit files of many common types, and when you click a file containing, say, a document or image, &konqueror; will start the appropriate application to display the file. If it doesn't know what application to start to open a file you clicked, &konqueror; will prompt you for the name of the application to run, and when you have chosen, &konqueror; will offer to remember your choice for the next time you open a file of that type. +&kde; comes with a set of applications to view and edit files of many common types, and when you click a file containing, say, a document or image, &konqueror; will start the appropriate application to display the file. If it doesn't know what application to start to open a file you clicked, &konqueror; will prompt you for the name of the application to run, and when you have chosen, &konqueror; will offer to remember your choice for the next time you open a file of that type. -&konqueror; uses MIME types to associate files with applications. - +&konqueror; uses MIME types to associate files with applications. + -Dragging and Dropping Icons +Dragging and Dropping Icons -To copy or move a file, simply drag its icon to the desktop, to another &konqueror; window, or to a folder icon. When you release the button, &konqueror; displays a menu to allow you to choose to copy, move, or create a link to the file. +To copy or move a file, simply drag its icon to the desktop, to another &konqueror; window, or to a folder icon. When you release the button, &konqueror; displays a menu to allow you to choose to copy, move, or create a link to the file. -Note that if you choose to create a link, &kde; creates a &UNIX; symbolic link (not a hard link), so if you move or delete the original file, the link will be broken. +Note that if you choose to create a link, &kde; creates a &UNIX; symbolic link (not a hard link), so if you move or delete the original file, the link will be broken. -Most &kde; applications also support drag and drop operations: you can drag an icon on to a window of a running application, or on to an icon of an application that is not started, to have the application open the file. Try it! +Most &kde; applications also support drag and drop operations: you can drag an icon on to a window of a running application, or on to an icon of an application that is not started, to have the application open the file. Try it! -Setting File Properties +Setting File Properties -To change file properties, such as its name and permissions, &RMB; click the icon and choose Properties from the menu. +To change file properties, such as its name and permissions, &RMB; click the icon and choose Properties from the menu. -Working with Archives and Networks - -In the recent past, you needed special software to access files on the Internet. Not any more! - -&kde; supports a technology called Network Transparent Access (NTA) which allows you to work with files on the other side of the world as easily as those on your local hard disk. - -For example, to access files on an &FTP; server, just choose LocationOpen Location from a &konqueror; menu, and enter the URL of an &FTP; server. You can drag and drop files to and from the folders on the server just as if they were on your local disk. You'll even be able to open files on the &FTP; server without having to manually copy them to your local disk (&kde; does it for you when necessary). +Working with Archives and Networks + +In the recent past, you needed special software to access files on the Internet. Not any more! + +&kde; supports a technology called Network Transparent Access (NTA) which allows you to work with files on the other side of the world as easily as those on your local hard disk. + +For example, to access files on an &FTP; server, just choose LocationOpen Location from a &konqueror; menu, and enter the URL of an &FTP; server. You can drag and drop files to and from the folders on the server just as if they were on your local disk. You'll even be able to open files on the &FTP; server without having to manually copy them to your local disk (&kde; does it for you when necessary). -Note that &konqueror; uses anonymous &FTP; access, which may restrict your access to files on the &FTP; server. If you have an account on the server, you can supply your user ID as part of the URL, like this: ftp://userid@server/folder - -&konqueror; will prompt you for your password, and if the login succeeds, you will have full access to your files on the server. +Note that &konqueror; uses anonymous &FTP; access, which may restrict your access to files on the &FTP; server. If you have an account on the server, you can supply your user ID as part of the URL, like this: ftp://userid@server/folder + +&konqueror; will prompt you for your password, and if the login succeeds, you will have full access to your files on the server. -If you are used to the WinZip utility on &Microsoft; &Windows;, then you will be happy to hear that &kde; can look into tar archives, too. It treats such archives just like a normal folder, and you can browse into the archive, open files, &etc; In general, accessing files on the Internet and in archives should look and feel just like accessing files on your local disk, except for delays imposed by the network and extracting the archive. +If you are used to the WinZip utility on &Microsoft; &Windows;, then you will be happy to hear that &kde; can look into tar archives, too. It treats such archives just like a normal folder, and you can browse into the archive, open files, &etc; In general, accessing files on the Internet and in archives should look and feel just like accessing files on your local disk, except for delays imposed by the network and extracting the archive. -Using Templates to access Applications and Devices +Using Templates to access Applications and Devices -In &kde; it's easy to put icons on the panel or the desktop to access your applications. It's just as easy to add icons to access other items of interest. &kde; has templates for shortcuts to: +In &kde; it's easy to put icons on the panel or the desktop to access your applications. It's just as easy to add icons to access other items of interest. &kde; has templates for shortcuts to: -Applications +Applications -Printers +Printers -Mountable Devices (⪚ floppy drives) - +Mountable Devices (⪚ floppy drives) + -Internet resources (⪚ WWW documents, &FTP; folders) +Internet resources (⪚ WWW documents, &FTP; folders) -Documents for some of &kde;'s &koffice; applications. +Documents for some of &kde;'s &koffice; applications. -You can add any of these items to the desktop by &RMB; clicking where you want the icon, and choosing Create New and selecting the item you want to link to. - -Nearly every item in the &kmenu;, on the desktop, and on the panel refers to a .desktop file on disk. The .desktop file specifies what icon to display, as well as specific information about what the icon represents (an application, device, or URL). You can drag any .desktop file to the panel to create a quick-launch button. +You can add any of these items to the desktop by &RMB; clicking where you want the icon, and choosing Create New and selecting the item you want to link to. + +Nearly every item in the &kmenu;, on the desktop, and on the panel refers to a .desktop file on disk. The .desktop file specifies what icon to display, as well as specific information about what the icon represents (an application, device, or URL). You can drag any .desktop file to the panel to create a quick-launch button. -Mounting devices - -&UNIX; provides access to storage devices other than the primary hard disk through a process called mounting. &kde; uses .desktop files to allow you to easily mount, unmount, and access files on secondary storage devices such as floppy drives and &cdrom; drives. - -As an example, here are the steps needed to create an icon to access files on a floppy disk: +Mounting devices + +&UNIX; provides access to storage devices other than the primary hard disk through a process called mounting. &kde; uses .desktop files to allow you to easily mount, unmount, and access files on secondary storage devices such as floppy drives and &cdrom; drives. + +As an example, here are the steps needed to create an icon to access files on a floppy disk: -Many systems require you to be logged in as root to mount and unmount devices. +Many systems require you to be logged in as root to mount and unmount devices. -Right click on the desktop and choose Create New Floppy Device.... +Right click on the desktop and choose Create New Floppy Device.... -On the General tab of the resulting dialogue, change the name to whatever you like, in the text box at the top. +On the General tab of the resulting dialogue, change the name to whatever you like, in the text box at the top. -On the Device tab, enter /dev/fd0 (or the path to the floppy device as it is named on your system) as the Device. +On the Device tab, enter /dev/fd0 (or the path to the floppy device as it is named on your system) as the Device. -You can add a Mount Point here too. This should be an existing folder, but empty. Common mount points are /mnt/floppy or /floppy, but you can just as easily have floppy disks mounted on ~/mydisk if you want. - +You can add a Mount Point here too. This should be an existing folder, but empty. Common mount points are /mnt/floppy or /floppy, but you can just as easily have floppy disks mounted on ~/mydisk if you want. + -Click the Unmounted Icon and select the picture of a floppy disk without the green light. +Click the Unmounted Icon and select the picture of a floppy disk without the green light. -Once you're happy with your choices, choose OK and you are finished! +Once you're happy with your choices, choose OK and you are finished! -Now, place a properly formatted floppy in the drive and click the Floppy icon to have &kde; mount the floppy drive and display the files on the disk. Before removing the disk from the drive, &RMB; click the Floppy icon and choose Unmount from the menu. +Now, place a properly formatted floppy in the drive and click the Floppy icon to have &kde; mount the floppy drive and display the files on the disk. Before removing the disk from the drive, &RMB; click the Floppy icon and choose Unmount from the menu. -Configuring your desktop +Configuring your desktop -If you do not like something about the way the desktop looks or operates, you can probably change it. &kde; is very configurable and you can change almost every aspect of the appearance and the behaviour of your desktop. Unlike many other &UNIX; desktop environments, you do not have to edit cryptic configuration files either (but you can if you really want to!) You use the &kcontrol;, a special program for configuring your desktop. +If you do not like something about the way the desktop looks or operates, you can probably change it. &kde; is very configurable and you can change almost every aspect of the appearance and the behaviour of your desktop. Unlike many other &UNIX; desktop environments, you do not have to edit cryptic configuration files either (but you can if you really want to!) You use the &kcontrol;, a special program for configuring your desktop. -Using the <application ->&kde; Control Centre</application -> - -Launch the &kcontrol; from the &kmenu;. A window with two panes appears, displaying a list of modules in the left pane. - -Open a module by clicking its name; a list of submodules will appear. Then, click one of the submodule category names to edit its configuration in the right pane. - -Changing the configuration is fairly straightforward. A help button is available on each configuration panel to explain settings that are not obvious. Each panel has buttons labelled Help, Use Defaults, Apply, and Reset, which work as follows: +Using the <application>&kde; Control Centre</application> + +Launch the &kcontrol; from the &kmenu;. A window with two panes appears, displaying a list of modules in the left pane. + +Open a module by clicking its name; a list of submodules will appear. Then, click one of the submodule category names to edit its configuration in the right pane. + +Changing the configuration is fairly straightforward. A help button is available on each configuration panel to explain settings that are not obvious. Each panel has buttons labelled Help, Use Defaults, Apply, and Reset, which work as follows: -Help +Help -Displays a short help text in the left hand pane, including a link to a longer manual for the module in question. +Displays a short help text in the left hand pane, including a link to a longer manual for the module in question. -Use Defaults +Use Defaults -Sets all the options in the current module back to the default at the time &kde; was installed. +Sets all the options in the current module back to the default at the time &kde; was installed. -Apply +Apply -Applies the current settings in the currently open module. +Applies the current settings in the currently open module. -Reset +Reset -Resets the options to the state they were in when you opened the module. If you have already used the Apply button, then this button will reset the options to the state they were in when you pressed Apply. +Resets the options to the state they were in when you opened the module. If you have already used the Apply button, then this button will reset the options to the state they were in when you pressed Apply. -If you make changes on one configuration panel and move to a different module without clicking OK or Apply first, &kcontrol; will prompt you to ask whether your changes should be applied first. +If you make changes on one configuration panel and move to a different module without clicking OK or Apply first, &kcontrol; will prompt you to ask whether your changes should be applied first. -Configuration Modules +Configuration Modules -Here is a brief overview of the major configuration modules categories: +Here is a brief overview of the major configuration modules categories: -File Browsing +File Browsing -Contains options that relate to how you view the contents of your local system. +Contains options that relate to how you view the contents of your local system. -Information +Information -Contains modules that you normally can't use to change anything. They display useful information about your computer instead. +Contains modules that you normally can't use to change anything. They display useful information about your computer instead. -Appearance & Themes +Appearance & Themes -Here you find the modules that have the most visible effect on your environment: Colours, styles, window decorations. Nearly everything you see can be customised to suit your tastes, and the few things that can't be, soon will. +Here you find the modules that have the most visible effect on your environment: Colours, styles, window decorations. Nearly everything you see can be customised to suit your tastes, and the few things that can't be, soon will. -Network +Network -The place to configure how your computer sees the world outside, as well as how the world sees you. Among other things, you can set up central email identities that many &kde; applications can use, to save you having to enter the same information over and over, you can set up SOCKS firewall support, and you can configure &Windows; (SMB) shares... and much more. +The place to configure how your computer sees the world outside, as well as how the world sees you. Among other things, you can set up central email identities that many &kde; applications can use, to save you having to enter the same information over and over, you can set up SOCKS firewall support, and you can configure &Windows; (SMB) shares... and much more. -Peripherals +Peripherals -Contains settings for your keyboard and mouse, and for printers. +Contains settings for your keyboard and mouse, and for printers. -Personalisation +Personalisation -Here you can set up things that make your life easier, from accessibility features to localisation, so that &kde; applications know how you like to see numbers and dates formatted, for example. +Here you can set up things that make your life easier, from accessibility features to localisation, so that &kde; applications know how you like to see numbers and dates formatted, for example. -Power Control +Power Control -If your computer supports APM power saving features, or you are using a laptop, this is the place to configure them. +If your computer supports APM power saving features, or you are using a laptop, this is the place to configure them. -Sound +Sound -Configure the sound daemon (&artsd;) and other audio behaviour. +Configure the sound daemon (&artsd;) and other audio behaviour. -System +System -Here you can set the remaining system features - how the &konsole; and &tdm; applications behave, set up printing, and set your system date. You might not be able to set some of these options unless you are logged in as root, but &kcontrol; will let you know if this is the case. +Here you can set the remaining system features - how the &konsole; and &tdm; applications behave, set up printing, and set your system date. You might not be able to set some of these options unless you are logged in as root, but &kcontrol; will let you know if this is the case. -Web Browsing +Web Browsing -With the Internet, and especially the web, being such an integral part of today's computer world, there are many options to be set to enhance your experience. You'll find them all here, from setting up custom style sheets, to proxies and caching. +With the Internet, and especially the web, being such an integral part of today's computer world, there are many options to be set to enhance your experience. You'll find them all here, from setting up custom style sheets, to proxies and caching. -Go ahead! Explore the configuration possibilities and discover the flexibility of &kde;. +Go ahead! Explore the configuration possibilities and discover the flexibility of &kde;. -Logging out - -We sincerely hope that using &kde; gives you so much fun and pleasure that you never want to log out. But if you do, simply choose TDE menu Logout. - -There is also a logout button directly on the panel, which looks like a small power button. Or you can press &Ctrl; &Alt; Delete to log out. +Logging out + +We sincerely hope that using &kde; gives you so much fun and pleasure that you never want to log out. But if you do, simply choose TDE menu Logout. + +There is also a logout button directly on the panel, which looks like a small power button. Or you can press &Ctrl; &Alt; Delete to log out. -Session Management - -When you log out, &kde; can remember which applications you had open, as well as where all the windows were located, so that it can open them for you the next time you log in. This feature is termed Session Management. &kde;-aware applications will restore themselves to the state they were in when you logged out. For example, &kate; remembers which files you were editing. - -Non-&kde; applications do not memorise their state on logout, and &kde; will warn you to make sure that you have saved any important data in them when you start to log out. - -To illustrate session management, choose TDE menuEditors Kate to start &kate;. Open a text document to edit. Now log out and back in. You will observe that &kate; will be restored to the exact same position on the screen, including the right virtual desktop, and the document we left open in &kate; before we logged out is opened again automatically. &kate; will even remember whether you had unsaved changes to your document before you logged out and will save them to the file you were working on if you choose Save from the File menu. +Session Management + +When you log out, &kde; can remember which applications you had open, as well as where all the windows were located, so that it can open them for you the next time you log in. This feature is termed Session Management. &kde;-aware applications will restore themselves to the state they were in when you logged out. For example, &kate; remembers which files you were editing. + +Non-&kde; applications do not memorise their state on logout, and &kde; will warn you to make sure that you have saved any important data in them when you start to log out. + +To illustrate session management, choose TDE menuEditors Kate to start &kate;. Open a text document to edit. Now log out and back in. You will observe that &kate; will be restored to the exact same position on the screen, including the right virtual desktop, and the document we left open in &kate; before we logged out is opened again automatically. &kate; will even remember whether you had unsaved changes to your document before you logged out and will save them to the file you were working on if you choose Save from the File menu. -&kde;, an exciting Journey +&kde;, an exciting Journey -We hope you enjoyed this brief tour of the K Desktop environment and that this unique desktop environment will help you get your work done faster and more comfortably than ever. +We hope you enjoyed this brief tour of the K Desktop environment and that this unique desktop environment will help you get your work done faster and more comfortably than ever. -Please remember that the &kde; project is not a commercial venture, but rather a project run by volunteers from all over the world. We would like to invite you to join the &kde; project and become part of this unique network of people. If you are a programmer you might consider helping us write &kde; applications. If you are an artist or have experience with graphic design, consider creating icons sets, colour schemes, sound schemes and logos for &kde;. If you enjoy writing we would love for you to join our documentation project. +Please remember that the &kde; project is not a commercial venture, but rather a project run by volunteers from all over the world. We would like to invite you to join the &kde; project and become part of this unique network of people. If you are a programmer you might consider helping us write &kde; applications. If you are an artist or have experience with graphic design, consider creating icons sets, colour schemes, sound schemes and logos for &kde;. If you enjoy writing we would love for you to join our documentation project. -As you can see there are many ways in which you can help. You are cordially invited to join this world-wide network of people dedicated to making &kde; the best desktop environment for any computer. Please visit www.kde.org for more information. +As you can see there are many ways in which you can help. You are cordially invited to join this world-wide network of people dedicated to making &kde; the best desktop environment for any computer. Please visit www.kde.org for more information. -Welcome aboard on this exciting journey, +Welcome aboard on this exciting journey, -Your &kde; Team +Your &kde; Team @@ -1357,26 +678,18 @@ printed on your default printer. -Advanced Topics +Advanced Topics -&MIME; Types +&MIME; Types &kde; comes with a number of &MIME; types predefined, but you can add your own &MIME; types by choosing -Settings -Configure Konqueror... - and then File -Associations in a &konqueror; window. +Settings +Configure Konqueror... + and then File +Associations in a &konqueror; window. @@ -1389,8 +702,7 @@ click menu on the file in question. -To link a certain file type with a particular application: +To link a certain file type with a particular application: Make sure the application you want to start this file type has an @@ -1399,47 +711,26 @@ entry in the &kmenu;. -In &konqueror; find or make a file with the extension you wish to +In &konqueror; find or make a file with the extension you wish to link. - + -Right click on the file, and choose -Edit File Type from the context menu, or -choose EditEdit File -Type in &konqueror;'s menu bar. +Right click on the file, and choose +Edit File Type from the context menu, or +choose EditEdit File +Type in &konqueror;'s menu bar. - Add file masks for the application by clicking the -Add button, and entering the file pattern you + Add file masks for the application by clicking the +Add button, and entering the file pattern you want. Remember that &UNIX; is case sensitive, so you may need to add -variations - *.mp3 may need -*.MP3 added as well, for example. Add as many -extensions as you like in this way. +variations - *.mp3 may need +*.MP3 added as well, for example. Add as many +extensions as you like in this way. @@ -1448,13 +739,8 @@ Add a description if you like. This is optional. -In the section labeled Application Preference -Order, press the Add button. A +In the section labeled Application Preference +Order, press the Add button. A miniature copy of the &kmenu; will open, where you can choose the application you want files of this type to be opened with. @@ -1468,32 +754,19 @@ file type. For example, you might like to use &kate; to open text files you wish to edit, and &kedit; for text files that you just want to take a quick peek into. You can add more applications in the same way as you did in the last step, and you can change the preferred -order using the Move Up and Move -Down buttons. +order using the Move Up and Move +Down buttons. - + If you're satisfied with your choices, you can click the -Apply button to save your changes without +Apply button to save your changes without closing the dialog box. This gives you the opportunity to test in the -Konqueror window that your file association -is correct. You can choose OK to save your -changes and close the dialog box, or Cancel if +Konqueror window that your file association +is correct. You can choose OK to save your +changes and close the dialog box, or Cancel if you have changed your mind and just want to close the dialog box. @@ -1511,12 +784,9 @@ program needed to edit it should start. be used to using file extensions for that purpose, and you may know that on &UNIX; systems the file extension often bears little or no relation to the contents of the file. On the other hand, it may be -vital - for example, some implementations of gunzip +vital - for example, some implementations of gunzip won't operate on files that aren't named .gz. +role="extension">.gz. @@ -1526,19 +796,9 @@ like. For example, if you always want to open any files relating to a particular client with &kate;, and you make a habit of naming the files with the client's name at the beginning so that they naturally group in the &konqueror; window, then you can set up a filename pattern that -matches ^clientname*. -Then any files that have clientname at the -beginning (the ^ character means starts with...) and +matches ^clientname*. +Then any files that have clientname at the +beginning (the ^ character means starts with...) and without any regard to the rest of the filename. @@ -1548,62 +808,21 @@ without any regard to the rest of the filename. --> -Credits +Credits -Authors +Authors -Matthias Ettrich ettrich@kde.org -Kalle Dahlheimer kalle@kde.org -Torben Weiss weis@kde.org -Bernd Wuebben wuebben@kde.org -Stephen Schaub sschaub@bju.edu - Editor -Robert Williams rwilliams@kde.org - Editor -Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org +Matthias Ettrich ettrich@kde.org +Kalle Dahlheimer kalle@kde.org +Torben Weiss weis@kde.org +Bernd Wuebben wuebben@kde.org +Stephen Schaub sschaub@bju.edu - Editor +Robert Williams rwilliams@kde.org - Editor +Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk &underFDL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdedebugdialog/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdedebugdialog/index.docbook index da8a975e139..c2bdb328b71 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdedebugdialog/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdedebugdialog/index.docbook @@ -1,194 +1,89 @@ TDEDebugDialog"> + TDEDebugDialog"> - + ]> -The &tdedebugdialog; Handbook +The &tdedebugdialog; Handbook -&David.Faure; &David.Faure.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&David.Faure; &David.Faure.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2001-02-13 -0.03.00 +2001-02-13 +0.03.00 -This document describes &tdedebugdialog;. +This document describes &tdedebugdialog;. -KDE -TDEDebugdialog +KDE +TDEDebugdialog -What is TDEDebugDialog? - -It is a dialogue box for managing diagnostic messages at runtime. - -If you simply start tdedebugdialog, you will see a list of areas, that can be disabled or enabled. A kdDebug(area) call in the code will show something in the debug output only if the area is enabled. - -Note that kdWarning, kdError and kdFatal always appear, they are NOT controlled by this setting. +What is TDEDebugDialog? + +It is a dialogue box for managing diagnostic messages at runtime. + +If you simply start tdedebugdialog, you will see a list of areas, that can be disabled or enabled. A kdDebug(area) call in the code will show something in the debug output only if the area is enabled. + +Note that kdWarning, kdError and kdFatal always appear, they are NOT controlled by this setting. -Area +Area -The areas which should only be output. Every message that is not mentioned here will simply not be output (unless this field remains empty, which is the default, and means that all messages should be output). You can enter several areas separated by commas here, and you can also use area ranges with the syntax start-end. Thus a valid entry could be: 117,214-289,356-359,221. Do not use whitespaces. +The areas which should only be output. Every message that is not mentioned here will simply not be output (unless this field remains empty, which is the default, and means that all messages should be output). You can enter several areas separated by commas here, and you can also use area ranges with the syntax start-end. Thus a valid entry could be: 117,214-289,356-359,221. Do not use whitespaces. -If you start tdedebugdialog , then for every severity level you can define separately what should be done with the diagnostic messages of that level, and the same for each debug area. +If you start tdedebugdialog , then for every severity level you can define separately what should be done with the diagnostic messages of that level, and the same for each debug area. -In full mode, first you should select the debug area you are interested in from the drop down list at the top. +In full mode, first you should select the debug area you are interested in from the drop down list at the top. -You may independently set the output for various types of messages: +You may independently set the output for various types of messages: -Information -Warning -Error -Fatal Error +Information +Warning +Error +Fatal Error -For each of these types, you can set the following: +For each of these types, you can set the following: -Output to: +Output to: -In this Combobox, you can choose where the messages should be output. The choices are: File, Message Box, Shell (meaning stderr) and Syslog. Please do not direct fatal messages to syslog unless you are the system administrator yourself. The default is Message Box. +In this Combobox, you can choose where the messages should be output. The choices are: File, Message Box, Shell (meaning stderr) and Syslog. Please do not direct fatal messages to syslog unless you are the system administrator yourself. The default is Message Box. -Filename: -This is only enabled when you have chosen File as the output and provides the name of that file (which is interpreted as relative to the current folder). The default is kdebug.dbg. +Filename: +This is only enabled when you have chosen File as the output and provides the name of that file (which is interpreted as relative to the current folder). The default is kdebug.dbg. -Apart from this, you can also tick the checkbox Abort on fatal errors. In this case, if a diagnostic message with the severity level KDEBUG_FATAL is output, the application aborts with a SIGABRT after outputting the message. - -When you close the dialogue by pressing OK, your entries apply immediately and are saved in kdebugrc. When you press Cancel, your entries are discarded and the old ones are restored. - -Credits to Kalle Dalheimer for the original version of &tdedebugdialog; +Apart from this, you can also tick the checkbox Abort on fatal errors. In this case, if a diagnostic message with the severity level KDEBUG_FATAL is output, the application aborts with a SIGABRT after outputting the message. + +When you close the dialogue by pressing OK, your entries apply immediately and are saved in kdebugrc. When you press Cancel, your entries are discarded and the old ones are restored. + +Credits to Kalle Dalheimer for the original version of &tdedebugdialog; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/audiocd.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/audiocd.docbook index 10008a8b8c7..de9a9d33c62 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/audiocd.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/audiocd.docbook @@ -1,291 +1,112 @@
-audiocd +audiocd -&Rik.Hemsley; &Rik.Hemsley.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Rik.Hemsley; &Rik.Hemsley.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2001-07-14 -2.20.00 +2001-07-14 +2.20.00 -Allows treating audio CDs like a real filesystem, where tracks are represented as files and, when copied from the folder, are digitally extracted from the CD. This ensures a perfect copy of the audio data. +Allows treating audio CDs like a real filesystem, where tracks are represented as files and, when copied from the folder, are digitally extracted from the CD. This ensures a perfect copy of the audio data. -To see how this slave works, insert an audio CD in your &CD-ROM; drive and type audiocd:/ into &konqueror;. Within a few seconds you should see a list of tracks and some folders. +To see how this slave works, insert an audio CD in your &CD-ROM; drive and type audiocd:/ into &konqueror;. Within a few seconds you should see a list of tracks and some folders. -Audio CDs don't really have folders, but the audiocd slave provides them as a convenience. If you look inside these folders you will see that they all contain the same number of tracks. If you are connected to the Internet, some folders will have the actual track titles shown as the filenames. +Audio CDs don't really have folders, but the audiocd slave provides them as a convenience. If you look inside these folders you will see that they all contain the same number of tracks. If you are connected to the Internet, some folders will have the actual track titles shown as the filenames. -The reason that these separate folders exist are so that you can choose in which format you would like to listen to (or copy) the tracks on the CD. +The reason that these separate folders exist are so that you can choose in which format you would like to listen to (or copy) the tracks on the CD. -If you drag a track from the Ogg Vorbis folder and drop it on another &konqueror; window open at your home folder, you should see a progress window showing you that the track is being extracted from the CD and saved to a file. Note that Ogg Vorbis is a compressed format, so the file in your home folder will appear a great deal smaller than it would have been if you had copied the raw data. +If you drag a track from the Ogg Vorbis folder and drop it on another &konqueror; window open at your home folder, you should see a progress window showing you that the track is being extracted from the CD and saved to a file. Note that Ogg Vorbis is a compressed format, so the file in your home folder will appear a great deal smaller than it would have been if you had copied the raw data. -The mechanism behind this is quite simple. When the audiocd slave is asked to retrieve a track from the Ogg Vorbis folder, it starts extracting the digital audio data from the CD. As it sends the data over to the file in your home folder, it simultaneously encodes it in Ogg Vorbis format (CD audio is in an uncompressed format to start with). +The mechanism behind this is quite simple. When the audiocd slave is asked to retrieve a track from the Ogg Vorbis folder, it starts extracting the digital audio data from the CD. As it sends the data over to the file in your home folder, it simultaneously encodes it in Ogg Vorbis format (CD audio is in an uncompressed format to start with). -You could also try dragging a file ending in .wav and dropping it on the &kde; Media Player, &noatun;. In this case, the procedure that happens behind the scenes is similar, except that instead of encoding the audio data in Ogg Vorbis format, it is put through a very simple conversion, from raw binary data (which the .cda files in the toplevel folder represent) to RIFF WAV format, a non-compressed format that most media players understand. +You could also try dragging a file ending in .wav and dropping it on the &kde; Media Player, &noatun;. In this case, the procedure that happens behind the scenes is similar, except that instead of encoding the audio data in Ogg Vorbis format, it is put through a very simple conversion, from raw binary data (which the .cda files in the toplevel folder represent) to RIFF WAV format, a non-compressed format that most media players understand. -&noatun; should quite happily play the .wav file, but if it has trouble, you may consider using the option, explained below. +&noatun; should quite happily play the .wav file, but if it has trouble, you may consider using the option, explained below. -Options +Options - + -Set the path to the audio CD device, ⪚ audiocd:/=/dev/sdc. Normally, the slave will try to find a CD drive with an audio CD inserted, but if it fails or you have more than one CD drive, you may want to try this option. Note that the configuration dialogue allows you to set a default value for this option. +Set the path to the audio CD device, ⪚ audiocd:/=/dev/sdc. Normally, the slave will try to find a CD drive with an audio CD inserted, but if it fails or you have more than one CD drive, you may want to try this option. Note that the configuration dialogue allows you to set a default value for this option. - + -Set the amount of error detection and correction used when extracting data. +Set the amount of error detection and correction used when extracting data. -Level 0 +Level 0 -No detection or correction. Only useful if you have a perfect CD drive (unlikely). +No detection or correction. Only useful if you have a perfect CD drive (unlikely). -Level 1 +Level 1 -Enable basic error checking and correction. +Enable basic error checking and correction. -Level 2 +Level 2 -Default. Specifies that only a perfect extraction will be accepted. +Default. Specifies that only a perfect extraction will be accepted. -Note that there is a disadvantage to level 2. Extraction can be very slow, so real-time digital playback may not work properly. If you have a good quality CD drive (note that more expensive does not necessarily mean better quality) then you probably won't experience very slow extraction, but a poor drive may take days (!) to extract the audio from one CD. +Note that there is a disadvantage to level 2. Extraction can be very slow, so real-time digital playback may not work properly. If you have a good quality CD drive (note that more expensive does not necessarily mean better quality) then you probably won't experience very slow extraction, but a poor drive may take days (!) to extract the audio from one CD. - + -Specify that track names for the inserted CD will be looked up on the Internet CD Database. Audio CDs don't have track names, but the Internet CD Database is a clever system which uses a special unique identifier generated from the number and length of tracks on each CD to cross-reference a track listing. Track listings are contributed by the Internet community and made available to all. +Specify that track names for the inserted CD will be looked up on the Internet CD Database. Audio CDs don't have track names, but the Internet CD Database is a clever system which uses a special unique identifier generated from the number and length of tracks on each CD to cross-reference a track listing. Track listings are contributed by the Internet community and made available to all. -You can submit your own track listings using &kscd;, the &kde; CD player. +You can submit your own track listings using &kscd;, the &kde; CD player. -This option is on by default. If your Internet connection is not set up correctly, you may find that your CD tracks don't appear. In this case, you can try audiocd:/?=0 to switch this option off. +This option is on by default. If your Internet connection is not set up correctly, you may find that your CD tracks don't appear. In this case, you can try audiocd:/?=0 to switch this option off. - + -Set the Internet CD Database server to contact. By default, this is freedb.freedb.org:888, which means server freedb.freedb.org at port 888. +Set the Internet CD Database server to contact. By default, this is freedb.freedb.org:888, which means server freedb.freedb.org at port 888. -Examples +Examples -audiocd:/?device=/dev/scd0&paranoia_level=0&use_cddb=0 +audiocd:/?device=/dev/scd0&paranoia_level=0&use_cddb=0 -Gives a listing of the tracks on the audio CD inserted in /dev/scd0, which on &Linux; specifies the first SCSI &CD-ROM; device. If you copy tracks from the CD, digital extraction will be performed without error correction or detection. No Internet CD Database will be contacted. +Gives a listing of the tracks on the audio CD inserted in /dev/scd0, which on &Linux; specifies the first SCSI &CD-ROM; device. If you copy tracks from the CD, digital extraction will be performed without error correction or detection. No Internet CD Database will be contacted. -Frequently Asked Question +Frequently Asked Question -I get The file or folder / does not exist. How do I fix that? I have an audio CD in my drive! +I get The file or folder / does not exist. How do I fix that? I have an audio CD in my drive! -Try running cdparanoia as yourself (not root). Do you see a track list? If not, make sure you have permission to access the CD device. If you're using SCSI emulation (possible if you have an IDE CD writer) then make sure you check that you have read and write permissions on the generic SCSI device, which is probably /dev/sg0, /dev/sg1, &etc;. If it still doesn't work, try typing audiocd:/?device=/dev/sg0 (or similar) to tell tdeio_audiocd which device your &CD-ROM; is. +Try running cdparanoia as yourself (not root). Do you see a track list? If not, make sure you have permission to access the CD device. If you're using SCSI emulation (possible if you have an IDE CD writer) then make sure you check that you have read and write permissions on the generic SCSI device, which is probably /dev/sg0, /dev/sg1, &etc;. If it still doesn't work, try typing audiocd:/?device=/dev/sg0 (or similar) to tell tdeio_audiocd which device your &CD-ROM; is. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip.docbook index 422781d17ec..f3097629509 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip.docbook @@ -1,46 +1,18 @@
-bzip +bzip -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -bzip is a compression program. It is rarely used today, having been replaced with bzip2, which offers much better compression. +bzip is a compression program. It is rarely used today, having been replaced with bzip2, which offers much better compression. -The bzip tdeioslave is not directly usable, and is intended for use as a filter. For example, the tar tdeioslave can filter a file through the bzip tdeioslave, in order to display the contents of a tar.bz file directly in a &konqueror; window. +The bzip tdeioslave is not directly usable, and is intended for use as a filter. For example, the tar tdeioslave can filter a file through the bzip tdeioslave, in order to display the contents of a tar.bz file directly in a &konqueror; window. -If you click on a file compressed with a bz extension in &konqueror;, this tdeioslave is used to uncompress it and display it as a normal (uncompressed) file. +If you click on a file compressed with a bz extension in &konqueror;, this tdeioslave is used to uncompress it and display it as a normal (uncompressed) file. -If you are a developer, and would like to use the bzip filter, you can find documentation on using tdeioslaves at http://developer.kde.org +If you are a developer, and would like to use the bzip filter, you can find documentation on using tdeioslaves at http://developer.kde.org
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip2.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip2.docbook index 7c510be806c..8349e4cde52 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip2.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/bzip2.docbook @@ -1,49 +1,20 @@
-bzip2 +bzip2 -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Bzip2 is a compression program +Bzip2 is a compression program -The bzip2 tdeioslave is not directly usable, and is intended for use as a filter. For example, the tar tdeioslave can filter a file through the bzip2 tdeioslave, in order to display the contents of a tar.bz2 file directly in a &konqueror; window. +The bzip2 tdeioslave is not directly usable, and is intended for use as a filter. For example, the tar tdeioslave can filter a file through the bzip2 tdeioslave, in order to display the contents of a tar.bz2 file directly in a &konqueror; window. -If you click on a file compressed with a .bz2 in &konqueror;, this tdeioslave is used to uncompress it and display it as a normal (uncompressed) file. +If you click on a file compressed with a .bz2 in &konqueror;, this tdeioslave is used to uncompress it and display it as a normal (uncompressed) file. -If you are a developer, and would like to use the bzip2 filter, you can find documentation on using tdeioslaves at http://developer.kde.org +If you are a developer, and would like to use the bzip2 filter, you can find documentation on using tdeioslaves at http://developer.kde.org -See the manual: bzip2. +See the manual: bzip2.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/cgi.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/cgi.docbook index b51eae877e8..4d03bd4a59c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/cgi.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/cgi.docbook @@ -1,46 +1,14 @@
-cgi +cgi -&Lauri.Watts;&Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts;&Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The CGI slave provides a way to execute CGI programs without the need to have a running web server. This can for example be used for local testing of CGI programs or for using search engines that only provide a CGI frontend like the one from Doxygen. +The CGI slave provides a way to execute CGI programs without the need to have a running web server. This can for example be used for local testing of CGI programs or for using search engines that only provide a CGI frontend like the one from Doxygen. -The slave implements the cgi: protocol. It uses the filename from the given &URL; and searches a configurable list of folders. If it finds an executable with the given name it executes it, passes the arguments of the &URL; and sets the environment variables needed by CGI programs. +The slave implements the cgi: protocol. It uses the filename from the given &URL; and searches a configurable list of folders. If it finds an executable with the given name it executes it, passes the arguments of the &URL; and sets the environment variables needed by CGI programs.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/data.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/data.docbook index fe7f3908dda..39c460755f5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/data.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/data.docbook @@ -1,75 +1,26 @@
-Data URLs +Data URLs -LeoSavernik
l.savernik@aon.at
 -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +LeoSavernik
l.savernik@aon.at
 +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-02-06 - +2003-02-06 + -Data URLs allow small document data to be included in the URL itself. This is useful for very small HTML testcases or other occasions that do not justify a document of their own. +Data URLs allow small document data to be included in the URL itself. This is useful for very small HTML testcases or other occasions that do not justify a document of their own. -data:,foobar (note the comma after the colon) will deliver a text document that contains nothing but foobar +data:,foobar (note the comma after the colon) will deliver a text document that contains nothing but foobar -The last example delivered a text document. For HTML documents one has to specify the MIME type text/html: data:text/html,<title>Testcase</title><p>This is a testcase</p>. This will produce exactly the same output as if the content had been loaded from a document of its own. +The last example delivered a text document. For HTML documents one has to specify the MIME type text/html: data:text/html,<title>Testcase</title><p>This is a testcase</p>. This will produce exactly the same output as if the content had been loaded from a document of its own. -Specifying alternate character sets is also possible. Note that 8-Bit characters have to be escaped by a percentage sign and their two-digit hexadecimal codes: data:;charset=iso-8859-1,Gr%FC%DFe aus Schl%E4gl results in Grüße aus Schlägl whereas omitting the charset attribute might lead to something like Gr??e aus Schl?gl +Specifying alternate character sets is also possible. Note that 8-Bit characters have to be escaped by a percentage sign and their two-digit hexadecimal codes: data:;charset=iso-8859-1,Gr%FC%DFe aus Schl%E4gl results in Grüße aus Schlägl whereas omitting the charset attribute might lead to something like Gr??e aus Schl?gl -IETF RFC2397 provides more information. +IETF RFC2397 provides more information.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/file.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/file.docbook index b4f6c3fcea3..d9e9c33824d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/file.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/file.docbook @@ -1,37 +1,13 @@
-file +file -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The file protocol is used by all &kde; applications to display locally available files. -Entering file:/directoryname in &konqueror; lists the files of this folder. +The file protocol is used by all &kde; applications to display locally available files. +Entering file:/directoryname in &konqueror; lists the files of this folder.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/finger.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/finger.docbook index 50d791cf561..179ae3c8826 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/finger.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/finger.docbook @@ -1,61 +1,24 @@
-finger +finger -&Lauri.Watts;&Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts;&Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Finger is a program to display information about users. - -If finger is enabled on the remote machine, you may be given information on the user's real name, if they are currently logged in, if they have mail and the text of their .plan file in their home folder. - -Finger is normally associated with a user@hostname address, which may or may not be the same as a users email address. - -Most Internet Service Providers no longer allow finger access, so, you may find that you get no useful answer for most people. - -Other people use their local .plan file to hold such information as PGP keys, the fact they are on vacation, and all sorts of information. - -Use the finger tdeioslave like this: finger://username@hostname - -See the manual: finger. +Finger is a program to display information about users. + +If finger is enabled on the remote machine, you may be given information on the user's real name, if they are currently logged in, if they have mail and the text of their .plan file in their home folder. + +Finger is normally associated with a user@hostname address, which may or may not be the same as a users email address. + +Most Internet Service Providers no longer allow finger access, so, you may find that you get no useful answer for most people. + +Other people use their local .plan file to hold such information as PGP keys, the fact they are on vacation, and all sorts of information. + +Use the finger tdeioslave like this: finger://username@hostname + +See the manual: finger.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/fish.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/fish.docbook index 21173bcbe61..d4925e3ccc9 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/fish.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/fish.docbook @@ -1,110 +1,22 @@
-fish +fish -&Joerg.Walter; &Joerg.Walter.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Joerg.Walter; &Joerg.Walter.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-06-23 -1.1.1 +2002-06-23 +1.1.1 -Allows you to access another computer's files using a simple SSH shell account and standard &UNIX; utilities on the remote side. This way, no server software is needed and you gain access to that computer's files as if they were local (or on NFS, since it is slower than local access). It uses the same protocol as MidnightCommander's #sh VFS handler. +Allows you to access another computer's files using a simple SSH shell account and standard &UNIX; utilities on the remote side. This way, no server software is needed and you gain access to that computer's files as if they were local (or on NFS, since it is slower than local access). It uses the same protocol as MidnightCommander's #sh VFS handler. -Fish should work with any roughly POSIX compatible &UNIX; based remote computer. It uses the shell commands cat, chgrp, chmod, chown, cp, dd, env, expr, grep, ls, mkdir, mv, rm, rmdir, sed, and wc. Fish starts /bin/sh as its shell and expects it to be a Bourne shell (or compatible, like bash). If the sed and file commands are available, as well as a /etc/apache/magic file with &MIME; type signatures, these will be used to guess &MIME; types. +Fish should work with any roughly POSIX compatible &UNIX; based remote computer. It uses the shell commands cat, chgrp, chmod, chown, cp, dd, env, expr, grep, ls, mkdir, mv, rm, rmdir, sed, and wc. Fish starts /bin/sh as its shell and expects it to be a Bourne shell (or compatible, like bash). If the sed and file commands are available, as well as a /etc/apache/magic file with &MIME; type signatures, these will be used to guess &MIME; types. -If Perl is available on the remote machine, it will be used instead. Then only env and /bin/sh are needed. Using Perl has the additional benefit of being faster. +If Perl is available on the remote machine, it will be used instead. Then only env and /bin/sh are needed. Using Perl has the additional benefit of being faster. -Fish may even work on &Windows; machines, if tools like Cygwin are installed. All the above utilities must be in the system PATH, and the initial shell must be able to process the command echo FISH:;/bin/sh correctly. +Fish may even work on &Windows; machines, if tools like Cygwin are installed. All the above utilities must be in the system PATH, and the initial shell must be able to process the command echo FISH:;/bin/sh correctly.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/floppy.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/floppy.docbook index 845131fb7c6..4dd257049e6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/floppy.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/floppy.docbook @@ -1,83 +1,27 @@
-Floppy +Floppy -&Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The floppy ioslave gives you easy access to the floppy disk drives installed on your system. +The floppy ioslave gives you easy access to the floppy disk drives installed on your system. -The drive letter becomes the first subdirectory in the floppy &URL;. Let's say there is a file logo.png on your floppy disk in drive A, then the &URL; will be floppy:/a/logo.png +The drive letter becomes the first subdirectory in the floppy &URL;. Let's say there is a file logo.png on your floppy disk in drive A, then the &URL; will be floppy:/a/logo.png -If you want to access drive B, floppy:/b will do it. floppy:/ is a shortcut for floppy:/a. +If you want to access drive B, floppy:/b will do it. floppy:/ is a shortcut for floppy:/a. -Note that floppy:/logo.png means you have a disk drive named logo.png. +Note that floppy:/logo.png means you have a disk drive named logo.png. -To use it you need to have the mtools package installed, and the floppy ioslave supports everything the various mtools command line utilities support. You don't have to mount your floppy disks, simply enter floppy:/ in any &kde; 3.x app and you will be able to read from and write to your floppy drive. +To use it you need to have the mtools package installed, and the floppy ioslave supports everything the various mtools command line utilities support. You don't have to mount your floppy disks, simply enter floppy:/ in any &kde; 3.x app and you will be able to read from and write to your floppy drive. -It also works with USB sticks, ZIP and JAZ drives. You can use floppy:/u for the USB stick and floppy:/z for the zip drive, for example. To make this work, you might need to adjust your /etc/mtools file. See the manpage for documentation. +It also works with USB sticks, ZIP and JAZ drives. You can use floppy:/u for the USB stick and floppy:/z for the zip drive, for example. To make this work, you might need to adjust your /etc/mtools file. See the manpage for documentation. -The ioslave gives read and write access to the floppy drive, but not simultaneously. While you can read and write to the floppy during the same session, reading and writing have to happen one after the other, not at the same time. +The ioslave gives read and write access to the floppy drive, but not simultaneously. While you can read and write to the floppy during the same session, reading and writing have to happen one after the other, not at the same time. -Author: Alexander Neundorf neundorf@kde.org +Author: Alexander Neundorf neundorf@kde.org
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ftp.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ftp.docbook index b42e7c08e60..28aaf46fbb1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ftp.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ftp.docbook @@ -1,55 +1,23 @@
-&FTP; +&FTP; -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -&FTP; is the Internet service used to transfer a data file from the disk of one computer to the disk of another, regardless of the operating system type. +&FTP; is the Internet service used to transfer a data file from the disk of one computer to the disk of another, regardless of the operating system type. -Similar to other Internet applications, &FTP; uses the client-server approach — a user invokes an &FTP; program on the computer, instructs it to contact a remote computer, and then requests the transfer of one or more files. The local &FTP; program becomes a client that uses TCP to contact an &FTP; server program on the remote computer. Each time the user requests a file transfer, the client and the server programs cooperate to send a copy of the data across the Internet. +Similar to other Internet applications, &FTP; uses the client-server approach — a user invokes an &FTP; program on the computer, instructs it to contact a remote computer, and then requests the transfer of one or more files. The local &FTP; program becomes a client that uses TCP to contact an &FTP; server program on the remote computer. Each time the user requests a file transfer, the client and the server programs cooperate to send a copy of the data across the Internet. -&FTP; servers which allow anonymous &FTP; permit any user, not only users with accounts on the host, to browse the ftp archives and download files. Some &FTP; servers are configured to allow users to upload files. +&FTP; servers which allow anonymous &FTP; permit any user, not only users with accounts on the host, to browse the ftp archives and download files. Some &FTP; servers are configured to allow users to upload files. -&FTP; is commonly used to retrieve information and obtain software stored in files at &FTP; archive sites throughout the world. +&FTP; is commonly used to retrieve information and obtain software stored in files at &FTP; archive sites throughout the world. -Source: Paraphrased from http://tlc.nlm.nih.gov/resources/tutorials/internetdistlrn/ftpdef.htm +Source: Paraphrased from http://tlc.nlm.nih.gov/resources/tutorials/internetdistlrn/ftpdef.htm -See the manual: ftp. +See the manual: ftp.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gopher.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gopher.docbook index e65acb27954..f338aa289cb 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gopher.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gopher.docbook @@ -1,49 +1,17 @@
-gopher +gopher -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -gopher began as a distributed campus information service at the University of Minnesota. Gopher allows the user to access information on Gopher servers running on Internet hosts. +gopher began as a distributed campus information service at the University of Minnesota. Gopher allows the user to access information on Gopher servers running on Internet hosts. -Gopher is an Internet information browsing service that uses a menu-driven interface. Users select information from menus, which may return another menu or display a text file. An item may reside on a Gopher server you originally queried, or it may be on another Gopher server (or another host). Gopher can tunnel from one Gopher to another without the user knowing that the server and/or host machine have changed. Gopher keeps the exact location of computers hidden from the user, providing the illusion of a single, large set of interconnected menus. +Gopher is an Internet information browsing service that uses a menu-driven interface. Users select information from menus, which may return another menu or display a text file. An item may reside on a Gopher server you originally queried, or it may be on another Gopher server (or another host). Gopher can tunnel from one Gopher to another without the user knowing that the server and/or host machine have changed. Gopher keeps the exact location of computers hidden from the user, providing the illusion of a single, large set of interconnected menus. -Gopher permits the user to record an item's location in a bookmark thereby allowing users to follow a bookmark directly to a particular item without searching the menu system. Gopher menus are not standardised, inasmuch as each Gopher server is individually determined. +Gopher permits the user to record an item's location in a bookmark thereby allowing users to follow a bookmark directly to a particular item without searching the menu system. Gopher menus are not standardised, inasmuch as each Gopher server is individually determined. -Source: http://tlc.nlm.nih.gov/resources/tutorials/internetdistlrn/gophrdef.htm +Source: http://tlc.nlm.nih.gov/resources/tutorials/internetdistlrn/gophrdef.htm
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gzip.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gzip.docbook index 2a53bf30384..3a7f07d42cb 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gzip.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/gzip.docbook @@ -1,51 +1,20 @@
-gzip +gzip -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -gzip is a compression program +gzip is a compression program -The gzip tdeioslave is not directly usable, and is intended for use as a filter. For example, the tar tdeioslave can filter a file through the gzip tdeioslave, in order to display the contents of a tar.gz file directly in a &konqueror; window. +The gzip tdeioslave is not directly usable, and is intended for use as a filter. For example, the tar tdeioslave can filter a file through the gzip tdeioslave, in order to display the contents of a tar.gz file directly in a &konqueror; window. -If you click on a file compressed with a gz extension in &konqueror;, this tdeioslave is used to uncompress it and display it as a normal (uncompressed) file. +If you click on a file compressed with a gz extension in &konqueror;, this tdeioslave is used to uncompress it and display it as a normal (uncompressed) file. -If you are a developer, and would like to use the gzip filter, you can find documentation on using tdeioslaves at http://developer.kde.org +If you are a developer, and would like to use the gzip filter, you can find documentation on using tdeioslaves at http://developer.kde.org -See the manual: gzip. +See the manual: gzip.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/help.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/help.docbook index 407fe86647d..730d7a29873 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/help.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/help.docbook @@ -1,33 +1,13 @@
-help +help -&Ferdinand.Gassauer;&Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer;&Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The help system of &kde; -See The &khelpcenter;. +The help system of &kde; +See The &khelpcenter;.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/http.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/http.docbook index c8fd823a278..68f69d93dfa 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/http.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/http.docbook @@ -1,56 +1,18 @@
-http +http -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -http is the HyperText Transfer Protocol. +http is the HyperText Transfer Protocol. -The http tdeioslave is used by all &kde; applications to handle connections to http servers, that is, web servers. The most common usage is to view web pages in the &konqueror; web browser. +The http tdeioslave is used by all &kde; applications to handle connections to http servers, that is, web servers. The most common usage is to view web pages in the &konqueror; web browser. -You can use the http tdeioslave in &konqueror; by giving it a URL. http://www.kde.org. +You can use the http tdeioslave in &konqueror; by giving it a URL. http://www.kde.org. -See the manual: http. +See the manual: http.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/https.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/https.docbook index 41412ed18fb..fe46817c423 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/https.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/https.docbook @@ -1,34 +1,13 @@
-https +https -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -HTTPS is HTTP encapsulated in an SSL/TLS stream. -SSL is the Secure Sockets Layer protocol, a security protocol that provides communications privacy over the Internet. The protocol allows client/server applications to communicate in a way that is designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery. -TLS stands for Transport Layer Security +HTTPS is HTTP encapsulated in an SSL/TLS stream. +SSL is the Secure Sockets Layer protocol, a security protocol that provides communications privacy over the Internet. The protocol allows client/server applications to communicate in a way that is designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery. +TLS stands for Transport Layer Security
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imap.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imap.docbook index 0dc1aef152b..37a0b21281c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imap.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imap.docbook @@ -1,44 +1,20 @@
-imap +imap -&Michael.Haeckel; &Michael.Haeckel.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Michael.Haeckel; &Michael.Haeckel.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2001-08-07 +2001-08-07 -The IMAP4rev1 protocol (Internet Message Access Protocol) allows access to messages in mail folders on a server. Unlike POP3, which is designed to download the mails and delete them from the server, the purpose of IMAP is to store all mails on the server to be able to access these mails from everywhere. Messages can be stored on the server, retrieved from there or moved between folders. +The IMAP4rev1 protocol (Internet Message Access Protocol) allows access to messages in mail folders on a server. Unlike POP3, which is designed to download the mails and delete them from the server, the purpose of IMAP is to store all mails on the server to be able to access these mails from everywhere. Messages can be stored on the server, retrieved from there or moved between folders. -This plugin is currently mainly used by KMail, but you can also use it in any other KDE application that uses tdeioslave plugins. +This plugin is currently mainly used by KMail, but you can also use it in any other KDE application that uses tdeioslave plugins. -For example in &konqueror;, simply type imap://username@your.mail.server/ to get your IMAP folders listed. You can then deal with the folders and mails like with folders and files on a local file system. IMAP URLs are defined in RFC 2192. +For example in &konqueror;, simply type imap://username@your.mail.server/ to get your IMAP folders listed. You can then deal with the folders and mails like with folders and files on a local file system. IMAP URLs are defined in RFC 2192.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imaps.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imaps.docbook index 8d09e5f8f76..b4a7e2f2a3e 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imaps.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/imaps.docbook @@ -1,36 +1,16 @@
-imaps +imaps -&Michael.Haeckel; &Michael.Haeckel.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Michael.Haeckel; &Michael.Haeckel.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2001-08-07 +2001-08-07 -IMAPS is the IMAP protocol encrypted via SSL. +IMAPS is the IMAP protocol encrypted via SSL.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/index.docbook index 391ecd32b1e..05cad79b5a6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/index.docbook @@ -23,8 +23,7 @@ - + @@ -41,26 +40,14 @@ -TDEPrint"> -FerdinandGassauer'> -f.gassauer@aon.at'> +TDEPrint"> +FerdinandGassauer'> +f.gassauer@aon.at'> - + ]> -IO-Slaves +IO-Slaves &tdeio-bzip; &tdeio-bzip2; &tdeio-cgi; &tdeio-data; &tdeio-file; &tdeio-finger; &tdeio-fish; &tdeio-floppy; &tdeio-ftp; &tdeio-gopher; &tdeio-gzip; &tdeio-help; &tdeio-http; &tdeio-https; &tdeio-imap; &tdeio-imaps; &tdeio-info; &tdeio-lan; &tdeio-ldap; &tdeio-mailto; &tdeio-mac; &tdeio-man; &tdeio-mrml; &tdeio-news; &tdeio-nfs; &tdeio-nntp; &tdeio-pop3; &tdeio-pop3s; &tdeio-print; &tdeio-rlan; &tdeio-rlogin; &tdeio-sftp; &tdeio-smb; &tdeio-smtp; &tdeio-tar; &tdeio-telnet; &tdeio-thumbnail; &tdeio-webdav; &tdeio-webdavs; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/info.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/info.docbook index 641c86b4e47..d6edf6da290 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/info.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/info.docbook @@ -1,58 +1,22 @@
-Info +Info -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Info is a type of documentation. The documents are in a file format called texinfo, and can be read on the command line with the info program. +Info is a type of documentation. The documents are in a file format called texinfo, and can be read on the command line with the info program. -The Info ioslave allows you to read the info pages installed on your system, from within &konqueror;. You can use it very easily: +The Info ioslave allows you to read the info pages installed on your system, from within &konqueror;. You can use it very easily: -info:/gcc +info:/gcc -This would show you the top level node of the Info documentation for the gcc compiler. +This would show you the top level node of the Info documentation for the gcc compiler. -Info is a GNU replacement for man, but is not widely used outside of GNU software. +Info is a GNU replacement for man, but is not widely used outside of GNU software. -You can quite easily browse the info documentation you have installed from within the &khelpcenter; application, or you can use the info ioslave directly from within both &konqueror; and the mini-cli. +You can quite easily browse the info documentation you have installed from within the &khelpcenter; application, or you can use the info ioslave directly from within both &konqueror; and the mini-cli.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/lan.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/lan.docbook index bd340b6e345..f0b3b71eb55 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/lan.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/lan.docbook @@ -1,53 +1,16 @@
-lan +lan -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -This protocol is intended to provide a kind of network neighbourhood but only relying on the TCP/IP protocol stack and with the ability to use other protocols than just SMB. +This protocol is intended to provide a kind of network neighbourhood but only relying on the TCP/IP protocol stack and with the ability to use other protocols than just SMB. -The lan tdeioslave can use &FTP;, &HTTP;, SMB, NFS, and FISH +The lan tdeioslave can use &FTP;, &HTTP;, SMB, NFS, and FISH -It must first be configured in &kcontrol;, NetworkLAN-Browsing and for more information see the Lan Browsing manual. +It must first be configured in &kcontrol;, NetworkLAN-Browsing and for more information see the Lan Browsing manual.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ldap.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ldap.docbook index 36e1daf1ec3..027ea0b8a50 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ldap.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/ldap.docbook @@ -1,46 +1,18 @@
-ldap +ldap -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -ldap is the lightweight directory access protocol. It provides access to an X.500 directory, or to a stand-alone LDAP server. +ldap is the lightweight directory access protocol. It provides access to an X.500 directory, or to a stand-alone LDAP server. -You can use the ldap tdeioslave as follows: +You can use the ldap tdeioslave as follows: -ldap://host:port/ou=People,o=where,c=de??sub for a subtree-query +ldap://host:port/ou=People,o=where,c=de??sub for a subtree-query -or ldap://host:port/cn=MM,ou=People,o=where,c=de??base for a complete branch. +or ldap://host:port/cn=MM,ou=People,o=where,c=de??base for a complete branch.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mac.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mac.docbook index 5eba03e0941..848b170bba1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mac.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mac.docbook @@ -1,77 +1,23 @@
-mac +mac -JohnathanRiddelljr@jriddell.org -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +JohnathanRiddelljr@jriddell.org +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The mac ioslave lets you read an HFS+ partition from &konqueror; or any other &kde; file dialogue. It uses hfsplus tools, so you will need these installed for it to work. +The mac ioslave lets you read an HFS+ partition from &konqueror; or any other &kde; file dialogue. It uses hfsplus tools, so you will need these installed for it to work. -Enter mac:/ into &konqueror; and you should see the contents of your &MacOS; partition. If you have not used tdeio-mac before, you will probably get an error message saying you have not specified the right partition. Enter something like mac:/ to specify the partition (if you don't know which partition &MacOS; is on, you can probably guess by changing hda2 to hda3 and so on or use the print command from mac-fdisk). This partition will be used the next time, so you do not have to specify it each time. +Enter mac:/ into &konqueror; and you should see the contents of your &MacOS; partition. If you have not used tdeio-mac before, you will probably get an error message saying you have not specified the right partition. Enter something like mac:/ to specify the partition (if you don't know which partition &MacOS; is on, you can probably guess by changing hda2 to hda3 and so on or use the print command from mac-fdisk). This partition will be used the next time, so you do not have to specify it each time. -Hfsplus tools let you see the file and copy data from the HFS+ partition, but not to copy data to it or change the filenames. +Hfsplus tools let you see the file and copy data from the HFS+ partition, but not to copy data to it or change the filenames. -HFS+ actually keeps two files for every one you see (called forks), a resource fork and a data fork. The default copy mode when you are copying files across to your native drive is raw data, which means it only copies the data fork. Text files are copied in text mode (same as raw format but changes the line endings to be &UNIX; friendly and gets rid of some extra characters - strongly advised for text files), unless you specify otherwise. You can also copy the files across in Mac Binary II format or specify text or raw format with another query: mac:/ or mac:/. See the hpcopy man page for more. +HFS+ actually keeps two files for every one you see (called forks), a resource fork and a data fork. The default copy mode when you are copying files across to your native drive is raw data, which means it only copies the data fork. Text files are copied in text mode (same as raw format but changes the line endings to be &UNIX; friendly and gets rid of some extra characters - strongly advised for text files), unless you specify otherwise. You can also copy the files across in Mac Binary II format or specify text or raw format with another query: mac:/ or mac:/. See the hpcopy man page for more. -Note that you need permissions to read your HFS+ partition. How you get this depends on your distribution. +Note that you need permissions to read your HFS+ partition. How you get this depends on your distribution. -For some reason some folders in &MacOS; end in a funny tall f character. This seems to confuse hfstools. +For some reason some folders in &MacOS; end in a funny tall f character. This seems to confuse hfstools.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mailto.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mailto.docbook index 9b5eff6d154..d78fc254b56 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mailto.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mailto.docbook @@ -1,36 +1,12 @@
-mailto +mailto -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The mailto tdeioslave is used when you click on a mailto link in an HTML page. &konqueror; will open the preferred mail client you have configured, with a composer window. Any information supplied in the URL will be filled in for you. +The mailto tdeioslave is used when you click on a mailto link in an HTML page. &konqueror; will open the preferred mail client you have configured, with a composer window. Any information supplied in the URL will be filled in for you. -See the manual: mailto. +See the manual: mailto.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/man.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/man.docbook index 1176e76b2f4..5f4a1db9dc1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/man.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/man.docbook @@ -1,88 +1,35 @@
-Man +Man -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Using the man ioslave you are able to read the man pages installed on your system. It is easy to use: +Using the man ioslave you are able to read the man pages installed on your system. It is easy to use: -man:/ +man:/ -See the sections of the manual, click to find the rest. +See the sections of the manual, click to find the rest. -man:fopen +man:fopen -See the man page of fopen. +See the man page of fopen. -There is also a shortcut: #fopen, which has the same effect as above. +There is also a shortcut: #fopen, which has the same effect as above. -If you don't find all your man pages, adjust the environment variables MANPATH and MANSECT. +If you don't find all your man pages, adjust the environment variables MANPATH and MANSECT. -As with any other &kde; ioslave, it is possible to enter a &URL;, like man:socket in any &kde; application. Try it in &kwrite; and you will see the man page in HTML format. +As with any other &kde; ioslave, it is possible to enter a &URL;, like man:socket in any &kde; application. Try it in &kwrite; and you will see the man page in HTML format. -Contact mailing list: kde-devel@kde.org +Contact mailing list: kde-devel@kde.org
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mrml.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mrml.docbook index d0cb42f3611..1edaf10a498 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mrml.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/mrml.docbook @@ -1,50 +1,20 @@
-mrml +mrml -&Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-01-08 +2003-01-08 -MRML stands for Multimedia Retrieval Markup Language. MRML is an XML-based protocol to provide standardised access to Multimedia retrieval software. See http://www.mrml.net for more information. +MRML stands for Multimedia Retrieval Markup Language. MRML is an XML-based protocol to provide standardised access to Multimedia retrieval software. See http://www.mrml.net for more information. -tdeio_mrml is used for the Image Finding feature in &kde; +tdeio_mrml is used for the Image Finding feature in &kde; -⪚ type mrml:/ or mrml:/some.other.server in &konqueror; to start searching for images. +⪚ type mrml:/ or mrml:/some.other.server in &konqueror; to start searching for images.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/news.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/news.docbook index 32ce32b5491..382745523f1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/news.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/news.docbook @@ -1,37 +1,15 @@
-news +news -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The news tdeioslave is used when you click on a news link on a web page. It will open &knode;, and if the group referred to in the news link is available from your server, it will subscribe you to the group, in the first available account you have configured in &knode; +The news tdeioslave is used when you click on a news link on a web page. It will open &knode;, and if the group referred to in the news link is available from your server, it will subscribe you to the group, in the first available account you have configured in &knode; -You can unsubscribe from within &knode; if you decide you don't want to read the group, by right clicking and selecting Unsubscribe from Group. +You can unsubscribe from within &knode; if you decide you don't want to read the group, by right clicking and selecting Unsubscribe from Group.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nfs.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nfs.docbook index c627b6d2629..46ed738e733 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nfs.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nfs.docbook @@ -1,55 +1,18 @@
-nfs +nfs -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Sun's NFS protocol provides transparent remote access to shared file systems across networks. The NFS protocol is designed to be machine, operating system, network architecture, and transport protocol independent. This independence is achieved through the use of Remote Procedure Call (RPC) primitives built on top of an eXternal Data Representation (XDR). +Sun's NFS protocol provides transparent remote access to shared file systems across networks. The NFS protocol is designed to be machine, operating system, network architecture, and transport protocol independent. This independence is achieved through the use of Remote Procedure Call (RPC) primitives built on top of an eXternal Data Representation (XDR). -The supporting MOUNT protocol performs the operating system-specific functions that allow clients to attach remote folder trees to a point within the local file system. The mount process also allows the server to grant remote access privileges to a restricted set of clients via export control. +The supporting MOUNT protocol performs the operating system-specific functions that allow clients to attach remote folder trees to a point within the local file system. The mount process also allows the server to grant remote access privileges to a restricted set of clients via export control. -The Lock Manager provides support for file locking when used in the NFS environment. The Network Lock Manager (NLM) protocol isolates the inherently stateful aspects of file locking into a separate protocol. +The Lock Manager provides support for file locking when used in the NFS environment. The Network Lock Manager (NLM) protocol isolates the inherently stateful aspects of file locking into a separate protocol. -Source: http://www.networksorcery.com/enp/protocol/nfs.htm +Source: http://www.networksorcery.com/enp/protocol/nfs.htm -See the manual: nfs. +See the manual: nfs.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nntp.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nntp.docbook index 6e723e3ba3f..54db48f1c50 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nntp.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/nntp.docbook @@ -1,65 +1,23 @@
-nntp +nntp -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The nntp tdeioslave accesses NNTP servers directly. +The nntp tdeioslave accesses NNTP servers directly. -This tdeioslave can not be used with servers that do not implement the GROUP command, including some versions of the popular INN news server which is often used by ISPs. It does work with leafnode, which many people use to keep an offline cache of news articles on their own hard drive or within their LAN. +This tdeioslave can not be used with servers that do not implement the GROUP command, including some versions of the popular INN news server which is often used by ISPs. It does work with leafnode, which many people use to keep an offline cache of news articles on their own hard drive or within their LAN. -You can use the nntp tdeioslave by typing nntp://yourserver/groupname into the &konqueror; URL bar. +You can use the nntp tdeioslave by typing nntp://yourserver/groupname into the &konqueror; URL bar. -If you enter a group name, as above, and the group is available, you will see the messages stored for that group as icons in &konqueror;. +If you enter a group name, as above, and the group is available, you will see the messages stored for that group as icons in &konqueror;. -Clicking on a message will display it as plain text, including all headers. This could be useful for debugging a news client to news server connection, for example, to ensure that your new leafnode server is working correctly. +Clicking on a message will display it as plain text, including all headers. This could be useful for debugging a news client to news server connection, for example, to ensure that your new leafnode server is working correctly. -If you don't enter a group name, and only the server name, you will see a list of available groups. +If you don't enter a group name, and only the server name, you will see a list of available groups. -Please be aware that this could take an enormous amount of time, and will cause a lot of network traffic. Some commercial usenet servers have 60,000 or more groups available, and doing such a thing may cause your desktop to freeze. +Please be aware that this could take an enormous amount of time, and will cause a lot of network traffic. Some commercial usenet servers have 60,000 or more groups available, and doing such a thing may cause your desktop to freeze.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3.docbook index 677522da456..9c151245ae2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3.docbook @@ -1,28 +1,11 @@
-pop3 +pop3 -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The Post Office Protocol (POP3) allows a user's workstation to access mail from a mailbox server. +The Post Office Protocol (POP3) allows a user's workstation to access mail from a mailbox server.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3s.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3s.docbook index 27a0540bcb0..e6c9cc972ff 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3s.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/pop3s.docbook @@ -1,28 +1,11 @@
-pop3s +pop3s -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -POP3S is the POP3 protocol encrypted via SSL. +POP3S is the POP3 protocol encrypted via SSL.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/print.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/print.docbook index bf781fedf7f..79b33943792 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/print.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/print.docbook @@ -1,217 +1,95 @@
-print +print -&Kurt.Pfeifle; &Kurt.Pfeifle.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Kurt.Pfeifle; &Kurt.Pfeifle.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-06-23 -1.00.00 +2002-06-23 +1.00.00 -The print KIOSlave gives quick access to browse different &tdeprint; sections via virtual folders. These folders provide some information about and quick access to your print subsystem. - -print:/ represents one more of those useful KIOSlaves implemented by &kde;. To access it, just type print:/ into the address field of &konqueror;. print:/ doesn't purely provide read-only access to your print subsystem, but it also allows you to change settings of your printers, of your print system and lets you create new printers and classes. - -You are asked for the Administrator or root password, if you are not allowed a view or an operation as a normal user. - -You can bookmark frequently used shortcuts like print:/manager - -Valid syntax is either print:/[path-to-virtual-folder] or print:[path-to-virtual-folder] - -Note, that some of the views and actions offered do heavily depend on the print subsystem that is installed on your box and presently activated for &kde;. Pages showing printer information display only those parts that are valid for the &kde; selected print subsystem. (So if you normally run CUPS, but switched temporarily to Generic UNIX LPD Printing, which is possible, you will see less printer info, because LPD is not capable of using the same amount of print settings as are possible in CUPS). - -Valid syntax to access different virtual folders and a short explanation of what they represent: +The print KIOSlave gives quick access to browse different &tdeprint; sections via virtual folders. These folders provide some information about and quick access to your print subsystem. + +print:/ represents one more of those useful KIOSlaves implemented by &kde;. To access it, just type print:/ into the address field of &konqueror;. print:/ doesn't purely provide read-only access to your print subsystem, but it also allows you to change settings of your printers, of your print system and lets you create new printers and classes. + +You are asked for the Administrator or root password, if you are not allowed a view or an operation as a normal user. + +You can bookmark frequently used shortcuts like print:/manager + +Valid syntax is either print:/[path-to-virtual-folder] or print:[path-to-virtual-folder] + +Note, that some of the views and actions offered do heavily depend on the print subsystem that is installed on your box and presently activated for &kde;. Pages showing printer information display only those parts that are valid for the &kde; selected print subsystem. (So if you normally run CUPS, but switched temporarily to Generic UNIX LPD Printing, which is possible, you will see less printer info, because LPD is not capable of using the same amount of print settings as are possible in CUPS). + +Valid syntax to access different virtual folders and a short explanation of what they represent: -Some examples +Some examples -print:/ (&ie; the root of print-tdeioslave) +print:/ (&ie; the root of print-tdeioslave) -virtual root for browsing your print subsystem. It displays subfolders Classes, Jobs, Manager, Printers, and Specials +virtual root for browsing your print subsystem. It displays subfolders Classes, Jobs, Manager, Printers, and Specials -print:/classes or print:classes -view your printer classes (supported by and useful for CUPS only) +print:/classes or print:classes +view your printer classes (supported by and useful for CUPS only) -print:/classes/class_name or print:classes/class_name -view all members of the named printer class (supported by and useful only for CUPS) +print:/classes/class_name or print:classes/class_name +view all members of the named printer class (supported by and useful only for CUPS) -print:/jobs or print:jobs +print:/jobs or print:jobs -lists the current and pending jobs. +lists the current and pending jobs. -print:/printers or print:printers +print:/printers or print:printers -lists all your printers. Clicking on a printer name shows more info about that printer. +lists all your printers. Clicking on a printer name shows more info about that printer. -print:/printers/printer_name or print:printers/printer_name +print:/printers/printer_name or print:printers/printer_name -displays useful info about the named printer +displays useful info about the named printer -print:/manager or print:manager -opens a page very similar to the &tdeprint; Manager module inside the &kde; Control Centre. Switch to a different printing system here or do every other administrative task. -This is the most important of access points to your printing system. +print:/manager or print:manager +opens a page very similar to the &tdeprint; Manager module inside the &kde; Control Centre. Switch to a different printing system here or do every other administrative task. +This is the most important of access points to your printing system. -print:/specials or print:specials -lists all presently available special printers: Likely you'll see: +print:/specials or print:specials +lists all presently available special printers: Likely you'll see: - The two that let you save a printfile to disk, in &PostScript; or PDF format. + The two that let you save a printfile to disk, in &PostScript; or PDF format. - One that sends it as a PDF attachment via &kmail;. + One that sends it as a PDF attachment via &kmail;. - And last, send it via fax, if you have one of the supported fax backends active, Hylafax or efax. + And last, send it via fax, if you have one of the supported fax backends active, Hylafax or efax. @@ -219,32 +97,8 @@ -You can also put print:/manager or similar as the command in the Quick Command utility (started via &Alt;F2) - -You can learn more about printing and &tdeprint;'s powerful abilities by reading the &tdeprint; Handbook locally or at the &tdeprint; Website where there are documents online (HTML and PDF),containing Tutorials, as well as FAQs and Tips and Tricks related to printing in general. +You can also put print:/manager or similar as the command in the Quick Command utility (started via &Alt;F2) + +You can learn more about printing and &tdeprint;'s powerful abilities by reading the &tdeprint; Handbook locally or at the &tdeprint; Website where there are documents online (HTML and PDF),containing Tutorials, as well as FAQs and Tips and Tricks related to printing in general.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlan.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlan.docbook index 5c486134867..ca2c8100b17 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlan.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlan.docbook @@ -1,28 +1,11 @@
-rlan +rlan -The &kde; team -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +The &kde; team +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Not yet documented +Not yet documented
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlogin.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlogin.docbook index 71ada32f0c5..5a97809c265 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlogin.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/rlogin.docbook @@ -1,62 +1,22 @@
-rlogin +rlogin -ChristianBunting -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +ChristianBunting +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Using &konqueror; you can start up an rlogin session with a server hosting the rlogin service. +Using &konqueror; you can start up an rlogin session with a server hosting the rlogin service. -To use this tdeioslave feature, in the &konqueror; URL bar, type rlogin:/host_to_connect_to +To use this tdeioslave feature, in the &konqueror; URL bar, type rlogin:/host_to_connect_to -This will initialise &konsole; with an rlogin session, prompting you for your password. +This will initialise &konsole; with an rlogin session, prompting you for your password. -The rlogin tdeioslave uses the username of the account you are currently using in &kde;. +The rlogin tdeioslave uses the username of the account you are currently using in &kde;. -After you have successfully entered your password, you can begin your remote session. +After you have successfully entered your password, you can begin your remote session. -See the manual: rlogin. +See the manual: rlogin. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/sftp.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/sftp.docbook index 6783abb2839..3de4eed416d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/sftp.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/sftp.docbook @@ -1,41 +1,13 @@
-sftp +sftp -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -SFTP is a Secure file transfer protocol. sftp is an interactive file transfer program, similar to ftp, but it performs all operations over an encrypted ssh transport. It may use many of the features of ssh, including public key authentication and compression. +SFTP is a Secure file transfer protocol. sftp is an interactive file transfer program, similar to ftp, but it performs all operations over an encrypted ssh transport. It may use many of the features of ssh, including public key authentication and compression. -See the manual: sftp. +See the manual: sftp.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smb.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smb.docbook index 163e83eb98b..20150cbf54b 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smb.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smb.docbook @@ -1,108 +1,26 @@
-SMB +SMB -&Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Alexander.Neundorf; &Alexander.Neundorf.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The smb ioslave enables you to browse the shares of a &Windows; (or Samba) network. +The smb ioslave enables you to browse the shares of a &Windows; (or Samba) network. -To see the workgroups, enter smb:/. -smb:/a_workgroup will list the hosts in this workgroup. -To see the shares of a host, enter smb://the_host or smb:/a_workgroup/the_host. -To access a share directly enter smb://the_host/the_share or smb:/a_workgroup/the_host/the_share +To see the workgroups, enter smb:/. +smb:/a_workgroup will list the hosts in this workgroup. +To see the shares of a host, enter smb://the_host or smb:/a_workgroup/the_host. +To access a share directly enter smb://the_host/the_share or smb:/a_workgroup/the_host/the_share -The smb ioslave is a wrapper around the command line tool smbclient, which is part of the Samba package. This means you need to have Samba installed to use this ioslave. +The smb ioslave is a wrapper around the command line tool smbclient, which is part of the Samba package. This means you need to have Samba installed to use this ioslave. -To be able to authenticate to &Windows; NT Domain Controllers, you need at least Samba 2.0. To access the shares of &Windows; 2000 machines, you need at least Samba 2.0.7. To be able to write to Windows shares, you need at least Samba 2.2.4 or the patch from http://lisa-home.sourceforge.net/smbclientpatch.html. +To be able to authenticate to &Windows; NT Domain Controllers, you need at least Samba 2.0. To access the shares of &Windows; 2000 machines, you need at least Samba 2.0.7. To be able to write to Windows shares, you need at least Samba 2.2.4 or the patch from http://lisa-home.sourceforge.net/smbclientpatch.html. -You can set your default user name and password in the &kcontrol; in NetworkWindows Shares. This is especially useful if you are a member of a &Windows; NT domain. There you can also set your workgroup name, but in most cases this is not required. +You can set your default user name and password in the &kcontrol; in NetworkWindows Shares. This is especially useful if you are a member of a &Windows; NT domain. There you can also set your workgroup name, but in most cases this is not required. -This ioslave is tested and developed using mainly Samba 2.0.7, but other versions of Samba should work too. +This ioslave is tested and developed using mainly Samba 2.0.7, but other versions of Samba should work too. -Author: Alexander Neundorf neundorf@kde.org +Author: Alexander Neundorf neundorf@kde.org
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smtp.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smtp.docbook index 7a9796c0014..e9fc2e10812 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smtp.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/smtp.docbook @@ -1,33 +1,13 @@
-smtp +smtp -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -A protocol to send mail from the client workstation to the mail server. +A protocol to send mail from the client workstation to the mail server. -See : Simple Mail Transfer Protocol . +See : Simple Mail Transfer Protocol .
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/tar.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/tar.docbook index b625adf9f4f..2c1078dffc5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/tar.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/tar.docbook @@ -1,33 +1,13 @@
-tar +tar -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -An archiving program designed to store and extract files from an archive file known as a tarfile. A tarfile may be made on a tape drive, however, it is also common to write a tarfile to a normal file. +An archiving program designed to store and extract files from an archive file known as a tarfile. A tarfile may be made on a tape drive, however, it is also common to write a tarfile to a normal file. -See the manual: tar. +See the manual: tar.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/telnet.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/telnet.docbook index 27f5e5d46a9..09cbc6144f4 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/telnet.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/telnet.docbook @@ -1,33 +1,13 @@
-telnet +telnet -&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Ferdinand.Gassauer; &Ferdinand.Gassauer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The network terminal protocol (TELNET) allows a user to log in on any other computer on the network supporting TELNET. +The network terminal protocol (TELNET) allows a user to log in on any other computer on the network supporting TELNET. -See the manual: telnet. +See the manual: telnet.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/thumbnail.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/thumbnail.docbook index bc9d6f408d5..7e0649c07c5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/thumbnail.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/thumbnail.docbook @@ -1,49 +1,17 @@
-thumbnail +thumbnail -&Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Carsten.Pfeiffer; &Carsten.Pfeiffer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -The thumbnail tdeioslave is used by &kde; for network transparent and persistent generation of thumbnails. +The thumbnail tdeioslave is used by &kde; for network transparent and persistent generation of thumbnails. -The thumbnail tdeioslave uses plugins to generate the actual thumbnails. You can enable viewing of these thumbnails from the View Preview submenu, available in &konqueror; in file manager mode. +The thumbnail tdeioslave uses plugins to generate the actual thumbnails. You can enable viewing of these thumbnails from the View Preview submenu, available in &konqueror; in file manager mode. -The thumbnail tdeioslave is not directly useful to a user, but if you are a developer, you can use it within your own applications to create file previews. +The thumbnail tdeioslave is not directly useful to a user, but if you are a developer, you can use it within your own applications to create file previews. -See the documentation in the sources for more information. You will find these at $TDEDIR/include/tdeio/thumbcreator.h or in the source folder tdebase/tdeioslave/thumbnail +See the documentation in the sources for more information. You will find these at $TDEDIR/include/tdeio/thumbcreator.h or in the source folder tdebase/tdeioslave/thumbnail
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdav.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdav.docbook index 5fc85060f49..ca9544d7dba 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdav.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdav.docbook @@ -1,85 +1,40 @@
-webdav +webdav -&Hamish.Rodda; &Hamish.Rodda.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Hamish.Rodda; &Hamish.Rodda.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-01-21 +2002-01-21 -WebDAV is a Distributed Authoring and Versioning protocol for the World Wide Web. It allows for easy management of documents and scripts on a http server, and has additional features designed to simplify version management amongst multiple authors. +WebDAV is a Distributed Authoring and Versioning protocol for the World Wide Web. It allows for easy management of documents and scripts on a http server, and has additional features designed to simplify version management amongst multiple authors. -Usage of this protocol is simple. Type the location you want to view, similar to a http URL except for the webdav:// protocol name at the start. An example is webdav://www.hostname.com/path/. If you specify a folder name, a list of files and folders will be displayed, and you can manipulate these folders and files just as you would with any other filesystem. +Usage of this protocol is simple. Type the location you want to view, similar to a http URL except for the webdav:// protocol name at the start. An example is webdav://www.hostname.com/path/. If you specify a folder name, a list of files and folders will be displayed, and you can manipulate these folders and files just as you would with any other filesystem. -WebDAV Features +WebDAV Features -Locking +Locking -File locking allows users to lock a file, informing others that they are currently working on this file. This way, editing can be done without fear that the changes may be overwritten by another person who is also editing the same document. +File locking allows users to lock a file, informing others that they are currently working on this file. This way, editing can be done without fear that the changes may be overwritten by another person who is also editing the same document. -Source file access +Source file access -WebDAV allows access to the script which is called to produce a specific page, so changes can be made to the script itself. +WebDAV allows access to the script which is called to produce a specific page, so changes can be made to the script itself. -Per-document property support +Per-document property support -Arbitrary properties may be set to assist identification of a document, such as the author. +Arbitrary properties may be set to assist identification of a document, such as the author. -To take advantage of these additional capabilities, you will need an application which supports them. No application currently supports them through this tdeioslave. +To take advantage of these additional capabilities, you will need an application which supports them. No application currently supports them through this tdeioslave.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdavs.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdavs.docbook index 8918fe1986c..659f6d8fdf5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdavs.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeioslave/webdavs.docbook @@ -1,36 +1,16 @@
-webdavs +webdavs -&Hamish.Rodda; &Hamish.Rodda.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Hamish.Rodda; &Hamish.Rodda.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-01-21 +2002-01-21 -WebDAVS is the WebDAV protocol encrypted via SSL. +WebDAVS is the WebDAV protocol encrypted via SSL.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/add-printer-wiz.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/add-printer-wiz.docbook index 1ece07bc322..ff7d67d277b 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/add-printer-wiz.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/add-printer-wiz.docbook @@ -1,341 +1,200 @@ -The <quote ->Add Printer Wizard</quote -> for &CUPS; - -Clicking on the leftmost icon on the toolbar in the upper part of the window starts the Add Printer Wizard. - -This wizard steps you through various screens to install a new printer. At present this Wizard works for &CUPS; and the RLPR environment module. The number of steps depend on the actual print-subsystem which is active and available to you on your box. +The <quote>Add Printer Wizard</quote> for &CUPS; + +Clicking on the leftmost icon on the toolbar in the upper part of the window starts the Add Printer Wizard. + +This wizard steps you through various screens to install a new printer. At present this Wizard works for &CUPS; and the RLPR environment module. The number of steps depend on the actual print-subsystem which is active and available to you on your box. -Starting +Starting -The welcome screen informs you that you can go back any time to change a setting. +The welcome screen informs you that you can go back any time to change a setting. -The &tdeprint; wizard introduction screen +The &tdeprint; wizard introduction screen -The introduction screen of the printer wizard +The introduction screen of the printer wizard -Backend Selection +Backend Selection -Choose the backend protocol that &CUPS; is supposed to use with your new printer. There are: +Choose the backend protocol that &CUPS; is supposed to use with your new printer. There are: -local printer (serial, parallel, USB) +local printer (serial, parallel, USB) -remote LPD queue +remote LPD queue -SMB shared printer (&Windows;) +SMB shared printer (&Windows;) -Network Printer (TCP, &HP; JetDirect, AppSocket) +Network Printer (TCP, &HP; JetDirect, AppSocket) -Network printer with &IPP; (&IPP;/HTTP) +Network printer with &IPP; (&IPP;/HTTP) -File printer +File printer -serial fax /modem printer +serial fax /modem printer -Class of Printers +Class of Printers -If some choices are greyed out, they are not available. For example, you may have no FAX backend software or no modem installed to use it. +If some choices are greyed out, they are not available. For example, you may have no FAX backend software or no modem installed to use it. -Choosing your Printer system +Choosing your Printer system -Choosing your Printer System +Choosing your Printer System -Direct Network Setting +Direct Network Setting -The contents of your next screen is dependent on your choice in the previous screen. If you know the details, just type them in to configure your network settings directly. +The contents of your next screen is dependent on your choice in the previous screen. If you know the details, just type them in to configure your network settings directly. -In other cases the wizard can scan the network for you, to help you decide which setting could be useful. +In other cases the wizard can scan the network for you, to help you decide which setting could be useful. -&tdeprint; wizard network scan +&tdeprint; wizard network scan -In the &tdeprint; wizard, you can enter network details directly, or you can scan the network automatically. +In the &tdeprint; wizard, you can enter network details directly, or you can scan the network automatically. -Information Retrieval by Scanning the Network - -If you use one of the network connections (remote LPD, SMB, remote &CUPS;, network printer with &IPP;), you have an option for scanning the network. Be careful when applying this; in some environments network scanning is considered to be hostile and harmful! - -In the case of SMB, &tdeprint; will use the Samba utilities nmblookup and smbclient (which need to be installed for this to work) to retrieve the information it presents in a tree structure. - -In the case of &IPP; (Port 631) and TCP Network/AppSocket (Port 9100) &tdeprint; will try to open the port and, if successful, send an ipp-get-printer-attribute request to the printer. For newer &HP; printers the latter usually works, because they support both AppSocket and &IPP;. - -Some printers or manufacturers use other port numbers for direct TCP/IP printing. You may need to look up which one to use. The Settings button in the dialogue lets you configure your scan, including IP addresses, ports and timeout to use. - -Once again: be careful not to be mistaken for an intruder on your network, if you use the scanning technique. +Information Retrieval by Scanning the Network + +If you use one of the network connections (remote LPD, SMB, remote &CUPS;, network printer with &IPP;), you have an option for scanning the network. Be careful when applying this; in some environments network scanning is considered to be hostile and harmful! + +In the case of SMB, &tdeprint; will use the Samba utilities nmblookup and smbclient (which need to be installed for this to work) to retrieve the information it presents in a tree structure. + +In the case of &IPP; (Port 631) and TCP Network/AppSocket (Port 9100) &tdeprint; will try to open the port and, if successful, send an ipp-get-printer-attribute request to the printer. For newer &HP; printers the latter usually works, because they support both AppSocket and &IPP;. + +Some printers or manufacturers use other port numbers for direct TCP/IP printing. You may need to look up which one to use. The Settings button in the dialogue lets you configure your scan, including IP addresses, ports and timeout to use. + +Once again: be careful not to be mistaken for an intruder on your network, if you use the scanning technique. -&tdeprint; wizard network configuration dialogue +&tdeprint; wizard network configuration dialogue -In the &tdeprint; wizard, you can enter parameters to have the wizard scan parts of your network. +In the &tdeprint; wizard, you can enter parameters to have the wizard scan parts of your network. -Printer Model Selection +Printer Model Selection -The hardest part is probably the Printer Model Selection. In former years the situation was difficult, because there were hardly any drivers to find. The difficulty now is there are too many; though some of them are very good, many are quite broken. +The hardest part is probably the Printer Model Selection. In former years the situation was difficult, because there were hardly any drivers to find. The difficulty now is there are too many; though some of them are very good, many are quite broken. -If you have a current database of available drivers on your system, select the manufacturer in the left part of the window first, then the device model in the right part. This split window shows all &PPD;s found by &CUPS; in its standard repository of installable &PPD;s. This repository normally is /usr/share/cups/model/. If you want your driver to be found automatically by &CUPS; and &tdeprint;, place it in there. +If you have a current database of available drivers on your system, select the manufacturer in the left part of the window first, then the device model in the right part. This split window shows all &PPD;s found by &CUPS; in its standard repository of installable &PPD;s. This repository normally is /usr/share/cups/model/. If you want your driver to be found automatically by &CUPS; and &tdeprint;, place it in there. -Driver Selection +Driver Selection -On the next screen you will see a description of the driver selected previously. This description is extracted from the actual &PPD; used. +On the next screen you will see a description of the driver selected previously. This description is extracted from the actual &PPD; used. -For a real &PostScript; printer never try to install a Foomatic or Gimp-Print &PPD;, even if it is offered. You won't be happy with it. Instead find the original &PPD; from the manufacturer, preferably the one written for &Windows; NT and use it. +For a real &PostScript; printer never try to install a Foomatic or Gimp-Print &PPD;, even if it is offered. You won't be happy with it. Instead find the original &PPD; from the manufacturer, preferably the one written for &Windows; NT and use it. -Some &Linux; distributions have supplied for &CUPS; every possible combination of Ghostscript filters and foomatic &PPD; files they could find on the net. Many of these are quite useless; they were generated a year ago, when the people at www.linuxprinting.org began their first experiments with supplying third party &PPD;s for &CUPS;. Although dubbed Alpha at the time, these started to take on a life of their own and can now be found at various places on the net, doing &CUPS; no favours. +Some &Linux; distributions have supplied for &CUPS; every possible combination of Ghostscript filters and foomatic &PPD; files they could find on the net. Many of these are quite useless; they were generated a year ago, when the people at www.linuxprinting.org began their first experiments with supplying third party &PPD;s for &CUPS;. Although dubbed Alpha at the time, these started to take on a life of their own and can now be found at various places on the net, doing &CUPS; no favours. -If you are not sure which ones to use go to: +If you are not sure which ones to use go to: -http://www.linuxprinting.org +http://www.linuxprinting.org -http://www.cups.org +http://www.cups.org -And ask for help. At a later stage, a document detailing the differences between the different driver and &PPD; models will appear at http://tdeprint.sourceforge.net/ Watch out for this! +And ask for help. At a later stage, a document detailing the differences between the different driver and &PPD; models will appear at http://tdeprint.sourceforge.net/ Watch out for this! -Via the Other... button you are able to retrieve any &PPD; located somewhere on your available file system. +Via the Other... button you are able to retrieve any &PPD; located somewhere on your available file system. -Printer Test and Finding the Right Settings +Printer Test and Finding the Right Settings -Specify your first driver settings now. The most important one is the default paper size. In many cases this is set to Letter. If you live in an A4 country and don't want your first test page to jam: now is the time to prevent this. +Specify your first driver settings now. The most important one is the default paper size. In many cases this is set to Letter. If you live in an A4 country and don't want your first test page to jam: now is the time to prevent this. -You are ready to start a test print. Hit the Test button. +You are ready to start a test print. Hit the Test button. -Finally: Baptising Your New Printer - -The last screen lets you insert a name for your new printer. - -The name must start with a letter and may contain numbers and underscores with a maximum size of 128 characters. Conform to this if you want to avoid erratic behaviour of your &CUPS; daemon. The printer names in &CUPS; are not case sensitive! This is a requirement of &IPP;. So the names DANKA_infotec, Danka_Infotec and danka_infotec all represent the same printer. +Finally: Baptising Your New Printer + +The last screen lets you insert a name for your new printer. + +The name must start with a letter and may contain numbers and underscores with a maximum size of 128 characters. Conform to this if you want to avoid erratic behaviour of your &CUPS; daemon. The printer names in &CUPS; are not case sensitive! This is a requirement of &IPP;. So the names DANKA_infotec, Danka_Infotec and danka_infotec all represent the same printer. -The Final Confirmation Screen +The Final Confirmation Screen - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cups-config.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cups-config.docbook index 49e387f3a2f..bc3580e81bd 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cups-config.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cups-config.docbook @@ -1,309 +1,184 @@ -Print Server Configuration: CUPS - -Start the print server configuration (now that you have chosen &CUPS;, this is equivalent to the configuration of the &CUPS; daemon) by clicking on the appropriate button. You can find it by moving the mouse slowly over the buttons and reading the tooltips. It should be the 11th from the left , or third from the right; its icon is a wrench. - -The &CUPS; Server Configuration window pops up. It gives you a structured view of all the settings that apply to the &CUPS; daemon. The configuration file for that daemon is normally located in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf. This is a plain ASCII file with a syntax similar to the configuration file of the Apache web server. It is a good idea to create a backup copy, just in case something goes wrong with the configuration through &tdeprint;/&CUPS; Server Configuration dialogues: - -cp /etc/cups/cupsd.conf /etc/cups/cupsd.conf.bak - -As this graphical user interface to edit the configuration file is such a new feature, you should have the second chance of resorting to the original file. So back it up, please. +Print Server Configuration: CUPS + +Start the print server configuration (now that you have chosen &CUPS;, this is equivalent to the configuration of the &CUPS; daemon) by clicking on the appropriate button. You can find it by moving the mouse slowly over the buttons and reading the tooltips. It should be the 11th from the left , or third from the right; its icon is a wrench. + +The &CUPS; Server Configuration window pops up. It gives you a structured view of all the settings that apply to the &CUPS; daemon. The configuration file for that daemon is normally located in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf. This is a plain ASCII file with a syntax similar to the configuration file of the Apache web server. It is a good idea to create a backup copy, just in case something goes wrong with the configuration through &tdeprint;/&CUPS; Server Configuration dialogues: + +cp /etc/cups/cupsd.conf /etc/cups/cupsd.conf.bak + +As this graphical user interface to edit the configuration file is such a new feature, you should have the second chance of resorting to the original file. So back it up, please. -Quick Help - -One very nice feature is the Quick Help available. If you click on the little question mark (What's this?) on your window title bar, you'll see the cursor changing its form. Now click on a cupsd configuration setting field to find out what it means and what your options are. In most cases you should understand the meaning immediately, otherwise turn to the excellent &CUPS; documentation. (If your &CUPS; Daemon is running, you have it online on your own host at http://localhost:631/documentation.html. -If &CUPS; is not running, but installed on your system you could find it in your own host's file system. The exact location depends on your &OS;, but on &Linux; the default is /usr/share/doc/cups/ or /usr/share/doc/cups/documentation.html. +Quick Help + +One very nice feature is the Quick Help available. If you click on the little question mark (What's this?) on your window title bar, you'll see the cursor changing its form. Now click on a cupsd configuration setting field to find out what it means and what your options are. In most cases you should understand the meaning immediately, otherwise turn to the excellent &CUPS; documentation. (If your &CUPS; Daemon is running, you have it online on your own host at http://localhost:631/documentation.html. +If &CUPS; is not running, but installed on your system you could find it in your own host's file system. The exact location depends on your &OS;, but on &Linux; the default is /usr/share/doc/cups/ or /usr/share/doc/cups/documentation.html. -Longer Help +Longer Help -For the best, most detailed and most recent information you should always refer to the original &CUPS; documentation. &CUPS; is, much like &kde; in a rapid development process. There are constantly new features being added. New features might for times be only configurable by directly editing the configuration files. The &tdeprint; &GUI; might not have caught up with &CUPS; development. +For the best, most detailed and most recent information you should always refer to the original &CUPS; documentation. &CUPS; is, much like &kde; in a rapid development process. There are constantly new features being added. New features might for times be only configurable by directly editing the configuration files. The &tdeprint; &GUI; might not have caught up with &CUPS; development. -Just in case you want to look at the original configuration files of your &CUPS; system -- they are here: +Just in case you want to look at the original configuration files of your &CUPS; system -- they are here: -These paths are based on the default installation. Your &OS; may have installed them to a different prefix, for example, /usr/local/, but the hierarchy should still match that shown below. +These paths are based on the default installation. Your &OS; may have installed them to a different prefix, for example, /usr/local/, but the hierarchy should still match that shown below. -/etc/cups/ +/etc/cups/ -The folder with the configuration files +The folder with the configuration files -/etc/cups/cupsd.conf +/etc/cups/cupsd.conf -The configuration file for the &CUPS; daemon +The configuration file for the &CUPS; daemon -/etc/cups/printers.conf +/etc/cups/printers.conf -The configuration file that contains the information about your locally installed printers. +The configuration file that contains the information about your locally installed printers. -/etc/cups/ppd/ +/etc/cups/ppd/ -The folder with &PPD; files of your installed printers. +The folder with &PPD; files of your installed printers. -The following links only work if your &CUPS; daemon is up and running. To access all the original &CUPS; documentation, go to: +The following links only work if your &CUPS; daemon is up and running. To access all the original &CUPS; documentation, go to: -http://localhost:631/documentation.html +http://localhost:631/documentation.html -A page with all the links to the other documents. +A page with all the links to the other documents. -http://localhost:631/sam.html +http://localhost:631/sam.html -Direct access to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual in HTML format. +Direct access to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual in HTML format. -http://localhost:631/sam.pdf +http://localhost:631/sam.pdf -Direct access to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual in PDF format. +Direct access to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual in PDF format. -http://www.cups.org/documentation.html +http://www.cups.org/documentation.html -The latest on line documentation from the &CUPS; web site. +The latest on line documentation from the &CUPS; web site. -The following links give you access to the same files (probably icons and graphics will be missing) even if your CUPS daemon is not up and running. You need, however, CUPS installed on your system. (Some distributions might place the files somewhere else -- you're on your own then to find out where...) To access all the original CUPS documentation, go to: +The following links give you access to the same files (probably icons and graphics will be missing) even if your CUPS daemon is not up and running. You need, however, CUPS installed on your system. (Some distributions might place the files somewhere else -- you're on your own then to find out where...) To access all the original CUPS documentation, go to: -This documentation is available even when the &CUPS; daemon is not installed, although you may find images and icons are missing when you view the HTML files. +This documentation is available even when the &CUPS; daemon is not installed, although you may find images and icons are missing when you view the HTML files. -As noted above, the hierarchy below should be intact, but your &OS; may have installed &CUPS; to a different location. +As noted above, the hierarchy below should be intact, but your &OS; may have installed &CUPS; to a different location. -/usr/share/doc/cups/documentation.html +/usr/share/doc/cups/documentation.html -A page with all the links to the other documents. +A page with all the links to the other documents. -/usr/share/doc/cups/sam.html +/usr/share/doc/cups/sam.html -Direct access to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual in HTML format. +Direct access to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual in HTML format. -/usr/share/doc/cups/sam.pdf +/usr/share/doc/cups/sam.pdf -Direct access to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual in PDF format. +Direct access to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual in PDF format. -There are a few WebSites and Newsgroups discussing &CUPS; (and &Linux; Printing in General) and giving help to newbies at: +There are a few WebSites and Newsgroups discussing &CUPS; (and &Linux; Printing in General) and giving help to newbies at: -http://www.cups.org/newsgroups.php +http://www.cups.org/newsgroups.php -The &CUPS; website. +The &CUPS; website. -http://www.linuxprinting.org/newsportal/ +http://www.linuxprinting.org/newsportal/ -LinuxPrinting.org, the home of the Linuxprinting HOWTO and the &Linux; Printer Database +LinuxPrinting.org, the home of the Linuxprinting HOWTO and the &Linux; Printer Database -And finally, there will be a WebSite for &tdeprint; and related documentation, at http://tdeprint.sourceforge.net/ +And finally, there will be a WebSite for &tdeprint; and related documentation, at http://tdeprint.sourceforge.net/ -In the next section I will step you through most of the configuration options of &tdeprint; with &CUPS;. +In the next section I will step you through most of the configuration options of &tdeprint; with &CUPS;. -Explaining different elements of the &GUI; +Explaining different elements of the &GUI; -Upper Window: View on Printers, both Real and Virtual +Upper Window: View on Printers, both Real and Virtual -This section is not yet complete +This section is not yet complete -Tree view, icon view and list view +Tree view, icon view and list view -The icons of the task bar +The icons of the task bar -Different fonts for different printers +Different fonts for different printers -Different printer icons mean different things +Different printer icons mean different things -Lower Window: Tabbed View of Details +Lower Window: Tabbed View of Details -This section is not yet complete. +This section is not yet complete. -The icons of the task bar +The icons of the task bar -The Tabs +The Tabs -Changing printer settings +Changing printer settings @@ -313,498 +188,229 @@ -Welcome to the &CUPS; Server Configuration +Welcome to the &CUPS; Server Configuration -This is the Welcome Screen for your server configuration dialogues. Clicking onto one of the items of the tree view on left side of the screen opens the appropriate part of the configuration settings. +This is the Welcome Screen for your server configuration dialogues. Clicking onto one of the items of the tree view on left side of the screen opens the appropriate part of the configuration settings. -Every setting has a default value. The defaults let &CUPS; normally work as a fully functional client. The clients listen on TCP/IP Port 631 for infos broadcast by &CUPS; servers on the LAN. This information let the clients print immediately after receiving them, without installing any driver or configuring any printer on the clients. +Every setting has a default value. The defaults let &CUPS; normally work as a fully functional client. The clients listen on TCP/IP Port 631 for infos broadcast by &CUPS; servers on the LAN. This information let the clients print immediately after receiving them, without installing any driver or configuring any printer on the clients. -To configure a &CUPS; server (which is broadcasting its service to the LAN) you need to change settings from the defaults. +To configure a &CUPS; server (which is broadcasting its service to the LAN) you need to change settings from the defaults. -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: welcome screen. +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: welcome screen. -CUPS server configuration dialogue: welcome screen +CUPS server configuration dialogue: welcome screen -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: welcome screen -
 +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: welcome screen + -To select the default setting of any item just enable the checkbox on the right side of the screen. To set an item to a different value, disable the checkbox and then go on to do the setting you want on the left side of the screen. +To select the default setting of any item just enable the checkbox on the right side of the screen. To set an item to a different value, disable the checkbox and then go on to do the setting you want on the left side of the screen. -The complete server configuration includes: +The complete server configuration includes: -Server General Configuration +Server General Configuration -Server Logging Configuration +Server Logging Configuration -Server Folders and Path Definitions +Server Folders and Path Definitions -Server HTTP Configuration +Server HTTP Configuration -Server Encryption and Certificate Support Configuration +Server Encryption and Certificate Support Configuration -Server Miscellaneous Configuration +Server Miscellaneous Configuration -Network General Configuration +Network General Configuration -Network Clients Configuration +Network Clients Configuration -Browsing General Configuration +Browsing General Configuration -Browsing Connection Configuration +Browsing Connection Configuration -Browsing Masks Configuration +Browsing Masks Configuration -Browsing Timeouts Configuration +Browsing Timeouts Configuration -Browsing Relay Configuration +Browsing Relay Configuration -Security Configuration +Security Configuration -Each of these configuration items will be described in the following sections of the manual. +Each of these configuration items will be described in the following sections of the manual. -Server General Configuration +Server General Configuration -The server general configuration is done on this screen. It includes: +The server general configuration is done on this screen. It includes: -Server name -Administrator's email -Server user -Server group -Remote user name +Server name +Administrator's email +Server user +Server group +Remote user name -The tab window to configure the &CUPS; server general settings lets you the change the default values. Click on the little question mark and then on one of the fields to get a Quick Help about the meaning of the setting. - -If you are unsure, leave alone and turn to the original &CUPS; documentation first. If your &CUPS; daemon is already running, it is readable from the &konqueror; by pointing it to &URL; http://localhost:631/documentation.html. - -There, first make friends with the Software Administrator Manual. Otherwise, for example, if the &CUPS; daemon is not running, try looking in your local file system, by default at /usr/share/doc/cups/ or /usr/share/doc/cups/documentation.html. +The tab window to configure the &CUPS; server general settings lets you the change the default values. Click on the little question mark and then on one of the fields to get a Quick Help about the meaning of the setting. + +If you are unsure, leave alone and turn to the original &CUPS; documentation first. If your &CUPS; daemon is already running, it is readable from the &konqueror; by pointing it to &URL; http://localhost:631/documentation.html. + +There, first make friends with the Software Administrator Manual. Otherwise, for example, if the &CUPS; daemon is not running, try looking in your local file system, by default at /usr/share/doc/cups/ or /usr/share/doc/cups/documentation.html. -&CUPS; server general configuration dialogue: ServerName, AdminMail, ServerUser, ServerGroup, RemoteUserName +&CUPS; server general configuration dialogue: ServerName, AdminMail, ServerUser, ServerGroup, RemoteUserName -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server general settings: ServerName, AdminMail, ServerUser, ServerGroup, RemoteUserName +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server general settings: ServerName, AdminMail, ServerUser, ServerGroup, RemoteUserName -Server Name +Server Name -The hostname of your server, as advertised to the world. By default, &CUPS; will use the hostname of the system. To set the default server usd by clients, see the client.conf file. +The hostname of your server, as advertised to the world. By default, &CUPS; will use the hostname of the system. To set the default server usd by clients, see the client.conf file. -For example, enter myhost.domain.com +For example, enter myhost.domain.com -This is the hostname that is reported to clients. Should you ever encounter strange problems in accessing the server, put here its IP address for troubleshooting. This way you eliminate any potential name resolution problems; and you can more easily nail the real problem down. +This is the hostname that is reported to clients. Should you ever encounter strange problems in accessing the server, put here its IP address for troubleshooting. This way you eliminate any potential name resolution problems; and you can more easily nail the real problem down. -Administrator's email +Administrator's email -This is the email address to send all complaints or problems to. By default &CUPS; will use root@hostname. +This is the email address to send all complaints or problems to. By default &CUPS; will use root@hostname. -For example, enter root@myhost.com. +For example, enter root@myhost.com. -Contrary to what the quickhelp suggests, it is also legal to send an email full of praise and enthusiasm about &CUPS; and &tdeprint; to the server administrator. +Contrary to what the quickhelp suggests, it is also legal to send an email full of praise and enthusiasm about &CUPS; and &tdeprint; to the server administrator. -Server User +Server User -The user the server runs under. Normally this must be lp, however you can configure things for another user if needed. +The user the server runs under. Normally this must be lp, however you can configure things for another user if needed. -The server must be initially run as root to support the default IPP port of 631. It changes users whenever an external program is run. +The server must be initially run as root to support the default IPP port of 631. It changes users whenever an external program is run. -Enter for example lp. +Enter for example lp. -This is the &UNIX; user account for filters and CGI programs to run under. CGI programs are responsible for showing you the nice web administration interface accessible via http://localhost:631/). +This is the &UNIX; user account for filters and CGI programs to run under. CGI programs are responsible for showing you the nice web administration interface accessible via http://localhost:631/). -There is no need to set the User directive to root, so never do this, as it only involves dangers. Should anyone discover security vulnerabilities in one of the used file filters, printer drivers or CGI programs, he could remotely execute arbitrary commands on your system with root user privileges. Always use an unprivileged account for the server directive User. +There is no need to set the User directive to root, so never do this, as it only involves dangers. Should anyone discover security vulnerabilities in one of the used file filters, printer drivers or CGI programs, he could remotely execute arbitrary commands on your system with root user privileges. Always use an unprivileged account for the server directive User. -Server group +Server group -The group the server runs under. Normally this must be sys, however you can configure things for another group as needed. +The group the server runs under. Normally this must be sys, however you can configure things for another group as needed. -Enter for example sys. +Enter for example sys. -Remote user name +Remote user name -The name of the user assigned to unauthenticated accesses from remote systems. By default remroot. +The name of the user assigned to unauthenticated accesses from remote systems. By default remroot. -This name will appear in log files and in queries about the job owner &etc;, for all resources and locations of the &CUPS; server that are configured to allow access without authentication. Authenticated entries will carry the authenticated names. +This name will appear in log files and in queries about the job owner &etc;, for all resources and locations of the &CUPS; server that are configured to allow access without authentication. Authenticated entries will carry the authenticated names. -Server Logging Configuration +Server Logging Configuration -The server logging configuration is done on this screen. It includes: +The server logging configuration is done on this screen. It includes: -Access log file setting -Error log file setting -Page log file setting -Log level setting -Max log file size setting +Access log file setting +Error log file setting +Page log file setting +Log level setting +Max log file size setting -This is an important screen for you. Should you ever encounter problems: here is the place to set the Log level to debug, restart the &CUPS; daemon and then look at the Error log file defined here for entries that might give you an insight to the trouble. +This is an important screen for you. Should you ever encounter problems: here is the place to set the Log level to debug, restart the &CUPS; daemon and then look at the Error log file defined here for entries that might give you an insight to the trouble. -&CUPS; server configuration dialogue: Server logging +&CUPS; server configuration dialogue: Server logging -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: Server logging +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: Server logging -Access log file +Access log file -This is where accesses to the server are logged. If this does not start with a leading /, then it is assumed to be relative to the server root. +This is where accesses to the server are logged. If this does not start with a leading /, then it is assumed to be relative to the server root. -You can also use the special name syslog to send the output to the syslog file or daemon. +You can also use the special name syslog to send the output to the syslog file or daemon. -Enter a path, for example /var/log/cups/acces_log. +Enter a path, for example /var/log/cups/acces_log. -The format of this file is stored in the so-called Common Log Format. This way you can use programs such as Webalizer or any other Web access reporting tool to generate reports on the &CUPS; server activities. - -To include the server name in the file name use a %s in the name. Example: /var/log/cups/access_log-%s. - -kurt@transmeta:~ ->tail /var/log/cups/access_log +The format of this file is stored in the so-called Common Log Format. This way you can use programs such as Webalizer or any other Web access reporting tool to generate reports on the &CUPS; server activities. + +To include the server name in the file name use a %s in the name. Example: /var/log/cups/access_log-%s. + +kurt@transmeta:~ >tail /var/log/cups/access_log 127.0.0.1 - - [04/Aug/2001:20:11:39 +0100] "POST /printers/ HTTP/1.1" 200 109 127.0.0.1 - - [04/Aug/2001:20:11:39 +0100] "POST /admin/ HTTP/1.1" 401 0 @@ -818,127 +424,49 @@ format="PNG"/> 127.0.0.1 - - [04/Aug/2001:20:11:40 +0100] "POST / HTTP/1.1" 200 139 10.160.16.45 - - [04/Aug/2001:20:11:39 +0100] "GET /printers/DANKA_P450 HTTP/1.0" 200 7319 10.160.16.45 - - [04/Aug/2001:20:11:40 +0100] "GET /images/title-logo.gif HTTP/1.0" 200 5729 - - -You see a separate line for each single access, showing the IP address of the accessing client, date and time of access, method of access (POST or GET), the requested ressource, the &HTTP; version used by the client, status code and the number of transferred bytes. Status code 200 means successful-OK the 401 in the above example was an unauthorized access which was denied. For a detailed explanation of the log format go to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual. - - - - -Error log file - -If this does not start with a leading /, then it is assumed to be relative to the server root. The default setting is /var/log/cups/error_log. - -You can also use the special name syslog to send the output to the syslog file or daemon. + + +You see a separate line for each single access, showing the IP address of the accessing client, date and time of access, method of access (POST or GET), the requested ressource, the &HTTP; version used by the client, status code and the number of transferred bytes. Status code 200 means successful-OK the 401 in the above example was an unauthorized access which was denied. For a detailed explanation of the log format go to the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual. + + + + +Error log file + +If this does not start with a leading /, then it is assumed to be relative to the server root. The default setting is /var/log/cups/error_log. + +You can also use the special name syslog to send the output to the syslog file or daemon. -Enter the path, for example /var/log/cups/error_log. +Enter the path, for example /var/log/cups/error_log. -The error log excerpt below shows you the part logged for printing the test page with the default setting of Log level to info. For an explanation of the Log Level setting see further below. - -kurt@transmeta:~ -> tail /var/log/cups/error_log +The error log excerpt below shows you the part logged for printing the test page with the default setting of Log level to info. For an explanation of the Log Level setting see further below. + +kurt@transmeta:~ > tail /var/log/cups/error_log I [04/Aug/2001:23:15:10 +0100] Job 213 queued on 'DANKA_P450' by 'root' I [04/Aug/2001:23:15:10 +0100] Started filter /usr/lib/cups/filter/pstops (PID 18891) for job 213. I [04/Aug/2001:23:15:10 +0100] Started backend /usr/lib/cups/backend/lpd (PID 18892) for job 213. - + -Page log file +Page log file -If this does not start with a leading / then it is assumed to be relative to the server root. The default is /var/log/cups/page_log +If this does not start with a leading / then it is assumed to be relative to the server root. The default is /var/log/cups/page_log -You can also use the special name syslog to send the output to the syslog file or daemon. +You can also use the special name syslog to send the output to the syslog file or daemon. -Enter the path, for example /var/log/cups/page_log. +Enter the path, for example /var/log/cups/page_log. -The page log file has a line for every single page of every job printed. - -Here is what some entries look like: - -kurt@transmeta:~ -> tail /var/log/cups/page_log +The page log file has a line for every single page of every job printed. + +Here is what some entries look like: + +kurt@transmeta:~ > tail /var/log/cups/page_log GIMP_print_stp_HP kdetest 201 [03/Aug/2001:03:18:03 +0100] 4 1 GIMP_print_stp_HP kdetest 201 [03/Aug/2001:03:18:03 +0100] 5 1 @@ -950,168 +478,81 @@ DANKA_infotec_P450 kurt 204 [04/Aug/2001:03:29:00 +0100] 3 33 DANKA_infotec_P450 kurt 204 [04/Aug/2001:03:29:00 +0100] 4 33 DANKA_infotec_P450 root 205 [04/Aug/2001:19:12:34 +0100] 1 14 DANKA_infotec_P450 root 206 [04/Aug/2001:19:15:20 +0100] 1 1 - - -In this excerpt of the file you find information on the name of the printers (GIMP_print_stp_HP and DANKA_infotec_P450) used through this server, the user names (kdetest, kurt and root), the job-IDs (201 to 205), time of printing, page number inside the job and the number of copies for the pages. For example, job-ID 204 had 4 pages and 33 copies printed, job-ID 205 had 14 copies of just 1 page) . + + +In this excerpt of the file you find information on the name of the printers (GIMP_print_stp_HP and DANKA_infotec_P450) used through this server, the user names (kdetest, kurt and root), the job-IDs (201 to 205), time of printing, page number inside the job and the number of copies for the pages. For example, job-ID 204 had 4 pages and 33 copies printed, job-ID 205 had 14 copies of just 1 page) . -&CUPS; is dependent (for its calculation of the number of pages in a job) on passing the &PostScript; through the pstops filter. See the &kivio; Flowchart on the &CUPS; filter architecture for an idea about were this filter fits into the whole printing process). More, pstops depends for the counting on a DSC conforming (DSC is Document Structuring Conventions, a standard defined by Adobe) to be sent by the client. In most cases this is working. - -However, this page accounting does not work for any raw printer queues (as those, by definition, don't use any filtering on the &CUPS; host and are by-passing pstops.) Every job going through a raw queue is counted as a 1-page-job (with possibly multiple copies). This is especially true for all Jobs send from &Microsoft; &Windows; clients via Samba to the &CUPS; server, as those jobs are already arriving in the correct format for the printer, because the clients use the original printer driver. +&CUPS; is dependent (for its calculation of the number of pages in a job) on passing the &PostScript; through the pstops filter. See the &kivio; Flowchart on the &CUPS; filter architecture for an idea about were this filter fits into the whole printing process). More, pstops depends for the counting on a DSC conforming (DSC is Document Structuring Conventions, a standard defined by Adobe) to be sent by the client. In most cases this is working. + +However, this page accounting does not work for any raw printer queues (as those, by definition, don't use any filtering on the &CUPS; host and are by-passing pstops.) Every job going through a raw queue is counted as a 1-page-job (with possibly multiple copies). This is especially true for all Jobs send from &Microsoft; &Windows; clients via Samba to the &CUPS; server, as those jobs are already arriving in the correct format for the printer, because the clients use the original printer driver. -I am still looking for someone who will write a nice &CUPS; page log analysing tool. It should generate a report with a graphical output similar to the Webalizer's access log reports. This way you could have nice statistics to be used for accounting about usage of printers, load dependent on daytime or weekday, users &etc; Anyone? +I am still looking for someone who will write a nice &CUPS; page log analysing tool. It should generate a report with a graphical output similar to the Webalizer's access log reports. This way you could have nice statistics to be used for accounting about usage of printers, load dependent on daytime or weekday, users &etc; Anyone? -Log level +Log level -This setting controls the number of messages logged to the error log file. It can be one of the following: +This setting controls the number of messages logged to the error log file. It can be one of the following: -debug2 +debug2 -Log everything. +Log everything. -debug +debug -Log almost everything. +Log almost everything. -info +info -Log all requests and state changes. +Log all requests and state changes. -warn +warn -Log errors and warnings. +Log errors and warnings. -error +error -Log only errors. +Log only errors. -none +none -Log nothing. +Log nothing. -If you need to troubleshoot (or if you want to study the inner workings of &CUPS;), set the log level to debug or debug2. Then the error_log will have a lot more entries (not just errors, but also informational entries). - -You can use this to watch live what &CUPS; is doing when you send a print job. In a &konsole; type: - -kurt@transmeta:~ ->tail 100 /var/log/cups/error_log - -This will give you the last 100 lines ( 100) of the file onto the screen and a realtime update ()of what is happening. The following listing shows the printing of a test page (some pieces have been cut off for space reasons... Try it yourself if you need more info): - - +If you need to troubleshoot (or if you want to study the inner workings of &CUPS;), set the log level to debug or debug2. Then the error_log will have a lot more entries (not just errors, but also informational entries). + +You can use this to watch live what &CUPS; is doing when you send a print job. In a &konsole; type: + +kurt@transmeta:~ >tail 100 /var/log/cups/error_log + +This will give you the last 100 lines ( 100) of the file onto the screen and a realtime update ()of what is happening. The following listing shows the printing of a test page (some pieces have been cut off for space reasons... Try it yourself if you need more info): + + I [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] Job 214 queued on 'DANKA_P450' by 'root' D [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] StartJob(214, 08426fe0) D [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] StartJob() id = 214, file = 0/1 @@ -1130,36 +571,20 @@ D [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] StartJob: backend = "/usr/lib/cups/backend/lpd" D [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] StartJob: filterfds[1] = -1, 7 D [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] start_process("/usr/lib/cups/backend/lpd", [....] I [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] Started backend /usr/lib/cups/backend/lpd (PID 18992) for job 214. -D [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] Page = 595x842; 15,16 to 580,833 [....] +D [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] Page = 595x842; 15,16 to 580,833 [....] -The lines tagged D at the beginning are debug level entries, the ones tagged I are there in info level. +The lines tagged D at the beginning are debug level entries, the ones tagged I are there in info level. -Max log file size +Max log file size -Controls the maximum size of each log file before they are rotated. Defaults to 1048576 (1 Mb). Set this to 0 to disable log rotation. +Controls the maximum size of each log file before they are rotated. Defaults to 1048576 (1 Mb). Set this to 0 to disable log rotation. -Enter an size in bytes, for example 1048576 +Enter an size in bytes, for example 1048576 @@ -1168,373 +593,195 @@ D [04/Aug/2001:23:15:12 +0100] Page = 595x842; 15,16 to 580,833 [....] -Server Folders Configuration +Server Folders Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server. Different folders are to be set here. Normally you don't need to change anything in this section. In case you play around with fancy (TrueType, &PostScript; or other) fonts on your system, this qis the place to do the settings for using those fonts when printing. Server folder settings include: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server. Different folders are to be set here. Normally you don't need to change anything in this section. In case you play around with fancy (TrueType, &PostScript; or other) fonts on your system, this qis the place to do the settings for using those fonts when printing. Server folder settings include: -Executables: where to find the server executables +Executables: where to find the server executables -Configuration: where to find the server configuration files +Configuration: where to find the server configuration files -Data: where to find the server data files +Data: where to find the server data files -Temporary files: where to put the server temporary print files +Temporary files: where to put the server temporary print files -Temporary Requests: where to find the server +Temporary Requests: where to find the server -Font Path: where to find the server fonts +Font Path: where to find the server fonts -&CUPS; server configuration dialogue: &HTTP; configuration +&CUPS; server configuration dialogue: &HTTP; configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: &HTTP; configuration +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: &HTTP; configuration -Executables +Executables -The root folder for the scheduler executables. By default this is /usr/lib/cups (or /usr/lib32/cups on IRIX 6.5) +The root folder for the scheduler executables. By default this is /usr/lib/cups (or /usr/lib32/cups on IRIX 6.5) -Configuration +Configuration -The root folder for the scheduler. By default, /etc/cups. -On the authors SuSE system, this is /usr/share/doc/cups. It contains all the HTML or PDF documentation for &CUPS; which is available through the Web interface at http://localhost:631/documentation.html +The root folder for the scheduler. By default, /etc/cups. +On the authors SuSE system, this is /usr/share/doc/cups. It contains all the HTML or PDF documentation for &CUPS; which is available through the Web interface at http://localhost:631/documentation.html -Data +Data -The root folder for the &CUPS; data files. By default this is /usr/share/cups -It contains such things as banners, charsets, data, drivers, fonts, and pstoraster templates. +The root folder for the &CUPS; data files. By default this is /usr/share/cups +It contains such things as banners, charsets, data, drivers, fonts, and pstoraster templates. -Temporary files +Temporary files -The folder to put temporary files in. This folder must be writable by the user defined on the previous screen. This defaults to either /var/spool/cups/tmp or the value of the TMPDIR environment variable. +The folder to put temporary files in. This folder must be writable by the user defined on the previous screen. This defaults to either /var/spool/cups/tmp or the value of the TMPDIR environment variable. -Temporary Requests +Temporary Requests -The folder where request files are stored. By default this is /var/spool/cups +The folder where request files are stored. By default this is /var/spool/cups -Font path +Font path -The place to configure the &CUPS; server for handling your fancy fonts (TrueType or &PostScript;). &CUPS; will look here for fonts to embed in printfiles. This currently only affects the pstoraster filter, and the default is /usr/share/cups/fonts. +The place to configure the &CUPS; server for handling your fancy fonts (TrueType or &PostScript;). &CUPS; will look here for fonts to embed in printfiles. This currently only affects the pstoraster filter, and the default is /usr/share/cups/fonts. -To specify more than one folder, list them with double colons as separator. Do it like this: +To specify more than one folder, list them with double colons as separator. Do it like this: -/path/to/first/fontdir/:/path/to/second/fontdir/:/path/to/last/fontdir/ +/path/to/first/fontdir/:/path/to/second/fontdir/:/path/to/last/fontdir/ -For the Font path directive to work as intended, the application that wants to print needs to: +For the Font path directive to work as intended, the application that wants to print needs to: -Either correctly reference its desired fonts in the header of the generated &PostScript; +Either correctly reference its desired fonts in the header of the generated &PostScript; -Or embed the font into the &PostScript; file. +Or embed the font into the &PostScript; file. -Referencing the font by name leaves it up to the RIP and print device to respect and actually use it. RIP or printer can only use the desired font, if it is available on the system. - -In the case of a &PostScript; printer, this needs to be a printer-resident font. If the printer doesn't have this font, it will try and replace it by an adequately similar font. - -In the case of a non &PostScript; printer, this is done by &CUPS; and its RIP-ing filtering system. &CUPS; will use the font path directive to grab the correct font when RIP-ing the &PostScript; in the pstoraster filter. - -In the case of a &PostScript; output device, &CUPS; is just spooling the file (actually, it is passing it through the pstops filter for accounting or n-up purposes), not working on it. Therefore, if you print to a &PostScript; printer it is solely the printer's responsibility to use the font asked for. It can't, if the font is neither loaded into the printer nor embedded in the &PostScript;. +Referencing the font by name leaves it up to the RIP and print device to respect and actually use it. RIP or printer can only use the desired font, if it is available on the system. + +In the case of a &PostScript; printer, this needs to be a printer-resident font. If the printer doesn't have this font, it will try and replace it by an adequately similar font. + +In the case of a non &PostScript; printer, this is done by &CUPS; and its RIP-ing filtering system. &CUPS; will use the font path directive to grab the correct font when RIP-ing the &PostScript; in the pstoraster filter. + +In the case of a &PostScript; output device, &CUPS; is just spooling the file (actually, it is passing it through the pstops filter for accounting or n-up purposes), not working on it. Therefore, if you print to a &PostScript; printer it is solely the printer's responsibility to use the font asked for. It can't, if the font is neither loaded into the printer nor embedded in the &PostScript;. -Server <acronym ->HTTP</acronym -> Configuration - -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server &HTTP; settings is shown here. -&CUPS; server &HTTP; settings are the following ones: +Server <acronym>HTTP</acronym> Configuration + +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server &HTTP; settings is shown here. +&CUPS; server &HTTP; settings are the following ones: -the Document folder -the Default Language -the Default Charset +the Document folder +the Default Language +the Default Charset -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server &HTTP; settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server &HTTP; settings -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server &HTTP; settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server &HTTP; settings -Document folder +Document folder -The root folder for &HTTP; documents that are served. By default the compiled in folder, /usr/share/cups/doc +The root folder for &HTTP; documents that are served. By default the compiled in folder, /usr/share/cups/doc -Default Language +Default Language -The default language, if not specified by the browser. If not specified, the current locale is used. +The default language, if not specified by the browser. If not specified, the current locale is used. -Use the two letter locale codes, for example en or de. +Use the two letter locale codes, for example en or de. -Default charset +Default charset -The default character set to use. If not specified, this defaults to UTF-8. This can also be overridden directly in the HTML documents. +The default character set to use. If not specified, this defaults to UTF-8. This can also be overridden directly in the HTML documents. -<guilabel ->Server encryption support configuration</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Server encryption support configuration</guilabel> -This is the dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings. The server encryption support settings are these: +This is the dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings. The server encryption support settings are these: -Server certificate: the file to read containing the server's certificate -Server key: the file to read containing the server's key +Server certificate: the file to read containing the server's certificate +Server key: the file to read containing the server's key -&CUPS; server configuration dialogue: security overview +&CUPS; server configuration dialogue: security overview -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: security settings +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: security settings -Server certificate +Server certificate -The file to read containing the server's certificate. Defaults to /etc/cups/ssl/server.crt. +The file to read containing the server's certificate. Defaults to /etc/cups/ssl/server.crt. -Server key +Server key -The file to read containing the server's key. Defaults to /etc/cups/ssl/server.key +The file to read containing the server's key. Defaults to /etc/cups/ssl/server.key @@ -1542,251 +789,124 @@ format="PNG"/> -Server Miscellaneous Configuration +Server Miscellaneous Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server miscellaneous settings is shown here. The following server settings are done through this screen: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server miscellaneous settings is shown here. The following server settings are done through this screen: -Preserve job history: whether to preserve a job history for later re-view -Preserve job files: whether to preserve fully RIP-ed job files for later re-print -Printcap file: setting the name of and the path to a printcap file -RIP Cache: setting the size of the RIP cache in memory -Filter Limit: defining a filter limit +Preserve job history: whether to preserve a job history for later re-view +Preserve job files: whether to preserve fully RIP-ed job files for later re-print +Printcap file: setting the name of and the path to a printcap file +RIP Cache: setting the size of the RIP cache in memory +Filter Limit: defining a filter limit -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server miscellaneous settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server miscellaneous settings -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server miscellaneous settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server miscellaneous settings -Preserve job history (after completion) +Preserve job history (after completion) -Whether or not to preserve the job history after a job is completed, canceled, or stopped. The default is yes +Whether or not to preserve the job history after a job is completed, canceled, or stopped. The default is yes -Preserve job file (after completion) +Preserve job file (after completion) -Whether or not to preserve the job files after a job is completed, canceled, or stopped. The default is no. +Whether or not to preserve the job files after a job is completed, canceled, or stopped. The default is no. -Printcap file +Printcap file -The name of the printcap file. The default is no filename. Leave this blank, to disable printcap file generation. -The printcap setting is only needed to satisfy older applications in need of such a file. +The name of the printcap file. The default is no filename. Leave this blank, to disable printcap file generation. +The printcap setting is only needed to satisfy older applications in need of such a file. -RIP cache +RIP cache -The amount of memory that each RIP should use to cache bitmaps. The value can be any real number, followed by k for kilobytes, m for megabytes, gfor gigabytes, or t for tiles, where one tile is 256 x 256 pixels. The default value is 8m. +The amount of memory that each RIP should use to cache bitmaps. The value can be any real number, followed by k for kilobytes, m for megabytes, gfor gigabytes, or t for tiles, where one tile is 256 x 256 pixels. The default value is 8m. -Filter limit +Filter limit -Sets the maximum cost of all job filters that can be run at the same time. A limit of 0 means no limit. A typical job may need a filter limit of at least 200. Limits less than the minimum required by a job force a single job to be printed at any time. The default limit is 0 (unlimited). +Sets the maximum cost of all job filters that can be run at the same time. A limit of 0 means no limit. A typical job may need a filter limit of at least 200. Limits less than the minimum required by a job force a single job to be printed at any time. The default limit is 0 (unlimited). -Network General Configuration +Network General Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server network settings is shown here. It includes: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server network settings is shown here. It includes: -Look for hostname on IP addresses -Port -Max request size -Timeout +Look for hostname on IP addresses +Port +Max request size +Timeout -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server network settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server network settings -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server network settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server network settings -Look for hostname on IP addresses +Look for hostname on IP addresses -Whether or not to do lookups on IP addresses to get a fully-qualified hostname. This defaults to off, for performance reasons. +Whether or not to do lookups on IP addresses to get a fully-qualified hostname. This defaults to off, for performance reasons. -Port +Port -Enter here Ports and addresses that the server will listen to. The default port 631 is reserved for the Internet Printing Protocol, and is what we use here. -You can have multiple entries, to listen to more than one port or address, or to restrict access. +Enter here Ports and addresses that the server will listen to. The default port 631 is reserved for the Internet Printing Protocol, and is what we use here. +You can have multiple entries, to listen to more than one port or address, or to restrict access. -Unfortunately, most web browsers don't support TLS or &HTTP; upgrades for encryption. If you want to support web-based encryption, you'll probably need to listen on port 443, the HTTPS port. +Unfortunately, most web browsers don't support TLS or &HTTP; upgrades for encryption. If you want to support web-based encryption, you'll probably need to listen on port 443, the HTTPS port. -Use the Add and Remove buttons to add and remove entries from the list. +Use the Add and Remove buttons to add and remove entries from the list. -You can enter ports on their own, ⪚ 631, or hostnames with ports, ⪚ myhost:80 or 1.2.3.4:631. +You can enter ports on their own, ⪚ 631, or hostnames with ports, ⪚ myhost:80 or 1.2.3.4:631. -Max request size +Max request size -Controls the maximum size of &HTTP; requests and print files. The default setting is 0, which disables this feature. +Controls the maximum size of &HTTP; requests and print files. The default setting is 0, which disables this feature. -Timeout +Timeout -The timeout (in seconds) before requests time out. The default is 300 seconds. +The timeout (in seconds) before requests time out. The default is 300 seconds. @@ -1794,73 +914,45 @@ format="PNG"/> -Network Clients Configuration +Network Clients Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; network client settings is shown here. It includes: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; network client settings is shown here. It includes: -Accept "Keep Alive" requests -KeepAliveTimeout: -MaxClients: +Accept "Keep Alive" requests +KeepAliveTimeout: +MaxClients: -dialogue to configure the &CUPS; network client settings +dialogue to configure the &CUPS; network client settings -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; network client settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; network client settings -Accept "Keep Alive" requests +Accept "Keep Alive" requests -Whether or not to support the Keep-Alive connection option. The default is on. +Whether or not to support the Keep-Alive connection option. The default is on. -Keep alive timeout +Keep alive timeout -The timeout (in seconds) before Keep-Alive connections are automatically closed. The default is 60 seconds. +The timeout (in seconds) before Keep-Alive connections are automatically closed. The default is 60 seconds. -Max number of clients +Max number of clients -Controls the maximum number of simultaneous clients that will be handled. Defaults to 100. +Controls the maximum number of simultaneous clients that will be handled. Defaults to 100. @@ -1868,405 +960,214 @@ format="PNG"/> -Browsing General Configuration +Browsing General Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; browsing general settings is shown here. It includes: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; browsing general settings is shown here. It includes: -Enable browsing -Use short names when possible -Use implicit classes +Enable browsing +Use short names when possible +Use implicit classes -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; browsing general settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; browsing general settings -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; browsing general settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; browsing general settings -Enable browsing +Enable browsing -Whether or not to broadcast printer information to other &CUPS; servers. Enabled by default. +Whether or not to broadcast printer information to other &CUPS; servers. Enabled by default. -Use short names when possible +Use short names when possible -Whether or not to use short names for remote printers when possible (⪚ printer instead of printer@host). Enabled by default. +Whether or not to use short names for remote printers when possible (⪚ printer instead of printer@host). Enabled by default. -Use implicit classes +Use implicit classes -Whether or not to use implicit classes. -Printer classes can be specified explicitly, in the classes.conf file, implicitly based upon the printers available on the LAN, or both. -When Implicit classes are enabled, printers on the LAN with the same name (⪚ Acme-LaserPrint-1000) will be put into a class with the same name. This allows you to setup multiple redundant queues on a LAN without a lot of administrative difficulties. If a user sends a job to Acme-LaserPrint-1000, the job will go to the first available queue. -This option is enabled by default. +Whether or not to use implicit classes. +Printer classes can be specified explicitly, in the classes.conf file, implicitly based upon the printers available on the LAN, or both. +When Implicit classes are enabled, printers on the LAN with the same name (⪚ Acme-LaserPrint-1000) will be put into a class with the same name. This allows you to setup multiple redundant queues on a LAN without a lot of administrative difficulties. If a user sends a job to Acme-LaserPrint-1000, the job will go to the first available queue. +This option is enabled by default. -Browsing Connection Configuration +Browsing Connection Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browsing connection is shown here. Browsing connection settings include: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browsing connection is shown here. Browsing connection settings include: -Broadcast addresses: The (UDP) broadcast address to transmit printer information to -Broadcast Port: The port number to use for broadcasting -Poll addresses: The address(es) to poll for information about printers on servers that might not broadcast (or whose broadcasts might not reach your LAN due to routers in between). +Broadcast addresses: The (UDP) broadcast address to transmit printer information to +Broadcast Port: The port number to use for broadcasting +Poll addresses: The address(es) to poll for information about printers on servers that might not broadcast (or whose broadcasts might not reach your LAN due to routers in between). -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browsing connection +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browsing connection -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browsing connection +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browsing connection -Broadcast addresses +Broadcast addresses -After pressing the Add button, you will see the following dialogue to enter a new value for outgoing broadcasting browse packets. It is the same kind of dialogue as for adding other &CUPS; server addresses to be polled for printer information. +After pressing the Add button, you will see the following dialogue to enter a new value for outgoing broadcasting browse packets. It is the same kind of dialogue as for adding other &CUPS; server addresses to be polled for printer information. -Dialogue to enter a new value for broadcasting browse packets to +Dialogue to enter a new value for broadcasting browse packets to -Dialogue to enter a new value for broadcasting browse packets to +Dialogue to enter a new value for broadcasting browse packets to -This option specifies a broadcast address to be used. By default, browsing information is broadcast to all active interfaces. +This option specifies a broadcast address to be used. By default, browsing information is broadcast to all active interfaces. -&HP-UX; 10.20 and earlier do not properly handle broadcast unless you have a Class A, B, C or D netmask (&ie;, there is no CIDR support). +&HP-UX; 10.20 and earlier do not properly handle broadcast unless you have a Class A, B, C or D netmask (&ie;, there is no CIDR support). -Broadcast port +Broadcast port -The port used for UDP broadcasts. By default this is the IPP port; if you change this, you need to do it on all servers. Only one BrowsePort is recognised. +The port used for UDP broadcasts. By default this is the IPP port; if you change this, you need to do it on all servers. Only one BrowsePort is recognised. -Poll addresses +Poll addresses -Poll the named server(s) for printers. +Poll the named server(s) for printers. -Browsing Masks Configuration +Browsing Masks Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server allowed and/or denied browse packets from other servers is shown here. +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server allowed and/or denied browse packets from other servers is shown here. -Browse allow: -Browse deny: -Browse order: +Browse allow: +Browse deny: +Browse order: -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server allowed and/or denied browse packets from other servers +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server allowed and/or denied browse packets from other servers -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server allowed and/or denied browse packets from other servers +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server allowed and/or denied browse packets from other servers -Add Browse Address dialogue +Add Browse Address dialogue -The dialogue to enter a new value for the address of another &CUPS; server to accept browse packets from is shown here. It is opened by clicking on the Add... button beside the field named Browse Allow:. It is the same dialogue as for adding denied broadcast sending addresses. +The dialogue to enter a new value for the address of another &CUPS; server to accept browse packets from is shown here. It is opened by clicking on the Add... button beside the field named Browse Allow:. It is the same dialogue as for adding denied broadcast sending addresses. -The dialogue to enter a new value for the address of another &CUPS; server to accept browse packets from is shown here. +The dialogue to enter a new value for the address of another &CUPS; server to accept browse packets from is shown here. -Dialogue to enter a new value for the address of another &CUPS; server to accept browse packets from +Dialogue to enter a new value for the address of another &CUPS; server to accept browse packets from -Dialogue to enter a new value for the address of another &CUPS; server to accept browse packets from +Dialogue to enter a new value for the address of another &CUPS; server to accept browse packets from -Browse allow and Browse deny +Browse allow and Browse deny -Browse allow specifies an address mask to allow for incoming browser packets. The default is to allow packets from all addresses. -Browse deny specifies an address mask to deny for incoming browser packets. The default is to deny packets from no addresses. -Both Browse allow and Browse deny accept the following notations for addresses: +Browse allow specifies an address mask to allow for incoming browser packets. The default is to allow packets from all addresses. +Browse deny specifies an address mask to deny for incoming browser packets. The default is to deny packets from no addresses. +Both Browse allow and Browse deny accept the following notations for addresses: -All +All -None +None -*.domain.com +*.domain.com -.domain.com +.domain.com -host.domain.com +host.domain.com -nnn.* +nnn.* -nnn.nnn.* +nnn.nnn.* -nnn.nnn.nnn.* +nnn.nnn.nnn.* -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm.mmm.mmm.mmm +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm.mmm.mmm.mmm -The hostname/domain name restrictions will only work if you have turned hostname lookups on! +The hostname/domain name restrictions will only work if you have turned hostname lookups on! -Browse order +Browse order -Specifies the order of the allow/deny comparisons. +Specifies the order of the allow/deny comparisons. @@ -2274,132 +1175,87 @@ format="PNG"/> -Browsing Timeouts Configuration +Browsing Timeouts Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browse timeout settings is shown here. Browse timeout settings include: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browse timeout settings is shown here. Browse timeout settings include: -Browse Interval -Browse Timeout +Browse Interval +Browse Timeout -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browse timeout settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browse timeout settings -dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browse timeout settings +dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server browse timeout settings -Browse interval +Browse interval -The time between browsing updates in seconds. The default is 30 seconds. -Note that browsing information is sent whenever a printer's state changes as well, so this represents the maximum time between updates. -Set this to 0 to disable outgoing broadcasts so your local printers are not advertised, but you can still see printers on other hosts. +The time between browsing updates in seconds. The default is 30 seconds. +Note that browsing information is sent whenever a printer's state changes as well, so this represents the maximum time between updates. +Set this to 0 to disable outgoing broadcasts so your local printers are not advertised, but you can still see printers on other hosts. -Browse timeouts +Browse timeouts -The timeout (in seconds) for network printers - if we don't get an update within this time, the printer will be removed from the printer list. -This number definitely should not be less than the browse interval period, for obvious reasons. Defaults to 300 seconds. +The timeout (in seconds) for network printers - if we don't get an update within this time, the printer will be removed from the printer list. +This number definitely should not be less than the browse interval period, for obvious reasons. Defaults to 300 seconds. -Browsing Relay Configuration +Browsing Relay Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server as a browsing relay is shown here. Browsing relay settings include: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server as a browsing relay is shown here. Browsing relay settings include: -Browser packets relay +Browser packets relay -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server as a browsing relay +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server as a browsing relay -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server as a browsing relay +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server as a browsing relay -Add Browse Relay dialogue +Add Browse Relay dialogue -The dialogue to enter a new value for an address pair to define browsing relaying between a &CUPS; server and a network is shown here. +The dialogue to enter a new value for an address pair to define browsing relaying between a &CUPS; server and a network is shown here. -The dialogue to enter a new value for an address pair to define browsing relaying between a &CUPS; server and a network +The dialogue to enter a new value for an address pair to define browsing relaying between a &CUPS; server and a network -The dialogue to enter a new value for an address pair to define browsing relaying between a &CUPS; server and a network +The dialogue to enter a new value for an address pair to define browsing relaying between a &CUPS; server and a network -Browser packets relay +Browser packets relay -Relay browser packets from one address or network to another. +Relay browser packets from one address or network to another. @@ -2407,273 +1263,140 @@ format="PNG"/> -Security Configuration +Security Configuration -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings for any of the defined server locations is shown here. It contains the following settings, which may be defined separately for any valid resource (or location) of the &CUPS; server: +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings for any of the defined server locations is shown here. It contains the following settings, which may be defined separately for any valid resource (or location) of the &CUPS; server: -System Group: -Access Permissions: -Auth Type: -Auth Class: -Auth Group Name: -Encryption: -Allow: -Deny: -Order: +System Group: +Access Permissions: +Auth Type: +Auth Class: +Auth Group Name: +Encryption: +Allow: +Deny: +Order: -Valid resources (or locations) of the &CUPS; server are: +Valid resources (or locations) of the &CUPS; server are: -Server Root Location: / -Server Administration Location: /admin -All printers on the server: /printers -Any individual printer on the server: ⪚ /printers/infotec_P320 -All printer classes on the server: /classes: -Any individual printer class on the server: ⪚ /classes/all_infotecs_P320_or_P450 +Server Root Location: / +Server Administration Location: /admin +All printers on the server: /printers +Any individual printer on the server: ⪚ /printers/infotec_P320 +All printer classes on the server: /classes: +Any individual printer class on the server: ⪚ /classes/all_infotecs_P320_or_P450 -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings for any of the defined server locations +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings for any of the defined server locations -dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings for any of the defined server locations +dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings for any of the defined server locations -For all locations that are not defined separately the setting of the location above it is valid. - -For example, you have a printer named infotec_P450 with no set security options. Then the security of the location /printers will take the responsibility for this printer as it is a sub-location of/printers. If, in turn there is no security set for /printers, then the security for / (the general security) of the server takes responsibility. Either you have set this for your purpose or the compiled-in default value takes over. +For all locations that are not defined separately the setting of the location above it is valid. + +For example, you have a printer named infotec_P450 with no set security options. Then the security of the location /printers will take the responsibility for this printer as it is a sub-location of/printers. If, in turn there is no security set for /printers, then the security for / (the general security) of the server takes responsibility. Either you have set this for your purpose or the compiled-in default value takes over. -SystemGroup +SystemGroup -The group name for System or printer administration access. The default varies depending on the operating system, but will be sys, system or root (checked for in that order). +The group name for System or printer administration access. The default varies depending on the operating system, but will be sys, system or root (checked for in that order). -Access Permissions +Access Permissions -Access permissions for each folder served by the scheduler. Locations are relative to the document root. +Access permissions for each folder served by the scheduler. Locations are relative to the document root. -Authorisation Type +Authorisation Type -The authorisation to use: +The authorisation to use: -None +None -Perform no authentication. +Perform no authentication. -Basic +Basic -Perform authentication using the &HTTP; Basic method. +Perform authentication using the &HTTP; Basic method. -Digest +Digest -Perform authentication using the &HTTP; Digest method. +Perform authentication using the &HTTP; Digest method. -Local certificate authentication can be substituted by the client for Basic or Digest, when connecting to the localhost interface. +Local certificate authentication can be substituted by the client for Basic or Digest, when connecting to the localhost interface. -Authorisation Class +Authorisation Class -The authorisation class. Currently only Anonymous, User, System (valid user belonging to the group set as system group), and group (valid user belonging to the specified group) are supported. +The authorisation class. Currently only Anonymous, User, System (valid user belonging to the group set as system group), and group (valid user belonging to the specified group) are supported. -Authorisation Group Name +Authorisation Group Name -The group name for Group authorisation +The group name for Group authorisation -Encryption +Encryption -Whether or not to use encryption. This depends on having the OpenSSL linked into the &CUPS; library and scheduler. -Possible values are: +Whether or not to use encryption. This depends on having the OpenSSL linked into the &CUPS; library and scheduler. +Possible values are: -Always +Always -Always use encryption (SSL) +Always use encryption (SSL) -Never +Never -Never use encryption. +Never use encryption. -Required +Required -Use TLS encryption upgrade. +Use TLS encryption upgrade. -IfRequested +IfRequested -Use encryption if the server requests it. +Use encryption if the server requests it. @@ -2681,310 +1404,189 @@ format="PNG"/> -Allow +Allow -Allows access from the specified hostname, domain, IP address or network. Possible values are: +Allows access from the specified hostname, domain, IP address or network. Possible values are: -All +All -None +None -*.domain.com +*.domain.com -.domain.com +.domain.com -host.domain.com +host.domain.com -nnn.* +nnn.* -nnn.nnn.* +nnn.nnn.* -nnn.nnn.nnn.* +nnn.nnn.nnn.* -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm.mmm.mmm.mmm +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm.mmm.mmm.mmm -The host and domain address require that you enable hostname lookups, as described earlier. +The host and domain address require that you enable hostname lookups, as described earlier. -Deny +Deny -Denies access from the specified hostname, domain, IP address or network. Possible values are: +Denies access from the specified hostname, domain, IP address or network. Possible values are: -All +All -None +None -*.domain.com +*.domain.com -.domain.com +.domain.com -host.domain.com +host.domain.com -nnn.* +nnn.* -nnn.nnn.* +nnn.nnn.* -nnn.nnn.nnn.* +nnn.nnn.nnn.* -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm -nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm.mmm.mmm.mmm +nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/mmm.mmm.mmm.mmm -The host and domain address require that you enable hostname lookups, as described earlier. +The host and domain address require that you enable hostname lookups, as described earlier. -Order +Order -The order of the allow and deny processing. +The order of the allow and deny processing. -Example: How To Define The Security For All Printers - -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings is discussed here. We use the example to add security definitions other than the default ones for the resource named all printers. For the &CUPS; web server, this is the location you access through http://localhost:631/printers/ or (remotely) through http://cups.server.name:631/printers/ - -The first screenshot shows the general location for this setting. Select Add or Modify a resource for which you want to decide about its security settings. +Example: How To Define The Security For All Printers + +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings is discussed here. We use the example to add security definitions other than the default ones for the resource named all printers. For the &CUPS; web server, this is the location you access through http://localhost:631/printers/ or (remotely) through http://cups.server.name:631/printers/ + +The first screenshot shows the general location for this setting. Select Add or Modify a resource for which you want to decide about its security settings. -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings -Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings +Dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server security settings -This dialogue is to add a new resource. It looks similar if you want to modify an already existing resource. Here are the general options: +This dialogue is to add a new resource. It looks similar if you want to modify an already existing resource. Here are the general options: -Dialogue to add a new resource. +Dialogue to add a new resource. -Dialogue to add a new resource. +Dialogue to add a new resource. -.This is the second part or the dialogue is to add a new ressource. It looks similar if you want to modify an already existing resource. Here you define the actual access masks for the resource in question. +.This is the second part or the dialogue is to add a new ressource. It looks similar if you want to modify an already existing resource. Here you define the actual access masks for the resource in question. -Dialogue to add a new resource. +Dialogue to add a new resource. -Dialogue to add a new resource. +Dialogue to add a new resource. -Resource dialogue +Resource dialogue -Resource dialogue +Resource dialogue -Resource dialogue +Resource dialogue -Resource dialogue +Resource dialogue -Resource dialogue +Resource dialogue -Resource dialogue +Resource dialogue -Resource dialogue +Resource dialogue -Resource dialogue +Resource dialogue diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cupsoptions.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cupsoptions.docbook index a6ecddc1ee0..50d5a4fd8f4 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cupsoptions.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/cupsoptions.docbook @@ -1,84 +1,48 @@ -&CUPS; options presently not available through &kcontrol; +&CUPS; options presently not available through &kcontrol; -This chapter gives you some hints about further configuration possibilities which may not be available through the &tdeprint; &GUI; interface to &CUPS;. +This chapter gives you some hints about further configuration possibilities which may not be available through the &tdeprint; &GUI; interface to &CUPS;. -Overview of provided features +Overview of provided features -All of the most often used features and functions &CUPS; provides are supported in &tdeprint;. +All of the most often used features and functions &CUPS; provides are supported in &tdeprint;. -Printer management is supported: add, remove, modify, configure, test, disable, enable ... +Printer management is supported: add, remove, modify, configure, test, disable, enable ... -Job management is supported: cancel, hold, release, move to different printer +Job management is supported: cancel, hold, release, move to different printer -Print options: for full control as provided by &CUPS;. +Print options: for full control as provided by &CUPS;. -Where to find help when using &CUPS; +Where to find help when using &CUPS; -A lot of information about the inner workings of &CUPS; is available through the web interface, which &CUPS; will always support. It works with any browser (yes, even text-based ones). Just go to http://localhost:631/ for a start. There you find a link to locally available &CUPS; documentation in HTML and PDF if you are new to &CUPS;. +A lot of information about the inner workings of &CUPS; is available through the web interface, which &CUPS; will always support. It works with any browser (yes, even text-based ones). Just go to http://localhost:631/ for a start. There you find a link to locally available &CUPS; documentation in HTML and PDF if you are new to &CUPS;. -&CUPS; is accessible through other means than &tdeprint;: commandline and browser are two native &CUPS; interfaces. The many commandline utilities add up to the most complete control you have on &CUPS;. The web interface is only a subset of all available configuration or control options. +&CUPS; is accessible through other means than &tdeprint;: commandline and browser are two native &CUPS; interfaces. The many commandline utilities add up to the most complete control you have on &CUPS;. The web interface is only a subset of all available configuration or control options. -This is also true for &tdeprint;. Generally, as &CUPS; develops, most new features will first be implemented through the commandline. Be sure to check the latest versions of the man pages for &CUPS; to stay up-to-date with new features after you install a new version. +This is also true for &tdeprint;. Generally, as &CUPS; develops, most new features will first be implemented through the commandline. Be sure to check the latest versions of the man pages for &CUPS; to stay up-to-date with new features after you install a new version. -Depending on your update method for &CUPS;, your active configuration file might not have been re-placed by a new one; thus your new, more capable &CUPS;-daemon might not have been told by the old configuration file about the new features to use. +Depending on your update method for &CUPS;, your active configuration file might not have been re-placed by a new one; thus your new, more capable &CUPS;-daemon might not have been told by the old configuration file about the new features to use. -A complete list of available files and man pages should always be in the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual (http://localhost:631/sam.html#FILES. In the &konqueror; &URL;/location field, type man:/lpadmin and man:/cupsd.conf to find out about the most important command and configuration file. You knew already about &konqueror;'s nice abilities to show you the traditional &UNIX; man pages, didn't you? Read this. From there you find more interesting hints and links to other man pages and documentation. +A complete list of available files and man pages should always be in the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual (http://localhost:631/sam.html#FILES. In the &konqueror; &URL;/location field, type man:/lpadmin and man:/cupsd.conf to find out about the most important command and configuration file. You knew already about &konqueror;'s nice abilities to show you the traditional &UNIX; man pages, didn't you? Read this. From there you find more interesting hints and links to other man pages and documentation. -How to find &CUPS; related man pages - -Here is a way to find out which &CUPS; related man pages there are on your system: - -kurt@transmeta:~ -> apropos cups +How to find &CUPS; related man pages + +Here is a way to find out which &CUPS; related man pages there are on your system: + +kurt@transmeta:~ > apropos cups cups-calibrate (8)- ESP Printer Calibration Tool lpstat (1) - print cups status information @@ -103,429 +67,168 @@ lpadmin (8) - configure cups printers and classes printers.conf (5) - printer configuration file for cups cupsd.conf (5) - server configuration file for cups filter (1) - cups file conversion filter interfaces - + -Outside &tdeprint;: Hints & Tips Tricks with &CUPS; on the Commandline +Outside &tdeprint;: Hints & Tips Tricks with &CUPS; on the Commandline -Here are a few examples of options that are presently only available if you use the commandline. +Here are a few examples of options that are presently only available if you use the commandline. -Allowing or denying printer access for certain users - -When installing (or modifying) a printer through the command line, you can either deny or allow the usage of that printer to certain users: - -lpadmin HeidelbergDigimaster9110 lpd:/10.160.16.99/mqueue allow:kurt,sylvi,hansjoerg /home/kurt/PPDs/DVHV.ppd - -will allow the usage of this (believe me: very nice and also very professional) printer to only the three mentioned users and at the same time deny it to all others. If another user wants to print on the DigiMaster via this &CUPS; server, he will receive an error message along the lines client-error-not-possible. - -lpadmin HeidelbergDigimaster9110 lpd:/10.160.16.99/mqueue deny:tackat,boss,waba /home/kurt/PPDs/DVHV.ppd - -will deny the usage of this same printer to the three mentioned users and at the same time allow it to all others. If denied user wants to print on the DigiMaster via this &CUPS; server, he will receive an error message along the lines client-error-not-possible. +Allowing or denying printer access for certain users + +When installing (or modifying) a printer through the command line, you can either deny or allow the usage of that printer to certain users: + +lpadmin HeidelbergDigimaster9110 lpd:/10.160.16.99/mqueue allow:kurt,sylvi,hansjoerg /home/kurt/PPDs/DVHV.ppd + +will allow the usage of this (believe me: very nice and also very professional) printer to only the three mentioned users and at the same time deny it to all others. If another user wants to print on the DigiMaster via this &CUPS; server, he will receive an error message along the lines client-error-not-possible. + +lpadmin HeidelbergDigimaster9110 lpd:/10.160.16.99/mqueue deny:tackat,boss,waba /home/kurt/PPDs/DVHV.ppd + +will deny the usage of this same printer to the three mentioned users and at the same time allow it to all others. If denied user wants to print on the DigiMaster via this &CUPS; server, he will receive an error message along the lines client-error-not-possible. -Only one of the two options may be used at one time; at present there is no support to have a similar option in a per-group based way. This will be implemented in the future. +Only one of the two options may be used at one time; at present there is no support to have a similar option in a per-group based way. This will be implemented in the future. -Imposing Quotas for certain printers +Imposing Quotas for certain printers -Sometimes you want to impose quotas for certain printers. With quotas you can set upper limits for the number of pages or the amount of data to be printed over a certain period to a certain printer. +Sometimes you want to impose quotas for certain printers. With quotas you can set upper limits for the number of pages or the amount of data to be printed over a certain period to a certain printer. -Quotas can be set with the option when installing a printer with the lpadmin command, or afterwards for an already existing printer. Following are some guidelines (which are missing at the time of writing in the, official &CUPS; documentation): +Quotas can be set with the option when installing a printer with the lpadmin command, or afterwards for an already existing printer. Following are some guidelines (which are missing at the time of writing in the, official &CUPS; documentation): -With &CUPS; you may have pagecount- and filesize-based quotas for individual printers. +With &CUPS; you may have pagecount- and filesize-based quotas for individual printers. -Quotas are calculated for each user individually (so a single set of limits applies to all users for the printer concerned). +Quotas are calculated for each user individually (so a single set of limits applies to all users for the printer concerned). -Quotas include banner pages (if those are used). +Quotas include banner pages (if those are used). -This means: you can limit every user to 20 pages per day on an expensive printer, but you cannot limit every user except Kurt or root. +This means: you can limit every user to 20 pages per day on an expensive printer, but you cannot limit every user except Kurt or root. -There are , , and options to give when setting up a printer. +There are , , and options to give when setting up a printer. - sets a time interval for quota computing (intervals are determined in seconds; so a day is 60x60x24=86.400, a week is 60x60x24x7=604,800, and a month is 60x60x24x30=2.592.000 seconds.) + sets a time interval for quota computing (intervals are determined in seconds; so a day is 60x60x24=86.400, a week is 60x60x24x7=604,800, and a month is 60x60x24x30=2.592.000 seconds.) -For quotas to be enforced, the time-period plus at least one job-limit must be set to non-zero. +For quotas to be enforced, the time-period plus at least one job-limit must be set to non-zero. -The default value of 0 for specifies that there is no limit. +The default value of 0 for specifies that there is no limit. -The default value of 0 for specifies that there is no limit. +The default value of 0 for specifies that there is no limit. -The default value of 0 for specifies that the limits apply to all jobs that have been printed by a user that are still known to the system. +The default value of 0 for specifies that the limits apply to all jobs that have been printed by a user that are still known to the system. -Working Examples: - -Working, as both, time-period plus one or both job-limits are defined - -lpadmin danka_infotec_4850 job-quota-period=604800 job-k-limit=1024 - -This sets a limit of a file size of 1 MB (in total) for each user of existing printer danka_infotec_4850 during one week. - -lpadmin danka_infotec_4105 job-quota-period=604800 job-page-limit=100 - -This sets a limit of 100 pages (in total) for each user of existing printer danka_infotec_4105 during one week. - -lpadmin danka_infotec_P450 job-quota-period=604800 job-k-limit=1024 job-page-limit=100 - -This sets a combined limit of 1 MB (in total) and 100 pages (in total) for each user of existing printer danka_infotec_P450 during one week. Whichever limit is reached first will take effect. +Working Examples: + +Working, as both, time-period plus one or both job-limits are defined + +lpadmin danka_infotec_4850 job-quota-period=604800 job-k-limit=1024 + +This sets a limit of a file size of 1 MB (in total) for each user of existing printer danka_infotec_4850 during one week. + +lpadmin danka_infotec_4105 job-quota-period=604800 job-page-limit=100 + +This sets a limit of 100 pages (in total) for each user of existing printer danka_infotec_4105 during one week. + +lpadmin danka_infotec_P450 job-quota-period=604800 job-k-limit=1024 job-page-limit=100 + +This sets a combined limit of 1 MB (in total) and 100 pages (in total) for each user of existing printer danka_infotec_P450 during one week. Whichever limit is reached first will take effect. -Not working examples - -NOT working, as only one, time-period or job-limit is defined) - -lpadmin danka_infotec_P320 job-quota-period=604800 - -lpadmin danka_infotec_FullColor job-page-limit=100 - -lpadmin danka_infotec_HiSpeed job-k-limit=1024 +Not working examples + +NOT working, as only one, time-period or job-limit is defined) + +lpadmin danka_infotec_P320 job-quota-period=604800 + +lpadmin danka_infotec_FullColor job-page-limit=100 + +lpadmin danka_infotec_HiSpeed job-k-limit=1024 -Related Error Messages +Related Error Messages -Once a user reaches his quota limit, he'll get a client-error-not-possible message, if he wants to print. +Once a user reaches his quota limit, he'll get a client-error-not-possible message, if he wants to print. -Installing a <quote ->raw</quote -> printer - -There are different ways to define a raw printer. One comfortable one is to use the lpadmin command. Just don't define a &PPD; file to be used for that printer and it will be a raw one: - -lpadmin Raw_Danka_infotec lpd://10.160.16.137/PORT1 - -Raw printer queues are those which don't touch the print file to transform it to a different file format. You need this for example when printing from &Windows; clients via Samba through a &CUPS; server to a PCL printer: in this case the &Windows; side printer driver would generate the finished print file format for the target printer and filtering it through &CUPS; filters would only harm the purpose. Under certain circumstances (if you want to make sure that the file goes to the printer unfiltered by &CUPS;) the lpadmin without a &PPD; comes in handy. +Installing a <quote>raw</quote> printer + +There are different ways to define a raw printer. One comfortable one is to use the lpadmin command. Just don't define a &PPD; file to be used for that printer and it will be a raw one: + +lpadmin Raw_Danka_infotec lpd://10.160.16.137/PORT1 + +Raw printer queues are those which don't touch the print file to transform it to a different file format. You need this for example when printing from &Windows; clients via Samba through a &CUPS; server to a PCL printer: in this case the &Windows; side printer driver would generate the finished print file format for the target printer and filtering it through &CUPS; filters would only harm the purpose. Under certain circumstances (if you want to make sure that the file goes to the printer unfiltered by &CUPS;) the lpadmin without a &PPD; comes in handy. -Troubleshooting &CUPS; in &tdeprint; +Troubleshooting &CUPS; in &tdeprint; -This section of the &tdeprint; Handbook will live from the readers' feedback. Here is just a small beginning. +This section of the &tdeprint; Handbook will live from the readers' feedback. Here is just a small beginning. -Error Messages +Error Messages -What does the error client-error-bad-request mean? +What does the error client-error-bad-request mean? -The user sent a file to the &CUPS; which the server could not process. You get this also upon sending an empty file. +The user sent a file to the &CUPS; which the server could not process. You get this also upon sending an empty file. -And client-error-not-possible? +And client-error-not-possible? -User is either not allowed to print to a certain printer or has achieved his quota (based on file size and/or page number) +User is either not allowed to print to a certain printer or has achieved his quota (based on file size and/or page number) -How about client-error-not-found? +How about client-error-not-found? -The user tried to access a nonexistent resource on the &CUPS; server, such as trying to print a nonexistent file, or one that you are denied permission to read. +The user tried to access a nonexistent resource on the &CUPS; server, such as trying to print a nonexistent file, or one that you are denied permission to read. @@ -534,362 +237,165 @@ filter (1) - cups file conversion filter interfaces -Questions and Answers +Questions and Answers -Why can't I re-start my jobs? +Why can't I re-start my jobs? -To be able to re-start your completed jobs from the web interface, you need a setting in the /etc/cups/cupsd.conf file: set PreserveJobFiles True. +To be able to re-start your completed jobs from the web interface, you need a setting in the /etc/cups/cupsd.conf file: set PreserveJobFiles True. -How do I get rid of the long list of completed jobs in the web interface? +How do I get rid of the long list of completed jobs in the web interface? -TODO +TODO -How does page accounting work? +How does page accounting work? -&CUPS; does the print accounting by passing nearly every job through the pstops filter. This one does, amongst other things, the page counting. Output of this filter there may be piped into other filters (like pstoraster --> rastertopcl) or sent to the printer directly (if it is a &PostScript; printer). - -In any case, this works for network, parallel, serial or USB printers the same. For pstops to work, it needs DSC, Document Structuring Convention compliant &PostScript; (or near-equivalent) as input. So it calculates the pages during filtering on the print server and writes info about every single page (what time, which user, which job-ID and -name, which printer, how many copies of which pages of the document, how many kilo-bytes?) into /var/log/cups/page_log. - -By the way: on my personal wishlist is a hack of webalizer to read and analyse the page_log and give a similar output. Anyone? - -However, it is not giving correct results in the following cases: +&CUPS; does the print accounting by passing nearly every job through the pstops filter. This one does, amongst other things, the page counting. Output of this filter there may be piped into other filters (like pstoraster --> rastertopcl) or sent to the printer directly (if it is a &PostScript; printer). + +In any case, this works for network, parallel, serial or USB printers the same. For pstops to work, it needs DSC, Document Structuring Convention compliant &PostScript; (or near-equivalent) as input. So it calculates the pages during filtering on the print server and writes info about every single page (what time, which user, which job-ID and -name, which printer, how many copies of which pages of the document, how many kilo-bytes?) into /var/log/cups/page_log. + +By the way: on my personal wishlist is a hack of webalizer to read and analyse the page_log and give a similar output. Anyone? + +However, it is not giving correct results in the following cases: -The printer jams and maybe therefore throw away the job (real live experience; or maybe throwing away the job because of problems with the data format) +The printer jams and maybe therefore throw away the job (real live experience; or maybe throwing away the job because of problems with the data format) -Jobs printed as raw are always counted as size of 1 page (and maybe multiple copies). +Jobs printed as raw are always counted as size of 1 page (and maybe multiple copies). -Therefore the page accounting of &CUPS; is only an approximation (in many cases an excellent or at least good one, in others a quite poor one). The only reliable print count is the one done by the internal printer counter. (Because this is the one you pay for, if you are on a click price or similar.) Some, by far not most, printers can be queried remotely for that information via SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). That means, in a bigger network with many different printers there is just no completely reliable and accurate page accounting tool! +Therefore the page accounting of &CUPS; is only an approximation (in many cases an excellent or at least good one, in others a quite poor one). The only reliable print count is the one done by the internal printer counter. (Because this is the one you pay for, if you are on a click price or similar.) Some, by far not most, printers can be queried remotely for that information via SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). That means, in a bigger network with many different printers there is just no completely reliable and accurate page accounting tool! -Why doesn't page-accounting work with &Windows; clients? +Why doesn't page-accounting work with &Windows; clients? -From &Windows; clients jobs nearly always need to be sent as raw. Why? If &CUPS; works as a print server for &Windows; clients using the original native &Windows; driver for the target print device, this guarantees the correct formatting of the job on the clients already; therefor the server should not touch it and print raw; therefor no filtering is started (and this is not even possible as the input from the clients is not &PostScript; as pstops expects; hence no page-count other than the default 1. +From &Windows; clients jobs nearly always need to be sent as raw. Why? If &CUPS; works as a print server for &Windows; clients using the original native &Windows; driver for the target print device, this guarantees the correct formatting of the job on the clients already; therefor the server should not touch it and print raw; therefor no filtering is started (and this is not even possible as the input from the clients is not &PostScript; as pstops expects; hence no page-count other than the default 1. -How do I get a list of available options for a given printer or a &PPD; file? +How do I get a list of available options for a given printer or a &PPD; file? -See the man page for the lpoptions command. You may investigate a &CUPS;-enabled box about any option of its available printers. There is no need to have the printer installed locally. As long as the printer is available locally (through the &CUPS; printer browsing feature), it will also work remote. - -To query for a printers' option typing lpoptions HitachiDDP70MicroPress will give a long listing of all available options as read from the &PPD; file for the given Hitachi-Printer (in my case installed on remote server transmeta). Remote server Transmeta and its &CUPS; daemon as well as the localhost's &CUPS; daemon need to be up and running for this to succeed. +See the man page for the lpoptions command. You may investigate a &CUPS;-enabled box about any option of its available printers. There is no need to have the printer installed locally. As long as the printer is available locally (through the &CUPS; printer browsing feature), it will also work remote. + +To query for a printers' option typing lpoptions HitachiDDP70MicroPress will give a long listing of all available options as read from the &PPD; file for the given Hitachi-Printer (in my case installed on remote server transmeta). Remote server Transmeta and its &CUPS; daemon as well as the localhost's &CUPS; daemon need to be up and running for this to succeed. -How do I read the listing retrieved by the lpoptions command? +How do I read the listing retrieved by the lpoptions command? -You know that for &PostScript; printer manufacturers it is legal to define their own internal names and procedures even for standard &PostScript; options. As long as the driver is able to retrieve the option from the &PPD; and show it to the user in a way that he understands it everything is OK. But what do you do, if you want to use some obscure printer options on the command line? How do you find out its exact syntax? - -Let's take an example. Looking at Hitachi's DDP70 printer and how it implements duplex printing is revealing somehow. How do you tell how to print double sided? duplex or Duplex? Or another name altogether?. - -lpoptions transmeta Hitachi_DDP70_ClusterPrintingSystem | grep uplex - -This leads to the output - -TR-Duplex/Duplex: False *True - -This is to be interpreted like follows: +You know that for &PostScript; printer manufacturers it is legal to define their own internal names and procedures even for standard &PostScript; options. As long as the driver is able to retrieve the option from the &PPD; and show it to the user in a way that he understands it everything is OK. But what do you do, if you want to use some obscure printer options on the command line? How do you find out its exact syntax? + +Let's take an example. Looking at Hitachi's DDP70 printer and how it implements duplex printing is revealing somehow. How do you tell how to print double sided? duplex or Duplex? Or another name altogether?. + +lpoptions transmeta Hitachi_DDP70_ClusterPrintingSystem | grep uplex + +This leads to the output + +TR-Duplex/Duplex: False *True + +This is to be interpreted like follows: -The name of the investigated option is ; +The name of the investigated option is ; -Behind the slash you see the translation of the option, as it should be shown in a &GUI; or Web interface (Duplex); +Behind the slash you see the translation of the option, as it should be shown in a &GUI; or Web interface (Duplex); -The option may take one of the two values False or True; +The option may take one of the two values False or True; -The present setting is True to be recognised by the marking with a star *. +The present setting is True to be recognised by the marking with a star *. -To override the present default setting (duplex) and print a job in simplex, you need to use the following command: - -lpr Hitachi_DDP70_ClusterPrintingSystem TR-Duplex=False /path/to/your/printjob +To override the present default setting (duplex) and print a job in simplex, you need to use the following command: + +lpr Hitachi_DDP70_ClusterPrintingSystem TR-Duplex=False /path/to/your/printjob -How do I get a nicely formatted listing of available options for a given printer or &PPD;? +How do I get a nicely formatted listing of available options for a given printer or &PPD;? -Use the lphelp command which may be installed on your system locally. There is not yet a man page for lphelp. - -lphelp infotecP450 - -This lists the available options for the named printer. It is nicely formatted and does explain every available option and how to use it. You can query different printers' options at once: - -lphelp infotec7410color DANKA_fullcolor_D2000 HP_ColorLaserJet8550 - -It also works for &PPD; files. Just specify the path to the &PPD;: - -lphelp /home/kurt/PPDs/HP-ColorLaserJet8550.ppd +Use the lphelp command which may be installed on your system locally. There is not yet a man page for lphelp. + +lphelp infotecP450 + +This lists the available options for the named printer. It is nicely formatted and does explain every available option and how to use it. You can query different printers' options at once: + +lphelp infotec7410color DANKA_fullcolor_D2000 HP_ColorLaserJet8550 + +It also works for &PPD; files. Just specify the path to the &PPD;: + +lphelp /home/kurt/PPDs/HP-ColorLaserJet8550.ppd -Solving Problems +Solving Problems -No system is perfect. Here are some commonly seen traps people have fallen into. +No system is perfect. Here are some commonly seen traps people have fallen into. -My printer named 3-lp-duplex shows erratic behaviour. What's wrong? +My printer named 3-lp-duplex shows erratic behaviour. What's wrong? -The printer names used in &CUPS; shall start with a letter and may contain up to 128 letters, numbers or underscores. Using dashes may lead to problems. Speaking about naming: printer names in &CUPS; are not case sensitive. So a printer named Best_of_Danka will be the same as best_of_danka or BEST_OF_DANKA. (This is a requirement of &IPP;, which &CUPS; is fully compliant with). +The printer names used in &CUPS; shall start with a letter and may contain up to 128 letters, numbers or underscores. Using dashes may lead to problems. Speaking about naming: printer names in &CUPS; are not case sensitive. So a printer named Best_of_Danka will be the same as best_of_danka or BEST_OF_DANKA. (This is a requirement of &IPP;, which &CUPS; is fully compliant with). -Why do I get Unable to connect to SAMBA host: Success with my printer shares from &Windows; accessed via Samba? +Why do I get Unable to connect to SAMBA host: Success with my printer shares from &Windows; accessed via Samba? -Are the rights on the remote &Windows; box set correctly for you? Are you actually allowed to print on the &Windows; shared printer? +Are the rights on the remote &Windows; box set correctly for you? Are you actually allowed to print on the &Windows; shared printer? -My files for printer lp sometimes mysteriously disappear and two days later I am told they got printed on a printer three floors below my office. What is going on? +My files for printer lp sometimes mysteriously disappear and two days later I am told they got printed on a printer three floors below my office. What is going on? -Believe me, it is very unlikely that your printer is the only one with the name lp. Maybe &CUPS; is playing a trick on you. As you might have the setting ImplicitClasses On activated, &CUPS; tries to stuff all printers it sees on the network into a Class name lp. All jobs destined to lp are sent to this class and the first available member prints it. So if you had this nice fellow (who listened closely when you raved about &CUPS; and &tdeprint;) install &CUPS; and poke around the system...get the idea? - -Take my advice: choose a unique name for any network printer! (Mind you, the one on your parallel port also turns out to be a network printer for the rest of the world if you don't take care of your settings). +Believe me, it is very unlikely that your printer is the only one with the name lp. Maybe &CUPS; is playing a trick on you. As you might have the setting ImplicitClasses On activated, &CUPS; tries to stuff all printers it sees on the network into a Class name lp. All jobs destined to lp are sent to this class and the first available member prints it. So if you had this nice fellow (who listened closely when you raved about &CUPS; and &tdeprint;) install &CUPS; and poke around the system...get the idea? + +Take my advice: choose a unique name for any network printer! (Mind you, the one on your parallel port also turns out to be a network printer for the rest of the world if you don't take care of your settings). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/extensions.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/extensions.docbook index 8d1feffc7ba..19c5daf9827 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/extensions.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/extensions.docbook @@ -1,86 +1,53 @@ -&tdeprint; Extensions To All Print Subsystems +&tdeprint; Extensions To All Print Subsystems -<quote ->Virtual</quote -> Printers +<quote>Virtual</quote> Printers -The <quote ->Fax</quote -> Printer +The <quote>Fax</quote> Printer -To be written +To be written -The <quote ->File</quote -> Printer +The <quote>File</quote> Printer -To be written +To be written -The <quote -><acronym ->PDF</acronym -></quote -> Printer +The <quote><acronym>PDF</acronym></quote> Printer -To be written +To be written -<quote ->External</quote -> Filters +<quote>External</quote> Filters -The <command ->enscript</command -> Filter for Text Files +The <command>enscript</command> Filter for Text Files -To be written +To be written -The <quote ->n-up</quote -> Filter for Any File +The <quote>n-up</quote> Filter for Any File -To be written +To be written -Three different <quote ->Make Pamphlet</quote -> Filters for &PostScript; Files +Three different <quote>Make Pamphlet</quote> Filters for &PostScript; Files -To be written +To be written diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/external-command.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/external-command.docbook index 40f62dde1a0..04bd961a719 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/external-command.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/external-command.docbook @@ -1,26 +1,20 @@ -Module For External Print Command (&Netscape;-like) +Module For External Print Command (&Netscape;-like) -This module allows the print command to be specified completely (&Netscape;-like). An edit line is added in the print dialogue for that purpose. Can be used in many cases, for example with a self-made print program. +This module allows the print command to be specified completely (&Netscape;-like). An edit line is added in the print dialogue for that purpose. Can be used in many cases, for example with a self-made print program. -Overview of provided features +Overview of provided features -Printer management: not supported +Printer management: not supported -Job management: not supported. +Job management: not supported. -Print options: basic control, depending on your knowledge of the print command +Print options: basic control, depending on your knowledge of the print command diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/final-word.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/final-word.docbook index 7fb084fd0e4..2a9fbf094ae 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/final-word.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/final-word.docbook @@ -1,91 +1,59 @@ -Final word from the Author +Final word from the Author -Who am I, what is my business? +Who am I, what is my business? -My employer is Danka Deutschland GmbH, a leading and manufacturer-independent provider of professional and hi-speed digital printing systems, black-and-white as well as colour. Danka provides hardware, software, service, maintenance, consumables and customised solutions for the products in its portfolio. I work there as a System Engineer. Amongst the brands Danka offers are Heidelberg (formerly Kodak), Canon, &Hewlett-Packard;, Hitachi, Infotec and EfI. +My employer is Danka Deutschland GmbH, a leading and manufacturer-independent provider of professional and hi-speed digital printing systems, black-and-white as well as colour. Danka provides hardware, software, service, maintenance, consumables and customised solutions for the products in its portfolio. I work there as a System Engineer. Amongst the brands Danka offers are Heidelberg (formerly Kodak), Canon, &Hewlett-Packard;, Hitachi, Infotec and EfI. -My acquaintance with &Linux; and the Free Software community is not too old. When I started to play around with &Linux; at the beginning of 1999, my deepest disappointment was the poor support for printing. True, I made all our machines spit out simplex prints -- but what about duplex? What about punching the output? How to make sorting work? Or stapling, cover sheets and all the other beautiful finishing options our engines offer to customers? No way -- at least for me as a non-geek! +My acquaintance with &Linux; and the Free Software community is not too old. When I started to play around with &Linux; at the beginning of 1999, my deepest disappointment was the poor support for printing. True, I made all our machines spit out simplex prints -- but what about duplex? What about punching the output? How to make sorting work? Or stapling, cover sheets and all the other beautiful finishing options our engines offer to customers? No way -- at least for me as a non-geek! -I began a search on the Internet for a solution. Fortunately not much later, in May 1999, Mike Sweet, principal developer of &CUPS;, announced the first Beta release of this superb piece of printing software. After trying it briefly, I knew this was it! +I began a search on the Internet for a solution. Fortunately not much later, in May 1999, Mike Sweet, principal developer of &CUPS;, announced the first Beta release of this superb piece of printing software. After trying it briefly, I knew this was it! -Next thing I attempted: to make &Linux; distributions interested in this new stuff. Believe me -- it was more than tenacious! They seemed to think they already had the best thing they could get in printing. One reason probably was that they (and many &Linux; developers) never had to think about how to best support a printer duplexer -- because one had never come near their own desks... +Next thing I attempted: to make &Linux; distributions interested in this new stuff. Believe me -- it was more than tenacious! They seemed to think they already had the best thing they could get in printing. One reason probably was that they (and many &Linux; developers) never had to think about how to best support a printer duplexer -- because one had never come near their own desks... -Finally, my attempts to make some &Linux; print publications interested in &CUPS; backfired on me - one editor squeezed me into writing a series on the subject myself. And this is how some people started to give me the nickname CUPS Evangelist. I will not get rid of this nick anytime soon, now that even the &kde; people wedged me into their timeframe of releases. Oh, boy... +Finally, my attempts to make some &Linux; print publications interested in &CUPS; backfired on me - one editor squeezed me into writing a series on the subject myself. And this is how some people started to give me the nickname CUPS Evangelist. I will not get rid of this nick anytime soon, now that even the &kde; people wedged me into their timeframe of releases. Oh, boy... -Anyway, &CUPS; is now making its way around the world and it might well become a triumphal one: I am a little bit proud to have supported and contributed to this from near the beginning. +Anyway, &CUPS; is now making its way around the world and it might well become a triumphal one: I am a little bit proud to have supported and contributed to this from near the beginning. -It should encourage you: even if some more experienced &Linux; users than you are skeptical about it, and even if your programming skills are next to zero (like mine) - there are a lot of tasks and jobs and ideas, and talent that you can contribute to the Free Software community. Not least within the &kde; project... +It should encourage you: even if some more experienced &Linux; users than you are skeptical about it, and even if your programming skills are next to zero (like mine) - there are a lot of tasks and jobs and ideas, and talent that you can contribute to the Free Software community. Not least within the &kde; project... -Credits +Credits -I'd like to thank... +I'd like to thank... -Mike Sweet for developing &CUPS; in the first place +Mike Sweet for developing &CUPS; in the first place -Jean-Eric Cuendet for starting kups and qtcups, the predecessors of &tdeprint; +Jean-Eric Cuendet for starting kups and qtcups, the predecessors of &tdeprint; -Michael Goffioul for doing all the hard work recently +Michael Goffioul for doing all the hard work recently -Martin Konold for thinking twice +Martin Konold for thinking twice -Sven Guckes for teaching me a few things about the art of survival on the terminal (just in case &kde; is not there ;-) ) +Sven Guckes for teaching me a few things about the art of survival on the terminal (just in case &kde; is not there ;-) ) -...too numerous others to mention who also let me snatch bits and bytes of knowledge off them +...too numerous others to mention who also let me snatch bits and bytes of knowledge off them -and last, but not least: Tom Schwaller for encouraging me to get into documentation writing +and last, but not least: Tom Schwaller for encouraging me to get into documentation writing -Caveats +Caveats -&tdeprint; has been developed on a system using &CUPS; 1.1.6. &tdeprint; has been tested on other versions of &CUPS; and so far no incompatibilities are known. By the time of writing this Handbook, &CUPS; 1.1.9 is out with a few new features not yet supported by &tdeprint;. Of course you are able to access these features, but you will need to bypass &tdeprint; and use the &CUPS; command-line tools or edit configuration files manually. &tdeprint;'s development will go on and this Handbook strives to always be the best available user documentation resource for it. +&tdeprint; has been developed on a system using &CUPS; 1.1.6. &tdeprint; has been tested on other versions of &CUPS; and so far no incompatibilities are known. By the time of writing this Handbook, &CUPS; 1.1.9 is out with a few new features not yet supported by &tdeprint;. Of course you are able to access these features, but you will need to bypass &tdeprint; and use the &CUPS; command-line tools or edit configuration files manually. &tdeprint;'s development will go on and this Handbook strives to always be the best available user documentation resource for it. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/getting-started.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/getting-started.docbook index 481237028fa..ad6b8bfd8ff 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/getting-started.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/getting-started.docbook @@ -1,169 +1,80 @@ -Getting Started +Getting Started -This chapter of the &tdeprint; Handbook will walk you through most of the configuration or selection options of &tdeprint;. It will mainly deal with &CUPS; in this version, as the author is most familiar with it, and also because &tdeprint; started off with supporting &CUPS; best. Later versions of the &tdeprint; software and editions of this handbook will support and explore other printing systems more closely. +This chapter of the &tdeprint; Handbook will walk you through most of the configuration or selection options of &tdeprint;. It will mainly deal with &CUPS; in this version, as the author is most familiar with it, and also because &tdeprint; started off with supporting &CUPS; best. Later versions of the &tdeprint; software and editions of this handbook will support and explore other printing systems more closely. -Selecting Your Print Subsystem - -You need to define your print subsystem, before you are able to install any printer with the &tdeprint; framework. There are two areas where you can define this: either in &kcontrol; (The Printing Manager section), or directly and on the fly from the print dialogue. - -Navigate to TDE Menu Preferences System Printing Manager. At the bottom you can see a button that lets you select which printing subsystem you want to use. In &kde; 2.2 you can choose from the following alternatives: +Selecting Your Print Subsystem + +You need to define your print subsystem, before you are able to install any printer with the &tdeprint; framework. There are two areas where you can define this: either in &kcontrol; (The Printing Manager section), or directly and on the fly from the print dialogue. + +Navigate to TDE Menu Preferences System Printing Manager. At the bottom you can see a button that lets you select which printing subsystem you want to use. In &kde; 2.2 you can choose from the following alternatives: -&CUPS; (Common &UNIX; Printing System) +&CUPS; (Common &UNIX; Printing System) -Print through an external program (generic) +Print through an external program (generic) -LPR (Standard BSD Print System) +LPR (Standard BSD Print System) -Generic &UNIX; LPD print system (the default) +Generic &UNIX; LPD print system (the default) -RLPR environment (print to remote LPD servers from the command line) +RLPR environment (print to remote LPD servers from the command line) -Of course, the chosen system must be installed, and up and running on your box prior to your selection, or before it takes effect. +Of course, the chosen system must be installed, and up and running on your box prior to your selection, or before it takes effect. -On it's first startup, &tdeprint; will try an autodetection. This only works for: +On it's first startup, &tdeprint; will try an autodetection. This only works for: -&CUPS;, as it is checking first for a running &CUPS; daemon +&CUPS;, as it is checking first for a running &CUPS; daemon -LPD, as it is checking for a running LPD daemon, plus a printcap file. +LPD, as it is checking for a running LPD daemon, plus a printcap file. +--> -The system you choose must be installed on your system prior to your selection. The author's personal recommendation is &CUPS;. +The system you choose must be installed on your system prior to your selection. The author's personal recommendation is &CUPS;. -Once autodetected, chosen, or changed, the active print subsystem will take effect for all &kde; applications. Different users may have different print subsystems in use, if those do exist on the computer and are compliant with each other. Their settings are stored in the tdeprintrc. This file is unique to every user, and is normally installed in $HOME/.trinity/share/config/tdeprintrc. +Once autodetected, chosen, or changed, the active print subsystem will take effect for all &kde; applications. Different users may have different print subsystems in use, if those do exist on the computer and are compliant with each other. Their settings are stored in the tdeprintrc. This file is unique to every user, and is normally installed in $HOME/.trinity/share/config/tdeprintrc. -This file is not intended to be directly editable, and all available options can be set from the &tdeprint; &GUI;. +This file is not intended to be directly editable, and all available options can be set from the &tdeprint; &GUI;. -You may even select a different printer subsystem, on the fly, from the &kprinter; dialogue box. +You may even select a different printer subsystem, on the fly, from the &kprinter; dialogue box. -Working with the Printing Manager - -Once you have chosen your preferred and installed print subsystem, you are ready to investigate, configure administer and work with this system through the &tdeprint; framework. - -Navigate to TDE Menu Preferences System Printing Manager. In the right part of the window you will see at least 4 printers predefined. These are the virtual or special purpose printers, explained in section . You will probably see a toolbar with 13 icons at the top of the window, and at least 4 tabs in the lower half of the window, labelled Information, Jobs, Properties and Instances. +Working with the Printing Manager + +Once you have chosen your preferred and installed print subsystem, you are ready to investigate, configure administer and work with this system through the &tdeprint; framework. + +Navigate to TDE Menu Preferences System Printing Manager. In the right part of the window you will see at least 4 printers predefined. These are the virtual or special purpose printers, explained in section . You will probably see a toolbar with 13 icons at the top of the window, and at least 4 tabs in the lower half of the window, labelled Information, Jobs, Properties and Instances. - - - + + + - - - - + + + + @@ -64,82 +30,49 @@ -Full Print Job Control +Full Print Job Control -The Print Job Viewer is automatically started by &kprinter;. It may be docked into the &kde; panel (in the system tray). The Print Job Viewer allows full job management, if supported by the print subsystem. +The Print Job Viewer is automatically started by &kprinter;. It may be docked into the &kde; panel (in the system tray). The Print Job Viewer allows full job management, if supported by the print subsystem. -You can: +You can: -Hold and release jobs, +Hold and release jobs, -Move pending jobs to another printer, +Move pending jobs to another printer, -Cancel pending or processing jobs. +Cancel pending or processing jobs. -A screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer shows the information you get: Job-ID, target printer, job name, job owner, job status and job size. In the next &tdeprint; release you will also see information about the number of pages (as &CUPS; calculates it; see chapter on page accounting for more information about its merits and limitations). +A screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer shows the information you get: Job-ID, target printer, job name, job owner, job status and job size. In the next &tdeprint; release you will also see information about the number of pages (as &CUPS; calculates it; see chapter on page accounting for more information about its merits and limitations). -A screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer +A screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer -Here's a screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer. +Here's a screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer. - + -An alternative way to looking at the same information (and having the same amount of control is through the &kcontrolcenter; selecting SystemPrinting Manager. If you don't see the Printer Information, right click on the window background and select View Printer Information. Then go to the Jobs tab to see this: +An alternative way to looking at the same information (and having the same amount of control is through the &kcontrolcenter; selecting SystemPrinting Manager. If you don't see the Printer Information, right click on the window background and select View Printer Information. Then go to the Jobs tab to see this: - + -Here's a screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer. +Here's a screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer. @@ -147,269 +80,140 @@ -Modules for different print subsystems +Modules for different print subsystems -&tdeprint; uses different modules to realise the interface to the possible print subsystems. Not all the modules are yet developed fully, but you will have basic printing functionality with: +&tdeprint; uses different modules to realise the interface to the possible print subsystems. Not all the modules are yet developed fully, but you will have basic printing functionality with: -LPD (BSD style) +LPD (BSD style) -LPRng (&RedHat;, if you just use it's BSD style subset), +LPRng (&RedHat;, if you just use it's BSD style subset), -RLPR (a command-line LPR utility, which doesn't need a printcap file. +RLPR (a command-line LPR utility, which doesn't need a printcap file. -external print commands (&Netscape; like). +external print commands (&Netscape; like). -Most importantly, full support for &CUPS; is already there. Modules for other print subsystems, such as PLP, PPR and PDQ may be available later. +Most importantly, full support for &CUPS; is already there. Modules for other print subsystems, such as PLP, PPR and PDQ may be available later. -&tdeprint; makes &kde; much more flexible. It gives freedom of choice to &kde; 2.2 users. To use different available print subsystems, these must, of course, be installed independently from &kde;. In former versions, users were stuck with the old LPD style print subsystems. Now they can even use &CUPS;. In the future, there will be easy integration of new subsystems, as they appear on the scene. +&tdeprint; makes &kde; much more flexible. It gives freedom of choice to &kde; 2.2 users. To use different available print subsystems, these must, of course, be installed independently from &kde;. In former versions, users were stuck with the old LPD style print subsystems. Now they can even use &CUPS;. In the future, there will be easy integration of new subsystems, as they appear on the scene. -More &tdeprint; <quote ->Goodies</quote -> -Benefitting all Print SubSystems. - -Some specific features of &tdeprint; depend on the chosen print subsystem. This dependency might exist because those features are only implemented there; remember, &tdeprint; is an intermediate layer between &kde; applications, and the print subsystem, but it's no replacement for any print subsystem by itself. Such dependency may exist for another reason: that &tdeprint; has not yet implemented an interface to all the features of all the subsystems. - -Other features include benefits from &tdeprint; that are independent of the chosen print subsystem, and are available with all of them. At present there are special or virtual printers, and some generic pre-filters. +More &tdeprint; <quote>Goodies</quote> +Benefitting all Print SubSystems. + +Some specific features of &tdeprint; depend on the chosen print subsystem. This dependency might exist because those features are only implemented there; remember, &tdeprint; is an intermediate layer between &kde; applications, and the print subsystem, but it's no replacement for any print subsystem by itself. Such dependency may exist for another reason: that &tdeprint; has not yet implemented an interface to all the features of all the subsystems. + +Other features include benefits from &tdeprint; that are independent of the chosen print subsystem, and are available with all of them. At present there are special or virtual printers, and some generic pre-filters. -Print Preview +Print Preview -From the Print Dialogue, you can select to look at a preview. For this, the print file is passed through filters which make it suitable for displaying on screen using &kghostview;. +From the Print Dialogue, you can select to look at a preview. For this, the print file is passed through filters which make it suitable for displaying on screen using &kghostview;. -Special Printers +Special Printers -Amongst these additional &tdeprint; features are a few special or virtual printers: +Amongst these additional &tdeprint; features are a few special or virtual printers: -These special printers may: +These special printers may: -Print to PDF +Print to PDF -Convert your document into a PDF file with the help of an external program. +Convert your document into a PDF file with the help of an external program. -Print to email +Print to email -Send your document as an email attached PDF file. +Send your document as an email attached PDF file. -Print to PS file +Print to PS file -Save your document as a &PostScript; file. +Save your document as a &PostScript; file. -Print to Fax +Print to Fax -Send it through an available backend, such as Hylafax as a fax. +Send it through an available backend, such as Hylafax as a fax. -These special printers appear in the user print dialogue just like normal printers. They are entirely configurable on a per-user basis. +These special printers appear in the user print dialogue just like normal printers. They are entirely configurable on a per-user basis. -Generic Pre-Filtering +Generic Pre-Filtering -&tdeprint; provides you with a framework to define and configure your own pre-filters. These pre-filters may take effect before they are passed to your print subsystem for further processing, but after the (&PostScript;, plain text or other) print files have been generated by your application. - -There are a few useful filters already predefined. These are: +&tdeprint; provides you with a framework to define and configure your own pre-filters. These pre-filters may take effect before they are passed to your print subsystem for further processing, but after the (&PostScript;, plain text or other) print files have been generated by your application. + +There are a few useful filters already predefined. These are: -The multiple pages per sheet filter, +The multiple pages per sheet filter, -the enscript text filter, +the enscript text filter, -and three filters to help print pamphlets. +and three filters to help print pamphlets. -You may create your own filters based on any third party program that is able to process &PostScript;, plain text or image files, and output any one of those formats. +You may create your own filters based on any third party program that is able to process &PostScript;, plain text or image files, and output any one of those formats. -These filters are configured through XML files. This makes an extension of the concept very easy for experienced developers, but end-user configuration is also done through an intuitive graphical user interface. So, fear not, you don't need to learn XML because of &tdeprint;! +These filters are configured through XML files. This makes an extension of the concept very easy for experienced developers, but end-user configuration is also done through an intuitive graphical user interface. So, fear not, you don't need to learn XML because of &tdeprint;! -Multiple Pages Per Sheet Filter +Multiple Pages Per Sheet Filter -This is a predefined filter that installs with &tdeprint;. It allows you to create a modified &PostScript; output, from &PostScript; input, that prints 1, 2, or 4 logical pages on a single sheet of paper. +This is a predefined filter that installs with &tdeprint;. It allows you to create a modified &PostScript; output, from &PostScript; input, that prints 1, 2, or 4 logical pages on a single sheet of paper. -Enscript Text Filter +Enscript Text Filter -This is a predefined filter that installs with &tdeprint;. It allows you to create &PostScript; output from any text file input, that includes syntax highlighting for program listings, pretty-printing, and nice configurable page frames and headers. +This is a predefined filter that installs with &tdeprint;. It allows you to create &PostScript; output from any text file input, that includes syntax highlighting for program listings, pretty-printing, and nice configurable page frames and headers. -Pamphlet Printing Filters +Pamphlet Printing Filters -If your printer is able to produce duplex output, using either one-pass or two-pass technology, you may be able to use one, or a combination, of the pamphlet filters. - -For duplexing printers, make sure you use the duplex option that turns the output along the short paper edge. Folding the printed paper along the middle turns your document into a nice pamphlet. - -If you are stuck with using a simplex-only device, you can do the same, using two different filters and a few additional steps. - -Depending on your model, first use the filter for printing the odd pages, then insert the paper in the correct order back into the paper tray to get the even pages printed on the reverse side. These can then be folded to make a pamphlet. +If your printer is able to produce duplex output, using either one-pass or two-pass technology, you may be able to use one, or a combination, of the pamphlet filters. + +For duplexing printers, make sure you use the duplex option that turns the output along the short paper edge. Folding the printed paper along the middle turns your document into a nice pamphlet. + +If you are stuck with using a simplex-only device, you can do the same, using two different filters and a few additional steps. + +Depending on your model, first use the filter for printing the odd pages, then insert the paper in the correct order back into the paper tray to get the even pages printed on the reverse side. These can then be folded to make a pamphlet. @@ -420,276 +224,101 @@ -&CUPS; Support: the Most Important Module in &tdeprint; - -&tdeprint; contains a module for &CUPS;. &CUPS;, the Common &UNIX; Printing System (http://www.cups.org/), is the most advanced, powerful and flexible of all print subsystems on &UNIX; and other &UNIX;-like operating systems. It is still quite new on the horizon, but is based on IPP, the Internet Printing Protocol, the newly emerging standard for the future of network printing. &CUPS; is clearly the print system of choice for Michael Goffioul, the principal &tdeprint; developer. - -Experienced &kde; users may already be familiar with Michael's utilities qtcups and kups (co-developed with Jean-Eric Cuendet). These were, up until now, the graphical &GUI; front ends for &CUPS; with a strong relation to &kde;. +&CUPS; Support: the Most Important Module in &tdeprint; + +&tdeprint; contains a module for &CUPS;. &CUPS;, the Common &UNIX; Printing System (http://www.cups.org/), is the most advanced, powerful and flexible of all print subsystems on &UNIX; and other &UNIX;-like operating systems. It is still quite new on the horizon, but is based on IPP, the Internet Printing Protocol, the newly emerging standard for the future of network printing. &CUPS; is clearly the print system of choice for Michael Goffioul, the principal &tdeprint; developer. + +Experienced &kde; users may already be familiar with Michael's utilities qtcups and kups (co-developed with Jean-Eric Cuendet). These were, up until now, the graphical &GUI; front ends for &CUPS; with a strong relation to &kde;. -<application ->qtcups</application -> and <application ->kups</application -> — The Predecessors - -Both utilities are probably still widely used. For those not familiar with them, here are brief explanations. - -qtcups was a graphical front end for the lp or lpr print commands as installed by &CUPS;. Using qtcups opened a dialogue. This dialogue let you comfortably select your printer and the print job options. qtcups worked from the command line, or from within applications, when the application in question had a configurable print command. - -kups was a graphical wrapper to do the administration tasks for your &CUPS; server, and the &CUPS; daemon at the heart of it. You could add, delete, modify, configure, start, and stop printers. You could cancel, delete, move, stop and restart print jobs, and you could change the settings of the daemon, start, stop, and restart it. +<application>qtcups</application> and <application>kups</application> — The Predecessors + +Both utilities are probably still widely used. For those not familiar with them, here are brief explanations. + +qtcups was a graphical front end for the lp or lpr print commands as installed by &CUPS;. Using qtcups opened a dialogue. This dialogue let you comfortably select your printer and the print job options. qtcups worked from the command line, or from within applications, when the application in question had a configurable print command. + +kups was a graphical wrapper to do the administration tasks for your &CUPS; server, and the &CUPS; daemon at the heart of it. You could add, delete, modify, configure, start, and stop printers. You could cancel, delete, move, stop and restart print jobs, and you could change the settings of the daemon, start, stop, and restart it. -&tdeprint; — The Heir - -The &CUPS; Module in &tdeprint; now contains all (and more) functions that were provided by qtcups and kups in former &kde; versions. - -Instead of qtcups you can now use the kprinter command. And in place of kups you will probably use tdecmshell printmgr from now on. - -The &tdeprint; module for &CUPS; also lets you fully administer the print subsystem, just like kups did before. It can start, stop and configure your &CUPS; daemon. It can also start, stop, add and delete printers (&ie; printer queues) and printer instances. Printer instances are printer queues that point to the same physical output device but with a different default setting of print options. +&tdeprint; — The Heir + +The &CUPS; Module in &tdeprint; now contains all (and more) functions that were provided by qtcups and kups in former &kde; versions. + +Instead of qtcups you can now use the kprinter command. And in place of kups you will probably use tdecmshell printmgr from now on. + +The &tdeprint; module for &CUPS; also lets you fully administer the print subsystem, just like kups did before. It can start, stop and configure your &CUPS; daemon. It can also start, stop, add and delete printers (&ie; printer queues) and printer instances. Printer instances are printer queues that point to the same physical output device but with a different default setting of print options. -&kprinter; — Graphical Print Command - -&tdeprint;'s &CUPS; module gives you access to a graphical print command, like qtcups did before. - -Use &kprinter; in any application, even a non-&kde; application, that lets you configure your print command. Examples of these are &Netscape; and StarOffice, but not most pre-&kde; 2.2 programs. - -A screenshot how to use the new kprinter print command instead of the old-fashioned lpr... Of course you need to have kprinter in your $PATH, or give the full path in the dialogue; ⪚ /opt/kde/bin/kprinter. &Netscape; will remember this and with further print jobs you will get the kprinter dialogue to configure your printouts. +&kprinter; — Graphical Print Command + +&tdeprint;'s &CUPS; module gives you access to a graphical print command, like qtcups did before. + +Use &kprinter; in any application, even a non-&kde; application, that lets you configure your print command. Examples of these are &Netscape; and StarOffice, but not most pre-&kde; 2.2 programs. + +A screenshot how to use the new kprinter print command instead of the old-fashioned lpr... Of course you need to have kprinter in your $PATH, or give the full path in the dialogue; ⪚ /opt/kde/bin/kprinter. &Netscape; will remember this and with further print jobs you will get the kprinter dialogue to configure your printouts. -A screenshot of the kprinter print command in action. +A screenshot of the kprinter print command in action. -Here's a screenshot showing how to use the new kprinter print command instead of the old-fashioned lp or lpr in &Netscape;. +Here's a screenshot showing how to use the new kprinter print command instead of the old-fashioned lp or lpr in &Netscape;. -You can also use &kprinter; from the command line and see the resulting dialogue box pop up: +You can also use &kprinter; from the command line and see the resulting dialogue box pop up: -Screenshot of the kprinter command +Screenshot of the kprinter command -Screenshot showing use of the kprinter command from the command line. +Screenshot showing use of the kprinter command from the command line. -Just make sure you give at least the file to be printed from the command line as well: kprinter . This will hand over the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual to the kprinter dialogue, which will then pop up with the default printer pre-selected. - -To pre-select a specific printer from the command line, use the option, ⪚: kprinter . You can still de-select the printer and choose a different one. - -You cannot however call kprinter without a print file and hope to open a file selection dialogue box from the &kprinter; window. This is a feature that will be implemented only in the next version. +Just make sure you give at least the file to be printed from the command line as well: kprinter . This will hand over the &CUPS; Software Administrator Manual to the kprinter dialogue, which will then pop up with the default printer pre-selected. + +To pre-select a specific printer from the command line, use the option, ⪚: kprinter . You can still de-select the printer and choose a different one. + +You cannot however call kprinter without a print file and hope to open a file selection dialogue box from the &kprinter; window. This is a feature that will be implemented only in the next version. -Using kprinter you are able to ring all the bells and blow all the whistles of your printer. You will need a device-specific so-called &PPD; (&PostScript; Printer Description) to enable &CUPS; to make this nice tandem team do this for you. Read more about this in . +Using kprinter you are able to ring all the bells and blow all the whistles of your printer. You will need a device-specific so-called &PPD; (&PostScript; Printer Description) to enable &CUPS; to make this nice tandem team do this for you. Read more about this in . -Plans for Future Development - -What you have now is the first, already very feature-rich version of &tdeprint;. This version is, of course, fully usable for printing. You might even think that it was never so easy (not even back in the days when you had to use &Microsoft; &Windows;). - -In the future, &tdeprint; will become even better. It will do a better job of detecting your installed print subsystem itself. Already &tdeprint; is doing quite well in automatically sensing if you have &CUPS; on your system. But in many cases you will have to tell &tdeprint; what you are using, if you want to keep a legacy print system. - -The most important improvement in the near future will be a completion of the LPRng plugin. This at present is still very basic. It is restricted to the pure classical LPD part of LPRng. - -Also, you may be able to add printers directly from the print dialogue to your system just in time, without going to &kcontrol; first. - -Some smaller improvements already planned are: +Plans for Future Development + +What you have now is the first, already very feature-rich version of &tdeprint;. This version is, of course, fully usable for printing. You might even think that it was never so easy (not even back in the days when you had to use &Microsoft; &Windows;). + +In the future, &tdeprint; will become even better. It will do a better job of detecting your installed print subsystem itself. Already &tdeprint; is doing quite well in automatically sensing if you have &CUPS; on your system. But in many cases you will have to tell &tdeprint; what you are using, if you want to keep a legacy print system. + +The most important improvement in the near future will be a completion of the LPRng plugin. This at present is still very basic. It is restricted to the pure classical LPD part of LPRng. + +Also, you may be able to add printers directly from the print dialogue to your system just in time, without going to &kcontrol; first. + +Some smaller improvements already planned are: -add a file selection dialogue from the &kprinter; window to allow combining of additional files to the present printjob add a history button to the KJobViewer window and also a column to show the number of pages &CUPS; calculates for the job. +add a file selection dialogue from the &kprinter; window to allow combining of additional files to the present printjob add a history button to the KJobViewer window and also a column to show the number of pages &CUPS; calculates for the job. -Finally, there will be an IO slave that will give you access to your print subsystem, via &konqueror; for example. With this you will soon be able to browse your print subsystem from &konqueror; through a &URL; like shortcut such as print://printers/printername. A KPart will add a virtual folder to the services section of the &konqueror; navigation panel, giving a nice integrated way to browse and manage your print system via the &URL; print:/manager. - -Please contact Michael Goffioul at tdeprint@swing.be with any further user or developer suggestions. +Finally, there will be an IO slave that will give you access to your print subsystem, via &konqueror; for example. With this you will soon be able to browse your print subsystem from &konqueror; through a &URL; like shortcut such as print://printers/printername. A KPart will add a virtual folder to the services section of the &konqueror; navigation panel, giving a nice integrated way to browse and manage your print system via the &URL; print:/manager. + +Please contact Michael Goffioul at tdeprint@swing.be with any further user or developer suggestions. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/index.docbook index 47edbac8971..f511c1833f7 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/index.docbook @@ -1,24 +1,12 @@ TDEPrint"> - kprinter"> - CUPS"> - PPD"> - IPP"> - ghostscript"> + TDEPrint"> + kprinter"> + CUPS"> + PPD"> + IPP"> + ghostscript"> @@ -34,172 +22,90 @@ - + - + ]> -The &tdeprint; Handbook +The &tdeprint; Handbook -Kurt Pfeifle
kpfeifle@danka.de
+Kurt Pfeifle
kpfeifle@danka.de
 -Michael Goffioul
tdeprint@swing.be
+Michael Goffioul
tdeprint@swing.be
 -Developer +Developer -Lauri Watts
lauri@kde.org
+Lauri Watts
lauri@kde.org
 -Reviewer +Reviewer -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2001 -Kurt Pfeifle +2001 +Kurt Pfeifle -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2001-08-09 -1.00.04 +2001-08-09 +1.00.04 -This handbook describes &tdeprint;. &tdeprint; is not a standalone program. It is the new printing framework for &kde; 2.2. &tdeprint; is an intermediate layer between &kde; (or other) applications and the selected (and installed) print subsystem of your OS (&OS;). +This handbook describes &tdeprint;. &tdeprint; is not a standalone program. It is the new printing framework for &kde; 2.2. &tdeprint; is an intermediate layer between &kde; (or other) applications and the selected (and installed) print subsystem of your OS (&OS;). -KDE -tdebase -tdeprint -print -printing -CUPS -LPR +KDE +tdebase +tdeprint +print +printing +CUPS +LPR -Introduction +Introduction -This handbook describes &tdeprint;. &tdeprint; is not a standalone program. It is the new printing framework for &kde; 2.2. &tdeprint; is an intermediate layer between &kde; (or other) applications and the selected (and installed) print subsystem of your OS (&OS;). +This handbook describes &tdeprint;. &tdeprint; is not a standalone program. It is the new printing framework for &kde; 2.2. &tdeprint; is an intermediate layer between &kde; (or other) applications and the selected (and installed) print subsystem of your OS (&OS;). -It should be noted that both the developer of this application, and the author of this document are most familiar with &CUPS; as a printing system. At the time of writing, &CUPS; is the best supported printing subsystem, and it is the best documented. +It should be noted that both the developer of this application, and the author of this document are most familiar with &CUPS; as a printing system. At the time of writing, &CUPS; is the best supported printing subsystem, and it is the best documented. -This handbook is a work in progress, and later versions of the &tdeprint; software and editions of this handbook will support and explore more closely other printing systems. +This handbook is a work in progress, and later versions of the &tdeprint; software and editions of this handbook will support and explore more closely other printing systems. -In the meantime, even if your printing subsystem is not yet well covered, you are encouraged to explore the Printing Manager module in &kcontrol;, and you will find its operation to hopefully be fairly self evident, no matter what printing subsystem you use. +In the meantime, even if your printing subsystem is not yet well covered, you are encouraged to explore the Printing Manager module in &kcontrol;, and you will find its operation to hopefully be fairly self evident, no matter what printing subsystem you use. -Lauri Watts, &kde; documentation team +Lauri Watts, &kde; documentation team - + -To configure your printing subsystem from &kcontrol; - -To configure your printing subsystem from &kcontrol;, go to SystemPrinting Manager and select your subsystem. Or you can let &tdeprint; try to determine it... +To configure your printing subsystem from &kcontrol; + +To configure your printing subsystem from &kcontrol;, go to SystemPrinting Manager and select your subsystem. Or you can let &tdeprint; try to determine it... -&CUPS; Printing Manager dialogue: overview via &kcontrol; +&CUPS; Printing Manager dialogue: overview via &kcontrol; -The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: security settings - +The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: security settings + @@ -235,22 +141,10 @@ format="PNG"/> &final-word-doc; -Credits And Licences - -&tdeprint; copyright 2001, Michael Goffioul tdeprint@swing.be -&underGPL; Documentation copyright 2001, Kurt Pfeifle, kpfeifle@danka.de &underFDL; Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Credits And Licences + +&tdeprint; copyright 2001, Michael Goffioul tdeprint@swing.be +&underGPL; Documentation copyright 2001, Kurt Pfeifle, kpfeifle@danka.de &underFDL; Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpd.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpd.docbook index 8c39ba87173..e99e2abeea7 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpd.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpd.docbook @@ -1,27 +1,13 @@ -Generic <acronym ->LPD</acronym -> Module (&UNIX;) +Generic <acronym>LPD</acronym> Module (&UNIX;) -Overview of Provided Features +Overview of Provided Features -Module used by default (on first start for example). +Module used by default (on first start for example). -Generic module that only allows sending of print jobs. No printer or job management supported. It is made to work on a wide variety of &UNIX; flavours: &Linux;/LPR, &HP-UX;, Solaris, &IRIX;. It also supports some LPRng extensions (like the absence of continuation character \ in printcap files). +Generic module that only allows sending of print jobs. No printer or job management supported. It is made to work on a wide variety of &UNIX; flavours: &Linux;/LPR, &HP-UX;, Solaris, &IRIX;. It also supports some LPRng extensions (like the absence of continuation character \ in printcap files). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpr-bsd.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpr-bsd.docbook index 9d6bcbbf86d..cda258b7be3 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpr-bsd.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lpr-bsd.docbook @@ -1,36 +1,20 @@ -<acronym ->LPR</acronym -> (<acronym ->BSD</acronym ->) +<acronym>LPR</acronym> (<acronym>BSD</acronym>) -Plain (old?) LPR support. An LPRng module is in development, and hopefully available for 2.3 release. +Plain (old?) LPR support. An LPRng module is in development, and hopefully available for 2.3 release. -Overview of Provided Features +Overview of Provided Features -Printer management: basic support to add/remove/configure a printer, compatible with &RedHat;-6.x systems (printtool + rhs-printfilers packages). +Printer management: basic support to add/remove/configure a printer, compatible with &RedHat;-6.x systems (printtool + rhs-printfilers packages). -Job management: not supported +Job management: not supported -Print options: basic control +Print options: basic control diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lprng.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lprng.docbook index 193747db5f2..a765cbc23ff 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lprng.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/lprng.docbook @@ -1,12 +1,6 @@ -<application ->LPRng</application -> +<application>LPRng</application> -An LPRng module for &tdeprint; is in development, and hopefully available for the &kde; 2.3 release. +An LPRng module for &tdeprint; is in development, and hopefully available for the &kde; 2.3 release. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/rlpr.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/rlpr.docbook index 88b2ac1dd7b..3c7858fda5d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/rlpr.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/rlpr.docbook @@ -1,24 +1,12 @@ -Module Built Around <application ->rlpr</application -> Utility +Module Built Around <application>rlpr</application> Utility -Overview of provided features +Overview of provided features -Printer management: basic operations are supported (add/remove/modify). +Printer management: basic operations are supported (add/remove/modify). -Each user can predefine the printers he wants to use by specifying the host and related printer queues. Printers are stored on a per user basis. This module is built around the rlpr utility rlpr +Each user can predefine the printers he wants to use by specifying the host and related printer queues. Printers are stored on a per user basis. This module is built around the rlpr utility rlpr diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/tech-overview.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/tech-overview.docbook index 05bfbc915c4..37fa1a89985 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/tech-overview.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/tech-overview.docbook @@ -1,164 +1,86 @@ -Technical Overview +Technical Overview -This chapter aims to give a technical overview of &tdeprint; which non-programmers can comprehend. +This chapter aims to give a technical overview of &tdeprint; which non-programmers can comprehend. -&tdeprint; is a new and revolutionary tool to give easy access to printing services for both &kde; users and &kde; developers. +&tdeprint; is a new and revolutionary tool to give easy access to printing services for both &kde; users and &kde; developers. -A Brief Description of &tdeprint; +A Brief Description of &tdeprint; -You can access the functions of &tdeprint; in different ways: through the Printing Manger in the &kcontrol;, through the kprinter command or through the dialogue that pops up if you want to print. +You can access the functions of &tdeprint; in different ways: through the Printing Manger in the &kcontrol;, through the kprinter command or through the dialogue that pops up if you want to print. -What it is <emphasis ->not</emphasis -> - -&tdeprint; is not a replacement for the printing subsystem itself. &tdeprint; does not therefore give provision for spooling, and it does not do the basic processing of &PostScript; or other print data. +What it is <emphasis>not</emphasis> + +&tdeprint; is not a replacement for the printing subsystem itself. &tdeprint; does not therefore give provision for spooling, and it does not do the basic processing of &PostScript; or other print data. -What it <emphasis ->is</emphasis -> -&tdeprint; is an intermediate layer between the spooling and the data processing print subsystem (as installed), and the application that seeks to print. &tdeprint; provides a common interface for &kde; developers and &kde; users, to various supported print subsystems. At the same time, it is customisable, and highly configurable. +What it <emphasis>is</emphasis> +&tdeprint; is an intermediate layer between the spooling and the data processing print subsystem (as installed), and the application that seeks to print. &tdeprint; provides a common interface for &kde; developers and &kde; users, to various supported print subsystems. At the same time, it is customisable, and highly configurable. -&tdeprint; is easy to use for both &kde; developers and end-users. Developers can port their applications, with minimal changes, to use &tdeprint; instead of the old &Qt; print system. Users can easily choose and configure their print subsystem. +&tdeprint; is easy to use for both &kde; developers and end-users. Developers can port their applications, with minimal changes, to use &tdeprint; instead of the old &Qt; print system. Users can easily choose and configure their print subsystem. -For a reference to new &kde; users: &Qt; is the basic library and graphical toolkit, which is used by all &kde; applications; &Qt; is developed by TrollTech, a Norwegian software company. +For a reference to new &kde; users: &Qt; is the basic library and graphical toolkit, which is used by all &kde; applications; &Qt; is developed by TrollTech, a Norwegian software company. -&tdeprint; -- Different Usage for Different People +&tdeprint; -- Different Usage for Different People -&tdeprint; has different faces for different people. +&tdeprint; has different faces for different people. -What users and administrators can do with &tdeprint; - -&tdeprint; allows users and/or administrators, depending on their rights, access to printing subsystems (&CUPS;, LPD, RLPR, LPRng, PDQ &etc;) through a &kde; graphical user interface (&GUI;). Using &tdeprint;, they can print, administer jobs, printers and the printing daemon, all in a comfortable manner. - -Experienced users will like the capability to plug any working filter for the print data between the output of their application and the input, into the chosen print subsystem. Some examples for this already ship with plain vanilla &tdeprint;. Read on. +What users and administrators can do with &tdeprint; + +&tdeprint; allows users and/or administrators, depending on their rights, access to printing subsystems (&CUPS;, LPD, RLPR, LPRng, PDQ &etc;) through a &kde; graphical user interface (&GUI;). Using &tdeprint;, they can print, administer jobs, printers and the printing daemon, all in a comfortable manner. + +Experienced users will like the capability to plug any working filter for the print data between the output of their application and the input, into the chosen print subsystem. Some examples for this already ship with plain vanilla &tdeprint;. Read on. -What &kde; developers can do with it... - -If a &kde; developer needs printing access for his application, he does not code the printing functions from scratch. Before &kde; 2.2 this service was provided by the QPrinter class, a library function of the &Qt; Toolkit. The QPrinter class relied on the out-moded Line Printer Daemon (LPD). The &tdeprint; library bases itself firmly on the more modern Common &UNIX; Printing System (&CUPS;), while at the same time keeping backward compatibility with LPD and other legacy, or less elaborate, print systems. It also leaves the door open for any new development that might occur. - -For &kde; developers to use the new &tdeprint; class in their applications, they require only minimal changes to their code: for every call of QPrinter, they just need to change this to KPrinter. Replacing one (!) letter in a few spots, and automatically they are done; their application can then use all of the features of the new &tdeprint; library. - -More ambitious developers, or ones with special requirements, can do more: despite &tdeprint;'s feature-rich framework, they are still able to customise the print dialogue of their application by creating an additional Tab, where their extensions to the standard &tdeprint; will feel right at home. - - -This last mentioned feature has not been used widely inside &kde; so far, as developers are not yet fully aware of &tdeprint;'s power. Expect more of this in the near future. One example I discovered is the &kcron; application. It lets you edit the crontab through a &GUI;. The developers have implemented a printing feature that lets you (or root) choose if you want to print the whole of crontab (for all users) or just the part that is marked. You can see the effects on &tdeprint; in the following screenshots. - -This shot shows a sample from the &kcron; utility. -&kcron; utility: a small sample of a system's cronjobs as shown through the &kde; GUI&GUI;. +What &kde; developers can do with it... + +If a &kde; developer needs printing access for his application, he does not code the printing functions from scratch. Before &kde; 2.2 this service was provided by the QPrinter class, a library function of the &Qt; Toolkit. The QPrinter class relied on the out-moded Line Printer Daemon (LPD). The &tdeprint; library bases itself firmly on the more modern Common &UNIX; Printing System (&CUPS;), while at the same time keeping backward compatibility with LPD and other legacy, or less elaborate, print systems. It also leaves the door open for any new development that might occur. + +For &kde; developers to use the new &tdeprint; class in their applications, they require only minimal changes to their code: for every call of QPrinter, they just need to change this to KPrinter. Replacing one (!) letter in a few spots, and automatically they are done; their application can then use all of the features of the new &tdeprint; library. + +More ambitious developers, or ones with special requirements, can do more: despite &tdeprint;'s feature-rich framework, they are still able to customise the print dialogue of their application by creating an additional Tab, where their extensions to the standard &tdeprint; will feel right at home. + + +This last mentioned feature has not been used widely inside &kde; so far, as developers are not yet fully aware of &tdeprint;'s power. Expect more of this in the near future. One example I discovered is the &kcron; application. It lets you edit the crontab through a &GUI;. The developers have implemented a printing feature that lets you (or root) choose if you want to print the whole of crontab (for all users) or just the part that is marked. You can see the effects on &tdeprint; in the following screenshots. + +This shot shows a sample from the &kcron; utility. +&kcron; utility: a small sample of a system's cronjobs as shown through the &kde; GUI&GUI;. -The &kcron; developers let you choose to print the whole of the cron table or just the marked part of it. +The &kcron; developers let you choose to print the whole of the cron table or just the marked part of it. -The dialogue to configure &kcron;'s printing options: the additional tab titled Cron Options is from inside &kcron;, not &tdeprint;; it is a special extension added by the &kcron; developers for printing purposes, not originating from, but executed by &tdeprint;. Developers of other applications are free to implement their own goodies, if they feel need for it. +The dialogue to configure &kcron;'s printing options: the additional tab titled Cron Options is from inside &kcron;, not &tdeprint;; it is a special extension added by the &kcron; developers for printing purposes, not originating from, but executed by &tdeprint;. Developers of other applications are free to implement their own goodies, if they feel need for it. -&kcron;'s addition to the &tdeprint; dialogue. +&kcron;'s addition to the &tdeprint; dialogue. -&kcron;'s addition to the &tdeprint; dialogue. +&kcron;'s addition to the &tdeprint; dialogue. @@ -166,161 +88,69 @@ format="PNG"/> -What &tdeprint; offers to everybody... - -&tdeprint;'s easy-to-use interface for all supported print subsystems of course does not eliminate basic traditional weaknesses of some of those systems. But it smooths some rough edges. Different users may use different printing systems on the same box. A user is free to even switch on the fly, from the print dialogue, the print subsystem to be used for the next job. (This is possible if different systems are installed in a way that they don't get in each other's way.) - -Most &UNIX; users are used to LPD printing. LPD provides only basic printing functions, is very inflexible and does not utilise the many options of more modern print systems like &CUPS;. While also working remotely over any distance (like every TCP/IP based protocol), LPD lacks bi-directional communication, authentication, access control and encryption support. - -&tdeprint; can use &CUPS; to support: +What &tdeprint; offers to everybody... + +&tdeprint;'s easy-to-use interface for all supported print subsystems of course does not eliminate basic traditional weaknesses of some of those systems. But it smooths some rough edges. Different users may use different printing systems on the same box. A user is free to even switch on the fly, from the print dialogue, the print subsystem to be used for the next job. (This is possible if different systems are installed in a way that they don't get in each other's way.) + +Most &UNIX; users are used to LPD printing. LPD provides only basic printing functions, is very inflexible and does not utilise the many options of more modern print systems like &CUPS;. While also working remotely over any distance (like every TCP/IP based protocol), LPD lacks bi-directional communication, authentication, access control and encryption support. + +&tdeprint; can use &CUPS; to support: -Querying the LAN for available printers, +Querying the LAN for available printers, -Basic, Digest, and Certificate Authentication, +Basic, Digest, and Certificate Authentication, -Access Control based on IP addresses, net addresses, netmasks, host- and domain names, +Access Control based on IP addresses, net addresses, netmasks, host- and domain names, -and 128-Bit TLS or SSL3 encryption of print data, to prevent eavesdropping, or at least make it much more difficult. +and 128-Bit TLS or SSL3 encryption of print data, to prevent eavesdropping, or at least make it much more difficult. -This makes &tdeprint; a much more robust and reliable solution than using the venerable LPD. +This makes &tdeprint; a much more robust and reliable solution than using the venerable LPD. -How to access &tdeprint; +How to access &tdeprint; -You get access to &tdeprint;, or parts of it, in four different ways: +You get access to &tdeprint;, or parts of it, in four different ways: -through your applications: if you call the printing dialogue (either File Print...) or the button with the little printer icon on it; this opens the printing dialogue. - -through the typed command kprinter in a terminal or a &konsole; window or from the Run Command... mini-CLI window: this also opens the printing dialogue. - -from the button, starting &kcontrol;, and then go to SystemPrinting Manager. This opens the &tdeprint; administration which is part of the &kcontrolcenter; and also lets you switch to other parts of the &kcontrol; - -from a command line (&konsole; or mini-CLI) type tdecmshell . This opens just the &tdeprint; part of &kcontrol; to change your settings +through your applications: if you call the printing dialogue (either File Print...) or the button with the little printer icon on it; this opens the printing dialogue. + +through the typed command kprinter in a terminal or a &konsole; window or from the Run Command... mini-CLI window: this also opens the printing dialogue. + +from the button, starting &kcontrol;, and then go to SystemPrinting Manager. This opens the &tdeprint; administration which is part of the &kcontrolcenter; and also lets you switch to other parts of the &kcontrol; + +from a command line (&konsole; or mini-CLI) type tdecmshell . This opens just the &tdeprint; part of &kcontrol; to change your settings -&kprinter; dialogue to be started from Run Command... window +&kprinter; dialogue to be started from Run Command... window -Starting the &kprinter; dialogue from a Run Command... window. - +Starting the &kprinter; dialogue from a Run Command... window. + -Here is a &kivio; drawing of the &kprinter; dialogue as it pops up after being started... You can always add a new printer by clicking on the small Wizard button (marked red/yellow in this drawing). +Here is a &kivio; drawing of the &kprinter; dialogue as it pops up after being started... You can always add a new printer by clicking on the small Wizard button (marked red/yellow in this drawing). -&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing) +&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing) -&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing) - +&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing) + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/theory.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/theory.docbook index d39e0969f85..7578f1a633b 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/theory.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdeprint/theory.docbook @@ -1,75 +1,36 @@ -Some Theoretical Background: &CUPS;, <acronym ->IPP</acronym ->, &PostScript; and <application ->Ghostscript</application -> - -This chapter aims to give a bit of theoretical background to printing in general, and to &CUPS; especially. If you are not in need of this, you might like to skip ahead to the next chapter. Chances are you will come back to this chapter at some point anyway, because sometimes one needs extra theory to solve a practical problem. +Some Theoretical Background: &CUPS;, <acronym>IPP</acronym>, &PostScript; and <application>Ghostscript</application> + +This chapter aims to give a bit of theoretical background to printing in general, and to &CUPS; especially. If you are not in need of this, you might like to skip ahead to the next chapter. Chances are you will come back to this chapter at some point anyway, because sometimes one needs extra theory to solve a practical problem. -Basics About Printing +Basics About Printing -Printing is one of the more complicated chapters in IT technology. +Printing is one of the more complicated chapters in IT technology. -Earlier on in history, every developer of a program that was capable of producing printable output had to write his own printer drivers too. That was quite complicated, because different programs have different file formats. Even programs with the same purpose, for example: word processors, often do not understand each other's formats. There was therefore no common interface to all printers, hence the programmers often supported only a few selected models. +Earlier on in history, every developer of a program that was capable of producing printable output had to write his own printer drivers too. That was quite complicated, because different programs have different file formats. Even programs with the same purpose, for example: word processors, often do not understand each other's formats. There was therefore no common interface to all printers, hence the programmers often supported only a few selected models. -A new device appearing on the market required the program authors to write a new driver if they wanted their program to support it. Also for manufacturers, it was impossible to make sure their device was supported by any program known to the world (although there were far fewer than today). +A new device appearing on the market required the program authors to write a new driver if they wanted their program to support it. Also for manufacturers, it was impossible to make sure their device was supported by any program known to the world (although there were far fewer than today). -Having to support ten application programs and a dozen printers, meant a system administrator had to deal with 120 drivers. So the development of unified interfaces between programs and printers became an urgent need. +Having to support ten application programs and a dozen printers, meant a system administrator had to deal with 120 drivers. So the development of unified interfaces between programs and printers became an urgent need. -The appearance of Page Description Languages, describing the graphical representation of ink and toner on sheets of paper (or other output devices, like monitors, photo typesetters, &etc;) in a common way, was a move that filled a big gap. +The appearance of Page Description Languages, describing the graphical representation of ink and toner on sheets of paper (or other output devices, like monitors, photo typesetters, &etc;) in a common way, was a move that filled a big gap. -One such development was &PostScript; by Adobe. It meant that an application programmer could concentrate on making his program generate a &PostScript; language description of his printable page, while printing device developers could focus on making their devices &PostScript; literate. +One such development was &PostScript; by Adobe. It meant that an application programmer could concentrate on making his program generate a &PostScript; language description of his printable page, while printing device developers could focus on making their devices &PostScript; literate. -Of course, over time, there came the development of other description methods. The most important competitors to &PostScript; were PCL (Print Control Language, from &Hewlett-Packard;), ESC/P (from Epson) and GDI (Graphical Device Interface from &Microsoft;). +Of course, over time, there came the development of other description methods. The most important competitors to &PostScript; were PCL (Print Control Language, from &Hewlett-Packard;), ESC/P (from Epson) and GDI (Graphical Device Interface from &Microsoft;). -The appearance of these page description languages made life easier, and facilitated further development for everybody. Yet the fact that there still remained different, incompatible, and competing page description languages keeps life for users, administrators, developers and manufacturers difficult enough. +The appearance of these page description languages made life easier, and facilitated further development for everybody. Yet the fact that there still remained different, incompatible, and competing page description languages keeps life for users, administrators, developers and manufacturers difficult enough. -&PostScript; in memory - Bitmaps on Paper +&PostScript; in memory - Bitmaps on Paper -&PostScript; is most heavily used in professional printing environments such as PrePress and printing service industries. In the &UNIX; and &Linux; domains, &PostScript; is the predominant standard as a PDL. Here, nearly every program generates a &PostScript; representation of its pages once you push the Print button. Let us look at a simple example of (hand-made) &PostScript; code. The following listing describes two simple drawings: +&PostScript; is most heavily used in professional printing environments such as PrePress and printing service industries. In the &UNIX; and &Linux; domains, &PostScript; is the predominant standard as a PDL. Here, nearly every program generates a &PostScript; representation of its pages once you push the Print button. Let us look at a simple example of (hand-made) &PostScript; code. The following listing describes two simple drawings: -&PostScript; Code -%!PS +&PostScript; Code +%!PS 100 100 moveto 0 50 rlineto 50 0 rlineto @@ -85,193 +46,98 @@ closepath .2 setgray fill -This tells the imaginary &PostScript; pen to draw a path of a certain shape, and then fill it with different shades of grey. The first part translates into more comprehensive English as Go to coordinate (100,100), draw a line with length 50 upward; then one from there to the right, then down again, and finally close this part. Now fill the drawn shape with 70% darkness grey. +This tells the imaginary &PostScript; pen to draw a path of a certain shape, and then fill it with different shades of grey. The first part translates into more comprehensive English as Go to coordinate (100,100), draw a line with length 50 upward; then one from there to the right, then down again, and finally close this part. Now fill the drawn shape with 70% darkness grey. -Rendered &PostScript; +Rendered &PostScript; - example rendered as an image. + example rendered as an image. -Of course, &PostScript; can be much more complicated than this simplistic example. It is a fully fledged programming language with many different operators and functions. You may even write &PostScript; programs to compute the value of Pi, format a hard disk or write to a file. The main value and strength of &PostScript; however lies in the field to describe the layout of graphical objects on a page: it also can scale, mirror, translate, transform, rotate and distort everything you can imagine on a piece of paper -- such as letters in different font representations, figures, shapes, shades, colours, lines, dots, raster... +Of course, &PostScript; can be much more complicated than this simplistic example. It is a fully fledged programming language with many different operators and functions. You may even write &PostScript; programs to compute the value of Pi, format a hard disk or write to a file. The main value and strength of &PostScript; however lies in the field to describe the layout of graphical objects on a page: it also can scale, mirror, translate, transform, rotate and distort everything you can imagine on a piece of paper -- such as letters in different font representations, figures, shapes, shades, colours, lines, dots, raster... -A &PostScript; file is a representation of one or more pages to be printed, in a relatively abstract way. Ideally, it is meant to describe the pages in a device-independent way. &PostScript; is not directly visible; it only lives on hard disks and in RAM as a coded representation of future printouts. +A &PostScript; file is a representation of one or more pages to be printed, in a relatively abstract way. Ideally, it is meant to describe the pages in a device-independent way. &PostScript; is not directly visible; it only lives on hard disks and in RAM as a coded representation of future printouts. -Raster Images on Paper Sheets - -What you see on a piece of paper is nearly always a raster image. Even if your brain suggests to you that your eyes see a line: take a good magnifying glass and you will discover lots of small dots... (One example to the contrary are lines that have been drawn by pen plotters). And that is the only thing that the marking engines of today's printers can put on paper: simple dots of different colours, size and resolution, to make up a complete page image composed of different bitmap patterns. - -Different printers need the raster image prepared in different ways. Thinking about an inkjet device: depending on its resolution, the number of inks used (the very good ones need 7 different inks, while cheaper ones might only use 3), the number of available jets (some print heads have more than 100!) dispensing ink simultaneously, the dithering algorithm used, and many other things, the final raster format and transfer order to the marking engine is heavily dependent on the exact model used. - -Back in the early life of the Line Printer Daemon, printers were machines that hammered rows of ASCII text mechanically on to long media, folded as a zig-zag paper snake, drawn from a cardboard box beneath the table... What a difference from today! +Raster Images on Paper Sheets + +What you see on a piece of paper is nearly always a raster image. Even if your brain suggests to you that your eyes see a line: take a good magnifying glass and you will discover lots of small dots... (One example to the contrary are lines that have been drawn by pen plotters). And that is the only thing that the marking engines of today's printers can put on paper: simple dots of different colours, size and resolution, to make up a complete page image composed of different bitmap patterns. + +Different printers need the raster image prepared in different ways. Thinking about an inkjet device: depending on its resolution, the number of inks used (the very good ones need 7 different inks, while cheaper ones might only use 3), the number of available jets (some print heads have more than 100!) dispensing ink simultaneously, the dithering algorithm used, and many other things, the final raster format and transfer order to the marking engine is heavily dependent on the exact model used. + +Back in the early life of the Line Printer Daemon, printers were machines that hammered rows of ASCII text mechanically on to long media, folded as a zig-zag paper snake, drawn from a cardboard box beneath the table... What a difference from today! -<acronym ->RIP</acronym ->: From &PostScript; to Raster - -Before the final raster images are put on paper cut-sheets, they have to be calculated somehow out of their abstract &PostScript; representation. This is a very computing-intensive process. It is called the Raster Imaging Process, more commonly RIP). - -With &PostScript; printers the RIP-ping is taken care of by the device itself. You just send the &PostScript; file to it. The Raster Imaging Processor (also called the RIP) inside the printer is responsible (and specialized) to fulfill quite well this task of interpreting the &PostScript;-page descriptions and put the raster image on paper. - -Smaller &PostScript; devices have a hardware-RIP built in; it is etched in silicon, on a special chip. Big professional printers often have their RIP implemented as a software-RIP inside a dedicated fast &UNIX; run computer, often a Sun SPARC Solaris or a &SGI; &IRIX; machine. +<acronym>RIP</acronym>: From &PostScript; to Raster + +Before the final raster images are put on paper cut-sheets, they have to be calculated somehow out of their abstract &PostScript; representation. This is a very computing-intensive process. It is called the Raster Imaging Process, more commonly RIP). + +With &PostScript; printers the RIP-ping is taken care of by the device itself. You just send the &PostScript; file to it. The Raster Imaging Processor (also called the RIP) inside the printer is responsible (and specialized) to fulfill quite well this task of interpreting the &PostScript;-page descriptions and put the raster image on paper. + +Smaller &PostScript; devices have a hardware-RIP built in; it is etched in silicon, on a special chip. Big professional printers often have their RIP implemented as a software-RIP inside a dedicated fast &UNIX; run computer, often a Sun SPARC Solaris or a &SGI; &IRIX; machine. -<application ->Ghostscript</application -> as a Software <acronym ->RIP</acronym -> +<application>Ghostscript</application> as a Software <acronym>RIP</acronym> -But what happens, if you are not lucky enough to have a &PostScript; printer available? +But what happens, if you are not lucky enough to have a &PostScript; printer available? -You need to do the RIP-ing before you send the print data to the marking engine. You need to digest the &PostScript; generated by your application on the host machine (the print client) itself. You need to know how the exact raster format of the target printer's marking engine must be composed. +You need to do the RIP-ing before you send the print data to the marking engine. You need to digest the &PostScript; generated by your application on the host machine (the print client) itself. You need to know how the exact raster format of the target printer's marking engine must be composed. -In other words, as you can't rely on the printer to understand and interpret the &PostScript; itself, the issue becomes quite a bit more complicated. You need software that tries to solve for you the issues involved. +In other words, as you can't rely on the printer to understand and interpret the &PostScript; itself, the issue becomes quite a bit more complicated. You need software that tries to solve for you the issues involved. -This is exactly what the omnipresent &ghostscript; package is doing for many &Linux;, *BSD and other &UNIX; boxes that need to print to non-&PostScript; printers: &ghostscript; is a &PostScript; interpreter, a software RIP capable of running many different devices. +This is exactly what the omnipresent &ghostscript; package is doing for many &Linux;, *BSD and other &UNIX; boxes that need to print to non-&PostScript; printers: &ghostscript; is a &PostScript; interpreter, a software RIP capable of running many different devices. -<quote ->Drivers</quote -> and <quote ->Filters</quote -> in General - -To produce rasterised bitmaps from &PostScript; input, the concept of filters is used by &ghostscript;. There are many different filters in &ghostscript;, some of them specialised for a certain model of printer. &ghostscript; filterspecializedin devices have often been developed without the consent or support of the manufacturer concerned. Without access to the specifications and documentation, it was a very painstaking process to reverse engineer protocols and data formats. - -Not all &ghostscript; filters work equally well for their printers. Yet, some of the newer ones, like the stp Filter of the Gimp Print project, produce excellent results leading to photographic quality on a par or even superior to their &Microsoft; &Windows; driver counterparts. - -&PostScript; is what most application programs produce for printing in &UNIX; and &Linux;. Filters are the true workhorses of any printing system there. Essentially they produce the right bitmaps from any &PostScript; input for non-&PostScript; target engines. +<quote>Drivers</quote> and <quote>Filters</quote> in General + +To produce rasterised bitmaps from &PostScript; input, the concept of filters is used by &ghostscript;. There are many different filters in &ghostscript;, some of them specialised for a certain model of printer. &ghostscript; filterspecializedin devices have often been developed without the consent or support of the manufacturer concerned. Without access to the specifications and documentation, it was a very painstaking process to reverse engineer protocols and data formats. + +Not all &ghostscript; filters work equally well for their printers. Yet, some of the newer ones, like the stp Filter of the Gimp Print project, produce excellent results leading to photographic quality on a par or even superior to their &Microsoft; &Windows; driver counterparts. + +&PostScript; is what most application programs produce for printing in &UNIX; and &Linux;. Filters are the true workhorses of any printing system there. Essentially they produce the right bitmaps from any &PostScript; input for non-&PostScript; target engines. -Drivers and Filters and Backends in CUPS +Drivers and Filters and Backends in CUPS -&CUPS; uses its own filters, though the filtering system is based on Ghostscript. Namely the pstoraster and the imagetoraster filters are directly derived from Ghostscript code. &CUPS; has reorganised and streamlined the whole mechanics of this legacy code and organised it into a few clear and distinct modules. +&CUPS; uses its own filters, though the filtering system is based on Ghostscript. Namely the pstoraster and the imagetoraster filters are directly derived from Ghostscript code. &CUPS; has reorganised and streamlined the whole mechanics of this legacy code and organised it into a few clear and distinct modules. -This next drawing (done with the help of &kivio;) gives an overview of the filters and backends inside &CUPS; and how they fit together. The flow is from top to bottom. Backends are special filters: they don't convert date to a different format, but they send the ready files to the printer. There are different backends for different transfer protocols. +This next drawing (done with the help of &kivio;) gives an overview of the filters and backends inside &CUPS; and how they fit together. The flow is from top to bottom. Backends are special filters: they don't convert date to a different format, but they send the ready files to the printer. There are different backends for different transfer protocols. -&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing) +&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing) -&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing) +&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing) -Spoolers and Printing Daemons +Spoolers and Printing Daemons -Besides the heavy part of the filtering task to generate a print-ready bitmap, any printing software needs to use a SPOOLing mechanism: this is to line up different jobs from different users for different printers and different filters and send them accordingly to the destinations. The printing daemon takes care of all this. +Besides the heavy part of the filtering task to generate a print-ready bitmap, any printing software needs to use a SPOOLing mechanism: this is to line up different jobs from different users for different printers and different filters and send them accordingly to the destinations. The printing daemon takes care of all this. -This daemon is keeping the house in order: it is also responsible for the job control: users should be allowed to cancel, stop, restart, &etc; their jobs (but not other peoples's jobs) and so on. +This daemon is keeping the house in order: it is also responsible for the job control: users should be allowed to cancel, stop, restart, &etc; their jobs (but not other peoples's jobs) and so on. @@ -280,258 +146,117 @@ format="PNG"/> -Excursion: How <quote ->CUPS</quote -> uses the power of &PPD;s - -Now that you know how a &PostScript; language file (which describes the page layout in a largely device independent way) is transformed into a Raster Image, you might ask: Well, there are different kinds of raster output devices: first they differ in their resolution; then there are the different paper sizes; it goes on with many finishing options (duplex prints, pamphlets, punched and stapled output with different sheets of coloured paper being drawn from different trays, &etc;). How does this fit into our model of device-independent &PostScript;? - -The answer comes with so called &PostScript; Printer Description (&PPD; files. A &PPD; describes all the device dependent features which can be utilised by a certain printer model. It also contains the coded commands that must be used to call certain features of the device. But &PPD;s are not a closed book, they are simple ASCII text files. - -&PPD;s were invented by Adobe to make it easy for manufacturers to implement their own features into &PostScript; printers, and at the same time retain a standard way of doing so. &PPD;s are well documented and described by Adobe. Their specification is a de-facto open standard. +Excursion: How <quote>CUPS</quote> uses the power of &PPD;s + +Now that you know how a &PostScript; language file (which describes the page layout in a largely device independent way) is transformed into a Raster Image, you might ask: Well, there are different kinds of raster output devices: first they differ in their resolution; then there are the different paper sizes; it goes on with many finishing options (duplex prints, pamphlets, punched and stapled output with different sheets of coloured paper being drawn from different trays, &etc;). How does this fit into our model of device-independent &PostScript;? + +The answer comes with so called &PostScript; Printer Description (&PPD; files. A &PPD; describes all the device dependent features which can be utilised by a certain printer model. It also contains the coded commands that must be used to call certain features of the device. But &PPD;s are not a closed book, they are simple ASCII text files. + +&PPD;s were invented by Adobe to make it easy for manufacturers to implement their own features into &PostScript; printers, and at the same time retain a standard way of doing so. &PPD;s are well documented and described by Adobe. Their specification is a de-facto open standard. -Device Dependent Print Options +Device Dependent Print Options -Remember, advanced &PostScript; printing was originally only developed for use on &Microsoft; &Windows; and Apple &Mac; systems. For a long time, all of the feature rich printing on modern devices was simply unavailable for &Linux; and &UNIX;. &CUPS; changes this decisively. &CUPS; is closely tied with &PPD;s, and therefore existing &PPD;s can be utilised to the full by all systems powered by &CUPS;. +Remember, advanced &PostScript; printing was originally only developed for use on &Microsoft; &Windows; and Apple &Mac; systems. For a long time, all of the feature rich printing on modern devices was simply unavailable for &Linux; and &UNIX;. &CUPS; changes this decisively. &CUPS; is closely tied with &PPD;s, and therefore existing &PPD;s can be utilised to the full by all systems powered by &CUPS;. -Using &PPD;s, printer manufacturers were able to insert device-specific hardware features into their products, for features such as duplexing, stapling, punching, finishing, &etc;. The printer drivers load this &PPD; just like an additional configuration file. Thus the printer driver learns about the available device options and how to call them; the driver also presents them in a &GUI; to the user. Through this mechanism you are still able to print device-independent &PostScript; page description language files and specify device-dependent finishing options on top, which are added to the application-generated &PostScript;. +Using &PPD;s, printer manufacturers were able to insert device-specific hardware features into their products, for features such as duplexing, stapling, punching, finishing, &etc;. The printer drivers load this &PPD; just like an additional configuration file. Thus the printer driver learns about the available device options and how to call them; the driver also presents them in a &GUI; to the user. Through this mechanism you are still able to print device-independent &PostScript; page description language files and specify device-dependent finishing options on top, which are added to the application-generated &PostScript;. -Where to get the &PPD;s for &PostScript; Printers +Where to get the &PPD;s for &PostScript; Printers -&PPD;s originally were not used routinely in &UNIX; and &Linux; systems. The vendors providing those &PPD;s never intended them for anything other than the originally supported &OS;s: &Microsoft; &Windows; and &MacOS;. Through its brilliant move to fully support and utilise the existing &PPD; specification, &CUPS; now gives the power to use all features of modern printers to users of &Linux; and &Linux;-like systems. &tdeprint; makes its usage even more comfortable than the &CUPS; developers ever dreamed of. +&PPD;s originally were not used routinely in &UNIX; and &Linux; systems. The vendors providing those &PPD;s never intended them for anything other than the originally supported &OS;s: &Microsoft; &Windows; and &MacOS;. Through its brilliant move to fully support and utilise the existing &PPD; specification, &CUPS; now gives the power to use all features of modern printers to users of &Linux; and &Linux;-like systems. &tdeprint; makes its usage even more comfortable than the &CUPS; developers ever dreamed of. -&CUPS; can use original &Windows; &PPD;s, distributed by the vendors in the case of &PostScript; printers. Those normally don't cost any money, and they can be grabbed from any &Windows; computer with an installed &PostScript; driver for the model concerned, or from the disks provided with the printer. There are also several places on the web to download them. +&CUPS; can use original &Windows; &PPD;s, distributed by the vendors in the case of &PostScript; printers. Those normally don't cost any money, and they can be grabbed from any &Windows; computer with an installed &PostScript; driver for the model concerned, or from the disks provided with the printer. There are also several places on the web to download them. -How Special &PPD;s are Now Useful Even For Non-&PostScript; Printers. +How Special &PPD;s are Now Useful Even For Non-&PostScript; Printers. -Now you know how &PostScript;-Printers can use &PPD;s. But what about non-&PostScript; printers? &CUPS; has done a very good trick: by using the same format and data structure as the &PostScript; Printer Descriptions (&PPD;s) in the &PostScript; world, it can describe the available print job options for non-&PostScript; printers just the same. For its own special purposes &CUPS; just added a few special options (namely the line which defines the filter to be used for further processing of the &PostScript; file). +Now you know how &PostScript;-Printers can use &PPD;s. But what about non-&PostScript; printers? &CUPS; has done a very good trick: by using the same format and data structure as the &PostScript; Printer Descriptions (&PPD;s) in the &PostScript; world, it can describe the available print job options for non-&PostScript; printers just the same. For its own special purposes &CUPS; just added a few special options (namely the line which defines the filter to be used for further processing of the &PostScript; file). -So, the developers could use the same software engine to parse the Printer Description Files for available options for all sorts of printers. Of course the &CUPS; developers could not rely on the non-&PostScript; hardware manufacturers to suddenly develop &PPD;s. They had to do the difficult start themselves and write them from scratch. More than 1000 of these are available through the commercial version of &CUPS;, called ESP PrintPro. +So, the developers could use the same software engine to parse the Printer Description Files for available options for all sorts of printers. Of course the &CUPS; developers could not rely on the non-&PostScript; hardware manufacturers to suddenly develop &PPD;s. They had to do the difficult start themselves and write them from scratch. More than 1000 of these are available through the commercial version of &CUPS;, called ESP PrintPro. -Meanwhile there are a lot of &CUPS;-specific &PPD;s available. Even now those are in most cases not originating from the printer manufacturers, but from Free software developers. The &CUPS; folks proofed it, and others followed suit: where &Linux; and &UNIX; printing one or two years ago still was a kludge, it is now able to support a big range of printers, including 7-colour inkjets capable of pushing them to Photo Quality output. +Meanwhile there are a lot of &CUPS;-specific &PPD;s available. Even now those are in most cases not originating from the printer manufacturers, but from Free software developers. The &CUPS; folks proofed it, and others followed suit: where &Linux; and &UNIX; printing one or two years ago still was a kludge, it is now able to support a big range of printers, including 7-colour inkjets capable of pushing them to Photo Quality output. -Different Ways to get &PPD;s for non-&PostScript; Printers +Different Ways to get &PPD;s for non-&PostScript; Printers -You can get &PPD;s to be used with &CUPS; and non-&PostScript; printers from different areas in the Web: +You can get &PPD;s to be used with &CUPS; and non-&PostScript; printers from different areas in the Web: -first, there is the repository at www.linuxprinting.org, which lets you generate a CUPS-O-Matic-&PPD; online for any printer that had been supported by traditional &ghostscript; printing already. This helps you to switch over to &CUPS; with little effort, if you wish so. If your printer was doing well with the traditional way of &ghostscript; printing, take CUPS-O-Matic to plug your driver into the &CUPS; system and you'll have the best of both worlds. +first, there is the repository at www.linuxprinting.org, which lets you generate a CUPS-O-Matic-&PPD; online for any printer that had been supported by traditional &ghostscript; printing already. This helps you to switch over to &CUPS; with little effort, if you wish so. If your printer was doing well with the traditional way of &ghostscript; printing, take CUPS-O-Matic to plug your driver into the &CUPS; system and you'll have the best of both worlds. -second, there are &CUPS;-&PPD;s for the more than 120 printer models, which are driven by the new universal stp driver. stp (stood originally for Stylus Photo) is now developed by the gimp-print project; it was started by Mike Sweet, the leading &CUPS; developer and is now available through gimp-print.sourceforge.net. This driver prints real Photo quality on many modern inkjets and can be configured to make 120 &CUPS;-&PPD;s along its own compilation. &HP; Laser- and DeskJet, Epson Stylus and Photo Colour models as well as some Canon and Lexmark are covered. +second, there are &CUPS;-&PPD;s for the more than 120 printer models, which are driven by the new universal stp driver. stp (stood originally for Stylus Photo) is now developed by the gimp-print project; it was started by Mike Sweet, the leading &CUPS; developer and is now available through gimp-print.sourceforge.net. This driver prints real Photo quality on many modern inkjets and can be configured to make 120 &CUPS;-&PPD;s along its own compilation. &HP; Laser- and DeskJet, Epson Stylus and Photo Colour models as well as some Canon and Lexmark are covered. -third, there is the commercial extension to &CUPS; from the &CUPS; developers themselves: it is called ESP PrintPro and comes with more than 2.300 printer drivers. There are even improved imagetoraster and pstoraster filters included. +third, there is the commercial extension to &CUPS; from the &CUPS; developers themselves: it is called ESP PrintPro and comes with more than 2.300 printer drivers. There are even improved imagetoraster and pstoraster filters included. -&CUPS; makes it really easy for manufacturers to start supporting &Linux; and &UNIX; printing for their models at reasonably low cost. The modular framework of &CUPS; facilitates to plug in any filter (=driver) with minimal effort and to access and utilise the whole printing framework that &CUPS; is creating. +&CUPS; makes it really easy for manufacturers to start supporting &Linux; and &UNIX; printing for their models at reasonably low cost. The modular framework of &CUPS; facilitates to plug in any filter (=driver) with minimal effort and to access and utilise the whole printing framework that &CUPS; is creating. -Read more about the exciting &CUPS; features in the available &CUPS; documentation at http://www.cups.org/documentation.html and http://www.danka.de/printpro/faq.html. Also at http://www.linuxprinting.org/ is a universal repository for all issues related to &Linux; and &UNIX; printing. +Read more about the exciting &CUPS; features in the available &CUPS; documentation at http://www.cups.org/documentation.html and http://www.danka.de/printpro/faq.html. Also at http://www.linuxprinting.org/ is a universal repository for all issues related to &Linux; and &UNIX; printing. -How &IPP; Support Makes &CUPS; the Best Choice Around +How &IPP; Support Makes &CUPS; the Best Choice Around -<quote -><acronym ->LPD</acronym -> Must Die!</quote -> - -For a long time many developers were deeply dissatisfied with good old LPD. Quite a few new projects were started to improve printing: LPRng is the best known example. Others are PDQ, PPR, PLP, GNUlpr and RLPR. But none of the new programs were seen as a big shot; most of them are just implementing the same old LPD specification with a few (or many) new extensions, which again make them incompatible with each other. - -Having seen the development of not just one, but different viable alternatives to venerable BSD-style LPD, Grant Taylor, author of the Linux Printing HOWTO, finally rallied the call LPD Must Die! in his Campaign To Abolish The Line Printer Daemon. +<quote><acronym>LPD</acronym> Must Die!</quote> + +For a long time many developers were deeply dissatisfied with good old LPD. Quite a few new projects were started to improve printing: LPRng is the best known example. Others are PDQ, PPR, PLP, GNUlpr and RLPR. But none of the new programs were seen as a big shot; most of them are just implementing the same old LPD specification with a few (or many) new extensions, which again make them incompatible with each other. + +Having seen the development of not just one, but different viable alternatives to venerable BSD-style LPD, Grant Taylor, author of the Linux Printing HOWTO, finally rallied the call LPD Must Die! in his Campaign To Abolish The Line Printer Daemon. -How the &IPP; Came to Be - -Along with the above, on the industry side of things, there were efforts to overcome the well-known weaknesses of LPD. It started with proprietary extensions to plain old LPD, and stretched as far as &Hewlett-Packard;'s attempt to establish &HP; JetDirect as a new standard for a network printing protocol. The result were even more incompatibilities. - -In the end, an initiative to define a new common industry and IETF standard took shape. The Printer Working Group or PWG, a loose aggregation of vendors in hardware, software, and operating systems, drafted the new Internet Printing Protocol, &IPP;. &IPP; v1.1 has now been approved by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) as a proposed standard, and now enjoys the unanimous support throughout the industry in Europe, USA and Japan. Most current network printer models have now built in &IPP; support on top of traditional LPR/LPD or JetDirect Printing. +How the &IPP; Came to Be + +Along with the above, on the industry side of things, there were efforts to overcome the well-known weaknesses of LPD. It started with proprietary extensions to plain old LPD, and stretched as far as &Hewlett-Packard;'s attempt to establish &HP; JetDirect as a new standard for a network printing protocol. The result were even more incompatibilities. + +In the end, an initiative to define a new common industry and IETF standard took shape. The Printer Working Group or PWG, a loose aggregation of vendors in hardware, software, and operating systems, drafted the new Internet Printing Protocol, &IPP;. &IPP; v1.1 has now been approved by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) as a proposed standard, and now enjoys the unanimous support throughout the industry in Europe, USA and Japan. Most current network printer models have now built in &IPP; support on top of traditional LPR/LPD or JetDirect Printing. -Why &IPP; is Solving Many Problems +Why &IPP; is Solving Many Problems -&IPP; promises to solve a lot of problems network administrators face. This trade normally deals with heterogeneous network environments and spends more than half of its working hours dealing with printing problems. +&IPP; promises to solve a lot of problems network administrators face. This trade normally deals with heterogeneous network environments and spends more than half of its working hours dealing with printing problems. -By creating a unified set of query functions for &IPP; enabled printers and servers, for transferring files and setting job-control attributes &etc;, &IPP; is destined to work across all &OS; platforms. It's rollout however, will not happen overnight, as many legacy print devices will still be in use for many years to come. Therefore, in &IPP; there is a provision made for backwards compatibility of all &IPP; implementations. &CUPS; is proving the viability of &IPP; printing in all environments. +By creating a unified set of query functions for &IPP; enabled printers and servers, for transferring files and setting job-control attributes &etc;, &IPP; is destined to work across all &OS; platforms. It's rollout however, will not happen overnight, as many legacy print devices will still be in use for many years to come. Therefore, in &IPP; there is a provision made for backwards compatibility of all &IPP; implementations. &CUPS; is proving the viability of &IPP; printing in all environments. -The most striking advantage will be it's integration into the existing set of other robust IP protocols. Being an extension of the proven and robust HTTP 1.1 protocol, for the special task of handling print file and related data, it is also very easy to plug in other standards as they are being developed and deployed: +The most striking advantage will be it's integration into the existing set of other robust IP protocols. Being an extension of the proven and robust HTTP 1.1 protocol, for the special task of handling print file and related data, it is also very easy to plug in other standards as they are being developed and deployed: -Basic, Digest, and Certificate Authentication for users seeking access to print services. +Basic, Digest, and Certificate Authentication for users seeking access to print services. -SSL3 and TLS encryption for transferring data. +SSL3 and TLS encryption for transferring data. -Bi directional communication of clients with print devices, using the HTTP/&IPP; GET and POST mechanism. +Bi directional communication of clients with print devices, using the HTTP/&IPP; GET and POST mechanism. -LDAP directory service integration to keep a consistent database of available printers, their capabilities and page-costs, &etc;, as well as user passwords, ACLs &etc;. +LDAP directory service integration to keep a consistent database of available printers, their capabilities and page-costs, &etc;, as well as user passwords, ACLs &etc;. -Pull (as opposed to the usual Push model) printing, where a server or printer just needs to be told the &URL; of a document, whereupon it is retrieved from the resource on the internet and printed. +Pull (as opposed to the usual Push model) printing, where a server or printer just needs to be told the &URL; of a document, whereupon it is retrieved from the resource on the internet and printed. @@ -539,147 +264,63 @@ format="PNG"/> + --> -Printer <quote ->Plug'n'Play</quote -> for Clients - -Have you ever seen a demonstration about &CUPS; capabilities in the network? You must have been quite impressed if you didn't know in advance what to expect. - -Imagine you as the administrator of a LAN. For testing purposes you fully installed one &kde;/&CUPS; box on your net, complete with a dozen printers configured and functional: &PostScript;, LaserJets, InkJets and BubbleJets, and so on. Your &kde; users on that box are very happy, they can print like never before, ringing all the bells and whistles of every printer. It took you 2 hours to make everything run perfectly... and now all the other 100 users on the network want the same. Two hours again for every box? No way you could do that before next year, you think? - -Wrong. Just change one setting in the original &CUPS; box to make it a server. Install &CUPS; on five other boxes, as clients. By the time you turn back to your first client, you find the users happily playing with the settings for the dozen printers you had defined earlier on the server. Somehow magically the printers had appeared on all the Print dialogues of the five new &CUPS; client boxes. - -Your users print, but not a single driver had been installed on the clients, nor a printer queue defined. - -So, how does this magic work? +Printer <quote>Plug'n'Play</quote> for Clients + +Have you ever seen a demonstration about &CUPS; capabilities in the network? You must have been quite impressed if you didn't know in advance what to expect. + +Imagine you as the administrator of a LAN. For testing purposes you fully installed one &kde;/&CUPS; box on your net, complete with a dozen printers configured and functional: &PostScript;, LaserJets, InkJets and BubbleJets, and so on. Your &kde; users on that box are very happy, they can print like never before, ringing all the bells and whistles of every printer. It took you 2 hours to make everything run perfectly... and now all the other 100 users on the network want the same. Two hours again for every box? No way you could do that before next year, you think? + +Wrong. Just change one setting in the original &CUPS; box to make it a server. Install &CUPS; on five other boxes, as clients. By the time you turn back to your first client, you find the users happily playing with the settings for the dozen printers you had defined earlier on the server. Somehow magically the printers had appeared on all the Print dialogues of the five new &CUPS; client boxes. + +Your users print, but not a single driver had been installed on the clients, nor a printer queue defined. + +So, how does this magic work? -<quote ->Seeing</quote -> Printers Not Installed Locally? - -The answer is not complicated at all. - -If a &CUPS; server is on the LAN, it broadcasts the names of all available printers to the LAN, using the UDP protocol and port 631. Port 631 is reserved as a well-known port by IANA (the Internet Assigning Numbers Authority) for &IPP; purposes. All &CUPS; clients listen to &CUPS; server info sent to their port 631. That's how they know about available printers, and that's how they learn about the path to the printers as well. - -Using &IPP;, which is really a clever extension to HTTP v1.1, &CUPS; is able to address all objects related to the printing system via Universal Resource Locators or URLs. Print jobs to be deleted or restarted, printers to be queried or modified, admin tasks to be performed on the server, with &IPP; and &CUPS;, everything is addressable by a certain URL. Many important things can be done through the web interface to &CUPS;, accessible for example with &konqueror;. +<quote>Seeing</quote> Printers Not Installed Locally? + +The answer is not complicated at all. + +If a &CUPS; server is on the LAN, it broadcasts the names of all available printers to the LAN, using the UDP protocol and port 631. Port 631 is reserved as a well-known port by IANA (the Internet Assigning Numbers Authority) for &IPP; purposes. All &CUPS; clients listen to &CUPS; server info sent to their port 631. That's how they know about available printers, and that's how they learn about the path to the printers as well. + +Using &IPP;, which is really a clever extension to HTTP v1.1, &CUPS; is able to address all objects related to the printing system via Universal Resource Locators or URLs. Print jobs to be deleted or restarted, printers to be queried or modified, admin tasks to be performed on the server, with &IPP; and &CUPS;, everything is addressable by a certain URL. Many important things can be done through the web interface to &CUPS;, accessible for example with &konqueror;. -Printing Without Installing a Driver - -And more, the clients basically can administer and use any printer they see, just as if it was a locally installed one. Of course, you can set restrictions on it with access control lists &etc;, so that not any clients may use any printer as it likes. - -The clients even are able to print without the appropriate filter (or driver) installed locally. - -So how does this work? If a client wants to know about and select printer-specific options, it sends a request (called CUPS-get-ppd) to the server. The server tells the client all about all printer-specific options, as read from the server side &PPD;. The user on the client side can see the options and select the required ones. He then sends the print file, usually unfiltered raw &PostScript;, spiced up with the printer-options to the printer server, using &IPP; as the transport protocol. All further processing, especially the filtering to generate the final format for the target printer, is then done by the server. The server has the necessary programs (drivers or filters) to do this. - -This way a client prints without needing to install a driver locally. - -Any change on the server, such as adding or modifying a printer, is instantly known to the clients with no further configuration. +Printing Without Installing a Driver + +And more, the clients basically can administer and use any printer they see, just as if it was a locally installed one. Of course, you can set restrictions on it with access control lists &etc;, so that not any clients may use any printer as it likes. + +The clients even are able to print without the appropriate filter (or driver) installed locally. + +So how does this work? If a client wants to know about and select printer-specific options, it sends a request (called CUPS-get-ppd) to the server. The server tells the client all about all printer-specific options, as read from the server side &PPD;. The user on the client side can see the options and select the required ones. He then sends the print file, usually unfiltered raw &PostScript;, spiced up with the printer-options to the printer server, using &IPP; as the transport protocol. All further processing, especially the filtering to generate the final format for the target printer, is then done by the server. The server has the necessary programs (drivers or filters) to do this. + +This way a client prints without needing to install a driver locally. + +Any change on the server, such as adding or modifying a printer, is instantly known to the clients with no further configuration. -<quote ->Zero Administration</quote ->, Load Balancing, and <quote ->Failover Switching</quote -> - -Some other advanced features built into &CUPS; are the capacity to do load balancing. - -If you define the same printer queues on two or more different servers, the clients will send their jobs to the first responding or available server. This implies an automatic load balancing amongst servers. If you have to take one server off the network for maintenance, the others will just take over its tasks without the users even noticing the difference. +<quote>Zero Administration</quote>, Load Balancing, and <quote>Failover Switching</quote> + +Some other advanced features built into &CUPS; are the capacity to do load balancing. + +If you define the same printer queues on two or more different servers, the clients will send their jobs to the first responding or available server. This implies an automatic load balancing amongst servers. If you have to take one server off the network for maintenance, the others will just take over its tasks without the users even noticing the difference. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdesu/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdesu/index.docbook index 9f0be4d3b98..86ab90e1b15 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdesu/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdesu/index.docbook @@ -4,472 +4,185 @@ - + ]> -The &tdesu; handbook +The &tdesu; handbook -&Geert.Jansen; &Geert.Jansen.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Geert.Jansen; &Geert.Jansen.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2000 -&Geert.Jansen; +2000 +&Geert.Jansen; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-01-18 -1.00.00 +2002-01-18 +1.00.00 -&tdesu; is a graphical front end for the &UNIX; su command. +&tdesu; is a graphical front end for the &UNIX; su command. -KDE -su -password -root +KDE +su +password +root -Introduction - -Welcome to &tdesu;! &tdesu; is a graphical front end for the &UNIX; su command for the K Desktop Environment. It allows you to run a program as different user by supplying the password for that user. &tdesu; is an unprivileged program; it uses the system's su. - -&tdesu; has one additional feature: it can remember passwords for you. If you are using this feature, you only need to enter the password once for each command. See for more information on this and a security analysis. - -This program is meant to be started from the command line or from .desktop files. Although it asks for the root password using a &GUI; dialogue, I consider it to be more of a command line <-> &GUI; glue instead of a pure &GUI; program. +Introduction + +Welcome to &tdesu;! &tdesu; is a graphical front end for the &UNIX; su command for the K Desktop Environment. It allows you to run a program as different user by supplying the password for that user. &tdesu; is an unprivileged program; it uses the system's su. + +&tdesu; has one additional feature: it can remember passwords for you. If you are using this feature, you only need to enter the password once for each command. See for more information on this and a security analysis. + +This program is meant to be started from the command line or from .desktop files. Although it asks for the root password using a &GUI; dialogue, I consider it to be more of a command line <-> &GUI; glue instead of a pure &GUI; program. -Using &tdesu; - -Usage of &tdesu; is easy. The syntax is like this: - - tdesu USER -n -t -q -d -f FILE -c COMMAND ARG1 ARG2 - - tdesu -v -h -s - -The command line options are explained below. +Using &tdesu; + +Usage of &tdesu; is easy. The syntax is like this: + + tdesu USER -n -t -q -d -f FILE -c COMMAND ARG1 ARG2 + + tdesu -v -h -s + +The command line options are explained below. - -This specifies the program to run as root. It has to be passed in one argument. So if, for example, you want to start a new file manager, you would enter at the prompt: tdesu + +This specifies the program to run as root. It has to be passed in one argument. So if, for example, you want to start a new file manager, you would enter at the prompt: tdesu - -This option allow efficient use of &tdesu; in .desktop files. It tells &tdesu; to examine the file specified by FILE. If this file is writable by the current user, &tdesu; will execute the command as the current user. If it is not writable, the command is executed as user USER (defaults to root). -FILE is evaluated like this: if FILE starts with a /, it is taken as an absolute filename. Otherwise, it is taken as the name of a global &kde; configuration file. For example: to configure the K display manager, tdm, you could issue tdesu + +This option allow efficient use of &tdesu; in .desktop files. It tells &tdesu; to examine the file specified by FILE. If this file is writable by the current user, &tdesu; will execute the command as the current user. If it is not writable, the command is executed as user USER (defaults to root). +FILE is evaluated like this: if FILE starts with a /, it is taken as an absolute filename. Otherwise, it is taken as the name of a global &kde; configuration file. For example: to configure the K display manager, tdm, you could issue tdesu - -Enable terminal output. This disables password keeping. This is largely for debugging purposes; if you want to run a console mode app, use the standard su instead. + +Enable terminal output. This disables password keeping. This is largely for debugging purposes; if you want to run a console mode app, use the standard su instead. - -Do not keep the password. This disables the keep password checkbox in the password dialogue. + +Do not keep the password. This disables the keep password checkbox in the password dialogue. - -Be quiet. + +Be quiet. - -Show debug information. + +Show debug information. - -Print version information and exit. + +Print version information and exit. - -Print some help. + +Print some help. - -Stop the tdesu daemon. See . + +Stop the tdesu daemon. See . -Configuration - -&tdesu; comes with a control module named kcmtdesu. You can find it in the K menu under Settings Applications KDE su. You can change the following things: +Configuration + +&tdesu; comes with a control module named kcmtdesu. You can find it in the K menu under Settings Applications KDE su. You can change the following things: -Echo Mode -This is how characters you type are echoed to the screen. Possible choices are: one star per character, three stars or no echo at all. The default is one star per character. +Echo Mode +This is how characters you type are echoed to the screen. Possible choices are: one star per character, three stars or no echo at all. The default is one star per character. -Keeping passwords -You can instruct &tdesu; remember passwords you enter by checking the keep password check box. If this checked, you can enter a timeout value in the text field below it. This is the amount of time, in minutes, that the password will be remembered. The default is not to remember passwords. +Keeping passwords +You can instruct &tdesu; remember passwords you enter by checking the keep password check box. If this checked, you can enter a timeout value in the text field below it. This is the amount of time, in minutes, that the password will be remembered. The default is not to remember passwords. -Internals +Internals -X authentication +X authentication -The program you execute will run under the root user id and will generally have no authority to access your X display. &tdesu; gets around this by adding an authentication cookie for your display to a temporary .Xauthority file. After the command exits, this file is removed. +The program you execute will run under the root user id and will generally have no authority to access your X display. &tdesu; gets around this by adding an authentication cookie for your display to a temporary .Xauthority file. After the command exits, this file is removed. -If you don't use X cookies, you are on your own. &tdesu; will detect this and will not add a cookie but you will have to make sure that root is allowed to access to your display. +If you don't use X cookies, you are on your own. &tdesu; will detect this and will not add a cookie but you will have to make sure that root is allowed to access to your display. -Interface to <command ->su</command -> - -&tdesu; uses the sytem's su for acquiring priviliges. In this section, I explain the details of how &tdesu; does this. - -Because some su implementations (&ie; the one from &RedHat;) don't want to read the password from stdin, &tdesu; creates a pty/tty pair and executes su with it's standard filedescriptors connected to the tty. - -To execute the command the user selected, rather than an interactive shell, &tdesu; uses the argument with su. This argument is understood by every shell that I know of so it should work portably. su passes this argument to the target user's shell, and the shell executes the program. Example command: su . - -Instead of executing the user command directly with su, &tdesu; executes a little stub program called tdesu_stub. This stub (running as the target user), requests some information from &tdesu; over the pty/tty channel (the stub's stdin and stdout) and then executes the user's program. The information passed over is: the X display, an X authentication cookie (if available), the PATH and the command to run. The reason why a stub program is used is that the X cookie is private information and therefore cannot be passed on the command line. +Interface to <command>su</command> + +&tdesu; uses the sytem's su for acquiring priviliges. In this section, I explain the details of how &tdesu; does this. + +Because some su implementations (&ie; the one from &RedHat;) don't want to read the password from stdin, &tdesu; creates a pty/tty pair and executes su with it's standard filedescriptors connected to the tty. + +To execute the command the user selected, rather than an interactive shell, &tdesu; uses the argument with su. This argument is understood by every shell that I know of so it should work portably. su passes this argument to the target user's shell, and the shell executes the program. Example command: su . + +Instead of executing the user command directly with su, &tdesu; executes a little stub program called tdesu_stub. This stub (running as the target user), requests some information from &tdesu; over the pty/tty channel (the stub's stdin and stdout) and then executes the user's program. The information passed over is: the X display, an X authentication cookie (if available), the PATH and the command to run. The reason why a stub program is used is that the X cookie is private information and therefore cannot be passed on the command line. -Password Checking +Password Checking -&tdesu; will check the password you entered and gives an error message if it is not correct. The checking is done by executing a test program: /bin/true. If this succeeds, the password is assumed to be correct. +&tdesu; will check the password you entered and gives an error message if it is not correct. The checking is done by executing a test program: /bin/true. If this succeeds, the password is assumed to be correct. -Password Keeping - -For your comfort, &tdesu; implements a keep password feature. If you are interested in security, you should read this paragraph. - -Allowing &tdesu; to remember passwords opens up a (small) security hole in your system. Obviously, &tdesu; does not allow anybody but your user id to use the passwords, but, if done without caution, this would lower root's security level to that of a normal user (you). A hacker who breaks into your account, would get root access. &tdesu; tries to prevent this. The security scheme it uses is, in my opinion at least, reasonably safe and is explained here. - -&tdesu; uses a daemon, called tdesud. The daemon listens to a &UNIX; socket in /tmp for commands. The mode of the socket is 0600 so that only your user id can connect to it. If password keeping is enabled, &tdesu; executes commands through this daemon. It writes the command and root's password to the socket and the daemon executes the command using su, as describe before. After this, the command and the password are not thrown away. Instead, they are kept for a specified amount of time. This is the timeout value from in the control module. If another request for the same command is coming within this time period, the client does not have to supply the password. To keep hackers who broke into your account from stealing passwords from the daemon (for example, by attaching a debugger), the daemon is installed set-group-id nogroup. This should prevent all normal users (including you) from getting passwords from the tdesud process. Also, the daemon sets the DISPLAY environment variable to the value it had when it was started. The only thing a hacker can do is execute an application on your display. - -One weak spot in this scheme is that the programs you execute are probably not written with security in mind (like setuid root programs). This means that they might have buffer overruns or other problems and a hacker could exploit those. - -The use of the password keeping feature is a tradeoff between security and comfort. I encourage you to think it over and decide for yourself if you want to use it or not. +Password Keeping + +For your comfort, &tdesu; implements a keep password feature. If you are interested in security, you should read this paragraph. + +Allowing &tdesu; to remember passwords opens up a (small) security hole in your system. Obviously, &tdesu; does not allow anybody but your user id to use the passwords, but, if done without caution, this would lower root's security level to that of a normal user (you). A hacker who breaks into your account, would get root access. &tdesu; tries to prevent this. The security scheme it uses is, in my opinion at least, reasonably safe and is explained here. + +&tdesu; uses a daemon, called tdesud. The daemon listens to a &UNIX; socket in /tmp for commands. The mode of the socket is 0600 so that only your user id can connect to it. If password keeping is enabled, &tdesu; executes commands through this daemon. It writes the command and root's password to the socket and the daemon executes the command using su, as describe before. After this, the command and the password are not thrown away. Instead, they are kept for a specified amount of time. This is the timeout value from in the control module. If another request for the same command is coming within this time period, the client does not have to supply the password. To keep hackers who broke into your account from stealing passwords from the daemon (for example, by attaching a debugger), the daemon is installed set-group-id nogroup. This should prevent all normal users (including you) from getting passwords from the tdesud process. Also, the daemon sets the DISPLAY environment variable to the value it had when it was started. The only thing a hacker can do is execute an application on your display. + +One weak spot in this scheme is that the programs you execute are probably not written with security in mind (like setuid root programs). This means that they might have buffer overruns or other problems and a hacker could exploit those. + +The use of the password keeping feature is a tradeoff between security and comfort. I encourage you to think it over and decide for yourself if you want to use it or not. -Author +Author -&tdesu; +&tdesu; -Copyright 2000 &Geert.Jansen; +Copyright 2000 &Geert.Jansen; -&tdesu; is written by &Geert.Jansen;. It is somewhat based on Pietro Iglio's &tdesu;, version 0.3. Pietro and I agreed that I will maintain this program in the future. +&tdesu; is written by &Geert.Jansen;. It is somewhat based on Pietro Iglio's &tdesu;, version 0.3. Pietro and I agreed that I will maintain this program in the future. -The author can be reached through email at &Geert.Jansen.mail;. Please report any bugs you find to me so that I can fix them. If you have a suggestion, feel free to contact me. +The author can be reached through email at &Geert.Jansen.mail;. Please report any bugs you find to me so that I can fix them. If you have a suggestion, feel free to contact me. &underFDL; &underArtisticLicense; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/index.docbook index c0c5a7e2a2a..beac753f9f1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/index.docbook @@ -3,116 +3,69 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - tdmrc"> - XDMCP"> - xdm"> + tdmrc"> + XDMCP"> + xdm"> - + ]> -The &tdm; Handbook +The &tdm; Handbook -&Oswald.Buddenhagen; &Oswald.Buddenhagen.mail; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +Reviewer + --> + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2000 -&Neal.Crook; +2000 +&Neal.Crook; -2002 -&Oswald.Buddenhagen; +2002 +&Oswald.Buddenhagen; -2003 -&Lauri.Watts; +2003 +&Lauri.Watts; -2003-03-01 -0.05.02 +2003-03-01 +0.05.02 -This document describes &tdm; the &kde; Display Manager. &tdm; is also known as the Login Manager. +This document describes &tdm; the &kde; Display Manager. &tdm; is also known as the Login Manager. -KDE -tdm -xdm -display manager -login manager +KDE +tdm +xdm +display manager +login manager -Introduction +Introduction -&tdm; provides a graphical interface that allows you to log in to a system. It prompts for login (username) and password, authenticates the user and starts a session. &tdm; is superior to &xdm;, the X Display Manager, in a number of ways. +&tdm; provides a graphical interface that allows you to log in to a system. It prompts for login (username) and password, authenticates the user and starts a session. &tdm; is superior to &xdm;, the X Display Manager, in a number of ways. @@ -131,1083 +84,473 @@ --> -Quick Start Guide +Quick Start Guide -This is a quick start guide for users who fit the following pattern: +This is a quick start guide for users who fit the following pattern: -X is configured and works with the command startx from the commandline. +X is configured and works with the command startx from the commandline. -Each user will generally only use a single window manager or desktop environment, and does not change this choice very often, or is comfortable editing a single text file in order to change their choice. +Each user will generally only use a single window manager or desktop environment, and does not change this choice very often, or is comfortable editing a single text file in order to change their choice. -This scenario will be sufficient for many environments where a single user or several users normally boot the computer and log into their preferred environment. +This scenario will be sufficient for many environments where a single user or several users normally boot the computer and log into their preferred environment. -Setting up a Default Session +Setting up a Default Session -Create or open the file ~/.xinitrc -If you already have a working ~/.xinitrc, go to the next step +Create or open the file ~/.xinitrc +If you already have a working ~/.xinitrc, go to the next step -If one does not already exist, add a line to the ~/.xinitrc to start your preferred window manager or desktop environment. -For &kde; you should enter: -starttde -For other window managers or desktop environments, you should look in their documentation for the correct command. +If one does not already exist, add a line to the ~/.xinitrc to start your preferred window manager or desktop environment. +For &kde; you should enter: +starttde +For other window managers or desktop environments, you should look in their documentation for the correct command. -Make a link as follows: -ln ~/.xinitrc ~/.xsession +Make a link as follows: +ln ~/.xinitrc ~/.xsession -At this point, typing startx on the commandline should start X, with a &kde; session. The next task is to try &tdm;. - -As root, type tdm at the prompt. - -You should see a login window, which is described more fully in. - -Typing your normal username and password in the fields provided, and leaving selected as the session type should now open a &kde; session for your user. - -If you have other users to configure, you should repeat the procedure above for each of them. +At this point, typing startx on the commandline should start X, with a &kde; session. The next task is to try &tdm;. + +As root, type tdm at the prompt. + +You should see a login window, which is described more fully in. + +Typing your normal username and password in the fields provided, and leaving selected as the session type should now open a &kde; session for your user. + +If you have other users to configure, you should repeat the procedure above for each of them. -This is a quick guide to getting up and running only. You probably will want to customise &tdm; further, for example, to hide the names of the system accounts, to allow further sessions, and much more. Please read through the rest of this manual to find out how to do these things. +This is a quick guide to getting up and running only. You probably will want to customise &tdm; further, for example, to hide the names of the system accounts, to allow further sessions, and much more. Please read through the rest of this manual to find out how to do these things. - -The Login Window + +The Login Window -The user interface to &tdm; consists of two dialogue boxes. The main dialogue box has these controls: +The user interface to &tdm; consists of two dialogue boxes. The main dialogue box has these controls: - + -A Username: field for you to enter your username. +A Username: field for you to enter your username. -A Password: field for you to enter your password. +A Password: field for you to enter your password. -(Optionally) a graphical image of each user (for example, a digitised photograph). Clicking on an image is equivalent to typing the associated username into the Username: field. (This feature is an imitation of the login box on IRIX). +(Optionally) a graphical image of each user (for example, a digitised photograph). Clicking on an image is equivalent to typing the associated username into the Username: field. (This feature is an imitation of the login box on IRIX). -A Menu drop-down box that allows &tdm; to be used to start sessions with various different window managers or desktop environments installed on the system. +A Menu drop-down box that allows &tdm; to be used to start sessions with various different window managers or desktop environments installed on the system. -(Optionally) a region to the right of the Username:, Password: and Session Type: fields which can be used to display either a static image or an analogue clock. +(Optionally) a region to the right of the Username:, Password: and Session Type: fields which can be used to display either a static image or an analogue clock. -A Login button that validates the username/password combination and attempts to start a session of the selected type. +A Login button that validates the username/password combination and attempts to start a session of the selected type. -A Clear button that clears the text from the Login and Pass fields. - +A Clear button that clears the text from the Login and Pass fields. + -(Optionally) A Shutdown button that displays the Shutdown dialogue box. +(Optionally) A Shutdown button that displays the Shutdown dialogue box. -A Menu button that opens an action menu with the following items: +A Menu button that opens an action menu with the following items: -(On local displays) a Restart X Server item that terminates the currently running &X-Server;, starts a new one and displays the login dialogue again. You can use this if the display content seems to be broken somehow. +(On local displays) a Restart X Server item that terminates the currently running &X-Server;, starts a new one and displays the login dialogue again. You can use this if the display content seems to be broken somehow. -(On remote displays) A Close Connection item that closes the connection to the XDMCP server you are currently connected to. If you got to this server through a host chooser, this will bring you back to the chooser, otherwise it will only reset the &X-Server; and bring up the login dialogue again. +(On remote displays) A Close Connection item that closes the connection to the XDMCP server you are currently connected to. If you got to this server through a host chooser, this will bring you back to the chooser, otherwise it will only reset the &X-Server; and bring up the login dialogue again. -(Optionally on local displays) A Console Mode item that terminates the currently running &X-Server; and leaves you alone with a console login. &tdm; will resume the graphical login if nobody is logged in at the console for some time. To make this work, you need to use the local@<console> syntax in the Xservers file (see comments in that file). +(Optionally on local displays) A Console Mode item that terminates the currently running &X-Server; and leaves you alone with a console login. &tdm; will resume the graphical login if nobody is logged in at the console for some time. To make this work, you need to use the local@<console> syntax in the Xservers file (see comments in that file). -(Optionally) A Shutdown... button that displays the shutdown dialogue box. +(Optionally) A Shutdown... button that displays the shutdown dialogue box. -The Shutdown dialogue box presents a set of radio buttons that allow one of these options to be selected: +The Shutdown dialogue box presents a set of radio buttons that allow one of these options to be selected: -Shutdown -Shut the system down in a controlled manner, ready for power-down. +Shutdown +Shut the system down in a controlled manner, ready for power-down. -Restart -Shut the system down and reboot. For systems that use Lilo, an optional drop-down box allows you to select a particular operating-system kernel to be used for the reboot. +Restart +Shut the system down and reboot. For systems that use Lilo, an optional drop-down box allows you to select a particular operating-system kernel to be used for the reboot. -Restart X Server +Restart X Server -Stop and then restart the X-server. Typically, you might need to use this option if you have changed your X11 configuration in some way. - +Stop and then restart the X-server. Typically, you might need to use this option if you have changed your X11 configuration in some way. + -Console Mode +Console Mode -Stop the &X-Server; and return the system to console mode. This is achieved by bringing the system down to run-level 3. Typically, the system manager might need to use this option before upgrading or re-configuring X11 software. - +Stop the &X-Server; and return the system to console mode. This is achieved by bringing the system down to run-level 3. Typically, the system manager might need to use this option before upgrading or re-configuring X11 software. + -Pressing the OK button initiates the selected action; pressing the Cancel button returns to the main &tdm; dialogue box. +Pressing the OK button initiates the selected action; pressing the Cancel button returns to the main &tdm; dialogue box. -Configuring &tdm; - -This chapter assumes that &tdm; is already up and running on your system, and that you simply want to change its behaviour in some way. - -When &tdm; starts up, it reads its configuration from the folder $TDEDIR/share/config/tdm/ (this may be /etc/kde3/tdm/ or something else on your system). - -The main configuration file is &tdmrc;; all other files are referenced from there and could be stored under any name anywhere on the system - but usually that would not make much sense for obvious reasons (one particular exception is referencing configuration files of an already installed &xdm; - however when a new &tdm; is installed, it will import settings from those files if it finds an already installed &xdm;). - -Since &tdm; must run before any user is logged in, it is not associated with any particular user. Therefore, it is not possible to have user-specific configuration files; all users share the common &tdmrc;. It follows from this that the configuration of &tdm; can only be altered by those users that have write access to $TDEDIR/share/config/tdm/tdmrc (normally restricted to system administrators logged in as root). - -You can view the &tdmrc; file currently in use on your system, and you can configure &tdm; by editing this file. Alternatively, you can use the graphical configuration tool provided by the &kcontrolcenter; (under System AdministrationLogin Manager), which is described in the &kcontrol; help files. - -The remainder of this chapter describes configuration of &tdm; via the &kcontrol; module, and the next chapter describes the options available in &tdmrc; itself. If you only need to configure for local users, the &kcontrol; module should be sufficient for your needs. If you need to configure remote logins, or have multiple &tdm; sessions running, you will need to read on. +Configuring &tdm; + +This chapter assumes that &tdm; is already up and running on your system, and that you simply want to change its behaviour in some way. + +When &tdm; starts up, it reads its configuration from the folder $TDEDIR/share/config/tdm/ (this may be /etc/kde3/tdm/ or something else on your system). + +The main configuration file is &tdmrc;; all other files are referenced from there and could be stored under any name anywhere on the system - but usually that would not make much sense for obvious reasons (one particular exception is referencing configuration files of an already installed &xdm; - however when a new &tdm; is installed, it will import settings from those files if it finds an already installed &xdm;). + +Since &tdm; must run before any user is logged in, it is not associated with any particular user. Therefore, it is not possible to have user-specific configuration files; all users share the common &tdmrc;. It follows from this that the configuration of &tdm; can only be altered by those users that have write access to $TDEDIR/share/config/tdm/tdmrc (normally restricted to system administrators logged in as root). + +You can view the &tdmrc; file currently in use on your system, and you can configure &tdm; by editing this file. Alternatively, you can use the graphical configuration tool provided by the &kcontrolcenter; (under System AdministrationLogin Manager), which is described in the &kcontrol; help files. + +The remainder of this chapter describes configuration of &tdm; via the &kcontrol; module, and the next chapter describes the options available in &tdmrc; itself. If you only need to configure for local users, the &kcontrol; module should be sufficient for your needs. If you need to configure remote logins, or have multiple &tdm; sessions running, you will need to read on. -&Thomas.Tanghus; &Thomas.Tanghus.mail; -&Steffen.Hansen; &Steffen.Hansen.mail; -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Thomas.Tanghus; &Thomas.Tanghus.mail; +&Steffen.Hansen; &Steffen.Hansen.mail; +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -The Login Manager &kcontrol; Module - -Using this module, you can configure the &kde; graphical login manager, &tdm;. You can change how the login screen looks, who has access using the login manager and who can shutdown the computer. - -All settings will be written to the configuration file &tdmrc;, which in it's original state has many comments to help you configure &tdm;. Using this &kcontrol; module will strip these comments from the file. All available options in &tdmrc; are covered in . - -The options listed in this chapter are cross referenced with their equivalents in &tdmrc;. All options available in the &kcontrol; module are also available directly in &tdmrc; but the reverse is not true. - -In order to organise all of these options, this module is divided into several sections: Appearance, Font, Background, Shutdown, Users and Convenience. - -You can switch between the sections using the tabs at the top of the window. - -If you are not currently logged in as a superuser, you will need to click the Administrator Mode Button. You will then be asked for a superuser password. Entering a correct password will allow you to modify the settings of this module. +The Login Manager &kcontrol; Module + +Using this module, you can configure the &kde; graphical login manager, &tdm;. You can change how the login screen looks, who has access using the login manager and who can shutdown the computer. + +All settings will be written to the configuration file &tdmrc;, which in it's original state has many comments to help you configure &tdm;. Using this &kcontrol; module will strip these comments from the file. All available options in &tdmrc; are covered in . + +The options listed in this chapter are cross referenced with their equivalents in &tdmrc;. All options available in the &kcontrol; module are also available directly in &tdmrc; but the reverse is not true. + +In order to organise all of these options, this module is divided into several sections: Appearance, Font, Background, Shutdown, Users and Convenience. + +You can switch between the sections using the tabs at the top of the window. + +If you are not currently logged in as a superuser, you will need to click the Administrator Mode Button. You will then be asked for a superuser password. Entering a correct password will allow you to modify the settings of this module. -Appearance - -From this page you can change the visual appearance of &tdm;, &kde;'s graphical login manager. - -The Greeting: is the title of the login screen. Setting this is especially useful if you have many servers users may log in to. You may use various placeholders, which are described along with the corresponding key in &tdmrc;. - -You can then choose to show either the current system time, a logo or nothing special in the login box. Make your choice in the radio buttons labelled Logo area:. This corresponds to in &tdmrc; - -If you chose Show logo you can now choose a logo: +Appearance + +From this page you can change the visual appearance of &tdm;, &kde;'s graphical login manager. + +The Greeting: is the title of the login screen. Setting this is especially useful if you have many servers users may log in to. You may use various placeholders, which are described along with the corresponding key in &tdmrc;. + +You can then choose to show either the current system time, a logo or nothing special in the login box. Make your choice in the radio buttons labelled Logo area:. This corresponds to in &tdmrc; + +If you chose Show logo you can now choose a logo: -Drop an image file on the image button. +Drop an image file on the image button. -Click on the image button and select a new image from the image chooser dialogue. +Click on the image button and select a new image from the image chooser dialogue. -If you do not specify a logo the default $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/kdelogo.xpm will be displayed. - -Normally the login box is centred on the screen. Use the Position: options if you want it to appear elsewhere on the screen. You can specify the relative position (percentage of the screen size) for the centre of the login window, relative to the top left of the display, in the fields labelled X: and Y: respectively. These correspond to the key in &tdmrc;. - -While &kde;'s style depends on the settings of the user logged in, the style used by &tdm; can be configured using the GUI Style: and Colour Scheme: options. These correspond to the keys and in &tdmrc; respectively. - -Below that, you have a dropdown box to choose the language for your login box, corresponding to setting in &tdmrc;. +If you do not specify a logo the default $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/kdelogo.xpm will be displayed. + +Normally the login box is centred on the screen. Use the Position: options if you want it to appear elsewhere on the screen. You can specify the relative position (percentage of the screen size) for the centre of the login window, relative to the top left of the display, in the fields labelled X: and Y: respectively. These correspond to the key in &tdmrc;. + +While &kde;'s style depends on the settings of the user logged in, the style used by &tdm; can be configured using the GUI Style: and Colour Scheme: options. These correspond to the keys and in &tdmrc; respectively. + +Below that, you have a dropdown box to choose the language for your login box, corresponding to setting in &tdmrc;. -Font - -From this section of the module you can change the fonts used in the login window. Only fonts available to all users are available here, not fonts you have installed on a per user basis. - -You can select three different font styles from the drop down box (General:, Failures:, Greeting). When you click on the Choose... button a dialogue appears from which you can select the new characteristics for the font style. +Font + +From this section of the module you can change the fonts used in the login window. Only fonts available to all users are available here, not fonts you have installed on a per user basis. + +You can select three different font styles from the drop down box (General:, Failures:, Greeting). When you click on the Choose... button a dialogue appears from which you can select the new characteristics for the font style. -The General: font is used in all other places in the login window. +The General: font is used in all other places in the login window. -The Failures: font is used when a login fails. +The Failures: font is used when a login fails. -The Greeting: font is the font used for the title (Greeting String). +The Greeting: font is the font used for the title (Greeting String). -You can also check the box labelled Use anti-aliasing for fonts if you want smoothed fonts in the login dialogue. +You can also check the box labelled Use anti-aliasing for fonts if you want smoothed fonts in the login dialogue. -An example of each font can be seen in the Example Box. +An example of each font can be seen in the Example Box. -Background +Background -Here you can change the desktop background which will be displayed before a user logs in. You can have a single colour or an image as a background. If you have an image as the background and select centre, the selected background colour will be used around the image if it is not large enough to cover the entire desktop. +Here you can change the desktop background which will be displayed before a user logs in. You can have a single colour or an image as a background. If you have an image as the background and select centre, the selected background colour will be used around the image if it is not large enough to cover the entire desktop. -The background colours and effects are controlled by the options on the tab labelled Background and you select a background image and its placement from the options on the tab labelled Wallpaper. +The background colours and effects are controlled by the options on the tab labelled Background and you select a background image and its placement from the options on the tab labelled Wallpaper. -To change the default background colour(s) simply click either of the colour buttons and select a new colour. +To change the default background colour(s) simply click either of the colour buttons and select a new colour. -The dropdown box above the colour buttons provides you with several different blend effects. Choose one from the list, and it will be previewed on the small monitor at the top of the window. Your choices are: +The dropdown box above the colour buttons provides you with several different blend effects. Choose one from the list, and it will be previewed on the small monitor at the top of the window. Your choices are: -Flat -By choosing this mode, you select one colour (using the colour button labelled Colour 1), and the entire background is covered with this one colour. +Flat +By choosing this mode, you select one colour (using the colour button labelled Colour 1), and the entire background is covered with this one colour. -Pattern -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). You then select a pattern by clicking Setup. This opens a new dialogue window, which gives you the opportunity to select a pattern. Simply click once on the pattern of your choice, then click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Background: Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. +Pattern +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). You then select a pattern by clicking Setup. This opens a new dialogue window, which gives you the opportunity to select a pattern. Simply click once on the pattern of your choice, then click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Background: Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. -Background Program -By selecting this option, you can have &kde; use an external program to determine the background. This can be any program of your choosing. For more information on this option, see the section entitled Background: Using an external program. +Background Program +By selecting this option, you can have &kde; use an external program to determine the background. This can be any program of your choosing. For more information on this option, see the section entitled Background: Using an external program. -Horizontal Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. +Horizontal Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. -Vertical Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the bottom of the screen. +Vertical Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the bottom of the screen. -Pyramid Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. +Pyramid Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. -Pipecross Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different then the pyramid gradient. +Pipecross Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different then the pyramid gradient. -Elliptic Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 2 in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 1 as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. +Elliptic Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 2 in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 1 as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. -The setup button is only needed for if you select Background program or Patterns. In these instances, another window will appear to configure the specifics. -Wallpaper -To select a new background image first, click on the Wallpapers tab, then you can either select an image from the drop-down list labelled Wallpaper or select Browse... and select an image file from a file selector. - -The image can be displayed in six different ways: +The setup button is only needed for if you select Background program or Patterns. In these instances, another window will appear to configure the specifics. +Wallpaper +To select a new background image first, click on the Wallpapers tab, then you can either select an image from the drop-down list labelled Wallpaper or select Browse... and select an image file from a file selector. + +The image can be displayed in six different ways: -No wallpaper -No image is displayed. Just the background colours. - +No wallpaper +No image is displayed. Just the background colours. + -Centred -The image will be centred on the screen. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. +Centred +The image will be centred on the screen. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. -Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. +Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. -Centre Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upwards, downwards to the right, and to the left. +Centre Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upwards, downwards to the right, and to the left. -Centred Maxpect -The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. +Centred Maxpect +The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. -Scaled -The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit all four corners. +Scaled +The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit all four corners. -<guilabel ->Shutdown</guilabel -> - -Allow Shutdown -Use these dropdown box to choose who is allowed to shut down: +<guilabel>Shutdown</guilabel> + +Allow Shutdown +Use these dropdown box to choose who is allowed to shut down: -Nobody: No one can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. You must be logged in, and execute a command. +Nobody: No one can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. You must be logged in, and execute a command. -Everybody: Everyone can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. +Everybody: Everyone can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. -Only Root: &tdm; requires that the root password be entered before shutting down the computer. +Only Root: &tdm; requires that the root password be entered before shutting down the computer. -You can independently configure who is allowed to issue a shutdown command for the Local: and Remote: users. - -Commands Use these text fields to define the exact shutdown command. The Halt: command defaults to /sbin/halt. The restart command defaults to /sbin/reboot. - -When Show boot options is enabled, &tdm; will on reboot offer you options for the lilo boot manager. For this feature to work, you will need to supply the correct paths to your lilo command and to lilo's map file. +You can independently configure who is allowed to issue a shutdown command for the Local: and Remote: users. + +Commands Use these text fields to define the exact shutdown command. The Halt: command defaults to /sbin/halt. The restart command defaults to /sbin/reboot. + +When Show boot options is enabled, &tdm; will on reboot offer you options for the lilo boot manager. For this feature to work, you will need to supply the correct paths to your lilo command and to lilo's map file. -Session types - -Define which session types should be accessible from the login window. - -For more information on this subject, look at /etc/X11/xdm/Xsession to find your xdm setup files. Also review the xdm man pages, especially under the SESSION PROGRAM section. - -To add a session, type its name in the blank entitled New types, and click Add new. - -To remove a session, select the session from the list and click Remove. +Session types + +Define which session types should be accessible from the login window. + +For more information on this subject, look at /etc/X11/xdm/Xsession to find your xdm setup files. Also review the xdm man pages, especially under the SESSION PROGRAM section. + +To add a session, type its name in the blank entitled New types, and click Add new. + +To remove a session, select the session from the list and click Remove. -Users +Users -From here you can change the way users are represented in the login window. +From here you can change the way users are represented in the login window. -You may disable the user list in &tdm; entirely in the Show Users section. You can choose from: +You may disable the user list in &tdm; entirely in the Show Users section. You can choose from: -None +None -Do not show any users. This is the most secure setting, since an attacker would then have to guess a valid login name as well as a password. It's also the preferred option if you have more than a handful of users to list, or the list itself would become unwieldy. +Do not show any users. This is the most secure setting, since an attacker would then have to guess a valid login name as well as a password. It's also the preferred option if you have more than a handful of users to list, or the list itself would become unwieldy. -Selected only +Selected only -Only show users you have specifically enabled. +Only show users you have specifically enabled. -Not hidden +Not hidden -Allows you to select a list of users that should not be shown, and all other users will be listed. +Allows you to select a list of users that should not be shown, and all other users will be listed. -Independently of the users you specify by name, you can use the System UIDs to specify a range of valid UIDs that are shown in the list. By default user id's under 1000, which are often system or daemon users, and user id's over 65000, are not shown. +Independently of the users you specify by name, you can use the System UIDs to specify a range of valid UIDs that are shown in the list. By default user id's under 1000, which are often system or daemon users, and user id's over 65000, are not shown. -You can also enable the Sort users checkbox, to have the user list sorted alphabetically. If this is disabled, users will appear in the order they are listed in the password file. +You can also enable the Sort users checkbox, to have the user list sorted alphabetically. If this is disabled, users will appear in the order they are listed in the password file. -If you choose to show users, then the login window will show images (which you select), of a list of users. When someone is ready to login, they may select their user name/image, enter their password, and they are granted access. +If you choose to show users, then the login window will show images (which you select), of a list of users. When someone is ready to login, they may select their user name/image, enter their password, and they are granted access. -If you permit a user image, then you can configure the source for those images. +If you permit a user image, then you can configure the source for those images. -The available options for the User Image Source are: +The available options for the User Image Source are: -You can configure the admin picture here, for each user on the system. Depending on the order selected above, users may be able to override your selection. +You can configure the admin picture here, for each user on the system. Depending on the order selected above, users may be able to override your selection. -If you choose not to show users, then the login window will be more traditional. Users will need to type their username and password to gain entrance. This is the preferred way if you have many users on this terminal. +If you choose not to show users, then the login window will be more traditional. Users will need to type their username and password to gain entrance. This is the preferred way if you have many users on this terminal. -To show (and sort) or not to show users +To show (and sort) or not to show users -Along the right edge of the window are two check boxes: +Along the right edge of the window are two check boxes: -If Show users is selected you have chosen to show images of users, instead of making them type their login name. +If Show users is selected you have chosen to show images of users, instead of making them type their login name. -If Sort users is selected, then the list of users will be sorted alphabetically in the login window. If unchecked, users will be listed in the same order as they are on this page. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +If Sort users is selected, then the list of users will be sorted alphabetically in the login window. If unchecked, users will be listed in the same order as they are on this page. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -How to determine which users to show and which users to hide +How to determine which users to show and which users to hide -Below the user image box, and above the Show users check box, is a set of two radio buttions: +Below the user image box, and above the Show users check box, is a set of two radio buttions: -Show only selected users: If this option is selected, only the users contained in the list labelled Selected Users, will be displayed in the login window. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -Show all users but no-show users: If this option is selected, all users will be listed, except those users contained in the list entitled No show users. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +Show only selected users: If this option is selected, only the users contained in the list labelled Selected Users, will be displayed in the login window. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +Show all users but no-show users: If this option is selected, all users will be listed, except those users contained in the list entitled No show users. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -Select users +Select users -This page contains three listboxes. The large listbox on the left shows all the users on the system which might be a genuine user. +This page contains three listboxes. The large listbox on the left shows all the users on the system which might be a genuine user. -The top rightmost listbox shows the selected users and the bottom rightmost listbox shows the users we do not want displayed in the login window. +The top rightmost listbox shows the selected users and the bottom rightmost listbox shows the users we do not want displayed in the login window. -To move a user from one listbox to another you click on the username in the listbox and click >> to move the user from the leftmost box the the rightmost box or << to move the user from the rightmost box to the leftmost box. +To move a user from one listbox to another you click on the username in the listbox and click >> to move the user from the leftmost box the the rightmost box or << to move the user from the rightmost box to the leftmost box. -Images - -This section of the manual only applies if Show users is selected. If it is not, this image box has no effect. - -Every user on the system can be represented by an image. The image for each user is kept in a file called $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/$USER.xpm. If there is no such file for a particular user, the file $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/default.xpm will be used instead. - -To assign a new image to a user just select the user in one of the listboxes and either drop an imagefile on the image button to the right or click on the image button and select a new image from the image selector. - -If no user is currently selected you will be asked if you want to change the default image. - -The replacement is performed by a &konqueror; process so if the imagefile already exists you will be prompted by &konqueror; if you want to replace it. If you confirm the image will be replaced - you will NOT have to press the Apply button. +Images + +This section of the manual only applies if Show users is selected. If it is not, this image box has no effect. + +Every user on the system can be represented by an image. The image for each user is kept in a file called $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/$USER.xpm. If there is no such file for a particular user, the file $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/default.xpm will be used instead. + +To assign a new image to a user just select the user in one of the listboxes and either drop an imagefile on the image button to the right or click on the image button and select a new image from the image selector. + +If no user is currently selected you will be asked if you want to change the default image. + +The replacement is performed by a &konqueror; process so if the imagefile already exists you will be prompted by &konqueror; if you want to replace it. If you confirm the image will be replaced - you will NOT have to press the Apply button. -Convenience +Convenience -In the convenience tab you can configure some options that make life easier for lazy people, like automatic login or disabling passwords. +In the convenience tab you can configure some options that make life easier for lazy people, like automatic login or disabling passwords. -Please think more than twice before using these options. Every option in the Convenience tab is well-suited to seriously compromise your system security. Practically, these options are only to be used in a completely non-critical environment, ⪚ a private computer at home. +Please think more than twice before using these options. Every option in the Convenience tab is well-suited to seriously compromise your system security. Practically, these options are only to be used in a completely non-critical environment, ⪚ a private computer at home. -Automatic Login +Automatic Login -Automatic login will give anyone access to a certain account on your system without doing any authentication. You can enable it using the option Enable auto-login. +Automatic login will give anyone access to a certain account on your system without doing any authentication. You can enable it using the option Enable auto-login. -You can choose the account to be used for automatic login from the list labelled User:. +You can choose the account to be used for automatic login from the list labelled User:. -<guilabel ->Password-Less Login</guilabel -> - -Using this feature, you can allow certain users to login without having to provide their password. Enable this feature using the Enable password-less logins option. - -Below this option you'll see a list of users on the system. Enable password-less login for specific users by checking the checkbox next to the login names. By default, this feature is disabled for all users. - -Again, this option should only be used in a safe environment. If you enable it on a rather public system you should take care that only users with heavy access restrictions are granted password-less login, ⪚ guest. - -The Automatically login after X server crash option allows you to skip the authentication procedure when your X server accidentally crashed. - -You can also choose which user is preselected when &tdm; starts. The default is None, but you can choose Previous to have &tdm; default to the last successfully logged in user, or you can Specify a particular user to always be selected from the list. You can also have &tdm; set the focus to the password field, so that when you reach the &tdm; login screen, you can type the password immediately. +<guilabel>Password-Less Login</guilabel> + +Using this feature, you can allow certain users to login without having to provide their password. Enable this feature using the Enable password-less logins option. + +Below this option you'll see a list of users on the system. Enable password-less login for specific users by checking the checkbox next to the login names. By default, this feature is disabled for all users. + +Again, this option should only be used in a safe environment. If you enable it on a rather public system you should take care that only users with heavy access restrictions are granted password-less login, ⪚ guest. + +The Automatically login after X server crash option allows you to skip the authentication procedure when your X server accidentally crashed. + +You can also choose which user is preselected when &tdm; starts. The default is None, but you can choose Previous to have &tdm; default to the last successfully logged in user, or you can Specify a particular user to always be selected from the list. You can also have &tdm; set the focus to the password field, so that when you reach the &tdm; login screen, you can type the password immediately. @@ -1221,29 +564,16 @@ -Configuring your system to use &tdm; +Configuring your system to use &tdm; -This chapter assumes that your system is already configured to run the X Window System, and that you only need to reconfigure it to allow graphical login. +This chapter assumes that your system is already configured to run the X Window System, and that you only need to reconfigure it to allow graphical login. -Setting up &tdm; - -The fundamental thing that controls whether your computer boots to a terminal prompt (console mode) or a graphical login prompt is the default runlevel. The runlevel is set by the program /sbin/init under the control of the configuration file /etc/inittab. The default runlevels used by different &UNIX; systems (and different &Linux; distributions) vary, but if you look at /etc/inittab the start of it should be something like this: - -# Default runlevel. The runlevels used by RHS are: +Setting up &tdm; + +The fundamental thing that controls whether your computer boots to a terminal prompt (console mode) or a graphical login prompt is the default runlevel. The runlevel is set by the program /sbin/init under the control of the configuration file /etc/inittab. The default runlevels used by different &UNIX; systems (and different &Linux; distributions) vary, but if you look at /etc/inittab the start of it should be something like this: + +# Default runlevel. The runlevels used by RHS are: # 0 - halt (Do NOT set initdefault to this) # 1 - Single user mode # 2 - Multiuser, without NFS @@ -1255,263 +585,107 @@ id:3:initdefault: -All but the last line of this extract are comments. The comments show that runlevel 5 is used for X11 and that runlevel 3 is used for multi-user mode without X11 (console mode). The final line specifies that the default runlevel of the system is 3 (console mode). If your system currently uses graphical login (for example, using &xdm;) its default runlevel will match the runlevel specified for X11. +All but the last line of this extract are comments. The comments show that runlevel 5 is used for X11 and that runlevel 3 is used for multi-user mode without X11 (console mode). The final line specifies that the default runlevel of the system is 3 (console mode). If your system currently uses graphical login (for example, using &xdm;) its default runlevel will match the runlevel specified for X11. -The runlevel with graphical login (&xdm;) for some common &Linux; distributions are: +The runlevel with graphical login (&xdm;) for some common &Linux; distributions are: -5 for &RedHat; 3.x and later, and for &Mandrake; -4 for Slackware -3 for &SuSE;. 4.x and 5.x +5 for &RedHat; 3.x and later, and for &Mandrake; +4 for Slackware +3 for &SuSE;. 4.x and 5.x -The first step in configuring your system is to ensure that you can start &tdm; from the command line. Once this is working, you can change your system configuration so that &tdm; starts automatically each time you reboot your system. - -To test &tdm;, you must first bring your system to a runlevel that does not run &xdm;. To do so, issue a command like this: - -/sbin/init - -Instead of the number you should specify the appropriate runlevel for console mode on your system. - -If your system uses Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM), which is normal with recent &Linux; and Solaris systems, you should check that your PAM configuration permits login through the service named kde. If you previously used &xdm; successfully, you should not need to make any changes to your PAM configuration in order to use &tdm;. /etc/pam.conf or /etc/pam.d/kde. Information on configuring PAM is beyond the scope of this handbook, but PAM comes with comprehensive documentation (try looking in /usr/share/doc/*pam*/html/). - -Now it's time for you to test &tdm; by issuing the following command: - -tdm +The first step in configuring your system is to ensure that you can start &tdm; from the command line. Once this is working, you can change your system configuration so that &tdm; starts automatically each time you reboot your system. + +To test &tdm;, you must first bring your system to a runlevel that does not run &xdm;. To do so, issue a command like this: + +/sbin/init + +Instead of the number you should specify the appropriate runlevel for console mode on your system. + +If your system uses Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM), which is normal with recent &Linux; and Solaris systems, you should check that your PAM configuration permits login through the service named kde. If you previously used &xdm; successfully, you should not need to make any changes to your PAM configuration in order to use &tdm;. /etc/pam.conf or /etc/pam.d/kde. Information on configuring PAM is beyond the scope of this handbook, but PAM comes with comprehensive documentation (try looking in /usr/share/doc/*pam*/html/). + +Now it's time for you to test &tdm; by issuing the following command: + +tdm -If you get a &tdm; login dialogue and you are able to log in, things are going well. The main thing that can go wrong here is that the run-time linker might not find the shared &Qt; or &kde; libraries. If you have a binary distribution of the &kde; libraries, make sure &tdm; is installed where the libraries believe &kde; is installed and try setting some environment variables to point to your &kde; and &Qt; libraries. - -For example: - -export - -export - -export - -export - +If you get a &tdm; login dialogue and you are able to log in, things are going well. The main thing that can go wrong here is that the run-time linker might not find the shared &Qt; or &kde; libraries. If you have a binary distribution of the &kde; libraries, make sure &tdm; is installed where the libraries believe &kde; is installed and try setting some environment variables to point to your &kde; and &Qt; libraries. + +For example: + +export + +export + +export + +export + -If you are still unsuccessful, try starting &xdm; instead, to make sure that you are not suffering from a more serious X configuration problem. +If you are still unsuccessful, try starting &xdm; instead, to make sure that you are not suffering from a more serious X configuration problem. -When you are able to start &tdm; successfully, you can start to replace &xdm; by &tdm;. Again, this is distribution-dependent. +When you are able to start &tdm; successfully, you can start to replace &xdm; by &tdm;. Again, this is distribution-dependent. -For &RedHat;, edit /etc/inittab, look for the string xdm and replace it with &tdm; (including all paths). +For &RedHat;, edit /etc/inittab, look for the string xdm and replace it with &tdm; (including all paths). -For &Mandrake;, the X11 runlevel in /etc/inittab invokes the shell script /etc/X11/prefdm, which is set up to select from amongst several display managers, including &tdm;. Make sure that all the paths are correct for your installation. +For &Mandrake;, the X11 runlevel in /etc/inittab invokes the shell script /etc/X11/prefdm, which is set up to select from amongst several display managers, including &tdm;. Make sure that all the paths are correct for your installation. -For &SuSE;, edit /sbin/init.d/xdm to add a first line: +For &SuSE;, edit /sbin/init.d/xdm to add a first line: -. /etc/rc.config +. /etc/rc.config DISPLAYMANAGER=tdm export DISPLAYMANAGER -For FreeBSD, edit /etc/ttys and find the line like this: ttyv8 "/usr/X11R6/bin/xdm -nodaemon" xterm off secure and edit it to this: ttyv8 "/usr/local/bin/tdm -nodaemon" xterm on secure +For FreeBSD, edit /etc/ttys and find the line like this: ttyv8 "/usr/X11R6/bin/xdm -nodaemon" xterm off secure and edit it to this: ttyv8 "/usr/local/bin/tdm -nodaemon" xterm on secure -Most other distributions are a variation of one of these. +Most other distributions are a variation of one of these. -At this stage, you can test &tdm; again by bringing your system to the runlevel that should now run &tdm;. To do so, issue a command like this: +At this stage, you can test &tdm; again by bringing your system to the runlevel that should now run &tdm;. To do so, issue a command like this: -/sbin/init +/sbin/init -Instead of the number you should specify the appropriate runlevel for running X11 on your system. - -The final step is to edit the initdefault entry in /etc/inittab to specify the appropriate runlevel for X11. - -Before you make this change, ensure that you have a way to reboot your system if a problem occurs. This might be a rescue floppy-disk provided by your operating system distribution or a specially-designed rescue floppy-disk, such as tomsrtbt. Ignore this advice at your peril. - -When you reboot your system, you should end up with the graphical &tdm; login dialogue. - -If this step is unsuccessful the most likely problem is that the environment used at boot time differs from the environment that you used for testing at the command line. If you are trying to get two versions of KDE to co-exist, be particularly careful that the settings you use for your PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variables are consistent, and that the startup scripts are not over-riding them in some way. +Instead of the number you should specify the appropriate runlevel for running X11 on your system. + +The final step is to edit the initdefault entry in /etc/inittab to specify the appropriate runlevel for X11. + +Before you make this change, ensure that you have a way to reboot your system if a problem occurs. This might be a rescue floppy-disk provided by your operating system distribution or a specially-designed rescue floppy-disk, such as tomsrtbt. Ignore this advice at your peril. + +When you reboot your system, you should end up with the graphical &tdm; login dialogue. + +If this step is unsuccessful the most likely problem is that the environment used at boot time differs from the environment that you used for testing at the command line. If you are trying to get two versions of KDE to co-exist, be particularly careful that the settings you use for your PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variables are consistent, and that the startup scripts are not over-riding them in some way. -Supporting multiple window managers - -The main dialogue box for &tdm; includes a Session Type: drop-down box, which allows you to select a window manager to use for your session. This chapter describes the changes that you must make to your configuration files in order to support this feature. - -The options that appear in the Session Type: drop-down box are configured by entries in the TDM section of &tdmrc;. - -When you log in using &tdm;, the shell script Xsession is executed. The session type that you select is passed as a command-line argument. (Xsession can be found in /etc/X11/xdm/ for Redhat and Mandrake, and in /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xdm/ for S.u.S.E.). Whilst debugging, you might find it helpful to add this line to Xsession: +Supporting multiple window managers + +The main dialogue box for &tdm; includes a Session Type: drop-down box, which allows you to select a window manager to use for your session. This chapter describes the changes that you must make to your configuration files in order to support this feature. + +The options that appear in the Session Type: drop-down box are configured by entries in the TDM section of &tdmrc;. + +When you log in using &tdm;, the shell script Xsession is executed. The session type that you select is passed as a command-line argument. (Xsession can be found in /etc/X11/xdm/ for Redhat and Mandrake, and in /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xdm/ for S.u.S.E.). Whilst debugging, you might find it helpful to add this line to Xsession: -echo "$0 || $1 || $2" -> $HOME/.Xsession_args +echo "$0 || $1 || $2" > $HOME/.Xsession_args -How you proceed now depends upon how your system usually starts up window managers. Here are two different approaches, with examples of the changes that you must make: +How you proceed now depends upon how your system usually starts up window managers. Here are two different approaches, with examples of the changes that you must make: -The window manager is started by commands within Xsession. In this case, you can add a case statement to start the appropriate window manager. Linux Mandrake uses this approach; here is an extract from Xsession: +The window manager is started by commands within Xsession. In this case, you can add a case statement to start the appropriate window manager. Linux Mandrake uses this approach; here is an extract from Xsession: -# now, we see if xdm/gdm/tdm has asked for a specific environment +# now, we see if xdm/gdm/tdm has asked for a specific environment case $# in 1) case $1 in @@ -1536,50 +710,17 @@ esac -The window manager is started by another script that is invoked by Xsession. In this case you must ensure that the parameter passed to Xsession is passed on to that other script. For example, if the window manager is started like this: - -exec - -you would need to change it to: - -exec - -Having made this change, you must trace your way through the startup to find the place where the window manager is started. One approach uses xinitrc to start the window manager; this allows a system-wide file /etc/X11/xinit/xinitrc or a user-specific file $HOME/.xinitrc to be used. If you edit $HOME/.xinitrc, you may want to save a copy in /etc/skel, so that it will be automatically generated in every user account you create from now on. Here is an example xinitrc for a system using this approach: - -#!/bin/bash +The window manager is started by another script that is invoked by Xsession. In this case you must ensure that the parameter passed to Xsession is passed on to that other script. For example, if the window manager is started like this: + +exec + +you would need to change it to: + +exec + +Having made this change, you must trace your way through the startup to find the place where the window manager is started. One approach uses xinitrc to start the window manager; this allows a system-wide file /etc/X11/xinit/xinitrc or a user-specific file $HOME/.xinitrc to be used. If you edit $HOME/.xinitrc, you may want to save a copy in /etc/skel, so that it will be automatically generated in every user account you create from now on. Here is an example xinitrc for a system using this approach: + +#!/bin/bash # # .xsession/.xinitrc # @@ -1639,164 +780,82 @@ exec $WINDOWMANAGER -Using &tdm; for Remote Logins (&XDMCP;) +Using &tdm; for Remote Logins (&XDMCP;) -&XDMCP; is the Open Group standard, the X Display Manager Control Protocol. This is used to set up connections between remote systems over the network. +&XDMCP; is the Open Group standard, the X Display Manager Control Protocol. This is used to set up connections between remote systems over the network. -&XDMCP; is useful in multiuser situations where there are users with workstations and a more powerful server that can provide the resources to run multiple X sessions. For example, &XDMCP; is a good way to reuse old computers - a Pentium or even 486 computer with 16 Mb RAM is sufficient to run X itself, and using XDMCP such a computer can run a full modern &kde; session from a server. For the server part, once a single &kde; (or other environment) session is running, running another one requires very few extra resources. +&XDMCP; is useful in multiuser situations where there are users with workstations and a more powerful server that can provide the resources to run multiple X sessions. For example, &XDMCP; is a good way to reuse old computers - a Pentium or even 486 computer with 16 Mb RAM is sufficient to run X itself, and using XDMCP such a computer can run a full modern &kde; session from a server. For the server part, once a single &kde; (or other environment) session is running, running another one requires very few extra resources. -However, allowing another method of login to your machine obviously has security implications. You should run this service only if you need to allow remote X Servers to start login sessions on your system. Users with a single &UNIX; computer should not need to run this. +However, allowing another method of login to your machine obviously has security implications. You should run this service only if you need to allow remote X Servers to start login sessions on your system. Users with a single &UNIX; computer should not need to run this. -Other sources of information - -Since &tdm; is descended from &xdm;, the xdm man page may provide useful background information. For X-related problems try the man pages X and startx. If you have questions about &tdm; that are not answered by this handbook, take advantage of the fact the &tdm; is provided under the terms of the GNU General Public Licence: look at the source code. +Other sources of information + +Since &tdm; is descended from &xdm;, the xdm man page may provide useful background information. For X-related problems try the man pages X and startx. If you have questions about &tdm; that are not answered by this handbook, take advantage of the fact the &tdm; is provided under the terms of the GNU General Public Licence: look at the source code. -Credits and Licence - -&tdm; is derived from, and includes code from, &xdm; (C) Keith Packard, MIT X Consortium. - -&tdm; 0.1 was written by Matthias Ettrich. Later versions till &kde; 2.0.x were written by Steffen Hansen. Some new features for &kde; 2.1.x and a major rewrite for &kde; 2.2.x made by Oswald Buddenhagen. - -Other parts of the &tdm; code are copyright by the authors, and licensed under the terms of the GNU GPL. Anyone is allowed to change &tdm; and redistribute the result as long as the names of the authors are mentioned. - -&tdm; requires the Qt library, which is copyright Troll Tech AS. - -Documentation contributors: - -Documentation written by Steffen Hansen stefh@dit.ou.dk - -Documentation extended by Gregor Zumsteinzumstein@ssd.ethz.ch. Last update August 9, 1998 - -Documentation revised for KDE 2 by Neal Crooknac@forth.org. Last update August 6, 2000 - -Documentation extended and revised for KDE 2.2 by Oswald Buddenhagenossi@kde.org. Last update August, 2001 - - - -Documentation copyright Steffen Hansen, Gregor Zumstein, Neal Crook and Oswald Buddenhagen. This document also includes large parts of the &xdm; man page, which is (C) Keith Packard. - -Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net +Credits and Licence + +&tdm; is derived from, and includes code from, &xdm; (C) Keith Packard, MIT X Consortium. + +&tdm; 0.1 was written by Matthias Ettrich. Later versions till &kde; 2.0.x were written by Steffen Hansen. Some new features for &kde; 2.1.x and a major rewrite for &kde; 2.2.x made by Oswald Buddenhagen. + +Other parts of the &tdm; code are copyright by the authors, and licensed under the terms of the GNU GPL. Anyone is allowed to change &tdm; and redistribute the result as long as the names of the authors are mentioned. + +&tdm; requires the Qt library, which is copyright Troll Tech AS. + +Documentation contributors: + +Documentation written by Steffen Hansen stefh@dit.ou.dk + +Documentation extended by Gregor Zumsteinzumstein@ssd.ethz.ch. Last update August 9, 1998 + +Documentation revised for KDE 2 by Neal Crooknac@forth.org. Last update August 6, 2000 + +Documentation extended and revised for KDE 2.2 by Oswald Buddenhagenossi@kde.org. Last update August, 2001 + + + +Documentation copyright Steffen Hansen, Gregor Zumstein, Neal Crook and Oswald Buddenhagen. This document also includes large parts of the &xdm; man page, which is (C) Keith Packard. + +Conversion to British English: John Knight anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net &underFDL; &underGPL; -Building and Installing tdm - -&tdm; is part of the KDE project. The various component parts of the KDE project are broken into sections, called packages. &tdm; is part of the package called tdebase. You can get KDE source code from various Linux and BSD distribution CDs, or by download from www.kde.org or its mirrors. If you have an out-of-date source code tree, you can use one of the KDE cvsup servers to bring it up-to-date whilst using minimal network bandwidth. - -Before building tdebase, you must have built and installed (in this order) version 2 of the qt library and the KDE packages tdesupport (optionally) and tdelibs. - -In order to build any of the above, you must already have the X Window System installed, together with a C++ compiler. If are you building from CVS you will also need the GNU configuration tools automake and autoconf. - -If the last few paragraphs seemed like a foreign language, then either you have strayed into an Inappropriate Area of this handbook, or you are about to undergo a Great Learning Experience. - -If you managed to satisfy all of the prerequisites, you are unlikely to have any problems with building and installing tdebase. &tdm; is installed in your $TDEDIR/bin folder. - -make will not overwrite your previous &tdm; config files including &tdmrc;. +Building and Installing tdm + +&tdm; is part of the KDE project. The various component parts of the KDE project are broken into sections, called packages. &tdm; is part of the package called tdebase. You can get KDE source code from various Linux and BSD distribution CDs, or by download from www.kde.org or its mirrors. If you have an out-of-date source code tree, you can use one of the KDE cvsup servers to bring it up-to-date whilst using minimal network bandwidth. + +Before building tdebase, you must have built and installed (in this order) version 2 of the qt library and the KDE packages tdesupport (optionally) and tdelibs. + +In order to build any of the above, you must already have the X Window System installed, together with a C++ compiler. If are you building from CVS you will also need the GNU configuration tools automake and autoconf. + +If the last few paragraphs seemed like a foreign language, then either you have strayed into an Inappropriate Area of this handbook, or you are about to undergo a Great Learning Experience. + +If you managed to satisfy all of the prerequisites, you are unlikely to have any problems with building and installing tdebase. &tdm; is installed in your $TDEDIR/bin folder. + +make will not overwrite your previous &tdm; config files including &tdmrc;. -Glossary +Glossary -greeter -The greeter is the login dialogue, &ie; the part of &tdm; which the user sees. +greeter +The greeter is the login dialogue, &ie; the part of &tdm; which the user sees. -entropy -... +entropy +... diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/tdmrc-ref.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/tdmrc-ref.docbook index a778a4b0d2f..4e122e4c1d4 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/tdmrc-ref.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/tdm/tdmrc-ref.docbook @@ -1,138 +1,66 @@ -The Files &tdm; Uses for Configuration +The Files &tdm; Uses for Configuration -This chapter documents the files that control &tdm;'s behaviour. Some of this can be also controlled from the &kcontrol; module, but not all. +This chapter documents the files that control &tdm;'s behaviour. Some of this can be also controlled from the &kcontrol; module, but not all. -&tdmrc; - The &tdm; master configuration file - -The basic format of the file is INI-like. Options are key/value pairs, placed in sections. Everything in the file is case sensitive. Syntactic errors and unrecognised key/section identifiers cause &tdm; to issue non-fatal error messages. - -Lines beginning with # are comments; empty lines are ignored as well. - -Sections are denoted by [Name of Section]. - -You can configure every X-display individually. -Every display has a display name, which consists of a host name (which is empty for local displays specified in the Xservers file), a colon and a display number. Additionally, a display belongs to a display class (which can be ignored in most cases). - -Sections with display-specific settings have the formal syntax [X- host [ : number [ _ class ] ] - sub-section ] -All sections with the same sub-section make up a section class. - -You can use the * wildcard for host, number and class. You may omit trailing components; they are assumed to be * then. The host part may be a domain specification like .inf.tu-dresden.de. - -From which section a setting is actually taken is determined by these rules: +&tdmrc; - The &tdm; master configuration file + +The basic format of the file is INI-like. Options are key/value pairs, placed in sections. Everything in the file is case sensitive. Syntactic errors and unrecognised key/section identifiers cause &tdm; to issue non-fatal error messages. + +Lines beginning with # are comments; empty lines are ignored as well. + +Sections are denoted by [Name of Section]. + +You can configure every X-display individually. +Every display has a display name, which consists of a host name (which is empty for local displays specified in the Xservers file), a colon and a display number. Additionally, a display belongs to a display class (which can be ignored in most cases). + +Sections with display-specific settings have the formal syntax [X- host [ : number [ _ class ] ] - sub-section ] +All sections with the same sub-section make up a section class. + +You can use the * wildcard for host, number and class. You may omit trailing components; they are assumed to be * then. The host part may be a domain specification like .inf.tu-dresden.de. + +From which section a setting is actually taken is determined by these rules: -An exact match takes precedence over a partial match (for the host part), which in turn takes precedence over a wildcard. +An exact match takes precedence over a partial match (for the host part), which in turn takes precedence over a wildcard. -Precedence decreases from left to right for equally exact matches. +Precedence decreases from left to right for equally exact matches. -Example: display name myhost:0, class dpy +Example: display name myhost:0, class dpy -[X-myhost:0_dpy] precedes +[X-myhost:0_dpy] precedes -[X-myhost:0_*] (same as [X-myhost:0]) precedes +[X-myhost:0_*] (same as [X-myhost:0]) precedes -[X-myhost:*_dpy] precedes +[X-myhost:*_dpy] precedes -[X-myhost:*_*] (same as [X-myhost]) precedes +[X-myhost:*_*] (same as [X-myhost]) precedes -[X-*:0_dpy] precedes +[X-*:0_dpy] precedes -[X-*:0_*] (same as [X-*:0]) precedes +[X-*:0_*] (same as [X-*:0]) precedes -[X-*:*_*] (same as [X-*]). +[X-*:*_*] (same as [X-*]). -These sections do not match this display: -[X-hishost], [X-myhost:0_dec], [X-*:1], [X-:*] +These sections do not match this display: +[X-hishost], [X-myhost:0_dec], [X-*:1], [X-:*] @@ -140,287 +68,143 @@ -Common sections are [X-*] (all displays), [X-:*] (all local displays) and [X-:0] (the first local display). +Common sections are [X-*] (all displays), [X-:*] (all local displays) and [X-:0] (the first local display). -The format for all keys is  = value. Keys are only valid in the section class they are defined for. Some keys do not apply to particular displays, in which case they are ignored. +The format for all keys is  = value. Keys are only valid in the section class they are defined for. Some keys do not apply to particular displays, in which case they are ignored. -If a setting is not found in any matching section, the default is used. +If a setting is not found in any matching section, the default is used. -A pristine &tdmrc; is very thoroughly commented. All comments will be lost if you change this file with the kcontrol frontend. +A pristine &tdmrc; is very thoroughly commented. All comments will be lost if you change this file with the kcontrol frontend. -The [General] section of &tdmrc; +The [General] section of &tdmrc; -This section contains global options that do not fit into any specific section. +This section contains global options that do not fit into any specific section. - + -This option exists solely for the purpose of clean automatic upgrades. Do not change it, you may interfere with future upgrades and this could result in &tdm; failing to run. +This option exists solely for the purpose of clean automatic upgrades. Do not change it, you may interfere with future upgrades and this could result in &tdm; failing to run. - + -If the value starts with a slash (/), it specifies a file to read &X-Server; definitions from; otherwise, it is an &X-Server; definition by itself. See for the details. The default is an &X-Server; definition that is usually reasonable for the system on which &tdm; was built. +If the value starts with a slash (/), it specifies a file to read &X-Server; definitions from; otherwise, it is an &X-Server; definition by itself. See for the details. The default is an &X-Server; definition that is usually reasonable for the system on which &tdm; was built. - + -List of Virtual Terminals to allocate to &X-Server;s. For negative numbers the absolute value is used, and the VT will be allocated only if the kernel says it is free. If &tdm; exhausts this list, it will allocate free VTs greater than the absolute value of the last entry in this list. -Empty by default. +List of Virtual Terminals to allocate to &X-Server;s. For negative numbers the absolute value is used, and the VT will be allocated only if the kernel says it is free. If &tdm; exhausts this list, it will allocate free VTs greater than the absolute value of the last entry in this list. +Empty by default. - + -The filename specified will be created to contain an ASCII representation of the process ID of the main &tdm; process; the PID will not be stored if the filename is empty. -Empty by default. +The filename specified will be created to contain an ASCII representation of the process ID of the main &tdm; process; the PID will not be stored if the filename is empty. +Empty by default. - + -This option controls whether &tdm; uses file locking to keep multiple display managers from running onto each other. -The default is true. +This option controls whether &tdm; uses file locking to keep multiple display managers from running onto each other. +The default is true. - + -This names a directory under which &tdm; stores &X-Server; authorisation files while initialising the session. &tdm; expects the system to clean up this directory from stale files on reboot. The authorisation file to be used for a particular display can be specified with the option in [X-*-Core]. -The default is /var/run/xauth. +This names a directory under which &tdm; stores &X-Server; authorisation files while initialising the session. &tdm; expects the system to clean up this directory from stale files on reboot. The authorisation file to be used for a particular display can be specified with the option in [X-*-Core]. +The default is /var/run/xauth. - + -This boolean controls whether &tdm; automatically re-reads its configuration files if it finds them to have changed. -The default is true. +This boolean controls whether &tdm; automatically re-reads its configuration files if it finds them to have changed. +The default is true. - + -Additional environment variables &tdm; should pass on to all programs it runs. LD_LIBRARY_PATH and XCURSOR_THEME are good candidates; otherwise, it should not be necessary very often. -Empty by default. +Additional environment variables &tdm; should pass on to all programs it runs. LD_LIBRARY_PATH and XCURSOR_THEME are good candidates; otherwise, it should not be necessary very often. +Empty by default. - + -If the system has no native entropy source like /dev/urandom (see ) and no entropy daemon like EGD (see and ) is running, &tdm; will fall back to its own pseudo-random number generator that will, among other things, successively checksum parts of this file (which, obviously, should change frequently). This option does not exist on Linux and various BSDs. -The default is /dev/mem. +If the system has no native entropy source like /dev/urandom (see ) and no entropy daemon like EGD (see and ) is running, &tdm; will fall back to its own pseudo-random number generator that will, among other things, successively checksum parts of this file (which, obviously, should change frequently). This option does not exist on Linux and various BSDs. +The default is /dev/mem. - + -If the system has no native entropy source like /dev/urandom (see ), read random data from a Pseudo-Random Number Generator Daemon, like EGD (http://egd.sourceforge.net) via this UNIX domain socket. This option does not exist on Linux and various BSDs. -Empty by default. +If the system has no native entropy source like /dev/urandom (see ), read random data from a Pseudo-Random Number Generator Daemon, like EGD (http://egd.sourceforge.net) via this UNIX domain socket. This option does not exist on Linux and various BSDs. +Empty by default. - + -Same as , only use a TCP socket on localhost. +Same as , only use a TCP socket on localhost. - + -The path to a character device which TDM should read random data from. Empty means to use the system's preferred entropy device if there is one. This option does not exist on OpenBSD, as it uses the arc4_random function instead. -Empty by default. +The path to a character device which TDM should read random data from. Empty means to use the system's preferred entropy device if there is one. This option does not exist on OpenBSD, as it uses the arc4_random function instead. +Empty by default. - + -The directory in which the command FiFos should be created; make it empty to disable them. -The default is /var/run/xdmctl. +The directory in which the command FiFos should be created; make it empty to disable them. +The default is /var/run/xdmctl. - + -The group to which the global command FiFo should belong; can be either a name or a numerical ID. +The group to which the global command FiFo should belong; can be either a name or a numerical ID. - + -The directory in which &tdm; should store persistent working data; such data is, for example, the previous user that logged in on a particular display. -The default is /var/lib/tdm. +The directory in which &tdm; should store persistent working data; such data is, for example, the previous user that logged in on a particular display. +The default is /var/lib/tdm. - + -The directory in which &tdm; should store users' .dmrc files. This is only needed if the home directories are not readable before actually logging in (like with AFS). -Empty by default. +The directory in which &tdm; should store users' .dmrc files. This is only needed if the home directories are not readable before actually logging in (like with AFS). +Empty by default. @@ -429,133 +213,73 @@ -The [Xdmcp] section of &tdmrc; +The [Xdmcp] section of &tdmrc; -This section contains options that control &tdm;'s handling of &XDMCP; requests. +This section contains options that control &tdm;'s handling of &XDMCP; requests. - + -Whether &tdm; should listen to incoming &XDMCP; requests. -The default is true. +Whether &tdm; should listen to incoming &XDMCP; requests. +The default is true. - + -This indicates the UDP port number which &tdm; uses to listen for incoming &XDMCP; requests. Unless you need to debug the system, leave this with its default value. -The default is 177. +This indicates the UDP port number which &tdm; uses to listen for incoming &XDMCP; requests. Unless you need to debug the system, leave this with its default value. +The default is 177. - + -XDM-AUTHENTICATION-1 style &XDMCP; authentication requires a private key to be shared between &tdm; and the terminal. This option specifies the file containing those values. Each entry in the file consists of a display name and the shared key. -Empty by default. +XDM-AUTHENTICATION-1 style &XDMCP; authentication requires a private key to be shared between &tdm; and the terminal. This option specifies the file containing those values. Each entry in the file consists of a display name and the shared key. +Empty by default. - + -To prevent unauthorised &XDMCP; service and to allow forwarding of &XDMCP; IndirectQuery requests, this file contains a database of hostnames which are either allowed direct access to this machine, or have a list of hosts to which queries should be forwarded to. The format of this file is described in . -The default is ${kde_confdir}/tdm/Xaccess. +To prevent unauthorised &XDMCP; service and to allow forwarding of &XDMCP; IndirectQuery requests, this file contains a database of hostnames which are either allowed direct access to this machine, or have a list of hosts to which queries should be forwarded to. The format of this file is described in . +The default is ${kde_confdir}/tdm/Xaccess. - + -Number of seconds to wait for the display to respond after the user has selected a host from the chooser. If the display sends an &XDMCP; IndirectQuery within this time, the request is forwarded to the chosen host; otherwise, it is assumed to be from a new session and the chooser is offered again. -The default is 15. +Number of seconds to wait for the display to respond after the user has selected a host from the chooser. If the display sends an &XDMCP; IndirectQuery within this time, the request is forwarded to the chosen host; otherwise, it is assumed to be from a new session and the chooser is offered again. +The default is 15. - + -When computing the display name for &XDMCP; clients, the name resolver will typically create a fully qualified host name for the terminal. As this is sometimes confusing, &tdm; will remove the domain name portion of the host name if it is the same as the domain name of the local host when this option is enabled. -The default is true. +When computing the display name for &XDMCP; clients, the name resolver will typically create a fully qualified host name for the terminal. As this is sometimes confusing, &tdm; will remove the domain name portion of the host name if it is the same as the domain name of the local host when this option is enabled. +The default is true. - + -Use the numeric IP address of the incoming connection on multihomed hosts instead of the host name. This is to avoid trying to connect on the wrong interface which might be down at this time. -The default is false. +Use the numeric IP address of the incoming connection on multihomed hosts instead of the host name. This is to avoid trying to connect on the wrong interface which might be down at this time. +The default is false. - + -This specifies a program which is run (as root) when an &XDMCP; DirectQuery or BroadcastQuery is received and this host is configured to offer &XDMCP; display management. The output of this program may be displayed in a chooser window. If no program is specified, the string Willing to manage is sent. -Empty by default. +This specifies a program which is run (as root) when an &XDMCP; DirectQuery or BroadcastQuery is received and this host is configured to offer &XDMCP; display management. The output of this program may be displayed in a chooser window. If no program is specified, the string Willing to manage is sent. +Empty by default. @@ -564,138 +288,63 @@ -The [Shutdown] section of &tdmrc; +The [Shutdown] section of &tdmrc; -This section contains global options concerning system shutdown. +This section contains global options concerning system shutdown. - + -The command to run to halt/poweroff the system. The default is something reasonable for the system on which &tdm; was built, like /sbin/shutdown  now. +The command to run to halt/poweroff the system. The default is something reasonable for the system on which &tdm; was built, like /sbin/shutdown  now. - + -The command to run to reboot the system. The default is something reasonable for the system &tdm; on which was built, like /sbin/shutdown  now. +The command to run to reboot the system. The default is something reasonable for the system &tdm; on which was built, like /sbin/shutdown  now. - + -Whether it is allowed to shut down the system via the global command FiFo. -The default is false. +Whether it is allowed to shut down the system via the global command FiFo. +The default is false. - + -Whether it is allowed to abort active sessions when shutting down the system via the global command FiFo. This will have no effect unless is enabled. -The default is true. +Whether it is allowed to abort active sessions when shutting down the system via the global command FiFo. This will have no effect unless is enabled. +The default is true. - + -Instructs &tdm; to offer LiLo boot options in the shutdown dialogue. Only available on Linux i386 & x86-64. -The default is false. +Instructs &tdm; to offer LiLo boot options in the shutdown dialogue. Only available on Linux i386 & x86-64. +The default is false. - + -The location of the LiLo binary. Only available on Linux i386 & x86-64. -The default is /sbin/lilo. +The location of the LiLo binary. Only available on Linux i386 & x86-64. +The default is /sbin/lilo. - + -The location of the map file LiLo should use. Only available on Linux i386 & x86-64. -The default is /boot/map. +The location of the map file LiLo should use. Only available on Linux i386 & x86-64. +The default is /boot/map. @@ -704,859 +353,383 @@ -The [X-*-Core] section class of &tdmrc; +The [X-*-Core] section class of &tdmrc; -This section class contains options concerning the configuration of the &tdm; backend (core). +This section class contains options concerning the configuration of the &tdm; backend (core). - + -See . -The default is 15. +See . +The default is 15. - + -See . -The default is 120. +See . +The default is 120. - + -These options control the behaviour of &tdm; when attempting to open a connection to an &X-Server;. is the length of the pause (in seconds) between successive attempts, is the number of attempts to make and is the amount of time to spend on a connection attempt. After attempts have been made, or if seconds elapse in any particular connection attempt, the start attempt is considered failed. -The default is 5. +These options control the behaviour of &tdm; when attempting to open a connection to an &X-Server;. is the length of the pause (in seconds) between successive attempts, is the number of attempts to make and is the amount of time to spend on a connection attempt. After attempts have been made, or if seconds elapse in any particular connection attempt, the start attempt is considered failed. +The default is 5. - + -How many times &tdm; should attempt to start a foreign display listed in the Xservers file before giving up and disabling it. Local displays are attempted only once, and &XDMCP; displays are retried indefinitely by the client (unless the option was given to the &X-Server;). -The default is 4. +How many times &tdm; should attempt to start a foreign display listed in the Xservers file before giving up and disabling it. Local displays are attempted only once, and &XDMCP; displays are retried indefinitely by the client (unless the option was given to the &X-Server;). +The default is 4. - + -How many times &tdm; should attempt to start up a local &X-Server;. Starting up includes executing it and waiting for it to come up. -The default is 1. +How many times &tdm; should attempt to start up a local &X-Server;. Starting up includes executing it and waiting for it to come up. +The default is 1. - + -How many seconds &tdm; should wait for a local &X-Server; to come up. -The default is 15. +How many seconds &tdm; should wait for a local &X-Server; to come up. +The default is 15. - + -See . -The default is 5. +See . +The default is 5. - + -To discover when remote displays disappear, &tdm; regularly pings them. specifies the time (in minutes) between the pings and specifies the maximum amount of time (in minutes) to wait for the terminal to respond to the request. If the terminal does not respond, the session is declared dead and terminated. If you frequently use X terminals which can become isolated from the managing host, you may wish to increase the timeout. The only worry is that sessions will continue to exist after the terminal has been accidentally disabled. -The default is 5. +To discover when remote displays disappear, &tdm; regularly pings them. specifies the time (in minutes) between the pings and specifies the maximum amount of time (in minutes) to wait for the terminal to respond to the request. If the terminal does not respond, the session is declared dead and terminated. If you frequently use X terminals which can become isolated from the managing host, you may wish to increase the timeout. The only worry is that sessions will continue to exist after the terminal has been accidentally disabled. +The default is 5. - + -Whether &tdm; should restart the local &X-Server; after session exit instead of resetting it. Use this if the &X-Server; leaks memory or crashes the system on reset attempts. -The default is false. +Whether &tdm; should restart the local &X-Server; after session exit instead of resetting it. Use this if the &X-Server; leaks memory or crashes the system on reset attempts. +The default is false. - + -The signal number to use to reset the local &X-Server;. -The default is 1 (SIGHUP). +The signal number to use to reset the local &X-Server;. +The default is 1 (SIGHUP). - + -The signal number to use to terminate the local &X-Server;. -The default is 15 (SIGTERM). +The signal number to use to terminate the local &X-Server;. +The default is 15 (SIGTERM). - + -Controls whether &tdm; generates and uses authorisation for local &X-Server; connections. For &XDMCP; displays the authorisation requested by the display is used; foreign non-&XDMCP; displays do not support authorisation at all. -The default is true. +Controls whether &tdm; generates and uses authorisation for local &X-Server; connections. For &XDMCP; displays the authorisation requested by the display is used; foreign non-&XDMCP; displays do not support authorisation at all. +The default is true. - + -If is true, use the authorisation mechanisms listed herein. The MIT-MAGIC-COOKIE-1 authorisation is always available; XDM-AUTHORIZATION-1, SUN-DES-1 and MIT-KERBEROS-5 might be available as well, depending on the build configuration. -The default is DEF_AUTH_NAME. +If is true, use the authorisation mechanisms listed herein. The MIT-MAGIC-COOKIE-1 authorisation is always available; XDM-AUTHORIZATION-1, SUN-DES-1 and MIT-KERBEROS-5 might be available as well, depending on the build configuration. +The default is DEF_AUTH_NAME. - + -Some old &X-Server;s re-read the authorisation file at &X-Server; reset time, instead of when checking the initial connection. As &tdm; generates the authorisation information just before connecting to the display, an old &X-Server; would not get up-to-date authorisation information. This option causes &tdm; to send SIGHUP to the &X-Server; after setting up the file, causing an additional &X-Server; reset to occur, during which time the new authorisation information will be read. -The default is false. +Some old &X-Server;s re-read the authorisation file at &X-Server; reset time, instead of when checking the initial connection. As &tdm; generates the authorisation information just before connecting to the display, an old &X-Server; would not get up-to-date authorisation information. This option causes &tdm; to send SIGHUP to the &X-Server; after setting up the file, causing an additional &X-Server; reset to occur, during which time the new authorisation information will be read. +The default is false. - + -This file is used to communicate the authorisation data from &tdm; to the &X-Server;, using the &X-Server; command line option. It should be kept in a directory which is not world-writable as it could easily be removed, disabling the authorisation mechanism in the &X-Server;. If not specified, a random name is generated from and the name of the display. -Empty by default. +This file is used to communicate the authorisation data from &tdm; to the &X-Server;, using the &X-Server; command line option. It should be kept in a directory which is not world-writable as it could easily be removed, disabling the authorisation mechanism in the &X-Server;. If not specified, a random name is generated from and the name of the display. +Empty by default. - + -This option specifies the name of the file to be loaded by xrdb as the resource database onto the root window of screen 0 of the display. KDE programs generally do not use X-resources, so this option is only needed if the program needs some X-resources. -Empty by default. +This option specifies the name of the file to be loaded by xrdb as the resource database onto the root window of screen 0 of the display. KDE programs generally do not use X-resources, so this option is only needed if the program needs some X-resources. +Empty by default. - + -The xrdb program to use to read the X-resources file specified in . -The default is ${x_bindir}/xrdb. +The xrdb program to use to read the X-resources file specified in . +The default is ${x_bindir}/xrdb. - + -This specifies a program which is run (as root) before offering the greeter window. This may be used to change the appearance of the screen around the greeter window or to put up other windows (e.g., you may want to run xconsole here). The conventional name for a file used here is Xsetup. See . -Empty by default. +This specifies a program which is run (as root) before offering the greeter window. This may be used to change the appearance of the screen around the greeter window or to put up other windows (e.g., you may want to run xconsole here). The conventional name for a file used here is Xsetup. See . +Empty by default. - + -This specifies a program which is run (as root) after the user authentication process succeeds. The conventional name for a file used here is Xstartup. See . -Empty by default. +This specifies a program which is run (as root) after the user authentication process succeeds. The conventional name for a file used here is Xstartup. See . +Empty by default. - + -This specifies a program which is run (as root) after the session terminates. The conventional name for a file used here is Xreset. See . -Empty by default. +This specifies a program which is run (as root) after the session terminates. The conventional name for a file used here is Xreset. See . +Empty by default. - + -This specifies the session program to be executed (as the user owning the session). The conventional name for a file used here is Xsession. See . -The default is ${x_bindir}/xterm -ls -T. +This specifies the session program to be executed (as the user owning the session). The conventional name for a file used here is Xsession. See . +The default is ${x_bindir}/xterm -ls -T. - + -If the program fails to execute, &tdm; will fall back to this program. This program is executed with no arguments, but executes using the same environment variables as the session would have had (see ). -The default is ${x_bindir}/xterm. +If the program fails to execute, &tdm; will fall back to this program. This program is executed with no arguments, but executes using the same environment variables as the session would have had (see ). +The default is ${x_bindir}/xterm. - + -The PATH environment variable for non-root s. The default depends on the system &tdm; was built on. +The PATH environment variable for non-root s. The default depends on the system &tdm; was built on. - + -The PATH environment variable for all programs but non-root s. Note that it is good practice not to include . (the current directory) into this entry. The default depends on the system &tdm; was built on. +The PATH environment variable for all programs but non-root s. Note that it is good practice not to include . (the current directory) into this entry. The default depends on the system &tdm; was built on. - + -The SHELL environment variable for all programs but the . -The default is /bin/sh. +The SHELL environment variable for all programs but the . +The default is /bin/sh. - + -When &tdm; is unable to write to the usual user authorisation file ($HOME/.Xauthority), it creates a unique file name in this directory and points the environment variable XAUTHORITY at the created file. -The default is /tmp. +When &tdm; is unable to write to the usual user authorisation file ($HOME/.Xauthority), it creates a unique file name in this directory and points the environment variable XAUTHORITY at the created file. +The default is /tmp. - + -If enabled, &tdm; will automatically restart a session after an &X-Server; crash (or if it is killed by Alt-Ctrl-BackSpace). Note that enabling this feature opens a security hole: a secured display lock can be circumvented (unless &kde;'s built-in screen locker is used). -The default is false. +If enabled, &tdm; will automatically restart a session after an &X-Server; crash (or if it is killed by Alt-Ctrl-BackSpace). Note that enabling this feature opens a security hole: a secured display lock can be circumvented (unless &kde;'s built-in screen locker is used). +The default is false. - + -If disabled, do not allow root (and any other user with UID = 0) to log in directly. -The default is true. +If disabled, do not allow root (and any other user with UID = 0) to log in directly. +The default is true. - + -If disabled, only users that have passwords assigned can log in. -The default is true. +If disabled, only users that have passwords assigned can log in. +The default is true. - + -Who is allowed to shut down the system. This applies both to the greeter and to the command FiFo. +Who is allowed to shut down the system. This applies both to the greeter and to the command FiFo. -None -no Shutdown... menu entry is shown at all - - -Root -the root password must be entered to shut down - - -All -everybody can shut down the machine +None +no Shutdown... menu entry is shown at all + + +Root +the root password must be entered to shut down + + +All +everybody can shut down the machine -The default is All. +The default is All. - + -Who is allowed to abort active sessions when shutting down. +Who is allowed to abort active sessions when shutting down. -None -no forced shutdown is allowed at all - - -Root -the root password must be entered to shut down forcibly - - -All -everybody can shut down the machine forcibly +None +no forced shutdown is allowed at all + + +Root +the root password must be entered to shut down forcibly + + +All +everybody can shut down the machine forcibly -The default is All. +The default is All. - + -The default choice for the shutdown condition/timing. +The default choice for the shutdown condition/timing. -Schedule -shut down after all active sessions exit (possibly at once) - - -TryNow -shut down, if no active sessions are open; otherwise, do nothing - - -ForceNow -shut down unconditionally +Schedule +shut down after all active sessions exit (possibly at once) + + +TryNow +shut down, if no active sessions are open; otherwise, do nothing + + +ForceNow +shut down unconditionally -The default is Schedule. +The default is Schedule. - + -How to offer shutdown scheduling options: +How to offer shutdown scheduling options: -Never -not at all - - -Optional -as a button in the simple shutdown dialogues - - -Always -instead of the simple shutdown dialogues +Never +not at all + + +Optional +as a button in the simple shutdown dialogues + + +Always +instead of the simple shutdown dialogues -The default is Never. +The default is Never. - + -Enable password-less logins on this display. Use with extreme care! -The default is false. +Enable password-less logins on this display. Use with extreme care! +The default is false. - + -The users that do not need to provide a password to log in. Items which are prefixed with @ represent all users in the user group named by that item. * means all users but root (and any other user with UID = 0). Never list root. -Empty by default. +The users that do not need to provide a password to log in. Items which are prefixed with @ represent all users in the user group named by that item. * means all users but root (and any other user with UID = 0). Never list root. +Empty by default. - + -Enable automatic login. Use with extreme care! -The default is false. +Enable automatic login. Use with extreme care! +The default is false. - + -The user to log in automatically. Never specify root! -Empty by default. +The user to log in automatically. Never specify root! +Empty by default. - + -The password for the user to log in automatically. This is not required unless the user is logged into a NIS or Kerberos domain. If you use this option, you should chmod  tdmrc for obvious reasons. -Empty by default. +The password for the user to log in automatically. This is not required unless the user is logged into a NIS or Kerberos domain. If you use this option, you should chmod  tdmrc for obvious reasons. +Empty by default. - + -A list of directories containing session type definitions. -The default is ${kde_datadir}/tdm/sessions. +A list of directories containing session type definitions. +The default is ${kde_datadir}/tdm/sessions. - + -The file (relative to the user's home directory) to redirect the session output to. One occurrence of %s in this string will be substituted with the display name. Use %% to obtain a literal %. -The default is .xsession-errors. +The file (relative to the user's home directory) to redirect the session output to. One occurrence of %s in this string will be substituted with the display name. Use %% to obtain a literal %. +The default is .xsession-errors. @@ -1565,1096 +738,485 @@ -The [X-*-Greeter] section class of &tdmrc; +The [X-*-Greeter] section class of &tdmrc; -This section class contains options concerning the configuration of the &tdm; frontend (greeter). +This section class contains options concerning the configuration of the &tdm; frontend (greeter). - + -Specify the widget style for the greeter. Empty means to use the built-in default which currently is Keramik. -Empty by default. +Specify the widget style for the greeter. Empty means to use the built-in default which currently is Keramik. +Empty by default. - + -Specify the widget colour scheme for the greeter. Empty means to use the built-in default which currently is yellowish grey with some light blue and yellow elements. -Empty by default. +Specify the widget colour scheme for the greeter. Empty means to use the built-in default which currently is yellowish grey with some light blue and yellow elements. +Empty by default. - + -What should be shown in the greeter righthand of the input lines (if is disabled) or above them (if is enabled): +What should be shown in the greeter righthand of the input lines (if is disabled) or above them (if is enabled): -None -nothing - - -Logo -the image specified by - - -Clock -a neat analogue clock +None +nothing + + +Logo +the image specified by + + +Clock +a neat analogue clock -The default is Clock. +The default is Clock. - + -The image to show in the greeter if is Logo. -Empty by default. +The image to show in the greeter if is Logo. +Empty by default. - + -The relative coordinates (percentages of the screen size; X,Y) at which the centre of the greeter is put. &tdm; aligns the greeter to the edges of the screen it would cross otherwise. -The default is 50,50. +The relative coordinates (percentages of the screen size; X,Y) at which the centre of the greeter is put. &tdm; aligns the greeter to the edges of the screen it would cross otherwise. +The default is 50,50. - + -The screen the greeter should be displayed on in multi-headed and Xinerama setups. The numbering starts with 0. For Xinerama, it corresponds to the listing order in the active ServerLayout section of XF86Config; -1 means to use the upper-left screen, -2 means to use the upper-right screen. +The screen the greeter should be displayed on in multi-headed and Xinerama setups. The numbering starts with 0. For Xinerama, it corresponds to the listing order in the active ServerLayout section of XF86Config; -1 means to use the upper-left screen, -2 means to use the upper-right screen. - + -The headline in the greeter. An empty greeting means none at all. The following character pairs are replaced by their value: +The headline in the greeter. An empty greeting means none at all. The following character pairs are replaced by their value: -%d -name of the current display +%d +name of the current display -%h -local host name, possibly with the domain name +%h +local host name, possibly with the domain name -%n -local node name, most probably the host name without the domain name +%n +local node name, most probably the host name without the domain name -%s -operating system +%s +operating system -%r -operating system version +%r +operating system version -%m -machine (hardware) type +%m +machine (hardware) type -%% -a single % +%% +a single % -The default is Welcome to %s at %n. +The default is Welcome to %s at %n. - + -The font for the greeter headline. -The default is charter,24,bold. +The font for the greeter headline. +The default is charter,24,bold. - + -The normal font used in the greeter. -The default is helvetica,12. +The normal font used in the greeter. +The default is helvetica,12. - + -The font used for the Login Failed message. -The default is helvetica,12,bold. +The font used for the Login Failed message. +The default is helvetica,12,bold. - + -Whether the fonts used in the greeter should be antialiased. -The default is false. +Whether the fonts used in the greeter should be antialiased. +The default is false. - + -What to do with the Num Lock modifier for the time the greeter is running: +What to do with the Num Lock modifier for the time the greeter is running: -Off -turn off - - -On -turn on - - -Keep -do not change the state +Off +turn off + + +On +turn on + + +Keep +do not change the state -The default is Keep. - +The default is Keep. + - + -Language and locale to use in the greeter, encoded like $LC_LANG. -The default is en_US. +Language and locale to use in the greeter, encoded like $LC_LANG. +The default is en_US. - + -Enable autocompletion in the username line edit. -The default is false. +Enable autocompletion in the username line edit. +The default is false. - + -Show a user list with unix login names, real names and images in the greeter. -The default is true. +Show a user list with unix login names, real names and images in the greeter. +The default is true. - + -This option controls which users will be shown in the user view () and/or offered for autocompletion (). If it is Selected, contains the final list of users. If it is NotHidden, the initial user list are all users found on the system. Users contained in are removed from the list, just like all users with a UID greater than specified in and users with a non-zero UID less than specified in . Items in and which are prefixed with @ represent all users in the user group named by that item. Finally, the user list will be sorted alphabetically, if is enabled. -The default is NotHidden. +This option controls which users will be shown in the user view () and/or offered for autocompletion (). If it is Selected, contains the final list of users. If it is NotHidden, the initial user list are all users found on the system. Users contained in are removed from the list, just like all users with a UID greater than specified in and users with a non-zero UID less than specified in . Items in and which are prefixed with @ represent all users in the user group named by that item. Finally, the user list will be sorted alphabetically, if is enabled. +The default is NotHidden. - + -See . -Empty by default. +See . +Empty by default. - + -See . -Empty by default. +See . +Empty by default. - + -See . +See . - + -See . -The default is 65535. +See . +The default is 65535. - + -See . -The default is true. +See . +The default is true. - + -If is enabled, this specifies where &tdm; gets the images from: +If is enabled, this specifies where &tdm; gets the images from: -AdminOnly -from <>/$USER.face[.icon] - - -PreferAdmin -prefer <>, fallback on $HOME - - -PreferUser -... and the other way round - - -UserOnly -from the user's $HOME/.face[.icon] +AdminOnly +from <>/$USER.face[.icon] + + +PreferAdmin +prefer <>, fallback on $HOME + + +PreferUser +... and the other way round + + +UserOnly +from the user's $HOME/.face[.icon] -The images can be in any format Qt recognises, but the filename must match &tdm;'s expectations: .face.icon should be a 48x48 icon, while .face should be a 300x300 image. Currently the big image is used only as a fallback and is scaled down, but in the future it might be displayed full-size in the logo area or a tooltip. -The default is AdminOnly. +The images can be in any format Qt recognises, but the filename must match &tdm;'s expectations: .face.icon should be a 48x48 icon, while .face should be a 300x300 image. Currently the big image is used only as a fallback and is scaled down, but in the future it might be displayed full-size in the logo area or a tooltip. +The default is AdminOnly. - + -See . -The default is ${kde_datadir}/tdm/faces. +See . +The default is ${kde_datadir}/tdm/faces. - + -Specify, if/which user should be preselected for log in: +Specify, if/which user should be preselected for log in: -None -do not preselect any user - - -Previous -the user which successfully logged in last time - - -Default -the user specified in the option +None +do not preselect any user + + +Previous +the user which successfully logged in last time + + +Default +the user specified in the option -If is enabled and a user was preselected, the cursor is placed in the password input field automatically. -Enabling user preselection can be considered a security hole, as it presents a valid login name to a potential attacker, so he only needs to guess the password. On the other hand, one could set to a fake login name. +If is enabled and a user was preselected, the cursor is placed in the password input field automatically. +Enabling user preselection can be considered a security hole, as it presents a valid login name to a potential attacker, so he only needs to guess the password. On the other hand, one could set to a fake login name. -The default is None. +The default is None. - + -See . -Empty by default. +See . +Empty by default. - + -See . -The default is false. +See . +The default is false. - + -The password input fields cloak the typed in text. Specify, how to do it: +The password input fields cloak the typed in text. Specify, how to do it: -OneStar -* is shown for every typed letter - - -ThreeStars -*** is shown for every typed letter - - -NoEcho -nothing is shown at all, the cursor does not move +OneStar +* is shown for every typed letter + + +ThreeStars +*** is shown for every typed letter + + +NoEcho +nothing is shown at all, the cursor does not move -The default is OneStar. - - - - - - -If enabled, &tdm; will automatically start the krootimage program to set up the background; otherwise, the program is responsible for the background. -The default is true. - - - - - - -The configuration file to be used by krootimage. It contains a section named [Desktop0] like kdesktoprc does. Its options are not described herein; guess their meanings or use the control centre. -The default is ${kde_confdir}/tdm/backgroundrc. - - - - - - -To improve security, the greeter grabs the &X-Server; and then the keyboard when it starts up. This option specifies if the &X-Server; grab should be held for the duration of the name/password reading. When disabled, the &X-Server; is ungrabbed after the keyboard grab succeeds; otherwise, the &X-Server; is grabbed until just before the session begins. -Enabling this option disables and . +The default is OneStar. + + + + + + +If enabled, &tdm; will automatically start the krootimage program to set up the background; otherwise, the program is responsible for the background. +The default is true. + + + + + + +The configuration file to be used by krootimage. It contains a section named [Desktop0] like kdesktoprc does. Its options are not described herein; guess their meanings or use the control centre. +The default is ${kde_confdir}/tdm/backgroundrc. + + + + + + +To improve security, the greeter grabs the &X-Server; and then the keyboard when it starts up. This option specifies if the &X-Server; grab should be held for the duration of the name/password reading. When disabled, the &X-Server; is ungrabbed after the keyboard grab succeeds; otherwise, the &X-Server; is grabbed until just before the session begins. +Enabling this option disables and . -The default is false. - - - - - - -This option specifies the maximum time &tdm; will wait for the grabs to succeed. A grab may fail if some other X-client has the &X-Server; or the keyboard grabbed, or possibly if the network latencies are very high. You should be cautious when raising the timeout, as a user can be spoofed by a look-alike window on the display. If a grab fails, &tdm; kills and restarts the &X-Server; (if possible) and the session. -The default is 3. - - - - - - -Warn, if a display has no X-authorisation. This will be the case if - the authorisation file for a local &X-Server; could not be created, - a remote display from &XDMCP; did not request any authorisation or - the display is a foreign display from the Xservers file. +The default is false. + + + + + + +This option specifies the maximum time &tdm; will wait for the grabs to succeed. A grab may fail if some other X-client has the &X-Server; or the keyboard grabbed, or possibly if the network latencies are very high. You should be cautious when raising the timeout, as a user can be spoofed by a look-alike window on the display. If a grab fails, &tdm; kills and restarts the &X-Server; (if possible) and the session. +The default is 3. + + + + + + +Warn, if a display has no X-authorisation. This will be the case if + the authorisation file for a local &X-Server; could not be created, + a remote display from &XDMCP; did not request any authorisation or + the display is a foreign display from the Xservers file. -The default is true. +The default is true. - + -Specify whether the greeter of local displays should start up in host chooser (remote) or login (local) mode and whether it is allowed to switch to the other mode. +Specify whether the greeter of local displays should start up in host chooser (remote) or login (local) mode and whether it is allowed to switch to the other mode. -LocalOnly -only local login possible - - -DefaultLocal -start up in local mode, but allow switching to remote mode - - -DefaultRemote -... and the other way round - - -RemoteOnly -only choice of remote host possible +LocalOnly +only local login possible + + +DefaultLocal +start up in local mode, but allow switching to remote mode + + +DefaultRemote +... and the other way round + + +RemoteOnly +only choice of remote host possible -The default is LocalOnly. +The default is LocalOnly. - + -A list of hosts to be automatically added to the remote login menu. The special name * means broadcast. Has no effect if is LocalOnly. -The default is *. +A list of hosts to be automatically added to the remote login menu. The special name * means broadcast. Has no effect if is LocalOnly. +The default is *. - + -Use this number as a random seed when forging saved session types, etc. of unknown users. This is used to avoid telling an attacker about existing users by reverse conclusion. This value should be random but constant across the login domain. +Use this number as a random seed when forging saved session types, etc. of unknown users. This is used to avoid telling an attacker about existing users by reverse conclusion. This value should be random but constant across the login domain. - + -Enable &tdm;'s built-in xconsole. Note that this can be enabled for only one display at a time. This option is available only if &tdm; was configured with . -The default is false. +Enable &tdm;'s built-in xconsole. Note that this can be enabled for only one display at a time. This option is available only if &tdm; was configured with . +The default is false. - + -The data source for &tdm;'s built-in xconsole. If empty, a console log redirection is requested from /dev/console. Has no effect if is disabled. -Empty by default. +The data source for &tdm;'s built-in xconsole. If empty, a console log redirection is requested from /dev/console. Has no effect if is disabled. +Empty by default. - + -Specify conversation plugins for the login dialogue; the first in the list is selected initially. Each plugin can be specified as a base name (which expands to $kde_modulesdir/kgreet_base) or as a full pathname. Conversation plugins are modules for the greeter which obtain authentication data from the user. Currently only the classic plugin is shipped with &kde;; it presents the well-known username and password form. -The default is classic. +Specify conversation plugins for the login dialogue; the first in the list is selected initially. Each plugin can be specified as a base name (which expands to $kde_modulesdir/kgreet_base) or as a full pathname. Conversation plugins are modules for the greeter which obtain authentication data from the user. Currently only the classic plugin is shipped with &kde;; it presents the well-known username and password form. +The default is classic. - + -Same as , but for the shutdown dialogue. -The default is classic. +Same as , but for the shutdown dialogue. +The default is classic. - + -A list of options of the form Key=Value. The conversation plugins can query these settings; it is up to them what possible keys are. -Empty by default. +A list of options of the form Key=Value. The conversation plugins can query these settings; it is up to them what possible keys are. +Empty by default. - + -Show the Console Login action in the greeter. For this to work, a console must be configured for this particular display, see . -The default is true. +Show the Console Login action in the greeter. For this to work, a console must be configured for this particular display, see . +The default is true. - + -Show the Restart X Server/Close Connection action in the greeter. -The default is true. +Show the Restart X Server/Close Connection action in the greeter. +The default is true. - + -A program to run while the greeter is visible. It is supposed to preload as much as possible of the session that is going to be started (most probably). -Empty by default. +A program to run while the greeter is visible. It is supposed to preload as much as possible of the session that is going to be started (most probably). +Empty by default. @@ -2666,524 +1228,190 @@ -Specifying permanent &X-Server;s - -Each specification indicates a display which should constantly be managed and which is not using &XDMCP;. This method is typically used only for local &X-Server;s that are started by &tdm;, but &tdm; can manage externally started (foreign) &X-Server;s as well, may they run on the local machine or rather remotely. - -The formal syntax of a specification is -display name [display class] local[@tty] [reserve] server command - for own &X-Server;s and -display name [display class] foreign - for foreign &X-Server;s. - -The display name must be something that can be passed in the option to an X program. This string is used to generate the display-specific section names, so be careful to match the names. The display name of &XDMCP; displays is derived from the display's address by reverse host name resolution. For configuration purposes, the localhost prefix from locally running &XDMCP; displays is not stripped to make them distinguishable from local &X-Server;s started by &tdm;. - -The display class portion is also used in the display-specific sections. This is useful if you have a large collection of similar displays (such as a corral of X terminals) and would like to set options for groups of them. When using &XDMCP;, the display is required to specify the display class, so the manual for your particular X terminal should document the display class string for your device. If it does not, you can run &tdm; in debug mode and grep the log for class. - -The tty specifies which text console an &X-Server; is covering, so &tdm; knows which console it should monitor for activity after switching to Console login to find out when the console session ends. Note that this concept (originating from Solaris) is not perfectly suited for Linux, as there &X-Server;s run on separate virtual terminals and consequently do not actually cover consoles (gettys). - -The reserve keyword instructs &tdm; to start the display not when &tdm; starts up, but when it is explicitly requested via the command FiFo. If reserve displays are specified, the &kde; menu will have a Start New Session item near the bottom; use that to activate a reserve display with a new login session. The monitor will switch to the new display, and you will have a minute to login. If there are no more reserve displays available, selecting the menu item will have no effect. - -The server command specifies the complete &X-Server; command line, including a display number for secondary displays. When &tdm; starts a session, it sets up authorisation data for the &X-Server;. For local servers, &tdm; passes  filename on the &X-Server;'s command line to point it at its authorisation data. For &XDMCP; displays, &tdm; passes the authorisation data to the &X-Server; via the Accept &XDMCP; message. +Specifying permanent &X-Server;s + +Each specification indicates a display which should constantly be managed and which is not using &XDMCP;. This method is typically used only for local &X-Server;s that are started by &tdm;, but &tdm; can manage externally started (foreign) &X-Server;s as well, may they run on the local machine or rather remotely. + +The formal syntax of a specification is +display name [display class] local[@tty] [reserve] server command + for own &X-Server;s and +display name [display class] foreign + for foreign &X-Server;s. + +The display name must be something that can be passed in the option to an X program. This string is used to generate the display-specific section names, so be careful to match the names. The display name of &XDMCP; displays is derived from the display's address by reverse host name resolution. For configuration purposes, the localhost prefix from locally running &XDMCP; displays is not stripped to make them distinguishable from local &X-Server;s started by &tdm;. + +The display class portion is also used in the display-specific sections. This is useful if you have a large collection of similar displays (such as a corral of X terminals) and would like to set options for groups of them. When using &XDMCP;, the display is required to specify the display class, so the manual for your particular X terminal should document the display class string for your device. If it does not, you can run &tdm; in debug mode and grep the log for class. + +The tty specifies which text console an &X-Server; is covering, so &tdm; knows which console it should monitor for activity after switching to Console login to find out when the console session ends. Note that this concept (originating from Solaris) is not perfectly suited for Linux, as there &X-Server;s run on separate virtual terminals and consequently do not actually cover consoles (gettys). + +The reserve keyword instructs &tdm; to start the display not when &tdm; starts up, but when it is explicitly requested via the command FiFo. If reserve displays are specified, the &kde; menu will have a Start New Session item near the bottom; use that to activate a reserve display with a new login session. The monitor will switch to the new display, and you will have a minute to login. If there are no more reserve displays available, selecting the menu item will have no effect. + +The server command specifies the complete &X-Server; command line, including a display number for secondary displays. When &tdm; starts a session, it sets up authorisation data for the &X-Server;. For local servers, &tdm; passes  filename on the &X-Server;'s command line to point it at its authorisation data. For &XDMCP; displays, &tdm; passes the authorisation data to the &X-Server; via the Accept &XDMCP; message. -&XDMCP; access control - -The file specified by the option provides information which &tdm; uses to control access from displays requesting service via &XDMCP;. The file contains four types of entries: entries which control the response to Direct and Broadcast queries, entries which control the response to Indirect queries, macro definitions for Indirect entries and entries which control on which network interfaces &tdm; listens for &XDMCP; queries. Blank lines are ignored, # is treated as a comment delimiter causing the rest of that line to be ignored and \ causes an immediately following newline to be ignored, allowing indirect host lists to span multiple lines. - -The format of the Direct entries is simple, either a host name or a pattern, which is compared against the host name of the display device. Patterns are distinguished from host names by the inclusion of one or more meta characters; * matches any sequence of 0 or more characters, and ? matches any single character. If the entry is a host name, all comparisons are done using network addresses, so any name which converts to the correct network address may be used. Note that only the first network address returned for a host name is used. For patterns, only canonical host names are used in the comparison, so ensure that you do not attempt to match aliases. Host names from &XDMCP; queries always contain the local domain name even if the reverse lookup returns a short name, so you can use patterns for the local domain. Preceding the entry with a ! character causes hosts which match that entry to be excluded. To only respond to Direct queries for a host or pattern, it can be followed by the optional NOBROADCAST keyword. This can be used to prevent a &tdm; server from appearing on menus based on Broadcast queries. - -An Indirect entry also contains a host name or pattern, but follows it with a list of host names or macros to which the queries should be forwarded. Indirect entries can be excluding as well, in which case a (valid) dummy host name must be supplied to make the entry distinguishable from a Direct entry. If compiled with IPv6 support, multicast address groups may also be included in the list of addresses the queries are forwarded to. If the indirect host list contains the keyword CHOOSER, Indirect queries are not forwarded, but instead a host chooser dialogue is displayed by &tdm;. The chooser will send a Direct query to each of the remaining host names in the list and offer a menu of all the hosts that respond. The host list may contain the keyword BROADCAST, to make the chooser send a Broadcast query as well; note that on some operating systems, UDP packets cannot be broadcast, so this feature will not work. - -When checking access for a particular display host, each entry is scanned in turn and the first matching entry determines the response. Direct and Broadcast entries are ignored when scanning for an Indirect entry and vice-versa. - -A macro definition contains a macro name and a list of host names and other macros that the macro expands to. To distinguish macros from hostnames, macro names start with a % character. - -The last entry type is the LISTEN directive. The formal syntax is - LISTEN [interface [multicast list]] - If one or more LISTEN lines are specified, &tdm; listens for &XDMCP; requests only on the specified interfaces. interface may be a hostname or IP address representing a network interface on this machine, or the wildcard * to represent all available network interfaces. If multicast group addresses are listed on a LISTEN line, &tdm; joins the multicast groups on the given interface. For IPv6 multicasts, the IANA has assigned ff0X:0:0:0:0:0:0:12b as the permanently assigned range of multicast addresses for &XDMCP;. The X in the prefix may be replaced by any valid scope identifier, such as 1 for Node-Local, 2 for Link-Local, 5 for Site-Local, and so on (see IETF RFC 2373 or its replacement for further details and scope definitions). &tdm; defaults to listening on the Link-Local scope address ff02:0:0:0:0:0:0:12b to most closely match the IPv4 subnet broadcast behavior. If no LISTEN lines are given, &tdm; listens on all interfaces and joins the default &XDMCP; IPv6 multicast group (when compiled with IPv6 support). To disable listening for &XDMCP; requests altogether, a LISTEN line with no addresses may be specified, but using the [Xdmcp] option is preferred. +&XDMCP; access control + +The file specified by the option provides information which &tdm; uses to control access from displays requesting service via &XDMCP;. The file contains four types of entries: entries which control the response to Direct and Broadcast queries, entries which control the response to Indirect queries, macro definitions for Indirect entries and entries which control on which network interfaces &tdm; listens for &XDMCP; queries. Blank lines are ignored, # is treated as a comment delimiter causing the rest of that line to be ignored and \ causes an immediately following newline to be ignored, allowing indirect host lists to span multiple lines. + +The format of the Direct entries is simple, either a host name or a pattern, which is compared against the host name of the display device. Patterns are distinguished from host names by the inclusion of one or more meta characters; * matches any sequence of 0 or more characters, and ? matches any single character. If the entry is a host name, all comparisons are done using network addresses, so any name which converts to the correct network address may be used. Note that only the first network address returned for a host name is used. For patterns, only canonical host names are used in the comparison, so ensure that you do not attempt to match aliases. Host names from &XDMCP; queries always contain the local domain name even if the reverse lookup returns a short name, so you can use patterns for the local domain. Preceding the entry with a ! character causes hosts which match that entry to be excluded. To only respond to Direct queries for a host or pattern, it can be followed by the optional NOBROADCAST keyword. This can be used to prevent a &tdm; server from appearing on menus based on Broadcast queries. + +An Indirect entry also contains a host name or pattern, but follows it with a list of host names or macros to which the queries should be forwarded. Indirect entries can be excluding as well, in which case a (valid) dummy host name must be supplied to make the entry distinguishable from a Direct entry. If compiled with IPv6 support, multicast address groups may also be included in the list of addresses the queries are forwarded to. If the indirect host list contains the keyword CHOOSER, Indirect queries are not forwarded, but instead a host chooser dialogue is displayed by &tdm;. The chooser will send a Direct query to each of the remaining host names in the list and offer a menu of all the hosts that respond. The host list may contain the keyword BROADCAST, to make the chooser send a Broadcast query as well; note that on some operating systems, UDP packets cannot be broadcast, so this feature will not work. + +When checking access for a particular display host, each entry is scanned in turn and the first matching entry determines the response. Direct and Broadcast entries are ignored when scanning for an Indirect entry and vice-versa. + +A macro definition contains a macro name and a list of host names and other macros that the macro expands to. To distinguish macros from hostnames, macro names start with a % character. + +The last entry type is the LISTEN directive. The formal syntax is + LISTEN [interface [multicast list]] + If one or more LISTEN lines are specified, &tdm; listens for &XDMCP; requests only on the specified interfaces. interface may be a hostname or IP address representing a network interface on this machine, or the wildcard * to represent all available network interfaces. If multicast group addresses are listed on a LISTEN line, &tdm; joins the multicast groups on the given interface. For IPv6 multicasts, the IANA has assigned ff0X:0:0:0:0:0:0:12b as the permanently assigned range of multicast addresses for &XDMCP;. The X in the prefix may be replaced by any valid scope identifier, such as 1 for Node-Local, 2 for Link-Local, 5 for Site-Local, and so on (see IETF RFC 2373 or its replacement for further details and scope definitions). &tdm; defaults to listening on the Link-Local scope address ff02:0:0:0:0:0:0:12b to most closely match the IPv4 subnet broadcast behavior. If no LISTEN lines are given, &tdm; listens on all interfaces and joins the default &XDMCP; IPv6 multicast group (when compiled with IPv6 support). To disable listening for &XDMCP; requests altogether, a LISTEN line with no addresses may be specified, but using the [Xdmcp] option is preferred. -Supplementary programs +Supplementary programs -The following programs are run by &tdm; at various stages of a session. They typically are shell scripts. +The following programs are run by &tdm; at various stages of a session. They typically are shell scripts. -The Setup, Startup and Reset programs are run as root, so they should be careful about security. Their first argument is auto if the session results from an automatic login; otherwise, no arguments are passed to them. +The Setup, Startup and Reset programs are run as root, so they should be careful about security. Their first argument is auto if the session results from an automatic login; otherwise, no arguments are passed to them. -Setup program - -The Xsetup program is run after the &X-Server; is started or reset, but before the greeter is offered. This is the place to change the root background (if is disabled) or bring up other windows that should appear on the screen along with the greeter. - -In addition to any specified by , the following environment variables are passed: +Setup program + +The Xsetup program is run after the &X-Server; is started or reset, but before the greeter is offered. This is the place to change the root background (if is disabled) or bring up other windows that should appear on the screen along with the greeter. + +In addition to any specified by , the following environment variables are passed: - DISPLAY - the associated display name + DISPLAY + the associated display name - PATH - the value of + PATH + the value of - SHELL - the value of + SHELL + the value of - XAUTHORITY - may be set to an authority file + XAUTHORITY + may be set to an authority file - DM_CONTROL - the value of + DM_CONTROL + the value of -Note that since &tdm; grabs the keyboard, any other windows will not be able to receive keyboard input. They will be able to interact with the mouse, however; beware of potential security holes here. If is set, Xsetup will not be able to connect to the display at all. Resources for this program can be put into the file named by . +Note that since &tdm; grabs the keyboard, any other windows will not be able to receive keyboard input. They will be able to interact with the mouse, however; beware of potential security holes here. If is set, Xsetup will not be able to connect to the display at all. Resources for this program can be put into the file named by . -Startup program - -The Xstartup program is run as root when the user logs in. This is the place to put commands which add entries to utmp (the sessreg program may be useful here), mount users' home directories from file servers, or abort the session if some requirements are not met (but note that on modern systems, many of these tasks are already taken care of by PAM modules). - -In addition to any specified by , the following environment variables are passed: +Startup program + +The Xstartup program is run as root when the user logs in. This is the place to put commands which add entries to utmp (the sessreg program may be useful here), mount users' home directories from file servers, or abort the session if some requirements are not met (but note that on modern systems, many of these tasks are already taken care of by PAM modules). + +In addition to any specified by , the following environment variables are passed: - DISPLAY - the associated display name + DISPLAY + the associated display name - HOME - the initial working directory of the user + HOME + the initial working directory of the user - LOGNAME - the username + LOGNAME + the username - USER - the username + USER + the username - PATH - the value of + PATH + the value of - SHELL - the value of + SHELL + the value of - XAUTHORITY - may be set to an authority file + XAUTHORITY + may be set to an authority file - DM_CONTROL - the value of + DM_CONTROL + the value of -&tdm; waits until this program exits before starting the user session. If the exit value of this program is non-zero, &tdm; discontinues the session and starts another authentication cycle. +&tdm; waits until this program exits before starting the user session. If the exit value of this program is non-zero, &tdm; discontinues the session and starts another authentication cycle. -Session program - -The Xsession program is the command which is run as the user's session. It is run with the permissions of the authorised user. One of the keywords failsafe, default or custom, or a string to eval by a Bourne-compatible shell is passed as the first argument. - -In addition to any specified by , the following environment variables are passed: +Session program + +The Xsession program is the command which is run as the user's session. It is run with the permissions of the authorised user. One of the keywords failsafe, default or custom, or a string to eval by a Bourne-compatible shell is passed as the first argument. + +In addition to any specified by , the following environment variables are passed: - DISPLAY - the associated display name + DISPLAY + the associated display name - HOME - the initial working directory of the user + HOME + the initial working directory of the user - LOGNAME - the username + LOGNAME + the username - USER - the username + USER + the username - PATH - the value of (or for root user sessions) + PATH + the value of (or for root user sessions) - SHELL - the user's default shell + SHELL + the user's default shell - XAUTHORITY - may be set to a non-standard authority file + XAUTHORITY + may be set to a non-standard authority file - KRBTKFILE - may be set to a Kerberos4 credentials cache name + KRBTKFILE + may be set to a Kerberos4 credentials cache name - KRB5CCNAME - may be set to a Kerberos5 credentials cache name + KRB5CCNAME + may be set to a Kerberos5 credentials cache name - DM_CONTROL - the value of + DM_CONTROL + the value of - XDM_MANAGED - will contain a comma-separated list of parameters the session might find interesting, like the location of the command FiFo and its capabilities, and which conversation plugin was used for the login + XDM_MANAGED + will contain a comma-separated list of parameters the session might find interesting, like the location of the command FiFo and its capabilities, and which conversation plugin was used for the login - DESKTOP_SESSION - the name of the session the user has chosen to run + DESKTOP_SESSION + the name of the session the user has chosen to run @@ -3191,28 +1419,11 @@ -Reset program - -Symmetrical with Xstartup, the Xreset program is run after the user session has terminated. Run as root, it should contain commands that undo the effects of commands in Xstartup, removing entries from utmp or unmounting directories from file servers. - -The environment variables that were passed to Xstartup are also passed to Xreset. +Reset program + +Symmetrical with Xstartup, the Xreset program is run after the user session has terminated. Run as root, it should contain commands that undo the effects of commands in Xstartup, removing entries from utmp or unmounting directories from file servers. + +The environment variables that were passed to Xstartup are also passed to Xreset. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/about-desktop.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/about-desktop.docbook index 26670ccb6c1..6609f70e907 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/about-desktop.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/about-desktop.docbook @@ -1,567 +1,243 @@ -All About Your Desktop +All About Your Desktop -Little Red Riding Hood -Grandma, what big eyes you have! +Little Red Riding Hood +Grandma, what big eyes you have! -The Wolf -The better to see you! +The Wolf +The better to see you! -The more you see, the more efficiently you can use your desktop. &kde; gives you the opportunity to make the desktop look and work the way you prefer, enabling you to work faster and more productively. It even gives you the opportunity to be warned if a wolf is trying to eat you, or (if you happen to be a granny) alert you when Little Red Riding Hood is on her way to bring you the goodies. Now that's service. +The more you see, the more efficiently you can use your desktop. &kde; gives you the opportunity to make the desktop look and work the way you prefer, enabling you to work faster and more productively. It even gives you the opportunity to be warned if a wolf is trying to eat you, or (if you happen to be a granny) alert you when Little Red Riding Hood is on her way to bring you the goodies. Now that's service. -Autostarting Applications +Autostarting Applications -Native &kde; programs and many third party applications left open at the end of a session will save their state and reappear when you login again, but there are some programs (like some versions of &Netscape;) that will not. You can use the Autostart folder for these programs. +Native &kde; programs and many third party applications left open at the end of a session will save their state and reappear when you login again, but there are some programs (like some versions of &Netscape;) that will not. You can use the Autostart folder for these programs. -To launch programs when &kde; is started, do the following: +To launch programs when &kde; is started, do the following: -Open the Autostart folder. By default this folder is at $HOME/.trinity/Autostart +Open the Autostart folder. By default this folder is at $HOME/.trinity/Autostart -Open a &konqueror; window and browse to the program you want to add. If you do not know how to do this, it was covered in . +Open a &konqueror; window and browse to the program you want to add. If you do not know how to do this, it was covered in . -Drag and drop the desired program from the &konqueror; window on to the Autostart folder. When asked, choose Link to create a symbolic link rather than a full copy, as this saves a great deal of disk space. +Drag and drop the desired program from the &konqueror; window on to the Autostart folder. When asked, choose Link to create a symbolic link rather than a full copy, as this saves a great deal of disk space. -Repeat the above steps for every program you want started when &kde; is launched. Remember, you do not need to add native &kde; applications, just leave them open when you log out, and they will open up again as if nothing had happened the next time you log in to &kde;. +Repeat the above steps for every program you want started when &kde; is launched. Remember, you do not need to add native &kde; applications, just leave them open when you log out, and they will open up again as if nothing had happened the next time you log in to &kde;. -Restart &kde; if you want to see the autostart function in action. +Restart &kde; if you want to see the autostart function in action. -Your programs should have launched automatically when &kde; restarted. +Your programs should have launched automatically when &kde; restarted. -Do not forget though that you will only need the Autostart folder for a few applications. Many applications, including almost all native &kde; applications, now understand session management, and you can simply leave them open when you log out in order for them to be restarted exactly as you left them. You can leave a &konqueror; window open with your favourite website, &kmail; looking at your inbox, and &kate; with a half dozen files open, log out, log back in, and find your desktop exactly as you left it. +Do not forget though that you will only need the Autostart folder for a few applications. Many applications, including almost all native &kde; applications, now understand session management, and you can simply leave them open when you log out in order for them to be restarted exactly as you left them. You can leave a &konqueror; window open with your favourite website, &kmail; looking at your inbox, and &kate; with a half dozen files open, log out, log back in, and find your desktop exactly as you left it. -Adding Programs and Shortcut Icons to Your &kmenu; and Panel +Adding Programs and Shortcut Icons to Your &kmenu; and Panel -The &kde; &kmenu; and &kicker; are not limited to the setup you find right after installing &kde;. The &kde; panel is designed to be extended, and there are two main ways of doing that: Adding new programs, and adding shortcut icons. +The &kde; &kmenu; and &kicker; are not limited to the setup you find right after installing &kde;. The &kde; panel is designed to be extended, and there are two main ways of doing that: Adding new programs, and adding shortcut icons. -Adding menu entries - -&kde; comes with a great many applications already in the menu. Depending on your operating system and distribution, this could include many non-&kde; applications. &kde; also includes an application that will search your hard drive for more applications, and add them to the menu for you. Try pressing &Alt;F2 and entering kappfinder to see it in action — operation is very straightforward. - -&kappfinder; is clever enough, but it doesn't know about every application there is. Or perhaps you simply don't want to have all those applications in the menu, and just want to add a single extra program. - -To add your favourite programs to the &kde; menu, you can use the KDE Menu Editor. To start it, use the &kmenu; and choose SettingsMenu Editor. - -A window will open showing the existing &kmenu; on the left, and an empty menu entry dialogue on the right - -For this example, we will be adding an entry for the Gimp under the Graphics submenu. If you already have a Gimp entry there and don't want a new one, you can still follow through this example, but just don't click the Apply when you are done. +Adding menu entries + +&kde; comes with a great many applications already in the menu. Depending on your operating system and distribution, this could include many non-&kde; applications. &kde; also includes an application that will search your hard drive for more applications, and add them to the menu for you. Try pressing &Alt;F2 and entering kappfinder to see it in action — operation is very straightforward. + +&kappfinder; is clever enough, but it doesn't know about every application there is. Or perhaps you simply don't want to have all those applications in the menu, and just want to add a single extra program. + +To add your favourite programs to the &kde; menu, you can use the KDE Menu Editor. To start it, use the &kmenu; and choose SettingsMenu Editor. + +A window will open showing the existing &kmenu; on the left, and an empty menu entry dialogue on the right + +For this example, we will be adding an entry for the Gimp under the Graphics submenu. If you already have a Gimp entry there and don't want a new one, you can still follow through this example, but just don't click the Apply when you are done. -Navigate down the left hand tree to the Graphics entry. +Navigate down the left hand tree to the Graphics entry. -Click on it once with the left mouse button to expand the entry. +Click on it once with the left mouse button to expand the entry. -Click the icon labelled New Item in the toolbar, or choose FileNew Item in the menu bar. +Click the icon labelled New Item in the toolbar, or choose FileNew Item in the menu bar. -In the dialogue box that pops up, enter the name you want your new menu entry to have. For this example, enter Gimp.Then press OK in the dialogue. +In the dialogue box that pops up, enter the name you want your new menu entry to have. For this example, enter Gimp.Then press OK in the dialogue. -Click on the new Gimp menu entry that was created for you under the Graphics submenu. The menu entry dialogue to the right will now change to be mostly empty, except for the name you already gave. +Click on the new Gimp menu entry that was created for you under the Graphics submenu. The menu entry dialogue to the right will now change to be mostly empty, except for the name you already gave. -Fill in an optional Comment. You might like to put An image editor for the example. Text entered here will be shown as a tool-tip in the &kmenu;. +Fill in an optional Comment. You might like to put An image editor for the example. Text entered here will be shown as a tool-tip in the &kmenu;. -Enter in the box labelled Command, the command you would type on the command line to open your application. For this example, this is gimp. You may also enter any optional command line parameters if you wish. You can use this to make a menu entry that always opens a particular document or image, for example. Check the application's documentation to find out more about command line parameters. +Enter in the box labelled Command, the command you would type on the command line to open your application. For this example, this is gimp. You may also enter any optional command line parameters if you wish. You can use this to make a menu entry that always opens a particular document or image, for example. Check the application's documentation to find out more about command line parameters. -If you want the application to operate from a particular folder (for example, for Gimp to begin its Load Image dialogue in a particular place) enter this path in the box labelled Work Path. This is optional. +If you want the application to operate from a particular folder (for example, for Gimp to begin its Load Image dialogue in a particular place) enter this path in the box labelled Work Path. This is optional. -If you wish to change the icon from the default unknown, click on the icon to the right of the dialogue, to open a standard &kde; icon chooser. +If you wish to change the icon from the default unknown, click on the icon to the right of the dialogue, to open a standard &kde; icon chooser. -Some applications must be run in a terminal window (for example Pine). If this is the case, check the appropriate check box. +Some applications must be run in a terminal window (for example Pine). If this is the case, check the appropriate check box. -If you want to run your application as a different user, check the box labelled Run as a different user and enter the appropriate user name in the text box. +If you want to run your application as a different user, check the box labelled Run as a different user and enter the appropriate user name in the text box. -If you're happy with your menu entry, press Apply. If you would like to start over, press Reset. +If you're happy with your menu entry, press Apply. If you would like to start over, press Reset. -And that's all. You now have a new menu entry. +And that's all. You now have a new menu entry. -Shortcut Icons +Shortcut Icons -Although &kde; is much more comfortable than the average &UNIX; window manager, everyone wants a solution for a one-click way to start a program. Later, you will learn how to create links and files on your desktop, but this also has some disadvantages: sometimes all your desktops are filled up with windows, and you cannot reach your icons without minimising all the windows that cover them. For commonly used programs, you can minimise this problem and speed access by creating shortcut icons on the &kde; panel. +Although &kde; is much more comfortable than the average &UNIX; window manager, everyone wants a solution for a one-click way to start a program. Later, you will learn how to create links and files on your desktop, but this also has some disadvantages: sometimes all your desktops are filled up with windows, and you cannot reach your icons without minimising all the windows that cover them. For commonly used programs, you can minimise this problem and speed access by creating shortcut icons on the &kde; panel. -To create a shortcut on the &kicker; panel, you have some choices: Drag-and-drop, or via a menu. +To create a shortcut on the &kicker; panel, you have some choices: Drag-and-drop, or via a menu. -Adding a shortcut icon with the menu -Click on the &ticon; and choose Panel MenuAddApplication . -You will see the top level of the &kmenu; again. Go through the menus to find the entry for which you want to create the shortcut, such as Home folder or &konqueror;. Click on the program you want. +Adding a shortcut icon with the menu +Click on the &ticon; and choose Panel MenuAddApplication . +You will see the top level of the &kmenu; again. Go through the menus to find the entry for which you want to create the shortcut, such as Home folder or &konqueror;. Click on the program you want. -A new icon will appear on the panel. Click on it, and the program will start. +A new icon will appear on the panel. Click on it, and the program will start. -Adding a shortcut icon with drag-and-drop is even simpler - just drag any icon from your desktop, or a &konqueror; window, to an empty space on the panel. +Adding a shortcut icon with drag-and-drop is even simpler - just drag any icon from your desktop, or a &konqueror; window, to an empty space on the panel. -What happens when you drag an item to your panel depends on what kind of item it is: +What happens when you drag an item to your panel depends on what kind of item it is: -If you drag a folder... A menu will pop up giving you a choice of Add as a File Manager URL or Add as a QuickBrowser. Choosing the first will create an icon that opens a &konqueror; window, starting at this folder, while choosing the latter will open that folder as a menu from the Panel. +If you drag a folder... A menu will pop up giving you a choice of Add as a File Manager URL or Add as a QuickBrowser. Choosing the first will create an icon that opens a &konqueror; window, starting at this folder, while choosing the latter will open that folder as a menu from the Panel. -If you drag a shortcut from your desktop... -It will be copied to the panel. +If you drag a shortcut from your desktop... +It will be copied to the panel. -If you drag a document... -A link will be made on the panel, leaving the original in place. Clicking on the resulting icon will open that document in the default application. +If you drag a document... +A link will be made on the panel, leaving the original in place. Clicking on the resulting icon will open that document in the default application. -In any case, if you want to move the icon, click on it using the &RMB; and choose Move Name of Button Move the icon to the position you want and press the &LMB;. If you wish to remove the icon, click on it using the &RMB; and choose Remove Name of Button. +In any case, if you want to move the icon, click on it using the &RMB; and choose Move Name of Button Move the icon to the position you want and press the &LMB;. If you wish to remove the icon, click on it using the &RMB; and choose Remove Name of Button. -Creating New Files On Your Desktop +Creating New Files On Your Desktop -Your desktop can be an efficient place to work. Every time you start &kde;, you can see the complete files, folders and &URL;s which you often use. +Your desktop can be an efficient place to work. Every time you start &kde;, you can see the complete files, folders and &URL;s which you often use. -There are two ways to create and edit files on your desktop. In any application, you can say that you want to save your work in the Desktop subfolder of your home folder. For example, my home folder is /home/stupiddog, so my Desktop folder is /home/stupiddog/Desktop. Everything you save there will be put on your desktop. +There are two ways to create and edit files on your desktop. In any application, you can say that you want to save your work in the Desktop subfolder of your home folder. For example, my home folder is /home/stupiddog, so my Desktop folder is /home/stupiddog/Desktop. Everything you save there will be put on your desktop. -If you want to move existing files to your Desktop, the best way to achieve this is to use &konqueror;. Open a file manager window and drag the files you need to your desktop. You can choose to copy them if you want to keep all your common stuff on the desktop now, or you can create symbolic links to the real files. Everything you change in the link files will be automatically updated in the originals. For more information on how to use drag & drop and the file manager, see the chapter Moving files with drag & drop. +If you want to move existing files to your Desktop, the best way to achieve this is to use &konqueror;. Open a file manager window and drag the files you need to your desktop. You can choose to copy them if you want to keep all your common stuff on the desktop now, or you can create symbolic links to the real files. Everything you change in the link files will be automatically updated in the originals. For more information on how to use drag & drop and the file manager, see the chapter Moving files with drag & drop. -Placing Links on Your Desktop +Placing Links on Your Desktop -Placing files on your desktop may shorten the paths you need to enter. However, sometimes it would be nice if you could start &kedit; with a commonly edited file already opened in it. And how often do you find yourself frustrated after browsing through endless lists of bookmarks to find a site you visit often? Wouldn't it be nice if everything necessary to deliver you to that site was done automatically after clicking a single icon? +Placing files on your desktop may shorten the paths you need to enter. However, sometimes it would be nice if you could start &kedit; with a commonly edited file already opened in it. And how often do you find yourself frustrated after browsing through endless lists of bookmarks to find a site you visit often? Wouldn't it be nice if everything necessary to deliver you to that site was done automatically after clicking a single icon? -Using &MIME; Types and File Associations - -&MIME; Types are very powerful. Employing them, you can easily customise your system such that clicking on a file of a specific type starts the application with which that file type has been associated. For example, all .mod files could be set to start &noatun;, .html files could open a &konqueror; window showing the file, and a core file can be viewed with the &khexedit; by simply clicking on the core file. +Using &MIME; Types and File Associations + +&MIME; Types are very powerful. Employing them, you can easily customise your system such that clicking on a file of a specific type starts the application with which that file type has been associated. For example, all .mod files could be set to start &noatun;, .html files could open a &konqueror; window showing the file, and a core file can be viewed with the &khexedit; by simply clicking on the core file. -Although &MIME; types are very powerful, they are not without dangers. Playing around with &MIME; types as the system administrator (root) can damage a &kde; system so severely that it cannot be restarted! In this example, you will create your personal &MIME; style, which is only relevant for you. It will only affect other users if you copy or move it to $TDEDIR/share/mimelnk. +Although &MIME; types are very powerful, they are not without dangers. Playing around with &MIME; types as the system administrator (root) can damage a &kde; system so severely that it cannot be restarted! In this example, you will create your personal &MIME; style, which is only relevant for you. It will only affect other users if you copy or move it to $TDEDIR/share/mimelnk. -To link a certain file type with a particular application: +To link a certain file type with a particular application: -Make sure the application you want to start this file type has an entry in the &kmenu;. - -In &konqueror; find or make a file with the extension you wish to link. - -Right click on the file, and choose Properties from the context menu and then press the tiny button with an icon next to the Type resulting properties dialogue. Or, choose EditEdit File Type... in the &konqueror; menu bar. - -Add file masks for the application by clicking the Add button, and entering the file pattern you want. Remember that &UNIX; is case sensitive, so you may need to add variations - *.mp3 may need *.MP3 added as well, for example. Add as many masks as you like in this way. - -Add a description if you like. This is optional. - -In the section labelled Application Preference Order, press the Add button. A miniature copy of the &kmenu; will open, where you can choose the application you want files of this type to be opened with. - -Sometimes, you may want to use a different application to open this file type. For example, you might like to use &kate; to open text files you wish to edit, and &kedit; for text files that you just want to take a quick peek into. You can add more applications in the same way as you did in the last step, and you can change the preferred order using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. - -If you're satisfied with your choices, you can click the Apply button to save your changes without closing the dialogue box. This gives you the opportunity to test in the &konqueror; window that your file association is correct. You can choose OK to save your changes and close the dialogue box, or Cancel if you have changed your mind and just want to close the dialogue box. +Make sure the application you want to start this file type has an entry in the &kmenu;. + +In &konqueror; find or make a file with the extension you wish to link. + +Right click on the file, and choose Properties from the context menu and then press the tiny button with an icon next to the Type resulting properties dialogue. Or, choose EditEdit File Type... in the &konqueror; menu bar. + +Add file masks for the application by clicking the Add button, and entering the file pattern you want. Remember that &UNIX; is case sensitive, so you may need to add variations - *.mp3 may need *.MP3 added as well, for example. Add as many masks as you like in this way. + +Add a description if you like. This is optional. + +In the section labelled Application Preference Order, press the Add button. A miniature copy of the &kmenu; will open, where you can choose the application you want files of this type to be opened with. + +Sometimes, you may want to use a different application to open this file type. For example, you might like to use &kate; to open text files you wish to edit, and &kedit; for text files that you just want to take a quick peek into. You can add more applications in the same way as you did in the last step, and you can change the preferred order using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. + +If you're satisfied with your choices, you can click the Apply button to save your changes without closing the dialogue box. This gives you the opportunity to test in the &konqueror; window that your file association is correct. You can choose OK to save your changes and close the dialogue box, or Cancel if you have changed your mind and just want to close the dialogue box. -Be sure to try your new association by opening a folder containing a file of the type you just selected. Click on the file, and the program needed to edit it should start. +Be sure to try your new association by opening a folder containing a file of the type you just selected. Click on the file, and the program needed to edit it should start. -&MIME; types are a way of describing the contents of files. You may be used to using file extensions for that purpose, and you may know that on &UNIX; systems the file extension often bears little or no relation to the contents of the file. On the other hand, it may be vital - for example, some implementations of gunzip won't operate on files that aren't named .gz. - -&MIME; types naturally make use of filename patterns, but not necessarily the extensions - you can set up any filename pattern you like. For example, if you always want to open any files relating to a particular client with &kate;, and you make a habit of naming the files with the client's name at the beginning so that they naturally group in the &konqueror; window, then you can set up a filename pattern that matches ^clientname*. Then any files that have clientname at the beginning (the ^ character means starts with...) will be opened with the application you choose. +&MIME; types are a way of describing the contents of files. You may be used to using file extensions for that purpose, and you may know that on &UNIX; systems the file extension often bears little or no relation to the contents of the file. On the other hand, it may be vital - for example, some implementations of gunzip won't operate on files that aren't named .gz. + +&MIME; types naturally make use of filename patterns, but not necessarily the extensions - you can set up any filename pattern you like. For example, if you always want to open any files relating to a particular client with &kate;, and you make a habit of naming the files with the client's name at the beginning so that they naturally group in the &konqueror; window, then you can set up a filename pattern that matches ^clientname*. Then any files that have clientname at the beginning (the ^ character means starts with...) will be opened with the application you choose. -Using the Trash Can - -Under normal circumstances, deleting a file under &UNIX; is something which cannot be undone. However, with &kde;, you can choose Move to Trash instead of Delete. This will move the file into the Trash Folder, which, by default, is accessible as an icon on your desktop. In the Trash Folder, you can always recover deleted files. Remember to empty the trashcan now and then by clicking on it using the right mouse button, then choosing Empty trashcan, otherwise you might run out of disk space because the files still need space. Note, however, that once you empty the Trash Folder, the files contained therein are lost forever. +Using the Trash Can + +Under normal circumstances, deleting a file under &UNIX; is something which cannot be undone. However, with &kde;, you can choose Move to Trash instead of Delete. This will move the file into the Trash Folder, which, by default, is accessible as an icon on your desktop. In the Trash Folder, you can always recover deleted files. Remember to empty the trashcan now and then by clicking on it using the right mouse button, then choosing Empty trashcan, otherwise you might run out of disk space because the files still need space. Note, however, that once you empty the Trash Folder, the files contained therein are lost forever. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/first-impressions.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/first-impressions.docbook index 3817d62f9b2..f7444d839b4 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/first-impressions.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/first-impressions.docbook @@ -1,357 +1,149 @@ -First Impressions +First Impressions -Origin unknown -You see to sea to see all that you can see is sea +Origin unknown +You see to sea to see all that you can see is sea -First impressions are so important -- this is not only true for Agatha Christie's famous thriller The Mousetrap -- but also for &kde;. As we mentioned before, &kde; is supposed to be the most intuitive, easy to learn user interface available. In fact, we will have reached our goal when users no longer need this book in order to work with &kde;, causing the authors to lose their (unpaid and voluntary) jobs as documenters. +First impressions are so important -- this is not only true for Agatha Christie's famous thriller The Mousetrap -- but also for &kde;. As we mentioned before, &kde; is supposed to be the most intuitive, easy to learn user interface available. In fact, we will have reached our goal when users no longer need this book in order to work with &kde;, causing the authors to lose their (unpaid and voluntary) jobs as documenters. -Starting &kde; +Starting &kde; -When you boot a &UNIX; system, one of three things should happen (that is, if the system works correctly; everything else is an undocumented fourth case). Either you stay in text mode and get a login prompt, you are logged into your &GUI; of choice automatically, or you are presented with a graphical login window. In the first case, you must log into your system and type: +When you boot a &UNIX; system, one of three things should happen (that is, if the system works correctly; everything else is an undocumented fourth case). Either you stay in text mode and get a login prompt, you are logged into your &GUI; of choice automatically, or you are presented with a graphical login window. In the first case, you must log into your system and type: -startx +startx -If the installation was successful, the &kde; desktop should appear after a few seconds of initialisation. +If the installation was successful, the &kde; desktop should appear after a few seconds of initialisation. -If a graphical login window is presented, then all that should be required is your login name and password. Assuming the &kde; installation was successful, &kde; should start without further intervention. +If a graphical login window is presented, then all that should be required is your login name and password. Assuming the &kde; installation was successful, &kde; should start without further intervention. -If you have not done so already, we recommend changing your X display manager from xdm to &tdm;, which includes the same functionality, but with the advanced features of the K Desktop Environment. +If you have not done so already, we recommend changing your X display manager from xdm to &tdm;, which includes the same functionality, but with the advanced features of the K Desktop Environment. -If your system is configured to automatically log you into a &GUI; you will need to consult your operating system manuals or support forums for instructions how to have &kde; be that &GUI;. +If your system is configured to automatically log you into a &GUI; you will need to consult your operating system manuals or support forums for instructions how to have &kde; be that &GUI;. -Desktop Components +Desktop Components -After everything has come up, take some time to explore the new environment. If you have already worked with &Windows;, OS/2 or &MacOS;, many things should look familiar to you. The main visible parts of &kde; that you will see are the desktop itself, and the panel. +After everything has come up, take some time to explore the new environment. If you have already worked with &Windows;, OS/2 or &MacOS;, many things should look familiar to you. The main visible parts of &kde; that you will see are the desktop itself, and the panel. -Panel +Panel -When you start &kde; for the first time, the panel is situated at the bottom of the screen. From here, you will start your programs and switch between the virtual screens. +When you start &kde; for the first time, the panel is situated at the bottom of the screen. From here, you will start your programs and switch between the virtual screens. -&ticon; button -The &ticon; button is one of the most important places on your &kde; desktop. From here, you can start all &kde; applications installed. Later, when you learn how to use the TDE Menu Editor, you can also add other programs here as well. To start a program, just click on the button. You will see a list of different categories, plus some special entries. Whenever you move your mouse over an entry that has an arrow to the right, a new menu will appear. When you find the program you want to start, just click on it with the left mouse button. +&ticon; button +The &ticon; button is one of the most important places on your &kde; desktop. From here, you can start all &kde; applications installed. Later, when you learn how to use the TDE Menu Editor, you can also add other programs here as well. To start a program, just click on the button. You will see a list of different categories, plus some special entries. Whenever you move your mouse over an entry that has an arrow to the right, a new menu will appear. When you find the program you want to start, just click on it with the left mouse button. -Virtual Desktop buttons -When you start &kde; for the first time, note the four buttons labelled, appropriately enough, 1, 2, 3 and 4. These represent your four desktops. Just click one of them. Don't worry; though they have disappeared, any open windows are still active (just take a look at the task list!). Using multiple desktops is one of the most powerful features of &kde; and the &X-Window;. Instead of placing one window over another, as you would when using &Windows; or OS/2, you can say Well, on the first desktop, I will write the &kde; User Guide. On the second desktop I'll run the meinproc documentation compiler and see my results while compiling my &Linux; kernel on the third desktop, and reading my email on the fourth. +Virtual Desktop buttons +When you start &kde; for the first time, note the four buttons labelled, appropriately enough, 1, 2, 3 and 4. These represent your four desktops. Just click one of them. Don't worry; though they have disappeared, any open windows are still active (just take a look at the task list!). Using multiple desktops is one of the most powerful features of &kde; and the &X-Window;. Instead of placing one window over another, as you would when using &Windows; or OS/2, you can say Well, on the first desktop, I will write the &kde; User Guide. On the second desktop I'll run the meinproc documentation compiler and see my results while compiling my &Linux; kernel on the third desktop, and reading my email on the fourth. -Icon bar +Icon bar -Some people are so lazy that they consider even the two or three motions through the application's menu to be too much (me included). For them, additional buttons can be placed next to the desktop buttons; for example, shortcuts to your home folder, to your trashcan, to the Konsole terminal emulator and to the documents you use often. For information on how to add icons to the taskbar, read Adding icons to your taskbar. -&kde; by default installs several commonly used buttons, including links to &khelpcenter;, &kwrite; and &kcontrol;. +Some people are so lazy that they consider even the two or three motions through the application's menu to be too much (me included). For them, additional buttons can be placed next to the desktop buttons; for example, shortcuts to your home folder, to your trashcan, to the Konsole terminal emulator and to the documents you use often. For information on how to add icons to the taskbar, read Adding icons to your taskbar. +&kde; by default installs several commonly used buttons, including links to &khelpcenter;, &kwrite; and &kcontrol;. -Time and date -At the far right end of the &kde; panel, you can always see the time and date. +Time and date +At the far right end of the &kde; panel, you can always see the time and date. -The task list +The task list -In another section of the panel, find a button for each open window. Just click on the button corresponding to the windows you want to open. Another click will minimise the window. A right mouse button click will give you a menu allowing you to move the window to another desktop, manipulate it's size, or close the application. +In another section of the panel, find a button for each open window. Just click on the button corresponding to the windows you want to open. Another click will minimise the window. A right mouse button click will give you a menu allowing you to move the window to another desktop, manipulate it's size, or close the application. -Using Windows +Using Windows -Window menu +Window menu -Right mouse button clicking in the title bar of the window (where you see the application's name), you can see a window manipulation icon. This is the same menu you see if you right click on an application's icon in the panel taskbar. When you click on it, a context menu containing commands to manipulate the window is presented. The available commands are as follows: +Right mouse button clicking in the title bar of the window (where you see the application's name), you can see a window manipulation icon. This is the same menu you see if you right click on an application's icon in the panel taskbar. When you click on it, a context menu containing commands to manipulate the window is presented. The available commands are as follows: -Move -Lets you move the window with your mouse. Click on the left mouse button when you have the window where you want it to be. +Move +Lets you move the window with your mouse. Click on the left mouse button when you have the window where you want it to be. -Resize -Enables you to make the window smaller or larger. Move your mouse around and click when you are satisfied with the new size. +Resize +Enables you to make the window smaller or larger. Move your mouse around and click when you are satisfied with the new size. -Minimise -Hides the window, leaving only an icon in the taskbar. Notice that the window title in this icon is now shown in (parentheses). To bring the window to the desktop again, click the icon. +Minimise +Hides the window, leaving only an icon in the taskbar. Notice that the window title in this icon is now shown in (parentheses). To bring the window to the desktop again, click the icon. -Maximise -This will expand the window to the largest size possible. Note that &kde; will take the size of your virtual desktop, which means that the window could be bigger than your screen. +Maximise +This will expand the window to the largest size possible. Note that &kde; will take the size of your virtual desktop, which means that the window could be bigger than your screen. -Shade -Roll up the window, leaving only the titlebar visible. You can achieve the same effect by double clicking in the titlebar. To display the entire window again, select Shade again, or double click in the titlebar. +Shade +Roll up the window, leaving only the titlebar visible. You can achieve the same effect by double clicking in the titlebar. To display the entire window again, select Shade again, or double click in the titlebar. -Advanced -Here you can find menu options that allow you to manipulate how windows may cover each other up, and more: +Advanced +Here you can find menu options that allow you to manipulate how windows may cover each other up, and more: -Keep Above Others -Selecting this will keep this window on top of all other applications, even when it does not have the focus. +Keep Above Others +Selecting this will keep this window on top of all other applications, even when it does not have the focus. -Keep Below Others -Selecting this will keep this window below all others, even when it does have the focus. +Keep Below Others +Selecting this will keep this window below all others, even when it does have the focus. -Fullscreen -Selecting this makes the window take up the entire screen, similar to maximising, however, there are no window decorations showing. To switch to other applications, you may need to use the keybindings. For instance &Alt; to switch to another window or &Ctrl; to switch to another virtual desktop. -To revert from fullscreen mode, you can use the &Alt;F3 shortcut to show the window operations menu and deselect AdvancedFullscreen . +Fullscreen +Selecting this makes the window take up the entire screen, similar to maximising, however, there are no window decorations showing. To switch to other applications, you may need to use the keybindings. For instance &Alt; to switch to another window or &Ctrl; to switch to another virtual desktop. +To revert from fullscreen mode, you can use the &Alt;F3 shortcut to show the window operations menu and deselect AdvancedFullscreen . -No Border +No Border -Remove the window decoration and border from this window. This is useful for monitor type applications, such as &kpager; which you keep on screen all the time and will never need the window decorations for. Many people also like to use this for xterm and &konsole; windows. -To revert from no border mode, you can use the &Alt;F3 shortcut to show the window operations menu and deselect AdvancedNo Border . +Remove the window decoration and border from this window. This is useful for monitor type applications, such as &kpager; which you keep on screen all the time and will never need the window decorations for. Many people also like to use this for xterm and &konsole; windows. +To revert from no border mode, you can use the &Alt;F3 shortcut to show the window operations menu and deselect AdvancedNo Border . -Store Window Settings -Stored the current settings for this window (position, size, whether it should always stay on top of all other windows &etc;.). This configuration will then be loaded the next time the window gets opened. +Store Window Settings +Stored the current settings for this window (position, size, whether it should always stay on top of all other windows &etc;.). This configuration will then be loaded the next time the window gets opened. -To Desktop -Enables you to send a window to another desktop. Choose the desktop where you want the window to be. The window will disappear at once. To see your window again, select the appropriate Desktop Button on the &kde; Panel. Selecting All Desktops will make the window sticky - it will display on all desktops at once, so you can alway see this window. +To Desktop +Enables you to send a window to another desktop. Choose the desktop where you want the window to be. The window will disappear at once. To see your window again, select the appropriate Desktop Button on the &kde; Panel. Selecting All Desktops will make the window sticky - it will display on all desktops at once, so you can alway see this window. -Configure Window Behaviour... -Allows you to change the look and feel, of all the windows in &kde;. This changes the window decoration widgets, including the titlebar buttons, but also including things such as checkboxes and buttons within dialogues, scrollbars, and the titlebar itself. The default is Keramik. -You can further customise nearly everything about the window manager itself, including how windows behave when moved, what different mouse button clicks will do in different parts of the window, and how to decide which windows have focus. +Configure Window Behaviour... +Allows you to change the look and feel, of all the windows in &kde;. This changes the window decoration widgets, including the titlebar buttons, but also including things such as checkboxes and buttons within dialogues, scrollbars, and the titlebar itself. The default is Keramik. +You can further customise nearly everything about the window manager itself, including how windows behave when moved, what different mouse button clicks will do in different parts of the window, and how to decide which windows have focus. -Close -This will close the window. Sometimes the application will allow you to save your work, but in some cases (⪚, old X11 applications) this does not work. It is best to close an application with its own commands, using this menu item only as a last resort. -If the application itself is experiencing a problem that doesn't allow you to close it normally, using this menu item, or the window decoration close button will offer you the chance to kill it as gracefully as possible. Note that this may still leave the application open in the background but not showing any windows. Allowing the application to be killed in this manner will most likely allow you back into the desktop however, so you can check in a terminal window and clean up any remaining processes. +Close +This will close the window. Sometimes the application will allow you to save your work, but in some cases (⪚, old X11 applications) this does not work. It is best to close an application with its own commands, using this menu item only as a last resort. +If the application itself is experiencing a problem that doesn't allow you to close it normally, using this menu item, or the window decoration close button will offer you the chance to kill it as gracefully as possible. Note that this may still leave the application open in the background but not showing any windows. Allowing the application to be killed in this manner will most likely allow you back into the desktop however, so you can check in a terminal window and clean up any remaining processes. @@ -360,93 +152,34 @@ -Window Decoration Buttons +Window Decoration Buttons -Sticky button -This button looks like a plus symbol in the default window decoration (Keramik) and may look like a thumb tack in others. It performs the same operation as selecting To DesktopAll Desktops in the Window Menu, but requires fewer steps to invoke. +Sticky button +This button looks like a plus symbol in the default window decoration (Keramik) and may look like a thumb tack in others. It performs the same operation as selecting To DesktopAll Desktops in the Window Menu, but requires fewer steps to invoke. -Title bar -The title bar containing the name of the window can be double-clicked in order to shade it. Use the right mouse button: The Window menu will reappear, allowing you to (un)maximise, iconify, move, resize, (un)sticky the window, to move it to another desktop (this works faster than the method with the sticky button). When a program does not react anymore, you can close (which will sometimes give you the opportunity to save your work) it. +Title bar +The title bar containing the name of the window can be double-clicked in order to shade it. Use the right mouse button: The Window menu will reappear, allowing you to (un)maximise, iconify, move, resize, (un)sticky the window, to move it to another desktop (this works faster than the method with the sticky button). When a program does not react anymore, you can close (which will sometimes give you the opportunity to save your work) it. -Minimise, Maximise and Close Buttons -To the right of the title bar, there are two buttons that can also be used to iconify or maximise the window (this is faster than using the window manipulation menu). Iconified windows can be brought back with a click on the taskbar. -At the far left of the titlebar (with the default window decoration) is a button to close the window. +Minimise, Maximise and Close Buttons +To the right of the title bar, there are two buttons that can also be used to iconify or maximise the window (this is faster than using the window manipulation menu). Iconified windows can be brought back with a click on the taskbar. +At the far left of the titlebar (with the default window decoration) is a button to close the window. -To move a window, place the cursor on the title bar and hold down the &LMB;. Without releasing the mouse button, move the window to the location of your choice, then release the mouse button. If you want to resize a window, move the mouse cursor to the window border you wish to change. Once you have reached the correct spot, the cursor will change from an arrow to a bracket and an arrow. Hold down the &LMB; and drag the side in question to the location you wish, then release the button. Note that you may drag sides or corners (which will adjust the size in two dimensions at once.) +To move a window, place the cursor on the title bar and hold down the &LMB;. Without releasing the mouse button, move the window to the location of your choice, then release the mouse button. If you want to resize a window, move the mouse cursor to the window border you wish to change. Once you have reached the correct spot, the cursor will change from an arrow to a bracket and an arrow. Hold down the &LMB; and drag the side in question to the location you wish, then release the button. Note that you may drag sides or corners (which will adjust the size in two dimensions at once.) -Using the menu bar of each &kde; window is easy. Just click on what you want to do, and it will be done. +Using the menu bar of each &kde; window is easy. Just click on what you want to do, and it will be done. -Below the menu bar, there is a set of tool symbols you can use to execute commands. Whenever you move over them, an active picture will be marked. But the menu bar can do even more for you. Notice the textured stripe on the left of the menu and icon bars? Depress your right mouse button and a context menu will appear, allowing you to put the menu bar on the top, left, right, or bottom of the window. You can also hide the menubar by selecting Flat +Below the menu bar, there is a set of tool symbols you can use to execute commands. Whenever you move over them, an active picture will be marked. But the menu bar can do even more for you. Notice the textured stripe on the left of the menu and icon bars? Depress your right mouse button and a context menu will appear, allowing you to put the menu bar on the top, left, right, or bottom of the window. You can also hide the menubar by selecting Flat -Getting Help +Getting Help -Help is available basically everywhere: On the desktop, just use the right mouse button and choose HelpKDesktop Handbook. On the &kde; panel, open the application menu and choose Help. Every &kde; program has a help menu. +Help is available basically everywhere: On the desktop, just use the right mouse button and choose HelpKDesktop Handbook. On the &kde; panel, open the application menu and choose Help. Every &kde; program has a help menu. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/getting-started.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/getting-started.docbook index 1a89fef7871..4580dc1d287 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/getting-started.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/getting-started.docbook @@ -1,567 +1,237 @@ -Getting Started +Getting Started -Help for one of the toughest riddles in The 7th Guest -Using only what you see, can you get from A to B? +Help for one of the toughest riddles in The 7th Guest +Using only what you see, can you get from A to B? -So far, you may be thinking that &kde; is little more than another window manager. Relax, and read this chapter, and we'll introduce you to some features that will assure you that &kde; is very much more than a window manager — it's a full fledged environment. +So far, you may be thinking that &kde; is little more than another window manager. Relax, and read this chapter, and we'll introduce you to some features that will assure you that &kde; is very much more than a window manager — it's a full fledged environment. -Editing Files - -Since you do not only have &kde; applications installed on your system, you probably know the mess of editing ASCII style configuration files. But in fact, there are a lot of other file types that need to be edited this way. For example, the raw &XML; source for this guide was written ASCII style, as was the source code for the &kde; programs themselves. We will now show you how you can use the &kwrite; facility in &kde; to edit ASCII files of your own. +Editing Files + +Since you do not only have &kde; applications installed on your system, you probably know the mess of editing ASCII style configuration files. But in fact, there are a lot of other file types that need to be edited this way. For example, the raw &XML; source for this guide was written ASCII style, as was the source code for the &kde; programs themselves. We will now show you how you can use the &kwrite; facility in &kde; to edit ASCII files of your own. -Opening a Window Containing Your Home Folder - -Click on the &ticon; button and choose Home (Personal Files). A window showing the contents of your home folder will pop up. To see a more detailed listing of files in your home folder, select Show Hidden Files from the View menu. - -On the left hand of the window, a tree view of your file system structure should appear, while on the right hand side, you can see icons for each file in your Home folder, including any hidden files — files or folders beginning with a period. +Opening a Window Containing Your Home Folder + +Click on the &ticon; button and choose Home (Personal Files). A window showing the contents of your home folder will pop up. To see a more detailed listing of files in your home folder, select Show Hidden Files from the View menu. + +On the left hand of the window, a tree view of your file system structure should appear, while on the right hand side, you can see icons for each file in your Home folder, including any hidden files — files or folders beginning with a period. -The File Manager Screen - -We tried to make the File Manager as easy as possible to use, and if you know other window managers (including those built into other Operating Systems) with integrated file management, many of the following concepts should be familiar to you. - -On the top, there is a Location menu which contains functions to open and close file manager windows. You can also print the current contents. - -Want to visit the Internet? There are several paths you can take. You could choose LocationOpen Location (or press &Ctrl;O) and enter a &URL;. - -The simplest way however, is to simply type in the address you want to go to in the location bar itself. - -For example, if you want to visit the &kde; homepage, enter http://www.kde.org. You can also quickly transfer files over &FTP; using this method. &kde; is Internet ready, which means that you can load and save files not only on your local hard disk, but also on remote &FTP; and other remote servers that you have write access to. While other operating systems and desktops make a distinction between local and remote file systems, &kde; does not. +The File Manager Screen + +We tried to make the File Manager as easy as possible to use, and if you know other window managers (including those built into other Operating Systems) with integrated file management, many of the following concepts should be familiar to you. + +On the top, there is a Location menu which contains functions to open and close file manager windows. You can also print the current contents. + +Want to visit the Internet? There are several paths you can take. You could choose LocationOpen Location (or press &Ctrl;O) and enter a &URL;. + +The simplest way however, is to simply type in the address you want to go to in the location bar itself. + +For example, if you want to visit the &kde; homepage, enter http://www.kde.org. You can also quickly transfer files over &FTP; using this method. &kde; is Internet ready, which means that you can load and save files not only on your local hard disk, but also on remote &FTP; and other remote servers that you have write access to. While other operating systems and desktops make a distinction between local and remote file systems, &kde; does not. -The Edit menu offers functions to select, copy and move files. We will use them later. Already having used the View menu, you have probably seen that you can view the content in many different ways. Just play around a bit and see what happens. +The Edit menu offers functions to select, copy and move files. We will use them later. Already having used the View menu, you have probably seen that you can view the content in many different ways. Just play around a bit and see what happens. -You will undoubtedly find the Bookmarks to be extremely useful: Now you can remember virtually any link, be it on the local machine or somewhere on the Internet. &kde;'s network transparency works both ways, allowing you to treat files and folders on your hard drive as if they were Internet bookmarks. +You will undoubtedly find the Bookmarks to be extremely useful: Now you can remember virtually any link, be it on the local machine or somewhere on the Internet. &kde;'s network transparency works both ways, allowing you to treat files and folders on your hard drive as if they were Internet bookmarks. -The Tools menu helps you find the notorious file-that-I-put-somewhere-I-do-not-remember-anymore. +The Tools menu helps you find the notorious file-that-I-put-somewhere-I-do-not-remember-anymore. -Navigating Through Folders - -We will now pick one of your configuration files and edit it. First, we must change the folder in the File Manager. - -&konqueror; started with your home folder as the top of the tree. For most day-to-day purposes, this is where you are likely to be working, so it is a practical default. Sometimes you need to see the broader picture though, so the rest of your file system is not far away. - -You can quickly display the / or root folder several ways: click the small folder icon beside the navigation pane to switch to a full filesystem tree, use the Up arrow on the toolbar above to go to the top of your filesystem in the right hand pane, or type in / in the location bar. - -For the purpose of following this guide, press the small blue folder icon beside the navigation pane, so that the navigation pane switches to a full filesystem view. Notice that part of the tree is expanded, and your home folder is still selected. Now you can see how your home folder fits into the whole hierarchy, and your home folder files are still visible in the right hand pane. - -Scroll down the navigation pane on the left side of the window until you find the folder /etc. Double-click on etc. You will see a long list of files in the right window. +Navigating Through Folders + +We will now pick one of your configuration files and edit it. First, we must change the folder in the File Manager. + +&konqueror; started with your home folder as the top of the tree. For most day-to-day purposes, this is where you are likely to be working, so it is a practical default. Sometimes you need to see the broader picture though, so the rest of your file system is not far away. + +You can quickly display the / or root folder several ways: click the small folder icon beside the navigation pane to switch to a full filesystem tree, use the Up arrow on the toolbar above to go to the top of your filesystem in the right hand pane, or type in / in the location bar. + +For the purpose of following this guide, press the small blue folder icon beside the navigation pane, so that the navigation pane switches to a full filesystem view. Notice that part of the tree is expanded, and your home folder is still selected. Now you can see how your home folder fits into the whole hierarchy, and your home folder files are still visible in the right hand pane. + +Scroll down the navigation pane on the left side of the window until you find the folder /etc. Double-click on etc. You will see a long list of files in the right window. -Opening A File - -Some of the files you see here are at the heart of your operating system, so making permanent changes to them require you to be the root or superuser. We are going to practice on a file that will not hurt anything if a mistake is made, called motd. - -Scroll down until you find the file motd and click on it with the right mouse button. In the context menu, select Open With. A new menu will pop up. Choose &kwrite;. Voila! - -There are many ways to open a file, and this is just one of them. &kwrite; is an editor with a simple and probably familiar interface. You could also have navigated down the small tree in the popup dialogue to the Editors section, and chosen another editor, or simply double click the file to open it in the default editor. - -In the meantime, you have the file /etc/motd open in &kwrite; and we're ready to do some editing. +Opening A File + +Some of the files you see here are at the heart of your operating system, so making permanent changes to them require you to be the root or superuser. We are going to practice on a file that will not hurt anything if a mistake is made, called motd. + +Scroll down until you find the file motd and click on it with the right mouse button. In the context menu, select Open With. A new menu will pop up. Choose &kwrite;. Voila! + +There are many ways to open a file, and this is just one of them. &kwrite; is an editor with a simple and probably familiar interface. You could also have navigated down the small tree in the popup dialogue to the Editors section, and chosen another editor, or simply double click the file to open it in the default editor. + +In the meantime, you have the file /etc/motd open in &kwrite; and we're ready to do some editing. -The Editor Screen - -The more you work with &kde;, the more you will notice that most screens and applications look and feel the same. The &kwrite; File menu is a great example of this. Almost every other &kde; program has the same menu, allowing you to create new files, open existing files from your local file system or (coming soon) even the web, save them (soon even on the web, too!), print it or mail it to somebody else. - -The Edit menu can also be found in most &kde; applications, allowing you to cut and paste information between programs. You can also search and replace text. Using the Settings Menu, you can customise the editor in many different ways. For example, you can increase the font size to suit your monitor resolution — and your eyes. Of course, as in any other &kde; application, you find a Help Menu, offering you on-line help whenever you need it. +The Editor Screen + +The more you work with &kde;, the more you will notice that most screens and applications look and feel the same. The &kwrite; File menu is a great example of this. Almost every other &kde; program has the same menu, allowing you to create new files, open existing files from your local file system or (coming soon) even the web, save them (soon even on the web, too!), print it or mail it to somebody else. + +The Edit menu can also be found in most &kde; applications, allowing you to cut and paste information between programs. You can also search and replace text. Using the Settings Menu, you can customise the editor in many different ways. For example, you can increase the font size to suit your monitor resolution — and your eyes. Of course, as in any other &kde; application, you find a Help Menu, offering you on-line help whenever you need it. -Using the Editor - -Most motd files contain useless stuff like Do not forget to back up your data or Do not annoy the system manager. Boring. Let's change the text so that users logging in get the really important information. You can navigate through the text using the arrow keys, and mark sections of text with &Shift;Arrows or by using the mouse with the left button pressed. Use the Edit Menu to cut and paste text. Enter whatever you want, or use the following (great) example: - -Welcome! +Using the Editor + +Most motd files contain useless stuff like Do not forget to back up your data or Do not annoy the system manager. Boring. Let's change the text so that users logging in get the really important information. You can navigate through the text using the arrow keys, and mark sections of text with &Shift;Arrows or by using the mouse with the left button pressed. Use the Edit Menu to cut and paste text. Enter whatever you want, or use the following (great) example: + +Welcome! This machine now has KDE installed, providing you with a great, easy-to-use interface and a consistent Look-and-Feel for all your applications. For more information on how to get KDE running on your -account, please email the administrator. +account, please email the administrator. -Saving Your Work - -Now that you have changed the motd file, it is time to save the file, putting the changes into effect. To do this, you can use either the File Menu, or you can use the Save Icon on the toolbar. - -At this point, reality hits us. You need to have root permission to save the changes to this file. &kde; handles this by asking you for the root password. - -You probably don't really want to save this file, so you can press Cancel in the password dialogue and Cancel again in the save dialogue. - -Finally, finish your work by closing the editor and file manager window. You can do this by clicking the X button on the top left of the window, by using the window menu of the title bar, or by choosing File Quit. Simple and elegant, isn't it? +Saving Your Work + +Now that you have changed the motd file, it is time to save the file, putting the changes into effect. To do this, you can use either the File Menu, or you can use the Save Icon on the toolbar. + +At this point, reality hits us. You need to have root permission to save the changes to this file. &kde; handles this by asking you for the root password. + +You probably don't really want to save this file, so you can press Cancel in the password dialogue and Cancel again in the save dialogue. + +Finally, finish your work by closing the editor and file manager window. You can do this by clicking the X button on the top left of the window, by using the window menu of the title bar, or by choosing File Quit. Simple and elegant, isn't it? -Creating New Files - -As with everything in &kde;, there are several ways to create a new file. You could open up the file manager, right click on an empty space in a folder you own, and choose Create NewFileText File.... A new empty file will appear, which you can open just like any other. You can even do this right on the desktop itself. - -More often you are already in an application and want to start a new file. Most &kde; applications offer a FileNew menu item, and an icon on the toolbar to complement it. A new empty document will appear that you can immediately begin working in. - -Both these approaches have advantages, so use the one that is most practical at the time. +Creating New Files + +As with everything in &kde;, there are several ways to create a new file. You could open up the file manager, right click on an empty space in a folder you own, and choose Create NewFileText File.... A new empty file will appear, which you can open just like any other. You can even do this right on the desktop itself. + +More often you are already in an application and want to start a new file. Most &kde; applications offer a FileNew menu item, and an icon on the toolbar to complement it. A new empty document will appear that you can immediately begin working in. + +Both these approaches have advantages, so use the one that is most practical at the time. -Moving Files With Drag and Drop +Moving Files With Drag and Drop -As you have seen in the previous section, working with files is as easy as 1-2-3. However, when you want to copy and move files, the whole copy-and-paste business can get annoying. Don't worry — a procedure called drag and drop allows you to copy and move files more quickly and easily. +As you have seen in the previous section, working with files is as easy as 1-2-3. However, when you want to copy and move files, the whole copy-and-paste business can get annoying. Don't worry — a procedure called drag and drop allows you to copy and move files more quickly and easily. -Opening Two File Manager Windows - -Before you can start, you will need to open two file manager windows. The simplest way to open a new window is to press the gear wheel button on the right of the icon bar. If you do not see the tree view in the new window, activate it (WindowNavigation Panel or press F9). +Opening Two File Manager Windows + +Before you can start, you will need to open two file manager windows. The simplest way to open a new window is to press the gear wheel button on the right of the icon bar. If you do not see the tree view in the new window, activate it (WindowNavigation Panel or press F9). -Dragging a File From One Window To Another - -In the first window, open the /etc folder and scroll until you see the motd file we modified in the previous section. - -In the second window, open your home folder. - -Click on the motd file. Hold your left mouse button and drag your file into your home folder. Release the left mouse button (this is called dropping the file). You will be presented up to four options: Copy Here, Move Here, Link Here and Cancel. In this example, since you are not root, you cannot move the file, so this option is not presented. Link Here will create a symbolic link to the file, while Copy Here and Move Here do exactly what they say. Select Copy Here. You should now have a copy of the motd file in your home folder. +Dragging a File From One Window To Another + +In the first window, open the /etc folder and scroll until you see the motd file we modified in the previous section. + +In the second window, open your home folder. + +Click on the motd file. Hold your left mouse button and drag your file into your home folder. Release the left mouse button (this is called dropping the file). You will be presented up to four options: Copy Here, Move Here, Link Here and Cancel. In this example, since you are not root, you cannot move the file, so this option is not presented. Link Here will create a symbolic link to the file, while Copy Here and Move Here do exactly what they say. Select Copy Here. You should now have a copy of the motd file in your home folder. -Using Command Line And Terminals +Using Command Line And Terminals -So far, you have only worked with the tools and programs &kde; provides. Undoubtedly, you will want to use other &UNIX; programs as well. There are two ways of running them: The quick command line and the terminal. +So far, you have only worked with the tools and programs &kde; provides. Undoubtedly, you will want to use other &UNIX; programs as well. There are two ways of running them: The quick command line and the terminal. -Quick Command Line +Quick Command Line -Pressing &Alt; F2 pops up a small window where you can enter a command to run. Please note that you will not see any text output generated from a program started in this manner! This method is only recommended for starting &X-Window; based programs or for running tools where you do not need to see or type anything. For other programs, you will still need to use the terminal. +Pressing &Alt; F2 pops up a small window where you can enter a command to run. Please note that you will not see any text output generated from a program started in this manner! This method is only recommended for starting &X-Window; based programs or for running tools where you do not need to see or type anything. For other programs, you will still need to use the terminal. -The &UNIX; Terminal Emulator - -From the application menu, choose SystemTerminal . A terminal window will open. Here you can use regular &UNIX; shell commands: ls, cat, less, and so forth. Using the Settings menu, you can customise the terminal emulator to suit your needs. +The &UNIX; Terminal Emulator + +From the application menu, choose SystemTerminal . A terminal window will open. Here you can use regular &UNIX; shell commands: ls, cat, less, and so forth. Using the Settings menu, you can customise the terminal emulator to suit your needs. -Finding Your Lost Files +Finding Your Lost Files -Everyone has undoubtedly encountered the following problem: You start ftp, log into a great site like ftp.kde.org and start downloading files. It is late in the evening and you shut down your machine after completing the transfer. The next morning, you are at the keyboard again, and you start wondering into which folder you placed the recently transferred files. Using &kde;'s &kfind; utility makes finding those lost files a snap. +Everyone has undoubtedly encountered the following problem: You start ftp, log into a great site like ftp.kde.org and start downloading files. It is late in the evening and you shut down your machine after completing the transfer. The next morning, you are at the keyboard again, and you start wondering into which folder you placed the recently transferred files. Using &kde;'s &kfind; utility makes finding those lost files a snap. -Starting &kfind; - -Starting &kfind; is simple: Choose Find Files in the &kmenu;. &kfind; uses an interface part you probably have not yet met in &kde;: tabs. When &kfind; starts, you see that Name/Location is selected. When you click on Date Range, the tab content changes. Since you have never run a search before, most of the icons on the toolbar and most of the menu entries are disabled. We will change this now. +Starting &kfind; + +Starting &kfind; is simple: Choose Find Files in the &kmenu;. &kfind; uses an interface part you probably have not yet met in &kde;: tabs. When &kfind; starts, you see that Name/Location is selected. When you click on Date Range, the tab content changes. Since you have never run a search before, most of the icons on the toolbar and most of the menu entries are disabled. We will change this now. -Finding a File by Knowing Parts of Its Name - -As long as you know a bit of the file name, searching is easy. Select the Name/Location tab, and enter the file name in the Named field. Wildcards may be used as needed. As a test, type *.tar.gz. By default, the search begins in your home folder, but you can select any starting folder you wish by clicking on the Look in or Browse.... To start searching, press the Find button. After a moment, a list of files will appear in the search results window. If they do not appear, you started the search in the wrong folder, made a spelling mistake in the Named field, or no files ending with a .tar.gz extension are located on your machine. +Finding a File by Knowing Parts of Its Name + +As long as you know a bit of the file name, searching is easy. Select the Name/Location tab, and enter the file name in the Named field. Wildcards may be used as needed. As a test, type *.tar.gz. By default, the search begins in your home folder, but you can select any starting folder you wish by clicking on the Look in or Browse.... To start searching, press the Find button. After a moment, a list of files will appear in the search results window. If they do not appear, you started the search in the wrong folder, made a spelling mistake in the Named field, or no files ending with a .tar.gz extension are located on your machine. -Finding a File by More Complex Criteria +Finding a File by More Complex Criteria -There are many categories you can use to make your search more precise. The more you know about the file, the better are your chances of finding it. +There are many categories you can use to make your search more precise. The more you know about the file, the better are your chances of finding it. -Date Range +Date Range -Here, you can specify that you only want to see files which were last touched in a given period of time. You can also specify that you only want to see files that were touched since a specified number of months or days ago. +Here, you can specify that you only want to see files which were last touched in a given period of time. You can also specify that you only want to see files that were touched since a specified number of months or days ago. -File Type in the Contents tab. -If you know that the file was of a special type (⪚, a tar/gzip archive or a jpeg picture), you can tell &kfind; to find only this type of file. +File Type in the Contents tab. +If you know that the file was of a special type (⪚, a tar/gzip archive or a jpeg picture), you can tell &kfind; to find only this type of file. -Containing text in the Advanced tab +Containing text in the Advanced tab -You can specify text that the file must contain. +You can specify text that the file must contain. -File size is, in the Properties tab -If you know the file size, you can limit your search in this regard, as well. +File size is, in the Properties tab +If you know the file size, you can limit your search in this regard, as well. -&kfind; has many more options to refine searches, explore them all! +&kfind; has many more options to refine searches, explore them all! -Using Multiple Desktops +Using Multiple Desktops -Using multiple desktops helps you organise your work. You can place your programs on different desktops, and name the desktops so you know what you do there. This increases and optimises your workspace. It also helps you when you are surfing the net instead of doing your work and your boss comes in. But, of course, this is rare — at least in the office where I work. +Using multiple desktops helps you organise your work. You can place your programs on different desktops, and name the desktops so you know what you do there. This increases and optimises your workspace. It also helps you when you are surfing the net instead of doing your work and your boss comes in. But, of course, this is rare — at least in the office where I work. -You can switch between desktops by clicking the desktop buttons on the &kicker; panel. If you want to rename them, you can do so by double-clicking on them. +You can switch between desktops by clicking the desktop buttons on the &kicker; panel. If you want to rename them, you can do so by double-clicking on them. -You can use windows on multiple desktops. If you want to have a window present everywhere, just click the sticky button on the top-left of the window. To send a window to another desktop, click on the title bar with the right mouse button, choose To Desktop, and select the desktop where you would like the window moved. +You can use windows on multiple desktops. If you want to have a window present everywhere, just click the sticky button on the top-left of the window. To send a window to another desktop, click on the title bar with the right mouse button, choose To Desktop, and select the desktop where you would like the window moved. -Quitting &kde; - -To quit working with &kde;, you can use the Logout entry in the &kmenu;. You will be asked if you really want to quit &kde;. Quitting will close all windows and return you to your console or display manager. For information on how programs can save your work during logout, please read the notes for logging out. +Quitting &kde; + +To quit working with &kde;, you can use the Logout entry in the &kmenu;. You will be asked if you really want to quit &kde;. Quitting will close all windows and return you to your console or display manager. For information on how programs can save your work during logout, please read the notes for logging out. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/history.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/history.docbook index 6b5bff13bf4..df73da9a0b9 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/history.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/history.docbook @@ -1,171 +1,90 @@ -A Short Guided Tour of &kde;'s History +A Short Guided Tour of &kde;'s History -The CEO of a big software company, at the beginning of the 80s...(apocryphal) -640KB ought to be enough for everybody +The CEO of a big software company, at the beginning of the 80s...(apocryphal) +640KB ought to be enough for everybody -Before &kde; - -Since the beginning of &UNIX; development, there has been one great problem: There were stable kernels, and good, powerful software. Unfortunately, only a few people could use &UNIX;, because it was written mainly for those students and professionals who had studied the system for a long time. For example, the standard method for reading USENET news was: - -find /var/spool/news -name '[0-9]*' -exec cat {} \; | more +Before &kde; + +Since the beginning of &UNIX; development, there has been one great problem: There were stable kernels, and good, powerful software. Unfortunately, only a few people could use &UNIX;, because it was written mainly for those students and professionals who had studied the system for a long time. For example, the standard method for reading USENET news was: + +find /var/spool/news -name '[0-9]*' -exec cat {} \; | more -Although fast and relatively efficient, this couldn't be called user friendly. Today, there are many good front ends available, such as tin and &knode;, which provide easy-to-use, intuitive graphical user interfaces (&GUI;s). Unfortunately, the &GUI;s lack a common look-and-feel. Commercial libraries for programmers like &Motif; promised a solution to this, but these libraries remained, until recently, far too expensive and far too slow. - -The configuration of programs is also often difficult. While compiling is usually done with a command line such as ./configure && make && make only a very few programs can be configured with menus or scripts. In most cases, you must edit text configuration files yourself. It often happens that a misplaced period ruins the whole file, forcing you to restart the configuration process. Whenever you need to change your settings or reconfigure a program, the whole mess comes up again. - -All this contributes to the fact that &Linux; and other &UNIX;'s fail to reach a wider audience. At the same time, many people are not satisfied with their current operating system, often because of the lack of stability and performance found in those operating systems. Other people hate to buy a new computer each time a new version of the program they cannot live without comes out, because it needs more RAM and more disk space. Often the new version provides functions few people really need. - -&kde; is different. Although we do not try to replace the standard &UNIX; shell, we are working on a tool that will make using &UNIX; easier. We also want to attract more users to the &UNIX; environment. Simple things will be made easy, yet complex things will still be just as possible. A single interface will be provided, instead of the dozens currently required. +Although fast and relatively efficient, this couldn't be called user friendly. Today, there are many good front ends available, such as tin and &knode;, which provide easy-to-use, intuitive graphical user interfaces (&GUI;s). Unfortunately, the &GUI;s lack a common look-and-feel. Commercial libraries for programmers like &Motif; promised a solution to this, but these libraries remained, until recently, far too expensive and far too slow. + +The configuration of programs is also often difficult. While compiling is usually done with a command line such as ./configure && make && make only a very few programs can be configured with menus or scripts. In most cases, you must edit text configuration files yourself. It often happens that a misplaced period ruins the whole file, forcing you to restart the configuration process. Whenever you need to change your settings or reconfigure a program, the whole mess comes up again. + +All this contributes to the fact that &Linux; and other &UNIX;'s fail to reach a wider audience. At the same time, many people are not satisfied with their current operating system, often because of the lack of stability and performance found in those operating systems. Other people hate to buy a new computer each time a new version of the program they cannot live without comes out, because it needs more RAM and more disk space. Often the new version provides functions few people really need. + +&kde; is different. Although we do not try to replace the standard &UNIX; shell, we are working on a tool that will make using &UNIX; easier. We also want to attract more users to the &UNIX; environment. Simple things will be made easy, yet complex things will still be just as possible. A single interface will be provided, instead of the dozens currently required. -What &kde; Can Do For You +What &kde; Can Do For You -&kde; is designed for everyone. +&kde; is designed for everyone. -Those new to &UNIX;, or those who simply have no interest in learning to use new technologies and commands not found in their previous operating systems don't need to face the intricacies of the command line unless they want to. Yet there is much &kde; offers that is of value to experienced &UNIX; users, with &GUI; tools to make simple what were previously complex tasks, and the command line just a mouse click away if you want it. +Those new to &UNIX;, or those who simply have no interest in learning to use new technologies and commands not found in their previous operating systems don't need to face the intricacies of the command line unless they want to. Yet there is much &kde; offers that is of value to experienced &UNIX; users, with &GUI; tools to make simple what were previously complex tasks, and the command line just a mouse click away if you want it. -No matter what your level of experience with &UNIX; or any other operating system, &kde; brings you: +No matter what your level of experience with &UNIX; or any other operating system, &kde; brings you: -A good looking, easy to use desktop environment. +A good looking, easy to use desktop environment. -A powerful, easy to use file manager +A powerful, easy to use file manager -An equally powerful and easy to use web browser +An equally powerful and easy to use web browser -A simple, centralised configuration +A simple, centralised configuration -A comprehensive list of applications, so you can be productive within minutes of your first &kde; login. +A comprehensive list of applications, so you can be productive within minutes of your first &kde; login. -Online help to support you in every situation. +Online help to support you in every situation. -Consistency of interface. Menus are in the same place across applications, keybindings behave the same way, toolbar icons, once learned, always work the same. +Consistency of interface. Menus are in the same place across applications, keybindings behave the same way, toolbar icons, once learned, always work the same. -The Background Of &kde; +The Background Of &kde; -In October 1996, German LyX developer Matthias Ettrich initiated the development of &kde; with a USENET posting. Soon after, a couple of interested developers began planning and programming parts of the new project. One year later, the window and file managers, the terminal emulator, the help system and the display configuration tool were released for Alpha and Beta testing and proved to be relatively stable. +In October 1996, German LyX developer Matthias Ettrich initiated the development of &kde; with a USENET posting. Soon after, a couple of interested developers began planning and programming parts of the new project. One year later, the window and file managers, the terminal emulator, the help system and the display configuration tool were released for Alpha and Beta testing and proved to be relatively stable. -In July 1998, &kde; 1.0 was released. It was the stable version for the next six months, while developers continued work on improving &kde; without stability constraints. In January 1999, their improvements were consolidated and integrated to produce &kde; 1.1, the new standard, stable version. +In July 1998, &kde; 1.0 was released. It was the stable version for the next six months, while developers continued work on improving &kde; without stability constraints. In January 1999, their improvements were consolidated and integrated to produce &kde; 1.1, the new standard, stable version. -Development continued from there with &kde; 2.0, an almost complete rewrite of the desktop, being released on October 23rd 2000. The &kde; 2.x version evolved through six minor releases over the period of a year, each bringing an already impressive desktop further features and stability. +Development continued from there with &kde; 2.0, an almost complete rewrite of the desktop, being released on October 23rd 2000. The &kde; 2.x version evolved through six minor releases over the period of a year, each bringing an already impressive desktop further features and stability. -At the time of writing, &kde; 3.2 is in preparation for release, introducing a broad range of improvements over the 2.0 series. Although the &GUI; didn't change as dramatically as it did during the move from &kde; 1 to &kde; 2, many refinements like a completely new printing system, vastly improved SSL support (for secure Internet transactions) or full support for languages which are written right-to-left (like Arabic or Hebrew) found their way into the desktop. You can find more information about this exciting development at &kde-http;. +At the time of writing, &kde; 3.2 is in preparation for release, introducing a broad range of improvements over the 2.0 series. Although the &GUI; didn't change as dramatically as it did during the move from &kde; 1 to &kde; 2, many refinements like a completely new printing system, vastly improved SSL support (for secure Internet transactions) or full support for languages which are written right-to-left (like Arabic or Hebrew) found their way into the desktop. You can find more information about this exciting development at &kde-http;. -The developers and users communicate primarily via several mailing lists, as described in the Mailing Lists section. If you would like to help, please do, &kde; is driven by volunteer contribution, and you are always welcome to take part. +The developers and users communicate primarily via several mailing lists, as described in the Mailing Lists section. If you would like to help, please do, &kde; is driven by volunteer contribution, and you are always welcome to take part. -How To Get New Components - -The main web site for &kde; is &kde-http;. Here you can find all important information regarding &kde;, including announcements, bugfixes, developer information and much more. - -For software upgrades, please visit our &FTP; site, &kde-ftp;, or use a mirror if one exists near you. You can find an up to date list of mirrors at http://www.kde.org/ftpmirrors.html. - -On the &FTP; servers, the folder unstable always contains brand new software, but it is often untested and may not even compile. If you are looking for more reliable components, please take a look in the stable folder, where we put Beta and release versions. - -If you are interested in developing &kde; applications of your own, you should visit http://developer.kde.org/" where you will find a wealth of information, including tutorials, API guides to the &kde; libraries, and much more. You should also visit Troll Tech's server (http://www.trolltech.com) which features a great deal of information concerning the &Qt; library used by &kde;. You will probably find it valuable to join the &kde; developer mailing list. +How To Get New Components + +The main web site for &kde; is &kde-http;. Here you can find all important information regarding &kde;, including announcements, bugfixes, developer information and much more. + +For software upgrades, please visit our &FTP; site, &kde-ftp;, or use a mirror if one exists near you. You can find an up to date list of mirrors at http://www.kde.org/ftpmirrors.html. + +On the &FTP; servers, the folder unstable always contains brand new software, but it is often untested and may not even compile. If you are looking for more reliable components, please take a look in the stable folder, where we put Beta and release versions. + +If you are interested in developing &kde; applications of your own, you should visit http://developer.kde.org/" where you will find a wealth of information, including tutorials, API guides to the &kde; libraries, and much more. You should also visit Troll Tech's server (http://www.trolltech.com) which features a great deal of information concerning the &Qt; library used by &kde;. You will probably find it valuable to join the &kde; developer mailing list. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/index.docbook index d1d8b2db1ee..d012ee25a18 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/index.docbook @@ -14,73 +14,39 @@ - + ]> -K Desktop Environment +K Desktop Environment -The KDE Team +The KDE Team -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-19 -3.2 +2003-10-19 +3.2 -2000200120022003 -The KDE Team +2000200120022003 +The KDE Team -&GPLNotice; +&GPLNotice; -This is the &kde; User's Guide, a complete documentation of the K Desktop Environment from the user perspective. The K Desktop Environment is a collection of tools that will make your &UNIX; life easier and more enjoyable. +This is the &kde; User's Guide, a complete documentation of the K Desktop Environment from the user perspective. The K Desktop Environment is a collection of tools that will make your &UNIX; life easier and more enjoyable. -KDE -user -guide +KDE +user +guide diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/installation.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/installation.docbook index 1383128cd72..f1df426ff0c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/installation.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/userguide/installation.docbook @@ -1,596 +1,189 @@ -Installation +Installation -Linus Torvalds, after finding one of his file systems smashed by a new Beta kernel -Core dumping fsck's tend to make me nervous +Linus Torvalds, after finding one of his file systems smashed by a new Beta kernel +Core dumping fsck's tend to make me nervous -Don't worry! Although the use of some Beta software can cause considerable grief, it is unlikely that the installation of KDE will trash your hard disk. In fact, this chapter is designed to guide you through the installation process, so that you can take a look at your new desktop as quickly (and with as little grief) as possible. As with all new Window Manager installs, it is recommended that you back up all your X11-specific configuration files before you begin the install. If you do not know the exact location of them, try all the hidden (.*) files in your home folder and the folder /usr/X11/lib/X11/xdm. +Don't worry! Although the use of some Beta software can cause considerable grief, it is unlikely that the installation of KDE will trash your hard disk. In fact, this chapter is designed to guide you through the installation process, so that you can take a look at your new desktop as quickly (and with as little grief) as possible. As with all new Window Manager installs, it is recommended that you back up all your X11-specific configuration files before you begin the install. If you do not know the exact location of them, try all the hidden (.*) files in your home folder and the folder /usr/X11/lib/X11/xdm. -Requirements +Requirements -Before installing KDE, ascertain that your system fulfills the following requirements: +Before installing KDE, ascertain that your system fulfills the following requirements: -A running POSIX compatible UNIX system. UNIX's that are known to work with KDE include: Linux, FreeBSD, Solaris, HP-UX, and MkLinux. We are working to make KDE available for more platforms soon. - -Some free hard disk space on the partition where /opt/kde will be created. We recommend that you reserve about 50MB if your system supports shared libraries, and considerably more if it does not. If you need or want to build KDE from the source tree, please remember to reserve about 100MB in /usr/src. - -A running X11 system with or without xdm. If you have not installed the X Window System yet, first check your UNIX installation media for an installable version. If you cannot find any version working, visit the XFree86 web site for more information on how to get and install the X Window System, or contact your UNIX vendor support. - -The &Qt; libraries, version 3.2 or higher. You can obtain these at Troll Tech's FTP Server in tgz format. +A running POSIX compatible UNIX system. UNIX's that are known to work with KDE include: Linux, FreeBSD, Solaris, HP-UX, and MkLinux. We are working to make KDE available for more platforms soon. + +Some free hard disk space on the partition where /opt/kde will be created. We recommend that you reserve about 50MB if your system supports shared libraries, and considerably more if it does not. If you need or want to build KDE from the source tree, please remember to reserve about 100MB in /usr/src. + +A running X11 system with or without xdm. If you have not installed the X Window System yet, first check your UNIX installation media for an installable version. If you cannot find any version working, visit the XFree86 web site for more information on how to get and install the X Window System, or contact your UNIX vendor support. + +The &Qt; libraries, version 3.2 or higher. You can obtain these at Troll Tech's FTP Server in tgz format. -A warning before you start: Before upgrading from a previous version of &kde;, we recommend that you do the following: - -cd /opt/kde -tar +A warning before you start: Before upgrading from a previous version of &kde;, we recommend that you do the following: + +cd /opt/kde +tar -Linux: Installing RPMs for RedHat, Caldera and SuSE. - -Using RPMs is the easiest method to get KDE up and running. Just visit your favourite KDE mirror and visit the folder /pub/kde/stable/distribution/rpm. There, you can see folders for different operating systems. Currently, the i386, alpha and sparc architectures are supported. The RPM packages can also be found on the Red Hat contrib sites like sunsite.unc.edu or ftp.redhat.com. - -The basic system consists of the files kde-component.architecture.rpm You need at least tdesupport, tdelibs and tdebase. After getting the base distribution, feel free to download any other RPMs that you think may come in handy. - -Next, start installing with the base package. If you are installing KDE for the first time, use - -rpm tdesupport.arch.rpm -rpm tdelibs.arch.rpm -rpm tdebase.arch.rpm +Linux: Installing RPMs for RedHat, Caldera and SuSE. + +Using RPMs is the easiest method to get KDE up and running. Just visit your favourite KDE mirror and visit the folder /pub/kde/stable/distribution/rpm. There, you can see folders for different operating systems. Currently, the i386, alpha and sparc architectures are supported. The RPM packages can also be found on the Red Hat contrib sites like sunsite.unc.edu or ftp.redhat.com. + +The basic system consists of the files kde-component.architecture.rpm You need at least tdesupport, tdelibs and tdebase. After getting the base distribution, feel free to download any other RPMs that you think may come in handy. + +Next, start installing with the base package. If you are installing KDE for the first time, use + +rpm tdesupport.arch.rpm +rpm tdelibs.arch.rpm +rpm tdebase.arch.rpm -It is important that these components are installed in the order listed, and that they are installed before any other KDE component. - -If you are upgrading from a previous release, try rpm kde-component.arch.rpm +It is important that these components are installed in the order listed, and that they are installed before any other KDE component. + +If you are upgrading from a previous release, try rpm kde-component.arch.rpm -Once again, the order given above should be preserved, and the given components should be installed before any other KDE components. +Once again, the order given above should be preserved, and the given components should be installed before any other KDE components. -This will unpack the base distribution and install it by default in /opt/kde. +This will unpack the base distribution and install it by default in /opt/kde. -If the installation of the base packages has been successful, you can install the remaining packages (use instead of once again to update an existing version) the same way. +If the installation of the base packages has been successful, you can install the remaining packages (use instead of once again to update an existing version) the same way. -Linux: Installing <acronym ->DEB</acronym ->s for debian +Linux: Installing <acronym>DEB</acronym>s for debian -The installation for a Debian system is also rather straightforward. You will only find KDE 2.0 packages for Debian 2.2 (Potato) and 3.0 (Woody). We describe here how to install packages for Debian 2.2, the stable version, since Debian 3.0 is still in development. However, the installation for both versions, is almost identical. The main difference is that KDE is officially included in Debian 3.0 and you do not need to specify any special location to find the deb packages for KDE. +The installation for a Debian system is also rather straightforward. You will only find KDE 2.0 packages for Debian 2.2 (Potato) and 3.0 (Woody). We describe here how to install packages for Debian 2.2, the stable version, since Debian 3.0 is still in development. However, the installation for both versions, is almost identical. The main difference is that KDE is officially included in Debian 3.0 and you do not need to specify any special location to find the deb packages for KDE. -The first step is to tell your system where it can find the deb packages for KDE. A list of locations for the Debian packages is kept on your hard disk in /etc/apt/sources.list. You should add to that file the following line: http://kde.tdyc.com/ stable kde2 +The first step is to tell your system where it can find the deb packages for KDE. A list of locations for the Debian packages is kept on your hard disk in /etc/apt/sources.list. You should add to that file the following line: http://kde.tdyc.com/ stable kde2 -Then you have to update your local package database so that your system knows that there are new packages available. Type the following command: - -apt-get +Then you have to update your local package database so that your system knows that there are new packages available. Type the following command: + +apt-get -Finally you should install the KDE base components. This is accomplished by typing: - -apt-get +Finally you should install the KDE base components. This is accomplished by typing: + +apt-get -If you want to install other components you should try some, or all of these options: - -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get +If you want to install other components you should try some, or all of these options: + +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get -You may also be interested in installing your language. - -apt-get +You may also be interested in installing your language. + +apt-get -where xx has to be substituted by the country code. - -The control files for some TDE applications will be placed at /etc/kde2, the executables will go in /usr/bin and most of the auxiliary files in /usr/share under different folders. - -If you are upgrading from a previous version of KDE you should perform the following steps. First, update file /etc/apt/sources.list by changing the line with the location of KDE packages with line: http://kde.tdyc.com/ stable kde2. Second update your package database: - -apt-get +where xx has to be substituted by the country code. + +The control files for some TDE applications will be placed at /etc/kde2, the executables will go in /usr/bin and most of the auxiliary files in /usr/share under different folders. + +If you are upgrading from a previous version of KDE you should perform the following steps. First, update file /etc/apt/sources.list by changing the line with the location of KDE packages with line: http://kde.tdyc.com/ stable kde2. Second update your package database: + +apt-get -Finally install the KDE base system: - -apt-get -apt-get +Finally install the KDE base system: + +apt-get +apt-get -If you want to install more KDE components try some, or all of these options. - -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get -apt-get +If you want to install more KDE components try some, or all of these options. + +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get +apt-get -Using Source Compilation to Install on Top of Other Systems +Using Source Compilation to Install on Top of Other Systems -If your Linux distribution did not come with an RPM or DEB archive format, or you are not using Linux at all, you must compile KDE on your own. In the future, we are planning to provide a binary distribution which includes its own installation program. +If your Linux distribution did not come with an RPM or DEB archive format, or you are not using Linux at all, you must compile KDE on your own. In the future, we are planning to provide a binary distribution which includes its own installation program. -In order to compile and install KDE properly, you need to have the following items installed on your hard disk: +In order to compile and install KDE properly, you need to have the following items installed on your hard disk: -An ANSI-C compiler, e.g. the GNU C compiler. -An ANSI-C++ compiler, e.g. GNU C++. -The make utility. -Qt development version 2.2 or higher. -X11 development version (include files are often missing) +An ANSI-C compiler, e.g. the GNU C compiler. +An ANSI-C++ compiler, e.g. GNU C++. +The make utility. +Qt development version 2.2 or higher. +X11 development version (include files are often missing) -Once you have all the needed helper applications, go to your favourite KDE mirror and retrieve the following files from the folder /pub/kde/stable/newest version: +Once you have all the needed helper applications, go to your favourite KDE mirror and retrieve the following files from the folder /pub/kde/stable/newest version: -tdesupport-version.tar.gz -tdelibs-version.tar.gz - -tdebase-version.tar.gz -any other packages you wish to install. We advise you to get at least tdeutils. +tdesupport-version.tar.gz +tdelibs-version.tar.gz + +tdebase-version.tar.gz +any other packages you wish to install. We advise you to get at least tdeutils. -In all cases above, version stands for the current version number. Once you have downloaded all you need, extract these files to /usr/src. This process should yield the following folder structure: +In all cases above, version stands for the current version number. Once you have downloaded all you need, extract these files to /usr/src. This process should yield the following folder structure: -/usr/src/tdesupport -/usr/src/tdelibs -/usr/src/tdebase -/usr/src/... (any other packages) +/usr/src/tdesupport +/usr/src/tdelibs +/usr/src/tdebase +/usr/src/... (any other packages) -Make sure you have write permissions to /opt/kde. +Make sure you have write permissions to /opt/kde. -Next you must compile and install the packages using the following: +Next you must compile and install the packages using the following: -cd into the folder of the package, you want to install (see above) -./configure (with the options you want to apply) -make -make install +cd into the folder of the package, you want to install (see above) +./configure (with the options you want to apply) +make +make install -Apply the above steps to every package you want to install. +Apply the above steps to every package you want to install. -These instructions can be used for almost every source package available, not just KDE packages. +These instructions can be used for almost every source package available, not just KDE packages. -Every configure script has several options available. Some are common between the packages while others are specific to an individual package. The following is a small part of the result of configure in tdelibs: +Every configure script has several options available. Some are common between the packages while others are specific to an individual package. The following is a small part of the result of configure in tdelibs: - + Installation directories: --prefix=PREFIX install architecture-independent files in PREFIX [/usr/local/kde-cvs] @@ -604,113 +197,45 @@ Optional Features: --enable-strict compiles with strict compiler options (may not work!) --disable-warnings disables compilation with -Wall and similar ... - + -Several options are not required and are only useful as workarounds for known problems (⪚ ). Since some are important options, for instance --with-shadow, you should always check the available options. - -An important option is . This option specifies the path where configure should install (for tdesupport and tdelibs) or where to look for libraries (for the other packages). By default, configure will look in /usr/local/kde . If you want to install &kde; into /opt/kde, you have to use configure . - -If you have installed the &Qt; libraries in an uncommon place, for instance in $HOME/src/qt, you must use configure . By default configure looks in the most common places for &Qt; before it gives up. - -If you have problems that you are not able to solve, send a copy of the config.log file to the address given in the offending package's README file. - -You must install KDE in the following order: arts, tdelibs, then the application packages (for example tdebase). All the application packages should only depend on tdelibs, so you can compile them at the same time (if you have a powerful machine). - -If you want to take advantage of multiprocessor systems, try make instead of make. +Several options are not required and are only useful as workarounds for known problems (⪚ ). Since some are important options, for instance --with-shadow, you should always check the available options. + +An important option is . This option specifies the path where configure should install (for tdesupport and tdelibs) or where to look for libraries (for the other packages). By default, configure will look in /usr/local/kde . If you want to install &kde; into /opt/kde, you have to use configure . + +If you have installed the &Qt; libraries in an uncommon place, for instance in $HOME/src/qt, you must use configure . By default configure looks in the most common places for &Qt; before it gives up. + +If you have problems that you are not able to solve, send a copy of the config.log file to the address given in the offending package's README file. + +You must install KDE in the following order: arts, tdelibs, then the application packages (for example tdebase). All the application packages should only depend on tdelibs, so you can compile them at the same time (if you have a powerful machine). + +If you want to take advantage of multiprocessor systems, try make instead of make. -Platform Specific Building Notes +Platform Specific Building Notes -Linux - -For &Linux;, most of the utilities needed to build &kde; can be found either at ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/GCC or ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/GNU. The Qt libraries can be found at ftp://ftp.troll.no/pub/qt/source, available as source code. Detailed instructions on how to install them are provided. Include files for X11 programs should be available at ftp://ftp.xfree86.org in the xdevel section. +Linux + +For &Linux;, most of the utilities needed to build &kde; can be found either at ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/GCC or ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/GNU. The Qt libraries can be found at ftp://ftp.troll.no/pub/qt/source, available as source code. Detailed instructions on how to install them are provided. Include files for X11 programs should be available at ftp://ftp.xfree86.org in the xdevel section. -Required Changes To Your Configuration Files -After you have placed the KDE binaries into their destination folder, there are a few adjustments you must make to your startup scripts. -The following procedure was tested on SuSE Linux 5.0, and should be compatible with the other popular UNIX's as well. Always make backups of configuration files before changing them! Add the following to the end of your /etc/profile: - -export PATH=$PATH:/opt/kde/bin +Required Changes To Your Configuration Files +After you have placed the KDE binaries into their destination folder, there are a few adjustments you must make to your startup scripts. +The following procedure was tested on SuSE Linux 5.0, and should be compatible with the other popular UNIX's as well. Always make backups of configuration files before changing them! Add the following to the end of your /etc/profile: + +export PATH=$PATH:/opt/kde/bin export TDEDIR=/opt/kde -Next, edit the .xinitrc file in your home folder. Look for the line that calls your window manager and replace it with starttde. -Now that everything needed to run KDE has been installed, you can go on to chapter 4 where you will start KDE for the first time. If something goes wrong, you may need to compile KDE on your own. Read Using Source Compilation to Install on Top of Other Systems for more information. -We have made the installation as bulletproof as possible, so you should not encounter any serious problems unless your configuration is exotic. If you do experience difficulties feel free to use the KDE mailing lists +Next, edit the .xinitrc file in your home folder. Look for the line that calls your window manager and replace it with starttde. +Now that everything needed to run KDE has been installed, you can go on to chapter 4 where you will start KDE for the first time. If something goes wrong, you may need to compile KDE on your own. Read Using Source Compilation to Install on Top of Other Systems for more information. +We have made the installation as bulletproof as possible, so you should not encounter any serious problems unless your configuration is exotic. If you do experience difficulties feel free to use the KDE mailing lists + -All trademarks mentioned on this web server or in &kde; documentation are recognised as belonging to their respective owners, including but not limited to: +All trademarks mentioned on this web server or in &kde; documentation are recognised as belonging to their respective owners, including but not limited to: -&AIX; is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation -&CSS;, &XHTML;, &XSL; and &XML; are common law trademarks of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique, or Keio University on behalf of the World Wide Web Consortium. -&Handspring; and &Visor; are trademarks of Handspring, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. -&Hewlett-Packard;, &HP; &LaserJet;,&HP-UX; PCL, PCL 5 and PCL 6 are U.S. registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company. -&IRIX; is a registered trademark and &SGI; is a trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. -&Java; and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. -&Jini; and all Jini-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the US and other countries. -&Linux; is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds -&LinuxPPC; is a trademark of LinuxPPC Inc. -&Mac; is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. -&Mandrake; and &Linux-Mandrake; are trademarks of MandrakeSoft. -&Netscape; is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. -&NeXTSTEP; is a trademark of NeXT Software, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. -&PalmOS;, &HotSync; and &PalmPilot; are registered trademarks of Palm, Inc. -&PostScript; is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -&Qt; is a trademark of Trolltech AS -&RedHat; and all Red Hat-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. -&Sendmail; is a registered trademark of Sendmail Inc. -&Solaris;, Sun and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc. -&SuSE; is a registered trademark of SuSE AG -&ThreeCom; is a registered trademark of 3com corporation in the United States and other countries. -&Motif;, &UNIX; and the X device are registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries -&Microsoft; and &Windows; are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation -XFree86 is pending trademark registration by The XFree86 Project, Inc. +&AIX; is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation +&CSS;, &XHTML;, &XSL; and &XML; are common law trademarks of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique, or Keio University on behalf of the World Wide Web Consortium. +&Handspring; and &Visor; are trademarks of Handspring, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. +&Hewlett-Packard;, &HP; &LaserJet;,&HP-UX; PCL, PCL 5 and PCL 6 are U.S. registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company. +&IRIX; is a registered trademark and &SGI; is a trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. +&Java; and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. +&Jini; and all Jini-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the US and other countries. +&Linux; is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds +&LinuxPPC; is a trademark of LinuxPPC Inc. +&Mac; is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. +&Mandrake; and &Linux-Mandrake; are trademarks of MandrakeSoft. +&Netscape; is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. +&NeXTSTEP; is a trademark of NeXT Software, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. +&PalmOS;, &HotSync; and &PalmPilot; are registered trademarks of Palm, Inc. +&PostScript; is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. +&Qt; is a trademark of Trolltech AS +&RedHat; and all Red Hat-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. +&Sendmail; is a registered trademark of Sendmail Inc. +&Solaris;, Sun and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc. +&SuSE; is a registered trademark of SuSE AG +&ThreeCom; is a registered trademark of 3com corporation in the United States and other countries. +&Motif;, &UNIX; and the X device are registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries +&Microsoft; and &Windows; are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation +XFree86 is pending trademark registration by The XFree86 Project, Inc. -What does &kde; stand for? -Originally the K stood for Kool, nowadays the K has no meaning and &kde; simply stands for the K Desktop Environment. &kde; is intended to be a collection of small tools, a window manager, a file manager and tools that bring all this together. It is created to make your life with &UNIX; easier. +What does &kde; stand for? +Originally the K stood for Kool, nowadays the K has no meaning and &kde; simply stands for the K Desktop Environment. &kde; is intended to be a collection of small tools, a window manager, a file manager and tools that bring all this together. It is created to make your life with &UNIX; easier. -I cannot compile package xxx +I cannot compile package xxx -Always be sure that you have the newest version of the &kde; libraries installed. The software is in constant development, so the dependencies can change from one day to another if you are using CVS. For most users, using a released version is much more practical. +Always be sure that you have the newest version of the &kde; libraries installed. The software is in constant development, so the dependencies can change from one day to another if you are using CVS. For most users, using a released version is much more practical. -Another problem could be that you are using a program written for a very old version of &kde;, which depends on outdated include files. Check in the source archive's README to see if it explains which version of &kde; the application is looking for. If that file doesn't exist, check the file dates. They should be more recent than your current &kde; version. +Another problem could be that you are using a program written for a very old version of &kde;, which depends on outdated include files. Check in the source archive's README to see if it explains which version of &kde; the application is looking for. If that file doesn't exist, check the file dates. They should be more recent than your current &kde; version. - + -What version of &kde; should I use for a stable desktop? -One can, in general, obtain &kde; in many ways. Obtaining pre-compiled binaries in a package format (rpm,deb,tgz) labeled with a particular version (⪚ 3.2) is the best way to encourage stability on your &kde; desktop. +What version of &kde; should I use for a stable desktop? +One can, in general, obtain &kde; in many ways. Obtaining pre-compiled binaries in a package format (rpm,deb,tgz) labeled with a particular version (⪚ 3.2) is the best way to encourage stability on your &kde; desktop. - -But I heard that my problem/wishlist item is already in CVS. I want to get my hands on the new features, why shouldn't I try CVS? + +But I heard that my problem/wishlist item is already in CVS. I want to get my hands on the new features, why shouldn't I try CVS? -The price of stability is that one must wait for each release to get new features. Conversely the price of being the first to see new features, is that you risk stability. &kde; has a fairly frequent release schedule, and stability of released versions is a particular focus. For the majority of &kde; users, unless you are planning to help develop &kde;, there is little advantage to running development versions of &kde;. +The price of stability is that one must wait for each release to get new features. Conversely the price of being the first to see new features, is that you risk stability. &kde; has a fairly frequent release schedule, and stability of released versions is a particular focus. For the majority of &kde; users, unless you are planning to help develop &kde;, there is little advantage to running development versions of &kde;. -However, there is always a place for experienced users who know what they are letting themselves in for, and are willing to report bugs found. If this is you, then there is no reason not to try the CVS versions. Be prepared for things to break occasionally, CVS gives you a snapshot of source code that is currently being worked on. +However, there is always a place for experienced users who know what they are letting themselves in for, and are willing to report bugs found. If this is you, then there is no reason not to try the CVS versions. Be prepared for things to break occasionally, CVS gives you a snapshot of source code that is currently being worked on. -These are daily snapshots of whatever the developers are working on, and some things are guaranteed to be broken. +These are daily snapshots of whatever the developers are working on, and some things are guaranteed to be broken. -Do not rely on CVS snapshots to maintain operational desktops. You will get burned eventually! +Do not rely on CVS snapshots to maintain operational desktops. You will get burned eventually! diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/visualdict/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/visualdict/index.docbook index c9178c95461..a6b7bd0174f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/visualdict/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/visualdict/index.docbook @@ -3,8 +3,7 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + ]> @@ -12,57 +11,29 @@ -The &kde; Visual Guide +The &kde; Visual Guide -The KDE Team -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +The KDE Team +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2000-10-04 -2.00.00 +2000-10-04 +2.00.00 -2000 -The KDE Team +2000 +The KDE Team -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -A visual guide to &kde;'s interface. This is a very early version of the document. Eventually, this will be a graphical tour of &kde;. +A visual guide to &kde;'s interface. This is a very early version of the document. Eventually, this will be a graphical tour of &kde;. -KDE -Visual -Dictionary -Guide +KDE +Visual +Dictionary +Guide @@ -73,23 +44,14 @@ -&kde; Visual Dictionary of terms +&kde; Visual Dictionary of terms -This project was started to help unify the vocabulary used in &kde; documentation. +This project was started to help unify the vocabulary used in &kde; documentation. -We provide this for you here as an aid to learning your way around the &kde; Graphical User Interface. These names have been standardised within &kde; documentation, so that you will always find interface items referred to in the same way. +We provide this for you here as an aid to learning your way around the &kde; Graphical User Interface. These names have been standardised within &kde; documentation, so that you will always find interface items referred to in the same way. -The term Widget refers to the basic building block of a computer program's interface. -Each widget operates in a similar manner each time it is used, but the effect that the widget has depends on its place within the program. +The term Widget refers to the basic building block of a computer program's interface. +Each widget operates in a similar manner each time it is used, but the effect that the widget has depends on its place within the program. -Listing of Common &kde; Widgets -Currently, this guide consists of a table of the names of the graphical elements often found in &kde; documentation, and an example of each one. -Our hope, eventually, is to make this a much more complete document, which will take you on a visual tour of &kde;. +Listing of Common &kde; Widgets +Currently, this guide consists of a table of the names of the graphical elements often found in &kde; documentation, and an example of each one. +Our hope, eventually, is to make this a much more complete document, which will take you on a visual tour of &kde;. -Button +Button @@ -122,8 +80,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Check Boxes +Check Boxes @@ -134,8 +91,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Colour Selector +Colour Selector @@ -146,8 +102,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Combo Box +Combo Box @@ -158,8 +113,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Dialogue Box +Dialogue Box @@ -170,8 +124,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Drop Down Box +Drop Down Box @@ -182,8 +135,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Icon List +Icon List @@ -194,8 +146,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -List Box +List Box @@ -206,8 +157,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Menubar +Menubar @@ -218,8 +168,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Progress Bar +Progress Bar @@ -230,8 +179,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Radio Buttons +Radio Buttons @@ -242,8 +190,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Scroll Bar +Scroll Bar @@ -254,8 +201,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Slider +Slider @@ -266,8 +212,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Spin Box +Spin Box @@ -278,8 +223,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Status Bar +Status Bar @@ -290,8 +234,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Text Box +Text Box @@ -303,8 +246,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Toolbar +Toolbar @@ -315,8 +257,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Tree View +Tree View @@ -328,8 +269,7 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Window Titlebar +Window Titlebar @@ -345,13 +285,10 @@ Perhaps list deprecated names, for search/replace purposes? -Credits and Licences -&kappname; +Credits and Licences +&kappname; -Documentation by the KDE Documentation Team. +Documentation by the KDE Documentation Team. &underFDL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/adjectives.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/adjectives.docbook index fa210644c49..f15d20ba73a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/adjectives.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/adjectives.docbook @@ -1,181 +1,114 @@ -KLatin Notes - Adjectives +KLatin Notes - Adjectives -Adjectives are words to describe nouns, and so they agree with the nouns. Agreeing means that they match the noun they refer to in three ways: gender, number and case. +Adjectives are words to describe nouns, and so they agree with the nouns. Agreeing means that they match the noun they refer to in three ways: gender, number and case.
The dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: welcome screenThe dialogue to configure the &CUPS; server: welcome screen A screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer.A screenshot of the &tdeprint; PrintJob Viewer. Configuration of printing subsystem from &kcontrol;Configuration of printing subsystem from &kcontrol; -&kcron;'s addition to the &tdeprint; dialogue. +&kcron;'s addition to the &tdeprint; dialogue. Starting the &kprinter; dialogue from a Run Command... window.Starting the &kprinter; dialogue from a Run Command... window. &kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing)&kprinter; dialogue started (&kivio; draft drawing)
-1st and 2nd Declension Adjectives (212) +1st and 2nd Declension Adjectives (212) -SINGULAR -Like Servus -Like Puella -Like Bellum - - - - - - +SINGULAR +Like Servus +Like Puella +Like Bellum + + + + + + -Nominative -bon-us -bon-a -bon-um - - -Vocative -bon-e -bon-a -bon-um - - -Accusative -bon-um -bon-am -bon-um - - -Genitive -bon-i -bon-ae -bon-i - - -Dative -bon-o -bon-ae -bon-o - - -Ablative -bon-o -bon-a -bon-o - - - - - - +Nominative +bon-us +bon-a +bon-um + + +Vocative +bon-e +bon-a +bon-um + + +Accusative +bon-um +bon-am +bon-um + + +Genitive +bon-i +bon-ae +bon-i + + +Dative +bon-o +bon-ae +bon-o + + +Ablative +bon-o +bon-a +bon-o + + + + + + -PLURAL - - - - - -Nominative -bon-i -bon-ae -bon-a - - -Vocative -bon-i -bon-ae -bon-a - - -Accusative -bon-os -bon-as -bon-a - - -Genitive -bon-orum -bon-arum -bon-orum - - -Dative -bon-is -bon-is -bon-is - - -Ablative -bon-is -bon-is -bon-is +PLURAL + + + + + +Nominative +bon-i +bon-ae +bon-a + + +Vocative +bon-i +bon-ae +bon-a + + +Accusative +bon-os +bon-as +bon-a + + +Genitive +bon-orum +bon-arum +bon-orum + + +Dative +bon-is +bon-is +bon-is + + +Ablative +bon-is +bon-is +bon-is @@ -183,174 +116,109 @@
-3rd Declension Adjectives (333) +3rd Declension Adjectives (333) -SINGULAR -Like Rex -Like Rex -Like Opus - - - - - - +SINGULAR +Like Rex +Like Rex +Like Opus + + + + + + -Nominative -trist-is -trist-is -trist-e - - -Vocative -trist-is -trist-is -trist-e - - -Accusative -trist-em -trist-em -trist-e - - -Genitive -trist-i -trist-i -trist-is - - -Dative -trist-is -trist-is -trist-i - - -Ablative -trist-i -trist-i -trist-i - - - - - - +Nominative +trist-is +trist-is +trist-e + + +Vocative +trist-is +trist-is +trist-e + + +Accusative +trist-em +trist-em +trist-e + + +Genitive +trist-i +trist-i +trist-is + + +Dative +trist-is +trist-is +trist-i + + +Ablative +trist-i +trist-i +trist-i + + + + + + -PLURAL - - - - - -Nominative -trist-es -trist-es -trist-ia - - -Vocative -trist-es -trist-es -trist-ia - - -Accusative -trist-es -trist-es -trist-ia - - -Genitive -trist-ium -trist-ium -trist-ium - - -Dative -trist-ibus -trist-ibus -trist-ibus - - -Ablative -trist-ibus -trist-ibus -trist-ibus +PLURAL + + + + + +Nominative +trist-es +trist-es +trist-ia + + +Vocative +trist-es +trist-es +trist-ia + + +Accusative +trist-es +trist-es +trist-ia + + +Genitive +trist-ium +trist-ium +trist-ium + + +Dative +trist-ibus +trist-ibus +trist-ibus + + +Ablative +trist-ibus +trist-ibus +trist-ibus @@ -358,76 +226,47 @@
-Comparison of Adjectives +Comparison of Adjectives -Positive -Comparative -Superlative -Notes +Positive +Comparative +Superlative +Notes - - - - + + + + -Normal form of Adjective +Normal form of Adjective -Stem + ior,-ius -Stem + issimus,-a,-um - - - - - -Stem + rimus,-a,-um -For adjectives which end with -er. For example: acer-rimus,-a,-um - - - - -Stem + limus,-a,-um -For adjectives which end with -ilis. For example: facil-limus,-a,-um - - - - -Per/Prae + Adjective - +Stem + ior,-ius +Stem + issimus,-a,-um + + + + + +Stem + rimus,-a,-um +For adjectives which end with -er. For example: acer-rimus,-a,-um + + + + +Stem + limus,-a,-um +For adjectives which end with -ilis. For example: facil-limus,-a,-um + + + + +Per/Prae + Adjective + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/index.docbook index ad9a51227d3..92d75940c03 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/index.docbook @@ -1,399 +1,200 @@ + - KWordQuiz"> - KVTML"> - + KWordQuiz"> + KVTML"> + - + ]> -The &klatin; Handbook +The &klatin; Handbook -George Wright
gwright@users.sourceforge.net
+George Wright
gwright@users.sourceforge.net
 -Anne-Marie Mahfouf
annma@kde.org
+Anne-Marie Mahfouf
annma@kde.org
 -Help in documentation +Help in documentation -Andrew Coles
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +Andrew Coles
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2001-2004 -George Wright +2001-2004 +George Wright -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2004-08-23 -0.9 +2004-08-23 +0.9 -&klatin; is a &kde; application to help revise/teach Latin. +&klatin; is a &kde; application to help revise/teach Latin. -KDE -tdeedu -KLatin -Latin -education -language -latin +KDE +tdeedu +KLatin +Latin +education +language +latin -Introduction - -&klatin; is a program to help revise Latin. There are three sections in which different aspects of the language can be revised. These are the vocabulary, grammar and verb testing sections. In addition there is a set of revision notes that can be used for self-guided revision. -In the vocabulary section an &XML; file is loaded containing various words and their local language translations. &klatin; asks you what each of these words translate into. The questions take place in a multiple-choice environment. -In the grammar and verb sections &klatin; asks for a particular part of a noun or a verb, such as the ablative singular, or the 1st person indicative passive plural, and is not multiple choice. +Introduction + +&klatin; is a program to help revise Latin. There are three sections in which different aspects of the language can be revised. These are the vocabulary, grammar and verb testing sections. In addition there is a set of revision notes that can be used for self-guided revision. +In the vocabulary section an &XML; file is loaded containing various words and their local language translations. &klatin; asks you what each of these words translate into. The questions take place in a multiple-choice environment. +In the grammar and verb sections &klatin; asks for a particular part of a noun or a verb, such as the ablative singular, or the 1st person indicative passive plural, and is not multiple choice. -Using &klatin; +Using &klatin; -When you start &klatin;, you are greeted by four options that you can choose from. +When you start &klatin;, you are greeted by four options that you can choose from. -&klatin; main screen, directly after the first start +&klatin; main screen, directly after the first start -&klatin; main screen +&klatin; main screen -The first one, Vocabulary, is a multiple-choice vocabulary tester. +The first one, Vocabulary, is a multiple-choice vocabulary tester. -&klatin; vocabulary section +&klatin; vocabulary section -&klatin; vocabulary +&klatin; vocabulary -After you finish your test, a results screen is displayed. +After you finish your test, a results screen is displayed. -&klatin; vocabulary results +&klatin; vocabulary results -&klatin; results +&klatin; results -The second, Grammar tests you on grammatical parts of nouns. +The second, Grammar tests you on grammatical parts of nouns. -&klatin; grammar section +&klatin; grammar section -&klatin; grammar +&klatin; grammar -Verbs is almost the same as the Grammar section, except that it tests you on verb forms. +Verbs is almost the same as the Grammar section, except that it tests you on verb forms. -&klatin; verbs section +&klatin; verbs section -&klatin; verbs +&klatin; verbs - + -The fourth section, Revision, loads &konqueror; into the &klatin; revision notes section. - -In addition to the options, you can also launch these sections via the menubar, in the Section. - -The configuration dialog for &klatin; can be accessed by choosing SettingsConfigure &klatin;... from the menu. In the Vocabulary page, you can set whether you want the test to take place from your language into Latin, or vice versa. You can also choose the default file which you want to use to test your vocabulary on, and you can also set how many questions you want to be tested on. +The fourth section, Revision, loads &konqueror; into the &klatin; revision notes section. + +In addition to the options, you can also launch these sections via the menubar, in the Section. + +The configuration dialog for &klatin; can be accessed by choosing SettingsConfigure &klatin;... from the menu. In the Vocabulary page, you can set whether you want the test to take place from your language into Latin, or vice versa. You can also choose the default file which you want to use to test your vocabulary on, and you can also set how many questions you want to be tested on. -The &klatin; main window -The &klatin; main window consists of four option buttons to choose which section to enter, and a menubar. -Choose from the Revision Sections list a section and click Start! to start the chosen section. +The &klatin; main window +The &klatin; main window consists of four option buttons to choose which section to enter, and a menubar. +Choose from the Revision Sections list a section and click Start! to start the chosen section. -When you are finished with that section, click Back to return to &klatin;'s main menu. +When you are finished with that section, click Back to return to &klatin;'s main menu. -Command Reference +Command Reference -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Quits &klatin; + &Ctrl;Q File Quit +Quits &klatin; -The <guimenu ->Section</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Section</guimenu> Menu -Section Load Vocabulary File -Loads a new vocabulary file. This menu is only enabled if you are in the Vocabulary section +Section Load Vocabulary File +Loads a new vocabulary file. This menu is only enabled if you are in the Vocabulary section -Section Load Vocabulary -Loads the vocabulary section +Section Load Vocabulary +Loads the vocabulary section -Section Load Grammar -Loads the grammar section +Section Load Grammar +Loads the grammar section -Section Load Verbs -Loads the verbs section +Section Load Verbs +Loads the verbs section -Section Load Revision -Loads the revision section +Section Load Revision +Loads the revision section @@ -401,44 +202,18 @@ -The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -Settings Configure Shortcuts... -Configure the keyboard keys you use to access the different actions. +Settings Configure Shortcuts... +Configure the keyboard keys you use to access the different actions. -Settings Configure &klatin;... -Display the &klatin; settings dialogue +Settings Configure &klatin;... +Display the &klatin; settings dialogue @@ -446,210 +221,104 @@ -The <guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu &help.menu.documentation; -Translation Guide to &klatin; +Translation Guide to &klatin; -Only the vocabulary files have to be translated in your language. The vocabulary files use the &kvtml; format, which is the same as other programs such as &kwordquiz; use. &kwordquiz; is very useful as you can create the vocabulary files in that and load them directly into &klatin;. -Below is explained how you can translate &klatin; vocabulary files. At the moment, the files are only in English. +Only the vocabulary files have to be translated in your language. The vocabulary files use the &kvtml; format, which is the same as other programs such as &kwordquiz; use. &kwordquiz; is very useful as you can create the vocabulary files in that and load them directly into &klatin;. +Below is explained how you can translate &klatin; vocabulary files. At the moment, the files are only in English. -How To Translate &klatin; vocabulary files +How To Translate &klatin; vocabulary files -Get the latest &klatin; code from CVS or a latest release. The words are stored in source_dir_of_tdeedu/klatin/klatin/data/vocab/en/ in files like A.kvtml for Latin words beginning with A, BC.kvtml for Latin words beginning with B and C and so on. +Get the latest &klatin; code from CVS or a latest release. The words are stored in source_dir_of_tdeedu/klatin/klatin/data/vocab/en/ in files like A.kvtml for Latin words beginning with A, BC.kvtml for Latin words beginning with B and C and so on. -Create a new subdirectory in data/vocab/ named as your language code (for example, fr for French, ja for Japanese). Copy all the English vocabulary files there as well as the Makefile.am. Edit the Makefile.am and replace en with your language code. +Create a new subdirectory in data/vocab/ named as your language code (for example, fr for French, ja for Japanese). Copy all the English vocabulary files there as well as the Makefile.am. Edit the Makefile.am and replace en with your language code. -In data/vocab/your_language_code, edit all the files and translate the English words, &ie; those that are between the t and t tags. +In data/vocab/your_language_code, edit all the files and translate the English words, &ie; those that are between the t and t tags. -Commit your files to CVS HEAD or tar them and send them to George gwright@users.sourceforge.net or to Anne-Marie annma@kde.org. +Commit your files to CVS HEAD or tar them and send them to George gwright@users.sourceforge.net or to Anne-Marie annma@kde.org. -Developer's Guide to &klatin; +Developer's Guide to &klatin; -Create new vocabulary files -The &klatin; vocabulary database system is very easy to extend. Just look at the files and you'll understand! It uses the &kvtml; format, which is the same as other programs such as &kwordquiz; use. So you can open &kwordquiz; and use it to create the vocabulary files. -You can save your new files in the corresponding folder depending on what language they refer to in .kde/share/apps/klatin/data/vocab/language_code/. For example, English &kvtml; files are kept in a directory called en, German files in de, and so on. You can also send me your files so I can add them in the next &klatin; release. +Create new vocabulary files +The &klatin; vocabulary database system is very easy to extend. Just look at the files and you'll understand! It uses the &kvtml; format, which is the same as other programs such as &kwordquiz; use. So you can open &kwordquiz; and use it to create the vocabulary files. +You can save your new files in the corresponding folder depending on what language they refer to in .kde/share/apps/klatin/data/vocab/language_code/. For example, English &kvtml; files are kept in a directory called en, German files in de, and so on. You can also send me your files so I can add them in the next &klatin; release. -Credits and Licence - -&klatin; -Program copyright 2001-2004 George Wright gwright@users.sourceforge.net -Contributors: - -Neil Stevens neil@qualityassistant.org +Credits and Licence + +&klatin; +Program copyright 2001-2004 George Wright gwright@users.sourceforge.net +Contributors: + +Neil Stevens neil@qualityassistant.org -Anne-Marie Mahfouf annma@kde.org +Anne-Marie Mahfouf annma@kde.org -Mark Westcott mark@houseoffish.org +Mark Westcott mark@houseoffish.org -Documentation copyright 2001-2004 George Wright gwright@users.sourceforge.net +Documentation copyright 2001-2004 George Wright gwright@users.sourceforge.net -Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk +Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; -&klatin; notes +&klatin; notes -Welcome to the &klatin; notes section. This is aimed to help you in your revision and covers the English GCSE syllabus (England). +Welcome to the &klatin; notes section. This is aimed to help you in your revision and covers the English GCSE syllabus (England). -Here are the different sections you can get help for: +Here are the different sections you can get help for: -Latin numbers - -Latin verbs - -Latin nouns - -Latin adjectives - -Latin pronouns - +Latin numbers + +Latin verbs + +Latin nouns + +Latin adjectives + +Latin pronouns + &numbers; &verbs; &nouns; &adjectives; &pronouns; -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &klatin; +How to obtain &klatin; &install.intro.documentation; -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation &install.compile.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/nouns.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/nouns.docbook index 8a180766639..84c338570c0 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/nouns.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/nouns.docbook @@ -1,363 +1,198 @@ -KLatin Notes - Nouns +KLatin Notes - Nouns -Nouns, like verbs, are divided into groups, called declensions. There are five declensions and three genders: masculine, feminine and neuter. -The stem of a noun is the basic part of the noun that does not change. To get the stem of a noun, take the genitive singular of the noun and take off its ending. For example: the stem of puella is puell; while the stem of rex is reg, because its genitive is reg-is. +Nouns, like verbs, are divided into groups, called declensions. There are five declensions and three genders: masculine, feminine and neuter. +The stem of a noun is the basic part of the noun that does not change. To get the stem of a noun, take the genitive singular of the noun and take off its ending. For example: the stem of puella is puell; while the stem of rex is reg, because its genitive is reg-is. -Latin Nouns +Latin Nouns
-Noun listings +Noun listings -SINGULAR -1st Feminine -2nd Masculine -2nd Neuter -3rd Masc/Fem -3rd Neuter -4th Masculine -4th Neuter -5th Feminine - - - - - - - - - - - +SINGULAR +1st Feminine +2nd Masculine +2nd Neuter +3rd Masc/Fem +3rd Neuter +4th Masculine +4th Neuter +5th Feminine + + + + + + + + + + + -Nominative -puell-a -serv-us -bell-um -rex -opus -grad-us -genu -res - - -Vocative -puell-a -serv-e -bell-um -rex -opus -grad-us -genu -res - - -Accusative -puell-am -serv-um -bell-um -reg-em -opus -grad-um -genu -re-m - - -Genitive -puell-ae -serv-i -bell-i -reg-is -oper-is -grad-us -gen-u -re-i - - -Dative -puell-ae -serv-o -bell-o -reg-i -oper-i -grad-ui -gen-u -re-i - - -Ablative -puell-a -serv-o -bell-o -reg-e -oper-e -grad-u -gen-u -re +Nominative +puell-a +serv-us +bell-um +rex +opus +grad-us +genu +res + + +Vocative +puell-a +serv-e +bell-um +rex +opus +grad-us +genu +res + + +Accusative +puell-am +serv-um +bell-um +reg-em +opus +grad-um +genu +re-m + + +Genitive +puell-ae +serv-i +bell-i +reg-is +oper-is +grad-us +gen-u +re-i + + +Dative +puell-ae +serv-o +bell-o +reg-i +oper-i +grad-ui +gen-u +re-i + + +Ablative +puell-a +serv-o +bell-o +reg-e +oper-e +grad-u +gen-u +re - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + -PLURAL - - - - - - - - - - -Nominative -puell-ae -serv-i -bell-a -reg-es -oper-a -grad-us -gen-ua -res - - -Vocative -puell-ae -serv-i -bell-a -reg-es -oper-a -grad-us -gen-ua -res - - -Accusative -puell-as -serv-os -bell-a -reg-es -oper-a -grad-us -gen-ua -res - - -Genitive -puell-arum -serv-orum -bell-orum -reg-um -oper-um -grad-uum -gen-uum -re-rum - - -Dative -puell-is -serv-is -bell-is -reg-ibus -oper-ibus -grad-ibus -gen-ibus -re-bus - - -Ablative -puell-is -serv-is -bell-is -reg-ibus -oper-ibus -grad-ibus -gen-ibus -re-bus +PLURAL + + + + + + + + + + +Nominative +puell-ae +serv-i +bell-a +reg-es +oper-a +grad-us +gen-ua +res + + +Vocative +puell-ae +serv-i +bell-a +reg-es +oper-a +grad-us +gen-ua +res + + +Accusative +puell-as +serv-os +bell-a +reg-es +oper-a +grad-us +gen-ua +res + + +Genitive +puell-arum +serv-orum +bell-orum +reg-um +oper-um +grad-uum +gen-uum +re-rum + + +Dative +puell-is +serv-is +bell-is +reg-ibus +oper-ibus +grad-ibus +gen-ibus +re-bus + + +Ablative +puell-is +serv-is +bell-is +reg-ibus +oper-ibus +grad-ibus +gen-ibus +re-bus diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/numbers.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/numbers.docbook index 2fef0ebc4d4..ded3f6e5254 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/numbers.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/numbers.docbook @@ -1,337 +1,214 @@ -KLatin Notes - Numbers +KLatin Notes - Numbers -The Romans had a particular set of numerals and had names for each of their numbers. In this section are listed some numbers and their corresponding symbol. +The Romans had a particular set of numerals and had names for each of their numbers. In this section are listed some numbers and their corresponding symbol.
-Numbers +Numbers -1 -I -unus +1 +I +unus -2 -II -duo +2 +II +duo -3 -III -tres +3 +III +tres -4 -IV -quattuor +4 +IV +quattuor -5 -V -quinque +5 +V +quinque -6 -VI -sex +6 +VI +sex -7 -VII -septem +7 +VII +septem -8 -VIII -octo +8 +VIII +octo -9 -IX -novem +9 +IX +novem -10 -X -decem +10 +X +decem -11 -XI -undecim +11 +XI +undecim -12 -XII -duodecim +12 +XII +duodecim -13 -XIII -tredecim +13 +XIII +tredecim -14 -XIV -quattuordecim +14 +XIV +quattuordecim -15 -XV -quindecim +15 +XV +quindecim -16 -XVI -sedecim +16 +XVI +sedecim -17 -XVII -septendecim +17 +XVII +septendecim -18 -XVIII -duodeviginti +18 +XVIII +duodeviginti -19 -XIX -undeviginti +19 +XIX +undeviginti -20 -XX -viginti +20 +XX +viginti -21 -XXI -vigintiunus +21 +XXI +vigintiunus -22 -XXII -vigintiduo +22 +XXII +vigintiduo -30 -XXX -triginta +30 +XXX +triginta -40 -XL -quadraginta +40 +XL +quadraginta -50 -L -quinquaginta +50 +L +quinquaginta -60 -LX -sexaginta +60 +LX +sexaginta -70 -LXX -septuaginta +70 +LXX +septuaginta -80 -LXXX -octoginta - +80 +LXXX +octoginta + -90 -XC -nonaginta - +90 +XC +nonaginta + -100 -C -centum - +100 +C +centum + -200 -CC -ducenti - +200 +CC +ducenti + -300 -CCC -trecenti - +300 +CCC +trecenti + -400 -CD -quadrigenti - +400 +CD +quadrigenti + -500 -D -quingenti - +500 +D +quingenti + -600 -DC -sescenti - +600 +DC +sescenti + -700 -DCC -septigenti - +700 +DCC +septigenti + -800 -DCCC -octigenti - +800 +DCCC +octigenti + -900 -CM -nongenti - +900 +CM +nongenti + -1000 -M -mille - +1000 +M +mille + -2000 -MM -duo milia +2000 +MM +duo milia diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/pronouns.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/pronouns.docbook index 4d3edb21703..83192de6286 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/pronouns.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/pronouns.docbook @@ -1,105 +1,68 @@ -KLatin Notes - Pronouns -Here are some pronouns. +KLatin Notes - Pronouns +Here are some pronouns.
-Personal Pronouns +Personal Pronouns -Me -You +Me +You -ego -tu +ego +tu -me -te +me +te -mei -tui +mei +tui -mihi -tibi +mihi +tibi -me -te +me +te - - + + -We -You (Pl) +We +You (Pl) -nos -vos +nos +vos -nos -vos +nos +vos -nostri/nostrum -vestri/vestrum +nostri/nostrum +vestri/vestrum -nobis -vobis +nobis +vobis -nobis -vobis +nobis +vobis @@ -107,128 +70,77 @@
-3rd Person Personal Pronouns +3rd Person Personal Pronouns - -He, -She, -It - - -SINGULAR -is -ea -id - - - -eum -eum -id - - - -eius -eius -eius - - - -ei -ei -ei - - - -eo -ea -eo - - -PLURAL -ei -eae -ea - - - -eos -eas -ea - - - -eorum -earum -eorum - - - -eis -eis -eis - - - -eis -eis -eis + +He, +She, +It + + +SINGULAR +is +ea +id + + + +eum +eum +id + + + +eius +eius +eius + + + +ei +ei +ei + + + +eo +ea +eo + + +PLURAL +ei +eae +ea + + + +eos +eas +ea + + + +eorum +earum +eorum + + + +eis +eis +eis + + + +eis +eis +eis @@ -236,285 +148,178 @@
-Demonstrative Pronouns +Demonstrative Pronouns -This - - -SINGULAR -hic -haec -hoc - - - -hunc -hanc -hoc - - - -huius -huius -huius - - - -huic -huic -huic - - - -hoc -hac -hoc - - -PLURAL -hi -hae -haec - - - -hos -has -heac - - - -horum -harum -horum - - - -his -his -his - - - -his -his -his - - - - - +This + + +SINGULAR +hic +haec +hoc + + + +hunc +hanc +hoc + + + +huius +huius +huius + + + +huic +huic +huic + + + +hoc +hac +hoc + + +PLURAL +hi +hae +haec + + + +hos +has +heac + + + +horum +harum +horum + + + +his +his +his + + + +his +his +his + + + + + -That - - -SINGULAR -ille -illa -illud - - - -illum -illam -illud - - - -illius -illius -illius - - - -illi -illi -illi - - - -illo -illa -illo - - -PLURAL -illi -illae -illa - - - -illos -illas -illa - - - -illorum -illarum -illorum - - - -illis -illis -illis - - - -illis -illis -illis +That + + +SINGULAR +ille +illa +illud + + + +illum +illam +illud + + + +illius +illius +illius + + + +illi +illi +illi + + + +illo +illa +illo + + +PLURAL +illi +illae +illa + + + +illos +illas +illa + + + +illorum +illarum +illorum + + + +illis +illis +illis + + + +illis +illis +illis
-Negative Pronouns +Negative Pronouns -Noone -Nothing +Noone +Nothing -nemo -nihil +nemo +nihil -neminem -nihil/nil +neminem +nihil/nil -nullius/neminis -nullius rei +nullius/neminis +nullius rei -nemini/nulli -nulli rei +nemini/nulli +nulli rei -nullo/nemine -nulla re +nullo/nemine +nulla re diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/verbs.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/verbs.docbook index 2585211cf0b..b6f73c6c888 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/verbs.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/klatin/verbs.docbook @@ -1,638 +1,368 @@ -KLatin Notes - Verbs +KLatin Notes - Verbs -All languages have verbs. Latin verbs are divided into four categories, called conjugations. These conjugations are divisions of verbs that, generally, use the same stem formation and have the same endings. +All languages have verbs. Latin verbs are divided into four categories, called conjugations. These conjugations are divisions of verbs that, generally, use the same stem formation and have the same endings. -The stem of a verb is the basic part of the verb that does not change. For example, the stem of moneo is mone. To get the stem of the verb, take the first person singular of the verb, and take off the -o ending. The verb sum (I am) is totally irregular, and does not have a consistent stem. +The stem of a verb is the basic part of the verb that does not change. For example, the stem of moneo is mone. To get the stem of the verb, take the first person singular of the verb, and take off the -o ending. The verb sum (I am) is totally irregular, and does not have a consistent stem.
-Verb listings - Indicative Active +Verb listings - Indicative Active -TENSE -1st -2nd -3rd -4th -SUM - I - - - - - - - - +TENSE +1st +2nd +3rd +4th +SUM - I + + + + + + + + -PRESENT -am-o -mone-o -reg-o -audi-o -sum - - - -ama-s -mone-s -regi-s -audi-s -es - - -I love, am loving -ama-t -mone-t -regi-t -audi-t -est - - - -ama-mus -mone-mus -regi-mus -audi-mus -sumus - - - -ama-tis -mone-tis -regi-tis -audi-tis -estis - - - -ama-nt -mone-nt -regu-nt -audi-unt -sunt - - - - - - - - +PRESENT +am-o +mone-o +reg-o +audi-o +sum + + + +ama-s +mone-s +regi-s +audi-s +es + + +I love, am loving +ama-t +mone-t +regi-t +audi-t +est + + + +ama-mus +mone-mus +regi-mus +audi-mus +sumus + + + +ama-tis +mone-tis +regi-tis +audi-tis +estis + + + +ama-nt +mone-nt +regu-nt +audi-unt +sunt + + + + + + + + -FUTURE -ama-bo -mone-bo -reg-am -audi-am -ero - - - -ama-bis -mone-bis -reg-es -audi-es -eris - - -I will love -ama-bit -mone-bit -reg-et -audi-et -erit - - - -ama-bimus -mone-bimus -reg-emus -audi-emus -erimus - - - -ama-bitis -mone-bitis -reg-etis -audi-etis -eritis - - - -ama-bunt -mone-bunt -reg-ent -audi-ent -erunt - - - - - - - - +FUTURE +ama-bo +mone-bo +reg-am +audi-am +ero + + + +ama-bis +mone-bis +reg-es +audi-es +eris + + +I will love +ama-bit +mone-bit +reg-et +audi-et +erit + + + +ama-bimus +mone-bimus +reg-emus +audi-emus +erimus + + + +ama-bitis +mone-bitis +reg-etis +audi-etis +eritis + + + +ama-bunt +mone-bunt +reg-ent +audi-ent +erunt + + + + + + + + -IMPERFECT -ama-bam -mone-bam -rege-bam -audi-bam -eram - - - -ama-bas -mone-bas -rege-bas -audi-bas -eras - - -I was loving -ama-bat -mone-bat -rege-bat -audi-bat -erat - - -I used to love -ama-bamus -mone-bamus -rege-bamus -audi-bamus -eramus - - -I began to love -ama-batis -mone-batis -rege-batis -audi-batis -eratis - - - -ama-bant -mone-bant -rege-bant -audi-bant -erant - - - - - - - - +IMPERFECT +ama-bam +mone-bam +rege-bam +audi-bam +eram + + + +ama-bas +mone-bas +rege-bas +audi-bas +eras + + +I was loving +ama-bat +mone-bat +rege-bat +audi-bat +erat + + +I used to love +ama-bamus +mone-bamus +rege-bamus +audi-bamus +eramus + + +I began to love +ama-batis +mone-batis +rege-batis +audi-batis +eratis + + + +ama-bant +mone-bant +rege-bant +audi-bant +erant + + + + + + + + -PERFECT -amav-i -monu-i -rex-i -audiv-i -fu-i - - - -amav-isti -monu-isti -rex-isti -audiv-isti -fu-isti - - -I have loved -amav-it -monu-it -rex-it -audiv-it -fu-it - - - -amav-imus -monu-imus -rex-imus -audiv-imus -fu-imus - - - -amav-istis -monu-istis -rex-istis -audiv-istis -fu-istis - - - -amav-erunt -monu-erunt -rex-erunt -audiv-erunt -fu-erunt - - - - - - - - +PERFECT +amav-i +monu-i +rex-i +audiv-i +fu-i + + + +amav-isti +monu-isti +rex-isti +audiv-isti +fu-isti + + +I have loved +amav-it +monu-it +rex-it +audiv-it +fu-it + + + +amav-imus +monu-imus +rex-imus +audiv-imus +fu-imus + + + +amav-istis +monu-istis +rex-istis +audiv-istis +fu-istis + + + +amav-erunt +monu-erunt +rex-erunt +audiv-erunt +fu-erunt + + + + + + + + -FUTURE PERFECT -amav-ero -monu-ero -rex-ero -audiv-ero -fu-ero - - - -amav-eris -monu-eris -rex-eris -audiv-eris -fu-eris - - -I will have loved -amav-erit -monu-erit -rex-erit -audiv-erit -fu-erit - - - -amav-erimus -monu-erimus -rex-erimus -audiv-erimus -fu-erimus - - - -amav-eritis -monu-eritis -rex-eritis -audiv-eritis -fu-eritis - - - -amav-erint -monu-erint -rex-erint -audiv-erint -fu-erint - - - - - - - - +FUTURE PERFECT +amav-ero +monu-ero +rex-ero +audiv-ero +fu-ero + + + +amav-eris +monu-eris +rex-eris +audiv-eris +fu-eris + + +I will have loved +amav-erit +monu-erit +rex-erit +audiv-erit +fu-erit + + + +amav-erimus +monu-erimus +rex-erimus +audiv-erimus +fu-erimus + + + +amav-eritis +monu-eritis +rex-eritis +audiv-eritis +fu-eritis + + + +amav-erint +monu-erint +rex-erint +audiv-erint +fu-erint + + + + + + + + -PLUPERFECT -amav-eram -monu-eram -rex-eram -audiv-eram -fu-eram - - - -amav-eras -monu-eras -rex-eras -audiv-eras -fu-eras - - -I had loved -amav-erat -monu-erat -rex-erat -audiv-erat -fu-erat - - - -amav-eramus -monu-eramus -rex-eramus -audiv-eramus -fu-eramus - - - -amav-eratis -monu-eratis -rex-eratis -audiv-eratis -fu-eratis - - - -amav-erant -monu-erant -rex-erant -audiv-erant -fu-erant +PLUPERFECT +amav-eram +monu-eram +rex-eram +audiv-eram +fu-eram + + + +amav-eras +monu-eras +rex-eras +audiv-eras +fu-eras + + +I had loved +amav-erat +monu-erat +rex-erat +audiv-erat +fu-erat + + + +amav-eramus +monu-eramus +rex-eramus +audiv-eramus +fu-eramus + + + +amav-eratis +monu-eratis +rex-eratis +audiv-eratis +fu-eratis + + + +amav-erant +monu-erant +rex-erant +audiv-erant +fu-erant @@ -641,421 +371,246 @@
-Verb listings - Subjunctive Active +Verb listings - Subjunctive Active -TENSE -1st -2nd -3rd -4th -SUM - I - - - - - - - - +TENSE +1st +2nd +3rd +4th +SUM - I + + + + + + + + -PRESENT -ame-m -monea-m -rega-m -audi-o -sim - - - -ame-s -monea-s -rega-s -audi-s -sis - - - -ame-t -monea-t -rega-t -audi-t -sit - - - -ame-mus -monea-mus -rega-mus -audi-mus -simus - - - -ame-tis -monea-tis -rega-tis -audi-tis -sitis - - - -ame-nt -monea-nt -rega-nt -audi-unt -sint - - - - - - - - +PRESENT +ame-m +monea-m +rega-m +audi-o +sim + + + +ame-s +monea-s +rega-s +audi-s +sis + + + +ame-t +monea-t +rega-t +audi-t +sit + + + +ame-mus +monea-mus +rega-mus +audi-mus +simus + + + +ame-tis +monea-tis +rega-tis +audi-tis +sitis + + + +ame-nt +monea-nt +rega-nt +audi-unt +sint + + + + + + + + -IMPERFECT -ama-rem -mone-rem -rege-rem -audi-rem -essem - - - -ama-res -mone-res -rege-res -audi-res -esset - - - -ama-ret -mone-ret -rege-ret -audi-ret -esset - - - -ama-remus -mone-remus -rege-remus -audi-remus -essemus - - - -ama-retis -mone-retis -rege-retis -audi-retis -essetis - - - -ama-rent -mone-rent -rege-rent -audi-rent -essent - - - - - - - - +IMPERFECT +ama-rem +mone-rem +rege-rem +audi-rem +essem + + + +ama-res +mone-res +rege-res +audi-res +esset + + + +ama-ret +mone-ret +rege-ret +audi-ret +esset + + + +ama-remus +mone-remus +rege-remus +audi-remus +essemus + + + +ama-retis +mone-retis +rege-retis +audi-retis +essetis + + + +ama-rent +mone-rent +rege-rent +audi-rent +essent + + + + + + + + -PERFECT -amav-erim -monu-erim -rex-erim -audiv-erim -fu-erim - - - -amav-eris -monu-eris -rex-eris -audiv-eris -fu-eris - - - -amav-erit -monu-erit -rex-erit -audiv-erit -fu-erit - - - -amav-erimus -monu-erimus -rex-erimus -audiv-erimus -fu-erimus - - - -amav-eritis -monu-eritis -rex-eritis -audiv-eritis -fu-eritis - - - -amav-erint -monu-erint -rex-erint -audiv-erint -fu-erint - - - - - - - - +PERFECT +amav-erim +monu-erim +rex-erim +audiv-erim +fu-erim + + + +amav-eris +monu-eris +rex-eris +audiv-eris +fu-eris + + + +amav-erit +monu-erit +rex-erit +audiv-erit +fu-erit + + + +amav-erimus +monu-erimus +rex-erimus +audiv-erimus +fu-erimus + + + +amav-eritis +monu-eritis +rex-eritis +audiv-eritis +fu-eritis + + + +amav-erint +monu-erint +rex-erint +audiv-erint +fu-erint + + + + + + + + -PLUPERFECT -amav-issem -monu-issem -rex-issem -audiv-issem -fu-issem - - - -amav-isses -monu-isses -rex-isses -audiv-isses -fu-isses - - - -amav-isset -monu-isset -rex-isset -audiv-isset -fu-isset - - - -amav-issemus -monu-issemus -rex-issemus -audiv-issemus -fu-issemus - - - -amav-issetis -monu-issetis -rex-issetis -audiv-issetis -fu-issetis - - - -amav-issent -monu-issent -rex-issent -audiv-issent -fu-issent +PLUPERFECT +amav-issem +monu-issem +rex-issem +audiv-issem +fu-issem + + + +amav-isses +monu-isses +rex-isses +audiv-isses +fu-isses + + + +amav-isset +monu-isset +rex-isset +audiv-isset +fu-isset + + + +amav-issemus +monu-issemus +rex-issemus +audiv-issemus +fu-issemus + + + +amav-issetis +monu-issetis +rex-issetis +audiv-issetis +fu-issetis + + + +amav-issent +monu-issent +rex-issent +audiv-issent +fu-issent @@ -1063,139 +618,84 @@
-Verb listings - Imperative Active +Verb listings - Imperative Active -TENSE -1st -2nd -3rd -4th -SUM - I - - - - - - - - +TENSE +1st +2nd +3rd +4th +SUM - I + + + + + + + + -PRESENT -am-a -mon-e -reg-e -aud-i -es - - - -am-ate -mon-ete -reg-ite -aud-ite -este - - - - - - - - +PRESENT +am-a +mon-e +reg-e +aud-i +es + + + +am-ate +mon-ete +reg-ite +aud-ite +este + + + + + + + + -FUTURE -am-ato -mon-eto -reg-ito -aud-ito -esto - - - -am-ato -mon-eto -reg-ito -aud-ito -esto - - - -am-atote -mon-etote -reg-itote -aud-itote -estote - - - -am-anto -mon-ento -reg-unto -aud-iunto -sunto +FUTURE +am-ato +mon-eto +reg-ito +aud-ito +esto + + + +am-ato +mon-eto +reg-ito +aud-ito +esto + + + +am-atote +mon-etote +reg-itote +aud-itote +estote + + + +am-anto +mon-ento +reg-unto +aud-iunto +sunto @@ -1203,70 +703,44 @@
-Verb listings - Gerund Active +Verb listings - Gerund Active - -1st -2nd -3rd -4th - - -Accusative -(ad) am-andum -(ad) mon-endum -(ad) reg-endum -(ad) aud-iendum - - -Genitive -am-andi -mon-endi -reg-endi -aud-iendi - - -Dative -am-ando -mon-endo -reg-endo -aud-iendo - - -Ablative -am-ando -mon-endo -reg-endo -aud-iendo + +1st +2nd +3rd +4th + + +Accusative +(ad) am-andum +(ad) mon-endum +(ad) reg-endum +(ad) aud-iendum + + +Genitive +am-andi +mon-endi +reg-endi +aud-iendi + + +Dative +am-ando +mon-endo +reg-endo +aud-iendo + + +Ablative +am-ando +mon-endo +reg-endo +aud-iendo @@ -1274,80 +748,49 @@
-Verb listings - Infinitive Active +Verb listings - Infinitive Active -TENSE -1st -2nd -3rd -4th -SUM - I - - - - - - - - - - -PRESENT -am-are -mon-ere -reg-ere -aud-ire -esse - - - - - - - - - - -PERFECT -amav-isse -monu-isse -rex-isse -audiv-isse -fu-isse +TENSE +1st +2nd +3rd +4th +SUM - I + + + + + + + + + + +PRESENT +am-are +mon-ere +reg-ere +aud-ire +esse + + + + + + + + + + +PERFECT +amav-isse +monu-isse +rex-isse +audiv-isse +fu-isse @@ -1355,80 +798,49 @@
-Verb listings - Participle Active +Verb listings - Participle Active -TENSE -1st -2nd -3rd -4th -SUM - I - - - - - - - - - - -PRESENT -am-ans,-antis -mon-ens,-entis -reg-ens,-entis -aud-iens,-ientis - - - - - - - - - - - -FUTURE -amat-urus,-a,-um -monit-urus,-a,-um -rect-urus,-a,-um -audit-urus,-a,-um -futurus,-a,-um +TENSE +1st +2nd +3rd +4th +SUM - I + + + + + + + + + + +PRESENT +am-ans,-antis +mon-ens,-entis +reg-ens,-entis +aud-iens,-ientis + + + + + + + + + + + +FUTURE +amat-urus,-a,-um +monit-urus,-a,-um +rect-urus,-a,-um +audit-urus,-a,-um +futurus,-a,-um @@ -1436,545 +848,323 @@
-Verb listings - Indicative Passive +Verb listings - Indicative Passive -TENSE -1st -2nd -3rd -4th - - - - - - - - +TENSE +1st +2nd +3rd +4th + + + + + + + + -PRESENT -am-or -mone-or -reg-or -audi-or - - - -ama-ris -mone-ris -reg-eris -audi-eris - - -I am loved -ama-tur -mone-tur -regi-tur -audi-tur - - - -ama-mur -mone-mur -regi-mur -audi-mur - - - -ama-mini -mone-mini -regi-mini -audi-mini - - - -ama-ntur -mone-ntur -regu-ntur -audiu-unt - - - - - - - - +PRESENT +am-or +mone-or +reg-or +audi-or + + + +ama-ris +mone-ris +reg-eris +audi-eris + + +I am loved +ama-tur +mone-tur +regi-tur +audi-tur + + + +ama-mur +mone-mur +regi-mur +audi-mur + + + +ama-mini +mone-mini +regi-mini +audi-mini + + + +ama-ntur +mone-ntur +regu-ntur +audiu-unt + + + + + + + + -FUTURE -ama-bor -mone-bor -reg-ar -audi-ar - - - -ama-beris -mone-beris -reg-eris -audi-eris - - -I will be loved -ama-bitur -mone-bitur -reg-etur -audi-etur - - - -ama-bimur -mone-bimur -reg-emur -audi-emur - - - -ama-bimini -mone-bimini -reg-emini -audi-emini - - - -ama-buntur -mone-buntur -reg-entur -audi-entur - - - - - - - - +FUTURE +ama-bor +mone-bor +reg-ar +audi-ar + + + +ama-beris +mone-beris +reg-eris +audi-eris + + +I will be loved +ama-bitur +mone-bitur +reg-etur +audi-etur + + + +ama-bimur +mone-bimur +reg-emur +audi-emur + + + +ama-bimini +mone-bimini +reg-emini +audi-emini + + + +ama-buntur +mone-buntur +reg-entur +audi-entur + + + + + + + + -IMPERFECT -ama-bar -mone-bar -rege-bar -audie-bar - - - -ama-baris -mone-baris -rege-baris -audie-baris - - -I was loved -ama-batur -mone-batur -rege-batur -audie-batur - - - -ama-bamur -mone-bamur -rege-bamur -audie-bamur - - - -ama-bamini -mone-bamini -rege-bamini -audie-bamini - - - -ama-bantur -mone-bantur -rege-bantur -audie-bantur - - - - - - - - +IMPERFECT +ama-bar +mone-bar +rege-bar +audie-bar + + + +ama-baris +mone-baris +rege-baris +audie-baris + + +I was loved +ama-batur +mone-batur +rege-batur +audie-batur + + + +ama-bamur +mone-bamur +rege-bamur +audie-bamur + + + +ama-bamini +mone-bamini +rege-bamini +audie-bamini + + + +ama-bantur +mone-bantur +rege-bantur +audie-bantur + + + + + + + + -PERFECT -amatus sum -monitus sum -rectus sum -auditus sum - - - -amatus es -monitus es -rectus es -auditus es - - -I have been loved -amatus est -monitus est -rectus est -auditus est - - - -amati sumus -moniti sumus -recti sumus -auditi sumus - - - -amati estis -moniti estis -recti estis -auditi estis - - - -amati sunt -moniti sunt -recti sunt -auditi sunt - - - - - - - - +PERFECT +amatus sum +monitus sum +rectus sum +auditus sum + + + +amatus es +monitus es +rectus es +auditus es + + +I have been loved +amatus est +monitus est +rectus est +auditus est + + + +amati sumus +moniti sumus +recti sumus +auditi sumus + + + +amati estis +moniti estis +recti estis +auditi estis + + + +amati sunt +moniti sunt +recti sunt +auditi sunt + + + + + + + + -FUTURE PERFECT -amatus ero -monitus ero -rectus ero -auditus ero - - - -amatus eris -monitus eris -rectus eris -auditus eris - - -I will have been loved -amatus erit -monitus erit -rectus erit -auditus erit - - - -amati erimus -moniti erimus -recti erimus -auditi erimus - - - -amati eritis -moniti eritis -recti eritis -auditi eritis - - - -amati erunt -moniti erunt -recti erunt -auditi erunt - - - - - - - - +FUTURE PERFECT +amatus ero +monitus ero +rectus ero +auditus ero + + + +amatus eris +monitus eris +rectus eris +auditus eris + + +I will have been loved +amatus erit +monitus erit +rectus erit +auditus erit + + + +amati erimus +moniti erimus +recti erimus +auditi erimus + + + +amati eritis +moniti eritis +recti eritis +auditi eritis + + + +amati erunt +moniti erunt +recti erunt +auditi erunt + + + + + + + + -PLUPERFECT -amatus eram -monitus eram -rectus eram -auditus eram - - - -amatus eras -monitus eras -rectus eras -auditus eras - - -I had been loved -amatus erat -monitus erat -rectus erat -auditus erat - - - -amati eramus -moniti eramus -recti eramus -auditi eramus - - - -amati eratis -moniti eratis -recti eratis -auditi eratis - - - -amati erant -moniti erant -recti erant -auditi erant +PLUPERFECT +amatus eram +monitus eram +rectus eram +auditus eram + + + +amatus eras +monitus eras +rectus eras +auditus eras + + +I had been loved +amatus erat +monitus erat +rectus erat +auditus erat + + + +amati eramus +moniti eramus +recti eramus +auditi eramus + + + +amati eratis +moniti eratis +recti eratis +auditi eratis + + + +amati erant +moniti erant +recti erant +auditi erant @@ -1982,40 +1172,27 @@
-Verb listings - Gerundive Passive +Verb listings - Gerundive Passive -1st -2nd -3rd -4th - - - - - - - - -am-andus,-a,-um -mon-endus,-a,-um -reg-endus,-a,-um -aud-iendus,-a,-um +1st +2nd +3rd +4th + + + + + + + + +am-andus,-a,-um +mon-endus,-a,-um +reg-endus,-a,-um +aud-iendus,-a,-um @@ -2023,106 +1200,65 @@
-Verb listings - Infinitive Passive +Verb listings - Infinitive Passive -TENSE -1st -2nd -3rd -4th - - - - - - - - - -PRESENT -am-ari -mon-eri -reg-i -aud-iri - - - - - - - - - -PERFECT -amat-um,-am,-um esse -monit-um,-am,-um esse -rect-um,-am,-um esse -audit-um,-am,-um esse - - - -amat-os,-as,-a esse -monit-os,-as,-a esse -rect-os,-as,-a esse -audit-os,-as,-a esse - - - - - - - - - -FUTURE -amat-um iri -monit-um iri -rect-um iri -audit-um iri +TENSE +1st +2nd +3rd +4th + + + + + + + + + +PRESENT +am-ari +mon-eri +reg-i +aud-iri + + + + + + + + + +PERFECT +amat-um,-am,-um esse +monit-um,-am,-um esse +rect-um,-am,-um esse +audit-um,-am,-um esse + + + +amat-os,-as,-a esse +monit-os,-as,-a esse +rect-os,-as,-a esse +audit-os,-as,-a esse + + + + + + + + + +FUTURE +amat-um iri +monit-um iri +rect-um iri +audit-um iri diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/commands.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/commands.docbook index ff3cfda6893..b56b8d066fc 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/commands.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/commands.docbook @@ -1,338 +1,134 @@ -Command Reference +Command Reference -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;N File New + &Ctrl;N File New -Starts a new Plot by clearing the coordinate system and resetting the function parser. +Starts a new Plot by clearing the coordinate system and resetting the function parser. - &Ctrl;O File Open... -Opens an existing document. - + &Ctrl;O File Open... +Opens an existing document. + -&Ctrl;S File Save -Saves the document. +&Ctrl;S File Save +Saves the document. -File Save As... -Saves the document under another name. +File Save As... +Saves the document under another name. - &Ctrl;P File Print... + &Ctrl;P File Print... -Sends the plot to a printer or file. +Sends the plot to a printer or file. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Exits &kmplot;. + &Ctrl;Q File Quit +Exits &kmplot;. -The <guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu -EditColours... -Displays the Colour Settings dialogue box. See . +EditColours... +Displays the Colour Settings dialogue box. See . -EditCoordinate System... -Displays the Coordinate System dialogue box. See . +EditCoordinate System... +Displays the Coordinate System dialogue box. See . -EditScaling... -Displays the Scaling Settings dialogue box. See . +EditScaling... +Displays the Scaling Settings dialogue box. See . -EditFonts... -Displays the Font Settings dialogue box. See . +EditFonts... +Displays the Font Settings dialogue box. See . -EditCoordinate System I -Show both positive and negative x- and y-values on the grid. +EditCoordinate System I +Show both positive and negative x- and y-values on the grid. -EditCoordinate System II -Show positive and negative y-values, but positive x-values only +EditCoordinate System II +Show positive and negative y-values, but positive x-values only -EditCoordinate System III -Show only positive x- and y-values. +EditCoordinate System III +Show only positive x- and y-values. -The <guimenu ->Plot</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Plot</guimenu> Menu -Functions New Function Plot... +Functions New Function Plot... -Opens the dialogue for creating a new function plot. See . +Opens the dialogue for creating a new function plot. See . -Functions New Parametric Plot... +Functions New Parametric Plot... -Opens the dialogue for creating a new parametric plot. See . +Opens the dialogue for creating a new parametric plot. See . -Functions New Polar Plot... +Functions New Polar Plot... -Opens the dialogue for creating a new polar plot. See . +Opens the dialogue for creating a new polar plot. See . -Functions Edit Plots... +Functions Edit Plots... -Displays the functions dialogue. There you can add, edit and remove functions. See . +Displays the functions dialogue. There you can add, edit and remove functions. See . @@ -340,26 +136,14 @@ -The <guimenu ->Zoom</guimenu -> Menu -The first five items in the menu change zoom-mode. +The <guimenu>Zoom</guimenu> Menu +The first five items in the menu change zoom-mode. -Zoom No Zoom +Zoom No Zoom -Disable the zoom-mode. +Disable the zoom-mode. @@ -367,85 +151,45 @@ -Zoom Zoom rectangular +Zoom Zoom rectangular -Let the user draw a rectangle. The minimum and maximum values will be set to the coordinates of the rectangle. +Let the user draw a rectangle. The minimum and maximum values will be set to the coordinates of the rectangle. -Zoom Zoom in +Zoom Zoom in -The minimum and maximum values will come closer to each other and the selected point in the graph will be centred. +The minimum and maximum values will come closer to each other and the selected point in the graph will be centred. -Zoom Zoom out +Zoom Zoom out -The minimum and maximum values will be more separated from each other and the selected point in the graph will be centred. +The minimum and maximum values will be more separated from each other and the selected point in the graph will be centred. -Zoom Centre a point +Zoom Centre a point -The selected point in the graph will be centred. +The selected point in the graph will be centred. -Zoom Fit widget to trigonometric functions +Zoom Fit widget to trigonometric functions -The scale will be adapted to trigonometric functions. This works both for radians and degrees. +The scale will be adapted to trigonometric functions. This works both for radians and degrees. @@ -453,94 +197,41 @@ -The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -Settings Show Toolbar +Settings Show Toolbar -Toggle on and off the display of the toolbar. The default is on. +Toggle on and off the display of the toolbar. The default is on. -Settings Show Statusbar +Settings Show Statusbar -Toggle on and off the display of the statusbar at the bottom of the &kmplot; main window. The default is on. +Toggle on and off the display of the statusbar at the bottom of the &kmplot; main window. The default is on. -Settings Configure Shortcuts... +Settings Configure Shortcuts... -Personalise the keybindings for &kmplot;. +Personalise the keybindings for &kmplot;. -Settings Configure Toolbars... +Settings Configure Toolbars... -Personalise the toolbars for &kmplot;. +Personalise the toolbars for &kmplot;. -Settings Configure &kmplot; +Settings Configure &kmplot; -Customise &kmplot;. The options available to you are described in . +Customise &kmplot;. The options available to you are described in . @@ -548,64 +239,35 @@ -The <guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu -This menu constains some tools for the functions that can be useful: +This menu constains some tools for the functions that can be useful: -Tools Get y-value +Tools Get y-value -Let the user get the y-value from a specific x-value. At the moment, only plot functions are supported. Type a value or expression in the textbox under "X:". In the list below all the available functions are shown. Press the "Calculate" button to find the function's y-value. The result will be shown in the y-value box. +Let the user get the y-value from a specific x-value. At the moment, only plot functions are supported. Type a value or expression in the textbox under "X:". In the list below all the available functions are shown. Press the "Calculate" button to find the function's y-value. The result will be shown in the y-value box. -The <guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu -&kmplot; has a standard &kde; Help as described below, with one addition: +&kmplot; has a standard &kde; Help as described below, with one addition: -Help Names... +Help Names... -Opens a window with a list of the predefined function names and constants that &kmplot; knows. +Opens a window with a list of the predefined function names and constants that &kmplot; knows. -The standard &kde; Help entries are: +The standard &kde; Help entries are: &help.menu.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/configuration.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/configuration.docbook index 89ed12f53c0..a696a9ddbcd 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/configuration.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/configuration.docbook @@ -1,45 +1,23 @@ -Configuring &kmplot; -To access the &kmplot; configuration dialogue, select SettingsConfigure KmPlot.... A number of settings can also be changed from options in the Edit menu, as well. +Configuring &kmplot; +To access the &kmplot; configuration dialogue, select SettingsConfigure KmPlot.... A number of settings can also be changed from options in the Edit menu, as well. -Settings changed in the &kmplot; configuration dialogue become the default for &kmplot;, and only take effect when a new plot is started. Settings changed in the View menu take effect immediately, but do not persist after &kmplot; is exited. +Settings changed in the &kmplot; configuration dialogue become the default for &kmplot;, and only take effect when a new plot is started. Settings changed in the View menu take effect immediately, but do not persist after &kmplot; is exited. -<guilabel ->General</guilabel -> Configuration -Here you can set global settings which automatic will be saved when you exit &kmplot;. In the first tab you can set calculation-precision, angle-mode (radians and degrees), background colour and zoom in and zoom out factors. The second tab let you define you own constants. &kmplot; saves the constains in the same file as KCalc does. That means you can create a constant in &kmplot;, close the program and load it in KCalc and vice versa. &kmplot; only supports constant names that consist one capital character and if you in KCalc define a constant name that is not one character, the name will be truncated. E.g, if you already have the constants "apple" and "bananas" in KCalc, they will be renamed to "A" and "B" in &kmplot;. +<guilabel>General</guilabel> Configuration +Here you can set global settings which automatic will be saved when you exit &kmplot;. In the first tab you can set calculation-precision, angle-mode (radians and degrees), background colour and zoom in and zoom out factors. The second tab let you define you own constants. &kmplot; saves the constains in the same file as KCalc does. That means you can create a constant in &kmplot;, close the program and load it in KCalc and vice versa. &kmplot; only supports constant names that consist one capital character and if you in KCalc define a constant name that is not one character, the name will be truncated. E.g, if you already have the constants "apple" and "bananas" in KCalc, they will be renamed to "A" and "B" in &kmplot;. -Here is a screenshot of the &kmplot; welcome window +Here is a screenshot of the &kmplot; welcome window - Screenshot + Screenshot @@ -48,115 +26,58 @@ -<guilabel ->Colours</guilabel -> Configuration -In the Coords tab of the Colours configuration option, you can change the colours of the axes and grid of the main &kmplot; area. -In the Functions tab, you can change the colours used for the graphs of the ten functions allowed in &kmplot;. +<guilabel>Colours</guilabel> Configuration +In the Coords tab of the Colours configuration option, you can change the colours of the axes and grid of the main &kmplot; area. +In the Functions tab, you can change the colours used for the graphs of the ten functions allowed in &kmplot;. -<guilabel ->Coords</guilabel -> Configuration +<guilabel>Coords</guilabel> Configuration -The <guilabel ->Axes</guilabel -> Configuration +The <guilabel>Axes</guilabel> Configuration -X-Axis +X-Axis -Sets the range for the x-axis scale. You can choose one of the predefined ranges, or select Custom to make your own. Note that in the Custom boxes, you can use the predefined functions and constants (see ) as the extremes of the range (⪚, set min: to 2*pi). You can even use functions you have defined to set the extremes of the axis range. For example, if you have defined a function f(x)=x^2, you could set min: to f(3), which would make the lower end of the range equal to 9. +Sets the range for the x-axis scale. You can choose one of the predefined ranges, or select Custom to make your own. Note that in the Custom boxes, you can use the predefined functions and constants (see ) as the extremes of the range (⪚, set min: to 2*pi). You can even use functions you have defined to set the extremes of the axis range. For example, if you have defined a function f(x)=x^2, you could set min: to f(3), which would make the lower end of the range equal to 9. -Y-Axis +Y-Axis -Sets the range for the y-axis. See X-Axis above. +Sets the range for the y-axis. See X-Axis above. -Axes line width +Axes line width -Sets the width of the lines representing the axes. +Sets the width of the lines representing the axes. -Tic width +Tic width -Sets the width of the lines representing tics on the axes. +Sets the width of the lines representing tics on the axes. -Tic length +Tic length -Sets the length of the lines representing tics on the axes. +Sets the length of the lines representing tics on the axes. -Labels +Labels -If checked, the names (x, y) of the axes are shown on the plot. +If checked, the names (x, y) of the axes are shown on the plot. @@ -166,101 +87,52 @@ -The <guilabel ->Grid</guilabel -> Configuration -You can set the Grid Style to one of four options: +The <guilabel>Grid</guilabel> Configuration +You can set the Grid Style to one of four options: -No Grid +No Grid -No gridlines are drawn on the plot area +No gridlines are drawn on the plot area -Lines +Lines -Straight lines form a grid of squares on the plot area. +Straight lines form a grid of squares on the plot area. -Crosses +Crosses -Crosses are drawn to indicate points where x and y have integer values (⪚, (1,1), (4,2) &etc;). +Crosses are drawn to indicate points where x and y have integer values (⪚, (1,1), (4,2) &etc;). -Polar Grid +Polar Grid -Lines of constant radius and of constant angle are drawn on the plot area. +Lines of constant radius and of constant angle are drawn on the plot area. -The Line width option is used to set the width of the lines of the grid. +The Line width option is used to set the width of the lines of the grid. -The <guilabel ->Fonts</guilabel -> Configuration -Header table sets the font for the information table shown in &kmplot; printouts, and Axes labels sets the font used for all labels on the axes in the plot area. +The <guilabel>Fonts</guilabel> Configuration +Header table sets the font for the information table shown in &kmplot; printouts, and Axes labels sets the font used for all labels on the axes in the plot area. -<guilabel ->Scaling</guilabel -> Configuration +<guilabel>Scaling</guilabel> Configuration -For each axis, you can set the Scaling and Printing of one tic. The Scaling option selects how many units apart the axis tics will be (and therefore, how far apart grid lines will be drawn), and the Printing option selects the length of one tic when displayed on the screen or printed. In this way, these options can be used to change the size of the graph on screen or on a page: For example, doubling the Printing setting whilst keeping the Scaling setting the same will result in the graph doubling in in height or width. +For each axis, you can set the Scaling and Printing of one tic. The Scaling option selects how many units apart the axis tics will be (and therefore, how far apart grid lines will be drawn), and the Printing option selects the length of one tic when displayed on the screen or printed. In this way, these options can be used to change the size of the graph on screen or on a page: For example, doubling the Printing setting whilst keeping the Scaling setting the same will result in the graph doubling in in height or width. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/credits.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/credits.docbook index 4bfbcd13e51..ea9a1a7f8db 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/credits.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/credits.docbook @@ -1,56 +1,27 @@ -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kmplot; +&kmplot; -Program copyright 2000-2002 Klaus-Dieter Möller kd.moeller@t-online.de +Program copyright 2000-2002 Klaus-Dieter Möller kd.moeller@t-online.de -Contributors +Contributors - CVS: Robert Gogolok mail@robert-gogoloh.de + CVS: Robert Gogolok mail@robert-gogoloh.de - Porting &GUI; to &kde; 3 and Translating: Matthias Messmer bmlmessmer@web.de + Porting &GUI; to &kde; 3 and Translating: Matthias Messmer bmlmessmer@web.de - Various improvements: Fredrik Edemar f_edemar@linux.se - + Various improvements: Fredrik Edemar f_edemar@linux.se + -Documentation copyright 2000--2002 by Klaus-Dieter Möller kd.moeller@t-online.de. -Documentation extended and updated for &kde; 3.2 by &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail;. -Documentation extended and updated for &kde; 3.3 by &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; and Fredrik Edemar f_edemar@linux.se. -Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk +Documentation copyright 2000--2002 by Klaus-Dieter Möller kd.moeller@t-online.de. +Documentation extended and updated for &kde; 3.2 by &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail;. +Documentation extended and updated for &kde; 3.3 by &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; and Fredrik Edemar f_edemar@linux.se. +Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; + @@ -15,108 +14,54 @@ - + ]> -The &kmplot; Handbook +The &kmplot; Handbook -Klaus-Dieter Möller
kd.moeller@t-online.de
+Klaus-Dieter Möller
kd.moeller@t-online.de
 -&Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; +&Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -200020012002 -Klaus-Dieter Möller +200020012002 +Klaus-Dieter Möller -2003 -&Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; +2003 +&Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2003-09-25 -1.0 +2003-09-25 +1.0 -&kmplot; is a mathematical function plotter for the &kde; Desktop. - &kmplot; is a mathematical function plotter for the &kde; Desktop. + &kmplot; is part of the KDE-EDU Project: http://edu.kde.org/ +format="PNG"/> &kmplot; is part of the KDE-EDU Project: http://edu.kde.org/ -KDE -KMPlot -EDU -edutainment -plotting -math +KDE +KMPlot +EDU +edutainment +plotting +math diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/install.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/install.docbook index 63119be75fe..c6d037cbe2f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/install.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/install.docbook @@ -1,25 +1,17 @@ -Installation +Installation &install.intro.documentation; - + -&kmplot; is part of the &kde; EDU Project: http://edu.kde.org/ +&kmplot; is part of the &kde; EDU Project: http://edu.kde.org/ -&kmplot; has its own homepage on SourceForge. You can also find archives of older versions of &kmplot; there, for example, for &kde; 2.x +&kmplot; has its own homepage on SourceForge. You can also find archives of older versions of &kmplot; there, for example, for &kde; 2.x &install.compile.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/introduction.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/introduction.docbook index bd019128b9e..8450b4612e2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/introduction.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/introduction.docbook @@ -1,47 +1,23 @@ -Introduction +Introduction -&kmplot; is a mathematical function plotter for the &kde; Desktop. It has a powerful built-in parser. You can plot different functions simultaneously and combine them to build new functions. +&kmplot; is a mathematical function plotter for the &kde; Desktop. It has a powerful built-in parser. You can plot different functions simultaneously and combine them to build new functions. -Examples +Examples -Examples +Examples -&kmplot; supports parametric functions and functions in polar coordinates. Several grid modes are supported. Plots may be printed with high precision in the correct scale. +&kmplot; supports parametric functions and functions in polar coordinates. Several grid modes are supported. Plots may be printed with high precision in the correct scale. -&kmplot; also provides some numerical an visual features like: Filling and calculating the area between the plot and the first axis Finding maximum and minimum values Changing function parameters dynamically Plotting derivatives and integral functions. These features help in learning the relationship between mathematical functions and their graphical representation in a coordinate system. +&kmplot; also provides some numerical an visual features like: Filling and calculating the area between the plot and the first axis Finding maximum and minimum values Changing function parameters dynamically Plotting derivatives and integral functions. These features help in learning the relationship between mathematical functions and their graphical representation in a coordinate system. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/menu.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/menu.docbook index a95730f1f30..837f45c4b1d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/menu.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/menu.docbook @@ -1,122 +1,57 @@ -The Menu Entries +The Menu Entries -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;N File New + &Ctrl;N File New - Starts a new Plot by clearing the coordinate system and resetting the function parser. + Starts a new Plot by clearing the coordinate system and resetting the function parser. - &Ctrl;S File Save + &Ctrl;S File Save - Saves the document + Saves the document - File Save As... + File Save As... - Saves the document to a specific file + Saves the document to a specific file - &Ctrl;P File Print... + &Ctrl;P File Print... - Sends the plot to the printer or to a file + Sends the plot to the printer or to a file - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit - Quits &kmplot; + Quits &kmplot; @@ -125,33 +60,15 @@ -The <guimenu ->Functions</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Functions</guimenu> Menu - Functions Functions + Functions Functions - Shows the Functions Dialogue Window where you can enter the function equations and some attributes of the plot. + Shows the Functions Dialogue Window where you can enter the function equations and some attributes of the plot. @@ -159,81 +76,45 @@ -The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -It contains the standard entries for enabling/disabling the toolbar and the statusbar. In addition there are the following options: +It contains the standard entries for enabling/disabling the toolbar and the statusbar. In addition there are the following options: - Settings Axes... + Settings Axes... - ... + ... - Settings Scale... + Settings Scale... - ... + ... - Settings Grid... + Settings Grid... - ... + ... - Settings Step... + Settings Step... - ... + ... @@ -242,37 +123,20 @@ -The <guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu -&kmplot; has a standard &kde; Help as described below, with one addition: +&kmplot; has a standard &kde; Help as described below, with one addition: -Help Names... +Help Names... -Opens a window with a list of function names, to help you remember them. +Opens a window with a list of function names, to help you remember them. -The standard &kde; Help entries are: +The standard &kde; Help entries are: &help.menu.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/reference.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/reference.docbook index 652d63e0869..900ac45478d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/reference.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/reference.docbook @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ -&kmplot; Reference +&kmplot; Reference -Function Syntax +Function Syntax -Some syntax rules must be complied with: +Some syntax rules must be complied with: -name(var1[, var2])=term [;extensions] +name(var1[, var2])=term [;extensions] -name +name -The function name. If the first character is r the parser assumes that you are using polar coordinates. If the first character is x (for instance xfunc) the parser expects a second function with a leading y (here yfunc) to define the function in parametric form. +The function name. If the first character is r the parser assumes that you are using polar coordinates. If the first character is x (for instance xfunc) the parser expects a second function with a leading y (here yfunc) to define the function in parametric form. -var1 -The function's variable +var1 +The function's variable -var2 -The function group parameter. It must be separated from the function's variable by a comma. You can use the group parameter to, for example, plot a number of graphs from one function. The parameter values can be selected manually or you can choose to have a slider bar that controls one parameter. By changing the value of the slider the value parameter will be changed. The slider can be set to an integer between 0 and 100. +var2 +The function group parameter. It must be separated from the function's variable by a comma. You can use the group parameter to, for example, plot a number of graphs from one function. The parameter values can be selected manually or you can choose to have a slider bar that controls one parameter. By changing the value of the slider the value parameter will be changed. The slider can be set to an integer between 0 and 100. -term -The expression defining the function. +term +The expression defining the function. -Predefined Function Names and Constants - -All the predefined functions and constants that &kmplot; knows can be shown by selecting HelpNames . They are: +Predefined Function Names and Constants + +All the predefined functions and constants that &kmplot; knows can be shown by selecting HelpNames . They are: -sqr, sqrt +sqr, sqrt -Return the square and square root of a number, respectively. +Return the square and square root of a number, respectively. -exp, ln +exp, ln -Return the exponential and natural logarithm of a number, respectively. +Return the exponential and natural logarithm of a number, respectively. -log +log -Returns the logarithm to base 10 of a number. +Returns the logarithm to base 10 of a number. -sin, arcsin +sin, arcsin -Return the sine and inverse sine of a number, respectively. Note that the argument to sin and the return value of arcsin are in radians. +Return the sine and inverse sine of a number, respectively. Note that the argument to sin and the return value of arcsin are in radians. -cos, arccos +cos, arccos -Return the cosine and inverse cosine of a number, respectively. Also in radians. +Return the cosine and inverse cosine of a number, respectively. Also in radians. -tan, arctan +tan, arctan -Return the tangent and inverse tangent of a number, respectively. Also in radians. +Return the tangent and inverse tangent of a number, respectively. Also in radians. -sinh, arcsinh +sinh, arcsinh -Return the hyperbolic sine and inverse hyperbolic sine of a number, respectively. +Return the hyperbolic sine and inverse hyperbolic sine of a number, respectively. -cosh, arccosh +cosh, arccosh -Return the hyperbolic cosine and inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number, respectively. +Return the hyperbolic cosine and inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number, respectively. -tanh, arctanh +tanh, arctanh -Return the hyperbolic tangent and inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number, respectively. +Return the hyperbolic tangent and inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number, respectively. -sin, arcsin +sin, arcsin -Return the sine and inverse sine of a number, respectively. Note that the argument to sin and the return value of arcsin are in radians. +Return the sine and inverse sine of a number, respectively. Note that the argument to sin and the return value of arcsin are in radians. -cos, arccos +cos, arccos -Return the cosine and inverse cosine of a number, respectively. Also in radians. +Return the cosine and inverse cosine of a number, respectively. Also in radians. -pi, e +pi, e -Constants representing &pgr; (3.14159...) and e (2.71828...), respectively. +Constants representing &pgr; (3.14159...) and e (2.71828...), respectively. -These functions and constants and even all user defined functions can be used to determine the axes settings as well. See . +These functions and constants and even all user defined functions can be used to determine the axes settings as well. See . -Mathematical Syntax -&kmplot; uses a common way of expressing mathematical functions, so you should have no trouble working it out. The operators &kmplot; understands are, in order of decreasing precedence: +Mathematical Syntax +&kmplot; uses a common way of expressing mathematical functions, so you should have no trouble working it out. The operators &kmplot; understands are, in order of decreasing precedence: -^ -The caret symbol performs exponentiation. ⪚, 2^4 returns 16. +^ +The caret symbol performs exponentiation. ⪚, 2^4 returns 16. -*, / +*, / -The asterisk and slash symbols perform multiplication and division . ⪚, 3*4/2 returns 6. +The asterisk and slash symbols perform multiplication and division . ⪚, 3*4/2 returns 6. -+, - -The plus and minus symbols perform addition and subtraction. ⪚, 1+3-2 returns 2. ++, - +The plus and minus symbols perform addition and subtraction. ⪚, 1+3-2 returns 2. -Note the precedence, which means that if parentheses are not used, exponentiation is performed before multiplication/division, which is performed before addition/subtraction. So 1+2*4^2 returns 33, and not, say 144. To override this, use parentheses. To use the above example, ((1+2)*4)^2 will return 144. +Note the precedence, which means that if parentheses are not used, exponentiation is performed before multiplication/division, which is performed before addition/subtraction. So 1+2*4^2 returns 33, and not, say 144. To override this, use parentheses. To use the above example, ((1+2)*4)^2 will return 144. -Plotting Area -By default, explicitly given functions are plotted for the whole of the visible part of the x-axis. You can specify an other range in the edit-dialogue for the function. For every pixel on the x-axis &kmplot; calculates a function value. If the plotting area contains the resulting point it is connected to the last drawn point by a line. -Parametric functions are plotted for parameter values from 0 up to 2&pgr;. You can set the plotting range in the dialogue for the function too. +Plotting Area +By default, explicitly given functions are plotted for the whole of the visible part of the x-axis. You can specify an other range in the edit-dialogue for the function. For every pixel on the x-axis &kmplot; calculates a function value. If the plotting area contains the resulting point it is connected to the last drawn point by a line. +Parametric functions are plotted for parameter values from 0 up to 2&pgr;. You can set the plotting range in the dialogue for the function too. -Cross Hair Cursor -While the mouse cursor is over the plotting area the cursor changes to a cross hair. The current coordinates can be seen at the intersections with the coordinate axes and also in the status bar at the bottom of the main window. -You can trace a function's values more precisely by clicking onto or next to a graph. The selected function is shown in the statusbar in the right column. The cross hair then will be caught and be coloured in the same colour as the graph. If the graph has the same colour as the background colour, the cross hair will have the inverted colour of the background. When moving the mouse or pressing the keys Left or Right the cross hair will follow the function and you see the current x- and y-value. If the cross hair is close to y-axis, the root-value is shown in the statusbar. You can switch function with the Up and Down keys. A second click anywhere in the window or pressing any non-navigating key will leave this trace mode. -Note that tracing is only possible with explicitly given functions. The coordinates are always displayed according to a Cartesian system of coordinates. Neither non-single-point parametric functions nor functions given in polar coordinates can be traced in this way. +Cross Hair Cursor +While the mouse cursor is over the plotting area the cursor changes to a cross hair. The current coordinates can be seen at the intersections with the coordinate axes and also in the status bar at the bottom of the main window. +You can trace a function's values more precisely by clicking onto or next to a graph. The selected function is shown in the statusbar in the right column. The cross hair then will be caught and be coloured in the same colour as the graph. If the graph has the same colour as the background colour, the cross hair will have the inverted colour of the background. When moving the mouse or pressing the keys Left or Right the cross hair will follow the function and you see the current x- and y-value. If the cross hair is close to y-axis, the root-value is shown in the statusbar. You can switch function with the Up and Down keys. A second click anywhere in the window or pressing any non-navigating key will leave this trace mode. +Note that tracing is only possible with explicitly given functions. The coordinates are always displayed according to a Cartesian system of coordinates. Neither non-single-point parametric functions nor functions given in polar coordinates can be traced in this way. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/using.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/using.docbook index 1f0e7611dd3..7f6cd5f9382 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/using.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kmplot/using.docbook @@ -1,185 +1,78 @@ -Using &kmplot; - -&kmplot; deals with named functions, which can be specified in terms of Cartesian coordinates (called explicit functions), polar coordinates or as parametric functions. To enter a function, choose PlotEdit Plots... . You can also enter new functions in the Function equation text box in the main &kmplot; window. The text box can handle explicit and polar functions. Each function you enter must have a unique name (&ie;, a name that is not taken by any of the existing functions displayed in the list box). A function name will be automatically generated if you do not specify one. - -For more information on &kmplot; functions, see . +Using &kmplot; + +&kmplot; deals with named functions, which can be specified in terms of Cartesian coordinates (called explicit functions), polar coordinates or as parametric functions. To enter a function, choose PlotEdit Plots... . You can also enter new functions in the Function equation text box in the main &kmplot; window. The text box can handle explicit and polar functions. Each function you enter must have a unique name (&ie;, a name that is not taken by any of the existing functions displayed in the list box). A function name will be automatically generated if you do not specify one. + +For more information on &kmplot; functions, see . -Here is a screenshot of the &kmplot; welcome window +Here is a screenshot of the &kmplot; welcome window - Screenshot + Screenshot -Function Types +Function Types -Explicit Functions -To enter an explicit function (&ie;, a function in the form y=f(x)) into &kmplot;, just enter it in the following form: -f(x)=expression - Where: -f is the name of the function, and can be any string of letters and numbers you like, provided it does not start with any of the letters x, y or r (since these are used for parametric and polar functions). +Explicit Functions +To enter an explicit function (&ie;, a function in the form y=f(x)) into &kmplot;, just enter it in the following form: +f(x)=expression + Where: +f is the name of the function, and can be any string of letters and numbers you like, provided it does not start with any of the letters x, y or r (since these are used for parametric and polar functions). -x is the x-coordinate, to be used in the expression following the equals sign. It is in fact a dummy variable, so you can use any variable name you like, but the effect will be the same. +x is the x-coordinate, to be used in the expression following the equals sign. It is in fact a dummy variable, so you can use any variable name you like, but the effect will be the same. -expression is the expression to be plotted, given in appropriate syntax for &kmplot;. See . +expression is the expression to be plotted, given in appropriate syntax for &kmplot;. See . -As an example, to draw the graph of y=x2+2x, enter the following into the functions dialogue of &kmplot;: f(x)=x^2+2x +As an example, to draw the graph of y=x2+2x, enter the following into the functions dialogue of &kmplot;: f(x)=x^2+2x -Parametric Functions -Parametric functions are those in which the x and y coordinates are defined by separate functions of another variable, often called t. To enter a parametric function in &kmplot;, follow the procedure as for an explicit function, but prefix the name of the function describing the x-coordinate with the letter x, and the function describing the y-coordinate with the letter y. As with explicit functions, you may use any variable name you wish for the parameter. To draw a parametric function, you must go to FunctionsNew Parametric Plot.... A function name will be created automatic if you do not specify one. -As an example, suppose you want to draw a circle, which has parametric equations x=sin(t), y=cos(t). In the &kmplot; functions dialogue, do the following: Open the parametric plot dialogue with PlotNew Parametric Plot... . Enter a name for the function, say, circle, in the Name box. The names of the x and y functions change to match this name: the x function becomes xcircle(t) and the y function becomes ycircle(t). In the x and y boxes, enter the appropriate equations, &ie;, xcircle(t)=sin(t) and ycircle(t)=cos(t). Click on OK and the function will be drawn. -You can set some further options for the plot in this dialogue: +Parametric Functions +Parametric functions are those in which the x and y coordinates are defined by separate functions of another variable, often called t. To enter a parametric function in &kmplot;, follow the procedure as for an explicit function, but prefix the name of the function describing the x-coordinate with the letter x, and the function describing the y-coordinate with the letter y. As with explicit functions, you may use any variable name you wish for the parameter. To draw a parametric function, you must go to FunctionsNew Parametric Plot.... A function name will be created automatic if you do not specify one. +As an example, suppose you want to draw a circle, which has parametric equations x=sin(t), y=cos(t). In the &kmplot; functions dialogue, do the following: Open the parametric plot dialogue with PlotNew Parametric Plot... . Enter a name for the function, say, circle, in the Name box. The names of the x and y functions change to match this name: the x function becomes xcircle(t) and the y function becomes ycircle(t). In the x and y boxes, enter the appropriate equations, &ie;, xcircle(t)=sin(t) and ycircle(t)=cos(t). Click on OK and the function will be drawn. +You can set some further options for the plot in this dialogue: -Hide +Hide -If this option is selected, the plot is not drawn, but &kmplot; remembers the function definition, so you can use it to define other functions. +If this option is selected, the plot is not drawn, but &kmplot; remembers the function definition, so you can use it to define other functions. -Custom Plot Range +Custom Plot Range -If this option is selected, you can change the maximum and minimum values of the parameter t for which the function is plotted using the min and max boxes. +If this option is selected, you can change the maximum and minimum values of the parameter t for which the function is plotted using the min and max boxes. -Line width +Line width -With this option you can set the width of the line drawn on the plot area, in units of 0.1mm. +With this option you can set the width of the line drawn on the plot area, in units of 0.1mm. -Colour +Colour -Click on the colour box and pick a colour in the dialogue that appears. The line on the plot will be drawn in this colour. +Click on the colour box and pick a colour in the dialogue that appears. The line on the plot will be drawn in this colour. @@ -187,182 +80,100 @@ -Entering Functions in Polar Coordinates - -Polar coordinates represent a point by its distance from the origin (usually called r), and the angle a line from the origin to the point makes with the x-axis (usually represented by the Greek letter theta). To enter functions in polar coordinates, use the menu entry PlotNew Polar Plot... . In the box labelled r, complete the function definition, including the name of the theta variable you want to use, ⪚, to draw the Archimedes' spiral r=theta, enter: +Entering Functions in Polar Coordinates + +Polar coordinates represent a point by its distance from the origin (usually called r), and the angle a line from the origin to the point makes with the x-axis (usually represented by the Greek letter theta). To enter functions in polar coordinates, use the menu entry PlotNew Polar Plot... . In the box labelled r, complete the function definition, including the name of the theta variable you want to use, ⪚, to draw the Archimedes' spiral r=theta, enter: (theta)=theta - so that the whole line reads r(theta)=theta. Note that you can use any name for the theta variable, so r(foo)=foo would have produced exactly the same output. + so that the whole line reads r(theta)=theta. Note that you can use any name for the theta variable, so r(foo)=foo would have produced exactly the same output. -Combining Functions -Functions can be combined to produce new ones. Simply enter the functions after the equals sign in an expression as if the functions were variables. For example, if you have defined functions f(x) and g(x), you can plot the sum of f and g with: +Combining Functions +Functions can be combined to produce new ones. Simply enter the functions after the equals sign in an expression as if the functions were variables. For example, if you have defined functions f(x) and g(x), you can plot the sum of f and g with: sum(x)=f(x)+g(x) - + -Note that you can only combine functions of the same type, ⪚ an explicit function cannot be combined with a polar function. +Note that you can only combine functions of the same type, ⪚ an explicit function cannot be combined with a polar function. -Changing the appearance of functions - -To change the appearance of a function's graph on the main plot window, select the function in the Edit Plots dialogue, and click on the Edit button. In the dialogue which appears, you can change the line width in the text box, and the colour of the function's graph by clicking on the colour button at the bottom. If you are editing an explicit function, you will see a dialogue with three tabs. In the first one you specify the equation of the function. The Derivatives tab lets you draw the first and second derivative to the function. With the Integral tab you can draw the integral of the function which is calculated using Euler's method. -Another way to edit a function is to right click on the graph. In the popup menu that appears, choose Edit - -For more information on the popup menu, see . +Changing the appearance of functions + +To change the appearance of a function's graph on the main plot window, select the function in the Edit Plots dialogue, and click on the Edit button. In the dialogue which appears, you can change the line width in the text box, and the colour of the function's graph by clicking on the colour button at the bottom. If you are editing an explicit function, you will see a dialogue with three tabs. In the first one you specify the equation of the function. The Derivatives tab lets you draw the first and second derivative to the function. With the Integral tab you can draw the integral of the function which is calculated using Euler's method. +Another way to edit a function is to right click on the graph. In the popup menu that appears, choose Edit + +For more information on the popup menu, see . -Popup menu +Popup menu -When right-clicking on a plot function or a single-point parametric plot function a popup menu will appear. In the menu there are seven items available: +When right-clicking on a plot function or a single-point parametric plot function a popup menu will appear. In the menu there are seven items available: -Hide - +Hide + -Hides the selected graph. Other plots of the graph's function will still be shown. +Hides the selected graph. Other plots of the graph's function will still be shown. -Remove - +Remove + -Removes the function. All its graphs will disappear. +Removes the function. All its graphs will disappear. -Edit - +Edit + -Shows the editor dialogue for the selected function. +Shows the editor dialogue for the selected function. -For plot functions the following four items are also available: +For plot functions the following four items are also available: -Get y-value - +Get y-value + -Opens a dialogue in which you can find the y-value corresponding to a specific x-value. The selected graph will be highlighted in the dialogue. Enter an x value in the X box, and click on Find (or press &Enter;). The corresponding y value will be shown under Y. +Opens a dialogue in which you can find the y-value corresponding to a specific x-value. The selected graph will be highlighted in the dialogue. Enter an x value in the X box, and click on Find (or press &Enter;). The corresponding y value will be shown under Y. -Search for Minimum Value - +Search for Minimum Value + -Find the minimum value of the graph in a specified range. The selected graph will be highlighted in the dialogue that appears. Enter the lower and upper boundaries of the region in which you want to search for a minimum, and click Find. The x and y values at the minimum will be shown. +Find the minimum value of the graph in a specified range. The selected graph will be highlighted in the dialogue that appears. Enter the lower and upper boundaries of the region in which you want to search for a minimum, and click Find. The x and y values at the minimum will be shown. -Search for Maximum Value - +Search for Maximum Value + -This is the same as Search for minimum value above, but finds maximum values instead of minima. +This is the same as Search for minimum value above, but finds maximum values instead of minima. -Area Under Graph - +Area Under Graph + -Draws the area between the graph and the x-axis. The selected graph will be highlighted in the new dialogue that appears. For more information on the Search for Area Under Graph-feature, see . +Draws the area between the graph and the x-axis. The selected graph will be highlighted in the new dialogue that appears. For more information on the Search for Area Under Graph-feature, see . diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ai-contents.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ai-contents.docbook index 84d694de674..b6baa343c10 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ai-contents.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ai-contents.docbook @@ -1,200 +1,45 @@ -AstroInfo: Table of Contents +AstroInfo: Table of Contents -The Sky and Coordinate Systems - Celestial Coordinate Systems - Celestial Equator - Celestial Poles - Celestial Sphere - The Ecliptic - The Equinoxes - Geographic Coordinates - Great Circles - The Horizon - Hour Angle - Local Meridian - Precession - The Zenith +The Sky and Coordinate Systems + Celestial Coordinate Systems + Celestial Equator + Celestial Poles + Celestial Sphere + The Ecliptic + The Equinoxes + Geographic Coordinates + Great Circles + The Horizon + Hour Angle + Local Meridian + Precession + The Zenith -Time - Julian Day - Leap Years - Sidereal Time - Time Zones - Universal Time +Time + Julian Day + Leap Years + Sidereal Time + Time Zones + Universal Time -Physics - Blackbody Radiation - Dark Matter - Flux - Luminosity - Parallax - Retrograde Motion +Physics + Blackbody Radiation + Dark Matter + Flux + Luminosity + Parallax + Retrograde Motion -Astrophysics - Elliptical Galaxies - Spiral Galaxies - The Magnitude Scale - Stars: An Introductory FAQ - Star Colours and Temperatures +Astrophysics + Elliptical Galaxies + Spiral Galaxies + The Magnitude Scale + Stars: An Introductory FAQ + Star Colours and Temperatures diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/altvstime.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/altvstime.docbook index 5761864a34e..b5752cff68a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/altvstime.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/altvstime.docbook @@ -1,75 +1,30 @@ -Altitude vs. Time Tool -Tools -Altitude vs. Time Tool +Altitude vs. Time Tool +Tools +Altitude vs. Time Tool -The Altitude vs. Time Tool +The Altitude vs. Time Tool - Altitude vs. Time Plotter + Altitude vs. Time Plotter -This tool plots the altitude of any objects as a function of time, for any date and location on Earth. The top section is a graphical plot of altitude angle on the vertical axis, and time on the horizontal axis. The time is shown both as standard local time along the bottom, and sidereal time along the top. The bottom half of the graph is shaded green to indicate that points in this region are below the horizon. -There are a few ways to add curves to the plot. The simplest way to add the curve of an existing object is to simply type its name in the Name input field, and press Enter, or the Plot button. If the text you enter is found in the object database, the object's curve is added to the graph. You can also press the Browse button to open the Find Object Window to select an object from the list of known objects. If you want to add a point that does not exist in the object database, simply enter a name for the point, and then fill in the coordinates in the RA and Dec input fields. Then press the Plot button to add the curve for your custom object to the plot (note that you have to pick a name that does not already exist in the object database for this to work). -When you add an object to the plot, its altitude vs. time curve is plotted with a thick white line, and its name is added to the listbox at the lower right. Any objects that were already present are plotted with a thinner red curve. You can choose which object is plotted with the thick white curve by highlighting its name in the listbox. -These curves show the objects' Altitude (angle above the horizon) as a function of time. When a curve passes from the lower half to the upper half, the object has risen; when it falls back to the lower half, it has set. For example, in the screenshot, the minor planet Quaoar is rising at around 15:30 local time, and is setting at about 00:30. -The Altitude of an object depends on both where you are on Earth, and on the Date. By default, the Tool adopts the Location and Date from the current KStars settings. You can change these parameters in the Date & Location Tab. To change the Location, you can press the Choose City... button to open the Set Geographic Location Window, or enter Longitude and Latitude values manually in the input fields, and press the Update button. To change the Date, use the Date picker widget, then press Update. Note that any curves you had already plotted will be automatically updated when you change the Date and/or Location. +This tool plots the altitude of any objects as a function of time, for any date and location on Earth. The top section is a graphical plot of altitude angle on the vertical axis, and time on the horizontal axis. The time is shown both as standard local time along the bottom, and sidereal time along the top. The bottom half of the graph is shaded green to indicate that points in this region are below the horizon. +There are a few ways to add curves to the plot. The simplest way to add the curve of an existing object is to simply type its name in the Name input field, and press Enter, or the Plot button. If the text you enter is found in the object database, the object's curve is added to the graph. You can also press the Browse button to open the Find Object Window to select an object from the list of known objects. If you want to add a point that does not exist in the object database, simply enter a name for the point, and then fill in the coordinates in the RA and Dec input fields. Then press the Plot button to add the curve for your custom object to the plot (note that you have to pick a name that does not already exist in the object database for this to work). +When you add an object to the plot, its altitude vs. time curve is plotted with a thick white line, and its name is added to the listbox at the lower right. Any objects that were already present are plotted with a thinner red curve. You can choose which object is plotted with the thick white curve by highlighting its name in the listbox. +These curves show the objects' Altitude (angle above the horizon) as a function of time. When a curve passes from the lower half to the upper half, the object has risen; when it falls back to the lower half, it has set. For example, in the screenshot, the minor planet Quaoar is rising at around 15:30 local time, and is setting at about 00:30. +The Altitude of an object depends on both where you are on Earth, and on the Date. By default, the Tool adopts the Location and Date from the current KStars settings. You can change these parameters in the Date & Location Tab. To change the Location, you can press the Choose City... button to open the Set Geographic Location Window, or enter Longitude and Latitude values manually in the input fields, and press the Update button. To change the Date, use the Date picker widget, then press Update. Note that any curves you had already plotted will be automatically updated when you change the Date and/or Location. -Exercise: -Plot the Sun's Altitude curve. Make sure the geographic location is not near the equator. Change the Date to some time in June, and then again to sometime in January. You can see easily why we have seasons; in the winter, the Sun is above the horizon for less time (the days are shorter), and its altitude is never very high. +Exercise: +Plot the Sun's Altitude curve. Make sure the geographic location is not near the equator. Change the Date to some time in June, and then again to sometime in January. You can see easily why we have seasons; in the winter, the Sun is above the horizon for less time (the days are shorter), and its altitude is never very high. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/astroinfo.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/astroinfo.docbook index d054cd6c01b..ee9148b0ee6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/astroinfo.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/astroinfo.docbook @@ -1,9 +1,5 @@ -The AstroInfo Project +The AstroInfo Project -Here you can find a collection of short articles that explain various astronomical concepts used in &kstars;. From coordinate systems to celestial mechanics, you can find answers to your questions here. The articles sometimes also contain exercises that you can perform with &kstars; to illustrate the concept behind the article. +Here you can find a collection of short articles that explain various astronomical concepts used in &kstars;. From coordinate systems to celestial mechanics, you can find answers to your questions here. The articles sometimes also contain exercises that you can perform with &kstars; to illustrate the concept behind the article. &contents; &skycoords; &cequator; &cpoles; &csphere; &ecliptic; &equinox; &geocoords; &greatcircle; &horizon; &hourangle; &meridian; &precession; &zenith; &julianday; &leapyear; &sidereal; &timezones; &utime; &blackbody; &darkmatter; &flux; &luminosity; ¶llax; &retrograde; &ellipgal; &spiralgal; &magnitude; &stars; &colorandtemp; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/blackbody.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/blackbody.docbook index 9d9603657f8..be18f216e0a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/blackbody.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/blackbody.docbook @@ -2,71 +2,38 @@ -Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu -
 +Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu +
 -Blackbody Radiation -Blackbody Radiation -Star Colours and Temperatures +Blackbody Radiation +Blackbody Radiation +Star Colours and Temperatures -A blackbody refers to an opaque object that emits thermal radiation. A perfect blackbody is one that absorbs all incoming light and does not reflect any. At room temperature, such an object would appear to be perfectly black (hence the term blackbody). However, if heated to a high temperature, a blackbody will begin to glow with thermal radiation. +A blackbody refers to an opaque object that emits thermal radiation. A perfect blackbody is one that absorbs all incoming light and does not reflect any. At room temperature, such an object would appear to be perfectly black (hence the term blackbody). However, if heated to a high temperature, a blackbody will begin to glow with thermal radiation. -In fact, all objects emit thermal radiation (as long as their temperature is above Absolute Zero, or -273.15 degrees Celsius), but no object emits thermal radiation perfectly; rather, they are better at emitting/absorbing some wavelengths of light than others. These uneven efficiencies make it difficult to study the interaction of light, heat and matter using normal objects. +In fact, all objects emit thermal radiation (as long as their temperature is above Absolute Zero, or -273.15 degrees Celsius), but no object emits thermal radiation perfectly; rather, they are better at emitting/absorbing some wavelengths of light than others. These uneven efficiencies make it difficult to study the interaction of light, heat and matter using normal objects. -Fortunately, it is possible to construct a nearly-perfect blackbody. Construct a box made of a thermally conductive material, such as metal. The box should be completely closed on all sides, so that the inside forms a cavity that does not receive light from the surroundings. Then, make a small hole somewhere on the box. The light coming out of this hole will almost perfectly resemble the light from an ideal blackbody, for the temperature of the air inside the box. +Fortunately, it is possible to construct a nearly-perfect blackbody. Construct a box made of a thermally conductive material, such as metal. The box should be completely closed on all sides, so that the inside forms a cavity that does not receive light from the surroundings. Then, make a small hole somewhere on the box. The light coming out of this hole will almost perfectly resemble the light from an ideal blackbody, for the temperature of the air inside the box. -At the beginning of the 20th century, scientists Lord Rayleigh, and Max Planck (among others) studied the blackbody radiation using such a device. After much work, Planck was able to empirically describe the intensity of light emitted by a blackbody as a function of wavelength. Furthermore, he was able to describe how this spectrum would change as the temperature changed. Planck's work on blackbody radiation is one of the areas of physics that led to the foundation of the wonderful science of Quantum Mechanics, but that is unfortunately beyond the scope of this article. +At the beginning of the 20th century, scientists Lord Rayleigh, and Max Planck (among others) studied the blackbody radiation using such a device. After much work, Planck was able to empirically describe the intensity of light emitted by a blackbody as a function of wavelength. Furthermore, he was able to describe how this spectrum would change as the temperature changed. Planck's work on blackbody radiation is one of the areas of physics that led to the foundation of the wonderful science of Quantum Mechanics, but that is unfortunately beyond the scope of this article. -What Planck and the others found was that as the temperature of a blackbody increases, the total amount of light emitted per second increases, and the wavelength of the spectrum's peak shifts to bluer colours (see Figure 1). +What Planck and the others found was that as the temperature of a blackbody increases, the total amount of light emitted per second increases, and the wavelength of the spectrum's peak shifts to bluer colours (see Figure 1). - + -For example, an iron bar becomes orange-red when heated to high temperatures and its colour progressively shifts toward blue and white as it is heated further. +For example, an iron bar becomes orange-red when heated to high temperatures and its colour progressively shifts toward blue and white as it is heated further. -In 1893, German physicist Wilhelm Wien quantified the relationship between blackbody temperature and the wavelength of the spectral peak with the following equation: +In 1893, German physicist Wilhelm Wien quantified the relationship between blackbody temperature and the wavelength of the spectral peak with the following equation: @@ -76,22 +43,17 @@ -where T is the temperature in Kelvin. Wien's law (also known as Wien's displacement law) states that the wavelength of maximum emission from a blackbody is inversely proportional to its temperature. This makes sense; shorter-wavelength (higher-frequency) light corresponds to higher-energy photons, which you would expect from a higher-temperature object. +where T is the temperature in Kelvin. Wien's law (also known as Wien's displacement law) states that the wavelength of maximum emission from a blackbody is inversely proportional to its temperature. This makes sense; shorter-wavelength (higher-frequency) light corresponds to higher-energy photons, which you would expect from a higher-temperature object. -For example, the sun has an average temperature of 5800 K, so its wavelength of maximum emission is given by: +For example, the sun has an average temperature of 5800 K, so its wavelength of maximum emission is given by: -This wavelengths falls in the green region of the visible light spectrum, but the sun's continuum radiates photons both longer and shorter than lambda(max) and the human eyes perceives the sun's colour as yellow/white. +This wavelengths falls in the green region of the visible light spectrum, but the sun's continuum radiates photons both longer and shorter than lambda(max) and the human eyes perceives the sun's colour as yellow/white. -In 1879, Austrian physicist Stephan Josef Stefan showed that the luminosity, L, of a black body is proportional to the 4th power of its temperature T. +In 1879, Austrian physicist Stephan Josef Stefan showed that the luminosity, L, of a black body is proportional to the 4th power of its temperature T. @@ -101,11 +63,9 @@ -where A is the surface area, alpha is a constant of proportionality, and T is the temperature in Kelvin. That is, if we double the temperature (e.g. 1000 K to 2000 K) then the total energy radiated from a blackbody increase by a factor of 2^4 or 16. +where A is the surface area, alpha is a constant of proportionality, and T is the temperature in Kelvin. That is, if we double the temperature (e.g. 1000 K to 2000 K) then the total energy radiated from a blackbody increase by a factor of 2^4 or 16. -Five years later, Austrian physicist Ludwig Boltzman derived the same equation and is now known as the Stefan-Boltzman law. If we assume a spherical star with radius R, then the luminosity of such a star is +Five years later, Austrian physicist Ludwig Boltzman derived the same equation and is now known as the Stefan-Boltzman law. If we assume a spherical star with radius R, then the luminosity of such a star is @@ -115,9 +75,7 @@ -where R is the star radius in cm, and the alpha is the Stefan-Boltzman constant, which has the value: +where R is the star radius in cm, and the alpha is the Stefan-Boltzman constant, which has the value: diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-angdist.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-angdist.docbook index 15de62623e9..f790d92b077 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-angdist.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-angdist.docbook @@ -1,39 +1,23 @@ -Angular Distance module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Angular Distance module +Angular Distance module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Angular Distance module -The Angular Distance calculator module +The Angular Distance calculator module - Angular Distance + Angular Distance -The Angular Distance tool is used to measure the angle between any two points on the sky. You simply specify the Equatorial coordinates of the desired pair of points, and then press the Compute button to obtain the angle between the two points. -There is also a Batch mode for this module. In batch mode, you specify an input filename which contains four numbers per line: the RA and Dec values for pairs of points. Alternatively, you can specify a single value for any of these four coordinates in the calculator panel (the corresponding values in the input file should be skipped if they are specified in the calculator). -Once you have specified the input filename and an output filename, simply press the Run button to generate the output file. +The Angular Distance tool is used to measure the angle between any two points on the sky. You simply specify the Equatorial coordinates of the desired pair of points, and then press the Compute button to obtain the angle between the two points. +There is also a Batch mode for this module. In batch mode, you specify an input filename which contains four numbers per line: the RA and Dec values for pairs of points. Alternatively, you can specify a single value for any of these four coordinates in the calculator panel (the corresponding values in the input file should be skipped if they are specified in the calculator). +Once you have specified the input filename and an output filename, simply press the Run button to generate the output file. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-apcoords.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-apcoords.docbook index 03471f5fccc..24bad248c16 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-apcoords.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-apcoords.docbook @@ -1,45 +1,22 @@ -Apparent Coordinates module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Apparent Coordinates module +Apparent Coordinates module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Apparent Coordinates module -The Apparent Coordinates calculator module +The Apparent Coordinates calculator module - Apparent Coordinates + Apparent Coordinates -The Apparent Coordinates module converts the catalogue coordinates of a point in the sky to its apparent coordinates for any date. The coordinates of objects in the sky are not fixed, because of precession, nutation and aberration. This module takes these effects into account. -To use the module, first enter the desired target date and time in the Target Time/Date section. Then, enter the catalogue coordinates in the Catalog Coordinates section. You can also specify the catalogue's epoch here (usually 2000.0 for modern object catalogues). Finally, press the Compute button, and the object's coordinates for the target date will be displayed in the Apparent Coordinates section. +The Apparent Coordinates module converts the catalogue coordinates of a point in the sky to its apparent coordinates for any date. The coordinates of objects in the sky are not fixed, because of precession, nutation and aberration. This module takes these effects into account. +To use the module, first enter the desired target date and time in the Target Time/Date section. Then, enter the catalogue coordinates in the Catalog Coordinates section. You can also specify the catalogue's epoch here (usually 2000.0 for modern object catalogues). Finally, press the Compute button, and the object's coordinates for the target date will be displayed in the Apparent Coordinates section. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-dayduration.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-dayduration.docbook index 956b3a8c41d..88d58f778fa 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-dayduration.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-dayduration.docbook @@ -1,31 +1,21 @@ -Day Duration module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Day Duration module +Day Duration module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Day Duration module -The Day Duration calculator module +The Day Duration calculator module - Day Duration + Day Duration -This module computes the length of day as well as sunrise, sun-transit (noon), and sunset times for any calendar date, for any location on Earth. First fill in the desired geographic coordinates and date, then press the Compute button. +This module computes the length of day as well as sunrise, sun-transit (noon), and sunset times for any calendar date, for any location on Earth. First fill in the desired geographic coordinates and date, then press the Compute button. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-ecliptic.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-ecliptic.docbook index 28487e4dfb4..fcf18203ece 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-ecliptic.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-ecliptic.docbook @@ -1,45 +1,22 @@ -Ecliptic Coordinates module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Ecliptic Coordinates module +Ecliptic Coordinates module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Ecliptic Coordinates module -The Ecliptic Coordinates calculator module +The Ecliptic Coordinates calculator module - Ecliptic Coordinates + Ecliptic Coordinates -This module converts between Equatorial coordinates and Ecliptic coordinates. First, select which coordinates should be taken as input values in the Choose Input Coordinates section. Then, fill in the corresponding coordinate values in either the Ecliptic coordinates or Equatorial coordinates section. Finally, press the Compute button, and the complementary coordinates will be filled in. -The module contains a batch mode for converting several coordinate pairs at once. You must construct an input file in which each line contains two values: the input coordinate pairs (either Equatorial or Ecliptic). Then specify which coordinates you are using as input, and identify the input and output filenames. Finally, press the Run button to generate the output file, which will contain the converted coordinates (Equatorial or Ecliptic; the complement of what you chose as the input values). +This module converts between Equatorial coordinates and Ecliptic coordinates. First, select which coordinates should be taken as input values in the Choose Input Coordinates section. Then, fill in the corresponding coordinate values in either the Ecliptic coordinates or Equatorial coordinates section. Finally, press the Compute button, and the complementary coordinates will be filled in. +The module contains a batch mode for converting several coordinate pairs at once. You must construct an input file in which each line contains two values: the input coordinate pairs (either Equatorial or Ecliptic). Then specify which coordinates you are using as input, and identify the input and output filenames. Finally, press the Run button to generate the output file, which will contain the converted coordinates (Equatorial or Ecliptic; the complement of what you chose as the input values). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-eqgal.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-eqgal.docbook index 9c53a0b0e64..2ee39560dcf 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-eqgal.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-eqgal.docbook @@ -1,42 +1,22 @@ -Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates module +Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates module -The Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates calculator module +The Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates calculator module - Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates + Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates -This module converts from Equatorial coordinates to Galactic coordinates, and vice versa. First, select which coordinates should be taken as input values in the Input Selection section. Then, fill in the corresponding coordinate values in either the Galactic coordinates or Equatorial coordinates section. Finally, press the Compute button, and the complementary coordinates will be filled in. +This module converts from Equatorial coordinates to Galactic coordinates, and vice versa. First, select which coordinates should be taken as input values in the Input Selection section. Then, fill in the corresponding coordinate values in either the Galactic coordinates or Equatorial coordinates section. Finally, press the Compute button, and the complementary coordinates will be filled in. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-equinox.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-equinox.docbook index 04ab0393713..98b9b52ae68 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-equinox.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-equinox.docbook @@ -1,37 +1,22 @@ -Equinoxes and Solstices module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Equinoxes and Solstices module +Equinoxes and Solstices module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Equinoxes and Solstices module -The Equinoxes and Solstices calculator module +The Equinoxes and Solstices calculator module - Equinoxes and Solstices + Equinoxes and Solstices -The Equinoxes and Solstices module calculates the date and time of an equinox or solstice for a given year. You specify which event (Spring Equinox, Summer Solstice, Autumn Equinox or Winter Solstice) should be investigated, and the year. Then press the Compute button to obtain the date and time of the event, and the length of the corresponding season, in days. -There is a batch mode for this module. To use it, simply generate an input file whose lines each contain a year for which the Equinox and Solstice data will be computed. Then specify the input and output filenames, and press the Run button to generate the output file. Each line in the output file contains the input year, the date and time of each event, and the length of each season. +The Equinoxes and Solstices module calculates the date and time of an equinox or solstice for a given year. You specify which event (Spring Equinox, Summer Solstice, Autumn Equinox or Winter Solstice) should be investigated, and the year. Then press the Compute button to obtain the date and time of the event, and the length of the corresponding season, in days. +There is a batch mode for this module. To use it, simply generate an input file whose lines each contain a year for which the Equinox and Solstice data will be computed. Then specify the input and output filenames, and press the Run button to generate the output file. Each line in the output file contains the input year, the date and time of each event, and the length of each season. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-geodetic.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-geodetic.docbook index 0419968435f..82a49753d3b 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-geodetic.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-geodetic.docbook @@ -1,45 +1,22 @@ -Geodetic Coordinates module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Geodetic Coordinates module +Geodetic Coordinates module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Geodetic Coordinates module -The Geodetic Coordinates calculator module +The Geodetic Coordinates calculator module - Geodetic Coordinates + Geodetic Coordinates -The normal geographic coordinate system assumes that the Earth is a perfect sphere. This is nearly true, so for most purposes geographic coordinates are fine. If very high precision is required, then we must take the true shape of the Earth into account. The Earth is an ellipsoid; the distance around the equator is about 0.3% longer than a Great Circle that passes through the poles. The Geodetic Coordinate system takes this ellipsoidal shape into account, and expresses the position on the Earth's surface in Cartesian coordinates (X, Y, and Z). -To use the module, first select which coordinates you will use as input in the Input Selection section. Then, fill in the input coordinates in either the Cartesian Coordinates section or the Geographic Coordinates section. When you press the Compute button, the corresponding coordinates will be filled in. +The normal geographic coordinate system assumes that the Earth is a perfect sphere. This is nearly true, so for most purposes geographic coordinates are fine. If very high precision is required, then we must take the true shape of the Earth into account. The Earth is an ellipsoid; the distance around the equator is about 0.3% longer than a Great Circle that passes through the poles. The Geodetic Coordinate system takes this ellipsoidal shape into account, and expresses the position on the Earth's surface in Cartesian coordinates (X, Y, and Z). +To use the module, first select which coordinates you will use as input in the Input Selection section. Then, fill in the input coordinates in either the Cartesian Coordinates section or the Geographic Coordinates section. When you press the Compute button, the corresponding coordinates will be filled in. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-horizontal.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-horizontal.docbook index da36d32fc0e..e1ee7ea1786 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-horizontal.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-horizontal.docbook @@ -1,42 +1,22 @@ -Horizontal Coordinates module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Horizontal Coordinates module +Horizontal Coordinates module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Horizontal Coordinates module -The Horizontal Coordinates calculator module +The Horizontal Coordinates calculator module - Horizontal Coordinates + Horizontal Coordinates -This module converts from Equatorial coordinates to Horizontal coordinates. First, select the date, time, and geographic coordinates for the calculation in the Input Data section. Then, fill in the equatorial coordinates to be converted and their catalogue epoch in the Equatorial Coordinates section. When you press the Compute button, the corresponding Horizontal coordinates will be presented in the Horizontal Coordinates section. +This module converts from Equatorial coordinates to Horizontal coordinates. First, select the date, time, and geographic coordinates for the calculation in the Input Data section. Then, fill in the equatorial coordinates to be converted and their catalogue epoch in the Equatorial Coordinates section. When you press the Compute button, the corresponding Horizontal coordinates will be presented in the Horizontal Coordinates section. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-julianday.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-julianday.docbook index bd8b957c38d..3e675a4ff47 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-julianday.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-julianday.docbook @@ -1,45 +1,27 @@ -Julian Day module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Julian Day module +Julian Day module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Julian Day module -The Julian Day calculator module +The Julian Day calculator module - Julian Day + Julian Day -This module converts between the calendar date, the Julian Day and the Modified Julian Day. The Modified Julian Day is simply equal to the Julian Day - 2,400,000.5. To use the module, select which of the three dates will be the input, and then fill in its value. Then press the Compute button, and the corresponding values for the other two date systems will be displayed. +This module converts between the calendar date, the Julian Day and the Modified Julian Day. The Modified Julian Day is simply equal to the Julian Day - 2,400,000.5. To use the module, select which of the three dates will be the input, and then fill in its value. Then press the Compute button, and the corresponding values for the other two date systems will be displayed. -Exercise: -What calendar date does MJD = 0.0 correspond to? +Exercise: +What calendar date does MJD = 0.0 correspond to? diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-planetcoords.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-planetcoords.docbook index 0188d75b90b..1e7d51d6d76 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-planetcoords.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-planetcoords.docbook @@ -1,43 +1,22 @@ -Planet Coordinates module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Planet Coordinates module +Planet Coordinates module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Planet Coordinates module -The Planet Coordinates calculator module +The Planet Coordinates calculator module - Planet Coordinates + Planet Coordinates -The Planet Coordinates module computes positional data for any major solar system body, for any time and date and any geographic location. Simply select the solar system body from the drop-down list, and specify the desired date, time and geographic coordinates (these values are preset to the current &kstars; settings). Then press the Compute button to determine the Equatorial, Horizontal and Ecliptic coordinates of the body. -There is a batch mode for this module. You must construct an input file in which each line specifies values for the input parameters (solar system body, date, time, longitude, and latitude). You may choose to specify a constant value for some of the parameters in the calculator window (these parameters should be skipped in the input file). You may also specify which of the output parameters (Equatorial, Horizontal and Ecliptic coordinates) should be calculated. Finally, specify the input and output filenames, and press the Run button to generate the output file with the computed values. +The Planet Coordinates module computes positional data for any major solar system body, for any time and date and any geographic location. Simply select the solar system body from the drop-down list, and specify the desired date, time and geographic coordinates (these values are preset to the current &kstars; settings). Then press the Compute button to determine the Equatorial, Horizontal and Ecliptic coordinates of the body. +There is a batch mode for this module. You must construct an input file in which each line specifies values for the input parameters (solar system body, date, time, longitude, and latitude). You may choose to specify a constant value for some of the parameters in the calculator window (these parameters should be skipped in the input file). You may also specify which of the output parameters (Equatorial, Horizontal and Ecliptic coordinates) should be calculated. Finally, specify the input and output filenames, and press the Run button to generate the output file with the computed values. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-precess.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-precess.docbook index 27195079140..13e6f528b4a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-precess.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-precess.docbook @@ -1,43 +1,22 @@ -Precession module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Precession module +Precession module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Precession module -The Precession calculator module +The Precession calculator module - Precession + Precession -This module is similar to the Apparent Coordinates module, but it only applies the effect of precession, not of nutation or aberration. -To use the module, first enter the input coordinates and their epoch in the Original Coordinates section. You must also fill in the target epoch in the Precessed Coordinates section. Then, press the Compute button, and the object's coordinates, precessed to the target Epoch, are presented in the Precessed Coordinates section. +This module is similar to the Apparent Coordinates module, but it only applies the effect of precession, not of nutation or aberration. +To use the module, first enter the input coordinates and their epoch in the Original Coordinates section. You must also fill in the target epoch in the Precessed Coordinates section. Then, press the Compute button, and the object's coordinates, precessed to the target Epoch, are presented in the Precessed Coordinates section. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-sidereal.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-sidereal.docbook index 77a4ebb6112..3844ec1f877 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-sidereal.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calc-sidereal.docbook @@ -1,37 +1,21 @@ -Sidereal Time module -Tools -Astrocalculator -Sidereal Time module +Sidereal Time module +Tools +Astrocalculator +Sidereal Time module -The Sidereal Time calculator module +The Sidereal Time calculator module - Sidereal Time + Sidereal Time -This module converts between Universal Time and Local Sidereal Time. First, select whether you will use Universal Time or Sidereal Time as an input value in the Input Selection section. You must also specify a geographic longitude, and a date for the calculation, in addition to either the Universal Time or the Sidereal Time value. When you press the Compute button, the corresponding value for the other Time will be displayed. +This module converts between Universal Time and Local Sidereal Time. First, select whether you will use Universal Time or Sidereal Time as an input value in the Input Selection section. You must also specify a geographic longitude, and a date for the calculation, in addition to either the Universal Time or the Sidereal Time value. When you press the Compute button, the corresponding value for the other Time will be displayed. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calculator.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calculator.docbook index b36104194c3..40fe46136aa 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calculator.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/calculator.docbook @@ -1,101 +1,28 @@ -The Astrocalculator -Tools -Astrocalculator +The Astrocalculator +Tools +Astrocalculator -The &kstars; Astrocalculator provides several modules that give you direct access to algorithms used by the program. The modules are organised by subject: Coordinate Converters -Angular Distance -Apparent Coordinates -Ecliptic Coordinates -Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates -Horizontal Coordinates -Precession +The &kstars; Astrocalculator provides several modules that give you direct access to algorithms used by the program. The modules are organised by subject: Coordinate Converters +Angular Distance +Apparent Coordinates +Ecliptic Coordinates +Equatorial/Galactic Coordinates +Horizontal Coordinates +Precession -Earth Coordinates -Geodetic Coordinates +Earth Coordinates +Geodetic Coordinates -Solar System -Planets Coordinates +Solar System +Planets Coordinates -Time Calculators -Day Duration -Equinoxes and Solstices -Julian Day -Sidereal Time +Time Calculators +Day Duration +Equinoxes and Solstices +Julian Day +Sidereal Time &calc-angdist; &calc-apcoords; &calc-ecliptic; &calc-eqgal; &calc-horiz; &calc-precess; &calc-geodetic; &calc-planetcoords; &calc-dayduration; &calc-equinox; &calc-julian; &calc-sidereal; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cequator.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cequator.docbook index 112cc4f234a..da6a7700909 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cequator.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cequator.docbook @@ -1,34 +1,11 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -The Celestial Equator -Celestial Equator -Equatorial Coordinates +The Celestial Equator +Celestial Equator +Equatorial Coordinates -The Celestial Equator is an imaginary great circle on the celestial sphere. The celestial equator is the fundamental plane of the Equatorial Coordinate System, so it is defined as the locus of points with Declination of zero degrees. It is also the projection of the Earth's equator onto the sky. -The Celestial Equator and the Ecliptic are set at an angle of 23.5 degrees in the sky. The points where they intersect are the Vernal and Autumnal Equinoxes. +The Celestial Equator is an imaginary great circle on the celestial sphere. The celestial equator is the fundamental plane of the Equatorial Coordinate System, so it is defined as the locus of points with Declination of zero degrees. It is also the projection of the Earth's equator onto the sky. +The Celestial Equator and the Ecliptic are set at an angle of 23.5 degrees in the sky. The points where they intersect are the Vernal and Autumnal Equinoxes. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/colorandtemp.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/colorandtemp.docbook index bf4663dbcd8..1e41ecaf81f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/colorandtemp.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/colorandtemp.docbook @@ -2,124 +2,62 @@ -Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu -
 +Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu +
 -Star Colours and Temperatures -Star Colours and Temperatures -Blackbody Radiation Magnitude Scale +Star Colours and Temperatures +Star Colours and Temperatures +Blackbody Radiation Magnitude Scale -Stars appear to be exclusively white at first glance. But if we look carefully, we can notice a range of colours: blue, white, red and even gold. In the winter constellation of Orion, a beautiful contrast is seen between the red Betelgeuse at Orion's "armpit" and the blue Bellatrix at the shoulder. What causes stars to exhibit different colours remained a mystery until two centuries ago, when Physicists gained enough understanding of the nature of light and the properties of matter at immensely high temperatures. +Stars appear to be exclusively white at first glance. But if we look carefully, we can notice a range of colours: blue, white, red and even gold. In the winter constellation of Orion, a beautiful contrast is seen between the red Betelgeuse at Orion's "armpit" and the blue Bellatrix at the shoulder. What causes stars to exhibit different colours remained a mystery until two centuries ago, when Physicists gained enough understanding of the nature of light and the properties of matter at immensely high temperatures. -Specifically, it was the physics of blackbody radiation that enabled us to understand the variation of stellar colours. Shortly after blackbody radiation was understood, it was noticed that the spectra of stars look extremely similar to blackbody radiation curves of various temperatures, ranging from a few thousand Kelvin to ~50,000 Kelvin. The obvious conclusion is that stars are similar to blackbodies, and that the colour variation of stars is a direct consequence of their surface temperatures. +Specifically, it was the physics of blackbody radiation that enabled us to understand the variation of stellar colours. Shortly after blackbody radiation was understood, it was noticed that the spectra of stars look extremely similar to blackbody radiation curves of various temperatures, ranging from a few thousand Kelvin to ~50,000 Kelvin. The obvious conclusion is that stars are similar to blackbodies, and that the colour variation of stars is a direct consequence of their surface temperatures. -Cool stars (i.e., Spectral Type K and M) radiate most of their energy in the red and infrared region of the electromagnetic spectrum and thus appear red, while hot stars (i.e., Spectral Type O and B) emit mostly at blue and ultra-violet wavelengths, making them appear blue or white. +Cool stars (i.e., Spectral Type K and M) radiate most of their energy in the red and infrared region of the electromagnetic spectrum and thus appear red, while hot stars (i.e., Spectral Type O and B) emit mostly at blue and ultra-violet wavelengths, making them appear blue or white. -To estimate the surface temperature of a star, we can use the known relationship between the temperature of a blackbody, and the wavelength of light where its spectrum peaks. That is, as you increase the temperature of a blackbody, the peak of its spectrum moves to shorter (bluer) wavelengths of light. This is illustrated in Figure 1 where the intensity of three hypothetical stars is plotted against wavelength. The "rainbow" indicates the range of wavelengths that are visible to the human eye. +To estimate the surface temperature of a star, we can use the known relationship between the temperature of a blackbody, and the wavelength of light where its spectrum peaks. That is, as you increase the temperature of a blackbody, the peak of its spectrum moves to shorter (bluer) wavelengths of light. This is illustrated in Figure 1 where the intensity of three hypothetical stars is plotted against wavelength. The "rainbow" indicates the range of wavelengths that are visible to the human eye. - + -This simple method is conceptually correct, but it cannot be used to obtain stellar temperatures accurately, because stars are not perfect blackbodies. The presence of various elements in the star's atmosphere will cause certain wavelengths of light to be absorbed. Because these absorption lines are not uniformly distributed over the spectrum, they can skew the position of the spectral peak. Moreover, obtaining a usable spectrum of a star is a time-intensive process and is prohibitively inefficient for large samples of stars. - -An alternative method utilises photometry to measure the intensity of light passing through different filters. Each filter allows only a specific part of the spectrum of light to pass through while rejecting all others. A widely used photometric system is called the Johnson UBV system. It employs three bandpass filters: U ("Ultra-violet"), B ("Blue"), and V ("Visible"); each occupying different regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. - -The process of UBV photometry involves using light sensitive devices (such as film or CCD cameras) and aiming a telescope at a star to measure the intensity of light that passes through each of the filters individually. This procedure gives three apparent brightnesses or fluxes (amount of energy per cm^2 per second) designated by Fu, Fb, and Fv. The ratio of fluxes Fu/Fb and Fb/Fv is a quantitative measure of the star's "colour", and these ratios can be used to establish a temperature scale for stars. Generally speaking, the larger the Fu/Fb and Fb/Fv ratios of a star, the hotter its surface temperature. - -For example, the star Bellatrix in Orion has Fb/Fv = 1.22, indicating that it is brighter through the B filter than through the V filter. furthermore, its Fu/Fb ratio is 2.22, so it is brightest through the U filter. This indicates that the star must be very hot indeed, since the position of its spectral peak must be somewhere in the range of the U filter, or at an even shorter wavelength. The surface temperature of Bellatrix (as determined from comparing its spectrum to detailed models that account for its absorption lines) is about 25,000 Kelvin. - -We can repeat this analysis for the star Betelgeuse. Its Fb/Fv and Fu/Fb ratios are 0.15 and 0.18, respectively, so it is brightest in V and dimmest in U. So, the spectral peak of Betelgeuse must be somewhere in the range of the V filter, or at an even longer wavelength. The surface temperature of Betelgeuse is only 2,400 Kelvin. - -Astronomers prefer to express star colours in terms of a difference in magnitudes, rather than a ratio of fluxes. Therefore, going back to blue Bellatrix we have a colour index equal to - -B - V = -2.5 log (Fb/Fv) = -2.5 log (1.22) = -0.22, - -Similarly, the colour index for red Betelgeuse is - -B - V = -2.5 log (Fb/Fv) = -2.5 log (0.18) = 1.85 - -The colour indices, like the magnitude scale, run backward. Hot and blue stars have smaller and negative values of B-V than the cooler and redder stars. - -An Astronomer can then use the colour indices for a star, after correcting for reddening and interstellar extinction, to obtain an accurate temperature of that star. The relationship between B-V and temperature is illustrated in Figure 2. +This simple method is conceptually correct, but it cannot be used to obtain stellar temperatures accurately, because stars are not perfect blackbodies. The presence of various elements in the star's atmosphere will cause certain wavelengths of light to be absorbed. Because these absorption lines are not uniformly distributed over the spectrum, they can skew the position of the spectral peak. Moreover, obtaining a usable spectrum of a star is a time-intensive process and is prohibitively inefficient for large samples of stars. + +An alternative method utilises photometry to measure the intensity of light passing through different filters. Each filter allows only a specific part of the spectrum of light to pass through while rejecting all others. A widely used photometric system is called the Johnson UBV system. It employs three bandpass filters: U ("Ultra-violet"), B ("Blue"), and V ("Visible"); each occupying different regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. + +The process of UBV photometry involves using light sensitive devices (such as film or CCD cameras) and aiming a telescope at a star to measure the intensity of light that passes through each of the filters individually. This procedure gives three apparent brightnesses or fluxes (amount of energy per cm^2 per second) designated by Fu, Fb, and Fv. The ratio of fluxes Fu/Fb and Fb/Fv is a quantitative measure of the star's "colour", and these ratios can be used to establish a temperature scale for stars. Generally speaking, the larger the Fu/Fb and Fb/Fv ratios of a star, the hotter its surface temperature. + +For example, the star Bellatrix in Orion has Fb/Fv = 1.22, indicating that it is brighter through the B filter than through the V filter. furthermore, its Fu/Fb ratio is 2.22, so it is brightest through the U filter. This indicates that the star must be very hot indeed, since the position of its spectral peak must be somewhere in the range of the U filter, or at an even shorter wavelength. The surface temperature of Bellatrix (as determined from comparing its spectrum to detailed models that account for its absorption lines) is about 25,000 Kelvin. + +We can repeat this analysis for the star Betelgeuse. Its Fb/Fv and Fu/Fb ratios are 0.15 and 0.18, respectively, so it is brightest in V and dimmest in U. So, the spectral peak of Betelgeuse must be somewhere in the range of the V filter, or at an even longer wavelength. The surface temperature of Betelgeuse is only 2,400 Kelvin. + +Astronomers prefer to express star colours in terms of a difference in magnitudes, rather than a ratio of fluxes. Therefore, going back to blue Bellatrix we have a colour index equal to + +B - V = -2.5 log (Fb/Fv) = -2.5 log (1.22) = -0.22, + +Similarly, the colour index for red Betelgeuse is + +B - V = -2.5 log (Fb/Fv) = -2.5 log (0.18) = 1.85 + +The colour indices, like the magnitude scale, run backward. Hot and blue stars have smaller and negative values of B-V than the cooler and redder stars. + +An Astronomer can then use the colour indices for a star, after correcting for reddening and interstellar extinction, to obtain an accurate temperature of that star. The relationship between B-V and temperature is illustrated in Figure 2. - + -The Sun with surface temperature of 5,800 K has a B-V index of 0.62. +The Sun with surface temperature of 5,800 K has a B-V index of 0.62. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/commands.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/commands.docbook index 39c258fa711..3ed65823e21 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/commands.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/commands.docbook @@ -1,826 +1,245 @@ -Command Reference +Command Reference -Menu Commands -CommandsMenu +Menu Commands +CommandsMenu -<guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;N File New Window -Open another &kstars; window - - - - &Ctrl;W File Close Window -Close &kstars; window - - - - &Ctrl;D File Download Data... -Open the Download Extra Data tool - - - - &Ctrl;O File Open FITS... -Open a FITS image in the FITS Editor tool - - - - &Ctrl;I File Save Sky Image... -Create image on disk from current display - - - - &Ctrl;R File Run Script... -Run the specified KStars script - - - - &Ctrl;P File Print... -Send the current sky map to the printer (or to a PostScript/PDF file) - - - - &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Quit &kstars; + &Ctrl;N File New Window +Open another &kstars; window + + + + &Ctrl;W File Close Window +Close &kstars; window + + + + &Ctrl;D File Download Data... +Open the Download Extra Data tool + + + + &Ctrl;O File Open FITS... +Open a FITS image in the FITS Editor tool + + + + &Ctrl;I File Save Sky Image... +Create image on disk from current display + + + + &Ctrl;R File Run Script... +Run the specified KStars script + + + + &Ctrl;P File Print... +Send the current sky map to the printer (or to a PostScript/PDF file) + + + + &Ctrl;Q File Quit +Quit &kstars; -<guimenu ->Time</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Time</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;E Time Set Time to Now -Sync time to system clock - - - - &Ctrl;S Time Set Time... -Set time and date - - - -Time Start/Stop Clock -Toggle whether time passes + &Ctrl;E Time Set Time to Now +Sync time to system clock + + + + &Ctrl;S Time Set Time... +Set time and date + + + +Time Start/Stop Clock +Toggle whether time passes -<guimenu ->Pointing</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Pointing</guimenu> Menu - Z Pointing Zenith -Centre the display at the Zenith point (straight up) - - - - N Pointing North -Centre the display above the North point on the horizon - - - - E Pointing East -Centre the display above the East point on the horizon - - - - S Pointing South -Centre the display above the South point on the horizon - - - - W Pointing West -Centre the display above the West point on the horizon - - - - &Ctrl;M Pointing Set Focus Manually... -Centre the display on specific sky coordinates - - - - &Ctrl;F Pointing Find Object -Locate an object by name using the Find Object Window - - - - &Ctrl;T Pointing Engage/Stop Tracking -Toggle tracking on/off. While tracking, the display will remain centred on the current position or object. + Z Pointing Zenith +Centre the display at the Zenith point (straight up) + + + + N Pointing North +Centre the display above the North point on the horizon + + + + E Pointing East +Centre the display above the East point on the horizon + + + + S Pointing South +Centre the display above the South point on the horizon + + + + W Pointing West +Centre the display above the West point on the horizon + + + + &Ctrl;M Pointing Set Focus Manually... +Centre the display on specific sky coordinates + + + + &Ctrl;F Pointing Find Object +Locate an object by name using the Find Object Window + + + + &Ctrl;T Pointing Engage/Stop Tracking +Toggle tracking on/off. While tracking, the display will remain centred on the current position or object. -<guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu - + View Zoom in -Zooms view in - - - - - View Zoom out -Zooms view out - - - - &Ctrl;Z View Default Zoom -Restore the default Zoom setting - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;Z View Zoom to Angular Size... -Zoom to specified field-of-view angle - - - - &Ctrl;&Shift;F View Full Screen Mode -Toggle full-screen mode - - - - Space View Horizontal/Equatorial Coordinates -Toggle between the Horizontal and Equatorial Coordinate Systems + + View Zoom in +Zooms view in + + + + - View Zoom out +Zooms view out + + + + &Ctrl;Z View Default Zoom +Restore the default Zoom setting + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;Z View Zoom to Angular Size... +Zoom to specified field-of-view angle + + + + &Ctrl;&Shift;F View Full Screen Mode +Toggle full-screen mode + + + + Space View Horizontal/Equatorial Coordinates +Toggle between the Horizontal and Equatorial Coordinate Systems -<guimenu ->Devices</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Devices</guimenu> Menu -Devices Telescope Wizard... -Opens the Telescope Wizard, which provides a step-by-step guide to help you connect to your telescope and control it with &kstars;. - - - -Devices Capture Image Sequence... -Acquire images from a CCD camera or webcam device - - - -Devices Device Manager -Opens up the device manager, which allows you to start/shutdown device drivers and connect to remote INDI servers. - - - -Devices INDI Control Panel -Opens up INDI Control Panel, which allows you to control all the features supported by a device. - - - -Devices Configure INDI -Opens up a dialogue to configure INDI-related features such as automatic device updates. +Devices Telescope Wizard... +Opens the Telescope Wizard, which provides a step-by-step guide to help you connect to your telescope and control it with &kstars;. + + + +Devices Capture Image Sequence... +Acquire images from a CCD camera or webcam device + + + +Devices Device Manager +Opens up the device manager, which allows you to start/shutdown device drivers and connect to remote INDI servers. + + + +Devices INDI Control Panel +Opens up INDI Control Panel, which allows you to control all the features supported by a device. + + + +Devices Configure INDI +Opens up a dialogue to configure INDI-related features such as automatic device updates. -<guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;C Tools Calculator... + &Ctrl;C Tools Calculator... -Opens the AstroCalculator Tool, which provides full access to many of the mathematical functions used by &kstars;. +Opens the AstroCalculator Tool, which provides full access to many of the mathematical functions used by &kstars;. - &Ctrl;V Tools AAVSO Light Curves... + &Ctrl;V Tools AAVSO Light Curves... -Opens the AAVSO Light Curve Generator Tool, which allows you to download a light curve for any variable star from the American Association of Variable Star Observers. +Opens the AAVSO Light Curve Generator Tool, which allows you to download a light curve for any variable star from the American Association of Variable Star Observers. - &Ctrl;A Tools Altitude vs. Time... + &Ctrl;A Tools Altitude vs. Time... -Opens the Altitude vs. Time Tool, which can plot curves representing the altitude of any object as a function of time. This is useful for planning observing sessions. +Opens the Altitude vs. Time Tool, which can plot curves representing the altitude of any object as a function of time. This is useful for planning observing sessions. - &Ctrl;U Tools What's Up Tonight... + &Ctrl;U Tools What's Up Tonight... -Opens the What's Up Tonight Tool, which presents a summary of the objects which are observable from your location on a given date. +Opens the What's Up Tonight Tool, which presents a summary of the objects which are observable from your location on a given date. - &Ctrl;B Tools Script Builder... + &Ctrl;B Tools Script Builder... -Opens the Script Builder Tool, which provides a GUI interface for building &kstars; DCOP scripts. +Opens the Script Builder Tool, which provides a GUI interface for building &kstars; DCOP scripts. - &Ctrl;Y Tools Solar System... + &Ctrl;Y Tools Solar System... -Opens the Solar System Viewer, which displays an overhead view of the solar system on the current simulation date. +Opens the Solar System Viewer, which displays an overhead view of the solar system on the current simulation date. - &Ctrl;J Tools Jupiter's Moons... + &Ctrl;J Tools Jupiter's Moons... -Opens the Jupiter Moons Tool, which displays the positions of Jupiter's four brightest moons as a function of time. +Opens the Jupiter Moons Tool, which displays the positions of Jupiter's four brightest moons as a function of time. @@ -828,378 +247,136 @@ -<guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -Settings Info Boxes Hide/Show Info Boxes -Toggle display of all three Info Boxes - - - -Settings Info Boxes Hide/Show Time -Toggle display of the Time Info Box - - - -Settings Info Boxes Hide/Show Focus -Toggle display of the Focus Info Box - - - -Settings Info Boxes Hide/Show Location -Toggle display of the Location Info Box - - - -Settings Toolbars Hide/Show Main Toolbar -Toggle display of the Main Toolbar - - - -Settings Toolbars Hide/Show View Toolbar -Toggle display of the View Toolbar - - - -Settings Statusbar Hide/Show Statusbar -Toggle display of the Statusbar - - - -Settings Statusbar Hide/Show Az/Alt field -Toggle display of the mouse cursor's horizontal coordinates in the statusbar - - - -Settings Statusbar Hide/Show RA/Dec field -Toggle display of the mouse cursor's horizontal coordinates in the statusbar - - - -Settings Colour Schemes -This submenu contains all of the defined colour schemes, including your custom schemes. Select any item to set that colour scheme. - - - -Settings FOV Symbols -This submenu lists the available field-of-view (FOV) Symbols. The FOV Symbol is drawn at the centre of the display. You may choose from the list of predefined symbols (No symbol, 7x35 Binoculars, One degree, or HST WFPC2), or you may define your own symbols (or modify existing symbols) using the Edit FOV symbols... item. - - - - &Ctrl;G Settings Set Geographic Location... +Settings Info Boxes Hide/Show Info Boxes +Toggle display of all three Info Boxes + + + +Settings Info Boxes Hide/Show Time +Toggle display of the Time Info Box + + + +Settings Info Boxes Hide/Show Focus +Toggle display of the Focus Info Box + + + +Settings Info Boxes Hide/Show Location +Toggle display of the Location Info Box + + + +Settings Toolbars Hide/Show Main Toolbar +Toggle display of the Main Toolbar + + + +Settings Toolbars Hide/Show View Toolbar +Toggle display of the View Toolbar + + + +Settings Statusbar Hide/Show Statusbar +Toggle display of the Statusbar + + + +Settings Statusbar Hide/Show Az/Alt field +Toggle display of the mouse cursor's horizontal coordinates in the statusbar + + + +Settings Statusbar Hide/Show RA/Dec field +Toggle display of the mouse cursor's horizontal coordinates in the statusbar + + + +Settings Colour Schemes +This submenu contains all of the defined colour schemes, including your custom schemes. Select any item to set that colour scheme. + + + +Settings FOV Symbols +This submenu lists the available field-of-view (FOV) Symbols. The FOV Symbol is drawn at the centre of the display. You may choose from the list of predefined symbols (No symbol, 7x35 Binoculars, One degree, or HST WFPC2), or you may define your own symbols (or modify existing symbols) using the Edit FOV symbols... item. + + + + &Ctrl;G Settings Set Geographic Location... -Select a new geographic location +Select a new geographic location -Settings Configure &kstars;... -Modify configuration options +Settings Configure &kstars;... +Modify configuration options -<guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu &help.menu.documentation; -Popup Menu -Popup MenuDescription - -The right click popup menu is context-sensitive, meaning its content varies depending on what kind of object you click on. We list all possible popup menu items here, with the relevant object type [in brackets]. +Popup Menu +Popup MenuDescription + +The right click popup menu is context-sensitive, meaning its content varies depending on what kind of object you click on. We list all possible popup menu items here, with the relevant object type [in brackets]. -[All] -Identification and type: The top one to three lines are devoted to the name(s) of the object and its type. For stars, the Spectral Type is also shown here. - - - -[All] -Rise, Transit and Set times for the object on the current simulation date are shown on the next three lines. - - - -[All] -Centre and Track: Centre the display on this location, and engage tracking. Equivalent to double-clicking. - - - -[All] -Angular Distance To...: Enter "angular distance mode". In this mode, a dotted line is drawn from the first target object to the current mouse position. When you invoke the popup menu of a second object, this item will read Compute Angular Distance. Selecting this item will display the angular distance between the two objects in the statusbar. You can press the Esc key to exit angular distance mode without measuring an angle. - - - -[All] -Details: Open the Object Details window for this object. - - - -[All] -Attach Label: Attach a permanent name label to the object. If the object already has a label attached, this item will read Remove Label. - - - -[All] -Show ... Image: download an image of the object from the internet, and display it in the Image Viewer tool. The "..." text is replaced by a short description of the image's source. An object may have multiple image links available in its popup menu. - - - -[All] -... Page: Display a webpage about the object in your default web browser. The "..." text is replaced by a short description of the page. An object may have multiple web links available in its popup menu. - - - -[All Named Objects] - -Objects in the Sky -Internet Links -Customising -Add Link...: This allows you to add your own custom links to the popup menu of any object. It opens a small window in which you enter the &URL; of the link, and the text you want to appear in the popup menu. There is also a pair of radio buttons which allow you to specify whether the &URL; is an image or an HTML document, so &kstars; knows whether to launch the web browser or the image viewer. You can use this to add links to files on your local disk, so this feature could be used to attach observing logs or other custom information to objects in &kstars;. Your custom links are automatically loaded whenever &kstars; starts up, and they are stored in the folder ~/.trinity/share/apps/kstars/, in files myimage_url.dat and myinfo_url.dat. If you build an extensive list of custom links, consider submitting them to us, we would like to include them in the next version of &kstars;! +[All] +Identification and type: The top one to three lines are devoted to the name(s) of the object and its type. For stars, the Spectral Type is also shown here. + + + +[All] +Rise, Transit and Set times for the object on the current simulation date are shown on the next three lines. + + + +[All] +Centre and Track: Centre the display on this location, and engage tracking. Equivalent to double-clicking. + + + +[All] +Angular Distance To...: Enter "angular distance mode". In this mode, a dotted line is drawn from the first target object to the current mouse position. When you invoke the popup menu of a second object, this item will read Compute Angular Distance. Selecting this item will display the angular distance between the two objects in the statusbar. You can press the Esc key to exit angular distance mode without measuring an angle. + + + +[All] +Details: Open the Object Details window for this object. + + + +[All] +Attach Label: Attach a permanent name label to the object. If the object already has a label attached, this item will read Remove Label. + + + +[All] +Show ... Image: download an image of the object from the internet, and display it in the Image Viewer tool. The "..." text is replaced by a short description of the image's source. An object may have multiple image links available in its popup menu. + + + +[All] +... Page: Display a webpage about the object in your default web browser. The "..." text is replaced by a short description of the page. An object may have multiple web links available in its popup menu. + + + +[All Named Objects] + +Objects in the Sky +Internet Links +Customising +Add Link...: This allows you to add your own custom links to the popup menu of any object. It opens a small window in which you enter the &URL; of the link, and the text you want to appear in the popup menu. There is also a pair of radio buttons which allow you to specify whether the &URL; is an image or an HTML document, so &kstars; knows whether to launch the web browser or the image viewer. You can use this to add links to files on your local disk, so this feature could be used to attach observing logs or other custom information to objects in &kstars;. Your custom links are automatically loaded whenever &kstars; starts up, and they are stored in the folder ~/.trinity/share/apps/kstars/, in files myimage_url.dat and myinfo_url.dat. If you build an extensive list of custom links, consider submitting them to us, we would like to include them in the next version of &kstars;! @@ -1208,244 +385,101 @@ -Keyboard Commands -Commands -Keyboard +Keyboard Commands +Commands +Keyboard -Navigation Keys -Navigation Controls -Keyboard +Navigation Keys +Navigation Controls +Keyboard -Arrow Keys -Use the arrow keys to pan the display. Holding down the &Shift; key doubles the scrolling speed. - - -+ / - -Zoom In/Out - - - -&Ctrl;Z -Restore the default Zoom setting - - - -&Ctrl;&Shift;Z -Zoom to specified field-of-view angle - - - -0–9 -Center Display on a major Solar System body: -0: Sun -1: Mercury -2: Venus -3: Moon -4: Mars -5: Jupiter -6: Saturn -7: Uranus -8: Neptune -9: Pluto +Arrow Keys +Use the arrow keys to pan the display. Holding down the &Shift; key doubles the scrolling speed. + + ++ / - +Zoom In/Out + + + +&Ctrl;Z +Restore the default Zoom setting + + + +&Ctrl;&Shift;Z +Zoom to specified field-of-view angle + + + +0–9 +Center Display on a major Solar System body: +0: Sun +1: Mercury +2: Venus +3: Moon +4: Mars +5: Jupiter +6: Saturn +7: Uranus +8: Neptune +9: Pluto - + -Z -Centre the display at the Zenith Point (straight up) +Z +Centre the display at the Zenith Point (straight up) -N -Centre the display above the North point on the horizon +N +Centre the display above the North point on the horizon -E -Centre the display above the East point on the horizon +E +Centre the display above the East point on the horizon -S -Centre the display above the South point on the horizon +S +Centre the display above the South point on the horizon -W -Centre the display above the West point on the horizon +W +Centre the display above the West point on the horizon -&Ctrl;F -Open the Find Object window, for specifying a sky object on which to centre +&Ctrl;F +Open the Find Object window, for specifying a sky object on which to centre -&Ctrl;M +&Ctrl;M -Open the Set Manual Focus tool, for specifying RA/Dec or Az/Alt coordinates on which to centre - - - -&Ctrl;T -Toggle tracking mode - - - -< -Advance the simulation clock backwards by one time step +Open the Set Manual Focus tool, for specifying RA/Dec or Az/Alt coordinates on which to centre + + + +&Ctrl;T +Toggle tracking mode + + + +< +Advance the simulation clock backwards by one time step -> -Advance the simulation clock forwards by one time step +> +Advance the simulation clock forwards by one time step @@ -1454,306 +488,116 @@ -Menu Shortcuts +Menu Shortcuts -&Ctrl;N -Open a new &kstars; window - - - -&Ctrl;W -Close a &kstars; window - - - -&Ctrl;D -Download extra data - - - -&Ctrl;O -Open a FITS image in the FITS Editor - - - -&Ctrl;I -Export sky image to a file - - - -&Ctrl;R -Run a &kstars; DCOP script - - - -&Ctrl;P -Print the current sky map - - - -&Ctrl;Q -Quit &kstars; - - - -&Ctrl;E -Sync the simulation clock with the current system time - - - -&Ctrl;S -Set the simulation clock to a specified Time and Date - - - -&Ctrl;&Shift;F -Toggle full-screen mode - - -Space -Toggle between the Horizontal and Equatorial Coordinate Systems - - -F1 -Open the &kstars; Handbook +&Ctrl;N +Open a new &kstars; window + + + +&Ctrl;W +Close a &kstars; window + + + +&Ctrl;D +Download extra data + + + +&Ctrl;O +Open a FITS image in the FITS Editor + + + +&Ctrl;I +Export sky image to a file + + + +&Ctrl;R +Run a &kstars; DCOP script + + + +&Ctrl;P +Print the current sky map + + + +&Ctrl;Q +Quit &kstars; + + + +&Ctrl;E +Sync the simulation clock with the current system time + + + +&Ctrl;S +Set the simulation clock to a specified Time and Date + + + +&Ctrl;&Shift;F +Toggle full-screen mode + + +Space +Toggle between the Horizontal and Equatorial Coordinate Systems + + +F1 +Open the &kstars; Handbook -Opening Tools +Opening Tools -&Ctrl;G -Open the Set Geographic Location window - - - -&Ctrl;C -Open the AstroCalculator - - - -&Ctrl;V -Open the AAVSO Lightcurve Generator - - - -&Ctrl;A -Open the Altitude vs. Time tool - - - -&Ctrl;U -Open the What's Up Tonight? tool - - - -&Ctrl;B -Open the Script Builder tool - - - -&Ctrl;Y -Open the Solar System Viewer - - - -&Ctrl;J -Open the Jupiter Moons tool +&Ctrl;G +Open the Set Geographic Location window + + + +&Ctrl;C +Open the AstroCalculator + + + +&Ctrl;V +Open the AAVSO Lightcurve Generator + + + +&Ctrl;A +Open the Altitude vs. Time tool + + + +&Ctrl;U +Open the What's Up Tonight? tool + + + +&Ctrl;B +Open the Script Builder tool + + + +&Ctrl;Y +Open the Solar System Viewer + + + +&Ctrl;J +Open the Jupiter Moons tool @@ -1761,133 +605,60 @@ -Mouse Commands -Commands -Mouse -Navigation Controls -Mouse +Mouse Commands +Commands +Mouse +Navigation Controls +Mouse -Moving the mouse -The sky coordinates (RA/Dec and Az/Alt) of the mouse cursor are updated in the status bar - - -"Hovering" the mouse -A temporary name label is attached to the object nearest to the mouse cursor. - - -Left-clicking +Moving the mouse +The sky coordinates (RA/Dec and Az/Alt) of the mouse cursor are updated in the status bar + + +"Hovering" the mouse +A temporary name label is attached to the object nearest to the mouse cursor. + + +Left-clicking -Objects in the Sky -Identifying -The object nearest the mouse click is identified in the status bar. - - -Double-clicking +Objects in the Sky +Identifying +The object nearest the mouse click is identified in the status bar. + + +Double-clicking -Objects in the Sky -Centring -Centre and track on the location or object nearest the mouse click. Double-clicking on an Info Box will shade it to show/hide extra information. - - -Right-clicking +Objects in the Sky +Centring +Centre and track on the location or object nearest the mouse click. Double-clicking on an Info Box will shade it to show/hide extra information. + + +Right-clicking -Objects in the Sky -Invoking Popup Menu for -Open the popup menu for the location or object nearest the mouse cursor. - - -Scrolling the mouse wheel -Zoom the display in or out. If you do not have a mouse wheel, you can hold the middle mouse button and drag vertically. - - -Click-and-dragging - +Objects in the Sky +Invoking Popup Menu for +Open the popup menu for the location or object nearest the mouse cursor. + + +Scrolling the mouse wheel +Zoom the display in or out. If you do not have a mouse wheel, you can hold the middle mouse button and drag vertically. + + +Click-and-dragging + - Dragging the sky map - Pan the display, following the drag motion. - &Ctrl;+dragging the sky map - Define a rectangle in the map. When the mouse button is released, the display is zoomed in to match the field-of-view to the bounds of the rectangle. - Dragging an Info Box - The Info Box is repositioned in the map. Info Boxes will stick to window edges, so that they remain on the edge when the window is resized. + Dragging the sky map + Pan the display, following the drag motion. + &Ctrl;+dragging the sky map + Define a rectangle in the map. When the mouse button is released, the display is zoomed in to match the field-of-view to the bounds of the rectangle. + Dragging an Info Box + The Info Box is repositioned in the map. Info Boxes will stick to window edges, so that they remain on the edge when the window is resized. - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/config.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/config.docbook index 00d23420ded..4d5300df447 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/config.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/config.docbook @@ -1,494 +1,154 @@ -Configuring &kstars; +Configuring &kstars; -Setting the Geographic Location +Setting the Geographic Location -Here is a screenshot of the Set Geographic Location window: -Changing the Geographic Location +Here is a screenshot of the Set Geographic Location window: +Changing the Geographic Location - Set Location Window + Set Location Window -There is a list of over 2500 predefined cities available to choose from. You set your location by highlighting a city from this list. Each city is represented in the world map as a small dot, and when a city is highlighted in the list, a red crosshairs appears on its location in the map. +There is a list of over 2500 predefined cities available to choose from. You set your location by highlighting a city from this list. Each city is represented in the world map as a small dot, and when a city is highlighted in the list, a red crosshairs appears on its location in the map. -Geographic Location Tool -Filtering -It is not practical to scroll through the full list of 2500 locations, looking for a specific city. To make searches easier, the list can be filtered by entering text in the boxes below the map. For example, in the screenshot, the text Ba appears in the City Filter box, while M has been entered in the Province Filter box, and USA is in the Country Filter box. Note that all of the cities displayed in the list have city, province and country names that begin with the entered filter strings, and that the message below the filter boxes indicates that 7 cities are matched by the filters. Also notice that the dots representing these seven cities in the map have been coloured white, while the unmatched cities remain grey. The list can also be filtered by location in the map. Clicking anywhere in the world map will show only those cities within two degrees of the clicked location. At this time, you can search by name, or by location, but not both at once. In other words, when you click on the map, the name filters are ignored, and vice versa. -Geographic Location Tool -Custom locations -The longitude, latitude and time zone information for the currently-selected location are displayed in the boxes at the bottom of the window. If you feel that any of these values are inaccurate, you can modify them and press the Add to List button to record your custom version of the location. You can also define a completely new location by pressing the Clear Fields button, and entering the data for the new location. Note that all fields except the optional State/Province must be filled before the new location can be added to the list. &kstars; will automatically load your custom locations for all future sessions. Please note, at this point, the only way to remove a custom location is to remove the appropriate line from the file ~/.trinity/share/apps/kstars/mycities.dat. If you add custom locations (or modify existing ones), please send us your mycities.dat file so that we can add your locations to the master list. +Geographic Location Tool +Filtering +It is not practical to scroll through the full list of 2500 locations, looking for a specific city. To make searches easier, the list can be filtered by entering text in the boxes below the map. For example, in the screenshot, the text Ba appears in the City Filter box, while M has been entered in the Province Filter box, and USA is in the Country Filter box. Note that all of the cities displayed in the list have city, province and country names that begin with the entered filter strings, and that the message below the filter boxes indicates that 7 cities are matched by the filters. Also notice that the dots representing these seven cities in the map have been coloured white, while the unmatched cities remain grey. The list can also be filtered by location in the map. Clicking anywhere in the world map will show only those cities within two degrees of the clicked location. At this time, you can search by name, or by location, but not both at once. In other words, when you click on the map, the name filters are ignored, and vice versa. +Geographic Location Tool +Custom locations +The longitude, latitude and time zone information for the currently-selected location are displayed in the boxes at the bottom of the window. If you feel that any of these values are inaccurate, you can modify them and press the Add to List button to record your custom version of the location. You can also define a completely new location by pressing the Clear Fields button, and entering the data for the new location. Note that all fields except the optional State/Province must be filled before the new location can be added to the list. &kstars; will automatically load your custom locations for all future sessions. Please note, at this point, the only way to remove a custom location is to remove the appropriate line from the file ~/.trinity/share/apps/kstars/mycities.dat. If you add custom locations (or modify existing ones), please send us your mycities.dat file so that we can add your locations to the master list. -Setting the Time +Setting the Time -Date and Time -The simulation clock -When &kstars; starts up, the time is set to your computer's system clock, and the &kstars; clock is running to keep up with the real time. If you want to stop the clock, select Stop Clock from the Time menu, or simply click on the Pause icon in the toolbar. You can make the clock run slower or faster than normal, or even make it run backward, using the time-step spinbox in the toolbar. This spinbox has two sets of up/down buttons. The first one will step through all 83 available time steps, one by one. The second one will skip to the next higher (or lower) unit of time, which allows you to make large timestep changes more quickly. +Date and Time +The simulation clock +When &kstars; starts up, the time is set to your computer's system clock, and the &kstars; clock is running to keep up with the real time. If you want to stop the clock, select Stop Clock from the Time menu, or simply click on the Pause icon in the toolbar. You can make the clock run slower or faster than normal, or even make it run backward, using the time-step spinbox in the toolbar. This spinbox has two sets of up/down buttons. The first one will step through all 83 available time steps, one by one. The second one will skip to the next higher (or lower) unit of time, which allows you to make large timestep changes more quickly. -Date and Time -Setting -You can set the time and date by selecting Set Time... from the Time menu, or by pressing the time icon in the toolbar. The Set Time window uses a standard &kde; Date Picker widget, coupled with three spinboxes for setting the hours, minutes and seconds. If you want to re-synchronise the simulation clock back to the current CPU time, just select Set Time to Now from the Time menu. +Date and Time +Setting +You can set the time and date by selecting Set Time... from the Time menu, or by pressing the time icon in the toolbar. The Set Time window uses a standard &kde; Date Picker widget, coupled with three spinboxes for setting the hours, minutes and seconds. If you want to re-synchronise the simulation clock back to the current CPU time, just select Set Time to Now from the Time menu. - -Date and Time -Extended range of dates -&kstars; can accept very remote dates beyond the usual limits imposed by QDate. Currently, you can set the date between the years -50000 and +50000. We may extend this range even further in future releases. However, please be aware that the accuracy of the simulation becomes more and more degraded as more remote dates are examined. This is especially true for the positions of solar system bodies. + +Date and Time +Extended range of dates +&kstars; can accept very remote dates beyond the usual limits imposed by QDate. Currently, you can set the date between the years -50000 and +50000. We may extend this range even further in future releases. However, please be aware that the accuracy of the simulation becomes more and more degraded as more remote dates are examined. This is especially true for the positions of solar system bodies. -The Configure &kstars; Window +The Configure &kstars; Window -Configure &kstars; window The Configure &kstars; window allows you to modify a wide range of display options. You can access the window with the configure toolbar icon, or by selecting Configure &kstars;... from the Settings menu. The window is depicted below: -Configure &kstars; Window +Configure &kstars; window The Configure &kstars; window allows you to modify a wide range of display options. You can access the window with the configure toolbar icon, or by selecting Configure &kstars;... from the Settings menu. The window is depicted below: +Configure &kstars; Window - Configure &kstars; Window + Configure &kstars; Window -The Configure &kstars; window is divided into five tabs: Catalogues, Guides, Solar System, Colours and Advanced. +The Configure &kstars; window is divided into five tabs: Catalogues, Guides, Solar System, Colours and Advanced. -Configure &kstars; window -Catalogues Tab -In the Catalogues tab, you determine which object catalogues are displayed in the map. The Stars section also allows you to set the faint magnitude limit for stars, and the magnitude limit for displaying the names and/or magnitudes of stars. Below the stars section, the Deep-Sky Objects section controls the display of several non-stellar object catalogues. By default, the list includes the Messier, NGC and IC catalogues. You can add your own custom object catalogues by pressing the Add Custom Catalog button. For detailed instructions on preparing a catalogue data file, see the README.customize file that ships with &kstars;. +Configure &kstars; window +Catalogues Tab +In the Catalogues tab, you determine which object catalogues are displayed in the map. The Stars section also allows you to set the faint magnitude limit for stars, and the magnitude limit for displaying the names and/or magnitudes of stars. Below the stars section, the Deep-Sky Objects section controls the display of several non-stellar object catalogues. By default, the list includes the Messier, NGC and IC catalogues. You can add your own custom object catalogues by pressing the Add Custom Catalog button. For detailed instructions on preparing a catalogue data file, see the README.customize file that ships with &kstars;. -Configure &kstars; window -Solar System Tab -In the Solar System tab, you can specify whether the Sun, Moon, planets, comets and asteroids are displayed, and whether the major bodies are drawn as coloured circles or actual images. You can also toggle whether solar system bodies have name labels attached, and control how many of the comets and asteroids get name labels. There is an option to automatically attach a temporary orbit trail whenever a solar system body is tracked, and another to toggle whether the colour of the orbit trail fades into the background sky colour. +Configure &kstars; window +Solar System Tab +In the Solar System tab, you can specify whether the Sun, Moon, planets, comets and asteroids are displayed, and whether the major bodies are drawn as coloured circles or actual images. You can also toggle whether solar system bodies have name labels attached, and control how many of the comets and asteroids get name labels. There is an option to automatically attach a temporary orbit trail whenever a solar system body is tracked, and another to toggle whether the colour of the orbit trail fades into the background sky colour. -Configure &kstars; window -Guides Tab -The Guides tab lets you toggle whether non-objects are displayed (&ie;, constellation lines, constellation names, the Milky Way contour, the celestial equator, the ecliptic, the horizon line, and the opaque ground). You can also choose whether you would like to see Latin constellation names, IAU-standard three-letter abbreviations, or constellation names using your local language. +Configure &kstars; window +Guides Tab +The Guides tab lets you toggle whether non-objects are displayed (&ie;, constellation lines, constellation names, the Milky Way contour, the celestial equator, the ecliptic, the horizon line, and the opaque ground). You can also choose whether you would like to see Latin constellation names, IAU-standard three-letter abbreviations, or constellation names using your local language. -Configure &kstars; window -Colours Tab -Colour Schemes -Customising -The Colours tab allows you to set the colour scheme, and to define custom colour schemes. The tab is split into two panels: -The left panel shows a list of all display items with adjustable colours. Click on any item to bring up a colour selection window to adjust its colour. Below the list is the Star Colour Mode selection box. By default, &kstars; draws stars with a realistic colour tint according to the spectral type of the star. However, you may also choose to draw the stars as solid white, black or red circles. If you are using the realistic star colours, you can set the saturation level of the star colours with the Star Colour Intensity spinbox. -The right panel lists the defined colour schemes. There are four predefined schemes: the Default scheme, Star Chart, which uses black stars on a white background, Night Vision, which uses only shades of red in order to protect dark-adapted vision, and Moonless Night, a more realistic, dark theme. Additionally, you can save the current colour settings as a custom scheme by clicking the Save Current Colors button. It will prompt you for a name for the new scheme, and then your scheme will appear in the list in all future &kstars; sessions. To remove a custom scheme, simply highlight it in the list, and press the Remove Colour Scheme button. -Configure &kstars; window -Advanced Tab -The Advanced Tab provides fine-grained control over the more subtle behaviours of &kstars;. -Atmospheric Refraction The Correct for atmospheric refraction checkbox controls whether the positions of objects are corrected for the effects of the atmosphere. Because the atmosphere is a spherical shell, light from outer space is bent as it passes through the atmosphere to our telescopes or eyes on the Earth's surface. The effect is largest for objects near the horizon, and actually changes the predicted rise or set times of objects by a few minutes. In fact, when you see a sunset, the Sun's actual position is already well below the horizon; atmospheric refraction makes it seem as if the Sun is still in the sky. Note that atmospheric refraction is never applied if you are using Equatorial coordinates. -Animated Slewing The Use animating slewing checkbox controls how the display changes when a new focus position is selected in the map. By default, you will see the sky drift or slew to the new position; if you untick this option, then the display will instead snap immediately to the new focus position. -Objects in the Sky -Labelling -Automatic +Configure &kstars; window +Colours Tab +Colour Schemes +Customising +The Colours tab allows you to set the colour scheme, and to define custom colour schemes. The tab is split into two panels: +The left panel shows a list of all display items with adjustable colours. Click on any item to bring up a colour selection window to adjust its colour. Below the list is the Star Colour Mode selection box. By default, &kstars; draws stars with a realistic colour tint according to the spectral type of the star. However, you may also choose to draw the stars as solid white, black or red circles. If you are using the realistic star colours, you can set the saturation level of the star colours with the Star Colour Intensity spinbox. +The right panel lists the defined colour schemes. There are four predefined schemes: the Default scheme, Star Chart, which uses black stars on a white background, Night Vision, which uses only shades of red in order to protect dark-adapted vision, and Moonless Night, a more realistic, dark theme. Additionally, you can save the current colour settings as a custom scheme by clicking the Save Current Colors button. It will prompt you for a name for the new scheme, and then your scheme will appear in the list in all future &kstars; sessions. To remove a custom scheme, simply highlight it in the list, and press the Remove Colour Scheme button. +Configure &kstars; window +Advanced Tab +The Advanced Tab provides fine-grained control over the more subtle behaviours of &kstars;. +Atmospheric Refraction The Correct for atmospheric refraction checkbox controls whether the positions of objects are corrected for the effects of the atmosphere. Because the atmosphere is a spherical shell, light from outer space is bent as it passes through the atmosphere to our telescopes or eyes on the Earth's surface. The effect is largest for objects near the horizon, and actually changes the predicted rise or set times of objects by a few minutes. In fact, when you see a sunset, the Sun's actual position is already well below the horizon; atmospheric refraction makes it seem as if the Sun is still in the sky. Note that atmospheric refraction is never applied if you are using Equatorial coordinates. +Animated Slewing The Use animating slewing checkbox controls how the display changes when a new focus position is selected in the map. By default, you will see the sky drift or slew to the new position; if you untick this option, then the display will instead snap immediately to the new focus position. +Objects in the Sky +Labelling +Automatic -If the Attach label to centred object checkbox is selected, then a name label will automatically be attached to an object when it is being tracked by the program. The label will be removed when the object is no longer being tracked. Note that you can also manually attach a persistent name label to any object with its popup menu. -Objects in the Sky -Hiding -There are three situations when &kstars; must redraw the sky display very rapidly: when a new focus position is selected (and Use animated slewing is checked), when the sky is dragged with the mouse, and when the time step is large. In these situations, the positions of all objects must be recomputed as rapidly as possible, which can put a large load on the CPU. If the CPU cannot keep up with the demand, then the display will seem sluggish or jerky. To mitigate this, &kstars; will hide certain objects during these rapid-redraw situations, as long as the Hide objects while moving checkbox is selected. The timestep threshold above which objects will be hidden is determined by the Also hide if timescale greater than: timestep-spinbox. You can specify the objects that should be hidden in the Configure Hidden Objects group box. +If the Attach label to centred object checkbox is selected, then a name label will automatically be attached to an object when it is being tracked by the program. The label will be removed when the object is no longer being tracked. Note that you can also manually attach a persistent name label to any object with its popup menu. +Objects in the Sky +Hiding +There are three situations when &kstars; must redraw the sky display very rapidly: when a new focus position is selected (and Use animated slewing is checked), when the sky is dragged with the mouse, and when the time step is large. In these situations, the positions of all objects must be recomputed as rapidly as possible, which can put a large load on the CPU. If the CPU cannot keep up with the demand, then the display will seem sluggish or jerky. To mitigate this, &kstars; will hide certain objects during these rapid-redraw situations, as long as the Hide objects while moving checkbox is selected. The timestep threshold above which objects will be hidden is determined by the Also hide if timescale greater than: timestep-spinbox. You can specify the objects that should be hidden in the Configure Hidden Objects group box. -Customising the Display +Customising the Display -There are several ways to modify the display to your liking. +There are several ways to modify the display to your liking. - -Colour SchemesSelecting -Select a different colour scheme in the SettingsColour Schemes menu. There are four predefined colour schemes, and you can define your own in the Configure &kstars; window. - -Toolbars -Customising -Toggle whether the Toolbars are drawn in the SettingsToolbars menu. Like most KDE toolbars, they can also be dragged around and anchored on any window edge, or even detached from the window completely. - -Info BoxesCustomising -Info BoxesShading -Toggle whether the Info Boxes are drawn in the SettingsInfo Boxes menu. In addition, you can manipulate the three Info Boxes with the mouse. Each box has additional lines of data that are hidden by default. You can toggle whether these additional lines are visible by double-clicking a box to shade it. Also, you can reposition a box by dragging it with the mouse. When a box hits a window edge, it will stick to the edge when the window is resized. + +Colour SchemesSelecting +Select a different colour scheme in the SettingsColour Schemes menu. There are four predefined colour schemes, and you can define your own in the Configure &kstars; window. + +Toolbars +Customising +Toggle whether the Toolbars are drawn in the SettingsToolbars menu. Like most KDE toolbars, they can also be dragged around and anchored on any window edge, or even detached from the window completely. + +Info BoxesCustomising +Info BoxesShading +Toggle whether the Info Boxes are drawn in the SettingsInfo Boxes menu. In addition, you can manipulate the three Info Boxes with the mouse. Each box has additional lines of data that are hidden by default. You can toggle whether these additional lines are visible by double-clicking a box to shade it. Also, you can reposition a box by dragging it with the mouse. When a box hits a window edge, it will stick to the edge when the window is resized. -Field-of-View SymbolsDescription -Choose an FOV Symbol using the SettingsFOV Symbols menu. FOV is an acronym for field-of-view. An FOV symbol is drawn at the centre of the window to indicate where the display is pointing. Different symbols have different angular sizes; you can use a symbol to show what the view through a particular telescope would look like. For example, if you choose the 7x35 Binoculars FOV symbol, then a circle is drawn on the display that is 9.2 degrees in diameter; this is the field-of-view for 7x35 binoculars. +Field-of-View SymbolsDescription +Choose an FOV Symbol using the SettingsFOV Symbols menu. FOV is an acronym for field-of-view. An FOV symbol is drawn at the centre of the window to indicate where the display is pointing. Different symbols have different angular sizes; you can use a symbol to show what the view through a particular telescope would look like. For example, if you choose the 7x35 Binoculars FOV symbol, then a circle is drawn on the display that is 9.2 degrees in diameter; this is the field-of-view for 7x35 binoculars. -Field-of-View SymbolsCustomising -You can define your own FOV symbols (or modify the existing symbols) using the Edit FOV Symbols... menu item, which launches the FOV Editor: +Field-of-View SymbolsCustomising +You can define your own FOV symbols (or modify the existing symbols) using the Edit FOV Symbols... menu item, which launches the FOV Editor: -Field-of-View Symbols Editor +Field-of-View Symbols Editor - FOV Symbol Editor + FOV Symbol Editor -The list of defined FOV symbols is displayed on the left. On the right are buttons for adding a new symbol, editing the highlighted symbol's properties, and removing the highlighted symbol from the list. Note that you can even modify or remove the four predefined symbols (if you remove all symbols, the four defaults will be restored the next time you start &kstars;). Below these three buttons is a graphical preview display showing the highlighted symbol from the list. When the New... or Edit... button is pressed, the New FOV Symbol window is opened: +The list of defined FOV symbols is displayed on the left. On the right are buttons for adding a new symbol, editing the highlighted symbol's properties, and removing the highlighted symbol from the list. Note that you can even modify or remove the four predefined symbols (if you remove all symbols, the four defaults will be restored the next time you start &kstars;). Below these three buttons is a graphical preview display showing the highlighted symbol from the list. When the New... or Edit... button is pressed, the New FOV Symbol window is opened: -New Field-of-View Symbol +New Field-of-View Symbol - New FOV Symbol + New FOV Symbol -Field-of-View SymbolsDefining New -This window lets you modify the four properties that define a FOV symbol: name, size, shape and colour. The angular size for the symbol can either be entered directly in the Field of View edit box, or you can use the Eyepiece/Camera Tabs to calculate the field-of-view angle, given parameters of your telescope/eyepiece or telescope/camera setup. The four available shapes are: Circle, Square, Crosshairs, and Bullseye. Once you have specified all four parameters, press Ok, and the symbol will appear in the list of defined symbols. It will also be available from the Settings | FOV menu. +Field-of-View SymbolsDefining New +This window lets you modify the four properties that define a FOV symbol: name, size, shape and colour. The angular size for the symbol can either be entered directly in the Field of View edit box, or you can use the Eyepiece/Camera Tabs to calculate the field-of-view angle, given parameters of your telescope/eyepiece or telescope/camera setup. The four available shapes are: Circle, Square, Crosshairs, and Bullseye. Once you have specified all four parameters, press Ok, and the symbol will appear in the list of defined symbols. It will also be available from the Settings | FOV menu. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cpoles.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cpoles.docbook index 062494cefea..cef6911fc82 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cpoles.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/cpoles.docbook @@ -1,64 +1,14 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -The Celestial Poles -Celestial Poles -Equatorial Coordinates +The Celestial Poles +Celestial Poles +Equatorial Coordinates -The sky appears to drift overhead from east to west, completing a full circuit around the sky in 24 (Sidereal) hours. This phenomenon is due to the spinning of the Earth on its axis. The Earth's spin axis intersects the Celestial Sphere at two points. These points are the Celestial Poles. As the Earth spins; they remain fixed in the sky, and all other points seem to rotate around them. The celestial poles are also the poles of the Equatorial Coordinate System, meaning they have Declinations of +90 degrees and -90 degrees (for the North and South celestial poles, respectively). The North Celestial Pole currently has nearly the same coordinates as the bright star Polaris (which is Latin for Pole Star). This makes Polaris useful for navigation: not only is it always above the North point of the horizon, but its Altitude angle is always (nearly) equal to the observer's Geographic Latitude (however, Polaris can only be seen from locations in the Northern hemisphere). The fact that Polaris is near the pole is purely a coincidence. In fact, because of Precession, Polaris is only near the pole for a small fraction of the time. +The sky appears to drift overhead from east to west, completing a full circuit around the sky in 24 (Sidereal) hours. This phenomenon is due to the spinning of the Earth on its axis. The Earth's spin axis intersects the Celestial Sphere at two points. These points are the Celestial Poles. As the Earth spins; they remain fixed in the sky, and all other points seem to rotate around them. The celestial poles are also the poles of the Equatorial Coordinate System, meaning they have Declinations of +90 degrees and -90 degrees (for the North and South celestial poles, respectively). The North Celestial Pole currently has nearly the same coordinates as the bright star Polaris (which is Latin for Pole Star). This makes Polaris useful for navigation: not only is it always above the North point of the horizon, but its Altitude angle is always (nearly) equal to the observer's Geographic Latitude (however, Polaris can only be seen from locations in the Northern hemisphere). The fact that Polaris is near the pole is purely a coincidence. In fact, because of Precession, Polaris is only near the pole for a small fraction of the time. -Exercises: -Use the Find Object window (&Ctrl;F) to locate Polaris. Notice that its Declination is almost (but not exactly) +90 degrees. Compare the Altitude reading when focused on Polaris to your location's geographic latitude. They are always within one degree of each other. They are not exactly the same because Polaris isn't exactly at the Pole. (you can point exactly at the pole by switching to Equatorial coordinates, and pressing the up-arrow key until the sky stops scrolling). Use the Time Step spinbox in the toolbar to accelerate time to a step of 100 seconds. You can see the entire sky appears to rotate around Polaris, while Polaris itself remains nearly stationary. We said that the celestial pole is the pole of the Equatorial coordinate system. What do you think is the pole of the horizontal (Altitude/Azimuth) coordinate system? (The Zenith). +Exercises: +Use the Find Object window (&Ctrl;F) to locate Polaris. Notice that its Declination is almost (but not exactly) +90 degrees. Compare the Altitude reading when focused on Polaris to your location's geographic latitude. They are always within one degree of each other. They are not exactly the same because Polaris isn't exactly at the Pole. (you can point exactly at the pole by switching to Equatorial coordinates, and pressing the up-arrow key until the sky stops scrolling). Use the Time Step spinbox in the toolbar to accelerate time to a step of 100 seconds. You can see the entire sky appears to rotate around Polaris, while Polaris itself remains nearly stationary. We said that the celestial pole is the pole of the Equatorial coordinate system. What do you think is the pole of the horizontal (Altitude/Azimuth) coordinate system? (The Zenith). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/credits.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/credits.docbook index ee7bded9340..2ef8ce2824a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/credits.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/credits.docbook @@ -1,111 +1,45 @@ -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kstars; -Program copyright 2001-2003 The &kstars; Team kstars@30doradus.org +&kstars; +Program copyright 2001-2003 The &kstars; Team kstars@30doradus.org -The &kstars; Team: -Jason Harris kstars@30doradus.org +The &kstars; Team: +Jason Harris kstars@30doradus.org -Jasem Mutlaq mutlaqja@ku.edu +Jasem Mutlaq mutlaqja@ku.edu -Pablo de Vicente pvicentea@wanadoo.es +Pablo de Vicente pvicentea@wanadoo.es -Heiko Evermann heiko@evermann.de +Heiko Evermann heiko@evermann.de -Thomas Kabelmann tk78@gmx.de +Thomas Kabelmann tk78@gmx.de -Mark Hollomon mhh@mindspring.com +Mark Hollomon mhh@mindspring.com -Carsten Niehaus cniehaus@gmx.de +Carsten Niehaus cniehaus@gmx.de -Data Sources: +Data Sources: -Object catalogues and planet position tables: NASA Astronomical Data Center +Object catalogues and planet position tables: NASA Astronomical Data Center -Detailed credit information for all of the images used in the program is presented in the file README.images +Detailed credit information for all of the images used in the program is presented in the file README.images -References: -Practical Astronomy With Your Calculator by Peter Duffet-Smith -Astronomical Algorithms by Jean Meeus +References: +Practical Astronomy With Your Calculator by Peter Duffet-Smith +Astronomical Algorithms by Jean Meeus -Special thanks: To the &kde; and &Qt; developers for providing the world with a peerless set of free API libraries. To the KDevelop team, for their excellent IDE, which made developing &kstars; so much easier and more fun. To everyone on the KDevelop message board, the &kde; mailing lists, and on irc.kde.org, for answering our frequent questions. Thank you to Anne-Marie Mahfouf, for inviting &kstars; to join the &kde;-Edu module. Finally, thanks to everyone who has submitted bug reports and other feedback. Thank you, everyone. +Special thanks: To the &kde; and &Qt; developers for providing the world with a peerless set of free API libraries. To the KDevelop team, for their excellent IDE, which made developing &kstars; so much easier and more fun. To everyone on the KDevelop message board, the &kde; mailing lists, and on irc.kde.org, for answering our frequent questions. Thank you to Anne-Marie Mahfouf, for inviting &kstars; to join the &kde;-Edu module. Finally, thanks to everyone who has submitted bug reports and other feedback. Thank you, everyone. -Documentation copyright 2001-2003 Jason Harris and the KStars Team kstars@30doradus.org +Documentation copyright 2001-2003 Jason Harris and the KStars Team kstars@30doradus.org -Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk +Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/csphere.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/csphere.docbook index 9237efa55e7..c953ad8f3f9 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/csphere.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/csphere.docbook @@ -1,28 +1,10 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -The Celestial Sphere -Celestial Sphere -Celestial Coordinate Systems +The Celestial Sphere +Celestial Sphere +Celestial Coordinate Systems -The celestial sphere is an imaginary sphere of gigantic radius, centred on the Earth. All objects which can be seen in the sky can be thought of as lying on the surface of this sphere. Of course, we know that the objects in the sky are not on the surface of a sphere centred on the Earth, so why bother with such a construct? Everything we see in the sky is so very far away, that their distances are impossible to gauge just by looking at them. Since their distances are indeterminate, you only need to know the direction toward the object to locate it in the sky. In this sense, the celestial sphere model is a very practical model for mapping the sky. The directions toward various objects in the sky can be quantified by constructing a Celestial Coordinate System. +The celestial sphere is an imaginary sphere of gigantic radius, centred on the Earth. All objects which can be seen in the sky can be thought of as lying on the surface of this sphere. Of course, we know that the objects in the sky are not on the surface of a sphere centred on the Earth, so why bother with such a construct? Everything we see in the sky is so very far away, that their distances are impossible to gauge just by looking at them. Since their distances are indeterminate, you only need to know the direction toward the object to locate it in the sky. In this sense, the celestial sphere model is a very practical model for mapping the sky. The directions toward various objects in the sky can be quantified by constructing a Celestial Coordinate System. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/darkmatter.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/darkmatter.docbook index 688ca6eb6a1..e52105623b4 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/darkmatter.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/darkmatter.docbook @@ -1,86 +1,34 @@ -Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu -
 +Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu +
 -Dark Matter -Dark Matter +Dark Matter +Dark Matter -Scientists are now quite comfortable with the idea that 90% of the mass is the universe is in a form of matter that cannot be seen. +Scientists are now quite comfortable with the idea that 90% of the mass is the universe is in a form of matter that cannot be seen. -Despite comprehensive maps of the nearby universe that cover the spectrum from radio to gamma rays, we are only able to account of 10% of the mass that must be out there. As Bruce H. Margon, an astronomer at the University of Washington, told the New York Times in 2001: It's a fairly embarrassing situation to admit that we can't find 90 percent of the universe. +Despite comprehensive maps of the nearby universe that cover the spectrum from radio to gamma rays, we are only able to account of 10% of the mass that must be out there. As Bruce H. Margon, an astronomer at the University of Washington, told the New York Times in 2001: It's a fairly embarrassing situation to admit that we can't find 90 percent of the universe. -The term given this missing mass is Dark Matter, and those two words pretty well sum up everything we know about it at this point. We know there is Matter, because we can see the effects of its gravitational influence. However, the matter emits no detectable electromagnetic radiation at all, hence it is Dark. There exist several theories to account for the missing mass ranging from exotic subatomic particles, to a population of isolated black holes, to less exotic brown and white dwarfs. The term missing mass might be misleading, since the mass itself is not missing, just its light. But what is exactly dark matter and how do we really know it exists, if we cannot see it? +The term given this missing mass is Dark Matter, and those two words pretty well sum up everything we know about it at this point. We know there is Matter, because we can see the effects of its gravitational influence. However, the matter emits no detectable electromagnetic radiation at all, hence it is Dark. There exist several theories to account for the missing mass ranging from exotic subatomic particles, to a population of isolated black holes, to less exotic brown and white dwarfs. The term missing mass might be misleading, since the mass itself is not missing, just its light. But what is exactly dark matter and how do we really know it exists, if we cannot see it? -The story began in 1933 when Astronomer Fritz Zwicky was studying the motions of distant and massive clusters of galaxies, specifically the Coma cluster and the Virgo cluster. Zwicky estimated the mass of each galaxy in the cluster based on their luminosity, and added up all of the galaxy masses to get a total cluster mass. He then made a second, independent estimate of the cluster mass, based on measuring the spread in velocities of the individual galaxies in the cluster. To his suprise, this second dynamical mass estimate was 400 times larger than the estimate based on the galaxy light. +The story began in 1933 when Astronomer Fritz Zwicky was studying the motions of distant and massive clusters of galaxies, specifically the Coma cluster and the Virgo cluster. Zwicky estimated the mass of each galaxy in the cluster based on their luminosity, and added up all of the galaxy masses to get a total cluster mass. He then made a second, independent estimate of the cluster mass, based on measuring the spread in velocities of the individual galaxies in the cluster. To his suprise, this second dynamical mass estimate was 400 times larger than the estimate based on the galaxy light. -Although the evidence was strong at Zwicky's time, it was not until the 1970s that scientists began to explore this discrepancy comprehensively. It was at this time that the existence of Dark Matter began to be taken seriously. The existence of such matter would not only resolve the mass deficit in galaxy clusters; it would also have far more reaching consequences for the evolution and fate of the universe itself. +Although the evidence was strong at Zwicky's time, it was not until the 1970s that scientists began to explore this discrepancy comprehensively. It was at this time that the existence of Dark Matter began to be taken seriously. The existence of such matter would not only resolve the mass deficit in galaxy clusters; it would also have far more reaching consequences for the evolution and fate of the universe itself. -Another phenomenon that suggested the need for dark matter is the rotational curves of Spiral Galaxies. Spiral Galaxies contain a large population of stars that orbit the Galactic centre on nearly circular orbits, much like planets orbit a star. Like planetary orbits, stars with larger galactic orbits are expected to have slower orbital speeds (this is just a statement of Kepler's 3rd Law). Actually, Kepler's 3rd Law only applies to stars near the perimeter of a Spiral Galaxy, because it assumes the mass enclosed by the orbit to be constant. +Another phenomenon that suggested the need for dark matter is the rotational curves of Spiral Galaxies. Spiral Galaxies contain a large population of stars that orbit the Galactic centre on nearly circular orbits, much like planets orbit a star. Like planetary orbits, stars with larger galactic orbits are expected to have slower orbital speeds (this is just a statement of Kepler's 3rd Law). Actually, Kepler's 3rd Law only applies to stars near the perimeter of a Spiral Galaxy, because it assumes the mass enclosed by the orbit to be constant. -However, astronomers have made observations of the orbital speeds of stars in the outer parts of a large number of spiral galaxies, and none of them follow Kepler's 3rd Law as expected. Instead of falling off at larger radii, the orbital speeds remain remarkably constant. The implication is that the mass enclosed by larger-radius orbits increases, even for stars that are apparently near the edge of the galaxy. While they are near the edge of the luminous part of the galaxy, the galaxy has a mass profile that apparently continues well beyond the regions occupied by stars. +However, astronomers have made observations of the orbital speeds of stars in the outer parts of a large number of spiral galaxies, and none of them follow Kepler's 3rd Law as expected. Instead of falling off at larger radii, the orbital speeds remain remarkably constant. The implication is that the mass enclosed by larger-radius orbits increases, even for stars that are apparently near the edge of the galaxy. While they are near the edge of the luminous part of the galaxy, the galaxy has a mass profile that apparently continues well beyond the regions occupied by stars. -Here is another way to think about it: Consider the stars near the perimeter of a spiral galaxy, with typical observed orbital velocities of 200 kilometers per second. If the galaxy consisted of only the matter that we can see, these stars would very quickly fly off from the galaxy, because their orbital speeds are four times larger than the galaxy's escape velocity. Since galaxies are not seen to be spinning apart, there must be mass in the galaxy that we are not accounting for when we add up all the parts we can see. +Here is another way to think about it: Consider the stars near the perimeter of a spiral galaxy, with typical observed orbital velocities of 200 kilometers per second. If the galaxy consisted of only the matter that we can see, these stars would very quickly fly off from the galaxy, because their orbital speeds are four times larger than the galaxy's escape velocity. Since galaxies are not seen to be spinning apart, there must be mass in the galaxy that we are not accounting for when we add up all the parts we can see. -Several theories have surfaced in literature to account for the missing mass such as WIMPs (Weakly Interacting Massive Particles), MACHOs (MAssive Compact Halo Objects), primordial black holes, massive neutrinos, and others; each with their pros and cons. No single theory has yet been accepted by the astronomical community, because we so far lack the means to conclusively test one theory against the other. +Several theories have surfaced in literature to account for the missing mass such as WIMPs (Weakly Interacting Massive Particles), MACHOs (MAssive Compact Halo Objects), primordial black holes, massive neutrinos, and others; each with their pros and cons. No single theory has yet been accepted by the astronomical community, because we so far lack the means to conclusively test one theory against the other. -You can see the galaxy clusters that Professor Zwicky studied to discover Dark Matter. Use the &kstars; Find Object Window (&Ctrl;F) to centre on M 87 to find the Virgo Cluster, and on NGC 4884 to find the Coma Cluster. You may have to zoom in to see the galaxies. Note that the Virgo Cluster appears to be much larger on the sky. In reality, Coma is the larger cluster; it only appears smaller because it is further away. +You can see the galaxy clusters that Professor Zwicky studied to discover Dark Matter. Use the &kstars; Find Object Window (&Ctrl;F) to centre on M 87 to find the Virgo Cluster, and on NGC 4884 to find the Coma Cluster. You may have to zoom in to see the galaxies. Note that the Virgo Cluster appears to be much larger on the sky. In reality, Coma is the larger cluster; it only appears smaller because it is further away. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dcop.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dcop.docbook index ffae09c3af5..e70a31da1da 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dcop.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dcop.docbook @@ -1,173 +1,54 @@ -Scripting KStars: The DCOP Interface -One of the goals of &kstars; is to provide the ability to playback complicated behaviours from a script. This will allow you to create virtual tours of the heavens, and will enable teachers to construct classroom demos to illustrate certain astronomical concepts. It is already possible to write such scripts for &kstars;, although not all of the desired functions have been included. Also, while we will eventually have a GUI-based script builder tool, the scripts must currently be written by hand. This chapter will explain how to write &kstars; scripts. -The &kde; architecture provides the necessary framework for scriptable applications via the DCOP interface. DCOP stands for Desktop Communication Protocol; through DCOP, &kde; applications can be controlled by other applications, from a terminal prompt, or through a text script. +Scripting KStars: The DCOP Interface +One of the goals of &kstars; is to provide the ability to playback complicated behaviours from a script. This will allow you to create virtual tours of the heavens, and will enable teachers to construct classroom demos to illustrate certain astronomical concepts. It is already possible to write such scripts for &kstars;, although not all of the desired functions have been included. Also, while we will eventually have a GUI-based script builder tool, the scripts must currently be written by hand. This chapter will explain how to write &kstars; scripts. +The &kde; architecture provides the necessary framework for scriptable applications via the DCOP interface. DCOP stands for Desktop Communication Protocol; through DCOP, &kde; applications can be controlled by other applications, from a terminal prompt, or through a text script. -DCOP Functions -The &kstars; DCOP Interface includes the following functions: - lookTowards( const QString direction ): Point the display focus in a direction specified by the argument. This can be the name of any object in the sky, or one of the following directional words or abbreviations: zenith (or z), north (n), northeast (ne), east (e), southeast (se), south (s), southwest(sw), west(w), northwest (nw). - - setRaDec( double ra, double dec ): Point the display focus at the specified equatorial coordinates. - - setAltAz(double alt, double az): Point the display focus at the specified horizontal coordinates. - - zoomIn(): Increase the display's Zoom level. - - zoomOut(): Decrease the display's Zoom level. - - defaultZoom(): Reset the display to Zoom level = 3 (the default). - - setLocalTime(int yr, int mth, int day, int hr, int min, int sec): Set the simulation clock to the specified date and time. - - waitFor( double t ): Pause for t seconds before continuing with subsequent script commands. - - waitForKey( const QString k ): Halt the script execution until the user presses the specified key. At this point, you cannot specify combination keystrokes (such as &Ctrl;C); just use simple keys. You can type space to indicate the spacebar. - - setTracking( bool track ): Toggle whether tracking mode is engaged. - - changeViewOption( const QString option, const QString value ): Adjust a view option. There are dozens and dozens of options available; basically everything you can change in the Configure &kstars; Window can be changed here as well. The first argument is the name of the option (the names are taken from the kstarsrc configuration file), and the second argument is the desired value. The argument parser is designed to be robust, so if you accidentally send it bad data it should fail gracefully. - - setGeoLocation( const QString city, const QString province, const QString country ): Change the observing location to the specified city. If no city matching the argument strings is found, then nothing happens. - - stop() [clock]: Halt the simulation clock. - - start() [clock]: Start the simulation clock. - - setScale(float s) [clock]: Set the rate of the simulation clock. s=1.0 corresponds to real time; 2.0 is twice as fast as real-time, etc. +DCOP Functions +The &kstars; DCOP Interface includes the following functions: + lookTowards( const QString direction ): Point the display focus in a direction specified by the argument. This can be the name of any object in the sky, or one of the following directional words or abbreviations: zenith (or z), north (n), northeast (ne), east (e), southeast (se), south (s), southwest(sw), west(w), northwest (nw). + + setRaDec( double ra, double dec ): Point the display focus at the specified equatorial coordinates. + + setAltAz(double alt, double az): Point the display focus at the specified horizontal coordinates. + + zoomIn(): Increase the display's Zoom level. + + zoomOut(): Decrease the display's Zoom level. + + defaultZoom(): Reset the display to Zoom level = 3 (the default). + + setLocalTime(int yr, int mth, int day, int hr, int min, int sec): Set the simulation clock to the specified date and time. + + waitFor( double t ): Pause for t seconds before continuing with subsequent script commands. + + waitForKey( const QString k ): Halt the script execution until the user presses the specified key. At this point, you cannot specify combination keystrokes (such as &Ctrl;C); just use simple keys. You can type space to indicate the spacebar. + + setTracking( bool track ): Toggle whether tracking mode is engaged. + + changeViewOption( const QString option, const QString value ): Adjust a view option. There are dozens and dozens of options available; basically everything you can change in the Configure &kstars; Window can be changed here as well. The first argument is the name of the option (the names are taken from the kstarsrc configuration file), and the second argument is the desired value. The argument parser is designed to be robust, so if you accidentally send it bad data it should fail gracefully. + + setGeoLocation( const QString city, const QString province, const QString country ): Change the observing location to the specified city. If no city matching the argument strings is found, then nothing happens. + + stop() [clock]: Halt the simulation clock. + + start() [clock]: Start the simulation clock. + + setScale(float s) [clock]: Set the rate of the simulation clock. s=1.0 corresponds to real time; 2.0 is twice as fast as real-time, etc. -Testing the DCOP Functions -You can try out the DCOP functions very easily using the kdcop program. When you run kdcop, you will see a tree-list of all running programs; if &kstars; is running it will be listed. Most of the DCOP functions are listed under the KStarsInterface heading, but the clock functions are listed under clock. Double-click on any function to execute it. If the function requires arguments, a window will open in which you can input the values. +Testing the DCOP Functions +You can try out the DCOP functions very easily using the kdcop program. When you run kdcop, you will see a tree-list of all running programs; if &kstars; is running it will be listed. Most of the DCOP functions are listed under the KStarsInterface heading, but the clock functions are listed under clock. Double-click on any function to execute it. If the function requires arguments, a window will open in which you can input the values. -Writing a DCOP Script -DCOP functions can also be called from the UNIX command line, and these can be encapsulated in a script. We will create an example script that switches to Equatorial coordinates, points the display at the Moon, zooms in a bit, and accelerates the clock to 1 hour per second. After tracking the Moon for 20 seconds, the clock is paused and the display zooms out. You can use this script as a template for making new scripts. I will list the entire script first, and then explain its various parts. +Writing a DCOP Script +DCOP functions can also be called from the UNIX command line, and these can be encapsulated in a script. We will create an example script that switches to Equatorial coordinates, points the display at the Moon, zooms in a bit, and accelerates the clock to 1 hour per second. After tracking the Moon for 20 seconds, the clock is paused and the display zooms out. You can use this script as a template for making new scripts. I will list the entire script first, and then explain its various parts. -#!/bin/bash +#!/bin/bash #KStars script: Track the Moon! # KSTARS=`dcopfind -a 'kstars*'` @@ -189,60 +70,10 @@ dcop $KSTARS $MAIN defaultZoom ## -Save this script to a file. The filename can be anything you like; I suggest something descriptive like trackmoon.kstars. Then type the following command to make the script executable: chmod trackmoon.kstars . The script can then be executed at any time by typing ./trackmoon.kstars in the folder which contains the script. Note that the script will only work if an instance of &kstars; is already running. You can use the dcopstart command in a script to launch a new instance &kstars;. -Now to the explanation of the script. The top line identifies the file as a BASH shell script. The following two lines are comments (any line beginning with # is a comment, and is ignored by the shell). The next three lines define some convenience variables that will be used later. The KSTARS variable identifies the currently-running &kstars; process, using the dcopfind command. MAIN and CLOCK identify the two DCOP interfaces associated with &kstars;. -The remainder of the script is the actual list of DCOP calls. The first command sets the display to use Equatorial coordinates by setting the UseAltAz option to false (again, you can see a list of all options that changeViewOption can use by examining your kstarsrc configuration file). The next command centres the display on the Moon, and automatically engages tracking. We then set the default zoom level, and then zoom in five times. Next, the clock's timescale is set to 1 hour per second (3600 seconds is one hour), and the clock is started (in case it was not already running). The next line pauses the script for 20 seconds while we track the Moon as it moves across the sky. Finally, we stop the clock and reset the zoom level to its default setting. -We hope you enjoy the scripting abilities of KStars. If you create an interesting script, please email it to kstars@30doradus.org; we would like to see what you have done, and may post some scripts on our webpage. Also, if you have any ideas for how to improve scripting (or any part of &kstars;), let us know at kstars-devel@lists.sourceforge.net or submit a wishlist item to bugzilla. +Save this script to a file. The filename can be anything you like; I suggest something descriptive like trackmoon.kstars. Then type the following command to make the script executable: chmod trackmoon.kstars . The script can then be executed at any time by typing ./trackmoon.kstars in the folder which contains the script. Note that the script will only work if an instance of &kstars; is already running. You can use the dcopstart command in a script to launch a new instance &kstars;. +Now to the explanation of the script. The top line identifies the file as a BASH shell script. The following two lines are comments (any line beginning with # is a comment, and is ignored by the shell). The next three lines define some convenience variables that will be used later. The KSTARS variable identifies the currently-running &kstars; process, using the dcopfind command. MAIN and CLOCK identify the two DCOP interfaces associated with &kstars;. +The remainder of the script is the actual list of DCOP calls. The first command sets the display to use Equatorial coordinates by setting the UseAltAz option to false (again, you can see a list of all options that changeViewOption can use by examining your kstarsrc configuration file). The next command centres the display on the Moon, and automatically engages tracking. We then set the default zoom level, and then zoom in five times. Next, the clock's timescale is set to 1 hour per second (3600 seconds is one hour), and the clock is started (in case it was not already running). The next line pauses the script for 20 seconds while we track the Moon as it moves across the sky. Finally, we stop the clock and reset the zoom level to its default setting. +We hope you enjoy the scripting abilities of KStars. If you create an interesting script, please email it to kstars@30doradus.org; we would like to see what you have done, and may post some scripts on our webpage. Also, if you have any ideas for how to improve scripting (or any part of &kstars;), let us know at kstars-devel@lists.sourceforge.net or submit a wishlist item to bugzilla. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/details.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/details.docbook index bb45fc9477f..9bf2b313550 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/details.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/details.docbook @@ -1,110 +1,39 @@ -Object Details Window -Tools -Object Details Window -Objects in the Sky -Details +Object Details Window +Tools +Object Details Window +Objects in the Sky +Details -The Object Details Window +The Object Details Window - Object Details Window + Object Details Window -The Object Details Window presents advanced data available about a specific object in the sky. To access this tool, right-click on any object, and select the Details... item from the popup menu. -The window is divided into a number of Tabs. In the General Tab, we present basic data about the current object. This includes names and catalogue designations, object type, and magnitude (brightness). Also shown are the object's Equatorial and Horizontal coordinates, as well as its rise, set and transit times. +The Object Details Window presents advanced data available about a specific object in the sky. To access this tool, right-click on any object, and select the Details... item from the popup menu. +The window is divided into a number of Tabs. In the General Tab, we present basic data about the current object. This includes names and catalogue designations, object type, and magnitude (brightness). Also shown are the object's Equatorial and Horizontal coordinates, as well as its rise, set and transit times. -Objects in the Sky -Internet Links -Customising -In the Links tab, you can manage the internet links associated with this object. The Image and Information links associated with the object are listed. These are the links that appear in the popup menu when the object is right-clicked. You can add custom links to the object with the Add Link... button. This will open a window in which you fill in the URL and link text for the new link (you can also test the URL in the web browser from this window). Keep in mind that the custom link can easily point to a file on your local disk, so you can use this feature to index your personal astronomical images or observing logs. -You can also modify or remove any link using the Edit Link... and Remove Link... buttons. -The Advanced Tab allows you to query professional astronomical databases on the internet for information regarding the current object. To use these databases, simply highlight the desired database in the list, and press the View button to see the results of your query in a web browser window. The query is made using the primary name of the object you clicked on to open the Details Dialogue. The following databases are available for querying: -High Energy Astrophysical Archive (HEASARC). Here you can retrieve data about the current object from a number of High-energy observatories, which covers the Ultraviolet, X-ray and Gamma Ray portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. -Multimission Archive at Space Telescope (MAST). The Space Telescope Science Institute provides access to the entire collection of images and spectra taken with the Hubble Space Telescope, as well as several other space-based observatories. -NASA Astrophysical Data System (ADS). This incredible bibliographic database encompass the entire body of literature published in international peer-review Journals about astronomy and astrophysics. The database is divided into four general subject areas (Astronomy and Astrophysics, Astrophysics Preprints, Instrumentation, and Physics and Geophysics). Each of these has three sub-nodes that query the database in different ways. Keyword search will return articles which listed the object's name as a keyword. Title word search will return articles which included the object name in their Title, and the Title & Keyword search uses both options together. -NASA/IPAC Extragalactic Database (NED). NED provides encapsulated data and bibliographic links about extragalactic objects. You should only use NED if your target is extragalactic; &ie; if it is itself a galaxy. -Set of Identifications, Measurements, and Bibliography for Astronomical Data (SIMBAD). SIMBAD is similar to NED, except it provides data about all kinds of objects, not just galaxies. -SkyView provides images from All-Sky surveys that have been performed in dozens of different parts of the spectrum, from Gamma Rays to the Radio. The &kstars; interface will retrieve an image from any of these surveys, centred on the selected object. +Objects in the Sky +Internet Links +Customising +In the Links tab, you can manage the internet links associated with this object. The Image and Information links associated with the object are listed. These are the links that appear in the popup menu when the object is right-clicked. You can add custom links to the object with the Add Link... button. This will open a window in which you fill in the URL and link text for the new link (you can also test the URL in the web browser from this window). Keep in mind that the custom link can easily point to a file on your local disk, so you can use this feature to index your personal astronomical images or observing logs. +You can also modify or remove any link using the Edit Link... and Remove Link... buttons. +The Advanced Tab allows you to query professional astronomical databases on the internet for information regarding the current object. To use these databases, simply highlight the desired database in the list, and press the View button to see the results of your query in a web browser window. The query is made using the primary name of the object you clicked on to open the Details Dialogue. The following databases are available for querying: +High Energy Astrophysical Archive (HEASARC). Here you can retrieve data about the current object from a number of High-energy observatories, which covers the Ultraviolet, X-ray and Gamma Ray portions of the electromagnetic spectrum. +Multimission Archive at Space Telescope (MAST). The Space Telescope Science Institute provides access to the entire collection of images and spectra taken with the Hubble Space Telescope, as well as several other space-based observatories. +NASA Astrophysical Data System (ADS). This incredible bibliographic database encompass the entire body of literature published in international peer-review Journals about astronomy and astrophysics. The database is divided into four general subject areas (Astronomy and Astrophysics, Astrophysics Preprints, Instrumentation, and Physics and Geophysics). Each of these has three sub-nodes that query the database in different ways. Keyword search will return articles which listed the object's name as a keyword. Title word search will return articles which included the object name in their Title, and the Title & Keyword search uses both options together. +NASA/IPAC Extragalactic Database (NED). NED provides encapsulated data and bibliographic links about extragalactic objects. You should only use NED if your target is extragalactic; &ie; if it is itself a galaxy. +Set of Identifications, Measurements, and Bibliography for Astronomical Data (SIMBAD). SIMBAD is similar to NED, except it provides data about all kinds of objects, not just galaxies. +SkyView provides images from All-Sky surveys that have been performed in dozens of different parts of the spectrum, from Gamma Rays to the Radio. The &kstars; interface will retrieve an image from any of these surveys, centred on the selected object. -Finally, in the Log Tab, you can type in some text that will remain associated with this object's Details window. You could use this to attach personal observing notes, for example. +Finally, in the Log Tab, you can type in some text that will remain associated with this object's Details window. You could use this to attach personal observing notes, for example. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dumpmode.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dumpmode.docbook index 515e54a5bc7..158839ae986 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dumpmode.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/dumpmode.docbook @@ -1,76 +1,12 @@ -Command-Line mode for Image Generation -Image-dump Mode +Command-Line mode for Image Generation +Image-dump Mode -You can use &kstars; to generate an image of the sky without actually launching the GUI portion of the program. To use this feature, start &kstars; from a command prompt using arguments to specify the filename for the image, as well as the desired image dimensions: kstars --dump --filename kstars.png --height 640 --width 480 --script myscript.kstars +You can use &kstars; to generate an image of the sky without actually launching the GUI portion of the program. To use this feature, start &kstars; from a command prompt using arguments to specify the filename for the image, as well as the desired image dimensions: kstars --dump --filename kstars.png --height 640 --width 480 --script myscript.kstars -If no filename is specified, it generates a file named kstars.png. It will attempt to generate an image that matches the extension of your filename. The following extensions are recognised: png, jpg, jpeg, gif, pnm, and bmp. If the filename extension is not recognised, it defaults to the PNG image type. -Likewise, if the image width and height are not specified, they default to 640 and 480, respectively. -By default, &kstars; will read in the options values stored in your $TDEHOME/share/config/kstarsrc file to determine where the image will be centred, and how it is rendered. This means you need to run &kstars; in normal GUI mode, and exit the program when it is set up with the desired options for the generated images. This is not very flexible, so we also provide the ability to execute a &kstars; DCOP script to set the scene before generating the image. The filename you specify as the script argument should be a valid &kstars; DCOP script, such as one created with the Script Builder Tool. The script can be used to set where the image is pointing, set the geographic location, set the time and date, change the Zoom level and adjust other view options. Some of the DCOP functions make no sense in non-GUI mode (such as waitForKey()); if these functions are encountered while parsing the script, they are simply ignored. -As an alternative to having to execute a &kstars; DCOP script, we will provide an argument to specify an alternate kstarsrc config file, in a future version of &kstars;. +If no filename is specified, it generates a file named kstars.png. It will attempt to generate an image that matches the extension of your filename. The following extensions are recognised: png, jpg, jpeg, gif, pnm, and bmp. If the filename extension is not recognised, it defaults to the PNG image type. +Likewise, if the image width and height are not specified, they default to 640 and 480, respectively. +By default, &kstars; will read in the options values stored in your $TDEHOME/share/config/kstarsrc file to determine where the image will be centred, and how it is rendered. This means you need to run &kstars; in normal GUI mode, and exit the program when it is set up with the desired options for the generated images. This is not very flexible, so we also provide the ability to execute a &kstars; DCOP script to set the scene before generating the image. The filename you specify as the script argument should be a valid &kstars; DCOP script, such as one created with the Script Builder Tool. The script can be used to set where the image is pointing, set the geographic location, set the time and date, change the Zoom level and adjust other view options. Some of the DCOP functions make no sense in non-GUI mode (such as waitForKey()); if these functions are encountered while parsing the script, they are simply ignored. +As an alternative to having to execute a &kstars; DCOP script, we will provide an argument to specify an alternate kstarsrc config file, in a future version of &kstars;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ecliptic.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ecliptic.docbook index 1b256948263..c06194841a8 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ecliptic.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ecliptic.docbook @@ -1,56 +1,14 @@ -John Cirillo +John Cirillo -The Ecliptic -Ecliptic -Ecliptic Coordinates +The Ecliptic +Ecliptic +Ecliptic Coordinates -The ecliptic is an imaginary Great Circle on the Celestial Sphere along which the Sun appears to move over the course of a year. Of course, it is really the Earth's orbit around the Sun causing the change in the Sun's apparent direction. The ecliptic is inclined from the Celestial Equator by 23.5 degrees. The two points where the Ecliptic crosses the Celestial Equator are known as the Equinoxes. Since our solar system is relatively flat, the orbits of the planets are also close to the plane of the ecliptic. In addition, the constellations of the zodiac are located along the ecliptic. This makes the ecliptic a very useful line of reference to anyone attempting to locate the planets or the constellations of the zodiac, since they all literally follow the Sun. Because of the 23.5-degree tilt of the Ecliptic, the Altitude of the Sun at noon changes over the course of the year, as it follows the path of the Ecliptic across the sky. This causes the seasons. In the Summer, the Sun is high in the sky at noon, and it remains above the Horizon for more than twelve hours. Whereas, in the winter, the Sun is low in the sky at noon, and remains above the Horizon for less than twelve hours. In addition, sunlight is received at the Earth's surface at a more direct angle in the Summer, which means that a given area at the surface receives more energy per second in the Summer than in Winter. The differences in day duration and in energy received per unit area lead to the differences in temperature we experience in Summer and Winter. +The ecliptic is an imaginary Great Circle on the Celestial Sphere along which the Sun appears to move over the course of a year. Of course, it is really the Earth's orbit around the Sun causing the change in the Sun's apparent direction. The ecliptic is inclined from the Celestial Equator by 23.5 degrees. The two points where the Ecliptic crosses the Celestial Equator are known as the Equinoxes. Since our solar system is relatively flat, the orbits of the planets are also close to the plane of the ecliptic. In addition, the constellations of the zodiac are located along the ecliptic. This makes the ecliptic a very useful line of reference to anyone attempting to locate the planets or the constellations of the zodiac, since they all literally follow the Sun. Because of the 23.5-degree tilt of the Ecliptic, the Altitude of the Sun at noon changes over the course of the year, as it follows the path of the Ecliptic across the sky. This causes the seasons. In the Summer, the Sun is high in the sky at noon, and it remains above the Horizon for more than twelve hours. Whereas, in the winter, the Sun is low in the sky at noon, and remains above the Horizon for less than twelve hours. In addition, sunlight is received at the Earth's surface at a more direct angle in the Summer, which means that a given area at the surface receives more energy per second in the Summer than in Winter. The differences in day duration and in energy received per unit area lead to the differences in temperature we experience in Summer and Winter. -Exercises: -Make sure your location is set to somewhere that is not very near the equator for these experiments. Open the Configure &kstars; window, and switch to Horizontal coordinates, with the Opaque Ground shown. Open the Set Time window (&Ctrl;S),and change the Date to sometime in the middle of Summer, and the Time to 12:00 Noon. Back in the Main Window, point toward the Southern Horizon (press S). Note the height of the Sun above the Horizon at Noon in the Summer. Now, change the Date to something in the middle of Winter (but keep the Time at 12:00 Noon). The Sun is now much lower in the Sky. You will also notice that the day durations are different if you open the What's Up Tonight? tool for each date. +Exercises: +Make sure your location is set to somewhere that is not very near the equator for these experiments. Open the Configure &kstars; window, and switch to Horizontal coordinates, with the Opaque Ground shown. Open the Set Time window (&Ctrl;S),and change the Date to sometime in the middle of Summer, and the Time to 12:00 Noon. Back in the Main Window, point toward the Southern Horizon (press S). Note the height of the Sun above the Horizon at Noon in the Summer. Now, change the Date to something in the middle of Winter (but keep the Time at 12:00 Noon). The Sun is now much lower in the Sky. You will also notice that the day durations are different if you open the What's Up Tonight? tool for each date. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ellipticalgalaxies.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ellipticalgalaxies.docbook index 37bad450a7e..1509438d84b 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ellipticalgalaxies.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/ellipticalgalaxies.docbook @@ -1,98 +1,49 @@ -Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu -
 +Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu +
 -Elliptical Galaxies -Elliptical Galaxies +Elliptical Galaxies +Elliptical Galaxies -Elliptical galaxies are spheroidal concentrations of billions of stars that resemble Globular Clusters on a grand scale. They have very little internal structure; the density of stars declines smoothly from the concentrated centre to the diffuse edge, and they can have a broad range of ellipticities (or aspect ratios). They typically contain very little interstellar gas and dust, and no young stellar populations (although there are exceptions to these rules). Edwin Hubble referred to Elliptical galaxies as early-type galaxies, because he thought that they evolved to become Spiral Galaxies (which he called late-type galaxies). Astronomers actually now believe the opposite is the case (&ie;, that Spiral galaxies can turn into Elliptical galaxies), but Hubble's early- and late-type labels are still used. +Elliptical galaxies are spheroidal concentrations of billions of stars that resemble Globular Clusters on a grand scale. They have very little internal structure; the density of stars declines smoothly from the concentrated centre to the diffuse edge, and they can have a broad range of ellipticities (or aspect ratios). They typically contain very little interstellar gas and dust, and no young stellar populations (although there are exceptions to these rules). Edwin Hubble referred to Elliptical galaxies as early-type galaxies, because he thought that they evolved to become Spiral Galaxies (which he called late-type galaxies). Astronomers actually now believe the opposite is the case (&ie;, that Spiral galaxies can turn into Elliptical galaxies), but Hubble's early- and late-type labels are still used. -Once thought to be a simple galaxy type, ellipticals are now known to be quite complex objects. Part of this complexity is due to their amazing history: ellipticals are thought to be the end product of the merger of two Spiral galaxies. You can view a computer simulation MPEG movie of such a merger at this NASA HST webpage (warning: the file is 3.4 MB). +Once thought to be a simple galaxy type, ellipticals are now known to be quite complex objects. Part of this complexity is due to their amazing history: ellipticals are thought to be the end product of the merger of two Spiral galaxies. You can view a computer simulation MPEG movie of such a merger at this NASA HST webpage (warning: the file is 3.4 MB). -Elliptical galaxies span a very wide range of sizes and luminosities, from giant Ellipticals hundreds of thousands of light years across and nearly a trillion times brighter than the sun, to dwarf Ellipticals just a bit brighter than the average globular cluster. They are divided to several morphological classes: +Elliptical galaxies span a very wide range of sizes and luminosities, from giant Ellipticals hundreds of thousands of light years across and nearly a trillion times brighter than the sun, to dwarf Ellipticals just a bit brighter than the average globular cluster. They are divided to several morphological classes: -cD galaxies: -Immense and bright objects that can measure nearly 1 Megaparsec (3 million light years) across. These titans are only found near the centres of large, dense clusters of galaxies, and are likely the result of many galaxy mergers. +cD galaxies: +Immense and bright objects that can measure nearly 1 Megaparsec (3 million light years) across. These titans are only found near the centres of large, dense clusters of galaxies, and are likely the result of many galaxy mergers. -Normal Elliptical galaxies -Condensed Object with relatively high central surface brightness. They include the giant ellipticals (gE'e), intermediate-luminosity ellipticals (E's), and compact ellipticals. +Normal Elliptical galaxies +Condensed Object with relatively high central surface brightness. They include the giant ellipticals (gE'e), intermediate-luminosity ellipticals (E's), and compact ellipticals. -Dwarf elliptical galaxies (dE's) -This class of galaxies is fundamentally different from normal ellipticals. Their diameters on the order of 1 to 10 kiloparsec with surface brightness that is much lower than normal ellipticals, giving them a much more diffuse appearance. They display the same characteristic gradual decline of star density from a relatively dense core out to a diffuse periphery. +Dwarf elliptical galaxies (dE's) +This class of galaxies is fundamentally different from normal ellipticals. Their diameters on the order of 1 to 10 kiloparsec with surface brightness that is much lower than normal ellipticals, giving them a much more diffuse appearance. They display the same characteristic gradual decline of star density from a relatively dense core out to a diffuse periphery. -Dwarf spheroidal galaxies (dSph's) -Extreme low-luminosity, low surface-brightness and have only been observed in the vicinity of the Milky Way, and possibly other very nearby galaxy groups, such as the Leo group. Their absolute magnitudes are only -8 to -15 mag. The Draco dwarf spheroidal galaxy has an absolute magnitude of -8.6, making it fainter than the average globular cluster in the Milky Way! +Dwarf spheroidal galaxies (dSph's) +Extreme low-luminosity, low surface-brightness and have only been observed in the vicinity of the Milky Way, and possibly other very nearby galaxy groups, such as the Leo group. Their absolute magnitudes are only -8 to -15 mag. The Draco dwarf spheroidal galaxy has an absolute magnitude of -8.6, making it fainter than the average globular cluster in the Milky Way! -Blue compact dwarf galaxies (BCD's) +Blue compact dwarf galaxies (BCD's) -Small galaxies that are unusually blue. Thehave photometric colors of B-V = 0.0 to 0.30 mag, which is typical for relatively young stars of spectral type A. This suggests that BCDs are currently actively forming stars. These systems also have abundant interstellar gas (unlike other Elliptical galaxies). +Small galaxies that are unusually blue. Thehave photometric colors of B-V = 0.0 to 0.30 mag, which is typical for relatively young stars of spectral type A. This suggests that BCDs are currently actively forming stars. These systems also have abundant interstellar gas (unlike other Elliptical galaxies). -You can see examples of Elliptical galaxies in &kstars;, using the Find Object window (&Ctrl;F). Search for NGC 4881, which is the Giant cD galaxy in the Coma cluster of galaxies. M 86 is a normal Elliptical galaxy in the Virgo cluster of galaxies. M 32 is a dwarf Elliptical that is a satellite of our neighbour, the Andromeda galaxy (M 31). M 110 is another satellite of M 31 that is a borderline dwarf spheroidal galaxy (borderline because it is somewhat brighter than most other dwarf spheroidals). +You can see examples of Elliptical galaxies in &kstars;, using the Find Object window (&Ctrl;F). Search for NGC 4881, which is the Giant cD galaxy in the Coma cluster of galaxies. M 86 is a normal Elliptical galaxy in the Virgo cluster of galaxies. M 32 is a dwarf Elliptical that is a satellite of our neighbour, the Andromeda galaxy (M 31). M 110 is another satellite of M 31 that is a borderline dwarf spheroidal galaxy (borderline because it is somewhat brighter than most other dwarf spheroidals). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/equinox.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/equinox.docbook index 8b4a0611550..8cc41f4568e 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/equinox.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/equinox.docbook @@ -1,44 +1,9 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -The Equinoxes -Equinoxes -Celestial Equator Ecliptic -Most people know the Vernal and Autumnal Equinoxes as calendar dates, signifying the beginning of the Northern hemisphere's Spring and Autumn, respectively. Did you know that the equinoxes are also positions in the sky? The Celestial Equator and the Ecliptic are two Great Circles on the Celestial Sphere, set at an angle of 23.5 degrees. The two points where they intersect are called the Equinoxes. The Vernal Equinox has coordinates RA=0.0 hours, Dec=0.0 degrees. The Autumnal Equinox has coordinates RA=12.0 hours, Dec=0.0 degrees. The Equinoxes are important for marking the seasons. Because they are on the Ecliptic, the Sun passes through each equinox every year. When the Sun passes through the Vernal Equinox (usually on March 21st), it crosses the Celestial Equator from South to North, signifying the end of Winter for the Northern hemisphere. Similarly, whenthe Sun passes through the Autumnal Equinox (usually on September 21st), it crosses the Celestial Equator from North to South, signifying the end of Winter for the Southern hemisphere. +The Equinoxes +Equinoxes +Celestial Equator Ecliptic +Most people know the Vernal and Autumnal Equinoxes as calendar dates, signifying the beginning of the Northern hemisphere's Spring and Autumn, respectively. Did you know that the equinoxes are also positions in the sky? The Celestial Equator and the Ecliptic are two Great Circles on the Celestial Sphere, set at an angle of 23.5 degrees. The two points where they intersect are called the Equinoxes. The Vernal Equinox has coordinates RA=0.0 hours, Dec=0.0 degrees. The Autumnal Equinox has coordinates RA=12.0 hours, Dec=0.0 degrees. The Equinoxes are important for marking the seasons. Because they are on the Ecliptic, the Sun passes through each equinox every year. When the Sun passes through the Vernal Equinox (usually on March 21st), it crosses the Celestial Equator from South to North, signifying the end of Winter for the Northern hemisphere. Similarly, whenthe Sun passes through the Autumnal Equinox (usually on September 21st), it crosses the Celestial Equator from North to South, signifying the end of Winter for the Southern hemisphere. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/faq.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/faq.docbook index e9c663aec38..a97df5c0a50 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/faq.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/faq.docbook @@ -1,55 +1,28 @@ -Questions and Answers +Questions and Answers &reporting.bugs; &updating.documentation; -What is the &kstars; Icon? +What is the &kstars; Icon? -The &kstars; Icon is a sextant, a handheld telescope which was used by navigators on sailing ships back when the stars were important for navigation. By carefully reckoning the positions of the stars, the navigator could get an accurate estimate of the ship's current longitude and latitude. +The &kstars; Icon is a sextant, a handheld telescope which was used by navigators on sailing ships back when the stars were important for navigation. By carefully reckoning the positions of the stars, the navigator could get an accurate estimate of the ship's current longitude and latitude. -What do the different symbols for deep-sky objects mean? +What do the different symbols for deep-sky objects mean? -The symbol indicates the object type: -dotted circle: Open Cluster -cross-in-circle: Globular Cluster -box: Gaseous Nebula -diamond: Supernova Remnant -circle with outer lines: Planetary Nebula -ellipse: Galaxy +The symbol indicates the object type: +dotted circle: Open Cluster +cross-in-circle: Globular Cluster +box: Gaseous Nebula +diamond: Supernova Remnant +circle with outer lines: Planetary Nebula +ellipse: Galaxy @@ -57,88 +30,57 @@ -What do the different colours of Deep-sky objects mean? +What do the different colours of Deep-sky objects mean? -Generally, the different colours indicate to which catalogue the object belongs (Messier, NGC or IC). However, some objects have a different colour which indicates that there are extra images available in the popup menu (the default extras colour is red). +Generally, the different colours indicate to which catalogue the object belongs (Messier, NGC or IC). However, some objects have a different colour which indicates that there are extra images available in the popup menu (the default extras colour is red). -Why are there so many more U.S. cities than in other countries? Is it a conspiracy? +Why are there so many more U.S. cities than in other countries? Is it a conspiracy? -It may be a conspiracy, but &kstars; is not involved! We were unable to find a single longitude/latitude database that covers the globe equitably. We are currently working on adding many more non-U.S. cities to the database. We have already received city lists from users in Norway, Italy and Korea. If you can contribute to this effort, please let us know. +It may be a conspiracy, but &kstars; is not involved! We were unable to find a single longitude/latitude database that covers the globe equitably. We are currently working on adding many more non-U.S. cities to the database. We have already received city lists from users in Norway, Italy and Korea. If you can contribute to this effort, please let us know. -Why can I not display the ground when using Equatorial Coordinates +Why can I not display the ground when using Equatorial Coordinates -The short answer is, this is a temporary limitation. There is a problem when constructing the filled polygon that represents the ground when in Equatorial mode. However, it does not make too much sense to draw the ground in equatorial coordinates, which is why this fix has been given a low priority. +The short answer is, this is a temporary limitation. There is a problem when constructing the filled polygon that represents the ground when in Equatorial mode. However, it does not make too much sense to draw the ground in equatorial coordinates, which is why this fix has been given a low priority. -Why do some objects disappear when I am scrolling the display? +Why do some objects disappear when I am scrolling the display? -When the display is in motion, &kstars; must recompute the screen coordinates of every object in its database, which involves some pretty heavy trigonometry. When scrolling the display (either with the arrow keys or by dragging with the mouse), the display may become slow and jerky, because the computer is having trouble keeping up. By excluding many of the objects, the computational load is greatly reduced, which allows for smoother scrolling. You can turn off this feature in the Configure &kstars; window, and you can also configure which objects get hidden. +When the display is in motion, &kstars; must recompute the screen coordinates of every object in its database, which involves some pretty heavy trigonometry. When scrolling the display (either with the arrow keys or by dragging with the mouse), the display may become slow and jerky, because the computer is having trouble keeping up. By excluding many of the objects, the computational load is greatly reduced, which allows for smoother scrolling. You can turn off this feature in the Configure &kstars; window, and you can also configure which objects get hidden. -I do not understand all the terms used in &kstars;. Where can I learn more about the astronomy behind the program? +I do not understand all the terms used in &kstars;. Where can I learn more about the astronomy behind the program? -The &kstars; Handbook includes the AstroInfo Project; a series of short, hyperlinked articles about astronomical topics that can be explored and illustrated with &kstars;. AstroInfo is a community effort, like GNUpedia or Everything2. If you'd like to contribute to AstroInfo, please join our mailing list: kstars-info@lists.sourceforge.net. +The &kstars; Handbook includes the AstroInfo Project; a series of short, hyperlinked articles about astronomical topics that can be explored and illustrated with &kstars;. AstroInfo is a community effort, like GNUpedia or Everything2. If you'd like to contribute to AstroInfo, please join our mailing list: kstars-info@lists.sourceforge.net. -How accurate/precise is &kstars;? +How accurate/precise is &kstars;? -&kstars; is pretty accurate, but it is not (yet) as precise as it can possibly be. The problem with high-precision calculations is that you start having to deal with a large number of complicating factors. If you are not a professional astronomer, you will probably never have a problem with its accuracy or precision. -Here is a list of some of the complicating factors which limit the program's precision: -Planet positions are only accurate for dates within 4000 years or so of the current epoch. The planet positions are predicted using a Fourier-like analysis of their orbits, as observed over the past few centuries. We learnt in school that planets follow simple elliptical orbits around the Sun, but this is not strictly true. It would be true only if there was only one planet in the Solar system, and if the Sun and the planet were both point masses. As it is, the planets are constantly tugging on each other, perturbing the orbits slightly, and tidal effects also induce precessional wobbling. In fact, recent analysis suggests that the planets' orbits may not even be stable in the long term (i.e., millions or billions of years). As a rule of thumb, you can expect the position of a planet to be accurate to a few arcseconds between the dates -2000 and 6000. Pluto is the exception to this; its position is perhaps ten times less precise than the positions of the other planets. Still, for dates near the present epoch, its position can be trusted to about an arcsecond. The moon's position is the most difficult to predict to high precision. This is because its motion is quite perturbed by the Earth. Also, since it is so nearby, even minute effects that would be undetectable in more distant bodies are easily apparent in the moon. The objects with the worst long-term precision in the program are the comets and asteroids. We use a very simplistic orbital model for the minor planets that does not include third-body perturbations. Therefore, their positions can only be trusted for dates near the present epoch. Even for the present epoch, one can expect positional errors among the minor planets of order 10 arcseconds or more. +&kstars; is pretty accurate, but it is not (yet) as precise as it can possibly be. The problem with high-precision calculations is that you start having to deal with a large number of complicating factors. If you are not a professional astronomer, you will probably never have a problem with its accuracy or precision. +Here is a list of some of the complicating factors which limit the program's precision: +Planet positions are only accurate for dates within 4000 years or so of the current epoch. The planet positions are predicted using a Fourier-like analysis of their orbits, as observed over the past few centuries. We learnt in school that planets follow simple elliptical orbits around the Sun, but this is not strictly true. It would be true only if there was only one planet in the Solar system, and if the Sun and the planet were both point masses. As it is, the planets are constantly tugging on each other, perturbing the orbits slightly, and tidal effects also induce precessional wobbling. In fact, recent analysis suggests that the planets' orbits may not even be stable in the long term (i.e., millions or billions of years). As a rule of thumb, you can expect the position of a planet to be accurate to a few arcseconds between the dates -2000 and 6000. Pluto is the exception to this; its position is perhaps ten times less precise than the positions of the other planets. Still, for dates near the present epoch, its position can be trusted to about an arcsecond. The moon's position is the most difficult to predict to high precision. This is because its motion is quite perturbed by the Earth. Also, since it is so nearby, even minute effects that would be undetectable in more distant bodies are easily apparent in the moon. The objects with the worst long-term precision in the program are the comets and asteroids. We use a very simplistic orbital model for the minor planets that does not include third-body perturbations. Therefore, their positions can only be trusted for dates near the present epoch. Even for the present epoch, one can expect positional errors among the minor planets of order 10 arcseconds or more. @@ -147,44 +89,28 @@ -Why do I have to download an improved NGC/IC catalogue and Messier object images? Why not just include them as part of the &kstars; distribution? +Why do I have to download an improved NGC/IC catalogue and Messier object images? Why not just include them as part of the &kstars; distribution? -The author of the downloadable NGC/IC catalogue has released it with the restriction that it may not be used commercially. For most &kstars; users, this is not a problem. However, it is technically against the &kstars; license (the GPL) to restrict usage in this way. We removed the Messier object images from the standard distribution for two reasons: to simply reduce the size of &kstars;, and also because of similar licensing concerns with a couple of the images. The inline images are significantly compressed to a very low quality from their original form, so I doubt there is a real copyright concern, but I did obtain explicit permission from the images' authors to use the few images for which there was any question about it (see README.images). Still, just to be absolutely safe, I removed them from the standard distribution, and marked the download archive as being "free for non-commercial use". +The author of the downloadable NGC/IC catalogue has released it with the restriction that it may not be used commercially. For most &kstars; users, this is not a problem. However, it is technically against the &kstars; license (the GPL) to restrict usage in this way. We removed the Messier object images from the standard distribution for two reasons: to simply reduce the size of &kstars;, and also because of similar licensing concerns with a couple of the images. The inline images are significantly compressed to a very low quality from their original form, so I doubt there is a real copyright concern, but I did obtain explicit permission from the images' authors to use the few images for which there was any question about it (see README.images). Still, just to be absolutely safe, I removed them from the standard distribution, and marked the download archive as being "free for non-commercial use". -I am really enjoying the beautiful images I have downloaded through &kstars;! I would like to share them with the world; can I publish a calendar featuring these images (or are there any usage restrictions on the images)? +I am really enjoying the beautiful images I have downloaded through &kstars;! I would like to share them with the world; can I publish a calendar featuring these images (or are there any usage restrictions on the images)? -It depends on the image, but many of the images restrict against commercial usage. The Image Viewer's statusbar will usually contain information about the image's copyright holder, and what usage restrictions apply. As a rule of thumb: anything published by NASA is in the public domain (including all HST images). For everything else, you can pretty safely assume that the images may not be used commercially without permission. When in doubt, contact the image's copyright holder directly. +It depends on the image, but many of the images restrict against commercial usage. The Image Viewer's statusbar will usually contain information about the image's copyright holder, and what usage restrictions apply. As a rule of thumb: anything published by NASA is in the public domain (including all HST images). For everything else, you can pretty safely assume that the images may not be used commercially without permission. When in doubt, contact the image's copyright holder directly. -Can I help contribute to future versions of &kstars;? +Can I help contribute to future versions of &kstars;? -Yes, definitely! Introduce yourself on our mailing list: kstars-devel@kde.org. If you want to help with the coding, download the latest CVS version of the code and dive right in. There are several README files in the distribution that explain some of the code's subsystems. If you need ideas of what to work on, see the TODO file. You can submit patches to kstars-devel, and feel free to post any questions you have about the code there as well. If you are not into coding, we can still use your help with i18n, docs, AstroInfo articles, URL links, bug reports and feature requests. +Yes, definitely! Introduce yourself on our mailing list: kstars-devel@kde.org. If you want to help with the coding, download the latest CVS version of the code and dive right in. There are several README files in the distribution that explain some of the code's subsystems. If you need ideas of what to work on, see the TODO file. You can submit patches to kstars-devel, and feel free to post any questions you have about the code there as well. If you are not into coding, we can still use your help with i18n, docs, AstroInfo articles, URL links, bug reports and feature requests. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/flux.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/flux.docbook index a59d1e7210b..dece6cafe39 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/flux.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/flux.docbook @@ -2,70 +2,38 @@ -Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu -
 +Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu +
 -Flux -Flux -Luminosity +Flux +Flux +Luminosity -The flux is the amount of energy that passes through a unit area each second. +The flux is the amount of energy that passes through a unit area each second. -Astronomers use flux to denote the apparent brightness of a celestial body. The apparent brightness is defined as the the amount of light received from a star above the earth atmosphere passing through a unit area each second. Therefore, the apparent brightness is simply the flux we receive from a star. +Astronomers use flux to denote the apparent brightness of a celestial body. The apparent brightness is defined as the the amount of light received from a star above the earth atmosphere passing through a unit area each second. Therefore, the apparent brightness is simply the flux we receive from a star. -The flux measures the rate of flow of energy that passes through each cm^2 (or any unit area) of an object's surface each second. The detected flux depends on the distance from the source that radiates the energy. This is because the energy has to spread over a volume of space before it reaches us. Let us assume that we have an imaginary balloon that encloses a star. Each dot on the balloon represents a unit of energy emitted from the star. Initially, the dots in an area of one cm^2 are in close proximity to each other and the flux (energy emitted per square centimetre per second) is high. After a distance d, the volume and surface area of the balloon increased causing the dots to spread away from each. Consequently, the number of dots (or energy) enclosed in one cm^2 has decreased as illustrated in Figure 1. +The flux measures the rate of flow of energy that passes through each cm^2 (or any unit area) of an object's surface each second. The detected flux depends on the distance from the source that radiates the energy. This is because the energy has to spread over a volume of space before it reaches us. Let us assume that we have an imaginary balloon that encloses a star. Each dot on the balloon represents a unit of energy emitted from the star. Initially, the dots in an area of one cm^2 are in close proximity to each other and the flux (energy emitted per square centimetre per second) is high. After a distance d, the volume and surface area of the balloon increased causing the dots to spread away from each. Consequently, the number of dots (or energy) enclosed in one cm^2 has decreased as illustrated in Figure 1. - + -The flux is inversely proportional to distance by a simple r^2 relation. Therefore, if the distance is doubled, we receive 1/2^2 or 1/4th of the original flux. From a fundamental standpoint, the flux is the luminosity per unit area: +The flux is inversely proportional to distance by a simple r^2 relation. Therefore, if the distance is doubled, we receive 1/2^2 or 1/4th of the original flux. From a fundamental standpoint, the flux is the luminosity per unit area: -where (4 * PI * R^2) is the surface area of a sphere (or a balloon!) with a radius R. Flux is measured in Watts/m^2/s or as commonly used by astronomers: Ergs/cm^2/s. For example, the luminosity of the sun is L = 3.90 * 10^26 W. That is, in one second the sun radiates 3.90 * 10^26 joules of energy into space. Thus, the flux we receive passing through one square centimetre from the sun at a distance of one AU (1.496 * 10^13 cm) is: +where (4 * PI * R^2) is the surface area of a sphere (or a balloon!) with a radius R. Flux is measured in Watts/m^2/s or as commonly used by astronomers: Ergs/cm^2/s. For example, the luminosity of the sun is L = 3.90 * 10^26 W. That is, in one second the sun radiates 3.90 * 10^26 joules of energy into space. Thus, the flux we receive passing through one square centimetre from the sun at a distance of one AU (1.496 * 10^13 cm) is: diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/geocoords.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/geocoords.docbook index 5f8d87bf8a7..96330b24325 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/geocoords.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/geocoords.docbook @@ -1,66 +1,15 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Geographic Coordinates -Geographic Coordinate System -LongitudeGeographic Coordinate System -LatitudeGeographic Coordinate System -Locations on Earth can be specified using a spherical coordinate system. The geographic (earth-mapping) coordinate system is aligned with the spin axis of the Earth. It defines two angles measured from the centre of the Earth. One angle, called the Latitude, measures the angle between any point and the Equator. The other angle, called the Longitude, measures the angle along the Equator from an arbitrary point on the Earth (Greenwich, England is the accepted zero-longitude point in most modern societies). By combining these two angles, any location on Earth can be specified. For example, Baltimore, Maryland (USA) has a latitude of 39.3 degrees North, and a longitude of 76.6 degrees West. So, a vector drawn from the centre of the Earth to a point 39.3 degrees above the Equator and 76.6 degrees west of Greenwich, England will pass through Baltimore. The Equator is obviously an important part of this coordinate system; it represents the zeropoint of the latitude angle, and the halfway point between the poles. The Equator is the Fundamental Plane of the geographic coordinate system. All Spherical Coordinate Systems define such a Fundamental Plane. Lines of constant Latitude are called Parallels. They trace circles on the surface of the Earth, but the only parallel that is a Great Circle is the Equator (Latitude=0 degrees). Lines of constant Longitude are called Meridians. The Meridian passing through Greenwich is the Prime Meridian (longitude=0 degrees). Unlike Parallels, all Meridians are great circles, and Meridians are not parallel: they intersect at the north and south poles. +Geographic Coordinates +Geographic Coordinate System +LongitudeGeographic Coordinate System +LatitudeGeographic Coordinate System +Locations on Earth can be specified using a spherical coordinate system. The geographic (earth-mapping) coordinate system is aligned with the spin axis of the Earth. It defines two angles measured from the centre of the Earth. One angle, called the Latitude, measures the angle between any point and the Equator. The other angle, called the Longitude, measures the angle along the Equator from an arbitrary point on the Earth (Greenwich, England is the accepted zero-longitude point in most modern societies). By combining these two angles, any location on Earth can be specified. For example, Baltimore, Maryland (USA) has a latitude of 39.3 degrees North, and a longitude of 76.6 degrees West. So, a vector drawn from the centre of the Earth to a point 39.3 degrees above the Equator and 76.6 degrees west of Greenwich, England will pass through Baltimore. The Equator is obviously an important part of this coordinate system; it represents the zeropoint of the latitude angle, and the halfway point between the poles. The Equator is the Fundamental Plane of the geographic coordinate system. All Spherical Coordinate Systems define such a Fundamental Plane. Lines of constant Latitude are called Parallels. They trace circles on the surface of the Earth, but the only parallel that is a Great Circle is the Equator (Latitude=0 degrees). Lines of constant Longitude are called Meridians. The Meridian passing through Greenwich is the Prime Meridian (longitude=0 degrees). Unlike Parallels, all Meridians are great circles, and Meridians are not parallel: they intersect at the north and south poles. -Exercise: -What is the longitude of the North Pole? Its latitude is 90 degrees North. -This is a trick question. The Longitude is meaningless at the north pole (and the south pole too). It has all longitudes at the same time. +Exercise: +What is the longitude of the North Pole? Its latitude is 90 degrees North. +This is a trick question. The Longitude is meaningless at the north pole (and the south pole too). It has all longitudes at the same time. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/greatcircle.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/greatcircle.docbook index 5d6783ddc24..352f29cda52 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/greatcircle.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/greatcircle.docbook @@ -1,32 +1,10 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Great Circles -Great Circles -Celestial Sphere +Great Circles +Great Circles +Celestial Sphere -Consider a sphere, such as the Earth, or the Celestial Sphere. The intersection of any plane with the sphere will result in a circle on the surface of the sphere. If the plane happens to contain the centre of the sphere, the intersection circle is a Great Circle. Great circles are the largest circles that can be drawn on a sphere. Also, the shortest path between any two points on a sphere is always along a great circle. Some examples of great circles on the celestial sphere include: the Horizon, the Celestial Equator, and the Ecliptic. +Consider a sphere, such as the Earth, or the Celestial Sphere. The intersection of any plane with the sphere will result in a circle on the surface of the sphere. If the plane happens to contain the centre of the sphere, the intersection circle is a Great Circle. Great circles are the largest circles that can be drawn on a sphere. Also, the shortest path between any two points on a sphere is always along a great circle. Some examples of great circles on the celestial sphere include: the Horizon, the Celestial Equator, and the Ecliptic. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/horizon.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/horizon.docbook index 03968069fd8..d3672208da2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/horizon.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/horizon.docbook @@ -1,30 +1,10 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -The Horizon -Horizon -Horizontal Coordinates +The Horizon +Horizon +Horizontal Coordinates -The Horizon is the line that separates Earth from Sky. More precisely, it is the line that divides all of the directions you can possibly look into two categories: those which intersect the Earth, and those which do not. At many locations, the Horizon is obscured by trees, buildings, mountains &etc;. However, if you are on a ship at sea, the Horizon is strikingly apparent. The horizon is the Fundamental Plane of the Horizontal Coordinate System. In other words, it is the locus of points which have an Altitude of zero degrees. +The Horizon is the line that separates Earth from Sky. More precisely, it is the line that divides all of the directions you can possibly look into two categories: those which intersect the Earth, and those which do not. At many locations, the Horizon is obscured by trees, buildings, mountains &etc;. However, if you are on a ship at sea, the Horizon is strikingly apparent. The horizon is the Fundamental Plane of the Horizontal Coordinate System. In other words, it is the locus of points which have an Altitude of zero degrees. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/hourangle.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/hourangle.docbook index 19d3e1b1a58..659c22cd242 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/hourangle.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/hourangle.docbook @@ -1,46 +1,9 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Hour Angle -Hour Angle -Local Meridian Sidereal Time -As explained in the Sidereal Time article, the Right Ascension of an object indicates the Sidereal Time at which it will transit across your Local Meridian. An object's Hour Angle is defined as the difference between the current Local Sidereal Time and the Right Ascension of the object: HAobj = LST - RAobj Thus, the object's Hour Angle indicates how much Sidereal Time has passed since the object was on the Local Meridian. It is also the angular distance between the object and the meridian, measured in hours (1 hour = 15 degrees). For example, if an object has an hour angle of 2.5 hours, it transited across the Local Meridian 2.5 hours ago, and is currently 37.5 degrees West of the Meridian. Negative Hour Angles indicate the time until the next transit across the Local Meridian. Of course, an Hour Angle of zero means the object is currently on the Local Meridian. +Hour Angle +Hour Angle +Local Meridian Sidereal Time +As explained in the Sidereal Time article, the Right Ascension of an object indicates the Sidereal Time at which it will transit across your Local Meridian. An object's Hour Angle is defined as the difference between the current Local Sidereal Time and the Right Ascension of the object: HAobj = LST - RAobj Thus, the object's Hour Angle indicates how much Sidereal Time has passed since the object was on the Local Meridian. It is also the angular distance between the object and the meridian, measured in hours (1 hour = 15 degrees). For example, if an object has an hour angle of 2.5 hours, it transited across the Local Meridian 2.5 hours ago, and is currently 37.5 degrees West of the Meridian. Negative Hour Angles indicate the time until the next transit across the Local Meridian. Of course, an Hour Angle of zero means the object is currently on the Local Meridian. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/index.docbook index 9259fd9f8fa..f467909f5ad 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/index.docbook @@ -65,232 +65,86 @@ - + ]> -The &kstars; Handbook +The &kstars; Handbook -Jason Harris
kstars@30doradus.org
+Jason Harris
kstars@30doradus.org
 -Heiko Evermann
heiko@evermann.de
+Heiko Evermann
heiko@evermann.de
 -Core Developer +Core Developer -Thomas Kabelmann
tk78@gmx.de
+Thomas Kabelmann
tk78@gmx.de
 -Core Developer +Core Developer -Pablo de Vicente
pvicentea@wanadoo.es
+Pablo de Vicente
pvicentea@wanadoo.es
 -Core Developer +Core Developer -Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ikarustech.com
+Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ikarustech.com
 -Core Developer +Core Developer -Carsten Niehaus
cniehaus@gmx.de
+Carsten Niehaus
cniehaus@gmx.de
 -Core Developer +Core Developer -Mark Holloman
mhh@mindspring.com
+Mark Holloman
mhh@mindspring.com
 -Core Developer +Core Developer -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -200120022003 -Jason Harris and the KStars Team +200120022003 +Jason Harris and the KStars Team -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-10-08 -1.0 +2002-10-08 +1.0 -&kstars; is a graphical desktop planetarium for KDE. It depicts an accurate simulation of the night sky, including stars, constellations, star clusters, nebulae, galaxies, all planets, the Sun, the Moon, comets and asteroids. You can see the sky as it appears from any location on Earth, on any date. The user interface is highly intuitive and flexible; the display can be panned and zoomed with the mouse, and you can easily identify objects and track their motion across the sky. &kstars; includes many powerful features, yet the interface is clean and simple, and fun to use. +&kstars; is a graphical desktop planetarium for KDE. It depicts an accurate simulation of the night sky, including stars, constellations, star clusters, nebulae, galaxies, all planets, the Sun, the Moon, comets and asteroids. You can see the sky as it appears from any location on Earth, on any date. The user interface is highly intuitive and flexible; the display can be panned and zoomed with the mouse, and you can easily identify objects and track their motion across the sky. &kstars; includes many powerful features, yet the interface is clean and simple, and fun to use. -KDE -tdeedu -Astronomy -KStars +KDE +tdeedu +Astronomy +KStars -Introduction - -&kstars; lets you explore the night sky from the comfort of your computer chair. It provides an accurate graphical representation of the night sky for any date, from any location on Earth. The display includes 126,000 stars to 9th magnitude (well below the naked-eye limit), 13,000 deep-sky objects (Messier, NGC, and IC catalogs), all planets, the Sun and Moon, hundreds of comets and asteroids, the Milky Way, 88 constellations, and guide lines such as the celestial equator, the horizon and the ecliptic. -However, &kstars; is more than a simple night-sky simulator. The display provides a compelling interface to a number of tools with which you can learn more about astronomy and the night sky. There is a customised popup menu attached to each displayed object, which displays object-specific information and actions. Hundreds of objects provide links in their popup menus to informative webpages and beautiful images taken by the Hubble Space Telescope and other observatories. From an object's popup menu, you can open its Detailed Information Window, where you can examine positional data about the object, and query a huge treasury of online databases for professional-grade astronomical data and literature references about the object. You can even attach your own internet links, images and text notes, making &kstars; a graphical front-end to your observing logs and your personal astronomical notebook. -Our Astrocalculator tool provides direct access to many of the algorithms the program uses behind the scenes, including coordinate converters and time calculators. The AAVSO Lightcurve Generator tool will download a lightcurve for any of the 6000+ variable stars monitored by the American Association of Variable Star Observers (AAVSO). The lightcurves are generated on the fly by querying the AAVSO server directly, ensuring that you have the very latest data points. -You can plan an observing session using our Altitude vs. Time tool, which will plot curves representing the Altitude as a function of time for any group of objects. If that is too much detail, we also provide a What's Up Tonight? tool that summarises the objects that you will be able to see from your location on any given night. -&kstars; also provides a Solar System Viewer, which shows the current configuration of the major planets in our solar system. There is also a Jupiter Moons Tool which shows the positions of Jupiter's four largest moons as a function of time. -Our primary goal is to make &kstars; an interactive educational tool for learning about astronomy and the night sky. To this end, the &kstars; Handbook includes the AstroInfo Project, a series of short, hyperlinked articles on astronomical topics that can be explored with &kstars;. In addition, &kstars; includes DCOP functions that allow you to write complex scripts, making &kstars; a powerful "demo engine" for classroom use or general illustration of astronomical topics. -You can even control telescopes with &kstars;, using the elegant and powerful INDI hardware interface. &kstars; supports several popular telescopes including Meade's LX200 family and Celestron GPS. Several popular CCD cameras, webcams and computerised focusers are also supported. Simple slew/track commands are integrated directly into the main window's popup menu, and the INDI Control Panel provides full access to all of your telescope's functions. INDI's Client/Server architecture allows for seamless control of any number of local or remote telescopes using a single &kstars; session. -We are very interested in your feedback; please report bugs or feature requests to the &kstars; development mailing list: kstars-devel@kde.org. You can also use the automated bug reporting tool, accessible from the Help menu. +Introduction + +&kstars; lets you explore the night sky from the comfort of your computer chair. It provides an accurate graphical representation of the night sky for any date, from any location on Earth. The display includes 126,000 stars to 9th magnitude (well below the naked-eye limit), 13,000 deep-sky objects (Messier, NGC, and IC catalogs), all planets, the Sun and Moon, hundreds of comets and asteroids, the Milky Way, 88 constellations, and guide lines such as the celestial equator, the horizon and the ecliptic. +However, &kstars; is more than a simple night-sky simulator. The display provides a compelling interface to a number of tools with which you can learn more about astronomy and the night sky. There is a customised popup menu attached to each displayed object, which displays object-specific information and actions. Hundreds of objects provide links in their popup menus to informative webpages and beautiful images taken by the Hubble Space Telescope and other observatories. From an object's popup menu, you can open its Detailed Information Window, where you can examine positional data about the object, and query a huge treasury of online databases for professional-grade astronomical data and literature references about the object. You can even attach your own internet links, images and text notes, making &kstars; a graphical front-end to your observing logs and your personal astronomical notebook. +Our Astrocalculator tool provides direct access to many of the algorithms the program uses behind the scenes, including coordinate converters and time calculators. The AAVSO Lightcurve Generator tool will download a lightcurve for any of the 6000+ variable stars monitored by the American Association of Variable Star Observers (AAVSO). The lightcurves are generated on the fly by querying the AAVSO server directly, ensuring that you have the very latest data points. +You can plan an observing session using our Altitude vs. Time tool, which will plot curves representing the Altitude as a function of time for any group of objects. If that is too much detail, we also provide a What's Up Tonight? tool that summarises the objects that you will be able to see from your location on any given night. +&kstars; also provides a Solar System Viewer, which shows the current configuration of the major planets in our solar system. There is also a Jupiter Moons Tool which shows the positions of Jupiter's four largest moons as a function of time. +Our primary goal is to make &kstars; an interactive educational tool for learning about astronomy and the night sky. To this end, the &kstars; Handbook includes the AstroInfo Project, a series of short, hyperlinked articles on astronomical topics that can be explored with &kstars;. In addition, &kstars; includes DCOP functions that allow you to write complex scripts, making &kstars; a powerful "demo engine" for classroom use or general illustration of astronomical topics. +You can even control telescopes with &kstars;, using the elegant and powerful INDI hardware interface. &kstars; supports several popular telescopes including Meade's LX200 family and Celestron GPS. Several popular CCD cameras, webcams and computerised focusers are also supported. Simple slew/track commands are integrated directly into the main window's popup menu, and the INDI Control Panel provides full access to all of your telescope's functions. INDI's Client/Server architecture allows for seamless control of any number of local or remote telescopes using a single &kstars; session. +We are very interested in your feedback; please report bugs or feature requests to the &kstars; development mailing list: kstars-devel@kde.org. You can also use the automated bug reporting tool, accessible from the Help menu. &quicktour; @@ -304,8 +158,7 @@ &credits; &install; - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/indi.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/indi.docbook index d608b666029..041fb745850 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/indi.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/indi.docbook @@ -1,453 +1,249 @@ -Astronomical Device Control with <acronym ->INDI</acronym -> -INDI Control -Overview +Astronomical Device Control with <acronym>INDI</acronym> +INDI Control +Overview -KStars provides an interface to configure and control astronomical instruments via the INDI protocol. +KStars provides an interface to configure and control astronomical instruments via the INDI protocol. -The INDI protocol supports a variety of astronomical instruments such as CCD cameras and focusers. Currently, KStars supports the following devices: +The INDI protocol supports a variety of astronomical instruments such as CCD cameras and focusers. Currently, KStars supports the following devices:
Figure 1Figure 1 Figure 1Figure 1 Figure 2Figure 2 Figure 1Figure 1
-Supported Telescopes +Supported Telescopes -Telescope -Device driver -Version +Telescope +Device driver +Version -LX200 8"-12" Classic -LX200 Classic -0.5 +LX200 8"-12" Classic +LX200 Classic +0.5 -Autostar based telescopes -LX200 Autostar -0.5 +Autostar based telescopes +LX200 Autostar +0.5 -LX200 GPS 8"-16" -LX200 GPS -0.5 +LX200 GPS 8"-16" +LX200 GPS +0.5 -LX200 Classic 16" -LX00 16" -0.5 +LX200 Classic 16" +LX00 16" +0.5 -NexStar GPS, CGE, AS-GT -Celestron GPS -0.5 +NexStar GPS, CGE, AS-GT +Celestron GPS +0.5 -New GT, NexStar 5i/8i -Celestron GPS -0.5 +New GT, NexStar 5i/8i +Celestron GPS +0.5 -Astro-Physics AP -LX200 Generic -0.1 +Astro-Physics AP +LX200 Generic +0.1 -Astro-Electronic FS-2 -LX200 Generic -0.1 +Astro-Electronic FS-2 +LX200 Generic +0.1 -Losmandy Gemini -LX200 Generic -0.1 +Losmandy Gemini +LX200 Generic +0.1 -Mel Bartels Controllers -LX200 Generic -0.1 +Mel Bartels Controllers +LX200 Generic +0.1
- + -Supported Focusers +Supported Focusers -Focuser -Device driver -Version +Focuser +Device driver +Version -Meade LX200GPS Microfocuser -LX200 GPS -0.1 +Meade LX200GPS Microfocuser +LX200 GPS +0.1 -Meade 1206 Primary Mirror Focuser -LX200 Generic -0.1 +Meade 1206 Primary Mirror Focuser +LX200 Generic +0.1 -JMI NGF Series -LX200 Generic -0.1 +JMI NGF Series +LX200 Generic +0.1 -JMI MOTOFOCUS -LX200 Generic -0.1 +JMI MOTOFOCUS +LX200 Generic +0.1
-Focuser connection -The focusers must be connected to the focuser port in the LX200 GPS, Autostar or Classic telescopes only. +Focuser connection +The focusers must be connected to the focuser port in the LX200 GPS, Autostar or Classic telescopes only. - + -Supported CCDs +Supported CCDs -CCD -Device driver -Version +CCD +Device driver +Version -Finger Lakes Instruments CCDs -fliccd -0.1 +Finger Lakes Instruments CCDs +fliccd +0.1
- + -Supported Webcams +Supported Webcams -Webcam -Device driver -Version +Webcam +Device driver +Version -Any Video4Linux compatible device -v4ldriver -0.1 +Any Video4Linux compatible device +v4ldriver +0.1 -Philips webcam -v4lphilips -0.1 +Philips webcam +v4lphilips +0.1
-INDI Setup -INDI -Setup +INDI Setup +INDI +Setup -KStars can control local and remote devices seamlessly via the INDI server/client architecture. INDI devices may be run in three different modes: +KStars can control local and remote devices seamlessly via the INDI server/client architecture. INDI devices may be run in three different modes: -Local: The local mode the most common and is used to control local device (&ie; a device attached to your machine). -Server: The server mode establishes an INDI server for a particular device and waits for connections from remote clients. You cannot operate server devices, you can only start and shut them down. -Client: The client mode is used to connect to remote INDI servers running INDI devices. You can control remote devices seamlessly like local devices. +Local: The local mode the most common and is used to control local device (&ie; a device attached to your machine). +Server: The server mode establishes an INDI server for a particular device and waits for connections from remote clients. You cannot operate server devices, you can only start and shut them down. +Client: The client mode is used to connect to remote INDI servers running INDI devices. You can control remote devices seamlessly like local devices. -You can run local device, establish INDI servers, and connect to remote clients from the Device Manager in the Devices menu. +You can run local device, establish INDI servers, and connect to remote clients from the Device Manager in the Devices menu. -Here is a screenshot of the Device Manager window: +Here is a screenshot of the Device Manager window: -Running device drivers +Running device drivers -Start device drivers +Start device drivers -You can run devices by browsing the device tree, selecting a specific device, and then clicking on the Run Service button. You can select the operation mode, either local or server as defined above. +You can run devices by browsing the device tree, selecting a specific device, and then clicking on the Run Service button. You can select the operation mode, either local or server as defined above. -To control remove devices, refer to the remote device control section. +To control remove devices, refer to the remote device control section. -Telescope Setup -INDI -Setup +Telescope Setup +INDI +Setup -Most telescopes are equipped with RS232 interface for remote control. Connect the RS232 jack in your telescope to your computer's Serial/USB port. Traditionally, the RS232 connects to the serial port of your computer, but since many new laptops abandoned the serial port in favour of USB/FireWire ports, you might need to obtain a Serial to USB adaptor to use with new laptops. - -After connecting your telescope to the Serial/USB port, turn your telescope on. It is highly recommended that you download and install the latest firmware for your telescope controller. - -The telescope needs to be aligned before it can be used properly. Align your telescope (one or two stars alignment) as illustrated in your telescope manual. - -&kstars; needs to verify time and location settings before connecting to the telescope. This insures proper tracking and synchronisation between the telescope and &kstars;. The following steps will enable you to connect to a device that is connected to your computer. To connect and control remote devices, please refer to remote device control section. - -You can use the Telescope Setup Wizard and it will verify all the required information in the process. It can automatically scan ports for attached telescopes. You can run the wizard by selecting Telescope Setup Wizard from the Devices menu. - -Alternatively, you can connect to a local telescope by performing the following steps: +Most telescopes are equipped with RS232 interface for remote control. Connect the RS232 jack in your telescope to your computer's Serial/USB port. Traditionally, the RS232 connects to the serial port of your computer, but since many new laptops abandoned the serial port in favour of USB/FireWire ports, you might need to obtain a Serial to USB adaptor to use with new laptops. + +After connecting your telescope to the Serial/USB port, turn your telescope on. It is highly recommended that you download and install the latest firmware for your telescope controller. + +The telescope needs to be aligned before it can be used properly. Align your telescope (one or two stars alignment) as illustrated in your telescope manual. + +&kstars; needs to verify time and location settings before connecting to the telescope. This insures proper tracking and synchronisation between the telescope and &kstars;. The following steps will enable you to connect to a device that is connected to your computer. To connect and control remote devices, please refer to remote device control section. + +You can use the Telescope Setup Wizard and it will verify all the required information in the process. It can automatically scan ports for attached telescopes. You can run the wizard by selecting Telescope Setup Wizard from the Devices menu. + +Alternatively, you can connect to a local telescope by performing the following steps: -Set your geographical location. Open the Set Geographic Location window by selecting Set Geographic Location... from the Settings menu, or by pressing the Globe icon in the toolbar, or by pressing &Ctrl;g. +Set your geographical location. Open the Set Geographic Location window by selecting Set Geographic Location... from the Settings menu, or by pressing the Globe icon in the toolbar, or by pressing &Ctrl;g. -Set your local time and date. You can change to any time or date by selecting Set Time... from the Time menu, or by pressing the time icon in the toolbar. The Set Time window uses a standard &kde; Date Picker widget, coupled with three spinboxes for setting the hours, minutes and seconds. If you ever need to reset the clock back to the current time, just select Set Time to Now from the Time menu. +Set your local time and date. You can change to any time or date by selecting Set Time... from the Time menu, or by pressing the time icon in the toolbar. The Set Time window uses a standard &kde; Date Picker widget, coupled with three spinboxes for setting the hours, minutes and seconds. If you ever need to reset the clock back to the current time, just select Set Time to Now from the Time menu. -Click on the Devices menu and select the Device Manager. +Click on the Devices menu and select the Device Manager. -Under the Device column, select your telescope model. +Under the Device column, select your telescope model. -Right-click on the device and select Run Service. +Right-click on the device and select Run Service. -Click Ok to close the Device Manager Dialogue. +Click Ok to close the Device Manager Dialogue. -Frequent Settings -You do not need to set the geographic location and time every time you connect to a telescope. Only adjust the settings as needed. +Frequent Settings +You do not need to set the geographic location and time every time you connect to a telescope. Only adjust the settings as needed. -You are now ready to use the device features, &kstars; conveniently provides two interchangeable GUI interfaces for controlling telescopes: +You are now ready to use the device features, &kstars; conveniently provides two interchangeable GUI interfaces for controlling telescopes: -Controlling your telescope +Controlling your telescope -Sky map Control: For each device you run in the Device Manager, a corresponding entry will show up in popup menu that allows you to control the properties of the device. You can issue commands like Slew, Sync, and Track directly from the sky map. -Here is a screenshot of the popup menu with an active LX200 Classic device: +Sky map Control: For each device you run in the Device Manager, a corresponding entry will show up in popup menu that allows you to control the properties of the device. You can issue commands like Slew, Sync, and Track directly from the sky map. +Here is a screenshot of the popup menu with an active LX200 Classic device: -Controlling devices from sky map +Controlling devices from sky map @@ -457,36 +253,22 @@ -INDI Control Panel: The panel offers the user with all the features supported by a device. +INDI Control Panel: The panel offers the user with all the features supported by a device. -The panel is divided into three main sections: +The panel is divided into three main sections: -Device tabs: Each additional active device occupies a tab in the INDI panel. Multiple devices can run simultaneously without affecting the operation of other devices. +Device tabs: Each additional active device occupies a tab in the INDI panel. Multiple devices can run simultaneously without affecting the operation of other devices. -Property view: Properties are the key element in INDI architecture. Each device defines a set of properties to communicate with the client. The current position of the telescope is an example of a property. Semantically similar properties are usually contained in logical blocks or groupings. +Property view: Properties are the key element in INDI architecture. Each device defines a set of properties to communicate with the client. The current position of the telescope is an example of a property. Semantically similar properties are usually contained in logical blocks or groupings. -Log viewers: Devices report their status and acknowledge commands by sending INDI messages. Each device has its own log view, and all devices share one generic log viewer. A device usually sends messages to its device driver only, but a device is permitted to send a generic message when appropriate. +Log viewers: Devices report their status and acknowledge commands by sending INDI messages. Each device has its own log view, and all devices share one generic log viewer. A device usually sends messages to its device driver only, but a device is permitted to send a generic message when appropriate. -INDI Control Panel +INDI Control Panel @@ -496,267 +278,127 @@ -You are not restricted on using one interface over another as they can be both used simultaneously. Actions from the Sky map are automatically reflected in the INDI Control Panel and vice versa. - -To connect to your telescope, you can either select Connect from your device popup menu or alternatively, you can press Connect under your device tab in the INDI Control Panel. - -By default, KStars will try to connect to the /dev/ttyS0 port. To change the connection port, select INDI Control Panel from the Devices menu and change the port under your device tab. - -&kstars; automatically updates the telescope's longitude, latitude, and time based on current settings in &kstars;. You can enable/disable these updates from Configure INDI dialogue under the Devices menu. - -If &kstars; communicates successfully with the telescope, it will retrieve the current RA and DEC from the telescope and will display a crosshair on the sky map indicating the telescope position. +You are not restricted on using one interface over another as they can be both used simultaneously. Actions from the Sky map are automatically reflected in the INDI Control Panel and vice versa. + +To connect to your telescope, you can either select Connect from your device popup menu or alternatively, you can press Connect under your device tab in the INDI Control Panel. + +By default, KStars will try to connect to the /dev/ttyS0 port. To change the connection port, select INDI Control Panel from the Devices menu and change the port under your device tab. + +&kstars; automatically updates the telescope's longitude, latitude, and time based on current settings in &kstars;. You can enable/disable these updates from Configure INDI dialogue under the Devices menu. + +If &kstars; communicates successfully with the telescope, it will retrieve the current RA and DEC from the telescope and will display a crosshair on the sky map indicating the telescope position. -Synchronising your telescope -If you aligned your telescope and the last alignment star was, for example, Vega, then the crosshair should be centred around Vega. If the crosshair was off target, then you can right-click Vega from the sky map and select Sync from your telescope menu. This action will instruct the telescope to synchronise its internal coordinates to match those of Vega, and the telescope's crosshair should now be centred around Vega. +Synchronising your telescope +If you aligned your telescope and the last alignment star was, for example, Vega, then the crosshair should be centred around Vega. If the crosshair was off target, then you can right-click Vega from the sky map and select Sync from your telescope menu. This action will instruct the telescope to synchronise its internal coordinates to match those of Vega, and the telescope's crosshair should now be centred around Vega. -That is it: your telescope is ready to explore the heavens. +That is it: your telescope is ready to explore the heavens. -WARNING -Never use the telescope to look at the sun. Looking at the sun might cause irreversible damage to your eyes and as well as your equipment. +WARNING +Never use the telescope to look at the sun. Looking at the sun might cause irreversible damage to your eyes and as well as your equipment. -CCD and Video-Capture Setup -CCD Video Control -Setup +CCD and Video-Capture Setup +CCD Video Control +Setup -KStars supports Finger Lakes instruments CCDs and any Video4Linux compatible device. Philips webcam extended features are supported as well. -You can run CCD and Video Capture devices from the Device Manager in the Devices menu. Like all INDI devices, some of the device controls will be accessible from the skymap. The device can be controlled fully from the INDI Control Panel. - -The standard format for image capture is FITS. Once an image is captured and downloaded, it will be displayed in the KStars FITSViewer. To capture a sequence of images, use the Capture Image Sequence tool from the Devices menu. This tool is inactive until you establish a connection to an image device. +KStars supports Finger Lakes instruments CCDs and any Video4Linux compatible device. Philips webcam extended features are supported as well. +You can run CCD and Video Capture devices from the Device Manager in the Devices menu. Like all INDI devices, some of the device controls will be accessible from the skymap. The device can be controlled fully from the INDI Control Panel. + +The standard format for image capture is FITS. Once an image is captured and downloaded, it will be displayed in the KStars FITSViewer. To capture a sequence of images, use the Capture Image Sequence tool from the Devices menu. This tool is inactive until you establish a connection to an image device. -INDI Concepts -Telescope Control -Concepts +INDI Concepts +Telescope Control +Concepts -The INDI control panel offers many device properties not accessible from the sky map. The properties offered differ from one device to another. Nevertheless, all properties share common features that constrains how they are displayed and used: +The INDI control panel offers many device properties not accessible from the sky map. The properties offered differ from one device to another. Nevertheless, all properties share common features that constrains how they are displayed and used: -Permission: All properties can either be read-only, write-only, or read and write enabled. An example of a read-write property is the telescope's Right Ascension. You can enter a new Right Ascension and the telescope, based on current settings, will either slew or sync to the new input. Furthermore, when the telescope slews, its Right Ascension gets updated and sent back to the client. +Permission: All properties can either be read-only, write-only, or read and write enabled. An example of a read-write property is the telescope's Right Ascension. You can enter a new Right Ascension and the telescope, based on current settings, will either slew or sync to the new input. Furthermore, when the telescope slews, its Right Ascension gets updated and sent back to the client. -State: Prefixed to each property is a state indicator (round LED). Each property has a state and an associated colour code: -INDI State colour code +State: Prefixed to each property is a state indicator (round LED). Each property has a state and an associated colour code: +
INDI State colour code -State -Colour -Description +State +Colour +Description -Idle -Grey -Device is performing no action with respect to this property +Idle +Grey +Device is performing no action with respect to this property -Ok -Green -Last operation performed on this property was successful and active +Ok +Green +Last operation performed on this property was successful and active -Busy -Yellow -The property is performing an action +Busy +Yellow +The property is performing an action -Alert -Red -The property is in critical condition and needs immediate attention +Alert +Red +The property is in critical condition and needs immediate attention
- -The device driver updates the property state in real-time when necessary. For example, if the telescope is in the process of slewing to a target, then the RA/DEC properties will be signalled as Busy. When the slew process is completed successfully, the properties will be signalled as Ok. + +The device driver updates the property state in real-time when necessary. For example, if the telescope is in the process of slewing to a target, then the RA/DEC properties will be signalled as Busy. When the slew process is completed successfully, the properties will be signalled as Ok. -Context: Numerical properties can accept and process numbers in two formats: decimal and sexagesimal. The sexagesimal format is convenient when expressing time or equatorial/geographical coordinates. You can use any format at your convenience. For example, all the following numbers are equal: +Context: Numerical properties can accept and process numbers in two formats: decimal and sexagesimal. The sexagesimal format is convenient when expressing time or equatorial/geographical coordinates. You can use any format at your convenience. For example, all the following numbers are equal: --156.40 --156:24:00 --156:24 +-156.40 +-156:24:00 +-156:24 -Time: The standard time for all INDI-related communications is Universal Time UTC specified as YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS in accord with ISO 8601. &kstars; communicates the correct UTC time with device drivers automatically. You can enable/disable automatic time updates from the Configure INDI dialogue under the Devices menu. +Time: The standard time for all INDI-related communications is Universal Time UTC specified as YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS in accord with ISO 8601. &kstars; communicates the correct UTC time with device drivers automatically. You can enable/disable automatic time updates from the Configure INDI dialogue under the Devices menu. -Remote Device Control -Telescope Control -Remote Devices +Remote Device Control +Telescope Control +Remote Devices -KStars provides a simple yet powerful layer for remote device control. A detailed description of the layer is described in the INDI white paper. +KStars provides a simple yet powerful layer for remote device control. A detailed description of the layer is described in the INDI white paper. -You need to configure both the server and client machines for remote control: +You need to configure both the server and client machines for remote control: -Server: To prepare a device for remote control, follow the same steps in the local/server setup. When you start a device service in the Device Manager, a port number is displayed under the Listening port column. In addition to the port number, you also need the hostname or IP address of your server. - +Server: To prepare a device for remote control, follow the same steps in the local/server setup. When you start a device service in the Device Manager, a port number is displayed under the Listening port column. In addition to the port number, you also need the hostname or IP address of your server. + -Client: Select the Device Manager from the Device menu and click on the Client tab. You can add, modify, or delete hosts under the Client tab. Add a host by clicking on the Add button. Enter the hostname/IP address of the server in the Host field, and enter the port number obtained from the server machine in step 1. +Client: Select the Device Manager from the Device menu and click on the Client tab. You can add, modify, or delete hosts under the Client tab. Add a host by clicking on the Add button. Enter the hostname/IP address of the server in the Host field, and enter the port number obtained from the server machine in step 1. -INDI Client +INDI Client @@ -764,216 +406,99 @@ -After you add a host, right click on the host to Connect or Disconnect. If a connection is established, you can control the telescope from the Sky map or INDI Control Panel exactly as described in the local/server section. It is as easy at that. +After you add a host, right click on the host to Connect or Disconnect. If a connection is established, you can control the telescope from the Sky map or INDI Control Panel exactly as described in the local/server section. It is as easy at that. -Running an INDI server from the command line -While &kstars; allows you to easily deploy an INDI server; you can launch an INDI server from the command line. - -Since INDI is an independent backend component, you can run an INDI server on a host without KStars. INDI can be compiled separately to run on remote hosts. Furthermore, device drivers log messages to stderr and that can be helpful in a debugging situation. The syntax for INDI server is as following: - -$ indiserver [options] [driver ...] - -Options: --p p : alternate IP port, default 7624 --r n : max restart attempts, default 2 --v : more verbose to stderr - -For example, if you want to start an INDI server running an LX200 GPS driver and listening to connections on port 8000, you would run the following command: - -$ indiserver -p 8000 lx200gps +Running an INDI server from the command line +While &kstars; allows you to easily deploy an INDI server; you can launch an INDI server from the command line. + +Since INDI is an independent backend component, you can run an INDI server on a host without KStars. INDI can be compiled separately to run on remote hosts. Furthermore, device drivers log messages to stderr and that can be helpful in a debugging situation. The syntax for INDI server is as following: + +$ indiserver [options] [driver ...] + +Options: +-p p : alternate IP port, default 7624 +-r n : max restart attempts, default 2 +-v : more verbose to stderr + +For example, if you want to start an INDI server running an LX200 GPS driver and listening to connections on port 8000, you would run the following command: + +$ indiserver -p 8000 lx200gps -Secure Remote Operation - -Suppose we want to run an indiserver with INDI drivers on a remote host, remote_host, and connect them to &kstars; running on the local machine. - -From the local machine log onto the remote host, remote_host, by typing: - -$ ssh -L local_port:remote_host:remote_port - -This binds the local_port on the local machine to the remote_port on the remote_host. After logging in, run indiserver on the remote host: - -$ indiserver -p remote_port [driver...] - -Back on the local machine, start &kstars; then open the Device Manager and add a host under the Client tab. The host should be the local host (usually 127.0.0.1) and the port number should be the local_port used in the steps above. Right-click on the host and select Connect from the popup menu. &kstars; will connect to the remote INDI server securely. The host information will be saved for future sessions. +Secure Remote Operation + +Suppose we want to run an indiserver with INDI drivers on a remote host, remote_host, and connect them to &kstars; running on the local machine. + +From the local machine log onto the remote host, remote_host, by typing: + +$ ssh -L local_port:remote_host:remote_port + +This binds the local_port on the local machine to the remote_port on the remote_host. After logging in, run indiserver on the remote host: + +$ indiserver -p remote_port [driver...] + +Back on the local machine, start &kstars; then open the Device Manager and add a host under the Client tab. The host should be the local host (usually 127.0.0.1) and the port number should be the local_port used in the steps above. Right-click on the host and select Connect from the popup menu. &kstars; will connect to the remote INDI server securely. The host information will be saved for future sessions. -INDI Frequently Asked Questions -Telescope Control -FAQ +INDI Frequently Asked Questions +Telescope Control +FAQ -What is INDI? +What is INDI? -INDI is the Instrument-Neutral-Distributed-Interface control protocol developed by ElwoodC. Downey of ClearSky Institute. &kstars; employs device drivers that are compatible with the INDI protocol. INDI has many advantages including loose coupling between hardware devices and software drivers. Clients that use the device drivers (like &kstars;) are completely unaware of the device capabilities. In run time, &kstars; communicates with the device drivers and builds a completely dynamical GUI based on services provided by the device. Therefore, new device drivers can be written or updated and KStars can take full advantage of them without any changes on the client side. +INDI is the Instrument-Neutral-Distributed-Interface control protocol developed by ElwoodC. Downey of ClearSky Institute. &kstars; employs device drivers that are compatible with the INDI protocol. INDI has many advantages including loose coupling between hardware devices and software drivers. Clients that use the device drivers (like &kstars;) are completely unaware of the device capabilities. In run time, &kstars; communicates with the device drivers and builds a completely dynamical GUI based on services provided by the device. Therefore, new device drivers can be written or updated and KStars can take full advantage of them without any changes on the client side. -Do you plan to support more devices? +Do you plan to support more devices? -Yes. We plan to support major CCD cameras and focusers and extend support for more telescopes. If you would like INDI to support a particular device, please send an email to indi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net +Yes. We plan to support major CCD cameras and focusers and extend support for more telescopes. If you would like INDI to support a particular device, please send an email to indi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net -I do not have a serial port, how can I connect to the telescope? +I do not have a serial port, how can I connect to the telescope? -Many modern laptops do not have a serial port. You will need a Serial To USB adaptor that is supported under Linux. For example, Keyspan's USA-19QW Serial to USB adaptor is well supported under Linux and had been tested with &kstars;. You need to refer to your adaptor's documentation to find which ports they provide (e.g. /dev/ttyUSB0 .... /dev/ttyUSB9). +Many modern laptops do not have a serial port. You will need a Serial To USB adaptor that is supported under Linux. For example, Keyspan's USA-19QW Serial to USB adaptor is well supported under Linux and had been tested with &kstars;. You need to refer to your adaptor's documentation to find which ports they provide (e.g. /dev/ttyUSB0 .... /dev/ttyUSB9). -When I try to Connect, &kstars; reports that the telescope is not connected to the serial/USB port. What can I do? +When I try to Connect, &kstars; reports that the telescope is not connected to the serial/USB port. What can I do? -This message is triggered when &kstars; cannot communicate with the telescope. Here are few things you can do: +This message is triggered when &kstars; cannot communicate with the telescope. Here are few things you can do: -Check that you have both reading and writing permission for the port you are trying to connect to. +Check that you have both reading and writing permission for the port you are trying to connect to. -Check the connection cable, make sure it is in good condition and test it with other applications. +Check the connection cable, make sure it is in good condition and test it with other applications. -Check your telescope power, make sure the power is on and that the telescope is getting enough power. +Check your telescope power, make sure the power is on and that the telescope is getting enough power. -Set the correct port in the INDI Control Panel under the Devices menu. The default port is /dev/ttyS0 +Set the correct port in the INDI Control Panel under the Devices menu. The default port is /dev/ttyS0 - Restart &kstars; and retry again. + Restart &kstars; and retry again. @@ -981,68 +506,47 @@ -&kstars; reports that the telescope is online and ready, but I cannot find the telescope's crosshair, where is it? +&kstars; reports that the telescope is online and ready, but I cannot find the telescope's crosshair, where is it? -&kstars; retrieves the telescopes RA and DEC coordinates upon connection. If your alignment was performed correctly, then you should see the crosshair around your target in the Sky Map. However, the RA and DEC coordinates provided by the telescope may be incorrect (even below the horizon) and you need to Sync your telescope to your current target. +&kstars; retrieves the telescopes RA and DEC coordinates upon connection. If your alignment was performed correctly, then you should see the crosshair around your target in the Sky Map. However, the RA and DEC coordinates provided by the telescope may be incorrect (even below the horizon) and you need to Sync your telescope to your current target. -The telescope is moving erratically or not moving at all. What can I do? +The telescope is moving erratically or not moving at all. What can I do? -This behaviour is mostly due to incorrect settings, please verify the following check list: +This behaviour is mostly due to incorrect settings, please verify the following check list: -Is the telescope aligned? +Is the telescope aligned? -Is the telescope alignment mode correct? Use INDI Control Panel to check and change these settings (Alt/Az,Polar, Land). +Is the telescope alignment mode correct? Use INDI Control Panel to check and change these settings (Alt/Az,Polar, Land). -Are the telescope's time and date settings correct? +Are the telescope's time and date settings correct? -Are the telescope's longitude and latitude settings correct? +Are the telescope's longitude and latitude settings correct? -Is the telescope's UTC offset correct? +Is the telescope's UTC offset correct? -Are the telescope's RA and DEC axis locked firmly? +Are the telescope's RA and DEC axis locked firmly? -Is the telescope's N/S switch (when applicable) setup correctly for your hemisphere? +Is the telescope's N/S switch (when applicable) setup correctly for your hemisphere? -Is the cable between the telescope and computer in good condition? +Is the cable between the telescope and computer in good condition? -If you think all settings are correct but the telescope still moves erratically or not at all, then please send a report to kstars-devel@kde.org +If you think all settings are correct but the telescope still moves erratically or not at all, then please send a report to kstars-devel@kde.org diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/install.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/install.docbook index 8f8905cafca..ac95f5f3540 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/install.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/install.docbook @@ -1,138 +1,42 @@ -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &kstars; -&kstars; is distributed with &kde; as part of the tdeedu "Edutainment" module. -We also occasionally make an independent release. These independent releases will be available as a gzipped tar archive from the following website: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/kstars/. -Independent releases are announced through the kstars-announce@lists.sourceforge.net mailing list. Releases are also posted to the &kstars; home page, kde-apps.org, and freshmeat.net. -&kstars; is been packaged by many Linux/BSD distributions, including Redhat, Suse, and Mandrake. Some distributions package &kstars; as a separate application, some just provide a tdeedu package, which includes &kstars;. If you would like the latest CVS development version of &kstars;, please follow these instructions. +How to obtain &kstars; +&kstars; is distributed with &kde; as part of the tdeedu "Edutainment" module. +We also occasionally make an independent release. These independent releases will be available as a gzipped tar archive from the following website: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/kstars/. +Independent releases are announced through the kstars-announce@lists.sourceforge.net mailing list. Releases are also posted to the &kstars; home page, kde-apps.org, and freshmeat.net. +&kstars; is been packaged by many Linux/BSD distributions, including Redhat, Suse, and Mandrake. Some distributions package &kstars; as a separate application, some just provide a tdeedu package, which includes &kstars;. If you would like the latest CVS development version of &kstars;, please follow these instructions. -Requirements -In order to successfully run &kstars;, you need &kde; ->=3.2 and &Qt; ->=3.2. -To compile &kstars;, you will also have to have the following packages installed: -tdelibs-devel -qt-devel -zlib-devel -fam-devel -png-devel -jpeg-devel -autoconf ( ->=2.5) - +Requirements +In order to successfully run &kstars;, you need &kde; >=3.2 and &Qt;>=3.2. +To compile &kstars;, you will also have to have the following packages installed: +tdelibs-devel +qt-devel +zlib-devel +fam-devel +png-devel +jpeg-devel +autoconf (>=2.5) + -On my system, &kstars; uses about 60 MB of system memory with the default settings. Most of this usage is due to the loaded object databases. You can dramatically reduce the memory footprint by reducing the faint limit for stars in the Configuration Window, or eliminating catalogs of objects (NGC, IC, comets, asteroids, &etc;). If &kstars; is idling, it uses very little CPU; but it will use as much as you have got when panning or zooming. +On my system, &kstars; uses about 60 MB of system memory with the default settings. Most of this usage is due to the loaded object databases. You can dramatically reduce the memory footprint by reducing the faint limit for stars in the Configuration Window, or eliminating catalogs of objects (NGC, IC, comets, asteroids, &etc;). If &kstars; is idling, it uses very little CPU; but it will use as much as you have got when panning or zooming. -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation -In order to compile and install &kstars; on your system, type the following in the base folder of the unpacked &kstars; distribution: % ./configure --prefix=$TDEDIR -% make -% make install +In order to compile and install &kstars; on your system, type the following in the base folder of the unpacked &kstars; distribution: % ./configure --prefix=$TDEDIR +% make +% make install -Please do not forget the prefix argument to configure. If your TDEDIR variable is not set, set prefix to whatever folder &kde; is installed in: this is usually either /usr, /opt/kde, or /opt/kde3. Also, make sure you do the last step as root. &kstars; uses autoconf and automake, so you should not have trouble compiling it. Should you run into problems please report them to the &kstars; mailing list kstars-devel@kde.org. +Please do not forget the prefix argument to configure. If your TDEDIR variable is not set, set prefix to whatever folder &kde; is installed in: this is usually either /usr, /opt/kde, or /opt/kde3. Also, make sure you do the last step as root. &kstars; uses autoconf and automake, so you should not have trouble compiling it. Should you run into problems please report them to the &kstars; mailing list kstars-devel@kde.org. -Configuration -At this point, there are no special configuration options or requirements. If &kstars; complains that there are missing data files, become root and manually copy all files in kstars/data/ to $(TDEDIR)/apps/kstars/ (If you do not have root privileges, copy them to ~/.trinity/share/apps/kstars/.) +Configuration +At this point, there are no special configuration options or requirements. If &kstars; complains that there are missing data files, become root and manually copy all files in kstars/data/ to $(TDEDIR)/apps/kstars/ (If you do not have root privileges, copy them to ~/.trinity/share/apps/kstars/.) diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/jmoons.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/jmoons.docbook index 63869ce059c..0b3be37e612 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/jmoons.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/jmoons.docbook @@ -1,39 +1,20 @@ -Jupiter Moons Tool -Tools -Jupiter Moons Tool +Jupiter Moons Tool +Tools +Jupiter Moons Tool -The Jupiter Moons Tool +The Jupiter Moons Tool - Jupiter Moons Tool + Jupiter Moons Tool -This tool displays the positions of Jupiter's four largest moons (Io, Europa, Ganymede, and Callisto) relative to Jupiter, as a function of time. Time is plotted vertically; the units are days and time=0.0 corresponds to the current simulation time. The horizontal axis displays the angular offset from Jupiter's position, in arcminutes. The offset is measured along the direction of Jupiter's equator. Each moon's position as a function of time traces a sinusoidal path in the plot, as the moon orbits around Jupiter. Each track is assigned a different colour to distinguish it from the others; the name labels at the top of the window indicate the colour used by each moon. The plot can be manipulated with the keyboard. The time axis can be expanded or compressed using the + and - keys. The time displayed at the center of the window can be changed with the [ and ] keys. +This tool displays the positions of Jupiter's four largest moons (Io, Europa, Ganymede, and Callisto) relative to Jupiter, as a function of time. Time is plotted vertically; the units are days and time=0.0 corresponds to the current simulation time. The horizontal axis displays the angular offset from Jupiter's position, in arcminutes. The offset is measured along the direction of Jupiter's equator. Each moon's position as a function of time traces a sinusoidal path in the plot, as the moon orbits around Jupiter. Each track is assigned a different colour to distinguish it from the others; the name labels at the top of the window indicate the colour used by each moon. The plot can be manipulated with the keyboard. The time axis can be expanded or compressed using the + and - keys. The time displayed at the center of the window can be changed with the [ and ] keys. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/julianday.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/julianday.docbook index 06e2832eb59..6b5ac82a544 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/julianday.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/julianday.docbook @@ -1,78 +1,9 @@ -John Cirillo +John Cirillo -Julian Day -Julian Day +Julian Day +Julian Day -Julian Days are a way of reckoning the current date by a simple count of the number of days that have passed since some remote, arbitrary date. This number of days is called the Julian Day, abbreviated as JD. The starting point, JD=0, is January 1, 4713 BC (or -4712 January 1, since there was no year '0'). Julian Days are very useful because they make it easy to determine the number of days between two events by simply subtracting their Julian Day numbers. Such a calculation is difficult for the standard (Gregorian) calendar, because days are grouped into months, which contain a variable number of days, and there is the added complication of Leap Years. Converting from the standard (Gregorian) calendar to Julian Days and vice versa is best left to a special program written to do this, such as the &kstars; Astrocalculator. However, for those interested, here is a simple example of a Gregorian to Julian day converter: JD = D - 32075 + 1461*( Y + 4800 + ( M - 14 ) / 12 ) / 4 + 367*( M - 2 - ( M - 14 ) / 12 * 12 ) / 12 - 3*( ( Y + 4900 + ( M - 14 ) / 12 ) / 100 ) / 4 where D is the day (1-31), M is the Month (1-12), and Y is the year (1801-2099). Note that this formula only works for dates between 1801 and 2099. More remote dates require a more complicated transformation. An example Julian Day is: JD 2440588, which corresponds to 1 Jan, 1970. Julian Days can also be used to tell time; the time of day is expressed as a fraction of a full day, with 12:00 noon (not midnight) as the zero point. So, 3:00 pm on 1 Jan 1970 is JD 2440588.125 (since 3:00 pm is 3 hours since noon, and 3/24 = 0.125 day). Note that the Julian Day is always determined from Universal Time, not Local Time. Astronomers use certain Julian Day values as important reference points, called Epochs. One widely-used epoch is called J2000; it is the Julian Day for 1 Jan, 2000 at 12:00 noon = JD 2451545.0. Much more information on Julian Days is available on the internet. A good starting point is the U.S. Naval Observatory. If that site is not available when you read this, try searching for Julian Day with your favourite search engine. +Julian Days are a way of reckoning the current date by a simple count of the number of days that have passed since some remote, arbitrary date. This number of days is called the Julian Day, abbreviated as JD. The starting point, JD=0, is January 1, 4713 BC (or -4712 January 1, since there was no year '0'). Julian Days are very useful because they make it easy to determine the number of days between two events by simply subtracting their Julian Day numbers. Such a calculation is difficult for the standard (Gregorian) calendar, because days are grouped into months, which contain a variable number of days, and there is the added complication of Leap Years. Converting from the standard (Gregorian) calendar to Julian Days and vice versa is best left to a special program written to do this, such as the &kstars; Astrocalculator. However, for those interested, here is a simple example of a Gregorian to Julian day converter: JD = D - 32075 + 1461*( Y + 4800 + ( M - 14 ) / 12 ) / 4 + 367*( M - 2 - ( M - 14 ) / 12 * 12 ) / 12 - 3*( ( Y + 4900 + ( M - 14 ) / 12 ) / 100 ) / 4 where D is the day (1-31), M is the Month (1-12), and Y is the year (1801-2099). Note that this formula only works for dates between 1801 and 2099. More remote dates require a more complicated transformation. An example Julian Day is: JD 2440588, which corresponds to 1 Jan, 1970. Julian Days can also be used to tell time; the time of day is expressed as a fraction of a full day, with 12:00 noon (not midnight) as the zero point. So, 3:00 pm on 1 Jan 1970 is JD 2440588.125 (since 3:00 pm is 3 hours since noon, and 3/24 = 0.125 day). Note that the Julian Day is always determined from Universal Time, not Local Time. Astronomers use certain Julian Day values as important reference points, called Epochs. One widely-used epoch is called J2000; it is the Julian Day for 1 Jan, 2000 at 12:00 noon = JD 2451545.0. Much more information on Julian Days is available on the internet. A good starting point is the U.S. Naval Observatory. If that site is not available when you read this, try searching for Julian Day with your favourite search engine. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/leapyear.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/leapyear.docbook index cf855c7534b..ff71d4bee17 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/leapyear.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/leapyear.docbook @@ -1,58 +1,12 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Leap Years -Leap Years +Leap Years +Leap Years -The Earth has two major components of motion. First, it spins on its rotational axis; a full spin rotation takes one Day to complete. Second, it orbits around the Sun; a full orbital rotation takes one Year to complete. There are normally 365 days in one calendar year, but it turns out that a true year (&ie;, a full orbit of the Earth around the Sun; also called a tropical year) is a little bit longer than 365 days. In other words, in the time it takes the Earth to complete one orbital circuit, it completes 365.24219 spin rotations. Do not be too surprised by this; there is no reason to expect the spin and orbital motions of the Earth to be synchronised in any way. However, it does make marking calendar time a bit awkward.... What would happen if we simply ignored the extra 0.24219 rotation at the end of the year, and simply defined a calendar year to always be 365.0 days long? The calendar is basically a charting of the Earth's progress around the Sun. If we ignore the extra bit at the end of each year, then with every passing year, the calendar date lags a little more behind the true position of Earth around the Sun. In just a few decades, the dates of the solstices and equinoxes will have drifted noticeably. In fact, it used to be that all years were defined to have 365.0 days, and the calendar drifted away from the true seasons as a result. In the year 46 BCE, Julius Caeser established the Julian Calendar, which implemented the world's first leap years: He decreed that every 4th year would be 366 days long, so that a year was 365.25 days long, on average. This basically solved the calendar drift problem. However, the problem wasn't completely solved by the Julian calendar, because a tropical year isn't 365.25 days long; it's 365.24219 days long. You still have a calendar drift problem, it just takes many centuries to become noticeable. And so, in 1582, Pope Gregory XIII instituted the Gregorian calendar, which was largely the same as the Julian Calendar, with one more trick added for leap years: even Century years (those ending with the digits 00) are only leap years if they are divisible by 400. So, the years 1700, 1800, and 1900 were not leap years (though they would have been under the Julian Calendar), whereas the year 2000 was a leap year. This change makes the average length of a year 365.2425 days. So, there is still a tiny calendar drift, but it amounts to an error of only 3 days in 10,000 years. The Gregorian calendar is still used as a standard calendar throughout most of the world. +The Earth has two major components of motion. First, it spins on its rotational axis; a full spin rotation takes one Day to complete. Second, it orbits around the Sun; a full orbital rotation takes one Year to complete. There are normally 365 days in one calendar year, but it turns out that a true year (&ie;, a full orbit of the Earth around the Sun; also called a tropical year) is a little bit longer than 365 days. In other words, in the time it takes the Earth to complete one orbital circuit, it completes 365.24219 spin rotations. Do not be too surprised by this; there is no reason to expect the spin and orbital motions of the Earth to be synchronised in any way. However, it does make marking calendar time a bit awkward.... What would happen if we simply ignored the extra 0.24219 rotation at the end of the year, and simply defined a calendar year to always be 365.0 days long? The calendar is basically a charting of the Earth's progress around the Sun. If we ignore the extra bit at the end of each year, then with every passing year, the calendar date lags a little more behind the true position of Earth around the Sun. In just a few decades, the dates of the solstices and equinoxes will have drifted noticeably. In fact, it used to be that all years were defined to have 365.0 days, and the calendar drifted away from the true seasons as a result. In the year 46 BCE, Julius Caeser established the Julian Calendar, which implemented the world's first leap years: He decreed that every 4th year would be 366 days long, so that a year was 365.25 days long, on average. This basically solved the calendar drift problem. However, the problem wasn't completely solved by the Julian calendar, because a tropical year isn't 365.25 days long; it's 365.24219 days long. You still have a calendar drift problem, it just takes many centuries to become noticeable. And so, in 1582, Pope Gregory XIII instituted the Gregorian calendar, which was largely the same as the Julian Calendar, with one more trick added for leap years: even Century years (those ending with the digits 00) are only leap years if they are divisible by 400. So, the years 1700, 1800, and 1900 were not leap years (though they would have been under the Julian Calendar), whereas the year 2000 was a leap year. This change makes the average length of a year 365.2425 days. So, there is still a tiny calendar drift, but it amounts to an error of only 3 days in 10,000 years. The Gregorian calendar is still used as a standard calendar throughout most of the world. -Fun Trivia: When Pope Gregory instituted the Gregorian Calendar, the Julian Calendar had been followed for over 1500 years, and so the calendar date had already drifted by over a week. Pope Gregory re-synchronised the calendar by simply eliminating 10 days: in 1582, the day after October 4th was October 15th! +Fun Trivia: When Pope Gregory instituted the Gregorian Calendar, the Julian Calendar had been followed for over 1500 years, and so the calendar date had already drifted by over a week. Pope Gregory re-synchronised the calendar by simply eliminating 10 days: in 1582, the day after October 4th was October 15th! diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/lightcurves.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/lightcurves.docbook index 19b1b5d7a4d..79a9f1474a5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/lightcurves.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/lightcurves.docbook @@ -1,222 +1,85 @@ -Aaron Price
aavso@aavso.org -
 +Aaron Price
aavso@aavso.org +
 -AAVSO Light Curves -Tools -AAVSO Lightcurve Generator +AAVSO Light Curves +Tools +AAVSO Lightcurve Generator -The AAVSO Lightcurves Tool +The AAVSO Lightcurves Tool - AAVSO Lightcurves + AAVSO Lightcurves -Introduction -&kstars; can display light curves for variable stars from the observing program of the American Association of Variable Star Observers (AAVSO). This program monitors over 6,000 variable stars and consists of 10 million observations going back almost a century. &kstars; downloads the very latest data directly from the AAVSO database via the Internet, so a network connection is required to use this tool. -To use the tool, select a variable star either by designation or name in the left panel, and set the start and end dates to be plotted. In the right panel, select the type of data that should be plotted (see below). When you have made you selections, press the Retrieve Curve button. &kstars; will automatically connect to the AAVSO server, which will generate the lightcurve plot and send it to your computer for display. A sample lightcurve plot is shown below: +Introduction +&kstars; can display light curves for variable stars from the observing program of the American Association of Variable Star Observers (AAVSO). This program monitors over 6,000 variable stars and consists of 10 million observations going back almost a century. &kstars; downloads the very latest data directly from the AAVSO database via the Internet, so a network connection is required to use this tool. +To use the tool, select a variable star either by designation or name in the left panel, and set the start and end dates to be plotted. In the right panel, select the type of data that should be plotted (see below). When you have made you selections, press the Retrieve Curve button. &kstars; will automatically connect to the AAVSO server, which will generate the lightcurve plot and send it to your computer for display. A sample lightcurve plot is shown below: -A Sample Lightcurve +A Sample Lightcurve - Sample Lightcurve + Sample Lightcurve -Please not these light curves should NEVER be used in research, papers, presentations, publications, &etc;. They are only meant to be used as a source of info for &kstars;. They have not been validated and passed the AAVSO's strict quality control measures. We will be glad to give you good raw data simply by requesting it at http://www.aavso.org/adata/onlinedata/. -Specific questions about the data in the light curves can be sent to aavso@aavso.org. +Please not these light curves should NEVER be used in research, papers, presentations, publications, &etc;. They are only meant to be used as a source of info for &kstars;. They have not been validated and passed the AAVSO's strict quality control measures. We will be glad to give you good raw data simply by requesting it at http://www.aavso.org/adata/onlinedata/. +Specific questions about the data in the light curves can be sent to aavso@aavso.org. -About Variable Stars -Variable stars are stars that change in brightness. A light curve is a plot of a variable star's brightness over time. By looking at a light curve you can see how the star has behaved in the past and try to predict how it will behave in the future. Astronomers also use this data to model astrophysical processes in the star. This important to help us understand how stars work. +About Variable Stars +Variable stars are stars that change in brightness. A light curve is a plot of a variable star's brightness over time. By looking at a light curve you can see how the star has behaved in the past and try to predict how it will behave in the future. Astronomers also use this data to model astrophysical processes in the star. This important to help us understand how stars work. -The Data - -Here is a summary of the various types of data available in the light curves: -Visual Observation: This is an observation of a variable star by an observer with a regular telescope. It means that an observer saw the star at Y brightness on X date and time. - -Fainter than: Sometimes the star is too faint to be seen by the observer. When that happens, the observer reports the faintest star seen in the field. These are called fainter thans because the variable star was fainter than the brightness reported. - -Average: This is a computed running average of all the data reported. The bin number tells the computer how many days to use in each average calculation. This will need to be adjusted based on the frequency of observations. The error bars represent the 1 sigma standard deviation of error. - -CCDV: These are observations reported using a CCD with a Johnson V filter. CCDV observations tend to be more accurate than visual (but not always). - -CCDB: CCD observations with a Johnson B filter. - -CCDI: CCD observations with a Cousins Ic filter. - -CCDR: CCD observations with a Cousins R filter. - -Discrepant Data: This is data that has been flagged by an AAVSO staff member as being discrepant following HQ rules for data validation. Contact aavso@aavso.org for more information. - -Dates: The observational database the light curves are based on is updated every 10 minutes so you can get data in near real-time. Right now light curve data is only available back to 1961, but this will likely be expanded further back in time in the future. +The Data + +Here is a summary of the various types of data available in the light curves: +Visual Observation: This is an observation of a variable star by an observer with a regular telescope. It means that an observer saw the star at Y brightness on X date and time. + +Fainter than: Sometimes the star is too faint to be seen by the observer. When that happens, the observer reports the faintest star seen in the field. These are called fainter thans because the variable star was fainter than the brightness reported. + +Average: This is a computed running average of all the data reported. The bin number tells the computer how many days to use in each average calculation. This will need to be adjusted based on the frequency of observations. The error bars represent the 1 sigma standard deviation of error. + +CCDV: These are observations reported using a CCD with a Johnson V filter. CCDV observations tend to be more accurate than visual (but not always). + +CCDB: CCD observations with a Johnson B filter. + +CCDI: CCD observations with a Cousins Ic filter. + +CCDR: CCD observations with a Cousins R filter. + +Discrepant Data: This is data that has been flagged by an AAVSO staff member as being discrepant following HQ rules for data validation. Contact aavso@aavso.org for more information. + +Dates: The observational database the light curves are based on is updated every 10 minutes so you can get data in near real-time. Right now light curve data is only available back to 1961, but this will likely be expanded further back in time in the future. -Updating your local copy of Variable Stars -The AAVSO publishes the full list of variable stars in their monitoring program. This file is updated monthly with newly discovered variable stars. To sync the list that &kstars; uses with the AAVSO master list, click on the Update List button in the AAVSO dialogue. &kstars; will then attempt to connect to the AAVSO database and download the latest list. +Updating your local copy of Variable Stars +The AAVSO publishes the full list of variable stars in their monitoring program. This file is updated monthly with newly discovered variable stars. To sync the list that &kstars; uses with the AAVSO master list, click on the Update List button in the AAVSO dialogue. &kstars; will then attempt to connect to the AAVSO database and download the latest list. -The customised data stream provided by the AAVSO was implemented for &kstars; by Aaron Price. Thank you, Aaron! +The customised data stream provided by the AAVSO was implemented for &kstars; by Aaron Price. Thank you, Aaron! diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/luminosity.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/luminosity.docbook index fcb119a70ee..49d5a957955 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/luminosity.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/luminosity.docbook @@ -2,43 +2,23 @@ -Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu -
 +Jasem Mutlaq
mutlaqja@ku.edu +
 -Luminosity -Luminosity -Flux +Luminosity +Luminosity +Flux -Luminosity is the amount of energy emitted by a star each second. +Luminosity is the amount of energy emitted by a star each second. -All stars radiate light over a broad range of frequencies in the electromagnetic spectrum from the low energy radio waves up to the highly energetic gamma rays. A star that emits predominately in the ultra-violet region of the spectrum produces a total amount of energy magnitudes larger than that produced in a star that emits principally in the infrared. Therefore, luminosity is a measure of energy emitted by a star over all wavelengths. The relationship between wavelength and energy was quantified by Einstein as E = h * v where v is the frequency, h is the Planck constant, and E is the photon energy in joules. That is, shorter wavelengths (and thus higher frequencies) correspond to higher energies. +All stars radiate light over a broad range of frequencies in the electromagnetic spectrum from the low energy radio waves up to the highly energetic gamma rays. A star that emits predominately in the ultra-violet region of the spectrum produces a total amount of energy magnitudes larger than that produced in a star that emits principally in the infrared. Therefore, luminosity is a measure of energy emitted by a star over all wavelengths. The relationship between wavelength and energy was quantified by Einstein as E = h * v where v is the frequency, h is the Planck constant, and E is the photon energy in joules. That is, shorter wavelengths (and thus higher frequencies) correspond to higher energies. -For example, a wavelength of lambda = 10 meter lies in the radio region of the electromagnetic spectrum and has a frequency of f = c / lambda = 3 * 10^8 m/s / 10 = 30 MHz where c is the speed of light. The energy of this photon is E = h * v = 6.625 * 10^-34 J s * 30 Mhz = 1.988 * 10^-26 joules. On the other hand, visible light has much shorter wavelengths and higher frequencies. A photon that has a wavelength of lambda = 5 * 10^-9 meters (A greenish photon) has an energy E = 3.975 * 10^-17 joules which is over a billion times higher than the energy of a radio photon. Similarly, a photon of red light (wavelength lambda = 700 nm) has less energy than a photon of violet light (wavelength lambda = 400 nm). +For example, a wavelength of lambda = 10 meter lies in the radio region of the electromagnetic spectrum and has a frequency of f = c / lambda = 3 * 10^8 m/s / 10 = 30 MHz where c is the speed of light. The energy of this photon is E = h * v = 6.625 * 10^-34 J s * 30 Mhz = 1.988 * 10^-26 joules. On the other hand, visible light has much shorter wavelengths and higher frequencies. A photon that has a wavelength of lambda = 5 * 10^-9 meters (A greenish photon) has an energy E = 3.975 * 10^-17 joules which is over a billion times higher than the energy of a radio photon. Similarly, a photon of red light (wavelength lambda = 700 nm) has less energy than a photon of violet light (wavelength lambda = 400 nm). -Luminosity depends both on temperature and surface area. This makes sense because a burning log radiates more energy than a match, even though both have the same temperature. Similarly, an iron rod heated to 2000 degrees emits more energy than when it is heated to only 200 degrees. +Luminosity depends both on temperature and surface area. This makes sense because a burning log radiates more energy than a match, even though both have the same temperature. Similarly, an iron rod heated to 2000 degrees emits more energy than when it is heated to only 200 degrees. -Luminosity is a very fundamental quantity in Astronomy and Astrophysics. Much of what is learnt about celestial objects comes from analysing their light. This is because the physical processes that occur inside stars gets recorded and transmitted by light. Luminosity is measured in units of energy per second. Astronomers prefer to use Ergs, rather than Watts, when quantifying luminosity. +Luminosity is a very fundamental quantity in Astronomy and Astrophysics. Much of what is learnt about celestial objects comes from analysing their light. This is because the physical processes that occur inside stars gets recorded and transmitted by light. Luminosity is measured in units of energy per second. Astronomers prefer to use Ergs, rather than Watts, when quantifying luminosity. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/magnitude.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/magnitude.docbook index 11c6ed98044..099f5b76913 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/magnitude.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/magnitude.docbook @@ -1,60 +1,12 @@ -Girish V +Girish V -Magnitude Scale -Magnitude Scale -Flux Star Colours and Temperatures -2500 years ago, the ancient Greek astronomer Hipparchus classified the brightnesses of visible stars in the sky on a scale from 1 to 6. He called the very brightest stars in the sky first magnitude, and the very faintest stars he could see sixth magnitude. Amazingly, two and a half millenia later, Hipparchus's classification scheme is still widely used by astronomers, although it has since been modernised and quantified. -The magnitude scale runs backwards to what you might expect: brighter stars have smaller magnitudes than fainter stars). +Magnitude Scale +Magnitude Scale +Flux Star Colours and Temperatures +2500 years ago, the ancient Greek astronomer Hipparchus classified the brightnesses of visible stars in the sky on a scale from 1 to 6. He called the very brightest stars in the sky first magnitude, and the very faintest stars he could see sixth magnitude. Amazingly, two and a half millenia later, Hipparchus's classification scheme is still widely used by astronomers, although it has since been modernised and quantified. +The magnitude scale runs backwards to what you might expect: brighter stars have smaller magnitudes than fainter stars). -The modern magnitude scale is a quantitative measurement of the flux of light coming from a star, with a logarithmic scaling: m = m_0 - 2.5 log (F / F_0) If you do not understand the maths, this just says that the magnitude of a given star (m) is different from that of some standard star (m_0) by 2.5 times the logarithm of their flux ratio. The 2.5 *log factor means that if the flux ratio is 100, the difference in magnitudes is 5 mag. So, a 6th magnitude star is 100 times fainter than a 1st magnitude star. The reason Hipparchus's simple classification translates to a relatively complex function is that the human eye responds logarithmically to light. There are several different magnitude scales in use, each of which serves a different purpose. The most common is the apparent magnitude scale; this is just the measure of how bright stars (and other objects) look to the human eye. The apparent magnitude scale defines the star Vega to have magnitude 0.0, and assigns magnitudes to all other objects using the above equation, and a measure of the flux ratio of each object to Vega. It is difficult to understand stars using just the apparent magnitudes. Imagine two stars in the sky with the same apparent magnitude, so they appear to be equally bright. You cannot know just by looking if the two have the same intrinsic brightness; it is possible that one star is intrinsically brighter, but further away. If we knew the distances to the stars (see the parallax article), we could account for their distances and assign Absolute magnitudes which would reflect their true, intrinsic brightness. The absolute magnitude is defined as the apparent magnitude the star would have if observed from a distance of 10 parsecs (1 parsec is 3.26 light-years, or 3.1 x 10^18 cm). The absolute magnitude (M) can be determined from the apparent magnitude (m) and the distance in parsecs (d) using the formula: M = m + 5 - 5 * log(d) (note that M=m when d=10). The modern magnitude scale is no longer based on the human eye; it is based on photographic plates and photoelectric photometers. With telescopes, we can see objects much fainter than Hipparchus could see with his unaided eyes, so the magnitude scale has been extended beyond 6th magnitude. In fact, the Hubble Space Telescope can image stars nearly as faint as 30th magnitude, which is one trillion times fainter than Vega. A final note: the magnitude is usually measured through a colour filter of some kind, and these magnitudes are denoted by a subscript describing the filter (&ie;, m_V is the magnitude through a visual filter, which is greenish; m_B is the magnitude through a blue filter; m_pg is the photographic plate magnitude &etc;). +The modern magnitude scale is a quantitative measurement of the flux of light coming from a star, with a logarithmic scaling: m = m_0 - 2.5 log (F / F_0) If you do not understand the maths, this just says that the magnitude of a given star (m) is different from that of some standard star (m_0) by 2.5 times the logarithm of their flux ratio. The 2.5 *log factor means that if the flux ratio is 100, the difference in magnitudes is 5 mag. So, a 6th magnitude star is 100 times fainter than a 1st magnitude star. The reason Hipparchus's simple classification translates to a relatively complex function is that the human eye responds logarithmically to light. There are several different magnitude scales in use, each of which serves a different purpose. The most common is the apparent magnitude scale; this is just the measure of how bright stars (and other objects) look to the human eye. The apparent magnitude scale defines the star Vega to have magnitude 0.0, and assigns magnitudes to all other objects using the above equation, and a measure of the flux ratio of each object to Vega. It is difficult to understand stars using just the apparent magnitudes. Imagine two stars in the sky with the same apparent magnitude, so they appear to be equally bright. You cannot know just by looking if the two have the same intrinsic brightness; it is possible that one star is intrinsically brighter, but further away. If we knew the distances to the stars (see the parallax article), we could account for their distances and assign Absolute magnitudes which would reflect their true, intrinsic brightness. The absolute magnitude is defined as the apparent magnitude the star would have if observed from a distance of 10 parsecs (1 parsec is 3.26 light-years, or 3.1 x 10^18 cm). The absolute magnitude (M) can be determined from the apparent magnitude (m) and the distance in parsecs (d) using the formula: M = m + 5 - 5 * log(d) (note that M=m when d=10). The modern magnitude scale is no longer based on the human eye; it is based on photographic plates and photoelectric photometers. With telescopes, we can see objects much fainter than Hipparchus could see with his unaided eyes, so the magnitude scale has been extended beyond 6th magnitude. In fact, the Hubble Space Telescope can image stars nearly as faint as 30th magnitude, which is one trillion times fainter than Vega. A final note: the magnitude is usually measured through a colour filter of some kind, and these magnitudes are denoted by a subscript describing the filter (&ie;, m_V is the magnitude through a visual filter, which is greenish; m_B is the magnitude through a blue filter; m_pg is the photographic plate magnitude &etc;). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/meridian.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/meridian.docbook index 067464da584..17284fabcf8 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/meridian.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/meridian.docbook @@ -1,41 +1,10 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -The Local Meridian -Local Meridian -Hour Angle Celestial Sphere -The Local Meridian is an imaginary Great Circle on the Celestial Sphere that is perpendicular to the local Horizon. It passes through the North point on the Horizon, through the Celestial Pole, up to the Zenith, and through the South point on the Horizon. Because it is fixed to the local Horizon, stars will appear to drift past the Local Meridian as the Earth spins. You can use an object's Right Ascension and the Local Sidereal Time to determine when it will cross your Local Meridian (see Hour Angle). +The Local Meridian +Local Meridian +Hour Angle Celestial Sphere +The Local Meridian is an imaginary Great Circle on the Celestial Sphere that is perpendicular to the local Horizon. It passes through the North point on the Horizon, through the Celestial Pole, up to the Zenith, and through the South point on the Horizon. Because it is fixed to the local Horizon, stars will appear to drift past the Local Meridian as the Earth spins. You can use an object's Right Ascension and the Local Sidereal Time to determine when it will cross your Local Meridian (see Hour Angle). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/parallax.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/parallax.docbook index ad19aa1c039..b88e8799308 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/parallax.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/parallax.docbook @@ -1,62 +1,13 @@ -James Lindenschmidt +James Lindenschmidt -Parallax -Parallax -Astronomical UnitParallax -ParsecParallax - Parallax is the apparent change of an observed object's position caused by a shift in the observer's position. As an example, hold your hand in front of you at arm's length, and observe an object on the other side of the room behind your hand. Now tilt your head to your right shoulder, and your hand will appear on the left side of the distant object. Tilt your head to your left shoulder, and your hand will appear to shift to the right side of the distant object. - Because the Earth is in orbit around the Sun, we observe the sky from a constantly moving position in space. Therefore, we should expect to see an annual parallax effect, in which the positions of nearby objects appear to wobble back and forth in response to our motion around the Sun. This does in fact happen, but the distances to even the nearest stars are so great that you need to make careful observations with a telescope to detect itThe ancient Greek astronomers knew about parallax; because they could not observe an annual parallax in the positions of stars, they concluded that the Earth could not be in motion around the Sun. What they did not realise was that the stars are millions of times further away than the Sun, so the parallax effect is impossible to see with the unaided eye.. - Modern telescopes allow astronomers to use the annual parallax to measure the distance to nearby stars, using triangulation. The astronomer carefully measures the position of the star on two dates, spaced six months apart. The nearer the star is to the Sun, the larger the apparent shift in its position will be between the two dates. - Over the six-month period, the Earth has moved through half its orbit around the Sun; in this time its position has changed by 2 Astronomical Units (abbreviated AU; 1 AU is the distance from the Earth to the Sun, or about 150 million kilometers). This sounds like a really long distance, but even the nearest star to the Sun (alpha Centauri) is about 40 trillion kilometers away. Therefore, the annual parallax is very small, typically smaller than one arcsecond, which is only 1/3600 of one degree. A convenient distance unit for nearby stars is the parsec, which is short for "parallax arcsecond". One parsec is the distance a star would have if its observed parallax angle was one arcsecond. It is equal to 3.26 light-years, or 31 trillion kilometersAstronomers like this unit so much that they now use kiloparsecs to measure galaxy-scale distances, and Megaparsecs to measure intergalactic distances, even though these distances are much too large to have an actual, observable parallax. Other methods are required to determine these distances. +Parallax +Parallax +Astronomical UnitParallax +ParsecParallax + Parallax is the apparent change of an observed object's position caused by a shift in the observer's position. As an example, hold your hand in front of you at arm's length, and observe an object on the other side of the room behind your hand. Now tilt your head to your right shoulder, and your hand will appear on the left side of the distant object. Tilt your head to your left shoulder, and your hand will appear to shift to the right side of the distant object. + Because the Earth is in orbit around the Sun, we observe the sky from a constantly moving position in space. Therefore, we should expect to see an annual parallax effect, in which the positions of nearby objects appear to wobble back and forth in response to our motion around the Sun. This does in fact happen, but the distances to even the nearest stars are so great that you need to make careful observations with a telescope to detect itThe ancient Greek astronomers knew about parallax; because they could not observe an annual parallax in the positions of stars, they concluded that the Earth could not be in motion around the Sun. What they did not realise was that the stars are millions of times further away than the Sun, so the parallax effect is impossible to see with the unaided eye.. + Modern telescopes allow astronomers to use the annual parallax to measure the distance to nearby stars, using triangulation. The astronomer carefully measures the position of the star on two dates, spaced six months apart. The nearer the star is to the Sun, the larger the apparent shift in its position will be between the two dates. + Over the six-month period, the Earth has moved through half its orbit around the Sun; in this time its position has changed by 2 Astronomical Units (abbreviated AU; 1 AU is the distance from the Earth to the Sun, or about 150 million kilometers). This sounds like a really long distance, but even the nearest star to the Sun (alpha Centauri) is about 40 trillion kilometers away. Therefore, the annual parallax is very small, typically smaller than one arcsecond, which is only 1/3600 of one degree. A convenient distance unit for nearby stars is the parsec, which is short for "parallax arcsecond". One parsec is the distance a star would have if its observed parallax angle was one arcsecond. It is equal to 3.26 light-years, or 31 trillion kilometersAstronomers like this unit so much that they now use kiloparsecs to measure galaxy-scale distances, and Megaparsecs to measure intergalactic distances, even though these distances are much too large to have an actual, observable parallax. Other methods are required to determine these distances. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/precession.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/precession.docbook index 354fa09447b..efbd1d3a6f5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/precession.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/precession.docbook @@ -1,56 +1,13 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Precession -Precession +Precession +Precession -Precession is the gradual change in the direction of the Earth's spin axis. The spin axis traces a cone, completing a full circuit in 26,000 years. If you have ever spun a top or a dreidel, the wobbling rotation of the top as it spins is precession. Because the direction of the Earth's spin axis changes, so does the location of the Celestial Poles. The reason for the Earth's precession is complicated. The Earth is not a perfect sphere, it is a bit flattened, meaning the Great Circle of the equator is longer than a meridonal great circle that passes through the poles. Also, the Moon and Sun lie outside the Earth's Equatorial plane. As a result, the gravitational pull of the Moon and Sun on the oblate Earth induces a slight torque in addition to a linear force. This torque on the spinning body of the Earth leads to the precessional motion. +Precession is the gradual change in the direction of the Earth's spin axis. The spin axis traces a cone, completing a full circuit in 26,000 years. If you have ever spun a top or a dreidel, the wobbling rotation of the top as it spins is precession. Because the direction of the Earth's spin axis changes, so does the location of the Celestial Poles. The reason for the Earth's precession is complicated. The Earth is not a perfect sphere, it is a bit flattened, meaning the Great Circle of the equator is longer than a meridonal great circle that passes through the poles. Also, the Moon and Sun lie outside the Earth's Equatorial plane. As a result, the gravitational pull of the Moon and Sun on the oblate Earth induces a slight torque in addition to a linear force. This torque on the spinning body of the Earth leads to the precessional motion. -Exercise: -Precession is easiest to see by observing the Celestial Pole. To find the pole, first switch to Equatorial Coordinates in the Configure &kstars; window, and then hold down the Up arrow key until the display stops scrolling. The declination displayed in the centre of the Info Panel should be +90 degrees, and the bright star Polaris should be nearly at the centre of the screen. Try slewing with the left and right arrow keys. Notice that the sky appears to rotate around the Pole. We will now demonstrate Precession by changing the Date to a very remote year, and observing that the location of the Celestial Pole is no longer near Polaris. Open the Set Time window (&Ctrl;S), and set the date to the year 8000 (currently, &kstars; cannot handle dates much more remote than this, but this date is sufficient for our purposes). Notice that the sky display is now centred at a point between the constellations Cygnus and Cepheus. Verify that this is actually the pole by slewing left and right: the sky rotates about this point; in the year 8000, the North celestial pole will no longer be near Polaris. +Exercise: +Precession is easiest to see by observing the Celestial Pole. To find the pole, first switch to Equatorial Coordinates in the Configure &kstars; window, and then hold down the Up arrow key until the display stops scrolling. The declination displayed in the centre of the Info Panel should be +90 degrees, and the bright star Polaris should be nearly at the centre of the screen. Try slewing with the left and right arrow keys. Notice that the sky appears to rotate around the Pole. We will now demonstrate Precession by changing the Date to a very remote year, and observing that the location of the Celestial Pole is no longer near Polaris. Open the Set Time window (&Ctrl;S), and set the date to the year 8000 (currently, &kstars; cannot handle dates much more remote than this, but this date is sufficient for our purposes). Notice that the sky display is now centred at a point between the constellations Cygnus and Cepheus. Verify that this is actually the pole by slewing left and right: the sky rotates about this point; in the year 8000, the North celestial pole will no longer be near Polaris. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/quicktour.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/quicktour.docbook index 229195bf066..c310571cabe 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/quicktour.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/quicktour.docbook @@ -1,334 +1,141 @@ -A Quick Tour of &kstars; +A Quick Tour of &kstars; -This chapter presents a guided tour of &kstars;, introducing many of its important features. +This chapter presents a guided tour of &kstars;, introducing many of its important features. -Here is a screenshot of the &kstars; main window: +Here is a screenshot of the &kstars; main window: - Main Window + Main Window -The above screenshot shows a typical view of the KStars program. You can see the sky display centered on Betelgeuse, the brightest star in the constellation Orion. Orion has just risen above the eastern horizon. Stars are displayed with realistic colors and relative brightnesses. M 42, the Orion Nebula, is visible on the right side of the screen, just above the horizon. If you look closely, you can also see the Sun and the planet Mercury in the upper left. In three corners of the sky display, there are on-screen text labels displaying data on the current time (LT: 06:44:58 20 June 2004), the current Geographic Location (Tucson, Arizona, USA), and the current object in the center of the display (Focused on: Betelgeuse (alpha Orionis)). Above the sky display, there are two toolbars. The main toolbar contains shortcuts for menu functions, as well as a time-step widget which controls how fast the simulation clock runs. The view toolbar contains buttons that toggle the display of different kinds of objects in the sky. At the bottom of the window, there is a status bar which displays the name of any object you click on, and the sky coordinates (both Right Ascension/Declination and Azimuth/Altitude) of the mouse cursor. +The above screenshot shows a typical view of the KStars program. You can see the sky display centered on Betelgeuse, the brightest star in the constellation Orion. Orion has just risen above the eastern horizon. Stars are displayed with realistic colors and relative brightnesses. M 42, the Orion Nebula, is visible on the right side of the screen, just above the horizon. If you look closely, you can also see the Sun and the planet Mercury in the upper left. In three corners of the sky display, there are on-screen text labels displaying data on the current time (LT: 06:44:58 20 June 2004), the current Geographic Location (Tucson, Arizona, USA), and the current object in the center of the display (Focused on: Betelgeuse (alpha Orionis)). Above the sky display, there are two toolbars. The main toolbar contains shortcuts for menu functions, as well as a time-step widget which controls how fast the simulation clock runs. The view toolbar contains buttons that toggle the display of different kinds of objects in the sky. At the bottom of the window, there is a status bar which displays the name of any object you click on, and the sky coordinates (both Right Ascension/Declination and Azimuth/Altitude) of the mouse cursor. -The Setup Wizard +The Setup Wizard -Setup Wizard The first time you run KStars, you will be presented with a Setup Wizard, which allows you to easily set your geographic location and download some extra data files. You can press the Finish button at any time to exit the Setup Wizard. +Setup Wizard The first time you run KStars, you will be presented with a Setup Wizard, which allows you to easily set your geographic location and download some extra data files. You can press the Finish button at any time to exit the Setup Wizard. -The first page of the Setup Wizard allows you to choose the starting geographic location, by selecting from the list of the 2500+ known locations on the right side of the window. The list of locations can be filtered to match the text you enter in the City, Province, and Country edit boxes. If your desired location is not present in the list, you can select a nearby city instead for now. Later on, you can add your precise location manually using the Set Geographic Location tool. Once you have selected a starting location, press the Next button. +The first page of the Setup Wizard allows you to choose the starting geographic location, by selecting from the list of the 2500+ known locations on the right side of the window. The list of locations can be filtered to match the text you enter in the City, Province, and Country edit boxes. If your desired location is not present in the list, you can select a nearby city instead for now. Later on, you can add your precise location manually using the Set Geographic Location tool. Once you have selected a starting location, press the Next button. -The second page of the Setup Wizard allows you to download extra data that are not included with the standard distribution of &kstars;. Simply press the Download Extra Data button to open the Get New Stuff tool. When you are all done, press the Finish button in the Setup Wizard to start exploring &kstars;. +The second page of the Setup Wizard allows you to download extra data that are not included with the standard distribution of &kstars;. Simply press the Download Extra Data button to open the Get New Stuff tool. When you are all done, press the Finish button in the Setup Wizard to start exploring &kstars;. -The Download Extra Data tool is only available if you have KDE 3.3.x installed. +The Download Extra Data tool is only available if you have KDE 3.3.x installed. -Have a Look Around +Have a Look Around -Navigation Controls -Basics -Now that we have the time and location set, let us have a look around. You can pan the display using the arrow keys. If you hold down the &Shift; key before panning, the scrolling speed is doubled. The display can also be panned by clicking and dragging with the mouse. Note that while the display is scrolling, not all objects are displayed. This is done to cut down on the CPU load of recomputing object positions, which makes the scrolling smoother (you can configure what gets hidden while scrolling in the Configure &kstars; window). There are seven ways to change the magnification (or Zoom level) of the display: +Navigation Controls +Basics +Now that we have the time and location set, let us have a look around. You can pan the display using the arrow keys. If you hold down the &Shift; key before panning, the scrolling speed is doubled. The display can also be panned by clicking and dragging with the mouse. Note that while the display is scrolling, not all objects are displayed. This is done to cut down on the CPU load of recomputing object positions, which makes the scrolling smoother (you can configure what gets hidden while scrolling in the Configure &kstars; window). There are seven ways to change the magnification (or Zoom level) of the display: - Use the + and - keys + Use the + and - keys - Press the Zoom In/Zoom Out buttons in the toolbar + Press the Zoom In/Zoom Out buttons in the toolbar - Select Zoom In/Zoom Out from the View menu + Select Zoom In/Zoom Out from the View menu - Select Zoom to Angular Size... from the View menu. This allows you to specify the the field-of-view angle for the display, in degrees. + Select Zoom to Angular Size... from the View menu. This allows you to specify the the field-of-view angle for the display, in degrees. - Use the scroll wheel on your mouse + Use the scroll wheel on your mouse - Drag the mouse up and down with the &MMB; pressed. + Drag the mouse up and down with the &MMB; pressed. - Hold down &Ctrl; while dragging the mouse. This will allow you to define a rectangle in the map. When you release the mouse button, the display will zoom to match the rectangle. + Hold down &Ctrl; while dragging the mouse. This will allow you to define a rectangle in the map. When you release the mouse button, the display will zoom to match the rectangle. -Notice that as you zoom in, you can see fainter stars than at lower zoom settings. +Notice that as you zoom in, you can see fainter stars than at lower zoom settings. -Zoom out until you can see a green curve; this represents your local horizon. If you have not adjusted the default &kstars; configuration, the display will be solid green below the horizon, representing the solid ground of the Earth. There is also a white curve, which represents the celestial equator, and a tan curve, which represents the Ecliptic, the path that the Sun appears to follow across the sky over the course of a year. The Sun is always found somewhere along the Ecliptic, and the planets are never far from it. +Zoom out until you can see a green curve; this represents your local horizon. If you have not adjusted the default &kstars; configuration, the display will be solid green below the horizon, representing the solid ground of the Earth. There is also a white curve, which represents the celestial equator, and a tan curve, which represents the Ecliptic, the path that the Sun appears to follow across the sky over the course of a year. The Sun is always found somewhere along the Ecliptic, and the planets are never far from it. -Objects in the Sky +Objects in the Sky -Objects in the Sky -Overview -&kstars; displays thousands of celestial objects: stars, planets, comets, asteroids, clusters, nebulae and galaxies. You can interact with displayed objects to perform actions on them or obtain more information about them. Clicking on an object will identify it in the status bar, and simply hovering the mouse cursor on an object will label it temporarily in the map. Double-clicking will re-centre the display on the object and begin tracking it (so that it will remain centred as time passes). Right clicking an object opens the object's popup menu, which provides more options. +Objects in the Sky +Overview +&kstars; displays thousands of celestial objects: stars, planets, comets, asteroids, clusters, nebulae and galaxies. You can interact with displayed objects to perform actions on them or obtain more information about them. Clicking on an object will identify it in the status bar, and simply hovering the mouse cursor on an object will label it temporarily in the map. Double-clicking will re-centre the display on the object and begin tracking it (so that it will remain centred as time passes). Right clicking an object opens the object's popup menu, which provides more options. -The Popup Menu -Popup MenuExample +The Popup Menu +Popup MenuExample -Here is an example of the right click popup menu, for the Orion Nebula: +Here is an example of the right click popup menu, for the Orion Nebula: -Popup Menu for M 42 +Popup Menu for M 42 - Popup Menu for M 42 + Popup Menu for M 42 -The appearance of the popup menu depends somewhat on the kind of object you right-click on, but the basic structure is listed below. You can get more detailed information about the popup menu. +The appearance of the popup menu depends somewhat on the kind of object you right-click on, but the basic structure is listed below. You can get more detailed information about the popup menu. -The top section contains information labels (which are not selectable). The top one to three labels display the object's name(s) and object type. The next three labels show the object's rise, transit and set times. If the rise and set times say "circumpolar", it means that the object is always above the horizon for the present location. -The middle section contains items for performing actions on the object, such as Center and Track, Angular Distance To... (which enters the Angular Distance Mode, allowing you to measure the angle between objects in the sky), Details... (which opens the object's Object Details window), Attach Label and Add/Remove Trail (only available for Solar System bodies). +The top section contains information labels (which are not selectable). The top one to three labels display the object's name(s) and object type. The next three labels show the object's rise, transit and set times. If the rise and set times say "circumpolar", it means that the object is always above the horizon for the present location. +The middle section contains items for performing actions on the object, such as Center and Track, Angular Distance To... (which enters the Angular Distance Mode, allowing you to measure the angle between objects in the sky), Details... (which opens the object's Object Details window), Attach Label and Add/Remove Trail (only available for Solar System bodies). -Objects in the Sky -Internet Links -Popup Menu -The bottom section contains links to images and/or informative webpages about the selected object. If you know of an additional &URL; with information or an image of the object, you can add a custom link to the object's popup menu using the Add Link... item. +Objects in the Sky +Internet Links +Popup Menu +The bottom section contains links to images and/or informative webpages about the selected object. If you know of an additional &URL; with information or an image of the object, you can add a custom link to the object's popup menu using the Add Link... item. -Finding Objects -Find Object Tool -Objects in the Sky -Finding by Name -You can search for named objects using the Find Object tool, which can be opened by clicking on the search icon in the toolbar, by selecting Find Object... from the Pointing menu, or by pressing &Ctrl;F. The Find Object window is shown below: -Find Object Window +Finding Objects +Find Object Tool +Objects in the Sky +Finding by Name +You can search for named objects using the Find Object tool, which can be opened by clicking on the search icon in the toolbar, by selecting Find Object... from the Pointing menu, or by pressing &Ctrl;F. The Find Object window is shown below: +Find Object Window - Find Object Window + Find Object Window -The window contains a list of all the named objects that &kstars; is aware of. Many of the objects only have a numeric catalogue name (for example, NGC 3077), but some objects have a common name as well (for example, Whirlpool Galaxy). You can filter the list by name and by object type. To filter by name, enter a string in the edit box at the top of the window; the list will then only contain names which start with that string. To filter by type, select a type from the combo box at the bottom of the window. To centre the display on an object, highlight the desired object in the list, and press Ok. Note that if the object is below the horizon, the program will warn you that you may not see anything except the ground (you can make the ground invisible in the Display Options window, or by pressing the Ground button in the View toolbar). +The window contains a list of all the named objects that &kstars; is aware of. Many of the objects only have a numeric catalogue name (for example, NGC 3077), but some objects have a common name as well (for example, Whirlpool Galaxy). You can filter the list by name and by object type. To filter by name, enter a string in the edit box at the top of the window; the list will then only contain names which start with that string. To filter by type, select a type from the combo box at the bottom of the window. To centre the display on an object, highlight the desired object in the list, and press Ok. Note that if the object is below the horizon, the program will warn you that you may not see anything except the ground (you can make the ground invisible in the Display Options window, or by pressing the Ground button in the View toolbar). -Objects in the Sky -Tracking -&kstars; will automatically begin tracking on an object whenever one is centred in the display, either by using the Find Object window, by double-clicking on it, or by selecting Center and Track from its right-click popup menu. You can disengage tracking by panning the display, pressing the Lock icon in the Main toolbar, or selecting Track Object from the Pointing menu. +Objects in the Sky +Tracking +&kstars; will automatically begin tracking on an object whenever one is centred in the display, either by using the Find Object window, by double-clicking on it, or by selecting Center and Track from its right-click popup menu. You can disengage tracking by panning the display, pressing the Lock icon in the Main toolbar, or selecting Track Object from the Pointing menu. -Orbit Trails -Attached to centred object +Orbit Trails +Attached to centred object -When tracking on a Solar System body, &kstars; will automatically attach an orbit trail, showing the path of the body across the sky. You will likely need to change the clock's timestep to a large value (such as 1 day) to see the trail. +When tracking on a Solar System body, &kstars; will automatically attach an orbit trail, showing the path of the body across the sky. You will likely need to change the clock's timestep to a large value (such as 1 day) to see the trail. -This concludes the tour of &kstars;, although we have only scratched the surface of the available features. &kstars; includes many useful astronomy tools, it can directly control your telescope, and it offers a wide variety of configuration and customization options. In addition, this Handbook includes the AstroInfo Project, a series of short, interlinked articles explaining some of the celestial and astrophysical concepts behind &kstars;. +This concludes the tour of &kstars;, although we have only scratched the surface of the available features. &kstars; includes many useful astronomy tools, it can directly control your telescope, and it offers a wide variety of configuration and customization options. In addition, this Handbook includes the AstroInfo Project, a series of short, interlinked articles explaining some of the celestial and astrophysical concepts behind &kstars;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/retrograde.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/retrograde.docbook index b60374831cd..077356ad321 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/retrograde.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/retrograde.docbook @@ -1,31 +1,10 @@ -John Cirillo +John Cirillo -Retrograde Motion -Retrograde Motion +Retrograde Motion +Retrograde Motion -Retrograde Motion is the orbital motion of a body in a direction opposite that which is normal to spatial bodies within a given system. When we observe the sky, we expect most objects to appear to move in a particular direction with the passing of time. The apparent motion of most bodies in the sky is from east to west. However it is possible to observe a body moving west to east, such as an artificial satellite or space shuttle that is orbiting eastward. This orbit is considered Retrograde Motion. Retrograde Motion is most often used in reference to the motion of the outer planets (Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and so forth). Though these planets appear to move from east to west on a nightly basis in response to the spin of the Earth, they are actually drifting slowly eastward with respect to the stationary stars, which can be observed by noting the position of these planets for several nights in a row. This motion is normal for these planets, however, and not considered Retrograde Motion. However, since the Earth completes its orbit in a shorter period of time than these outer planets, we occasionally overtake an outer planet, like a faster car on a multiple-lane highway. When this occurs, the planet we are passing will first appear to stop its eastward drift, and it will then appear to drift back toward the west. This is Retrograde Motion, since it is in a direction opposite that which is typical for planets. Finally, as the Earth swings past the the planet in its orbit, they appear to resume their normal west-to-east drift on successive nights. This Retrograde Motion of the planets puzzled ancient Greek astronomers, and was one reason why they named these bodies planets which in Greek means wanderers. +Retrograde Motion is the orbital motion of a body in a direction opposite that which is normal to spatial bodies within a given system. When we observe the sky, we expect most objects to appear to move in a particular direction with the passing of time. The apparent motion of most bodies in the sky is from east to west. However it is possible to observe a body moving west to east, such as an artificial satellite or space shuttle that is orbiting eastward. This orbit is considered Retrograde Motion. Retrograde Motion is most often used in reference to the motion of the outer planets (Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and so forth). Though these planets appear to move from east to west on a nightly basis in response to the spin of the Earth, they are actually drifting slowly eastward with respect to the stationary stars, which can be observed by noting the position of these planets for several nights in a row. This motion is normal for these planets, however, and not considered Retrograde Motion. However, since the Earth completes its orbit in a shorter period of time than these outer planets, we occasionally overtake an outer planet, like a faster car on a multiple-lane highway. When this occurs, the planet we are passing will first appear to stop its eastward drift, and it will then appear to drift back toward the west. This is Retrograde Motion, since it is in a direction opposite that which is typical for planets. Finally, as the Earth swings past the the planet in its orbit, they appear to resume their normal west-to-east drift on successive nights. This Retrograde Motion of the planets puzzled ancient Greek astronomers, and was one reason why they named these bodies planets which in Greek means wanderers. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/scriptbuilder.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/scriptbuilder.docbook index d98a71ba0ba..cd1bd230641 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/scriptbuilder.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/scriptbuilder.docbook @@ -1,154 +1,35 @@ -The Script Builder Tool -Tools -Script Builder +The Script Builder Tool +Tools +Script Builder -TDE applications can be controlled externally from another program, from a console prompt, or from a shell script using the Desktop COmmunication Protocol (DCOP). KStars takes advantage of this feature to allow rather complex behaviours to be scripted and played back at any time. This can be used, for example, to create a classroom demo to illustrate an astronomical concept. -The problem with DCOP scripts is, writing them is a bit like programming, and can seem a daunting task to those who do not have programming experience. The Script Builder Tool provides a GUI point-and-click interface for constructing KStars DCOP scripts, making it very easy to create complex scripts. +TDE applications can be controlled externally from another program, from a console prompt, or from a shell script using the Desktop COmmunication Protocol (DCOP). KStars takes advantage of this feature to allow rather complex behaviours to be scripted and played back at any time. This can be used, for example, to create a classroom demo to illustrate an astronomical concept. +The problem with DCOP scripts is, writing them is a bit like programming, and can seem a daunting task to those who do not have programming experience. The Script Builder Tool provides a GUI point-and-click interface for constructing KStars DCOP scripts, making it very easy to create complex scripts. -Introduction to the Script Builder +Introduction to the Script Builder -Before explaining how to use the Script Builder, I provide a very brief introduction to all of the GUI components; for more infomation, use the "What's This?" function. +Before explaining how to use the Script Builder, I provide a very brief introduction to all of the GUI components; for more infomation, use the "What's This?" function. -The Script Builder Tool +The Script Builder Tool - Script Builder Tool + Script Builder Tool -The Script Builder is shown in the above screenshot. The box on the left is the Current Script box; it shows the list of commands that comprise the current working script. The box on the right is the Function Browser; it displays the list of all available script functions. Below the Function Browser, there is a small panel which will display short documentation about the script function highlighted in the Function Browser. The panel below the Current Script box is the Function Arguments panel; when a function is highlighted in the Current Script box, this panel will contain items for specifying values for any arguments that the highlighted function requires. Along the top of the window, there is a row of buttons which operate on the script as a whole. From left to right, they are: New Script, Open Script, Save Script, Save Script As..., and Test Script. The function of these buttons should be obvious, except perhaps the last button. Pressing Test Script will attempt to run the current script in the main KStars window. You should move the Script Builder window out of the way before pressing this, so you can see the results. In the centre of the window, there is a column of buttons which operate on individual script functions. From top to bottom, they are: Add Function, Remove Function, Copy Function, Move Up, and Move Down. Add Function adds the currently-highlighted function in the Function Browser to the Current Script box (you can also add a function by double-clicking on it). The rest of the buttons operate on the function highlighted in the Current Script box, either removing it, duplicating it, or changing its position in the current script. +The Script Builder is shown in the above screenshot. The box on the left is the Current Script box; it shows the list of commands that comprise the current working script. The box on the right is the Function Browser; it displays the list of all available script functions. Below the Function Browser, there is a small panel which will display short documentation about the script function highlighted in the Function Browser. The panel below the Current Script box is the Function Arguments panel; when a function is highlighted in the Current Script box, this panel will contain items for specifying values for any arguments that the highlighted function requires. Along the top of the window, there is a row of buttons which operate on the script as a whole. From left to right, they are: New Script, Open Script, Save Script, Save Script As..., and Test Script. The function of these buttons should be obvious, except perhaps the last button. Pressing Test Script will attempt to run the current script in the main KStars window. You should move the Script Builder window out of the way before pressing this, so you can see the results. In the centre of the window, there is a column of buttons which operate on individual script functions. From top to bottom, they are: Add Function, Remove Function, Copy Function, Move Up, and Move Down. Add Function adds the currently-highlighted function in the Function Browser to the Current Script box (you can also add a function by double-clicking on it). The rest of the buttons operate on the function highlighted in the Current Script box, either removing it, duplicating it, or changing its position in the current script. -Using the Script Builder -In order to illustrate using the Script Builder, we present a small tutorial example where we make a script that tracks the Moon while the clock runs at an accelerated rate. If we are going to track the Moon, we will need to point the display at it first. The lookToward function is used to do this. Highlight this function in the Function Browser, and note the documentation displayed in the panel below the Browser. Press the Add Function button to add this function to the Current Script box. The Function Arguments panel will now contain a combobox labelled dir, short for direction. This is the direction in which the display should be pointed. The combobox contains only the cardinal compass points, not the Moon or any other objects. You can either enter Moon in the box manually, or press the Object button to use the Find Object window to select the Moon from the list of named objects. Note that, as usual, centring on an object automatically engages object-tracking mode, so there is no need to add the setTracking function after lookToward. Now that we have taken care of pointing at the Moon, we next want to make time pass at an accelerated rate. Use the setClockScale function for this. Add it to the script by double-clicking on it in the Function Browser. The Function Arguments panel contains a timestep spinbox for setting the desired time step for the simulation clock. Change the timestep to 3 hours. OK, we have pointed at the Moon and accelerated the clock. Now we just want the script to wait for several seconds while the display tracks on the Moon. Add the waitFor function to the script, and use the Function Arguments panel to specify that it should wait for 20 seconds before continuing. To finish up, let us reset the clock's timestep to the normal value of 1 second. Add another instance of setClockScale, and set its value to 1 sec. Actually, we are not quite done yet. We should probably make sure that the display is using Equatorial coordinates before the script tracks the Moon with an accelerated time step. Otherwise, if the display is using Horizontal coordinates, it will rotate very quickly through large angles as the Moon rises and sets. This can be very confusing, and is avoided by setting the View Option UseAltAz to false. To change any View Option, use the changeViewOption function. Add this function to the script, and examine the Function Arguments panel. There is a combobox which contains the list of all options which can be adjusted by changeViewOption. Since we know we want the UseAltAz option, we could simply select it from the combobox. However, the list is quite long, and there is no explanation of what each item is for. It therefore may be easier to press the Browse Tree button, which will open a window containing a tree view of the available options, organised by topic. In addition, each item has a short explanation of what the option does, and the data type of the option's value. We find UseAltAz under the Skymap options category. Just highlight this item and press OK, and it will be selected in the combobox of the Function Arguments panel. Finally, make its value false or 0. One more step: changing UseAltAz at the end of the script does us no good; we need this to be changed before anything else happens. So, make sure this function is highlighted in the Current Script box, and press the Move Up button until it is the first function. Now that we have finished the script, we should save it to disk. Press the Save Script button. This will first open a window in which you can provide a name for the script, and fill in your name as the author. Enter Tracking the Moon for a name, and your name as the author, and press OK. Next, you will see the standard &kde; Save File dialog. Specify a filename for the script and press OK to save the script. Note that if your filename does not end with .kstars, this suffix will be automatically attached. If you are curious, you can examine the script file with any text editor. Now that we have a completed script, we can run it in a couple of ways. From a console prompt, you can simply execute the script as long as an instance of KStars is currently running. Alternatively, you can execute the script from within KStars using the Run Script item in the File menu. +Using the Script Builder +In order to illustrate using the Script Builder, we present a small tutorial example where we make a script that tracks the Moon while the clock runs at an accelerated rate. If we are going to track the Moon, we will need to point the display at it first. The lookToward function is used to do this. Highlight this function in the Function Browser, and note the documentation displayed in the panel below the Browser. Press the Add Function button to add this function to the Current Script box. The Function Arguments panel will now contain a combobox labelled dir, short for direction. This is the direction in which the display should be pointed. The combobox contains only the cardinal compass points, not the Moon or any other objects. You can either enter Moon in the box manually, or press the Object button to use the Find Object window to select the Moon from the list of named objects. Note that, as usual, centring on an object automatically engages object-tracking mode, so there is no need to add the setTracking function after lookToward. Now that we have taken care of pointing at the Moon, we next want to make time pass at an accelerated rate. Use the setClockScale function for this. Add it to the script by double-clicking on it in the Function Browser. The Function Arguments panel contains a timestep spinbox for setting the desired time step for the simulation clock. Change the timestep to 3 hours. OK, we have pointed at the Moon and accelerated the clock. Now we just want the script to wait for several seconds while the display tracks on the Moon. Add the waitFor function to the script, and use the Function Arguments panel to specify that it should wait for 20 seconds before continuing. To finish up, let us reset the clock's timestep to the normal value of 1 second. Add another instance of setClockScale, and set its value to 1 sec. Actually, we are not quite done yet. We should probably make sure that the display is using Equatorial coordinates before the script tracks the Moon with an accelerated time step. Otherwise, if the display is using Horizontal coordinates, it will rotate very quickly through large angles as the Moon rises and sets. This can be very confusing, and is avoided by setting the View Option UseAltAz to false. To change any View Option, use the changeViewOption function. Add this function to the script, and examine the Function Arguments panel. There is a combobox which contains the list of all options which can be adjusted by changeViewOption. Since we know we want the UseAltAz option, we could simply select it from the combobox. However, the list is quite long, and there is no explanation of what each item is for. It therefore may be easier to press the Browse Tree button, which will open a window containing a tree view of the available options, organised by topic. In addition, each item has a short explanation of what the option does, and the data type of the option's value. We find UseAltAz under the Skymap options category. Just highlight this item and press OK, and it will be selected in the combobox of the Function Arguments panel. Finally, make its value false or 0. One more step: changing UseAltAz at the end of the script does us no good; we need this to be changed before anything else happens. So, make sure this function is highlighted in the Current Script box, and press the Move Up button until it is the first function. Now that we have finished the script, we should save it to disk. Press the Save Script button. This will first open a window in which you can provide a name for the script, and fill in your name as the author. Enter Tracking the Moon for a name, and your name as the author, and press OK. Next, you will see the standard &kde; Save File dialog. Specify a filename for the script and press OK to save the script. Note that if your filename does not end with .kstars, this suffix will be automatically attached. If you are curious, you can examine the script file with any text editor. Now that we have a completed script, we can run it in a couple of ways. From a console prompt, you can simply execute the script as long as an instance of KStars is currently running. Alternatively, you can execute the script from within KStars using the Run Script item in the File menu. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/sidereal.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/sidereal.docbook index a545518c5c6..a3f9f410488 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/sidereal.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/sidereal.docbook @@ -1,87 +1,20 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Sidereal Time -Sidereal Time -Hour Angle +Sidereal Time +Sidereal Time +Hour Angle -Sidereal Time literally means star time. The time we are used to using in our everyday lives is Solar Time. The fundamental unit of Solar Time is a Day: the time it takes the Sun to travel 360 degrees around the sky, due to the rotation of the Earth. Smaller units of Solar Time are just divisions of a Day: +Sidereal Time literally means star time. The time we are used to using in our everyday lives is Solar Time. The fundamental unit of Solar Time is a Day: the time it takes the Sun to travel 360 degrees around the sky, due to the rotation of the Earth. Smaller units of Solar Time are just divisions of a Day: -1/24 Day = 1 Hour -1/60 Hour = 1 Minute -1/60 Minute = 1 Second +1/24 Day = 1 Hour +1/60 Hour = 1 Minute +1/60 Minute = 1 Second -However, there is a problem with Solar Time. The Earth does not actually spin around 360 degrees in one Solar Day. The Earth is in orbit around the Sun, and over the course of one day, it moves about one Degree along its orbit (360 degrees/365.25 Days for a full orbit = about one Degree per Day). So, in 24 hours, the direction toward the Sun changes by about a Degree. Therefore, the Earth has to spin 361 degrees to make the Sun look like it has travelled 360 degrees around the Sky. In astronomy, we are concerned with how long it takes the Earth to spin with respect to the fixed stars, not the Sun. So, we would like a timescale that removes the complication of Earth's orbit around the Sun, and just focuses on how long it takes the Earth to spin 360 degrees with respect to the stars. This rotational period is called a Sidereal Day. On average, it is 4 minutes shorter than a Solar Day, because of the extra 1 degree the Earth spins in a Solar Day. Rather than defining a Sidereal Day to be 23 hours, 56 minutes, we define Sidereal Hours, Minutes and Seconds that are the same fraction of a Day as their Solar counterparts. Therefore, one Solar Second = 1.00278 Sidereal Seconds. The Sidereal Time is useful for determining where the stars are at any given time. Sidereal Time divides one full spin of the Earth into 24 Sidereal Hours; similarly, the map of the sky is divided into 24 Hours of Right Ascension. This is no coincidence; Local Sidereal Time (LST) indicates the Right Ascension on the sky that is currently crossing the Local Meridian. So, if a star has a Right Ascension of 05h 32m 24s, it will be on your meridian at LST=05:32:24. More generally, the difference between an object's RA and the Local Sidereal Time tells you how far from the Meridian the object is. For example, the same object at LST=06:32:24 (one Sidereal Hour later), will be one Hour of Right Ascension west of your meridian, which is 15 degrees. This angular distance from the meridian is called the object's Hour Angle. +However, there is a problem with Solar Time. The Earth does not actually spin around 360 degrees in one Solar Day. The Earth is in orbit around the Sun, and over the course of one day, it moves about one Degree along its orbit (360 degrees/365.25 Days for a full orbit = about one Degree per Day). So, in 24 hours, the direction toward the Sun changes by about a Degree. Therefore, the Earth has to spin 361 degrees to make the Sun look like it has travelled 360 degrees around the Sky. In astronomy, we are concerned with how long it takes the Earth to spin with respect to the fixed stars, not the Sun. So, we would like a timescale that removes the complication of Earth's orbit around the Sun, and just focuses on how long it takes the Earth to spin 360 degrees with respect to the stars. This rotational period is called a Sidereal Day. On average, it is 4 minutes shorter than a Solar Day, because of the extra 1 degree the Earth spins in a Solar Day. Rather than defining a Sidereal Day to be 23 hours, 56 minutes, we define Sidereal Hours, Minutes and Seconds that are the same fraction of a Day as their Solar counterparts. Therefore, one Solar Second = 1.00278 Sidereal Seconds. The Sidereal Time is useful for determining where the stars are at any given time. Sidereal Time divides one full spin of the Earth into 24 Sidereal Hours; similarly, the map of the sky is divided into 24 Hours of Right Ascension. This is no coincidence; Local Sidereal Time (LST) indicates the Right Ascension on the sky that is currently crossing the Local Meridian. So, if a star has a Right Ascension of 05h 32m 24s, it will be on your meridian at LST=05:32:24. More generally, the difference between an object's RA and the Local Sidereal Time tells you how far from the Meridian the object is. For example, the same object at LST=06:32:24 (one Sidereal Hour later), will be one Hour of Right Ascension west of your meridian, which is 15 degrees. This angular distance from the meridian is called the object's Hour Angle. -The Local Sidereal Time is displayed by &kstars; in the Time Info Box, with the label ST (you have to unshade the box by double-clicking it in order to see the sidereal time). Note that the changing sidereal seconds are not synchronised with the changing Local Time and Universal Time seconds. In fact, if you watch the clocks for a while, you will notice that the Sidereal seconds really are slightly shorter than the LT and UT seconds. Point to the Zenith (press Z or select Zenith from the Location menu). The Zenith is the point on the sky where you are looking straight up from the ground, and it is a point on your Local Meridian. Note the Right Ascension of the Zenith: it is exactly the same as your Local Sidereal Time. +The Local Sidereal Time is displayed by &kstars; in the Time Info Box, with the label ST (you have to unshade the box by double-clicking it in order to see the sidereal time). Note that the changing sidereal seconds are not synchronised with the changing Local Time and Universal Time seconds. In fact, if you watch the clocks for a while, you will notice that the Sidereal seconds really are slightly shorter than the LT and UT seconds. Point to the Zenith (press Z or select Zenith from the Location menu). The Zenith is the point on the sky where you are looking straight up from the ground, and it is a point on your Local Meridian. Note the Right Ascension of the Zenith: it is exactly the same as your Local Sidereal Time. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/skycoords.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/skycoords.docbook index fca764c8f3a..b5543b20946 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/skycoords.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/skycoords.docbook @@ -1,192 +1,52 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Celestial Coordinate Systems +Celestial Coordinate Systems -Celestial Coordinate Systems -Overview -A basic requirement for studying the heavens is determining where in the sky things are. To specify sky positions, astronomers have developed several coordinate systems. Each uses a coordinate grid projected on the Celestial Sphere, in analogy to the Geographic coordinate system used on the surface of the Earth. The coordinate systems differ only in their choice of the fundamental plane, which divides the sky into two equal hemispheres along a great circle. (the fundamental plane of the geographic system is the Earth's equator). Each coordinate system is named for its choice of fundamental plane. +Celestial Coordinate Systems +Overview +A basic requirement for studying the heavens is determining where in the sky things are. To specify sky positions, astronomers have developed several coordinate systems. Each uses a coordinate grid projected on the Celestial Sphere, in analogy to the Geographic coordinate system used on the surface of the Earth. The coordinate systems differ only in their choice of the fundamental plane, which divides the sky into two equal hemispheres along a great circle. (the fundamental plane of the geographic system is the Earth's equator). Each coordinate system is named for its choice of fundamental plane. -The Equatorial Coordinate System -Celestial Coordinate Systems -Equatorial Coordinates -Celestial Equator Celestial Poles Geographic Coordinate System -Right AscensionEquatorial Coordinates -DeclinationEquatorial Coordinates - -The Equatorial coordinate system is probably the most widely used celestial coordinate system. It is also the most closely related to the Geographic coordinate system, because they use the same fundamental plane, and the same poles. The projection of the Earth's equator onto the celestial sphere is called the Celestial Equator. Similarly, projecting the geographic Poles onto the celestial sphere defines the North and South Celestial Poles. However, there is an important difference between the equatorial and geographic coordinate systems: the geographic system is fixed to the Earth; it rotates as the Earth does. The Equatorial system is fixed to the starsactually, the equatorial coordinates are not quite fixed to the stars. See precession. Also, if Hour Angle is used in place of Right Ascension, then the Equatorial system is fixed to the Earth, not to the stars., so it appears to rotate across the sky with the stars, but of course it is really the Earth rotating under the fixed sky. The latitudinal (latitude-like) angle of the Equatorial system is called Declination (Dec for short). It measures the angle of an object above or below the Celestial Equator. The longitudinal angle is called the Right Ascension (RA for short). It measures the angle of an object East of the Vernal Equinox. Unlike longitude, Right Ascension is usually measured in hours instead of degrees, because the apparent rotation of the Equatorial coordinate system is closely related to Sidereal Time and Hour Angle. Since a full rotation of the sky takes 24 hours to complete, there are (360 degrees / 24 hours) = 15 degrees in one Hour of Right Ascension. +The Equatorial Coordinate System +Celestial Coordinate Systems +Equatorial Coordinates +Celestial Equator Celestial Poles Geographic Coordinate System +Right AscensionEquatorial Coordinates +DeclinationEquatorial Coordinates + +The Equatorial coordinate system is probably the most widely used celestial coordinate system. It is also the most closely related to the Geographic coordinate system, because they use the same fundamental plane, and the same poles. The projection of the Earth's equator onto the celestial sphere is called the Celestial Equator. Similarly, projecting the geographic Poles onto the celestial sphere defines the North and South Celestial Poles. However, there is an important difference between the equatorial and geographic coordinate systems: the geographic system is fixed to the Earth; it rotates as the Earth does. The Equatorial system is fixed to the starsactually, the equatorial coordinates are not quite fixed to the stars. See precession. Also, if Hour Angle is used in place of Right Ascension, then the Equatorial system is fixed to the Earth, not to the stars., so it appears to rotate across the sky with the stars, but of course it is really the Earth rotating under the fixed sky. The latitudinal (latitude-like) angle of the Equatorial system is called Declination (Dec for short). It measures the angle of an object above or below the Celestial Equator. The longitudinal angle is called the Right Ascension (RA for short). It measures the angle of an object East of the Vernal Equinox. Unlike longitude, Right Ascension is usually measured in hours instead of degrees, because the apparent rotation of the Equatorial coordinate system is closely related to Sidereal Time and Hour Angle. Since a full rotation of the sky takes 24 hours to complete, there are (360 degrees / 24 hours) = 15 degrees in one Hour of Right Ascension. -The Horizontal Coordinate System - -Celestial Coordinate Systems -Horizontal Coordinates -Horizon Zenith -AzimuthHorizontal Coordinates -AltitudeHorizontal Coordinates -The Horizontal coordinate system uses the observer's local horizon as the Fundamental Plane. This conveniently divides the sky into the upper hemisphere that you can see, and the lower hemisphere that you can't (because the Earth is in the way). The pole of the upper hemisphere is called the Zenith. The pole of the lower hemisphere is called the nadir. The angle of an object above or below the horizon is called the Altitude (Alt for short). The angle of an object around the horizon (measured from the North point, toward the East) is called the Azimuth. The Horizontal Coordinate System is sometimes also called the Alt/Az Coordinate System. The Horizontal Coordinate System is fixed to the Earth, not the Stars. Therefore, the Altitude and Azimuth of an object changes with time, as the object appears to drift across the sky. In addition, because the Horizontal system is defined by your local horizon, the same object viewed from different locations on Earth at the same time will have different values of Altitude and Azimuth. Horizontal coordinates are very useful for determining the Rise and Set times of an object in the sky. When an object has Altitude=0 degrees, it is either Rising (if its Azimuth is < 180 degrees) or Setting (if its Azimuth is > 180 degrees). +The Horizontal Coordinate System + +Celestial Coordinate Systems +Horizontal Coordinates +Horizon Zenith +AzimuthHorizontal Coordinates +AltitudeHorizontal Coordinates +The Horizontal coordinate system uses the observer's local horizon as the Fundamental Plane. This conveniently divides the sky into the upper hemisphere that you can see, and the lower hemisphere that you can't (because the Earth is in the way). The pole of the upper hemisphere is called the Zenith. The pole of the lower hemisphere is called the nadir. The angle of an object above or below the horizon is called the Altitude (Alt for short). The angle of an object around the horizon (measured from the North point, toward the East) is called the Azimuth. The Horizontal Coordinate System is sometimes also called the Alt/Az Coordinate System. The Horizontal Coordinate System is fixed to the Earth, not the Stars. Therefore, the Altitude and Azimuth of an object changes with time, as the object appears to drift across the sky. In addition, because the Horizontal system is defined by your local horizon, the same object viewed from different locations on Earth at the same time will have different values of Altitude and Azimuth. Horizontal coordinates are very useful for determining the Rise and Set times of an object in the sky. When an object has Altitude=0 degrees, it is either Rising (if its Azimuth is < 180 degrees) or Setting (if its Azimuth is > 180 degrees). -The Ecliptic Coordinate System +The Ecliptic Coordinate System -Celestial Coordinate Systems -Ecliptic Coordinates -Ecliptic +Celestial Coordinate Systems +Ecliptic Coordinates +Ecliptic -The Ecliptic coordinate system uses the Ecliptic for its Fundamental Plane. The Ecliptic is the path that the Sun appears to follow across the sky over the course of a year. It is also the projection of the Earth's orbital plane onto the Celestial Sphere. The latitudinal angle is called the Ecliptic Latitude, and the longitudinal angle is called the Ecliptic Longitude. Like Right Ascension in the Equatorial system, the zeropoint of the Ecliptic Longitude is the Vernal Equinox. What do you think such a coordinate system would be useful for? If you guessed charting solar system objects, you are right! Each of the planets (except Pluto) orbits the Sun in roughly the same plane, so they always appear to be somewhere near the Ecliptic (&ie;, they always have small ecliptic latitudes). +The Ecliptic coordinate system uses the Ecliptic for its Fundamental Plane. The Ecliptic is the path that the Sun appears to follow across the sky over the course of a year. It is also the projection of the Earth's orbital plane onto the Celestial Sphere. The latitudinal angle is called the Ecliptic Latitude, and the longitudinal angle is called the Ecliptic Longitude. Like Right Ascension in the Equatorial system, the zeropoint of the Ecliptic Longitude is the Vernal Equinox. What do you think such a coordinate system would be useful for? If you guessed charting solar system objects, you are right! Each of the planets (except Pluto) orbits the Sun in roughly the same plane, so they always appear to be somewhere near the Ecliptic (&ie;, they always have small ecliptic latitudes). -The Galactic Coordinate System +The Galactic Coordinate System -Celestial Coordinate Systems -Galactic Coordinates +Celestial Coordinate Systems +Galactic Coordinates -Milky Way The Galactic coordinate system uses the Milky Way as its Fundamental Plane. The latitudinal angle is called the Galactic Latitude, and the longitudinal angle is called the Galactic Longitude. This coordinate system is useful for studying the Galaxy itself. For example, you might want to know how the density of stars changes as a function of Galactic Latitude, to how much the disk of the Milky Way is flattened. +Milky Way The Galactic coordinate system uses the Milky Way as its Fundamental Plane. The latitudinal angle is called the Galactic Latitude, and the longitudinal angle is called the Galactic Longitude. This coordinate system is useful for studying the Galaxy itself. For example, you might want to know how the density of stars changes as a function of Galactic Latitude, to how much the disk of the Milky Way is flattened. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/solarsys.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/solarsys.docbook index 9acaf75e8ba..22cfef1e704 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/solarsys.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/solarsys.docbook @@ -1,35 +1,23 @@ -Solar System Viewer -Tools -Solar System Viewer +Solar System Viewer +Tools +Solar System Viewer -The Solar System Viewer +The Solar System Viewer - Solar System Viewer + Solar System Viewer -This tool displays a model of our solar system as seen from above, for the current date and time in the main window. The Sun is drawn as a yellow dot in the centre of the plot, and the orbits of the planets are drawn as circles with correct relative diameters, centred on the Sun. The current position of each planet along its orbit is drawn as a coloured dot along with a name label. The display can be zoomed in and out with the + and - keys. +This tool displays a model of our solar system as seen from above, for the current date and time in the main window. The Sun is drawn as a yellow dot in the centre of the plot, and the orbits of the planets are drawn as circles with correct relative diameters, centred on the Sun. The current position of each planet along its orbit is drawn as a coloured dot along with a name label. The display can be zoomed in and out with the + and - keys. -The current version of this tool shows a very simplified model of the solar system; we are planning on several improvements in future versions. For example, the orbits will be displayed as ellipses, not perfect circles. We will also make it possible to recenter the display at any location (currently, the centre is fixed at the Sun), and allow the date to be changed, including the ability to animate the display with a variable timestep. Finally, we would like to add comets and asteroids as well. +The current version of this tool shows a very simplified model of the solar system; we are planning on several improvements in future versions. For example, the orbits will be displayed as ellipses, not perfect circles. We will also make it possible to recenter the display at any location (currently, the centre is fixed at the Sun), and allow the date to be changed, including the ability to animate the display with a variable timestep. Finally, we would like to add comets and asteroids as well. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/spiralgalaxies.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/spiralgalaxies.docbook index 2f2b099a9f9..a05cc75e0ee 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/spiralgalaxies.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/spiralgalaxies.docbook @@ -1,91 +1,26 @@ -Mike Choatie +Mike Choatie -Spiral Galaxies -Spiral Galaxies +Spiral Galaxies +Spiral Galaxies -Spiral galaxies are huge collections of billions of stars, most of which are flattened into a disk shape, with a bright, spherical bulge of stars at its centre. Within the disk, there are typically bright arms where the youngest, brightest stars are found. These arms wind out from the centre in a spiral pattern, giving the galaxies their name. Spiral galaxies look a bit like hurricanes, or like water flowing down a drain. They are some of the most beautiful objects in the sky. -Galaxies are classified using a tuning fork diagram. The end of the fork classifies elliptical galaxies on a scale from the roundest, which is an E0, to those that appear most flattened, which is rated as E7. The tines of the tuning fork are where the two types of spiral galaxies are classified: normal spirals, and barred spirals. A barred spiral is one whose nuclear bulge is stretched out into a line, so it literally looks like it has a bar of stars in its centre. Both types of spiral galaxies are sub-classified according to the prominence of their central bulge of stars, their overall surface brightness, and how tightly their spiral arms are wound. These characteristics are related, so that an Sa galaxy has a large central bulge, a high surface brightness, and tightly-wound spiral arms. An Sb galaxy has a smaller bulge, a dimmer disk, and looser arms than an Sa, and so on through Sc and Sd. Barred galaxies use the same classification scheme, indicated by types SBa, SBb, SBc, and SBd. There is another class of galaxy called S0, which is morphologically a transitional type between true spirals and ellipticals. Its spiral arms are so tightly wound as to be indistinguishable; S0 galaxies have disks with a uniform brightness. They also have an extremely dominant bulge. The Milky Way galaxy, which is home to earth and all of the stars in our sky, is a Spiral Galaxy, and is believed to be a barred spiral. The name Milky Way refers to a band of very faint stars in the sky. This band is the result of looking in the plane of our galaxy's disk from our perspective inside it. Spiral galaxies are very dynamic entities. They are hotbeds of star formation, and contain many young stars in their disks. Their central bulges tend to be made of older stars, and their diffuse halos are made of the very oldest stars in the Universe. Star formation is active in the disks because that is where the gas and dust are most concentrated; gas and dust are the building blocks of star formation. Modern telescopes have revealed that many Spiral galaxies harbour supermassive black holes at their centres, with masses that can exceed that of a billion Suns. Both elliptical and spiral galaxies are known to contain these exotic objects; in fact many astronomers now believe that all large galaxies contain a supermassive black hole in their nucleus. Our own Milky Way is known to harbour a black hole in its core with a mass millions of times bigger than a star's mass. +Spiral galaxies are huge collections of billions of stars, most of which are flattened into a disk shape, with a bright, spherical bulge of stars at its centre. Within the disk, there are typically bright arms where the youngest, brightest stars are found. These arms wind out from the centre in a spiral pattern, giving the galaxies their name. Spiral galaxies look a bit like hurricanes, or like water flowing down a drain. They are some of the most beautiful objects in the sky. +Galaxies are classified using a tuning fork diagram. The end of the fork classifies elliptical galaxies on a scale from the roundest, which is an E0, to those that appear most flattened, which is rated as E7. The tines of the tuning fork are where the two types of spiral galaxies are classified: normal spirals, and barred spirals. A barred spiral is one whose nuclear bulge is stretched out into a line, so it literally looks like it has a bar of stars in its centre. Both types of spiral galaxies are sub-classified according to the prominence of their central bulge of stars, their overall surface brightness, and how tightly their spiral arms are wound. These characteristics are related, so that an Sa galaxy has a large central bulge, a high surface brightness, and tightly-wound spiral arms. An Sb galaxy has a smaller bulge, a dimmer disk, and looser arms than an Sa, and so on through Sc and Sd. Barred galaxies use the same classification scheme, indicated by types SBa, SBb, SBc, and SBd. There is another class of galaxy called S0, which is morphologically a transitional type between true spirals and ellipticals. Its spiral arms are so tightly wound as to be indistinguishable; S0 galaxies have disks with a uniform brightness. They also have an extremely dominant bulge. The Milky Way galaxy, which is home to earth and all of the stars in our sky, is a Spiral Galaxy, and is believed to be a barred spiral. The name Milky Way refers to a band of very faint stars in the sky. This band is the result of looking in the plane of our galaxy's disk from our perspective inside it. Spiral galaxies are very dynamic entities. They are hotbeds of star formation, and contain many young stars in their disks. Their central bulges tend to be made of older stars, and their diffuse halos are made of the very oldest stars in the Universe. Star formation is active in the disks because that is where the gas and dust are most concentrated; gas and dust are the building blocks of star formation. Modern telescopes have revealed that many Spiral galaxies harbour supermassive black holes at their centres, with masses that can exceed that of a billion Suns. Both elliptical and spiral galaxies are known to contain these exotic objects; in fact many astronomers now believe that all large galaxies contain a supermassive black hole in their nucleus. Our own Milky Way is known to harbour a black hole in its core with a mass millions of times bigger than a star's mass. -There are many fine examples of spiral galaxies to be found in &kstars;, and many have beautiful images available in their popup menu. You can find them by using the Find Object window. Here is a list of some spiral galaxies with nice images available: -M 64, the Black-Eye Galaxy (type Sa) -M 31, the Andromeda Galaxy (type Sb) -M 81, Bode's Galaxy (type Sb) -M 51, the Whirlpool Galaxy (type Sc) -NGC 300 (type Sd) [use DSS image link] -M 83 (type SBa) -NGC 1530 (type SBb) -NGC 1073 (type SBc) +There are many fine examples of spiral galaxies to be found in &kstars;, and many have beautiful images available in their popup menu. You can find them by using the Find Object window. Here is a list of some spiral galaxies with nice images available: +M 64, the Black-Eye Galaxy (type Sa) +M 31, the Andromeda Galaxy (type Sb) +M 81, Bode's Galaxy (type Sb) +M 51, the Whirlpool Galaxy (type Sc) +NGC 300 (type Sd) [use DSS image link] +M 83 (type SBa) +NGC 1530 (type SBb) +NGC 1073 (type SBc) diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/stars.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/stars.docbook index 914651780ab..c4730d40f09 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/stars.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/stars.docbook @@ -1,109 +1,72 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Stars: An Introductory <acronym ->FAQ</acronym -> -Stars +Stars: An Introductory <acronym>FAQ</acronym> +Stars -What are the stars? +What are the stars? -Stars are gigantic, self-gravitating spheres of (mostly) Hydrogen gas. Stars are also thermonuclear engines; nuclear fusion takes place deep in the cores of stars, where the density is extreme and the temperature reaches tens of millions of degrees Celsius. +Stars are gigantic, self-gravitating spheres of (mostly) Hydrogen gas. Stars are also thermonuclear engines; nuclear fusion takes place deep in the cores of stars, where the density is extreme and the temperature reaches tens of millions of degrees Celsius. -Is the Sun a star? +Is the Sun a star? -Yes, the Sun is a star. It is the dominant centrepiece of our solar system. Compared to other stars, our Sun is rather ordinary; it appears to be so much bigger and brighter to us because it is millions of times closer than any other star. +Yes, the Sun is a star. It is the dominant centrepiece of our solar system. Compared to other stars, our Sun is rather ordinary; it appears to be so much bigger and brighter to us because it is millions of times closer than any other star. -Why do stars shine? +Why do stars shine? -The short answer is: star shine because they are very hot. It is really no more complicated than that. Any object heated to thousands of degrees will radiate light, just like stars do. +The short answer is: star shine because they are very hot. It is really no more complicated than that. Any object heated to thousands of degrees will radiate light, just like stars do. -The obvious next question is: why are stars so hot? +The obvious next question is: why are stars so hot? -This is a tougher question. The usual answer is that stars get their heat from the thermonuclear fusion reactions in their cores. However, this cannot be the ultimate cause for the stars' heat, because a star must be hot in the first place for nuclear fusion to be triggered. Fusion can only sustain the hot temperature; it cannot make a star hot. A more correct answer is that stars are hot because they have collapsed. Stars form from diffuse gaseous nebulae; as the nebulous gas condenses to form a star, the gravitational potential energy of the material is released, first as kinetic energy, and ultimately as heat as the density increases. +This is a tougher question. The usual answer is that stars get their heat from the thermonuclear fusion reactions in their cores. However, this cannot be the ultimate cause for the stars' heat, because a star must be hot in the first place for nuclear fusion to be triggered. Fusion can only sustain the hot temperature; it cannot make a star hot. A more correct answer is that stars are hot because they have collapsed. Stars form from diffuse gaseous nebulae; as the nebulous gas condenses to form a star, the gravitational potential energy of the material is released, first as kinetic energy, and ultimately as heat as the density increases. -Are stars all the same? +Are stars all the same? -Stars have many things in common: they are all collapsed spheres of hot, dense gas (mostly Hydrogen), and nuclear fusion reactions are occurring at or near the centres of every star in the sky. However, stars also show a great diversity in some properties. The brightest stars shine almost 100 million times as brightly as the faintest stars. Stars range in surface temperature from only a few thousand degrees to almost 50,000 degrees Celsius. These differences are largely due to differences in mass: massive stars are both hotter and brighter than lower-mass stars. The temperature and Luminosity also depend on the evolutionary state of the star. +Stars have many things in common: they are all collapsed spheres of hot, dense gas (mostly Hydrogen), and nuclear fusion reactions are occurring at or near the centres of every star in the sky. However, stars also show a great diversity in some properties. The brightest stars shine almost 100 million times as brightly as the faintest stars. Stars range in surface temperature from only a few thousand degrees to almost 50,000 degrees Celsius. These differences are largely due to differences in mass: massive stars are both hotter and brighter than lower-mass stars. The temperature and Luminosity also depend on the evolutionary state of the star. -What is the Main Sequence? +What is the Main Sequence? -Main sequence The main sequence is the evolutionary state of a star when it is fusing Hydrogen in its core. This is the first (and longest) stage of a star's life (not including protostar phases). What happens to a star after it runs out of core Hydrogen is addressed in the stellar evolution article (coming soon). +Main sequence The main sequence is the evolutionary state of a star when it is fusing Hydrogen in its core. This is the first (and longest) stage of a star's life (not including protostar phases). What happens to a star after it runs out of core Hydrogen is addressed in the stellar evolution article (coming soon). -How long do stars last? +How long do stars last? -The lifetime of a star depends very much on its mass. More massive stars are hotter and shine much more brightly, causing them to consume their nuclear fuel much more rapidly. The largest stars (roughly 100 times as massive as the Sun), will run out of fuel in only a few million years; while the smallest stars (roughly ten percent the mass of the Sun), with their much more frugal consumption rate, will shine on (albeit dimly) for trillions of years. Note that this is much longer than the Universe has yet been in existence. +The lifetime of a star depends very much on its mass. More massive stars are hotter and shine much more brightly, causing them to consume their nuclear fuel much more rapidly. The largest stars (roughly 100 times as massive as the Sun), will run out of fuel in only a few million years; while the smallest stars (roughly ten percent the mass of the Sun), with their much more frugal consumption rate, will shine on (albeit dimly) for trillions of years. Note that this is much longer than the Universe has yet been in existence. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/timezones.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/timezones.docbook index f899dd74681..78e9d659d6c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/timezones.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/timezones.docbook @@ -1,32 +1,9 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Time Zones -Time Zones +Time Zones +Time Zones -The Earth is round, and it is always half-illuminated by the Sun. However, because the Earth is spinning, the half that is illuminated is always changing. We experience this as the passing of days wherever we are on the Earth's surface. At any given instant, there are places on the Earth passing from the dark half into the illuminated half (which is seen as dawn on the surface). At the same instant, on the opposite side of the Earth, points are passing from the illuminated half into darkness (which is seen as dusk at those locations). So, at any given time, different places on Earth are experiencing different parts of the day. Thus, Solar time is defined locally, so that the clock time at any location describes the part of the day consistently. This localisation of time is accomplished by dividing the globe into 24 vertical slices called Time Zones. The Local Time is the same within any given zone, but the time in each zone is one Hour earlier than the time in the neighboring Zone to the East. Actually, this is a idealised simplification; real Time Zone boundaries are not straight vertical lines, because they often follow national boundaries and other political considerations. Note that because the Local Time always increases by an hour when moving between Zones to the East, by the time you move through all 24 Time Zones, you are a full day ahead of where you started. We deal with this paradox by defining the International Date Line, which is a Time Zone boundary in the Pacific Ocean, between Asia and North America. Points just to the East of this line are 24 hours behind the points just to the West of the line. This leads to some interesting phenomena. A direct flight from Australia to California arrives before it departs. Also, the islands of Fiji straddle the International Date Line, so if you have a bad day on the West side of Fiji, you can go over to the East side of Fiji and have a chance to live the same day all over again. +The Earth is round, and it is always half-illuminated by the Sun. However, because the Earth is spinning, the half that is illuminated is always changing. We experience this as the passing of days wherever we are on the Earth's surface. At any given instant, there are places on the Earth passing from the dark half into the illuminated half (which is seen as dawn on the surface). At the same instant, on the opposite side of the Earth, points are passing from the illuminated half into darkness (which is seen as dusk at those locations). So, at any given time, different places on Earth are experiencing different parts of the day. Thus, Solar time is defined locally, so that the clock time at any location describes the part of the day consistently. This localisation of time is accomplished by dividing the globe into 24 vertical slices called Time Zones. The Local Time is the same within any given zone, but the time in each zone is one Hour earlier than the time in the neighboring Zone to the East. Actually, this is a idealised simplification; real Time Zone boundaries are not straight vertical lines, because they often follow national boundaries and other political considerations. Note that because the Local Time always increases by an hour when moving between Zones to the East, by the time you move through all 24 Time Zones, you are a full day ahead of where you started. We deal with this paradox by defining the International Date Line, which is a Time Zone boundary in the Pacific Ocean, between Asia and North America. Points just to the East of this line are 24 hours behind the points just to the West of the line. This leads to some interesting phenomena. A direct flight from Australia to California arrives before it departs. Also, the islands of Fiji straddle the International Date Line, so if you have a bad day on the West side of Fiji, you can go over to the East side of Fiji and have a chance to live the same day all over again. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/tools.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/tools.docbook index 60bd3929c42..9876e65f079 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/tools.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/tools.docbook @@ -1,61 +1,16 @@ -KStars Tools +KStars Tools -Tools &kstars; comes with a number of tools that allow you to explore some more advanced aspects of astronomy and the night sky. +Tools &kstars; comes with a number of tools that allow you to explore some more advanced aspects of astronomy and the night sky. -Object Details -Astrocalculator -AAVSO Lightcurves -Altitude vs. Time Plotter -What's Up Tonight? -Script Builder -Solar System Viewer -Jupiter Moons Tool +Object Details +Astrocalculator +AAVSO Lightcurves +Altitude vs. Time Plotter +What's Up Tonight? +Script Builder +Solar System Viewer +Jupiter Moons Tool &tool-details; &tool-calculator; &tool-aavso; &tool-altvstime; &tool-whatsup; &tool-scriptbuilder; &tool-solarsys; &tool-jmoons; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/utime.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/utime.docbook index 7319b1cd1fe..73b6e4fac01 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/utime.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/utime.docbook @@ -1,54 +1,14 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -Universal Time -Universal Time -Time Zones +Universal Time +Universal Time +Time Zones -The time on our clocks is essentially a measurement of the current position of the Sun in the sky, which is different for places at different Longitudes because the Earth is round (see Time Zones). However, it is sometimes necessary to define a global time, one that is the same for all places on Earth. One way to do this is to pick a place on the Earth, and adopt the Local Time at that place as the Universal Time, abbreviated UT. (The name is a bit of a misnomer, since Universal Time has little to do with the Universe. It would perhaps be better to think of it as global time). The geographic location chosen to represent Universal Time is Greenwich, England. The choice is arbitrary and historical. Universal Time became an important concept when European ships began to sail the wide open seas, far from any known landmarks. A navigator could reckon the ship's longitude by comparing the Local Time (as measured from the Sun's position) to the time back at the home port (as kept by an accurate clock on board the ship). Greenwich was home to England's Royal Observatory, which was charged with keeping time very accurately, so that ships in port could re-calibrate their clocks before setting sail. +The time on our clocks is essentially a measurement of the current position of the Sun in the sky, which is different for places at different Longitudes because the Earth is round (see Time Zones). However, it is sometimes necessary to define a global time, one that is the same for all places on Earth. One way to do this is to pick a place on the Earth, and adopt the Local Time at that place as the Universal Time, abbreviated UT. (The name is a bit of a misnomer, since Universal Time has little to do with the Universe. It would perhaps be better to think of it as global time). The geographic location chosen to represent Universal Time is Greenwich, England. The choice is arbitrary and historical. Universal Time became an important concept when European ships began to sail the wide open seas, far from any known landmarks. A navigator could reckon the ship's longitude by comparing the Local Time (as measured from the Sun's position) to the time back at the home port (as kept by an accurate clock on board the ship). Greenwich was home to England's Royal Observatory, which was charged with keeping time very accurately, so that ships in port could re-calibrate their clocks before setting sail. -Exercise: -Set the geographic location to Greenwich, England using the Set Location window (&Ctrl;G). Note that the Local Time (LT)and the Universal Time (UT) are now the same. Further Reading: The history behind the construction of the first clock that was accurate and stable enough to be used on ships to keep Universal Time is a fascinating tale, and one told expertly in the book Longitude, by Dava Sobel. +Exercise: +Set the geographic location to Greenwich, England using the Set Location window (&Ctrl;G). Note that the Local Time (LT)and the Universal Time (UT) are now the same. Further Reading: The history behind the construction of the first clock that was accurate and stable enough to be used on ships to keep Universal Time is a fascinating tale, and one told expertly in the book Longitude, by Dava Sobel. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/wut.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/wut.docbook index 2e89188362a..888b76a8abe 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/wut.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/wut.docbook @@ -1,56 +1,24 @@ -What's Up Tonight? Tool -Tools -What's Up Tonight? Tool +What's Up Tonight? Tool +Tools +What's Up Tonight? Tool -The What's Up Tonight Tool +The What's Up Tonight Tool - What's Up Tonight? + What's Up Tonight? -The What's Up Tonight? (WUT) tool displays a list of objects that will be visible at night from any location, on any date. By default, the Date and Location are taken from the current settings in the main window, but you can change either value using the Change Date and Change Location buttons at the top of the WUT window. -The WUT tool also displays a short almanac of data for the selected date: the rise and set times for the Sun and moon, the duration of the night and the Moon's illumination fraction. -Below the almanac is where the object information is displayed. The objects are organised into type categories. Select an object type in the box labelled Choose a Category, and all objects of that type which are above the horizon on the selected night will be displayed in the box labelled Matching Objects. For example, in the screenshot, the Planets category has been selected, and four planets which are up on the selected night are displayed (Mars, Neptune, Pluto, and Uranus). When an object in the list is selected, its rise, set and transit times are displayed in the lower-right panel. In addition, you can press the Object Details... button to open the Object Details window for that object. -By default, the WUT will display objects which are above the horizon between sunset and midnight (i.e., in the evening). You can choose to show objects which are up between midnight and dawn (in the morning), or between dusk and dawn (any time tonight) using the combobox near the top of the window. +The What's Up Tonight? (WUT) tool displays a list of objects that will be visible at night from any location, on any date. By default, the Date and Location are taken from the current settings in the main window, but you can change either value using the Change Date and Change Location buttons at the top of the WUT window. +The WUT tool also displays a short almanac of data for the selected date: the rise and set times for the Sun and moon, the duration of the night and the Moon's illumination fraction. +Below the almanac is where the object information is displayed. The objects are organised into type categories. Select an object type in the box labelled Choose a Category, and all objects of that type which are above the horizon on the selected night will be displayed in the box labelled Matching Objects. For example, in the screenshot, the Planets category has been selected, and four planets which are up on the selected night are displayed (Mars, Neptune, Pluto, and Uranus). When an object in the list is selected, its rise, set and transit times are displayed in the lower-right panel. In addition, you can press the Object Details... button to open the Object Details window for that object. +By default, the WUT will display objects which are above the horizon between sunset and midnight (i.e., in the evening). You can choose to show objects which are up between midnight and dawn (in the morning), or between dusk and dawn (any time tonight) using the combobox near the top of the window. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/zenith.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/zenith.docbook index a466a29e333..ddc138071d4 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/zenith.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kstars/zenith.docbook @@ -1,44 +1,14 @@ -Jason Harris +Jason Harris -The Zenith -Zenith -Horizontal Coordinates +The Zenith +Zenith +Horizontal Coordinates -The Zenith is the point in the sky where you are looking when you look straight up from the ground. More precisely, it is the point on the sky with an Altitude of +90 Degrees; it is the Pole of the Horizontal Coordinate System. Geometrically, it is the point on the Celestial Sphere intersected by a line drawn from the centre of the Earth through your location on the Earth's surface. The Zenith is, by definition, a point along the Local Meridian. +The Zenith is the point in the sky where you are looking when you look straight up from the ground. More precisely, it is the point on the sky with an Altitude of +90 Degrees; it is the Pole of the Horizontal Coordinate System. Geometrically, it is the point on the Celestial Sphere intersected by a line drawn from the centre of the Earth through your location on the Earth's surface. The Zenith is, by definition, a point along the Local Meridian. -Exercise: -You can point to the Zenith by pressing Z or by selecting Zenith from the Location menu. +Exercise: +You can point to the Zenith by pressing Z or by selecting Zenith from the Location menu. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/getting-started.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/getting-started.docbook index fb4e5045d03..7d907c42939 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/getting-started.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/getting-started.docbook @@ -1,125 +1,47 @@ -Getting Started -When you start &kturtle; you will see something like this: Here is a screenshot of &kturtle; when you start it for the first time &kturtle; Main window In this Getting Started guide we assume that the language of the &logo; commands is English. You can change this language in SettingsConfigure &kturtle;... in the Language section. Be aware that the language you set here for &kturtle; is the one you use to type the &logo; commands. +Getting Started +When you start &kturtle; you will see something like this: Here is a screenshot of &kturtle; when you start it for the first time &kturtle; Main window In this Getting Started guide we assume that the language of the &logo; commands is English. You can change this language in SettingsConfigure &kturtle;... in the Language section. Be aware that the language you set here for &kturtle; is the one you use to type the &logo; commands. -First steps with &logo;: meet the Turtle! -You must have noticed the turtle is in the middle of the canvas: you are just about to learn how to control it using commands in the code editor. +First steps with &logo;: meet the Turtle! +You must have noticed the turtle is in the middle of the canvas: you are just about to learn how to control it using commands in the code editor. -The Turtle Moves -Let us start by getting the turtle moving. Our turtle can do 3 types of moves, (1) it can go forwards and backwards, (2) it can turn left and right and (3) it can go directly to a position on the screen. Try this for example: +The Turtle Moves +Let us start by getting the turtle moving. Our turtle can do 3 types of moves, (1) it can go forwards and backwards, (2) it can turn left and right and (3) it can go directly to a position on the screen. Try this for example: -forward 90 +forward 90 turnleft 90 -Type or copy-paste the code to the code editor and execute it (using FileExecute Commands) to see the result. +Type or copy-paste the code to the code editor and execute it (using FileExecute Commands) to see the result. -When you typed and executed the commands like above in the code editor you might have noticed one or more of the following things: +When you typed and executed the commands like above in the code editor you might have noticed one or more of the following things: -That — after executing the commands — the turtle moves up, draws a line, and then turns a quarter turn to the left. This because you have used the forward and the turnleft commands. +That — after executing the commands — the turtle moves up, draws a line, and then turns a quarter turn to the left. This because you have used the forward and the turnleft commands. -That the colour of the code changed while you where typing it: this feature is called intuitive highlighting — different types of commands are highlighted differently. This makes reading large blocks of code more easy. +That the colour of the code changed while you where typing it: this feature is called intuitive highlighting — different types of commands are highlighted differently. This makes reading large blocks of code more easy. -That the turtle draws a thin black line. +That the turtle draws a thin black line. -Maybe you got an error message. This could simply mean two things: you could have made a mistake while copying the commands, or you should still set the correct language for the &logo; commands (you can do that by choosing SettingsConfigure &kturtle;..., in the Language section). +Maybe you got an error message. This could simply mean two things: you could have made a mistake while copying the commands, or you should still set the correct language for the &logo; commands (you can do that by choosing SettingsConfigure &kturtle;..., in the Language section). -You will likely understand that forward 90 commanded the turtle to move forward leaving a line, and that turnleft 90 commanded the turtle to turn 90 degrees to the left. +You will likely understand that forward 90 commanded the turtle to move forward leaving a line, and that turnleft 90 commanded the turtle to turn 90 degrees to the left. -Please see the following links to the reference manual for a complete explanation of the new commands: forward, backward, turnleft, and turnright. +Please see the following links to the reference manual for a complete explanation of the new commands: forward, backward, turnleft, and turnright. -More examples -The first example was very simple, so let us go on! +More examples +The first example was very simple, so let us go on! -canvassize 200,200 +canvassize 200,200 canvascolour 0,0,0 pencolour 255,0,0 penwidth 5 @@ -139,110 +61,29 @@ turnleft 45 go 40, 100 -Again you can type or copy-paste the code to the code editor or open the arrow.logo file in the Open examples folder and execute it (using FileExecute Commands) to see the result. In the next examples you are expected to know the drill. +Again you can type or copy-paste the code to the code editor or open the arrow.logo file in the Open examples folder and execute it (using FileExecute Commands) to see the result. In the next examples you are expected to know the drill. -You might have noticed that this second example uses a lot more code. You have also seen a couple of new commands. Here a short explanation of all the new commands: +You might have noticed that this second example uses a lot more code. You have also seen a couple of new commands. Here a short explanation of all the new commands: -canvassize 200,200 sets the canvas width and height to 200 pixels. The width and the height are equal, so the canvas will be a square. +canvassize 200,200 sets the canvas width and height to 200 pixels. The width and the height are equal, so the canvas will be a square. -canvascolour 0,0,0 makes the canvas black. 0,0,0 is an RGB-combination where all values are set to 0, which results in black. +canvascolour 0,0,0 makes the canvas black. 0,0,0 is an RGB-combination where all values are set to 0, which results in black. -pencolor 255,0,0 sets the color of the pen to red. 255,0,0 is an RGB-combination where only the red value is set to 255 (fully on) while the others (green and blue) are set to 0 (fully off). This results in a bright shade of red. +pencolor 255,0,0 sets the color of the pen to red. 255,0,0 is an RGB-combination where only the red value is set to 255 (fully on) while the others (green and blue) are set to 0 (fully off). This results in a bright shade of red. -penwidth 5 sets the width (the size) of the pen to 5 pixels. From now on every line the turtle draw will have a thickness of 5, until we change the penwidth to something else. +penwidth 5 sets the width (the size) of the pen to 5 pixels. From now on every line the turtle draw will have a thickness of 5, until we change the penwidth to something else. -clear clear the canvas, that is all it does. +clear clear the canvas, that is all it does. -go 20,20 commands the turtle to go to a certain place on the canvas. Counted from the upper left corner, this place is 20 pixels across from the left, and 20 pixels down from the top of the canvas. Note that using the go command the turtle will not draw a line. +go 20,20 commands the turtle to go to a certain place on the canvas. Counted from the upper left corner, this place is 20 pixels across from the left, and 20 pixels down from the top of the canvas. Note that using the go command the turtle will not draw a line. -direction 135 set the turtle's direction. The turnleft and turnright commands change the turtle's angle starting from its current direction. The direction command changes the turtle's angle from zero, and thus is not relative to the turtle previous direction. +direction 135 set the turtle's direction. The turnleft and turnright commands change the turtle's angle starting from its current direction. The direction command changes the turtle's angle from zero, and thus is not relative to the turtle previous direction. -After the direction command a lot of forward and turnleft commands follow. These command do the actual drawing. +After the direction command a lot of forward and turnleft commands follow. These command do the actual drawing. -At last another go command is used to move the turtle aside. +At last another go command is used to move the turtle aside. -Make sure you follow the links to the reference. The reference explains each command more thoroughly. +Make sure you follow the links to the reference. The reference explains each command more thoroughly. @@ -252,41 +93,35 @@ Again you can type or copy-paste the code to the code editor or open the -Simple Calculations +Simple Calculations Not yet written -Using Variables: creating 'number containers' +Using Variables: creating 'number containers' Not yet written -Using strings: creating 'text containers' +Using strings: creating 'text containers' Not yet written -Logic: asking the computer simple questions +Logic: asking the computer simple questions Not yet written -Recursion: the Turtle is using itself +Recursion: the Turtle is using itself Draw a maze for example ---> +--> \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/glossary.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/glossary.docbook index 22af4ab935a..3a9af4e2a2e 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/glossary.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/glossary.docbook @@ -1,404 +1,147 @@ -Glossary +Glossary -In this chapter you will find an explanation of most of the uncommon words that are used in the handbook. +In this chapter you will find an explanation of most of the uncommon words that are used in the handbook. -degrees -Degrees are units to measure angles or turns. A full turn is 360 degrees, a half turn 180 degrees and a quarter turn 90 degrees. The commands turnleft, turnright and direction need an input in degrees. +degrees +Degrees are units to measure angles or turns. A full turn is 360 degrees, a half turn 180 degrees and a quarter turn 90 degrees. The commands turnleft, turnright and direction need an input in degrees. -input and output of commands -Some commands take input, some commands give output, some commands take input and give output and some commands neither take input nor give output. -Some examples of commands that only take input are: +input and output of commands +Some commands take input, some commands give output, some commands take input and give output and some commands neither take input nor give output. +Some examples of commands that only take input are: forward 50 pencolour 255,0,0 print "Hello!" - The forward command takes 50 as input. forward needs this input to know how many pixels it should go forward. pencolor takes a colour as input and print takes a string (a piece of text) as input. Please note that the input can also be a container. The next example illustrates this: x = 50 + The forward command takes 50 as input. forward needs this input to know how many pixels it should go forward. pencolor takes a colour as input and print takes a string (a piece of text) as input. Please note that the input can also be a container. The next example illustrates this: x = 50 print x str = "hello!" print str - + -Now some examples of commands that give output: +Now some examples of commands that give output: x = inputwindow "Please type something and press OK... thanks!" r = random 1,100 - The inputwindow command takes a string as input, and outputs the number or string that is entered. As you can see, the output of inputwindow is stored in the container x. The random command also gives output. In this case it outputs a number between 1 and 100. The output of the random is again stored in a container, named r. Note that the containers x and r are not used in the example code above. + The inputwindow command takes a string as input, and outputs the number or string that is entered. As you can see, the output of inputwindow is stored in the container x. The random command also gives output. In this case it outputs a number between 1 and 100. The output of the random is again stored in a container, named r. Note that the containers x and r are not used in the example code above. -There are also commands that neither need input nor give output. Here are some examples: clear +There are also commands that neither need input nor give output. Here are some examples: clear penup wrapon hide - + -intuitive highlighting -This is a feature of &kturtle; that makes coding even easier. With intuitive highlighting the code that you write gets a colour that indicates what type of code it is. In the next list you will find the different types of code and the colour they get in the code editor. -Different types of code and their highlight colour +intuitive highlighting +This is a feature of &kturtle; that makes coding even easier. With intuitive highlighting the code that you write gets a colour that indicates what type of code it is. In the next list you will find the different types of code and the colour they get in the code editor.
+Different types of code and their highlight colour -regular commands -dark green -The regular commands are described here. +regular commands +dark green +The regular commands are described here. -execution controllers -black (bold) -The special commands control execution, read more on them here. +execution controllers +black (bold) +The special commands control execution, read more on them here. -comments -dark yellow -Lines that are commented start with a comment characters (#). These lines are ignored when the code is executed. Comments allow the programmer to explain a bit about his code or can be used to temporarily prevent a certain piece of code from executing. +comments +dark yellow +Lines that are commented start with a comment characters (#). These lines are ignored when the code is executed. Comments allow the programmer to explain a bit about his code or can be used to temporarily prevent a certain piece of code from executing. -brackets [, ] -light green (bold) -Brackets are used to group portions of code. Brackets are often used together with execution controllers. +brackets [, ] +light green (bold) +Brackets are used to group portions of code. Brackets are often used together with execution controllers. -the learn command -light green (bold) -The learn command is used to create new commands. +the learn command +light green (bold) +The learn command is used to create new commands. -numbers -blue -Numbers, well not much to say about them. +numbers +blue +Numbers, well not much to say about them. -strings -dark red -Not much to say about (text) strings either, except that they always start and end with the double quotes ("). +strings +dark red +Not much to say about (text) strings either, except that they always start and end with the double quotes ("). -mathematical characters -grey -These are the mathematical characters: +, -, *, /, (, and ). Read more about them here. +mathematical characters +grey +These are the mathematical characters: +, -, *, /, (, and ). Read more about them here. -questions characters -blue (bold) -Read more about questions here. +questions characters +blue (bold) +Read more about questions here. -question glue-words -pink -Read more about the question glue-words (and, or, not) here. +question glue-words +pink +Read more about the question glue-words (and, or, not) here. -regular text -black - +regular text +black +
- + -pixels -A pixel is a dot on the screen. If you look very close you will see that the screen of your monitor uses pixels. All images on the screen are built with these pixels. A pixel is the smallest thing that can be drawn on the screen. -A lot of commands need a number of pixels as input. These commands are: forward, backward, go, gox, goy, canvassize and penwidth. +pixels +A pixel is a dot on the screen. If you look very close you will see that the screen of your monitor uses pixels. All images on the screen are built with these pixels. A pixel is the smallest thing that can be drawn on the screen. +A lot of commands need a number of pixels as input. These commands are: forward, backward, go, gox, goy, canvassize and penwidth. -RGB combinations (colour codes) -RGB combinations are used to describe colours. The R stand for red, the G stands for green and the B stands for blue. An example of an RGB combination is 255,0,0: the first value (red) is 255 and the others are 0, so this represents a bright shade of red. Each value of an RGB combination has to be in the range 0 to 255. Here a small list of some often used colours: -Often used RGB combinations +RGB combinations (colour codes) +RGB combinations are used to describe colours. The R stand for red, the G stands for green and the B stands for blue. An example of an RGB combination is 255,0,0: the first value (red) is 255 and the others are 0, so this represents a bright shade of red. Each value of an RGB combination has to be in the range 0 to 255. Here a small list of some often used colours:
+Often used RGB combinations -0,0,0black -255,255,255white -255,0,0red -150,0,0dark red -0,255,0green -0,0,255blue -0,255,255light blue -255,0,255pink -255,255,0yellow +0,0,0black +255,255,255white +255,0,0red +150,0,0dark red +0,255,0green +0,0,255blue +0,255,255light blue +255,0,255pink +255,255,0yellow
 -To easily find the RGB combinations of a colour you should try the colour picker! You can open the colour picker using ToolsColour Picker. -Two commands need an RGB combination as input: these commands are canvascolour and pencolour. +To easily find the RGB combinations of a colour you should try the colour picker! You can open the colour picker using ToolsColour Picker. +Two commands need an RGB combination as input: these commands are canvascolour and pencolour. -sprite -A sprite is a small picture that can be moved around the screen. Our beloved turtle, for instance, is a sprite. -Note: with this version of &kturtle; the sprite cannot be changed from a turtle into something else. Future versions of &kturtle; will be able to do this. +sprite +A sprite is a small picture that can be moved around the screen. Our beloved turtle, for instance, is a sprite. +Note: with this version of &kturtle; the sprite cannot be changed from a turtle into something else. Future versions of &kturtle; will be able to do this. -wrapping -Wrapping is what happens when the turtle draws something that is to big to fix in on the canvas and wrapping is set on. This is what happens when wrapping is on An example of wrapping When the turtle moves off a border of the canvas it is instantly taken to the opposite border so it can continue its move. This way the turtle will always stay on the screen while it moves. This happens when wrapping is on. -Wrapping can be turned on and off with the wrapon and wrapoff commands. When &kturtle; starts wrapping is turned on by default. +wrapping +Wrapping is what happens when the turtle draws something that is to big to fix in on the canvas and wrapping is set on. This is what happens when wrapping is on An example of wrapping When the turtle moves off a border of the canvas it is instantly taken to the opposite border so it can continue its move. This way the turtle will always stay on the screen while it moves. This happens when wrapping is on. +Wrapping can be turned on and off with the wrapon and wrapoff commands. When &kturtle; starts wrapping is turned on by default. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/index.docbook index 4a23baed449..39fc13e2258 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/index.docbook @@ -1,14 +1,12 @@ - + - + @@ -19,168 +17,73 @@ -The &kturtle; Handbook +The &kturtle; Handbook -Cies Breijs
cies # showroommama ! nl
+Cies Breijs
cies # showroommama ! nl
 -Anne-Marie Mahfouf
annma@kde.org
+Anne-Marie Mahfouf
annma@kde.org
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2004 -Cies Breijs +2004 +Cies Breijs -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2004-10-5 -0.2.1 +2004-10-5 +0.2.1 -&kturtle; is an educational programming environment using the &logo; programming language. +&kturtle; is an educational programming environment using the &logo; programming language. -KDE -tdeedu -KTurtle -education -language -native -programming -code -Logo -instructions -turtle +KDE +tdeedu +KTurtle +education +language +native +programming +code +Logo +instructions +turtle -Introduction +Introduction -&kturtle; is an educational programming environment using the &logo; programming language. It tries to make programming as easy and accessible as possible. This makes &kturtle; suitable for teaching kids the basics of maths, geometry and... programming. The commands used to program are in the style of the &logo; programming language. The unique feature of &logo; is that the commands are often translated into the speaking language of the programmer. +&kturtle; is an educational programming environment using the &logo; programming language. It tries to make programming as easy and accessible as possible. This makes &kturtle; suitable for teaching kids the basics of maths, geometry and... programming. The commands used to program are in the style of the &logo; programming language. The unique feature of &logo; is that the commands are often translated into the speaking language of the programmer. -&kturtle; is named after the turtle that plays a central role in the programming environment. The user programs the turtle, using the &logo; commands, to draw a picture on the canvas. +&kturtle; is named after the turtle that plays a central role in the programming environment. The user programs the turtle, using the &logo; commands, to draw a picture on the canvas. -Features of &kturtle; -&kturtle; has some nice features that make starting to program a breeze. See here some of the highlights of &kturtle; feature set: -An integrated &logo; interpreter, so no need to download any other program. -A powerful editor for the &logo; commands with intuitive syntax highlighting, line numbering and more. -The canvas can be saved as an image or printed. -Context help for all &logo; commands: Just press F1. -The &logo; commands are fully translatable (currently only English, Dutch, French, German and Swedish are supported). -Full-screen mode. -Many integrated, internationalised example &logo; programs make it easy to get started. +Features of &kturtle; +&kturtle; has some nice features that make starting to program a breeze. See here some of the highlights of &kturtle; feature set: +An integrated &logo; interpreter, so no need to download any other program. +A powerful editor for the &logo; commands with intuitive syntax highlighting, line numbering and more. +The canvas can be saved as an image or printed. +Context help for all &logo; commands: Just press F1. +The &logo; commands are fully translatable (currently only English, Dutch, French, German and Swedish are supported). +Full-screen mode. +Many integrated, internationalised example &logo; programs make it easy to get started. @@ -198,96 +101,46 @@ -Credits and Licence - -&kturtle; -Program copyright 2003-2004 Cies Breijs cies # showroommama ! nl -Contributors: -Coding help, editor part: Anne-Marie Mahfouf annma@kde.org +Credits and Licence + +&kturtle; +Program copyright 2003-2004 Cies Breijs cies # showroommama ! nl +Contributors: +Coding help, editor part: Anne-Marie Mahfouf annma@kde.org -Author of wsbasic (http://wsbasic.sourceforge.net) which is the base for the interpreter of &kturtle;: Walter Schreppers Walter.Schreppers@ua.ac.be +Author of wsbasic (http://wsbasic.sourceforge.net) which is the base for the interpreter of &kturtle;: Walter Schreppers Walter.Schreppers@ua.ac.be -German Data Files: Matthias Meßmer bmlmessmer@web.de +German Data Files: Matthias Meßmer bmlmessmer@web.de -Swedish Data Files: Stefan Asserhäll stefan.asserhal@telia.com +Swedish Data Files: Stefan Asserhäll stefan.asserhal@telia.com -Documentation copyright 2004 -Cies Briej cies # showroommama ! nl -Anne-Marie Mahfouf annma@kde.org -Some proofreading changes by &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; +Documentation copyright 2004 +Cies Briej cies # showroommama ! nl +Anne-Marie Mahfouf annma@kde.org +Some proofreading changes by &Philip.Rodrigues; &Philip.Rodrigues.mail; -Updated translation how-to and some proofreading changes by Andrew Coles andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk +Updated translation how-to and some proofreading changes by Andrew Coles andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk -Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk +Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &kturtle; +How to obtain &kturtle; &install.intro.documentation; -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation &install.compile.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/programming-reference.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/programming-reference.docbook index 5e459b562f1..85ac1908ab7 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/programming-reference.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/programming-reference.docbook @@ -1,602 +1,269 @@ -&kturtle;'s &logo; Programming Reference +&kturtle;'s &logo; Programming Reference -Commands -Using commands you tell the turtle or &kturtle; to do something. Some commands need input, some give output. In this section we explain all the commands that can be used in &kturtle;. +Commands +Using commands you tell the turtle or &kturtle; to do something. Some commands need input, some give output. In this section we explain all the commands that can be used in &kturtle;. -Moving the turtle -There are several commands to move the turtle over the screen. +Moving the turtle +There are several commands to move the turtle over the screen. - forward - forward X -forward moves the turtle forward by the amount of X pixels. When the pen is down the turtle will leave a trail. forward can be abbreviated to fw + forward + forward X +forward moves the turtle forward by the amount of X pixels. When the pen is down the turtle will leave a trail. forward can be abbreviated to fw - backward - backward X -backward moves the turtle backward by the amount of X pixels. When the pen is down the turtle will leave a trail. backward can be abbreviated to bw. + backward + backward X +backward moves the turtle backward by the amount of X pixels. When the pen is down the turtle will leave a trail. backward can be abbreviated to bw. - turnleft - turnleft X -turnleft commands the turtle to turn an amount of X degrees to the left. turnleft can be abbreviated to tl. + turnleft + turnleft X +turnleft commands the turtle to turn an amount of X degrees to the left. turnleft can be abbreviated to tl. - turnright - turnright X -turnrightthe turtle to turn an amount of X degrees to the right. turnright can be abbreviated to tr. + turnright + turnright X +turnrightthe turtle to turn an amount of X degrees to the right. turnright can be abbreviated to tr. - direction - direction X -direction set the turtle's direction to an amount of X degrees counting from zero, and thus is not relative to the turtle's previous direction. direction can be abbreviated to dir. + direction + direction X +direction set the turtle's direction to an amount of X degrees counting from zero, and thus is not relative to the turtle's previous direction. direction can be abbreviated to dir. - centre - centre -centre moves the turtle to the centre on the canvas. + centre + centre +centre moves the turtle to the centre on the canvas. - go - go X,Y -go commands the turtle to go to a certain place on the canvas. This place is X pixels from the left of the canvas, and Y pixels form the top of the canvas. Note that using the go command the turtle will not draw a line. + go + go X,Y +go commands the turtle to go to a certain place on the canvas. This place is X pixels from the left of the canvas, and Y pixels form the top of the canvas. Note that using the go command the turtle will not draw a line. - gox - gox X -gox using this command the turtle will move to X pixels from the left of the canvas whilst staying at the same height. + gox + gox X +gox using this command the turtle will move to X pixels from the left of the canvas whilst staying at the same height. - goy - goy Y -gox using this command the turtle will move to Y pixels from the top of the canvas whilst staying at the same distance from the left border of the canvas. + goy + goy Y +gox using this command the turtle will move to Y pixels from the top of the canvas whilst staying at the same distance from the left border of the canvas. -The turtle has a pen -The turtle has a pen that draws a line when the turtle moves. There are a few commands to control the pen. In this section we explain these commands. +The turtle has a pen +The turtle has a pen that draws a line when the turtle moves. There are a few commands to control the pen. In this section we explain these commands. - penup - penup -penup lifts the pen from the canvas. When the pen is up no line will be drawn when the turtle moves. See also pendown. penup can be abbreviated to pu. + penup + penup +penup lifts the pen from the canvas. When the pen is up no line will be drawn when the turtle moves. See also pendown. penup can be abbreviated to pu. - pendown - pendown -pendown presses the pen down on the canvas. When the pen is press down on the canvas a line will be drawn when the turtle moves. See also penup.pendown can be abbreviated to pd. + pendown + pendown +pendown presses the pen down on the canvas. When the pen is press down on the canvas a line will be drawn when the turtle moves. See also penup.pendown can be abbreviated to pd. - penwidth - penwidth X -penwidth sets the width of the pen (the line width) to an amount of X pixels. penwidth can be abbreviated to pw. + penwidth + penwidth X +penwidth sets the width of the pen (the line width) to an amount of X pixels. penwidth can be abbreviated to pw. - pencolour - pencolour R,G,B -pencolor sets the color of the pen. pencolor takes an RGB combination as input. pencolor can be abbreviated to pc. + pencolour + pencolour R,G,B +pencolor sets the color of the pen. pencolor takes an RGB combination as input. pencolor can be abbreviated to pc. -Commands to control the canvas -There are several commands to control the canvas. +Commands to control the canvas +There are several commands to control the canvas. - canvassize - canvassize X,Y -With the canvassize command you can set the size of the canvas. It takes X and Y as input, where X is the new canvas width in pixels, and Y is the new height of the canvas in pixels. canvassize can be abbreviated to cs. + canvassize + canvassize X,Y +With the canvassize command you can set the size of the canvas. It takes X and Y as input, where X is the new canvas width in pixels, and Y is the new height of the canvas in pixels. canvassize can be abbreviated to cs. - canvascolour - canvascolour R,G,B -canvascolor set the color of the canvas. canvascolor takes an RGB combination as input. canvascolor can be abbreviated to cc. + canvascolour + canvascolour R,G,B +canvascolor set the color of the canvas. canvascolor takes an RGB combination as input. canvascolor can be abbreviated to cc. - wrapon - wrapon -With the wrapon command you can set wrapping on for the canvas. Please see the glossary if you want to know what wrapping is. + wrapon + wrapon +With the wrapon command you can set wrapping on for the canvas. Please see the glossary if you want to know what wrapping is. - wrapoff - wrapoff -With the wrapoff command you can set wrapping off for the canvas: this means the turtle can move off the canvas and can get lost. Please see the glossary if you want to know what wrapping is. + wrapoff + wrapoff +With the wrapoff command you can set wrapping off for the canvas: this means the turtle can move off the canvas and can get lost. Please see the glossary if you want to know what wrapping is. -Commands to clean up -There are two commands to clean up the canvas after you have made a mess. +Commands to clean up +There are two commands to clean up the canvas after you have made a mess. - clear - clear -With clear you can clean all drawings from the canvas. All other things remain: the position and angle of the turtle, the canvascolor, the visibility of the turtle, and the canvas size. clear can be abbreviated to ccl. + clear + clear +With clear you can clean all drawings from the canvas. All other things remain: the position and angle of the turtle, the canvascolor, the visibility of the turtle, and the canvas size. clear can be abbreviated to ccl. - reset - reset -reset cleans much more thoroughly than the clear command. After a reset command everything is like is was when you had just started &kturtle;. The turtle is positioned at the middle of the screen, the canvas color is white, and the turtle draws a black line on the canvas. + reset + reset +reset cleans much more thoroughly than the clear command. After a reset command everything is like is was when you had just started &kturtle;. The turtle is positioned at the middle of the screen, the canvas color is white, and the turtle draws a black line on the canvas. -The turtle is a sprite -Many people do not know what sprites are, so here a short explanation: sprites are small pictures that can be moved around the screen. (for more info see the glossary on sprites). So the turtle is a sprite. -Next you will find a full overview on all commands to work with sprites. -[The current version of &kturtle; does not yet support the use of sprites other than the turtle. With future versions you will be able to change the turtle into something of your own design] +The turtle is a sprite +Many people do not know what sprites are, so here a short explanation: sprites are small pictures that can be moved around the screen. (for more info see the glossary on sprites). So the turtle is a sprite. +Next you will find a full overview on all commands to work with sprites. +[The current version of &kturtle; does not yet support the use of sprites other than the turtle. With future versions you will be able to change the turtle into something of your own design] - show - show -show makes the turtle visible again after it has been hidden.show can be abbreviated to ss. + show + show +show makes the turtle visible again after it has been hidden.show can be abbreviated to ss. - hide - hide -hide hides the turtle. This can be used if the turtle does not fit in your drawing.hide can be abbreviated to sh. + hide + hide +hide hides the turtle. This can be used if the turtle does not fit in your drawing.hide can be abbreviated to sh. -Can the turtles write text? -The answer is: yes. The turtle can write: it writes just about everything you command it to. +Can the turtles write text? +The answer is: yes. The turtle can write: it writes just about everything you command it to. - print - print X -The print command is used to command the turtle to write something on the canvas. print takes numbers and strings as input. You can print various numbers and strings using the + symbol. See here a small example: year = 2004 + print + print X +The print command is used to command the turtle to write something on the canvas. print takes numbers and strings as input. You can print various numbers and strings using the + symbol. See here a small example: year = 2004 author = "Cies" print "KTurtle was made in " + year + " by " + author - + - fontsize - fontsize X -fontsize sets the size of the font that is used by print. fontsize takes one input which should be a number. The size is set in pixels. + fontsize + fontsize X +fontsize sets the size of the font that is used by print. fontsize takes one input which should be a number. The size is set in pixels. -A command that rolls a dice for you -There is one command that rolls a dice for you +A command that rolls a dice for you +There is one command that rolls a dice for you - random - random X,Y -random is a command that takes input and gives output. As input are required two numbers, the first (X) sets the minimum output, the second (Y) sets the maximum. The output is a randomly chosen number that is equal or greater then the minimum and equal or smaller than the maximum. Here a small example: + random + random X,Y +random is a command that takes input and gives output. As input are required two numbers, the first (X) sets the minimum output, the second (Y) sets the maximum. The output is a randomly chosen number that is equal or greater then the minimum and equal or smaller than the maximum. Here a small example: repeat 500 [ x = random 1,20 forward x turnleft 10 - x ] - Using the random command you can add a bit of chaos to your program. + Using the random command you can add a bit of chaos to your program. -Containers -Containers are letters or words that can be used by the programmer to store a number or a text. Containers that contain a number are called variables, containers that can contain text are called strings. +Containers +Containers are letters or words that can be used by the programmer to store a number or a text. Containers that contain a number are called variables, containers that can contain text are called strings. -Containers that are not used yet are 0 by default. An example: +Containers that are not used yet are 0 by default. An example: print N - This will print a 0. + This will print a 0. -Variables: number containers -Let us start with an example: +Variables: number containers +Let us start with an example: x = 3 print x - In the first line the letter x made into a variable (number container). As you see the value of the variable x is set to 3. On the second line the value is printed. -Note that if we wanted to print an x that we should have written print "x" + In the first line the letter x made into a variable (number container). As you see the value of the variable x is set to 3. On the second line the value is printed. +Note that if we wanted to print an x that we should have written print "x" -That was easy, now a bit harder example: +That was easy, now a bit harder example: A = 2004 B = 25 AB = A + B @@ -609,296 +276,105 @@ print "" + A + " plus " + B backward 30 # the next command prints "1979" print A - B - In the first two lines the variables A and B are set to 2004 and 25. On the third line the variable AB is set to A + B, which is 2029. The rest of the example consists of 3 print commands with backward 30 in between. The backward 30 is there to make sure every output is on a new line. In this example you also see that variables can be used in mathematical calculations. + In the first two lines the variables A and B are set to 2004 and 25. On the third line the variable AB is set to A + B, which is 2029. The rest of the example consists of 3 print commands with backward 30 in between. The backward 30 is there to make sure every output is on a new line. In this example you also see that variables can be used in mathematical calculations. -Strings: text containers -Strings are a lot like variables. The biggest difference is that strings cannot be used in mathematical calculations and questions. An example of the use of strings: +Strings: text containers +Strings are a lot like variables. The biggest difference is that strings cannot be used in mathematical calculations and questions. An example of the use of strings: x = "Hello " name = inputwindow "Please enter your name..." print x + name + ", how are you?" - On the first line the string x is set to Hello . On the second line the string name is set to the output of the inputwindow command. On the third line the program prints a composition of three strings on the canvas. -This program ask you to enter your name. When you, for instance, enter the name Paul, the program prints Hello Paul, how are you?. Please note that the plus (+) is the only math symbol that you can use with strings. + On the first line the string x is set to Hello . On the second line the string name is set to the output of the inputwindow command. On the third line the program prints a composition of three strings on the canvas. +This program ask you to enter your name. When you, for instance, enter the name Paul, the program prints Hello Paul, how are you?. Please note that the plus (+) is the only math symbol that you can use with strings. -Can the Turtle do maths? -Yes, &kturtle; will do your math. You can add (+), substract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/). Here is an example in which we use all of them: +Can the Turtle do maths? +Yes, &kturtle; will do your math. You can add (+), substract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/). Here is an example in which we use all of them: a = 20 - 5 b = 15 * 2 c = 30 / 30 d = 1 + 1 print "a: "+a+", b: "+b+", c: "+c+", d: "+d - Do you know what value a, b, c and d have? -If you just want a simple calculation to be done you can do something like this: print 2004-12 - -Now an example with brackets: + Do you know what value a, b, c and d have? +If you just want a simple calculation to be done you can do something like this: print 2004-12 + +Now an example with brackets: print ( ( 20 - 5 ) * 2 / 30 ) + 1 - The expressions inside brackets will be calculated first. In this example, 20-5 will be calculated, then multiplied by 2, divided by 30, and then 1 is added (giving 2). + The expressions inside brackets will be calculated first. In this example, 20-5 will be calculated, then multiplied by 2, divided by 30, and then 1 is added (giving 2). -Asking questions, getting answers... -if and while are execution controllers that we will discuss in the next section. In this section we use the if command to explain questions. -A simple example of questions: +Asking questions, getting answers... +if and while are execution controllers that we will discuss in the next section. In this section we use the if command to explain questions. +A simple example of questions: x = 6 if x > 5 [ print "hello" ] - In this example the question is the x > 5 part. If the answer to this question is true the code between the brackets will be executed. Questions are an important part of programming and often used together with execution controllers, like if. All numbers and variables (number containers) can be compared to each other with questions. -Here are all possible questions: -Types of questions + In this example the question is the x > 5 part. If the answer to this question is true the code between the brackets will be executed. Questions are an important part of programming and often used together with execution controllers, like if. All numbers and variables (number containers) can be compared to each other with questions. +Here are all possible questions:
+Types of questions -a == b -equals -answer is true if a equals b +a == b +equals +answer is true if a equals b -a != b -not-equal -answer is true if a does not equal b +a != b +not-equal +answer is true if a does not equal b -a > b -greater than -answer is true if a is greater than b +a > b +greater than +answer is true if a is greater than b -a < b -smaller than -answer is true if a is smaller than b +a < b +smaller than +answer is true if a is smaller than b -a >= b -greater than or equals -answer is true if a is greater than or equals b +a >= b +greater than or equals +answer is true if a is greater than or equals b -a <= b -smaller than or equals -answer is true if a is smaller than or equals b +a <= b +smaller than or equals +answer is true if a is smaller than or equals b
-Questions can also be glued to each other with question glue, this way a few questions can become one big question. +Questions can also be glued to each other with question glue, this way a few questions can become one big question. a = 1 b = 5 if a < 5 and b == 5 [ print "hello" ] - In this example the glue-word and is used to glue 2 questions (a < 5, b == 5) together. If one side of the and would answer false the whole question would answer false, because with the glue-word and both sides need to be true in order to answer true. -and is not the only glue-word there are two others. They are all in the next table: -Question glue-words +In this example the glue-word and is used to glue 2 questions (a < 5, b == 5) together. If one side of the and would answer false the whole question would answer false, because with the glue-word and both sides need to be true in order to answer true. +and is not the only glue-word there are two others. They are all in the next table:
+Question glue-words -and -both sides need to be true in order to answer true +and +both sides need to be true in order to answer true -or -if one of the sides is true the answer is true +or +if one of the sides is true the answer is true -not -only if both of the sides are false the answer is false +not +only if both of the sides are false the answer is false @@ -907,232 +383,100 @@ if a < 5 and b == 5 [ -Controlling execution -The execution controllers enable you — as their name implies — to control execution. +Controlling execution +The execution controllers enable you — as their name implies — to control execution. -Have the turtle wait -If you have done some programming in &kturtle; you have might noticed that the turtle can be very quick at drawing. This command makes the turtle wait for a given amount of time. +Have the turtle wait +If you have done some programming in &kturtle; you have might noticed that the turtle can be very quick at drawing. This command makes the turtle wait for a given amount of time. - wait - wait X -wait makes the turtle wait for X seconds. + wait + wait X +wait makes the turtle wait for X seconds. repeat 36 [ forward 5 turnright 10 wait 0.5 ] - This code draws a circle, but the turtle will wait half a second after each step. This gives the impression of a slow-moving turtle. + This code draws a circle, but the turtle will wait half a second after each step. This gives the impression of a slow-moving turtle. -Execute "if" - +Execute "if" + - if - if question [ ... ] -The code that is placed between the brackets will only be executed if the answer to the question is true. Please read for more information on questions in the question section. + if + if question [ ... ] +The code that is placed between the brackets will only be executed if the answer to the question is true. Please read for more information on questions in the question section. x = 6 if x > 5 [ print "x is greater than five!" ] - On the first line x is set to 6. On the second line the question x > 5 is asked. Since the answer to this question is true the execution controller if will allow the code between the brackets to be executed + On the first line x is set to 6. On the second line the question x > 5 is asked. Since the answer to this question is true the execution controller if will allow the code between the brackets to be executed -Execute "while" - +Execute "while" + - while - while question [ ... ] -The execution controller while is a lot like if. The difference is that while keeps repeating the code between the brackets till the answer to the question is false. + while + while question [ ... ] +The execution controller while is a lot like if. The difference is that while keeps repeating the code between the brackets till the answer to the question is false. x = 1 while x < 5 [ forward 10 wait 1 x = x + 1 ] - On the first line x is set to 1. On the second line the question x < 5 is asked. Since the answer to this question is true the execution controller while starts executing the code between the brackets till the answer to the question is false. In this case the code between the brackets will be executed 4 times, because every time the fifth line is executed x increases by 1.. + On the first line x is set to 1. On the second line the question x < 5 is asked. Since the answer to this question is true the execution controller while starts executing the code between the brackets till the answer to the question is false. In this case the code between the brackets will be executed 4 times, because every time the fifth line is executed x increases by 1.. -If not, in other words: "else" - +If not, in other words: "else" + - else - if question [ ... ] else [ ... ] -else can be used in addition to the execution controller if. The code between the brackets after else is only executed if the answer to the question that is asked is false. + else + if question [ ... ] else [ ... ] +else can be used in addition to the execution controller if. The code between the brackets after else is only executed if the answer to the question that is asked is false. x = 4 if x > 5 [ print "x is greater than five!" ] else [ print "x is smaller than six!" ] - The question asks if x is greater than 5. Since x is set to 4 on the first line the answer to the question is false. This means the code between the brackets after else gets executed. + The question asks if x is greater than 5. Since x is set to 4 on the first line the answer to the question is false. This means the code between the brackets after else gets executed. -The "for" loop - +The "for" loop + - for - for start point to end point [ ... ] -The for loop is a counting loop, &ie; it keeps count for you. + for + for start point to end point [ ... ] +The for loop is a counting loop, &ie; it keeps count for you. for x = 1 to 10 [ print x * 7 forward 15 ] - Every time the code between the brackets is executed the x is increased by 1, till x reaches the value of 10. The code between the brackets prints the x multiplied by 7. After this program finishes its execution you will see the times table of 7 on the canvas. + Every time the code between the brackets is executed the x is increased by 1, till x reaches the value of 10. The code between the brackets prints the x multiplied by 7. After this program finishes its execution you will see the times table of 7 on the canvas. @@ -1141,37 +485,15 @@ for x = 1 to 10 [ -Create your own commands -learn is a very special command, because it is used to create your own commands. The command you create can take input and return output. Let us take a look at how a new command is created: +Create your own commands +learn is a very special command, because it is used to create your own commands. The command you create can take input and return output. Let us take a look at how a new command is created: learn circle (x) [ repeat 36 [ forward x turnleft 10 ] ] - The new command is called circle. circle takes one input, a number, to set the size of the circle. circle returns no output. The circle command can now be used like a normal command in the rest of the code. See this example: learn circle (x) [ + The new command is called circle. circle takes one input, a number, to set the size of the circle. circle returns no output. The circle command can now be used like a normal command in the rest of the code. See this example: learn circle (x) [ repeat 36 [ forward x turnleft 10 @@ -1185,8 +507,7 @@ learn circle (x) [ circle(50) -In the next example a command with a return value is created. +In the next example a command with a return value is created. reset learn multiplyBySelf (n) [ @@ -1196,14 +517,7 @@ learn multiplyBySelf (n) [ ] i = inputwindow "Please enter a number and press OK" print i + " multiplied by itself is: " + multiplyBySelf (i) - In this example a new command called multiplyBySelf is created. The input of this command is multiplied by it self and then returned, using the return command. The return command is the way to output a value from a function you have created. + In this example a new command called multiplyBySelf is created. The input of this command is multiplied by it self and then returned, using the return command. The return command is the way to output a value from a function you have created. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/translator-guide.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/translator-guide.docbook index 3676f91bfc3..f7ea5e5cb12 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/translator-guide.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/translator-guide.docbook @@ -1,221 +1,60 @@ -Translator's Guide to &kturtle; -As you know, one of the great features of &logo; is that the &logo; commands can be translated in your own language. This makes it easier for a child to understand the commands. For a new language, there are 3 files to translate: first the keywords file (or commands) then the logo-highlight-style file and finally the examples. +Translator's Guide to &kturtle; +As you know, one of the great features of &logo; is that the &logo; commands can be translated in your own language. This makes it easier for a child to understand the commands. For a new language, there are 3 files to translate: first the keywords file (or commands) then the logo-highlight-style file and finally the examples. -Creating a Directory to hold the Translated Files -First, you need to create a directory to store the translated files. Create a directory called tde-i18n/code/data/tdeedu/kturtle/ in your KDE CVS directory, where code is your country code (the 2- or 4- letter ISO code). -Copy the Makefile.am file from tdeedu/kturtle/data/ into this directory. Open it using your favorite text editor, replace all instances of en_US in the file with your country code (the one used above), and save the file. +Creating a Directory to hold the Translated Files +First, you need to create a directory to store the translated files. Create a directory called tde-i18n/code/data/tdeedu/kturtle/ in your KDE CVS directory, where code is your country code (the 2- or 4- letter ISO code). +Copy the Makefile.am file from tdeedu/kturtle/data/ into this directory. Open it using your favorite text editor, replace all instances of en_US in the file with your country code (the one used above), and save the file. -How To Translate the &logo; Keywords (commands) +How To Translate the &logo; Keywords (commands) -Copy the logokeywords.en_US.xml file from tdeedu/kturtle/data/ to the directory you have just created, and rename it to logokeywords.code.xml where code is your country code (the 2- or 4- letter ISO code). +Copy the logokeywords.en_US.xml file from tdeedu/kturtle/data/ to the directory you have just created, and rename it to logokeywords.code.xml where code is your country code (the 2- or 4- letter ISO code). -Translate the contents of the keyword tag (&ie; the information between keyword and keyword) into your own language wherever possible. Also, translate the contents of the alias tag, (&ie; the information between the alias and alias): these are used as shortcuts for the keyword. -For example, translate while in: keywordwhilekeyword -Please do not translate anything else and do not translate the English words in command name="english_word": these must stay in English. +Translate the contents of the keyword tag (&ie; the information between keyword and keyword) into your own language wherever possible. Also, translate the contents of the alias tag, (&ie; the information between the alias and alias): these are used as shortcuts for the keyword. +For example, translate while in: keywordwhilekeyword +Please do not translate anything else and do not translate the English words in command name="english_word": these must stay in English. -Save your file as UTF-8 (in &kate;, use Save As... and change to utf8 in the box on the right of the file name). +Save your file as UTF-8 (in &kate;, use Save As... and change to utf8 in the box on the right of the file name). -Commit your file (add your filename in the Makefile.am) or send it to Anne-Marie. +Commit your file (add your filename in the Makefile.am) or send it to Anne-Marie. -In case of any doubt, please contact Anne-Marie Mahfouf annemarie.mahfouf@free.fr for more information. +In case of any doubt, please contact Anne-Marie Mahfouf annemarie.mahfouf@free.fr for more information. -How To Translate the Syntax Highlighting Files +How To Translate the Syntax Highlighting Files -Copy the logohighlightstyle.en_US.xml file from tdeedu/kturtle/data/ to the directory you created to store the translated keywords file, and rename it to logohighlightstyle.code.xml where code is your country code (the 2- or 4- letter ISO code). +Copy the logohighlightstyle.en_US.xml file from tdeedu/kturtle/data/ to the directory you created to store the translated keywords file, and rename it to logohighlightstyle.code.xml where code is your country code (the 2- or 4- letter ISO code). -In line 4 of the file, there is language name="en_US"...: here you change en_US to your language's ISO code (2 or 4 letters). -Translate into your own language the content of the item tag (&ie; the information between item and item). This content must match the logokeyword file. For example, translate while in: item while item and leave the spaces as they are (one at the beginning and one at the end). Please do not translate anything else. -Save your file as UTF-8 (in &kate;, use Save As... and change to utf8 in the box on the right of the file name). -Commit your file (add your filename in the Makefile.am) or send it to Anne-Marie. -In case of any doubt, please contact Anne-Marie Mahfouf annemarie.mahfouf@free.fr for more information. +In line 4 of the file, there is language name="en_US"...: here you change en_US to your language's ISO code (2 or 4 letters). +Translate into your own language the content of the item tag (&ie; the information between item and item). This content must match the logokeyword file. For example, translate while in: item while item and leave the spaces as they are (one at the beginning and one at the end). Please do not translate anything else. +Save your file as UTF-8 (in &kate;, use Save As... and change to utf8 in the box on the right of the file name). +Commit your file (add your filename in the Makefile.am) or send it to Anne-Marie. +In case of any doubt, please contact Anne-Marie Mahfouf annemarie.mahfouf@free.fr for more information. -How To Translate the Examples +How To Translate the Examples -Copy the English example files from tdeedu/kturtle/data/ to the directory used to store the translated keyword and hilighting files. Translate the filenames of the examples in your directory: this will allow users to easily and quickly understand what the example is about. +Copy the English example files from tdeedu/kturtle/data/ to the directory used to store the translated keyword and hilighting files. Translate the filenames of the examples in your directory: this will allow users to easily and quickly understand what the example is about. -Translate the keywords in the examples, using those in the logokeywords.xml for your language. The keywords file file must be done, first, before translating the examples. +Translate the keywords in the examples, using those in the logokeywords.xml for your language. The keywords file file must be done, first, before translating the examples. -Save your file as UTF-8 (in &kate;, use Save As... and change to utf8 in the box on the right of the file name) +Save your file as UTF-8 (in &kate;, use Save As... and change to utf8 in the box on the right of the file name) -Commit your folder (add a Makefile.am inside) or send it to Anne-Marie. +Commit your folder (add a Makefile.am inside) or send it to Anne-Marie. -In case of any doubt, please contact Anne-Marie Mahfouf, annemarie.mahfouf@free.fr for more information. +In case of any doubt, please contact Anne-Marie Mahfouf, annemarie.mahfouf@free.fr for more information. -Finally, if you want, you can add your own examples in this folder. +Finally, if you want, you can add your own examples in this folder. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/using-kturtle.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/using-kturtle.docbook index e250da7f1ba..3e83de66110 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/using-kturtle.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeedu/kturtle/using-kturtle.docbook @@ -1,993 +1,318 @@ -Using &kturtle; +Using &kturtle; - Here is a screenshot of &kturtle; in action + Here is a screenshot of &kturtle; in action - &kturtle; Main Window + &kturtle; Main Window -The main window of &kturtle; has two main parts: the code editor (3) on the left where you type the &logo; commands, and the canvas (4) on the right where the instructions are visualized. The canvas is the turtle's playground: it is on the canvas that the turtle actually moves and draws. The three other places on the main window are: the menu bar (1) from where all the actions can be reached, the toolbar (4) that allows you to quickly select the most used actions, and the statusbar (5) where you will find feedback on the state of &kturtle;. +The main window of &kturtle; has two main parts: the code editor (3) on the left where you type the &logo; commands, and the canvas (4) on the right where the instructions are visualized. The canvas is the turtle's playground: it is on the canvas that the turtle actually moves and draws. The three other places on the main window are: the menu bar (1) from where all the actions can be reached, the toolbar (4) that allows you to quickly select the most used actions, and the statusbar (5) where you will find feedback on the state of &kturtle;. -The Code Editor -In the code editor you type the &logo; commands. It has all of the features you would expect from a modern editor. Most of its features are found in the Edit and the Tools menus. The code editor can be docked on each border of the main window or it can be detached and placed anywhere on your desktop. -You have several ways to get some code in the editor. The easiest way is to use an already-made example: choose FileOpen Examples in the File menu and click on a file. The filename will tell you what the example is about (⪚ square.logo will draw a square). The file you choose will be opened in the the code editor, you can then use FileExecute Commands to run the code if you like. -You can open &logo; files by choosing FileOpen... . -The third way is to directly type your own code in the editor or to copy/paste some code from this user guide. -The cursor position is indicated in the statusbar, on the right with the Line number and Column number. +The Code Editor +In the code editor you type the &logo; commands. It has all of the features you would expect from a modern editor. Most of its features are found in the Edit and the Tools menus. The code editor can be docked on each border of the main window or it can be detached and placed anywhere on your desktop. +You have several ways to get some code in the editor. The easiest way is to use an already-made example: choose FileOpen Examples in the File menu and click on a file. The filename will tell you what the example is about (⪚ square.logo will draw a square). The file you choose will be opened in the the code editor, you can then use FileExecute Commands to run the code if you like. +You can open &logo; files by choosing FileOpen... . +The third way is to directly type your own code in the editor or to copy/paste some code from this user guide. +The cursor position is indicated in the statusbar, on the right with the Line number and Column number. -The Canvas -The canvas is the area where the commands are visualized, where the commands draw a picture. In other words, it is the turtle's playground. After getting some code in the the code editor, and executing it using FileExecute Commands , two things can happen: either the code executes fine, and will you most likely see something change on the canvas; or you have made an error in your code and there will be a message telling you what error you made. -This message should help you to resolve the error. -The picture that is drawn can be saved as an image (using FileSave Canvas ) or printed (using FilePrint... ). +The Canvas +The canvas is the area where the commands are visualized, where the commands draw a picture. In other words, it is the turtle's playground. After getting some code in the the code editor, and executing it using FileExecute Commands , two things can happen: either the code executes fine, and will you most likely see something change on the canvas; or you have made an error in your code and there will be a message telling you what error you made. +This message should help you to resolve the error. +The picture that is drawn can be saved as an image (using FileSave Canvas ) or printed (using FilePrint... ). -The Menubar -In the menu bar you find all the actions of &kturtle;. They are in the following groups: File, Edit, View, Tools, Settings, and Help. This section describes them all. +The Menubar +In the menu bar you find all the actions of &kturtle;. They are in the following groups: File, Edit, View, Tools, Settings, and Help. This section describes them all. -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;N File New - Creates a new, empty &logo; file. + &Ctrl;N File New + Creates a new, empty &logo; file. - &Ctrl;O File Open... - Opens a &logo; file. + &Ctrl;O File Open... + Opens a &logo; file. - File Open Recent - Opens a &logo; file that has been opened recently. + File Open Recent + Opens a &logo; file that has been opened recently. - &Ctrl;E File Open Examples - Show the folder with examples &logo; programs. The examples should be in your favorite language that you can choose in SettingsConfigure &kturtle;... . + &Ctrl;E File Open Examples + Show the folder with examples &logo; programs. The examples should be in your favorite language that you can choose in SettingsConfigure &kturtle;... . - &Alt;Return File Execute Commands - Starts the execution of the commands in the code editor. + &Alt;Return File Execute Commands + Starts the execution of the commands in the code editor. - Escape File Stop Execution - Stops the execution. This action is only enabled when the commands are actually executing. + Escape File Stop Execution + Stops the execution. This action is only enabled when the commands are actually executing. - &Ctrl;S File Save - Saves the currently opened &logo; file. + &Ctrl;S File Save + Saves the currently opened &logo; file. - File Save As... - Saves the currently opened &logo; file on a specified location. + File Save As... + Saves the currently opened &logo; file on a specified location. - File Save Canvas - Saves the current drawing on canvas into an image. + File Save Canvas + Saves the current drawing on canvas into an image. - &Ctrl;P File Print... - Prints either the current code in the editor or the current drawing on the canvas. + &Ctrl;P File Print... + Prints either the current code in the editor or the current drawing on the canvas. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit - Quits &kturtle;. + &Ctrl;Q File Quit + Quits &kturtle;. - The <guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> Menu + The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;Z Edit Undo - Undoes the last change to code. &kturtle; has unlimited undos. + &Ctrl;Z Edit Undo + Undoes the last change to code. &kturtle; has unlimited undos. - &Ctrl;&Shift;Z Edit Redo - Redoes an undone change to the code. + &Ctrl;&Shift;Z Edit Redo + Redoes an undone change to the code. - &Ctrl;X Edit Cut - Cuts the selected text from the code editor to the clipboard. + &Ctrl;X Edit Cut + Cuts the selected text from the code editor to the clipboard. - &Ctrl;C Edit Copy - Copies the selected text from the code editor to the clipboard. + &Ctrl;C Edit Copy + Copies the selected text from the code editor to the clipboard. - &Ctrl;V Edit Paste - Pastes the text from the clipboard to the editor. + &Ctrl;V Edit Paste + Pastes the text from the clipboard to the editor. - &Ctrl;F Edit Find... - With this action you can find phrases in the code. + &Ctrl;F Edit Find... + With this action you can find phrases in the code. - F3 Edit Find Next - Use this to find the next occurrence of the phrase. + F3 Edit Find Next + Use this to find the next occurrence of the phrase. - &Ctrl;R Edit Replace... - With this action you can replace phrases in the code. + &Ctrl;R Edit Replace... + With this action you can replace phrases in the code. - The <guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu + The <guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;&Shift;F View Full Screen Mode - With this action you toggle the full screen mode. - Note: When code is executed while in full screen mode everything but the canvas is hidden. This makes it possible to write full screen programs in &kturtle;. + &Ctrl;&Shift;F View Full Screen Mode + With this action you toggle the full screen mode. + Note: When code is executed while in full screen mode everything but the canvas is hidden. This makes it possible to write full screen programs in &kturtle;. - F11 View Show Line Numbers - With this action you can show the line numbers in the code editor. This can be handy for finding errors. + F11 View Show Line Numbers + With this action you can show the line numbers in the code editor. This can be handy for finding errors. - The <guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> Menu + The <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu - &Alt;C Tools Colour Picker - This action opens the colour picker. Using the colour picker you can easily select a colour code and insert it in the code editor. + &Alt;C Tools Colour Picker + This action opens the colour picker. Using the colour picker you can easily select a colour code and insert it in the code editor. - &Ctrl;I Tools Indent - This action indents (adds white space at the beginning of) the lines that are selected. When indentation is used properly this can make code much easier to read. All examples use indentation, please check them out. + &Ctrl;I Tools Indent + This action indents (adds white space at the beginning of) the lines that are selected. When indentation is used properly this can make code much easier to read. All examples use indentation, please check them out. - &Ctrl;&Shift;I Tools Unindent - This action unindents (removes the white space at the beginning of) the lines that are selected. + &Ctrl;&Shift;I Tools Unindent + This action unindents (removes the white space at the beginning of) the lines that are selected. - Tools Clean Indentation - This action cleans indentation (removes all the white space at the beginning of) the lines that are selected. + Tools Clean Indentation + This action cleans indentation (removes all the white space at the beginning of) the lines that are selected. - &Ctrl;D Tools Comment - This action add comment characters (#) in from of the lines that are selected. Lines that start with a comment character are ignored when the code is executed. Comments allow the programmer to explain a bit about his code or they can be used to temporarily prevent a certain piece of code from being executed. + &Ctrl;D Tools Comment + This action add comment characters (#) in from of the lines that are selected. Lines that start with a comment character are ignored when the code is executed. Comments allow the programmer to explain a bit about his code or they can be used to temporarily prevent a certain piece of code from being executed. - &Ctrl;&Shift;D Tools Uncomment - This action removes the comment characters from the selected lines. + &Ctrl;&Shift;D Tools Uncomment + This action removes the comment characters from the selected lines. - The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu + The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -Settings Show/Hide Toolbar -Toggle the Main Toolbar +Settings Show/Hide Toolbar +Toggle the Main Toolbar - + -Settings Show/Hide Statusbar -Toggle the Statusbar +Settings Show/Hide Statusbar +Toggle the Statusbar - Settings Advanced Settings - Here you can change things you normally do not need to change. The Advanced Settings submenu has three items: Configure Editor... (the standard &kate; editor settings dialog), Configure Shortcuts... (the standard &kde; shortcut settings dialog), and Configure Toolbars... (the standard &kde; toolbars setting dialog). + Settings Advanced Settings + Here you can change things you normally do not need to change. The Advanced Settings submenu has three items: Configure Editor... (the standard &kate; editor settings dialog), Configure Shortcuts... (the standard &kde; shortcut settings dialog), and Configure Toolbars... (the standard &kde; toolbars setting dialog). - Settings Configure &kturtle;... - This is used to configure &kturtle;. Here you can change the language of the &logo; commands or set a new initial canvas size. + Settings Configure &kturtle;... + This is used to configure &kturtle;. Here you can change the language of the &logo; commands or set a new initial canvas size. - The <guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu + The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu - Help &kturtle; Handbook - This action shows the handbook that you are currently reading. + Help &kturtle; Handbook + This action shows the handbook that you are currently reading. - &Shift;F1 Help What's This? - After activating this action the mouse arrow will be changed into a question mark arrow. When this arrow is used to click on parts of &kturtle; main window, a description of the particular part pops-up. + &Shift;F1 Help What's This? + After activating this action the mouse arrow will be changed into a question mark arrow. When this arrow is used to click on parts of &kturtle; main window, a description of the particular part pops-up. - F1 Help Help on: ... - This is a very useful function: it provides help on the code where the cursor in the code editor is at. So, ⪚, you have used the print command in your code, and you want to read and to know what the handbook says on this command. You just move your cursor so it is in the print command and you press F1. The handbook will then show all info on the print command. - This function is very important while learning programming. + F1 Help Help on: ... + This is a very useful function: it provides help on the code where the cursor in the code editor is at. So, ⪚, you have used the print command in your code, and you want to read and to know what the handbook says on this command. You just move your cursor so it is in the print command and you press F1. The handbook will then show all info on the print command. + This function is very important while learning programming. - Help Report Bug... - Use this to report a problem with &kturtle; to the developers. These reports can be used to make future versions of &kturtle; even better. + Help Report Bug... + Use this to report a problem with &kturtle; to the developers. These reports can be used to make future versions of &kturtle; even better. - Help About &kturtle; - Here you find information on &kturtle;, like the authors and the license it comes with. + Help About &kturtle; + Here you find information on &kturtle;, like the authors and the license it comes with. - Help About &kde; - Here you can find information on &kde;. If you do not know yet what &kde; is, this is a place you should not miss. + Help About &kde; + Here you can find information on &kde;. If you do not know yet what &kde; is, this is a place you should not miss. @@ -995,31 +320,14 @@ -The Toolbar -Here you can quickly reach the most used actions. By default, you will find here all main useful commands ending with the Execute Commands and Stop Execution icons. -You can configure the toolbar using SettingsAdvanced SettingsConfigure Toolbar... +The Toolbar +Here you can quickly reach the most used actions. By default, you will find here all main useful commands ending with the Execute Commands and Stop Execution icons. +You can configure the toolbar using SettingsAdvanced SettingsConfigure Toolbar... -The Statusbar -On the statusbar you get feedback of the state of &kturtle;. On the left side it shows the feedback on the last action. On the right side you find the current location of the cursor (line and column numbers). In the middle of the Statusbar is indicated the current language used for the commands. +The Statusbar +On the statusbar you get feedback of the state of &kturtle;. On the left side it shows the feedback on the last action. On the right side you find the current location of the cursor (line and column numbers). In the middle of the Statusbar is indicated the current language used for the commands. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdelibs/tdespell/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdelibs/tdespell/index.docbook index f02bbc27985..397aa4b754f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdelibs/tdespell/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdelibs/tdespell/index.docbook @@ -1,238 +1,123 @@ - + ]> -The &tdespell; Handbook +The &tdespell; Handbook -&David.Sweet; &David.Sweet.mail; - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&David.Sweet; &David.Sweet.mail; + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-02-24 -1.00.00 +2003-02-24 +1.00.00 -&tdespell; is the spelling checker used by &kde; applications such as &kate;, &kmail;, and &kword;. It is a GUI frontend to International ISpell and ASpell. +&tdespell; is the spelling checker used by &kde; applications such as &kate;, &kmail;, and &kword;. It is a GUI frontend to International ISpell and ASpell. -spell -spelling -tdespell -ispell -aspell -check -checker -KDE +spell +spelling +tdespell +ispell +aspell +check +checker +KDE -Misspelled Word Dialogue +Misspelled Word Dialogue -(If you do not have Ispell installed you can obtain it from the International ISpell home page. ASpell is available from the ASpell home page.) +(If you do not have Ispell installed you can obtain it from the International ISpell home page. ASpell is available from the ASpell home page.) -General Use - - The top line in the dialogue displays a possibly misspelled word which was found in your document. &tdespell; attempts to find an appropriate replacement word. One or several may be found. The best guess is shown to the right of Replacement:. To accept this replacement, click on Replace. You may also select a word from the list of Suggestions and then click Replace to replace the misspelled word with the selected word. - -To keep your original spelling, click on Ignore. - -To stop the spell checking -- keeping the changes you've already made -- click on Stop. - -To stop the spell checking and cancel the changes you've already made, click on Cancel. - -Clicking on Replace All will initially perform the same function as clicking on Replace, but will automatically replace the misspelled word with the chosen replacement word, if it appears again (at a later point) in your document. - -The Ignore All button ignores this and all future occurrences of the misspelled word. - -Clicking on Add will add the misspelled word to your personal dictionary (this is distinct from the original system dictionary, so the additions you make will not be seen by other users). +General Use + + The top line in the dialogue displays a possibly misspelled word which was found in your document. &tdespell; attempts to find an appropriate replacement word. One or several may be found. The best guess is shown to the right of Replacement:. To accept this replacement, click on Replace. You may also select a word from the list of Suggestions and then click Replace to replace the misspelled word with the selected word. + +To keep your original spelling, click on Ignore. + +To stop the spell checking -- keeping the changes you've already made -- click on Stop. + +To stop the spell checking and cancel the changes you've already made, click on Cancel. + +Clicking on Replace All will initially perform the same function as clicking on Replace, but will automatically replace the misspelled word with the chosen replacement word, if it appears again (at a later point) in your document. + +The Ignore All button ignores this and all future occurrences of the misspelled word. + +Clicking on Add will add the misspelled word to your personal dictionary (this is distinct from the original system dictionary, so the additions you make will not be seen by other users). -Configuration Dialogue +Configuration Dialogue -Dictionaries +Dictionaries -You can choose the dictionary to use for spell checking from the list of installed dictionaries. +You can choose the dictionary to use for spell checking from the list of installed dictionaries. -Encodings +Encodings -The most commonly used character encodings are: +The most commonly used character encodings are: -US-ASCII +US-ASCII -This is the character set used for English text. +This is the character set used for English text. -ISO-8859-1 +ISO-8859-1 -This is used for Western European languages. +This is used for Western European languages. -UTF-8 +UTF-8 -This is a Unicode encoding that can be used for almost any language, if your system has the necessary fonts. +This is a Unicode encoding that can be used for almost any language, if your system has the necessary fonts. -You should select the one that matches the character set you are using. In some cases, dictionaries will support more than one encoding. A dictionary might, for example, accept accented characters when ISO-8859-1 is selected, but accept email-style character combinations (like 'a for an accented a) when US-ASCII is selected. Please see your dictionary's distribution for more information. +You should select the one that matches the character set you are using. In some cases, dictionaries will support more than one encoding. A dictionary might, for example, accept accented characters when ISO-8859-1 is selected, but accept email-style character combinations (like 'a for an accented a) when US-ASCII is selected. Please see your dictionary's distribution for more information. -Spell-checking client - -You may choose to use Ispell or Aspell as the spell-checking backend for &tdespell;. Ispell is more widely available and may have better international support, but Aspell is gaining popularity as it claims to give better suggestions for word replacements. +Spell-checking client + +You may choose to use Ispell or Aspell as the spell-checking backend for &tdespell;. Ispell is more widely available and may have better international support, but Aspell is gaining popularity as it claims to give better suggestions for word replacements. -Other +Other -It is recommend that you do not change the first two options unless you have read the International ISpell man page. +It is recommend that you do not change the first two options unless you have read the International ISpell man page. -Contact Information - -For more information about &tdespell;, visit the &tdespell; Home Page. In particular, you will find information about programming the &tdespell; C++ class. - -You may email the author/maintainer with questions and/or comments at &David.Sweet.mail;. - -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Contact Information + +For more information about &tdespell;, visit the &tdespell; Home Page. In particular, you will find information about programming the &tdespell; C++ class. + +You may email the author/maintainer with questions and/or comments at &David.Sweet.mail;. + +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk &documentation.index; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdemultimedia/kcontrol/kmixcfg/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdemultimedia/kcontrol/kmixcfg/index.docbook index 22428b6bde2..a3e7579e5f5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdemultimedia/kcontrol/kmixcfg/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdemultimedia/kcontrol/kmixcfg/index.docbook @@ -2,94 +2,48 @@ - + ]>
-Mike McBride -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +Mike McBride +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -mixer +KDE +KControl +mixer -Mixer +Mixer -This module can be used to configure some of the more basic options of &kmix; (the &kde; Mixer). +This module can be used to configure some of the more basic options of &kmix; (the &kde; Mixer). -The first section, relates to default volumes. With this section, you can save the current volume levels as the default. You can also load the default volume levels (thereby restoring them to the default status). +The first section, relates to default volumes. With this section, you can save the current volume levels as the default. You can also load the default volume levels (thereby restoring them to the default status). -By selecting the Load volumes on login, you can instruct &kde; to automatically load the default volume levels whenever &kde; is started. +By selecting the Load volumes on login, you can instruct &kde; to automatically load the default volume levels whenever &kde; is started. -The next section, lets you specify what hardware &kmix; should look for. +The next section, lets you specify what hardware &kmix; should look for. -The slider labelled Maximum number of probed mixers determines when &kmix; stops looking for soundcards. If you have one soundcard in your computer, you should set this to one. Using a higher number, means &kmix; will continue to search for a second sound card, which will delay the startup of &kmix;. +The slider labelled Maximum number of probed mixers determines when &kmix; stops looking for soundcards. If you have one soundcard in your computer, you should set this to one. Using a higher number, means &kmix; will continue to search for a second sound card, which will delay the startup of &kmix;. -The slider labelled Maximum number of probed devices per mixer determines how many devices &kmix; tries to detect on each soundcard. If there are more devices on your soundcard than &kmix; shows on startup, you should increase this number. +The slider labelled Maximum number of probed devices per mixer determines how many devices &kmix; tries to detect on each soundcard. If there are more devices on your soundcard than &kmix; shows on startup, you should increase this number. -Section Author - -This section written by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Author + +This section written by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdenetwork/kcontrol/kcmktalkd/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdenetwork/kcontrol/kcmktalkd/index.docbook index 8a66791212a..9c603dea855 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdenetwork/kcontrol/kcmktalkd/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdenetwork/kcontrol/kcmktalkd/index.docbook @@ -2,91 +2,47 @@ - + ]>
-Talk +Talk -Lauri Watts -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +Lauri Watts +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-10-08 -3.01.00 +2002-10-08 +3.01.00 -KDE -KControl -talk +KDE +KControl +talk -Talk Configuration +Talk Configuration - -Introduction + +Introduction -Please see the &ktalkd; manual for more information (you can read it by entering help:/ktalkd/ in a &konqueror; window.) +Please see the &ktalkd; manual for more information (you can read it by entering help:/ktalkd/ in a &konqueror; window.) - -Section Author -This section written by: + +Section Author +This section written by: -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kaddressbook/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kaddressbook/index.docbook index 31d5bef87aa..66c581edc83 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kaddressbook/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kaddressbook/index.docbook @@ -3,148 +3,96 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + ]> -The &kaddressbook; Handbook +The &kaddressbook; Handbook - Don Sanders
dsanders@kde.org
 -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
KDE British Conversion + Don Sanders
dsanders@kde.org
 +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
KDE British Conversion -2001-06-01 -0.01.00 +2001-06-01 +0.01.00 &FDLNotice; -&kaddressbook; is the &kde; address book. +&kaddressbook; is the &kde; address book. -KDE -kaddressbook +KDE +kaddressbook -Introduction +Introduction -Features +Features - The documentation for &kaddressbook; was not complete at the time you installed this application. If you have any questions, please direct them to the appropriate &kde; mailing list. + The documentation for &kaddressbook; was not complete at the time you installed this application. If you have any questions, please direct them to the appropriate &kde; mailing list. - For &kaddressbook; this is probably + For &kaddressbook; this is probably -Using &kaddressbook; +Using &kaddressbook; - + -Questions, Answers, and Tips +Questions, Answers, and Tips -Question 1 +Question 1 -The answer +The answer -Installation +Installation - + -How to obtain &kaddressbook; +How to obtain &kaddressbook; - + -Requirements +Requirements - + -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation -Compiling &kaddressbook; is very easy. The following should do it: +Compiling &kaddressbook; is very easy. The following should do it: % ./configure % make % make install - + -That should do it! Should you run into any problems, please report them to the author at dsanders@kde.org +That should do it! Should you run into any problems, please report them to the author at dsanders@kde.org &underFDL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kcontrol/kalarmd/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kcontrol/kalarmd/index.docbook index 4b75e497a2f..e9f9a2d6976 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kcontrol/kalarmd/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kcontrol/kalarmd/index.docbook @@ -2,114 +2,63 @@ - + ]>
-Lauri Watts
lauri@kde.org
 +Lauri Watts
lauri@kde.org
 -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-11 -3.00.00 +2002-02-11 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -alarm -schedule +KDE +KControl +alarm +schedule -Alarm Daemon +Alarm Daemon -This module allows you to configure &kalarmd;, the alarm daemon from the tdepim package. It will not be available if you have not installed this package. +This module allows you to configure &kalarmd;, the alarm daemon from the tdepim package. It will not be available if you have not installed this package. -There are only two options for this module: +There are only two options for this module: -Start alarm daemon automatically at login +Start alarm daemon automatically at login -Check this to start the alarm daemon whenever you start a &kde; session. +Check this to start the alarm daemon whenever you start a &kde; session. -Check interval [minutes] +Check interval [minutes] -How long (in minutes) the alarm daemon should wait between checks for alarms coming due. +How long (in minutes) the alarm daemon should wait between checks for alarms coming due. -These settings apply to every application which uses the alarm daemon. Currently, the applications which use it include &korganizer; and &kalarm;. For more information, see their respective handbooks. +These settings apply to every application which uses the alarm daemon. Currently, the applications which use it include &korganizer; and &kalarm;. For more information, see their respective handbooks. -Section Author - -Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org - -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Author + +Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org + +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kleopatra/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kleopatra/index.docbook index 939dcac0fbf..07d86b3f851 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kleopatra/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kleopatra/index.docbook @@ -1,798 +1,319 @@ Kleopatra"> - KWatchGnuPG"> - GpgSM"> - GPG"> - GpgConf"> + Kleopatra"> + KWatchGnuPG"> + GpgSM"> + GPG"> + GpgConf"> - DN"> - CA"> + DN"> + CA"> - FileNew Key Pair..."> - FileExport Certificates..."> - FileExport Secret key..."> - FileImport Certificates..."> - FileImport CRLs..."> - &Ctrl;QFileQuit"> + FileNew Key Pair..."> + FileExport Certificates..."> + FileExport Secret key..."> + FileImport Certificates..."> + FileImport CRLs..."> + &Ctrl;QFileQuit"> - F5ViewRedisplay"> - EscViewStop Operation"> - ViewCertificate Details..."> - ViewHierarchical Key List"> - &Ctrl;.ViewExpand All"> - &Ctrl;,ViewCollapse All"> + F5ViewRedisplay"> + EscViewStop Operation"> + ViewCertificate Details..."> + ViewHierarchical Key List"> + &Ctrl;.ViewExpand All"> + &Ctrl;,ViewCollapse All"> - &Shift;F5CertificatesValidate"> - CertificatesRefresh CRLs"> - DeleteCertificatesDelete"> - CertificatesDownload"> + &Shift;F5CertificatesValidate"> + CertificatesRefresh CRLs"> + DeleteCertificatesDelete"> + CertificatesDownload"> - CRLsClear CRL Cache..."> - CRLsDump CRL Cache..."> + CRLsClear CRL Cache..."> + CRLsDump CRL Cache..."> - ToolsGnuPG Log Viewer..."> + ToolsGnuPG Log Viewer..."> - SettingsShow Statusbar"> - SettingsConfigure Shortcuts..."> - SettingsConfigure &kleopatra;..."> - SettingsConfigure GpgME Backend..."> + SettingsShow Statusbar"> + SettingsConfigure Shortcuts..."> + SettingsConfigure &kleopatra;..."> + SettingsConfigure GpgME Backend..."> - --external"> - --query"> - --import-certificate"> + --external"> + --query"> + --import-certificate"> ]> -The &kleopatra; Handbook +The &kleopatra; Handbook -Marc Mutz
marc@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se
+Marc Mutz
marc@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se
 -David Faure Developer +David Faure Developer -Steffen Hansen
steffen@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se
+Steffen Hansen
steffen@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se
 -Developer +Developer -Matthias Kalle Dalheimer Developer +Matthias Kalle Dalheimer Developer -Jesper Pedersen
blackie@kde.org
+Jesper Pedersen
blackie@kde.org
 -Developer +Developer -Daniel Molkentin
molkentin@kde.org
+Daniel Molkentin
molkentin@kde.org
 -Developer +Developer -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -&GPLNotice; +&GPLNotice; -2004-06-11 -0.31 +2004-06-11 +0.31 -&kleopatra; is a tool for managing X.509 certificates. +&kleopatra; is a tool for managing X.509 certificates. -KDE -Kapp -X509 -LDAP -gpg -gpgsm +KDE +Kapp +X509 +LDAP +gpg +gpgsm - Introduction - -&kleopatra; is the &kde; tool for managing X.509 certificates in the &gpgsm; keybox and for retrieving certificates from LDAP servers. - -&kleopatra; can be started from KMail's Tools menu, as well as from the command line. The &kleopatra; executable is named kleopatra. - -This program is named after Cleopatra, a famous female Egyptian pharaoh that lived at the time of Julius Caesar, whom she is said to have had an intimate relationship with. - -The name was chosen since this program originates from the Ägypten Projects (Ägypten is German for Egypt). Kleopatra is the German spelling of Cleopatra. + Introduction + +&kleopatra; is the &kde; tool for managing X.509 certificates in the &gpgsm; keybox and for retrieving certificates from LDAP servers. + +&kleopatra; can be started from KMail's Tools menu, as well as from the command line. The &kleopatra; executable is named kleopatra. + +This program is named after Cleopatra, a famous female Egyptian pharaoh that lived at the time of Julius Caesar, whom she is said to have had an intimate relationship with. + +The name was chosen since this program originates from the Ägypten Projects (Ägypten is German for Egypt). Kleopatra is the German spelling of Cleopatra. -Main Functions +Main Functions -Viewing the Local Keybox +Viewing the Local Keybox -&kleopatra;'s main function is to display and edit the contents of the local keybox, which is similar to &gpg;'s concept of keyrings, albeit one should not stretch this analogy too much. - -The main window is divided into the large key listing area, the menubar and the search bar on top, and a statusbar at the bottom. - -Each line in the key list corresponds to one certificate, identified by the so-called Subject &dn;. &dn; is an acronym for Distinguished Name, a hierarchical identifier, much like a filesystem path with an unusual syntax, that is supposed to globally uniquely identify a given certificate. - -To be valid, and thus usable, (public) keys need to be signed by a &ca; (Certification Authority). These signatures are called certificates, but usually the terms certificate and (public) key are used interchangeably, and we will not distinguish between them in this manual either, except when explicitly noted. The name of the &ca; which issued the certificate (its &dn;) is shown in the Issuer DN column. - -&ca;s must in turn be signed by other &ca;s to be valid. Of course, this must end somewhere, so the top-level &ca; (root-&ca;) signs its key with itself (this is called a self-signature). Root certificates thus need to be assigned validity (commonly called trust) manually, ⪚ after comparing the fingerprint with the one on the website of the &ca;. This is typically done by the system administrator or the vendor of a product using certificates, but can be done by the user via &gpgsm;'s command line interface. - -To see which of the certificates are root certificates, you can either compare Subject &dn; and Issuer &dn;, or you switch to hierarchical keylist mode with . - -You can see the details of any certificate by double-clicking it or using . This opens a dialog that shows the most common properties of the certificate, its certificate chain (&ie; the chain of issuers up to the root-&ca;), and a dump of all information the backend is able to extract from the certificate. - -If you change the keybox without using &kleopatra; (⪚ using &gpgsm;'s command line interface), you can refresh the view with . - -Since validating a key may take some time (⪚ CRLs might need to be fetched), the normal keylisting does not attempt to check the validity of keys. For this, , a special variant of , is provided. It either checks the selected certificates, or all keys if none are selected. +&kleopatra;'s main function is to display and edit the contents of the local keybox, which is similar to &gpg;'s concept of keyrings, albeit one should not stretch this analogy too much. + +The main window is divided into the large key listing area, the menubar and the search bar on top, and a statusbar at the bottom. + +Each line in the key list corresponds to one certificate, identified by the so-called Subject &dn;. &dn; is an acronym for Distinguished Name, a hierarchical identifier, much like a filesystem path with an unusual syntax, that is supposed to globally uniquely identify a given certificate. + +To be valid, and thus usable, (public) keys need to be signed by a &ca; (Certification Authority). These signatures are called certificates, but usually the terms certificate and (public) key are used interchangeably, and we will not distinguish between them in this manual either, except when explicitly noted. The name of the &ca; which issued the certificate (its &dn;) is shown in the Issuer DN column. + +&ca;s must in turn be signed by other &ca;s to be valid. Of course, this must end somewhere, so the top-level &ca; (root-&ca;) signs its key with itself (this is called a self-signature). Root certificates thus need to be assigned validity (commonly called trust) manually, ⪚ after comparing the fingerprint with the one on the website of the &ca;. This is typically done by the system administrator or the vendor of a product using certificates, but can be done by the user via &gpgsm;'s command line interface. + +To see which of the certificates are root certificates, you can either compare Subject &dn; and Issuer &dn;, or you switch to hierarchical keylist mode with . + +You can see the details of any certificate by double-clicking it or using . This opens a dialog that shows the most common properties of the certificate, its certificate chain (&ie; the chain of issuers up to the root-&ca;), and a dump of all information the backend is able to extract from the certificate. + +If you change the keybox without using &kleopatra; (⪚ using &gpgsm;'s command line interface), you can refresh the view with . + +Since validating a key may take some time (⪚ CRLs might need to be fetched), the normal keylisting does not attempt to check the validity of keys. For this, , a special variant of , is provided. It either checks the selected certificates, or all keys if none are selected. -Searching and Importing Certificates - -Most of the time, you will acquire new certificates by verifying signatures in emails, since certificates are embedded in the signatures made using them most of the time. However, if you need to send a mail to someone you have not yet had contact with, you need to fetch the certificate from an LDAP directory (although &gpgsm; can do this automatically), or from a file. You also need to import your own certificate after receiving the &ca; answer to your certification request. - -To search for a certificate in an LDAP directory, switch the dropdown menu of the search bar from in Local Certificates to in External Certificates, enter some text (⪚ the name of the person you want the certificate for) into the line edit, and click on the Find icon. The results will be displayed in the key list below the search bar, where you can select certificates to either look at them with or download them with into the local keybox. Note that you can also download the certificate from the details dialogue, using the Import to Local button. - -You can configure the list of LDAP servers to search in the Directory Services page of &kleopatra;'s configure dialogue. - -If you received the certificate as a file, try . &gpgsm; needs to understand the format of the certificate file; please refer to &gpgsm;'s manual for a list of supported file formats. - -If you did not create your keypair with &gpgsm;, you also need to manually import the public key (as well as the secret key) from the PKCS#12 file you got from the &ca;. You can do this on the command line with kleopatra &commandline-option-import-certificate; filename or from within &kleopatra; with , just as you would to for normal certificates. +Searching and Importing Certificates + +Most of the time, you will acquire new certificates by verifying signatures in emails, since certificates are embedded in the signatures made using them most of the time. However, if you need to send a mail to someone you have not yet had contact with, you need to fetch the certificate from an LDAP directory (although &gpgsm; can do this automatically), or from a file. You also need to import your own certificate after receiving the &ca; answer to your certification request. + +To search for a certificate in an LDAP directory, switch the dropdown menu of the search bar from in Local Certificates to in External Certificates, enter some text (⪚ the name of the person you want the certificate for) into the line edit, and click on the Find icon. The results will be displayed in the key list below the search bar, where you can select certificates to either look at them with or download them with into the local keybox. Note that you can also download the certificate from the details dialogue, using the Import to Local button. + +You can configure the list of LDAP servers to search in the Directory Services page of &kleopatra;'s configure dialogue. + +If you received the certificate as a file, try . &gpgsm; needs to understand the format of the certificate file; please refer to &gpgsm;'s manual for a list of supported file formats. + +If you did not create your keypair with &gpgsm;, you also need to manually import the public key (as well as the secret key) from the PKCS#12 file you got from the &ca;. You can do this on the command line with kleopatra &commandline-option-import-certificate; filename or from within &kleopatra; with , just as you would to for normal certificates. -Creating New Key Pairs - -The menu item starts the certificate-request-creating wizard which will guide you through a number of steps to create a certificate request; this request can, on the last page of the wizard, either be sent to a certificate authority (CA) to be signed or saved to a file (for example to a floppy, so it can be shipped to the CA). Whenever you are done with a step in the wizard, press Next to go to the next step (or Back to review steps that are already completed). The certificate request creation can be cancelled at any time by pressing the Cancel button. -The first step in the wizard is to type in your personal data for the certificate. The fields to fill out are: +Creating New Key Pairs + +The menu item starts the certificate-request-creating wizard which will guide you through a number of steps to create a certificate request; this request can, on the last page of the wizard, either be sent to a certificate authority (CA) to be signed or saved to a file (for example to a floppy, so it can be shipped to the CA). Whenever you are done with a step in the wizard, press Next to go to the next step (or Back to review steps that are already completed). The certificate request creation can be cancelled at any time by pressing the Cancel button. +The first step in the wizard is to type in your personal data for the certificate. The fields to fill out are: -Name: Your name; +Name: Your name; -Location:The town or city in which you live; +Location:The town or city in which you live; -Organisation:The organisation you represent (for example, the company you work for); +Organisation:The organisation you represent (for example, the company you work for); -Department:The organisational unit you are in (for example, "Logistics"); +Department:The organisational unit you are in (for example, "Logistics"); -Country code:The two letter code for the country in which you are living (for example, "UK"); +Country code:The two letter code for the country in which you are living (for example, "UK"); -Email address:Your email address; be sure to type this in correctly—this will be the address people will be sending mail to when they use your certificate. +Email address:Your email address; be sure to type this in correctly—this will be the address people will be sending mail to when they use your certificate. -The next step in the wizard is to select whether to store the certificate in a file or send it directly to a CA. You will have to specify the filename or email address to send the certificate request to. +The next step in the wizard is to select whether to store the certificate in a file or send it directly to a CA. You will have to specify the filename or email address to send the certificate request to. -Keybox Management +Keybox Management -In addition to list and validate, search and import certificates and creating new ones, &kleopatra; also has some less often used functions that help you manage your local keybox. +In addition to list and validate, search and import certificates and creating new ones, &kleopatra; also has some less often used functions that help you manage your local keybox. -These functions include deleting certificates from the local keybox with , as well as manual handling of CRLs (, , ). +These functions include deleting certificates from the local keybox with , as well as manual handling of CRLs (, , ). -Menu Reference +Menu Reference -File Menu +File Menu -&file-new-key-pair; +&file-new-key-pair; -Creates a new key pair (public and private) and allows to send the public part to a certification authority (CA) for signing. The resulting certificate is then sent back to you, or stored in an LDAP server for you to download into your local keybox, where you can use it to sign and decrypt mails. - -This mode of operation is called decentralised key generation, since all keys are created locally. &kleopatra; (and &gpgsm;) do not support centralised key generation directly, but you can import the public/secret key bundle that you receive from the CA in PKCS#12 format via &file-import-certificates;. +Creates a new key pair (public and private) and allows to send the public part to a certification authority (CA) for signing. The resulting certificate is then sent back to you, or stored in an LDAP server for you to download into your local keybox, where you can use it to sign and decrypt mails. + +This mode of operation is called decentralised key generation, since all keys are created locally. &kleopatra; (and &gpgsm;) do not support centralised key generation directly, but you can import the public/secret key bundle that you receive from the CA in PKCS#12 format via &file-import-certificates;. -&file-export-certificates; +&file-export-certificates; -Exports the selected certificates into a file. - -This exports only the public keys, even if the secret key is available. Use &file-export-secret-key; to export both public and secret keys into a file, but note that this is almost always a bad idea. +Exports the selected certificates into a file. + +This exports only the public keys, even if the secret key is available. Use &file-export-secret-key; to export both public and secret keys into a file, but note that this is almost always a bad idea. -&file-export-secret-key; +&file-export-secret-key; -Exports both the public and the secret key to a (PKCS#12) file. - -It should rarely be necessary to use this function, and if it is, it should be carefully planned. Planning the migration of a secret key involves choice of transport media and secure deletion of the key data on the old machine, as well as the transport medium, among other things. +Exports both the public and the secret key to a (PKCS#12) file. + +It should rarely be necessary to use this function, and if it is, it should be carefully planned. Planning the migration of a secret key involves choice of transport media and secure deletion of the key data on the old machine, as well as the transport medium, among other things. -&file-import-certificates; +&file-import-certificates; -Imports certificates and/or secret keys from files into the local keybox. +Imports certificates and/or secret keys from files into the local keybox. -The format of the certificate file must be supported by &gpgsm;. Please refer to the &gpgsm; manual for a list of supported formats. +The format of the certificate file must be supported by &gpgsm;. Please refer to the &gpgsm; manual for a list of supported formats. -&file-import-crls; +&file-import-crls; -Lets you manually import CRLs from files. - -Normally, Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) are handled transparently by the backend, but it can sometimes be useful to import a CRL manually into the local CRL cache. - -For CRL import to work, the dirmngr tool must be in the search PATH. If this menu item is disabled, you should contact the system administrator and ask them to install dirmngr. - -You can view the contents of the local CRL cache from the menu item &crls-dump-crl-cache;. This will display a dialogue with information about the CRLs in the cache and the fingerprints of the certificates in each CRL. +Lets you manually import CRLs from files. + +Normally, Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) are handled transparently by the backend, but it can sometimes be useful to import a CRL manually into the local CRL cache. + +For CRL import to work, the dirmngr tool must be in the search PATH. If this menu item is disabled, you should contact the system administrator and ask them to install dirmngr. + +You can view the contents of the local CRL cache from the menu item &crls-dump-crl-cache;. This will display a dialogue with information about the CRLs in the cache and the fingerprints of the certificates in each CRL. -&file-quit; +&file-quit; -Terminates &kleopatra;. +Terminates &kleopatra;. - + -View Menu +View Menu -&view-redisplay; +&view-redisplay; -Redisplays the selected certificates or refreshes the certificate list. +Redisplays the selected certificates or refreshes the certificate list. -If there are selected certificates, the refresh operation is restricted to those selected entries. +If there are selected certificates, the refresh operation is restricted to those selected entries. -If a query result (either remote or local) is currently displayed, the query is re-issued and the new results are displayed in place of the old ones. +If a query result (either remote or local) is currently displayed, the query is re-issued and the new results are displayed in place of the old ones. -If no query has been performed, the whole keybox contents is re-fetched and re-displayed. +If no query has been performed, the whole keybox contents is re-fetched and re-displayed. -You can use this if you have changed the contents of the keybox by other means than &kleopatra; (⪚ by using &gpgsm;'s command line interface). +You can use this if you have changed the contents of the keybox by other means than &kleopatra; (⪚ by using &gpgsm;'s command line interface). -&view-stop-operation; +&view-stop-operation; -Stops (cancels) all pending operations, ⪚ a search or a download. - -Depending on the server used, cancelling a remote search can block &kleopatra; for a few seconds while waiting for the backend to complete the procedure. This is normal and expected behaviour. +Stops (cancels) all pending operations, ⪚ a search or a download. + +Depending on the server used, cancelling a remote search can block &kleopatra; for a few seconds while waiting for the backend to complete the procedure. This is normal and expected behaviour. -&view-certificate-details; +&view-certificate-details; -Shows the details of the currently selected certificate. +Shows the details of the currently selected certificate. -This function is also available by double-clicking the corresponding item in the list view directly. +This function is also available by double-clicking the corresponding item in the list view directly. @@ -800,64 +321,43 @@ -&view-hierarchical-key-list; +&view-hierarchical-key-list; -Toggles between hierarchical and flat keylist mode. - -In hierarchical mode, certificates are arranged in issuer/subject relation, so it is easy to see to which certification hierarchy a given certificate belongs, but a given certificate is harder to find initially (though you can of course use the search bar). - -In flat mode, all certificates are displayed in a flat list, sorted alphabetically. In this mode, a given certificate is easy to find, but it is not directly clear which root certificate it belongs to. +Toggles between hierarchical and flat keylist mode. + +In hierarchical mode, certificates are arranged in issuer/subject relation, so it is easy to see to which certification hierarchy a given certificate belongs, but a given certificate is harder to find initially (though you can of course use the search bar). + +In flat mode, all certificates are displayed in a flat list, sorted alphabetically. In this mode, a given certificate is easy to find, but it is not directly clear which root certificate it belongs to. -&view-expand-all; +&view-expand-all; -(This function is only available when is on.) +(This function is only available when is on.) -Expands all list items in the certificate list view, &ie; makes all items visible. +Expands all list items in the certificate list view, &ie; makes all items visible. -This is the default when entering hierarchical keylist mode. +This is the default when entering hierarchical keylist mode. -You can still expand and collapse each individual item by itself, of course. +You can still expand and collapse each individual item by itself, of course. -&view-collapse-all; +&view-collapse-all; -(This function is only available when is on.) +(This function is only available when is on.) -Collapses all list items in the certificate list view, &ie; hides all but the top-level items. +Collapses all list items in the certificate list view, &ie; hides all but the top-level items. -You can still expand and collapse each individual item by itself, of course. +You can still expand and collapse each individual item by itself, of course. @@ -865,98 +365,59 @@ -Certificates Menu +Certificates Menu -&certificates-validate; +&certificates-validate; -Validates selected (or all) keys. - -This is similar to , but performs a validation of the (selected) keys. Validation here means that all relevant CRLs are fetched, and the certificate chain is checked for correctness. As a result, invalid or expired keys will be marked according to your colour and font preferences set in the Appearance page of &kleopatra;'s configure dialogue. - -You can only rely on information from validated keys, and, since any of them may be revoked at any time, even validation is only ever a snapshot of the current state of the local keyring. This is why the backend normally performs such checks whenever the keys are used (⪚ for signing, signature verification, encryption or decryption). +Validates selected (or all) keys. + +This is similar to , but performs a validation of the (selected) keys. Validation here means that all relevant CRLs are fetched, and the certificate chain is checked for correctness. As a result, invalid or expired keys will be marked according to your colour and font preferences set in the Appearance page of &kleopatra;'s configure dialogue. + +You can only rely on information from validated keys, and, since any of them may be revoked at any time, even validation is only ever a snapshot of the current state of the local keyring. This is why the backend normally performs such checks whenever the keys are used (⪚ for signing, signature verification, encryption or decryption). -&certificates-refresh-crls; +&certificates-refresh-crls; -Fetches the current CRLs for all selected keys, even though they would normally not be fetched when using the key. - -This function only has an effect on certificates which define a CRL distribution point. Depending on the backend used, certificates configured to perform checks using OCSP will not be updated. - -You may use this ⪚ if you have sideband knowledge that a key has been revoked, and you want the backend to reflect this now instead of relying on this to automatically happen at the next scheduled CRL update. - -Excessive use of this function might put a high load on your provider's or company's network, since CRLs of large organisations can be surprisingly big (several megabytes are not uncommon). - -Use this function scarcely. +Fetches the current CRLs for all selected keys, even though they would normally not be fetched when using the key. + +This function only has an effect on certificates which define a CRL distribution point. Depending on the backend used, certificates configured to perform checks using OCSP will not be updated. + +You may use this ⪚ if you have sideband knowledge that a key has been revoked, and you want the backend to reflect this now instead of relying on this to automatically happen at the next scheduled CRL update. + +Excessive use of this function might put a high load on your provider's or company's network, since CRLs of large organisations can be surprisingly big (several megabytes are not uncommon). + +Use this function scarcely. -&certificates-delete; +&certificates-delete; -Deletes selected certificate(s) from the local keyring. - -Use this function to remove unused keys from your local keybox. However, since certificates are typically attached to signed emails, verifying an email might result in the key just removed to pop back into the local keybox. So it is probably best to avoid using this function as much as possible. When you are lost, use the search bar or the function to regain control over the lot of certificates. +Deletes selected certificate(s) from the local keyring. + +Use this function to remove unused keys from your local keybox. However, since certificates are typically attached to signed emails, verifying an email might result in the key just removed to pop back into the local keybox. So it is probably best to avoid using this function as much as possible. When you are lost, use the search bar or the function to regain control over the lot of certificates. -&certificates-download; +&certificates-download; -Downloads the selected certificate(s) from the LDAP to the local keybox. +Downloads the selected certificate(s) from the LDAP to the local keybox. @@ -966,36 +427,25 @@ -CRLs Menu +CRLs Menu -&crls-clear-crl-cache; +&crls-clear-crl-cache; -Clears the &gpgsm; CRL cache. +Clears the &gpgsm; CRL cache. -You probably never need this. You can force a refresh of the CRL cache by selecting all certificates and using instead. +You probably never need this. You can force a refresh of the CRL cache by selecting all certificates and using instead. -&crls-dump-crl-cache; +&crls-dump-crl-cache; -Shows the detailed contents of the &gpgsm; CRL cache. +Shows the detailed contents of the &gpgsm; CRL cache. @@ -1003,23 +453,15 @@ -Tools Menu +Tools Menu -&tools-gnupg-log-viewer; +&tools-gnupg-log-viewer; -Starts &kwatchgnupg; +Starts &kwatchgnupg; @@ -1027,63 +469,43 @@ -Settings Menu +Settings Menu -&settings-show-statusbar; +&settings-show-statusbar; -Toggles the visibility of the bottom status bar. +Toggles the visibility of the bottom status bar. -&settings-configure-shortcuts; +&settings-configure-shortcuts; -Opens the standard &kde; shortcut configuration dialogue, where you can assign and re-assign keyboard shortcuts for all menu items. +Opens the standard &kde; shortcut configuration dialogue, where you can assign and re-assign keyboard shortcuts for all menu items. -&settings-configure-kleopatra; +&settings-configure-kleopatra; -Opens &kleopatra;'s configure dialogue. +Opens &kleopatra;'s configure dialogue. -See for more details. +See for more details. -&settings-configure-gpgme-backend; +&settings-configure-gpgme-backend; -Opens a dialogue that allows you to configure every aspect of &gpgsm; and other backend modules. +Opens a dialogue that allows you to configure every aspect of &gpgsm; and other backend modules. -This dialogue is dynamically built from the output of the &gpgconf; utility and may thus change when backend modules are updated. +This dialogue is dynamically built from the output of the &gpgconf; utility and may thus change when backend modules are updated. @@ -1091,70 +513,43 @@ -Help Menu +Help Menu -The Help menu contains the standard &kde; help menu. +The Help menu contains the standard &kde; help menu. &help.menu.documentation; -Command Line Options Reference +Command Line Options Reference -Only the options specific to &kleopatra; are listed here. As with all &kde; applications, you can get a complete list of options by issuing the command kleopatra . +Only the options specific to &kleopatra; are listed here. As with all &kde; applications, you can get a complete list of options by issuing the command kleopatra . -&commandline-option-external; +&commandline-option-external; -Specifies that &commandline-option-query; shall search remotely instead of in the local keybox. +Specifies that &commandline-option-query; shall search remotely instead of in the local keybox. -&commandline-option-query; +&commandline-option-query; -Specifies that &kleopatra; shall start with the given query string instead of listing the complete local keybox. +Specifies that &kleopatra; shall start with the given query string instead of listing the complete local keybox. -&commandline-option-import-certificate; +&commandline-option-import-certificate; -Specifies a file or URL from which to import certificates (or secret keys) from. +Specifies a file or URL from which to import certificates (or secret keys) from. -This is the command line equivalent of . +This is the command line equivalent of . @@ -1162,304 +557,111 @@ -Configuring &kleopatra; - -&kleopatra;'s configure dialogue can be accessed via . - -Each of its pages is described in the sections below. - -Configuring Directory Services - -On this page, you can configure which LDAP servers to use for certificate searches. You can also configure their order, as well as some selected LDAP-related settings from the dynamic backend configuration dialogue, available via . - -To add a new server, click on the Add Service... button. In the dialogue that appears, you can set the Server name, the Port (preset to the default LDAP port), the Base DN (sometimes referred to as the search root or search base), and the usual User name and Password, both of which are only needed if the server requires authentication. Clicking OK adds the server details to the list of servers, while Cancel dismisses the input. - -To remove a server from the search list, select it in the list, then press the Remove Service button. - -To change the relative search order of servers, select one of them and move it up or down with the arrow buttons right next to the list. - -To set the LDAP timeout, &ie; the maximum time the backend will wait for a server to respond, simply use the corresponding input field labelled LDAP timeout. - -If one of your servers has a large database, so that even reasonable searches like Smith hit the maximum number of items returned by query, you might want to increase this limit. You can find out easily if you hit the limit during a search, since a dialogue box will pop up in that case, telling you that the results have been truncated. - -Some servers may impose their own limits on the number of items returned from a query. In this case, increasing the limit here will not result in more returned items. +Configuring &kleopatra; + +&kleopatra;'s configure dialogue can be accessed via . + +Each of its pages is described in the sections below. + +Configuring Directory Services + +On this page, you can configure which LDAP servers to use for certificate searches. You can also configure their order, as well as some selected LDAP-related settings from the dynamic backend configuration dialogue, available via . + +To add a new server, click on the Add Service... button. In the dialogue that appears, you can set the Server name, the Port (preset to the default LDAP port), the Base DN (sometimes referred to as the search root or search base), and the usual User name and Password, both of which are only needed if the server requires authentication. Clicking OK adds the server details to the list of servers, while Cancel dismisses the input. + +To remove a server from the search list, select it in the list, then press the Remove Service button. + +To change the relative search order of servers, select one of them and move it up or down with the arrow buttons right next to the list. + +To set the LDAP timeout, &ie; the maximum time the backend will wait for a server to respond, simply use the corresponding input field labelled LDAP timeout. + +If one of your servers has a large database, so that even reasonable searches like Smith hit the maximum number of items returned by query, you might want to increase this limit. You can find out easily if you hit the limit during a search, since a dialogue box will pop up in that case, telling you that the results have been truncated. + +Some servers may impose their own limits on the number of items returned from a query. In this case, increasing the limit here will not result in more returned items. -Configuring Visual Appearance +Configuring Visual Appearance -&kleopatra; allows you to customise the appearance of (validated) keys in the list view. This includes the foreground (text) and background colours, as well as the font. +&kleopatra; allows you to customise the appearance of (validated) keys in the list view. This includes the foreground (text) and background colours, as well as the font. -Each Key Category on the left is assigned a set of colours and a font in which keys belonging to that category are displayed. The category list also acts as a preview of the settings. Categories can be freely defined by the administrator or the power user, see in . +Each Key Category on the left is assigned a set of colours and a font in which keys belonging to that category are displayed. The category list also acts as a preview of the settings. Categories can be freely defined by the administrator or the power user, see in . -To change the text (foreground) colour of a category, select it in the list, and press the Set Text Colour... button. The standard &kde; colour selection dialogue will appear where you can select or create a new colour. +To change the text (foreground) colour of a category, select it in the list, and press the Set Text Colour... button. The standard &kde; colour selection dialogue will appear where you can select or create a new colour. -Changing the background colour is done in the same way, just press Set Background Colour... instead. +Changing the background colour is done in the same way, just press Set Background Colour... instead. -To change the font, you basically have two options: +To change the font, you basically have two options: -Modify the standard font, used for all list views in &kde; -Use a custom font. +Modify the standard font, used for all list views in &kde; +Use a custom font. -The first option has the advantage that the font will follow whichever style you choose &kde;-wide, whereas the latter gives you full control over the font to use. The choice is yours. +The first option has the advantage that the font will follow whichever style you choose &kde;-wide, whereas the latter gives you full control over the font to use. The choice is yours. -To use the modified standard font, select the category in the list, and tick or un-tick the font modifiers Italic, Bold, and/or Strikeout. You can immediately see the effect on the font in the category list. +To use the modified standard font, select the category in the list, and tick or un-tick the font modifiers Italic, Bold, and/or Strikeout. You can immediately see the effect on the font in the category list. -To use a custom font, press the Set Font... button. The standard &kde; font selection dialogue will appear where you can select the new font. Note that you can still use the font modifiers to change the custom font, just as for modifying the standard font. +To use a custom font, press the Set Font... button. The standard &kde; font selection dialogue will appear where you can select the new font. Note that you can still use the font modifiers to change the custom font, just as for modifying the standard font. -To switch back to the standard font, you need to press the Default Appearance button. +To switch back to the standard font, you need to press the Default Appearance button. -Configuring the Order DN Attributes are Shown - -Although &dn;s are hierarchical, the order of the individual components (called relative &dn;s (RDNs), or &dn; attributes) is not defined. The order in which the attributes are shown is thus a matter of personal taste or company policy, which is why it is configurable in &kleopatra;. - -This setting does not only apply to &kleopatra;, but to all applications using &kleopatra; Technology. At the time of this writing, these include KMail, KAddressBook, as well as &kleopatra; itself, of course. - -This configuration page basically consists of two lists, one for the known attributes (Available attributes), and one describing the Current attribute order. - -Both lists contain entries described by the short from of the attribute (⪚ CN) as well as the spelled-out form (Common Name). - -The Available attributes list is always sorted alphabetically, while the Current attribute order list's order reflects the configured &dn; attribute order: the first attribute in the list is also the one displayed first. - -Only attributes explicitly listed in the Current attribute order list are displayed at all. The rest is hidden by default. - -However, if the placeholder entry _X_ (All others) is in the current list, all unlisted attributes (whether known or not), are inserted at the point of _X_, in their original relative order. - -A small example will help to make this more clear: +Configuring the Order DN Attributes are Shown + +Although &dn;s are hierarchical, the order of the individual components (called relative &dn;s (RDNs), or &dn; attributes) is not defined. The order in which the attributes are shown is thus a matter of personal taste or company policy, which is why it is configurable in &kleopatra;. + +This setting does not only apply to &kleopatra;, but to all applications using &kleopatra; Technology. At the time of this writing, these include KMail, KAddressBook, as well as &kleopatra; itself, of course. + +This configuration page basically consists of two lists, one for the known attributes (Available attributes), and one describing the Current attribute order. + +Both lists contain entries described by the short from of the attribute (⪚ CN) as well as the spelled-out form (Common Name). + +The Available attributes list is always sorted alphabetically, while the Current attribute order list's order reflects the configured &dn; attribute order: the first attribute in the list is also the one displayed first. + +Only attributes explicitly listed in the Current attribute order list are displayed at all. The rest is hidden by default. + +However, if the placeholder entry _X_ (All others) is in the current list, all unlisted attributes (whether known or not), are inserted at the point of _X_, in their original relative order. + +A small example will help to make this more clear: -Given the &dn; -
O=KDE, C=US, CN=Dave Devel, X-BAR=foo, OU=Kleopatra, X-FOO=bar,
the default attribute order of CN, L, _X_, OU, O, C will produce the following formatted &dn;:
CN=Dave Devel, X-BAR=foo, X-FOO=bar, OU=Kleopatra, O=KDE, C=US
while CN, L, OU, O, C will produce
CN=Dave Devel, OU=Kleopatra, O=KDE, C=US
- -To add an attribute to the display order list, select it in the Available attributes list, and press the Add to current attribute order button. - -To remove an attribute from the display order list, select it in the Current attribute order list, and press the Remove from current attribute order button. - -To move an attribute to the beginning (end), select it in the Current attribute order list, and press the Move to top (Move to bottom) button. - -To move an attribute up (down) one slot only, select it in the Current attribute order list, and press the Move one up (Move one down) button. +Given the &dn; +
O=KDE, C=US, CN=Dave Devel, X-BAR=foo, OU=Kleopatra, X-FOO=bar,
the default attribute order of CN, L, _X_, OU, O, C will produce the following formatted &dn;:
CN=Dave Devel, X-BAR=foo, X-FOO=bar, OU=Kleopatra, O=KDE, C=US
while CN, L, OU, O, C will produce
CN=Dave Devel, OU=Kleopatra, O=KDE, C=US
+ +To add an attribute to the display order list, select it in the Available attributes list, and press the Add to current attribute order button. + +To remove an attribute from the display order list, select it in the Current attribute order list, and press the Remove from current attribute order button. + +To move an attribute to the beginning (end), select it in the Current attribute order list, and press the Move to top (Move to bottom) button. + +To move an attribute up (down) one slot only, select it in the Current attribute order list, and press the Move one up (Move one down) button. -Administrator's Guide - -This Administrator's Guide describes ways to customise &kleopatra; that are not accessible via the GUI, but only via config files. - -It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the technology used for &kde; application configuration, including layout, filesystem location and cascading of &kde; config files, as well as the KIOSK framework. - -Customisation of the Certificate-Creation Wizard - -&kleopatra; allows you to customise the fields that the user is allowed to enter in order to create their certificate. - -Create a group called CertificateCreationWizard in the system-wide kleopatrarc. If you want a custom order of attributes or if you only want certain items to appear, create a key called DNAttributeOrder. The argument is one or more of CN,SN,GN,L,T,OU,O,PC,C,SP,DC,BC,EMAIL If you want to initialise fields with a certain value, write something like Attribute=value. If you want the attribute to be treated as a required one, append an exclamation mark (e.g. CN!,L,OU,O!,C!,EMAIL!, which happens to be the default configuration). - -Using the KIOSK mode modifier $e allows to retrieve the values from environment variables or from an evaluated script or binary. If you want to disallow editing of the respective field in addition, use the modifier $i. If you want to disallow the use Insert My Address button, set ShowSetWhoAmI to false. - -Due to the nature of the &kde; KIOSK framework, using the immutable flag ($i) makes it impossible for the user to override the flag. This is intended behaviour. $i and $e can be used with all other config keys in &kde; applications as well. - -The following example outlines possible customisations: +Administrator's Guide + +This Administrator's Guide describes ways to customise &kleopatra; that are not accessible via the GUI, but only via config files. + +It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the technology used for &kde; application configuration, including layout, filesystem location and cascading of &kde; config files, as well as the KIOSK framework. + +Customisation of the Certificate-Creation Wizard + +&kleopatra; allows you to customise the fields that the user is allowed to enter in order to create their certificate. + +Create a group called CertificateCreationWizard in the system-wide kleopatrarc. If you want a custom order of attributes or if you only want certain items to appear, create a key called DNAttributeOrder. The argument is one or more of CN,SN,GN,L,T,OU,O,PC,C,SP,DC,BC,EMAIL If you want to initialise fields with a certain value, write something like Attribute=value. If you want the attribute to be treated as a required one, append an exclamation mark (e.g. CN!,L,OU,O!,C!,EMAIL!, which happens to be the default configuration). + +Using the KIOSK mode modifier $e allows to retrieve the values from environment variables or from an evaluated script or binary. If you want to disallow editing of the respective field in addition, use the modifier $i. If you want to disallow the use Insert My Address button, set ShowSetWhoAmI to false. + +Due to the nature of the &kde; KIOSK framework, using the immutable flag ($i) makes it impossible for the user to override the flag. This is intended behaviour. $i and $e can be used with all other config keys in &kde; applications as well. + +The following example outlines possible customisations: -[CertificateCreationWizard] +[CertificateCreationWizard] ;Disallow to copy personal data from the addressbook, do not allow local override ShowSetWhoAmI[$i]=false @@ -1481,394 +683,175 @@ C=DE - Creating and Editing Key Categories - - &kleopatra; allows the user to configure the visual appearance of keys based on a concept called Key Categories. This section describes how you can edit the available categories and add new ones. - - When trying to find the category a key belongs to, &kleopatra; tries to match the key to a sequence of key filters, configured in the libkleopatrarc. The first one to match defines the category. - - Each key filter is defined in a config group named Key Filter #n, where n is a number, starting from 0. - - The only mandatory key in a Key Filter #n group is Name, containing the name of the category as displayed in the config dialogue. - - lists all keys that define the display properties of keys belonging to that category (&ie; those keys that can be adjusted in the config dialogue), whereas lists all keys that define the criteria the filter matches keys against. + Creating and Editing Key Categories + + &kleopatra; allows the user to configure the visual appearance of keys based on a concept called Key Categories. This section describes how you can edit the available categories and add new ones. + + When trying to find the category a key belongs to, &kleopatra; tries to match the key to a sequence of key filters, configured in the libkleopatrarc. The first one to match defines the category. + + Each key filter is defined in a config group named Key Filter #n, where n is a number, starting from 0. + + The only mandatory key in a Key Filter #n group is Name, containing the name of the category as displayed in the config dialogue. + + lists all keys that define the display properties of keys belonging to that category (&ie; those keys that can be adjusted in the config dialogue), whereas lists all keys that define the criteria the filter matches keys against.
- Key-Filter Configuration Keys Defining Display Properties + Key-Filter Configuration Keys Defining Display Properties - Config Key - Type - Description + Config Key + Type + Description - background-color - color - The background colour to use. If missing, defaults to whichever background colour is defined globally for list views. + background-color + color + The background colour to use. If missing, defaults to whichever background colour is defined globally for list views. - foreground-color - color - The foreground colour to use. If missing, defaults to whichever foreground colour is defined globally for list views. + foreground-color + color + The foreground colour to use. If missing, defaults to whichever foreground colour is defined globally for list views. - font - font - The custom font to use. The font will be scaled to the size configured for list views, and any font attributes (see below) will be applied. + font + font + The custom font to use. The font will be scaled to the size configured for list views, and any font attributes (see below) will be applied. - font-bold - boolean - If set to true and font is not set, uses the default list view font with bold font style added (if available). Ignored if font is also present. + font-bold + boolean + If set to true and font is not set, uses the default list view font with bold font style added (if available). Ignored if font is also present. - font-italic - boolean - Analogous to font-bold, but for italic font style instead of bold. + font-italic + boolean + Analogous to font-bold, but for italic font style instead of bold. - font-strikeout - boolean - If true, draws a centred line over the font. Applied even if font is set. + font-strikeout + boolean + If true, draws a centred line over the font. Applied even if font is set. - icon - text - The name of an icon to show in the first column. Not yet implemented. + icon + text + The name of an icon to show in the first column. Not yet implemented.
- Key-Filter Configuration Keys Defining Filter Criteria + Key-Filter Configuration Keys Defining Filter Criteria - Config Key - Type - If specified, filter matches when... + Config Key + Type + If specified, filter matches when... - is-revoked - boolean - the key has been revoked. + is-revoked + boolean + the key has been revoked. - is-expired - boolean - the key is expired. + is-expired + boolean + the key is expired. - is-disabled - boolean - the key has been disabled (marked for not using) by the user. Ignored for S/MIME keys. + is-disabled + boolean + the key has been disabled (marked for not using) by the user. Ignored for S/MIME keys. - is-root-certificate - boolean - the key is a root certificate. Ignored for OpenPGP keys. + is-root-certificate + boolean + the key is a root certificate. Ignored for OpenPGP keys. - can-encrypt - boolean - the key can be used for encryption. + can-encrypt + boolean + the key can be used for encryption. - can-sign - boolean - the key can be used for signing. + can-sign + boolean + the key can be used for signing. - can-certify - boolean - the key can be used for signing (certifying) other keys. + can-certify + boolean + the key can be used for signing (certifying) other keys. - can-authenticate - boolean - the key can be used for authentication (⪚ as an TLS client certificate). + can-authenticate + boolean + the key can be used for authentication (⪚ as an TLS client certificate). - has-secret-key - boolean - the secret key for this key pair is available. + has-secret-key + boolean + the secret key for this key pair is available. - is-openpgp-key - boolean - the key is an OpenPGP key (true), or an S/MIME key (false). + is-openpgp-key + boolean + the key is an OpenPGP key (true), or an S/MIME key (false). - was-validated - boolean - the key has been validated (see ). + was-validated + boolean + the key has been validated (see ). - prefix-ownertrust - validity Validity is an (ordered) enumeration with the following allowed values: unknown, undefined, never, marginal, full, ultimate. See the &gpg; and &gpgsm; manuals for a detailed explanation. + prefix-ownertrust + validity Validity is an (ordered) enumeration with the following allowed values: unknown, undefined, never, marginal, full, ultimate. See the &gpg; and &gpgsm; manuals for a detailed explanation. - the key has exactly (prefix = is), has anything but (prefix = is-not), has at least (prefix = is-at-least), or has at most (prefix = is-at-most) the ownertrust given as the value of the config key. If more than one prefix-ownertrust keys (with different prefix values) are present in a single group, the behaviour is undefined. + the key has exactly (prefix = is), has anything but (prefix = is-not), has at least (prefix = is-at-least), or has at most (prefix = is-at-most) the ownertrust given as the value of the config key. If more than one prefix-ownertrust keys (with different prefix values) are present in a single group, the behaviour is undefined. - prefix-validity - validity - Analogous to prefix-ownertrust, but for key validity instead of ownertrust. + prefix-validity + validity + Analogous to prefix-ownertrust, but for key validity instead of ownertrust.
- Some of the more interesting criteria, such as is-revoked or is-expired will only work on validated keys, which is why, by default, only validated keys are checked for revocation and expiration, although you are free to remove these extra checks. + Some of the more interesting criteria, such as is-revoked or is-expired will only work on validated keys, which is why, by default, only validated keys are checked for revocation and expiration, although you are free to remove these extra checks. - In general, criteria not specified (&ie; the config entry is not set) are not checked for. If a criterion is given, it is checked for and must match for the filter as a whole to match, &ie; the criteria are AND'ed together. + In general, criteria not specified (&ie; the config entry is not set) are not checked for. If a criterion is given, it is checked for and must match for the filter as a whole to match, &ie; the criteria are AND'ed together. - Examples of key filters - To check for all expired, but non-revoked root certificates, you would use a key filter defined as follows: + Examples of key filters + To check for all expired, but non-revoked root certificates, you would use a key filter defined as follows: - [Key Filter #n] + [Key Filter #n] Name=expired, but not revoked was-validated=true is-expired=true is-revoked=false is-root-certificate=true - To check for all disabled OpenPGP keys (not yet supported by &kleopatra;) with ownertrust of at least marginal, you would use: - [Key Filter #n] + To check for all disabled OpenPGP keys (not yet supported by &kleopatra;) with ownertrust of at least marginal, you would use: + [Key Filter #n] Name=disabled OpenPGP keys with marginal or better ownertrust is-openpgp=true is-disabled=true @@ -1878,57 +861,34 @@ is-at-least-ownertrust=marginal + -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kleopatra; copyright 2002 Steffen Hansen, Matthias Kalle Dalheimer and Jesper Pedersen., copyright 2004 Daniel Molkentin, copyright 2004 Klarälvdalens Datakonsult AB +&kleopatra; copyright 2002 Steffen Hansen, Matthias Kalle Dalheimer and Jesper Pedersen., copyright 2004 Daniel Molkentin, copyright 2004 Klarälvdalens Datakonsult AB -Documentation copyright 2002 Steffen Hansen, copyright 2004 Daniel Molkentin, copyright 2004 Klarälvdalens Datakonsult AB +Documentation copyright 2002 Steffen Hansen, copyright 2004 Daniel Molkentin, copyright 2004 Klarälvdalens Datakonsult AB -Contributors +Contributors -Marc Mutz mutz@kde.org +Marc Mutz mutz@kde.org -David Faure faure@kde.org +David Faure faure@kde.org -Steffen Hansen hansen@kde.org +Steffen Hansen hansen@kde.org -Matthias Kalle Dalheimer kalle@kde.org +Matthias Kalle Dalheimer kalle@kde.org -Jesper Pedersen blackie@kde.org +Jesper Pedersen blackie@kde.org -Daniel Molkentin molkentin@kde.org +Daniel Molkentin molkentin@kde.org &underGPL; &underFDL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/configure.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/configure.docbook index eb9333ab2ea..920b5cbfbe2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/configure.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/configure.docbook @@ -2,261 +2,103 @@ -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net -
 +David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net +
 -Marc Mutz Klarälvdalens Datakonsult AB
mutz@kde.org
+Marc Mutz Klarälvdalens Datakonsult AB
mutz@kde.org
-Michel Boyer de la Giroday
michel@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se -
 +Michel Boyer de la Giroday
michel@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2004-07-13 1.7 +2004-07-13 1.7 -Configure &kmail; +Configure &kmail; -General Information +General Information -&kmail;'s configuration window enables you to configure &kmail; in many ways. You can reach it via SettingsConfigure &kmail;.... +&kmail;'s configuration window enables you to configure &kmail; in many ways. You can reach it via SettingsConfigure &kmail;.... -It is divided into six pages, each of them represented by one of the icons in the list on the left hand side of the dialogue. Below the pages will be described in detail. +It is divided into six pages, each of them represented by one of the icons in the list on the left hand side of the dialogue. Below the pages will be described in detail. -The dialogue has several buttons: +The dialogue has several buttons: -Help -This will open this manual at the appropriate page. +Help +This will open this manual at the appropriate page. -Defaults -This will reset the configuration options on the current page back to the default values. +Defaults +This will reset the configuration options on the current page back to the default values. -Load Profile... -This will open a dialogue which offers several configuration profiles. You can use these as starting points for your own configuration. +Load Profile... +This will open a dialogue which offers several configuration profiles. You can use these as starting points for your own configuration. -Reset -This resets all changes you have made since you last saved the settings. +Reset +This resets all changes you have made since you last saved the settings. -OK -This saves the settings and closes the configuration dialogue. +OK +This saves the settings and closes the configuration dialogue. -Apply -This saves the settings without closing the configuration dialogue. +Apply +This saves the settings without closing the configuration dialogue. -Cancel -This closes the configuration dialogue without saving the changes you have made. +Cancel +This closes the configuration dialogue without saving the changes you have made. -Identities Page - -You can find a quick introduction to the Identities page in the Getting Started section. - -This page allows you to create one or more Identities, &ie; combinations of name, email address and other settings. For example, you can create one identity for business communication and one for personal communication. If you have more than one email address, you can create one identity per address. You will then be able to select an identity on a per-message basis. - -The page consists of a list of identities and buttons to manage them. The identities list will always show at least one identity, which is then the Default identity. - -To add a new identity to the identity list, click on the New... button. The New identity dialogue will then appear. +Identities Page + +You can find a quick introduction to the Identities page in the Getting Started section. + +This page allows you to create one or more Identities, &ie; combinations of name, email address and other settings. For example, you can create one identity for business communication and one for personal communication. If you have more than one email address, you can create one identity per address. You will then be able to select an identity on a per-message basis. + +The page consists of a list of identities and buttons to manage them. The identities list will always show at least one identity, which is then the Default identity. + +To add a new identity to the identity list, click on the New... button. The New identity dialogue will then appear. -The <guilabel ->New Identity</guilabel -> Dialogue +The <guilabel>New Identity</guilabel> Dialogue -You have to enter the name of the new identity into the New Identity edit field. This will be the name shown in the identity list. +You have to enter the name of the new identity into the New Identity edit field. This will be the name shown in the identity list. -You can choose how the new identity should be initialised by checking one of the three radio buttons in the middle of the dialogue: +You can choose how the new identity should be initialised by checking one of the three radio buttons in the middle of the dialogue: -With empty fields +With empty fields -All fields of the new identity are cleared or preset with standard values. +All fields of the new identity are cleared or preset with standard values. -Use Control Centre settings +Use Control Centre settings -Uses the settings of the Control Centre's default email profile (you can edit that one under Internet & Network Email in the Control Centre). +Uses the settings of the Control Centre's default email profile (you can edit that one under Internet & Network Email in the Control Centre). -Duplicate existing identity +Duplicate existing identity -Copies all fields from an existing identity. You can choose which identity to copy from by selecting the corresponding entry in the Existing identities popup. +Copies all fields from an existing identity. You can choose which identity to copy from by selecting the corresponding entry in the Existing identities popup. @@ -265,167 +107,96 @@ -General +General -The General tab allows you to specify some basic settings for the currently selected identity. +The General tab allows you to specify some basic settings for the currently selected identity. -Your name +Your name -Enter your full name here (sometimes also called display name). Although this field is not strictly mandatory, it is recommended to enter the correct value here. +Enter your full name here (sometimes also called display name). Although this field is not strictly mandatory, it is recommended to enter the correct value here. -Organisation +Organisation -Enter your organisation here. This field is optional. +Enter your organisation here. This field is optional. -Email address +Email address -Enter your email address here, &ie; something like joe@example.com. +Enter your email address here, &ie; something like joe@example.com. -Example -So if your address is Joe User <joe@example.com>, you should enter Joe User into the Your name field and joe@example.com into the Email address field. +Example +So if your address is Joe User <joe@example.com>, you should enter Joe User into the Your name field and joe@example.com into the Email address field. - Cryptography + Cryptography - The Cryptography tab allows you to specify &openpgp; and &smime; keys associated with this identity, as well as choosing the preferred (cryptographic) message format to use. + The Cryptography tab allows you to specify &openpgp; and &smime; keys associated with this identity, as well as choosing the preferred (cryptographic) message format to use. - OpenPGP signing key + OpenPGP signing key - Here you can select the key to be used when &openpgp;-signing messages written with this identity in effect. - For brevity, only the short key id of selected keys is shown. Hovering with the mouse over the key list will show more information in a tooltip. - To clear the label press the Clear button. - To change the selected key, press the Change... button. A dialogue listing all secret &openpgp; keys will be shown allowing you to select the one to use. + Here you can select the key to be used when &openpgp;-signing messages written with this identity in effect. + For brevity, only the short key id of selected keys is shown. Hovering with the mouse over the key list will show more information in a tooltip. + To clear the label press the Clear button. + To change the selected key, press the Change... button. A dialogue listing all secret &openpgp; keys will be shown allowing you to select the one to use. - OpenPGP encryption key + OpenPGP encryption key - Here you can select the key to &openpgp;-encrypt messages to when this identity and are in effect. This key is also used for the function of the Composer. - To change the selected key, press the Change... button. A dialogue listing all &openpgp; keys found in your keyring will be shown allowing you to select the one to use. - You can clear the list of keys and get more information about them in the same way as described for . + Here you can select the key to &openpgp;-encrypt messages to when this identity and are in effect. This key is also used for the function of the Composer. + To change the selected key, press the Change... button. A dialogue listing all &openpgp; keys found in your keyring will be shown allowing you to select the one to use. + You can clear the list of keys and get more information about them in the same way as described for . - S/MIME signing certificate + S/MIME signing certificate - Here you can select the certificate to be used when &smime;-signing messages written with this identity in effect. - To change the selected certificate, press the Change... button. A dialogue listing all secret &smime; signing certificates will be shown allowing you to select the one to use. - You can clear the list of certificates and get more information about them in the same way as described for . + Here you can select the certificate to be used when &smime;-signing messages written with this identity in effect. + To change the selected certificate, press the Change... button. A dialogue listing all secret &smime; signing certificates will be shown allowing you to select the one to use. + You can clear the list of certificates and get more information about them in the same way as described for . - S/MIME encryption certificate + S/MIME encryption certificate - Here you can select the certificate to &smime;-encrypt messages to when this identity and are in effect. - To change the selected certificate, press the Change... button. A dialogue listing all &smime; encryption certificates found in your local keybox will be shown allowing you to select the one to use. - You can clear the list of certificates and get more information about them in the same way as described for . + Here you can select the certificate to &smime;-encrypt messages to when this identity and are in effect. + To change the selected certificate, press the Change... button. A dialogue listing all &smime; encryption certificates found in your local keybox will be shown allowing you to select the one to use. + You can clear the list of certificates and get more information about them in the same way as described for . - Preferred crypto message format + Preferred crypto message format - Here you can choose which cryptographic message format to use by default with this identity. - You can either select any of the four formats supported by &kmail; or leave the option at the recommended default setting of Any, which will choose a suitable format based on the recipients of the message, or might even go so far as to create two copies of the message, one &smime; signed and/or encrypted, the other &openpgp; signed and/or encrypted. + Here you can choose which cryptographic message format to use by default with this identity. + You can either select any of the four formats supported by &kmail; or leave the option at the recommended default setting of Any, which will choose a suitable format based on the recipients of the message, or might even go so far as to create two copies of the message, one &smime; signed and/or encrypted, the other &openpgp; signed and/or encrypted. @@ -434,118 +205,49 @@ -Advanced +Advanced -The Advanced tab allows you to specify some rarely used or otherwise specialised settings for the currently selected identity. +The Advanced tab allows you to specify some rarely used or otherwise specialised settings for the currently selected identity. -Reply-To address +Reply-To address -Enter the address to which replies to your messages should be sent. Only fill out this field if it is different from your normal address (specified using the Name and Email Address on the General tab), since replies default to the sender's address anyway. -This field is only useful if you want replies to your mail to go somewhere else than your regular email address, ⪚ if you are using this identity to send messages from an email address that cannot receive messages. Note that some mailing lists overwrite this header field with their post address to make sure that replies go to the list instead of individuals. So the usefulness of this field is very limited and it should only be used in rare cases. +Enter the address to which replies to your messages should be sent. Only fill out this field if it is different from your normal address (specified using the Name and Email Address on the General tab), since replies default to the sender's address anyway. +This field is only useful if you want replies to your mail to go somewhere else than your regular email address, ⪚ if you are using this identity to send messages from an email address that cannot receive messages. Note that some mailing lists overwrite this header field with their post address to make sure that replies go to the list instead of individuals. So the usefulness of this field is very limited and it should only be used in rare cases. -BCC address +BCC address -Optionally enter an address to which blind copies of your messages should be sent to. Note that a BCC is only send to this address, when ViewBCC is activated while composing a message. If you want to send a BCC regardless of this setting, you should look at the Headers tab of the Composer page. +Optionally enter an address to which blind copies of your messages should be sent to. Note that a BCC is only send to this address, when ViewBCC is activated while composing a message. If you want to send a BCC regardless of this setting, you should look at the Headers tab of the Composer page. -Sent-mail folder +Sent-mail folder -Select the folder into which messages should be filed after sending when using this identity. IMAP users should consider changing this to an IMAP folder, so their sent-mail is stored on a server instead of being stored in a local folder. This way they can access these messages at a different location. - -You can exercise more fine-grained control over where to file sent messages by creating a corresponding message filter that is applied to outgoing messages. +Select the folder into which messages should be filed after sending when using this identity. IMAP users should consider changing this to an IMAP folder, so their sent-mail is stored on a server instead of being stored in a local folder. This way they can access these messages at a different location. + +You can exercise more fine-grained control over where to file sent messages by creating a corresponding message filter that is applied to outgoing messages. -Drafts folder +Drafts folder -Select the folder into which drafts should be filed when using this identity. IMAP users should consider changing this to an IMAP folder, so their drafts are stored on a server instead of being stored in a local folder. This way they can easily continue to work on their drafts at a different location. +Select the folder into which drafts should be filed when using this identity. IMAP users should consider changing this to an IMAP folder, so their drafts are stored on a server instead of being stored in a local folder. This way they can easily continue to work on their drafts at a different location. -Special transport +Special transport -Select or enter an alternative SMTP server to be used when sending messages using this identity. - -You need to configure outgoing mail servers first, before you can choose them from the list. You can do this on the Sending tab of the Accounts page. +Select or enter an alternative SMTP server to be used when sending messages using this identity. + +You need to configure outgoing mail servers first, before you can choose them from the list. You can do this on the Sending tab of the Accounts page. @@ -553,74 +255,26 @@ -Signature - -This tab allows you to specify a signature (sometimes called footer or disclaimer) to be appended to each message sent using this identity. - -This type of signature has nothing to do with the (digital) signatures for which you can select the keys to use on the Cryptography tab. It is just bad wording to call this a signature, but since the term is already used everywhere else, we keep this notation. Just keep in mind that these signatures and digital signatures are two completely different things. - -Check the Enable signature option if you want to be able to append the signature when using this identity. To automatically append it to every new message you also have to select Automatically append signature in the Composer configuration page. - -&kmail; can obtain the signature text from various sources. The traditional way on Unix is to read the text from a file called .signature in your home folder. This file can be shared between several programs, so you get the same signature in each mail program you use. - -To read the text from a text file you select Obtain signature text from file. Enter the filename in the Specify file edit field or hit the button to the right of it to browse your filesystem. If you want to edit the file, hit the Edit File button. - -&kmail; can also read the signature text from the output of a command. Thus, you can use programs such as fortune to create a new signature text for every message. Everything the program prints onto stdout is caught and used as the signature text. - -To read the text from the output of a command you select Obtain signature text from Output of Command. Enter the command (preferably with full path) in the Specify command edit field. - -As a third option, you can enter the signature text directly in &kmail;'s configuration dialogue. To do this, select Obtain signature text from input field below and enter the text into the appearing text box. - -On the Internet, signatures are by convention separated from the body of the message by a line containing only the three character -- (dash, dash, space). &kmail; will automatically prepend the signature text with this line if it is not already present in the signature text. -If you do not wish the separator to be prepended automatically by &kmail;, simply add it to the signature text yourself. +Signature + +This tab allows you to specify a signature (sometimes called footer or disclaimer) to be appended to each message sent using this identity. + +This type of signature has nothing to do with the (digital) signatures for which you can select the keys to use on the Cryptography tab. It is just bad wording to call this a signature, but since the term is already used everywhere else, we keep this notation. Just keep in mind that these signatures and digital signatures are two completely different things. + +Check the Enable signature option if you want to be able to append the signature when using this identity. To automatically append it to every new message you also have to select Automatically append signature in the Composer configuration page. + +&kmail; can obtain the signature text from various sources. The traditional way on Unix is to read the text from a file called .signature in your home folder. This file can be shared between several programs, so you get the same signature in each mail program you use. + +To read the text from a text file you select Obtain signature text from file. Enter the filename in the Specify file edit field or hit the button to the right of it to browse your filesystem. If you want to edit the file, hit the Edit File button. + +&kmail; can also read the signature text from the output of a command. Thus, you can use programs such as fortune to create a new signature text for every message. Everything the program prints onto stdout is caught and used as the signature text. + +To read the text from the output of a command you select Obtain signature text from Output of Command. Enter the command (preferably with full path) in the Specify command edit field. + +As a third option, you can enter the signature text directly in &kmail;'s configuration dialogue. To do this, select Obtain signature text from input field below and enter the text into the appearing text box. + +On the Internet, signatures are by convention separated from the body of the message by a line containing only the three character -- (dash, dash, space). &kmail; will automatically prepend the signature text with this line if it is not already present in the signature text. +If you do not wish the separator to be prepended automatically by &kmail;, simply add it to the signature text yourself. @@ -628,357 +282,111 @@ -Accounts Page - -You can find a quick introduction to the Accounts page in the Setting up your Account section. - -This page allows you to create one or more (incoming and outgoing) accounts, &ie; combinations of mail servers, login information and other settings. Typically, you will create one outgoing (used for sending messages) and one incoming (used to retrieve messages) account. You can create as many accounts as you want, though, and assign each one to different identities or decide on a per-message basis. +Accounts Page + +You can find a quick introduction to the Accounts page in the Setting up your Account section. + +This page allows you to create one or more (incoming and outgoing) accounts, &ie; combinations of mail servers, login information and other settings. Typically, you will create one outgoing (used for sending messages) and one incoming (used to retrieve messages) account. You can create as many accounts as you want, though, and assign each one to different identities or decide on a per-message basis. -Sending - -The Sending tab allows you to define new outgoing mail servers and set some common options. - -For basic information, see Setting up your Account: Sending. - -When you click Add... or Modify... the Add transport or Modify transport dialogues will open respectively. For sending via sendmail or similar programs you can specify a name and the location of the sendmail program. For SMTP you can specify Name, Host and Port of the server. Server requires authentication will enable the Login and Password fields and the Authentication method buttons on the Security tab. If you are not sure about the security settings you can make &kmail; test for the best settings by using Check What the Server Supports. - -Confirm before send will pop up a confirmation box every time you send a message. - -Send messages in outbox folder lets you specify when queued messages, &ie; messages in the outbox folder pending to be sent, should be sent. You can choose between: +Sending + +The Sending tab allows you to define new outgoing mail servers and set some common options. + +For basic information, see Setting up your Account: Sending. + +When you click Add... or Modify... the Add transport or Modify transport dialogues will open respectively. For sending via sendmail or similar programs you can specify a name and the location of the sendmail program. For SMTP you can specify Name, Host and Port of the server. Server requires authentication will enable the Login and Password fields and the Authentication method buttons on the Security tab. If you are not sure about the security settings you can make &kmail; test for the best settings by using Check What the Server Supports. + +Confirm before send will pop up a confirmation box every time you send a message. + +Send messages in outbox folder lets you specify when queued messages, &ie; messages in the outbox folder pending to be sent, should be sent. You can choose between: -Never Automatically -Queued messages will only be sent if you select FileSend queued messages. +Never Automatically +Queued messages will only be sent if you select FileSend queued messages. -On Manual Mail Checks -Queued messages will be sent after you have manually checked for new mail, ⪚ with FileCheck Mail. Of course, you can also manually send the queued messages with FileSend queued messages. +On Manual Mail Checks +Queued messages will be sent after you have manually checked for new mail, ⪚ with FileCheck Mail. Of course, you can also manually send the queued messages with FileSend queued messages. -On All Mail Checks -Queued messages will be sent after all checks for new mail, &ie; after automatic mail checks as well as after manual mail checks. Of course, you can also manually send the queued messages with FileSend queued messages. +On All Mail Checks +Queued messages will be sent after all checks for new mail, &ie; after automatic mail checks as well as after manual mail checks. Of course, you can also manually send the queued messages with FileSend queued messages. -Default send method lets you define what happens when a message is sent. If Send now is selected, the message is sent to the mail server immediately, while if Send later is selected, the message is queued in the outbox to be sent later with the FileSend Queued Messages command or automatically when you check your mail, depending on the setting of Send messages in outbox folder above. - -Message property lets you select how your message will be encoded when it is sent. Allow 8-bit means that &kmail; will send your message in 8-bit ASCII, which means that all special characters such as accented letters will be sent as-is. If MIME Compliant (Quoted Printable) is selected, special characters will be encoded using standard &MIME; encodings, which may be more portable to mailing systems other than 8-bit ASCII. We recommend to use MIME Compliant. - -Even with Allow 8-bit selected &kmail; will use MIME Compliant encoding in some situations, for example for sending cryptographically signed messages. - -Default domain lets you specify which domain name should be used to complete email addresses that only consist of the recipient's user name. For example when you set the default domain to kde.org then messages you send to joebloggs will be sent to joebloggs@kde.org. +Default send method lets you define what happens when a message is sent. If Send now is selected, the message is sent to the mail server immediately, while if Send later is selected, the message is queued in the outbox to be sent later with the FileSend Queued Messages command or automatically when you check your mail, depending on the setting of Send messages in outbox folder above. + +Message property lets you select how your message will be encoded when it is sent. Allow 8-bit means that &kmail; will send your message in 8-bit ASCII, which means that all special characters such as accented letters will be sent as-is. If MIME Compliant (Quoted Printable) is selected, special characters will be encoded using standard &MIME; encodings, which may be more portable to mailing systems other than 8-bit ASCII. We recommend to use MIME Compliant. + +Even with Allow 8-bit selected &kmail; will use MIME Compliant encoding in some situations, for example for sending cryptographically signed messages. + +Default domain lets you specify which domain name should be used to complete email addresses that only consist of the recipient's user name. For example when you set the default domain to kde.org then messages you send to joebloggs will be sent to joebloggs@kde.org. -Receiving - -For basic information, see Setting up your Account: Receiving. - -Check mail on startup lets you specify whether KMail should check for new mail immediately after it has been started. - -With New Mail Notification you can set how &kmail; will notify you if new messages have arrived: Beep will play a short beep sound; if Detailed new mail notification is enabled then &kmail; will show the number of new messages for each folder provided you have chosen to be notified with a dialogue. More advanced notification options, like showing a dialogue or running a certain command, are available via the Other Actions button. +Receiving + +For basic information, see Setting up your Account: Receiving. + +Check mail on startup lets you specify whether KMail should check for new mail immediately after it has been started. + +With New Mail Notification you can set how &kmail; will notify you if new messages have arrived: Beep will play a short beep sound; if Detailed new mail notification is enabled then &kmail; will show the number of new messages for each folder provided you have chosen to be notified with a dialogue. More advanced notification options, like showing a dialogue or running a certain command, are available via the Other Actions button. -Appearance Page +Appearance Page -Fonts - -This section allows you to change the type, size and character set of the display fonts. Message Body sets the font for the reader pane, Composer sets the font for writing messages in the composer window. There is a separate entry for Message List - Date Field so you can choose a monospaced font for the date field for better readability. +Fonts + +This section allows you to change the type, size and character set of the display fonts. Message Body sets the font for the reader pane, Composer sets the font for writing messages in the composer window. There is a separate entry for Message List - Date Field so you can choose a monospaced font for the date field for better readability. -Colours +Colours -This section allows you to change the colour of the text. Recycle colours on deep quoting means that even text that is quoted more than three times will appear in colour. Note that the Quoted text colours only work in the message reader, not in the composer. +This section allows you to change the colour of the text. Recycle colours on deep quoting means that even text that is quoted more than three times will appear in colour. Note that the Quoted text colours only work in the message reader, not in the composer. -Layout - -Show HTML status bar activates a bar at the left side of the reader pane that tells you if a message is &html; or not. This is important because &html; messages might imitate the look of a signed and encrypted message, so you should be aware of the fact that you are reading a &html; message. The &html; status bar itself cannot be influenced by the &html; code of the message. - -The Window Layout section lets you choose the layout of the main window. You can choose where you want the Message Preview Pane or choose not to have it at all. - -The Message Structure Viewer option lets you choose when the structure viewer will be shown: the structure viewer is a part of the main window that lets you access all parts of a message. Show never will disable the structure viewer (note that you can still access attachments as icons), Show always will show the structure viewer even if there is only one plaintext part. Show only for non-plaintext messages will display the structure viewer only if it makes sense, &ie; if the current message has attachments or has &html; parts. +Layout + +Show HTML status bar activates a bar at the left side of the reader pane that tells you if a message is &html; or not. This is important because &html; messages might imitate the look of a signed and encrypted message, so you should be aware of the fact that you are reading a &html; message. The &html; status bar itself cannot be influenced by the &html; code of the message. + +The Window Layout section lets you choose the layout of the main window. You can choose where you want the Message Preview Pane or choose not to have it at all. + +The Message Structure Viewer option lets you choose when the structure viewer will be shown: the structure viewer is a part of the main window that lets you access all parts of a message. Show never will disable the structure viewer (note that you can still access attachments as icons), Show always will show the structure viewer even if there is only one plaintext part. Show only for non-plaintext messages will display the structure viewer only if it makes sense, &ie; if the current message has attachments or has &html; parts. -Headers - -With Display message sizes selected there will be another column in the header pane that shows the messages' size. - -Show crypto icons will add more status information to the Subject columns in the header pane: every message that has been signed will have a small Signed icon in front of the subject, every message that has been encrypted will have a small Encrypted icon in front of the subject. Note that you have to select a message once before these icons will appear, until then only question marks will be displayed. - -Thread list of message headers will put all the messages in the header pane in a kind of tree list, so that the replies to a message are directly below that message. - -With Message header threading options you can select whether threads should appear expanded (open) by default or whether they should be collapsed (closed). You can of course still open/close threads using the +/- buttons. - -With Date Display you can choose between several date formats. The Localised Format is the one you can specify under Country & Language in &kcontrol;. For the Custom format you can get a description of the possible values by pressing &Shift;F1 and then clicking on Custom option. +Headers + +With Display message sizes selected there will be another column in the header pane that shows the messages' size. + +Show crypto icons will add more status information to the Subject columns in the header pane: every message that has been signed will have a small Signed icon in front of the subject, every message that has been encrypted will have a small Encrypted icon in front of the subject. Note that you have to select a message once before these icons will appear, until then only question marks will be displayed. + +Thread list of message headers will put all the messages in the header pane in a kind of tree list, so that the replies to a message are directly below that message. + +With Message header threading options you can select whether threads should appear expanded (open) by default or whether they should be collapsed (closed). You can of course still open/close threads using the +/- buttons. + +With Date Display you can choose between several date formats. The Localised Format is the one you can specify under Country & Language in &kcontrol;. For the Custom format you can get a description of the possible values by pressing &Shift;F1 and then clicking on Custom option. -System Tray - -If you enable the system tray icon then a small &kmail; icon with the number of unread messages will be shown in the system tray. You can enable &kmail;'s system tray icon with Enable system tray icon, and with System Tray Mode you can specify whether the tray icon should always be shown or only if you have unread messages. - -If the icon is visible then you can hide &kmail;'s main window by clicking on the icon or by clicking on the window close button. By clicking on the icon you can make &kmail;'s main window visible again. If you click on the icon with the right mousebutton then you get a menu with a few useful commands. You can check for new mail, create a new message or quit &kmail;. Additionally, there is the entry New Messages In which lists all folders containing unread messages. If you choose one of those folders then this folder will be selected in &kmail;'s main window. +System Tray + +If you enable the system tray icon then a small &kmail; icon with the number of unread messages will be shown in the system tray. You can enable &kmail;'s system tray icon with Enable system tray icon, and with System Tray Mode you can specify whether the tray icon should always be shown or only if you have unread messages. + +If the icon is visible then you can hide &kmail;'s main window by clicking on the icon or by clicking on the window close button. By clicking on the icon you can make &kmail;'s main window visible again. If you click on the icon with the right mousebutton then you get a menu with a few useful commands. You can check for new mail, create a new message or quit &kmail;. Additionally, there is the entry New Messages In which lists all folders containing unread messages. If you choose one of those folders then this folder will be selected in &kmail;'s main window. @@ -988,92 +396,58 @@ - Composer Page + Composer Page - General + General - Automatically append signature + Automatically append signature - If checked, your signature as defined in the identity page is automatically included at the end of all messages you create (&ie; new messages, replies &etc;). + If checked, your signature as defined in the identity page is automatically included at the end of all messages you create (&ie; new messages, replies &etc;). - Use smart quoting + Use smart quoting - If checked, &kmail; will break long lines but will try to keep the correct quoting (⪚ the > will always be at the start of the line). + If checked, &kmail; will break long lines but will try to keep the correct quoting (⪚ the > will always be at the start of the line). - Automatically request message disposition notifications + Automatically request message disposition notifications - If checked, will default to on. Check this option only if you know what you are doing. &mdn;s are considered a nuisance (or are simply ignored) by a lot of people. It is better to decide to request them on a message-by-message basis. + If checked, will default to on. Check this option only if you know what you are doing. &mdn;s are considered a nuisance (or are simply ignored) by a lot of people. It is better to decide to request them on a message-by-message basis. - Word wrap at column + Word wrap at column - Lets you turn word wrapping on and off in the composer window and lets you set the column at which words will be wrapped (you probably should not need to change the default value, which is 78). + Lets you turn word wrapping on and off in the composer window and lets you set the column at which words will be wrapped (you probably should not need to change the default value, which is 78). - Autosave interval + Autosave interval - A backup copy of the text in the composer window can be created regularly. This option lets you specify the interval used to create the backup. You can disable autosaving by setting it to the value 0. + A backup copy of the text in the composer window can be created regularly. This option lets you specify the interval used to create the backup. You can disable autosaving by setting it to the value 0. - External Editor + External Editor - If you do not like the Composer you can use a different editor. Note that the composer window will still open and the external editor will open as soon as you type just one character in the body of the message. If you are done, save the text and exit the editor. The text will now appear in the composer window, where you can send it. Note that your editor may not return immediately, you have to use ⪚ gvim %f for gvim. + If you do not like the Composer you can use a different editor. Note that the composer window will still open and the external editor will open as soon as you type just one character in the body of the message. If you are done, save the text and exit the editor. The text will now appear in the composer window, where you can send it. Note that your editor may not return immediately, you have to use ⪚ gvim %f for gvim. @@ -1082,281 +456,167 @@ -Phrases - -The Phrases tab lets you define the automatically generated lines that are added to message replies, forwarded messages, and the character that is added in front of quoted text. There are special %-denoted characters that will insert certain values, which are also displayed at the top of the Phrases section. You can add reply phrases in languages other than your default &kde; language using the Add... button. You can then choose between different languages with the Language drop down box. This will only work for languages whose i18n package you have installed. +Phrases + +The Phrases tab lets you define the automatically generated lines that are added to message replies, forwarded messages, and the character that is added in front of quoted text. There are special %-denoted characters that will insert certain values, which are also displayed at the top of the Phrases section. You can add reply phrases in languages other than your default &kde; language using the Add... button. You can then choose between different languages with the Language drop down box. This will only work for languages whose i18n package you have installed. -Subject - -This section contains a list of prefixes for Reply and Forward. If you receive messages that use prefixes different to the standard ones, you can add them here so &kmail; will recognise them. This way &kmail; can ignore them for sorting messages and when setting the subject of a reply or a forwarded messages, and optionally replace them with Re: or Fwd: respectively. +Subject + +This section contains a list of prefixes for Reply and Forward. If you receive messages that use prefixes different to the standard ones, you can add them here so &kmail; will recognise them. This way &kmail; can ignore them for sorting messages and when setting the subject of a reply or a forwarded messages, and optionally replace them with Re: or Fwd: respectively. -Charset - -Here you can manage the default charsets used for your own messages. Every message you send will be checked if it is written in one of the listed charsets, starting at the top of the list. If it is, this charset will be used. If it is not, a dialogue will show up and tell you that you manually have to choose a charset using OptionsSet Encoding. - -If you select Keep original charset when replying or forwarding (if possible), the original message's charset will be kept, unless there are now characters that cannot be represented using that charset. +Charset + +Here you can manage the default charsets used for your own messages. Every message you send will be checked if it is written in one of the listed charsets, starting at the top of the list. If it is, this charset will be used. If it is not, a dialogue will show up and tell you that you manually have to choose a charset using OptionsSet Encoding. + +If you select Keep original charset when replying or forwarding (if possible), the original message's charset will be kept, unless there are now characters that cannot be represented using that charset. -Headers - -Check the Use custom message-id suffix checkbox if you want &kmail; to generate Message-Id's with a custom suffix. Enter the desired suffix in the Custom message-id suffix field. Please make sure that the suffix that you specify is world-wide unique. The best thing is to use the name of a domain which you are the owner of. If you do not check Use custom Message-Id suffix then &kmail; will automatically generate the complete Message-Id. If you do not know what this is all about do not check this option. - -The Define custom mime header fields list sets the headers that &kmail; will use for its outgoing messages. You can both invent new fields and overwrite existing ones. This feature is only useful for advanced users. +Headers + +Check the Use custom message-id suffix checkbox if you want &kmail; to generate Message-Id's with a custom suffix. Enter the desired suffix in the Custom message-id suffix field. Please make sure that the suffix that you specify is world-wide unique. The best thing is to use the name of a domain which you are the owner of. If you do not check Use custom Message-Id suffix then &kmail; will automatically generate the complete Message-Id. If you do not know what this is all about do not check this option. + +The Define custom mime header fields list sets the headers that &kmail; will use for its outgoing messages. You can both invent new fields and overwrite existing ones. This feature is only useful for advanced users. -Attachments +Attachments -If you have to send attachments with filenames containing non-English characters to users of Outlook(TM) or Outlook Express(TM) then you might want to check the Outlook-compatible attachment naming option. &kmail; will then encode the attachment names in a non-standard way that is understood by Outlook(TM). -Note that &kmail; will create non-standard compliant messages, and consequently it is possible that your messages will not be understood by standard-compliant mail clients. So, unless you have no other choice, you should not enable this option. +If you have to send attachments with filenames containing non-English characters to users of Outlook(TM) or Outlook Express(TM) then you might want to check the Outlook-compatible attachment naming option. &kmail; will then encode the attachment names in a non-standard way that is understood by Outlook(TM). +Note that &kmail; will create non-standard compliant messages, and consequently it is possible that your messages will not be understood by standard-compliant mail clients. So, unless you have no other choice, you should not enable this option. -Check the Enable detection of missing attachments checkbox if you want &kmail; to warn you whenever you are about to send a message without attachments although the message text contains certain words which indicate that you wanted to include an attachment. The list of key words can be modified. +Check the Enable detection of missing attachments checkbox if you want &kmail; to warn you whenever you are about to send a message without attachments although the message text contains certain words which indicate that you wanted to include an attachment. The list of key words can be modified. - Security Page + Security Page - Reading + Reading - On this tab you can configure security-relevant options for reading messages. + On this tab you can configure security-relevant options for reading messages. - Prefer HTML to plain text + Prefer HTML to plain text - If checked, &kmail; will show &html; messages with their &html; formatting and layout. We strongly recommend to leave this option off, as security problems with &html; might show up. When this option is off, you can still read &html; messages, but only as plain text. + If checked, &kmail; will show &html; messages with their &html; formatting and layout. We strongly recommend to leave this option off, as security problems with &html; might show up. When this option is off, you can still read &html; messages, but only as plain text. - Allow messages to load external references from the Internet + Allow messages to load external references from the Internet - If checked, &kmail; can load external images, style sheets &etc; from the Internet when you look at an &html; message. We strongly recommend to leave this option off (although it has no effect if you only view plain text messages). By adding external references to their messages, people sending spam can detect that and when you have looked at their message. Note that this option has no effect on &Java;, JavaScript and Plugins - these are disabled anyway and cannot be enabled at all. + If checked, &kmail; can load external images, style sheets &etc; from the Internet when you look at an &html; message. We strongly recommend to leave this option off (although it has no effect if you only view plain text messages). By adding external references to their messages, people sending spam can detect that and when you have looked at their message. Note that this option has no effect on &Java;, JavaScript and Plugins - these are disabled anyway and cannot be enabled at all. - Message Disposition Notifications + Message Disposition Notifications - &mdn;s are a generalisation of what is commonly called a read receipt. The message author requests a disposition notification to be sent and the receiver's mail program generates a reply from which the author can learn what happened to his message. Common disposition types include displayed (&ie; read), deleted and dispatched (⪚ forwarded). - The following options (listed as Send policy) are available to control when &kmail; sends &mdn;s: + &mdn;s are a generalisation of what is commonly called a read receipt. The message author requests a disposition notification to be sent and the receiver's mail program generates a reply from which the author can learn what happened to his message. Common disposition types include displayed (&ie; read), deleted and dispatched (⪚ forwarded). + The following options (listed as Send policy) are available to control when &kmail; sends &mdn;s: - Ignore (recommended) + Ignore (recommended) - Ignores any request for disposition notifications. No &mdn; will ever be sent automatically. + Ignores any request for disposition notifications. No &mdn; will ever be sent automatically. - Ask + Ask - Answers requests only after asking the user for permission. This way, you can send &mdn;s for selected messages while denying or ignoring them for others. + Answers requests only after asking the user for permission. This way, you can send &mdn;s for selected messages while denying or ignoring them for others. - Deny + Deny - Always sends a denied notification. This is only slightly better than always sending &mdn;s. The author will still know that the messages has been acted upon, he just cannot tell whether it was deleted or read &etc; + Always sends a denied notification. This is only slightly better than always sending &mdn;s. The author will still know that the messages has been acted upon, he just cannot tell whether it was deleted or read &etc; - Always send + Always send - Always sends the requested disposition notification. That means that the author of the message gets to know when the message was acted upon and, in addition, what happened to it (displayed, deleted &etc;). This option is strongly discouraged, but since it makes sense where privacy is not a concern, ⪚ in customer relationship management, it has been made available. + Always sends the requested disposition notification. That means that the author of the message gets to know when the message was acted upon and, in addition, what happened to it (displayed, deleted &etc;). This option is strongly discouraged, but since it makes sense where privacy is not a concern, ⪚ in customer relationship management, it has been made available. - If you are unsure, experiment a while with Ask and if you find &kmail;s questions annoying, switch to Ignore. - The following options (listed as Quote original message) are available to control how much of the original message &kmail; sends back in &mdn;s. + If you are unsure, experiment a while with Ask and if you find &kmail;s questions annoying, switch to Ignore. + The following options (listed as Quote original message) are available to control how much of the original message &kmail; sends back in &mdn;s. - Nothing + Nothing - No parts of the message other than the mandatory message-id and the original recipient is included in the &mdn; reply. This preserves enough information for the sender to find the message in his sent messages for which this &mdn; was generated. + No parts of the message other than the mandatory message-id and the original recipient is included in the &mdn; reply. This preserves enough information for the sender to find the message in his sent messages for which this &mdn; was generated. - Full message + Full message - Attaches the complete message to the disposition notification. Usually, this is overkill. It does not add any valuable information that cannot be deduced from the message headers alone, but people sometimes insist on this, since it is much easier for humans to correlate the content of the message than just the headers to what they sent earlier. + Attaches the complete message to the disposition notification. Usually, this is overkill. It does not add any valuable information that cannot be deduced from the message headers alone, but people sometimes insist on this, since it is much easier for humans to correlate the content of the message than just the headers to what they sent earlier. - Only headers + Only headers - Attaches only the headers to the disposition notification. This is usually enough to enable both humans (by subject) and computers (by message-id) to easily correlate &mdn; and original message. + Attaches only the headers to the disposition notification. This is usually enough to enable both humans (by subject) and computers (by message-id) to easily correlate &mdn; and original message. - If unsure, leave the option at the default. + If unsure, leave the option at the default. - Do not send MDNs in response to encrypted messages + Do not send MDNs in response to encrypted messages - This option suppresses the sending of &mdn;s if the message is encrypted (partially or in whole). This thwarts attempts to use &kmail;'s &mdn; feature as an oracle to deduce whether you were able to decrypt the message or not. - Strictly speaking, this option is not needed, since &kmail; sends &mdn;s regardless of whether the message could be successfully decrypted or not (the disposition notification request resides in the unencrypted part of the message), but it gives the security-conscious user the choice to either send them always if requested (option unchecked), or never (option checked). - If unsure, leave the option checked. + This option suppresses the sending of &mdn;s if the message is encrypted (partially or in whole). This thwarts attempts to use &kmail;'s &mdn; feature as an oracle to deduce whether you were able to decrypt the message or not. + Strictly speaking, this option is not needed, since &kmail; sends &mdn;s regardless of whether the message could be successfully decrypted or not (the disposition notification request resides in the unencrypted part of the message), but it gives the security-conscious user the choice to either send them always if requested (option unchecked), or never (option checked). + If unsure, leave the option checked. - Automatically import keys and certificates + Automatically import keys and certificates - If checked, &kmail; automatically imports any attachments containing &openpgp; keys into your local keyring, and any attachments containing &smime; keys into your local key box. + If checked, &kmail; automatically imports any attachments containing &openpgp; keys into your local keyring, and any attachments containing &smime; keys into your local key box. - Verifying &smime; signatures always involves importing the contained certificates. This option thus does not affect this. It is also unrelated to &gpg;'s feature, where &gpg; will try to import unknown keys from a key server. + Verifying &smime; signatures always involves importing the contained certificates. This option thus does not affect this. It is also unrelated to &gpg;'s feature, where &gpg; will try to import unknown keys from a key server. @@ -1364,120 +624,73 @@ - Composing + Composing - On this tab you can configure security-relevant options for composing messages. + On this tab you can configure security-relevant options for composing messages. - Automatically sign messages + Automatically sign messages - If checked, the option in the composer will default to on. - However, you can still switch it on and off on a per-message basis. + If checked, the option in the composer will default to on. + However, you can still switch it on and off on a per-message basis. - Always encrypt to self + Always encrypt to self - If checked, any message that is encrypted to the recipients will additionally be encrypted to yourself. + If checked, any message that is encrypted to the recipients will additionally be encrypted to yourself. - If you uncheck this option, you may not be able to decrypt the messages written by yourself and encrypted to other people anymore. + If you uncheck this option, you may not be able to decrypt the messages written by yourself and encrypted to other people anymore. - Store sent messages encrypted - This options enables a mode of using mail encryption that is sometimes (misleadingly) called transport-only encryption. In this mode of operation, the message encryption is stripped off as soon as the message has reached its destination. The encryption lasts only while the message is on its way. - &kmail; supports this mode half-heartedly, since such functionality should better placed at the mail server (MTA) than at the mail client (MUA) level. Thus, future versions of &kmail; may drop support for this option. + This options enables a mode of using mail encryption that is sometimes (misleadingly) called transport-only encryption. In this mode of operation, the message encryption is stripped off as soon as the message has reached its destination. The encryption lasts only while the message is on its way. + &kmail; supports this mode half-heartedly, since such functionality should better placed at the mail server (MTA) than at the mail client (MUA) level. Thus, future versions of &kmail; may drop support for this option. - If checked, messages are stored in your sent-mail folder just as you sent them (&ie; if they were encrypted, they are also stored that way). - If unchecked, messages will always be stored unencrypted in your sent-mail folder, even if they are sent encrypted. + If checked, messages are stored in your sent-mail folder just as you sent them (&ie; if they were encrypted, they are also stored that way). + If unchecked, messages will always be stored unencrypted in your sent-mail folder, even if they are sent encrypted. - Always show the encryption keys for approval + Always show the encryption keys for approval - If checked, everytime you encrypt a message, a dialogue will appear that presents you with the encryption keys that will be used for each recipient. You can then review the choice of keys, change them, and approve or cancel the encryption operation. We recommend to keep this option checked, since it makes the encryption process more transparent. + If checked, everytime you encrypt a message, a dialogue will appear that presents you with the encryption keys that will be used for each recipient. You can then review the choice of keys, change them, and approve or cancel the encryption operation. We recommend to keep this option checked, since it makes the encryption process more transparent. - Automatically encrypt messages whenever possible + Automatically encrypt messages whenever possible - Also called opportunistic encryption. If checked, &kmail; will try to match recipients to (&openpgp; or &smime;) keys even when you did not specifically request encryption. If usable keys are found for all recipients, &kmail; will ask whether or not you want to encrypt the message. - It is highly recommended to turn this on, as it makes encrypting messages really easy to use. + Also called opportunistic encryption. If checked, &kmail; will try to match recipients to (&openpgp; or &smime;) keys even when you did not specifically request encryption. If usable keys are found for all recipients, &kmail; will ask whether or not you want to encrypt the message. + It is highly recommended to turn this on, as it makes encrypting messages really easy to use. - Never sign/encrypt when saving as draft + Never sign/encrypt when saving as draft - If checked, &kmail; will not attempt to sign and/or encrypt messages that are merely saved to the drafts folder. This is more convenient, and does not result in a gross loss of security, provided the drafts folder is safe. &imap; users might want this options turned off, if their drafts folder is on the server. + If checked, &kmail; will not attempt to sign and/or encrypt messages that are merely saved to the drafts folder. This is more convenient, and does not result in a gross loss of security, provided the drafts folder is safe. &imap; users might want this options turned off, if their drafts folder is on the server. @@ -1486,84 +699,59 @@ - Warnings + Warnings - On this tab you can switch security-relavant warnings on and off. + On this tab you can switch security-relavant warnings on and off. - Warn when trying to send unsigned messages + Warn when trying to send unsigned messages - If checked, &kmail; will show a warning if for whatever reason a message would be sent without being digitally signed. + If checked, &kmail; will show a warning if for whatever reason a message would be sent without being digitally signed. - Warn when trying to send unencrypted messages + Warn when trying to send unencrypted messages - If checked, &kmail; will show a warning if for whatever reason a message would be sent without being encrypted. + If checked, &kmail; will show a warning if for whatever reason a message would be sent without being encrypted. - While it is common to sign all outgoing messages, encrypting them is not. So unless your company has a policy of never sending any unencrypted messages, it might be a good idea to keep this option switched off and rely on opportunistic encryption to alert you if you could send encrypted messages, but did not request it. + While it is common to sign all outgoing messages, encrypting them is not. So unless your company has a policy of never sending any unencrypted messages, it might be a good idea to keep this option switched off and rely on opportunistic encryption to alert you if you could send encrypted messages, but did not request it. - Warn if receiver's email address is not in certificate + Warn if receiver's email address is not in certificate - If checked, &kmail; will emit a warning if an &smime; certifciate or &openpgp; key will be used for a recipient whose email address is not listed in the email addresses stored in the certificate. - Situations in which this warning will trigger include when configuring your per-identity &openpgp; keys or &smime; certificates, when encrypting, and when verifying signatures, if the signature was made with a certificate that does not include the email address of the sender. + If checked, &kmail; will emit a warning if an &smime; certifciate or &openpgp; key will be used for a recipient whose email address is not listed in the email addresses stored in the certificate. + Situations in which this warning will trigger include when configuring your per-identity &openpgp; keys or &smime; certificates, when encrypting, and when verifying signatures, if the signature was made with a certificate that does not include the email address of the sender. - Warn if certificates/keys expire soon + Warn if certificates/keys expire soon - If checked, &kmail; will warn when an &smime; certificate or &openpgp; key is used which will expire soon. - The period in which to warn before key/certificate expiration can then be configured separately for signing and encryption keys, as well as (in the case of &smime;), for end-user certificates, intermediate CA certificates and root certificates. + If checked, &kmail; will warn when an &smime; certificate or &openpgp; key is used which will expire soon. + The period in which to warn before key/certificate expiration can then be configured separately for signing and encryption keys, as well as (in the case of &smime;), for end-user certificates, intermediate CA certificates and root certificates. - Re-Enable All "Don't Ask Again" Warnings + Re-Enable All "Don't Ask Again" Warnings - Apart from the main warnings described above, there are more warning and information messages, which contain an option to not show them again. If you would like to re-enable them after choosing not to show them again, you can achieve this by pressing this button. This will re-enable all such warnings for &kmail;. It does not make much sense to allow more fine-grained selection of which warnings to show since you can just check the option to suppress them again when they next show up. + Apart from the main warnings described above, there are more warning and information messages, which contain an option to not show them again. If you would like to re-enable them after choosing not to show them again, you can achieve this by pressing this button. This will re-enable all such warnings for &kmail;. It does not make much sense to allow more fine-grained selection of which warnings to show since you can just check the option to suppress them again when they next show up. @@ -1574,192 +762,96 @@ - &smime; Validation + &smime; Validation - This tab contains selected entries from &gpgsm;'s dynamic backend configuration dialogue. Please refer to the &gpgsm; manual for a description of these options. + This tab contains selected entries from &gpgsm;'s dynamic backend configuration dialogue. Please refer to the &gpgsm; manual for a description of these options. - Crypto Backends + Crypto Backends - On this tab you can configure which crypto backends are to be used for &openpgp; and &smime; cryptographic operations (such as signing and encrypting). + On this tab you can configure which crypto backends are to be used for &openpgp; and &smime; cryptographic operations (such as signing and encrypting). - On the right-hand side, you see a list of available backends. Below each backend entry, you can see what protocols (&openpgp; and/or &smime;) the backend supports. If a protocol is not listed, the backend does not support it. If it is listed, but greyed out, the backend supports the protocol, but some required programs were not found, or other errors occurred during initialisation. If you press Rescan, a dialogue box will appear that lists reasons for the initialisation failure. + On the right-hand side, you see a list of available backends. Below each backend entry, you can see what protocols (&openpgp; and/or &smime;) the backend supports. If a protocol is not listed, the backend does not support it. If it is listed, but greyed out, the backend supports the protocol, but some required programs were not found, or other errors occurred during initialisation. If you press Rescan, a dialogue box will appear that lists reasons for the initialisation failure. - To configure a backend, select it in the list of available backends and press Configure.... The per-backend configuration dialogue is dynamically created from the information returned by the backend. It may therefore change if you update the backend applications, although &kmail; itself is unchanged. If the Configure... button is disabled, the backend does not support a backend configuration dialogue. + To configure a backend, select it in the list of available backends and press Configure.... The per-backend configuration dialogue is dynamically created from the information returned by the backend. It may therefore change if you update the backend applications, although &kmail; itself is unchanged. If the Configure... button is disabled, the backend does not support a backend configuration dialogue. - Please refer to the manuals of the applications underlying each backend for a description of the options presented in the backend configuration dialogues. + Please refer to the manuals of the applications underlying each backend for a description of the options presented in the backend configuration dialogues. - In front of each backend's protocol entries, you can see a checkbox, with which you select which backend is to be used for a given protocol. These checkboxes are exclusive per protocol, meaning that if you select a backend to perform &openpgp; operations, any previously selected &openpgp; implementation will be unselected, but the &smime; backend selection will be unchanged. If no backend is selected for a given protocol, that protocol is effectively disabled for use in &kmail;. + In front of each backend's protocol entries, you can see a checkbox, with which you select which backend is to be used for a given protocol. These checkboxes are exclusive per protocol, meaning that if you select a backend to perform &openpgp; operations, any previously selected &openpgp; implementation will be unselected, but the &smime; backend selection will be unchanged. If no backend is selected for a given protocol, that protocol is effectively disabled for use in &kmail;. - + -Misc Page +Misc Page -Folders +Folders -Ask for confirmation before moving all messages to the wastebin +Ask for confirmation before moving all messages to the wastebin -Enable this option if you want to be asked for confirmation whenever you use FolderMove All Messages to Wastebin. +Enable this option if you want to be asked for confirmation whenever you use FolderMove All Messages to Wastebin. -Exclude important messages from expiry +Exclude important messages from expiry -Enable this option if important messages should never be deleted during message expiration, &ie; during automatic deletion of old messages. +Enable this option if important messages should never be deleted during message expiration, &ie; during automatic deletion of old messages. -When trying to find unread messages +When trying to find unread messages -This option controls what happens if you press one of the shortcuts to go to the next or previous unread message (⪚ Space). If you ask &kmail; to go to the next unread message although there is no unread message below the currently selected message then the following happens: If Do not Loop is selected then nothing will happen. If Loop in Current Folder is selected then &kmail; will search from the beginning of the current folder for an unread message. If none is found then nothing happens. If Loop in All Folders is selected then &kmail; will first search in the current folder for another unread message. If none is found then &kmail; will search the next folder containing unread messages. Correspondingly, if you ask &kmail; to go to the previous unread message. +This option controls what happens if you press one of the shortcuts to go to the next or previous unread message (⪚ Space). If you ask &kmail; to go to the next unread message although there is no unread message below the currently selected message then the following happens: If Do not Loop is selected then nothing will happen. If Loop in Current Folder is selected then &kmail; will search from the beginning of the current folder for an unread message. If none is found then nothing happens. If Loop in All Folders is selected then &kmail; will first search in the current folder for another unread message. If none is found then &kmail; will search the next folder containing unread messages. Correspondingly, if you ask &kmail; to go to the previous unread message. -Jump to first unread message when entering a folder +Jump to first unread message when entering a folder -If this option is enabled &kmail; will go to the first unread message when you enter a folder; if it is not enabled, &kmail; will go to first new message or, if there is no new message, to the message that was selected when you last left the folder. +If this option is enabled &kmail; will go to the first unread message when you enter a folder; if it is not enabled, &kmail; will go to first new message or, if there is no new message, to the message that was selected when you last left the folder. -Mark selected message as read after... +Mark selected message as read after... -When you select a new or unread message, &kmail; will change the message's status to read after the number of seconds entered here. If you disable this option, messages will keep their new or unread status. +When you select a new or unread message, &kmail; will change the message's status to read after the number of seconds entered here. If you disable this option, messages will keep their new or unread status. -Ask for action after dragging messages to another folder +Ask for action after dragging messages to another folder -When you drag a message to a different folder, a small popup will ask you if you want to move or copy the message. If you disable this option, the message will be moved immediately, without a popup. +When you drag a message to a different folder, a small popup will ask you if you want to move or copy the message. If you disable this option, the message will be moved immediately, without a popup. -By default, message folders on disk are... +By default, message folders on disk are... -Here you can set the default folder format that is used when you create a new folder. +Here you can set the default folder format that is used when you create a new folder. -Open this folder on startup +Open this folder on startup -Here you can set the folder that should be selected by default if you start &kmail;. If you use only &imap; folders then you might want to set this to your &imap; inbox folder. +Here you can set the folder that should be selected by default if you start &kmail;. If you use only &imap; folders then you might want to set this to your &imap; inbox folder. -Empty wastebin on program exit +Empty wastebin on program exit -The wastebin folder is cleared of messages when you quit &kmail; if this option is selected. +The wastebin folder is cleared of messages when you quit &kmail; if this option is selected. @@ -1768,118 +860,58 @@ -Groupware +Groupware -Enable IMAP resource functionality +Enable IMAP resource functionality -Makes it possible to store the entries from the Kontact applications (KOrganizer, KAddressBook and KNotes). This option has to be set whenever you are configuring Kontact as a TDE Kolab client. This option being enabled you will also need to add the appropriate resources from the TDE Control Center (kcontrol) in the TDE Resources Configuration section. Kolab resources have to be added in case the resource functionality applies to a TDE Kolab client set-up. +Makes it possible to store the entries from the Kontact applications (KOrganizer, KAddressBook and KNotes). This option has to be set whenever you are configuring Kontact as a TDE Kolab client. This option being enabled you will also need to add the appropriate resources from the TDE Control Center (kcontrol) in the TDE Resources Configuration section. Kolab resources have to be added in case the resource functionality applies to a TDE Kolab client set-up. -Format used for the groupware folders +Format used for the groupware folders -Choose the storage format for the groupware folders +Choose the storage format for the groupware folders -Default format is Standard (Ical/Vcard) for calendar folders (Ical) and addressbook folders (Vcard). This makes all Kontact features available. +Default format is Standard (Ical/Vcard) for calendar folders (Ical) and addressbook folders (Vcard). This makes all Kontact features available. -Kolab users should choose Kolab XML. This format uses a custom model that matches more closely to the one used in Microsoft Outlook(tm) and gives better compatibility. +Kolab users should choose Kolab XML. This format uses a custom model that matches more closely to the one used in Microsoft Outlook(tm) and gives better compatibility. -Language of the groupware folders +Language of the groupware folders -Choose between the available languages to set the folder names of the IMAP storage to your local language. Note that this option is only aimed for compatibility with Microsoft Outlook(tm). It is not recommended to change its default unless you have to, since it makes changing languages impossible. +Choose between the available languages to set the folder names of the IMAP storage to your local language. Note that this option is only aimed for compatibility with Microsoft Outlook(tm). It is not recommended to change its default unless you have to, since it makes changing languages impossible. -Resource folders are in account +Resource folders are in account -Select the parent of the IMAP resource folders. You should select the name of your IMAP/DIMAP account. By default the Kolab server sets the IMAP inbox to be the parent. +Select the parent of the IMAP resource folders. You should select the name of your IMAP/DIMAP account. By default the Kolab server sets the IMAP inbox to be the parent. -Hide groupware folders +Hide groupware folders -You should not need to see the folders that hold the IMAP resources. However if you want to see them, you can set that by enabling this option. +You should not need to see the folders that hold the IMAP resources. However if you want to see them, you can set that by enabling this option. -Mangle From:/To: headers in replies to invitations +Mangle From:/To: headers in replies to invitations -Enable this option to make Microsoft Outlook(tm) understand your answers to invitations replies. +Enable this option to make Microsoft Outlook(tm) understand your answers to invitations replies. -Send invitations in the mail body +Send invitations in the mail body -Invitations use to be send as attachments to a mail. By enabling this option, you let the invitation mails to be sent in the text of the mail, which is necessary to send invitations and replies to Microsoft Outlook(tm). +Invitations use to be send as attachments to a mail. By enabling this option, you let the invitation mails to be sent in the text of the mail, which is necessary to send invitations and replies to Microsoft Outlook(tm). diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/credits-and-licenses.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/credits-and-licenses.docbook index 1f8878ab685..119a0f422e6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/credits-and-licenses.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/credits-and-licenses.docbook @@ -2,394 +2,114 @@ -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net -
 +David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
British English English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
British English English -2004-07-13 1.7 +2004-07-13 1.7 -Credits and Licences +Credits and Licences -&kmail;: Copyright the &kmail; developers, 1997-2004 +&kmail;: Copyright the &kmail; developers, 1997-2004 &underGPL; &underFDL; -Development Team +Development Team -Ingo Klöcker (kloecker at kde org): Maintainer -Don Sanders (sanders at kde org): Adopter and co-maintainer -Stefan Taferner (taferner at kde org): Original author -Michael Häckel (haeckel at kde org): Former maintainer -Till Adam (till at adam-lilienthal de): Core developer -Carsten Burghardt (burghardt at kde org): Core developer -Marc Mutz (mutz at kde org): Core developer -Daniel Naber (daniel naber at t-online de): Documentation -Zack Rusin (zack at kde org): Core developer -Toyohiro Asukai (toyohiro at ksmplus com) -Waldo Bastian (bastian at kde org) -Ryan Breen (ryan at ryanbreen com): system tray notification -Steven Brown (swbrown at ucsd edu) -Matthias Kalle Dalheimer (kalle at kde org) -Cristi Dumitrescu (cristid at chip ro) -David Faure (faure at kde org) -Philippe Fremy (pfremy at chez com) -Kurt Granroth (granroth at kde org) -Andreas Gungl (a gungl at gmx de): PGP 6 support and further enhancements of the encryption support -Steffen Hansen (hansen at kde org) -Igor Janssen (rm at linux ru net) -Matt Johnston (matt at caifex org) -Christer Kaivo-oja (whizkid at telia com) -Lars Knoll (knoll at kde org): Original encryption support, PGP 2 and PGP 5 support -J. Nick Koston (bdraco at darkorb net): GnuPG support -Stephan Kulow (coolo at kde org) -Guillaume Laurent (glaurent at telegraph-road org) -Sam Magnuson (sam at trolltech com) -Laurent Montel (lmontel at mandrakesoft com) -Matt Newell (newellm at proaxis com) -Denis Perchine (dyp at perchine com) -Samuel Penn (sam at bifrost demon co uk) -Carsten Pfeiffer (pfeiffer at kde org) -Sven Radej (radej at kde org) -Mark Roberts (mark at taurine demon co uk) -Wolfgang Rohdewald (wrohdewald at dplanet ch) -Espen Sand (espen at kde org) -Aaron J. Seigo (aseigo at olympusproject org) -George Staikos (staikos at kde org) -Jason Stephenson (panda at mis net) -Jacek Stolarczyk (jacek at mer chemia polsl gliwice pl) -Roberto S. Teixeira (maragato at kde org) -Bo Thorsen (bo at sonofthor dk) -Ronen Tzur (rtzur at shani net) -Mario Weilguni (mweilguni at sime com) -Wynn Wilkes (wynnw at calderasystems com) -Robert D. Williams (rwilliams at kde org) -Markus Wübben (markus wuebben at kde org) -Karl-Heinz Zimmer (khz at kde org) +Ingo Klöcker (kloecker at kde org): Maintainer +Don Sanders (sanders at kde org): Adopter and co-maintainer +Stefan Taferner (taferner at kde org): Original author +Michael Häckel (haeckel at kde org): Former maintainer +Till Adam (till at adam-lilienthal de): Core developer +Carsten Burghardt (burghardt at kde org): Core developer +Marc Mutz (mutz at kde org): Core developer +Daniel Naber (daniel naber at t-online de): Documentation +Zack Rusin (zack at kde org): Core developer +Toyohiro Asukai (toyohiro at ksmplus com) +Waldo Bastian (bastian at kde org) +Ryan Breen (ryan at ryanbreen com): system tray notification +Steven Brown (swbrown at ucsd edu) +Matthias Kalle Dalheimer (kalle at kde org) +Cristi Dumitrescu (cristid at chip ro) +David Faure (faure at kde org) +Philippe Fremy (pfremy at chez com) +Kurt Granroth (granroth at kde org) +Andreas Gungl (a gungl at gmx de): PGP 6 support and further enhancements of the encryption support +Steffen Hansen (hansen at kde org) +Igor Janssen (rm at linux ru net) +Matt Johnston (matt at caifex org) +Christer Kaivo-oja (whizkid at telia com) +Lars Knoll (knoll at kde org): Original encryption support, PGP 2 and PGP 5 support +J. Nick Koston (bdraco at darkorb net): GnuPG support +Stephan Kulow (coolo at kde org) +Guillaume Laurent (glaurent at telegraph-road org) +Sam Magnuson (sam at trolltech com) +Laurent Montel (lmontel at mandrakesoft com) +Matt Newell (newellm at proaxis com) +Denis Perchine (dyp at perchine com) +Samuel Penn (sam at bifrost demon co uk) +Carsten Pfeiffer (pfeiffer at kde org) +Sven Radej (radej at kde org) +Mark Roberts (mark at taurine demon co uk) +Wolfgang Rohdewald (wrohdewald at dplanet ch) +Espen Sand (espen at kde org) +Aaron J. Seigo (aseigo at olympusproject org) +George Staikos (staikos at kde org) +Jason Stephenson (panda at mis net) +Jacek Stolarczyk (jacek at mer chemia polsl gliwice pl) +Roberto S. Teixeira (maragato at kde org) +Bo Thorsen (bo at sonofthor dk) +Ronen Tzur (rtzur at shani net) +Mario Weilguni (mweilguni at sime com) +Wynn Wilkes (wynnw at calderasystems com) +Robert D. Williams (rwilliams at kde org) +Markus Wübben (markus wuebben at kde org) +Karl-Heinz Zimmer (khz at kde org) -Credits +Credits -Heiko Hund (heiko at ist eigentlich net): POP filters -Bernhard Reiter (bernhard at intevation de): Ägypten and Kroupware project management -Jan Simonson (jan at simonson pp se): beta testing of PGP 6 support -Patrick S. Vogt (patrick vogt at unibas ch): timestamp for 'Transmission completed' status messages -Jan-Oliver Wagner (jan at intevation de): Ägypten and Kroupware project management -Wolfgang Westphal (wolfgang westphal at gmx de): multiple encryption keys per address -Thorsten Zachmann (t zachmann at zagge de): POP filters +Heiko Hund (heiko at ist eigentlich net): POP filters +Bernhard Reiter (bernhard at intevation de): Ägypten and Kroupware project management +Jan Simonson (jan at simonson pp se): beta testing of PGP 6 support +Patrick S. Vogt (patrick vogt at unibas ch): timestamp for 'Transmission completed' status messages +Jan-Oliver Wagner (jan at intevation de): Ägypten and Kroupware project management +Wolfgang Westphal (wolfgang westphal at gmx de): multiple encryption keys per address +Thorsten Zachmann (t zachmann at zagge de): POP filters -Documentation +Documentation -Update for &kmail; 1.7 by Ingo Klöcker kloecker@kde.de and Marc Mutz mutz@kde.org, Anti-Spam Wizard chapter by Andreas Gungl a.gungl@gmx.de, section about filter log by Andreas Gungl a.gungl@gmx.de and Brad Hards bradh@frogmouth.net, additional changes by Daniel Naber daniel.naber@t-online.de. +Update for &kmail; 1.7 by Ingo Klöcker kloecker@kde.de and Marc Mutz mutz@kde.org, Anti-Spam Wizard chapter by Andreas Gungl a.gungl@gmx.de, section about filter log by Andreas Gungl a.gungl@gmx.de and Brad Hards bradh@frogmouth.net, additional changes by Daniel Naber daniel.naber@t-online.de. -Update for &kmail; 1.2 to 1.5 by Daniel Naber daniel.naber@t-online.de, OpenPGP chapter by Andreas Gungl a.gungl@gmx.de and Ingo Klöcker kloecker@kde.de, message filter chapter by Marc Mutz mutz@kde.org, download filter chapter by Thorsten Zachmann T.Zachmann@zagge.de. Other parts have been contributed by various &kmail; developers. +Update for &kmail; 1.2 to 1.5 by Daniel Naber daniel.naber@t-online.de, OpenPGP chapter by Andreas Gungl a.gungl@gmx.de and Ingo Klöcker kloecker@kde.de, message filter chapter by Marc Mutz mutz@kde.org, download filter chapter by Thorsten Zachmann T.Zachmann@zagge.de. Other parts have been contributed by various &kmail; developers. -&kmail; 1.0 documentation by David Rugge davidrugge@mediaone.net. Original documentation by Markus Wuebben markus.wuebben@kde.org, Robert Williams rwilliams@kde.org (Editor). +&kmail; 1.0 documentation by David Rugge davidrugge@mediaone.net. Original documentation by Markus Wuebben markus.wuebben@kde.org, Robert Williams rwilliams@kde.org (Editor). -Thanks to Michael Elkins me@cs.hmc.edu for his excellent description of the different &UNIX; mail formats in the Mutt documentation. +Thanks to Michael Elkins me@cs.hmc.edu for his excellent description of the different &UNIX; mail formats in the Mutt documentation. -Thanks to the following people for providing directions on using other email client mailboxes with &kmail;: +Thanks to the following people for providing directions on using other email client mailboxes with &kmail;: -Nik Gaffney nik@f0.am (Mailsmith) -David McMillen mcmillen@math.bu.edu and Mendel Mobach mendel@mobach.nl (&Netscape; mail) -Ed Shapard shapard@bigfoot.com (Pegasus Mail) -Ray Muir rjmuir@ibm.net (Forte Agent) +Nik Gaffney nik@f0.am (Mailsmith) +David McMillen mcmillen@math.bu.edu and Mendel Mobach mendel@mobach.nl (&Netscape; mail) +Ed Shapard shapard@bigfoot.com (Pegasus Mail) +Ray Muir rjmuir@ibm.net (Forte Agent) -Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk +Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/faq.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/faq.docbook index e1f1455aba3..2f59836d914 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/faq.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/faq.docbook @@ -2,56 +2,18 @@ -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net -
 +David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2004-07-14 1.7 +2004-07-14 1.7 -Frequently Asked Questions (&FAQ;) - +Frequently Asked Questions (&FAQ;) + @@ -59,605 +21,218 @@ ~/Mail (incl. hidden ones) to the new ~/Mail folder --> -Why are my filters not applied to incoming messages of IMAP accounts? +Why are my filters not applied to incoming messages of IMAP accounts? -Normal IMAP mode does not support filtering, but the new disconnected IMAP account type does. You could try to use server-side filtering (ask your admin for how to install filters on the server and in which format), since IMAP is all about managing your email on the server. Unfortunately, although there exists a mail filter language (Sieve, defined in RFC3028), there is no standardised access protocol for installing or editing server-side Sieve scripts. If such a protocol becomes available in the future, &kmail; will most probably include support for it. +Normal IMAP mode does not support filtering, but the new disconnected IMAP account type does. You could try to use server-side filtering (ask your admin for how to install filters on the server and in which format), since IMAP is all about managing your email on the server. Unfortunately, although there exists a mail filter language (Sieve, defined in RFC3028), there is no standardised access protocol for installing or editing server-side Sieve scripts. If such a protocol becomes available in the future, &kmail; will most probably include support for it. -Using PGP or GnuPG is very slow or it blocks &kmail;. +Using PGP or GnuPG is very slow or it blocks &kmail;. -&kmail; accesses PGP/GnuPG synchronously, &ie; it blocks while PGP/GnuPG works. This means that you might want to disable automatic retrieval of unknown keys from a keyserver to make &kmail; look more responsive. If you are using GnuPG 1.0.7 (or better) or upgraded from an earlier version, then make sure to run gpg once and gpg after every import or refresh. Both will speed up GnuPG immensely. +&kmail; accesses PGP/GnuPG synchronously, &ie; it blocks while PGP/GnuPG works. This means that you might want to disable automatic retrieval of unknown keys from a keyserver to make &kmail; look more responsive. If you are using GnuPG 1.0.7 (or better) or upgraded from an earlier version, then make sure to run gpg once and gpg after every import or refresh. Both will speed up GnuPG immensely. -What should I know if I want to use PGP/GnuPG with &kmail;? - -&kmail; provides a simple and easy-to-use interface for the basic functions of these programs; still you should understand how these programs work and what might make their use insecure. Some important issues: +What should I know if I want to use PGP/GnuPG with &kmail;? + +&kmail; provides a simple and easy-to-use interface for the basic functions of these programs; still you should understand how these programs work and what might make their use insecure. Some important issues: -You really should test if encryption works before you use it. &kmail; partly relies on PGP/GnuPG's error strings, which often change between different versions. +You really should test if encryption works before you use it. &kmail; partly relies on PGP/GnuPG's error strings, which often change between different versions. -&kmail; will not encrypt messages with an untrusted (unsigned) public key: if you want to encrypt to such a key you should check the identity of the key owner and only then sign the key with your secret key; if you do not want to or cannot check the identity of the key owner but nevertheless want to encrypt the message then please sign the key locally with gpg keyID. +&kmail; will not encrypt messages with an untrusted (unsigned) public key: if you want to encrypt to such a key you should check the identity of the key owner and only then sign the key with your secret key; if you do not want to or cannot check the identity of the key owner but nevertheless want to encrypt the message then please sign the key locally with gpg keyID. -Trusting a foreign public key without checking it is not a good idea. +Trusting a foreign public key without checking it is not a good idea. -&kmail; cannot encrypt and sign attachments if you are using the built-in OpenPGP support. For encrypted and signed attachments you need to have crypto plugins installed and configured. +&kmail; cannot encrypt and sign attachments if you are using the built-in OpenPGP support. For encrypted and signed attachments you need to have crypto plugins installed and configured. -Starting with GnuPG 1.0.7 you have to set your own key to ultimate ownertrust: it is no longer implicitly done for you. +Starting with GnuPG 1.0.7 you have to set your own key to ultimate ownertrust: it is no longer implicitly done for you. -Where does &kmail; save my settings and my mail? +Where does &kmail; save my settings and my mail? -Most &kmail; settings are stored in $TDEHOME/share/config/kmailrc, where $TDEHOME is typically ~/.trinity; the identities are stored in $TDEHOME/share/config/emailidentities and your mail is saved in ~/Mail. Note that some of the files are hidden: remember to also copy those if you want to backup or archive your mails. +Most &kmail; settings are stored in $TDEHOME/share/config/kmailrc, where $TDEHOME is typically ~/.trinity; the identities are stored in $TDEHOME/share/config/emailidentities and your mail is saved in ~/Mail. Note that some of the files are hidden: remember to also copy those if you want to backup or archive your mails. -Why did &kmail; regenerate the index of a folder? +Why did &kmail; regenerate the index of a folder? -&kmail; regenerates the index of a folder whenever the index appears to be out of date, &ie; whenever the contents of a folder are newer than the index. &kmail; regenerates the index in this case in order to prevent the loss or corruption of messages. Unfortunately, currently-deleted messages might reappear and message flags (like important, etc.) might be lost when the index is regenerated. -An outdated index can have several causes; the two most important causes are: -Some other program modified the contents of the folder: if you want to use &kmail; together with procmail then please read this &FAQ;. If you want to use &kmail; together with another email client then please read this &FAQ;. -If your mail folder (usually ~/Mail) is on a volume which is mounted via NFS and if the clock of the NFS server is ahead of the clock of your computer then the NFS server sometimes reports a wrong file date for the index file. In this case &kmail; assumes that the index is outdated although in reality it is not. To fix this problem you (or your system administrator) have to make sure that the clock of the NFS server and the clock of your computer are always in sync. One way to achieve this is the use of the ntp daemon. +&kmail; regenerates the index of a folder whenever the index appears to be out of date, &ie; whenever the contents of a folder are newer than the index. &kmail; regenerates the index in this case in order to prevent the loss or corruption of messages. Unfortunately, currently-deleted messages might reappear and message flags (like important, etc.) might be lost when the index is regenerated. +An outdated index can have several causes; the two most important causes are: +Some other program modified the contents of the folder: if you want to use &kmail; together with procmail then please read this &FAQ;. If you want to use &kmail; together with another email client then please read this &FAQ;. +If your mail folder (usually ~/Mail) is on a volume which is mounted via NFS and if the clock of the NFS server is ahead of the clock of your computer then the NFS server sometimes reports a wrong file date for the index file. In this case &kmail; assumes that the index is outdated although in reality it is not. To fix this problem you (or your system administrator) have to make sure that the clock of the NFS server and the clock of your computer are always in sync. One way to achieve this is the use of the ntp daemon. -I cannot add addresses to my address book after upgrading to KDE 3.x. +I cannot add addresses to my address book after upgrading to KDE 3.x. -You probably copied your old kmailrc file manually. That is not necessary, there is a script that will do such things when you run KDE 3.x for the first time. To fix the problem, remove the complete [AddressBook] group and the addressbook option in group [General] in your kmailrc file; however, chances are you will also encounter other problems that the config update script would have solved. +You probably copied your old kmailrc file manually. That is not necessary, there is a script that will do such things when you run KDE 3.x for the first time. To fix the problem, remove the complete [AddressBook] group and the addressbook option in group [General] in your kmailrc file; however, chances are you will also encounter other problems that the config update script would have solved. -Can I use &kmail; together with a different email client, ⪚ mutt? +Can I use &kmail; together with a different email client, ⪚ mutt? -If you're using the mbox format for your folders it is not possible to use a different email client while &kmail; is running. With mutt there may also be problems even if both programs are not running at the same time. We recommend to use the maildir format in this case, this should solve all problems. +If you're using the mbox format for your folders it is not possible to use a different email client while &kmail; is running. With mutt there may also be problems even if both programs are not running at the same time. We recommend to use the maildir format in this case, this should solve all problems. -How can I convert my mailboxes from mbox to maildir? +How can I convert my mailboxes from mbox to maildir? -There is no automatic way to do that. You will have to create a new folder in maildir format and copy the messages from the mbox folder into this new folder. Remember to adapt any filter rules connected with the old folder before you delete it. +There is no automatic way to do that. You will have to create a new folder in maildir format and copy the messages from the mbox folder into this new folder. Remember to adapt any filter rules connected with the old folder before you delete it. -How can I use a browser other than &konqueror; to open links in messages? +How can I use a browser other than &konqueror; to open links in messages? -Change the File Associations for HTML files using &kcontrol;. +Change the File Associations for HTML files using &kcontrol;. -How can I remove attachments from messages without removing the message itself? +How can I remove attachments from messages without removing the message itself? -This is currently not supported. As a workaround, move the message to the drafts folder, double click on it in order to open it in the composer, remove the attachments, save the message again to the drafts folder, move it back to its folder. The disadvantage of this workaround is that the date will be changed to the current date. Some other headers might also be changed. +This is currently not supported. As a workaround, move the message to the drafts folder, double click on it in order to open it in the composer, remove the attachments, save the message again to the drafts folder, move it back to its folder. The disadvantage of this workaround is that the date will be changed to the current date. Some other headers might also be changed. -How can I make &kmail; check for new messages at startup? +How can I make &kmail; check for new messages at startup? -If &kmail; should always check for new messages at startup then enable Check mail on startup on the Accounts configuration page. Otherwise start &kmail; with kmail . +If &kmail; should always check for new messages at startup then enable Check mail on startup on the Accounts configuration page. Otherwise start &kmail; with kmail . -Why does &kmail; get slow / stop working when I try to send big attachments? +Why does &kmail; get slow / stop working when I try to send big attachments? -&kmail; is known to have problems with large attachments. We are working on a solution for this problem for &kde; 3.2 but currently it temporarily consumes virtual memory of about 10-15 times the size of the attachment. That means that if you attach a 2MB file &kmail; might temporarily need about 20-30 MB of virtual memory (= RAM + swap space). If you do not have enough virtual memory this will lead to problems. +&kmail; is known to have problems with large attachments. We are working on a solution for this problem for &kde; 3.2 but currently it temporarily consumes virtual memory of about 10-15 times the size of the attachment. That means that if you attach a 2MB file &kmail; might temporarily need about 20-30 MB of virtual memory (= RAM + swap space). If you do not have enough virtual memory this will lead to problems. -Where can I get a list of changes between the versions of &kmail;? +Where can I get a list of changes between the versions of &kmail;? -The welcome screen lists all important changes for your version. It is displayed when you select Help&kmail; Introduction. +The welcome screen lists all important changes for your version. It is displayed when you select Help&kmail; Introduction. -Can I configure the location of my mail folder? +Can I configure the location of my mail folder? -Exit &kmail;, make a backup of ~/.trinity/share/config/kmailrc, then open it with an editor and add ⪚ folders=/home/username/.mail to the [General] section. Then move all your existing folders (including the hidden index files) to the new location. The next time you start &kmail; will use /home/username/.mail instead of /home/username/Mail. Note that &kmail; will lose its filters if you change the mail folder's location but forget to move your existing folders. +Exit &kmail;, make a backup of ~/.trinity/share/config/kmailrc, then open it with an editor and add ⪚ folders=/home/username/.mail to the [General] section. Then move all your existing folders (including the hidden index files) to the new location. The next time you start &kmail; will use /home/username/.mail instead of /home/username/Mail. Note that &kmail; will lose its filters if you change the mail folder's location but forget to move your existing folders. -How can I use mail folders that are not in ~/Mail/? - -To add a whole mbox mail folder use ln /somewhere/Mail/.remotedir.directory ~/Mail/.mymailboxfile.directory. Note that it is not possible to use links to files, only links that point to folders will work. +How can I use mail folders that are not in ~/Mail/? + +To add a whole mbox mail folder use ln /somewhere/Mail/.remotedir.directory ~/Mail/.mymailboxfile.directory. Note that it is not possible to use links to files, only links that point to folders will work. -I'm one of those people whose mails consist of 100 quoted lines and one line written by myself. For some reason this annoys other people. Can &kmail; help me and make everyone's life better? -Sure. Just select a short relevant part of the original mail with the mouse before you reply. Only this part will then be quoted in your reply. +I'm one of those people whose mails consist of 100 quoted lines and one line written by myself. For some reason this annoys other people. Can &kmail; help me and make everyone's life better? +Sure. Just select a short relevant part of the original mail with the mouse before you reply. Only this part will then be quoted in your reply. -For some messages the value in the Date field is unknown or it is not correct. -Probably the Date: header of these messages is broken and &kmail; cannot interpret it. That is not a bug in &kmail; but in the software that sent the mail. +For some messages the value in the Date field is unknown or it is not correct. +Probably the Date: header of these messages is broken and &kmail; cannot interpret it. That is not a bug in &kmail; but in the software that sent the mail. -My signature has two dashes above it. What's up? +My signature has two dashes above it. What's up? -Separating the signature from the message body with two dashes and a space on a single line is common usage. These symbols permit mail clients who recognise them to trim the signatures from a reply. If your signature does not already have this separator, &kmail; will automatically add it. +Separating the signature from the message body with two dashes and a space on a single line is common usage. These symbols permit mail clients who recognise them to trim the signatures from a reply. If your signature does not already have this separator, &kmail; will automatically add it. -&kmail; fetches the same messages over and over again. -This happens if you have enabled Leave fetched messages on the server and your POP3 server does not support the UIDL command. There is currently no workaround besides disabling Leave fetched messages on the server. A more detailed explanation can be found in this mailing list post. +&kmail; fetches the same messages over and over again. +This happens if you have enabled Leave fetched messages on the server and your POP3 server does not support the UIDL command. There is currently no workaround besides disabling Leave fetched messages on the server. A more detailed explanation can be found in this mailing list post. -Are there any known bugs in &kmail;? +Are there any known bugs in &kmail;? -A list of submitted bugs is linked at the &kmail; homepage. Note that not all these bugs are valid. All in all we think that &kmail; is a very robust piece of software. -However, you should not run &kmail; while another email client is already accessing the files in ~/Mail; if you try to do so, you might lose messages. Note that you should make backups of your messages anyway. +A list of submitted bugs is linked at the &kmail; homepage. Note that not all these bugs are valid. All in all we think that &kmail; is a very robust piece of software. +However, you should not run &kmail; while another email client is already accessing the files in ~/Mail; if you try to do so, you might lose messages. Note that you should make backups of your messages anyway. -&kmail; does not display HTML mail properly. -References to external content like images, are disabled by default, as they can be used to track whether and when you read a message. Loading external references can be activated in the Security tab in &kmail;'s configuration dialogue; also Plugins (like Macromedia Flash), &Java; and JavaScript will not be displayed in &kmail; for security reasons and there is no way to activate them. +&kmail; does not display HTML mail properly. +References to external content like images, are disabled by default, as they can be used to track whether and when you read a message. Loading external references can be activated in the Security tab in &kmail;'s configuration dialogue; also Plugins (like Macromedia Flash), &Java; and JavaScript will not be displayed in &kmail; for security reasons and there is no way to activate them. -Can I use two different versions of &kmail; at the same time? Can I go back from a current version of &kmail; to an older one? -You can only run one instance of &kmail; at once. We also recommend to stick to a certain version and not switch back and forth between different versions. Downgrading to an older version will probably cause problems, ⪚ because the index file formats might have changed. Upgrading should never be a problem. +Can I use two different versions of &kmail; at the same time? Can I go back from a current version of &kmail; to an older one? +You can only run one instance of &kmail; at once. We also recommend to stick to a certain version and not switch back and forth between different versions. Downgrading to an older version will probably cause problems, ⪚ because the index file formats might have changed. Upgrading should never be a problem. -Does &kmail; support uuencoded files? -Uuencoded attachments are supported, but inline uuencoded files are not. +Does &kmail; support uuencoded files? +Uuencoded attachments are supported, but inline uuencoded files are not. -&kmail; crashed while I was writing a mail; is that mail is lost now? -&kmail; tries to save your mail to ~/dead.letter in case of a crash. The next time you start &kmail; the mail composer should appear with your mail again; If it does not, try to open ~/dead.letter with an editor. If it does not exist then the crash was so bad that &kmail; could not save your mail. +&kmail; crashed while I was writing a mail; is that mail is lost now? +&kmail; tries to save your mail to ~/dead.letter in case of a crash. The next time you start &kmail; the mail composer should appear with your mail again; If it does not, try to open ~/dead.letter with an editor. If it does not exist then the crash was so bad that &kmail; could not save your mail. -When I try to set a folder to be mailing list-aware, it does not do anything when receiving an email from the list. -Associating a folder with a mailing list has nothing to do with filtering the mailing list messages — you have to add a new filter rule manually; however, once you associated a folder with a mailing list you can use MessageReply to Mailing-List... or MessageNew Message to Mailing-List... and the mailing list address will be set in the To: field. +When I try to set a folder to be mailing list-aware, it does not do anything when receiving an email from the list. +Associating a folder with a mailing list has nothing to do with filtering the mailing list messages — you have to add a new filter rule manually; however, once you associated a folder with a mailing list you can use MessageReply to Mailing-List... or MessageNew Message to Mailing-List... and the mailing list address will be set in the To: field. -My SMTP server requires authentication; Does &kmail; support this? -There are two common techniques used for SMTP authentication: SMTP after POP3 and SMTP Auth. SMTP Auth can be set in the General tab of the SMTP configuration dialogue. To use SMTP after POP3 you have to collect all your messages in the outbox and send them just after you have fetched new mail. You can make &kmail; send the queued messages automatically with the Send messages in outbox folder option on the Accounts configuration page. +My SMTP server requires authentication; Does &kmail; support this? +There are two common techniques used for SMTP authentication: SMTP after POP3 and SMTP Auth. SMTP Auth can be set in the General tab of the SMTP configuration dialogue. To use SMTP after POP3 you have to collect all your messages in the outbox and send them just after you have fetched new mail. You can make &kmail; send the queued messages automatically with the Send messages in outbox folder option on the Accounts configuration page. -Can I use &kmail; and procmail? -Yes, but it is important to do it the right way or you might lose mail. In order to use procmail and &kmail; you need to set up &kmail; so that it will fetch new mail from the spoolfiles in which procmail drops your mail. Do not set up procmail to deliver mail in a &kmail; folder, this cannot work. +Can I use &kmail; and procmail? +Yes, but it is important to do it the right way or you might lose mail. In order to use procmail and &kmail; you need to set up &kmail; so that it will fetch new mail from the spoolfiles in which procmail drops your mail. Do not set up procmail to deliver mail in a &kmail; folder, this cannot work. -For each procmail spoolfile you then need to create an account from which &kmail; will fetch new mail; you also need to make sure you specify the right lockfile name for this account. When setting up an account, &kmail; will do some minimal parsing on your .procmail file, and will try to list every spoolfile it has found, and also the lockfiles next to the procmail lockfile item. procmail lets the user specify lockfiles in three different ways, so there is no way to establish a correspondence between the spoolfiles and lockfiles; so it's really up to you to make sure you specify the right lockfile for each spoolfile. +For each procmail spoolfile you then need to create an account from which &kmail; will fetch new mail; you also need to make sure you specify the right lockfile name for this account. When setting up an account, &kmail; will do some minimal parsing on your .procmail file, and will try to list every spoolfile it has found, and also the lockfiles next to the procmail lockfile item. procmail lets the user specify lockfiles in three different ways, so there is no way to establish a correspondence between the spoolfiles and lockfiles; so it's really up to you to make sure you specify the right lockfile for each spoolfile. -Spellchecking does not recognize non-English characters. -Before you can use spellchecking the first time, you have to configure it. You can do so in the composer window's menu under Settings Spellchecker.... You can set the dictionary and the encoding there. +Spellchecking does not recognize non-English characters. +Before you can use spellchecking the first time, you have to configure it. You can do so in the composer window's menu under Settings Spellchecker.... You can set the dictionary and the encoding there. -How do I use my Eudora/&Netscape;/Outlook/... mail folders in &kmail;? -See the section Using other Mailbox files With &kmail;. +How do I use my Eudora/&Netscape;/Outlook/... mail folders in &kmail;? +See the section Using other Mailbox files With &kmail;. -Can I use encryption with my normal (non-SSL) POP3 account? -If your POP3 server runs an ssh daemon, you can use ssh to tunnel your POP3 connection using the following command: - -ssh - -Modify your &kmail; configuration to fetch the mail via POP3 from localhost and ssh will tunnel the connection for you. If non-encrypted messages have already been sent via Internet, the only advantage of using ssh is that your password will be sent encrypted to the POP3 server. +Can I use encryption with my normal (non-SSL) POP3 account? +If your POP3 server runs an ssh daemon, you can use ssh to tunnel your POP3 connection using the following command: + +ssh + +Modify your &kmail; configuration to fetch the mail via POP3 from localhost and ssh will tunnel the connection for you. If non-encrypted messages have already been sent via Internet, the only advantage of using ssh is that your password will be sent encrypted to the POP3 server. @@ -666,215 +241,59 @@ -Does &kmail; lock the folders it uses? -&kmail; does not lock the files in ~/Mail. -To avoid the risk of losing mail if using a local account it is necessary to ensure that &kmail; uses the same type of locking as your mail delivery agent. - -There are five different locking options you can use: +Does &kmail; lock the folders it uses? +&kmail; does not lock the files in ~/Mail. +To avoid the risk of losing mail if using a local account it is necessary to ensure that &kmail; uses the same type of locking as your mail delivery agent. + +There are five different locking options you can use: -Procmail lockfile -Mutt dotlock -Mutt dotlock privileged -FCNTL (default) -none (use with care) +Procmail lockfile +Mutt dotlock +Mutt dotlock privileged +FCNTL (default) +none (use with care) -Procmail lockfile will use a small utility that comes with procmail called lockfile. You can use this if your mail folder is in a folder where you have write permission. This will not work on your /var/spool/mail/user file in most cases. It will create .lock files on your account when &kmail; is checking for new mail. Please note that this will only work if procmail is installed on your system. - -Mutt dotlock and Mutt dotlock privileged will both use a small utility that comes with mutt called mutt_dotlock. Mutt dotlock can be used in the same way as the Procmail lockfile option, with the same limitation with regards to the /var/spool/mail/ folders. However, the Mutt dotlock privileged option can create lock files in the /var/spool/mail folder. mutt_dotlock is a setgid program and this option will run it in setgid mode. Please note that these options will only work if mutt is installed on your system. - -FCNTL will use the fcntl() system call. - -Usage of FCNTL locking might cause system lockups when the mail spool file is on an NFS mounted device. - -If you do not want to use any locking, the none option is what you want. However, there are risks of losing mail when no locking is used. +Procmail lockfile will use a small utility that comes with procmail called lockfile. You can use this if your mail folder is in a folder where you have write permission. This will not work on your /var/spool/mail/user file in most cases. It will create .lock files on your account when &kmail; is checking for new mail. Please note that this will only work if procmail is installed on your system. + +Mutt dotlock and Mutt dotlock privileged will both use a small utility that comes with mutt called mutt_dotlock. Mutt dotlock can be used in the same way as the Procmail lockfile option, with the same limitation with regards to the /var/spool/mail/ folders. However, the Mutt dotlock privileged option can create lock files in the /var/spool/mail folder. mutt_dotlock is a setgid program and this option will run it in setgid mode. Please note that these options will only work if mutt is installed on your system. + +FCNTL will use the fcntl() system call. + +Usage of FCNTL locking might cause system lockups when the mail spool file is on an NFS mounted device. + +If you do not want to use any locking, the none option is what you want. However, there are risks of losing mail when no locking is used. -How do I leave messages on the server? -See the Download filters chapter. If you want to leave all messages on the server: open up the SettingsConfigure &kmail;... window. Click on the Network page. Select your account from the account list and click the Modify... button. This dialogue contains the Leave fetched messages on the server setting which you must enable. +How do I leave messages on the server? +See the Download filters chapter. If you want to leave all messages on the server: open up the SettingsConfigure &kmail;... window. Click on the Network page. Select your account from the account list and click the Modify... button. This dialogue contains the Leave fetched messages on the server setting which you must enable. -How do I automatically insert a text footer within my messages? -The text footer is also called a signature (not to be confused with a cryptographic signature). Select Settings Configure &kmail;... Look in the Identity page for the Signature tab and add your signature there. Then go to the General tab on the Composer page and enable +How do I automatically insert a text footer within my messages? +The text footer is also called a signature (not to be confused with a cryptographic signature). Select Settings Configure &kmail;... Look in the Identity page for the Signature tab and add your signature there. Then go to the General tab on the Composer page and enable -How do I set up &Sendmail; to work with &kmail; if I have a dial-up connection? +How do I set up &Sendmail; to work with &kmail; if I have a dial-up connection? -First you should check if your distribution can do this for you. It probably has already been set up during installation. +First you should check if your distribution can do this for you. It probably has already been set up during installation. -If that is not the case, you may want to have a look at the Mail Queue HOWTO. +If that is not the case, you may want to have a look at the Mail Queue HOWTO. -I've seen demonstrations of remote control behavior with &kmail;. Is there any documentation on the available interfaces? -You can get a list of functions by using this command in a shell: dcop . Some documentation is also available in tdenetwork/kmail/kmailIface.h and tdenetwork/kmail/mailcomposerIface.h. +I've seen demonstrations of remote control behavior with &kmail;. Is there any documentation on the available interfaces? +You can get a list of functions by using this command in a shell: dcop . Some documentation is also available in tdenetwork/kmail/kmailIface.h and tdenetwork/kmail/mailcomposerIface.h. -When I reply to a message, only a part of the message is quoted. How come? -This can happen when the message contains two dashes and a space on a single line. This is seen as the start of the signature. The remaining part of the message will not be quoted, because when you reply to a message KMail strips the signature. +When I reply to a message, only a part of the message is quoted. How come? +This can happen when the message contains two dashes and a space on a single line. This is seen as the start of the signature. The remaining part of the message will not be quoted, because when you reply to a message KMail strips the signature. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/getting-started.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/getting-started.docbook index 7ce32399782..4d5d512e6d1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/getting-started.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/getting-started.docbook @@ -2,581 +2,132 @@ -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net -
 +David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net +
 -Michel Boyer de la Giroday
michel@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se -
 +Michel Boyer de la Giroday
michel@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
British English English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
British English English -2004-07-13 1.7 - -Getting Started - -This is a short introduction to &kmail; and its usage so you can start working with it right away. For more in-depth information see the Using &kmail; section. Note that &kmail;'s installation is described in the appendix. - -Invoking &kmail; for the first time creates a folder called Mail in your home folder. This folder contains the initial folders (inbox, outbox, sent-mail, wastebin and drafts). Use Settings Configure &kmail;... to enter some initial information so &kmail; will be able to properly retrieve and send your messages. - -The Configure window consists of six sections: Identities, Network, Appearance, Composer, Security and Misc. - -To begin sending and receiving messages you will only have to change some settings in the Identities and Network pages. +2004-07-13 1.7 + +Getting Started + +This is a short introduction to &kmail; and its usage so you can start working with it right away. For more in-depth information see the Using &kmail; section. Note that &kmail;'s installation is described in the appendix. + +Invoking &kmail; for the first time creates a folder called Mail in your home folder. This folder contains the initial folders (inbox, outbox, sent-mail, wastebin and drafts). Use Settings Configure &kmail;... to enter some initial information so &kmail; will be able to properly retrieve and send your messages. + +The Configure window consists of six sections: Identities, Network, Appearance, Composer, Security and Misc. + +To begin sending and receiving messages you will only have to change some settings in the Identities and Network pages. - Setting your Identity - - The settings in the Identities page are fairly straightforward. Select your default identity and click Modify. Fill in the Your name field with your full name (⪚ John Doe) and the Organisation field (optional) with the appropriate information. - Next, fill in the Email address field with your email address (⪚ john@example.net). - If you are using PGP or GnuPG you can set your &openpgp; keys and/or &smime; certificates in the Cryptography tab. - Optionally, go to the Signature tab and enter your signature. This is a short text that will be automatically appended to all your messages. It has nothing to do with digital signatures. + Setting your Identity + + The settings in the Identities page are fairly straightforward. Select your default identity and click Modify. Fill in the Your name field with your full name (⪚ John Doe) and the Organisation field (optional) with the appropriate information. + Next, fill in the Email address field with your email address (⪚ john@example.net). + If you are using PGP or GnuPG you can set your &openpgp; keys and/or &smime; certificates in the Cryptography tab. + Optionally, go to the Signature tab and enter your signature. This is a short text that will be automatically appended to all your messages. It has nothing to do with digital signatures. -Setting up your Account +Setting up your Account -The Network page contains the settings that tell &kmail; how to send and receive your email messages. Many of these settings can vary greatly depending on the setup of your system and on the kind of network that your mail server is located in. If you do not know what setting to choose or what to put in a field, consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or system administrator. +The Network page contains the settings that tell &kmail; how to send and receive your email messages. Many of these settings can vary greatly depending on the setup of your system and on the kind of network that your mail server is located in. If you do not know what setting to choose or what to put in a field, consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or system administrator. -Sending Messages - -The Sending tab provides a list of ways to send messages. The first item in the list is the default way to send messages. Using the Add... button you can choose between two different ways of sending messages: SMTP and Sendmail. &Sendmail; here means a local software installation -- this has a reputation of being difficult to set up, so if you do not already have a working &Sendmail; configuration, choose SMTP and fill in the Name field with a descriptive name (⪚ My Mail Account) and the Host field with the name and domain of your mail server (⪚ smtp.provider.com). You will probably not need to change the Port setting (the default is 25). +Sending Messages + +The Sending tab provides a list of ways to send messages. The first item in the list is the default way to send messages. Using the Add... button you can choose between two different ways of sending messages: SMTP and Sendmail. &Sendmail; here means a local software installation -- this has a reputation of being difficult to set up, so if you do not already have a working &Sendmail; configuration, choose SMTP and fill in the Name field with a descriptive name (⪚ My Mail Account) and the Host field with the name and domain of your mail server (⪚ smtp.provider.com). You will probably not need to change the Port setting (the default is 25). -If you do want to use &Sendmail; and you are using a dial-up connection, follow the instructions for setting up sendmail for a dial-up connection in the &FAQ; section. - -The way of sending messages configured here will be used for your default identity and for all other identities that have no own way of sending messages. You can use different ways of sending messages for different identities by selecting the Special transport checkbox in the Advanced tab of the Identities section. - -A description of the other options can be found in the Configuration chapter. +If you do want to use &Sendmail; and you are using a dial-up connection, follow the instructions for setting up sendmail for a dial-up connection in the &FAQ; section. + +The way of sending messages configured here will be used for your default identity and for all other identities that have no own way of sending messages. You can use different ways of sending messages for different identities by selecting the Special transport checkbox in the Advanced tab of the Identities section. + +A description of the other options can be found in the Configuration chapter. -Options relevant to <acronym ->Kolab</acronym -> server - -When configuring a SMTP account with a Kolab server Host, you need to check the Server requires authentification option and to fill in your Kolab user's email address and password in the Login and Password fields. Select then the Security tab and click on the Check What the Server Supports for automated setup of your Security configuration. The default should be TLS/PLAIN. The Kolab server supports SSL/PLAIN as well. Those settings may of course be configured manually. +Options relevant to <acronym>Kolab</acronym> server + +When configuring a SMTP account with a Kolab server Host, you need to check the Server requires authentification option and to fill in your Kolab user's email address and password in the Login and Password fields. Select then the Security tab and click on the Check What the Server Supports for automated setup of your Security configuration. The default should be TLS/PLAIN. The Kolab server supports SSL/PLAIN as well. Those settings may of course be configured manually. -Receiving Messages - -To set up an account so you can receive mail, press the Add... button in the Receiving tab. You will then be prompted for the type of your email account. Most users should select POP3 or IMAP. If you want to use a local mailbox file, please see the FAQ about file locking. +Receiving Messages + +To set up an account so you can receive mail, press the Add... button in the Receiving tab. You will then be prompted for the type of your email account. Most users should select POP3 or IMAP. If you want to use a local mailbox file, please see the FAQ about file locking. -You will then be presented with the Add account window. First, fill in the Name field to name your account. You can choose any name you like. Login, Password, and Host should be filled in with the appropriate information from your ISP or system administrator. You should not need to change the Port setting (the default for POP3 is 110, the default for IMAP is 143). +You will then be presented with the Add account window. First, fill in the Name field to name your account. You can choose any name you like. Login, Password, and Host should be filled in with the appropriate information from your ISP or system administrator. You should not need to change the Port setting (the default for POP3 is 110, the default for IMAP is 143). -Options relevant to <acronym ->Kolab</acronym -> server -select Disconnected IMAP when choosing your Account Type. Fill in the Login and Password fields with respectively your user email address and password on the Kolab server. In the Security section click on the Check What the Server Support button for automated set-up of your Security configuration. The default should be TLS/PLAIN. The Kolab server supports SSL/PLAIN as well. Those settings may of course be configured manually. -If you want to use the "Out of Office" Replies functionality of the Kolab server, set-up the Filtering section of you DIMAP account by checking the Server supports Sieve option as well as Reuse host and login configuration, Managesieve port should be set to 2000 as default. +Options relevant to <acronym>Kolab</acronym> server +select Disconnected IMAP when choosing your Account Type. Fill in the Login and Password fields with respectively your user email address and password on the Kolab server. In the Security section click on the Check What the Server Support button for automated set-up of your Security configuration. The default should be TLS/PLAIN. The Kolab server supports SSL/PLAIN as well. Those settings may of course be configured manually. +If you want to use the "Out of Office" Replies functionality of the Kolab server, set-up the Filtering section of you DIMAP account by checking the Server supports Sieve option as well as Reuse host and login configuration, Managesieve port should be set to 2000 as default. -Options only relevant to DIMAP (<acronym ->Kolab</acronym -> server) -After having configured your Disconnect IMAP account, you need to activate the Groupware functionalities and set-up the Misc page for KMail. -In the Misc page, of the Configure dialogue, choose the Groupware tab. Check the Enable IMAP resource functionality option and select Kolab (XML) as Format used for the groupware folders. The Resource folders are in account combo-box should be set on the Receiving (kolab user) account of your choice (if you happen to have several accounts).You may if you wish hide the groupware folder by checking this option. It is recommended to check both Groupware Compatibility and Legacy Options for compatibility with an eventual Kolab Microsoft Outlook client for sending invitations and replies from a Kolab KDE client. +Options only relevant to DIMAP (<acronym>Kolab</acronym> server) +After having configured your Disconnect IMAP account, you need to activate the Groupware functionalities and set-up the Misc page for KMail. +In the Misc page, of the Configure dialogue, choose the Groupware tab. Check the Enable IMAP resource functionality option and select Kolab (XML) as Format used for the groupware folders. The Resource folders are in account combo-box should be set on the Receiving (kolab user) account of your choice (if you happen to have several accounts).You may if you wish hide the groupware folder by checking this option. It is recommended to check both Groupware Compatibility and Legacy Options for compatibility with an eventual Kolab Microsoft Outlook client for sending invitations and replies from a Kolab KDE client. -Options only relevant to <acronym ->IMAP</acronym -> -If you are using IMAP, you can optionally specify a path in the Prefix to folders field. This tells &kmail; where it can find your folders on the server. If you also have a shell account on the server and the messages are stored in your home folder it might be useful to store the messages in a subfolder Mail. Use this as a value in the Prefix to folders field so that &kmail; does not mix up mailbox files and other files. If you are not interested in this feature, simple leave the field blank. - -If you check Automatically compact folders &kmail; removes the messages you deleted from the server as soon as you leave a folder. Otherwise the messages are only marked as deleted and it is up to you to compact the folders manually by using the menu item FileCompact All Folders. -If you check Show hidden folders, folders whose name starts with a dot are also displayed. +Options only relevant to <acronym>IMAP</acronym> +If you are using IMAP, you can optionally specify a path in the Prefix to folders field. This tells &kmail; where it can find your folders on the server. If you also have a shell account on the server and the messages are stored in your home folder it might be useful to store the messages in a subfolder Mail. Use this as a value in the Prefix to folders field so that &kmail; does not mix up mailbox files and other files. If you are not interested in this feature, simple leave the field blank. + +If you check Automatically compact folders &kmail; removes the messages you deleted from the server as soon as you leave a folder. Otherwise the messages are only marked as deleted and it is up to you to compact the folders manually by using the menu item FileCompact All Folders. +If you check Show hidden folders, folders whose name starts with a dot are also displayed. -Options only relevant to POP3 - -Select Leave fetched messages on the server if you want to leave your messages on the server after you downloaded them. - -Select Exclude from "Check Mail" if you do not want to check this account whenever you use FileCheck Mail. You can still check for new messages on this account with FileCheck Mail In. - -Select Enable interval mail checking if you want &kmail; to check for new messages automatically. The interval can be specified below under Check interval. - -inbox is the default folder for incoming messages. If you want to change that for some reason, you can do so with Destination folder. But what you probably want is a filter, which has nothing to do with this option. - -With Precommand you can specify any program that &kmail; will execute just before fetching mail. Please specify the full path (do not use ~) and note that &kmail; will not continue until the program returns. - -On the Extras tab you can select Use pipelining for faster mail download if this is supported by your server. You should carefully test this to make sure it works safely. +Options only relevant to POP3 + +Select Leave fetched messages on the server if you want to leave your messages on the server after you downloaded them. + +Select Exclude from "Check Mail" if you do not want to check this account whenever you use FileCheck Mail. You can still check for new messages on this account with FileCheck Mail In. + +Select Enable interval mail checking if you want &kmail; to check for new messages automatically. The interval can be specified below under Check interval. + +inbox is the default folder for incoming messages. If you want to change that for some reason, you can do so with Destination folder. But what you probably want is a filter, which has nothing to do with this option. + +With Precommand you can specify any program that &kmail; will execute just before fetching mail. Please specify the full path (do not use ~) and note that &kmail; will not continue until the program returns. + +On the Extras tab you can select Use pipelining for faster mail download if this is supported by your server. You should carefully test this to make sure it works safely. -Options for both <acronym ->IMAP</acronym -> and POP3 +Options for both <acronym>IMAP</acronym> and POP3 -If you select Store POP password in configuration file or Store IMAP password in configuration file &kmail; will remember your password so you will not have to type it every time you start &kmail; and fetch new mail. - -Be warned that &kmail; cannot really encrypt your password, so people who can access your configuration files (⪚ system administrators) can easily get your password if you select this option. - -&kmail; supports encryption via SSL and TLS (TLS should be preferred if it is available). - -For POP3 &kmail; supports: +If you select Store POP password in configuration file or Store IMAP password in configuration file &kmail; will remember your password so you will not have to type it every time you start &kmail; and fetch new mail. + +Be warned that &kmail; cannot really encrypt your password, so people who can access your configuration files (⪚ system administrators) can easily get your password if you select this option. + +&kmail; supports encryption via SSL and TLS (TLS should be preferred if it is available). + +For POP3 &kmail; supports: -Clear text, -PLAIN, -LOGIN, -CRAM-MD5 (recommended if DIGEST-MD5 is not available), -DIGEST-MD5 (recommended) and -APOP authentication. +Clear text, +PLAIN, +LOGIN, +CRAM-MD5 (recommended if DIGEST-MD5 is not available), +DIGEST-MD5 (recommended) and +APOP authentication. -DIGEST-MD5, CRAM-MD5 and APOP are secure on their own, the other options are only secure when used together with SSL or TLS. You should only use Clear text if your server does not support any of the other authentication methods. Additionally, for IMAP Anonymous is supported, but APOP is not. Use the Check what the server supports button on the Extras or Security tab to automatically select the most secure settings supported by your server. - -You are now ready to send and receive mail. For IMAP, just open your folders in the folder tree in &kmail;'s main window. &kmail; then connects to your server and displays the messages it finds. For POP3 use FileCheck Mail. +DIGEST-MD5, CRAM-MD5 and APOP are secure on their own, the other options are only secure when used together with SSL or TLS. You should only use Clear text if your server does not support any of the other authentication methods. Additionally, for IMAP Anonymous is supported, but APOP is not. Use the Check what the server supports button on the Extras or Security tab to automatically select the most secure settings supported by your server. + +You are now ready to send and receive mail. For IMAP, just open your folders in the folder tree in &kmail;'s main window. &kmail; then connects to your server and displays the messages it finds. For POP3 use FileCheck Mail. @@ -585,50 +136,11 @@ -Testing your Setup - -First, you should send yourself a message to test your configuration. To send a message, either hit &Ctrl;N, select the New Message icon or select the MessageNew Message... menu item. The composer window will appear. Fill in the To: field with your email address and type something in the Subject field. Send the message by selecting Message Send . +Testing your Setup + +First, you should send yourself a message to test your configuration. To send a message, either hit &Ctrl;N, select the New Message icon or select the MessageNew Message... menu item. The composer window will appear. Fill in the To: field with your email address and type something in the Subject field. Send the message by selecting Message Send . -To check your email, select FileCheck Mail. In the lower right corner of the main window, a progress bar will indicate how many messages are being downloaded. If you receive the message you just sent, then congratulations! If, however, you receive any error messages while testing your setup, make sure that your network connection is working and recheck your settings at Settings Configure &kmail;.... +To check your email, select FileCheck Mail. In the lower right corner of the main window, a progress bar will indicate how many messages are being downloaded. If you receive the message you just sent, then congratulations! If, however, you receive any error messages while testing your setup, make sure that your network connection is working and recheck your settings at Settings Configure &kmail;.... diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/importing.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/importing.docbook index 3f0e0fc5f18..5cf77a7bbef 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/importing.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/importing.docbook @@ -2,376 +2,127 @@ -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net -
 +David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-10-03 1.5 +2002-10-03 1.5 -Using other Mailbox Files with &kmail; +Using other Mailbox Files with &kmail; -&kmail; offers an import tool for the messages and address books of some other email clients. You can access it using Tools Import.... Please make sure that you compact your folders in the other email client, no matter if you are going to use the import utility or if you are going to copy files manually. You only need to read this chapter if this tool does not work for you. +&kmail; offers an import tool for the messages and address books of some other email clients. You can access it using Tools Import.... Please make sure that you compact your folders in the other email client, no matter if you are going to use the import utility or if you are going to copy files manually. You only need to read this chapter if this tool does not work for you. -This section is for all of the users who need to move email messages from their previous email client over to &kmail;. &kmail; can store its messages using mbox or maildir formats, which are the most widely-used mailbox formats on &UNIX; systems. Mbox mailboxes store messages in one file, identifying where messages start and end with a From line (do not mix this up with the From: header that contains the message's sender); Maildir uses one file per message. For many &UNIX; email clients, all you must do is move your mailboxes to ~/Mail (or make Mail a symbolic link to the folder containing your mailboxes), make sure they are writable by your user, and launch &kmail;. The mailboxes should now show up correctly in &kmail;. +This section is for all of the users who need to move email messages from their previous email client over to &kmail;. &kmail; can store its messages using mbox or maildir formats, which are the most widely-used mailbox formats on &UNIX; systems. Mbox mailboxes store messages in one file, identifying where messages start and end with a From line (do not mix this up with the From: header that contains the message's sender); Maildir uses one file per message. For many &UNIX; email clients, all you must do is move your mailboxes to ~/Mail (or make Mail a symbolic link to the folder containing your mailboxes), make sure they are writable by your user, and launch &kmail;. The mailboxes should now show up correctly in &kmail;. -Please have a look at the Tools section of &kmail;'s homepage first, to see if there is a tool that imports your mailbox and maybe even address book. +Please have a look at the Tools section of &kmail;'s homepage first, to see if there is a tool that imports your mailbox and maybe even address book. -Do not use a second email client that accesses the files in ~/Mail while &kmail; is running or you might lose messages. This section only explains how to import mailboxes to &kmail; once; it is not useful to you if you're planning to use several email clients for your mailboxes in the future. +Do not use a second email client that accesses the files in ~/Mail while &kmail; is running or you might lose messages. This section only explains how to import mailboxes to &kmail; once; it is not useful to you if you're planning to use several email clients for your mailboxes in the future. -Eudora Lite/Eudora Pro +Eudora Lite/Eudora Pro -Eudora uses the mbox format in its mail files. To use them with &kmail;, make sure that your Eudora mailboxes have been compacted, then copy the .mbx files (&Windows; Eudora) or Eudora mailbox files (&Mac; Eudora) to your ~/Mail folder. You do not need to copy the index files. Once you start &kmail;, the mailboxes should appear in the Folders pane and the messages should be accessible in the Headers pane. -If messages do not appear in the Headers pane, your mailbox files may still contain &Windows; or &Mac; line-feed characters. Use your favourite text editor, the recode command or a scripting language to change the &Windows; or &Mac; line feeds to &UNIX; line feeds. +Eudora uses the mbox format in its mail files. To use them with &kmail;, make sure that your Eudora mailboxes have been compacted, then copy the .mbx files (&Windows; Eudora) or Eudora mailbox files (&Mac; Eudora) to your ~/Mail folder. You do not need to copy the index files. Once you start &kmail;, the mailboxes should appear in the Folders pane and the messages should be accessible in the Headers pane. +If messages do not appear in the Headers pane, your mailbox files may still contain &Windows; or &Mac; line-feed characters. Use your favourite text editor, the recode command or a scripting language to change the &Windows; or &Mac; line feeds to &UNIX; line feeds. -Mailsmith +Mailsmith -Mailsmith runs on &Mac; and uses its own database format; however it is possible to export mail into mbox format using FileExport Mail on a selected mailbox or on selected messages. Once the messages have been exported, translate the &Mac; line breaks to &UNIX; line breaks using your favourite editor, or using the following command under &Linux;: +Mailsmith runs on &Mac; and uses its own database format; however it is possible to export mail into mbox format using FileExport Mail on a selected mailbox or on selected messages. Once the messages have been exported, translate the &Mac; line breaks to &UNIX; line breaks using your favourite editor, or using the following command under &Linux;: -cat | perl -e 'while (<STDIN>) { s/\r/\n/gi; print $_ ;}' > mail-unix.txt +cat | perl -e 'while (<STDIN>) { s/\r/\n/gi; print $_ ;}' > mail-unix.txt -&kmail; will only recognise mboxes placed directly in the ~/Mail/ folder. This means that a folder hierarchy cannot be preserved by simply moving files into the ~/Mail/ folder, but will need to be reconstructed within &kmail; manually. +&kmail; will only recognise mboxes placed directly in the ~/Mail/ folder. This means that a folder hierarchy cannot be preserved by simply moving files into the ~/Mail/ folder, but will need to be reconstructed within &kmail; manually. -MMDF +MMDF -This format is close enough to the mailbox format that &kmail; should be able to use these mailboxes if you just copy them to your ~/Mail folder; however, MMDF mailboxes have not been tested with &kmail;, so your results may vary. If you can get this format to work with &kmail;, please let us know so we can include more specific directions in the next documentation release. +This format is close enough to the mailbox format that &kmail; should be able to use these mailboxes if you just copy them to your ~/Mail folder; however, MMDF mailboxes have not been tested with &kmail;, so your results may vary. If you can get this format to work with &kmail;, please let us know so we can include more specific directions in the next documentation release. -MH mailboxes +MH mailboxes -MH mailboxes are directories containing files that correspond to each message in that mailbox. A shell script to convert MH mailboxes to mbox mailboxes, mh2kmail, is included at least in the source releases of &kmail;, but maybe not in the packaged releases. Running this script on a MH folder will convert it to an mbox file. We strongly suggest that you back up your MH mail folders before you use this script. +MH mailboxes are directories containing files that correspond to each message in that mailbox. A shell script to convert MH mailboxes to mbox mailboxes, mh2kmail, is included at least in the source releases of &kmail;, but maybe not in the packaged releases. Running this script on a MH folder will convert it to an mbox file. We strongly suggest that you back up your MH mail folders before you use this script. -Forte Agent +Forte Agent -In Agent: +In Agent: -Select the messages to export +Select the messages to export -Select FILESAVE MESSAGES AS +Select FILESAVE MESSAGES AS -Mark the UNIX FORMAT and SAVE RAW boxes +Mark the UNIX FORMAT and SAVE RAW boxes -Give File a .txt extension and save. +Give File a .txt extension and save. -In &kde;: +In &kde;: -Move the previously-saved file to the correct ~/Mail folder +Move the previously-saved file to the correct ~/Mail folder -Rename file without .txt extension +Rename file without .txt extension -When you open &kmail; the new folder with appropriate messages will be there. +When you open &kmail; the new folder with appropriate messages will be there. -&Netscape; Mail +&Netscape; Mail -If you are using &Netscape; 4.x, the mail files should be found in ~/nsmail; if you are using &Netscape; 6.x, they're buried in a folder deep in the ~/.mozilla subfolder, something like: /home/user_name/.mozilla/user_name/2ts1ixha.slt/Mail/Mail/server_name (the 2ts1ixha.slt string will probably vary, so check it on your own system.) The [...]/Mail/Mail folder contains one subfolder for each account from which you receive mail through Netscape (⪚ [...]/Mail/Mail/math.university.edu); you will need to copy files from each of them if you want everything to be accessible under &kmail;. +If you are using &Netscape; 4.x, the mail files should be found in ~/nsmail; if you are using &Netscape; 6.x, they're buried in a folder deep in the ~/.mozilla subfolder, something like: /home/user_name/.mozilla/user_name/2ts1ixha.slt/Mail/Mail/server_name (the 2ts1ixha.slt string will probably vary, so check it on your own system.) The [...]/Mail/Mail folder contains one subfolder for each account from which you receive mail through Netscape (⪚ [...]/Mail/Mail/math.university.edu); you will need to copy files from each of them if you want everything to be accessible under &kmail;. -If you have no subfolders, just copy all of the &Netscape; files to ~/Mail, make sure that they are writable (only by your user, of course) and restart &kmail;: all of the messages will now appear in &kmail; folders. (Note that if you use a command like cp * ~/Mail, you should follow it with rm ~/Mail/*.msf; every &Netscape; 6 folder has a corresponding .msf file, and if you do not get rid of them you will have a bunch of spurious empty folders). +If you have no subfolders, just copy all of the &Netscape; files to ~/Mail, make sure that they are writable (only by your user, of course) and restart &kmail;: all of the messages will now appear in &kmail; folders. (Note that if you use a command like cp * ~/Mail, you should follow it with rm ~/Mail/*.msf; every &Netscape; 6 folder has a corresponding .msf file, and if you do not get rid of them you will have a bunch of spurious empty folders). -If you were using subfolders under &Netscape; (⪚ a main folder called Work with subfolders called Jim and Nancy), there are additional steps required. First, create the main folder (Work) in &kmail; and create a temporary child folder under it (by right-clicking on the folder name and selecting Create child folder); it does not matter what you call this folder -- dummy or the default unnamed, for example. Once a child folder has been requested, &kmail; creates a hidden folder in ~/Mail called (in this example) .Work.directory. You can then copy your &Netscape; subfolder files (Jim and Nancy) into ~/Mail/.Work.directory, and restart &kmail;; the child folders will appear under the main folder Work. Of course, this procedure may be extended for sub-subfolders, to any depth. (You can remove the temporary child folders afterwards, unless it amuses you to have a Work subfolder called dummy). +If you were using subfolders under &Netscape; (⪚ a main folder called Work with subfolders called Jim and Nancy), there are additional steps required. First, create the main folder (Work) in &kmail; and create a temporary child folder under it (by right-clicking on the folder name and selecting Create child folder); it does not matter what you call this folder -- dummy or the default unnamed, for example. Once a child folder has been requested, &kmail; creates a hidden folder in ~/Mail called (in this example) .Work.directory. You can then copy your &Netscape; subfolder files (Jim and Nancy) into ~/Mail/.Work.directory, and restart &kmail;; the child folders will appear under the main folder Work. Of course, this procedure may be extended for sub-subfolders, to any depth. (You can remove the temporary child folders afterwards, unless it amuses you to have a Work subfolder called dummy). -Pegasus Mail +Pegasus Mail -Pegasus for win32 uses single files for Mail folders similar to &kmail;. Pegasus mail folder files have the extension .pmm but they are the same format as mbox except the messages do not start with the From header, but with a control character. To work around this, replace each instance of the control character with From aaa@aaa Mon Jan 01 00:00:00 1997. This From line should be the first line of every message, before the Received: and other headers. Make sure to use a text editor that lets you save the files in &UNIX; format or create new folders in Pegasus that are in &UNIX; format and copy your messages there. +Pegasus for win32 uses single files for Mail folders similar to &kmail;. Pegasus mail folder files have the extension .pmm but they are the same format as mbox except the messages do not start with the From header, but with a control character. To work around this, replace each instance of the control character with From aaa@aaa Mon Jan 01 00:00:00 1997. This From line should be the first line of every message, before the Received: and other headers. Make sure to use a text editor that lets you save the files in &UNIX; format or create new folders in Pegasus that are in &UNIX; format and copy your messages there. -Maildir / Outlook Express / xfmail +Maildir / Outlook Express / xfmail -Tools to convert these formats are available at the Tools section of &kmail;'s homepage. +Tools to convert these formats are available at the Tools section of &kmail;'s homepage. -Lotus Notes, BeOS Mail files, cc: Mail, &etc;... +Lotus Notes, BeOS Mail files, cc: Mail, &etc;... -First you should have a look at Tools section of &kmail;'s homepage if there are tools to convert your messages. -Mail programs not listed here or on the homepage probably do not work with &kmail; as they use proprietary mail formats that &kmail; cannot understand. However, there is no harm in trying! If the mailbox file looks similar to the mbox format, try copying the mailbox file (remember, the index file is not needed) to your ~/Mail folder and see what happens if you start &kmail;. If you get mailboxes from your favorite email client to work in &kmail;, please tell us how you did it so that we can include directions in a future revision of this documentation. +First you should have a look at Tools section of &kmail;'s homepage if there are tools to convert your messages. +Mail programs not listed here or on the homepage probably do not work with &kmail; as they use proprietary mail formats that &kmail; cannot understand. However, there is no harm in trying! If the mailbox file looks similar to the mbox format, try copying the mailbox file (remember, the index file is not needed) to your ~/Mail folder and see what happens if you start &kmail;. If you get mailboxes from your favorite email client to work in &kmail;, please tell us how you did it so that we can include directions in a future revision of this documentation. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/index.docbook index 112a6cfc795..d5825eb2da6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/index.docbook @@ -11,50 +11,27 @@ - - HTML"> - GPG"> - GpgSM"> - MDN"> - ACL"> - IMAP"> - NNTP"> - OpenPGP"> - S/MIME"> - Kolab"> + + HTML"> + GPG"> + GpgSM"> + MDN"> + ACL"> + IMAP"> + NNTP"> + OpenPGP"> + S/MIME"> + Kolab"> ]> -The &kmail; Handbook +The &kmail; Handbook -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net -
 +David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2004-07-13 -1.7 +2004-07-13 +1.7 -1999 -2000 -2001 -2002 -David Rugge +1999 +2000 +2001 +2002 +David Rugge -2003 -Daniel Naber +2003 +Daniel Naber -2004 -Daniel Naber -Ingo Klöcker +2004 +Daniel Naber +Ingo Klöcker -&kmail; is &kde;'s powerful and user friendly email client. +&kmail; is &kde;'s powerful and user friendly email client. -KDE -Mail -email -Client -POP3 -IMAP -PGP -GnuPG -GPG -Kolab +KDE +Mail +email +Client +POP3 +IMAP +PGP +GnuPG +GPG +Kolab @@ -203,17 +121,14 @@ &kmail-credits-and-licenses; -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &kmail; +How to obtain &kmail; &install.intro.documentation; -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation &install.compile.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/intro.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/intro.docbook index 73a9047757d..5432fa12a5a 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/intro.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/intro.docbook @@ -2,83 +2,34 @@ -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
British English English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
British English English -2004-07-13 1.7 +2004-07-13 1.7 -Introduction +Introduction -The &kmail; Team welcomes you to &kmail;, a user-friendly email client for the K Desktop Environment. Our goal is to make &kmail; a program that is beautiful and intuitive without sacrificing power. +The &kmail; Team welcomes you to &kmail;, a user-friendly email client for the K Desktop Environment. Our goal is to make &kmail; a program that is beautiful and intuitive without sacrificing power. -If you have never set up an email client on a &UNIX; system before, we suggest that you read through the Getting Started section first so that your setup goes smoothly. +If you have never set up an email client on a &UNIX; system before, we suggest that you read through the Getting Started section first so that your setup goes smoothly. -Since most people do not read documentation anyway, here is a collection of the most helpful tips: +Since most people do not read documentation anyway, here is a collection of the most helpful tips: -You do not have to use your mouse to use &kmail;. Everything can be done by using Keyboard Shortcuts. +You do not have to use your mouse to use &kmail;. Everything can be done by using Keyboard Shortcuts. -Although &kmail; can be considered reliable you should keep backups of your messages, &ie; just copy the files and folders in ~/Mail (including the hidden ones that start with a dot) to a safe place. +Although &kmail; can be considered reliable you should keep backups of your messages, &ie; just copy the files and folders in ~/Mail (including the hidden ones that start with a dot) to a safe place. -&kmail;'s homepage can be found at http://kmail.kde.org. There you will find useful links, ⪚ to the user and developer mailing lists. Please report bugs in &kmail; using HelpReport Bug.... +&kmail;'s homepage can be found at http://kmail.kde.org. There you will find useful links, ⪚ to the user and developer mailing lists. Please report bugs in &kmail; using HelpReport Bug.... -We hope you will enjoy &kmail;! +We hope you will enjoy &kmail;! diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/menus.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/menus.docbook index 1157641c3f5..870f7489c06 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/menus.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/menus.docbook @@ -2,292 +2,129 @@ -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net -
 +David Rugge
davidrugge@mediaone.net +
 -Michel Boyer de la Giroday
michel@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se -
 +Michel Boyer de la Giroday
michel@klaralvdalens-datakonsult.se +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
British English English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
British English English -2004-07-11 1.7 +2004-07-11 1.7 -Menu Entries +Menu Entries -Each menu item is discussed below. When there is a keyboard shortcut that performs a menu item function, the default shortcut is listed with the menu item. +Each menu item is discussed below. When there is a keyboard shortcut that performs a menu item function, the default shortcut is listed with the menu item. -The Main Window +The Main Window -<guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu -File New Window +File New Window -Creates a new main window. +Creates a new main window. -&Ctrl;O File Open... +&Ctrl;O File Open... -Allows you to open files which contain email messages. +Allows you to open files which contain email messages. -&Ctrl;S File Save As... +&Ctrl;S File Save As... -Saves the currently displayed message to a text file, including all the headers and attachments. +Saves the currently displayed message to a text file, including all the headers and attachments. -&Ctrl;P File Print... +&Ctrl;P File Print... -Display a dialogue that lets you prints the currently displayed message. +Display a dialogue that lets you prints the currently displayed message. -File Compact All Folders +File Compact All Folders -Will compact all folders, &ie; it will really move and delete the messages on disk according to how you have moved and deleted them in &kmail;. +Will compact all folders, &ie; it will really move and delete the messages on disk according to how you have moved and deleted them in &kmail;. -File Expire All Folders +File Expire All Folders -Delete old messages from all folders, according to the rules in each folder's Properties dialogue (the default is not to delete old messages at all). +Delete old messages from all folders, according to the rules in each folder's Properties dialogue (the default is not to delete old messages at all). -File Refresh Local &imap; Cache +File Refresh Local &imap; Cache -This will remove all changes that you have done locally to your IMAP folders and re-download everything from the server. Use this if the local cache was corrupted. +This will remove all changes that you have done locally to your IMAP folders and re-download everything from the server. Use this if the local cache was corrupted. -File Empty All Wastebin Folders +File Empty All Wastebin Folders -Use this to empty all wastebin folders, &ie; the local wastebin folder and all wastebin folders that you might have on &imap; servers. +Use this to empty all wastebin folders, &ie; the local wastebin folder and all wastebin folders that you might have on &imap; servers. -&Ctrl;L File Check Mail +&Ctrl;L File Check Mail -Checks for new messages in all your accounts, except those that have Exclude from "Check Mail" enabled. +Checks for new messages in all your accounts, except those that have Exclude from "Check Mail" enabled. -File Check Mail In +File Check Mail In -Submenu that lets you check for new messages from a particular account. +Submenu that lets you check for new messages from a particular account. -File Send Queued Messages +File Send Queued Messages -Sends the messages that are in your outbox. +Sends the messages that are in your outbox. -&Ctrl;Q File Quit +&Ctrl;Q File Quit -Closes the current main window or exits &kmail; if there is only this one window. +Closes the current main window or exits &kmail; if there is only this one window. @@ -297,178 +134,79 @@ -<guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu -&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo +&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo -Revokes your last move or delete action. Note that you cannot undo a deletion from the wastebin. +Revokes your last move or delete action. Note that you cannot undo a deletion from the wastebin. -&Ctrl;C Edit Copy +&Ctrl;C Edit Copy -Copies selected text to the clipboard. +Copies selected text to the clipboard. -T Edit Edit Message +T Edit Edit Message -Edits the selected message if it is editable. Only messages in the outbox and drafts folder can be edited. +Edits the selected message if it is editable. Only messages in the outbox and drafts folder can be edited. -D Edit Move to Wastebin +D Edit Move to Wastebin -Moves the selected messages to the wastebin folder. If the selected messages are already in the wastebin folder, they will really be deleted. +Moves the selected messages to the wastebin folder. If the selected messages are already in the wastebin folder, they will really be deleted. -&Shift;Delete Edit Delete +&Shift;Delete Edit Delete -Deletes the selected messages. There is no way to recover the messages once they are deleted with this command. +Deletes the selected messages. There is no way to recover the messages once they are deleted with this command. -&Ctrl;F Edit Find in Message... +&Ctrl;F Edit Find in Message... -Lets you search for a string in the currently displayed message. +Lets you search for a string in the currently displayed message. -&Ctrl;A Edit Select All Messages +&Ctrl;A Edit Select All Messages -Selects all messages in the current folder. +Selects all messages in the current folder. -&Ctrl;&Shift;A Edit Select Message Text +&Ctrl;&Shift;A Edit Select Message Text -Selects the text of the currently displayed message. +Selects the text of the currently displayed message. @@ -478,237 +216,106 @@ -<guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu -View Headers +View Headers -Changes the format of the message header in the Message pane. +Changes the format of the message header in the Message pane. -View Attachments +View Attachments -Changes the way attachments appear in the Message pane (independent of the MIME Tree). With Icons all attachments appear as icons at the bottom of the message. Smart will show attachments as icons, unless the message suggests that they should be displayed inline. You can suggest that certain attachments should be shown inline in your own messages when you select Suggest automatic display in the attachment's properties dialogue. Inline shows the contents of the attachments at the bottom of the message. Attachments that cannot be displayed, ⪚ compressed files, will still be shown as an icon. Hide will not show attachments. +Changes the way attachments appear in the Message pane (independent of the MIME Tree). With Icons all attachments appear as icons at the bottom of the message. Smart will show attachments as icons, unless the message suggests that they should be displayed inline. You can suggest that certain attachments should be shown inline in your own messages when you select Suggest automatic display in the attachment's properties dialogue. Inline shows the contents of the attachments at the bottom of the message. Attachments that cannot be displayed, ⪚ compressed files, will still be shown as an icon. Hide will not show attachments. -View Unread Column +View Unread Column -Allows you to specify whether the number of unread messages should be shown in brackets next to the folder name (View After Folder Name) or in a separate column (View in Separate Column) +Allows you to specify whether the number of unread messages should be shown in brackets next to the folder name (View After Folder Name) or in a separate column (View in Separate Column) -View Total Column +View Total Column -Display a column in the list of folders which shows the number of messages per folder. +Display a column in the list of folders which shows the number of messages per folder. -. View Expand Thread +. View Expand Thread -If FolderThread Messages is activated, this will display the thread of the current message, &ie; all messages that are replies to the current message. +If FolderThread Messages is activated, this will display the thread of the current message, &ie; all messages that are replies to the current message. -, View Collapse Thread +, View Collapse Thread -If FolderThread Messages is activated, this will hide the thread of the current message, &ie; it will hide all messages that are replies to the current message. +If FolderThread Messages is activated, this will hide the thread of the current message, &ie; it will hide all messages that are replies to the current message. -&Ctrl;. View Expand All Threads +&Ctrl;. View Expand All Threads -Expands all threads in the current folder. +Expands all threads in the current folder. -&Ctrl;, View Collapse All Threads +&Ctrl;, View Collapse All Threads -Collapses all threads in the current folder. +Collapses all threads in the current folder. -V View View Source +V View View Source -Shows the message and its complete headers in plain text format in a new window. This can be useful to find out the origin of a mail. You should know that it is easy to fake the From: header of a mail, but one can still find out which mail servers have been used to send the message by looking at the Received: lines in the header. +Shows the message and its complete headers in plain text format in a new window. This can be useful to find out the origin of a mail. You should know that it is easy to fake the From: header of a mail, but one can still find out which mail servers have been used to send the message by looking at the Received: lines in the header. -View Use Fixed Font +View Use Fixed Font -Uses a fixed width (monospaced) font to display the messages in the current folder. The font to be used can be configured in the Appearance section of &kmail;'s configuration dialogue. +Uses a fixed width (monospaced) font to display the messages in the current folder. The font to be used can be configured in the Appearance section of &kmail;'s configuration dialogue. -Message Set Encoding +Message Set Encoding -Lets you choose the character encoding to be used in the Message Pane. The default, Auto, should work in almost all cases. +Lets you choose the character encoding to be used in the Message Pane. The default, Auto, should work in almost all cases. @@ -718,149 +325,70 @@ -<guimenu ->Go</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Go</guimenu> Menu -N Go Next Message +N Go Next Message -Selects the next message in the message list. The keyboard shortcut Right Arrow also performs this action. +Selects the next message in the message list. The keyboard shortcut Right Arrow also performs this action. -+ Go Next Unread Message ++ Go Next Unread Message -Selects the next unread message in the message list. If there is no unread message below the currently selected message then the behaviour depends on the value of the option. +Selects the next unread message in the message list. If there is no unread message below the currently selected message then the behaviour depends on the value of the option. -P Go Previous Message +P Go Previous Message -Selects the previous message in the message list. +Selects the previous message in the message list. -- Go Previous Unread Message +- Go Previous Unread Message -Selects the previous unread message in the message list. If there is no unread message above the currently selected message then the behaviour depends on the value of the option. +Selects the previous unread message in the message list. If there is no unread message above the currently selected message then the behaviour depends on the value of the option. -&Ctrl;+ Go Next Unread Folder +&Ctrl;+ Go Next Unread Folder -Jumps to the the next folder with unread messages. +Jumps to the the next folder with unread messages. -&Ctrl;- Go Previous Unread Folder +&Ctrl;- Go Previous Unread Folder -Jumps to the the previous folder with unread messages. +Jumps to the the previous folder with unread messages. -Space Go Next Unread Text +Space Go Next Unread Text -Scrolls down if you are not yet at the bottom of a message, otherwise jumps to the next unread message. +Scrolls down if you are not yet at the bottom of a message, otherwise jumps to the next unread message. @@ -870,228 +398,125 @@ -<guimenu ->Folder</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Folder</guimenu> Menu -Folder New Folder... +Folder New Folder... -Opens the Folder Properties dialogue that lets you create a new folder. +Opens the Folder Properties dialogue that lets you create a new folder. -Folder Mark All Messages as Read +Folder Mark All Messages as Read -Sets the status of all new and unread messages in the current folder to read. +Sets the status of all new and unread messages in the current folder to read. -Folder Compact +Folder Compact -Compacts the folder file to reduce its disk space usage. Usually &kmail; compacts all folders automatically, but under certain circumstances you might want to compact a folder manually. +Compacts the folder file to reduce its disk space usage. Usually &kmail; compacts all folders automatically, but under certain circumstances you might want to compact a folder manually. -Folder Expire +Folder Expire -Deletes old messages from the current folder or moves them to another folder, according to the rules in the folder's Properties dialogue (the default is not to delete or move old messages). Usually &kmail; does this automatically, but under certain circumstances you might want to expire a folder manually.. +Deletes old messages from the current folder or moves them to another folder, according to the rules in the folder's Properties dialogue (the default is not to delete or move old messages). Usually &kmail; does this automatically, but under certain circumstances you might want to expire a folder manually.. -&Ctrl;* Folder Remove Duplicate Messages +&Ctrl;* Folder Remove Duplicate Messages -Searches the folder for duplicate messages and deletes the duplicates. +Searches the folder for duplicate messages and deletes the duplicates. -F5 Folder Check Mail in This Folder +F5 Folder Check Mail in This Folder -Checks whether new mail arrived in the currently selected folder. This is only available for &imap; folders. +Checks whether new mail arrived in the currently selected folder. This is only available for &imap; folders. -Folder Move All Messages to the Wastebin +Folder Move All Messages to the Wastebin -Moves all of the messages in the selected folder into the wastebin folder. This is only available if the currently selected folder is not a wastebin folder. +Moves all of the messages in the selected folder into the wastebin folder. This is only available if the currently selected folder is not a wastebin folder. -Folder Empty Wastebin +Folder Empty Wastebin -Permanently deletes all messages. This is only available if the currently selected folder is a wastebin folder. +Permanently deletes all messages. This is only available if the currently selected folder is a wastebin folder. -Folder Delete Folder +Folder Delete Folder -Removes the selected folder and all its contents, including subfolders. -Note that there is no way to access the contents of a folder after it has been removed. +Removes the selected folder and all its contents, including subfolders. +Note that there is no way to access the contents of a folder after it has been removed. -Folder Prefer HTML to Plain Text +Folder Prefer HTML to Plain Text -If enabled then &html; messages in this folders will be shown using &html; rendering. For security reasons, we recommend to only activate this for folders which only contain trusted messages. +If enabled then &html; messages in this folders will be shown using &html; rendering. For security reasons, we recommend to only activate this for folders which only contain trusted messages. -Folder Thread Messages +Folder Thread Messages -If enabled then the messages in the message list are shown in a tree-like list, with replies showing up directly under the message they reply to. +If enabled then the messages in the message list are shown in a tree-like list, with replies showing up directly under the message they reply to. -Folder Thread Messages also by Subject +Folder Thread Messages also by Subject -If enabled then the messages are not only grouped according to special information included in the messages but also according to their subject, &ie; messages with the same subject are considered as being related. If many messages are threaded below unrelated messages then you might want to disable this option. +If enabled then the messages are not only grouped according to special information included in the messages but also according to their subject, &ie; messages with the same subject are considered as being related. If many messages are threaded below unrelated messages then you might want to disable this option. -Folder Properties +Folder Properties -Opens up the Properties dialogue which lets you change the settings for the selected folder. +Opens up the Properties dialogue which lets you change the settings for the selected folder. @@ -1100,402 +525,183 @@ -<guimenu ->Message</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Message</guimenu> Menu -&Ctrl;N Message New Message... +&Ctrl;N Message New Message... -Opens the composer window so you can write a new message. +Opens the composer window so you can write a new message. -Message New Message to Mailing-List... +Message New Message to Mailing-List... -Opens the composer window so you can write a new mail. If the current folder holds a mailing list and has a posting address defined, this address will be the default To: address. +Opens the composer window so you can write a new mail. If the current folder holds a mailing list and has a posting address defined, this address will be the default To: address. -R Message Reply... +R Message Reply... -Opens up the composer window, inserts the quoted text of the currently selected message and presets the To: field either with the mailing-list address (if you reply to a mailing-list message) or with the preferred reply address of the sender. If you want to control which address the To: field is preset with then you should either use MessageReply to Author... or MessageReply to Mailing-List.... Your identity will automatically be set to the one which this message was sent to. +Opens up the composer window, inserts the quoted text of the currently selected message and presets the To: field either with the mailing-list address (if you reply to a mailing-list message) or with the preferred reply address of the sender. If you want to control which address the To: field is preset with then you should either use MessageReply to Author... or MessageReply to Mailing-List.... Your identity will automatically be set to the one which this message was sent to. -A Message Reply to All... +A Message Reply to All... -Opens up the composer window, inserts the quoted text of the currently selected message and presets the To: field either with the mailing-list address (if you reply to a mailing-list message) or with the preferred reply address of the sender. The Copy to (CC): field is preset with the addresses of all other recipients of the currently selected message excluding your own addresses. Your identity will automatically be set to the one which this message was sent to. +Opens up the composer window, inserts the quoted text of the currently selected message and presets the To: field either with the mailing-list address (if you reply to a mailing-list message) or with the preferred reply address of the sender. The Copy to (CC): field is preset with the addresses of all other recipients of the currently selected message excluding your own addresses. Your identity will automatically be set to the one which this message was sent to. -&Shift;A Message Reply to Author... +&Shift;A Message Reply to Author... -Opens up the composer window, inserts the quoted text of the currently selected message and presets the To: field with the preferred reply address of the sender. Your identity will automatically be set to the one which this message was sent to. +Opens up the composer window, inserts the quoted text of the currently selected message and presets the To: field with the preferred reply address of the sender. Your identity will automatically be set to the one which this message was sent to. -L Message Reply to Mailing-List... +L Message Reply to Mailing-List... -Opens up the composer window, inserts the quoted text of the currently selected message and presets the To: field with the mailing-list address. If you did not specify a mailing-list address for the currently selected folder and &kmail; cannot determine the posting address from the currently selected message then the To: field will be empty. Your identity will automatically be set to the one which this message was sent to. +Opens up the composer window, inserts the quoted text of the currently selected message and presets the To: field with the mailing-list address. If you did not specify a mailing-list address for the currently selected folder and &kmail; cannot determine the posting address from the currently selected message then the To: field will be empty. Your identity will automatically be set to the one which this message was sent to. -&Shift;R Message Reply Without Quote... +&Shift;R Message Reply Without Quote... -Works just like Reply... except that the text of the currently selected message is not quoted. +Works just like Reply... except that the text of the currently selected message is not quoted. -Message Forward +Message Forward -Forwards the message to a new recipient. Using Inline, the message's text and some important header fields will be copied to the body of the new message with a text marking the forwarded part. Attachments will be forwarded as attachments of the new message. Using As Attachment the message and its attachments will become an attachment of the new message. The original message headers will be included in the forwarded message, too. Redirect works like forward, except that the message stays the same (even the From: field). The user who redirected the message is added in special header fields (Redirect-From, Redirect-Date, Redirect-To, &etc;). +Forwards the message to a new recipient. Using Inline, the message's text and some important header fields will be copied to the body of the new message with a text marking the forwarded part. Attachments will be forwarded as attachments of the new message. Using As Attachment the message and its attachments will become an attachment of the new message. The original message headers will be included in the forwarded message, too. Redirect works like forward, except that the message stays the same (even the From: field). The user who redirected the message is added in special header fields (Redirect-From, Redirect-Date, Redirect-To, &etc;). -Message Bounce... +Message Bounce... -Sends the message back to the sender with a notice that it cannot be delivered. This is nearly exactly the message you get from a mail relay if the user does not exist. This option was originally added to reply to spam, but as spam today comes almost only from faked email addresses, it should not be used on spam. The same is true for messages that contain a virus: some ISPs check if an outgoing message contains a virus. Bouncing messages containing a virus is a very bad idea, you could end up disconnected by your ISP. +Sends the message back to the sender with a notice that it cannot be delivered. This is nearly exactly the message you get from a mail relay if the user does not exist. This option was originally added to reply to spam, but as spam today comes almost only from faked email addresses, it should not be used on spam. The same is true for messages that contain a virus: some ISPs check if an outgoing message contains a virus. Bouncing messages containing a virus is a very bad idea, you could end up disconnected by your ISP. -Message Send Again... +Message Send Again... -Opens a composer window with the currently selected message so it can be sent again. This is only available for messages which you have sent or, more precisely, for messages which have the sent status. +Opens a composer window with the currently selected message so it can be sent again. This is only available for messages which you have sent or, more precisely, for messages which have the sent status. -Message Copy To +Message Copy To -Copies the selected messages to a certain folder. +Copies the selected messages to a certain folder. -Message Move To +Message Move To -Moves the selected messages to a certain folder. +Moves the selected messages to a certain folder. -Message Mark Message +Message Mark Message -Allows you to change the status of the selected message to one of the following states: +Allows you to change the status of the selected message to one of the following states: -Status -Symbol -Meaning +Status +Symbol +Meaning -Read -Sheet of paper before an envelope -The message has been read. +Read +Sheet of paper before an envelope +The message has been read. -New -Closed envelope with a star -The message is new to &kmail; and you. +New +Closed envelope with a star +The message is new to &kmail; and you. -Unread -Close envelope -The message is not new to &kmail; but has not been read yet. +Unread +Close envelope +The message is not new to &kmail; but has not been read yet. -Important -Flag -This status will not automatically be set by &kmail;. You can use it freely to mark messages that are in some way important to you. +Important +Flag +This status will not automatically be set by &kmail;. You can use it freely to mark messages that are in some way important to you. -Replied -Blue u-turn arrow -A reply to this message has been sent. +Replied +Blue u-turn arrow +A reply to this message has been sent. -Forwarded -Blue arrow -The message has been forwarded to someone else. +Forwarded +Blue arrow +The message has been forwarded to someone else. -Queued -Envelope -The message has been queued in the outbox to be sent later. +Queued +Envelope +The message has been queued in the outbox to be sent later. -Sent -Angled envelope -The message has been sent. +Sent +Angled envelope +The message has been sent. -Spam -Round recycle symbol -This status will not be set automatically by &kmail;. You can use it to mark spam messages. +Spam +Round recycle symbol +This status will not be set automatically by &kmail;. You can use it to mark spam messages. -Ham -Green check mark -This status will not be set automatically by &kmail;. You can use it to mark messages which are not spam. +Ham +Green check mark +This status will not be set automatically by &kmail;. You can use it to mark messages which are not spam. @@ -1506,90 +712,46 @@ -Message Mark Thread +Message Mark Thread -Allows you to change the status of all messages in a thread. The possible states are the same as for Message Mark Message. +Allows you to change the status of all messages in a thread. The possible states are the same as for Message Mark Message. -Message Watch Thread +Message Watch Thread -Use this to mark threads which you want to keep an eye on for further contributions to the discussion. +Use this to mark threads which you want to keep an eye on for further contributions to the discussion. -Message Ignore Thread +Message Ignore Thread -Use this to mark threads you are not interested in. New contributions to this thread will automatically be marked as read. +Use this to mark threads you are not interested in. New contributions to this thread will automatically be marked as read. -&Ctrl;J Message Apply Filters +&Ctrl;J Message Apply Filters -Applies your filters to the selected messages. +Applies your filters to the selected messages. -Message Apply Filter +Message Apply Filter -Allows you to apply an individual filter to the selected messages. Only filters for which you enabled the Add this filter to the Apply Filter menu option will be available. +Allows you to apply an individual filter to the selected messages. Only filters for which you enabled the Add this filter to the Apply Filter menu option will be available. @@ -1599,132 +761,62 @@ -<guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu -S Tools Find Messages... +S Tools Find Messages... -Opens up a search window that lets you search for messages with certain characteristics, ⪚ a certain subject. Start the search by entering some values and press Search. Click on one of the resulting messages and it will appear in the Message pane. +Opens up a search window that lets you search for messages with certain characteristics, ⪚ a certain subject. Start the search by entering some values and press Search. Click on one of the resulting messages and it will appear in the Message pane. -Tools Address Book +Tools Address Book -Starts up &kaddressbook;, the &kde; address book. +Starts up &kaddressbook;, the &kde; address book. - Tools Certificate Manager... + Tools Certificate Manager... - Starts Kleopatra, the &kde; certificate manager. + Starts Kleopatra, the &kde; certificate manager. - Tools GnuPG Log Viewer + Tools GnuPG Log Viewer - Starts KWatchGnuPG, a tool to present the debug output of GnuPG application. If signing, encryption, or verification mysteriously stop working, you might find out why by looking at the log. + Starts KWatchGnuPG, a tool to present the debug output of GnuPG application. If signing, encryption, or verification mysteriously stop working, you might find out why by looking at the log. - Tools Import Messages... + Tools Import Messages... - Starts up kmailcvt (which is part of tdepim). This application lets you import messages from several email clients &kmail;. + Starts up kmailcvt (which is part of tdepim). This application lets you import messages from several email clients &kmail;. -Tools Edit "Out of Office" Replies... +Tools Edit "Out of Office" Replies... -Launch the Configure "Out of Office" Replies dialogue, which allow you to set-up vacation notifications. +Launch the Configure "Out of Office" Replies dialogue, which allow you to set-up vacation notifications. -Out of Office reply functionality relies on server-side filtering. To be able to use it you need to configure the Filtering tab (see option relevant to kolab server) of your IMAP account set-up. +Out of Office reply functionality relies on server-side filtering. To be able to use it you need to configure the Filtering tab (see option relevant to kolab server) of your IMAP account set-up. @@ -1732,50 +824,28 @@ -Tools Create Filter +Tools Create Filter -Opens up the Filter dialogue with a new filter added. This new filter is based on fields of the current mail, depending on which sub menu item you select. +Opens up the Filter dialogue with a new filter added. This new filter is based on fields of the current mail, depending on which sub menu item you select. -Tools Filter Log Viewer... +Tools Filter Log Viewer... -Opens up the viewer window for the filter log; there you find some options to control the logging of the filtering process. In the log you will find valuable information about what filter rules were used, what was the result of the evaluation of those rules and which filter actions were applied to a message. +Opens up the viewer window for the filter log; there you find some options to control the logging of the filtering process. In the log you will find valuable information about what filter rules were used, what was the result of the evaluation of those rules and which filter actions were applied to a message. -Tools Anti-Spam Wizard... +Tools Anti-Spam Wizard... -It starts a wizard which can help you to set up spam filtering. +It starts a wizard which can help you to set up spam filtering. @@ -1783,17 +853,12 @@ -Tools -Anti-Virus Wizard... +Tools +Anti-Virus Wizard... -It starts a wizard which can help +It starts a wizard which can help you to set up scanning messages for virusses. @@ -1805,136 +870,79 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -Settings Show Toolbar +Settings Show Toolbar -If enabled, the Toolbar is visible (the Toolbar is the one with the icon to compose a new message &etc;). +If enabled, the Toolbar is visible (the Toolbar is the one with the icon to compose a new message &etc;). -Settings Show Quick Search +Settings Show Quick Search -If enabled, the Quick Search bar which allows you to quickly search for messages matching a search text is visible. +If enabled, the Quick Search bar which allows you to quickly search for messages matching a search text is visible. -Settings Configure Filters... +Settings Configure Filters... -Opens the Message Filters window. +Opens the Message Filters window. -Settings Configure POP Filters... +Settings Configure POP Filters... -Opens the Configure Pop Filters window. +Opens the Configure Pop Filters window. -Settings Configure Shortcuts... +Settings Configure Shortcuts... -Opens a window that lets you configure the keyboard shortcuts for many menu commands. +Opens a window that lets you configure the keyboard shortcuts for many menu commands. -Settings Configure Notifications... +Settings Configure Notifications... -Opens a window that lets you configure what happens when new mail arrives, like playing a sound. +Opens a window that lets you configure what happens when new mail arrives, like playing a sound. -Settings Configure Toolbars... +Settings Configure Toolbars... -Opens a window that lets you choose which icons are visible in the toolbar. +Opens a window that lets you choose which icons are visible in the toolbar. -Settings Configure &kmail;... +Settings Configure &kmail;... -Opens the Configure window. +Opens the Configure window. @@ -1943,47 +951,28 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu - -These are the &kde; standard items for the Help menu: -&help.menu.documentation; Additionally &kmail; offers these items: +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu + +These are the &kde; standard items for the Help menu: +&help.menu.documentation; Additionally &kmail; offers these items: -Help &kmail; Introduction +Help &kmail; Introduction -This displays the welcome screen, which lists the most important differences between your version of &kmail; and the previous one. +This displays the welcome screen, which lists the most important differences between your version of &kmail; and the previous one. -Help Tip of the Day +Help Tip of the Day -This displays a dialogue with useful hints for using &kmail;. +This displays a dialogue with useful hints for using &kmail;. @@ -1993,172 +982,82 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -The Composer Window +The Composer Window -<guimenu ->Message</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Message</guimenu> Menu -&Ctrl;N Message New Composer +&Ctrl;N Message New Composer -Opens up a new composer window. +Opens up a new composer window. -Message New Main Window +Message New Main Window -Creates a new main window. +Creates a new main window. -&Ctrl;Return Message Send +&Ctrl;Return Message Send -Sends the message immediately. If you use SMTP to send your messages and the SMTP server is not reachable, the message will be put into the outbox and you will get an error message. You can then later send the messages in the outbox using FileSend Queued. +Sends the message immediately. If you use SMTP to send your messages and the SMTP server is not reachable, the message will be put into the outbox and you will get an error message. You can then later send the messages in the outbox using FileSend Queued. -Message Queue +Message Queue -Queues the message in the outbox for sending it later using FileSend Queued. +Queues the message in the outbox for sending it later using FileSend Queued. -Message Save in Drafts Folder +Message Save in Drafts Folder -Save the message in the drafts folder so you can later edit and send it. +Save the message in the drafts folder so you can later edit and send it. -Messages Insert File... +Messages Insert File... -Inserts a text file into the message text, starting at the cursor position. +Inserts a text file into the message text, starting at the cursor position. -&Ctrl;P Message Print... +&Ctrl;P Message Print... -Prints the current text. +Prints the current text. -&Ctrl;W Message Close +&Ctrl;W Message Close -Closes this composer window. +Closes this composer window. @@ -2168,259 +1067,124 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu -&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo +&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo -Undo your steps in editing the current message. +Undo your steps in editing the current message. -&Ctrl;&Shift;Z Edit Redo +&Ctrl;&Shift;Z Edit Redo -Redo your steps in editing the current message. +Redo your steps in editing the current message. -&Ctrl;X Edit Cut +&Ctrl;X Edit Cut -Cutting text works as with most editors: the selected text is removed and put into the clipboard. Note that you can also select text and drag it to a new position. +Cutting text works as with most editors: the selected text is removed and put into the clipboard. Note that you can also select text and drag it to a new position. -&Ctrl;C Edit Copy +&Ctrl;C Edit Copy -Copying text works as with most editors: the selected text is copied to the clipboard. Note that you can also select text while holding the &Ctrl; key and drag it to a new position to copy it. +Copying text works as with most editors: the selected text is copied to the clipboard. Note that you can also select text while holding the &Ctrl; key and drag it to a new position to copy it. -&Ctrl;V Edit Paste +&Ctrl;V Edit Paste -Pasting works the same as with most editors: the text from the clipboard is pasted at the current cursor position. +Pasting works the same as with most editors: the text from the clipboard is pasted at the current cursor position. -&Ctrl;A Edit Select All +&Ctrl;A Edit Select All -Selects all of the text in your message. +Selects all of the text in your message. -&Ctrl;F Edit Find... +&Ctrl;F Edit Find... -Opens a dialogue to search for strings in the current message. +Opens a dialogue to search for strings in the current message. -&Ctrl;F Edit Find Next +&Ctrl;F Edit Find Next -Goes to the next occurrence of the previously searched string. +Goes to the next occurrence of the previously searched string. -&Ctrl;R Edit Replace... +&Ctrl;R Edit Replace... -Opens a dialogue that lets you replace strings in your message with other strings. +Opens a dialogue that lets you replace strings in your message with other strings. -Edit Clean Spaces +Edit Clean Spaces -This replaces multiple line breaks or spaces with single line breaks or spaces. It works on the current selection or on the complete message if there is no selection. +This replaces multiple line breaks or spaces with single line breaks or spaces. It works on the current selection or on the complete message if there is no selection. -Edit Paste as Quotation +Edit Paste as Quotation -Pastes the text from the clipboard marked as quotation. +Pastes the text from the clipboard marked as quotation. -Edit Add Quote Characters +Edit Add Quote Characters -Prepends the selected text with quotation marks. +Prepends the selected text with quotation marks. -Edit Remove Quote Characters +Edit Remove Quote Characters -Removes the left-most quotation marks from the selected text. +Removes the left-most quotation marks from the selected text. @@ -2429,104 +1193,57 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu -This menu lets you toggle the display of the header fields and other options in this composer window. +This menu lets you toggle the display of the header fields and other options in this composer window. -Options available are: +Options available are: -All Fields +All Fields -Identity +Identity -Dictionary +Dictionary -Sent-Mail folder +Sent-Mail folder -Mail Transport +Mail Transport -From +From -Reply To +Reply To -To +To -CC +CC -BCC +BCC -Subject +Subject -Currently visible items have a checkmark shown next to their name in the menu. +Currently visible items have a checkmark shown next to their name in the menu. -View Use Fixed Font +View Use Fixed Font -Uses a fixed width (monospaced) font to display the currently edited message. The font to be used can be configured in the Appearance section of &kmail;'s configuration dialogue. +Uses a fixed width (monospaced) font to display the currently edited message. The font to be used can be configured in the Appearance section of &kmail;'s configuration dialogue. @@ -2534,159 +1251,89 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->Options</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Options</guimenu> Menu -Options Urgent +Options Urgent -Sets the priority of the message to Urgent. The receiver's email client has to support this or it will have no effect. &kmail; itself does not support priorities for incoming messages. +Sets the priority of the message to Urgent. The receiver's email client has to support this or it will have no effect. &kmail; itself does not support priorities for incoming messages. - Options Request Disposition Notification + Options Request Disposition Notification - If you choose this option, you request a confirmation email once your message is downloaded and read by its recipient. This has to be supported and enabled by the receiver's email client in order to work. - See for background information and ways to customise the read receipts that &kmail; itself sends. + If you choose this option, you request a confirmation email once your message is downloaded and read by its recipient. This has to be supported and enabled by the receiver's email client in order to work. + See for background information and ways to customise the read receipts that &kmail; itself sends. -Options Sign Message +Options Sign Message -Digitally sign the message using OpenPGP. You can learn more about this in the chapter on OpenPGP. +Digitally sign the message using OpenPGP. You can learn more about this in the chapter on OpenPGP. -Options Encrypt Message +Options Encrypt Message -Encrypt the message using OpenPGP. You can learn more about this in the chapter on OpenPGP. +Encrypt the message using OpenPGP. You can learn more about this in the chapter on OpenPGP. - Options Select Cryptographic Message Format + Options Select Cryptographic Message Format - Choose the cryptographic message format to use to digitally sign and/or encrypt the message in. See the previous description of each option for more information. + Choose the cryptographic message format to use to digitally sign and/or encrypt the message in. See the previous description of each option for more information. -Options Formatting (HTML) +Options Formatting (HTML) -Enables &html; editing. +Enables &html; editing. -Options Set Encoding +Options Set Encoding -Set the charset encoding of this message. The chosen encoding will appear in the header of the outgoing mail. You can use Auto for almost all cases, &kmail; will tell you if you need to select a different encoding manually. +Set the charset encoding of this message. The chosen encoding will appear in the header of the outgoing mail. You can use Auto for almost all cases, &kmail; will tell you if you need to select a different encoding manually. -Options Wordwrap +Options Wordwrap -Toggles the automatic wordwrap. It may be useful to turn it off if you want to paste long lines that should not wrap. +Toggles the automatic wordwrap. It may be useful to turn it off if you want to paste long lines that should not wrap. -Options Automatic Spellchecking +Options Automatic Spellchecking -Toggles automatic spellchecking. Note that in &html;-editing mode automatic spellchecking is not available. +Toggles automatic spellchecking. Note that in &html;-editing mode automatic spellchecking is not available. @@ -2696,131 +1343,73 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->Attach</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Attach</guimenu> Menu -This menu lets you select attachment options. +This menu lets you select attachment options. -Attach Append Signature +Attach Append Signature -Appends your signature (footer) to the end of the message. +Appends your signature (footer) to the end of the message. -Attach Attach Public Key... +Attach Attach Public Key... -Attaches the corresponding PGP/GnuPG key to your message. +Attaches the corresponding PGP/GnuPG key to your message. -Attach Attach My Public Key +Attach Attach My Public Key -Attaches your PGP/GnuPG public key to your message. +Attaches your PGP/GnuPG public key to your message. -Attach Attach File... +Attach Attach File... -Attaches one or more files to the current message. +Attaches one or more files to the current message. -Attach Remove Attachment +Attach Remove Attachment -Removes the attachment that is selected in the attachment part of the composer. +Removes the attachment that is selected in the attachment part of the composer. -Attach Save Attachment As... +Attach Save Attachment As... -Saves the attachment that is selected in the attachment window to a file. +Saves the attachment that is selected in the attachment window to a file. -Attach Attachment Properties +Attach Attachment Properties -Displays the properties of the attachment that is selected in the attachment window. +Displays the properties of the attachment that is selected in the attachment window. @@ -2829,50 +1418,25 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu -Tools Spelling... +Tools Spelling... -Uses &tdespell; to check the spelling in the body of your message. Note that you have to configure &tdespell; with Settings Spellchecker... if you use it for the first time. +Uses &tdespell; to check the spelling in the body of your message. Note that you have to configure &tdespell; with Settings Spellchecker... if you use it for the first time. -Tools Addressbook... +Tools Addressbook... -Opens up &kaddressbook;. +Opens up &kaddressbook;. @@ -2881,104 +1445,61 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu -Settings Show Main Toolbar +Settings Show Main Toolbar -If enabled, the Main Toolbar is visible, &ie; the one with the icon to send the message &etc;. +If enabled, the Main Toolbar is visible, &ie; the one with the icon to send the message &etc;. -Settings Show HTML Toolbar +Settings Show HTML Toolbar -If enabled, the &html; Toolbar is visible, &ie; the one which with the tools to change certain properties of the composed text. +If enabled, the &html; Toolbar is visible, &ie; the one which with the tools to change certain properties of the composed text. -Settings Spellchecker... +Settings Spellchecker... -Allows you to configure &tdespell;, &kde;'s spellchecker. +Allows you to configure &tdespell;, &kde;'s spellchecker. -Settings Configure Shortcuts... +Settings Configure Shortcuts... -Opens a window that lets you configure the keyboard shortcuts for many menu commands. +Opens a window that lets you configure the keyboard shortcuts for many menu commands. -Settings Configure Toolbars... +Settings Configure Toolbars... -Opens a window that allows you to decide which icons appear in the toolbar. +Opens a window that allows you to decide which icons appear in the toolbar. -Settings Configure &kmail;... +Settings Configure &kmail;... -Opens &kmail;'s configuration dialogue. +Opens &kmail;'s configuration dialogue. @@ -2987,15 +1508,9 @@ you to set up scanning messages for virusses. -<guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu - -The entries in this menu have the same meaning as the entries in the main window's help menu. +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu + +The entries in this menu have the same meaning as the entries in the main window's help menu. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/using-kmail.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/using-kmail.docbook index 9bbf43f48a7..12f1fcd3e67 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/using-kmail.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/kmail/using-kmail.docbook @@ -2,113 +2,37 @@ -Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de -
 +Daniel Naber
daniel.naber@t-online.de +
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2004-09-24 1.7.50 +2004-09-24 1.7.50 -Using &kmail; +Using &kmail; -The Main Window +The Main Window -The main window is the window that appears when &kmail; is started. It is by default divided into three panes: +The main window is the window that appears when &kmail; is started. It is by default divided into three panes: -Folder list (on the left) +Folder list (on the left) -This pane contains the list of your message folders (other email programs may call them mailboxes). To select a folder, simply click on it. The messages contained in the folder will now appear in the Headers pane. The folder list can be displayed in both a short view, which takes up only a small portion of the left side of the screen, and a long view, which takes up the entire left side of the screen but is able to show more mailboxes. You can toggle between these two views under Appearance/Layout in the SettingsConfigure &kmail;... dialogue. Also see the Folders Section for more information about how to use folders. +This pane contains the list of your message folders (other email programs may call them mailboxes). To select a folder, simply click on it. The messages contained in the folder will now appear in the Headers pane. The folder list can be displayed in both a short view, which takes up only a small portion of the left side of the screen, and a long view, which takes up the entire left side of the screen but is able to show more mailboxes. You can toggle between these two views under Appearance/Layout in the SettingsConfigure &kmail;... dialogue. Also see the Folders Section for more information about how to use folders. -Message list (in the upper right by default) +Message list (in the upper right by default) -This pane lists header information (message Status Flags, Sender, Subject, Date, and other optional columns like Size, Attachment Flag, Important Flag etc.) for the messages in the currently selected folder. Clicking on a header will select that message and display it in the Message pane; you can also select more than one message by holding down the &Ctrl; key when clicking on messages. You may sort the messages by clicking on the column that you wish to sort; if you click on the same column more than once, sort order will toggle between ascending/descending and some alternative sorting criteria will become available (like sorting by Status when you click on the header of the Subject column). Clicking the right mousebutton on the list header shows a popup menu, which allows to show or hide several columns in the list. +This pane lists header information (message Status Flags, Sender, Subject, Date, and other optional columns like Size, Attachment Flag, Important Flag etc.) for the messages in the currently selected folder. Clicking on a header will select that message and display it in the Message pane; you can also select more than one message by holding down the &Ctrl; key when clicking on messages. You may sort the messages by clicking on the column that you wish to sort; if you click on the same column more than once, sort order will toggle between ascending/descending and some alternative sorting criteria will become available (like sorting by Status when you click on the header of the Subject column). Clicking the right mousebutton on the list header shows a popup menu, which allows to show or hide several columns in the list. -Message preview pane (in the lower right by default) +Message preview pane (in the lower right by default) -This pane displays the currently selected message. Attachments appear at the bottom of the message, either as icons or embedded in the message, depending on View Attachments. For complex messages the structure of the message is shown in the message structure viewer below the preview pane. The placement of the preview pane as well as the placement of the structure viewer can be changed under Appearance/Layout in the SettingsConfigure &kmail;... dialogue. Moreover, you can disable the preview pane and you can choose when the message structure viewer should be shown. You can scroll through the message page-by-page using the Page Up and Page down keys, or line-by-line using the up arrow and down arrow keys; you can also use key shortcuts to skip through your messages without having to use the mouse. +This pane displays the currently selected message. Attachments appear at the bottom of the message, either as icons or embedded in the message, depending on View Attachments. For complex messages the structure of the message is shown in the message structure viewer below the preview pane. The placement of the preview pane as well as the placement of the structure viewer can be changed under Appearance/Layout in the SettingsConfigure &kmail;... dialogue. Moreover, you can disable the preview pane and you can choose when the message structure viewer should be shown. You can scroll through the message page-by-page using the Page Up and Page down keys, or line-by-line using the up arrow and down arrow keys; you can also use key shortcuts to skip through your messages without having to use the mouse. @@ -116,1043 +40,486 @@ -Keyboard Shortcuts +Keyboard Shortcuts -The following keyboard shortcuts are supported in the main window: +The following keyboard shortcuts are supported in the main window: -Keyboard Shortcut -Action +Keyboard Shortcut +Action -Space -Scroll down in the current message or go to the next unread message if you are already at the bottom. +Space +Scroll down in the current message or go to the next unread message if you are already at the bottom. -Right Arrow or N -Go to the next message in the current folder. +Right Arrow or N +Go to the next message in the current folder. -Left Arrow key or P -Go to the previous message in the current folder. +Left Arrow key or P +Go to the previous message in the current folder. -+ -Go to the next unread message in the current folder. ++ +Go to the next unread message in the current folder. -- -Go to the previous unread message in the current folder. +- +Go to the previous unread message in the current folder. -&Ctrl;+ -Go to the next folder with unread messages. +&Ctrl;+ +Go to the next folder with unread messages. -&Ctrl;- -Go to the previous folder with unread messages. +&Ctrl;- +Go to the previous folder with unread messages. -&Ctrl;Up Arrow -Go to the next folder in the folder list (if the folder list has focus). +&Ctrl;Up Arrow +Go to the next folder in the folder list (if the folder list has focus). -&Ctrl;Down Arrow -Go to the previous folder in the folder list (if the folder list has focus). +&Ctrl;Down Arrow +Go to the previous folder in the folder list (if the folder list has focus). -&Ctrl;Left Arrow -Walk upwards in the list of folders. Use &Ctrl;Space to actually enter the folder. +&Ctrl;Left Arrow +Walk upwards in the list of folders. Use &Ctrl;Space to actually enter the folder. -&Ctrl;Right Arrow -Walk downwards in the list of folders. Use &Ctrl;Space to actually enter the folder. +&Ctrl;Right Arrow +Walk downwards in the list of folders. Use &Ctrl;Space to actually enter the folder. -&Ctrl;Space -Enter the folder that has focus, &ie; the folder that you navigated to using &Ctrl;Left Arrow or &Ctrl;Right Arrow. +&Ctrl;Space +Enter the folder that has focus, &ie; the folder that you navigated to using &Ctrl;Left Arrow or &Ctrl;Right Arrow. -&Shift;Left Arrow and &Shift;Right Arrow -Select messages in the header pane, starting with the current message. +&Shift;Left Arrow and &Shift;Right Arrow +Select messages in the header pane, starting with the current message. -For more keyboard shortcuts have a look at the SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... dialogue. +For more keyboard shortcuts have a look at the SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... dialogue. -The Composer Window - -The composer window is used to write new messages; it can be invoked via Message New Message... menu or from the New Message icon on the main window. +The Composer Window + +The composer window is used to write new messages; it can be invoked via Message New Message... menu or from the New Message icon on the main window. -Composing a Message - -To write your message, fill in the appropriate fields in the composer window. Use the View menu to select which header fields are displayed. The Identity field offers a Sticky option; if it is checked, the current identity will become the default identity when you open a new composer next time. - -There are a variety of shortcuts to help you with writing your messages. The ... buttons next to the To:, CC: and BCC: fields will call up the address book so that you can select addresses from there. - -When you start typing an address in the To:/CC:/BCC: fields, a popup will appear that offers matching addresses that have been used recently and matching addresses from your address book; if you do not like the automatic popup you can disable it by clicking with the &RMB; on the field and choosing a different completion mode. - -Whenever you want to add more than one recipient in one of the fields, use a comma to separate each address from the next one. You may need to specify fully qualified addresses (&ie; user@domain.com) even for local users, depending on your system configuration. - -When you are finished with your message, click the Send icon (the envelope) to send the message now, or click the Queue icon to put the message in the outbox. If your message is not finished yet, select MessageSave in Drafts Folder. +Composing a Message + +To write your message, fill in the appropriate fields in the composer window. Use the View menu to select which header fields are displayed. The Identity field offers a Sticky option; if it is checked, the current identity will become the default identity when you open a new composer next time. + +There are a variety of shortcuts to help you with writing your messages. The ... buttons next to the To:, CC: and BCC: fields will call up the address book so that you can select addresses from there. + +When you start typing an address in the To:/CC:/BCC: fields, a popup will appear that offers matching addresses that have been used recently and matching addresses from your address book; if you do not like the automatic popup you can disable it by clicking with the &RMB; on the field and choosing a different completion mode. + +Whenever you want to add more than one recipient in one of the fields, use a comma to separate each address from the next one. You may need to specify fully qualified addresses (&ie; user@domain.com) even for local users, depending on your system configuration. + +When you are finished with your message, click the Send icon (the envelope) to send the message now, or click the Queue icon to put the message in the outbox. If your message is not finished yet, select MessageSave in Drafts Folder. -Signing and Encrypting Messages - -If you want to send an encrypted or digitally signed message, select the Sign Message or Encrypt Message icons in the toolbar. Moreover you can select the format that should be used to sign and/or encrypt the message. Depending on the installed encryption programs you can choose between: +Signing and Encrypting Messages + +If you want to send an encrypted or digitally signed message, select the Sign Message or Encrypt Message icons in the toolbar. Moreover you can select the format that should be used to sign and/or encrypt the message. Depending on the installed encryption programs you can choose between: -Any +Any -KMail will use a format which is understood by all recipients of the message. The preferred format of the recipients can be specified in the KDE Address Book. +KMail will use a format which is understood by all recipients of the message. The preferred format of the recipients can be specified in the KDE Address Book. -Inline OpenPGP (deprecated) +Inline OpenPGP (deprecated) -This format is outdated. If you use this format then only the message text will be signed and/or encrypted. Attachments will neither be signed nor encrypted. HTML messages cannot be signed with this format. You should only use this format if necessary, &ie; if you send messages to users of email clients that cannot handle the more advanced formats. +This format is outdated. If you use this format then only the message text will be signed and/or encrypted. Attachments will neither be signed nor encrypted. HTML messages cannot be signed with this format. You should only use this format if necessary, &ie; if you send messages to users of email clients that cannot handle the more advanced formats. -PGP/MIME +PGP/MIME -This format is the successor of the inline OpenPGP format. If you use this format then the message text and all attachments will be signed and/or encrypted (at least by default). This is the recommended format if you use OpenPGP. +This format is the successor of the inline OpenPGP format. If you use this format then the message text and all attachments will be signed and/or encrypted (at least by default). This is the recommended format if you use OpenPGP. -S/MIME +S/MIME -This format is an alternative format to PGP/MIME. If you use this format then the message text and all attachments will be signed and/or encrypted (at least by default). This format is mostly used by corporations. +This format is an alternative format to PGP/MIME. If you use this format then the message text and all attachments will be signed and/or encrypted (at least by default). This format is mostly used by corporations. -S/MIME opaque +S/MIME opaque -This format is a variant of the S/MIME format. It should only be used if necessary. +This format is a variant of the S/MIME format. It should only be used if necessary. -Creating HTML Messages +Creating HTML Messages -Note that HTML messages are often regarded as an annoyance; therefore, you should avoid sending HTML messages if possible. Particularly, you should never send HTML messages to a mailing list unless HTML messages are explicitly allowed. +Note that HTML messages are often regarded as an annoyance; therefore, you should avoid sending HTML messages if possible. Particularly, you should never send HTML messages to a mailing list unless HTML messages are explicitly allowed. -In order to be able to create HTML messages you first have to enable the markup tools. To do this enable Formatting (HTML) in the Options menu. A toolbar with several tools to format the message will appear. Via the drop down box you can select between standard text and six different types of lists (three bulleted lists with different symbols and three numbered lists with different numbering). Moreover, you can select the font family, the font size, the font style (bold, italic, underlined) and the text colour. Last but not least, you can select the alignment of the text (left aligned, centred, right aligned). +In order to be able to create HTML messages you first have to enable the markup tools. To do this enable Formatting (HTML) in the Options menu. A toolbar with several tools to format the message will appear. Via the drop down box you can select between standard text and six different types of lists (three bulleted lists with different symbols and three numbered lists with different numbering). Moreover, you can select the font family, the font size, the font style (bold, italic, underlined) and the text colour. Last but not least, you can select the alignment of the text (left aligned, centred, right aligned). -Creating tables and embedding images is currently not possible. +Creating tables and embedding images is currently not possible. -Adding Attachments +Adding Attachments -You can attach files to your message by using one of the methods below: +You can attach files to your message by using one of the methods below: -Click the Attach File (paper clip) icon and select the file you wish to attach; +Click the Attach File (paper clip) icon and select the file you wish to attach; -Drag a file from the desktop or another folder into the composer window; +Drag a file from the desktop or another folder into the composer window; -Drag a message from &kmail;'s message list into the composer window -- that message will then be attached; +Drag a message from &kmail;'s message list into the composer window -- that message will then be attached; -Select one of the options in the Attach menu. +Select one of the options in the Attach menu. -Once a file is attached to your message, it appears in the attachments pane at the bottom of the composer window. You can use the &RMB; on each attachment to View, Save or Remove the attachment. - -Use the Properties item to open the Message Part Properties dialogue. The first field contains the attachment's &MIME; type. Just like the Name field, it should be automatically filled with an appropriate value. Sometimes the &MIME; type value may be wrong. You can then type in any &MIME; type or choose from the list of common &MIME; types. You can also select an encoding method for your file from the list of encoding options (normally, the default value works fine). Check the Suggest automatic display option if you want to suggest to the recipient the automatic (inline) display of this attachment. Whether this works or not depends on the recipient's email client and on his settings. - -You can also attach public keys to the message by using the appropriate options in the Attach menu. PGP key attachments are handled like file attachments. +Once a file is attached to your message, it appears in the attachments pane at the bottom of the composer window. You can use the &RMB; on each attachment to View, Save or Remove the attachment. + +Use the Properties item to open the Message Part Properties dialogue. The first field contains the attachment's &MIME; type. Just like the Name field, it should be automatically filled with an appropriate value. Sometimes the &MIME; type value may be wrong. You can then type in any &MIME; type or choose from the list of common &MIME; types. You can also select an encoding method for your file from the list of encoding options (normally, the default value works fine). Check the Suggest automatic display option if you want to suggest to the recipient the automatic (inline) display of this attachment. Whether this works or not depends on the recipient's email client and on his settings. + +You can also attach public keys to the message by using the appropriate options in the Attach menu. PGP key attachments are handled like file attachments. -Checking the Spelling of your Message - -&kmail; will automatically check the spelling of your message (in HTML mode this currently does not work) and display unknown words using red colour. If there are too many unknown words &kmail; will disable its checking. To select the language used for checking, select View Dictionary. You can disable automatic spellchecking in the Options menu. - -To check the spelling of your message using a dialogue, select Tools Spelling.... &kmail; uses &tdespell; to check spelling, which is the &kde; frontend to the ispell or aspell spelling checker. Note that you may first need to configure the spellchecker using Settings Spellchecker.... +Checking the Spelling of your Message + +&kmail; will automatically check the spelling of your message (in HTML mode this currently does not work) and display unknown words using red colour. If there are too many unknown words &kmail; will disable its checking. To select the language used for checking, select View Dictionary. You can disable automatic spellchecking in the Options menu. + +To check the spelling of your message using a dialogue, select Tools Spelling.... &kmail; uses &tdespell; to check spelling, which is the &kde; frontend to the ispell or aspell spelling checker. Note that you may first need to configure the spellchecker using Settings Spellchecker.... -Message Folders - -Message Folders are used to organise your email messages. By default, all message folders are stored in the folder Mail, which is created in your home folder. When you first start &kmail; the inbox, outbox, sent-mail, wastebin and drafts folders are created. These folders each have special functions: +Message Folders + +Message Folders are used to organise your email messages. By default, all message folders are stored in the folder Mail, which is created in your home folder. When you first start &kmail; the inbox, outbox, sent-mail, wastebin and drafts folders are created. These folders each have special functions: -inbox: +inbox: -Where &kmail; by default puts your new messages when you ask it to check your mail. +Where &kmail; by default puts your new messages when you ask it to check your mail. -outbox: +outbox: -Where messages are put while they are waiting to be delivered. Note that you should not drag and drop messages here to send them, use the Send icon in the composer window instead. +Where messages are put while they are waiting to be delivered. Note that you should not drag and drop messages here to send them, use the Send icon in the composer window instead. -sent-mail: +sent-mail: -By default copies of all messages that you have sent are put into this folder. +By default copies of all messages that you have sent are put into this folder. -wastebin: +wastebin: -By default all messages that you have moved to the wastebin are moved into this folder. +By default all messages that you have moved to the wastebin are moved into this folder. -drafts: +drafts: -Contains messages you started to edit but then saved to this folder instead of sending them. +Contains messages you started to edit but then saved to this folder instead of sending them. -You may find that the standard folders are fine for your needs; eventually, though, you will probably need folders to help you organise your messages. To create a new folder, select FolderNew Folder...: the folder properties dialogue will then prompt you for the necessary information. If you ever need to change the settings for a folder, select the folder you wish to modify in the Folders pane and select FolderProperties . - -To move messages from one folder into another, select the message(s) you want to move and press the M key or select MessageMove To. A list of folders will appear; select the folder from the list that you want to move the messages to. Messages can also be moved by dragging them from the Message list to a folder in the Folder list. - -If you want to clear all of the messages out of a folder choose FolderMove All Messages to the Wastebin. You can use FolderDelete Folder to remove a folder and all its messages and subfolders. +You may find that the standard folders are fine for your needs; eventually, though, you will probably need folders to help you organise your messages. To create a new folder, select FolderNew Folder...: the folder properties dialogue will then prompt you for the necessary information. If you ever need to change the settings for a folder, select the folder you wish to modify in the Folders pane and select FolderProperties . + +To move messages from one folder into another, select the message(s) you want to move and press the M key or select MessageMove To. A list of folders will appear; select the folder from the list that you want to move the messages to. Messages can also be moved by dragging them from the Message list to a folder in the Folder list. + +If you want to clear all of the messages out of a folder choose FolderMove All Messages to the Wastebin. You can use FolderDelete Folder to remove a folder and all its messages and subfolders. -Folder Properties +Folder Properties -The folder's Properties dialogue lets you rename and move a folder and specify all of its properties. Note that most properties are only available for your own folders and not for default folder like inbox &etc;. Default folders also cannot be moved or renamed. +The folder's Properties dialogue lets you rename and move a folder and specify all of its properties. Note that most properties are only available for your own folders and not for default folder like inbox &etc;. Default folders also cannot be moved or renamed. -General - -Rename a folder by changing the entry in the Name: field. - -You can make a folder a subfolder of another folder by choosing a new parent folder using the Belongs to selection. - -The Folder Icons section lets you choose icons that are different from the default ones in the folder list. - -See the Folder Format section for information about the Mailbox format. - -With the Identity section you can set the default identity that should be used for new messages if this folder is selected. Replies to messages that were sent directly to you will still default to the message's To address if an according identity is found. - -With Show Sender/Receiver you can set the visible columns in the header pane. This is useful if you use a folder to save your own sent messages. - -Check Ignore new mail in this folder if you do not want to be informed about new mail that arrives in this folder. This is for example useful for the folder where you move all detected spam messages to. - -Check Keep replies in this folder if you want replies to messages in this folder to be filed also into this folder rather than into a special sent-mail folder. +General + +Rename a folder by changing the entry in the Name: field. + +You can make a folder a subfolder of another folder by choosing a new parent folder using the Belongs to selection. + +The Folder Icons section lets you choose icons that are different from the default ones in the folder list. + +See the Folder Format section for information about the Mailbox format. + +With the Identity section you can set the default identity that should be used for new messages if this folder is selected. Replies to messages that were sent directly to you will still default to the message's To address if an according identity is found. + +With Show Sender/Receiver you can set the visible columns in the header pane. This is useful if you use a folder to save your own sent messages. + +Check Ignore new mail in this folder if you do not want to be informed about new mail that arrives in this folder. This is for example useful for the folder where you move all detected spam messages to. + +Check Keep replies in this folder if you want replies to messages in this folder to be filed also into this folder rather than into a special sent-mail folder. -Old Message Expiry - -Here you can select what should happen with old messages in this folder. If you enable Expire old messages in this folder then KMail will regularly, depending on your choice, either delete old messages or move old messages to another folder. You can also start expiration of old messages manually via FolderExpire and via FileExpire All Folders - -Messages that are deleted during expiration of old messages cannot be restored, so be careful with this setting. +Old Message Expiry + +Here you can select what should happen with old messages in this folder. If you enable Expire old messages in this folder then KMail will regularly, depending on your choice, either delete old messages or move old messages to another folder. You can also start expiration of old messages manually via FolderExpire and via FileExpire All Folders + +Messages that are deleted during expiration of old messages cannot be restored, so be careful with this setting. -Mailing List - -If you are going to use the folder for a mailing list then you should check Folder holds a mailing list to associate this folder with the mailing list. Next you should click on Detect Automatically. KMail will then try to guess some information about the mailing list from the currently selected message. If KMail could not determine some addresses then you can add the missing information manually. To do this first select the Address type for which you want to add an address. You can choose between: +Mailing List + +If you are going to use the folder for a mailing list then you should check Folder holds a mailing list to associate this folder with the mailing list. Next you should click on Detect Automatically. KMail will then try to guess some information about the mailing list from the currently selected message. If KMail could not determine some addresses then you can add the missing information manually. To do this first select the Address type for which you want to add an address. You can choose between: - Post to List + Post to List - This address is used for sending messages to the mailing list. This is usually an email address. + This address is used for sending messages to the mailing list. This is usually an email address. - Subscribe to List + Subscribe to List - This address is used for subscribing to the mailing list. This can be an email address or the address of a webpage. + This address is used for subscribing to the mailing list. This can be an email address or the address of a webpage. - Unsubscribe from List + Unsubscribe from List - This address is used for unsubscribing from the mailing list. This can be an email address or the address of a webpage. + This address is used for unsubscribing from the mailing list. This can be an email address or the address of a webpage. - List Archives + List Archives - This is the address of the archive of the mailing list. This is usually the address of a webpage. + This is the address of the archive of the mailing list. This is usually the address of a webpage. - List Help + List Help - This address is used for requesting help for this mailing list. This is usually an email address. + This address is used for requesting help for this mailing list. This is usually an email address. -After selecting the appropriate Address type you enter the email address or the address of the webpage and then click on Add. With Remove you can remove addresses. - -If all addresses have been added then you can execute an action, ⪚ go to the list archives, by selecting the appropriate Address type and then clicking on Invoke Handler. If there is an email address and an address of a webpage for the desired action then you will have to select the Preferred handler prior to clicking on Invoke Handler. Select KMail if you want to send a message to the email address and select Browser if you want to go to the webpage. - -Alternatively to invoking the handler for Post to List you can send a new message to the mailing list via MessageNew Message to Mailing-List... or by clicking with the middle mousebutton on the folder in the folder list. +After selecting the appropriate Address type you enter the email address or the address of the webpage and then click on Add. With Remove you can remove addresses. + +If all addresses have been added then you can execute an action, ⪚ go to the list archives, by selecting the appropriate Address type and then clicking on Invoke Handler. If there is an email address and an address of a webpage for the desired action then you will have to select the Preferred handler prior to clicking on Invoke Handler. Select KMail if you want to send a message to the email address and select Browser if you want to go to the webpage. + +Alternatively to invoking the handler for Post to List you can send a new message to the mailing list via MessageNew Message to Mailing-List... or by clicking with the middle mousebutton on the folder in the folder list. - Access Control tab (&imap; only) - - Here you can manage the access control lists (&acl;s) of &imap; folders. - - The currently active &acl; is shown in the list. It consists of pairs of User Ids and the Permissions granted to users identified by that User Id. Note that a single User Id might refer to more than one user. Depending on the &imap; server and its configuration, there may be User Ids that correspond to groups of users, anonymous users, or any user. Consult the manual of your specific &imap; server implementation for more information. &acl;s are settable per-folder. + Access Control tab (&imap; only) + + Here you can manage the access control lists (&acl;s) of &imap; folders. + + The currently active &acl; is shown in the list. It consists of pairs of User Ids and the Permissions granted to users identified by that User Id. Note that a single User Id might refer to more than one user. Depending on the &imap; server and its configuration, there may be User Ids that correspond to groups of users, anonymous users, or any user. Consult the manual of your specific &imap; server implementation for more information. &acl;s are settable per-folder. - As with everything else when using disconnected &imap;, you need to sync with the server for the changes to be transferred to the server. + As with everything else when using disconnected &imap;, you need to sync with the server for the changes to be transferred to the server. - &imap; &acl;s define a lot of fine-grained permissions that you can grant or deny other users. For the sake of clarity, &kmail; will present them as the following five categories that you can choose from (see for the details if you already know &imap; &acl;s). + &imap; &acl;s define a lot of fine-grained permissions that you can grant or deny other users. For the sake of clarity, &kmail; will present them as the following five categories that you can choose from (see for the details if you already know &imap; &acl;s). - None + None - Grants the users identified by User Id no rights at all. This is also the default for users not explicitly (or implicitly, as a group) listed in the &acl;. These users will not see this folder in the list of &imap; folders presented to them by their mail clients. + Grants the users identified by User Id no rights at all. This is also the default for users not explicitly (or implicitly, as a group) listed in the &acl;. These users will not see this folder in the list of &imap; folders presented to them by their mail clients. - Read + Read - Grants the users identified by User Id reading rights for this folder. This also includes the ability for their mail clients to mark mails as read and store this information on the server. Every user has its own list of read mail, so none of your unread mails will suddenly be marked as read just because someone else has already read them. + Grants the users identified by User Id reading rights for this folder. This also includes the ability for their mail clients to mark mails as read and store this information on the server. Every user has its own list of read mail, so none of your unread mails will suddenly be marked as read just because someone else has already read them. - These users will see this folder in the list of &imap; folders presented to them by their mail clients. - Use this to create a shared folder that others can read, but not modify. + These users will see this folder in the list of &imap; folders presented to them by their mail clients. + Use this to create a shared folder that others can read, but not modify. - If you were the editor of a company's news letter, you could create a folder for the purpose of distributing the news letter, grant everyone reading rights, and save the letter to this folder instead of sending it out by email to a catch-all address. + If you were the editor of a company's news letter, you could create a folder for the purpose of distributing the news letter, grant everyone reading rights, and save the letter to this folder instead of sending it out by email to a catch-all address. - Append + Append - (also known as Post) - Grants the users identified by User Id reading (see above) and posting rights for this folder. - Use this to create a shared folder that others can read and post messages to, but can not otherwise modify. + (also known as Post) + Grants the users identified by User Id reading (see above) and posting rights for this folder. + Use this to create a shared folder that others can read and post messages to, but can not otherwise modify. - If you wanted to create a company-wide discussion forum, instead of using a web-based form or a separate company-private usenet server, you could create a bunch of folders (one per topic), and grant everyone reading and posting rights. Instead of posting to an &nntp; server or writing their messages into a web form, people would just write emails and store them in the folder suiting the topic of the message. + If you wanted to create a company-wide discussion forum, instead of using a web-based form or a separate company-private usenet server, you could create a bunch of folders (one per topic), and grant everyone reading and posting rights. Instead of posting to an &nntp; server or writing their messages into a web form, people would just write emails and store them in the folder suiting the topic of the message. - Write + Write - Grants the users identified by User Id reading, posting (see above), and writing rights for this folder. - The right to write to a folder includes deleting of messages, creating subfolders, and storing other attributes than read/unread on the server (⪚ answered). - Use this to create a shared folder that everyone has (almost, see ) the same rights for. + Grants the users identified by User Id reading, posting (see above), and writing rights for this folder. + The right to write to a folder includes deleting of messages, creating subfolders, and storing other attributes than read/unread on the server (⪚ answered). + Use this to create a shared folder that everyone has (almost, see ) the same rights for. - In the example, you could assign write rights to a group of people acting as moderators, which would then be able to remove off-topic posts and create sub-topic-folders for high-traffic folders. + In the example, you could assign write rights to a group of people acting as moderators, which would then be able to remove off-topic posts and create sub-topic-folders for high-traffic folders. - All + All - Grants the users identified by User Id reading, posting, writing (see above), as well as administration rights, &ie; the right to modify the &acl; of this folder. - This is the default set of rights for the owner of a folder. + Grants the users identified by User Id reading, posting, writing (see above), as well as administration rights, &ie; the right to modify the &acl; of this folder. + This is the default set of rights for the owner of a folder. - summarises the &imap; &acl; rights associated with each permission level. + summarises the &imap; &acl; rights associated with each permission level. - &acl; Rights Summary + &acl; Rights Summary - &acl; right - - - - - + &acl; right + + + + + - Lookup - - x - x - x - x + Lookup + + x + x + x + x - Read - - x - x - x - x + Read + + x + x + x + x - Store Seen - - x - x - x - x + Store Seen + + x + x + x + x - Insert - - - x - x - x + Insert + + + x + x + x - Post - - - x - x - x + Post + + + x + x + x - Write Flags - - - - x - x + Write Flags + + + + x + x - Create - - - - x - x + Create + + + + x + x - Delete - - - - x - x + Delete + + + + x + x - Administer - - - - - x + Administer + + + + + x @@ -1163,528 +530,223 @@ -Folder Format - -A message folder can be either in mbox or in maildir format. mbox saves all messages of a folder to one file, whereas maildir saves each message to its own file. maildir, which is the default format, can be considered more robust, but it can be slower on some file systems. If you are unsure, choose maildir. - -Note that there is currently no feature in &kmail; that allows you to convert between both formats automatically, but you can just move all messages from an old mbox folder to a new maildir folder or vice-versa. +Folder Format + +A message folder can be either in mbox or in maildir format. mbox saves all messages of a folder to one file, whereas maildir saves each message to its own file. maildir, which is the default format, can be considered more robust, but it can be slower on some file systems. If you are unsure, choose maildir. + +Note that there is currently no feature in &kmail; that allows you to convert between both formats automatically, but you can just move all messages from an old mbox folder to a new maildir folder or vice-versa. -Message Filters +Message Filters -After using &kmail; for a while, you may find that you have trouble sorting out the new messages in your inbox when they arrive. Filters allow you to automatically perform certain actions on incoming messages and to manually perform actions on selected messages in a folder. - -Please note that the filters described in this section are applied after the messages have been downloaded from your account -- if you want to filter messages on the server, see Download Filters. - -Filters consist of: filter criteria, whose rules are used as criteria to determine whether this filter should be applied to a given message; and a list of filter actions, which describe what is to be done with, or to, the message if the search pattern matches. Read more about filter criteria and filter actions in the following subsections. - -Filters are considered one after the other, starting with the first filter in the list. The first one whose pattern matches the given message gets executed; you can request that the remaining filters also be applied, but the default is to stop processing at the first matching filter. - -Usually, filters are used on incoming messages, but they can also be applied to sent messages or to an arbitrary message or group of messages. To selectively filter messages, select the messages you want to filter in the message list and either type &Ctrl;J or select Message Apply Filters: this will apply all filters that have been marked for manual filtering in the filter dialogue to those messages. +After using &kmail; for a while, you may find that you have trouble sorting out the new messages in your inbox when they arrive. Filters allow you to automatically perform certain actions on incoming messages and to manually perform actions on selected messages in a folder. + +Please note that the filters described in this section are applied after the messages have been downloaded from your account -- if you want to filter messages on the server, see Download Filters. + +Filters consist of: filter criteria, whose rules are used as criteria to determine whether this filter should be applied to a given message; and a list of filter actions, which describe what is to be done with, or to, the message if the search pattern matches. Read more about filter criteria and filter actions in the following subsections. + +Filters are considered one after the other, starting with the first filter in the list. The first one whose pattern matches the given message gets executed; you can request that the remaining filters also be applied, but the default is to stop processing at the first matching filter. + +Usually, filters are used on incoming messages, but they can also be applied to sent messages or to an arbitrary message or group of messages. To selectively filter messages, select the messages you want to filter in the message list and either type &Ctrl;J or select Message Apply Filters: this will apply all filters that have been marked for manual filtering in the filter dialogue to those messages. -Fast Filter Creation - -There are two methods for creating a filter; the quick method is to use ToolsCreate Filter...: this will call the filter dialogue and present you with a new filter which has the first rule of the search pattern and the first action (as file into folder) preset. In most cases, all you have to do is select the folder where the message should be moved to; but you can, of course, edit the filter as you like. - -When creating a filter on mailing list messages this method will try really hard to find a criterion that uniquely identifies messages from that list; If it succeeds, the guessed name of the list is presented in the ToolsCreate FilterFilter on Mailing-List... menu entry. - -The second method is to manually construct a filter from scratch by calling the filter dialogue through SettingsConfigure Filters.... The filter dialogue is described in detail in the following subsection. +Fast Filter Creation + +There are two methods for creating a filter; the quick method is to use ToolsCreate Filter...: this will call the filter dialogue and present you with a new filter which has the first rule of the search pattern and the first action (as file into folder) preset. In most cases, all you have to do is select the folder where the message should be moved to; but you can, of course, edit the filter as you like. + +When creating a filter on mailing list messages this method will try really hard to find a criterion that uniquely identifies messages from that list; If it succeeds, the guessed name of the list is presented in the ToolsCreate FilterFilter on Mailing-List... menu entry. + +The second method is to manually construct a filter from scratch by calling the filter dialogue through SettingsConfigure Filters.... The filter dialogue is described in detail in the following subsection. -The Filter Dialogue +The Filter Dialogue -This dialogue allows you to manage and edit your list of filters. - -You can reach it either via ToolsCreate Filter... or SettingsConfigure Filters.... - -The dialogue is divided into four main sections: +This dialogue allows you to manage and edit your list of filters. + +You can reach it either via ToolsCreate Filter... or SettingsConfigure Filters.... + +The dialogue is divided into four main sections: -Available Filters -This group contains the list of filters and some action buttons to modify the filters, namely: to create new filters; to move them up or down the list; to delete them; or to rename them. If you select a filter from the list, its properties are shown in the right-hand half of the dialogue. +Available Filters +This group contains the list of filters and some action buttons to modify the filters, namely: to create new filters; to move them up or down the list; to delete them; or to rename them. If you select a filter from the list, its properties are shown in the right-hand half of the dialogue. -Filter Criteria In this group you can edit the pattern that messages must match for the filter to be applied to them. You can select here whether all of the defined rules must match or whether it suffices that any one of them matches. See Search Patterns below for a detailed description of each search rule type. - -You can click on More to get an additional (initially empty) rule if you want to define more-complex patterns and on Fewer to remove the last rule. Clear clears the pattern, &ie; it removes all but two rules from screen and resets those two. -Invalid or empty rules are not evaluated. +Filter Criteria In this group you can edit the pattern that messages must match for the filter to be applied to them. You can select here whether all of the defined rules must match or whether it suffices that any one of them matches. See Search Patterns below for a detailed description of each search rule type. + +You can click on More to get an additional (initially empty) rule if you want to define more-complex patterns and on Fewer to remove the last rule. Clear clears the pattern, &ie; it removes all but two rules from screen and resets those two. +Invalid or empty rules are not evaluated. -Filter Actions In this group you can edit the list of actions that are applied to all messages that match the defined filter criteria. See Filter Actions below for a detailed description of each action type. - -You can click on More to get a new, empty action (if you want to define more than one action) and on Fewer to remove the last action. Clear clears the list, &ie; it removes all but one action and resets that one. -Invalid or empty actions are not executed. +Filter Actions In this group you can edit the list of actions that are applied to all messages that match the defined filter criteria. See Filter Actions below for a detailed description of each action type. + +You can click on More to get a new, empty action (if you want to define more than one action) and on Fewer to remove the last action. Clear clears the list, &ie; it removes all but one action and resets that one. +Invalid or empty actions are not executed. -Advanced Options +Advanced Options -In this group you can define a few advanced options for filters that allow you to refine your filtering. - -Using the first row of check boxes, you can toggle when the filter is applied: the to incoming messages option means that the filter is applied to messages when you receive them (&ie; on Check Mail); the to sent messages options means that the filter is applied to messages when you send them and the on manual filtering option controls whether to apply this filter when filtering is specifically selected (&ie; via Message Apply Filters.) - -The If this filter matches, stop processing here check box in the second row controls whether or not the filters after the current filter will be applied, if the current filter matches. - -If the Add this filter to the Apply Filter menu check box in the third row is selected, this filter will be inserted in the Message Apply Filter submenu. You can then apply this filter to a message. Another way of applying filters is to use Message Apply Filters menu option, which applies all the filters - one after another until they are all used or one of the filters that matches has the If the filters matches, stop processing here. +In this group you can define a few advanced options for filters that allow you to refine your filtering. + +Using the first row of check boxes, you can toggle when the filter is applied: the to incoming messages option means that the filter is applied to messages when you receive them (&ie; on Check Mail); the to sent messages options means that the filter is applied to messages when you send them and the on manual filtering option controls whether to apply this filter when filtering is specifically selected (&ie; via Message Apply Filters.) + +The If this filter matches, stop processing here check box in the second row controls whether or not the filters after the current filter will be applied, if the current filter matches. + +If the Add this filter to the Apply Filter menu check box in the third row is selected, this filter will be inserted in the Message Apply Filter submenu. You can then apply this filter to a message. Another way of applying filters is to use Message Apply Filters menu option, which applies all the filters - one after another until they are all used or one of the filters that matches has the If the filters matches, stop processing here. -Filters are automatically named unless you explicitly rename them using the Rename... button. The dialogue assumes that it should continue auto-naming the filter as long as the filter name starts with <. +Filters are automatically named unless you explicitly rename them using the Rename... button. The dialogue assumes that it should continue auto-naming the filter as long as the filter name starts with <. -If you apply filter changes, via OK or Apply, only valid filters are actually copied to the internal filter manager. - -Similarly, empty rules and actions are removed from the pattern and action list respectively, before the filter is saved. +If you apply filter changes, via OK or Apply, only valid filters are actually copied to the internal filter manager. + +Similarly, empty rules and actions are removed from the pattern and action list respectively, before the filter is saved. -Search Patterns +Search Patterns -The most common use of filters is to filter on the sender of messages; this can be done by choosing From. A good bet for a mailing list would be <recipients>, but there are other criteria a filter can search for (note that all patterns are interpreted case-insensitively): +The most common use of filters is to filter on the sender of messages; this can be done by choosing From. A good bet for a mailing list would be <recipients>, but there are other criteria a filter can search for (note that all patterns are interpreted case-insensitively): -<message> +<message> -Searches the whole message (&ie; headers, body and attachments, if any); +Searches the whole message (&ie; headers, body and attachments, if any); -<body> +<body> -Searches the body of the message (&ie; the whole message except the headers); +Searches the body of the message (&ie; the whole message except the headers); -<any header> +<any header> -Searches the headers of the message; +Searches the headers of the message; -<recipients> +<recipients> -Searches the To and CC header fields of the message; +Searches the To and CC header fields of the message; -<size in bytes> +<size in bytes> -Sets upper or lower bounds on the message size; +Sets upper or lower bounds on the message size; -<age in days> +<age in days> -Sets upper or lower bounds on the message age; +Sets upper or lower bounds on the message age; -<status> +<status> -Sets restrictions on the status of the message; +Sets restrictions on the status of the message; -Any other name +Any other name -Searches the header field that is given by that name. +Searches the header field that is given by that name. -The list of possible rules depends on what you selected in the first drop down box. The available rules are: +The list of possible rules depends on what you selected in the first drop down box. The available rules are: -Rule -Available for -Description +Rule +Available for +Description -contains/does not contain -all textual search items -Matches if the searched item contains (or does not contain) the given text. +contains/does not contain +all textual search items +Matches if the searched item contains (or does not contain) the given text. -equals/does not equal -most textual search items -Matches if the searched item is equal to (or not equal to) the given text. +equals/does not equal +most textual search items +Matches if the searched item is equal to (or not equal to) the given text. -matches regular expr./does not match reg. expr. -all textual search items -Matches if a part of the searched item matches the given regular expression (or does not match it). If the regular expression editor is installed then you can edit the regular expression by clicking on the Edit... button. +matches regular expr./does not match reg. expr. +all textual search items +Matches if a part of the searched item matches the given regular expression (or does not match it). If the regular expression editor is installed then you can edit the regular expression by clicking on the Edit... button. -has an attachment/has no attachment -<message> -Matches if the message has an attachment (or does not have an attachment). +has an attachment/has no attachment +<message> +Matches if the message has an attachment (or does not have an attachment). -is in address book/is not in address book -most textual search items -Matches if the searched item contains an address that is in your address book (or if the searched items contains only unknown addresses). Of course, this rule makes only sense for address fields like From or <recipients> +is in address book/is not in address book +most textual search items +Matches if the searched item contains an address that is in your address book (or if the searched items contains only unknown addresses). Of course, this rule makes only sense for address fields like From or <recipients> -is in category/is not in category -most textual search items -Matches if the searched item contains an address that is in the specified category in your address book (or if the searched item contains no address that is in the specified category). Again, this rule makes only sense for address fields. +is in category/is not in category +most textual search items +Matches if the searched item contains an address that is in the specified category in your address book (or if the searched item contains no address that is in the specified category). Again, this rule makes only sense for address fields. -is equal to/is not equal to -numerical search items -Matches if the value of the search item is equal to (or not equal to) the specified value. +is equal to/is not equal to +numerical search items +Matches if the value of the search item is equal to (or not equal to) the specified value. -is less than -numerical search items -Matches if the value of the search item is less than the specified value. +is less than +numerical search items +Matches if the value of the search item is less than the specified value. -is greater than -numerical search items -Matches if the value of the search item is greater than the specified value. +is greater than +numerical search items +Matches if the value of the search item is greater than the specified value. -is less than or equal to -numerical search items -Matches if the value of the search item is less than or equal to the specified value. +is less than or equal to +numerical search items +Matches if the value of the search item is less than or equal to the specified value. -is greater than or equal to -numerical search items -Matches if the value of the search item is greater than or equal to the specified value. +is greater than or equal to +numerical search items +Matches if the value of the search item is greater than or equal to the specified value. -is/is not -<status> -Matches if the message has (or does not have) the specified status. +is/is not +<status> +Matches if the message has (or does not have) the specified status. @@ -1693,288 +755,119 @@ -Filter Action +Filter Action -The most common use of filters is to sort incoming messages to certain folders; this can be done by choosing file into folder. Here is a list of all possible actions: +The most common use of filters is to sort incoming messages to certain folders; this can be done by choosing file into folder. Here is a list of all possible actions: -file into folder +file into folder -This will file the message into another folder, removing it from its current folder if necessary; you cannot, currently use &imap; folders as a target. +This will file the message into another folder, removing it from its current folder if necessary; you cannot, currently use &imap; folders as a target. -set identity to +set identity to -This will set the identity that will be used if you reply to this message. +This will set the identity that will be used if you reply to this message. -mark as +mark as -This allows you to mark the message as read or important (flagged), but also as forwarded, replied &etc; +This allows you to mark the message as read or important (flagged), but also as forwarded, replied &etc; -send fake MDN +send fake MDN -This will send a faked message disposition notification (&ie; a read receipt) to the sender of the message. +This will send a faked message disposition notification (&ie; a read receipt) to the sender of the message. -set transport to +set transport to -This will set the method of transport (⪚ SMTP) that will be used if you reply to the message. +This will set the method of transport (⪚ SMTP) that will be used if you reply to the message. - + -set Reply-To to -This will modify the Reply-To field of this message. This can be useful for mailing lists that automatically set a Reply-To which you do not like. +set Reply-To to +This will modify the Reply-To field of this message. This can be useful for mailing lists that automatically set a Reply-To which you do not like. -forward to -This will forward the message inline (&ie; as if you selected MessageForwardInline...) to another email address. +forward to +This will forward the message inline (&ie; as if you selected MessageForwardInline...) to another email address. -redirect to -This will redirect the message as-is to another email address. +redirect to +This will redirect the message as-is to another email address. -bounce -Will try to return the message to the sender as undeliverable. -This will only work if the sender's email address is valid, which is not the case for most spam messages. +bounce +Will try to return the message to the sender as undeliverable. +This will only work if the sender's email address is valid, which is not the case for most spam messages. -confirm delivery -Will try to return a message to the sender that indicates successful delivery of their message, if the sender requested that. This action allows you to select who will get delivery receipts from you. Though you can globally enable the sending of delivery confirmations in the Configure &kmail;... dialogue (Security page) we recommended not to send them to everyone, since this makes tracking of spam messages, for example, very easy for the sender. +confirm delivery +Will try to return a message to the sender that indicates successful delivery of their message, if the sender requested that. This action allows you to select who will get delivery receipts from you. Though you can globally enable the sending of delivery confirmations in the Configure &kmail;... dialogue (Security page) we recommended not to send them to everyone, since this makes tracking of spam messages, for example, very easy for the sender. -execute command +execute command -This will execute a program, but will not modify the message. Specify the full path to the program you want to execute; &kmail; will then block until the program returns. If you do not want &kmail; to block then append '&' to the command. You can feed the program with the parts of the mail: %0, %1, &etc; stand for files representing the message parts; for common messages %0 is the text, %1 the first attachment and so on. Additionally, the whole message is fed into the program's stdin; and every occurrence of %{foo} is replaced by the content of the foo header. +This will execute a program, but will not modify the message. Specify the full path to the program you want to execute; &kmail; will then block until the program returns. If you do not want &kmail; to block then append '&' to the command. You can feed the program with the parts of the mail: %0, %1, &etc; stand for files representing the message parts; for common messages %0 is the text, %1 the first attachment and so on. Additionally, the whole message is fed into the program's stdin; and every occurrence of %{foo} is replaced by the content of the foo header. -This currently only works if the message has at least one attachment. No, not even %0 will work in the general case! - -You can enter arbitrarily-complex shell commands here, since &kmail; uses a sub shell to execute the command line; therefore, even this command will work (within its limits): uudecode $(mktemp kmail-uudecoded.XXXXXX) && echo $'\a' +This currently only works if the message has at least one attachment. No, not even %0 will work in the general case! + +You can enter arbitrarily-complex shell commands here, since &kmail; uses a sub shell to execute the command line; therefore, even this command will work (within its limits): uudecode $(mktemp kmail-uudecoded.XXXXXX) && echo $'\a' -pipe through +pipe through -This will feed the message to a program: if the program returns output, the entire message (including the headers) will be replaced with this output; if the program does not return output or exits with a return code other than 0 (indicating an error occurred), the message will not change. Specify the full path to the program. The same substitutions (%n, %{foo} as with execute command are performed on the command line. -Be cautious with this action, as it will easily mess up your messages if the filter program returns garbage or extra lines. +This will feed the message to a program: if the program returns output, the entire message (including the headers) will be replaced with this output; if the program does not return output or exits with a return code other than 0 (indicating an error occurred), the message will not change. Specify the full path to the program. The same substitutions (%n, %{foo} as with execute command are performed on the command line. +Be cautious with this action, as it will easily mess up your messages if the filter program returns garbage or extra lines. -remove header +remove header -Will remove all header fields with the given name from the message. This is useful mainly for removing bogus Reply-To: headers. +Will remove all header fields with the given name from the message. This is useful mainly for removing bogus Reply-To: headers. -add header +add header -If no such field is already present this will add a new header field with the given name and value to the message; if there already is a header field with that name, it is overwritten with the given value; if there are already multiple headers with the given name (⪚ Received: headers), an arbitrary one of them is overwritten and the others are left unchanged -- this is a known limitation. You may want to combine this filter with the remove header filter above to make sure that there are no other headers with that name in the message. +If no such field is already present this will add a new header field with the given name and value to the message; if there already is a header field with that name, it is overwritten with the given value; if there are already multiple headers with the given name (⪚ Received: headers), an arbitrary one of them is overwritten and the others are left unchanged -- this is a known limitation. You may want to combine this filter with the remove header filter above to make sure that there are no other headers with that name in the message. -rewrite header +rewrite header -Will scan the given header field, modify its contents and write it back. The search string is always interpreted as a case-sensitive regular expression. The replacement string is inserted literally except for occurrences of \n, $n and ${nn}, where n is a positive (single-digit, except for the third form) number or 0. These constructs are interpreted as back references to substrings captured with brackets in the search string.Analogous restrictions as in the add header action apply here, too. +Will scan the given header field, modify its contents and write it back. The search string is always interpreted as a case-sensitive regular expression. The replacement string is inserted literally except for occurrences of \n, $n and ${nn}, where n is a positive (single-digit, except for the third form) number or 0. These constructs are interpreted as back references to substrings captured with brackets in the search string.Analogous restrictions as in the add header action apply here, too. -play sound +play sound -Will play the specified sound. +Will play the specified sound. @@ -1982,917 +875,390 @@ folders as a target. -Filter Examples +Filter Examples -If I am subscribed to the (general) &kde; List, I could create a folder for the list (I will call it KDE-General) and use a filter to automatically transfer new messages from my inbox to my KDE-General folder if they are from the &kde; List. Here is how to create this filter: +If I am subscribed to the (general) &kde; List, I could create a folder for the list (I will call it KDE-General) and use a filter to automatically transfer new messages from my inbox to my KDE-General folder if they are from the &kde; List. Here is how to create this filter: -Filtering a mailing list +Filtering a mailing list -Try if ToolsCreate filterFilter on Mailing-List... can identify the mailing list (the name of the list should then appear in the menu item); in this case, this works and I am presented a filter that has List-Idcontains <kde.mail.kde.org> preset. You select the desired destination folder from the folder pull-down menu in the Filter Action group and that is it. - -If that does not work, think of a unique way of identifying the messages you want to filter. The (almost) unique property of my &kde; List messages is that they always contain kde@mail.kde.org in the To: or CC: field. It is only almost unique, because this fails for cross-posted messages. +Try if ToolsCreate filterFilter on Mailing-List... can identify the mailing list (the name of the list should then appear in the menu item); in this case, this works and I am presented a filter that has List-Idcontains <kde.mail.kde.org> preset. You select the desired destination folder from the folder pull-down menu in the Filter Action group and that is it. + +If that does not work, think of a unique way of identifying the messages you want to filter. The (almost) unique property of my &kde; List messages is that they always contain kde@mail.kde.org in the To: or CC: field. It is only almost unique, because this fails for cross-posted messages. -Select SettingsConfigure Filters.... +Select SettingsConfigure Filters.... -Press the New button to create an empty filter. It will appear as <unknown>. +Press the New button to create an empty filter. It will appear as <unknown>. -In the Filter Criteria area, select <recipients> from the first drop-down box, contains from the second drop-down box, and type kde@mail.kde.org in the text field. +In the Filter Criteria area, select <recipients> from the first drop-down box, contains from the second drop-down box, and type kde@mail.kde.org in the text field. -Skip down to the Filter Actions section. Select file into folder from the first drop-down box. A new drop-down box containing a list of folders will appear. Select the folder that you want the filtered messages to be transferred to. For this example, you would select KDE-General from the drop-down box. +Skip down to the Filter Actions section. Select file into folder from the first drop-down box. A new drop-down box containing a list of folders will appear. Select the folder that you want the filtered messages to be transferred to. For this example, you would select KDE-General from the drop-down box. -You may find that you need to use more powerful criteria to properly filter your messages; for example, you may only want to filter the &kde; List messages that are written by your friend Fred Johnson <fj@anywhere.com>. This is where the rest of the matching criteria section comes into play: +You may find that you need to use more powerful criteria to properly filter your messages; for example, you may only want to filter the &kde; List messages that are written by your friend Fred Johnson <fj@anywhere.com>. This is where the rest of the matching criteria section comes into play: -Extending the filter +Extending the filter -Open up the Configure Filters... window and select the filter you just created. +Open up the Configure Filters... window and select the filter you just created. -Since you want to filter all messages that have kde@mail.kde.org in the To: or CC: field and that are from Fred, check the Match all of the following radio button. +Since you want to filter all messages that have kde@mail.kde.org in the To: or CC: field and that are from Fred, check the Match all of the following radio button. -Now, go to the second search rule and select the following from the pull-down menus: From, contains. Now, type fj@anywhere.com in the text field. +Now, go to the second search rule and select the following from the pull-down menus: From, contains. Now, type fj@anywhere.com in the text field. -You now have a filter that transfers all &kde; List messages that are from fj@anywhere.com. +You now have a filter that transfers all &kde; List messages that are from fj@anywhere.com. +Advanced Options are changed. --> -Filter Optimisation +Filter Optimisation -It is important to know that, for example, the order of the filters has an impact on the speed of the filter process. Here are some ideas which can help you to improve the filtering: +It is important to know that, for example, the order of the filters has an impact on the speed of the filter process. Here are some ideas which can help you to improve the filtering: -Stop filter processing as early as possible: +Stop filter processing as early as possible: -If you know that a filter finally processes a certain class of messages, please make sure to check the option If this filter matches, stop processing here for the filter. This will avoid the evaluation of the filter rules of all subsequent filters. (See the advanced options in the Filter Dialogue). -An example is filtering messages from mailing lists via List-Id header into separate folders. Having found out that a message came from list A means that you can avoid checking the next filter for messages from list B. +If you know that a filter finally processes a certain class of messages, please make sure to check the option If this filter matches, stop processing here for the filter. This will avoid the evaluation of the filter rules of all subsequent filters. (See the advanced options in the Filter Dialogue). +An example is filtering messages from mailing lists via List-Id header into separate folders. Having found out that a message came from list A means that you can avoid checking the next filter for messages from list B. -Consider the costs of the evaluation of filter rules: +Consider the costs of the evaluation of filter rules: -The time required to evaluate a filter rule depends on the way the rule is constructed. In particular, scanning for a substring using the contains operation is faster than a pattern matching using the matches regular expr. operation. -Another dependency is on the amount of data which is used for the evaluation of a filter rule. If the rule is based on a message header, its evaluation should normally be much faster than the evaluation of a rule based on the complete message. -You should try to keep the filter rules as simple as possible. +The time required to evaluate a filter rule depends on the way the rule is constructed. In particular, scanning for a substring using the contains operation is faster than a pattern matching using the matches regular expr. operation. +Another dependency is on the amount of data which is used for the evaluation of a filter rule. If the rule is based on a message header, its evaluation should normally be much faster than the evaluation of a rule based on the complete message. +You should try to keep the filter rules as simple as possible. -Check the order of your filters: +Check the order of your filters: -All the different filter actions have a different complexity. The most expensive filter actions are pipe through and execute command, because both need external programs to be run. Placing filters containing these filter actions behind other filters that can reduce the number of times these complex actions are required is useful, if the filter logic does allow this. -An example is filtering messages from a mailing list and detecting spam messages. For the spam detection you will usually use an external tool via a pipe through action. Filtering the messages for the mailing list is done via the List-Id header. If you do not want to check the messages from the mailing list for spam too, it is better to use the filter for the mailing list messages before the filter for the spam detection. This way you avoid the expensive and slow spam check for all messages which were identified as mailing list messages. +All the different filter actions have a different complexity. The most expensive filter actions are pipe through and execute command, because both need external programs to be run. Placing filters containing these filter actions behind other filters that can reduce the number of times these complex actions are required is useful, if the filter logic does allow this. +An example is filtering messages from a mailing list and detecting spam messages. For the spam detection you will usually use an external tool via a pipe through action. Filtering the messages for the mailing list is done via the List-Id header. If you do not want to check the messages from the mailing list for spam too, it is better to use the filter for the mailing list messages before the filter for the spam detection. This way you avoid the expensive and slow spam check for all messages which were identified as mailing list messages. -Filter Log -If you want to verify that your filters work as intended, you can open a viewer for the filter log via Tools Filter Log Viewer.... -In the viewer, there you can configure the logging of the filter processing. You can control the detail level of the log, clear the log or save the log into a file. The log can provide valuable information if you need to debug your filtering process. +Filter Log +If you want to verify that your filters work as intended, you can open a viewer for the filter log via Tools Filter Log Viewer.... +In the viewer, there you can configure the logging of the filter processing. You can control the detail level of the log, clear the log or save the log into a file. The log can provide valuable information if you need to debug your filtering process. -Download Filters - -Download Filters can be used to filter mail from a POP server, before they are completely downloaded; you can use them to prevent &kmail; from downloading huge messages and save time this way. - -In the configuration dialogue of the POP account you can enable download filtering by checking the Filter messages if they are greater than box; once you have done that, you can specify a size which is used as a threshold: messages exceeding this size will be checked against the filter rules you defined -- if no filter rule matches, they will be shown in a confirmation dialogue and you can decide what to do with them. The default size for filtering is 50,000 Bytes; this is a good value as the overhead is kept to a minimum -- every message that is looked at by the filter causes additional traffic because the header of the message is downloaded twice. The default action is Download mail to prevent the loss of messages. - -Be careful with the Delete mail from server option since once a mail is deleted on the server there is no way to get it back. - -With a really good set of filter rules, it is possible that all messages that exceed the threshold size are automatically tagged (&ie; downloaded, kept on the server or deleted) and you would never be bugged by the confirmation dialogue. Be careful though, since once a message is matched by a filter rule, you have no guarantee that you can change the action before it is executed: the confirmation dialogue will be displayed only if there is a message left that was not matched by a filter rule. +Download Filters + +Download Filters can be used to filter mail from a POP server, before they are completely downloaded; you can use them to prevent &kmail; from downloading huge messages and save time this way. + +In the configuration dialogue of the POP account you can enable download filtering by checking the Filter messages if they are greater than box; once you have done that, you can specify a size which is used as a threshold: messages exceeding this size will be checked against the filter rules you defined -- if no filter rule matches, they will be shown in a confirmation dialogue and you can decide what to do with them. The default size for filtering is 50,000 Bytes; this is a good value as the overhead is kept to a minimum -- every message that is looked at by the filter causes additional traffic because the header of the message is downloaded twice. The default action is Download mail to prevent the loss of messages. + +Be careful with the Delete mail from server option since once a mail is deleted on the server there is no way to get it back. + +With a really good set of filter rules, it is possible that all messages that exceed the threshold size are automatically tagged (&ie; downloaded, kept on the server or deleted) and you would never be bugged by the confirmation dialogue. Be careful though, since once a message is matched by a filter rule, you have no guarantee that you can change the action before it is executed: the confirmation dialogue will be displayed only if there is a message left that was not matched by a filter rule. -The <guilabel ->Configure Pop Filter</guilabel -> Dialogue - -Adding filter rules works similar as for message filters. On the left hand side you can manage the existing filters. Use the New button to add a filter. On the right hand side you can configure under which conditions the current filter should match. Using Filter Action you specify what will happen to a message that is matched by this rule. The available options are: +The <guilabel>Configure Pop Filter</guilabel> Dialogue + +Adding filter rules works similar as for message filters. On the left hand side you can manage the existing filters. Use the New button to add a filter. On the right hand side you can configure under which conditions the current filter should match. Using Filter Action you specify what will happen to a message that is matched by this rule. The available options are: -Download mail +Download mail -Will download the messages matched by the filter, just as any other message that does not exceed the threshold size. +Will download the messages matched by the filter, just as any other message that does not exceed the threshold size. -Download mail later +Download mail later -Will tag the messages for later download. This means the messages matched will stay on the POP server until you choose to download them by changing the action manually. +Will tag the messages for later download. This means the messages matched will stay on the POP server until you choose to download them by changing the action manually. -Delete mail from server +Delete mail from server -Will delete the message from the server and does not download it. Once you deleted a message from the server, there is no way you can undo this. Be careful, as rules could match messages you actually want, too. +Will delete the message from the server and does not download it. Once you deleted a message from the server, there is no way you can undo this. Be careful, as rules could match messages you actually want, too. -The option Always show matched 'Download Later' messages in confirmation dialogue will cause the confirmation dialogue to show up during mailbox check if at least one message was tagged for Download Later - even if all messages exceeding the threshold size were matched by a rule. This option is useful in the case you have messages matched by a rule and tagged for Download Later, but you do not get any message exceeding the size limit for a very long time. Without this option, the confirmation dialogue would never show up and you would never have a chance to get the queued message by changing the action manually. +The option Always show matched 'Download Later' messages in confirmation dialogue will cause the confirmation dialogue to show up during mailbox check if at least one message was tagged for Download Later - even if all messages exceeding the threshold size were matched by a rule. This option is useful in the case you have messages matched by a rule and tagged for Download Later, but you do not get any message exceeding the size limit for a very long time. Without this option, the confirmation dialogue would never show up and you would never have a chance to get the queued message by changing the action manually. -The Confirmation Dialogue - -This dialogue shows up whenever you have POP filtering switched on and messages were found on the server that exceed the threshold size you defined for the POP account. Now you have the chance to decide what you want to do with that message. The options are Download (green), Download later (yellow with egg watch) and Delete from server (red X). Be cautious with the delete option, since once you deleted a mail from the server, there is no way to undelete it again. - -In the Filtered Messages section you can check the box if you receive messages that were automatically tagged for a certain action (download, download later, delete) by a filter rule. The checkbox is only enabled if you receive some messages that were matched by a filter rule; once you check it, a list similar to the one for the not-automatically-tagged messages will be displayed and you can change the action for every single message. - -Please note that if there is a message exceeding the size limit, but all messages are matched by a filter rule the dialogue will not be displayed. One exception occurs if you have checked Always show matched 'Download Later' messages in the Global Options section of the POP filter configuration dialogue; then, the dialogue will also be displayed if you only have matched messages, but at least one message was tagged for Download later. +The Confirmation Dialogue + +This dialogue shows up whenever you have POP filtering switched on and messages were found on the server that exceed the threshold size you defined for the POP account. Now you have the chance to decide what you want to do with that message. The options are Download (green), Download later (yellow with egg watch) and Delete from server (red X). Be cautious with the delete option, since once you deleted a mail from the server, there is no way to undelete it again. + +In the Filtered Messages section you can check the box if you receive messages that were automatically tagged for a certain action (download, download later, delete) by a filter rule. The checkbox is only enabled if you receive some messages that were matched by a filter rule; once you check it, a list similar to the one for the not-automatically-tagged messages will be displayed and you can change the action for every single message. + +Please note that if there is a message exceeding the size limit, but all messages are matched by a filter rule the dialogue will not be displayed. One exception occurs if you have checked Always show matched 'Download Later' messages in the Global Options section of the POP filter configuration dialogue; then, the dialogue will also be displayed if you only have matched messages, but at least one message was tagged for Download later. -Using Multiple Accounts - -Multiple accounts are used to check for messages from more than one email address and/or mail server. Select Settings Configure &kmail;... and click on the Network page to add or change your account settings. See the Getting started section for more information on the settings in the Network page. - -To check for messages from a particular account, use the FileCheck Mail In submenu to select the account to check for mail. You can also press the mouse button on the Check Mail icon for some time to get a list of accounts. +Using Multiple Accounts + +Multiple accounts are used to check for messages from more than one email address and/or mail server. Select Settings Configure &kmail;... and click on the Network page to add or change your account settings. See the Getting started section for more information on the settings in the Network page. + +To check for messages from a particular account, use the FileCheck Mail In submenu to select the account to check for mail. You can also press the mouse button on the Check Mail icon for some time to get a list of accounts. -Signing and Encrypting Messages with <application ->PGP</application -> or <application ->GnuPG</application -> - -There have been major changes in the way &kmail; handles signing/encryption. The following introduction applies to the previous version of &kmail;. You can still read the introduction to get an overview about how to sign/encrypt messages, but the details, especially those of the configuration, will differ. - -This is a short introduction on how to setup &kmail;'s PGP (Pretty Good Privacy) support; it gives some hints on the use of PGP too. It is written for people who are beginners in this area; if you are familiar with the use of PGP, you can skip most of the steps. This documentation, and the &kmail; user interface, generally talk only about PGP, but it applies to both PGP and GnuPG (GNU Privacy Guard), (although some GnuPG command-line parameters may be different.) - -Please also check out the &FAQ; item about PGP. - -Attachments will not be signed/encrypted if you are using inline OpenPGP: to sign/encrypt attachments, you have to install GnuPG and some necessary libraries; then, you can decide for each attachment whether it should be signed/encrypted or not. - -&kmail; has to rely on PGP's output; this output is often different between different versions of PGP, so it is important that you test if encryption really works with your setup before you start using it seriously. &kmail; might not warn you if something fails -- enable Show signed/encrypted text after composing. - -To setup and use PGP support in &kmail; it is necessary to have PGP installed and set up properly; of course, we cannot give you a full introduction of PGP here. We will only mention the steps you have to do to get PGP going. For details you should have a look at the excellent PGP documentation or The GNU Privacy Handbook. - -It is certainly a good idea to study this documentation as well as an introduction into public key cryptography (⪚ out of the PGP 6.5.x package): there you can learn a lot about the basic concepts, which will help you to understand what is going on; also, many security related issues you should know about are discussed there. - -Now, let us start. +Signing and Encrypting Messages with <application>PGP</application> or <application>GnuPG</application> + +There have been major changes in the way &kmail; handles signing/encryption. The following introduction applies to the previous version of &kmail;. You can still read the introduction to get an overview about how to sign/encrypt messages, but the details, especially those of the configuration, will differ. + +This is a short introduction on how to setup &kmail;'s PGP (Pretty Good Privacy) support; it gives some hints on the use of PGP too. It is written for people who are beginners in this area; if you are familiar with the use of PGP, you can skip most of the steps. This documentation, and the &kmail; user interface, generally talk only about PGP, but it applies to both PGP and GnuPG (GNU Privacy Guard), (although some GnuPG command-line parameters may be different.) + +Please also check out the &FAQ; item about PGP. + +Attachments will not be signed/encrypted if you are using inline OpenPGP: to sign/encrypt attachments, you have to install GnuPG and some necessary libraries; then, you can decide for each attachment whether it should be signed/encrypted or not. + +&kmail; has to rely on PGP's output; this output is often different between different versions of PGP, so it is important that you test if encryption really works with your setup before you start using it seriously. &kmail; might not warn you if something fails -- enable Show signed/encrypted text after composing. + +To setup and use PGP support in &kmail; it is necessary to have PGP installed and set up properly; of course, we cannot give you a full introduction of PGP here. We will only mention the steps you have to do to get PGP going. For details you should have a look at the excellent PGP documentation or The GNU Privacy Handbook. + +It is certainly a good idea to study this documentation as well as an introduction into public key cryptography (⪚ out of the PGP 6.5.x package): there you can learn a lot about the basic concepts, which will help you to understand what is going on; also, many security related issues you should know about are discussed there. + +Now, let us start. -Preconditions - -&kmail; expects that your PGP binary is called pgp; in the case of GnuPG, it expects the binary to be called gpg. If this is not the case for you, just make a symlink. - -If you have not done so, you have to generate a key pair (secret and public key) for your identity. You must do this at the command line: use pgp or gpg : &kmail; has no internal support for pgp's key generation at this time. The identity (normally your name followed by your email address within brackets, such as John Smith <john@example.com>) and your passphrase are important for the co-operation between &kmail; and PGP. +Preconditions + +&kmail; expects that your PGP binary is called pgp; in the case of GnuPG, it expects the binary to be called gpg. If this is not the case for you, just make a symlink. + +If you have not done so, you have to generate a key pair (secret and public key) for your identity. You must do this at the command line: use pgp or gpg : &kmail; has no internal support for pgp's key generation at this time. The identity (normally your name followed by your email address within brackets, such as John Smith <john@example.com>) and your passphrase are important for the co-operation between &kmail; and PGP. -<application ->PGP</application ->-Related Settings in &kmail; - -Select the OpenPGP tab on the Security settings page; there you will find the following options: +<application>PGP</application>-Related Settings in &kmail; + +Select the OpenPGP tab on the Security settings page; there you will find the following options: -Encryption tool +Encryption tool -Here you can choose if you want to use PGP, GnuPG or no encryption software at all; of course, the program you select has to be installed on your system (it is also important to select the correct version). +Here you can choose if you want to use PGP, GnuPG or no encryption software at all; of course, the program you select has to be installed on your system (it is also important to select the correct version). -Keep passphrase in memory +Keep passphrase in memory -When this option is off, &kmail; will ask for your passphrase each time you sign a message (before sending) or select an encrypted message; if you turn this option on, &kmail; will remember your passphrase from after your first successful input until you finish your &kmail; session. The passphrase is stored in memory and not written to the hard disk. If you use one of the Crypto-Plugins or if you use GnuPG with the gpg-agent then an external program will ask for your passphrase and optionally remember it for some time. +When this option is off, &kmail; will ask for your passphrase each time you sign a message (before sending) or select an encrypted message; if you turn this option on, &kmail; will remember your passphrase from after your first successful input until you finish your &kmail; session. The passphrase is stored in memory and not written to the hard disk. If you use one of the Crypto-Plugins or if you use GnuPG with the gpg-agent then an external program will ask for your passphrase and optionally remember it for some time. -Always encrypt to self +Always encrypt to self -If this option is off and you want to send an encrypted message to somebody, then you cannot read this message any longer after you have composed and encrypted it. Turn this option on to keep sent encrypted messages readable for you too. +If this option is off and you want to send an encrypted message to somebody, then you cannot read this message any longer after you have composed and encrypted it. Turn this option on to keep sent encrypted messages readable for you too. -Show signed/encrypted text after composing +Show signed/encrypted text after composing -This will show you the result of encrypting and signing before the message gets sent; this way, you can still cancel sending if encrypting failed. It is strongly recommended to use this option. +This will show you the result of encrypting and signing before the message gets sent; this way, you can still cancel sending if encrypting failed. It is strongly recommended to use this option. -Always show the encryption keys for approval +Always show the encryption keys for approval -This will always open a dialogue that lets you choose the keys used for each recipient when you are sending an encrypted message; if this option is off, &kmail; will show this dialogue only when it cannot find a key for a recipient or when there are conflicting or unset encryption preferences. +This will always open a dialogue that lets you choose the keys used for each recipient when you are sending an encrypted message; if this option is off, &kmail; will show this dialogue only when it cannot find a key for a recipient or when there are conflicting or unset encryption preferences. -Automatically sign messages using OpenPGP -This lets you toggle whether to automatically sign your messages by default; of course, it is still possible to send unsigned messages by deselecting the icon in the composer window. +Automatically sign messages using OpenPGP +This lets you toggle whether to automatically sign your messages by default; of course, it is still possible to send unsigned messages by deselecting the icon in the composer window. -Automatically encrypt messages whenever possible -If this option is on, &kmail; will automatically encrypt messages with the built-in OpenPGP support or the PGP/MIME-Plugin provided that, for every recipient, a trusted PGP key is found in your keyring and you did not tell &kmail; not to encrypt messages sent to certain recipients. If in doubt, &kmail; will ask whether the message should be encrypted or not. +Automatically encrypt messages whenever possible +If this option is on, &kmail; will automatically encrypt messages with the built-in OpenPGP support or the PGP/MIME-Plugin provided that, for every recipient, a trusted PGP key is found in your keyring and you did not tell &kmail; not to encrypt messages sent to certain recipients. If in doubt, &kmail; will ask whether the message should be encrypted or not. -Now that you have setup the encryption tool you have tell &kmail; which OpenPGP key you want to use for signing and for encrypting messages; to do this go to the Identities configuration and set the key that should be used on the Advanced tab of the identity configuration. - -Now you are able to sign outgoing messages; to let people send you encrypted messages and to let them verify your signature you must send them your public key or upload your public key to a public PGP key server so that they can fetch your key from there. To send encrypted messages to other people or to verify their signed messages you will need their public keys; you can store your public key(s) on a public PGP key server such as http://www.cam.ac.uk.pgp.net/pgpnet/. +Now that you have setup the encryption tool you have tell &kmail; which OpenPGP key you want to use for signing and for encrypting messages; to do this go to the Identities configuration and set the key that should be used on the Advanced tab of the identity configuration. + +Now you are able to sign outgoing messages; to let people send you encrypted messages and to let them verify your signature you must send them your public key or upload your public key to a public PGP key server so that they can fetch your key from there. To send encrypted messages to other people or to verify their signed messages you will need their public keys; you can store your public key(s) on a public PGP key server such as http://www.cam.ac.uk.pgp.net/pgpnet/. -Sign your Messages - -You can compose your message as usual in the composer window of &kmail;. Before you send the message, check the Sign Message icon on the toolbar of the composer window; then, you can send the message. The identity you are using to write the current message needs to be connected to an OpenPGP Key in the Identity section of the Configure dialogue. To sign the message, &kmail; needs to know your PGP passphrase: if you did not select Keep passphrase in memory in the Security section, &kmail; will ask you for it; otherwise, if you have already given the phrase to &kmail;, it will sign the message without any further prompt. +Sign your Messages + +You can compose your message as usual in the composer window of &kmail;. Before you send the message, check the Sign Message icon on the toolbar of the composer window; then, you can send the message. The identity you are using to write the current message needs to be connected to an OpenPGP Key in the Identity section of the Configure dialogue. To sign the message, &kmail; needs to know your PGP passphrase: if you did not select Keep passphrase in memory in the Security section, &kmail; will ask you for it; otherwise, if you have already given the phrase to &kmail;, it will sign the message without any further prompt. -Encrypt your Messages - -To send an encrypted message to somebody of whom you have a public key, you simply create the message in the composer window. Before you send the message, check the Encrypt Message button in the toolbar of the composer window; note that you might not have to check the button if Automatically encrypt messages whenever possible is selected in &kmail;'s configuration (see above). Then send the message. - -If you checked the Encrypt Message button and &kmail; cannot find a matching key for a recipient, it will display a list containing all available keys in the Encryption Key Selection dialogue; if &kmail; finds more than one trusted key for a recipient, it will display a list containing all matching keys for this recipient. In both cases you can select the key(s) which should be used for encrypting this message for the recipient in question. Using the Remember choice checkbox you can save your selection for future messages. - -If you are using a key for the first time, there are conflicting Encryption Preferences, or if Always show the encryption keys for approval is selected in the Security section of &kmail;'s configuration dialogue the Encryption Key Approval dialogue will appear; here, you can select different keys for the recipients and can set the Encryption Preference for each recipient. The default option, Encrypt whenever encryption is possible, will automatically encrypt your message if there is a trusted key for each recipient. - -As mentioned above, you will not be able to read your own encrypted sent messages if you do not check Always encrypt to self in the settings' Security page. +Encrypt your Messages + +To send an encrypted message to somebody of whom you have a public key, you simply create the message in the composer window. Before you send the message, check the Encrypt Message button in the toolbar of the composer window; note that you might not have to check the button if Automatically encrypt messages whenever possible is selected in &kmail;'s configuration (see above). Then send the message. + +If you checked the Encrypt Message button and &kmail; cannot find a matching key for a recipient, it will display a list containing all available keys in the Encryption Key Selection dialogue; if &kmail; finds more than one trusted key for a recipient, it will display a list containing all matching keys for this recipient. In both cases you can select the key(s) which should be used for encrypting this message for the recipient in question. Using the Remember choice checkbox you can save your selection for future messages. + +If you are using a key for the first time, there are conflicting Encryption Preferences, or if Always show the encryption keys for approval is selected in the Security section of &kmail;'s configuration dialogue the Encryption Key Approval dialogue will appear; here, you can select different keys for the recipients and can set the Encryption Preference for each recipient. The default option, Encrypt whenever encryption is possible, will automatically encrypt your message if there is a trusted key for each recipient. + +As mentioned above, you will not be able to read your own encrypted sent messages if you do not check Always encrypt to self in the settings' Security page. -Send your Public Key - -Prepare a message to the person to whom you want to send your public key; then, choose, in the composer window's menu, AttachAttach My Public Key: this will attach the public key you defined for the current identity to the message. Now you can send the message. - -Remember that it is not safe at all if you sign the message to make sure that the receiver will get the correct key: there can be a man-in-the-middle attack, as somebody can change the key and sign the message with that other key. That is why the recipient should verify the attached key by checking the key's fingerprint against the one he received in a secure way from you; have a look at the PGP documentation for further details. +Send your Public Key + +Prepare a message to the person to whom you want to send your public key; then, choose, in the composer window's menu, AttachAttach My Public Key: this will attach the public key you defined for the current identity to the message. Now you can send the message. + +Remember that it is not safe at all if you sign the message to make sure that the receiver will get the correct key: there can be a man-in-the-middle attack, as somebody can change the key and sign the message with that other key. That is why the recipient should verify the attached key by checking the key's fingerprint against the one he received in a secure way from you; have a look at the PGP documentation for further details. -You received an encrypted Message +You received an encrypted Message -All you have to do is to select the message in &kmail;. You will be prompted for your passphrase; then, &kmail; will try to decrypt the message and show you the plain text if the message had been encrypted with your public key: if not, then you will not be able to read it. &kmail; stores the messages encrypted, so nobody can read these messages without knowing your passphrase. +All you have to do is to select the message in &kmail;. You will be prompted for your passphrase; then, &kmail; will try to decrypt the message and show you the plain text if the message had been encrypted with your public key: if not, then you will not be able to read it. &kmail; stores the messages encrypted, so nobody can read these messages without knowing your passphrase. -Receiving a Public Key - -You can receive a public key as an attachment or via http, ftp or a floppy. Before you can use this key to encrypt a message to the owner of the key, you should verify the key (check its fingerprint or look for trusted signatures); then, you can add this key to your public keyring by typing pgp filename at the command line (if you are using PGP) or by typing gpg filename at the command line (if you are using GnuPG). If the key is not certified with a trusted signature you cannot use it to encrypt messages unless you have signed the key with your key. +Receiving a Public Key + +You can receive a public key as an attachment or via http, ftp or a floppy. Before you can use this key to encrypt a message to the owner of the key, you should verify the key (check its fingerprint or look for trusted signatures); then, you can add this key to your public keyring by typing pgp filename at the command line (if you are using PGP) or by typing gpg filename at the command line (if you are using GnuPG). If the key is not certified with a trusted signature you cannot use it to encrypt messages unless you have signed the key with your key. -The Anti-Spam Wizard +The Anti-Spam Wizard -Basics +Basics -&kmail; does not have a built-in spam detection solution: the developers believe using external, but specialised, tools is the better approach. &kmail; uses these tools through its flexible filter architecture. The Anti-Spam Wizard helps you with the initial filter setup. +&kmail; does not have a built-in spam detection solution: the developers believe using external, but specialised, tools is the better approach. &kmail; uses these tools through its flexible filter architecture. The Anti-Spam Wizard helps you with the initial filter setup. -What can the wizard do to help you? +What can the wizard do to help you? -It will give you some choices about how you want the spam filtering to be set up. Afterwards it will automatically create the appropriate filter rules. +It will give you some choices about how you want the spam filtering to be set up. Afterwards it will automatically create the appropriate filter rules. -What are the limitations of the wizard? +What are the limitations of the wizard? -It can only initially set up the filters for you; and it will provide a standard setup. Modifying existing filters is not yet possible. +It can only initially set up the filters for you; and it will provide a standard setup. Modifying existing filters is not yet possible. -You can activate the wizard via Tools Anti-Spam Wizard.... +You can activate the wizard via Tools Anti-Spam Wizard.... -Advanced - -Here are the details of how the wizard works: &kmail; can use several external tools to detect spam messages; it will try to automatically find out which of those tools are installed on your box and will show you the result of the search for each tool. You can mark the tools which you want to be used by &kmail; to detect spam; marking tools which were not found is not possible because the appropriate checkboxes are disabled. Of course, you can close the wizard, install a tool, and restart the wizard again. - -If you have marked at least one tool you will be able to select some actions to be done in &kmail; with regard to spam messages: to let &kmail; detect spam messages you definitely should mark the Classify messages using the anti-spam tools option; if you want messages detected as spam to be moved into a certain folder, please select the appropriate folder and mark the Move detected spam messages to the selected folder option; if messages detected as spam should additionally be marked as read, then mark the Additionally, mark detected spam messages as read option. - -If you want to be able to manually mark messages as spam or non-spam (ham) you should check the Classify messages manually as spam option: note that you can seemingly achieve the same result when you only change the status of the appropriate messages; but, if any of the tools you selected support Bayesian filtering (&ie; a method to detect spam based on statistical analysis of the messages) then these messages are not only marked but additionally transfered to the tools to let them learn so they can improve their detection rate. - -Having checked at least one of these last options will allow you to let the wizard finish the filter setup. The wizard will not take any existing filter rules into consideration but will append new rules in any case; you may want to inspect the result of this process in the Filter Dialogue. If you have checked the Classify messages manually as spam / not spam option the wizard will create toolbar buttons for marking messages as spam or as ham; keep in mind that classifying messages as spam will also move those messages to the folder you had specified for spam messages. +Advanced + +Here are the details of how the wizard works: &kmail; can use several external tools to detect spam messages; it will try to automatically find out which of those tools are installed on your box and will show you the result of the search for each tool. You can mark the tools which you want to be used by &kmail; to detect spam; marking tools which were not found is not possible because the appropriate checkboxes are disabled. Of course, you can close the wizard, install a tool, and restart the wizard again. + +If you have marked at least one tool you will be able to select some actions to be done in &kmail; with regard to spam messages: to let &kmail; detect spam messages you definitely should mark the Classify messages using the anti-spam tools option; if you want messages detected as spam to be moved into a certain folder, please select the appropriate folder and mark the Move detected spam messages to the selected folder option; if messages detected as spam should additionally be marked as read, then mark the Additionally, mark detected spam messages as read option. + +If you want to be able to manually mark messages as spam or non-spam (ham) you should check the Classify messages manually as spam option: note that you can seemingly achieve the same result when you only change the status of the appropriate messages; but, if any of the tools you selected support Bayesian filtering (&ie; a method to detect spam based on statistical analysis of the messages) then these messages are not only marked but additionally transfered to the tools to let them learn so they can improve their detection rate. + +Having checked at least one of these last options will allow you to let the wizard finish the filter setup. The wizard will not take any existing filter rules into consideration but will append new rules in any case; you may want to inspect the result of this process in the Filter Dialogue. If you have checked the Classify messages manually as spam / not spam option the wizard will create toolbar buttons for marking messages as spam or as ham; keep in mind that classifying messages as spam will also move those messages to the folder you had specified for spam messages. -Details +Details -The wizard uses information stored in a special configuration file named kmail.antispamrc (stored in the global or local KDE config directory). It will first check the global config file and then the local config file: if the local config file contains entries with higher (newer) version numbers per-tool the configuration data from the local file for that tool is used; that way, both administrators and users can update the wizard configuration. +The wizard uses information stored in a special configuration file named kmail.antispamrc (stored in the global or local KDE config directory). It will first check the global config file and then the local config file: if the local config file contains entries with higher (newer) version numbers per-tool the configuration data from the local file for that tool is used; that way, both administrators and users can update the wizard configuration. -The detection of spam messages is achieved by creating pipe through actions per-tool within a special filter. Another filter contains rules to check for detected spam messages and actions to mark them and (optionally, depending on the choice in the wizard) to move them into a folder. Both filters are configured to be applied on incoming messages and on manual filtering. +The detection of spam messages is achieved by creating pipe through actions per-tool within a special filter. Another filter contains rules to check for detected spam messages and actions to mark them and (optionally, depending on the choice in the wizard) to move them into a folder. Both filters are configured to be applied on incoming messages and on manual filtering. -Two filters are needed for the classification of ham and spam. They contain actions to mark the messages appropriately. As mentioned above, the filter for classification as spam has another action to move the message into a predefined folder. If the selected tools support Bayesian filtering, the wizard will create additional filter actions to pass the messages to the tools (execute command actions) in the appropriate learn mode. +Two filters are needed for the classification of ham and spam. They contain actions to mark the messages appropriately. As mentioned above, the filter for classification as spam has another action to move the message into a predefined folder. If the selected tools support Bayesian filtering, the wizard will create additional filter actions to pass the messages to the tools (execute command actions) in the appropriate learn mode. -The Anti-Virus Wizard +The Anti-Virus Wizard -Basics +Basics -&kmail; does not have a built-in virus detection solution: the developers believe using external, but specialised, tools is the better approach. &kmail; uses these tools through its flexible filter architecture. The Anti-Virus Wizard helps you with the initial filter setup. +&kmail; does not have a built-in virus detection solution: the developers believe using external, but specialised, tools is the better approach. &kmail; uses these tools through its flexible filter architecture. The Anti-Virus Wizard helps you with the initial filter setup. -What can the wizard do to help you? +What can the wizard do to help you? -It will give you some choices about how you want virus filtering to be set up. Afterwards it will automatically create the appropriate filter rules. +It will give you some choices about how you want virus filtering to be set up. Afterwards it will automatically create the appropriate filter rules. -What are the limitations of the wizard? +What are the limitations of the wizard? -It can only initially set up the filters for you; and it will provide a standard setup. Modifying existing filters is not yet possible. +It can only initially set up the filters for you; and it will provide a standard setup. Modifying existing filters is not yet possible. -You can activate the wizard via Tools Anti-Virus Wizard.... +You can activate the wizard via Tools Anti-Virus Wizard.... -Advanced - -The Anti-Virus Wizard basically works exactly as the Anti-Spam Wizard. Here are the details of how the wizard works: &kmail; can use several external tools to detect messages containing viruses; it will try to automatically find out which of those tools are installed on your box and will show you the result of the search for each tool. You can mark the tools which you want to be used by &kmail; to detect viruses; marking tools which were not found is not possible because the appropriate checkboxes are disabled. Of course, you can close the wizard, install a tool, and restart the wizard again. - -If you have marked at least one tool you will be able to select some actions to be done in &kmail; with regard to messages containing viruses: to let &kmail; detect messages containing viruses you definitely should mark the Check messages using the anti-virus tools option; if you want messages detected as virus-infected to be moved into a certain folder, please select the appropriate folder and mark the Move detected viral messages to the selected folder option; if messages detected as virus-infected should additionally be marked as read, then mark the Additionally, mark detected viral messages as read option. - -Having checked at least one of these last options will allow you to let the wizard finish the filter setup. The wizard will not take any existing filter rules into consideration but will append new rules in any case; you may want to inspect the result of this process in the Filter Dialogue. +Advanced + +The Anti-Virus Wizard basically works exactly as the Anti-Spam Wizard. Here are the details of how the wizard works: &kmail; can use several external tools to detect messages containing viruses; it will try to automatically find out which of those tools are installed on your box and will show you the result of the search for each tool. You can mark the tools which you want to be used by &kmail; to detect viruses; marking tools which were not found is not possible because the appropriate checkboxes are disabled. Of course, you can close the wizard, install a tool, and restart the wizard again. + +If you have marked at least one tool you will be able to select some actions to be done in &kmail; with regard to messages containing viruses: to let &kmail; detect messages containing viruses you definitely should mark the Check messages using the anti-virus tools option; if you want messages detected as virus-infected to be moved into a certain folder, please select the appropriate folder and mark the Move detected viral messages to the selected folder option; if messages detected as virus-infected should additionally be marked as read, then mark the Additionally, mark detected viral messages as read option. + +Having checked at least one of these last options will allow you to let the wizard finish the filter setup. The wizard will not take any existing filter rules into consideration but will append new rules in any case; you may want to inspect the result of this process in the Filter Dialogue. -Details - -The wizard uses information stored in a special configuration file named kmail.antivirusrc (stored in the global or local KDE config directory). It will first check the global config file and then the local config file: if the local config file contains entries with higher (newer) version numbers per-tool the configuration data from the local file for that tool is used; that way, both administrators and users can update the wizard configuration. - -The detection of messages containing viruses is achieved by creating pipe through actions per-tool within a special filter. Another filter contains rules to check for detected viral messages and actions to mark them and (optionally, depending on the choice in the wizard) to move them into a folder. Both filters are configured to be applied on incoming messages and on manual filtering. +Details + +The wizard uses information stored in a special configuration file named kmail.antivirusrc (stored in the global or local KDE config directory). It will first check the global config file and then the local config file: if the local config file contains entries with higher (newer) version numbers per-tool the configuration data from the local file for that tool is used; that way, both administrators and users can update the wizard configuration. + +The detection of messages containing viruses is achieved by creating pipe through actions per-tool within a special filter. Another filter contains rules to check for detected viral messages and actions to mark them and (optionally, depending on the choice in the wizard) to move them into a folder. Both filters are configured to be applied on incoming messages and on manual filtering. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/commands.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/commands.docbook index 2f65ccf5c7f..8a4aba35cc9 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/commands.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/commands.docbook @@ -1,120 +1,65 @@ + --> -Command reference +Command reference -The following keybindings assume you did not change the default settings. +The following keybindings assume you did not change the default settings. -The main &knode; window +The main &knode; window -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu - &Ctrl;S File Save + &Ctrl;S File Save -Saves the selected article in a file. +Saves the selected article in a file. - &Ctrl;P File Print + &Ctrl;P File Print -Prints the selected article. +Prints the selected article. - File Send pending messages + File Send pending messages -The messages in the Outbox folder are sent. +The messages in the Outbox folder are sent. - File Stop Network + File Stop Network -Disconnects the current connection to a newsserver. +Disconnects the current connection to a newsserver. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Quits &knode;. +Quits &knode;. @@ -123,89 +68,46 @@ -The <guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu - &Ctrl;C Edit Copy + &Ctrl;C Edit Copy -Copy the selected text to the clipboard. +Copy the selected text to the clipboard. -&Ctrl;A Edit Select all +&Ctrl;A Edit Select all -Selects the whole article. +Selects the whole article. - F4 Edit Search articles + F4 Edit Search articles -Opens the Search Dialogue Box for searching in the active group. +Opens the Search Dialogue Box for searching in the active group. -Edit Fetch article with ID... +Edit Fetch article with ID... -Enables the download of an article with a specified article-ID. +Enables the download of an article with a specified article-ID. @@ -214,211 +116,120 @@ -The <guimenu ->View</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu -View Show Threads +View Show Threads -When this is activated, &knode; shows discussions as a tree view in the article view. +When this is activated, &knode; shows discussions as a tree view in the article view. -View Expand all threads +View Expand all threads -When this is activated, &knode; shows the complete threads; this is only functional when Show threads is active. +When this is activated, &knode; shows the complete threads; this is only functional when Show threads is active. -View Collapse all threads +View Collapse all threads -When this is activated, &knode; shows no threads; this is only functional when Show threads is active. +When this is activated, &knode; shows no threads; this is only functional when Show threads is active. -T View Toggle Subthread +T View Toggle Subthread -Toggles between showing and collapsing the selected thread. +Toggles between showing and collapsing the selected thread. -View Filter +View Filter -Allows you to choose a filter for the article view. +Allows you to choose a filter for the article view. -View Sort +View Sort -Allows you to sort the article view. +Allows you to sort the article view. -F5 View Refresh list +F5 View Refresh list -Refreshes the article view +Refreshes the article view -View Show all headers +View Show all headers -When this setting is activated, &knode; shows the complete article header in the article window. +When this setting is activated, &knode; shows the complete article header in the article window. -View Unscramble (ROT 13) +View Unscramble (ROT 13) -When this setting is activated, &knode; shows all characters of the complete article rotated by 13 characters. +When this setting is activated, &knode; shows all characters of the complete article rotated by 13 characters. -View Verify PGP signature +View Verify PGP signature -Checks the PGP signature in the article. +Checks the PGP signature in the article. -X View Use fixed font +X View Use fixed font -Activates the configured fixed-width font for the viewer. +Activates the configured fixed-width font for the viewer. -View Charset +View Charset -Here you can configure the charset which is used for the articles. +Here you can configure the charset which is used for the articles. @@ -427,135 +238,68 @@ -The <guimenu ->Go</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Go</guimenu> menu -B Go Previous article +B Go Previous article -Jumps to previous article in the article view. +Jumps to previous article in the article view. -N Go Next article +N Go Next article -Jumps to next article in the article view. +Jumps to next article in the article view. -&Alt;Space Go Next unread article +&Alt;Space Go Next unread article -Jumps to the next unread article, and to the first unread article of the next newsgroup if necessary. +Jumps to the next unread article, and to the first unread article of the next newsgroup if necessary. -&Ctrl;Space Go Next unread thread +&Ctrl;Space Go Next unread thread -Jumps to the next unread thread, and to the next unread thread in the next newsgroup if necessary. +Jumps to the next unread thread, and to the next unread thread in the next newsgroup if necessary. -- Go Previous group +- Go Previous group -Jumps to the previous news group in the folder view +Jumps to the previous news group in the folder view -+ Go Next group ++ Go Next group -Jumps to the next newsgroup in the folder view +Jumps to the next newsgroup in the folder view @@ -564,99 +308,58 @@ -The <guimenu ->Account</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Account</guimenu> menu -Account Get new articles in all groups +Account Get new articles in all groups -Connects with the active account and fetches any new messages. +Connects with the active account and fetches any new messages. -Account Subscribe to Newsgroups - - - -Opens the Dialogue Box for subscribing to newsgroups for the active account. - - - +Account Subscribe to Newsgroups + + + +Opens the Dialogue Box for subscribing to newsgroups for the active account. + + + -Account Expire all groups +Account Expire all groups -Here you can expire all groups of an account manually. +Here you can expire all groups of an account manually. -Account Account Properties +Account Account Properties -Opens the properties dialogue for the active account. +Opens the properties dialogue for the active account. -Account Delete Account +Account Delete Account -Deletes the active account and all subscribed newsgroups therein. +Deletes the active account and all subscribed newsgroups therein. @@ -665,121 +368,76 @@ -The <guimenu ->Group</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Group</guimenu> menu -Group Get new articles +Group Get new articles -Connects with the active account and fetches any new messages. +Connects with the active account and fetches any new messages. -Group Expire group +Group Expire group -Checks if there are any old articles and, if so, deletes them. +Checks if there are any old articles and, if so, deletes them. -Group Reorganise group +Group Reorganise group -Rebuilds the article view by using the configured sortings. +Rebuilds the article view by using the configured sortings. -Group Mark all as read +Group Mark all as read -Sets the status of all articles in the active newsgroup to read. +Sets the status of all articles in the active newsgroup to read. -Group Mark all as unread +Group Mark all as unread -Sets the status of all articles in the active newsgroup to unread. +Sets the status of all articles in the active newsgroup to unread. -Group Group Properties +Group Group Properties -Opens the dialogue for the group properties. +Opens the dialogue for the group properties. -Group Unsubscribe +Group Unsubscribe -Unsubscribes from the active newsgroup +Unsubscribes from the active newsgroup @@ -789,162 +447,96 @@ -The <guimenu ->Folder</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Folder</guimenu> menu -Folder New Folder +Folder New Folder -Creates a new main folder. +Creates a new main folder. -Folder New Subfolder +Folder New Subfolder -Creates a new subfolder. +Creates a new subfolder. -Folder Rename Folder +Folder Rename Folder -Here you can rename the active folder. +Here you can rename the active folder. -Folder Import MBox Folder +Folder Import MBox Folder -With this function it is possible to import an MBox folder into the active folder. +With this function it is possible to import an MBox folder into the active folder. -Folder Export as MBox Folder +Folder Export as MBox Folder -With this function you can export the active folder as an MBox folder. +With this function you can export the active folder as an MBox folder. -Folder Compact Folder +Folder Compact Folder -Removes all deleted articles from the active folder. +Removes all deleted articles from the active folder. -Folder Compact All Folders - - - -Removes all deleted articles from the every folder. - - - - - -Folder Empty Folder +Folder Compact All Folders + + + +Removes all deleted articles from the every folder. + + + + + +Folder Empty Folder -Deletes all articles from the active folder. +Deletes all articles from the active folder. -Folder Delete Folder +Folder Delete Folder -Deletes the active folder. +Deletes the active folder. @@ -953,310 +545,143 @@ -The <guimenu ->Article</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Article</guimenu> menu -P Article Post To Newsgroup +P Article Post To Newsgroup -Opens the Composer, with the settings for writing new articles set to those of the active newsgroup. +Opens the Composer, with the settings for writing new articles set to those of the active newsgroup. -R Article Followup To Newsgroup +R Article Followup To Newsgroup -Opens the Composer for writing a followup, with the content of the active article. +Opens the Composer for writing a followup, with the content of the active article. -A Article Reply by Email +A Article Reply by Email -Opens the Composer for writing an e-mail to the author of the active article. +Opens the Composer for writing an e-mail to the author of the active article. -F Article Forward by Email +F Article Forward by Email -Opens the Composer for forwarding the active article as e-mail. +Opens the Composer for forwarding the active article as e-mail. -D Article Mark as Read +D Article Mark as Read -Set the status of the active article to read +Set the status of the active article to read -U Article Mark as Unread +U Article Mark as Unread -Set the status of the active article to unread +Set the status of the active article to unread -&Ctrl;D Article Mark Thread as Read +&Ctrl;D Article Mark Thread as Read -Set the status of the active thread to read +Set the status of the active thread to read -&Ctrl;U Article Mark Thread as Unread +&Ctrl;U Article Mark Thread as Unread -Set the status of the active thread to unread +Set the status of the active thread to unread -Article Cancel Article +Article Cancel Article -Generate a message which deletes the active Article in Usenet; you can only use this with your own articles. +Generate a message which deletes the active Article in Usenet; you can only use this with your own articles. -Article Supersede Article +Article Supersede Article -Opens the Composer with the content of the active article; when this article is posted it overwrites the original article. You can only use this with your own articles. +Opens the Composer with the content of the active article; when this article is posted it overwrites the original article. You can only use this with your own articles. -O Article Open in own window +O Article Open in own window -The active article is opened in a new window. +The active article is opened in a new window. -Article View Source +Article View Source -The source code of the active article is opened in a new window. +The source code of the active article is opened in a new window. -E Article Edit Article... +E Article Edit Article... - Opens the Composer for editing the active article; you can only use this in the Outbox and Drafts folders. + Opens the Composer for editing the active article; you can only use this in the Outbox and Drafts folders. -Delete Article Delete Article +Delete Article Delete Article - Deletes the active article. You can only use this in the Outbox and Drafts folders. + Deletes the active article. You can only use this in the Outbox and Drafts folders. -Article Send now +Article Send now - Sends the active article. You can only use this in the Outbox and Drafts folders. + Sends the active article. You can only use this in the Outbox and Drafts folders. @@ -1264,149 +689,66 @@ -The <guimenu ->Scoring</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Scoring</guimenu> menu -&Ctrl;E Scoring Edit Scoring Rules... - - - -The dialogue to edit the scoring rules will be opened. - - - - - -Scoring Recalculate scores - - - -The scores will be reset and recalculated. - - - - - -&Ctrl;L Scoring Lower Score for Author... - - - -Creates a rule for lowering the score of all articles posted by the author of the active article. - - - - - -&Ctrl;I Scoring Raise Score for Author... - - - -Creates a rule for raising the score of all articles posted by the author of the active article. - - - - - -WScoring Watch Thread - +&Ctrl;E Scoring Edit Scoring Rules... + + + +The dialogue to edit the scoring rules will be opened. + + + + + +Scoring Recalculate scores + + + +The scores will be reset and recalculated. + + + + + +&Ctrl;L Scoring Lower Score for Author... + + + +Creates a rule for lowering the score of all articles posted by the author of the active article. + + + + + +&Ctrl;I Scoring Raise Score for Author... + + + +Creates a rule for raising the score of all articles posted by the author of the active article. + + + + + +WScoring Watch Thread + + + +Sets the score for this thread to the configured score of watched threads (standard = 100). + + + + + +I Scoring Ignore Thread + -Sets the score for this thread to the configured score of watched threads (standard = 100). - - - - - -I Scoring Ignore Thread - - - -Sets the score for this thread to the configured score of ignored threads (standard = -100). +Sets the score for this thread to the configured score of ignored threads (standard = -100). @@ -1415,90 +757,57 @@ -The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> menu -Settings Show Toolbar +Settings Show Toolbar -This option toggles whether the toolbar is shown or not. +This option toggles whether the toolbar is shown or not. -Settings Show Statusbar +Settings Show Statusbar -This option toggles whether the statusbar is shown or not. +This option toggles whether the statusbar is shown or not. -Settings Show Group view +Settings Show Group view -This option toggles whether the group list is shown or not. +This option toggles whether the group list is shown or not. -Settings Show Header view +Settings Show Header view -This option toggles whether the header view is shown or not. +This option toggles whether the header view is shown or not. -Settings Show Article viewer +Settings Show Article viewer -This option toggles whether the article is shown or not. +This option toggles whether the article is shown or not. @@ -1506,49 +815,31 @@ -Settings Configure Shortcuts... +Settings Configure Shortcuts... -Opens a dialogue for configuring the key bindings. +Opens a dialogue for configuring the key bindings. -Settings Configure Toolbars... +Settings Configure Toolbars... -Opens a dialogue for configuring the toolbars. +Opens a dialogue for configuring the toolbars. -Settings Configure KNode... +Settings Configure KNode... -Opens a dialogue for configuring &knode;. +Opens a dialogue for configuring &knode;. @@ -1557,121 +848,60 @@ -The <guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> menu &help.menu.documentation; -The composer menus. +The composer menus. - -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> menu + +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu -&Ctrl;Return File Send Now +&Ctrl;Return File Send Now -Sends the current article immediately. +Sends the current article immediately. -File Send Later - - -Stores the current article in the Outbox to be sent later. - - +File Send Later + + +Stores the current article in the Outbox to be sent later. + + - -File Save as Draft + +File Save as Draft -Saves the current article in the Drafts folder, so you can finish editing it another time. +Saves the current article in the Drafts folder, so you can finish editing it another time. -File Delete +File Delete -Deletes the current article, closing the editor. +Deletes the current article, closing the editor. -&Ctrl;W File Close +&Ctrl;W File Close -Closes the editor window +Closes the editor window @@ -1680,284 +910,131 @@ -The <guimenu ->Edit</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu -&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo - - - -Undo the last edit. - - - - - -&Ctrl;ShiftZ Edit Redo - - -Redo the last action undone with the Undo menu entry. - - - - -&Ctrl;X Edit Cut - - - -Cuts the currently-selected text to the clipboard, deleting it from the editor window. - - - - - -&Ctrl;C Edit Copy +&Ctrl;Z Edit Undo + + + +Undo the last edit. + + + + + +&Ctrl;ShiftZ Edit Redo + + +Redo the last action undone with the Undo menu entry. + + + + +&Ctrl;X Edit Cut + + + +Cuts the currently-selected text to the clipboard, deleting it from the editor window. + + + + + +&Ctrl;C Edit Copy - - -Copies the selected text to the clipboard. - - - - - -&Ctrl;V Edit Paste - - - -Pastes the current contents of the clipboard into the editor window. - - - - - -Edit Paste as Quotation + + +Copies the selected text to the clipboard. + + + + + +&Ctrl;V Edit Paste + + + +Pastes the current contents of the clipboard into the editor window. + + + + + +Edit Paste as Quotation - Pastes the current contents of the clipboard into the editor window with a quote character (>) at the beginning of each line. + Pastes the current contents of the clipboard into the editor window with a quote character (>) at the beginning of each line. -Edit Select All +Edit Select All -Selects all the text in the editor window. +Selects all the text in the editor window. -&Ctrl;F Edit Find - +&Ctrl;F Edit Find + -Opens the Find dialogue. +Opens the Find dialogue. -&Ctrl;R Edit Replace... - - - -Opens the Replace dialogue. - - - - +&Ctrl;R Edit Replace... + + + +Opens the Replace dialogue. + + + + - + - -The <guimenu ->Attach</guimenu -> menu + +The <guimenu>Attach</guimenu> menu -Attach Append Signature +Attach Append Signature -Inserts your signature at the end of the article you are editing. +Inserts your signature at the end of the article you are editing. -Attach Insert File... +Attach Insert File... -Inserts the contents of a file into the editor window. +Inserts the contents of a file into the editor window. -Attach Insert File (in a box)... +Attach Insert File (in a box)... -Inserts the contents of a file into the editor window and puts a box around of it. +Inserts the contents of a file into the editor window and puts a box around of it. @@ -1965,17 +1042,11 @@ -Attach Attach File... +Attach Attach File... -Inserts a file as an attachment. +Inserts a file as an attachment. @@ -1984,73 +1055,46 @@ -The <guimenu ->Options</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Options</guimenu> menu -Options Send News-Article +Options Send News-Article -Toggles whether the message is to be sent as an article or not. +Toggles whether the message is to be sent as an article or not. -Options Send Email +Options Send Email -Toggles whether the message is to be sent as an email or not; if it's configured, an external editor will be activated. +Toggles whether the message is to be sent as an email or not; if it's configured, an external editor will be activated. -Options Set Charset +Options Set Charset -Here you can configure the charset used for this article; normally you use us-ascii for English-speaking areas. +Here you can configure the charset used for this article; normally you use us-ascii for English-speaking areas. -Options Word Wrap +Options Word Wrap -Toggles the word wrapping in the editor on or off. +Toggles the word wrapping in the editor on or off. @@ -2059,159 +1103,94 @@ -The <guimenu ->Tools</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> menu -Tools Add Quote Characters +Tools Add Quote Characters -Puts > in front of the marked lines. +Puts > in front of the marked lines. -Tools Remove Quote Characters +Tools Remove Quote Characters -Removes the quote characters at the beginning of the marked lines. +Removes the quote characters at the beginning of the marked lines. -Tools Add Box +Tools Add Box -Puts the marked lines in an ASCII box. +Puts the marked lines in an ASCII box. -Tools Remove Box +Tools Remove Box -Removes the ASCII box around the marked area. +Removes the ASCII box around the marked area. -Tools Sign Article with PGP +Tools Sign Article with PGP -Signs the article with PGP. +Signs the article with PGP. -Tools Get Original Text (not rewrapped) +Tools Get Original Text (not rewrapped) -Rebuilds the original posting when answering to an article. +Rebuilds the original posting when answering to an article. -Tools Scramble (Rot-13) +Tools Scramble (Rot-13) -Encrypts the marked text by rotating every character 13 characters of the alphabet. +Encrypts the marked text by rotating every character 13 characters of the alphabet. -Tools Start External Editor +Tools Start External Editor -Start the external editor (if one is configured) with the current contents of the editor window. +Start the external editor (if one is configured) with the current contents of the editor window. -&Ctrl;Z Tools Spelling... +&Ctrl;Z Tools Spelling... -Opens a dialogue box to check your spelling. +Opens a dialogue box to check your spelling. @@ -2220,89 +1199,56 @@ -The <guimenu ->Settings</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Settings</guimenu> menu -Settings Show Toolbar +Settings Show Toolbar -Toggles whether the toolbar should be shown or not. +Toggles whether the toolbar should be shown or not. -Settings Show Statusbar +Settings Show Statusbar -Toggles whether the statusbar should be shown or not. +Toggles whether the statusbar should be shown or not. -Settings Configure Shortcuts... +Settings Configure Shortcuts... -Opens a dialogue for configuring the key bindings. +Opens a dialogue for configuring the key bindings. -Settings Configure Toolbars... +Settings Configure Toolbars... -Opens a dialogue for configuring the toolbars. +Opens a dialogue for configuring the toolbars. -Settings Configure KNode... +Settings Configure KNode... -Open the &knode; Preferences dialogue. +Open the &knode; Preferences dialogue. @@ -2311,10 +1257,7 @@ -The <guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> menu +The <guimenu>Help</guimenu> menu &help.menu.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/credits.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/credits.docbook index 9fb4a7b579b..03a5d158f74 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/credits.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/credits.docbook @@ -1,86 +1,43 @@ -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&knode; +&knode; -Program Copyright 1999,2000,2001,2002 KNode developers +Program Copyright 1999,2000,2001,2002 KNode developers - -Developers - -Christian Gebauer gebauer@kde.org + +Developers + +Christian Gebauer gebauer@kde.org - -Christian Thurner cthurner@web.de - + +Christian Thurner cthurner@web.de + -Dirk Mueller mueller@kde.org +Dirk Mueller mueller@kde.org -Mark Mutz mutz@kde.org +Mark Mutz mutz@kde.org -Roberto Teixeira roberto@kde.org +Roberto Teixeira roberto@kde.org -Mathias Waack mathias@atoll-net.de +Mathias Waack mathias@atoll-net.de -Documentation +Documentation -Copyright 2000,2001 Stephan Johachlucardus@onlinehome.de +Copyright 2000,2001 Stephan Johachlucardus@onlinehome.de -Copyright 2001,2002 Thomas Schütz Thomas.Schuetz@gmx.li +Copyright 2001,2002 Thomas Schütz Thomas.Schuetz@gmx.li -Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk +Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk -Thanks go to the &knode; developers who answered all my stupid questions with patience. Then Thomas Diehl and Matthias Kiefer who always were competent contacts regards to translation. Many Thanks to Malcolm Hunter who checked this english translation. Not to forget Michael McBride, always there to help me out with documentation-related and general stuff, and everybody else in the &kde; Team who contributed to the creation of this document. -&underFDL; &underGPL; +Thanks go to the &knode; developers who answered all my stupid questions with patience. Then Thomas Diehl and Matthias Kiefer who always were competent contacts regards to translation. Many Thanks to Malcolm Hunter who checked this english translation. Not to forget Michael McBride, always there to help me out with documentation-related and general stuff, and everybody else in the &kde; Team who contributed to the creation of this document. +&underFDL; &underGPL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/faq.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/faq.docbook index 072bedafba0..76c8d45153c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/faq.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/faq.docbook @@ -2,290 +2,131 @@ --> -Questions and Answers +Questions and Answers -I have installed &kde; 3, but &knode; does not exist in the K Menu. - - -Does the Internetentry exist? If not, maybe the tdenetwork package isn't installed (perhaps because your distribution possibly doesn't do this for you); if the entry is there, but you do not have a KNode item in it, you should try to open a &konsole; and run &knode; from there. Type - -% knode & - - -If an error message appears that tells you that &knode; could not be started or found please check whether the file knode exists in $TDEDIR/bin and that its permissions are correctly set. - - - - - -When I start &knode;, a message appears in the task bar but suddenly disappears without &knode; being started. - +I have installed &kde; 3, but &knode; does not exist in the K Menu. + + +Does the Internetentry exist? If not, maybe the tdenetwork package isn't installed (perhaps because your distribution possibly doesn't do this for you); if the entry is there, but you do not have a KNode item in it, you should try to open a &konsole; and run &knode; from there. Type + +% knode & + + +If an error message appears that tells you that &knode; could not be started or found please check whether the file knode exists in $TDEDIR/bin and that its permissions are correctly set. + + + + + +When I start &knode;, a message appears in the task bar but suddenly disappears without &knode; being started. + -Try to start &knode; from the &konsole; (see previous question) and keep attention for the messages displayed there: if they do not make sense to you mark them with your mouse and copy it to the clipboard; then, ask for help on one of the &kde; mailing lists or &kde; news groups. - - - - - -I need an important article, but &knode; doesn't have it any more; where can I find this article? - - -You can find some extensive usenet archives at groups.google.com or AltaVista; they even contain articles that are several years old. - - - - - -How do I open and read several articles at the same time? - - -Open the article with Open in own window. - - - - - -My articles do not appear in the newsgroup. - - -When you publish an article it may be some time until your news server has it; wait several hours before you send the article again. - - - - - -I want to keep an article; how do I archive it? - - -Choose the article in the article view and then use FileSave to open a file dialogue; you can then save the article to a file. Another possibility is to copy the article to a folder. - - - - - -Some set headers do not appear for several articles in the article window; am I doing something wrong? - - -This is not unusual because many headers are optional and often not contained in articles; in this case &knode; does not show those header lines. - - - - - -Sometimes I see an article which refers to other articles but &knode; does not show any references; why is that? - - -This happens when somebody posted an article in another news group and checked the option Followup To; the article in question is then sent to your news group, but the referring article is absent. In many cases the poster tells the reason for his choice to set a followup. - - - - - -When I want to answer an article an error message appears telling me that the external editor could not be started, but the editor is correctly set. - - -Have a look whether you entered the place-holder for a filename after the editor command; if not, enter it. If you want, for example, to use &kedit; enter kedit %f -If the %f is absent, your editor cannot be run. +Try to start &knode; from the &konsole; (see previous question) and keep attention for the messages displayed there: if they do not make sense to you mark them with your mouse and copy it to the clipboard; then, ask for help on one of the &kde; mailing lists or &kde; news groups. + + + + + +I need an important article, but &knode; doesn't have it any more; where can I find this article? + + +You can find some extensive usenet archives at groups.google.com or AltaVista; they even contain articles that are several years old. + + + + + +How do I open and read several articles at the same time? + + +Open the article with Open in own window. + + + + + +My articles do not appear in the newsgroup. + + +When you publish an article it may be some time until your news server has it; wait several hours before you send the article again. + + + + + +I want to keep an article; how do I archive it? + + +Choose the article in the article view and then use FileSave to open a file dialogue; you can then save the article to a file. Another possibility is to copy the article to a folder. + + + + + +Some set headers do not appear for several articles in the article window; am I doing something wrong? + + +This is not unusual because many headers are optional and often not contained in articles; in this case &knode; does not show those header lines. + + + + + +Sometimes I see an article which refers to other articles but &knode; does not show any references; why is that? + + +This happens when somebody posted an article in another news group and checked the option Followup To; the article in question is then sent to your news group, but the referring article is absent. In many cases the poster tells the reason for his choice to set a followup. + + + + + +When I want to answer an article an error message appears telling me that the external editor could not be started, but the editor is correctly set. + + +Have a look whether you entered the place-holder for a filename after the editor command; if not, enter it. If you want, for example, to use &kedit; enter kedit %f +If the %f is absent, your editor cannot be run. - + -Why can I not receive data from my local news server? - - -If you use &knode; together with with a local news server, you must make sure that this server is correctly set up and started; for further details, please consult the documentation of your local news server. - -The availability of the local news server can easily be verified with the telnet program: open a console and type: +Why can I not receive data from my local news server? + + +If you use &knode; together with with a local news server, you must make sure that this server is correctly set up and started; for further details, please consult the documentation of your local news server. + +The availability of the local news server can easily be verified with the telnet program: open a console and type: -% telnet localhost nntp +% telnet localhost nntp -Followed by that, the news server should respond with: +Followed by that, the news server should respond with: - + Trying 127.0.0.1... Connected to localhost. Escape character is '^]'. 200 Leafnode NNTP Daemon, version 1.9.16 running at konqi.org - + -You can quit the telnet session with: +You can quit the telnet session with: -% quit +% quit -If that does not work there is either no local news server set up or the server was not started; in this case, please consult the documentation of your local news server. +If that does not work there is either no local news server set up or the server was not started; in this case, please consult the documentation of your local news server. -If you are trying to connect to a news server on the Internet you need, of course, an open (dial-in) connection and to have set up &knode; to use your ISP's news server; your ISP should be able to give you information about which news servers you can use. +If you are trying to connect to a news server on the Internet you need, of course, an open (dial-in) connection and to have set up &knode; to use your ISP's news server; your ISP should be able to give you information about which news servers you can use. - + - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/gloss.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/gloss.docbook index 32628779b1f..ced5789ab35 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/gloss.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/gloss.docbook @@ -1,425 +1,205 @@ -Glossary +Glossary -A - -Article - -An article in the sense of newspapers: special articles are, for example, followups; replies are not articles but Email. - - +A + +Article + +An article in the sense of newspapers: special articles are, for example, followups; replies are not articles but Email. + + - -C + +C -Cancelling +Cancelling -To delete one of your articles from the newsserver: the newsreader generates a special control message to tell the server to delete this article. +To delete one of your articles from the newsserver: the newsreader generates a special control message to tell the server to delete this article. -Crossposting +Crossposting -The posting of an article in several newsgroups; this is very often disliked, because it disturbs the topic-oriented association of the newsgroups. - - - - - -E +The posting of an article in several newsgroups; this is very often disliked, because it disturbs the topic-oriented association of the newsgroups. + + + + + +E -Expire - -Articles can not be held for eternity because of harddisk limits. Because of this there is usually a program called expire on most computer systems; this program deletes all articles which are older than a configured number of days. &knode; includes this functionality on its own. - - - - - -F +Expire + +Articles can not be held for eternity because of harddisk limits. Because of this there is usually a program called expire on most computer systems; this program deletes all articles which are older than a configured number of days. &knode; includes this functionality on its own. + + + + + +F -FAQ +FAQ -FAQ is the acronym for Frequently Asked Questions. - - +FAQ is the acronym for Frequently Asked Questions. + + -Followup - -An article which is written as an answer to another article. - - - - - -G +Followup + +An article which is written as an answer to another article. + + + + + +G -GNKSA +GNKSA -GNKSA is a kind of seal-of-approval for newsreaders; you can get more information at http://www.gnksa.org. - - +GNKSA is a kind of seal-of-approval for newsreaders; you can get more information at http://www.gnksa.org. + + - -H + +H -Header +Header -The Header of an article contains information about the sender, the subject, and the newsgroup of the article. - - - - - -K +The Header of an article contains information about the sender, the subject, and the newsgroup of the article. + + + + + +K -Killfile - -This is a functionality of a newsreader to hide articles of a determined sender or with certain contents. - - - - - -M +Killfile + +This is a functionality of a newsreader to hide articles of a determined sender or with certain contents. + + + + + +M -Message-ID - - -The Message-ID of an article is a clear mark for the newsserver to identify the article. A Message-ID should not be used twice in the whole usenet for about 2 years; wrong or double Message-IDs could cause problems when forwarding them and could overwrite other articles. - +Message-ID + + +The Message-ID of an article is a clear mark for the newsserver to identify the article. A Message-ID should not be used twice in the whole usenet for about 2 years; wrong or double Message-IDs could cause problems when forwarding them and could overwrite other articles. + - - - -N + + + +N -Newbie - -Somebody who is new somewhere, in relationship to usenet: somebody who is new to the newsgroup, or new to usenet in general. - - +Newbie + +Somebody who is new somewhere, in relationship to usenet: somebody who is new to the newsgroup, or new to usenet in general. + + -Newsgroup - -A kind-of bulletin board in the usenet about a special topic or a group of topics. This is where you post your articles. - - - - -Newsreader - -A program for reading and writing news. - - - - -NNTP - +Newsgroup + +A kind-of bulletin board in the usenet about a special topic or a group of topics. This is where you post your articles. + + + + +Newsreader + +A program for reading and writing news. + + + + +NNTP + -Network News Transport Protocol; this is the protocol which defines how the articles in the usenet are spread. - - - - - -P +Network News Transport Protocol; this is the protocol which defines how the articles in the usenet are spread. + + + + + +P -Port - -A kind-of address for the application to listen for data on and for connecting to another computer; the standard-port for the connection between the newsreader and the newsserver is 119. - - +Port + +A kind-of address for the application to listen for data on and for connecting to another computer; the standard-port for the connection between the newsreader and the newsserver is 119. + + -PGP-Signature +PGP-Signature -A digital signature; you can use it to determine whether the document has been changed since it was signed or if it is the original text from the author. - - +A digital signature; you can use it to determine whether the document has been changed since it was signed or if it is the original text from the author. + + -Posting - -Either an article which is sent to usenet or the act of sending itself; you are posting an article into a newsgroup. - - - - - -Q +Posting + +Either an article which is sent to usenet or the act of sending itself; you are posting an article into a newsgroup. + + + + + +Q -Quoting - -This is the act of citing of an article to which you are answering: you quote the original article to make clear which passages of text your answer refers to. - - - - - -R +Quoting + +This is the act of citing of an article to which you are answering: you quote the original article to make clear which passages of text your answer refers to. + + + + + +R -Reply - -A reply is an answer to the author of an article by e-mail. - - - - - -S +Reply + +A reply is an answer to the author of an article by e-mail. + + + + + +S -Scoring +Scoring -This is the valuation of an article or a thread. +This is the valuation of an article or a thread. -Signature +Signature -A signature is a personal sign of the author which is attached at the end of the normal contents of the article; it is like a visiting card — very often there are e-mail addresses, a homepage URL or other personal data. The signature should not be longer than 4 lines. Note that the signature should not be mixed up with the PGP-signature. +A signature is a personal sign of the author which is attached at the end of the normal contents of the article; it is like a visiting card — very often there are e-mail addresses, a homepage URL or other personal data. The signature should not be longer than 4 lines. Note that the signature should not be mixed up with the PGP-signature. -Supersede +Supersede -This is the overwriting of an existing article: the newsreader generates a special article with a control message in the header which tells the newsserver to overwrite the existing article with this one. +This is the overwriting of an existing article: the newsreader generates a special article with a control message in the header which tells the newsserver to overwrite the existing article with this one. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/index.docbook index b633badab40..f0db65fc294 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/index.docbook @@ -1,8 +1,7 @@ - + @@ -20,168 +19,68 @@ -The &knode; manual +The &knode; manual -StephanJohach
lucardus@onlinehome.de
+StephanJohach
lucardus@onlinehome.de
 - Thomas Schûtz
Thomas.Schuetz@gmx.li
+ Thomas Schûtz
Thomas.Schuetz@gmx.li
- Christian Gebauer Developer and maintainer -
gebauer@kde.org
+ Christian Gebauer Developer and maintainer +
gebauer@kde.org
- Christian Thurner Developer -
cthurner@web.de
+ Christian Thurner Developer +
cthurner@web.de
- Dirk Mueller Developer -
mueller@kde.org
+ Dirk Mueller Developer +
mueller@kde.org
- Mark Mutz Developer -
mutz@kde.org
+ Mark Mutz Developer +
mutz@kde.org
- Roberto Teixeira Developer -
roberto@kde.org
+ Roberto Teixeira Developer +
roberto@kde.org
- Mathias Waack Developer -
mathias@atoll-net.de
+ Mathias Waack Developer +
mathias@atoll-net.de
- 200020012002 -Stephan Johach -Thomas Schütz + 200020012002 +Stephan Johach +Thomas Schütz -2002-04-13 -0.07.00 +2002-04-13 +0.07.00 -&knode; is an easy-to-use newsreader. +&knode; is an easy-to-use newsreader. -KDE -KNode -tdenetwork -newsreader +KDE +KNode +tdenetwork +newsreader @@ -189,11 +88,8 @@ - -Working with &knode; &using-firststart; &using-subscribing; &using-morefeatures; + +Working with &knode; &using-firststart; &using-subscribing; &using-morefeatures; &commands; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/install.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/install.docbook index cf090ca7246..b8ffb1d4fb2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/install.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/install.docbook @@ -1,59 +1,34 @@ - -Installation - - -Where do I get &knode;? &install.intro.documentation; - - -Requirements + +Installation + + +Where do I get &knode;? &install.intro.documentation; + + +Requirements -If you want to successfully install &knode;, you need &kde; 3.x; if, in addition, you want to use &knode; as an offline newsreader, you need a local news server, ⪚ leafnode. - +If you want to successfully install &knode;, you need &kde; 3.x; if, in addition, you want to use &knode; as an offline newsreader, you need a local news server, ⪚ leafnode. + -Compile and install +Compile and install -&knode; is part of the tdenetwork package of &kde; 3.x and is installed together with it, provided you have chosen to install the tdenetwork package; so, in general, there is no need for a user to compile the sources of &knode;. +&knode; is part of the tdenetwork package of &kde; 3.x and is installed together with it, provided you have chosen to install the tdenetwork package; so, in general, there is no need for a user to compile the sources of &knode;. &install.compile.documentation; -Notes about updating an older version of &knode; +Notes about updating an older version of &knode; -This section contains notes about what to take care of when installing a newer version of &knode; with an older version already installed. +This section contains notes about what to take care of when installing a newer version of &knode; with an older version already installed. -Changes in configuration files and folders +Changes in configuration files and folders -Since version 0.2 the format of the configuration files and the saved articles has changed, so unfortunately, your old configuration files cannot be imported. +Since version 0.2 the format of the configuration files and the saved articles has changed, so unfortunately, your old configuration files cannot be imported. -If you update from a version ->= 0.4 the local folders will automatically be converted into the new format; you will then be unable to use the data with an older version of &knode; any more. +If you update from a version >= 0.4 the local folders will automatically be converted into the new format; you will then be unable to use the data with an older version of &knode; any more. - \ No newline at end of file + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/introduction.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/introduction.docbook index 5314b187e1d..36d662df074 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/introduction.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/introduction.docbook @@ -1,61 +1,31 @@ - -Introduction + --> + +Introduction -&knode; is an easy-to-use, convenient newsreader; it is intended to allow even newbies to use a newsreader under &kde;, but it also offers advanced features appealing to experienced users. &knode; is a online-reader but could work together with a newsserver like leafnode as an offline-reader. +&knode; is an easy-to-use, convenient newsreader; it is intended to allow even newbies to use a newsreader under &kde;, but it also offers advanced features appealing to experienced users. &knode; is a online-reader but could work together with a newsserver like leafnode as an offline-reader. -As of version 0.4 &knode; complies with all the requirements of the GNKSA. +As of version 0.4 &knode; complies with all the requirements of the GNKSA. -If you have problems or questions about this program, please contact the mailing list for &kde; users (for subscription, seeHomepage of the &kde; mailing lists ) or one of the &kde; newsgroups: +If you have problems or questions about this program, please contact the mailing list for &kde; users (for subscription, seeHomepage of the &kde; mailing lists ) or one of the &kde; newsgroups: -comp.windows.x.kde -de.comp.os.unix.apps.kde (german) +comp.windows.x.kde +de.comp.os.unix.apps.kde (german) -If you have found a bug or have suggestions regarding the functionality of &knode; please report them via the HelpReport bug... menu. - -Please make sure when asking questions in the newsgroups and mailing lists mentioned above that the question you are asking is not answered in this manual. - -For those new to reading news and posting articles, the A journey through Usenet chapter is recommended; it is not so much about &knode; as how to move about in the Usenet with its help. In general, it is not sufficient to just master a news reader for writing news articles: imagine a car driver who masters his car perfectly but does not know about the traffic rules or signs; do you want to encounter such a driver when out in traffic? So please take your time to learn at least a little about the traffic rules of the Usenet; the other participants will thank you. +If you have found a bug or have suggestions regarding the functionality of &knode; please report them via the HelpReport bug... menu. + +Please make sure when asking questions in the newsgroups and mailing lists mentioned above that the question you are asking is not answered in this manual. + +For those new to reading news and posting articles, the A journey through Usenet chapter is recommended; it is not so much about &knode; as how to move about in the Usenet with its help. In general, it is not sufficient to just master a news reader for writing news articles: imagine a car driver who masters his car perfectly but does not know about the traffic rules or signs; do you want to encounter such a driver when out in traffic? So please take your time to learn at least a little about the traffic rules of the Usenet; the other participants will thank you. -&knode; supports you in many cases with hints and warnings: if you do not simply ignore them you will avoid many beginners' mistakes; but, do not exclusively depend on them either. +&knode; supports you in many cases with hints and warnings: if you do not simply ignore them you will avoid many beginners' mistakes; but, do not exclusively depend on them either. -Please address suggestions and criticisms at the author or at the responsible translator for your language. +Please address suggestions and criticisms at the author or at the responsible translator for your language. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/journey.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/journey.docbook index e1141d9136c..5b6d3b6223f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/journey.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/journey.docbook @@ -1,574 +1,376 @@ + --> - -A journey in the World of Newsgroups + +A journey in the World of Newsgroups -This chapter is supposed to be glance over the World of Newsgroups and their inhabitants; someone who has never dared to go there before will encounter some strange customs, which may give you a feeling of being a lonely alien without backup; but stay calm, it is not like this. The Usenet is a meeting place for all kinds of normal and not-so-normal folks; it is here where they are distributing a lot of information but also gossip and other stuff. - - -References to more detailed and qualified essays on the Usenet can be found at More Resources - - - -What are ... +This chapter is supposed to be glance over the World of Newsgroups and their inhabitants; someone who has never dared to go there before will encounter some strange customs, which may give you a feeling of being a lonely alien without backup; but stay calm, it is not like this. The Usenet is a meeting place for all kinds of normal and not-so-normal folks; it is here where they are distributing a lot of information but also gossip and other stuff. + + +References to more detailed and qualified essays on the Usenet can be found at More Resources + + + +What are ... - -... online-readers? + +... online-readers? -An online-reader connects to a newsserver and gives you access to its content. &knode; is an online-reader: you are reading your News and publishing your own articles while the online-reader stays connected. +An online-reader connects to a newsserver and gives you access to its content. &knode; is an online-reader: you are reading your News and publishing your own articles while the online-reader stays connected. - + - -... offline-readers? + +... offline-readers? -An offline-reader connects to the Server and fetches only the headers of new articles; then, the connection is closed and you can mark (offline) the articles you are really interested in. When you connect next time the offline-reader fetches the articles you marked and sends the articles you have written whilst offline. +An offline-reader connects to the Server and fetches only the headers of new articles; then, the connection is closed and you can mark (offline) the articles you are really interested in. When you connect next time the offline-reader fetches the articles you marked and sends the articles you have written whilst offline. -There is no connection while you are reading or writing articles. +There is no connection while you are reading or writing articles. - + - -... newsgroups? + +... newsgroups? -You can look at newsgroups as public bulletin boards and forums, where everybody is allowed to participate. Articles you have published in a newsgroup can be read by everybody subscribed to this newsgroup and, normally, everybody is allowed to publish their articles in a newsgroup. +You can look at newsgroups as public bulletin boards and forums, where everybody is allowed to participate. Articles you have published in a newsgroup can be read by everybody subscribed to this newsgroup and, normally, everybody is allowed to publish their articles in a newsgroup. - + -... news? +... news? -News is the collective term for articles published in a newsgroup. +News is the collective term for articles published in a newsgroup. - + - -... threads? + +... threads? -A thread is a topic of discussion in a newsgroup. +A thread is a topic of discussion in a newsgroup. - - + + - -Online Manners + +Online Manners -There are lot of different people meeting and talking in newsgroups; it is seen as some kind of courtesy to obey some rules of manner, the basics of which are listed here. - - - -Before you ask questions be sure you have read the newsgroup's FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) and didn't find the answer. - - -If you take part in a discussion be aware of the fact that everybody can read the answer: do not say anything that you would not say to the others if you were facing them; avoid insults. - - -Try to avoid crossposting: do not ask a question in more than one newsgroup when you do not know which is the right one. Ask in one newsgroup; if it is wrong, you will be told which is right one. - - -Formulate your articles accurately; nobody likes to read an article with lots of typos, even with content worth a Pulitzer. Think of your articles as letters: your letter speaks for you; it represents you; somebody reading your article will draw conclusions about you from it, wrong or right. - - -Remember, nobody sees your grin when you are writing an ironic sentence: it may be funny for you, but it can be very serious for the person reading it. It is very difficult to include emotions in an article. - - -The most important rule: use your common sense when you are answering or publishing an article. - - - - - - -The Usenet language +There are lot of different people meeting and talking in newsgroups; it is seen as some kind of courtesy to obey some rules of manner, the basics of which are listed here. + + + +Before you ask questions be sure you have read the newsgroup's FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) and didn't find the answer. + + +If you take part in a discussion be aware of the fact that everybody can read the answer: do not say anything that you would not say to the others if you were facing them; avoid insults. + + +Try to avoid crossposting: do not ask a question in more than one newsgroup when you do not know which is the right one. Ask in one newsgroup; if it is wrong, you will be told which is right one. + + +Formulate your articles accurately; nobody likes to read an article with lots of typos, even with content worth a Pulitzer. Think of your articles as letters: your letter speaks for you; it represents you; somebody reading your article will draw conclusions about you from it, wrong or right. + + +Remember, nobody sees your grin when you are writing an ironic sentence: it may be funny for you, but it can be very serious for the person reading it. It is very difficult to include emotions in an article. + + +The most important rule: use your common sense when you are answering or publishing an article. + + + + + + +The Usenet language -You will not be surprised about English being the main language on the Usenet; however, there are special trees for German (de.*), French (fr.*) and many other languages. If you are unable to determine the main language of a newsgroup the only possibility is careful listening or a possible explanation in the description of the group in the grouplist. +You will not be surprised about English being the main language on the Usenet; however, there are special trees for German (de.*), French (fr.*) and many other languages. If you are unable to determine the main language of a newsgroup the only possibility is careful listening or a possible explanation in the description of the group in the grouplist. -In addition, over the time the Usenet has developed its own language but it is easy to learn. +In addition, over the time the Usenet has developed its own language but it is easy to learn. - -<acronym ->RTFM</acronym -> and other typos + +<acronym>RTFM</acronym> and other typos -When you read news, after some time you will read some strange combinations of letters; for example, you can get a reply like: +When you read news, after some time you will read some strange combinations of letters; for example, you can get a reply like: -RTFM +RTFM -Nothing else. Strange, but absolutely intended; to solve the riddle: those, most of the time, are shortcuts, acronyms. It is easier to drop some letters than to write the same sentence over and over again. +Nothing else. Strange, but absolutely intended; to solve the riddle: those, most of the time, are shortcuts, acronyms. It is easier to drop some letters than to write the same sentence over and over again. -But what is the meaning of RTFM? The writer is asking you to read the manual, documentation or FAQ before asking questions in the newsgroup. It stands for: (R)ead (T)he (F)...ing (M)anual; BTW this is advice you should adopt. +But what is the meaning of RTFM? The writer is asking you to read the manual, documentation or FAQ before asking questions in the newsgroup. It stands for: (R)ead (T)he (F)...ing (M)anual; BTW this is advice you should adopt. -Wait, what is BTW now? Another often-seen acronym which means (B)y (T)he (W)ay. It is easy when you know it; to avoid you having to continuously speculate over the meaning of acronyms there is table at he end of this section containing the most-often-used acronyms. +Wait, what is BTW now? Another often-seen acronym which means (B)y (T)he (W)ay. It is easy when you know it; to avoid you having to continuously speculate over the meaning of acronyms there is table at he end of this section containing the most-often-used acronyms. -This table does not try to be complete and is based on a list by Martin Imlau. +This table does not try to be complete and is based on a list by Martin Imlau.
-Acronyms on Usenet +Acronyms on Usenet -Acronym -Meaning +Acronym +Meaning -<g> -grins +<g> +grins -AAMOF +AAMOF -As a matter of fact +As a matter of fact -ACK +ACK -Acknowledge +Acknowledge -AFAIK +AFAIK -As far as I know +As far as I know -AFAIR +AFAIR -As far as I remember +As far as I remember -AWGTHTGTTA +AWGTHTGTTA -Are we going to have to go through this again? +Are we going to have to go through this again? -ASAP +ASAP -As soon as possible +As soon as possible -BFN +BFN -Bye for now! +Bye for now! -BTW +BTW -By the way +By the way -BYKT +BYKT -But you knew that +But you knew that -CMIIW +CMIIW -Correct me if I'm wrong +Correct me if I'm wrong -CU +CU -See you! +See you! -CU2 +CU2 -See you too! +See you too! -CYL +CYL -See you later! +See you later! -DAU +DAU -German abbreviation for the silliest user you can imagine (DÃ¼mmster anzunehmender User) +German abbreviation for the silliest user you can imagine (DÃ¼mmster anzunehmender User) -EOD +EOD -End of discussion +End of discussion -ESOSL +ESOSL -Endless snorts of stupid laughter +Endless snorts of stupid laughter -FYI +FYI -For your information +For your information -GOK +GOK -God only knows +God only knows -HAND +HAND -Have a nice day! +Have a nice day! -HTH +HTH -Hope that helps +Hope that helps -HSIK +HSIK -How should I know? +How should I know? -IAE +IAE -In any event +In any event -IANAL +IANAL -I am not a lawyer +I am not a lawyer -IIRC +IIRC -If I remember correctly +If I remember correctly -IMCO +IMCO -In my considered opinion +In my considered opinion -IMHO +IMHO -In my humble opinion +In my humble opinion -IMNSHO +IMNSHO -In my not so humble opinion +In my not so humble opinion -INPO +INPO -In no particular order +In no particular order -IOW +IOW -In other words +In other words -LMAO +LMAO -Laughing my ass off +Laughing my ass off -LOL +LOL -Laughing out loudly +Laughing out loudly -NAK +NAK -Not acknowledged +Not acknowledged -NBD +NBD -No big deal +No big deal -NFW +NFW -No f...ing way +No f...ing way -ROTFL +ROTFL -Rolling on the floor, laughing +Rolling on the floor, laughing -RTFM +RTFM -Read the f...ing manual +Read the f...ing manual -SCNR +SCNR -Sorry, could not resist +Sorry, could not resist -TIA +TIA -Thanks in advance - - - -
- +Thanks in advance + + + + + - -Smile! + +Smile! -Again, such a strange thing. What is this ;-) meant to be? Turn your head so the left side of your screen is on top; got it? It's a smile with a wink? This is a so-called emoticon; emoticons are an often-used possibility to express emotions, one thing missing in conversation on the Usenet (but there is a substitute, remember? ;-) +Again, such a strange thing. What is this ;-) meant to be? Turn your head so the left side of your screen is on top; got it? It's a smile with a wink? This is a so-called emoticon; emoticons are an often-used possibility to express emotions, one thing missing in conversation on the Usenet (but there is a substitute, remember? ;-) -It is very difficult to express emotions in email or news; your joking comment appear to be very serious to the recipient and can lead to unmeant reactions or conflicts (flames); so use emoticons to express your intention. +It is very difficult to express emotions in email or news; your joking comment appear to be very serious to the recipient and can lead to unmeant reactions or conflicts (flames); so use emoticons to express your intention. -There are a lots of emoticons, which express a great variety of emotions; the interpretation is easy if you turn your head and think of a face. +There are a lots of emoticons, which express a great variety of emotions; the interpretation is easy if you turn your head and think of a face. - + - -PLONK! + +PLONK! -This PLONK! looks like some comic-sound, does it not? And that is exactly what it is used for. The one who reads it knows he was just added to the killfile of a newsreader; normally this means the recipient of the PLONK! annoyed the sender. The PLONK! is meant to play back the sound of the recipients name hitting the ground in the killfile. - - +This PLONK! looks like some comic-sound, does it not? And that is exactly what it is used for. The one who reads it knows he was just added to the killfile of a newsreader; normally this means the recipient of the PLONK! annoyed the sender. The PLONK! is meant to play back the sound of the recipients name hitting the ground in the killfile. + + - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/more.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/more.docbook index 42f158404df..64b6a2c9bab 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/more.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/more.docbook @@ -1,230 +1,84 @@ + --> - -Further Information + +Further Information -In this section we will detail some additional information resources which could be useful to you. Many of the articles listed below (for which URLs are given) are posted to news groups regularly; some of those groups are also listed here. +In this section we will detail some additional information resources which could be useful to you. Many of the articles listed below (for which URLs are given) are posted to news groups regularly; some of those groups are also listed here. - -Informative Newsgroups + +Informative Newsgroups - -news.answers -news.newusers.questions -de.newsusers.infos (German) -de.answers (German) -de.comp.os.unix.linux.infos (German) -de.newusers.answers (German) -de.newusers.questions (German) - - -For beginners it is especially recommended to read these articles at least partially: informed users have strong advantages in news groups. There are some more-specialized news groups where FAQs and introductory articles are posted frequently, ⪚ the newsgroup de.comp.os.unix.linux.infos (German), which contains a lot of useful articles about the &Linux; operating system. Just have a look on the group list of your newsserver for it. - - - - -Test Groups + +news.answers +news.newusers.questions +de.newsusers.infos (German) +de.answers (German) +de.comp.os.unix.linux.infos (German) +de.newusers.answers (German) +de.newusers.questions (German) + + +For beginners it is especially recommended to read these articles at least partially: informed users have strong advantages in news groups. There are some more-specialized news groups where FAQs and introductory articles are posted frequently, ⪚ the newsgroup de.comp.os.unix.linux.infos (German), which contains a lot of useful articles about the &Linux; operating system. Just have a look on the group list of your newsserver for it. + + + + +Test Groups -The following groups were created especially for testing, &ie; after successfully configuring &knode; you should post some articles to those groups to test your settings. - -Some groups support automatic replies through email to enable you to test whether your entered identity is correct and mail-replies actually arrive in your mailbox. - -In addition, some scripts are offered which check your articles for erroneous settings and generate a followup with useful hints. - - -de.test (German test newsgroup) -misc.test -alt.test -alt.test.ignore - - - - -Informative technical articles in the world wide web +The following groups were created especially for testing, &ie; after successfully configuring &knode; you should post some articles to those groups to test your settings. + +Some groups support automatic replies through email to enable you to test whether your entered identity is correct and mail-replies actually arrive in your mailbox. + +In addition, some scripts are offered which check your articles for erroneous settings and generate a followup with useful hints. + + +de.test (German test newsgroup) +misc.test +alt.test +alt.test.ignore + + + + +Informative technical articles in the world wide web -These URLs are from the corresponding article in the newsgroup de.newusers.infos and have the same contents as the articles posted there. - - -Introduction for de.newusers.infos: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/einleitung (German) -The newsgroups of the de.alt hierarchy: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/de-alt-newsgruppen (German) -The newsgroups of the de-hierarchy: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/de-newsgruppen (German) -First read, then post: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/erst-lesen-dann-schreiben (German) -First steps in the usenet: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/erste-schritte (German) -Questions and answers from de.newusers.questions: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/faq (German) -Seven theses about behaviour in the internet: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/hoeflichkeit (German) -Introduction to the usenet: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/usenet-einfuehrung (German) -Why should I take the rules seriously? http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/warum-regel (German) -The newsreader FAQ: http://www.crosswinds.net/~cgarbers/faq/newsreaderFAQ.htm -The correct quoting: http://www.afaik.de/usenet/faq/zitieren (German) -The German umlauts FAQ: http://www.westfalen.de/paefken/de.newusers/umlaute-faq.txt (German) - - - - -Informative technical articles +These URLs are from the corresponding article in the newsgroup de.newusers.infos and have the same contents as the articles posted there. + + +Introduction for de.newusers.infos: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/einleitung (German) +The newsgroups of the de.alt hierarchy: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/de-alt-newsgruppen (German) +The newsgroups of the de-hierarchy: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/de-newsgruppen (German) +First read, then post: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/erst-lesen-dann-schreiben (German) +First steps in the usenet: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/erste-schritte (German) +Questions and answers from de.newusers.questions: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/faq (German) +Seven theses about behaviour in the internet: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/hoeflichkeit (German) +Introduction to the usenet: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/usenet-einfuehrung (German) +Why should I take the rules seriously? http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/warum-regel (German) +The newsreader FAQ: http://www.crosswinds.net/~cgarbers/faq/newsreaderFAQ.htm +The correct quoting: http://www.afaik.de/usenet/faq/zitieren (German) +The German umlauts FAQ: http://www.westfalen.de/paefken/de.newusers/umlaute-faq.txt (German) + + + + +Informative technical articles -If you are interested in further technical information in connection to news, you should not miss the following URLs. - - -Header entries: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/headerzeilen (German) -A very useful message-ID FAQ: http://www.qad.org/faq/faq-messageid.html -A lot of links about newsreaders and related topics: http://www.leafnode.org/links -RFCs, Drafts and documents for the technical interested: http://www.landfield.com/usefor/ - - - +If you are interested in further technical information in connection to news, you should not miss the following URLs. + + +Header entries: http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/headerzeilen (German) +A very useful message-ID FAQ: http://www.qad.org/faq/faq-messageid.html +A lot of links about newsreaders and related topics: http://www.leafnode.org/links +RFCs, Drafts and documents for the technical interested: http://www.landfield.com/usefor/ + + + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/using-firststart.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/using-firststart.docbook index 5d38dd1469a..66a76574dd5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/using-firststart.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/using-firststart.docbook @@ -1,2706 +1,1242 @@ - -The first start - -You can find &knode; in the K Menu under the Internet entry: the menu entry KNode launches the program. - - -If the entry for &knode; can not be found or if &knode; does not appear after clicking on the menu entry, read Questions and Answers. + --> + +The first start + +You can find &knode; in the K Menu under the Internet entry: the menu entry KNode launches the program. + + +If the entry for &knode; can not be found or if &knode; does not appear after clicking on the menu entry, read Questions and Answers. -The main window of &knode; should now be displayed on your desktop as shown; on the first start, the settings dialogue will be invoked. +The main window of &knode; should now be displayed on your desktop as shown; on the first start, the settings dialogue will be invoked. -Setting up &knode; +Setting up &knode; -&knode; after first start +&knode; after first start -&knode; after first start +&knode; after first start -The windows shows the menu bar, the toolbar below and the status pane at the buttom. The area between the toolbar and the status pane is occupied by a three-part window. +The windows shows the menu bar, the toolbar below and the status pane at the buttom. The area between the toolbar and the status pane is occupied by a three-part window. -There is a folder view, which currently contains only three entries: +There is a folder view, which currently contains only three entries: -The folder Outbox -The folder Drafts -The folder Sent +The folder Outbox +The folder Drafts +The folder Sent -When &knode; is completely and correctly configured, the news servers and the subscribed news groups will appear there. +When &knode; is completely and correctly configured, the news servers and the subscribed news groups will appear there. -In the upper section is the article view; it is currently empty and does not show any articles. Directly below the article view is the article window; the body of the currently-selected article appears there. These windows are also blank at the moment, as there are no articles, of course. You should not be concerned, though, as before reading and publishing news some things have to be configured; this will be covered by the following section. +In the upper section is the article view; it is currently empty and does not show any articles. Directly below the article view is the article window; the body of the currently-selected article appears there. These windows are also blank at the moment, as there are no articles, of course. You should not be concerned, though, as before reading and publishing news some things have to be configured; this will be covered by the following section. -We are now beginning the setting up of &knode;. Most settings are not important for daily use, but you should know what settings are possible and what they are for. Some may skip the Quickstart chapter but those who prefer a quick start will just glance over the manual anyway. For others, especially those who have not any or much experience with a news reader, this chapter offers the chance to fully perform the configuration, although some things may become clear only later on. +We are now beginning the setting up of &knode;. Most settings are not important for daily use, but you should know what settings are possible and what they are for. Some may skip the Quickstart chapter but those who prefer a quick start will just glance over the manual anyway. For others, especially those who have not any or much experience with a news reader, this chapter offers the chance to fully perform the configuration, although some things may become clear only later on. - -Personal settings + +Personal settings -Via SettingsConfigure KNode... you will enter the preferences dialogue of &knode;. The figure shows the dialogue. - - -Dialogue for entering personal information - - - - -Entering personal information - - -Entering personal information - - - -The dialogue is divided into two parts: in one part there is a treeview, in which the top entry Identity is already highlighted; in the other part is the corresponding input dialogue -- these settings relate to the identity with which you navigate through the newsgroups. +Via SettingsConfigure KNode... you will enter the preferences dialogue of &knode;. The figure shows the dialogue. + + +Dialogue for entering personal information + + + + +Entering personal information + + +Entering personal information + + + +The dialogue is divided into two parts: in one part there is a treeview, in which the top entry Identity is already highlighted; in the other part is the corresponding input dialogue -- these settings relate to the identity with which you navigate through the newsgroups. -If you have already configured your personal settings in the &kcontrolcenter; before the first start of &knode;, they will be adopted. - - -<guilabel ->Name</guilabel -> - -In the field Name you enter your name, ⪚ Joe Miller or Mary Gordon. This name will later appear in the newsgroups as sender, and can be seen by anyone. - -Filling out the field Name is mandatory. +If you have already configured your personal settings in the &kcontrolcenter; before the first start of &knode;, they will be adopted. + + +<guilabel>Name</guilabel> + +In the field Name you enter your name, ⪚ Joe Miller or Mary Gordon. This name will later appear in the newsgroups as sender, and can be seen by anyone. + +Filling out the field Name is mandatory. -In most newsgroups, it is considered polite and appropriate to appear with one's real name; other newsgroups are less strict about this. But, there are also cases when one would not want to appear with one's real name, ⪚ in newsgroups where one would like to (and can) talk about very personal matters without being exposed; these groups mostly do tell you in their Charter that the anonymity of their members is explicitly approved. - - - -For those special cases, &knode; offers settings that can be adjusted to each newsgroup individually; further information can be found under Group local Identities. - - +In most newsgroups, it is considered polite and appropriate to appear with one's real name; other newsgroups are less strict about this. But, there are also cases when one would not want to appear with one's real name, ⪚ in newsgroups where one would like to (and can) talk about very personal matters without being exposed; these groups mostly do tell you in their Charter that the anonymity of their members is explicitly approved. + + + +For those special cases, &knode; offers settings that can be adjusted to each newsgroup individually; further information can be found under Group local Identities. + + -<guilabel ->Organisation</guilabel -> - -The input field Organisation is optional and does not have to be filled out. You can enter, ⪚, the name of your company or your university if you use &knode; there; if you leave this field blank, it will often be filled out later by your Internet service provider. - - - -<guilabel ->Email address</guilabel -> - -The email address you enter here will be used as sender in news articles, &ie; as actual address of the author, in conjunction with the real name (set in the field Name). - -The field Email Address shows up when someone wants to reply to you by email: the email will be sent to the address entered here. Many newsreaders display the sender address together with the name in the Header of the article. - -Filling out the Email Address field is mandatory. +<guilabel>Organisation</guilabel> + +The input field Organisation is optional and does not have to be filled out. You can enter, ⪚, the name of your company or your university if you use &knode; there; if you leave this field blank, it will often be filled out later by your Internet service provider. + + + +<guilabel>Email address</guilabel> + +The email address you enter here will be used as sender in news articles, &ie; as actual address of the author, in conjunction with the real name (set in the field Name). + +The field Email Address shows up when someone wants to reply to you by email: the email will be sent to the address entered here. Many newsreaders display the sender address together with the name in the Header of the article. + +Filling out the Email Address field is mandatory. -Note that the e-mail address will only be used for replies to you if the field Reply-to Address is not filled out; in this case, the field Email will be ignored for replies and the address given under Reply-to Address will be used. - - - - -<guilabel ->Reply-to Address</guilabel -> - -Reply-to Address offers you the possibility to enter a different address than your sender e-mail address: if someone replies to you by email this address will be displayed as target address in the reply. An example for using Reply-to Address would be that you write the article at the office during the day but want to receive the answer in your home inbox, because your boss co-reads your mail. - -Only enter an e-mail address in that field if it actually differs from the field Email Address. +Note that the e-mail address will only be used for replies to you if the field Reply-to Address is not filled out; in this case, the field Email will be ignored for replies and the address given under Reply-to Address will be used. + + + + +<guilabel>Reply-to Address</guilabel> + +Reply-to Address offers you the possibility to enter a different address than your sender e-mail address: if someone replies to you by email this address will be displayed as target address in the reply. An example for using Reply-to Address would be that you write the article at the office during the day but want to receive the answer in your home inbox, because your boss co-reads your mail. + +Only enter an e-mail address in that field if it actually differs from the field Email Address. -Some news readers deliberately set this to an invalid e-mail address in order to prevent spam mails from being received; what could happen, though, is that a reader sends an e-mail to this invalid address which you will therefore never receive. You should drop a note about this in the signature. +Some news readers deliberately set this to an invalid e-mail address in order to prevent spam mails from being received; what could happen, though, is that a reader sends an e-mail to this invalid address which you will therefore never receive. You should drop a note about this in the signature. -<guilabel ->Mail-Copies-To</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Mail-Copies-To</guilabel> -If you enter an email address here every article will be sent to the usenet and to this email address. +If you enter an email address here every article will be sent to the usenet and to this email address. -<guilabel ->Signing Key</guilabel -> - -If you have configured the use of PGP or GnuPG you can chose your signing key with Change.... +<guilabel>Signing Key</guilabel> + +If you have configured the use of PGP or GnuPG you can chose your signing key with Change.... -<guilabel ->Use a signature from file</guilabel -> - -If this option is selected, the file specified under Signature File will be used as Signature. +<guilabel>Use a signature from file</guilabel> + +If this option is selected, the file specified under Signature File will be used as Signature. -<guilabel ->Signature File</guilabel -> - -The field Signature File determines the file, the content of which is appended to each of your articles. The field is only enabled if the option Use a signature from file is selected. - -The signature file is a simple text file, which should not contain more than four lines; it can, for example, contain a reference to your homepage with the corresponding link, your postal address with your telephone number (which would then be of course visible to the whole world with every article) or just a cool quote. The signature is your brand, so to speak, which will mark all your articles; therefore, your signature should not be designed sloppily or in the long run annoying to others: an old joke that one would have to read over and over again does not foster sympathy or the interest of the other newsgroup subscribers. - -You can directly enter the file name of the signature file but it is more convenient to use the button Choose.... This opens a file open dialogue and you can conveniently choose the signature file with the mouse. The button Edit File enables you, after choosing the file, to edit the signature. - - -It is not necessary to include a separation line in the signature file as &knode; inserts it automatically. - - - - -<guilabel ->The file is a program</guilabel -> - -If this option is activated, the signature file is not handled as a text file, but as a program. The signature file will be started as a program and the output will be used as a signature. Through that you'll be able to chose a signature by accident or to use fortune to generate a cool slogan every time. - - - - -<guilabel ->Specify signature below</guilabel -> - -If this option is selected you can enter the text of the signature directly in the input field below. - - -Please make sure that in this case also your signature should not contain more than 4 lines. A separation line is not necessary as &knode; inserts it automatically. - - - - -General notes - -You can later adapt the identity individually for each of the subscribed groups via the Preferences dialogue, ⪚ you can specify an English signature for English groups and a German one for German groups. Apart from the language it is also possible to have context-sensitive signatures, ⪚ your favourite recipe in a cooking group or the names of your twelve cats in a cat owner group. - -You find more in the section Group local identities. - -The next step in the configuration covers the news account. +<guilabel>Signature File</guilabel> + +The field Signature File determines the file, the content of which is appended to each of your articles. The field is only enabled if the option Use a signature from file is selected. + +The signature file is a simple text file, which should not contain more than four lines; it can, for example, contain a reference to your homepage with the corresponding link, your postal address with your telephone number (which would then be of course visible to the whole world with every article) or just a cool quote. The signature is your brand, so to speak, which will mark all your articles; therefore, your signature should not be designed sloppily or in the long run annoying to others: an old joke that one would have to read over and over again does not foster sympathy or the interest of the other newsgroup subscribers. + +You can directly enter the file name of the signature file but it is more convenient to use the button Choose.... This opens a file open dialogue and you can conveniently choose the signature file with the mouse. The button Edit File enables you, after choosing the file, to edit the signature. + + +It is not necessary to include a separation line in the signature file as &knode; inserts it automatically. + + + + +<guilabel>The file is a program</guilabel> + +If this option is activated, the signature file is not handled as a text file, but as a program. The signature file will be started as a program and the output will be used as a signature. Through that you'll be able to chose a signature by accident or to use fortune to generate a cool slogan every time. + + + + +<guilabel>Specify signature below</guilabel> + +If this option is selected you can enter the text of the signature directly in the input field below. + + +Please make sure that in this case also your signature should not contain more than 4 lines. A separation line is not necessary as &knode; inserts it automatically. + + + + +General notes + +You can later adapt the identity individually for each of the subscribed groups via the Preferences dialogue, ⪚ you can specify an English signature for English groups and a German one for German groups. Apart from the language it is also possible to have context-sensitive signatures, ⪚ your favourite recipe in a cooking group or the names of your twelve cats in a cat owner group. + +You find more in the section Group local identities. + +The next step in the configuration covers the news account. -Configuring the news account +Configuring the news account -Now we must tell &knode; about where we get the news from or where to send the articles to later on. In the tree view on the right, there is an Accounts entry; click on it with the mouse; then, two sub entries will be opened out. Choose the News entry, because we first want to configure the news account: the list of accounts is still empty. +Now we must tell &knode; about where we get the news from or where to send the articles to later on. In the tree view on the right, there is an Accounts entry; click on it with the mouse; then, two sub entries will be opened out. Choose the News entry, because we first want to configure the news account: the list of accounts is still empty. -To create a new account click on New.... The following dialogue appears: +To create a new account click on New.... The following dialogue appears: -The New Account dialogue - - - - -The New Account dialogue - +The New Account dialogue + + + + +The New Account dialogue + -The New Account dialogue - - - +The New Account dialogue + + + -<guilabel ->Name</guilabel -> - -The Name field can be filled in as you like; the text you enter will later be visible in the folder view. You could, for example, enter the name of your Internet Provider; for our example we enter the name My News Account. +<guilabel>Name</guilabel> + +The Name field can be filled in as you like; the text you enter will later be visible in the folder view. You could, for example, enter the name of your Internet Provider; for our example we enter the name My News Account. - -<guilabel ->Server</guilabel -> - -The next field is labelled Server. Unlike the field Name, what you enter here is important. The name of the news server is fixed and you should be able to get it from your Internet service provider; if you do not know the name of the news server, you should get it now: without this information you can not read any news. If your Internet service provider doesn't own a news server you can use a public one (universities often provide public news servers.) - -For our example configuration we enter the name news.server.com; you will, of course, enter the real name of your news server. + +<guilabel>Server</guilabel> + +The next field is labelled Server. Unlike the field Name, what you enter here is important. The name of the news server is fixed and you should be able to get it from your Internet service provider; if you do not know the name of the news server, you should get it now: without this information you can not read any news. If your Internet service provider doesn't own a news server you can use a public one (universities often provide public news servers.) + +For our example configuration we enter the name news.server.com; you will, of course, enter the real name of your news server. -If you want to use &knode; with a local news server, enter the name localhost here. +If you want to use &knode; with a local news server, enter the name localhost here. - -<guilabel ->Port</guilabel -> - -Port, the next field, has already a default value. The Port designates, roughly speaking, a data channel on which the server listens for whether someone wants to retrieve news: it defaults to the value 119, which is applicable in most cases; therefore, we do not change this default for our example. + +<guilabel>Port</guilabel> + +Port, the next field, has already a default value. The Port designates, roughly speaking, a data channel on which the server listens for whether someone wants to retrieve news: it defaults to the value 119, which is applicable in most cases; therefore, we do not change this default for our example. - -<guilabel ->Hold connection for</guilabel -> - -The time value you enter here is used if you have established a connection to the news server and if, for whatever reason, no data is received from or transmitted to the news server: after the specified time has elapsed &knode; will automatically disconnect. This, amongst other things, relieves the server of unnecessary connections which would otherwise reduce its availability for other subscribers; it also makes sure that an automatically-established Internet connection is not held unnecessarily even if no data is being sent or received. - - -This settings mainly makes sense if one receives and reads news online; for local news servers it is of almost no importance. If this waiting time is set too low, there can be waiting periods if you read a longer article and do not do anything for some time: &knode; will have cancelled the connection to the server by then (after the time period has elapsed) and has to reestablish it, causing a delay. -If the waiting time is set too high you might waste online time whilst doing nothing (perhaps increasing your phone bill). + +<guilabel>Hold connection for</guilabel> + +The time value you enter here is used if you have established a connection to the news server and if, for whatever reason, no data is received from or transmitted to the news server: after the specified time has elapsed &knode; will automatically disconnect. This, amongst other things, relieves the server of unnecessary connections which would otherwise reduce its availability for other subscribers; it also makes sure that an automatically-established Internet connection is not held unnecessarily even if no data is being sent or received. + + +This settings mainly makes sense if one receives and reads news online; for local news servers it is of almost no importance. If this waiting time is set too low, there can be waiting periods if you read a longer article and do not do anything for some time: &knode; will have cancelled the connection to the server by then (after the time period has elapsed) and has to reestablish it, causing a delay. +If the waiting time is set too high you might waste online time whilst doing nothing (perhaps increasing your phone bill). - -<guilabel ->Timeout</guilabel -> + +<guilabel>Timeout</guilabel> -If &knode; connects to the news server it waits no longer than the time specified here for an answer; if the period is exceeded &knode; cancels the connection attempt and you will get an error message stating that the server is not responding. +If &knode; connects to the news server it waits no longer than the time specified here for an answer; if the period is exceeded &knode; cancels the connection attempt and you will get an error message stating that the server is not responding. -Depending on the quality of your Internet account and the news server's current load there can be busy periods where &knode; cancels the connection; if this happens frequently, you should set this setting to a higher value. +Depending on the quality of your Internet account and the news server's current load there can be busy periods where &knode; cancels the connection; if this happens frequently, you should set this setting to a higher value. - - - - -<guilabel ->Fetch group descriptions</guilabel -> - -If this setting is selected, &knode; additionally requests the available group descriptions; they will be displayed in the Subscribe to Newsgroups dialogue. - - -There is not a group description for every group, so it is not an error if no group description is shown when subscribing to a group later on. - - - - - -<guilabel ->Server requires authentication</guilabel -> - -The option Server requires authentication needs only to be selected if your news server requires a user name and a password when retrieving articles; you can find out if this is the case from your Internet service provider or the server's maintainer. - - -If you do not know if this setting is necessary forget about selecting it for now: if you encounter an error later on, you can try selecting it then. Otherwise, select this option and enter your user name under User and the associated password under Password. - - - - -General notes - -By now you have completed the setup of your news account. You can confirm and save your settings by clicking on the OK button: as soon as you have done that, the account will appear in the list by the name that you entered in Name earlier; and, if you have a close look, you will see that the account also appears in the folder view. - -Using the Subscribe button you could get directly to the dialogue for subscribing to news groups; but, we still have more to do so we'll ignore it for now: there are several ways that lead to the goal. - -In the Managing multiple news accounts chapter you can learn how to work with multiple news accounts, but first we will stay with this one; in most cases, one account is sufficient. - - -Please note that some Internet providers only allow retrieving news from their news server if you are connected to the Internet through them. - - -We will now move on to configuring the email account; in order to do that, click on the Mail entry in the tree view on the left. - - - - - -Setting up the mail account - -After selecting Mail in the tree view, the following Dialogue Box appears. - - -Dialogue Box for setting up the mail account - - - - -Setting up the mail account - - -Setting up the mail account - - - - -You will notice this Dialogue Box is very similar to the news account settings Dialogue Box; but why do we need an email account in a newsreader? - -Sometimes you need to answer to the author of an article directly, without posting to the newsgroup; for example, when you want to make a very personal comment or want to correct an error. Sometimes an email is more appropriate than a public remark. - -That's why &knode; provides the possibility to reply by email; if you want to use this feature you must tell &knode; how to send emails: you just need to insert the mail server's address. If you have already configured an email account, ⪚ with &kmail;, you can reuse the settings used there. - - -<guilabel ->Use external mail program</guilabel -> - -If this option is active &knode; will use the mail program which is configured in the control centre; the other options in this dialogue will then be disabled. - - - - -<guilabel ->Server</guilabel -> - -The name (address) of your mail server as provided by your Internet service provider or system administrator; all you have to do here is enter the mail server's name in the Server field. - -In our example we entermail.server.de + + + + +<guilabel>Fetch group descriptions</guilabel> + +If this setting is selected, &knode; additionally requests the available group descriptions; they will be displayed in the Subscribe to Newsgroups dialogue. + + +There is not a group description for every group, so it is not an error if no group description is shown when subscribing to a group later on. + + + + + +<guilabel>Server requires authentication</guilabel> + +The option Server requires authentication needs only to be selected if your news server requires a user name and a password when retrieving articles; you can find out if this is the case from your Internet service provider or the server's maintainer. + + +If you do not know if this setting is necessary forget about selecting it for now: if you encounter an error later on, you can try selecting it then. Otherwise, select this option and enter your user name under User and the associated password under Password. + + + + +General notes + +By now you have completed the setup of your news account. You can confirm and save your settings by clicking on the OK button: as soon as you have done that, the account will appear in the list by the name that you entered in Name earlier; and, if you have a close look, you will see that the account also appears in the folder view. + +Using the Subscribe button you could get directly to the dialogue for subscribing to news groups; but, we still have more to do so we'll ignore it for now: there are several ways that lead to the goal. + +In the Managing multiple news accounts chapter you can learn how to work with multiple news accounts, but first we will stay with this one; in most cases, one account is sufficient. + + +Please note that some Internet providers only allow retrieving news from their news server if you are connected to the Internet through them. + + +We will now move on to configuring the email account; in order to do that, click on the Mail entry in the tree view on the left. + + + + + +Setting up the mail account + +After selecting Mail in the tree view, the following Dialogue Box appears. + + +Dialogue Box for setting up the mail account + + + + +Setting up the mail account + + +Setting up the mail account + + + + +You will notice this Dialogue Box is very similar to the news account settings Dialogue Box; but why do we need an email account in a newsreader? + +Sometimes you need to answer to the author of an article directly, without posting to the newsgroup; for example, when you want to make a very personal comment or want to correct an error. Sometimes an email is more appropriate than a public remark. + +That's why &knode; provides the possibility to reply by email; if you want to use this feature you must tell &knode; how to send emails: you just need to insert the mail server's address. If you have already configured an email account, ⪚ with &kmail;, you can reuse the settings used there. + + +<guilabel>Use external mail program</guilabel> + +If this option is active &knode; will use the mail program which is configured in the control centre; the other options in this dialogue will then be disabled. + + + + +<guilabel>Server</guilabel> + +The name (address) of your mail server as provided by your Internet service provider or system administrator; all you have to do here is enter the mail server's name in the Server field. + +In our example we entermail.server.de -If you have one you can send your mail via a local mail server; if this is the case local mail server enter localhost in the Server field. - +If you have one you can send your mail via a local mail server; if this is the case local mail server enter localhost in the Server field. + - -<guilabel ->Port</guilabel -> - -Again, the Port field has a default value; in this case it's port 25. You should not need to change this, unless your ISP has a very exotic configuration and tells you to do so. We do not change this for the example. + +<guilabel>Port</guilabel> + +Again, the Port field has a default value; in this case it's port 25. You should not need to change this, unless your ISP has a very exotic configuration and tells you to do so. We do not change this for the example. - -Hold connection for - -This value is important: if you have established a connection with your mail server and there is no data transfer occurring &knode; cancels the connection to your mailserver after the specified amount of time has elapsed. - - - - -<guilabel ->Timeout</guilabel -> - -When &knode; tries to connect to the mail server it will wait this long for a reply from the server; if this time is exceeded, you will get a error message. - - -Depending on the quality of your connection and the actual load of your mail server you might get long reply times; if &knode; cancels the connection due to this, you should increase the timeout. - - - - -General notes - - -Some ISPs only allow you to send email using their mail server after you have checked your mailbox for new mail: this reduces spamming. - -For the same reasons, some ISPs will only allow you to send mail using their mailservers if you are online with them or if you are logged in at the mailserver; for example, this is the normal configuration at GMX and isn't supported by &knode; or &kmail; yet. + +Hold connection for + +This value is important: if you have established a connection with your mail server and there is no data transfer occurring &knode; cancels the connection to your mailserver after the specified amount of time has elapsed. + + + + +<guilabel>Timeout</guilabel> + +When &knode; tries to connect to the mail server it will wait this long for a reply from the server; if this time is exceeded, you will get a error message. + + +Depending on the quality of your connection and the actual load of your mail server you might get long reply times; if &knode; cancels the connection due to this, you should increase the timeout. + + + + +General notes + + +Some ISPs only allow you to send email using their mail server after you have checked your mailbox for new mail: this reduces spamming. + +For the same reasons, some ISPs will only allow you to send mail using their mailservers if you are online with them or if you are logged in at the mailserver; for example, this is the normal configuration at GMX and isn't supported by &knode; or &kmail; yet. -Defining the appearance +Defining the appearance -With the Appearance dialogue you are given the ability to set the colours, the character code and the font size of the text in the article window; the picture below shows the dialogue. +With the Appearance dialogue you are given the ability to set the colours, the character code and the font size of the text in the article window; the picture below shows the dialogue. -Setting up the Appearance dialogue +Setting up the Appearance dialogue -Setting up the Appearance dialogue +Setting up the Appearance dialogue -Setting up the Appearance dialogue +Setting up the Appearance dialogue -<guilabel ->Use custom colours</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Use custom colours</guilabel> -If you select this option you can adjust the colour settings of &knode; in the list field below; to change a colour setting do a double-click with the &LMB; on the list entry to open the &kde; colour-selection dialogue. +If you select this option you can adjust the colour settings of &knode; in the list field below; to change a colour setting do a double-click with the &LMB; on the list entry to open the &kde; colour-selection dialogue. -The colour selection can only be configured after the checkbox has been checked; otherwise, a double-click on the list entries won't do anything. +The colour selection can only be configured after the checkbox has been checked; otherwise, a double-click on the list entries won't do anything. -If the Use custom colours setting is selected &knode; won't use colours which have been changed later globally for &kde; but will only use the colours defined here instead. +If the Use custom colours setting is selected &knode; won't use colours which have been changed later globally for &kde; but will only use the colours defined here instead. -<guilabel ->Use custom fonts</guilabel -> - -If you select this setting you can adjust the fonts which &knode; uses for the display in the list field below; to choose a font do a double-click with the &LMB; on the list entry to open the &kde; font-selection dialogue. - -The font can only be configured after the checkbox has been checked; otherwise, a double click on the list entries won't do anything. - - -If the setting Use custom fonts is selected &knode; won't use later changes to the global font settings for &kde; but will use the fonts defined here instead. - - - - - - -General News Settings - -Now click on Reading news and then on the General sub-entry; the figure below shows the dialogue containing the preferences you can configure there. - - -General Preferences Dialogue - - - - -The General Preferences dialogue - - -The General Preferences dialogue +<guilabel>Use custom fonts</guilabel> + +If you select this setting you can adjust the fonts which &knode; uses for the display in the list field below; to choose a font do a double-click with the &LMB; on the list entry to open the &kde; font-selection dialogue. + +The font can only be configured after the checkbox has been checked; otherwise, a double click on the list entries won't do anything. + + +If the setting Use custom fonts is selected &knode; won't use later changes to the global font settings for &kde; but will use the fonts defined here instead. + + + + + + +General News Settings + +Now click on Reading news and then on the General sub-entry; the figure below shows the dialogue containing the preferences you can configure there. + + +General Preferences Dialogue + + + + +The General Preferences dialogue + + +The General Preferences dialogue -You don't need to change most of these settings, but we will discuss them step-by-step to give you an overview of the possibilities of &knode;. +You don't need to change most of these settings, but we will discuss them step-by-step to give you an overview of the possibilities of &knode;. - -<guilabel ->Check for new articles automatically</guilabel -> + +<guilabel>Check for new articles automatically</guilabel> -If this box is checked &knode; tries to request new articles from the server when selecting a newsgroup. These settings especially make sense when you use &knode; together with a local news server: downloading the messages obviously only works when the server is reachable; for a server which is only reachable via an Internet connection, this setting rarely makes sense and should stay deactivated. +If this box is checked &knode; tries to request new articles from the server when selecting a newsgroup. These settings especially make sense when you use &knode; together with a local news server: downloading the messages obviously only works when the server is reachable; for a server which is only reachable via an Internet connection, this setting rarely makes sense and should stay deactivated. -If your system isn't set up to establish an Internet connection if necessary, you will get an error message each time you select a newsgroup. +If your system isn't set up to establish an Internet connection if necessary, you will get an error message each time you select a newsgroup. -If you want to keep control over when a connection to the server is established, the GroupGet new articles menu option is appropriate. +If you want to keep control over when a connection to the server is established, the GroupGet new articles menu option is appropriate. - -<guilabel ->Maximal number of articles to fetch</guilabel -> - -This sets a restriction on the number articles which are requested from the server while downloading. The value configured here is for each newsgroup separately. If this is set, for instance, to 300 only the 300 newest articles of the newsgroup are requested; other articles will be discarded. - - -For newsgroups with relatively high traffic you might lose articles if this value is too low; this especially occurs when you've just subscribed to a newsgroup or only occasionally download articles and the traffic for this reason rises above the value specified here. - - - - -<guilabel ->Mark article as read after</guilabel -> - -Articles you have opened in the article window are marked as read after the number of seconds specified here. If you set this value to be relatively high you avoid articles you have just glanced at being marked as read; on the other hand, it can be annoying for relatively short articles, for which you need less time to read than specified: if you browsed too quickly through the articles they would stay unread even though you have read them. Therefore, you should adjust this value to your personal preferences. - - - - -<guilabel ->Mark crossposted articles as read</guilabel -> - -Sometimes an article will be posted to more than one group; this is known as crossposting. If you activate this option, those crossposted articles will be marked as read in all the newsgroups to which they were posted if you read it in one newsgroup. + +<guilabel>Maximal number of articles to fetch</guilabel> + +This sets a restriction on the number articles which are requested from the server while downloading. The value configured here is for each newsgroup separately. If this is set, for instance, to 300 only the 300 newest articles of the newsgroup are requested; other articles will be discarded. + + +For newsgroups with relatively high traffic you might lose articles if this value is too low; this especially occurs when you've just subscribed to a newsgroup or only occasionally download articles and the traffic for this reason rises above the value specified here. + + + + +<guilabel>Mark article as read after</guilabel> + +Articles you have opened in the article window are marked as read after the number of seconds specified here. If you set this value to be relatively high you avoid articles you have just glanced at being marked as read; on the other hand, it can be annoying for relatively short articles, for which you need less time to read than specified: if you browsed too quickly through the articles they would stay unread even though you have read them. Therefore, you should adjust this value to your personal preferences. + + + + +<guilabel>Mark crossposted articles as read</guilabel> + +Sometimes an article will be posted to more than one group; this is known as crossposting. If you activate this option, those crossposted articles will be marked as read in all the newsgroups to which they were posted if you read it in one newsgroup. -<guilabel ->Smart scrolling</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Smart scrolling</guilabel> -If this option is selected the lines in the article list are scrolled smoothly instead of jerkily. +If this option is selected the lines in the article list are scrolled smoothly instead of jerkily. - + -<guilabel ->Show whole thread on expanding</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Show whole thread on expanding</guilabel> -This setting lets a discussion be displayed completely (over multiple answer levels) if you click on the plus in front of the discussion; if this setting isn't checked, only the immediate answers to the current article are displayed. +This setting lets a discussion be displayed completely (over multiple answer levels) if you click on the plus in front of the discussion; if this setting isn't checked, only the immediate answers to the current article are displayed. -<guilabel ->Default to expanded threads</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Default to expanded threads</guilabel> -Here you can toggle whether the threads are expanded by default or not. +Here you can toggle whether the threads are expanded by default or not. -<guilabel ->Show article score</guilabel -> - -Here you can toggle whether the scoring column should be shown in the article view. - - - - -<guilabel ->Show line count</guilabel -> - -Here you can toggle whether the column with the number of lines should be shown in the article view. - - - - -<guilabel ->Cache size for headers</guilabel -> - -Here you can configure how much memory &knode; should use for the caching of the headers. +<guilabel>Show article score</guilabel> + +Here you can toggle whether the scoring column should be shown in the article view. + + + + +<guilabel>Show line count</guilabel> + +Here you can toggle whether the column with the number of lines should be shown in the article view. + + + + +<guilabel>Cache size for headers</guilabel> + +Here you can configure how much memory &knode; should use for the caching of the headers. -<guilabel ->Cache size for articles</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Cache size for articles</guilabel> -Here you can configure, how much memory &knode; should use for the caching of the articles. +Here you can configure, how much memory &knode; should use for the caching of the articles. -<guilabel ->Navigation</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Navigation</guilabel> -Here you can change some navigation properties of &knode;. Normally everything here is switched off, but if you don't like this kind of navigation you can change it. +Here you can change some navigation properties of &knode;. Normally everything here is switched off, but if you don't like this kind of navigation you can change it. -<guilabel ->General</guilabel -> +<guilabel>General</guilabel> -The keyboard behaviour between &knode; and &kmail; is a bit different; with the Emulate the keyboard behaviour of KMail switch you can activate the same keyboard behaviour as in &kmail; for &knode;. +The keyboard behaviour between &knode; and &kmail; is a bit different; with the Emulate the keyboard behaviour of KMail switch you can activate the same keyboard behaviour as in &kmail; for &knode;. -<guilabel ->Mark All as Read</guilabel -> - -If the box Switch to next group is checked, &knode; automatically switches to the next group if you mark all articles as read. +<guilabel>Mark All as Read</guilabel> + +If the box Switch to next group is checked, &knode; automatically switches to the next group if you mark all articles as read. -<guilabel ->Mark Thread as Read</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Mark Thread as Read</guilabel> -If Close the current thread is checked, &knode; automatically closes a thread if you mark it as read. +If Close the current thread is checked, &knode; automatically closes a thread if you mark it as read. -If Go to next unread thread is checked, &knode; automatically shows the next thread if you mark the the previous thread as read. +If Go to next unread thread is checked, &knode; automatically shows the next thread if you mark the the previous thread as read. -<guilabel ->Ignore Thread</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Ignore Thread</guilabel> -If Close the current threadis checked, &knode; automatically closes a thread if you choose to ignore it. +If Close the current threadis checked, &knode; automatically closes a thread if you choose to ignore it. -If Go to next unread thread is checked, &knode; automatically shows the next thread if you choose to ignore the previous one. +If Go to next unread thread is checked, &knode; automatically shows the next thread if you choose to ignore the previous one. -Scoring rules - -To sort the articles you have the possibility to score them. The standard score is 0: a higher score means that the article is interesting; a lower score means it is less interesting. - -In the middle of the window you see a big, white area; here you can see your scoring rules. Scoring rules are used by &knode; to score the incoming articles automatically; if, for example, a person always posts nonsense you can automatically score the articles of that person down and hide them. - -With the buttons below the list of scoring-rules you can edit, add, remove and copy a rule. We will skip this feature for now, because it is not essential for the setup of &knode;. - -You can learn more about scoring; in the chapter Scoring, watching and ignoring. +Scoring rules + +To sort the articles you have the possibility to score them. The standard score is 0: a higher score means that the article is interesting; a lower score means it is less interesting. + +In the middle of the window you see a big, white area; here you can see your scoring rules. Scoring rules are used by &knode; to score the incoming articles automatically; if, for example, a person always posts nonsense you can automatically score the articles of that person down and hide them. + +With the buttons below the list of scoring-rules you can edit, add, remove and copy a rule. We will skip this feature for now, because it is not essential for the setup of &knode;. + +You can learn more about scoring; in the chapter Scoring, watching and ignoring. -<guilabel ->Default score for ignored threads</guilabel -> - -Normally you only need the functions ignore and watch; this simply shows if a thread is interesting or not. Here you can configure a default score for the ignored threads; choosing the ScoringIgnore Thread menu item will give this score to all the posts in that thread, and will apply that score also to future posts that follow up the thread. - - - - -<guilabel ->Default score for watched threads</guilabel -> - -If an article is interesting, it will get a score above 0. Here you can enter the default score for those articles; choosing the ScoringWatch Thread menu item will give this score to all the posts in that thread, and will apply that score also to future posts that follow up the thread. +<guilabel>Default score for ignored threads</guilabel> + +Normally you only need the functions ignore and watch; this simply shows if a thread is interesting or not. Here you can configure a default score for the ignored threads; choosing the ScoringIgnore Thread menu item will give this score to all the posts in that thread, and will apply that score also to future posts that follow up the thread. + + + + +<guilabel>Default score for watched threads</guilabel> + +If an article is interesting, it will get a score above 0. Here you can enter the default score for those articles; choosing the ScoringWatch Thread menu item will give this score to all the posts in that thread, and will apply that score also to future posts that follow up the thread. -You can use the W key to watch a thread or the I key to ignore it. - - - +You can use the W key to watch a thread or the I key to ignore it. + + + -Filter settings - -This screenshot shows the filter settings. - - -The filter settings - - - - -The filter settings - - -The filter settings - - - - -This dialogue shows two lists. The upper list, labelled Filters, shows all defined filters; when you use &knode; for the first time, you will only see the predefined filters. - -With the buttons Add, Delete, Edit and Copy you can add new filters or delete filters which are no longer needed; we will skip this feature for now, because it is not essential for the setup of &knode;. - -You can find more-detailed information about filters in Defining and using filters. - -The lower list, labelled Menu, shows the appearance of the View Filter menu, which you can reach from the menu bar; the order of the filters in the this menu can be configured in this list. - -The Up button shifts the selected filter one position up. Try it: select the second filter and press Up; this entry will then go up one position. - -The Down button does the opposite action: select the filter you just shifted one up and pressDown until it reaches its old position. - -With the two buttons Add Separator and Remove Separator you can visually group the filters on the menu. The separators are shown as ==== in the list; in the Menu they show up as some more-appealing horizontal lines. Try adding separator; then, select the separator and remove it by pressing Remove separator. - -Any changes you make here, you can see in ViewFilter after closing this dialogue. - - - - -<guilabel ->Customise displayed article headers</guilabel -> +Filter settings + +This screenshot shows the filter settings. + + +The filter settings + + + + +The filter settings + + +The filter settings + + + + +This dialogue shows two lists. The upper list, labelled Filters, shows all defined filters; when you use &knode; for the first time, you will only see the predefined filters. + +With the buttons Add, Delete, Edit and Copy you can add new filters or delete filters which are no longer needed; we will skip this feature for now, because it is not essential for the setup of &knode;. + +You can find more-detailed information about filters in Defining and using filters. + +The lower list, labelled Menu, shows the appearance of the View Filter menu, which you can reach from the menu bar; the order of the filters in the this menu can be configured in this list. + +The Up button shifts the selected filter one position up. Try it: select the second filter and press Up; this entry will then go up one position. + +The Down button does the opposite action: select the filter you just shifted one up and pressDown until it reaches its old position. + +With the two buttons Add Separator and Remove Separator you can visually group the filters on the menu. The separators are shown as ==== in the list; in the Menu they show up as some more-appealing horizontal lines. Try adding separator; then, select the separator and remove it by pressing Remove separator. + +Any changes you make here, you can see in ViewFilter after closing this dialogue. + + + + +<guilabel>Customise displayed article headers</guilabel> -In this dialogue you can set how the single header lines are displayed in the article window. - - -The Customise displayed article headers Dialogue - - - - -The Customise displayed article headers dialogue - +In this dialogue you can set how the single header lines are displayed in the article window. + + +The Customise displayed article headers Dialogue + + + + +The Customise displayed article headers dialogue + -The Customise displayed article headers dialogue +The Customise displayed article headers dialogue -This list shows all the header lines which are to be display in the article window. The identifiers at the left will be displayed alongside the header lines in < > to their right; the header lines are taken from each message, ⪚ for From the From header line will be used (indicating who send the message). - -Using Edit you can alter the shown identifiers, alter the header line shown by each identifier and change the font settings of the text used. To make things clearer, we'll now simply select the From:<From> entry in the list and open the dialogue for editing the header display by clicking on Edit. +This list shows all the header lines which are to be display in the article window. The identifiers at the left will be displayed alongside the header lines in < > to their right; the header lines are taken from each message, ⪚ for From the From header line will be used (indicating who send the message). + +Using Edit you can alter the shown identifiers, alter the header line shown by each identifier and change the font settings of the text used. To make things clearer, we'll now simply select the From:<From> entry in the list and open the dialogue for editing the header display by clicking on Edit. -The Header Properties Dialogue +The Header Properties Dialogue -The Header Properties dialogue +The Header Properties dialogue -The Header Properties dialogue +The Header Properties dialogue - - - - -<guilabel ->Header</guilabel -> - -The Header selection box shows the entry From: that is the name of the header line for the sender, as present in the article and evaluated by the newsreader. If you drop down the selection box &knode; shows a range of other identifiers, which stand all for a certain header lines in the article: for now, we'll leave the From identifier configured; we'll work with this list later, when we add a header line to the display. + + + + +<guilabel>Header</guilabel> + +The Header selection box shows the entry From: that is the name of the header line for the sender, as present in the article and evaluated by the newsreader. If you drop down the selection box &knode; shows a range of other identifiers, which stand all for a certain header lines in the article: for now, we'll leave the From identifier configured; we'll work with this list later, when we add a header line to the display. - -<guilabel ->Displayed Name</guilabel -> - -This field holds the name you'd like to be later shown in the article window as a label alongside the actual header line text; for example, for the From header line the label From is used. If you leave this field blank, only the content of the header line appears in the article window; this is, for example, the default setting for the Subject header line. We won't change anything here either, for now. - - - - -<guilabel ->Name</guilabel -> - -Here you can influence the way the 'Displayed Name' text is displayed; in our case, the Bold attribute is selected for the name From, &ie; the text will be shown in bold letters in the article window. Of course, you can combine different attributes, for example Bold and Underlined. - - - - -Value - -Here you can influence the way the header text is displayed in the article window; for example, if the Italic entry is selected the sender, ⪚ John Doe <johndoe@doubleguns.com> will appears in an italic font. - - - - -Add and remove header lines to the display - -To explain the possibilities of this dialogue to you we're going to add a new header line to the display. - - -Show the newsreader used for a post in the article window - -This pictures shows the dialogue with the header line X-Newsreader. - -The Header Properties Dialogue - - - - -The Header Properties dialogue - - -The Header Properties dialogue - - + +<guilabel>Displayed Name</guilabel> + +This field holds the name you'd like to be later shown in the article window as a label alongside the actual header line text; for example, for the From header line the label From is used. If you leave this field blank, only the content of the header line appears in the article window; this is, for example, the default setting for the Subject header line. We won't change anything here either, for now. + + + + +<guilabel>Name</guilabel> + +Here you can influence the way the 'Displayed Name' text is displayed; in our case, the Bold attribute is selected for the name From, &ie; the text will be shown in bold letters in the article window. Of course, you can combine different attributes, for example Bold and Underlined. + + + + +Value + +Here you can influence the way the header text is displayed in the article window; for example, if the Italic entry is selected the sender, ⪚ John Doe <johndoe@doubleguns.com> will appears in an italic font. + + + + +Add and remove header lines to the display + +To explain the possibilities of this dialogue to you we're going to add a new header line to the display. + + +Show the newsreader used for a post in the article window + +This pictures shows the dialogue with the header line X-Newsreader. + +The Header Properties Dialogue + + + + +The Header Properties dialogue + + +The Header Properties dialogue + + -It would be nice if one could see which newsreader another subscriber uses in the article window; it is actually quite easy to do this because there is a (optional) header line which contains the necessary information. +It would be nice if one could see which newsreader another subscriber uses in the article window; it is actually quite easy to do this because there is a (optional) header line which contains the necessary information. -Drop down the Header selection field and select the X-Newsreader entry from the list. +Drop down the Header selection field and select the X-Newsreader entry from the list. -In the Displayed name field, enter Newsreader. +In the Displayed name field, enter Newsreader. -Now you can select any attribute for the display of the field and its content; next, acknowledge your input with the OK: the new header line appears now in the list and will later be shown in the article window. +Now you can select any attribute for the display of the field and its content; next, acknowledge your input with the OK: the new header line appears now in the list and will later be shown in the article window. -Use the up and Down buttons to arrange the order of the headers in the article window. - - -The statement that the new header line will be shown in the article window is actually pretty optimistic, because the entry X-Newsreader isn't required for Usenet articles; therefore, not all articles will contain that header line: if the line doesn't exist, the according entry simply won't be shown. You can get more information about headers at http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/headerzeilen (german) - - - +Use the up and Down buttons to arrange the order of the headers in the article window. + + +The statement that the new header line will be shown in the article window is actually pretty optimistic, because the entry X-Newsreader isn't required for Usenet articles; therefore, not all articles will contain that header line: if the line doesn't exist, the according entry simply won't be shown. You can get more information about headers at http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/headerzeilen (german) + + + -<guilabel ->Viewer</guilabel -> - - -<guilabel ->Show fancy header decorations</guilabel -> - -If this is active, the headers will be 'beautified' a bit; otherwise, only the plain text is shown. - - - - -<guilabel ->Rewrap text when necessary</guilabel -> - -If this option is active, the text wrapping in the viewer will be automatically corrected. - - - - -<guilabel ->Remove trailing empty lines</guilabel -> - -If this is active empty lines at the end of the article will be automatically hidden. +<guilabel>Viewer</guilabel> + + +<guilabel>Show fancy header decorations</guilabel> + +If this is active, the headers will be 'beautified' a bit; otherwise, only the plain text is shown. + + + + +<guilabel>Rewrap text when necessary</guilabel> + +If this option is active, the text wrapping in the viewer will be automatically corrected. + + + + +<guilabel>Remove trailing empty lines</guilabel> + +If this is active empty lines at the end of the article will be automatically hidden. - -<guilabel ->Show signature</guilabel -> - -If this setting is activated, the signature of the sender is displayed in the article window; if it isn't, the signature is suppressed. - - -Please notice that &knode; can display the signature correctly only if it can be separated correctly from the article content in the current article: there are newsreaders which do this separation incorrectly. Two - characters followed by a   (space) is correct. - - - -Many participants in the newsgroups give hints on their homepage or say that they have intentionally erroneously specified their Email addresses in the header fields: if you disable displaying the signature, you might lose this information; on the other hand, you might save yourself from reading strange quotes. - - - - -<guilabel ->Interpret text-format tags</guilabel -> - -If this is active, all text format tags in the message like *bold*, /italic/ and _underline_ are shown directly in the viewer. These text-format tags are an unofficial standard. - - - - -<guilabel ->Recognise quote characters</guilabel -> - -To display the quoted text in another size or colour, &knode; needs to recognise that it's quoted text. Quoted text is normally marked with a > at the beginning of the line, but sometimes there are other characters. In this field you can enter all characters that should mark quoted text. - - - - -<guilabel ->Show attachments inline if possible</guilabel -> - -If this setting is marked, &knode; tries to display the contents of possible attachment directly in the window when opening an article; for instance, a picture would be displayed directly below the article text. - -Additionally, you have the possibility to save the attachment or open it with the application you have associated with the MIME type of the attachment by using the context menu. - - - - -<guilabel ->Open attachments on click</guilabel -> - -If this box is checked, attachments are opened with the external program which is configured for the MIME type; if there is no such association, a dialogue for saving a file is opened and you can save the attachment to a separate file. - - - - -<guilabel ->Show alternative contents as attachments</guilabel -> - -Articles which are sent as Multipart MIME contain the text of the message in multiple formats, for example as raw text and HTML; the newsreader decides which part of the article is displayed. This setting makes it possible for the other formats to be opened as if they were attachments with a mouse click. - -If this setting is disabled, alternative contents are not displayed. - - - - -<guilabel ->Open links with</guilabel -> - -Here you can select which browser is used for displaying links you clicked on in a message. Currently, you can either select the Netscape Navigator or the default, &konqueror;; the selected browser has to be installed, of course. - - - - - -Settings for publishing articles - -When you post articles with &knode; the settings in the following dialogue box are used. - - -The Technical Settings dialogue - - - - -The Technical Settings dialogue - - -The Technical Settings dialogue - - - - - -If you choose the wrong settings here your articles could be unreadable or not sendable at all, so please be careful with these settings. - + +<guilabel>Show signature</guilabel> + +If this setting is activated, the signature of the sender is displayed in the article window; if it isn't, the signature is suppressed. + + +Please notice that &knode; can display the signature correctly only if it can be separated correctly from the article content in the current article: there are newsreaders which do this separation incorrectly. Two - characters followed by a   (space) is correct. + + + +Many participants in the newsgroups give hints on their homepage or say that they have intentionally erroneously specified their Email addresses in the header fields: if you disable displaying the signature, you might lose this information; on the other hand, you might save yourself from reading strange quotes. + + + + +<guilabel>Interpret text-format tags</guilabel> + +If this is active, all text format tags in the message like *bold*, /italic/ and _underline_ are shown directly in the viewer. These text-format tags are an unofficial standard. + + + + +<guilabel>Recognise quote characters</guilabel> + +To display the quoted text in another size or colour, &knode; needs to recognise that it's quoted text. Quoted text is normally marked with a > at the beginning of the line, but sometimes there are other characters. In this field you can enter all characters that should mark quoted text. + + + + +<guilabel>Show attachments inline if possible</guilabel> + +If this setting is marked, &knode; tries to display the contents of possible attachment directly in the window when opening an article; for instance, a picture would be displayed directly below the article text. + +Additionally, you have the possibility to save the attachment or open it with the application you have associated with the MIME type of the attachment by using the context menu. + + + + +<guilabel>Open attachments on click</guilabel> + +If this box is checked, attachments are opened with the external program which is configured for the MIME type; if there is no such association, a dialogue for saving a file is opened and you can save the attachment to a separate file. + + + + +<guilabel>Show alternative contents as attachments</guilabel> + +Articles which are sent as Multipart MIME contain the text of the message in multiple formats, for example as raw text and HTML; the newsreader decides which part of the article is displayed. This setting makes it possible for the other formats to be opened as if they were attachments with a mouse click. + +If this setting is disabled, alternative contents are not displayed. + + + + +<guilabel>Open links with</guilabel> + +Here you can select which browser is used for displaying links you clicked on in a message. Currently, you can either select the Netscape Navigator or the default, &konqueror;; the selected browser has to be installed, of course. + + + + + +Settings for publishing articles + +When you post articles with &knode; the settings in the following dialogue box are used. + + +The Technical Settings dialogue + + + + +The Technical Settings dialogue + + +The Technical Settings dialogue + + + + + +If you choose the wrong settings here your articles could be unreadable or not sendable at all, so please be careful with these settings. + -<guilabel ->Charset</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Charset</guilabel> -Here you can choose the charset used for encoding your articles. Normally this is US-ASCII for English speaking countries, but your charset may differ. The default is the charset used in your global &kde; settings, so you should not have to change this. +Here you can choose the charset used for encoding your articles. Normally this is US-ASCII for English speaking countries, but your charset may differ. The default is the charset used in your global &kde; settings, so you should not have to change this. -When you want to post articles in newsgroups with other charsets (⪚ eastern European or Asian) you can set the required charset here. +When you want to post articles in newsgroups with other charsets (⪚ eastern European or Asian) you can set the required charset here. -<guilabel ->Encoding</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Encoding</guilabel> -Here you set the encoding of the characters for the message transfer; you can choose between 8-bit and 7-bit (quoted-printable). +Here you set the encoding of the characters for the message transfer; you can choose between 8-bit and 7-bit (quoted-printable). -If you choose 8-bit encoding most special characters are transfered correctly; this is, for example, the normal option for the German groups (de.*). +If you choose 8-bit encoding most special characters are transfered correctly; this is, for example, the normal option for the German groups (de.*). -If you choose quoted-printable 8-bit characters (⪚ German umlauts or special characters) are send as encoded 7-bit characters. +If you choose quoted-printable 8-bit characters (⪚ German umlauts or special characters) are send as encoded 7-bit characters. -In the English newsgroups 7-bit encoding is quite normal. - - - - - -<guilabel ->Use own default charset when replying</guilabel -> - -If this option is active, &knode; uses your default charset for replying instead of the charset of the article you're answering on. - - - - -<guilabel ->Generate Message-ID</guilabel -> - -When this is active, &knode; generates its own Message-IDs for all articles you post. - - -The Message-ID must be unique worldwide: there would otherwise be collisions between messages with the same Message-ID and the news server would reject the second article because it thinks this article has already been received. - -A Message-ID consists of a valid FQDN (Full Qualified Domain Name); this means it looks similar to an email address with an identification before the @ and the domain. - -The identification is generated by &knode; automatically, but you must provide a valid domain name in Hostname; if you do not have your own domain, you should not activate this option — let the newsserver generate a Message-ID for you. - - -Message-ID - -An example for a valid domain would be: kde.org; a Message-ID generated with this domain would look like: - -934lek9934@kde.org - - -An unique identification is only guaranteed if you have your own domain. Even when you do not use &knode; for generating your Message-IDs there may be collisions when you are using a local newsserver; for example, leafnode generates a Message-ID which it derives from the local hostname. - - - - -You can get more information about this and how to own a free domain at http://www.qad.org/faq/faq-messageid.html. - - - - -<guilabel ->Hostname</guilabel -> - -Here you enter the Hostname of your computer; this is used to generate the Message-ID. If you do not have your own domain you should not activate this option — let the newsserver generate a Message-ID for you. Using the example above this would be: kde.org. +In the English newsgroups 7-bit encoding is quite normal. + + + + + +<guilabel>Use own default charset when replying</guilabel> + +If this option is active, &knode; uses your default charset for replying instead of the charset of the article you're answering on. + + + + +<guilabel>Generate Message-ID</guilabel> + +When this is active, &knode; generates its own Message-IDs for all articles you post. + + +The Message-ID must be unique worldwide: there would otherwise be collisions between messages with the same Message-ID and the news server would reject the second article because it thinks this article has already been received. + +A Message-ID consists of a valid FQDN (Full Qualified Domain Name); this means it looks similar to an email address with an identification before the @ and the domain. + +The identification is generated by &knode; automatically, but you must provide a valid domain name in Hostname; if you do not have your own domain, you should not activate this option — let the newsserver generate a Message-ID for you. + + +Message-ID + +An example for a valid domain would be: kde.org; a Message-ID generated with this domain would look like: + +934lek9934@kde.org + + +An unique identification is only guaranteed if you have your own domain. Even when you do not use &knode; for generating your Message-IDs there may be collisions when you are using a local newsserver; for example, leafnode generates a Message-ID which it derives from the local hostname. + + + + +You can get more information about this and how to own a free domain at http://www.qad.org/faq/faq-messageid.html. + + + + +<guilabel>Hostname</guilabel> + +Here you enter the Hostname of your computer; this is used to generate the Message-ID. If you do not have your own domain you should not activate this option — let the newsserver generate a Message-ID for you. Using the example above this would be: kde.org. - -<guilabel ->X-Headers</guilabel -> - -Here you can enter X-Headers which are not provided by &knode;; for example, X-No-Archive: yes, which can be used to prevent your articles from being archived by archive services such as Google. - -X-Headers are experimental headers, which are not included in the standard for Internet-Messages; they are, for example, used for extended information transfer. To prevent collisions with later standard headers, they have a X- prefix. - - - - -<guilabel ->Don't add the "User-Agent" identification header</guilabel -> - -When this option is checked &knode; does not include the corresponding line in the Header before posting. - -This header is used for identification of the newsreader the article was written in; apart from statistical reasons, this allows non-standard newsreaders to be identified. You should not activate this option — &knode; has no need to hide. + +<guilabel>X-Headers</guilabel> + +Here you can enter X-Headers which are not provided by &knode;; for example, X-No-Archive: yes, which can be used to prevent your articles from being archived by archive services such as Google. + +X-Headers are experimental headers, which are not included in the standard for Internet-Messages; they are, for example, used for extended information transfer. To prevent collisions with later standard headers, they have a X- prefix. + + + + +<guilabel>Don't add the "User-Agent" identification header</guilabel> + +When this option is checked &knode; does not include the corresponding line in the Header before posting. + +This header is used for identification of the newsreader the article was written in; apart from statistical reasons, this allows non-standard newsreaders to be identified. You should not activate this option — &knode; has no need to hide. - -The Composer Settings - - -The Composer Settings dialogue - - - - -The Composer Settings dialogue - - -The Composer Settings dialogue - - - - - -<guilabel ->Word-wrap at column</guilabel -> - -Here you can set the column number at which &knode; wraps the line; also, you can deactivate the automatic word-wrapping completely. - - -It is recommended to use no more than 76 characters even if you are able to display more: many Usenet users use text-based newsreaders which can not display more than 80 characters and it is difficult to read your articles in such a newsreader if you increase this value — this would reduce the probability of your articles being read at all. - - - - -<guilabel ->Append signature automatically</guilabel -> - -When you write a new article or a followup, your signature is appended automatically if you have configured one in SettingsConfigure KNode...Identity. + +The Composer Settings + + +The Composer Settings dialogue + + + + +The Composer Settings dialogue + + +The Composer Settings dialogue + + + + + +<guilabel>Word-wrap at column</guilabel> + +Here you can set the column number at which &knode; wraps the line; also, you can deactivate the automatic word-wrapping completely. + + +It is recommended to use no more than 76 characters even if you are able to display more: many Usenet users use text-based newsreaders which can not display more than 80 characters and it is difficult to read your articles in such a newsreader if you increase this value — this would reduce the probability of your articles being read at all. + + + + +<guilabel>Append signature automatically</guilabel> + +When you write a new article or a followup, your signature is appended automatically if you have configured one in SettingsConfigure KNode...Identity. - -<guilabel ->Introduction Phrase:</guilabel -> - -When you write a followup, &knode; inserts an introduction phrase before the quoted original text. You can put arbitrary text here; you can also use the variables which &knode; extracts from the original article, ⪚ the name of the author or the date the article was written. - -The following variable are available: - - - -%NAME - -The name of the original author; - - - -%DATE - -The date on which the original article was written; - - - -%EMAIL - -The original author's email address; - - - -%MSID - -The Message-ID of the original article; - - - -%GROUP - -The name of the newsgroup the article comes from. - - - - - -Keep this short, because this introductory line appears in every followup: a long introductory line can be as repelling as a long signature. - - - -An example introductory line - -On %DATE %NAME wrote in %MSID - -Let us assume the original article was written by Konqui on Saturday the 17th of June at 17:42:32 - 0500. The article has the Message-ID <8igdg5.3vvijgt.3@lizard.physos.com>. &knode; will then insert the following introductionary line. - -On Sat, 17 Jun 2000 17:42:32 +0200 Konqui wrote in -<8igdg5.3vvijgt.3@lizard.physos.com>: - - - - - -<guilabel ->Rewrap quoted text automatically</guilabel -> - -When this is checked, the quoted text is wrapped at the correct border value; hence, every new line will be at the correct quoting level. + +<guilabel>Introduction Phrase:</guilabel> + +When you write a followup, &knode; inserts an introduction phrase before the quoted original text. You can put arbitrary text here; you can also use the variables which &knode; extracts from the original article, ⪚ the name of the author or the date the article was written. + +The following variable are available: + + + +%NAME + +The name of the original author; + + + +%DATE + +The date on which the original article was written; + + + +%EMAIL + +The original author's email address; + + + +%MSID + +The Message-ID of the original article; + + + +%GROUP + +The name of the newsgroup the article comes from. + + + + + +Keep this short, because this introductory line appears in every followup: a long introductory line can be as repelling as a long signature. + + + +An example introductory line + +On %DATE %NAME wrote in %MSID + +Let us assume the original article was written by Konqui on Saturday the 17th of June at 17:42:32 - 0500. The article has the Message-ID <8igdg5.3vvijgt.3@lizard.physos.com>. &knode; will then insert the following introductionary line. + +On Sat, 17 Jun 2000 17:42:32 +0200 Konqui wrote in +<8igdg5.3vvijgt.3@lizard.physos.com>: + + + + + +<guilabel>Rewrap quoted text automatically</guilabel> + +When this is checked, the quoted text is wrapped at the correct border value; hence, every new line will be at the correct quoting level. -<guilabel ->Include the author's signature</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Include the author's signature</guilabel> -When this is activated not only the text of the original message, but also the signature of the author, is quoted in a reply. +When this is activated not only the text of the original message, but also the signature of the author, is quoted in a reply. -Quoting a signature is unnecessary and is often considered impolite. +Quoting a signature is unnecessary and is often considered impolite. -<guilabel ->Put the cursor below the introduction phrase</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Put the cursor below the introduction phrase</guilabel> -Normally the cursor will appear below the whole message when answering; with this option turned on the cursor appears below the introduction phrase. +Normally the cursor will appear below the whole message when answering; with this option turned on the cursor appears below the introduction phrase. -This is especially helpful if you quote an article and wish to write between the quoted lines from top to bottom. +This is especially helpful if you quote an article and wish to write between the quoted lines from top to bottom. -<guilabel ->Define external editor</guilabel -> - -You can define an external editor here which is opened by selecting ToolsStart external editor in the Composer window. - -When Start external editor automatically is checked the external editor is opened directly. +<guilabel>Define external editor</guilabel> + +You can define an external editor here which is opened by selecting ToolsStart external editor in the Composer window. + +When Start external editor automatically is checked the external editor is opened directly. -Notice the %f after the name of the editor: this is a variable for the filename of the article you want to edit; do not delete this — you will get an error message when opening the external editor if you do. +Notice the %f after the name of the editor: this is a variable for the filename of the article you want to edit; do not delete this — you will get an error message when opening the external editor if you do. -If you have problems with starting your external editor, the reason may be that the editor starting in "the background"; this is called forking: &knode; only notices the sub-process started and has finished, and thinks you have quit the editor. The editor gvim is an example for this; you can disable the forking of gvim with the commandline switch . It is recommended that you refer to the documentation of your editor you are experiencing this problem. - -If you want to use gvim in Specify Editor enter the following: +If you have problems with starting your external editor, the reason may be that the editor starting in "the background"; this is called forking: &knode; only notices the sub-process started and has finished, and thinks you have quit the editor. The editor gvim is an example for this; you can disable the forking of gvim with the commandline switch . It is recommended that you refer to the documentation of your editor you are experiencing this problem. + +If you want to use gvim in Specify Editor enter the following: -gvim -f %f +gvim -f %f -<guilabel ->Start external editor automatically</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Start external editor automatically</guilabel> -If this option is active the external editor will be used for editing articles. +If this option is active the external editor will be used for editing articles. -<guilabel ->Spelling</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Spelling</guilabel> -Here you can configure the behaviour of the spell checker. +Here you can configure the behaviour of the spell checker. -<guilabel ->Create root/affix not in dictionary</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Create root/affix not in dictionary</guilabel> -If this is checked a known word-root with an unknown affix will be automatically accepted as a new word. +If this is checked a known word-root with an unknown affix will be automatically accepted as a new word. -<guilabel ->Consider run-together words as spelling errors</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Consider run-together words as spelling errors</guilabel> -Here you can toggle if two known words that run together to form an unknown word should be treated as an error or not.) +Here you can toggle if two known words that run together to form an unknown word should be treated as an error or not.) -<guilabel ->Dictionary</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Dictionary</guilabel> -Here you chose the dictionary the spell-checker should use. +Here you chose the dictionary the spell-checker should use. -<guilabel ->Encoding</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Encoding</guilabel> -Here you can tell &knode; which encoding should be used for spell checking; for English text this should normally be US-ASCII. +Here you can tell &knode; which encoding should be used for spell checking; for English text this should normally be US-ASCII. -<guilabel ->Client</guilabel -> - -Here you can switch between the spell-checkers; you can use International Ispell or Aspell. +<guilabel>Client</guilabel> + +Here you can switch between the spell-checkers; you can use International Ispell or Aspell. -<guilabel ->Signing and verifying</guilabel -> - -Here you can configure &knode; for signing articles with GnuPG or PGP. Your GnuPG/PGP ID will be built automatically from your configured name and email address; it is identical to the from line in the header of the article. +<guilabel>Signing and verifying</guilabel> + +Here you can configure &knode; for signing articles with GnuPG or PGP. Your GnuPG/PGP ID will be built automatically from your configured name and email address; it is identical to the from line in the header of the article. -<guilabel ->Encryption tool</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Encryption tool</guilabel> -Here you can choose your encryption tool. +Here you can choose your encryption tool. -<guilabel ->Keep passphrase in memory</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Keep passphrase in memory</guilabel> -If this option is active you only need to type the passphrase for your private key once; &knode; will remember your passphrase until you close &knode; again. +If this option is active you only need to type the passphrase for your private key once; &knode; will remember your passphrase until you close &knode; again. -<guilabel ->Show ciphered/signed text after composing</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Show ciphered/signed text after composing</guilabel> -If this option is activated &knode; will show the signed message in an extra window for confirmation before changing it in the editor. +If this option is activated &knode; will show the signed message in an extra window for confirmation before changing it in the editor. -Always show the encryption keys for approval +Always show the encryption keys for approval -If you are using public newsgroups (on Usenet) you can safely ignore this option as it would not be useful to encrypt messages sent to Usenet; this option may, however, be useful in private newsgroups on private networks where encryption is desired. +If you are using public newsgroups (on Usenet) you can safely ignore this option as it would not be useful to encrypt messages sent to Usenet; this option may, however, be useful in private newsgroups on private networks where encryption is desired. -<guilabel ->Check signatures automatically</guilabel -> - -If this is marked, the PGP signature of the article is automatically checked when showing the article; if there's no mark, you can check the signature for correctness manually with the ViewVerify PGP-Signature menu entry. - - - - - - - -The article-cleanup settings. - -The dialogue below shows the settings for the article cleanup; these settings are used to keep the number of articles on your local harddisk to a reasonable number. &knode; administrates the articles in memory so there can be some decrease in speed if you have to many articles lying around; most of the time it makes no sense to keep articles for a very long time. Services like Google and Altavista make archiving unnecessary. - - -&knode; isn't an offline reader, so all of the configuration refers to the headers which are managed by &knode;; if you are running a local news server, such as leafnode, you should refer to its documentation to handle expiring the articles on the server — &knode; cannot do this for you. - - - -The cleanup settings - - - - -The cleanup settings - - -The cleanup settings - - - - - -<guilabel ->Expire old articles automatically</guilabel -> - -When this option is active all subscribed groups are checked for old articles in the time interval set here; the old articles will then be deleted. +<guilabel>Check signatures automatically</guilabel> + +If this is marked, the PGP signature of the article is automatically checked when showing the article; if there's no mark, you can check the signature for correctness manually with the ViewVerify PGP-Signature menu entry. + + + + + + + +The article-cleanup settings. + +The dialogue below shows the settings for the article cleanup; these settings are used to keep the number of articles on your local harddisk to a reasonable number. &knode; administrates the articles in memory so there can be some decrease in speed if you have to many articles lying around; most of the time it makes no sense to keep articles for a very long time. Services like Google and Altavista make archiving unnecessary. + + +&knode; isn't an offline reader, so all of the configuration refers to the headers which are managed by &knode;; if you are running a local news server, such as leafnode, you should refer to its documentation to handle expiring the articles on the server — &knode; cannot do this for you. + + + +The cleanup settings + + + + +The cleanup settings + + +The cleanup settings + + + + + +<guilabel>Expire old articles automatically</guilabel> + +When this option is active all subscribed groups are checked for old articles in the time interval set here; the old articles will then be deleted. -You can force this check by selecting GroupExpire group - - - - -<guilabel ->Purge groups every</guilabel -> - -Here you can configure how often subscribed groups should be checked for old articles and how often those articles should be deleted; this option only has an effect when Expire old articles automatically is selected. +You can force this check by selecting GroupExpire group + + + + +<guilabel>Purge groups every</guilabel> + +Here you can configure how often subscribed groups should be checked for old articles and how often those articles should be deleted; this option only has an effect when Expire old articles automatically is selected. -<guilabel ->Keep read articles</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Keep read articles</guilabel> -Read articles are deleted by the next cleanup if they are older than this value; &knode; uses the creation date for this. +Read articles are deleted by the next cleanup if they are older than this value; &knode; uses the creation date for this. -<guilabel ->Keep unread articles</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Keep unread articles</guilabel> -Unread articles are deleted by the next cleanup if they are older than this value; &knode; uses the creation date for this. +Unread articles are deleted by the next cleanup if they are older than this value; &knode; uses the creation date for this. -<guilabel ->Remove articles that are not available on the server</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Remove articles that are not available on the server</guilabel> -It may happen that you'll see a header in &knode; but the article is not available on the server; if this option is set, those articles will automatically deleted in &knode;. +It may happen that you'll see a header in &knode; but the article is not available on the server; if this option is set, those articles will automatically deleted in &knode;. -<guilabel ->Preserve threads</guilabel -> - -This selection forces a thread to be deleted only if all articles contained in it fulfil the delete conditions; this means that a thread will not be deleted until the last article in the thread should be deleted. - -This prevents old articles in a long thread from vanishing before the discussion has ended. - - -&knode; can not predict whether there will be a reply after the set conditions are fulfilled; you will have to find your own settings for this. Some newsgroups have days between replies; others only hours. Use your own judgement. - - - - -<guilabel ->Compact folders automatically</guilabel -> - -This option refers to the memory behaviour of &knode;. If an article in a folder is deleted it will be marked as deleted but still take up space on your hard disk; with this option you can tell &knode; to actually delete the articles and free the hard-disk space regularly. +<guilabel>Preserve threads</guilabel> + +This selection forces a thread to be deleted only if all articles contained in it fulfil the delete conditions; this means that a thread will not be deleted until the last article in the thread should be deleted. + +This prevents old articles in a long thread from vanishing before the discussion has ended. + + +&knode; can not predict whether there will be a reply after the set conditions are fulfilled; you will have to find your own settings for this. Some newsgroups have days between replies; others only hours. Use your own judgement. + + + + +<guilabel>Compact folders automatically</guilabel> + +This option refers to the memory behaviour of &knode;. If an article in a folder is deleted it will be marked as deleted but still take up space on your hard disk; with this option you can tell &knode; to actually delete the articles and free the hard-disk space regularly. -You can force this check by selecting FolderCompact folder or for all folders together with FolderCompact all folders. +You can force this check by selecting FolderCompact folder or for all folders together with FolderCompact all folders. -<guilabel ->Purge folders every</guilabel -> - -Here you can configure how often the folder is checked for deleted articles; this option only has an effect if the Compact folders automatically is set. +<guilabel>Purge folders every</guilabel> + +Here you can configure how often the folder is checked for deleted articles; this option only has an effect if the Compact folders automatically is set. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/using-morefeatures.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/using-morefeatures.docbook index 925be293bb3..11789163099 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/using-morefeatures.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knode/using-morefeatures.docbook @@ -1,1278 +1,485 @@ -The Advanced &knode; Features +The Advanced &knode; Features -Defining and Using Filters +Defining and Using Filters -You may already have read about using filters in the chapter explaining the configuration of &knode;; there, we were talking about the built-in filters provided by &knode; there. You can configure the built-in filters like all the others. The screenshot below shows the dialogue box for configuring the filters. +You may already have read about using filters in the chapter explaining the configuration of &knode;; there, we were talking about the built-in filters provided by &knode; there. You can configure the built-in filters like all the others. The screenshot below shows the dialogue box for configuring the filters. -While filters and scoring are very powerful and have many uses, one of the most common requirements is simply to add all posts written by someone you don't wish to read to a killfile. At the end of this section is a quick guide to using filters and scores to create such a killfile. +While filters and scoring are very powerful and have many uses, one of the most common requirements is simply to add all posts written by someone you don't wish to read to a killfile. At the end of this section is a quick guide to using filters and scores to create such a killfile. -The New Filter dialogue +The New Filter dialogue -The New Filter dialogue +The New Filter dialogue -The New Filter dialogue +The New Filter dialogue -First we will create a new filter. You may, at some point, want to find your own articles amongst all the others; or, you may not want to see the articles posted by a particular person at all: both cases can be solved by a simple filter on the Sender. Here are some examples: - - -Do Not Show The Articles by a Particular Person - -SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsFilters - - -Select New... - - -Insert Do not show idiot in the Text Box Name - - -To make the filter appear on the menu, check Show in menu. - - -Go to the From area. - - -Choose Does NOT contain from the drop-down box. +First we will create a new filter. You may, at some point, want to find your own articles amongst all the others; or, you may not want to see the articles posted by a particular person at all: both cases can be solved by a simple filter on the Sender. Here are some examples: + + +Do Not Show The Articles by a Particular Person + +SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsFilters + + +Select New... + + +Insert Do not show idiot in the Text Box Name + + +To make the filter appear on the menu, check Show in menu. + + +Go to the From area. + + +Choose Does NOT contain from the drop-down box. - -Insert the name of the person you want to ignore in the now- active Text Box; for example, Idiot. - - -Confirm the filter settings with OK. + +Insert the name of the person you want to ignore in the now- active Text Box; for example, Idiot. + + +Confirm the filter settings with OK. -The filter now shows all articles, except the ones containing Idiot in the From: line. +The filter now shows all articles, except the ones containing Idiot in the From: line. -You can combine the settings of the 'Subject + From' tab with the settings on the other tabs. For example: +You can combine the settings of the 'Subject + From' tab with the settings on the other tabs. For example: -Show only discussion with unread follow-ups on own articles. +Show only discussion with unread follow-ups on own articles. -SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsFilters +SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsFilters -Select the predefined filter threads with own articles +Select the predefined filter threads with own articles -Select Copy +Select Copy -Insert My threads with unread in the Name field. +Insert My threads with unread in the Name field. -Select the Status tab +Select the Status tab -Select has new followups +Select has new followups -Select true in the drop-down box next to it. +Select true in the drop-down box next to it. -Confirm the filter settings with OK -This filter shows all the threads your are participating in which have unread messages; also, you have seen the possibility of using existing filters as a base for new ones: this makes life easier for complex filters. +Confirm the filter settings with OK +This filter shows all the threads your are participating in which have unread messages; also, you have seen the possibility of using existing filters as a base for new ones: this makes life easier for complex filters. -Show all articles, no older than 3 days, containing KNode in the subject. - -SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsFilters +Show all articles, no older than 3 days, containing KNode in the subject. + +SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsFilters -Select Add +Select Add -Insert Latest KNode threads in the Name field. +Insert Latest KNode threads in the Name field. -To make the filter appear in the menu, check show in menu. - - -From the apply on drop-down box select single articles - - -Go to the Subject area and select does contain in the drop-down box. - - -Insert knode in the text box. - - -Change to the Additional tab +To make the filter appear in the menu, check show in menu. + + +From the apply on drop-down box select single articles + + +Go to the Subject area and select does contain in the drop-down box. + + +Insert knode in the text box. + + +Change to the Additional tab - -Select the Age check box - - -Enter the following settings: 0 < days <= 3 - - -Confirm the filter settings with OK -This filter, now, shows all articles, no older than 3 days, containing knode in the subject. - - + +Select the Age check box + + +Enter the following settings: 0 < days <= 3 + + +Confirm the filter settings with OK +This filter, now, shows all articles, no older than 3 days, containing knode in the subject. + + -Creating a Killfile +Creating a Killfile -&knode; offers viewing filters (all, unread only, my posts &etc;) and scoring filters (threads and articles start with a score of zero and can be adjusted according to author, thread &etc;). +&knode; offers viewing filters (all, unread only, my posts &etc;) and scoring filters (threads and articles start with a score of zero and can be adjusted according to author, thread &etc;). -Using viewing filters you could hide articles according to poster, but this is not really suitable when you want to kill several posters universally. +Using viewing filters you could hide articles according to poster, but this is not really suitable when you want to kill several posters universally. -Using the scoring gives lots of control but filters only at the thread level, i.e. you can watch and ignore threads; the disadvantage of this, however, is that you may lose otherwise-useful threads just because of one poster. +Using the scoring gives lots of control but filters only at the thread level, i.e. you can watch and ignore threads; the disadvantage of this, however, is that you may lose otherwise-useful threads just because of one poster. -The solution is to use these in combination. +The solution is to use these in combination. -Creating a Killfile +Creating a Killfile -Go to SettingsConfigure KNodeReading NewsFilters. +Go to SettingsConfigure KNodeReading NewsFilters. -Create a new filter below unread, called killfile on. Be sure that Apply to single articles is set and then click on the Additional tab. Set score equal to or less than zero (<=); then click the OK until you have exited the dialogue. +Create a new filter below unread, called killfile on. Be sure that Apply to single articles is set and then click on the Additional tab. Set score equal to or less than zero (<=); then click the OK until you have exited the dialogue. -Open an article whose author should be killed and just type &Ctrl;L(or select, from the Scoring menu, Lower Score for Author). This opens the Rule Editor (a part of scoring). You can optionally give the rule a name that matches the author (Kook, for example.) and then, if this is to be permanent, uncheck the expire automatically box; you'll see that this rule will change the author's score to minus ten (or the score you entered); finally, click OK. +Open an article whose author should be killed and just type &Ctrl;L(or select, from the Scoring menu, Lower Score for Author). This opens the Rule Editor (a part of scoring). You can optionally give the rule a name that matches the author (Kook, for example.) and then, if this is to be permanent, uncheck the expire automatically box; you'll see that this rule will change the author's score to minus ten (or the score you entered); finally, click OK. -Go to the menu item ViewFilterkillfile on. +Go to the menu item ViewFilterkillfile on. -This will cause any articles with scores less than zero will disappear; to kill additional authors you only need repeat the &Ctrl;L part of these instructions. +This will cause any articles with scores less than zero will disappear; to kill additional authors you only need repeat the &Ctrl;L part of these instructions. - + - -The Composer + +The Composer -The &knode; composer provides many features, especially for posting and replying to articles. - - -Publish Articles in Multiple Newsgroups - -By selecting the Button Browse you can choose additional newsgroups you want to publish your article in. - - -It is generally undesirable to post articles in multiple newsgroups: please think twice about it; if you are not sure where to post your article ask in one of the possible groups — somebody will tell you were to post. - - - - -Redirect Followups - -The main use of this feature is when a thread has gone off topic for the newsgroup in which it is posted; for example, a thread may start in a &kde; newsgroup discussing how to redirect a followup in &knode;, but may leads to a discussion about graphical and text based newsreaders. - -Sometimes it happens that usenet users post an article into the wrong newsgroup; very often those articles are just ignored. If it looks like the author did this unintentionally, you might like to tell them politely and make the followup articles go into the right group. - -Another reason for using Followup-To: is a when dealing with articles cross-posted across in multiple newsgroups: you should take care that the replies are only posted in one single newsgroup. - -You can activate this by filling the text box Followups - To:; here you can enter the suitable group. If there are multiple newsgroups in the Groups: field, they are shown in the drop-down list. - - -If you enter poster here, instead of a newsgroup, the replies will go directly to the author, not to the newsgroup. - -Some people put an email address here, but this is not a valid entry: use poster and correctly set your Reply-To address in the normal &knode; settings. - - - - - - -Working With an External Editor - -Using ToolsStart External Editor you can start an editor of your choice for editing the reply; this way you can use your preferred Editor for writing articles and e-mails. - - - - -Spelling - -By selecting ToolsSpelling, you can check the article in the composer for spelling errors. - - - - -Sending Attachments - -By selecting AttachAttach File you can open the File Selection Dialogue Box; here you can choose the file you want to attach. - -Most of the time, &knode; determines the correct MIME type for the attachment; if &knode; detects it incorrectly, you can correct the MIME type manually. - -This screenshot shows the Composer with 2 attachments: a text file and a PNG picture. - - -Sending Attachments - - - - -Sending Attachments - - -Sending Attachments - - - - - -Only do this if you know what you're doing! An incorrect MIME type could cause the attachment to be sent incorrectly, or mean that the attachment will not be able to be rebuilt after sending. - - - -The English word attachment is used all over the world; you can use it in your language, too. - - - -In most newsgroups, attachments are prohibited: do not send unsolicited attachments; if you are asked to send them, look who is asking for them — normally, the person will want you to send them by email. - -The news server will probably reject articles with attachments for most groups anyway; those that do accept attachments normally have the word binaries in their name. Some news servers even stop carrying non-binaries newsgroups that continuously receive attachments. - - - - - -Searching for Articles - -Sooner or later, you will want to search for one specific article; the &knode; search feature is an easy way to do this. - -You can reach the search function by selecting EditSearch Articles... or the by pressing F4. The screenshot below shows the Search Dialogue Box. - - -The Search Dialogue Box - - - - -The Search Dialogue Box - - -The Search Dialogue Box - - - - -The Search Dialogue Box has four tabs which allow several search criteria: the first tab contains the settings for the Subject and From criteria; the second tab contains the settings for the message-IDs of an article and its references; the third tab contains the settings for the Status of an article; the fourth tab, Additional, contains the remaining criteria. - -You have probably already noticed the similarities between the Filter Dialogue Box and the Search Dialogue Box: the usage is the same and should not be too complicated if you have already defined your own filters. - -&knode; always searches in the currently-active newsgroup; a search in all newsgroups is not possible at the moment. After the Search has finished the articles found appear in the article view; when you close the Search Dialogue Box using Close the search results are deleted, and the old view of the newsgroup appears again. - - -<guilabel ->Start Search</guilabel -> - -With this button you start the Search with the search criteria you defined; all articles in the selected newsgroup, fulfilling these criteria, appear in the article view. - - - - -<guilabel ->New Search</guilabel -> - -This button resets all search criteria. +The &knode; composer provides many features, especially for posting and replying to articles. + + +Publish Articles in Multiple Newsgroups + +By selecting the Button Browse you can choose additional newsgroups you want to publish your article in. + + +It is generally undesirable to post articles in multiple newsgroups: please think twice about it; if you are not sure where to post your article ask in one of the possible groups — somebody will tell you were to post. + + + + +Redirect Followups + +The main use of this feature is when a thread has gone off topic for the newsgroup in which it is posted; for example, a thread may start in a &kde; newsgroup discussing how to redirect a followup in &knode;, but may leads to a discussion about graphical and text based newsreaders. + +Sometimes it happens that usenet users post an article into the wrong newsgroup; very often those articles are just ignored. If it looks like the author did this unintentionally, you might like to tell them politely and make the followup articles go into the right group. + +Another reason for using Followup-To: is a when dealing with articles cross-posted across in multiple newsgroups: you should take care that the replies are only posted in one single newsgroup. + +You can activate this by filling the text box Followups - To:; here you can enter the suitable group. If there are multiple newsgroups in the Groups: field, they are shown in the drop-down list. + + +If you enter poster here, instead of a newsgroup, the replies will go directly to the author, not to the newsgroup. + +Some people put an email address here, but this is not a valid entry: use poster and correctly set your Reply-To address in the normal &knode; settings. + + + + + + +Working With an External Editor + +Using ToolsStart External Editor you can start an editor of your choice for editing the reply; this way you can use your preferred Editor for writing articles and e-mails. + + + + +Spelling + +By selecting ToolsSpelling, you can check the article in the composer for spelling errors. + + + + +Sending Attachments + +By selecting AttachAttach File you can open the File Selection Dialogue Box; here you can choose the file you want to attach. + +Most of the time, &knode; determines the correct MIME type for the attachment; if &knode; detects it incorrectly, you can correct the MIME type manually. + +This screenshot shows the Composer with 2 attachments: a text file and a PNG picture. + + +Sending Attachments + + + + +Sending Attachments + + +Sending Attachments + + + + + +Only do this if you know what you're doing! An incorrect MIME type could cause the attachment to be sent incorrectly, or mean that the attachment will not be able to be rebuilt after sending. + + + +The English word attachment is used all over the world; you can use it in your language, too. + + + +In most newsgroups, attachments are prohibited: do not send unsolicited attachments; if you are asked to send them, look who is asking for them — normally, the person will want you to send them by email. + +The news server will probably reject articles with attachments for most groups anyway; those that do accept attachments normally have the word binaries in their name. Some news servers even stop carrying non-binaries newsgroups that continuously receive attachments. + + + + + +Searching for Articles + +Sooner or later, you will want to search for one specific article; the &knode; search feature is an easy way to do this. + +You can reach the search function by selecting EditSearch Articles... or the by pressing F4. The screenshot below shows the Search Dialogue Box. + + +The Search Dialogue Box + + + + +The Search Dialogue Box + + +The Search Dialogue Box + + + + +The Search Dialogue Box has four tabs which allow several search criteria: the first tab contains the settings for the Subject and From criteria; the second tab contains the settings for the message-IDs of an article and its references; the third tab contains the settings for the Status of an article; the fourth tab, Additional, contains the remaining criteria. + +You have probably already noticed the similarities between the Filter Dialogue Box and the Search Dialogue Box: the usage is the same and should not be too complicated if you have already defined your own filters. + +&knode; always searches in the currently-active newsgroup; a search in all newsgroups is not possible at the moment. After the Search has finished the articles found appear in the article view; when you close the Search Dialogue Box using Close the search results are deleted, and the old view of the newsgroup appears again. + + +<guilabel>Start Search</guilabel> + +With this button you start the Search with the search criteria you defined; all articles in the selected newsgroup, fulfilling these criteria, appear in the article view. + + + + +<guilabel>New Search</guilabel> + +This button resets all search criteria. - - - - -Supersede and Cancel Articles - -This chapter deals with superseding and cancelling articles. You will not use these two features very often, but they do exist should you, one day, need them. - - -Both functions need a news server prepared to handle them; you should also remember that there is no guarantee that no one has already read your article before it is superseded or cancelled. - -So first think, then post. - - - -Cancel - -Cancelling an article means deleting it from the newsgroup. - -Why should you want to cancel an article? Perhaps you flamed somebody in a rage and now you want to get this article out of the newsgroup because you regret what you wrote: a personal insult, read by everybody, doesn't look good, especially when you regret it; so, there is only one thing you can do — cancel the article. - -Select the article you want to cancel and choose Cancel article from its context menu. If you are sure it is the right article, confirm &knode;s question with Yes. Now you will be asked if you want to send the Cancel message now or later; for this example we decide to send it Later. You will notice the new message in the folder Outbox. - -Now we want to look at the so-called cancel message. In the subject you will find something like: - -cancel of <n177m8.1m.ln@konqui.org> - - -This strange letters between the brackets are the Message-ID of the article you want to cancel. This message tells the newsserver to delete your article: if you look at complete header of this message, by selecting ViewShow all headers, you will notice a line with the name control and the content cancel <xxxxx@ddddd.dd> — this line tells the server that this message is a control message and, in our case, tells the server to cancel your article. - -You can still delete the control message from the Outbox should you change your mind. - - -Keep in mind that articles can only be identified by their Message-IDs; you need this Message-ID if you want to cancel an article. Normally, your article gets a Message-ID when it arrives at the newsserver — that's why you can only cancel an article once it has been published. The articles in the Sent folder have no Message-ID, so you cannot cancel them from there. - -There is one exception: if you have configured &knode; to generate a Message-ID you can cancel you articles in folder Sent too. - -&knode; allows only to cancel your own articles: it refuses to cancel articles from other authors. - + + + + +Supersede and Cancel Articles + +This chapter deals with superseding and cancelling articles. You will not use these two features very often, but they do exist should you, one day, need them. + + +Both functions need a news server prepared to handle them; you should also remember that there is no guarantee that no one has already read your article before it is superseded or cancelled. + +So first think, then post. + + + +Cancel + +Cancelling an article means deleting it from the newsgroup. + +Why should you want to cancel an article? Perhaps you flamed somebody in a rage and now you want to get this article out of the newsgroup because you regret what you wrote: a personal insult, read by everybody, doesn't look good, especially when you regret it; so, there is only one thing you can do — cancel the article. + +Select the article you want to cancel and choose Cancel article from its context menu. If you are sure it is the right article, confirm &knode;s question with Yes. Now you will be asked if you want to send the Cancel message now or later; for this example we decide to send it Later. You will notice the new message in the folder Outbox. + +Now we want to look at the so-called cancel message. In the subject you will find something like: + +cancel of <n177m8.1m.ln@konqui.org> + + +This strange letters between the brackets are the Message-ID of the article you want to cancel. This message tells the newsserver to delete your article: if you look at complete header of this message, by selecting ViewShow all headers, you will notice a line with the name control and the content cancel <xxxxx@ddddd.dd> — this line tells the server that this message is a control message and, in our case, tells the server to cancel your article. + +You can still delete the control message from the Outbox should you change your mind. + + +Keep in mind that articles can only be identified by their Message-IDs; you need this Message-ID if you want to cancel an article. Normally, your article gets a Message-ID when it arrives at the newsserver — that's why you can only cancel an article once it has been published. The articles in the Sent folder have no Message-ID, so you cannot cancel them from there. + +There is one exception: if you have configured &knode; to generate a Message-ID you can cancel you articles in folder Sent too. + +&knode; allows only to cancel your own articles: it refuses to cancel articles from other authors. + -Since the cancel feature is so easily fooled, by newsreaders that let you cancel any post, many news servers do not acknowledge cancel messages from posters; even if your own ISP accepts the cancel and passes it on, many other servers will ignore it and will not pass it on. - -You should consider any previously-sent article, cancelled or not, to be published and publicly available. +Since the cancel feature is so easily fooled, by newsreaders that let you cancel any post, many news servers do not acknowledge cancel messages from posters; even if your own ISP accepts the cancel and passes it on, many other servers will ignore it and will not pass it on. + +You should consider any previously-sent article, cancelled or not, to be published and publicly available. - - - -Supersede - -Supersede overwrites your article with a new version. One reason for doing this could be: - -You have written a long article and have already posted it; now, you have found an error in this article: you could cancel this article, and post a new, corrected, article; or, you can use Supersede. - -Select the article in the article view. From its context menu select Supersede article.... &knode; will ask you if you really want to overwrite this article; if you confirm with Yes the Composer appears. - -In the Composer you can now make the desired corrections and changes. You can then publish this article in the same way as you post every other article; when the newsserver receives this article it reads some special lines in the header which tell the newsserver to supersede the older article. Select FileSend Later for now, because we want to look at the article's header in the Outbox. - -Activate ViewShow all headers, because we want to see all the headers the newsserver receives. You will notice a line like: - -Supersedes: <oggcm8.4n5.ln@konqi.org> - -This is the instruction for the newsserver for superseding the article with the Message-ID <oggcm8.4n5.ln@konqi.org> with the new article. - -Besides this, Supersede is used for periodical posted articles, ⪚ an FAQ. The new article supersedes the old one and the newsgroups do not end up with lots of different versions. - - -Again, using this function is only possible if the article already has a Message-ID. Normally, articles get their Message-ID from the newsserver: this means that you can only supersede articles which have already been published. - -You can configure &knode; to generate this Message-ID, then you can supersede your articles in the folder Sent, too. - -&knode; allows you to only supersede your own articles. - - + + + +Supersede + +Supersede overwrites your article with a new version. One reason for doing this could be: + +You have written a long article and have already posted it; now, you have found an error in this article: you could cancel this article, and post a new, corrected, article; or, you can use Supersede. + +Select the article in the article view. From its context menu select Supersede article.... &knode; will ask you if you really want to overwrite this article; if you confirm with Yes the Composer appears. + +In the Composer you can now make the desired corrections and changes. You can then publish this article in the same way as you post every other article; when the newsserver receives this article it reads some special lines in the header which tell the newsserver to supersede the older article. Select FileSend Later for now, because we want to look at the article's header in the Outbox. + +Activate ViewShow all headers, because we want to see all the headers the newsserver receives. You will notice a line like: + +Supersedes: <oggcm8.4n5.ln@konqi.org> + +This is the instruction for the newsserver for superseding the article with the Message-ID <oggcm8.4n5.ln@konqi.org> with the new article. + +Besides this, Supersede is used for periodical posted articles, ⪚ an FAQ. The new article supersedes the old one and the newsgroups do not end up with lots of different versions. + + +Again, using this function is only possible if the article already has a Message-ID. Normally, articles get their Message-ID from the newsserver: this means that you can only supersede articles which have already been published. + +You can configure &knode; to generate this Message-ID, then you can supersede your articles in the folder Sent, too. + +&knode; allows you to only supersede your own articles. + + -As with cancels, supersede messages have been abused in the past, with, for example, certain parties sending hundreds or even thousands of them to overwrite legitimate posts with random computer generated junk; again, as with cancels, many news servers do not honour supersede messages, nor do they pass them on. +As with cancels, supersede messages have been abused in the past, with, for example, certain parties sending hundreds or even thousands of them to overwrite legitimate posts with random computer generated junk; again, as with cancels, many news servers do not honour supersede messages, nor do they pass them on. - - + + - -Score, watch, ignore + +Score, watch, ignore -Score, Watch and Ignore are different names for the same feature. - -By scoring a thread, you determine its importance. &knode; allows scores between -100000 and 100000. A normal article will get a score of 0 if you do not change this; threads with a score below 0 are less important than average; threads with a score above 0 are more important than average. - -The score is an attribute of the thread and the articles in this thread, so you can use the score for filtering and searching articles; for example, you can define a filter to show only articles with a score > 0, i.e. all articles in which you are specifically interested. - -The function Watch sets the score of all article in a thread to 100; this way they get a high score and &knode; labels them with a special icon. - -The function Ignore does the opposite: it scores all articles in a thread with -100 so &knode; does not show these articles anymore. - - -The English word scoring is used in many other countries, too. - - -You can score an article or a thread manually with the right mouse button or with the Scoring menu — here you can score with Watch Thread and Ignore Thread directly. Apart from scoring manually you can let &knode; score the articles with scoring rules automatically; you can configure these rules at SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsScoring or at ScoringEdit scoring rules... — the only difference between these dialogues is that the last one has the rule-list next to the rule configuration. In the following guide I'm using the editor that appears if ScoringEdit scoring rules... is chosen. - - -The Rule Editor +Score, Watch and Ignore are different names for the same feature. + +By scoring a thread, you determine its importance. &knode; allows scores between -100000 and 100000. A normal article will get a score of 0 if you do not change this; threads with a score below 0 are less important than average; threads with a score above 0 are more important than average. + +The score is an attribute of the thread and the articles in this thread, so you can use the score for filtering and searching articles; for example, you can define a filter to show only articles with a score > 0, i.e. all articles in which you are specifically interested. + +The function Watch sets the score of all article in a thread to 100; this way they get a high score and &knode; labels them with a special icon. + +The function Ignore does the opposite: it scores all articles in a thread with -100 so &knode; does not show these articles anymore. + + +The English word scoring is used in many other countries, too. + + +You can score an article or a thread manually with the right mouse button or with the Scoring menu — here you can score with Watch Thread and Ignore Thread directly. Apart from scoring manually you can let &knode; score the articles with scoring rules automatically; you can configure these rules at SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsScoring or at ScoringEdit scoring rules... — the only difference between these dialogues is that the last one has the rule-list next to the rule configuration. In the following guide I'm using the editor that appears if ScoringEdit scoring rules... is chosen. + + +The Rule Editor -The Rule Editor +The Rule Editor -The Rule Editor - - - - -The composer consists of 4 areas: on the left side is the list of the rules; with the buttons below the list you can add, delete or copy an existing rule; below that you have the possibility to limit the rules which are shown — you have the choice whether to show all rules or only the rules for a specific newsgroup. - -If you chose a rule-name in the list you the rule will be displayed on the right-hand side; now you can edit the rule. At the top you can change the name of the rule and set the newsgroups to which this rule applies. You can choose one or more than one group, note that group names must be separated by a semicolon. You can choose from the subscribed groups with the drop-down list and the Add group button; or you can use regular expressions and wild cards, ⪚ .* for all groups. The Expire rule automatically option makes it possible to delete the rule automatically after the configured number of days; this is useful if a specific person behaves badly and you do not want to read anything from this person for a few days. - -In the Condition field you enter the condition on which this rule is activated. Normally, you can enter only one condition, but you can change this by pressing the More and Fewer buttons. If you have more than one condition, you must tell knode whether all conditions need to be fulfilled or only one of them; this can be done by choosing Match all conditions or Match any condition respectively. - -Each condition consists of 2 drop-down lists and a text field. In the first list you chose the part of the message which should be used for the condition — this part will be compared with the text field; the second drop-down list tells &knode; how it is to be compared, for example, whether the chosen header should be identical to the text entered in the text field, or if it just needs to match part of it. Regular expressions are allowed, too. If you check Not then the conditions under which the condition is satisfied are reversed, and the condition will be satisfied if the opposite of its shown conditions is true. - -Now, let's have a look at some examples. - - +The Rule Editor + + + + +The composer consists of 4 areas: on the left side is the list of the rules; with the buttons below the list you can add, delete or copy an existing rule; below that you have the possibility to limit the rules which are shown — you have the choice whether to show all rules or only the rules for a specific newsgroup. + +If you chose a rule-name in the list you the rule will be displayed on the right-hand side; now you can edit the rule. At the top you can change the name of the rule and set the newsgroups to which this rule applies. You can choose one or more than one group, note that group names must be separated by a semicolon. You can choose from the subscribed groups with the drop-down list and the Add group button; or you can use regular expressions and wild cards, ⪚ .* for all groups. The Expire rule automatically option makes it possible to delete the rule automatically after the configured number of days; this is useful if a specific person behaves badly and you do not want to read anything from this person for a few days. + +In the Condition field you enter the condition on which this rule is activated. Normally, you can enter only one condition, but you can change this by pressing the More and Fewer buttons. If you have more than one condition, you must tell knode whether all conditions need to be fulfilled or only one of them; this can be done by choosing Match all conditions or Match any condition respectively. + +Each condition consists of 2 drop-down lists and a text field. In the first list you chose the part of the message which should be used for the condition — this part will be compared with the text field; the second drop-down list tells &knode; how it is to be compared, for example, whether the chosen header should be identical to the text entered in the text field, or if it just needs to match part of it. Regular expressions are allowed, too. If you check Not then the conditions under which the condition is satisfied are reversed, and the condition will be satisfied if the opposite of its shown conditions is true. + +Now, let's have a look at some examples. + + -Maybe you want to filter away all the postings by Theodor Test; to do this choose the From header line from the first drop-down list, choose is exactly the same as from the second drop-down list, and enter his name in the text field. But, before doing this you should have a look at the header of one of Theodor's articles and see what is in the From line. - +Maybe you want to filter away all the postings by Theodor Test; to do this choose the From header line from the first drop-down list, choose is exactly the same as from the second drop-down list, and enter his name in the text field. But, before doing this you should have a look at the header of one of Theodor's articles and see what is in the From line. + -If you do not want to read articles with more than 100 lines, choose the header entry Lines from the first drop-down list, choose greater than from the second, and enter 100 in the text field. You probably, then, want to score down the message. +If you do not want to read articles with more than 100 lines, choose the header entry Lines from the first drop-down list, choose greater than from the second, and enter 100 in the text field. You probably, then, want to score down the message. -Last example: of course, you're very interested in every article that refers to &knode;. Choose the header entry Subject, then contains substring and enter knode in the text field. But what do you do if &knode; is not mentioned in the Subject? I suggest using a regular expression: change contains substring to matches regular expression and type knode|newsreader|usenet into the text field to match either knode, newsreader or usenet — the | symbol means OR. Alternatively, you can make 3 conditions — one that matches knode, one that matches newsreader and so on — and choose Match any condition; but, this needs a lot of space and it is not very elegant, is it? +Last example: of course, you're very interested in every article that refers to &knode;. Choose the header entry Subject, then contains substring and enter knode in the text field. But what do you do if &knode; is not mentioned in the Subject? I suggest using a regular expression: change contains substring to matches regular expression and type knode|newsreader|usenet into the text field to match either knode, newsreader or usenet — the | symbol means OR. Alternatively, you can make 3 conditions — one that matches knode, one that matches newsreader and so on — and choose Match any condition; but, this needs a lot of space and it is not very elegant, is it? - - -Once your condition is ready you should set an action down in the Actions section. The most important action is adjust score; if this action is chosen you can raise or lower the score, by the configured value, for articles to which this rule applies. &knode; can also show you a little message when finding such an article or colourise the header in the article list; for example, you could make interesting articles screaming pink so you would notice them very quickly. - -When leaving the editor, or when the ScoringRecalculate scores menu item is chosen, the rules are executed; furthermore, the rules are automatically used for new articles. Scoring makes the most sense when used with filters: by scoring some articles down and filtering them away they won't appear in the article list. + + +Once your condition is ready you should set an action down in the Actions section. The most important action is adjust score; if this action is chosen you can raise or lower the score, by the configured value, for articles to which this rule applies. &knode; can also show you a little message when finding such an article or colourise the header in the article list; for example, you could make interesting articles screaming pink so you would notice them very quickly. + +When leaving the editor, or when the ScoringRecalculate scores menu item is chosen, the rules are executed; furthermore, the rules are automatically used for new articles. Scoring makes the most sense when used with filters: by scoring some articles down and filtering them away they won't appear in the article list. - -Group identities - -With &knode; you can use a different identity with every newsgroup to which you are subscribed; i.e. you can set a name, email address, reply-to address and signature to use with that group. - -It is easy to set group identities. First, with the right mouse button, click on the name of the newsgroup in which to have a different identity in; then, select Group Properties from the context menu that appears. In the dialogue that appears the second tab contains fields identical to the global identity settings; enter your settings here and click OK to confirm the changes: then, your articles in this group will always posted with this newly-entered identity. - - -When you unsubscribe from a group you lose its identity settings for this group: if you re-subscribe to the group, you will need to re-enter its identity settings. For new newsgroups, the global identity is used. - - - - - -Managing Multiple News Accounts - -&knode; can handle an unlimited number of news server accounts in addition to your main news server; most users don't need this feature, but it can be very useful to if your main newsserver does not provide all groups you want to read. Typical cases of this are when support groups for commercial software are hosted on a special, private, server or binary newsgroups, which are only available from some servers. - -Another example of why you sometimes need more than one newsserver is that sometimes not all interesting newsgroups are on one server; in fact, there is very often only a selection of newsgroups. For example, many servers do not support binary groups with pictures or programs; if you want such a newsgroup and your newsserver provider does not want to serve it you can configure &knode; to get it from another server. - -Or, perhaps you find you are just subscribed to too many newsgroups, and would like to organise them a little better; you could set up several accounts for the same server, perhaps one for groups you read every day, and one for groups you read less often, so that you do not have to search for your everyday groups in a long list of subscribed groups. - -In order to add an new account, open the preferences dialogue via SettingsConfigure KNode...AccountsNews . The New button creates a new account; you then have to enter the same data as for your first account, typically a name for the account, the host name, and a user name and password if the server requires authentication. When this is done the new server will appear both in the configuration dialogue and in the group view: you can now subscribe to newsgroups. - -You can delete the currently-selected account by pressing the Delete button. + +Group identities + +With &knode; you can use a different identity with every newsgroup to which you are subscribed; i.e. you can set a name, email address, reply-to address and signature to use with that group. + +It is easy to set group identities. First, with the right mouse button, click on the name of the newsgroup in which to have a different identity in; then, select Group Properties from the context menu that appears. In the dialogue that appears the second tab contains fields identical to the global identity settings; enter your settings here and click OK to confirm the changes: then, your articles in this group will always posted with this newly-entered identity. + + +When you unsubscribe from a group you lose its identity settings for this group: if you re-subscribe to the group, you will need to re-enter its identity settings. For new newsgroups, the global identity is used. + + + + + +Managing Multiple News Accounts + +&knode; can handle an unlimited number of news server accounts in addition to your main news server; most users don't need this feature, but it can be very useful to if your main newsserver does not provide all groups you want to read. Typical cases of this are when support groups for commercial software are hosted on a special, private, server or binary newsgroups, which are only available from some servers. + +Another example of why you sometimes need more than one newsserver is that sometimes not all interesting newsgroups are on one server; in fact, there is very often only a selection of newsgroups. For example, many servers do not support binary groups with pictures or programs; if you want such a newsgroup and your newsserver provider does not want to serve it you can configure &knode; to get it from another server. + +Or, perhaps you find you are just subscribed to too many newsgroups, and would like to organise them a little better; you could set up several accounts for the same server, perhaps one for groups you read every day, and one for groups you read less often, so that you do not have to search for your everyday groups in a long list of subscribed groups. + +In order to add an new account, open the preferences dialogue via SettingsConfigure KNode...AccountsNews . The New button creates a new account; you then have to enter the same data as for your first account, typically a name for the account, the host name, and a user name and password if the server requires authentication. When this is done the new server will appear both in the configuration dialogue and in the group view: you can now subscribe to newsgroups. + +You can delete the currently-selected account by pressing the Delete button. -In the Account properties dialogue (available from the context menu of the newsserver) you can setup an identity for use only on this newsserver. +In the Account properties dialogue (available from the context menu of the newsserver) you can setup an identity for use only on this newsserver. -Sign and Verify Articles with <acronym ->PGP</acronym -> +Sign and Verify Articles with <acronym>PGP</acronym> -PGP is the most-widespread method used to encrypt or sign data. Using the PGP-signature you can verify if an article is really from the original author or if it has been changed by others. You can find PGP-programs and guides at http://www.pgpi.org. - -With &knode; you can sign an article with PGP and to verify PGP-signed article. After you have configured the PGP support, at SettingsConfigure Knode...Signing/Verifying, you can sign articles in the editor with the ToolsSign article with PGP menu item — you will be asked for your passphrase and after that the article will be signed. - - -Your GnuPG/PGP ID is automatically built from your name and your email address and is identical to the sender of the message (From-header). +PGP is the most-widespread method used to encrypt or sign data. Using the PGP-signature you can verify if an article is really from the original author or if it has been changed by others. You can find PGP-programs and guides at http://www.pgpi.org. + +With &knode; you can sign an article with PGP and to verify PGP-signed article. After you have configured the PGP support, at SettingsConfigure Knode...Signing/Verifying, you can sign articles in the editor with the ToolsSign article with PGP menu item — you will be asked for your passphrase and after that the article will be signed. + + +Your GnuPG/PGP ID is automatically built from your name and your email address and is identical to the sender of the message (From-header). -To verify a PGP-signature you have to choose the menu item ViewVerify PGP-signature. +To verify a PGP-signature you have to choose the menu item ViewVerify PGP-signature. - + - -Working with newsgroups + +Working with newsgroups -After the configuration of &knode; we will now try to get your first news; to achieve this, you need to do some more steps of configuration, but you will not have to do this very often. +After the configuration of &knode; we will now try to get your first news; to achieve this, you need to do some more steps of configuration, but you will not have to do this very often. -Fetching the group-list from the news server +Fetching the group-list from the news server -If you want to read a newsgroup you first have to subscribe to it. &RMB;-click with your mouse on the entry of your newsserver in the folder-list; from the context menu that appears select the Subscribe to Newsgroups entry. &knode;, at this moment, does not know which newsgroups are available from this server and will ask you if it should fetch a list of available newsgroups: confirm with Yes. Now you should see the following dialogue. - - -The Subscribe to Newsgroups Dialogue - - - - -The Subscribe to Newsgroups dialogue - - -The Subscribe to Newsgroups dialogue - - - - -After some time &knode; will has fetched the list of available newsgroups and will show them in the left window, Groups on, in a tree; this tree view shows the newsgroup hierarchy. +If you want to read a newsgroup you first have to subscribe to it. &RMB;-click with your mouse on the entry of your newsserver in the folder-list; from the context menu that appears select the Subscribe to Newsgroups entry. &knode;, at this moment, does not know which newsgroups are available from this server and will ask you if it should fetch a list of available newsgroups: confirm with Yes. Now you should see the following dialogue. + + +The Subscribe to Newsgroups Dialogue + + + + +The Subscribe to Newsgroups dialogue + + +The Subscribe to Newsgroups dialogue + + + + +After some time &knode; will has fetched the list of available newsgroups and will show them in the left window, Groups on, in a tree; this tree view shows the newsgroup hierarchy. -You can find a short description about the structure of the usenet and the hierarchy of the single newsgroups at http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/usenet-einfuehrung (German). +You can find a short description about the structure of the usenet and the hierarchy of the single newsgroups at http://www.kirchwitz.de/~amk/dni/usenet-einfuehrung (German). -<guilabel ->Search</guilabel -> - -The simplest method to navigate in the tree is to use the Search input field: &knode; will filter the groups displayed according to your input. If you are searching for a group about &kde;, but you do not know its exact position in the hierarchy, just type kde in the Search field. - -When you enter the k, you will already see the list changing; the second letter, d, give you a significantly-reduced list of shown groups; and the final e reduces the list to the groups with kde in their name. You will most likely end with just one group: - - -comp.windows.x.kde - - -If your server carries the international groups, you might find your list is: - - -comp.windows.x.kde -de.comp.os.unix.apps.kde - - -This incremental search gives you the possibility to search for newsgroups without knowing their exact paths. - - -On a closer look, you will see &knode; showing the groups without a tree if there are only a few groups left; this is not a bug, it is a feature. - - - - -<guilabel ->disable tree view</guilabel -> - -Normally &knode; shows all the groups in a tree; if this option is activated, all newsgroups are listed amongst one another. - - - - - -<guilabel ->subscribed only</guilabel -> - -If subscribed only is checked the tree-view Groups on shows only the groups you are already subscribed to; this is very convenient if you want to unsubscribe from some groups: you then won't have to search the whole tree for these groups. - - - - -<guilabel ->new only</guilabel -> - -If new only is checked the tree-view Groups on shows only the groups which are new since you last fetched the group list; for this to be functional, you first have to fetch a new group list with New List. - -The New Groups button give the possibility to show all the new groups since a specific date. - - - - -<guilabel ->Groups on</guilabel -> - -This list shows all newsgroups on this server; if you check one of the checkboxes, subscribed only or new only, you get the corresponding selection. - - - - -<guilabel ->Current changes</guilabel -> - -The Current changes window shows all changes you have made since you opened the dialogue. - -The subscribe to list shows the newsgroups you have chosen to subscribe to. - -Below you can see the unsubscribe from list, which shows all newsgroups from which you have chosen to unsubscribe. You cannot unsubscribe from groups you are not subscribed to. - - - - -<guilabel ->New Groups</guilabel -> - -This button opens a dialogue which allows you to configure the list of new groups; you can choose between showing all groups since the last refresh or all groups since a given date. With the date option, &knode; provides a more-flexible possibility to check for new groups; you can even check for new groups since before the last refresh of the group list. - - - - -<guibutton ->New List</guibutton -> - -The New List button tells &knode; to fetch a new group list from the news server. - - -The newsgroup hierarchy is in a constant flux; all the time there are groups introduced, renamed or moved; some groups just disappear: they are no longer available and get deleted. To reflect this, &knode; gives you the possibility to refresh the the group list. This is, normally, only needed to see if your server now provides a group which was not there before. +<guilabel>Search</guilabel> + +The simplest method to navigate in the tree is to use the Search input field: &knode; will filter the groups displayed according to your input. If you are searching for a group about &kde;, but you do not know its exact position in the hierarchy, just type kde in the Search field. + +When you enter the k, you will already see the list changing; the second letter, d, give you a significantly-reduced list of shown groups; and the final e reduces the list to the groups with kde in their name. You will most likely end with just one group: + + +comp.windows.x.kde + + +If your server carries the international groups, you might find your list is: + + +comp.windows.x.kde +de.comp.os.unix.apps.kde + + +This incremental search gives you the possibility to search for newsgroups without knowing their exact paths. + + +On a closer look, you will see &knode; showing the groups without a tree if there are only a few groups left; this is not a bug, it is a feature. + + + + +<guilabel>disable tree view</guilabel> + +Normally &knode; shows all the groups in a tree; if this option is activated, all newsgroups are listed amongst one another. + + + + + +<guilabel>subscribed only</guilabel> + +If subscribed only is checked the tree-view Groups on shows only the groups you are already subscribed to; this is very convenient if you want to unsubscribe from some groups: you then won't have to search the whole tree for these groups. + + + + +<guilabel>new only</guilabel> + +If new only is checked the tree-view Groups on shows only the groups which are new since you last fetched the group list; for this to be functional, you first have to fetch a new group list with New List. + +The New Groups button give the possibility to show all the new groups since a specific date. + + + + +<guilabel>Groups on</guilabel> + +This list shows all newsgroups on this server; if you check one of the checkboxes, subscribed only or new only, you get the corresponding selection. + + + + +<guilabel>Current changes</guilabel> + +The Current changes window shows all changes you have made since you opened the dialogue. + +The subscribe to list shows the newsgroups you have chosen to subscribe to. + +Below you can see the unsubscribe from list, which shows all newsgroups from which you have chosen to unsubscribe. You cannot unsubscribe from groups you are not subscribed to. + + + + +<guilabel>New Groups</guilabel> + +This button opens a dialogue which allows you to configure the list of new groups; you can choose between showing all groups since the last refresh or all groups since a given date. With the date option, &knode; provides a more-flexible possibility to check for new groups; you can even check for new groups since before the last refresh of the group list. + + + + +<guibutton>New List</guibutton> + +The New List button tells &knode; to fetch a new group list from the news server. + + +The newsgroup hierarchy is in a constant flux; all the time there are groups introduced, renamed or moved; some groups just disappear: they are no longer available and get deleted. To reflect this, &knode; gives you the possibility to refresh the the group list. This is, normally, only needed to see if your server now provides a group which was not there before. -If you simply want to make sure you have seen every new group, it is more effective to use New Groups; fetching the complete list is much more time consuming, but you do make sure that any deleted groups vanish from the grouplist. - - -Unfortunately there is no guarantee that your newsserver is providing all available newsgroups: many newsserver refuse groups publishing binary attachments; other groups are only available from special servers. &knode; provides you the possibility to use more than one news-server if you want to access alternative servers providing these groups; you can read more about this in . - - - - -Working with the dialogue - -We now want to subscribe to the &kde; group: mark the the box beside the name; you can now see the group in the list labelled subscribe to. Another possibility is to use the arrows between the two windows. - -If you picked the wrong newsgroup by mistake you can undo your selection by unchecking the checkbox next to the group's name in the Groups on window; again, you could use the arrow (you probably noticed the arrow changing direction.) - -If you want to unsubscribe from a newsgroup it is as easy as subscribing to it: you just uncheck the box next to its name. The groups you wish to unsubscribe from are shown in the unsubscribe from list. Again, the arrow is another way of doing things: to correct your actions you can use the arrow again; this works as long as the dialogue is not closed by clicking OK. - -As a &kde; and &knode; user you will probably want to subscribe to the group, so make sure you checked the box and press OK. This group now appears in the tree view under the server entry it was chosen from; in our example this is My News Account. If you can not see the group, click on the cross next to the server entry or on the server entry itself; the list of subscribed newsgroups should appear. - -Click on the newsgroup; now you see on the right in the article view an empty folder: &knode; has to fetch the articles for the new newsgroup. If you have, in SettingsConfigure KNodeReading newsGeneral, the check box Check for new article automatically checked &knode; tries to fetch the articles from the server when the newsgroup is first selected; if this is unchecked, you have to use AccountGet new articles. - - -When you are using leafnode as a server, there will be a single article in the group: leafnode generates an article in every new subscribed group; this indicates that leafnode will consider this group the next time it fetches articles. You can ignore an error message saying the article can not be found. If you select this article you tell leafnode you are really interested in this group. - -You get the real articles when your local newsserver fetches them from the Internet and provides them to you; details about this can be found in the documentation of your local newsserver. - - -When everything works the articles of the subscribed newsgroup appear in the upper right window — the article view. - - +If you simply want to make sure you have seen every new group, it is more effective to use New Groups; fetching the complete list is much more time consuming, but you do make sure that any deleted groups vanish from the grouplist. + + +Unfortunately there is no guarantee that your newsserver is providing all available newsgroups: many newsserver refuse groups publishing binary attachments; other groups are only available from special servers. &knode; provides you the possibility to use more than one news-server if you want to access alternative servers providing these groups; you can read more about this in . + + + + +Working with the dialogue + +We now want to subscribe to the &kde; group: mark the the box beside the name; you can now see the group in the list labelled subscribe to. Another possibility is to use the arrows between the two windows. + +If you picked the wrong newsgroup by mistake you can undo your selection by unchecking the checkbox next to the group's name in the Groups on window; again, you could use the arrow (you probably noticed the arrow changing direction.) + +If you want to unsubscribe from a newsgroup it is as easy as subscribing to it: you just uncheck the box next to its name. The groups you wish to unsubscribe from are shown in the unsubscribe from list. Again, the arrow is another way of doing things: to correct your actions you can use the arrow again; this works as long as the dialogue is not closed by clicking OK. + +As a &kde; and &knode; user you will probably want to subscribe to the group, so make sure you checked the box and press OK. This group now appears in the tree view under the server entry it was chosen from; in our example this is My News Account. If you can not see the group, click on the cross next to the server entry or on the server entry itself; the list of subscribed newsgroups should appear. + +Click on the newsgroup; now you see on the right in the article view an empty folder: &knode; has to fetch the articles for the new newsgroup. If you have, in SettingsConfigure KNodeReading newsGeneral, the check box Check for new article automatically checked &knode; tries to fetch the articles from the server when the newsgroup is first selected; if this is unchecked, you have to use AccountGet new articles. + + +When you are using leafnode as a server, there will be a single article in the group: leafnode generates an article in every new subscribed group; this indicates that leafnode will consider this group the next time it fetches articles. You can ignore an error message saying the article can not be found. If you select this article you tell leafnode you are really interested in this group. + +You get the real articles when your local newsserver fetches them from the Internet and provides them to you; details about this can be found in the documentation of your local newsserver. + + +When everything works the articles of the subscribed newsgroup appear in the upper right window — the article view. + + - -Fetching and reading Articles - -&knode; always shows three views: the folder view, the article view and the article window; you can change height and width of these views with the mouse. If you click in a window it gets the focus; this is important if you want to use &knode; with the keyboard. The Tab key changes the focus between the views; the currently-active view is indicated by a small colored bar over the column headers. - -This picture shows &knode; with the subscribed &kde; newsgroup. - - -The three views of &knode; - - - - -The three views of &knode; - - -The three views of &knode; + +Fetching and reading Articles + +&knode; always shows three views: the folder view, the article view and the article window; you can change height and width of these views with the mouse. If you click in a window it gets the focus; this is important if you want to use &knode; with the keyboard. The Tab key changes the focus between the views; the currently-active view is indicated by a small colored bar over the column headers. + +This picture shows &knode; with the subscribed &kde; newsgroup. + + +The three views of &knode; + + + + +The three views of &knode; + + +The three views of &knode; - - + + -It is possible to select more than one group or article. You can select an area by clicking on the first entry with the &LMB;, holding the &Shift; key and clicking on the last entry with the &LMB; again. +It is possible to select more than one group or article. You can select an area by clicking on the first entry with the &LMB;, holding the &Shift; key and clicking on the last entry with the &LMB; again. -If you want to select more than one single entry, but they are not next to each other in the list, you have to select the first by clicking on it with the &LMB; and then select the other entries by holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking on them with the &LMB;. +If you want to select more than one single entry, but they are not next to each other in the list, you have to select the first by clicking on it with the &LMB; and then select the other entries by holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking on them with the &LMB;. -In either case you can clear your selection by clicking on another entry with the &LMB;. +In either case you can clear your selection by clicking on another entry with the &LMB;. -If you have selected more than one entry you have to activate the context menu with the &Shift; key pressed, otherwise you'll clear the selection. - - - -The Folder View - -The folder views contains not only the accounts you configured — in our example this is My News Account — but also three other folders. When you are subscribed to some newsgroups there will be plus next to the name of the account: clicking on the plus or the name of the account opens the tree to show the names of the newsgroups you have chosen to subscribe to using that account. - - -Using the &RMB; you can get a context menu for the selected item (folders or newsgroups): if you select a newsgroup and choose Properties you can, amongst other things, specify your identity for this particular group; you can find more about this in the Local Identities chapter. +If you have selected more than one entry you have to activate the context menu with the &Shift; key pressed, otherwise you'll clear the selection. + + + +The Folder View + +The folder views contains not only the accounts you configured — in our example this is My News Account — but also three other folders. When you are subscribed to some newsgroups there will be plus next to the name of the account: clicking on the plus or the name of the account opens the tree to show the names of the newsgroups you have chosen to subscribe to using that account. + + +Using the &RMB; you can get a context menu for the selected item (folders or newsgroups): if you select a newsgroup and choose Properties you can, amongst other things, specify your identity for this particular group; you can find more about this in the Local Identities chapter. -When you select a newsgroup with your mouse a list of articles of this group appears in the upper-right window; if there are no articles in the upper-right window there are two possibilities — either there are no articles for this newsgroup on the newsserver or the newsserver did not fetch them yet. Select AccountGet new articles in all groups: if there are still no articles appearing you either have some problems with your settings or there really are no articles for this group. Try another group: if there are no articles for this group you will probably have to work through the first chapters, about the configuration of &knode;, again; the Frequently Asked Questions chapter may help you, too. - - -If you are using a local newsserver the articles only appear if the newsserver has already got them from the internet; if you are using leafnode this is done by the fetchnews program. - - - -The Newsgroup Folders - -The newsgroup folders appear with the name they are given by the hierarchy on the newsserver; in our example this is comp.windows.x.kde. You can change the name shown in this view: in the context menu (click with the &RMB; on the newsgroup's name) choose Rename group, then you can change the name in the input field. A good name for comp.windows.x.kde would be, for example, The KDE Newsgroup. - -If you don't change this, the hierarchical name will still be shown. - -Besides the name of newsgroups the folder view shows more information by altering its appearance: if a newsgroup contains new articles its name is shown bold; the columns Total and Unread also tell you how many articles are in the corresponding group or folder and how many are marked as unread. - - - - -The <guilabel ->Outbox</guilabel -> folder - -The Outbox folder contains all articles which are to be sent later, or which could not be sent because of an error. If you want to sent an article later choose FileSend Later in the editor: the article is then filed in the Outbox folder; it is possible to edit, delete or send these articles later. - - -If an article was not sent because of an error, it is stored in this folder; you will not lose these articles. - - - - -The <guilabel ->Drafts</guilabel -> folder - -This folder is used for storing drafts of your articles; for example, if you want to do some further work on them but you have no time for it right now. To store an article in this folder choose FileSave as Draft in the editor. - -You can edit, delete and send the articles in this folder. - - - - -The <guilabel ->Sent</guilabel -> Folder - -This folder contains copies of the articles that you have successfully sent, including your e-mail replies; you can delete the messages in this folder, but it will not un-send the messages already sent. - - -If your are using a local newsserver an article appearing in the folder Sent only indicates the local newsserver received the article; it is possible this article will never appears in any newsgroup if the local newsserver was not able to send it for some reason. If you notice some articles not appearing in the according newsgroup first make sure it was sent by the local newsserver. - - - -If you are using leafnode then articles leafnode was unable to send are normally found in /var/spool/failed.postings. - - - - - -The Article View - -The article view gives you a list of all articles in the selected newsgroup or folder; you can change the appearance of this view using the View menu. The uppermost row of the view contains the column headers. - - - -Subject - -The Subject column shows the subjects of an articles which, most of the time, give you a clue about the content of this article. The subject is chosen by the article author. You can find more about this in How to post and reply to news. - - - -From - -The From column shows the author, or their e-mail address if the author didn't give a name. You can configure your settings in SettingsConfigure KNodeIdentity; when you publish an article &knode; will show these settings in the From column. - - - -Score - -The Score column shows the scoring of an article as a number; the default is 0. Articles which are important to you can be scored up; articles you want to ignore can be scored down: the range is -100000 to +100000. You can read more about this in the Scoring, Watching and Ignoring chapter. -The Score column is only shown if SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsGeneralShow article score is activated. - - - -Date - -The Date column shows the date and time when the article was written. - - - -Lines - -The Lines column shows the number of lines of the article; this column is only shown if SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsGeneralShow line count is activated. - - - - - -The Symbols and Highlighting Used - -This is a short explanation of the different symbols for labelling articles. - - - - - +When you select a newsgroup with your mouse a list of articles of this group appears in the upper-right window; if there are no articles in the upper-right window there are two possibilities — either there are no articles for this newsgroup on the newsserver or the newsserver did not fetch them yet. Select AccountGet new articles in all groups: if there are still no articles appearing you either have some problems with your settings or there really are no articles for this group. Try another group: if there are no articles for this group you will probably have to work through the first chapters, about the configuration of &knode;, again; the Frequently Asked Questions chapter may help you, too. + + +If you are using a local newsserver the articles only appear if the newsserver has already got them from the internet; if you are using leafnode this is done by the fetchnews program. + + + +The Newsgroup Folders + +The newsgroup folders appear with the name they are given by the hierarchy on the newsserver; in our example this is comp.windows.x.kde. You can change the name shown in this view: in the context menu (click with the &RMB; on the newsgroup's name) choose Rename group, then you can change the name in the input field. A good name for comp.windows.x.kde would be, for example, The KDE Newsgroup. + +If you don't change this, the hierarchical name will still be shown. + +Besides the name of newsgroups the folder view shows more information by altering its appearance: if a newsgroup contains new articles its name is shown bold; the columns Total and Unread also tell you how many articles are in the corresponding group or folder and how many are marked as unread. + + + + +The <guilabel>Outbox</guilabel> folder + +The Outbox folder contains all articles which are to be sent later, or which could not be sent because of an error. If you want to sent an article later choose FileSend Later in the editor: the article is then filed in the Outbox folder; it is possible to edit, delete or send these articles later. + + +If an article was not sent because of an error, it is stored in this folder; you will not lose these articles. + + + + +The <guilabel>Drafts</guilabel> folder + +This folder is used for storing drafts of your articles; for example, if you want to do some further work on them but you have no time for it right now. To store an article in this folder choose FileSave as Draft in the editor. + +You can edit, delete and send the articles in this folder. + + + + +The <guilabel>Sent</guilabel> Folder + +This folder contains copies of the articles that you have successfully sent, including your e-mail replies; you can delete the messages in this folder, but it will not un-send the messages already sent. + + +If your are using a local newsserver an article appearing in the folder Sent only indicates the local newsserver received the article; it is possible this article will never appears in any newsgroup if the local newsserver was not able to send it for some reason. If you notice some articles not appearing in the according newsgroup first make sure it was sent by the local newsserver. + + + +If you are using leafnode then articles leafnode was unable to send are normally found in /var/spool/failed.postings. + + + + + +The Article View + +The article view gives you a list of all articles in the selected newsgroup or folder; you can change the appearance of this view using the View menu. The uppermost row of the view contains the column headers. + + + +Subject + +The Subject column shows the subjects of an articles which, most of the time, give you a clue about the content of this article. The subject is chosen by the article author. You can find more about this in How to post and reply to news. + + + +From + +The From column shows the author, or their e-mail address if the author didn't give a name. You can configure your settings in SettingsConfigure KNodeIdentity; when you publish an article &knode; will show these settings in the From column. + + + +Score + +The Score column shows the scoring of an article as a number; the default is 0. Articles which are important to you can be scored up; articles you want to ignore can be scored down: the range is -100000 to +100000. You can read more about this in the Scoring, Watching and Ignoring chapter. +The Score column is only shown if SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsGeneralShow article score is activated. + + + +Date + +The Date column shows the date and time when the article was written. + + + +Lines + +The Lines column shows the number of lines of the article; this column is only shown if SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsGeneralShow line count is activated. + + + + + +The Symbols and Highlighting Used + +This is a short explanation of the different symbols for labelling articles. + + + + + - Already-read articles are labelled with this symbol. - - - - - + Already-read articles are labelled with this symbol. + + + + + - Articles labelled with this symbol are read and the body was fetched from the server. - - - - - - Articles labelled with this symbol are unread and the body has not yet been fetched. - - - - - - Articles labeled with this symbol are unread but the body has already been already fetched. - - - - - - Articles labelled with this symbol are part of a thread with new and/or unread articles in it. - - - - - - Articles labelled with this symbol are parts of a guarded thread. This corresponds to a score of 100. - - - -Besides different symbols, &knode; is using the following highlighting: - - - -Bold article subjects. - -The article is new in this group; it was fetched during the last connection with the server. - - - -Article subjects printed in grey. - -There are no unread follow-up articles. - - - - - - -Navigation in the Article View. - -You can navigate in articles, display an article and open or close threads with your mouse or keyboard. - -When you select an article with your mouse its entry in the the article view gets colored; at the same time the header and body of this article appear in in the article window. If you want to read another article you can use the mouse to select it, or you can use the cursor keys. If you use the cursor keys you can move the dashed frame to the article you want to read and then press Enter to mark and display the article. - -There are many key commands to provide comfortable navigation within a news group and to switching between newsgroups. Here the most common key commands of the standard key configuration are listed; you can configure the key bindings in SettingsConfigure Shortcuts. - - - -Toggle Subthreads T - -The replies to an article are either shown or hidden by multiply pressing this key; another way to open threads is to use the Right Arrow key. - - - -Filter F6 - -A dialogue is shown where you can choose the filter for the articles. - - - -Sort F7 - -A dialogue is shown where you can change the sorting of the articles; if you choose a column for a second time it will change the sorting direction. - - + Articles labelled with this symbol are read and the body was fetched from the server. + + + + + + Articles labelled with this symbol are unread and the body has not yet been fetched. + + + + + + Articles labeled with this symbol are unread but the body has already been already fetched. + + + + + + Articles labelled with this symbol are part of a thread with new and/or unread articles in it. + + + + + + Articles labelled with this symbol are parts of a guarded thread. This corresponds to a score of 100. + + + +Besides different symbols, &knode; is using the following highlighting: + + + +Bold article subjects. + +The article is new in this group; it was fetched during the last connection with the server. + + + +Article subjects printed in grey. + +There are no unread follow-up articles. + + + + + + +Navigation in the Article View. + +You can navigate in articles, display an article and open or close threads with your mouse or keyboard. + +When you select an article with your mouse its entry in the the article view gets colored; at the same time the header and body of this article appear in in the article window. If you want to read another article you can use the mouse to select it, or you can use the cursor keys. If you use the cursor keys you can move the dashed frame to the article you want to read and then press Enter to mark and display the article. + +There are many key commands to provide comfortable navigation within a news group and to switching between newsgroups. Here the most common key commands of the standard key configuration are listed; you can configure the key bindings in SettingsConfigure Shortcuts. + + + +Toggle Subthreads T + +The replies to an article are either shown or hidden by multiply pressing this key; another way to open threads is to use the Right Arrow key. + + + +Filter F6 + +A dialogue is shown where you can choose the filter for the articles. + + + +Sort F7 + +A dialogue is shown where you can change the sorting of the articles; if you choose a column for a second time it will change the sorting direction. + + -Browsing articles Space +Browsing articles Space -This key gives you a convenient possibility for browsing through the article view: by pressing this key the article in the article window is scrolled; when you reach the end of the article by repeatedly pressing Space, it takes you to the next article; when you have read all articles in one newsgroup, Space takes you to the first article of the next newsgroup. By repeatedly pressing Space you can browse through all subscribed newsgroups like this. +This key gives you a convenient possibility for browsing through the article view: by pressing this key the article in the article window is scrolled; when you reach the end of the article by repeatedly pressing Space, it takes you to the next article; when you have read all articles in one newsgroup, Space takes you to the first article of the next newsgroup. By repeatedly pressing Space you can browse through all subscribed newsgroups like this. -Next unread article &Alt;Space - -This key binding jumps to the next unread article. The sequence follows the order of articles in the article view; threads are opened if necessary. - - +Next unread article &Alt;Space + +This key binding jumps to the next unread article. The sequence follows the order of articles in the article view; threads are opened if necessary. + + -Next unread thread &Ctrl;Space - -This command jumps to the next thread containing unread articles: the first unread article is then selected and shown. The sequence follows the order of articles in the article view. - - - -Next article N - -This command jumps to the next article; the sequence follows the order of articles in the article view. Replies in closed threads are ignored. - - - -Previous article B - -This command jumps to the previous article in the group; the sequence follows the order of articles in the article view. Replies in closed threads are ignored. - - - -Next group + - -This command jumps to the next newsgroup; the sequence follows the order of newsgroups in the folder view. - - - -Previous group - - -This command jumps to the previous newsgroup; the sequence follows the order of newsgroups in the folder view. - - - - - - -Sorting and Filtering of Articles - -Some newsgroups are very crowded and contain lots of articles; perhaps only some of them are interesting to you. One possibility to keep track of the news you are interested in is to sort your articles with a certain criterion. - -Sorting your articles, and choosing sorting criteria, is done with the column titles in the article view: clicking on a column title makes it the current sorting criterion; another click on the same column title changes the order of sorting. - - -The current sorting criterion is indicated with an arrow next to the title; this gives you an easy sign which column is used for sorting, too. You have to make the column wide enough, though, so you can actually see the arrow; you can change the column width by moving the mouse pointer on the small area between two column titles: the pointer changes its appearance to two horizontal arrows; clicking and holding the &LMB; mouse button now allows you to change the width of the column to the left of the mouse pointer. +Next unread thread &Ctrl;Space + +This command jumps to the next thread containing unread articles: the first unread article is then selected and shown. The sequence follows the order of articles in the article view. + + + +Next article N + +This command jumps to the next article; the sequence follows the order of articles in the article view. Replies in closed threads are ignored. + + + +Previous article B + +This command jumps to the previous article in the group; the sequence follows the order of articles in the article view. Replies in closed threads are ignored. + + + +Next group + + +This command jumps to the next newsgroup; the sequence follows the order of newsgroups in the folder view. + + + +Previous group - + +This command jumps to the previous newsgroup; the sequence follows the order of newsgroups in the folder view. + + + + + + +Sorting and Filtering of Articles + +Some newsgroups are very crowded and contain lots of articles; perhaps only some of them are interesting to you. One possibility to keep track of the news you are interested in is to sort your articles with a certain criterion. + +Sorting your articles, and choosing sorting criteria, is done with the column titles in the article view: clicking on a column title makes it the current sorting criterion; another click on the same column title changes the order of sorting. + + +The current sorting criterion is indicated with an arrow next to the title; this gives you an easy sign which column is used for sorting, too. You have to make the column wide enough, though, so you can actually see the arrow; you can change the column width by moving the mouse pointer on the small area between two column titles: the pointer changes its appearance to two horizontal arrows; clicking and holding the &LMB; mouse button now allows you to change the width of the column to the left of the mouse pointer. -&knode; gives you the possibility to reduce the flood of articles: you can show only articles fitting specific criteria; &knode; uses filters for this task. In the following paragraphs we are just dealing with the predefined filters; for defining and using your own filters please refer to the Defining and using Filters chapter. - -Normally you will read most articles only once, and then never again. &knode; labels the articles which are unread, but when there are more articles in a news group than can be shown by the article view you often have to search for unread articles: it would be much easier to see only the new fetched and unread articles; &knode; gives you this feature by the predefined filters. - -In the status line at the bottom border of your main window next to the word Filter the actually-active filter is shown: if you do not change the filter configuration this is the filter all; this means all articles of a newsgroup are shown. all is one of the predefined filters; there are eight of them in all, which are described in more detail here. - - - - -All - - -This filter is the default setting; it shows all articles in a newsgroup. You can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterAll - - - -Unread - -This filter shows only unread articles; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterUnread - - - -New - -This filter shows only articles fetched during the last connection; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterNew - - - -Watched - -This shows only threads chosen as watched threads by you; you may be watching a thread because, for example, you are participating in it, or because you are particularly interested in the answers. You can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterWatched - -This filter only shows something if have you selected one or more threads to watch; you can achieve this by selecting ArticleThreadWatch: next to the subject a symbol will appear, showing a pair of eyes. - - - - -Threads With Unread - -This filter shows only threads containing unread articles; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilter Threads With Unread - - - - -Threads With New - -This filter shows only threads with newly-fetched articles; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterThreads With New - - - -Own articles - -This filter only articles you have published; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterOwn Articles - - - - -Threads With Own Articles - -This filter only shows threads containing articles you have published; you can choose this filter by selecting View FilterOwn Articles +&knode; gives you the possibility to reduce the flood of articles: you can show only articles fitting specific criteria; &knode; uses filters for this task. In the following paragraphs we are just dealing with the predefined filters; for defining and using your own filters please refer to the Defining and using Filters chapter. + +Normally you will read most articles only once, and then never again. &knode; labels the articles which are unread, but when there are more articles in a news group than can be shown by the article view you often have to search for unread articles: it would be much easier to see only the new fetched and unread articles; &knode; gives you this feature by the predefined filters. + +In the status line at the bottom border of your main window next to the word Filter the actually-active filter is shown: if you do not change the filter configuration this is the filter all; this means all articles of a newsgroup are shown. all is one of the predefined filters; there are eight of them in all, which are described in more detail here. + + + + +All + + +This filter is the default setting; it shows all articles in a newsgroup. You can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterAll + + + +Unread + +This filter shows only unread articles; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterUnread + + + +New + +This filter shows only articles fetched during the last connection; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterNew + + + +Watched + +This shows only threads chosen as watched threads by you; you may be watching a thread because, for example, you are participating in it, or because you are particularly interested in the answers. You can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterWatched + +This filter only shows something if have you selected one or more threads to watch; you can achieve this by selecting ArticleThreadWatch: next to the subject a symbol will appear, showing a pair of eyes. + + + + +Threads With Unread + +This filter shows only threads containing unread articles; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilter Threads With Unread + + + + +Threads With New + +This filter shows only threads with newly-fetched articles; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterThreads With New + + + +Own articles + +This filter only articles you have published; you can choose this filter by selecting ViewFilterOwn Articles + + + + +Threads With Own Articles + +This filter only shows threads containing articles you have published; you can choose this filter by selecting View FilterOwn Articles - - - - -For everyday use the unread filter is propably the most useful: it shows all unread articles, including the old ones. The other filters are very task-specific and are seldom used; in the end it is a matter of taste which filter to select. - - - - - -The Article Window - -The article window shows the currently-selected article. You can scroll in it like in a normal text editor window; the difference is that you cannot change the article — it is for reading only. - -By pressing the &RMB; in the article viewer you can access the important functions in the context menu very quickly. - -The window itself is divided in three areas; they are explained in more detail now. - - -The Header - -This part shows the header lines or a part of the header. You will recognize some information here from the article view; for example, the subject and the address or name where the article originated. When you click on the From: address, &knode; opens an editor window where the email address of the author and the subject of the referring article are already filled in for you; this enables you to reply to the author directly from their article. - -The appearance and content of the header shown by default can be configured by choosing SettingsConfiguring KNode...Reading NewsHeaders; you can find a more-detailed view on this in Configuring the Shown Headers. - -By selecting ViewShow all headers you force &knode; to show the whole header as is produced by the newsreader and newsservers; normally you do not need this view: it needs a lot of space in the article window. - -The last lines of the header contain, if necessary, some references to other articles, shown as numbers in the range from 1 to n. These References are the articles to which the current article refers: the article labeled with 1 is the oldest article to which this article refers; the article with the highest number is the most-recent article to which the current article refers. - -When you click on a reference the corresponding article is loaded and shown in the article view; if the article is no longer available you will be informed by &knode;. This will happen if the article has been deleted by the article management of &knode; due to its age, or your news server decided to delete it from the newsgroup; for details on how to get such an article, please refer to the Frequently Asked Questions. - - -The first lines in an article, with the subject and author information and so on, are called headers. - - - - -The Body of the Article - -The body of the article follows straight after the header; it is the actual message the author published in the newsgroup. Be aware that some articles may contain quotes from other articles which are not recognisable as quotes; this depends on the news editor the author used and their article-formatting habits. - -&knode; provides some formatting which can be used by articles; at the moment the available options are: + + + + +For everyday use the unread filter is propably the most useful: it shows all unread articles, including the old ones. The other filters are very task-specific and are seldom used; in the end it is a matter of taste which filter to select. + + + + + +The Article Window + +The article window shows the currently-selected article. You can scroll in it like in a normal text editor window; the difference is that you cannot change the article — it is for reading only. + +By pressing the &RMB; in the article viewer you can access the important functions in the context menu very quickly. + +The window itself is divided in three areas; they are explained in more detail now. + + +The Header + +This part shows the header lines or a part of the header. You will recognize some information here from the article view; for example, the subject and the address or name where the article originated. When you click on the From: address, &knode; opens an editor window where the email address of the author and the subject of the referring article are already filled in for you; this enables you to reply to the author directly from their article. + +The appearance and content of the header shown by default can be configured by choosing SettingsConfiguring KNode...Reading NewsHeaders; you can find a more-detailed view on this in Configuring the Shown Headers. + +By selecting ViewShow all headers you force &knode; to show the whole header as is produced by the newsreader and newsservers; normally you do not need this view: it needs a lot of space in the article window. + +The last lines of the header contain, if necessary, some references to other articles, shown as numbers in the range from 1 to n. These References are the articles to which the current article refers: the article labeled with 1 is the oldest article to which this article refers; the article with the highest number is the most-recent article to which the current article refers. + +When you click on a reference the corresponding article is loaded and shown in the article view; if the article is no longer available you will be informed by &knode;. This will happen if the article has been deleted by the article management of &knode; due to its age, or your news server decided to delete it from the newsgroup; for details on how to get such an article, please refer to the Frequently Asked Questions. + + +The first lines in an article, with the subject and author information and so on, are called headers. + + + + +The Body of the Article + +The body of the article follows straight after the header; it is the actual message the author published in the newsgroup. Be aware that some articles may contain quotes from other articles which are not recognisable as quotes; this depends on the news editor the author used and their article-formatting habits. + +&knode; provides some formatting which can be used by articles; at the moment the available options are: -/italic/ -*bold* -_underlined_ - - -Do not use the highlighting too often; the impact decreases the more it is used. - - -The main part of the message (the contents) is called the body. - - -Most of the time a quote is indicated by a prefixed > on every line; however, there are other possible signs. If you can not directly recognize a quote the author did not obey the rules of proper quoting. - -Also, it is usual to start an answer with a introductionary line, something like: - - -On 12/25/2000 Santa Claus wrote: - - - -Normally you do not have to concern yourself with these introductionary lines: &knode; does this automatically when you reply to an article; to find out how to customize this line see The Composer Settings documentation. - - -In SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsAppearance you can choose how the articles are shown. In particular, &knode; provides the smart coloring of different reply levels; you can read more about this in the chapter Configuring the appearance. - - -&knode; only supports the colouring of quotes if the quoting lines starts with special characters; you can configure these characters at SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsViewer. - - -When the body of an article contains links to internet addresses you can invoke an internet browser to display the web page it links to by clicking on the link; details about configuring this feature can be found in General news settings. - - - - -The Signature - -Below the main text of an article you can find the signature of the author, provided you did not disable signatures in SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsGeneral. The signature is divided from the text by thin horizontal line. - +/italic/ +*bold* +_underlined_ + + +Do not use the highlighting too often; the impact decreases the more it is used. + + +The main part of the message (the contents) is called the body. + + +Most of the time a quote is indicated by a prefixed > on every line; however, there are other possible signs. If you can not directly recognize a quote the author did not obey the rules of proper quoting. + +Also, it is usual to start an answer with a introductionary line, something like: + + +On 12/25/2000 Santa Claus wrote: + + + +Normally you do not have to concern yourself with these introductionary lines: &knode; does this automatically when you reply to an article; to find out how to customize this line see The Composer Settings documentation. + + +In SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsAppearance you can choose how the articles are shown. In particular, &knode; provides the smart coloring of different reply levels; you can read more about this in the chapter Configuring the appearance. + + +&knode; only supports the colouring of quotes if the quoting lines starts with special characters; you can configure these characters at SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsViewer. + + +When the body of an article contains links to internet addresses you can invoke an internet browser to display the web page it links to by clicking on the link; details about configuring this feature can be found in General news settings. + + + + +The Signature + +Below the main text of an article you can find the signature of the author, provided you did not disable signatures in SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsGeneral. The signature is divided from the text by thin horizontal line. + -Attachments and Multipart <acronym ->MIME</acronym -> messages - -If an article contains attachments they are shown below the signature in a table. - -The multipart MIME format allows the body of an article to be sent in more than one format; for example, in plain-text and in HTML. It depends on the newsreader which format is used for reading the article. - -&knode; allows the different formats to be shown by selecting SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsViewerShow alternative contents as attachments; when this option is checked all alternative formats are shown as attachments and can be opened and viewed. - -If this option is unchecked you will not be shown the different text formats and &knode; decides which one should be shown. - - - - - - -Writing and Replying to Articles - -Before you start writing articles or replying to other Usenet users be sure you understand the habits of the current newsgroup; again, reading A Journey Through Usenet would be a good idea. - -For testing the settings of &knode; please resist sending an article to a random newsgroup; it is not very friendly to bother people with test articles: what if you are subscribed to a newsgroup and half of its articles only contain the word test? It is like somebody calling you just to testing their phone. - -This is the reason for the special groups having test in their name; for example, alt.test. In these groups you can test everything you want without bothering anybody; some groups even send you error messages back. - -Here you can easily identify obvious mistakes, like a missing or a wrong e-mail address or a wrongly-configured charset which doesn't show all special characters. - -You can find a selection of test groups in Test Groups. - -Subscribe to one of the test groups now; some news servers have their own test groups, which are probably less crowded. +Attachments and Multipart <acronym>MIME</acronym> messages + +If an article contains attachments they are shown below the signature in a table. + +The multipart MIME format allows the body of an article to be sent in more than one format; for example, in plain-text and in HTML. It depends on the newsreader which format is used for reading the article. + +&knode; allows the different formats to be shown by selecting SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsViewerShow alternative contents as attachments; when this option is checked all alternative formats are shown as attachments and can be opened and viewed. + +If this option is unchecked you will not be shown the different text formats and &knode; decides which one should be shown. + + + + + + +Writing and Replying to Articles + +Before you start writing articles or replying to other Usenet users be sure you understand the habits of the current newsgroup; again, reading A Journey Through Usenet would be a good idea. + +For testing the settings of &knode; please resist sending an article to a random newsgroup; it is not very friendly to bother people with test articles: what if you are subscribed to a newsgroup and half of its articles only contain the word test? It is like somebody calling you just to testing their phone. + +This is the reason for the special groups having test in their name; for example, alt.test. In these groups you can test everything you want without bothering anybody; some groups even send you error messages back. + +Here you can easily identify obvious mistakes, like a missing or a wrong e-mail address or a wrongly-configured charset which doesn't show all special characters. + +You can find a selection of test groups in Test Groups. + +Subscribe to one of the test groups now; some news servers have their own test groups, which are probably less crowded. - -Remember, you have to download the articles of the new subscribed group; this may take some time if there are many articles in the group. The only important articles are yours and the answers by the check handler; if you want to reduce the number of articles fetched during the test you can configure this in SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsGeneralMaximal number of articles to fetch: if you reduce this dramatically, you should not wait too long to fetch the new articles after sending your test article; however, if it set too low your article might not be fetched. A tolerably-fast news server should provide your article right after you sent it; you might, however, have to wait a while, at worst 1 or 2 days. Feel free to send another article if cannot see your initial one; this is what the test groups are for. - + +Remember, you have to download the articles of the new subscribed group; this may take some time if there are many articles in the group. The only important articles are yours and the answers by the check handler; if you want to reduce the number of articles fetched during the test you can configure this in SettingsConfigure KNode...Reading NewsGeneralMaximal number of articles to fetch: if you reduce this dramatically, you should not wait too long to fetch the new articles after sending your test article; however, if it set too low your article might not be fetched. A tolerably-fast news server should provide your article right after you sent it; you might, however, have to wait a while, at worst 1 or 2 days. Feel free to send another article if cannot see your initial one; this is what the test groups are for. + -When you are using a local news server the configuration of Maximal number of articles to fetch in &knode; is probably unnecessary; you should consult the documentation of your news server instead. +When you are using a local news server the configuration of Maximal number of articles to fetch in &knode; is probably unnecessary; you should consult the documentation of your news server instead. -If you did not encounter any errors unsubscribe from the test groups and set Maximum number of articles to fetch back to normal (1000). - - -Publishing Articles - -You have seen most of &knode; now, but have only used it passively so far, so let's publish a test article now. Select the new subscribed test group in the folder view; then, with ArticlePost to newsgroup...or the key P, the Editor will be opened. - -You can use the &knode; Editor like a normal Texteditor; there are some additional features for writing news articles though. - -In the editor window there are two input lines: one for the subject, which is empty at the moment; and another for the newsgroups this article is going to be posted to. - -Enter the text This is a test in the subject field. - - -Normally, when you post an article, use a descriptive subject. Articles without a descriptive subject are often ignored. Avoid subjects like Help, it doesn't work !!!!! This subject gives no information about the content of your article. - - -The Groups: field already contains the test newsgroup you selected before; do not change this. - -Below the input field for the newsgroup there is another inactive option field: this function is explained later in the chapter The editor; for now it is irrelevant. - -For simplicity reasons we will only use a simple sentence; type: +If you did not encounter any errors unsubscribe from the test groups and set Maximum number of articles to fetch back to normal (1000). + + +Publishing Articles + +You have seen most of &knode; now, but have only used it passively so far, so let's publish a test article now. Select the new subscribed test group in the folder view; then, with ArticlePost to newsgroup...or the key P, the Editor will be opened. + +You can use the &knode; Editor like a normal Texteditor; there are some additional features for writing news articles though. + +In the editor window there are two input lines: one for the subject, which is empty at the moment; and another for the newsgroups this article is going to be posted to. + +Enter the text This is a test in the subject field. + + +Normally, when you post an article, use a descriptive subject. Articles without a descriptive subject are often ignored. Avoid subjects like Help, it doesn't work !!!!! This subject gives no information about the content of your article. + + +The Groups: field already contains the test newsgroup you selected before; do not change this. + +Below the input field for the newsgroup there is another inactive option field: this function is explained later in the chapter The editor; for now it is irrelevant. + +For simplicity reasons we will only use a simple sentence; type: -This is the body of my test article. @ $ % - - -Then, enter an empty line, followed by: +This is the body of my test article. @ $ % + + +Then, enter an empty line, followed by: -Did it work? - - -This may look funny to you, but it does what it is supposed to do — test your configuration.. - -Your article should now look like the screenshot below: - - -Your first article - - - - -Your first article - - -Your first article - - - - -If you are using &knode; with a local newsserver choose FileSend Now in the Editor; if you do not have a connection to a newsserver at this point, you may want to send the article later — you can achieve this by using FileSend Later — &knode; then stores this article in the folder Outbox. You can start sending the articles in the Outbox manually by selecting FileSend pending messages. - -After sending the article you will notice &knode; stores a copy in the Sent folder. - -Depending on how fast your article is published in the according newsgroup you can check the result after some time: mostly it is sufficient to check for new messages immediately after sending the article; be patient, though, it may take the article some hours before reaching the newsgroup. If the article does not arrive after a number of hours it is likely that something went wrong: try again; then, if it is still not working, have a look at the Frequently Asked Questions. - - -Even when you are using a local news server, you have to check for new articles: the local news server just sends the article, it does not store it in the local newsgroup, so you have to synchronize with an external news server if you want to see if your test article has arrived. - - -If the article appears in the newsgroup you are successful; now you should check if there is the correct sender and if the article is readable. Have a look on your language-specific characters like the German umlauts; if they are not readable you have to change the coding at SettingsConfigure KNode...Posting NewsTechnicalto Allow 8-bit. Change this and repeat your test. - -If everything is right you have successfully published your first article in usenet with &knode;. - - - - -Post Reply - -After successfully publishing an article we will now answer to your own article. You want to answer the question you asked, don't you? - -Select your article in the article view and press the &RMB;: a context menu will appear; choose Followup to newsgroup. - -&knode; opens the Editor again, but this time there is already a subject filled in for you. The subject line reads: +Did it work? + + +This may look funny to you, but it does what it is supposed to do — test your configuration.. + +Your article should now look like the screenshot below: + + +Your first article + + + + +Your first article + + +Your first article + + + + +If you are using &knode; with a local newsserver choose FileSend Now in the Editor; if you do not have a connection to a newsserver at this point, you may want to send the article later — you can achieve this by using FileSend Later — &knode; then stores this article in the folder Outbox. You can start sending the articles in the Outbox manually by selecting FileSend pending messages. + +After sending the article you will notice &knode; stores a copy in the Sent folder. + +Depending on how fast your article is published in the according newsgroup you can check the result after some time: mostly it is sufficient to check for new messages immediately after sending the article; be patient, though, it may take the article some hours before reaching the newsgroup. If the article does not arrive after a number of hours it is likely that something went wrong: try again; then, if it is still not working, have a look at the Frequently Asked Questions. + + +Even when you are using a local news server, you have to check for new articles: the local news server just sends the article, it does not store it in the local newsgroup, so you have to synchronize with an external news server if you want to see if your test article has arrived. + + +If the article appears in the newsgroup you are successful; now you should check if there is the correct sender and if the article is readable. Have a look on your language-specific characters like the German umlauts; if they are not readable you have to change the coding at SettingsConfigure KNode...Posting NewsTechnicalto Allow 8-bit. Change this and repeat your test. + +If everything is right you have successfully published your first article in usenet with &knode;. + + + + +Post Reply + +After successfully publishing an article we will now answer to your own article. You want to answer the question you asked, don't you? + +Select your article in the article view and press the &RMB;: a context menu will appear; choose Followup to newsgroup. + +&knode; opens the Editor again, but this time there is already a subject filled in for you. The subject line reads: -Re: This is a test - - -Re: is a shortcut for the Latin In re, which translates to something along the lines of relating to. You should not change the subject and, above all, the Re:: most newsreaders sort threads by the subject. - - -If you want to change the subject for some reason put the new subject in front of the old and replace the Re: with a bracketed (Was: ... ); in our example this would look like - - -A new subject! (Was: This is a test) - - -With this kind of subject you show the other readers there is a branch in the original discussion; this happens, for example, when a new topic occurs in the original discussion or the original subject has changed for some reason. - -If you answer to an article with such a subject, delete the bracketed part of the subject; the first part with a prefixed Re: remains. +Re: This is a test + + +Re: is a shortcut for the Latin In re, which translates to something along the lines of relating to. You should not change the subject and, above all, the Re:: most newsreaders sort threads by the subject. + + +If you want to change the subject for some reason put the new subject in front of the old and replace the Re: with a bracketed (Was: ... ); in our example this would look like + + +A new subject! (Was: This is a test) + + +With this kind of subject you show the other readers there is a branch in the original discussion; this happens, for example, when a new topic occurs in the original discussion or the original subject has changed for some reason. + +If you answer to an article with such a subject, delete the bracketed part of the subject; the first part with a prefixed Re: remains. -Re: A new subject! - - - -Let us have look at the Editor now. The contents of the article to which we want to reply has already been copied to the Editor by &knode;; to indicate the text is a quote every line is prefixed with a >. - -In front of the quoted text &knode; has put an introduction line: the content of this line refers to the original author; you can change the standard text of this line in SettingsConfigure KNode...Posting NewsComposerIntroduction Phrase:. - -The original article contains the question: Did it work? We want to answer this question now. - -Place the cursor below the quoted question and write in the next line: +Re: A new subject! + + + +Let us have look at the Editor now. The contents of the article to which we want to reply has already been copied to the Editor by &knode;; to indicate the text is a quote every line is prefixed with a >. + +In front of the quoted text &knode; has put an introduction line: the content of this line refers to the original author; you can change the standard text of this line in SettingsConfigure KNode...Posting NewsComposerIntroduction Phrase:. + +The original article contains the question: Did it work? We want to answer this question now. + +Place the cursor below the quoted question and write in the next line: -Yes it worked, congratulations! - - -We are not finished yet: it is considered polite to begin with a greeting like Hello in the first line; whether you call the author by their name or not depends on your habits, watch the newsgroup to get used to the habits there. - -Next we delete all non-mandatory parts of the quoted article; in our case, we delete all parts except the question. - -With such a short text this is unnecessary, but this just an example: if you have to read a message 100 lines long again just to find an I agree at the end you will understand.... Aside from this, it makes articles smaller so they use less space on the server. - -At the end we say good bye. - -This screenshot shows our answer before sending it. - - -Your answer to your article - - - - -Your answer to your article - - -Your answer to your article - - - - - -You can find a good guide for correct quoting at http://www.afaik.de/usenet/faq/zitieren (German). - - -Now we still need to post our reply; like posting the original message choose FileSend now or the alternative FileSend later, if you're not online at the moment and you're not using a local newsserver. If everything works you will see your article in the newsgroup after a while; easy, isn't it? +Yes it worked, congratulations! + + +We are not finished yet: it is considered polite to begin with a greeting like Hello in the first line; whether you call the author by their name or not depends on your habits, watch the newsgroup to get used to the habits there. + +Next we delete all non-mandatory parts of the quoted article; in our case, we delete all parts except the question. + +With such a short text this is unnecessary, but this just an example: if you have to read a message 100 lines long again just to find an I agree at the end you will understand.... Aside from this, it makes articles smaller so they use less space on the server. + +At the end we say good bye. + +This screenshot shows our answer before sending it. + + +Your answer to your article + + + + +Your answer to your article + + +Your answer to your article + + + + + +You can find a good guide for correct quoting at http://www.afaik.de/usenet/faq/zitieren (German). + + +Now we still need to post our reply; like posting the original message choose FileSend now or the alternative FileSend later, if you're not online at the moment and you're not using a local newsserver. If everything works you will see your article in the newsgroup after a while; easy, isn't it? - -Using the Options menu you can configure whether you want to send an email, a news article or both. - - - - -Mail Reply - -The Mail Reply follows the same lines as posting a reply in a newsgroup; the only difference is that a mail reply is sent directly to the author and does not appear in any newsgroup. - -Sometimes it is better to use an emailed reply instead of posting a reply to newsgroup; they are used primarily for when you want to correct an error or misconduct by the author, without hurting their feelings by doing so publicly on the newsgroup. - -To answer with an e-mail select your article; again, open the context menu with the right mouse button; and choose Reply by Email: &knode; opens the Composer with the quoted article. - -Subject and body are identical as when posting an article but the Groups: field is replaced by a To: field; here the author's email address appears. In our example this should be your own email address, if &knode; is set up correctly. - -For emails the same rules for quoting and politeness apply as for posting an article in a newsgroup. - -After finishing your Reply, you can send it. - -The screenshot below shows the reply we distributed by email. - - -A Mail Reply - - - - -A Mail Reply - - -A Mail Reply + +Using the Options menu you can configure whether you want to send an email, a news article or both. + + + + +Mail Reply + +The Mail Reply follows the same lines as posting a reply in a newsgroup; the only difference is that a mail reply is sent directly to the author and does not appear in any newsgroup. + +Sometimes it is better to use an emailed reply instead of posting a reply to newsgroup; they are used primarily for when you want to correct an error or misconduct by the author, without hurting their feelings by doing so publicly on the newsgroup. + +To answer with an e-mail select your article; again, open the context menu with the right mouse button; and choose Reply by Email: &knode; opens the Composer with the quoted article. + +Subject and body are identical as when posting an article but the Groups: field is replaced by a To: field; here the author's email address appears. In our example this should be your own email address, if &knode; is set up correctly. + +For emails the same rules for quoting and politeness apply as for posting an article in a newsgroup. + +After finishing your Reply, you can send it. + +The screenshot below shows the reply we distributed by email. + + +A Mail Reply + + + + +A Mail Reply + + +A Mail Reply -The Mail Reply only works if you have used the correct settings in SettingsConfigure KNode...AccountsMail. +The Mail Reply only works if you have used the correct settings in SettingsConfigure KNode...AccountsMail. -Depending on the configuration of your computer, you will find the reply in your mailbox; you might have to connect to your ISP and fetch your new mail first though. - - - -On the Options menu you can configure whether you want to send an email, a news article or both. - - +Depending on the configuration of your computer, you will find the reply in your mailbox; you might have to connect to your ISP and fetch your new mail first though. + + + +On the Options menu you can configure whether you want to send an email, a news article or both. + + - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knotes/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knotes/index.docbook index f880fa26202..f0491e4ec0e 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knotes/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdepim/knotes/index.docbook @@ -3,337 +3,164 @@ - + ]> -The &knotes; Handbook +The &knotes; Handbook -Fabian Dal Santo
linuxgnu@yahoo.com.au
+Fabian Dal Santo
linuxgnu@yahoo.com.au
 -Greg M. Holmes - -Lauri Watts Reviewer +Greg M. Holmes + +Lauri Watts Reviewer -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2000 -Greg M. Holmes +2000 +Greg M. Holmes -2001 -Fabian Del Santo +2001 +Fabian Del Santo -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2003-09-18 -3.0 +2003-09-18 +3.0 -&knotes; is a sticky notes application for the desktop. +&knotes; is a sticky notes application for the desktop. -KDE -Knotes -tdeutils -notes -popup -pop-up -knotes +KDE +Knotes +tdeutils +notes +popup +pop-up +knotes -Introduction +Introduction -&knotes; is a program that lets you write the computer equivalent of sticky notes. The notes are saved automatically when you exit the program and they display when you open the program. +&knotes; is a program that lets you write the computer equivalent of sticky notes. The notes are saved automatically when you exit the program and they display when you open the program. -You may print and mail your notes if you configure &knotes; to use helper applications. +You may print and mail your notes if you configure &knotes; to use helper applications. -Display features of notes such as colour and font may be customised for each note. You may also customise the defaults. +Display features of notes such as colour and font may be customised for each note. You may also customise the defaults. -Using &knotes; +Using &knotes; -Creating a new note: +Creating a new note: -To create a new note &RMB; click on the &knotes; panel icon and select New Note or using the shortcut &Alt;&Shift;N. -You can create a new note containing the contents of the clipboard by selecting New Note From Clipboard or using the shortcut &Alt;&Shift;C. +To create a new note &RMB; click on the &knotes; panel icon and select New Note or using the shortcut &Alt;&Shift;N. +You can create a new note containing the contents of the clipboard by selecting New Note From Clipboard or using the shortcut &Alt;&Shift;C. -Writing your note: +Writing your note: -To write your note, simply type the note in the space provided. Normal keyboard and mouse editing functions are supported. Right clicking in the editing space provides the following menu options: +To write your note, simply type the note in the space provided. Normal keyboard and mouse editing functions are supported. Right clicking in the editing space provides the following menu options: -Undo -Redo -Cut -Copy -Paste -Clear -Select All +Undo +Redo +Cut +Copy +Paste +Clear +Select All -Text may be selected by holding down the &LMB; and moving the mouse, or by holding down the &Shift; key and using the arrow keys. +Text may be selected by holding down the &LMB; and moving the mouse, or by holding down the &Shift; key and using the arrow keys. -Inserting the date: +Inserting the date: -To insert the current date in the Note &RMB; click on the title bar of the note and select Insert Date. -The current date and time will be inserted at the cursor position in the text of the note. +To insert the current date in the Note &RMB; click on the title bar of the note and select Insert Date. +The current date and time will be inserted at the cursor position in the text of the note. -Renaming a note: +Renaming a note: -To rename a note &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Rename.... -Type the new name of the note in the dialogue that appears. To accept the new name, press the OK button. To exit the dialogue without renaming the note, press the Cancel button. To clear what you have typed and start over, click the Clear button. +To rename a note &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Rename.... +Type the new name of the note in the dialogue that appears. To accept the new name, press the OK button. To exit the dialogue without renaming the note, press the Cancel button. To clear what you have typed and start over, click the Clear button. -Mailing a note: +Mailing a note: -To mail a note &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Mail.... -What happens next depends on how you configured the Mail action in the Preferences... dialogue. +To mail a note &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Mail.... +What happens next depends on how you configured the Mail action in the Preferences... dialogue. -Printing a note: +Printing a note: -To print a note &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Print. -A standard &kde; print dialogue will open. +To print a note &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Print. +A standard &kde; print dialogue will open. -Deleting a note: +Deleting a note: -To delete a note &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Delete. +To delete a note &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Delete. -Hiding a note: +Hiding a note: -To hide a note, click the X in the upper right corner of the title bar of the note. The note will no longer be displayed on the screen. The note itself will not be deleted. +To hide a note, click the X in the upper right corner of the title bar of the note. The note will no longer be displayed on the screen. The note itself will not be deleted. -Displaying notes: +Displaying notes: -When you start &knotes;, all notes will display on the screen. If you hide a note and later want to display it, &LMB; on the &knotes; panel icon and select the note you wish to display. +When you start &knotes;, all notes will display on the screen. If you hide a note and later want to display it, &LMB; on the &knotes; panel icon and select the note you wish to display. -Desktop functions: +Desktop functions: -To send a note to a specific desktop, &RMB; click on the title bar of the note and select To Desktop. Choose the desktop desired, or alternatively, All desktops -To make the note remain on top of other windows &RMB; click on the title bar of the note and select Always On Top. -To return the note to more normal window behaviour, simply repeat this process. +To send a note to a specific desktop, &RMB; click on the title bar of the note and select To Desktop. Choose the desktop desired, or alternatively, All desktops +To make the note remain on top of other windows &RMB; click on the title bar of the note and select Always On Top. +To return the note to more normal window behaviour, simply repeat this process. -Quitting &knotes; +Quitting &knotes; -To quit &knotes; &RMB; click on the panel icon and select Quit. +To quit &knotes; &RMB; click on the panel icon and select Quit. @@ -341,165 +168,82 @@ -Configuration +Configuration -Configuring &knotes; Default Settings +Configuring &knotes; Default Settings -To configure &knotes; &RMB; click on the panel icon. Select Configure KNotes... The &knotes; KNotes Defaults dialogue will open. +To configure &knotes; &RMB; click on the panel icon. Select Configure KNotes... The &knotes; KNotes Defaults dialogue will open. -The <guilabel ->Display</guilabel -> Section +The <guilabel>Display</guilabel> Section -Text colour: -The colour square shows the current text colour. By clicking this colour square you open the standard &kde; colour selection dialogue. +Text colour: +The colour square shows the current text colour. By clicking this colour square you open the standard &kde; colour selection dialogue. -Background colour: -The colour square shows the current background colour. By clicking this colour square you open the standard &kde; colour selection dialogue. +Background colour: +The colour square shows the current background colour. By clicking this colour square you open the standard &kde; colour selection dialogue. -Default width: -The width of the note in pixels. Edit this number as desired. +Default width: +The width of the note in pixels. Edit this number as desired. -Default height: -The height of the note in pixels. Edit this number as desired. +Default height: +The height of the note in pixels. Edit this number as desired. -Show note in taskbar -By default, &knotes; notes do not show an entry in the taskbar for each note. If you prefer they do so, enable this option. +Show note in taskbar +By default, &knotes; notes do not show an entry in the taskbar for each note. If you prefer they do so, enable this option. -The <guilabel ->Editor</guilabel -> Section +The <guilabel>Editor</guilabel> Section -Tab Size -This is the size of the indent produced by the key in spaces. Edit this number as desired. +Tab Size +This is the size of the indent produced by the key in spaces. Edit this number as desired. -Auto Indent -This is a check box. If selected, auto-indenting is on. +Auto Indent +This is a check box. If selected, auto-indenting is on. -Rich Text +Rich Text -Not yet implemented +Not yet implemented -Title Font: Click to Change -You can change the font used for the title of your notes. - -Click this button to open the standard &kde; font selection dialogue. +Title Font: Click to Change +You can change the font used for the title of your notes. + +Click this button to open the standard &kde; font selection dialogue. -Text Font: Click to Change +Text Font: Click to Change -You can change the font used for the text of your notes. +You can change the font used for the text of your notes. -Click this button to open the standard &kde; font selection dialogue. +Click this button to open the standard &kde; font selection dialogue. -The <guilabel ->Actions</guilabel -> Section +The <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> Section -Mail Action -Type a mail command and any required command line switches in this box. -By using %f in the command line you can pass the filename of the note body to the mail command. +Mail Action +Type a mail command and any required command line switches in this box. +By using %f in the command line you can pass the filename of the note body to the mail command. @@ -508,66 +252,36 @@ -Customising a Single Note Display - -You can customise each note independently of the global settings. The settings you can customise are identical to those described in the Configuration section, but they will apply only to the note you are changing. Any other open notes, and any new notes you create, will use the default settings. - -To customise a single note display &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Preferences.... -The Local Settings dialogue will open, allowing you to configure the note. +Customising a Single Note Display + +You can customise each note independently of the global settings. The settings you can customise are identical to those described in the Configuration section, but they will apply only to the note you are changing. Any other open notes, and any new notes you create, will use the default settings. + +To customise a single note display &RMB; click on the note title bar and select Preferences.... +The Local Settings dialogue will open, allowing you to configure the note. -Credits and License +Credits and License -&knotes; +&knotes; -Program copyright 1997 Bernd Wuebben wuebben@kde.org +Program copyright 1997 Bernd Wuebben wuebben@kde.org -Contributors: +Contributors: -Wynn Wilkeswynnw@calderasystems.com +Wynn Wilkeswynnw@calderasystems.com -Documentation copyright 2000 Greg M. Holmes holmegm@earthlink.net +Documentation copyright 2000 Greg M. Holmes holmegm@earthlink.net -Documentation updated 2001 by Fabian Del Santo linuxgnu@yahoo.com.au and 2003 by &Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail;. +Documentation updated 2001 by Fabian Del Santo linuxgnu@yahoo.com.au and 2003 by &Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail;. -Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk +Andrew Colesandrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; &documentation.index; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/cervisia/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/cervisia/index.docbook index a769181ee18..890547a5b9f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/cervisia/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/cervisia/index.docbook @@ -2,418 +2,190 @@ - ssh"> - rsh"> + ssh"> + rsh"> - - CVS"> + + CVS"> ]> -&cervisia; Manual +&cervisia; Manual -BerndGehrmann
bernd@mail.berlios.de
 - -CarlosWoelz
carloswoelz@imap-mail.com
 - - - -AlexWalker
alex@x3ja.co.uk
Conversion to British English +BerndGehrmann
bernd@mail.berlios.de
 + +CarlosWoelz
carloswoelz@imap-mail.com
 + + + +AlexWalker
alex@x3ja.co.uk
Conversion to British English -1999 -2000 -2001 -2002 -Bernd Gehrmann +1999 +2000 +2001 +2002 +Bernd Gehrmann -2004 -Carlos Woelz +2004 +Carlos Woelz -This program may be distributed under the terms of the Q Public License as defined by Trolltech AS of Norway and appearing in the file LICENSE.QPL included in the packaging of this file. +This program may be distributed under the terms of the Q Public License as defined by Trolltech AS of Norway and appearing in the file LICENSE.QPL included in the packaging of this file. -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2004-06-06 -2.01.90 +2004-06-06 +2.01.90 -&cervisia; provides a graphical view of &CVS;. +&cervisia; provides a graphical view of &CVS;. -KDE -tdesdk -Cervisia -CVS -version control -revision control +KDE +tdesdk +Cervisia +CVS +version control +revision control -Introduction +Introduction -&cervisia; is a user friendly version control system front-end. The aim is to support &CVS; and other version control system programs in a unified interface, featuring conflict resolution, difference and history viewers, status for the working copy files and support for most version control functions. You can get &cervisia; by building the tdesdk module or installing the tdesdk package provided by your distribution. Currently, only &CVS; is supported, but other version control systems may be integrated in the future. +&cervisia; is a user friendly version control system front-end. The aim is to support &CVS; and other version control system programs in a unified interface, featuring conflict resolution, difference and history viewers, status for the working copy files and support for most version control functions. You can get &cervisia; by building the tdesdk module or installing the tdesdk package provided by your distribution. Currently, only &CVS; is supported, but other version control systems may be integrated in the future. -A version control system is a tool to record, manage and distribute different versions of files. &CVS; is a version control system. It allows you to share your modifications easily, as each of the contributors can work on their local copy at the same time, without fear of overwriting each others' modifications. It allows the recovery of past versions (useful for tracking bugs), the creation of branches (for experimental development or for releases of code) and more. +A version control system is a tool to record, manage and distribute different versions of files. &CVS; is a version control system. It allows you to share your modifications easily, as each of the contributors can work on their local copy at the same time, without fear of overwriting each others' modifications. It allows the recovery of past versions (useful for tracking bugs), the creation of branches (for experimental development or for releases of code) and more. -The main repository usually holds a collaborative project (commercial or not), but you can take advantage of the nice revision control features offered by &CVS; even for a project developed exclusively by you. It is easy to set up a local repository, and you will gain the ability to track changes that caused bugs, revert changes, avoid accidental loss of information &etc;. +The main repository usually holds a collaborative project (commercial or not), but you can take advantage of the nice revision control features offered by &CVS; even for a project developed exclusively by you. It is easy to set up a local repository, and you will gain the ability to track changes that caused bugs, revert changes, avoid accidental loss of information &etc;. -The repository holds the project files, and every contributor keeps their own local copy, named working copy or sandbox; one can then add their modifications to the main repository (a process called "committing") and/or update their own copy to reflect recent changes made by other contributors. +The repository holds the project files, and every contributor keeps their own local copy, named working copy or sandbox; one can then add their modifications to the main repository (a process called "committing") and/or update their own copy to reflect recent changes made by other contributors. -Getting Started +Getting Started -Accessing The Repository +Accessing The Repository -In this section, we show how to use the basic version control system functionality using &cervisia; to checkout modules from the repository and work with them. To do that, you must have access to the repository as a client, meaning that someone (probably the administrator of the &CVS; repository) gave you an account on the server machine. Alternatively, you can easily create a local repository for your own project. +In this section, we show how to use the basic version control system functionality using &cervisia; to checkout modules from the repository and work with them. To do that, you must have access to the repository as a client, meaning that someone (probably the administrator of the &CVS; repository) gave you an account on the server machine. Alternatively, you can easily create a local repository for your own project. -If you plan to develop a complex project, it is a good idea to use the &CVS; features, even if you are the only developer. You can make all changes in the working copy, and use &cervisia; (or any other &CVS; tool) to update and commit. This way, you will gain the ability to track changes that caused bugs, revert changes, avoid accidental loss of information &etc;. Using &cervisia;, it is simple to create a local repository. +If you plan to develop a complex project, it is a good idea to use the &CVS; features, even if you are the only developer. You can make all changes in the working copy, and use &cervisia; (or any other &CVS; tool) to update and commit. This way, you will gain the ability to track changes that caused bugs, revert changes, avoid accidental loss of information &etc;. Using &cervisia;, it is simple to create a local repository. -Creating a Local Repository - -Open the Create New Repository (cvs init) dialogue by choosing Repository Create.... - -Press the ... button to select the folder where you want to create the repository, or enter its location in the edit box. For instance, if you want to place the repository in the /home/user folder, and to name it cvsroot, you should type /home/user/cvsroot in the edit box, or select the /home/user folder using the file picker and add cvsroot. - -Confirm by pressing the OK button. &cervisia; will create and initialise the new repository folder. - -Now you can import your current work to the repository, or simply create a folder in the repository to start a new module from scratch. +Creating a Local Repository + +Open the Create New Repository (cvs init) dialogue by choosing Repository Create.... + +Press the ... button to select the folder where you want to create the repository, or enter its location in the edit box. For instance, if you want to place the repository in the /home/user folder, and to name it cvsroot, you should type /home/user/cvsroot in the edit box, or select the /home/user folder using the file picker and add cvsroot. + +Confirm by pressing the OK button. &cervisia; will create and initialise the new repository folder. + +Now you can import your current work to the repository, or simply create a folder in the repository to start a new module from scratch. -&cervisia; offers an integrated front-end to manage all your repository locations, the Configure Access to Repositories dialogue. To display it, select the Repository Repositories... menu item. +&cervisia; offers an integrated front-end to manage all your repository locations, the Configure Access to Repositories dialogue. To display it, select the Repository Repositories... menu item.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s Configure Access to Repositories dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s Configure Access to Repositories dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s Configure Access to Repositories dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s Configure Access to Repositories dialogue
-There are several methods to access a CVS repository. It may be reached via password authentication (:pserver:), secure shell (using :ext:), local repository (:local:) &etc;. The format for the repository location is (optional items appear between square brackets): +There are several methods to access a CVS repository. It may be reached via password authentication (:pserver:), secure shell (using :ext:), local repository (:local:) &etc;. The format for the repository location is (optional items appear between square brackets): -[:method:][[user][:password]@]hostname[:[port]]/path/to/repository +[:method:][[user][:password]@]hostname[:[port]]/path/to/repository -Not all these items (user, password, hostname, port) are always necessary to access the repository. The required information depends on the access method used, which can be categorised as follows: +Not all these items (user, password, hostname, port) are always necessary to access the repository. The required information depends on the access method used, which can be categorised as follows: -Local +Local -The local access method is the default method used by &CVS;. Therefore, it is optional to add the :local: method to the repository location: you can enter simply the path to the folder which stores the &CVS; repository, and is accessible from your computer, like /path/to/repository or to give a real life example, /home/cvs. - -It may physically be on a disk which is mounted via NFS, but this is an irrelevant detail. If you created a local repository, the location will be simple the path to it. +The local access method is the default method used by &CVS;. Therefore, it is optional to add the :local: method to the repository location: you can enter simply the path to the folder which stores the &CVS; repository, and is accessible from your computer, like /path/to/repository or to give a real life example, /home/cvs. + +It may physically be on a disk which is mounted via NFS, but this is an irrelevant detail. If you created a local repository, the location will be simple the path to it. -rsh +rsh -The repository location is something like :ext:username@host.url.org:/path/to/repository. - -This method requires that you have a user account on the server machine (in this example, host.url.org) and use a remote shell for communication. By default, &CVS; uses ↱ for this purpose; however, ↱ has long considered to be insecure, and is widely replaced by &ssh;. - -If you wish to use &ssh;, you must set the environment variable $CVS_RSH to &ssh; when using the cvs client. &cervisia; supports this easily. +The repository location is something like :ext:username@host.url.org:/path/to/repository. + +This method requires that you have a user account on the server machine (in this example, host.url.org) and use a remote shell for communication. By default, &CVS; uses ↱ for this purpose; however, ↱ has long considered to be insecure, and is widely replaced by &ssh;. + +If you wish to use &ssh;, you must set the environment variable $CVS_RSH to &ssh; when using the cvs client. &cervisia; supports this easily. -Note that &cervisia; cannot answer possible password requests from the server machine. You must make sure that a remote login works without requiring you to enter the password. With plain vanilla ↱, this can be achieved for example by creating a .rhosts file in your home folder with a list of trusted hosts (see the ↱ manpage). - -With &ssh;, it can be achieved by copying your public key located in the file identity.pub, located in the $HOME/.ssh/ folder to the server. In this case, the key must not be encrypted with a passphrase see the &ssh; manpage and the &CVS;/SSH FAQ on SourceForge). If you are unsure about these issues, ask your system administrator. +Note that &cervisia; cannot answer possible password requests from the server machine. You must make sure that a remote login works without requiring you to enter the password. With plain vanilla ↱, this can be achieved for example by creating a .rhosts file in your home folder with a list of trusted hosts (see the ↱ manpage). + +With &ssh;, it can be achieved by copying your public key located in the file identity.pub, located in the $HOME/.ssh/ folder to the server. In this case, the key must not be encrypted with a passphrase see the &ssh; manpage and the &CVS;/SSH FAQ on SourceForge). If you are unsure about these issues, ask your system administrator. -pserver +pserver -The repository location looks like :pserver:username@host.url.org:/path/to/repository +The repository location looks like :pserver:username@host.url.org:/path/to/repository -This method accesses the server via a special protocol with a relatively weak authentication (pserver stands for password authentication). Before you can use such a server, you need a username and password given by the &CVS; server administrator, and you have to login. Note that your &CVS; password authentication username does not necessarily match the system's username. Before accessing the &CVS; server, you will need to login. +This method accesses the server via a special protocol with a relatively weak authentication (pserver stands for password authentication). Before you can use such a server, you need a username and password given by the &CVS; server administrator, and you have to login. Note that your &CVS; password authentication username does not necessarily match the system's username. Before accessing the &CVS; server, you will need to login. -Open-source projects typically offer Anonymous CVS access to their sources. This means you can easily grab the latest sources, modify, and create patches (differences) against the repository without asking for a CVS account. As a general rule, Anonymous CVS uses password authentication (:pserver:), and is a read-only repository, not allowing you to upload your changes directly. +Open-source projects typically offer Anonymous CVS access to their sources. This means you can easily grab the latest sources, modify, and create patches (differences) against the repository without asking for a CVS account. As a general rule, Anonymous CVS uses password authentication (:pserver:), and is a read-only repository, not allowing you to upload your changes directly. -Knowing the access method and location to the repository, you can add it to &cervisia;'s repositories list: +Knowing the access method and location to the repository, you can add it to &cervisia;'s repositories list: -Adding a New Repository - -Open the Configure Access to Repositories dialogue by choosing the Repository Repositories... menu item. - -Press the Add... button to open the Add Repository dialogue. - -Enter the repository location in the Repository: edit box. &cervisia; will automatically disable the areas of the dialogue that are not relevant to the access method you entered. - -If you are using the ext method to access the repository, enter the remote shell you wish to use (⪚ &ssh;) in the Use remote shell edit box. - -Press OK. You will see the repository you just entered on the repositories list. - -If the access method to the repository you just entered is password authentication (pserver), you will need to login before connecting the server. Click the repository on the list to select it, and press the Login... button. Enter your password in the pop-up dialogue. -If you successfully enter your password, the Status column entry of the pserver repository will change from Not logged in to Logged in. - -Press OK to apply your modifications, or add another location to the list. &cervisia; will store as many locations as you like. +Adding a New Repository + +Open the Configure Access to Repositories dialogue by choosing the Repository Repositories... menu item. + +Press the Add... button to open the Add Repository dialogue. + +Enter the repository location in the Repository: edit box. &cervisia; will automatically disable the areas of the dialogue that are not relevant to the access method you entered. + +If you are using the ext method to access the repository, enter the remote shell you wish to use (⪚ &ssh;) in the Use remote shell edit box. + +Press OK. You will see the repository you just entered on the repositories list. + +If the access method to the repository you just entered is password authentication (pserver), you will need to login before connecting the server. Click the repository on the list to select it, and press the Login... button. Enter your password in the pop-up dialogue. +If you successfully enter your password, the Status column entry of the pserver repository will change from Not logged in to Logged in. + +Press OK to apply your modifications, or add another location to the list. &cervisia; will store as many locations as you like. @@ -421,376 +193,150 @@ -Importing a Module Into the Repository +Importing a Module Into the Repository -In this section, we discuss how you can put a new project into the &CVS; repository. If you just want to work with an existing project which is already in a repository, you may skip this section. +In this section, we discuss how you can put a new project into the &CVS; repository. If you just want to work with an existing project which is already in a repository, you may skip this section. -There are two ways to put a project into the &CVS;: +There are two ways to put a project into the &CVS;: -Import the files and folders to a new module, using &cervisia;'s import dialogue. Modules are the top folders in the &CVS; repository folder tree, and are used to separate and organise the different software projects inside the repository. +Import the files and folders to a new module, using &cervisia;'s import dialogue. Modules are the top folders in the &CVS; repository folder tree, and are used to separate and organise the different software projects inside the repository. -Create an empty module and add the new files and folders manually. You will have more control, but it will probably take a little more time. +Create an empty module and add the new files and folders manually. You will have more control, but it will probably take a little more time. -Keep in mind that &CVS; was initially designed to handle text files. Many features, like revision merging, creating differences in a readable form &etc; are only performed to text files. This does not mean you cannot use CVS to keep binary files, it just means you have to explicitly tell CVS if it is a text or binary file. If you declare the wrong file type, you will experience problems with the &CVS; functionality for these files, and they may get corrupted. +Keep in mind that &CVS; was initially designed to handle text files. Many features, like revision merging, creating differences in a readable form &etc; are only performed to text files. This does not mean you cannot use CVS to keep binary files, it just means you have to explicitly tell CVS if it is a text or binary file. If you declare the wrong file type, you will experience problems with the &CVS; functionality for these files, and they may get corrupted. -Importing a project (as a new module) has some advantages: you will import all files and folders recursively, and the module will automatically be created for you. This makes importing large existing projects to the repository easier. However, there are some disadvantages: you cannot use &cervisia;'s import dialogue to add files to existing modules, and you can either import the files as text or binary files. You can work around this limitation by creating a folder with files of only one of the types, or by informing the patterns of the files that should be ignored during the import process. +Importing a project (as a new module) has some advantages: you will import all files and folders recursively, and the module will automatically be created for you. This makes importing large existing projects to the repository easier. However, there are some disadvantages: you cannot use &cervisia;'s import dialogue to add files to existing modules, and you can either import the files as text or binary files. You can work around this limitation by creating a folder with files of only one of the types, or by informing the patterns of the files that should be ignored during the import process. -For instance, suppose your project contains text files and some PNG images (binary files) only. You can tell &CVS; to ignore all files with the pattern *.png while importing the other files as text, or you can move the images to a separate folder, and then import the remaining files (as text files). Either way, you will have to checkout the newly imported module to a new working copy, copy the the missing files and folders to it, add and commit them to the repository to complete the import process. +For instance, suppose your project contains text files and some PNG images (binary files) only. You can tell &CVS; to ignore all files with the pattern *.png while importing the other files as text, or you can move the images to a separate folder, and then import the remaining files (as text files). Either way, you will have to checkout the newly imported module to a new working copy, copy the the missing files and folders to it, add and commit them to the repository to complete the import process. -As an alternative, you can add the files and folders manually, creating an empty module for them. To add an empty module to a repository, just create a new folder in the &CVS; repository root folder. The name of this new folder will be the name of the module. Checkout the new empty module. Then copy the the files and folders to the working copy, add and commit to upload them to the &CVS; repository. +As an alternative, you can add the files and folders manually, creating an empty module for them. To add an empty module to a repository, just create a new folder in the &CVS; repository root folder. The name of this new folder will be the name of the module. Checkout the new empty module. Then copy the the files and folders to the working copy, add and commit to upload them to the &CVS; repository.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s import dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s import dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s import dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s import dialogue
-In you can see the dialogue which helps you to import a project as a module. To access &cervisia;'s import dialogue, choose the Repository Import... menu item. +In you can see the dialogue which helps you to import a project as a module. To access &cervisia;'s import dialogue, choose the Repository Import... menu item. -Repository: -Enter or select on the dropdown list the name of the &CVS; repository, also known as $CVSROOT. You must have write access to it, and the repository must be properly initialised. If the repository does not yet exist, you can create one choosing the Repository Create... menu item. -The drop down box shows a list of the repositories you previously entered using the Configure Access to Repositories dialogue box. If the repository is remote, make sure that authentication works. See for more information. +Repository: +Enter or select on the dropdown list the name of the &CVS; repository, also known as $CVSROOT. You must have write access to it, and the repository must be properly initialised. If the repository does not yet exist, you can create one choosing the Repository Create... menu item. +The drop down box shows a list of the repositories you previously entered using the Configure Access to Repositories dialogue box. If the repository is remote, make sure that authentication works. See for more information. -Module: -The name of the module under which the project will be stored. After the import, the project can be checked out under this name. See for more information. This is also the name of the corresponding folder in the repository. +Module: +The name of the module under which the project will be stored. After the import, the project can be checked out under this name. See for more information. This is also the name of the corresponding folder in the repository. -Working Folder: -The toplevel folder of the project you want to import. The import starts from this folder and goes down recursively. +Working Folder: +The toplevel folder of the project you want to import. The import starts from this folder and goes down recursively. -Vendor tag: -The vendor tag is historically used for tracking third-party sources. Just use your user name if you have no better idea. It does not matter much what you enter here. +Vendor tag: +The vendor tag is historically used for tracking third-party sources. Just use your user name if you have no better idea. It does not matter much what you enter here. -Release tag: -This tag is also historically used for importing different versions of third-party software. If you are not doing this, use the word start or a string FOO_1_0 where FOO is the name of your project and 1.0 is the version number of the imported release. +Release tag: +This tag is also historically used for importing different versions of third-party software. If you are not doing this, use the word start or a string FOO_1_0 where FOO is the name of your project and 1.0 is the version number of the imported release. -Ignore files: -If you fill out this field, an additional option is given go the cvs import command. This entry is interpreted as a whitespace-separated list of file name patterns which are ignored. In general, a cleaner and less error-prone way to control which files go into the repository is to create a folder with only the files which you want to import and start from that. Nevertheless, this entry may be useful if the project contains files which are by default ignored by &CVS;, ⪚ files with the name core. In such a case, simply enter the character ! in this field: this overrules &CVS;'s scheme of ignored files, see . +Ignore files: +If you fill out this field, an additional option is given go the cvs import command. This entry is interpreted as a whitespace-separated list of file name patterns which are ignored. In general, a cleaner and less error-prone way to control which files go into the repository is to create a folder with only the files which you want to import and start from that. Nevertheless, this entry may be useful if the project contains files which are by default ignored by &CVS;, ⪚ files with the name core. In such a case, simply enter the character ! in this field: this overrules &CVS;'s scheme of ignored files, see . -Comment: -Use this field to record the comments you might have about the origin, use, development &etc; of the files you are importing. +Comment: +Use this field to record the comments you might have about the origin, use, development &etc; of the files you are importing. -Import as binaries -If you check this box, all files are imported in binary mode, i.e. an argument is given to cvs import. +Import as binaries +If you check this box, all files are imported in binary mode, i.e. an argument is given to cvs import. -Use file's modification as time of import -If you check this box, the time of import will be the file's modification time instead of the import time. +Use file's modification as time of import +If you check this box, the time of import will be the file's modification time instead of the import time. -After you have filled out this form and confirmed by pressing OK, the following &CVS; command is used: - -cvs -d repository import -m "" module vendortag releasetag +After you have filled out this form and confirmed by pressing OK, the following &CVS; command is used: + +cvs -d repository import -m "" module vendortag releasetag -Checkout a Module From the Repository -Now that you successfully defined your repository location, and imported the initial files to the repository, it is time to retrieve the module from the &CVS; repository, creating your working copy. +Checkout a Module From the Repository +Now that you successfully defined your repository location, and imported the initial files to the repository, it is time to retrieve the module from the &CVS; repository, creating your working copy. -You should also know the name of the branch or tag you want to use. +You should also know the name of the branch or tag you want to use. -Branches of a module are parallel versions of this module. A good real-life example of the use of this feature is the release of a software project. After a major release, there are bugs in the code that should be fixed, but people want to add new features to the application too. It is very hard to do both at the same time because new features usually introduce new bugs, making it hard to track down the old ones. To solve this dilemma, &CVS; lets you create a parallel version, that we will call the "stable release branch", where you can only add bugfixes, leaving the main branch (HEAD) open for adding new features. +Branches of a module are parallel versions of this module. A good real-life example of the use of this feature is the release of a software project. After a major release, there are bugs in the code that should be fixed, but people want to add new features to the application too. It is very hard to do both at the same time because new features usually introduce new bugs, making it hard to track down the old ones. To solve this dilemma, &CVS; lets you create a parallel version, that we will call the "stable release branch", where you can only add bugfixes, leaving the main branch (HEAD) open for adding new features. -Tags are used to mark a version of a project. &CVS; stamps one version of each file with the tag, so when you checkout or update to a specific tag, you will get always the same file versions. Therefore, in opposition to branches, tags are not dynamic: you cannot develop a tag. Tags are useful to mark releases, big changes in the code &etc;. Using tags, you can easily return the project to a previous state, to reproduce and track bugs, generate the release code again &etc;. +Tags are used to mark a version of a project. &CVS; stamps one version of each file with the tag, so when you checkout or update to a specific tag, you will get always the same file versions. Therefore, in opposition to branches, tags are not dynamic: you cannot develop a tag. Tags are useful to mark releases, big changes in the code &etc;. Using tags, you can easily return the project to a previous state, to reproduce and track bugs, generate the release code again &etc;.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s checkout dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s checkout dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s checkout dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s checkout dialogue
-Repository: -The name of the &CVS; repository, also known as $CVSROOT. The drop-down box shows a list of the repositories you previously entered using the Configure Access to Repositories dialogue box. If the repository is remote, make sure that authentication works. See for more information. +Repository: +The name of the &CVS; repository, also known as $CVSROOT. The drop-down box shows a list of the repositories you previously entered using the Configure Access to Repositories dialogue box. If the repository is remote, make sure that authentication works. See for more information. -Module: -The name of the module to be checked out. If you are working with an existing repository, you can probably get this name from the system administrator; or, if it is an open-source repository, you can get the module names from the project web pages. If you want to create a new module from scratch using a local repository, just create a new folder in the local repository root folder. The name of the folder will be the same as the name of the empty module. -Alternatively, if the repository has a $CVSROOT/modules file, you can retrieve a list of available modules by pressing the Fetch list button. -Note that it is possible to checkout any existing subfolder of the module, without retrieving the rest of the module. Just enter the path to the subfolder as well. For instance, if you want to get only the doc/cervisia subfolder of the tdesdk module, enter tdesdk/doc/cervisia in this field. +Module: +The name of the module to be checked out. If you are working with an existing repository, you can probably get this name from the system administrator; or, if it is an open-source repository, you can get the module names from the project web pages. If you want to create a new module from scratch using a local repository, just create a new folder in the local repository root folder. The name of the folder will be the same as the name of the empty module. +Alternatively, if the repository has a $CVSROOT/modules file, you can retrieve a list of available modules by pressing the Fetch list button. +Note that it is possible to checkout any existing subfolder of the module, without retrieving the rest of the module. Just enter the path to the subfolder as well. For instance, if you want to get only the doc/cervisia subfolder of the tdesdk module, enter tdesdk/doc/cervisia in this field. -Branch tag: -The name of the branch or tag you want to check out. If you leave this field empty, &cervisia; will retrieve the main (HEAD) branch. +Branch tag: +The name of the branch or tag you want to check out. If you leave this field empty, &cervisia; will retrieve the main (HEAD) branch. -Working folder: -The folder under which the module should be checked out. Note that the the working copy toplevel folder is named after the module you are retrieving, unless you give it an alternative name in the Check out as: field. +Working folder: +The folder under which the module should be checked out. Note that the the working copy toplevel folder is named after the module you are retrieving, unless you give it an alternative name in the Check out as: field. -Check out as: -This results in the working copy files being checked out to an alternative folder under the working folder rather than a folder named after the module. +Check out as: +This results in the working copy files being checked out to an alternative folder under the working folder rather than a folder named after the module. -Export only -If you check this box, the files will be exported rather than checked out. Exporting obtains a copy of the source for the module without the CVS administrative folders. For example, export may be used to prepare the source code for a release. +Export only +If you check this box, the files will be exported rather than checked out. Exporting obtains a copy of the source for the module without the CVS administrative folders. For example, export may be used to prepare the source code for a release. @@ -799,242 +345,96 @@ -The Main Screen, Viewing File Status and Updating -When you start &cervisia;, and open a working copy by choosing File Open Sandbox... , you can see two main areas in &cervisia;'s main window: the top one is a hierarchical (tree) view of the current working copy; the bottom area is used to display the &CVS; commands &cervisia; issues to perform its tasks, as well as the output generated by these commands. - -By default, &cervisia; does not display the files contained by the sub-folders, so you will have to click the folders you want to see. To display all files of the working copy, select View Unfold File Tree . To close back all folders from the working copy, choose View Fold File Tree . - -According to the settings in your .cvsignore files, the files you usually do not want to include into the repository - such as object files - are not shown in the tree view. For each file, you see its corresponding status. In the default setting, after opening the sandbox, this is "Unknown" because &cervisia; delays the fetching of information until you select the files and folders whose status you want to update or view and choose File Update or File Status . With this approach, you have a minimal amount of functionality available even if you do not have a permanent connection to the &CVS; server. +The Main Screen, Viewing File Status and Updating +When you start &cervisia;, and open a working copy by choosing File Open Sandbox... , you can see two main areas in &cervisia;'s main window: the top one is a hierarchical (tree) view of the current working copy; the bottom area is used to display the &CVS; commands &cervisia; issues to perform its tasks, as well as the output generated by these commands. + +By default, &cervisia; does not display the files contained by the sub-folders, so you will have to click the folders you want to see. To display all files of the working copy, select View Unfold File Tree . To close back all folders from the working copy, choose View Fold File Tree . + +According to the settings in your .cvsignore files, the files you usually do not want to include into the repository - such as object files - are not shown in the tree view. For each file, you see its corresponding status. In the default setting, after opening the sandbox, this is "Unknown" because &cervisia; delays the fetching of information until you select the files and folders whose status you want to update or view and choose File Update or File Status . With this approach, you have a minimal amount of functionality available even if you do not have a permanent connection to the &CVS; server.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s main view +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s main view - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s main view + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s main view
-The commands in the File menu usually act only on the files which you have marked. You may also mark folders. Now choose Status from the File menu, press F5 or right click the marked files and choose the Status menu item from the pop-up menu. &cervisia; issues a +The commands in the File menu usually act only on the files which you have marked. You may also mark folders. Now choose Status from the File menu, press F5 or right click the marked files and choose the Status menu item from the pop-up menu. &cervisia; issues a -cvs update -n file names +cvs update -n file names -command to get status information for the marked files. Note that &cervisia; goes recursively into subfolders only if you have the according option in the Settings menu set. According to the respective file's status, you now see an entry in the Status column: +command to get status information for the marked files. Note that &cervisia; goes recursively into subfolders only if you have the according option in the Settings menu set. According to the respective file's status, you now see an entry in the Status column: -Locally Modified -This means you have modified the file compared to the version in the repository. +Locally Modified +This means you have modified the file compared to the version in the repository. -Locally Added -This means the file does not exist in the repository, but in your working copy and you have scheduled it for addition. The actual insertion into the repository only happens after a commit. +Locally Added +This means the file does not exist in the repository, but in your working copy and you have scheduled it for addition. The actual insertion into the repository only happens after a commit. -Locally Removed -This means you have scheduled the file for removal, but it still exists in the repository. The actual removal happens only after a commit. +Locally Removed +This means you have scheduled the file for removal, but it still exists in the repository. The actual removal happens only after a commit. -Needs Update -This is shown if a newer version of the file exists in the repository, e.g. because someone committed a modification. Normally, you want to update this file so you have an up-to-date version in your folder. +Needs Update +This is shown if a newer version of the file exists in the repository, e.g. because someone committed a modification. Normally, you want to update this file so you have an up-to-date version in your folder. -Needs Patch -This is essentially the same as before; the difference is that in case of an update, the &CVS; server transfers only a patch instead of the whole file to you. +Needs Patch +This is essentially the same as before; the difference is that in case of an update, the &CVS; server transfers only a patch instead of the whole file to you. -Needs Merge -Indicates that a merge of the revision of this file in your working copy with the version in the repository is necessary. This typically happens if you have made modifications to the file while someone else has committed his modifications. If you choose to update, the modifications in the repository are merged into your file. In case of a conflict (i.e. if someone else has changed some of the same lines like you) the new status is then "Conflict". +Needs Merge +Indicates that a merge of the revision of this file in your working copy with the version in the repository is necessary. This typically happens if you have made modifications to the file while someone else has committed his modifications. If you choose to update, the modifications in the repository are merged into your file. In case of a conflict (i.e. if someone else has changed some of the same lines like you) the new status is then "Conflict". -Up to Date -Indicates that the file is identical with the version in the repository. +Up to Date +Indicates that the file is identical with the version in the repository. -Conflict -This is shown if this file still has conflict markers in it. Maybe you have previously updated the file and not resolved the conflicts. +Conflict +This is shown if this file still has conflict markers in it. Maybe you have previously updated the file and not resolved the conflicts. -Not In CVS -Indicates that the file is not registered in the &CVS; repository. If you want it to available for others, you should add it to the repository. If not, you may consider adding it to your .cvsignore file. +Not In CVS +Indicates that the file is not registered in the &CVS; repository. If you want it to available for others, you should add it to the repository. If not, you may consider adding it to your .cvsignore file. -Now that you have got an overview of the current status of the CVS, you may want to do an update. Mark some files (or the root of the folder tree which is equivalent to marking all files in this folder). Now choose Update from the File menu, or right-click the marked files and choose the Status menu item from the pop-up menu. (Of course, you could have chosen this at the beginning of the session). For some of the files the status may change now. Typically, files which had "Needs Patch" or "Needs Update" are updated. So the following new items are possible in the status column: +Now that you have got an overview of the current status of the CVS, you may want to do an update. Mark some files (or the root of the folder tree which is equivalent to marking all files in this folder). Now choose Update from the File menu, or right-click the marked files and choose the Status menu item from the pop-up menu. (Of course, you could have chosen this at the beginning of the session). For some of the files the status may change now. Typically, files which had "Needs Patch" or "Needs Update" are updated. So the following new items are possible in the status column: -Updated -Shown if the file was updated from the repository. +Updated +Shown if the file was updated from the repository. -Patched -Indicates that the &CVS; server has sent a patch for this file and the patch has been successfully applied. If the patch was not successful because there was a conflict between your modifications and those someone else committed to the repository, the status is now Conflict. +Patched +Indicates that the &CVS; server has sent a patch for this file and the patch has been successfully applied. If the patch was not successful because there was a conflict between your modifications and those someone else committed to the repository, the status is now Conflict. -You may have noticed that according to the status of the file, its row has a different colour. The colours are chosen to somehow reflect the priority of the status. For example, a file with a conflict is marked red to show you that you have to resolve a conflict before you can continue working with the file. If your folder contains a high number of files, you may nevertheless lose the overview. To get more concise information about which files have an unusual status, simply click on the header of the Status column. The file list is then sorted by priority, so you have all important information at the top of the list. To get back to the alphabetically sorted view, click on the header of the File name column. +You may have noticed that according to the status of the file, its row has a different colour. The colours are chosen to somehow reflect the priority of the status. For example, a file with a conflict is marked red to show you that you have to resolve a conflict before you can continue working with the file. If your folder contains a high number of files, you may nevertheless lose the overview. To get more concise information about which files have an unusual status, simply click on the header of the Status column. The file list is then sorted by priority, so you have all important information at the top of the list. To get back to the alphabetically sorted view, click on the header of the File name column. @@ -1042,404 +442,156 @@ -Working With Files - -All commonly used &CVS; functionality is directly available in &cervisia;'s main view. Commands usually act on several files at once, namely all which currently selected. If the selection includes folders, its interpretation depends on the settings made under the Settings menu. For example, if SettingsCommit and Remove Recursively is checked and you choose FileCommit... while a folder is selected, then all files in the tree under that folder are committed. Otherwise, only the regular files in the folder itself are affected. +Working With Files + +All commonly used &CVS; functionality is directly available in &cervisia;'s main view. Commands usually act on several files at once, namely all which currently selected. If the selection includes folders, its interpretation depends on the settings made under the Settings menu. For example, if SettingsCommit and Remove Recursively is checked and you choose FileCommit... while a folder is selected, then all files in the tree under that folder are committed. Otherwise, only the regular files in the folder itself are affected.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s pop-up menu +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s pop-up menu - +
-The most used actions are also available by right-clicking the files in the tree view, through the pop-up menu. shows &cervisia;'s main window pop-up menu. +The most used actions are also available by right-clicking the files in the tree view, through the pop-up menu. shows &cervisia;'s main window pop-up menu. -You can simply edit a file by double-clicking on it or selecting it and pressing Return. This starts the default application that handles that file type (the default application for each file type is a KDE wide setting). If the default application is not the one you want to use, you can right click the file and choose the Edit With submenu, and select one of the other applications that handle that file type. +You can simply edit a file by double-clicking on it or selecting it and pressing Return. This starts the default application that handles that file type (the default application for each file type is a KDE wide setting). If the default application is not the one you want to use, you can right click the file and choose the Edit With submenu, and select one of the other applications that handle that file type. -Adding Files - -Adding files to a project requires two steps: first, the files must be registered with &CVS;, or in other words, added to the repository. This is necessary, but not sufficient. In order to actually put the files into the repository, you must commit them. This procedure has an important advantage: you can commit the files together with modifications to other parts of the project. When doing this, one can easily see (⪚ in commit emails) that all these changes are part of a whole. - -To this end, mark all files to be added in &cervisia;'s main view. Then, choose FileAdd to Repository..., or right click the marked files and choose Add to Repository.... The CVS Add dialogue will appear, listing the files you marked, and asks for confirmation. Press OK. - -&cervisia; issues a command +Adding Files + +Adding files to a project requires two steps: first, the files must be registered with &CVS;, or in other words, added to the repository. This is necessary, but not sufficient. In order to actually put the files into the repository, you must commit them. This procedure has an important advantage: you can commit the files together with modifications to other parts of the project. When doing this, one can easily see (⪚ in commit emails) that all these changes are part of a whole. + +To this end, mark all files to be added in &cervisia;'s main view. Then, choose FileAdd to Repository..., or right click the marked files and choose Add to Repository.... The CVS Add dialogue will appear, listing the files you marked, and asks for confirmation. Press OK. + +&cervisia; issues a command -cvs add file names +cvs add file names -If the operation was successful, the status column should have "Added to repository" for the added files. - -&CVS; is not designed to provide meaningful revision control for binary files. For example, merging binary files normally does not make sense. Furthermore, by default &CVS; performs keyword expansion (⪚ on the string $Revision: 1.6 $) when a file is committed. In binary files, such replacements may corrupt the file and make it completely unusable. - -In order to switch the above behaviour off, you should commit binary files (or other files, like Postscript or PNG images) by choosing FileAdd Binary.... The CVS Add dialogue will appear, listing the binary files you marked, and asks for confirmation. Press OK. - -&cervisia; issues a command +If the operation was successful, the status column should have "Added to repository" for the added files. + +&CVS; is not designed to provide meaningful revision control for binary files. For example, merging binary files normally does not make sense. Furthermore, by default &CVS; performs keyword expansion (⪚ on the string $Revision: 1.6 $) when a file is committed. In binary files, such replacements may corrupt the file and make it completely unusable. + +In order to switch the above behaviour off, you should commit binary files (or other files, like Postscript or PNG images) by choosing FileAdd Binary.... The CVS Add dialogue will appear, listing the binary files you marked, and asks for confirmation. Press OK. + +&cervisia; issues a command -cvs add -kb file names +cvs add -kb file names -Removing Files - -Like adding files, removing files is done in two steps: First, the files have to be registered as removed by choosing FileRemove From Repository... or right clicking the marked files and choosing Remove From Repository... from the pop-up menu. The CVS Remove dialogue will appear, listing the files you marked, and asking for confirmation. Press OK. &cervisia; issues the command +Removing Files + +Like adding files, removing files is done in two steps: First, the files have to be registered as removed by choosing FileRemove From Repository... or right clicking the marked files and choosing Remove From Repository... from the pop-up menu. The CVS Remove dialogue will appear, listing the files you marked, and asking for confirmation. Press OK. &cervisia; issues the command -cvs remove -f file names +cvs remove -f file names -After that, this modification to the sandbox has to be committed, possibly together with other modifications to the project. +After that, this modification to the sandbox has to be committed, possibly together with other modifications to the project. -The above command only works if the file is up-to-date. Otherwise, you get an error message. This behaviour is sensible: If you have modified the file compared to the version in the repository, or if someone else has made any modifications, you will first want to check if you really want to discard them. +The above command only works if the file is up-to-date. Otherwise, you get an error message. This behaviour is sensible: If you have modified the file compared to the version in the repository, or if someone else has made any modifications, you will first want to check if you really want to discard them. -Adding and Removing Folders - -Folders are handled fundamentally different from ordinary files by &CVS;. They are not under revision control, i.e. you cannot tell which folders existed in the project at a certain time. Furthermore, folders can never be explicitly removed (expect by removing them directly in the repository). - -As a substitute, &CVS; follows the convention that a folder is "non-existent" in a version of the project if it is empty. This convention can be enforced by using the option to cvs update and cvs checkout. This option can be set in the menu SettingsPrune Empty Folders on Update. - -A folder can be added to the repository choosing FileAdd to Repository... or right clicking the marked folder and choosing Add to Repository... from the pop-up menu. Note that in contrast to adding files, adding folders does not require a commit afterwards. &cervisia; issues the command +Adding and Removing Folders + +Folders are handled fundamentally different from ordinary files by &CVS;. They are not under revision control, i.e. you cannot tell which folders existed in the project at a certain time. Furthermore, folders can never be explicitly removed (expect by removing them directly in the repository). + +As a substitute, &CVS; follows the convention that a folder is "non-existent" in a version of the project if it is empty. This convention can be enforced by using the option to cvs update and cvs checkout. This option can be set in the menu SettingsPrune Empty Folders on Update. + +A folder can be added to the repository choosing FileAdd to Repository... or right clicking the marked folder and choosing Add to Repository... from the pop-up menu. Note that in contrast to adding files, adding folders does not require a commit afterwards. &cervisia; issues the command -cvs add dirname +cvs add dirname -Committing Files - -When you have made a certain number of changes to your working copy, and you want other developers to have access to them, you commit them. With a commit, you place your versions of the modified files as new revisions into the repository. A subsequent update by another developer will bring your modifications into their working copy. - -In order to commit a couple of files, select them in &cervisia;'s main view and choose FileCommit... or right click the marked files and choose Commit... from the pop-up menu. +Committing Files + +When you have made a certain number of changes to your working copy, and you want other developers to have access to them, you commit them. With a commit, you place your versions of the modified files as new revisions into the repository. A subsequent update by another developer will bring your modifications into their working copy. + +In order to commit a couple of files, select them in &cervisia;'s main view and choose FileCommit... or right click the marked files and choose Commit... from the pop-up menu.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s commit dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s commit dialogue - +
-You get a dialogue that shows you a list of the selected files on the top section and a log message for your changes below. &cervisia; helps you in several ways to find a meaningful log message: first, in the file list you can double-click a file or press Return in order to see the changes you have made to the file. Second, it gives you a list of log messages you have previously used in a combo box. Third, this dialogue is integrated with &cervisia;'s changelog editor described below. When you have finished the dialogue, the command +You get a dialogue that shows you a list of the selected files on the top section and a log message for your changes below. &cervisia; helps you in several ways to find a meaningful log message: first, in the file list you can double-click a file or press Return in order to see the changes you have made to the file. Second, it gives you a list of log messages you have previously used in a combo box. Third, this dialogue is integrated with &cervisia;'s changelog editor described below. When you have finished the dialogue, the command -cvs commit -m message file names +cvs commit -m message file names -is used. +is used. -A common error you may encounter when committing is Up-to-date check failed. This indicates that someone has committed changes to the repository since you last updated; or, more technically, that your BASE revision is not the newest on its branch. In such a case, &CVS; refuses to merge your modifications into the repository. The solution is to update, resolve any conflicts and commit again. Of course, if you are working on a software project, it is normally good style to check if the program still works after you have updated - after all, there could be bad interactions between your modifications and the other modifications which break the code. +A common error you may encounter when committing is Up-to-date check failed. This indicates that someone has committed changes to the repository since you last updated; or, more technically, that your BASE revision is not the newest on its branch. In such a case, &CVS; refuses to merge your modifications into the repository. The solution is to update, resolve any conflicts and commit again. Of course, if you are working on a software project, it is normally good style to check if the program still works after you have updated - after all, there could be bad interactions between your modifications and the other modifications which break the code. -Another popular mistake results in the error message Sticky tag 'X' for file 'X' is not a branch. This happens if you try to commit a file which you have previously brought to a certain revision or tag with the command +Another popular mistake results in the error message Sticky tag 'X' for file 'X' is not a branch. This happens if you try to commit a file which you have previously brought to a certain revision or tag with the command -%cvs update -r X +%cvs update -r X -(which is ⪚ used by the menu item AdvancedUpdate to Tag/Date...). In such a case, the tag on the file gets sticky, i.e. further updates do not bring you to the newest revision on the branch. If you want to commit further revisions to the branch, you have to update to the branch tag before you do further commits. +(which is ⪚ used by the menu item AdvancedUpdate to Tag/Date...). In such a case, the tag on the file gets sticky, i.e. further updates do not bring you to the newest revision on the branch. If you want to commit further revisions to the branch, you have to update to the branch tag before you do further commits. -With &cervisia;, it is quite easy to maintain a ChangeLog file that is compliant with the format laid out in the GNU coding guidelines. To use it, choose FileInsert ChangeLog Entry.... If a file with the name ChangeLog exists in the toplevel folder of your sandbox, this file will be loaded and you have the possibility to edit it. To this end, at the top of the file, an entry with the current date and your user name (which can be configured as described in ) is inserted. When you finish the dialogue this dialogue by clicking OK, the next commit dialogue you open will have the log message set to the message you last entered in the ChangeLog. +With &cervisia;, it is quite easy to maintain a ChangeLog file that is compliant with the format laid out in the GNU coding guidelines. To use it, choose FileInsert ChangeLog Entry.... If a file with the name ChangeLog exists in the toplevel folder of your sandbox, this file will be loaded and you have the possibility to edit it. To this end, at the top of the file, an entry with the current date and your user name (which can be configured as described in ) is inserted. When you finish the dialogue this dialogue by clicking OK, the next commit dialogue you open will have the log message set to the message you last entered in the ChangeLog. -Resolving Conflicts +Resolving Conflicts -Conflicts may occur whenever you have made changes to a file which was also modified by another developer. The conflict is detected by &CVS; when you update the modified file; &CVS; then tries to merge the modifications committed by the other developer into your working copy. The merge fails if both your and his modifications are in overlapping parts of the file, and the &CVS; server issues an error message. +Conflicts may occur whenever you have made changes to a file which was also modified by another developer. The conflict is detected by &CVS; when you update the modified file; &CVS; then tries to merge the modifications committed by the other developer into your working copy. The merge fails if both your and his modifications are in overlapping parts of the file, and the &CVS; server issues an error message. -In &cervisia;'s main view, files with conflicts are indicated with "Conflict" in the status column and with a red colour. It is your job now to resolve these conflicts before you commit the file. &CVS; will refuse to commit any files with conflicts until they have been edited. From the main view, you can of course resolve conflicts the traditional way: just double-click the file in question and edit it with your favourite editor. +In &cervisia;'s main view, files with conflicts are indicated with "Conflict" in the status column and with a red colour. It is your job now to resolve these conflicts before you commit the file. &CVS; will refuse to commit any files with conflicts until they have been edited. From the main view, you can of course resolve conflicts the traditional way: just double-click the file in question and edit it with your favourite editor. -&CVS; marks the conflicting changes by placing marks in the middle of the files, in the following manner: +&CVS; marks the conflicting changes by placing marks in the middle of the files, in the following manner: -<<<<<<< +<<<<<<< Changes in your working copy ======= Changes in the repository >>>>>>> revision_number -You should replace this whole block with the new merged version. Of course, you have a great amount of freedom when resolving a set of conflicts: you can for each conflict decide to take one of the two alternative versions. You can also decide that both approaches are are broken and rewrite a whole routine or the complete file from scratch. - -Fortunately, &cervisia; offers a nicer interface for handling these conflicts. This does not mean that you will never need to manually edit the files, but at least can eliminate the need to do so for the trivial conflict resolution. To use &cervisia;'s CVS Resolve dialogue choose FileResolve... or right click the marked file and choose Resolve... from the pop-up menu. +You should replace this whole block with the new merged version. Of course, you have a great amount of freedom when resolving a set of conflicts: you can for each conflict decide to take one of the two alternative versions. You can also decide that both approaches are are broken and rewrite a whole routine or the complete file from scratch. + +Fortunately, &cervisia; offers a nicer interface for handling these conflicts. This does not mean that you will never need to manually edit the files, but at least can eliminate the need to do so for the trivial conflict resolution. To use &cervisia;'s CVS Resolve dialogue choose FileResolve... or right click the marked file and choose Resolve... from the pop-up menu.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s resolve dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s resolve dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s resolve dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s resolve dialogue
-On the top of the dialogue, you see Your version (A) of the file on the left hand side and the version in the repository, Other version (B), on the right hand side. The differences between them are marked in red colour. Below these two versions, you can see the Merged version. The merged version reflects what that section will be in your working copy if you press the Save button. - -You can go back and forward between the conflicting sections by pressing << and >>. In the lower middle of the dialogue you can see which section is currently marked. For example, 2 of 3 means that you are currently at the second differing section of 3 total. - -Now can can decide section by section which version you want to have in the merged file. By pressing A, you take over the version you edited. By pressing B, you take over the version from the repository. By pressing A+B, both versions will be added, and your version will come first. B+A yields the same result, but the order will be different: first the repository version, then yours. - -If you are not happy with any of these versions, press Edit to open a simple text editor where you can edit the section. When you are finished editing, press OK to return to the CVS Resolve dialogue and resume solving conflicts. You will see the section you just edited in the Merged version, with your modifications. - -To save your modifications, overwriting the working copy version, press Save. Note that this will save the choices not only the section you are currently viewing, but all sections in the file. If you want to save it to another file, press Save As.... Press Close to exit the dialogue. If you close the dialogue without saving, the changes you made will be lost. +On the top of the dialogue, you see Your version (A) of the file on the left hand side and the version in the repository, Other version (B), on the right hand side. The differences between them are marked in red colour. Below these two versions, you can see the Merged version. The merged version reflects what that section will be in your working copy if you press the Save button. + +You can go back and forward between the conflicting sections by pressing << and >>. In the lower middle of the dialogue you can see which section is currently marked. For example, 2 of 3 means that you are currently at the second differing section of 3 total. + +Now can can decide section by section which version you want to have in the merged file. By pressing A, you take over the version you edited. By pressing B, you take over the version from the repository. By pressing A+B, both versions will be added, and your version will come first. B+A yields the same result, but the order will be different: first the repository version, then yours. + +If you are not happy with any of these versions, press Edit to open a simple text editor where you can edit the section. When you are finished editing, press OK to return to the CVS Resolve dialogue and resume solving conflicts. You will see the section you just edited in the Merged version, with your modifications. + +To save your modifications, overwriting the working copy version, press Save. Note that this will save the choices not only the section you are currently viewing, but all sections in the file. If you want to save it to another file, press Save As.... Press Close to exit the dialogue. If you close the dialogue without saving, the changes you made will be lost. @@ -1447,638 +599,245 @@ Changes in the repository -Obtaining Information About Files and Creating Patches +Obtaining Information About Files and Creating Patches -Watching Differences Between Revisions +Watching Differences Between Revisions -There are several places in &cervisia; where you can ask for a window showing the differences between revisions of a file: +There are several places in &cervisia; where you can ask for a window showing the differences between revisions of a file: -In the main view, you can choose ViewDifference to Repository (BASE).... This is based on the command cvs diff and shows you the differences between the version in your sandbox and the version to which you last updated (also known as BASE). This is in particular useful just before you commit a file, so you can find an appropriate log message. - -You can view the differences between the version in your sandbox and the version in the main development branch (also called HEAD) by choosing View Difference to Repository (HEAD).... - -You can view the differences between the last two revisions of the selected file choosing View Last Change.... - -You can access the Difference to Repository (BASE)..., Difference to Repository (HEAD)... and Last Change... menu items from the main view pop-up menu, by right-clicking the file you want to view. - -In the dialogue that is shown when a you commit a set of files, you can request a difference window by selecting a file name in the selection list, either by double-clicking it or by pressing Return. This is quite similar to using ViewDifference to Repository (BASE)... with the respective file in the main view. - -In the Browse Logs dialogue, you can mark two revisions of a file and request a dialogue showing the differences between them (see ). +In the main view, you can choose ViewDifference to Repository (BASE).... This is based on the command cvs diff and shows you the differences between the version in your sandbox and the version to which you last updated (also known as BASE). This is in particular useful just before you commit a file, so you can find an appropriate log message. + +You can view the differences between the version in your sandbox and the version in the main development branch (also called HEAD) by choosing View Difference to Repository (HEAD).... + +You can view the differences between the last two revisions of the selected file choosing View Last Change.... + +You can access the Difference to Repository (BASE)..., Difference to Repository (HEAD)... and Last Change... menu items from the main view pop-up menu, by right-clicking the file you want to view. + +In the dialogue that is shown when a you commit a set of files, you can request a difference window by selecting a file name in the selection list, either by double-clicking it or by pressing Return. This is quite similar to using ViewDifference to Repository (BASE)... with the respective file in the main view. + +In the Browse Logs dialogue, you can mark two revisions of a file and request a dialogue showing the differences between them (see ). -As you may have expected, &cervisia; does not just dump the output of the diff command into your terminal, but shows you a graphical view as seen in . +As you may have expected, &cervisia; does not just dump the output of the diff command into your terminal, but shows you a graphical view as seen in .
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s diff dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s diff dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s diff dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s diff dialogue
-The text in the dialogue is an improved variant of the text given by the diff command with the option. You can see the differing versions in two windows, with lines arranged such that you can do a side-by-side comparison. That means, where text has been added or deleted, the respective window shows empty lines with the marker +++++ at the left hand side. Elsewhere, you can see the running number of each line in the left column. - -In the second column in the right window, you can see which kind of change has been made. Possible types are Add, Delete and Change. The respective lines are marked in blue, green and red colour. In the middle of the dialogue a compressed image of the colour markers is shown. In this way, you can get a quick overview of the overall changes to the file. You can also use the position of the coloured regions in the compressed image as an orientation when you using the scroll bars. - -Normally, the scrollbars at the left and the right window are synchronised, i.e. if you scroll on the left hand side, the right hand side is scrolled by the same amount. You can change this by checking the box Synchronise scroll bars. - -For information about how to customise the diff dialogue, see . +The text in the dialogue is an improved variant of the text given by the diff command with the option. You can see the differing versions in two windows, with lines arranged such that you can do a side-by-side comparison. That means, where text has been added or deleted, the respective window shows empty lines with the marker +++++ at the left hand side. Elsewhere, you can see the running number of each line in the left column. + +In the second column in the right window, you can see which kind of change has been made. Possible types are Add, Delete and Change. The respective lines are marked in blue, green and red colour. In the middle of the dialogue a compressed image of the colour markers is shown. In this way, you can get a quick overview of the overall changes to the file. You can also use the position of the coloured regions in the compressed image as an orientation when you using the scroll bars. + +Normally, the scrollbars at the left and the right window are synchronised, i.e. if you scroll on the left hand side, the right hand side is scrolled by the same amount. You can change this by checking the box Synchronise scroll bars. + +For information about how to customise the diff dialogue, see . -Creating Patches - -Sometimes you want to offer your modifications for review, before committing them, or you do not have write access to the repository (therefore you cannot commit). &CVS; offers standard formats to share the modifications in your working copy, so other people can review your changes, test them in their working copy and apply them to the &CVS; repository. A file containing these differences is called a patch, and is generated by the cvs diff command, in the same way as the differences in . Sharing patches instead of sets of files requires less bandwidth, and patches are easier to handle, as you can send only one patch file containing all the differences from many source files. - -&cervisia; gives you to access to this feature by choosing Advanced Create Patch Against Repository. - -The Create Patch Against Repository action creates a patch with all modifications in all files in your working copy (sandbox) against the BASE repository. Therefore, the selection of files in the main view does not affect the patch that will be generated. - -Another possibility is to select one file in the main view and choose Browse Log... from the View menu or right click the marked file and choose Browse Log... from the pop-up menu, in order to open the Browse log dialogue. Now, select the version you want to create a patch against, as revision "A" and press the button Create Patch.... This will generate a patch with the differences between the marked file in your working copy and the version selected as revision "A". - -Before generating the patch, &cervisia; displays a dialogue allowing you to configure the output format. +Creating Patches + +Sometimes you want to offer your modifications for review, before committing them, or you do not have write access to the repository (therefore you cannot commit). &CVS; offers standard formats to share the modifications in your working copy, so other people can review your changes, test them in their working copy and apply them to the &CVS; repository. A file containing these differences is called a patch, and is generated by the cvs diff command, in the same way as the differences in . Sharing patches instead of sets of files requires less bandwidth, and patches are easier to handle, as you can send only one patch file containing all the differences from many source files. + +&cervisia; gives you to access to this feature by choosing Advanced Create Patch Against Repository. + +The Create Patch Against Repository action creates a patch with all modifications in all files in your working copy (sandbox) against the BASE repository. Therefore, the selection of files in the main view does not affect the patch that will be generated. + +Another possibility is to select one file in the main view and choose Browse Log... from the View menu or right click the marked file and choose Browse Log... from the pop-up menu, in order to open the Browse log dialogue. Now, select the version you want to create a patch against, as revision "A" and press the button Create Patch.... This will generate a patch with the differences between the marked file in your working copy and the version selected as revision "A". + +Before generating the patch, &cervisia; displays a dialogue allowing you to configure the output format.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s patch dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s patch dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s patch dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s patch dialogue
-Output Format -There are three output formats available: -Normal: a format that can be used to cause the ed editor to automatically make another copy of the old file match the new file. In the normal output format, the characters < and > mark the changes, and there is no context information. -Unified: the most used format for exchanging patches. The unified format uses context lines in addition to line numbers to record the differences. This makes the process of applying patches more robust. This format displays the differences in a compact and readable form, with a header for each file involved, and separate sections (chunks) for each difference. The context lines available for each difference make reading the modifications easier. In the unified output format, the characters + and - mark the changes. -Context, which presents the same information as the unified format, but in a less compact way. In the context output format, the character ! marks the changes. +Output Format +There are three output formats available: +Normal: a format that can be used to cause the ed editor to automatically make another copy of the old file match the new file. In the normal output format, the characters < and > mark the changes, and there is no context information. +Unified: the most used format for exchanging patches. The unified format uses context lines in addition to line numbers to record the differences. This makes the process of applying patches more robust. This format displays the differences in a compact and readable form, with a header for each file involved, and separate sections (chunks) for each difference. The context lines available for each difference make reading the modifications easier. In the unified output format, the characters + and - mark the changes. +Context, which presents the same information as the unified format, but in a less compact way. In the context output format, the character ! marks the changes. -Number of context lines: -Set here the number of context lines for the unified or context output formats. This option is not available for the normal output format, as in this format no context information is recorded. More context information makes reading the raw output easier, and applying the patch more precise, but increases the patch size. It is recommended to use at least two context lines for proper patch operation. +Number of context lines: +Set here the number of context lines for the unified or context output formats. This option is not available for the normal output format, as in this format no context information is recorded. More context information makes reading the raw output easier, and applying the patch more precise, but increases the patch size. It is recommended to use at least two context lines for proper patch operation. -Ignore Options -Check here the changes that should not be considered as differences when generating the patch. +Ignore Options +Check here the changes that should not be considered as differences when generating the patch. -After setting the output format, &cervisia; generates the patch and displays the Save As dialogue. Enter in this dialogue the file name and location of the patch file. +After setting the output format, &cervisia; generates the patch and displays the Save As dialogue. Enter in this dialogue the file name and location of the patch file. -Watching an Annotated View of a File - -With the command cvs annotate, &CVS; offers the possibility to see - for each line in a file - who has modified a line the most recently. This view may be helpful in order to find out who has introduced a change in the behavior of a program or who should be asked about some change or bug in the code. - -&cervisia; gives you to access to this feature, but it further enriches the information in an interactive way. You obtain an annotate view by choosing ViewAnnotate.... Another possibility is to press the button Annotate in the Browse log dialogue, in which you can select which version of the file you want to display. In you can see a screenshot of the dialogue. +Watching an Annotated View of a File + +With the command cvs annotate, &CVS; offers the possibility to see - for each line in a file - who has modified a line the most recently. This view may be helpful in order to find out who has introduced a change in the behavior of a program or who should be asked about some change or bug in the code. + +&cervisia; gives you to access to this feature, but it further enriches the information in an interactive way. You obtain an annotate view by choosing ViewAnnotate.... Another possibility is to press the button Annotate in the Browse log dialogue, in which you can select which version of the file you want to display. In you can see a screenshot of the dialogue.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s annotate dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s annotate dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s annotate dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s annotate dialogue
-In the annotate dialogue, you see in a window the latest version of the selected file (or the revision "A" version, in case you launched the annotate dialogue from the the Browse log dialogue). In the columns before the text, you get some information related to the latest change in each line. In the first column the line number is displayed. In the second column you see the name of the author and revision number. Finally, in the third column you see the actual content of that line. +In the annotate dialogue, you see in a window the latest version of the selected file (or the revision "A" version, in case you launched the annotate dialogue from the the Browse log dialogue). In the columns before the text, you get some information related to the latest change in each line. In the first column the line number is displayed. In the second column you see the name of the author and revision number. Finally, in the third column you see the actual content of that line. -Consequently, when a certain line appears strange to you or you assume a bug there, you can immediately see who is responsible for that line. But not only that, you can also find out why that line was changed. To this end, move the mouse cursor over the respective revision number. Then a tooltip appears that shows the log message and the date of the change. +Consequently, when a certain line appears strange to you or you assume a bug there, you can immediately see who is responsible for that line. But not only that, you can also find out why that line was changed. To this end, move the mouse cursor over the respective revision number. Then a tooltip appears that shows the log message and the date of the change. -Browsing &CVS; Logs - -When you mark one file in the main view and choose Browse Log... from the View menu or right click the marked file and choose Browse Log... from the pop-up menu, the CVS Log dialogue is shown (if you mark more than one, nothing happens, as &cervisia; can only generate and parse the log for one file at a time). This dialogue offers functionality that is beyond viewing the file's history. Using it as a version browser you can: +Browsing &CVS; Logs + +When you mark one file in the main view and choose Browse Log... from the View menu or right click the marked file and choose Browse Log... from the pop-up menu, the CVS Log dialogue is shown (if you mark more than one, nothing happens, as &cervisia; can only generate and parse the log for one file at a time). This dialogue offers functionality that is beyond viewing the file's history. Using it as a version browser you can: -View the revision, author, date, branch, commit message and tags for each version of the marked file. +View the revision, author, date, branch, commit message and tags for each version of the marked file. -View a graphical tree representation showing the branching and tagging of the marked file. +View a graphical tree representation showing the branching and tagging of the marked file. -View any version of the marked file (with the default application). +View any version of the marked file (with the default application). -Watch an annotated view of any version of the marked file +Watch an annotated view of any version of the marked file -View the differences between any pair of versions of the marked file, including pairs with the current working copy version of the marked file. +View the differences between any pair of versions of the marked file, including pairs with the current working copy version of the marked file. -Create patches containing the differences between any pair of versions of the marked file, including pairs with the current working copy version of the marked file. +Create patches containing the differences between any pair of versions of the marked file, including pairs with the current working copy version of the marked file.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s browse logs dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s browse logs dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s browse logs dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s browse logs dialogue
-You can choose to see the history as provided by the cvs log command (CVS Output), as a Tree, or in List form. What you prefer is of course a matter of taste and it depends on what information you are interested in. The tree is an intuitive representation of what has been done on different branches by which authors. As tooltips, you can see the corresponding log messages. The list is by its nature linear and, therefore, does not give an immediate view of branches; on the other hand, it concentrates more otherwise relevant information on less screen estate, namely the time of each change of the file and the first part of the log message. The CVS output information is complete, but long, and difficult to read. To alleviate these problems, you have the ability to search the text of the CVS output, by pressing the Find... button. - -To obtain more information about a certain revision, you can click on it either in the list or the tree view. The fields in the middle of the dialogue are then filled with the complete information provided by cvs log. You can mark two revisions, called "A" and "B", which are relevant if you make use of further features provided by the buttons. Revision "A" can be chosen with the left mouse button, revision "B" with the middle one. In the list view, you can also navigate with with your cursor keys. In order to mark revisions "A" and "B", use the keybindings CtrlA, CtrlB, respectively. Using the CVS Output view, you can click on the Select for revision A and Select for revision B to mark the revisions. - -If you press the Annotate button, you get a dialogue showing the text of file belonging to the revision marked as "A". Every line is prefixed with the information about who edited this last time, and at which revision this happened. You can get more information about viewing annotated versions in . - -If you press the Diff button, a cvs diff call is issued and you get a dialogue in which all the modifications between the two marked revisions are shown. If you mark revision "A", but not revision "B", &cervisia; will generate the modifications between the file version marked as revision "A" and the working copy version of the file. This allows you to view the differences between your version of the file and any version available in &CVS;. To make it easy to see the changes, different colours are used to mark lines which have been added, removed or simply changed. You can get more information about viewing differences in . - -If you press the Create Patch... button, you get a dialogue in which you can set the format options for generating a file containing all the modifications between the two marked revisions which are shown. If you mark revision "A", but not revision "B", &cervisia; will generate the modifications between the file version marked as revision "A" and the working copy version of the file. This allows you to generate a patch, or difference file, between your version of the file and any version available in &CVS;. After configuring the format of the patch in the dialogue, and pressing OK, a cvs diff command is issued to generate the difference file. A Save As dialogue will pop up. Enter the file name and location of the patch file &cervisia; generated, in order to save it. You can get more information about creating patches, and the patch format options in . - -If you press the View button, &cervisia; will retrieve the revision marked as "A" and display it using the default application for its file type. - -Press the Close button to leave the dialogue and return to the main view. - - -To generate the log that is the base for the CVS Log dialogue, &cervisia; issues the following command: +You can choose to see the history as provided by the cvs log command (CVS Output), as a Tree, or in List form. What you prefer is of course a matter of taste and it depends on what information you are interested in. The tree is an intuitive representation of what has been done on different branches by which authors. As tooltips, you can see the corresponding log messages. The list is by its nature linear and, therefore, does not give an immediate view of branches; on the other hand, it concentrates more otherwise relevant information on less screen estate, namely the time of each change of the file and the first part of the log message. The CVS output information is complete, but long, and difficult to read. To alleviate these problems, you have the ability to search the text of the CVS output, by pressing the Find... button. + +To obtain more information about a certain revision, you can click on it either in the list or the tree view. The fields in the middle of the dialogue are then filled with the complete information provided by cvs log. You can mark two revisions, called "A" and "B", which are relevant if you make use of further features provided by the buttons. Revision "A" can be chosen with the left mouse button, revision "B" with the middle one. In the list view, you can also navigate with with your cursor keys. In order to mark revisions "A" and "B", use the keybindings CtrlA, CtrlB, respectively. Using the CVS Output view, you can click on the Select for revision A and Select for revision B to mark the revisions. + +If you press the Annotate button, you get a dialogue showing the text of file belonging to the revision marked as "A". Every line is prefixed with the information about who edited this last time, and at which revision this happened. You can get more information about viewing annotated versions in . + +If you press the Diff button, a cvs diff call is issued and you get a dialogue in which all the modifications between the two marked revisions are shown. If you mark revision "A", but not revision "B", &cervisia; will generate the modifications between the file version marked as revision "A" and the working copy version of the file. This allows you to view the differences between your version of the file and any version available in &CVS;. To make it easy to see the changes, different colours are used to mark lines which have been added, removed or simply changed. You can get more information about viewing differences in . + +If you press the Create Patch... button, you get a dialogue in which you can set the format options for generating a file containing all the modifications between the two marked revisions which are shown. If you mark revision "A", but not revision "B", &cervisia; will generate the modifications between the file version marked as revision "A" and the working copy version of the file. This allows you to generate a patch, or difference file, between your version of the file and any version available in &CVS;. After configuring the format of the patch in the dialogue, and pressing OK, a cvs diff command is issued to generate the difference file. A Save As dialogue will pop up. Enter the file name and location of the patch file &cervisia; generated, in order to save it. You can get more information about creating patches, and the patch format options in . + +If you press the View button, &cervisia; will retrieve the revision marked as "A" and display it using the default application for its file type. + +Press the Close button to leave the dialogue and return to the main view. + + +To generate the log that is the base for the CVS Log dialogue, &cervisia; issues the following command: -cvs log file name +cvs log file name -Browsing the History +Browsing the History -If the used repository has logging enabled, &cervisia; can present you a history of certain events like checkouts, commits, rtags, updates and releases. Choose History from the View menu, and &cervisia; will issue the command +If the used repository has logging enabled, &cervisia; can present you a history of certain events like checkouts, commits, rtags, updates and releases. Choose History from the View menu, and &cervisia; will issue the command -cvs history -e -a +cvs history -e -a -This fetches the complete logging file from the server, i.e. a list of the events for all users and all modules. This can be a huge amount of data. +This fetches the complete logging file from the server, i.e. a list of the events for all users and all modules. This can be a huge amount of data. -Now you can see the list of events, sorted by date. In the second column, the type of the event is shown: +Now you can see the list of events, sorted by date. In the second column, the type of the event is shown: -Checkout - The user who is displayed in the 'Author' column has checked out a module - -Tag - A user has used the command cvs rtag. Note that the usage of cvs tag (as done by &cervisia;'s AdvancedTag/Branch... command) is not recorded in the history database. This has historical reasons (see the &CVS; FAQ). - -Release - A user has released a module. Actually, this command is rarely used and not of much value. - -Update, Deleted - A user has made an update on a file which was deleted in the repository. As a consequence, the file was deleted in his working copy. - -Update, Copied - A user has made an update on a file. A new version was copied into working copy. - -Update, Merged - A user has made an update on a file. The modifications in the repository version on the file were merged into his working copy. - -Update, Conflict - A user has made an update on a file, and a conflict with his own modifications was detected. - -Commit, Modified - A user committed a modified file. - -Commit, Added - A user added a file and committed it. - -Commit, Removed - A user removed a file and committed it. +Checkout - The user who is displayed in the 'Author' column has checked out a module + +Tag - A user has used the command cvs rtag. Note that the usage of cvs tag (as done by &cervisia;'s AdvancedTag/Branch... command) is not recorded in the history database. This has historical reasons (see the &CVS; FAQ). + +Release - A user has released a module. Actually, this command is rarely used and not of much value. + +Update, Deleted - A user has made an update on a file which was deleted in the repository. As a consequence, the file was deleted in his working copy. + +Update, Copied - A user has made an update on a file. A new version was copied into working copy. + +Update, Merged - A user has made an update on a file. The modifications in the repository version on the file were merged into his working copy. + +Update, Conflict - A user has made an update on a file, and a conflict with his own modifications was detected. + +Commit, Modified - A user committed a modified file. + +Commit, Added - A user added a file and committed it. + +Commit, Removed - A user removed a file and committed it.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s history dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s history dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s history dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s history dialogue
-You can sort the list by other criteria simply by clicking on the respective column header. In order to sort out the history entries you are interested in, there are various filter options activated by check boxes: +You can sort the list by other criteria simply by clicking on the respective column header. In order to sort out the history entries you are interested in, there are various filter options activated by check boxes: -Show commit events - shows commits -Show checkout events - shows checkouts -Show tag events - shows taggings -Show other events - shows events not included in the above -Only user - shows only events caused by a certain user -Only file names matching - filters file names by a regular expression -Only dirnames matching - filters folder names by a regular expression +Show commit events - shows commits +Show checkout events - shows checkouts +Show tag events - shows taggings +Show other events - shows events not included in the above +Only user - shows only events caused by a certain user +Only file names matching - filters file names by a regular expression +Only dirnames matching - filters folder names by a regular expression -Special characters recognised by the regular expression matcher are: +Special characters recognised by the regular expression matcher are: -x* matches any number of occurrences of the character x. - -x+ matches one or more of occurrences of the character x. - -x? matches zero or one occurrences of the character x. - -^ matches the start of the string. - -$ matches the end of the string. - -[a-cx-z] matches a set of characters, ⪚ here the set consisting of a,b,c,x,y,z. +x* matches any number of occurrences of the character x. + +x+ matches one or more of occurrences of the character x. + +x? matches zero or one occurrences of the character x. + +^ matches the start of the string. + +$ matches the end of the string. + +[a-cx-z] matches a set of characters, ⪚ here the set consisting of a,b,c,x,y,z. @@ -2088,477 +847,164 @@ Changes in the repository -Advanced Usage +Advanced Usage -Updating to Tag, Branch or Date +Updating to Tag, Branch or Date -Branches of a module are parallel versions of this module. A good real life example of the use of this feature is the release of a software project. After a major release, there are bugs in the code that should be fixed, but people want to add new features to the application too. It is very hard to do both at the same time because new features usually introduce new bugs, making it hard to track down the old ones. To solve this dilemma, &CVS; lets you create a parallel version, that we will call the "stable release branch", where you can only add bugfixes, leaving the main branch (HEAD) open for adding new features. +Branches of a module are parallel versions of this module. A good real life example of the use of this feature is the release of a software project. After a major release, there are bugs in the code that should be fixed, but people want to add new features to the application too. It is very hard to do both at the same time because new features usually introduce new bugs, making it hard to track down the old ones. To solve this dilemma, &CVS; lets you create a parallel version, that we will call the "stable release branch", where you can only add bugfixes, leaving the main branch (HEAD) open for adding new features. -Tags are used to mark a version of a project. &CVS; stamps one version of each file with the tag, so when you checkout or update to a specific tag, you will get always the same file versions; therefore, as opposed to branches, tags are not dynamic: you cannot develop a tag. Tags are useful to mark releases, big changes in the code &etc; +Tags are used to mark a version of a project. &CVS; stamps one version of each file with the tag, so when you checkout or update to a specific tag, you will get always the same file versions; therefore, as opposed to branches, tags are not dynamic: you cannot develop a tag. Tags are useful to mark releases, big changes in the code &etc; -When you are developing or following the development of a software project, you do not necessarily work with the main branch all the time. After a release, you may want to stay with the released branch for a while, to enjoy its relative stability, fix bugs, translate the sources &etc; To do all that, you have to update to the released branch. All your files will be updated to the latest version of the files in that branch. After updating, all your new commits will be uploaded to the new branch as well. +When you are developing or following the development of a software project, you do not necessarily work with the main branch all the time. After a release, you may want to stay with the released branch for a while, to enjoy its relative stability, fix bugs, translate the sources &etc; To do all that, you have to update to the released branch. All your files will be updated to the latest version of the files in that branch. After updating, all your new commits will be uploaded to the new branch as well. -Also, if you want to track a bug that was reported against a past tagged release, &CVS; offers you the possibility to retrieve the software as it was released, by updating to that tag. Besides, if you want to fetch a past version of your project, you can update your working copy to a specific date. This may be useful if an error was introduced in the project between two releases, and you have an opinion on when that was. When you update to a date or tag, the versions of your files will be the same as the versions in that specific date or the versions stamped by that tag. +Also, if you want to track a bug that was reported against a past tagged release, &CVS; offers you the possibility to retrieve the software as it was released, by updating to that tag. Besides, if you want to fetch a past version of your project, you can update your working copy to a specific date. This may be useful if an error was introduced in the project between two releases, and you have an opinion on when that was. When you update to a date or tag, the versions of your files will be the same as the versions in that specific date or the versions stamped by that tag. -Before updating to a different branch or tag, make sure you committed all your changes to the branch you are working with. If your are not ready to commit your changes, but do not want to discard them, do not update to the new branch, as you may lose your changes. As an alternative, you can do a new checkout, to work in parallel with both versions. +Before updating to a different branch or tag, make sure you committed all your changes to the branch you are working with. If your are not ready to commit your changes, but do not want to discard them, do not update to the new branch, as you may lose your changes. As an alternative, you can do a new checkout, to work in parallel with both versions.
-A screenshot of &cervisia;'s update to tag dialogue +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s update to tag dialogue - -A screenshot of &cervisia;'s update to tag dialogue + +A screenshot of &cervisia;'s update to tag dialogue
-Update to branch -Select this option to update to a branch. Enter the name of the branch in the drop down edit box (or press the Fetch List button to retrieve the list of branches from the &CVS; server, and select the one you want in the drop down list). +Update to branch +Select this option to update to a branch. Enter the name of the branch in the drop down edit box (or press the Fetch List button to retrieve the list of branches from the &CVS; server, and select the one you want in the drop down list). -Update to tag -Select this option to update to a tag. Enter the name of the tag in the drop down edit box (or press the Fetch List button to retrieve the list of tags from the &CVS; server, and select the one you want in the drop down list). +Update to tag +Select this option to update to a tag. Enter the name of the tag in the drop down edit box (or press the Fetch List button to retrieve the list of tags from the &CVS; server, and select the one you want in the drop down list). -Update to date -Select this option to update to a date. In the field below, you can enter a wide variety of date formats. One possible format is yyyy-mm-dd where yyyy is the year, mm is the month (numerically) and dd is the day. Alternatives are some English phrases like yesterday or 2 weeks ago. +Update to date +Select this option to update to a date. In the field below, you can enter a wide variety of date formats. One possible format is yyyy-mm-dd where yyyy is the year, mm is the month (numerically) and dd is the day. Alternatives are some English phrases like yesterday or 2 weeks ago. -Updating to a tag or date make them 'sticky', &ie; you can not commit further modifications on that files (unless the tag is a branch tag). In order to get back to the main branch, use the menu item AdvancedUpdate to HEAD. - -The comand issued to update to a branch or tag is: cvs update -r tag +Updating to a tag or date make them 'sticky', &ie; you can not commit further modifications on that files (unless the tag is a branch tag). In order to get back to the main branch, use the menu item AdvancedUpdate to HEAD. + +The comand issued to update to a branch or tag is: cvs update -r tag -The command issued to update to a date is: cvs update -D date +The command issued to update to a date is: cvs update -D date -The command issued to update to the main branch (HEAD) is: cvs update +The command issued to update to the main branch (HEAD) is: cvs update -Tagging and Branching - -We discuss here only the technical aspects of tagging and branching. If you are only a user, not the administrator of the repository, you will probably not be confronted with the problem. If however you are your own administrator, you should first read about the non-technical problems that accompany branching, in order to get an impression of how time-consuming and error-prone maintaining different branches of a project can be. The appendix includes some references about this topic. - -Simple tagging is something you usually do when a release is made, so that you can at any time easily get back to the project state at that time. Tags are usually given a name consisting of the project name and the version number. For example, &cervisia; 1.0 is available under the tag CERVISIA_1_0. &cervisia; enforces &CVS;'s strict rules about what constitutes valid tag name. It must begin with a letter and may contain letters, digits, hyphens and underscores. - -Normally, you will want to tag the whole project (although &CVS; of course allows you to tag only a subset). To this end, mark the toplevel folder in the view and choose AdvancedTag/Branch. Now enter the name of the tag, press Return and you are done. - -Creating a branch is not significantly more difficult: In the tag dialogue, check the box Create branch with this tag. You can also delete an existing tag: Choose AdvancedDelete Tag in the main view. - -Another aspect of branching is the merging of modifications from a branch to the current branch. If you are going to do this, choose AdvancedMerge.... The dialogue that appears now gives you two options: - -Either you may merge all modifications done on a branch to the current branch. In that case, check the box Merge from branch and fill in the branch you want to merge from. &cervisia; will then execute the command +Tagging and Branching + +We discuss here only the technical aspects of tagging and branching. If you are only a user, not the administrator of the repository, you will probably not be confronted with the problem. If however you are your own administrator, you should first read about the non-technical problems that accompany branching, in order to get an impression of how time-consuming and error-prone maintaining different branches of a project can be. The appendix includes some references about this topic. + +Simple tagging is something you usually do when a release is made, so that you can at any time easily get back to the project state at that time. Tags are usually given a name consisting of the project name and the version number. For example, &cervisia; 1.0 is available under the tag CERVISIA_1_0. &cervisia; enforces &CVS;'s strict rules about what constitutes valid tag name. It must begin with a letter and may contain letters, digits, hyphens and underscores. + +Normally, you will want to tag the whole project (although &CVS; of course allows you to tag only a subset). To this end, mark the toplevel folder in the view and choose AdvancedTag/Branch. Now enter the name of the tag, press Return and you are done. + +Creating a branch is not significantly more difficult: In the tag dialogue, check the box Create branch with this tag. You can also delete an existing tag: Choose AdvancedDelete Tag in the main view. + +Another aspect of branching is the merging of modifications from a branch to the current branch. If you are going to do this, choose AdvancedMerge.... The dialogue that appears now gives you two options: + +Either you may merge all modifications done on a branch to the current branch. In that case, check the box Merge from branch and fill in the branch you want to merge from. &cervisia; will then execute the command -cvs update branchtag +cvs update branchtag -The other possibility is that you want to merge only the modifications made between two tags on a branch. This usually happens when you merge from the same branch to the trunk several times. In that case, check the box Merge modifications and enter (in the correct order) the two relevant tags. This will result in a command +The other possibility is that you want to merge only the modifications made between two tags on a branch. This usually happens when you merge from the same branch to the trunk several times. In that case, check the box Merge modifications and enter (in the correct order) the two relevant tags. This will result in a command -cvs update branchtag1 branchtag2 +cvs update branchtag1 branchtag2 -Using Watches - -A watch is the conventional name for &CVS;'s feature to notify users of the repository whenever a file has been changed or a developer has started editing a file. The usage of watches requires that the file $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/notify has been set up properly. This is not discussed here; if you need further information on the setup from the administrator's point of view, read one of the books listed in the appendix. - -&cervisia;'s main support of watches are six menu items. - -In order to add a watch to one or several files, use AdvancedAdd Watch.... In the dialogue you get, you can choose to get notified for any of the types of events that &CVS; supports. For example, if you only want to get notified when a file is committed, check the boxes Only and Commits. If you want to get notified about any event related to the marked files, check the box All. The command line used when you accept the dialogue is +Using Watches + +A watch is the conventional name for &CVS;'s feature to notify users of the repository whenever a file has been changed or a developer has started editing a file. The usage of watches requires that the file $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/notify has been set up properly. This is not discussed here; if you need further information on the setup from the administrator's point of view, read one of the books listed in the appendix. + +&cervisia;'s main support of watches are six menu items. + +In order to add a watch to one or several files, use AdvancedAdd Watch.... In the dialogue you get, you can choose to get notified for any of the types of events that &CVS; supports. For example, if you only want to get notified when a file is committed, check the boxes Only and Commits. If you want to get notified about any event related to the marked files, check the box All. The command line used when you accept the dialogue is -cvs watch add -a commit file names +cvs watch add -a commit file names -or with a similar option, depending on the events you chose to watch. +or with a similar option, depending on the events you chose to watch. -If you are not interested in some files anymore, you can remove your watches on them. To this end, use AdvancedRemove Watch.... In the dialogue you get here, the same options are offered as in the form you filled out when adding the watch. When you confirm this dialogue, &cervisia; issues the command +If you are not interested in some files anymore, you can remove your watches on them. To this end, use AdvancedRemove Watch.... In the dialogue you get here, the same options are offered as in the form you filled out when adding the watch. When you confirm this dialogue, &cervisia; issues the command -cvs watch remove file names +cvs watch remove file names -possibly with an option for the chosen events. +possibly with an option for the chosen events. -Finally, you can get a list of the people who are watching a couple of files. Choose AdvancedShow Watchers. Using this menu item will result in a command +Finally, you can get a list of the people who are watching a couple of files. Choose AdvancedShow Watchers. Using this menu item will result in a command -cvs watchers file names +cvs watchers file names -In the normal usage scenario of &CVS;, each developer works separately in his checked out sandbox. When he wants to modify some file, he can just open it in his editor and start working on it. Nobody else will know about this work until the file gets committed. +In the normal usage scenario of &CVS;, each developer works separately in his checked out sandbox. When he wants to modify some file, he can just open it in his editor and start working on it. Nobody else will know about this work until the file gets committed. -For some developer groups, this is not the preferred model of cooperation. They want to get notified about someone working on a file as soon as he starts with it. This can be achieved by some further &CVS; commands. Before you start editing a file, select it in &cervisia;'s main window and choose AdvancedEdit. This will execute the command +For some developer groups, this is not the preferred model of cooperation. They want to get notified about someone working on a file as soon as he starts with it. This can be achieved by some further &CVS; commands. Before you start editing a file, select it in &cervisia;'s main window and choose AdvancedEdit. This will execute the command -cvs edit file names +cvs edit file names -This will send out a notification to everyone who has set an edit watch on this file. It will also register you as an editor of the file. You can obtain a list of all editors of a certain file by using AdvancedShow Editors. This is equivalent to typing on the command line +This will send out a notification to everyone who has set an edit watch on this file. It will also register you as an editor of the file. You can obtain a list of all editors of a certain file by using AdvancedShow Editors. This is equivalent to typing on the command line -cvs editors file names +cvs editors file names -An editing session is automatically ended when you commit the affected file. At that moment, an unedit notification gets sent out to all people who have registered a respective watch on the file. Of course, sometimes you may not want to commit the file, but abort the editing session and revert to the previous version of the file. This is done by using AdvancedUnedit. Note that &cervisia; will not ask you for confirmation; that means if you use this menu item, all your work done since you used AdvancedEdit will be lost. Precisely, &cervisia; uses the command line +An editing session is automatically ended when you commit the affected file. At that moment, an unedit notification gets sent out to all people who have registered a respective watch on the file. Of course, sometimes you may not want to commit the file, but abort the editing session and revert to the previous version of the file. This is done by using AdvancedUnedit. Note that &cervisia; will not ask you for confirmation; that means if you use this menu item, all your work done since you used AdvancedEdit will be lost. Precisely, &cervisia; uses the command line -echo y | cvs unedit file names +echo y | cvs unedit file names -So far, we have only the discussed the case where edits and unedits are used voluntarily be the developers. In addition &CVS; supports a model which enforces the usage of these commands. The responsible command to switch to this model is cvs watch on which we will not explain further because it is mostly used by the administrator of the repository. However, the important point from the developer's point of view is that when the project enforces edits, working copies are checked out readonly. That means you cannot edit a file by default (unless you use tricks like chmod). Only when you use AdvancedEdit, the file becomes writable. It is made read-only again when you commit the file or use AdvancedUnedit. - -&cervisia;'s editor interface helps you with projects that enforce watches also in a different way. If you just started an editor with a readonly file by double-clicking on it or by using FileEdit, you would not be able to save your modifications later. This has of course a reason: Whenever you want to change a file, you should run cvs edit before, so that all people watching the file get a notification that you are working on it. - -In such a case, it is advisable to check the option SettingsDo cvs edit Automatically When Necessary. Now, whenever you edit a file by double-clicking it, &cervisia; will run cvs edit before the editor is actually executed. Then you can edit your file as usual. When you have finished your work, commit your files, and the committed files are read-only again. +So far, we have only the discussed the case where edits and unedits are used voluntarily be the developers. In addition &CVS; supports a model which enforces the usage of these commands. The responsible command to switch to this model is cvs watch on which we will not explain further because it is mostly used by the administrator of the repository. However, the important point from the developer's point of view is that when the project enforces edits, working copies are checked out readonly. That means you cannot edit a file by default (unless you use tricks like chmod). Only when you use AdvancedEdit, the file becomes writable. It is made read-only again when you commit the file or use AdvancedUnedit. + +&cervisia;'s editor interface helps you with projects that enforce watches also in a different way. If you just started an editor with a readonly file by double-clicking on it or by using FileEdit, you would not be able to save your modifications later. This has of course a reason: Whenever you want to change a file, you should run cvs edit before, so that all people watching the file get a notification that you are working on it. + +In such a case, it is advisable to check the option SettingsDo cvs edit Automatically When Necessary. Now, whenever you edit a file by double-clicking it, &cervisia; will run cvs edit before the editor is actually executed. Then you can edit your file as usual. When you have finished your work, commit your files, and the committed files are read-only again. -Locking - -The development model usually followed when &CVS; is used is called unreserved checkouts. Each developer has his own sandbox where he can edit files as he likes. If when the watch features - like cvs edit - are used, multiple developers can work on files synchronously. Changes done by a different developer are merged into the local sandbox when an update is performed. - -Other revision control systems - like RCS and SourceSafe use a different model. When a developer wants to a edit a file, he has to lock it. Only one developer at a time can a lock a file. When he has finished editing, the lock is released. On the one hand, with this model, conflicts can never happen. On the other hand, two developers can not work on the same file at the same time, even when their changes do not affect each other. This can be a bottleneck. We are not going to discuss the organisational benefits of both approaches. Nevertheless we mention that although &CVS; has some support for locking, it is not the preferred way of working with &CVS;. You should not use these features unless you are sure that your project manager allows them. - -With &cervisia;, you lock files as follows. Select the desired files in the main view. Then choose AdvancedLock. This runs the command +Locking + +The development model usually followed when &CVS; is used is called unreserved checkouts. Each developer has his own sandbox where he can edit files as he likes. If when the watch features - like cvs edit - are used, multiple developers can work on files synchronously. Changes done by a different developer are merged into the local sandbox when an update is performed. + +Other revision control systems - like RCS and SourceSafe use a different model. When a developer wants to a edit a file, he has to lock it. Only one developer at a time can a lock a file. When he has finished editing, the lock is released. On the one hand, with this model, conflicts can never happen. On the other hand, two developers can not work on the same file at the same time, even when their changes do not affect each other. This can be a bottleneck. We are not going to discuss the organisational benefits of both approaches. Nevertheless we mention that although &CVS; has some support for locking, it is not the preferred way of working with &CVS;. You should not use these features unless you are sure that your project manager allows them. + +With &cervisia;, you lock files as follows. Select the desired files in the main view. Then choose AdvancedLock. This runs the command -cvs admin -l file names +cvs admin -l file names -The reverse effect is achieved by using AdvancedUnlock. This runs the command +The reverse effect is achieved by using AdvancedUnlock. This runs the command -cvs admin -u file names +cvs admin -u file names @@ -2567,57 +1013,24 @@ Changes in the repository -Customising &cervisia; +Customising &cervisia; -&cervisia; can be customised in various ways to your needs and preferences. Some options which you may want to change regularly are directly available in the Settings menu. Others are united in a common dialogue which is available via OptionSettings.... +&cervisia; can be customised in various ways to your needs and preferences. Some options which you may want to change regularly are directly available in the Settings menu. Others are united in a common dialogue which is available via OptionSettings.... -General +General -User name for the ChangeLog editor: -Whenever you use the menu item FileInsert ChangeLog Entry..., a new ChangeLog entry is generated with the current date and your username. Normally, it is considered good style to insert your full name and your email address into each of your ChangeLog entries. &cervisia; add automatically the full name and email address entered here. +User name for the ChangeLog editor: +Whenever you use the menu item FileInsert ChangeLog Entry..., a new ChangeLog entry is generated with the current date and your username. Normally, it is considered good style to insert your full name and your email address into each of your ChangeLog entries. &cervisia; add automatically the full name and email address entered here. -Path to cvs executable, or 'cvs': -Here you can set the name (or path) to the cvs command line client. By default, the &CVS; executable found in your $PATH is used by &cervisia;. +Path to cvs executable, or 'cvs': +Here you can set the name (or path) to the cvs command line client. By default, the &CVS; executable found in your $PATH is used by &cervisia;. @@ -2625,81 +1038,28 @@ Changes in the repository -Diff Viewer +Diff Viewer -Number of context lines in the diff dialogue: -For the diff dialogue, &cervisia; uses the option to diff. This lets diff show only a limited number of lines around each difference region (context lines). Here you can set the argument to . +Number of context lines in the diff dialogue: +For the diff dialogue, &cervisia; uses the option to diff. This lets diff show only a limited number of lines around each difference region (context lines). Here you can set the argument to . -Additional options for cvs diff: -Here you can add additional arguments to the diff. A popular example is which lets diff ignore changes in the amount of whitespace. +Additional options for cvs diff: +Here you can add additional arguments to the diff. A popular example is which lets diff ignore changes in the amount of whitespace. -Tab width in diff dialogue: -In the diff dialogue, tab characters present in your file or in the output of the diff command are expanded into a fixed number of space characters. By default, each tab is replaced by eight spaces, but here you can setup a different number. +Tab width in diff dialogue: +In the diff dialogue, tab characters present in your file or in the output of the diff command are expanded into a fixed number of space characters. By default, each tab is replaced by eight spaces, but here you can setup a different number. -External diff frontend: -When you use any of the features which show the diff dialogue, like ViewDifference to Repository..., &cervisia; invokes its internal diff frontend. If you prefer a different one, like Kompare, TkDiff or xxdiff, enter its file name and path here. +External diff frontend: +When you use any of the features which show the diff dialogue, like ViewDifference to Repository..., &cervisia; invokes its internal diff frontend. If you prefer a different one, like Kompare, TkDiff or xxdiff, enter its file name and path here. @@ -2707,43 +1067,18 @@ Changes in the repository -Status +Status -When opening a sandbox from a remote repository, start a File->Status command automatically -When you check this option, the FileStatus command is started whenever you open a remote sandbox. This command may need some time and also needs a connection to the server for remote repositories (making it unusable for offline usage). +When opening a sandbox from a remote repository, start a File->Status command automatically +When you check this option, the FileStatus command is started whenever you open a remote sandbox. This command may need some time and also needs a connection to the server for remote repositories (making it unusable for offline usage). -When opening a sandbox from a local repository, start a File->Status command automatically -When you check this option, the FileStatus command is started whenever you open a local sandbox. +When opening a sandbox from a local repository, start a File->Status command automatically +When you check this option, the FileStatus command is started whenever you open a local sandbox. @@ -2751,62 +1086,23 @@ Changes in the repository -Advanced +Advanced -Timeout after which a progress dialogue appears (in ms): -Practically all &CVS; commands started in a sandbox which belongs to a remote repository need a connection to the &CVS; server. This is affected by delays from the network connection or a high load on the server. For this reason, for commands like ViewDifference to Repository... &cervisia; opens a dialogue which indicates that the command is still running and which allows you to abort it. Furthermore, this dialogue is used to show you error messages from &CVS;. As this dialogue may become annoying after some time, it is shown only after a certain timeout which is 4 seconds by default. Here you can change this value. +Timeout after which a progress dialogue appears (in ms): +Practically all &CVS; commands started in a sandbox which belongs to a remote repository need a connection to the &CVS; server. This is affected by delays from the network connection or a high load on the server. For this reason, for commands like ViewDifference to Repository... &cervisia; opens a dialogue which indicates that the command is still running and which allows you to abort it. Furthermore, this dialogue is used to show you error messages from &CVS;. As this dialogue may become annoying after some time, it is shown only after a certain timeout which is 4 seconds by default. Here you can change this value. -Default compression level: -The cvs client compresses files and patches when they are transferred over a network. With the command line option , the compression level can be set. You can setup &cervisia; to use this option by configuring the level here. The value set here is used only as a default; additionally there is a per-repository setting available in RepositoryRepositories.... +Default compression level: +The cvs client compresses files and patches when they are transferred over a network. With the command line option , the compression level can be set. You can setup &cervisia; to use this option by configuring the level here. The value set here is used only as a default; additionally there is a per-repository setting available in RepositoryRepositories.... -Utilise a running or start a new ssh-agent process -Check this box if you use ext (rsh) repositories, the &ssh; remote shell to communicate with the repository and ssh-agent to manage your keys. +Utilise a running or start a new ssh-agent process +Check this box if you use ext (rsh) repositories, the &ssh; remote shell to communicate with the repository and ssh-agent to manage your keys. @@ -2815,90 +1111,33 @@ Changes in the repository -Look'n'feel +Look'n'feel -Font for protocol window... -Press this button to open the Set Font dialogue, to set the font used in the protocol window (this is the window showing the output of the cvs client). +Font for protocol window... +Press this button to open the Set Font dialogue, to set the font used in the protocol window (this is the window showing the output of the cvs client). -Font for annotate view... -Press this button to open the Set Font dialogue, to set the font used in the annotate view. +Font for annotate view... +Press this button to open the Set Font dialogue, to set the font used in the annotate view. -Font for diff view... -Press this button to open the Set Font dialogue, to set the font used in diff dialogs. +Font for diff view... +Press this button to open the Set Font dialogue, to set the font used in diff dialogs. -Colours -Press the coloured buttons to open the Select Colour dialogue, to set the colour used for Conflict, Local Change or Remote Change, in the main view or Diff change, Diff insertion or Diff deletion, in &cervisia;'s built-in diff frontend. +Colours +Press the coloured buttons to open the Select Colour dialogue, to set the colour used for Conflict, Local Change or Remote Change, in the main view or Diff change, Diff insertion or Diff deletion, in &cervisia;'s built-in diff frontend. -Split main window horizontally -&cervisia;'s main window is normally split vertically into a window with the file tree above and one with the &CVS; output below; alternatively, you can arrange them horizontally. +Split main window horizontally +&cervisia;'s main window is normally split vertically into a window with the file tree above and one with the &CVS; output below; alternatively, you can arrange them horizontally. @@ -2908,123 +1147,44 @@ Changes in the repository -Appendix +Appendix -Ignored Files +Ignored Files -In its main file tree, &cervisia; does not display all files which are actually there. This is analogue to cvs itself and helps to avoid clutter caused by uninteresting stuff like object files. &cervisia; tries to mimic cvs's behavior as close as possible, i.e. it gets ignore lists from the following sources: +In its main file tree, &cervisia; does not display all files which are actually there. This is analogue to cvs itself and helps to avoid clutter caused by uninteresting stuff like object files. &cervisia; tries to mimic cvs's behavior as close as possible, i.e. it gets ignore lists from the following sources: -A static list of entries which includes things like *.o and core. For details, see the &CVS; documentation. -The file $HOME/.cvsignore. - -The environment variable $CVSIGNORE. -The .cvsignore file in the respective folder. +A static list of entries which includes things like *.o and core. For details, see the &CVS; documentation. +The file $HOME/.cvsignore. + +The environment variable $CVSIGNORE. +The .cvsignore file in the respective folder. -cvs itself additionally looks up entries in $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/cvsignore, but this is a file on the server, and &cervisia; should be able to start up offline. If you are working with a group that prefers to use an ignore list on the server, it's probably a good idea to take a look which patterns are listed there and to put them into the .cvsignore file in your home folder. +cvs itself additionally looks up entries in $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/cvsignore, but this is a file on the server, and &cervisia; should be able to start up offline. If you are working with a group that prefers to use an ignore list on the server, it's probably a good idea to take a look which patterns are listed there and to put them into the .cvsignore file in your home folder. -Further Information and Support +Further Information and Support -&CVS; comes with a complete set of documentation in the form of info pages, known as "The Cederqvist". If it is properly installed, you get browse it by typing in info:/cvs into the locationbar of kdehelp, khelpcenter resp. Alternative, you can just choose HelpCVS Info in &cervisia;. An on-line HTML version of the Cederqvist is available on the web. - -As this book is maintained together with &CVS;, it is normally the most up-to-date reference; nevertheless, considering other documentation for learning to use &CVS; is recommended, in particular the following. - -Karl Fogel has written the excellent book Open Source Development with CVS. About half of this book is about the development process of Open Source software. The other half is a technical documentation of &CVS;. Thankfully, the technical part of the book has been made freely redistributable under the GPL, so that you can download a HTML version of it. A list of errata is available on the webpage mentioned above. - -&CVS; issues are discussed on a dedicated mailing list. - -There is USENET group comp.software.config-mgmt dedicated to configuration management in general. &CVS; is only marginally a topic in this group, but nevertheless it may be interesting for discussing merits of various revision control systems compared to &CVS;. - -Last but not least, there is a (low traffic) &cervisia; mailing list. +&CVS; comes with a complete set of documentation in the form of info pages, known as "The Cederqvist". If it is properly installed, you get browse it by typing in info:/cvs into the locationbar of kdehelp, khelpcenter resp. Alternative, you can just choose HelpCVS Info in &cervisia;. An on-line HTML version of the Cederqvist is available on the web. + +As this book is maintained together with &CVS;, it is normally the most up-to-date reference; nevertheless, considering other documentation for learning to use &CVS; is recommended, in particular the following. + +Karl Fogel has written the excellent book Open Source Development with CVS. About half of this book is about the development process of Open Source software. The other half is a technical documentation of &CVS;. Thankfully, the technical part of the book has been made freely redistributable under the GPL, so that you can download a HTML version of it. A list of errata is available on the webpage mentioned above. + +&CVS; issues are discussed on a dedicated mailing list. + +There is USENET group comp.software.config-mgmt dedicated to configuration management in general. &CVS; is only marginally a topic in this group, but nevertheless it may be interesting for discussing merits of various revision control systems compared to &CVS;. + +Last but not least, there is a (low traffic) &cervisia; mailing list. @@ -3032,252 +1192,80 @@ Changes in the repository -Command Reference +Command Reference -The File Menu +The File Menu -FileOpen Sandbox... -Opens a sandbox in the main window. See . +FileOpen Sandbox... +Opens a sandbox in the main window. See . -FileRecent sandboxes -Opens one of the sandboxes that were in use recently. +FileRecent sandboxes +Opens one of the sandboxes that were in use recently. -FileInsert ChangeLog Entry... -Opens the ChangeLog editor, prepared such that you can add a new entry with the current date. See . +FileInsert ChangeLog Entry... +Opens the ChangeLog editor, prepared such that you can add a new entry with the current date. See . -&Ctrl;U FileUpdate -Runs 'cvs update' on selected files and changes the status and revision numbers in the listing accordingly. See . +&Ctrl;U FileUpdate +Runs 'cvs update' on selected files and changes the status and revision numbers in the listing accordingly. See . -F5 FileStatus -Runs 'cvs -n update' on selected files and changes the status and revision numbers in the listing accordingly. See . +F5 FileStatus +Runs 'cvs -n update' on selected files and changes the status and revision numbers in the listing accordingly. See . -FileEdit -Opens the selected file in KDE's default editor for the selected file's type. +FileEdit +Opens the selected file in KDE's default editor for the selected file's type. -FileResolve... -Opens a dialogue for the selected file which allows you to resolve merge conflicts in it. See . +FileResolve... +Opens a dialogue for the selected file which allows you to resolve merge conflicts in it. See . -# FileCommit... -Allows you to commit the selected files. See . +# FileCommit... +Allows you to commit the selected files. See . -+ FileAdd to Repository... -Allows you to add the selected files to the repository. See . ++ FileAdd to Repository... +Allows you to add the selected files to the repository. See . -FileAdd Binary... -Allows you to add the selected files to the repository as binaries (cvs add). See . +FileAdd Binary... +Allows you to add the selected files to the repository as binaries (cvs add). See . -- FileRemove from Repository... -Allows you to remove the selected files from the repository. See . +- FileRemove from Repository... +Allows you to remove the selected files from the repository. See . -FileRevert -Discards any local changes you have made to the selected files and reverts to the version in the repository (Option to cvs update). +FileRevert +Discards any local changes you have made to the selected files and reverts to the version in the repository (Option to cvs update). -&Ctrl;Q FileExit -Quits &cervisia;. +&Ctrl;Q FileExit +Quits &cervisia;. @@ -3287,258 +1275,81 @@ Changes in the repository -The View Menu +The View Menu -Escape ViewStop -Aborts any running subprocesses. +Escape ViewStop +Aborts any running subprocesses. -&Ctrl;L ViewBrowse Log... -Shows the log browser of the selected file versions. See . +&Ctrl;L ViewBrowse Log... +Shows the log browser of the selected file versions. See . -&Ctrl;A ViewAnnotate... -Shows an annotated view of the selected file, i.e. a view where you can for each line see which author modified it last. See . +&Ctrl;A ViewAnnotate... +Shows an annotated view of the selected file, i.e. a view where you can for each line see which author modified it last. See . -&Ctrl;D ViewDifference to Repository (BASE)... -Shows the differences between the selected file in the sandbox and the revision you last updated (BASE). See . +&Ctrl;D ViewDifference to Repository (BASE)... +Shows the differences between the selected file in the sandbox and the revision you last updated (BASE). See . -&Ctrl;H ViewDifference to Repository (HEAD)... -Shows the differences between the selected file in the sandbox and the revision you last updated (HEAD). See . +&Ctrl;H ViewDifference to Repository (HEAD)... +Shows the differences between the selected file in the sandbox and the revision you last updated (HEAD). See . -ViewLast Change... -Shows the differences between the revision of the selected file you last updated (BASE) and the revision before. See . +ViewLast Change... +Shows the differences between the revision of the selected file you last updated (BASE) and the revision before. See . -ViewHistory... -Shows the &CVS; history as reported by the server. See . +ViewHistory... +Shows the &CVS; history as reported by the server. See . -ViewHide All Files -Determines whether only folders are shown in the main tree view. See . +ViewHide All Files +Determines whether only folders are shown in the main tree view. See . -ViewHide Unmodified Files -Determines whether unknown and up to date files are hidden in the main tree view. See . +ViewHide Unmodified Files +Determines whether unknown and up to date files are hidden in the main tree view. See . -ViewHide Removed Files -Determines whether removed files are hidden in the main tree view. See . +ViewHide Removed Files +Determines whether removed files are hidden in the main tree view. See . -ViewHide Non-CVS Files -Determines whether files not in CVS are hidden in the main tree view. See . +ViewHide Non-CVS Files +Determines whether files not in CVS are hidden in the main tree view. See . -ViewHide Empty Folders -Determines whether without visible entries are hidden in the main tree view. See . +ViewHide Empty Folders +Determines whether without visible entries are hidden in the main tree view. See . -ViewUnfold File Tree -Opens all branches in the file tree so that you can see all files and folders. See . +ViewUnfold File Tree +Opens all branches in the file tree so that you can see all files and folders. See . -ViewFold File Tree -Closes all branches in the file tree. See . +ViewFold File Tree +Closes all branches in the file tree. See . @@ -3548,224 +1359,77 @@ Changes in the repository -The Advanced Menu +The Advanced Menu -AdvancedTag/Branch... -Tags or branches the selected files. See . +AdvancedTag/Branch... +Tags or branches the selected files. See . -AdvancedDelete Tag... -Removes a given tag from the selected files. See . +AdvancedDelete Tag... +Removes a given tag from the selected files. See . -AdvancedUpdate to Tag/Date... -Brings the selected files to a given tag or date, making it sticky. See . +AdvancedUpdate to Tag/Date... +Brings the selected files to a given tag or date, making it sticky. See . -AdvancedUpdate to HEAD... -Brings the selected files to the respective HEAD revision. See . +AdvancedUpdate to HEAD... +Brings the selected files to the respective HEAD revision. See . -AdvancedMerge... -Merges either a given branch or the modifications between two tags into the selected files. See . +AdvancedMerge... +Merges either a given branch or the modifications between two tags into the selected files. See . -AdvancedAdd Watch... -Adds a watch for a set of events on the selected files. See . +AdvancedAdd Watch... +Adds a watch for a set of events on the selected files. See . -AdvancedRemove Watch... -Removes a watch for a set of events from the selected files. See . +AdvancedRemove Watch... +Removes a watch for a set of events from the selected files. See . -AdvancedShow Watchers -Lists the watchers of the selected files. See . +AdvancedShow Watchers +Lists the watchers of the selected files. See . -AdvancedEdit -Runs cvs edit on the selected files. See . +AdvancedEdit +Runs cvs edit on the selected files. See . -AdvancedUnedit -Runs cvs unedit on the selected files. See . +AdvancedUnedit +Runs cvs unedit on the selected files. See . -AdvancedShow Editors -Runs cvs editors on the selected files. See . +AdvancedShow Editors +Runs cvs editors on the selected files. See . -AdvancedLock -Locks the selected files. See . +AdvancedLock +Locks the selected files. See . -AdvancedUnlock -Unlocks the selected files. See . +AdvancedUnlock +Unlocks the selected files. See . -AdvancedCreate Patch Against Repository... -Creates a patch from the modifications in your sandbox. See . +AdvancedCreate Patch Against Repository... +Creates a patch from the modifications in your sandbox. See . @@ -3775,69 +1439,28 @@ Changes in the repository -The Repository Menu +The Repository Menu -RepositoryCreate... -Opens a dialogue which allows you to create a new local repository. See . +RepositoryCreate... +Opens a dialogue which allows you to create a new local repository. See . -RepositoryCheckout... -Opens a dialogue which allows you to checkout a module from a repository. See . +RepositoryCheckout... +Opens a dialogue which allows you to checkout a module from a repository. See . -RepositoryImport... -Opens a dialogue which allows you to import a package into the repository. See . +RepositoryImport... +Opens a dialogue which allows you to import a package into the repository. See . -RepositoryRepositories... -Configures a list of repositories you often use and how to access them. See . +RepositoryRepositories... +Configures a list of repositories you often use and how to access them. See . @@ -3846,164 +1469,53 @@ Changes in the repository -The Settings Menu +The Settings Menu -SettingsShow Toolbar -Determines whether the toolbar is displayed. +SettingsShow Toolbar +Determines whether the toolbar is displayed. -SettingsCreate Folders on Update -Determines whether updates create folders in the sandbox which were not there before (Option to cvs update). +SettingsCreate Folders on Update +Determines whether updates create folders in the sandbox which were not there before (Option to cvs update). -SettingsPrune Empty Folders on Update -Determines whether updates remove empty folders in the sandbox. (Option to cvs update). +SettingsPrune Empty Folders on Update +Determines whether updates remove empty folders in the sandbox. (Option to cvs update). -SettingsUpdate Recursively -Determines whether updates are recursive (Option to cvs update). +SettingsUpdate Recursively +Determines whether updates are recursive (Option to cvs update). -SettingsCommit and Remove Recursively -Determines whether commits and removes are recursive (Option to cvs add, cvs remove resp.). +SettingsCommit and Remove Recursively +Determines whether commits and removes are recursive (Option to cvs add, cvs remove resp.). -SettingsDo cvs edit Automatically When Necessary -Determines whether cvs edit is executed automatically whenever you edit a file. +SettingsDo cvs edit Automatically When Necessary +Determines whether cvs edit is executed automatically whenever you edit a file. -SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... -Opens a dialogue for configuring keybindings. +SettingsConfigure Shortcuts... +Opens a dialogue for configuring keybindings. -SettingsConfigure Toolbars... -Opens a dialogue for configuring &cervisia;'s toolbars. +SettingsConfigure Toolbars... +Opens a dialogue for configuring &cervisia;'s toolbars. -SettingsConfigure Cervisia... -Opens a dialogue for customising &cervisia;. +SettingsConfigure Cervisia... +Opens a dialogue for customising &cervisia;. @@ -4012,88 +1524,33 @@ Changes in the repository -The Help Menu +The Help Menu -F1 HelpHandbook -Invokes the KDE Help system starting at the &cervisia; help pages. (this document). +F1 HelpHandbook +Invokes the KDE Help system starting at the &cervisia; help pages. (this document). -HelpReport Bug... -Opens the Bug report dialogue. +HelpReport Bug... +Opens the Bug report dialogue. -Help About &cervisia; -This will display version and author information. +Help About &cervisia; +This will display version and author information. -HelpAbout KDE -This displays the KDE version and other basic information. +HelpAbout KDE +This displays the KDE version and other basic information. -HelpCVS Manual -Opens the &CVS; info pages in the KDE help system. +HelpCVS Manual +Opens the &CVS; info pages in the KDE help system. @@ -4106,7 +1563,6 @@ Changes in the repository -Credits And Licenses +Credits And Licenses &underFDL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/catman.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/catman.docbook index e0e16896d11..df408454d82 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/catman.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/catman.docbook @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ + --> @@ -11,57 +10,27 @@ - + -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Using &cataloguemanager; +Using &cataloguemanager; -Screenshot of &cataloguemanager; +Screenshot of &cataloguemanager; -Screenshot of &cataloguemanager; +Screenshot of &cataloguemanager; -The Catalogue Manager merges two folders into one tree and displays all the PO and POT files in these folders. The display allows you to easily see if a new template has been added or an old one has been removed. Some information is shown along with each file name: total number of entries, number of fuzzy entries, number of untranslated entries, the date of the last revision and the last translator of the file. -To make it easier for you to find files that need work or are missing the status of each file is also displayed using an icon: +The Catalogue Manager merges two folders into one tree and displays all the PO and POT files in these folders. The display allows you to easily see if a new template has been added or an old one has been removed. Some information is shown along with each file name: total number of entries, number of fuzzy entries, number of untranslated entries, the date of the last revision and the last translator of the file. +To make it easier for you to find files that need work or are missing the status of each file is also displayed using an icon: @@ -70,8 +39,7 @@ - All the messages in this file are translated. + All the messages in this file are translated. @@ -79,8 +47,7 @@ - Some of the messages in this file are fuzzy or untranslated + Some of the messages in this file are fuzzy or untranslated @@ -88,10 +55,7 @@ - This file does not exist in the folder of the PO files. + This file does not exist in the folder of the PO files. @@ -99,8 +63,7 @@ - This file contains syntax errors. + This file contains syntax errors. @@ -108,106 +71,43 @@ - Information about this file is being currently updated. When the update is finished, it will get one of the icons listed above to reflect its state. + Information about this file is being currently updated. When the update is finished, it will get one of the icons listed above to reflect its state. -If an icon is marked with this icon , like , it indicates that this file or folder does not exist in the folder of the POT files. - -You can mark or unmark a file by selecting Toggle Marking in the context menu of a file. - -If you want to toggle or remove all markings in a folder, press the right mouse button over the folder and select Toggle Markings or Remove Markings. The markings are automatically saved when leaving &kbabel;. - -To open a file either double-click on the file, select Open from the context menu or press either Return or &Ctrl;O . - -You can configure the &cataloguemanager; by Settings Configure &cataloguemanager;.... See section Preferences for more details. +If an icon is marked with this icon , like , it indicates that this file or folder does not exist in the folder of the POT files. + +You can mark or unmark a file by selecting Toggle Marking in the context menu of a file. + +If you want to toggle or remove all markings in a folder, press the right mouse button over the folder and select Toggle Markings or Remove Markings. The markings are automatically saved when leaving &kbabel;. + +To open a file either double-click on the file, select Open from the context menu or press either Return or &Ctrl;O . + +You can configure the &cataloguemanager; by Settings Configure &cataloguemanager;.... See section Preferences for more details. -&cataloguemanager; Features -Besides the main feature for opening the files in &kbabel; &cataloguemanager; supports number of other features for maintaining a tree of PO-files. +&cataloguemanager; Features +Besides the main feature for opening the files in &kbabel; &cataloguemanager; supports number of other features for maintaining a tree of PO-files. -Find and replace in multiple files -One of the most requested features for &kbabel; was a possibility to search and replace in multiple files at once. &cataloguemanager; supports this feature with a tight integration with &kbabel; +Find and replace in multiple files +One of the most requested features for &kbabel; was a possibility to search and replace in multiple files at once. &cataloguemanager; supports this feature with a tight integration with &kbabel; -Statistics -&cataloguemanager; can show you a number of statistics about a single file or about the whole folders. The statistics contain number of files, how many of the files have their templates, how many templates are missing. It also counts number of messages in the files and shows statistics about how large parts of the messages are translated, fuzzy-translated or untranslated. +Statistics +&cataloguemanager; can show you a number of statistics about a single file or about the whole folders. The statistics contain number of files, how many of the files have their templates, how many templates are missing. It also counts number of messages in the files and shows statistics about how large parts of the messages are translated, fuzzy-translated or untranslated. -Checking the syntax -This allows you to check the syntax of multiple PO-files using msgfmt. If a file fails this check, it cannot be used for generating a MO-file for binary distribution. Such an incorrect file will typically result in failing compilation of the package the PO-file belongs to. +Checking the syntax +This allows you to check the syntax of multiple PO-files using msgfmt. If a file fails this check, it cannot be used for generating a MO-file for binary distribution. Such an incorrect file will typically result in failing compilation of the package the PO-file belongs to. -User-defined commands -Because &cataloguemanager; cannot provide any functionality you would like to use, you can extend it by defining your own commands. -There are two sets of commands. One for folders and one for single files. You can set them in configuration dialogue and access by pressing &RMB; on an entry in the file list. +User-defined commands +Because &cataloguemanager; cannot provide any functionality you would like to use, you can extend it by defining your own commands. +There are two sets of commands. One for folders and one for single files. You can set them in configuration dialogue and access by pressing &RMB; on an entry in the file list. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/dictionaries.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/dictionaries.docbook index 261d6c6ecfa..f0e7fe01f25 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/dictionaries.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/dictionaries.docbook @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ + --> @@ -11,615 +10,284 @@ - + -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Dictionaries +Dictionaries -&kbabel; has 3 modes which can be used to search translated PO message strings: +&kbabel; has 3 modes which can be used to search translated PO message strings: - Searching translation, using a translation database + Searching translation, using a translation database - Rough translation + Rough translation - &kbabeldict; + &kbabeldict; -Translation database +Translation database -Translation database allows you to store translations in a database based on Berkeley Database II, &ie; it is stored in a binary file on your disk. The database guarantees fast searching in a large number of translations. +Translation database allows you to store translations in a database based on Berkeley Database II, &ie; it is stored in a binary file on your disk. The database guarantees fast searching in a large number of translations. -This mode is the one best integrated with &kbabel;. Besides searching and rough translation it also supports the following features: +This mode is the one best integrated with &kbabel;. Besides searching and rough translation it also supports the following features: -Every new translation typed in the &kbabel; editor can be automatically stored in the database. +Every new translation typed in the &kbabel; editor can be automatically stored in the database. -This database can be used for diff-ing msgid. +This database can be used for diff-ing msgid. -Of course, the more translations are stored in the database, the more productive you can be. To fill the database, you can use the Database tab in the preferences dialogue or you can turn on automatic addition of every translated messages on the same tab. +Of course, the more translations are stored in the database, the more productive you can be. To fill the database, you can use the Database tab in the preferences dialogue or you can turn on automatic addition of every translated messages on the same tab. -Settings -You can configure this searching mode and how it should be used by selecting Settings Configure Dictionary Translation Database in &kbabel; menu. -The Generic tab contains general settings for searching in the database. +Settings +You can configure this searching mode and how it should be used by selecting Settings Configure Dictionary Translation Database in &kbabel; menu. +The Generic tab contains general settings for searching in the database. - Search in whole database (slow) + Search in whole database (slow) - Do not use good keys, search in the whole database. This is slow, but will return the most precise results. + Do not use good keys, search in the whole database. This is slow, but will return the most precise results. - Search in list of "good keys" (best) + Search in list of "good keys" (best) - Use good keys strategy. This option will give you the best tradeoff between speed and exact matching. + Use good keys strategy. This option will give you the best tradeoff between speed and exact matching. - Return the list of "good keys" (fast) + Return the list of "good keys" (fast) - Just return good keys, do not try to eliminate any more texts. This is the fastest provided method, but can lead to a quite large number of imprecise matches. + Just return good keys, do not try to eliminate any more texts. This is the fastest provided method, but can lead to a quite large number of imprecise matches. - Case sensitive + Case sensitive - Distinguish case of letters when searching the text. + Distinguish case of letters when searching the text. - Normalise white space + Normalise white space - Skip unnecessary white space in the texts, so the searching will ignore small differences of white space, ⪚ number of spaces in the text. + Skip unnecessary white space in the texts, so the searching will ignore small differences of white space, ⪚ number of spaces in the text. - Remove context comment + Remove context comment - Do not include context comments in search. You will want this to be turned on. + Do not include context comments in search. You will want this to be turned on. - Character to be ignored + Character to be ignored - Here you can enter characters, which should be ignored while searching. Typical example would be accelerator mark, &ie; & for &kde; texts. + Here you can enter characters, which should be ignored while searching. Typical example would be accelerator mark, &ie; & for &kde; texts. -The Search tab contains finer specification for searching the text. You can define how to search and also allows to use another special way of searching called Word substitution. By substituting one or two words the approximate text can be found as well. For example, assume you are trying to find the text My name is Andrea. +The Search tab contains finer specification for searching the text. You can define how to search and also allows to use another special way of searching called Word substitution. By substituting one or two words the approximate text can be found as well. For example, assume you are trying to find the text My name is Andrea. - Equal + Equal - Text from database matches if it is the same as the searched string. In our example it can be My name is &Andrea (if & is set as ignored character in Characters to be ignored on Generic tab). + Text from database matches if it is the same as the searched string. In our example it can be My name is &Andrea (if & is set as ignored character in Characters to be ignored on Generic tab). - Query is contained + Query is contained - Text from database matches if the searched string is contained in it. For our example it can be My name is Andrea, you know?. + Text from database matches if the searched string is contained in it. For our example it can be My name is Andrea, you know?. - Query contains + Query contains - Text from database matches if the searched string contains it. For our example it can be Andrea. You can use this for enumerating the possibilities to be found. + Text from database matches if the searched string contains it. For our example it can be Andrea. You can use this for enumerating the possibilities to be found. - Regular Expression + Regular Expression - Consider searched text as a regular expression. This is mainly used for &kbabeldict;. You can hardly expect regular expressions in PO files. + Consider searched text as a regular expression. This is mainly used for &kbabeldict;. You can hardly expect regular expressions in PO files. - Use one word substitution + Use one word substitution - If the query text contains less words than specified below, it also tries to replace one of the words in the query. In our example it will find Your name is Andrea as well. + If the query text contains less words than specified below, it also tries to replace one of the words in the query. In our example it will find Your name is Andrea as well. - Max number of words in the query + Max number of words in the query - Maximal number of words in a query to enable one word substitution. + Maximal number of words in a query to enable one word substitution. - Local characters for regular expressions + Local characters for regular expressions - Characters to be considered part of regular expressions. + Characters to be considered part of regular expressions. -Two-word substitution is not implemented yet. +Two-word substitution is not implemented yet. -Filling the database -The Database tab allows to define where is the database stored on disk (Database folder) and if it should be used for automatic storing of the new translations (Auto add entry to database). In this case you should specify the author of the new translation in Auto added entry author. -The rest of the tab allows you to fill the database from PO files that already exist. Use one of the buttons in the middle of the dialogue box. The progress of the file load will be shown by progress bars below the buttons. The Repeated strings button should be used in the special case where one translated string is repeated many times, to prevent storing unnecessary copies. Here you can limit the stored strings. +Filling the database +The Database tab allows to define where is the database stored on disk (Database folder) and if it should be used for automatic storing of the new translations (Auto add entry to database). In this case you should specify the author of the new translation in Auto added entry author. +The rest of the tab allows you to fill the database from PO files that already exist. Use one of the buttons in the middle of the dialogue box. The progress of the file load will be shown by progress bars below the buttons. The Repeated strings button should be used in the special case where one translated string is repeated many times, to prevent storing unnecessary copies. Here you can limit the stored strings. -Filling the database +Filling the database -Filling the database by existing PO-files +Filling the database by existing PO-files - + -Defining good keys -On the Good keys tab are the thresholds to specify how to fill the list of good keys. Minimum number of query words in the key (%) specifies exactly that. Text will need to contain only this per cent of the words to qualify as good key. Opposite can be specified via Minimum number of words of the key also in the query (%). The length of the words can be set by Max length spinbox. -Searched text typically contains number of generic words, ⪚ articles. You can eliminate the words based on the frequency. You can discard them by Discard words more frequent than or consider as always present by frequent words are considered as in every key. This way the frequent words will be almost invisible for queries. +Defining good keys +On the Good keys tab are the thresholds to specify how to fill the list of good keys. Minimum number of query words in the key (%) specifies exactly that. Text will need to contain only this per cent of the words to qualify as good key. Opposite can be specified via Minimum number of words of the key also in the query (%). The length of the words can be set by Max length spinbox. +Searched text typically contains number of generic words, ⪚ articles. You can eliminate the words based on the frequency. You can discard them by Discard words more frequent than or consider as always present by frequent words are considered as in every key. This way the frequent words will be almost invisible for queries. -Auxiliary PO file - -This searching mode is based on matching the same original English string (the msgid) translated in some other language in an auxillary PO file. It is very common for romanic languages to have similar words, similarly for anglosaxon and slavonic ones. - -For example, say I wanted to translate the word on, from tdelibs.po, into Romanian but have no idea. I look in the same file for French and find actif, and in the Spanish one find activado. So, I conclude that the best one in Romanian will be active. &kbabel; automates this task. Currently you can define only one auxiliary file to search. +Auxiliary PO file + +This searching mode is based on matching the same original English string (the msgid) translated in some other language in an auxillary PO file. It is very common for romanic languages to have similar words, similarly for anglosaxon and slavonic ones. + +For example, say I wanted to translate the word on, from tdelibs.po, into Romanian but have no idea. I look in the same file for French and find actif, and in the Spanish one find activado. So, I conclude that the best one in Romanian will be active. &kbabel; automates this task. Currently you can define only one auxiliary file to search. -Settings -You can configure this searching mode by selecting Settings Configure Dictionary PO Auxiliary from the &kbabel; menu. - -In the Configure Dictionary PO Auxiliary dialogue you can select the path to the auxiliary PO file. To automate PO-file switching when you change current edited file there are many variables delimited by @ char that are replaced by appropriate values: +Settings +You can configure this searching mode by selecting Settings Configure Dictionary PO Auxiliary from the &kbabel; menu. + +In the Configure Dictionary PO Auxiliary dialogue you can select the path to the auxiliary PO file. To automate PO-file switching when you change current edited file there are many variables delimited by @ char that are replaced by appropriate values: - @PACKAGE@ - The name of application or package currently being translated. For example, it can expand to kbabel, tdelibs, konqueror and so on. + @PACKAGE@ + The name of application or package currently being translated. For example, it can expand to kbabel, tdelibs, konqueror and so on. - @LANG@ - The language code. For example can expand to: en_GB, de, ro, fr etc. + @LANG@ + The language code. For example can expand to: en_GB, de, ro, fr etc. - @DIRn@ - where n is a positive integer. This expands to the n-th folder counted from the filename (right to left). + @DIRn@ + where n is a positive integer. This expands to the n-th folder counted from the filename (right to left). -The edit line displays the actual path to the auxiliary PO file. While it is best to use the provided variables in a path it is possible to choose an absolute, real path to an existing PO file. Let's take an example. - -I'm Romanian and I have some knowledge about French language and I work on &kde; translation. - -First step is to download a very fresh tde-i18n-fr.tar.bz2 from the &kde; &FTP; site or to use the CVS system to put on my hard-disk a French translation tree. I do this into /home/clau/cvs-cvs.kde.org/tde-i18n/fr. - -My PO sources folder is in /home/clau/cvs-cvs.kde.org/tde-i18n/ro. Don't forget to select PO Auxiliary as the default dictionary and check Automatically start search on the Search tab from &kbabel;'s Preferences dialogue. +The edit line displays the actual path to the auxiliary PO file. While it is best to use the provided variables in a path it is possible to choose an absolute, real path to an existing PO file. Let's take an example. + +I'm Romanian and I have some knowledge about French language and I work on &kde; translation. + +First step is to download a very fresh tde-i18n-fr.tar.bz2 from the &kde; &FTP; site or to use the CVS system to put on my hard-disk a French translation tree. I do this into /home/clau/cvs-cvs.kde.org/tde-i18n/fr. + +My PO sources folder is in /home/clau/cvs-cvs.kde.org/tde-i18n/ro. Don't forget to select PO Auxiliary as the default dictionary and check Automatically start search on the Search tab from &kbabel;'s Preferences dialogue. -PO compendium - -A compendium is a file containing a collection of all translation messages (pairs of msgid and msgstr) in a project, ⪚ in &kde;. Typically, compendium for a given language is created by concatenating all PO files of the project for the language. Compendium can contain translated, untranslated and fuzzy messages. Untranslated ones are ignored by this module. - -Similarly to Auxiliary PO, this searching mode is based on matching the same original string (msgid) in a compendium. Currently you can define only one compendium file to search. - -This mode is very useful if you are not using the translation database and you want to achieve consistent translation with other translations. By the way, compendium files are much easier to share with other translators and even other translation projects because they can be generated for them as well. +PO compendium + +A compendium is a file containing a collection of all translation messages (pairs of msgid and msgstr) in a project, ⪚ in &kde;. Typically, compendium for a given language is created by concatenating all PO files of the project for the language. Compendium can contain translated, untranslated and fuzzy messages. Untranslated ones are ignored by this module. + +Similarly to Auxiliary PO, this searching mode is based on matching the same original string (msgid) in a compendium. Currently you can define only one compendium file to search. + +This mode is very useful if you are not using the translation database and you want to achieve consistent translation with other translations. By the way, compendium files are much easier to share with other translators and even other translation projects because they can be generated for them as well. -Settings - -You can configure this searching mode by selecting Settings Configure Dictionary PO Compendium in &kbabel;'s menu. - -In Configure Dictionary PO Compendium dialogue you can select the path to a compendium file. To automate compendium file switching when you change the translation language, there is a variable delimited by @ char which si replaced by appropriate value: +Settings + +You can configure this searching mode by selecting Settings Configure Dictionary PO Compendium in &kbabel;'s menu. + +In Configure Dictionary PO Compendium dialogue you can select the path to a compendium file. To automate compendium file switching when you change the translation language, there is a variable delimited by @ char which si replaced by appropriate value: - @LANG@ - The language code. For example can expand to: en_GB, de, ro, fr etc. + @LANG@ + The language code. For example can expand to: en_GB, de, ro, fr etc. -In the edit line is displayed the actual path to compendium PO file. While you had best use provided variables in path, it's possible to choose an absolute, real path to an existing PO file to be used as a compendium. +In the edit line is displayed the actual path to compendium PO file. While you had best use provided variables in path, it's possible to choose an absolute, real path to an existing PO file to be used as a compendium. -A very fresh compendium for &kde; translation into ⪚ French you can download fr.messages.bz2 from the &kde; &FTP; site. +A very fresh compendium for &kde; translation into ⪚ French you can download fr.messages.bz2 from the &kde; &FTP; site. -You can define how to search in the compendium using options below the path. They are divided into two groups: text-matching options, where you can specify how the text is compared and whether to ignore fuzzy translations, and message-matching options, which determine if the translation from compendium should be a substring of searching message or vice versa. +You can define how to search in the compendium using options below the path. They are divided into two groups: text-matching options, where you can specify how the text is compared and whether to ignore fuzzy translations, and message-matching options, which determine if the translation from compendium should be a substring of searching message or vice versa. - Case sensitive + Case sensitive - If the matching of message in compendium should distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters. + If the matching of message in compendium should distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters. - Ignore fuzzy string + Ignore fuzzy string - If the fuzzy messages in the compendium should be ignored for searching. The compendium can contain fuzzy messages, since it is typically created by concatenating the PO files of the project which can include fuzzy messages. Untranslated ones are ignored always (You can't search for translation in untranslated messages, right?) + If the fuzzy messages in the compendium should be ignored for searching. The compendium can contain fuzzy messages, since it is typically created by concatenating the PO files of the project which can include fuzzy messages. Untranslated ones are ignored always (You can't search for translation in untranslated messages, right?) - Only whole words + Only whole words - If the matching text should start and end at the boundaries of words. + If the matching text should start and end at the boundaries of words. - A text matches if it is equal to search text + A text matches if it is equal to search text - A text in compendium matches the search text only if it is exactly the same (of course using the options above). + A text in compendium matches the search text only if it is exactly the same (of course using the options above). - A text matches if it is similar to search text + A text matches if it is similar to search text - A text in compendium matches the search text only if it is similar. Both texts are compared by short chunks of letters (3-grams) and at least half of the chunks has to be same. + A text in compendium matches the search text only if it is similar. Both texts are compared by short chunks of letters (3-grams) and at least half of the chunks has to be same. - A text matches if it contains search text + A text matches if it contains search text - A text in compendium matches the search text if it contains the search text. + A text in compendium matches the search text if it contains the search text. - A text matches if it is contained in search text + A text matches if it is contained in search text - A text in compendium matches the search text if it is contained the search text. + A text in compendium matches the search text if it is contained the search text. - A text matches if it contains a word of search text + A text matches if it contains a word of search text - The texts are divided to words and a text in compendium matches the search text only if it contains some word from the search text. + The texts are divided to words and a text in compendium matches the search text only if it contains some word from the search text. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/faq.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/faq.docbook index 1109bb9abcb..7da2eeaa399 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/faq.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/faq.docbook @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ + --> @@ -10,85 +9,31 @@ - + -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Questions and Answers +Questions and Answers - Why does &kbabel; show question marks when entering language specific characters? + Why does &kbabel; show question marks when entering language specific characters? - This is a problem with your locale settings. The following might help: Exit &kbabel;, in a shell set the environment variable LANG to a locale, valid for your language. If you use bash do export LANG=change this. For example, when you use german characters, do export LANG=de_DE.88591. Then start &kbabel; from this shell. If the problem is gone, insert this command in your ~/.profile. + This is a problem with your locale settings. The following might help: Exit &kbabel;, in a shell set the environment variable LANG to a locale, valid for your language. If you use bash do export LANG=change this. For example, when you use german characters, do export LANG=de_DE.88591. Then start &kbabel; from this shell. If the problem is gone, insert this command in your ~/.profile. - Why does &kbabel; show question marks instead of language specific characters after loading a PO file? + Why does &kbabel; show question marks instead of language specific characters after loading a PO file? - The text contains characters, which can not be displayed with your system font. If you are sure, that the text contains no such characters, the file might have been corrupted somehow. In this case, mark such a question mark and press &Ctrl;F to find all the corrupted characters and replace them. Do not search for real question marks, because these characters are only displayed as question marks, but internally they are different characters. Otherwise you might want to install an Unicode font, which contains all necessary characters. + The text contains characters, which can not be displayed with your system font. If you are sure, that the text contains no such characters, the file might have been corrupted somehow. In this case, mark such a question mark and press &Ctrl;F to find all the corrupted characters and replace them. Do not search for real question marks, because these characters are only displayed as question marks, but internally they are different characters. Otherwise you might want to install an Unicode font, which contains all necessary characters. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/glossary.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/glossary.docbook index 00a4beaa0b1..e264d9c884f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/glossary.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/glossary.docbook @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ + --> @@ -10,249 +9,83 @@ - + -AlexWalker
alex@x3ja.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AlexWalker
alex@x3ja.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Glossary +Glossary -A +A - Auxiliary file + Auxiliary file - is a &kbabel; specific issue. It is an option for the user to set up one PO file to search through for original messages. For example, if you're a member of French team and have some Spanish or Italian knowledge you can grab and set-up an auxiliary Spanish PO file associated with the file currently being translated. + is a &kbabel; specific issue. It is an option for the user to set up one PO file to search through for original messages. For example, if you're a member of French team and have some Spanish or Italian knowledge you can grab and set-up an auxiliary Spanish PO file associated with the file currently being translated. -C +C - Compendium file + Compendium file - is a collection of all translations for one language. This big PO file is made by unique messages from all applications' PO files. It can be used to fill in all already translated strings into a new yet untranslated or partially translated PO file. &kbabel; uses such a file in the PO Compendium search engine. + is a collection of all translations for one language. This big PO file is made by unique messages from all applications' PO files. It can be used to fill in all already translated strings into a new yet untranslated or partially translated PO file. &kbabel; uses such a file in the PO Compendium search engine. -F +F - Fuzzy + Fuzzy - This is a flag generated, in general, by msgmerge. It shows that a msgstr string might not be a correct translation. The translator must see and make modifications to the string if necessary and then remove the fuzzy flag from the message's comment. + This is a flag generated, in general, by msgmerge. It shows that a msgstr string might not be a correct translation. The translator must see and make modifications to the string if necessary and then remove the fuzzy flag from the message's comment. -I - Internationalisation i18n - is the operation by which an application is made aware and able to support multiple languages. The word internationalisation has 20 characters so, to shorten it, people started to write only the first and last characters and between them write the number of intermediate characters (18) forming the common abbreviation i18n. - +I + Internationalisation i18n + is the operation by which an application is made aware and able to support multiple languages. The word internationalisation has 20 characters so, to shorten it, people started to write only the first and last characters and between them write the number of intermediate characters (18) forming the common abbreviation i18n. + -L - Localisation l10n - is the operation by which an application already internationalised is made to process input and output in a fashion desired by some cultural and language habits. The word localisation has 12 characters so, to shorten it, people started to write only the first and last characters and between them write the number of intermediate characters (10) forming the common abbreviation l10n. - +L + Localisation l10n + is the operation by which an application already internationalised is made to process input and output in a fashion desired by some cultural and language habits. The word localisation has 12 characters so, to shorten it, people started to write only the first and last characters and between them write the number of intermediate characters (10) forming the common abbreviation l10n. + -M - MO file MO - MO stands for Machine Object. A MO file contains binary data suitable for reading by computers. The contents of a MO file are organised as a database to minimise the lookup time for translated strings. MO files are obtained by compiling PO files using msgfmt. - +M + MO file MO + MO stands for Machine Object. A MO file contains binary data suitable for reading by computers. The contents of a MO file are organised as a database to minimise the lookup time for translated strings. MO files are obtained by compiling PO files using msgfmt. + - Message ID msgid - msgid is the keyword which introduces the original string in a PO file. It is followed by a C-like string that spans one or more lines. - + Message ID msgid + msgid is the keyword which introduces the original string in a PO file. It is followed by a C-like string that spans one or more lines. + - Message String msgstr - msgstr is the keyword which introduces the translated string in PO file. It is followed by C-like string that span on one or multiple lines. - + Message String msgstr + msgstr is the keyword which introduces the translated string in PO file. It is followed by C-like string that span on one or multiple lines. + -P - PO file PO - PO stands for Portable Object. PO files contain sets of strings which associate each translatable string with its translation in a particular language. A single PO file relates to only one language. A PO file is derived from a POT file and is edited either by hand or using &kbabel;. - +P + PO file PO + PO stands for Portable Object. PO files contain sets of strings which associate each translatable string with its translation in a particular language. A single PO file relates to only one language. A PO file is derived from a POT file and is edited either by hand or using &kbabel;. + - POT file POT - POT stands for Portable Object Template. A POT file is built by extracting all the translatable strings from application source files. A POT file does not contain translations into any particular language— it is used by the translators as a template. - + POT file POT + POT stands for Portable Object Template. A POT file is built by extracting all the translatable strings from application source files. A POT file does not contain translations into any particular language— it is used by the translators as a template. + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/index.docbook index 039381641ca..fa621352ec6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/index.docbook @@ -11,89 +11,47 @@ - + ]> -The &kbabel; Handbook +The &kbabel; Handbook -&Stanislav.Visnovsky; &Stanislav.Visnovsky.mail; -&Matthias.Kiefer; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Stanislav.Visnovsky; &Stanislav.Visnovsky.mail; +&Matthias.Kiefer; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-09-18 -3.1.91 +2003-09-18 +3.1.91 -&kbabel; is a suite of of an advanced and easy to use PO file editor comprising &kbabel;, a multi functional &cataloguemanager; and a dictionary for translators &kbabeldict;. It supports many advanced features and it lets you customise many options. +&kbabel; is a suite of of an advanced and easy to use PO file editor comprising &kbabel;, a multi functional &cataloguemanager; and a dictionary for translators &kbabeldict;. It supports many advanced features and it lets you customise many options. -KDE -KBabel -catalogmanager -tdesdk -gettext -translation -i18n -l10n +KDE +KBabel +catalogmanager +tdesdk +gettext +translation +i18n +l10n -Introduction - -&kbabel; is an advanced and easy to use PO file (&GNU; gettext message catalogues) editor. It has many features, that make it easy to edit and manage your PO files. This includes full navigation capabilities, extensive editing functionality, search functions, syntax checking and statistics function. &cataloguemanager; is a file manager view, which helps you keep an overview over your PO files. &kbabeldict; allows you to translate any text using &kbabel; capabilities for automated translation. The &kbabel; suite will help you to translate quickly and also to keep translations consistent. - -With the &kde; project growing continuously, the number of PO messages is over 47000 at the time of writing this documentation (plus another 20000 messages used for translating application documentation). There is a need to stay organised and consistent across all translations. +Introduction + +&kbabel; is an advanced and easy to use PO file (&GNU; gettext message catalogues) editor. It has many features, that make it easy to edit and manage your PO files. This includes full navigation capabilities, extensive editing functionality, search functions, syntax checking and statistics function. &cataloguemanager; is a file manager view, which helps you keep an overview over your PO files. &kbabeldict; allows you to translate any text using &kbabel; capabilities for automated translation. The &kbabel; suite will help you to translate quickly and also to keep translations consistent. + +With the &kde; project growing continuously, the number of PO messages is over 47000 at the time of writing this documentation (plus another 20000 messages used for translating application documentation). There is a need to stay organised and consistent across all translations. @@ -107,68 +65,47 @@ -Credits and Licence - -&kbabel; -Program Copyright © 1999-2000 &Matthias.Kiefer; &Matthias.Kiefer.mail; -Contributors: -&Thomas.Diehl; &Thomas.Diehl.mail; +Credits and Licence + +&kbabel; +Program Copyright © 1999-2000 &Matthias.Kiefer; &Matthias.Kiefer.mail; +Contributors: +&Thomas.Diehl; &Thomas.Diehl.mail; -&Stephan.Kulow; &Stephan.Kulow.mail; +&Stephan.Kulow; &Stephan.Kulow.mail; -Documentation Copyright © 2000 &Claudiu.Costin; &Claudiu.Costin.mail; and &Matthias.Kiefer; &Matthias.Kiefer.mail; +Documentation Copyright © 2000 &Claudiu.Costin; &Claudiu.Costin.mail; and &Matthias.Kiefer; &Matthias.Kiefer.mail; -Update for &kde; 3.0 Copyright © 2002 &Stanislav.Visnovsky; &Stanislav.Visnovsky.mail; +Update for &kde; 3.0 Copyright © 2002 &Stanislav.Visnovsky; &Stanislav.Visnovsky.mail; -Malcolm Huntermalcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Malcolm Huntermalcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; &glossary; -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &kbabel; +How to obtain &kbabel; &install.intro.documentation; -Requirements +Requirements -In order to successfully use &kbabel;, you need &kde; 3.x. +In order to successfully use &kbabel;, you need &kde; 3.x. -All required libraries as well as &kbabel; itself can be found on &kde-ftp;. +All required libraries as well as &kbabel; itself can be found on &kde-ftp;. -If you want to use the translation database, you need Berkeley Database II. +If you want to use the translation database, you need Berkeley Database II. -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation &install.compile.documentation; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/kbabeldict.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/kbabeldict.docbook index 397d20ad65c..c56e9e54e68 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/kbabeldict.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/kbabeldict.docbook @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ + --> @@ -10,82 +9,39 @@ - + -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Using &kbabeldict; +Using &kbabeldict; -&kbabeldict; is a simple interface for translation modules for &kbabel;. It allows you to search for translations. +&kbabeldict; is a simple interface for translation modules for &kbabel;. It allows you to search for translations. -Screenshot of &kbabeldict; +Screenshot of &kbabeldict; -Screenshot of &kbabeldict; +Screenshot of &kbabeldict; -The screenshot above does not contain settings for selected module. You can show them using Show Settings. Preferences widget for selected module will be shown on the right side of the window. The &kbabeldict; window then looks like this: +The screenshot above does not contain settings for selected module. You can show them using Show Settings. Preferences widget for selected module will be shown on the right side of the window. The &kbabeldict; window then looks like this: -Screenshot of &kbabeldict; +Screenshot of &kbabeldict; -Screenshot of &kbabeldict; with shown settings +Screenshot of &kbabeldict; with shown settings -The usage is very simple. You select a module to in the Search in module combo-box. Then you enter the phrase to lookup and press Start Search. All found messages are shown in the list below, which is the same as a tool in the &kbabel; main window. Searching can be stopped by pressing Stop. In case you want to search in translated text, not in original English message, you should use Search in translations. -Buttons on the bottom of the window can be used for closing &kbabeldict;, showing/hiding the module settings or displaying a dialogue with credits for &kbabeldict; and the modules themselves. +The usage is very simple. You select a module to in the Search in module combo-box. Then you enter the phrase to lookup and press Start Search. All found messages are shown in the list below, which is the same as a tool in the &kbabel; main window. Searching can be stopped by pressing Stop. In case you want to search in translated text, not in original English message, you should use Search in translations. +Buttons on the bottom of the window can be used for closing &kbabeldict;, showing/hiding the module settings or displaying a dialogue with credits for &kbabeldict; and the modules themselves. -For description of the standard modules and their settings see . +For description of the standard modules and their settings see . + --> @@ -11,218 +10,116 @@ -AndrewColes +AndrewColes -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Command Reference +Command Reference -The &kbabel; menu +The &kbabel; menu -The File Menu +The File Menu - &Ctrl;O File Open + &Ctrl;O File Open - Opens a PO file. If the current file is modified you will be prompted to save it first. + Opens a PO file. If the current file is modified you will be prompted to save it first. - File Open Recent + File Open Recent - Opens a recently edited PO file from the recently-used documents menu + Opens a recently edited PO file from the recently-used documents menu - &Ctrl;S File Save + &Ctrl;S File Save - Saves the current PO file. If it is not modified no action is taken. + Saves the current PO file. If it is not modified no action is taken. - File Save As + File Save As - Saves the current PO file under a new name + Saves the current PO file under a new name - File Save Special + File Save Special - Displays the Save Settings dialogue and then saves the current PO file under a new name + Displays the Save Settings dialogue and then saves the current PO file under a new name - File Revert + File Revert - Loads the last saved version of the current PO file + Loads the last saved version of the current PO file - File Mail + File Mail - Prompts for an archive filename in which to store the current PO file then opens an email composer window with the archive as an attachment + Prompts for an archive filename in which to store the current PO file then opens an email composer window with the archive as an attachment - File New View + File New View - Opens a new window with the currently loaded file. Very useful if you have to translate large files and need to refer back to some strings. + Opens a new window with the currently loaded file. Very useful if you have to translate large files and need to refer back to some strings. - File New Window + File New Window - Opens a new empty window + Opens a new empty window - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit - Quits &kbabel; editor + Quits &kbabel; editor @@ -230,345 +127,162 @@ -The Edit Menu +The Edit Menu - &Ctrl;Z Edit Undo + &Ctrl;Z Edit Undo - Undoes the last edit action in the translation edit box + Undoes the last edit action in the translation edit box - &Ctrl;&Shift;Z Edit Redo + &Ctrl;&Shift;Z Edit Redo - Redoes the last undone edit action in the translation edit box + Redoes the last undone edit action in the translation edit box - &Ctrl;X Edit Cut + &Ctrl;X Edit Cut - Cuts the selected text and moves it to the clipboard + Cuts the selected text and moves it to the clipboard - &Ctrl;C Edit Copy + &Ctrl;C Edit Copy - Copies the selected text to the clipboard + Copies the selected text to the clipboard - &Ctrl;V Edit Paste + &Ctrl;V Edit Paste - Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor position in the translation edit box. + Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor position in the translation edit box. - Edit Select All + Edit Select All - Selects all text in the translation edit box + Selects all text in the translation edit box - &Ctrl;F Edit Find... + &Ctrl;F Edit Find... - Opens a Find dialogue for searching for strings in the current PO file + Opens a Find dialogue for searching for strings in the current PO file - F3 Edit Find Next + F3 Edit Find Next - Finds the next occurrence of a string from the previous search action + Finds the next occurrence of a string from the previous search action - &Ctrl;R Edit Replace... + &Ctrl;R Edit Replace... - Opens the Replace dialogue to search for and replace strings in the current PO file + Opens the Replace dialogue to search for and replace strings in the current PO file - &Ctrl;Delete Edit Clear + &Ctrl;Delete Edit Clear - Clears the translation for the current msgid + Clears the translation for the current msgid - &Ctrl;Space Edit Copy msgid to msgstr + &Ctrl;Space Edit Copy msgid to msgstr - Copies the original English string into the translation edit box. This is useful when you do not need to make any changes (or only minor changes) to the original English text (msgstr). + Copies the original English string into the translation edit box. This is useful when you do not need to make any changes (or only minor changes) to the original English text (msgstr). - &Ctrl;&Alt;Space Edit Copy search result to msgstr + &Ctrl;&Alt;Space Edit Copy search result to msgstr - Copies a string found after a translation search into the msgstr edit box. This is very useful if you do not want to keep re-translating the same message again and again. + Copies a string found after a translation search into the msgstr edit box. This is very useful if you do not want to keep re-translating the same message again and again. - &Ctrl;U Edit Toggle Fuzzy Status + &Ctrl;U Edit Toggle Fuzzy Status - Toggles the fuzzy status for the current entry. It can be useful to turn fuzzy on, ⪚ to mark the translation for another review. + Toggles the fuzzy status for the current entry. It can be useful to turn fuzzy on, ⪚ to mark the translation for another review. - &Ctrl;&Alt;N Edit Insert Next Tag + &Ctrl;&Alt;N Edit Insert Next Tag - Inserts the next tag found in the msgid into the translation, if the original English string contains markup tags + Inserts the next tag found in the msgid into the translation, if the original English string contains markup tags - &Ctrl;&Alt;N Edit Insert Tag + &Ctrl;&Alt;N Edit Insert Tag - This submenu contains all markup tags found in the original English string. By selecting one of them you can insert at the current position of cursor in translated text. translation. + This submenu contains all markup tags found in the original English string. By selecting one of them you can insert at the current position of cursor in translated text. translation. - Edit Edit Header... + Edit Edit Header... - Edits the PO file header. Actually there are many header lines, which keep the last translated date, translator name and email, language and translated text encoding &etc;. + Edits the PO file header. Actually there are many header lines, which keep the last translated date, translator name and email, language and translated text encoding &etc;. @@ -576,318 +290,152 @@ -The Go Menu +The Go Menu - Page Up Go Previous + Page Up Go Previous - Skips to the previous entry in the PO file. + Skips to the previous entry in the PO file. - Page Down Go Next + Page Down Go Next - Skips to the next entry in the PO file. + Skips to the next entry in the PO file. - Go Go to... + Go Go to... - Opens a dialogue to jump to a specific entry number within the PO file. + Opens a dialogue to jump to a specific entry number within the PO file. - Go First Entry + Go First Entry - Jumps to the first entry in the PO file. + Jumps to the first entry in the PO file. - Go Last Entry + Go Last Entry - Jumps to the last entry in the PO file. + Jumps to the last entry in the PO file. - &Ctrl;&Shift;Page Up Go Previous fuzzy or untranslated + &Ctrl;&Shift;Page Up Go Previous fuzzy or untranslated - Jumps to the entry previous to the current one that is untranslated or marked as fuzzy. + Jumps to the entry previous to the current one that is untranslated or marked as fuzzy. - &Ctrl;&Shift;Page Down Go Next fuzzy or untranslated + &Ctrl;&Shift;Page Down Go Next fuzzy or untranslated - Jumps to the next entry after the current one which is untranslated or marked as fuzzy. + Jumps to the next entry after the current one which is untranslated or marked as fuzzy. - &Ctrl;PgUp Go Previous fuzzy + &Ctrl;PgUp Go Previous fuzzy - Jumps to the entry previous to the current one that is marked as fuzzy. + Jumps to the entry previous to the current one that is marked as fuzzy. - &Ctrl;Page Down Go Next fuzzy + &Ctrl;Page Down Go Next fuzzy - Jumps to the next entry after the current one that is marked as fuzzy. + Jumps to the next entry after the current one that is marked as fuzzy. - &Alt;Page Up Go Previous untranslated + &Alt;Page Up Go Previous untranslated - Jumps to the entry previous to the current one that is untranslated. + Jumps to the entry previous to the current one that is untranslated. - &Alt;Page Down Go Next untranslated + &Alt;Page Down Go Next untranslated - Jumps to the next entry after the current one that is untranslated. + Jumps to the next entry after the current one that is untranslated. - &Shift;Page Up Go Previous error + &Shift;Page Up Go Previous error - Jumps to the previous entry that has an error. This is usually when double-quotes are not escaped or the original string ends with a "newline" (\n) character and the translated string does not (and vice versa). + Jumps to the previous entry that has an error. This is usually when double-quotes are not escaped or the original string ends with a "newline" (\n) character and the translated string does not (and vice versa). - &Shift;Page Down Go Next error + &Shift;Page Down Go Next error - Jumps to the next entry with an error. + Jumps to the next entry with an error. - &Alt;Left Arrow Go Back + &Alt;Left Arrow Go Back - Jump to last visited entry in PO file. + Jump to last visited entry in PO file. - &Alt;Right Arrow Go Forward + &Alt;Right Arrow Go Forward - Jump to previous visited entry in PO file. + Jump to previous visited entry in PO file. @@ -895,138 +443,70 @@ -The Dictionaries Menu -Note that this menu is dynamic: it depends on the installed dictionaries plugins. By default are three of them. +The Dictionaries Menu +Note that this menu is dynamic: it depends on the installed dictionaries plugins. By default are three of them. - Dictionaries Search Text KDE Database Search Engine + Dictionaries Search Text KDE Database Search Engine - Start searching translation for current original English message using &kde; Database Search Engine. + Start searching translation for current original English message using &kde; Database Search Engine. - Dictionaries Search Text PO Auxiliary + Dictionaries Search Text PO Auxiliary - Start searching translation for current original English message in PO file defined by user. + Start searching translation for current original English message in PO file defined by user. - Dictionaries Search Text PO Compendium + Dictionaries Search Text PO Compendium - Start searching translation for current original English message in compendium file (made by merging all translated messages for one language). + Start searching translation for current original English message in compendium file (made by merging all translated messages for one language). - Dictionaries Search Selected Text KDE Database Search Engine + Dictionaries Search Selected Text KDE Database Search Engine - Start searching selected text using &kde; Database Search Engine. + Start searching selected text using &kde; Database Search Engine. - Dictionaries Search Selected Text PO Auxiliary + Dictionaries Search Selected Text PO Auxiliary - Start searching selected text using file defined by user. + Start searching selected text using file defined by user. - Dictionaries Search Selected Text PO Compendium + Dictionaries Search Selected Text PO Compendium - Start searching selected text using compendium file with all language translated messages. + Start searching selected text using compendium file with all language translated messages. - Dictionaries Edit Dictionary + Dictionaries Edit Dictionary - Allow you to edit content of current dictionary. Useful if you found errors in dictionary and do not want errors to be reported when searching and replacing strings. (Not implemented yet) + Allow you to edit content of current dictionary. Useful if you found errors in dictionary and do not want errors to be reported when searching and replacing strings. (Not implemented yet) @@ -1035,725 +515,352 @@ -The Tools Menu +The Tools Menu - Tools Spelling Spell check... + Tools Spelling Spell check... - Display the spell-check configuration dialogue. After you have chosen the desired options, hit OK and the normal spell-checking dialogue will appear. + Display the spell-check configuration dialogue. After you have chosen the desired options, hit OK and the normal spell-checking dialogue will appear. - Tools Spelling Check All... + Tools Spelling Check All... - Start spell-checking all words for an opened PO file. + Start spell-checking all words for an opened PO file. - Tools Spelling Check From Cursor Position... + Tools Spelling Check From Cursor Position... - Start spell-checking from current cursor position. + Start spell-checking from current cursor position. - Tools Spelling Check Current... + Tools Spelling Check Current... - Spell-check only current entry from PO file. + Spell-check only current entry from PO file. - Tools Spelling Check Marked Text... + Tools Spelling Check Marked Text... - Spell-check only selected text in MsgStr editbox. + Spell-check only selected text in MsgStr editbox. - &Ctrl;T Tools Validation Check Syntax + &Ctrl;T Tools Validation Check Syntax - Check syntax for current PO file. Errors may appear from CVS merging or users' mistakes when the translating process is performed by hand. + Check syntax for current PO file. Errors may appear from CVS merging or users' mistakes when the translating process is performed by hand. - &Ctrl;D Tools Validation Check Arguments + &Ctrl;D Tools Validation Check Arguments - When this option is selected, C-format strings in the original message and the translation are checked to ensure the number of format sequences and the order are consistent. + When this option is selected, C-format strings in the original message and the translation are checked to ensure the number of format sequences and the order are consistent. - &Ctrl;H Tools Validation Check Accelerators + &Ctrl;H Tools Validation Check Accelerators - When this option is selected, &kbabel; checks if the number of accelerator characters is identical in both the original and the translated string. Note that accelerator marker is & in &kde; (but not in every programming toolkit). See the Miscellaneous section below to find out how to change a keyboard accelerator. + When this option is selected, &kbabel; checks if the number of accelerator characters is identical in both the original and the translated string. Note that accelerator marker is & in &kde; (but not in every programming toolkit). See the Miscellaneous section below to find out how to change a keyboard accelerator. - &Ctrl;K Tools Validation Look for Translated Context Info + &Ctrl;K Tools Validation Look for Translated Context Info - Some original messages are marked with context information to mark them as being unique even if they represent same word. This is because many simple words, such as Save, are translated into many languages. Context information is marked with _:. Many unexperienced translators translate the context information and fill their PO files with garbage. Check this box to make sure you will be warned about these errors in a file. + Some original messages are marked with context information to mark them as being unique even if they represent same word. This is because many simple words, such as Save, are translated into many languages. Context information is marked with _:. Many unexperienced translators translate the context information and fill their PO files with garbage. Check this box to make sure you will be warned about these errors in a file. - Tools Validation Check Plural Forms (KDE only) + Tools Validation Check Plural Forms (KDE only) - Check if the PO file contains the correct number of translations for each &kde;-specific plural form message. + Check if the PO file contains the correct number of translations for each &kde;-specific plural form message. - &Ctrl;J Tools Validation Check Equations + &Ctrl;J Tools Validation Check Equations - Check whether the left side of the translated string is the same as the left side of the original string. Sides are delimited by an equals-sign character. + Check whether the left side of the translated string is the same as the left side of the original string. Sides are delimited by an equals-sign character. - F5 Tools Diff Show Diff + F5 Tools Diff Show Diff - Show difference found to the original translated message. + Show difference found to the original translated message. - F6 Tools Diff Show Original Text + F6 Tools Diff Show Original Text - Hide difference markings and show msgid only. + Hide difference markings and show msgid only. - Tools Diff Open File for Diff + Tools Diff Open File for Diff - Open file to be used for difference lookup. + Open file to be used for difference lookup. - Tools Diff Diffmode + Tools Diff Diffmode - Toggle difference mode. + Toggle difference mode. - Tools Rough Translation... + Tools Rough Translation... - Invoke rough-translation dialogue for automated translation. + Invoke rough-translation dialogue for automated translation. - Tools Catalogue Manager... + Tools Catalogue Manager... - Open &catalogmanager;. Read &catalogmanager; section for more details. + Open &catalogmanager;. Read &catalogmanager; section for more details. -The Settings Menu +The Settings Menu - Settings Show Toolbar + Settings Show Toolbar - When checked, the standard toolbar is displayed. + When checked, the standard toolbar is displayed. - Settings Show Statusbar + Settings Show Statusbar - When checked, the bottom statusbar is displayed. + When checked, the bottom statusbar is displayed. - Settings Show Navigation Bar + Settings Show Navigation Bar - When checked, the navigation bar is displayed. + When checked, the navigation bar is displayed. - Settings Show Comments + Settings Show Comments - When checked, the upper-right part of main window, which contains current entry's comments, will be displayed. + When checked, the upper-right part of main window, which contains current entry's comments, will be displayed. - Settings Show Tools + Settings Show Tools - When checked, the bottom-right part of main window, which contain search results through the dictionary, will be displayed. + When checked, the bottom-right part of main window, which contain search results through the dictionary, will be displayed. - Settings Configure Key Bindings... + Settings Configure Key Bindings... - Opens a configure dialogue for binding keys to actions. This will let you to customise the default key bindings to suite your needs. + Opens a configure dialogue for binding keys to actions. This will let you to customise the default key bindings to suite your needs. - Settings Configure Toolbars... + Settings Configure Toolbars... - Standard toolbar-configuration dialogue will open. You can choose which actions will go in which toolbars and what toolbar to customise. + Standard toolbar-configuration dialogue will open. You can choose which actions will go in which toolbars and what toolbar to customise. - Settings Configure Kbabel... + Settings Configure Kbabel... - All &kbabel;-specific settings go here. Please read the Preferences section for specific topics. + All &kbabel;-specific settings go here. Please read the Preferences section for specific topics. - Settings Configure Dictionary KDE Database Search Engine + Settings Configure Dictionary KDE Database Search Engine - Open dialogue for &kde; Database Search Engine configuration. + Open dialogue for &kde; Database Search Engine configuration. - Settings Configure Dictionary PO Auxiliary + Settings Configure Dictionary PO Auxiliary - Open dialogue for PO auxiliary file configuration. + Open dialogue for PO auxiliary file configuration. - Settings Configure Dictionary PO Compendium + Settings Configure Dictionary PO Compendium - Open dialogue for PO compendium file configuration. + Open dialogue for PO compendium file configuration. -The Help Menu +The Help Menu - F1 Help Contents + F1 Help Contents - Open the &kbabel; handbook. It is what you are reading now. + Open the &kbabel; handbook. It is what you are reading now. - &Shift;F1 Help What's This? + &Shift;F1 Help What's This? - Cursor change to arrow with question mark and you can click with it on various elements on main window. A quick help window will open. + Cursor change to arrow with question mark and you can click with it on various elements on main window. A quick help window will open. - Help Gettext Info + Help Gettext Info - Open the gettext manual page in the &kde; Help Centre. This package of tools helps the in process of handling POT and PO files. + Open the gettext manual page in the &kde; Help Centre. This package of tools helps the in process of handling POT and PO files. - Help Report Bug... + Help Report Bug... - This will open a standard error-reporting dialogue for &kde; It is useful if you experience abnormal behaviour of &kbabel;. &kbabel;'s developer will be glad to receive any comments, wishes, and bug reports. + This will open a standard error-reporting dialogue for &kde; It is useful if you experience abnormal behaviour of &kbabel;. &kbabel;'s developer will be glad to receive any comments, wishes, and bug reports. - Help About KBabel... + Help About KBabel... - Open a message box which inform you about &kbabel;'s version, developer name, and e-mail address. + Open a message box which inform you about &kbabel;'s version, developer name, and e-mail address. - Help About KDE... + Help About KDE... - Open a message box which informs you about the &kde; project, contact information and how you can report bugs and wishes. + Open a message box which informs you about the &kde; project, contact information and how you can report bugs and wishes. - Help About Dictionary KDE Database Search Engine + Help About Dictionary KDE Database Search Engine - Display a message box with information about the people who made the &kde; Database Search Engine. + Display a message box with information about the people who made the &kde; Database Search Engine. - Help About Dictionary PO Auxiliary + Help About Dictionary PO Auxiliary - Display a message box with information about the people who made searching in auxiliary file possible. + Display a message box with information about the people who made searching in auxiliary file possible. - Help About Dictionary PO Compendium + Help About Dictionary PO Compendium - Display a message box with information about people who made searching in compendium file possible. + Display a message box with information about people who made searching in compendium file possible. @@ -1762,12 +869,10 @@ -The &kbabel; toolbars +The &kbabel; toolbars -Standard Toolbar +Standard Toolbar @@ -1775,13 +880,9 @@ - Open + Open - Load PO file in &kbabel; for editing. + Load PO file in &kbabel; for editing. @@ -1790,13 +891,9 @@ - Save + Save - Save current PO file if it is modified. + Save current PO file if it is modified. @@ -1805,11 +902,9 @@ - Undo + Undo - Undo last operation. + Undo last operation. @@ -1818,11 +913,9 @@ - Redo + Redo - Redo last operation. + Redo last operation. @@ -1831,11 +924,9 @@ - Cut + Cut - Cut selected text and move it to the clipboard. + Cut selected text and move it to the clipboard. @@ -1844,11 +935,9 @@ - Copy + Copy - Copy selected text to the clipboard. + Copy selected text to the clipboard. @@ -1857,11 +946,9 @@ - Paste + Paste - Paste text from clipboard at the current cursor position. + Paste text from clipboard at the current cursor position. @@ -1870,11 +957,9 @@ - Find + Find - Find specified string in current PO-file. + Find specified string in current PO-file. @@ -1883,11 +968,9 @@ - Previous + Previous - Skip to previous entry in PO-file. + Skip to previous entry in PO-file. @@ -1896,13 +979,9 @@ - Next + Next - Skip to next entry in PO file. + Skip to next entry in PO file. @@ -1911,15 +990,9 @@ - Copy msgid to msgstr + Copy msgid to msgstr - Copy original string to translated string edit box. + Copy original string to translated string edit box. @@ -1928,15 +1001,9 @@ - Search Translations + Search Translations - Drop-down toolbar for searching selected text using: &kde; Database Search Engine, PO auxiliary file, PO compendium file and other dictionary plugins if available. + Drop-down toolbar for searching selected text using: &kde; Database Search Engine, PO auxiliary file, PO compendium file and other dictionary plugins if available. @@ -1945,11 +1012,9 @@ - Stop + Stop - Stop current search-in-progress. + Stop current search-in-progress. @@ -1958,19 +1023,16 @@ - Catalogue Manager + Catalogue Manager - Open Catalogue Manager window. + Open Catalogue Manager window. -Navigation Toolbar +Navigation Toolbar @@ -1978,13 +1040,9 @@ - Previous + Previous - Skip to previous entry in PO file. + Skip to previous entry in PO file. @@ -1993,13 +1051,9 @@ - Next + Next - Skip to next entry in PO file. + Skip to next entry in PO file. @@ -2008,13 +1062,9 @@ - First Entry + First Entry - Jump to first entry in PO file. + Jump to first entry in PO file. @@ -2023,13 +1073,9 @@ - Last Entry + Last Entry - Jump to last entry in PO file. + Jump to last entry in PO file. @@ -2038,13 +1084,9 @@ - Previous fuzzy or untranslated + Previous fuzzy or untranslated - Jump to previous fuzzy or untranslated entry in PO file. + Jump to previous fuzzy or untranslated entry in PO file. @@ -2053,13 +1095,9 @@ - Next fuzzy or untranslated + Next fuzzy or untranslated - Jump to next fuzzy or untranslated entry in PO file. + Jump to next fuzzy or untranslated entry in PO file. @@ -2068,13 +1106,9 @@ - Previous fuzzy + Previous fuzzy - Jump to previous fuzzy entry in PO file. + Jump to previous fuzzy entry in PO file. @@ -2083,13 +1117,9 @@ - Next fuzzy + Next fuzzy - Jump to next fuzzy entry in PO file. + Jump to next fuzzy entry in PO file. @@ -2098,13 +1128,9 @@ - Previous untranslated + Previous untranslated - Jump to previous untranslated entry in PO file. + Jump to previous untranslated entry in PO file. @@ -2113,13 +1139,9 @@ - Next untranslated + Next untranslated - Jump to next untranslated entry in PO file. + Jump to next untranslated entry in PO file. @@ -2128,13 +1150,9 @@ - Previous error + Previous error - Jump to previous error in PO file. + Jump to previous error in PO file. @@ -2143,13 +1161,9 @@ - Next error + Next error - Jump to next error in PO file. + Jump to next error in PO file. @@ -2158,13 +1172,9 @@ - Back + Back - Jump to last visited entry in PO file. + Jump to last visited entry in PO file. @@ -2173,80 +1183,57 @@ - Forward + Forward - Jump to previous visited entry in PO file. + Jump to previous visited entry in PO file. -Status Bar +Status Bar - Current + Current - Current message in edited PO file. + Current message in edited PO file. - Total + Total - Total number of messages in PO file. + Total number of messages in PO file. - Fuzzy + Fuzzy - Number of messages marked as fuzzy. They should be revised and translated if needed. + Number of messages marked as fuzzy. They should be revised and translated if needed. - Untranslated + Untranslated - Number of yet untranslated messages. + Number of yet untranslated messages. - Editor status + Editor status - INS - insert, and OVR - overwrite. Same meaning like in every ordinary text editor. + INS - insert, and OVR - overwrite. Same meaning like in every ordinary text editor. - PO-file status + PO-file status - RO - read-only file, RW - read-write access on file. When a file is read-only you cannot modify entries in editor. + RO - read-only file, RW - read-write access on file. When a file is read-only you cannot modify entries in editor. - Progress bar + Progress bar - Usually, this bar is hidden; it is displayed only when saving is being done, or if you are searching for messages in a PO-file, compendium or elsewhere. + Usually, this bar is hidden; it is displayed only when saving is being done, or if you are searching for messages in a PO-file, compendium or elsewhere. @@ -2255,32 +1242,18 @@ -The &catalogmanager; menu +The &catalogmanager; menu -The File Menu +The File Menu - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit - Quits &catalogmanager; + Quits &catalogmanager; @@ -2288,142 +1261,75 @@ -The Edit Menu +The Edit Menu - &Ctrl;F Edit Find in Files... + &Ctrl;F Edit Find in Files... - Open Find dialogue for searching for strings in a set of PO files. + Open Find dialogue for searching for strings in a set of PO files. - &Ctrl;R Edit Replace in Files... + &Ctrl;R Edit Replace in Files... - Open Replace dialogue for searching for and replacing strings in a set of PO files. + Open Replace dialogue for searching for and replacing strings in a set of PO files. - Escape Edit Stop Searching + Escape Edit Stop Searching - Stop currently running find/replace operation. + Stop currently running find/replace operation. - &Ctrl;M Edit Toggle Marking + &Ctrl;M Edit Toggle Marking - Toggle mark for the selected file. + Toggle mark for the selected file. - Edit Remove Marking + Edit Remove Marking - Removes mark for the selected file or folder. + Removes mark for the selected file or folder. - Edit Toggle All Markings + Edit Toggle All Markings - Toggles marks for the selected file or folder (recursively). + Toggles marks for the selected file or folder (recursively). - Edit Remove All Markings + Edit Remove All Markings - Remove marks for the selected file or folder (recursively). + Remove marks for the selected file or folder (recursively). @@ -2431,50 +1337,25 @@ -The Tools Menu +The Tools Menu - &Ctrl;S Tools Statistics + &Ctrl;S Tools Statistics - Show statistics about number of translated/untranslated/fuzzy messages for the selected file or subtree. + Show statistics about number of translated/untranslated/fuzzy messages for the selected file or subtree. - &Ctrl;Y Tools Check Syntax + &Ctrl;Y Tools Check Syntax - Check syntax for the selected file or subtree using msgfmt. + Check syntax for the selected file or subtree using msgfmt. @@ -2482,101 +1363,64 @@ -The Settings Menu +The Settings Menu - Settings Show Toolbar + Settings Show Toolbar - When checked, standard toolbar is displayed. + When checked, standard toolbar is displayed. - Settings Show Statusbar + Settings Show Statusbar - When checked, bottom statusbar is displayed. + When checked, bottom statusbar is displayed. - Settings Configure Key Bindings... + Settings Configure Key Bindings... - Opens a configure dialogue for binding keys to actions. This will let you to customise the default key bindings to suite your needs. + Opens a configure dialogue for binding keys to actions. This will let you to customise the default key bindings to suite your needs. - Settings Configure Toolbars... + Settings Configure Toolbars... - Standard toolbar-configuration dialogue will open. You can choose which actions will go in which toolbars and what toolbar to customise. + Standard toolbar-configuration dialogue will open. You can choose which actions will go in which toolbars and what toolbar to customise. - Settings Configure KBabel - Catalogue Manager... + Settings Configure KBabel - Catalogue Manager... - All &catalogmanager; specific settings go here. Please read Preferences section for specific topics. + All &catalogmanager; specific settings go here. Please read Preferences section for specific topics. -The Help Menu +The Help Menu &help.menu.documentation; - + + --> @@ -11,95 +10,35 @@ - + -AlexWalker
alex@x3ja.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AlexWalker
alex@x3ja.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Preferences +Preferences -&kbabel; preferences - -To show the Preferences dialogue choose Settings Configure KBabel... from &kbabel;'s menu. It uses a structured configuration dialog which makes it very easy to find an option without having to perform an extensive search for it. - -The left side of the preferences dialogue lists the categories of customisable items and the right side shows the corresponding tab for the selected category. &kbabel; keeps changes if you move between categories, so when you're finally happy click the OK button. At any time you can use quick help—just click on the question mark on the title bar and, after the cursor has changed to an arrow with a question mark, click on a button, label, or preference entry to find out more about it. +&kbabel; preferences + +To show the Preferences dialogue choose Settings Configure KBabel... from &kbabel;'s menu. It uses a structured configuration dialog which makes it very easy to find an option without having to perform an extensive search for it. + +The left side of the preferences dialogue lists the categories of customisable items and the right side shows the corresponding tab for the selected category. &kbabel; keeps changes if you move between categories, so when you're finally happy click the OK button. At any time you can use quick help—just click on the question mark on the title bar and, after the cursor has changed to an arrow with a question mark, click on a button, label, or preference entry to find out more about it. -Identity - -This section allows you to set standard fields for every translated PO file. These are your name, email address, full language name, email address for your translation team mailing list. There is also a timezone field to track your last modified time for PO files. You can specify it as character sequence like EEST or offset from GMT time like +0200 (&ie; for Romania). This information is used when updating file headers. You can find the options that control what fields in the header should be updated in the Save section of the Preferences dialogue. - -Character sequences for timezones are not standardised. So you should not use the string set here in time specification for saving in Save tab. You should use %z instead. +Identity + +This section allows you to set standard fields for every translated PO file. These are your name, email address, full language name, email address for your translation team mailing list. There is also a timezone field to track your last modified time for PO files. You can specify it as character sequence like EEST or offset from GMT time like +0200 (&ie; for Romania). This information is used when updating file headers. You can find the options that control what fields in the header should be updated in the Save section of the Preferences dialogue. + +Character sequences for timezones are not standardised. So you should not use the string set here in time specification for saving in Save tab. You should use %z instead. -Number of singular/plural forms +Number of singular/plural forms -Use this for setting number of plural forms for your language. For example, it is 2 for German (one for the singular and one for the plural form). - -This feature is currently implemented only for plural forms format used in &kde;. It does not work with gettext plural forms. +Use this for setting number of plural forms for your language. For example, it is 2 for German (one for the singular and one for the plural form). + +This feature is currently implemented only for plural forms format used in &kde;. It does not work with gettext plural forms. @@ -107,148 +46,61 @@ -Editor -The editor preferences category is divided in 3 subwindows: General, Appearance, Spell Check and Fonts. All these settings customize how the editor behaves and looks. +Editor +The editor preferences category is divided in 3 subwindows: General, Appearance, Spell Check and Fonts. All these settings customize how the editor behaves and looks. -General - -This section contains a set of checkboxes. - -The first checkbox in the upper side sets if the fuzzy status is reset automatically when a character is inputted into the MsgStr editor. When this option is disabled you have to manually choose EditUnset Fuzzy Status or use the &Ctrl;U shortcut. Note that this means the string , fuzzy is removed from the entry's comment. - -Next option allows you to enable clever editing, where editor automatically inserts special characters escaped correctly, ⪚ \t after pressing Tab and it allows special handling of Enter. - -The lower checkboxes are very useful in assisting, not for the correctness of the translation, but if the translated string is a suitable replacement for the original. For example, many messages represent menu items with keyboard accelerator and C-like formatted strings whose structure must remain intact once translated. +General + +This section contains a set of checkboxes. + +The first checkbox in the upper side sets if the fuzzy status is reset automatically when a character is inputted into the MsgStr editor. When this option is disabled you have to manually choose EditUnset Fuzzy Status or use the &Ctrl;U shortcut. Note that this means the string , fuzzy is removed from the entry's comment. + +Next option allows you to enable clever editing, where editor automatically inserts special characters escaped correctly, ⪚ \t after pressing Tab and it allows special handling of Enter. + +The lower checkboxes are very useful in assisting, not for the correctness of the translation, but if the translated string is a suitable replacement for the original. For example, many messages represent menu items with keyboard accelerator and C-like formatted strings whose structure must remain intact once translated. - Check Arguments + Check Arguments - When this option is selected, C-format strings in the original and the translation are checked to ensure the number of format sequences and the order are consistent. + When this option is selected, C-format strings in the original and the translation are checked to ensure the number of format sequences and the order are consistent. - Check Accelerator + Check Accelerator -When this option is selected, &kbabel; checks if the number accelerator characters is identical in both the original and the translated string. Note that the accelerator marker is & (but not in every programming toolkit). See the Miscellaneous section below to find how to change a keyboard accelerator. +When this option is selected, &kbabel; checks if the number accelerator characters is identical in both the original and the translated string. Note that the accelerator marker is & (but not in every programming toolkit). See the Miscellaneous section below to find how to change a keyboard accelerator. - Check Equation + Check Equation - This is a feature for the &kde; project development. .desktop files are simply text files which store various parameters in value=key format. Some of these keys are translatable. The only restriction is to maintain the left side of equality unchanged. Equation check allows you to spot many errors determined by the fuzzy msgmerge algorithm. Note that there are situations where this function generates false errors on some PO-files. + This is a feature for the &kde; project development. .desktop files are simply text files which store various parameters in value=key format. Some of these keys are translatable. The only restriction is to maintain the left side of equality unchanged. Equation check allows you to spot many errors determined by the fuzzy msgmerge algorithm. Note that there are situations where this function generates false errors on some PO-files. - Look for Translated Context Info + Look for Translated Context Info -Some original messages are marked with context information to mark them as being unique even if they represent same word. This is because many simple words, such as Save, are translated into many languages. Context information is marked with _:. Many unexperienced translators translate the context information and fill their PO files with garbage. Check this box to make sure you will be warned about these errors in a file. +Some original messages are marked with context information to mark them as being unique even if they represent same word. This is because many simple words, such as Save, are translated into many languages. Context information is marked with _:. Many unexperienced translators translate the context information and fill their PO files with garbage. Check this box to make sure you will be warned about these errors in a file. - Check Plural Forms + Check Plural Forms - If you are translating &kde; project, it uses a special kind of syntax for specifying plural forms of messages. This check automatically counts the number of forms in msgstr and compares it with the number specified in Identity tab. Incorrect number of plural forms can result in crash of an application. + If you are translating &kde; project, it uses a special kind of syntax for specifying plural forms of messages. This check automatically counts the number of forms in msgstr and compares it with the number specified in Identity tab. Incorrect number of plural forms can result in crash of an application. - Beep on error + Beep on error - Your system bell will beep when you switch on entries with errors like those described above. + Your system bell will beep when you switch on entries with errors like those described above. - Change text colour on error + Change text colour on error - This is another type of warning about errors in current message. It is a good solution for those who are hearing impaired or dislike bell noise. See also the Appearance tab to find out how to change the text colour on errors. + This is another type of warning about errors in current message. It is a good solution for those who are hearing impaired or dislike bell noise. See also the Appearance tab to find out how to change the text colour on errors. @@ -256,724 +108,302 @@ -Appearance +Appearance -These options let you configure the appearance for the message editor. In upper part there are 4 checkboxes: +These options let you configure the appearance for the message editor. In upper part there are 4 checkboxes: - Highlight syntax - Setting this option will enable syntax highlighting for special characters, accelerators and text background in the msgid viewer and msgstr editor. If don't have a monochrome display or have a visual impairment, you should enable this option. + Highlight syntax + Setting this option will enable syntax highlighting for special characters, accelerators and text background in the msgid viewer and msgstr editor. If don't have a monochrome display or have a visual impairment, you should enable this option. - Highlight background - The background will be highlighted only for existing characters in the msgid and msgstr. This includes spaces. This is useful if you don't want to see the surrounding quotes (see below) for the PO entry, and you will still be able to observe starting and ending spaces in a text line. + Highlight background + The background will be highlighted only for existing characters in the msgid and msgstr. This includes spaces. This is useful if you don't want to see the surrounding quotes (see below) for the PO entry, and you will still be able to observe starting and ending spaces in a text line. - Mark whitespaces with points - When you feel the need to count spaces and background highlighting is not your taste then you can check this option to have a point sign drawn in the middle of whitespace characters. Note that the point is a point sign in the center of a character box and is not a decimal point. + Mark whitespaces with points + When you feel the need to count spaces and background highlighting is not your taste then you can check this option to have a point sign drawn in the middle of whitespace characters. Note that the point is a point sign in the center of a character box and is not a decimal point. - Show surrounding quotes - If you think that viewing the terminal characters in msgstr or msgid's text line is better for you then check this option to view the surrounding quotes for every text line. - If you are experienced editing PO files with ordinary text editors you may feel safer if you can track starting and ending double quotes in PO entry lines. + Show surrounding quotes + If you think that viewing the terminal characters in msgstr or msgid's text line is better for you then check this option to view the surrounding quotes for every text line. + If you are experienced editing PO files with ordinary text editors you may feel safer if you can track starting and ending double quotes in PO entry lines. -For the different items in edited text there are different colour choices to make editing easy. Colours can be changed by clicking on colour-picker buttons. From the 'select color' dialogs you can choose from standard colours, custom colours or just pick a colour from any part of your screen. +For the different items in edited text there are different colour choices to make editing easy. Colours can be changed by clicking on colour-picker buttons. From the 'select color' dialogs you can choose from standard colours, custom colours or just pick a colour from any part of your screen. - Background colour - This sets the background colour for characters in the MsgID view and the MsgStr editor. To change the general background colour of edit boxes you must use the &kcontrolcenter;. + Background colour + This sets the background colour for characters in the MsgID view and the MsgStr editor. To change the general background colour of edit boxes you must use the &kcontrolcenter;. - Colour for quoted characters - Here you can adjust the colour for escaped characters like (\") double quotes or (\n) newline. + Colour for quoted characters + Here you can adjust the colour for escaped characters like (\") double quotes or (\n) newline. - Colour for syntax errors - This is the colour for the entire text entry if errors are detected when you try to save PO file. Errors are triggered by not terminating identically both msgid and msgstr, or escaping characters incorrectly. + Colour for syntax errors + This is the colour for the entire text entry if errors are detected when you try to save PO file. Errors are triggered by not terminating identically both msgid and msgstr, or escaping characters incorrectly. - Colour for c-format characters - This sets the colour for a characters sequence like in C language printf or scanf functions. In general these start with (%) percent char and are continued by one char. + Colour for c-format characters + This sets the colour for a characters sequence like in C language printf or scanf functions. In general these start with (%) percent char and are continued by one char. - Colour for keyboard accelerators - Keyboard accelerators start with (&) ampersand character in &kde; but if you are translating for other projects there might be an different character marking the accelerator key. See Miscellaneous section below to find how to change keyboard accelerator. + Colour for keyboard accelerators + Keyboard accelerators start with (&) ampersand character in &kde; but if you are translating for other projects there might be an different character marking the accelerator key. See Miscellaneous section below to find how to change keyboard accelerator. -The status for the current edited entry is marked by three LEDs. For your convenience you can choose where to put these LEDs—either on the statusbar or in the editor section (between the msgid and msgstr entry). If have difficulties viewing some colours or you want to be able to track LED status changes easily without moving your eye you can select the preferred color using the colour button chooser. +The status for the current edited entry is marked by three LEDs. For your convenience you can choose where to put these LEDs—either on the statusbar or in the editor section (between the msgid and msgstr entry). If have difficulties viewing some colours or you want to be able to track LED status changes easily without moving your eye you can select the preferred color using the colour button chooser. -Fonts +Fonts -This is a standard &kde; font chooser dialogue with a little addition. You can select to view only fixed fonts by checking the Show only fixed fonts option. This is highly recommended for easy translating. The font dialogue lets you set font family, style, size and encoding. The bottom box shows a preview of the current font for user convenience. +This is a standard &kde; font chooser dialogue with a little addition. You can select to view only fixed fonts by checking the Show only fixed fonts option. This is highly recommended for easy translating. The font dialogue lets you set font family, style, size and encoding. The bottom box shows a preview of the current font for user convenience. -Save -This section allows you to edit the options for PO file saving. The first group of checkboxes controls general behaviour for actions performed in PO file saving. +Save +This section allows you to edit the options for PO file saving. The first group of checkboxes controls general behaviour for actions performed in PO file saving. - Update header when saving - Check this button to update the header information of the file every time it is saved. The header normally keeps information about the date and time the file was last updated; the last translator etc. You can choose which information you want to update from the Fields to update checkboxes area below. Fields that do not exist are added to the header. If you want to add additional fields to the header you can edit the header manually by choosing Edit Edit Header in the editor window. + Update header when saving + Check this button to update the header information of the file every time it is saved. The header normally keeps information about the date and time the file was last updated; the last translator etc. You can choose which information you want to update from the Fields to update checkboxes area below. Fields that do not exist are added to the header. If you want to add additional fields to the header you can edit the header manually by choosing Edit Edit Header in the editor window. - Check syntax of file when saving - Check this to automatically check syntax of file with msgfmt --statistics when saving a file. You will only get a message if an error occurred. You should keep this validation enabled unless you know what you're doing. + Check syntax of file when saving + Check this to automatically check syntax of file with msgfmt --statistics when saving a file. You will only get a message if an error occurred. You should keep this validation enabled unless you know what you're doing. -If you don't want to touch some fields in a PO file header or want to force updating of specific fields, there are five checkboxes which control this: revision date, PO file language, text encoding, last translator name, charset. If a field does not exist, it is appended to the header. If you want to add other information to the header, you have to edit the header manually by choosing EditEdit Header in the editor window. Deactivate Update header when saving above if you don't want to have the header updated. - -For date and time of the header field PO-Revision-Date you can choose one from bellow formats: +If you don't want to touch some fields in a PO file header or want to force updating of specific fields, there are five checkboxes which control this: revision date, PO file language, text encoding, last translator name, charset. If a field does not exist, it is appended to the header. If you want to add other information to the header, you have to edit the header manually by choosing EditEdit Header in the editor window. Deactivate Update header when saving above if you don't want to have the header updated. + +For date and time of the header field PO-Revision-Date you can choose one from bellow formats: - Default is the format normally used in PO files. - Local is the format specific to your country. - Custom lets you define your own format, where you can use the following C-like format strings: - Year + Default is the format normally used in PO files. + Local is the format specific to your country. + Custom lets you define your own format, where you can use the following C-like format strings:
+ Year - FormatMeaningRange + FormatMeaningRange - %yyear00 to 99 + %yyear00 to 99 - %Yyear0001 to 9999 + %Yyear0001 to 9999
- Month + Month - FormatMeaningRange + FormatMeaningRange - %mmonth of year01 to 12 + %mmonth of year01 to 12 - %fmonth of year1 to 12 + %fmonth of year1 to 12 - %b,%hmonth abbreviationJan to Dec + %b,%hmonth abbreviationJan to Dec
- Day + Day - FormatMeaningRange + FormatMeaningRange - %jday of the year001 to 366 + %jday of the year001 to 366 - %dday of month01 to 31 + %dday of month01 to 31 - %eday of month1 to 31 + %eday of month1 to 31 - %aweekday abbreviationSun to Sat + %aweekday abbreviationSun to Sat
- Hour + Hour - FormatMeaningRange + FormatMeaningRange - %Hhour00 to 23 + %Hhour00 to 23 - %khour0 to 23 + %khour0 to 23 - %ihour1 to 12 + %ihour1 to 12 - %Ihour01 to 12 + %Ihour01 to 12 - %pAM or PM + %pAM or PM
- Minute, Second, Timezone + Minute, Second, Timezone - FormatMeaningRange + FormatMeaningRange - %Mminute00 to 59 + %Mminute00 to 59 - %Ssecond00 to 59 + %Ssecond00 to 59 - %Ztimezone(given in identity settings) + %Ztimezone(given in identity settings) - %ztimezone(numeric offset as specified by system settings) + %ztimezone(numeric offset as specified by system settings)
- + -The lower group covers encoding options for PO files when saving. If you work on the &kde; project you should be aware that at least desktop.po file must be UTF-8 encoded. The drop-down list lets you select message encoding. You must at least have your language code and UTF-8 encoding set. If, for some reason, you don't want to accidentally change the current PO file encoding, turn on Keep the encoding of the file. +The lower group covers encoding options for PO files when saving. If you work on the &kde; project you should be aware that at least desktop.po file must be UTF-8 encoded. The drop-down list lets you select message encoding. You must at least have your language code and UTF-8 encoding set. If, for some reason, you don't want to accidentally change the current PO file encoding, turn on Keep the encoding of the file. -Spell Check +Spell Check -Here you can set your spell checking preferences. This is of interest if you have a dictionary file for the language you are translating to. Below are the items to consider setting: +Here you can set your spell checking preferences. This is of interest if you have a dictionary file for the language you are translating to. Below are the items to consider setting: - Create root/affix combinations not in dictionary - For new words added to the personal dictionary, the spell checker will create root/affix combinations to match more than one word (variations). + Create root/affix combinations not in dictionary + For new words added to the personal dictionary, the spell checker will create root/affix combinations to match more than one word (variations). - Consider run-together words as spelling errors - If this is turned on, joined words will be treated as errors. However, such words are very common in the German language, which have a very large number of compound words, so it should be left turned off in that case. + Consider run-together words as spelling errors + If this is turned on, joined words will be treated as errors. However, such words are very common in the German language, which have a very large number of compound words, so it should be left turned off in that case. - Dictionary - From the popup list you can choose which dictionary to use. Note that you must install an appropriate dictionary for your language. Check your ispell or aspell distribution to find out if you have one. + Dictionary + From the popup list you can choose which dictionary to use. Note that you must install an appropriate dictionary for your language. Check your ispell or aspell distribution to find out if you have one. - Encoding - Here you choose the encoding for your text. This option is passed to the spellchecker, and is used as the encoding for your words dictionary. See the tdespell documentation for more details. + Encoding + Here you choose the encoding for your text. This option is passed to the spellchecker, and is used as the encoding for your words dictionary. See the tdespell documentation for more details. - Client - Backend program to use for spell checking. Currently either ispell (International Ispell) or aspell. + Client + Backend program to use for spell checking. Currently either ispell (International Ispell) or aspell. - Remember ignored words - Keep track of user-ignored words when spell-checking PO files. It is very convenient to ignore the abbreviations or strange letter combinations you meet in &GUI; interfaces. + Remember ignored words + Keep track of user-ignored words when spell-checking PO files. It is very convenient to ignore the abbreviations or strange letter combinations you meet in &GUI; interfaces. - File to store ignored words - Here you can set location of the file for ignored words. Click on the folder icon to the right of the edit box. The default is $(HOME)/.trinity/share/apps/kbabel/spellignores, where $(HOME) is your home folder. + File to store ignored words + Here you can set location of the file for ignored words. Click on the folder icon to the right of the edit box. The default is $(HOME)/.trinity/share/apps/kbabel/spellignores, where $(HOME) is your home folder. -Search -The search section allows you to customise various settings for searching in previously translated strings. +Search +The search section allows you to customise various settings for searching in previously translated strings. -General - -General settings are common for all search types. If you check the Automatically start search option then the search is automatically started whenever you switch to another entry in the editor. Currently, there are three possibilities you can choose from, but since &kbabel; can use dictionary plugins the available dictionaries depend on those installed. Using Settings Configure Dictionary ... you can configure every search plugin. - -The dictionary plugins installed by default are: +General + +General settings are common for all search types. If you check the Automatically start search option then the search is automatically started whenever you switch to another entry in the editor. Currently, there are three possibilities you can choose from, but since &kbabel; can use dictionary plugins the available dictionaries depend on those installed. Using Settings Configure Dictionary ... you can configure every search plugin. + +The dictionary plugins installed by default are: -&kde; Database Search Engine +&kde; Database Search Engine -This new method is still in alpha stage of development and is based on &kbabeldict; which accompanies &kbabel;. See &kbabeldict; documentation for further info on configuring the search engine. +This new method is still in alpha stage of development and is based on &kbabeldict; which accompanies &kbabel;. See &kbabeldict; documentation for further info on configuring the search engine. -PO Compendium -The compendium is a normal PO file, which should contain a list of standard translations from your translation team. If you don't have one, you can also use a file that contains all the translations from your team (⪚ the $lang.messages file in the &kde; Project, that can be found at i18n.kde.org). +PO Compendium +The compendium is a normal PO file, which should contain a list of standard translations from your translation team. If you don't have one, you can also use a file that contains all the translations from your team (⪚ the $lang.messages file in the &kde; Project, that can be found at i18n.kde.org). -PO Auxiliary -The auxiliary should help you find the context of a translation by looking up the same message in a message catalog of the same package but translated to another language. This way you can have a look how this message is translated in another language. +PO Auxiliary +The auxiliary should help you find the context of a translation by looking up the same message in a message catalog of the same package but translated to another language. This way you can have a look how this message is translated in another language. -You can also start searching manually by choosing an entry in the popup menu that appears, either by clicking DictionariesSearch Text PO Compendium or by keeping the search button on the toolbar pressed down for a while. +You can also start searching manually by choosing an entry in the popup menu that appears, either by clicking DictionariesSearch Text PO Compendium or by keeping the search button on the toolbar pressed down for a while. -Diff - -The Diff section holds settings how to display differences in msgids. - -Every difference can be displayed by two added parts and by characters removed from the text. For both you can specify the method of display and the color to be used. Highlighted means that the background of the corresponding characters will be shown in the selected colour, while Underlined(for added characters) or Stroked Out (for removed characters) will denote the changed parts by coloured lines. -Diff mode needs to find the original msgid to compare with. For this purpose, &kbabel; can use the translation database if you turn in on by enabling Use messages from Translation Database. A second possibility is to use a tree of original PO files and specifying the root of the tree in Base folder for diff files. +Diff + +The Diff section holds settings how to display differences in msgids. + +Every difference can be displayed by two added parts and by characters removed from the text. For both you can specify the method of display and the color to be used. Highlighted means that the background of the corresponding characters will be shown in the selected colour, while Underlined(for added characters) or Stroked Out (for removed characters) will denote the changed parts by coloured lines. +Diff mode needs to find the original msgid to compare with. For this purpose, &kbabel; can use the translation database if you turn in on by enabling Use messages from Translation Database. A second possibility is to use a tree of original PO files and specifying the root of the tree in Base folder for diff files. -Miscellaneous -Miscellaneous section holds settings which don't fit anywhere else. Currently there are two: +Miscellaneous +Miscellaneous section holds settings which don't fit anywhere else. Currently there are two: - Marker for keyboard accelerator - Here you can select your own character to serve as the keyboard accelerator indicator in a &GUI;. By default it is & (ampersand), but in some programming toolkits it may vary. For example, in Gnome/GTK translations the underscore character _ is the marker for the keyboard accelerator. + Marker for keyboard accelerator + Here you can select your own character to serve as the keyboard accelerator indicator in a &GUI;. By default it is & (ampersand), but in some programming toolkits it may vary. For example, in Gnome/GTK translations the underscore character _ is the marker for the keyboard accelerator. - Regular expression for context information - For inexperienced users "regular expression" may sound strange. So you are advised to change the default value only if you know what you are doing. Some &GUI; programming toolkits provide their own context information description methods. Consult an experienced developer if you translate PO files other than standard &kde; files. For the sake of completeness I will "translate" for you what the default regular expression means: "the text matches if it starts with _: and is followed by one or more characters and ends with a newline". + Regular expression for context information + For inexperienced users "regular expression" may sound strange. So you are advised to change the default value only if you know what you are doing. Some &GUI; programming toolkits provide their own context information description methods. Consult an experienced developer if you translate PO files other than standard &kde; files. For the sake of completeness I will "translate" for you what the default regular expression means: "the text matches if it starts with _: and is followed by one or more characters and ends with a newline". @@ -982,233 +412,61 @@ -&cataloguemanager; preferences +&cataloguemanager; preferences -This dialogue allows you to edit the options for the Catalogue Manager. +This dialogue allows you to edit the options for the Catalogue Manager. -General -Here are two edit lines with Browse... buttons. Type in the folders which contains all your PO- and respectively POT-files. The files and the folders in these folders will then be merged into one tree in Catalogue Manager window. - -Below you can turn on and off if: +General +Here are two edit lines with Browse... buttons. Type in the folders which contains all your PO- and respectively POT-files. The files and the folders in these folders will then be merged into one tree in Catalogue Manager window. + +Below you can turn on and off if: - Open files in new window - If this is activated all files that are opened from the Catalogue Manager are opened in a new window. + Open files in new window + If this is activated all files that are opened from the Catalogue Manager are opened in a new window. - Kill processes on exit - If you check this, &kbabel; tries to kill the processes that are not exited already when the program closes by sending a kill signal to them. It's not guaranteed that the processes are killed. - + Kill processes on exit + If you check this, &kbabel; tries to kill the processes that are not exited already when the program closes by sending a kill signal to them. It's not guaranteed that the processes are killed. + - Create index for file contents - If you check this, &kbabel; will create an index of contents for every file in the tree. This index is then used in find/replace operations. There is a large speed trade-off. If you enable Create index for file contents, the updating of file information will be much slower. On the other hand, it speeds up find/replace operations considerably. - + Create index for file contents + If you check this, &kbabel; will create an index of contents for every file in the tree. This index is then used in find/replace operations. There is a large speed trade-off. If you enable Create index for file contents, the updating of file information will be much slower. On the other hand, it speeds up find/replace operations considerably. + -Folder Commands -Here you can insert commands you want to execute in folders from the Catalogue Manager. The commands are then shown in the submenu Commands in the Catalogue Manager's context menu. Insert in the Name field the name of the command. The name can be chosen freely and is only used to be displayed in the menu. In the Command field insert the command you want to have executed when selecting the corresponding menu item. Then press the Add button to add the command to your available commands. To edit a command, select it, press the Edit button and press Add after you have finished. To remove a command, select it from the list and press the Remove button. If you want a different order in the contextual submenu, you can use the up and down buttons. The command is executed through your default shell, so you can execute multiple commands at once by separating them with a semicolon, and you can set environment variables if you need to. The commands are executed in the (PO file) folder you have selected in the Catalogue Manager. The following strings will be replaced in a command: +Folder Commands +Here you can insert commands you want to execute in folders from the Catalogue Manager. The commands are then shown in the submenu Commands in the Catalogue Manager's context menu. Insert in the Name field the name of the command. The name can be chosen freely and is only used to be displayed in the menu. In the Command field insert the command you want to have executed when selecting the corresponding menu item. Then press the Add button to add the command to your available commands. To edit a command, select it, press the Edit button and press Add after you have finished. To remove a command, select it from the list and press the Remove button. If you want a different order in the contextual submenu, you can use the up and down buttons. The command is executed through your default shell, so you can execute multiple commands at once by separating them with a semicolon, and you can set environment variables if you need to. The commands are executed in the (PO file) folder you have selected in the Catalogue Manager. The following strings will be replaced in a command: - @PACKAGE@: The name of the folder without path - @PODIR@: The name of the PO-folder with path - @POTDIR@: The name of the template folder with path + @PACKAGE@: The name of the folder without path + @PODIR@: The name of the PO-folder with path + @POTDIR@: The name of the template folder with path -E.g.: If you want to execute make and then make install you could insert in Make install in the Name field, and make; make install in the Command field. If you then select Commands Make install from the context menu of a folder, the commands listed above will be executed in that folder. +E.g.: If you want to execute make and then make install you could insert in Make install in the Name field, and make; make install in the Command field. If you then select Commands Make install from the context menu of a folder, the commands listed above will be executed in that folder. -File Commands -Here you can insert the commands you want to execute on files from the Catalogue Manager. The commands are then shown in the submenu Commands in the Catalogue Manager's context menu. - -Insert in the Name field the name of the command. The name can be chosen freely and is only used to be displayed in the menu. In the Command field insert the command you want to have executed when selecting the corresponding menu item. Then press the Add button to add the command to your available commands. To edit a command, select it, press the Edit button and press the Add button after you have finished. To remove a command, select it from the list and press the Remove button. If you want a different order in the contextual submenu, you can use the up and down buttons. The command is executed through your default shell, so you can execute multiple commands at once by separating them with a semicolon, and you can set environment variables, if you need. The commands are executed in the (PO file) folder, in which the file, you have selected in the Catalogue Manager, is. The following strings will be replaced in a command: +File Commands +Here you can insert the commands you want to execute on files from the Catalogue Manager. The commands are then shown in the submenu Commands in the Catalogue Manager's context menu. + +Insert in the Name field the name of the command. The name can be chosen freely and is only used to be displayed in the menu. In the Command field insert the command you want to have executed when selecting the corresponding menu item. Then press the Add button to add the command to your available commands. To edit a command, select it, press the Edit button and press the Add button after you have finished. To remove a command, select it from the list and press the Remove button. If you want a different order in the contextual submenu, you can use the up and down buttons. The command is executed through your default shell, so you can execute multiple commands at once by separating them with a semicolon, and you can set environment variables, if you need. The commands are executed in the (PO file) folder, in which the file, you have selected in the Catalogue Manager, is. The following strings will be replaced in a command: - @PACKAGE@: The name of the file without path and extension - @POFILE@: The name of the PO file with path and extension - @POTFILE@: The name of the corresponding template file with path and extension - @PODIR@: The name of the folder the PO file is in, with path - @POTDIR@: The name of the folder the template file is in, with path + @PACKAGE@: The name of the file without path and extension + @POFILE@: The name of the PO file with path and extension + @POTFILE@: The name of the corresponding template file with path and extension + @PODIR@: The name of the folder the PO file is in, with path + @POTDIR@: The name of the folder the template file is in, with path -For example, if you want to merge the template file into your PO file you could insert Merge in the Name field and msgmerge @POFILE@ @POTFILE@ > @PACKAGE@.new && mv @PACKAGE@.new "@PACKAGE@.po in the Command field. If you then select CommandsMerge from a file's context menu, the PO file will be merged with its template file. +For example, if you want to merge the template file into your PO file you could insert Merge in the Name field and msgmerge @POFILE@ @POTFILE@ > @PACKAGE@.new && mv @PACKAGE@.new "@PACKAGE@.po in the Command field. If you then select CommandsMerge from a file's context menu, the PO file will be merged with its template file. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/using.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/using.docbook index 9741d7ba9a6..656e8052fa3 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/using.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbabel/using.docbook @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ + --> @@ -10,413 +9,157 @@ - + -AlexWalker
alex@x3ja.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AlexWalker
alex@x3ja.co.uk
Conversion to British English -Using &kbabel; +Using &kbabel; -Introduction - -Usually program messages and documentation are written in English. Using a framework made of a set of tools and libraries, it is possible to have your favourite applications speak your native non-English language. This process of adapting an application to a specific language is known as localisation. The localisation process includes translating the program's interfaces and documentation to the various languages users need and, in some countries or regions, making the inputs and outputs conform to particular conventions. &kbabel; is a tool which will assist you in the internationalisation process to make an application's interface speak many languages. - -Every internationalisation-aware program makes available for translation one or more message-catalogue files. The extension of these files is .pot. POT is an acronym for Portable Object Template. - - -Every translator takes a POT file copy and begins translating messages. This file will became a PO file - Portable Object and represents only one language. - -Each translator takes a copy of one of these POT templates and begins filling in the blanks: each message is translated into the language desired. The file containing the translated text is referred to as a PO (Portable Object) file. - -Once all the messages have been translated, the PO file is compiled into a machine-readable binary format, known as a MO (Machine Object) file. These files, which will be stored with a .mo extension, act as a database to minimise the time taken by the applications to look up each translated message. - -This suggests a question: do I need to know what is inside a PO file even though I have &kbabel;? The answer is, undoubtedly, yes. There are situations when a message catalogue can become corrupted and needs to be manually fixed. Most of these problems are the so-hated CVS conflicts which occur when a translating process is coordinated by a concurrent version system (see the CVS documentation). &kbabel; can't help you very much if a problem like this arises so a text editor and some knowledge of PO-files are needed. Let's see how a PO file is made. - -PO files consist of pairs of messages—a msgid and a msgstr. The msgid is the text in English and the msgstr is the text translated into the appropriate language. The text that accompanies each msgid and msgstr is enclosed within C-like double quotes. An example, taken from a PO file for &noatun;, is msgid "Open a Playlist" - -Empty lines and those starting with # are ignored. Lines starting with a # represent comments and are a useful means of providing a note detailing which file this message is going to be used in and, in the case of the application writers, to provide additional comments to aide translation. &kbabel; displays these comment lines for every message. - -In many cases the first msgid-msgstr pair in PO file is a fake entry (acting as PO file header) that contains various information about the translated PO file, such as the application name, translating date, translator name and so on. - -Recent versions of &GNU; gettext added another useful i18n feature called plural forms. English uses only singular and one plural form of nouns, ⪚ 1 file and 10 files. This leads many developers to an idea that the world is that simple and they can use messages like Do you want to delete %1 file(s)?, where %1 denotes a number of files to be deleted. But this is fundamentally wrong. For Slovak translation you need 3 different forms of the message. This number is different for different languages and even when it is the same, ⪚ Czech uses 3 forms as well, the rule to decide which form to use can be very different. -Plural forms in PO files are here to help. Unfortunately, &kde; developers do not like the plural forms implementation in &GNU; gettext and they have introduced their own format and handling for them. +Introduction + +Usually program messages and documentation are written in English. Using a framework made of a set of tools and libraries, it is possible to have your favourite applications speak your native non-English language. This process of adapting an application to a specific language is known as localisation. The localisation process includes translating the program's interfaces and documentation to the various languages users need and, in some countries or regions, making the inputs and outputs conform to particular conventions. &kbabel; is a tool which will assist you in the internationalisation process to make an application's interface speak many languages. + +Every internationalisation-aware program makes available for translation one or more message-catalogue files. The extension of these files is .pot. POT is an acronym for Portable Object Template. + + +Every translator takes a POT file copy and begins translating messages. This file will became a PO file - Portable Object and represents only one language. + +Each translator takes a copy of one of these POT templates and begins filling in the blanks: each message is translated into the language desired. The file containing the translated text is referred to as a PO (Portable Object) file. + +Once all the messages have been translated, the PO file is compiled into a machine-readable binary format, known as a MO (Machine Object) file. These files, which will be stored with a .mo extension, act as a database to minimise the time taken by the applications to look up each translated message. + +This suggests a question: do I need to know what is inside a PO file even though I have &kbabel;? The answer is, undoubtedly, yes. There are situations when a message catalogue can become corrupted and needs to be manually fixed. Most of these problems are the so-hated CVS conflicts which occur when a translating process is coordinated by a concurrent version system (see the CVS documentation). &kbabel; can't help you very much if a problem like this arises so a text editor and some knowledge of PO-files are needed. Let's see how a PO file is made. + +PO files consist of pairs of messages—a msgid and a msgstr. The msgid is the text in English and the msgstr is the text translated into the appropriate language. The text that accompanies each msgid and msgstr is enclosed within C-like double quotes. An example, taken from a PO file for &noatun;, is msgid "Open a Playlist" + +Empty lines and those starting with # are ignored. Lines starting with a # represent comments and are a useful means of providing a note detailing which file this message is going to be used in and, in the case of the application writers, to provide additional comments to aide translation. &kbabel; displays these comment lines for every message. + +In many cases the first msgid-msgstr pair in PO file is a fake entry (acting as PO file header) that contains various information about the translated PO file, such as the application name, translating date, translator name and so on. + +Recent versions of &GNU; gettext added another useful i18n feature called plural forms. English uses only singular and one plural form of nouns, ⪚ 1 file and 10 files. This leads many developers to an idea that the world is that simple and they can use messages like Do you want to delete %1 file(s)?, where %1 denotes a number of files to be deleted. But this is fundamentally wrong. For Slovak translation you need 3 different forms of the message. This number is different for different languages and even when it is the same, ⪚ Czech uses 3 forms as well, the rule to decide which form to use can be very different. +Plural forms in PO files are here to help. Unfortunately, &kde; developers do not like the plural forms implementation in &GNU; gettext and they have introduced their own format and handling for them. -Editor +Editor -Here is a screenshot of &kbabel;. For convenience &kbabel; has toolbars to speed up many operations and, for busy users, there are many keyboard shortcuts. The main window is divided into four parts. +Here is a screenshot of &kbabel;. For convenience &kbabel; has toolbars to speed up many operations and, for busy users, there are many keyboard shortcuts. The main window is divided into four parts. -The upper-left edit box is read-only and contains the current msgid field from the opened PO-file and its English text. +The upper-left edit box is read-only and contains the current msgid field from the opened PO-file and its English text. -The bottom-left edit box contains the msgstr field related to the msgid shown and here you can edit the translated text. +The bottom-left edit box contains the msgstr field related to the msgid shown and here you can edit the translated text. -The top-right part of the window is a comments panel where you can view the comments added for entry currently being edited. +The top-right part of the window is a comments panel where you can view the comments added for entry currently being edited. -It can be used: +It can be used: -to find out how the current message is treated by the application (c-formatted or simple) -in some cases, to read helpful comments added by the application's developer to assist the translators in their work—for example, there may be technical hints (used to great effect in the LyX project) -when you need to know which file a message is from because you want to report a spelling mistake in the original English string. +to find out how the current message is treated by the application (c-formatted or simple) +in some cases, to read helpful comments added by the application's developer to assist the translators in their work—for example, there may be technical hints (used to great effect in the LyX project) +when you need to know which file a message is from because you want to report a spelling mistake in the original English string. -Screenshot of &kbabel; +Screenshot of &kbabel; -Screenshot of &kbabel; +Screenshot of &kbabel; -The editor window (in the bottom right) is the most sophisticated part of &kbabel;'s main window. Its size can be adjusted using the splitter line between it and the comment panel (the panel in the top right). The editor window has two tabbed panels—one storing search information, the other context information. The context information tab contain a scrolled view which shows the previous and next 4 entries associated with the current entry—essentially it's a small 'snapshot' of the PO file. While translating, it is very common for message strings to be related to subsequent and previous messages, so the context panel is useful for looking at the nearby messages to get a hint as to how the current message can best be translated. Dialogue interface translation is a good example, or widgets with their associated text and "what's this" message. +The editor window (in the bottom right) is the most sophisticated part of &kbabel;'s main window. Its size can be adjusted using the splitter line between it and the comment panel (the panel in the top right). The editor window has two tabbed panels—one storing search information, the other context information. The context information tab contain a scrolled view which shows the previous and next 4 entries associated with the current entry—essentially it's a small 'snapshot' of the PO file. While translating, it is very common for message strings to be related to subsequent and previous messages, so the context panel is useful for looking at the nearby messages to get a hint as to how the current message can best be translated. Dialogue interface translation is a good example, or widgets with their associated text and "what's this" message. -More &kbabel; Features +More &kbabel; Features -Each msgid entry can be in three states: +Each msgid entry can be in three states: - untranslated + untranslated - there is no translated text currently associated with the msgstr + there is no translated text currently associated with the msgstr - fuzzy + fuzzy - msgmerge has tried to match a translated string by looking in rest of PO-file entries. This does not work perfectly and you must edit the translated text to fit the current English text. + msgmerge has tried to match a translated string by looking in rest of PO-file entries. This does not work perfectly and you must edit the translated text to fit the current English text. - translated + translated - the msgid is the completed translated form of the msgstr + the msgid is the completed translated form of the msgstr -The state of the current entry is indicated by two LEDs. Depending on your configuration these can either be in the status bar or above the translated string edit box. Both have a customisable colour (to reflect your visual requirements or taste). Please read the Preferences section to see how you can adjust these settings. +The state of the current entry is indicated by two LEDs. Depending on your configuration these can either be in the status bar or above the translated string edit box. Both have a customisable colour (to reflect your visual requirements or taste). Please read the Preferences section to see how you can adjust these settings. -Advanced Translation +Advanced Translation -Now you have an idea how to translate a PO-file. In this section we will follow the standard way of translating a new PO-file using the advanced features of &kbabel;. We assume you have already opened a template POT-file and saved it as a PO file. +Now you have an idea how to translate a PO-file. In this section we will follow the standard way of translating a new PO-file using the advanced features of &kbabel;. We assume you have already opened a template POT-file and saved it as a PO file. -Navigation in PO-file -&kbabel; allows you to easily navigate through the file according to the state of their translation. The untranslated/fuzzy status was introduced already. A message can be marked as erroneous as a result of validation checking or validation done by msgfmt. And, of course, &kbabel; supports browsing the history of visited messages with Forward/Back, like in &konqueror;. -All commands for navigation are in Go menu. +Navigation in PO-file +&kbabel; allows you to easily navigate through the file according to the state of their translation. The untranslated/fuzzy status was introduced already. A message can be marked as erroneous as a result of validation checking or validation done by msgfmt. And, of course, &kbabel; supports browsing the history of visited messages with Forward/Back, like in &konqueror;. +All commands for navigation are in Go menu. -Page Up -Move to the previous message +Page Up +Move to the previous message -Page Down -Move to the next message +Page Down +Move to the next message -&Ctrl;Page Up -Move to the previous fuzzy message +&Ctrl;Page Up +Move to the previous fuzzy message -&Ctrl;Page Down -Move to the next fuzzy message +&Ctrl;Page Down +Move to the next fuzzy message -&Alt;Page Up -Move to the previous untranslated message +&Alt;Page Up +Move to the previous untranslated message -&Alt;Page Down -Move to the next untranslated message +&Alt;Page Down +Move to the next untranslated message -&Shift;Page Up -Move to the previous error message +&Shift;Page Up +Move to the previous error message -&Shift;Page Down -Move to the next error message +&Shift;Page Down +Move to the next error message -&Ctrl;&Shift;Page Up -Move to the previous fuzzy or untranslated message +&Ctrl;&Shift;Page Up +Move to the previous fuzzy or untranslated message -&Ctrl;&Shift;Page Down -Move to the next fuzzy or untranslated message +&Ctrl;&Shift;Page Down +Move to the next fuzzy or untranslated message @@ -424,138 +167,47 @@ -Clever editing -Clever editing means that the editor will help you easily edit the translation while taking into account specials of the PO format. It will correctly escape as necessary. -It also supports more than one mode for inserting end of the line. This is very useful because of the way gettext handles end of the lines. It simply ignores them. (You can imagine that all the text in msgstr is a single line.) If you want insert a real end of the line, you need to insert \n. But most of translators do not realize, that a new line in msgstr does not add any space between the lines. This can be easily solved by adding a space at the end of every line. But you can easily forget, so clever editing does this automatically for you. -The table below summarises clever editing features. +Clever editing +Clever editing means that the editor will help you easily edit the translation while taking into account specials of the PO format. It will correctly escape as necessary. +It also supports more than one mode for inserting end of the line. This is very useful because of the way gettext handles end of the lines. It simply ignores them. (You can imagine that all the text in msgstr is a single line.) If you want insert a real end of the line, you need to insert \n. But most of translators do not realize, that a new line in msgstr does not add any space between the lines. This can be easily solved by adding a space at the end of every line. But you can easily forget, so clever editing does this automatically for you. +The table below summarises clever editing features. -Tab -Insert \t +Tab +Insert \t -" -Insert \" +" +Insert \" -Enter -If the last character before cursor is not a space, insert one space. Then start a new line. - -&Ctrl;Enter -Start a new line without any additional logic +Enter +If the last character before cursor is not a space, insert one space. Then start a new line. + +&Ctrl;Enter +Start a new line without any additional logic -&Shift;Enter -Insert \n and start a new line +&Shift;Enter +Insert \n and start a new line -If you want to see where are spaces, you can turn on Highlight background and/or Mark whitespaces with points in preferences dialogue on tab Edit Appearance. +If you want to see where are spaces, you can turn on Highlight background and/or Mark whitespaces with points in preferences dialogue on tab Edit Appearance. -Automatic translation -As the first step when starting a new translation, &kbabel; provides a function for automatic filling of the messages translations by the older translations. Choose ToolsRough Translation and &kbabel; will present the following dialogue: +Automatic translation +As the first step when starting a new translation, &kbabel; provides a function for automatic filling of the messages translations by the older translations. Choose ToolsRough Translation and &kbabel; will present the following dialogue: -Rough translation dialogue +Rough translation dialogue @@ -563,298 +215,122 @@ -In the dialogue, you should specify what to translate and choose the sources for the old translations. -At the top of the What to translate frame are three checkboxes (Untranslated entries, Fuzzy entries , Translated entries) for specifying the kind of messages you want to translate. Untranslated and fuzzy entries are natural choices for automatic translation, but you can change already translated messages as well. -The exact matching for msgids will always be used for rough translation. However, you can add more strategies, &ie; Allow fuzzy translation (slow) and Allow single word translation. Both of these additional strategies must be supported by the sources used (see below). There is no specification, what does fuzzy translation mean, but the purpose is quite obvious. Single word translation is suitable for only some of the languages. &kbabel; will try to translate each word in msgid separately and then put the translated words (or phrases) in the same order in msgstr . -As a source for rough translation, any dictionary module available can be used. There is a list of Don't use modules and Use modules. Modules are used in the order in the Use list. First module is asked for translation. If it is not found, next module in the list is asked and so on. You can use the buttons with arrows for moving modules between the lists. Don't forget to change the order to suit your needs by Move Up and Move Down buttons. -Normally &kbabel; will mark every roughly translated message as fuzzy, because it assumes that any automatic translation needs to be reviewed by a translator. If you are 100% sure that the automatic translation will be correct, or you will review all the translation anyway. Mark changed entries as fuzzy allows you to turn off this automatic fuzzy marking, but you will need to confirm this. -If you have set all the options to suit your needs, push Start to automatically translate messages. You can follow the progress bar and in case, there is always the Stop button. +In the dialogue, you should specify what to translate and choose the sources for the old translations. +At the top of the What to translate frame are three checkboxes (Untranslated entries, Fuzzy entries , Translated entries) for specifying the kind of messages you want to translate. Untranslated and fuzzy entries are natural choices for automatic translation, but you can change already translated messages as well. +The exact matching for msgids will always be used for rough translation. However, you can add more strategies, &ie; Allow fuzzy translation (slow) and Allow single word translation. Both of these additional strategies must be supported by the sources used (see below). There is no specification, what does fuzzy translation mean, but the purpose is quite obvious. Single word translation is suitable for only some of the languages. &kbabel; will try to translate each word in msgid separately and then put the translated words (or phrases) in the same order in msgstr . +As a source for rough translation, any dictionary module available can be used. There is a list of Don't use modules and Use modules. Modules are used in the order in the Use list. First module is asked for translation. If it is not found, next module in the list is asked and so on. You can use the buttons with arrows for moving modules between the lists. Don't forget to change the order to suit your needs by Move Up and Move Down buttons. +Normally &kbabel; will mark every roughly translated message as fuzzy, because it assumes that any automatic translation needs to be reviewed by a translator. If you are 100% sure that the automatic translation will be correct, or you will review all the translation anyway. Mark changed entries as fuzzy allows you to turn off this automatic fuzzy marking, but you will need to confirm this. +If you have set all the options to suit your needs, push Start to automatically translate messages. You can follow the progress bar and in case, there is always the Stop button. -Validate your translation -Everyone makes mistakes. So &kbabel; supports a number of checks for typical problems in translations. These checks (not syntax check) can be basically performed in two ways. -Checks can be done at each change of the translated text. These are called automatic checks and they can be turned on in the &kbabel; configuration dialogue. Automatic checking of syntax is possible at each saving of the file. -The automatic checks can slow down &kbabel;. If you have a slower computer, you can turn off the automatic checks and use only the second possibility. You can invoke every kind of check from the Tools Validation. Then the check is performed for all messages in the file and faulty ones are marked as errors. +Validate your translation +Everyone makes mistakes. So &kbabel; supports a number of checks for typical problems in translations. These checks (not syntax check) can be basically performed in two ways. +Checks can be done at each change of the translated text. These are called automatic checks and they can be turned on in the &kbabel; configuration dialogue. Automatic checking of syntax is possible at each saving of the file. +The automatic checks can slow down &kbabel;. If you have a slower computer, you can turn off the automatic checks and use only the second possibility. You can invoke every kind of check from the Tools Validation. Then the check is performed for all messages in the file and faulty ones are marked as errors. - Check Syntax + Check Syntax - This invokes msgfmt to check validity of the PO file as seen by gettext package. It will show the result of the command and mark error msgstrs. + This invokes msgfmt to check validity of the PO file as seen by gettext package. It will show the result of the command and mark error msgstrs. - Check Arguments + Check Arguments - Incorrect translations can crash the application. The most dangerous parts of translation are arguments, ⪚ for printf-like functions. This check compares the number and types of the arguments in msgid and msgstr. They must match. + Incorrect translations can crash the application. The most dangerous parts of translation are arguments, ⪚ for printf-like functions. This check compares the number and types of the arguments in msgid and msgstr. They must match. - Check Accelerators + Check Accelerators - &GUI; text commonly contain accelerators, &ie; letters which can be used for fast access to &GUI; elements by keyboard. They are denoted by special character, ⪚ & in &kde;. Typical requirement of the translation is that translated text should contain accelerator as well. This check will notice this problem for you. The accelerator character can be specified in Preferences on Misc tab. + &GUI; text commonly contain accelerators, &ie; letters which can be used for fast access to &GUI; elements by keyboard. They are denoted by special character, ⪚ & in &kde;. Typical requirement of the translation is that translated text should contain accelerator as well. This check will notice this problem for you. The accelerator character can be specified in Preferences on Misc tab. - Look for Translated Context Info + Look for Translated Context Info - You will probably need this only for &kde; translation. Some of the text are too common and they need to be translated differently in different contexts. In &kde; the context is described at the beginning of msgid after the special sequence :_. But if some translators are not aware of this convention and they try to translate context information as well. This check will try to find these. If the check founds translated context information, you should remove it. + You will probably need this only for &kde; translation. Some of the text are too common and they need to be translated differently in different contexts. In &kde; the context is described at the beginning of msgid after the special sequence :_. But if some translators are not aware of this convention and they try to translate context information as well. This check will try to find these. If the check founds translated context information, you should remove it. - Check Plural Forms + Check Plural Forms - If the msgid is specified as a plural form, the translation has to contain the correct number of translations separated by \n. The correct number depends on the language of translation and is specified on Identity tab in Preferences dialogue. This is implemented only for &kde; at the moment. + If the msgid is specified as a plural form, the translation has to contain the correct number of translations separated by \n. The correct number depends on the language of translation and is specified on Identity tab in Preferences dialogue. This is implemented only for &kde; at the moment. - Check Equations + Check Equations - Equations are special format of msgid typically used in .desktop files. And because your translations will be merged back to these files, msgstr must use this special format as well. This means that the translation must start (up to the first occurrence of = with the same text as the original message, ⪚ Name=. + Equations are special format of msgid typically used in .desktop files. And because your translations will be merged back to these files, msgstr must use this special format as well. This means that the translation must start (up to the first occurrence of = with the same text as the original message, ⪚ Name=. -Spellchecking the translation -As always, it is very important to spell-check your translation before using your result. This way you can find typos and other problems in your translation. &kbabel; uses the standard &kde; library for spellchecking and its standard settings can be found in the &kbabel; configuration dialogue. Spell checking itself can be found in ToolsSpelling submenu. You can use a number of modes for spell checking: +Spellchecking the translation +As always, it is very important to spell-check your translation before using your result. This way you can find typos and other problems in your translation. &kbabel; uses the standard &kde; library for spellchecking and its standard settings can be found in the &kbabel; configuration dialogue. Spell checking itself can be found in ToolsSpelling submenu. You can use a number of modes for spell checking: - Spell check... + Spell check... - This is a generic invocation of a dialogue where you can choose the spellchecking mode and set the default mode. This is invoked by pressing &Ctrl;I . + This is a generic invocation of a dialogue where you can choose the spellchecking mode and set the default mode. This is invoked by pressing &Ctrl;I . - Check All... + Check All... - Spellcheck all messages in the file. + Spellcheck all messages in the file. - Check from Cursor Position... + Check from Cursor Position... - Start spellchecking at the position in the current message and progress towards the end of the file. + Start spellchecking at the position in the current message and progress towards the end of the file. - Check Current... + Check Current... - Spellcheck the current message only. + Spellcheck the current message only. - Check Selected Text... + Check Selected Text... - If there is a selected text in msgstr editor, this option is available and will spellcheck this text only. + If there is a selected text in msgstr editor, this option is available and will spellcheck this text only. -Translating &XML;, <acronym ->HTML</acronym ->, ... -Markup languages are used more and more in &GUI;. &kde; project also uses PO-files for translating DocBook documentation files (which is also a markup language). &kbabel; contains quite a lot of functionality to support this trend. +Translating &XML;, <acronym>HTML</acronym>, ... +Markup languages are used more and more in &GUI;. &kde; project also uses PO-files for translating DocBook documentation files (which is also a markup language). &kbabel; contains quite a lot of functionality to support this trend. -Here, we will describe only functions related to tags used for markup itself. The other problem introduced by using markup languages is translation of longer texts. This issue is addressed by the diff feature described in the following section. +Here, we will describe only functions related to tags used for markup itself. The other problem introduced by using markup languages is translation of longer texts. This issue is addressed by the diff feature described in the following section. -The current version of &kbabel; is capable to find out which tags are used in msgid and provide an easy access to them using following actions from the Edit: +The current version of &kbabel; is capable to find out which tags are used in msgid and provide an easy access to them using following actions from the Edit: - Insert Next Tag + Insert Next Tag - This inserts next tag found in msgid to the translation. &kbabel; finds the tag to be inserted by counting the number of tags from the beginning of the translation. + This inserts next tag found in msgid to the translation. &kbabel; finds the tag to be inserted by counting the number of tags from the beginning of the translation. - Edit Insert Tag + Edit Insert Tag - This submenu contains all different markup tags found in original english string. By selecting a tag you can insert it at the current position of cursor in translated text. translation. + This submenu contains all different markup tags found in original english string. By selecting a tag you can insert it at the current position of cursor in translated text. translation. @@ -862,142 +338,50 @@ -Showing the difference -As explained already, current applications, trying to be user friendly, contain a lot of longer descriptive texts, including markup. If a developer changes a part of the text, the &GNU; gettext system will, in the best case, retain the old translation and mark it as fuzzy. (In the worst case you will lose the translation completely, depending on the size of the text changes). This works OK, if a msgid is short, because then you can find the changes quickly. But if the text is long enough, you will struggle to find out what has been changed (For example, it can be only an article change by proof-reading team.) -To help, &kbabel; can be asked to lookup the original msgid and to show the difference. The changes are graphically displayed in the Original String window. The exact method can be set in the &kbabel; configuration dialogue. Tools Diff Show Diff will show the differences found. To see the current text without the mixture of original text and differences, use Tools Diff Show Original Text . -You can turn automatic lookup of difference on and off by choosing Tools Diff Diff Mode . When the diff mode is on, difference searching starts when you go to another message. -As always, you can use different sources for finding the old version of the text, all being set in in &kbabel; configuration dialogue: +Showing the difference +As explained already, current applications, trying to be user friendly, contain a lot of longer descriptive texts, including markup. If a developer changes a part of the text, the &GNU; gettext system will, in the best case, retain the old translation and mark it as fuzzy. (In the worst case you will lose the translation completely, depending on the size of the text changes). This works OK, if a msgid is short, because then you can find the changes quickly. But if the text is long enough, you will struggle to find out what has been changed (For example, it can be only an article change by proof-reading team.) +To help, &kbabel; can be asked to lookup the original msgid and to show the difference. The changes are graphically displayed in the Original String window. The exact method can be set in the &kbabel; configuration dialogue. Tools Diff Show Diff will show the differences found. To see the current text without the mixture of original text and differences, use Tools Diff Show Original Text . +You can turn automatic lookup of difference on and off by choosing Tools Diff Diff Mode . When the diff mode is on, difference searching starts when you go to another message. +As always, you can use different sources for finding the old version of the text, all being set in in &kbabel; configuration dialogue: - Translation Database + Translation Database - You can use Translation Database for difference lookup. We strongly recommend to turn on the automatic storing of the newly translated messages into Translation Database in Translation Database configuration dialogue. This mode can be turned on by Use messages from Translation Database. + You can use Translation Database for difference lookup. We strongly recommend to turn on the automatic storing of the newly translated messages into Translation Database in Translation Database configuration dialogue. This mode can be turned on by Use messages from Translation Database. - Tree of the old files + Tree of the old files - This will be used only if searching in Translation Database is turned off. By setting Base folder for diff files you can navigate &kbabel;, which file to use for difference. It takes the relative path of the opened file and uses this relative path in the folder specified here. If there is a corresponding file, it will be used. To use this mode, you should make a copy of old files before each update. + This will be used only if searching in Translation Database is turned off. By setting Base folder for diff files you can navigate &kbabel;, which file to use for difference. It takes the relative path of the opened file and uses this relative path in the folder specified here. If there is a corresponding file, it will be used. To use this mode, you should make a copy of old files before each update. - Manually chosen file + Manually chosen file - If the previous possibility does not work, correctly, you can always set the difference file manually by choosing ToolsDiff Open File for Diff. + If the previous possibility does not work, correctly, you can always set the difference file manually by choosing ToolsDiff Open File for Diff. -The difference lookup is not always accurate, because the PO-file does not contain any reference to the original message. +The difference lookup is not always accurate, because the PO-file does not contain any reference to the original message. -Plural Forms -Because plural forms are quite a complicated issue, we devote a special section for their suport in &kbabel;. -&kbabel; can read the &GNU; plural forms only, but cannot edit them. It only supports the &kde; version of plural forms at the moment. -Every language to which &kde; is translated must have set a correct number of plural forms. This is done by translating an entry in tdelibs.po. The number is set by selecting the name of a language, which uses the same number and rules for finding the right plural form. The up-to-date list of possible values can be found in the tdelibs source code, in the file tdecore/tdelocale.cpp. -&kde; plural forms are denoted by comment _: containing the %n argument. This argument is then used in the message itself and it controls which plural form of your language should be used depending on the rules for your language. -The translation of a plural form message has to have a special format. It must contain the correct number of translations (one for each plural form) separated by an end of the line \n. For example, Selected %n files translated to Slovak would be: -Vybraný %n súbor\n +Plural Forms +Because plural forms are quite a complicated issue, we devote a special section for their suport in &kbabel;. +&kbabel; can read the &GNU; plural forms only, but cannot edit them. It only supports the &kde; version of plural forms at the moment. +Every language to which &kde; is translated must have set a correct number of plural forms. This is done by translating an entry in tdelibs.po. The number is set by selecting the name of a language, which uses the same number and rules for finding the right plural form. The up-to-date list of possible values can be found in the tdelibs source code, in the file tdecore/tdelocale.cpp. +&kde; plural forms are denoted by comment _: containing the %n argument. This argument is then used in the message itself and it controls which plural form of your language should be used depending on the rules for your language. +The translation of a plural form message has to have a special format. It must contain the correct number of translations (one for each plural form) separated by an end of the line \n. For example, Selected %n files translated to Slovak would be: +Vybraný %n súbor\n Vybrané %n súbory\n Vybraných %n súborov -To check if your translation contains the correct number of plural forms, use the Tools Validation Check Plural Forms (KDE only) menu. +To check if your translation contains the correct number of plural forms, use the Tools Validation Check Plural Forms (KDE only) menu. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbugbuster/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbugbuster/index.docbook index 1b59451fa02..937becd8f11 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbugbuster/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kbugbuster/index.docbook @@ -9,43 +9,16 @@ -The &kbugbuster; Handbook +The &kbugbuster; Handbook -
+
-MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-03-31 -0.00.00 +2002-03-31 +0.00.00 -&kbugbuster; is part of the tdesdk package. +&kbugbuster; is part of the tdesdk package. -KDE -kbugbuster +KDE +kbugbuster - Introduction The documentation for &kappname; was not finished when &kde; was installed on this computer. If you need help, please check The &kde; Website for updates, or by submitting your question to The &kde; User Mailing list. The &kde; Team &underFDL; + Introduction The documentation for &kappname; was not finished when &kde; was installed on this computer. If you need help, please check The &kde; Website for updates, or by submitting your question to The &kde; User Mailing list. The &kde; Team &underFDL; &documentation.index; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kompare/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kompare/index.docbook index b44f14de61f..c8845c138a5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kompare/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/kompare/index.docbook @@ -9,43 +9,16 @@ -The &kompare; Handbook +The &kompare; Handbook -
+
-MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-12-16 -0.00.00 +2002-12-16 +0.00.00 -&kompare; is a program to view the differences between files. +&kompare; is a program to view the differences between files. -KDE -Kompare +KDE +Kompare - Introduction The documentation for &kappname; was not finished when &kde; was installed on this computer. If you need help, please check The &kde; Website for updates, or by submitting your question to The &kde; User Mailing list. The &kde; Team &underFDL; + Introduction The documentation for &kappname; was not finished when &kde; was installed on this computer. If you need help, please check The &kde; Website for updates, or by submitting your question to The &kde; User Mailing list. The &kde; Team &underFDL; &documentation.index; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/tdecachegrind/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/tdecachegrind/index.docbook index 443be3d40cd..10f44686ac9 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/tdecachegrind/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/tdecachegrind/index.docbook @@ -1,23 +1,11 @@ KCachegrind'> - Cachegrind"> - Calltree"> - Callgrind"> - Valgrind"> - OProfile"> + KCachegrind'> + Cachegrind"> + Calltree"> + Callgrind"> + Valgrind"> + OProfile"> @@ -29,167 +17,96 @@ -The &tdecachegrind; Handbook +The &tdecachegrind; Handbook -Josef Weidendorfer
Josef.Weidendorfer@gmx.de
+Josef Weidendorfer
Josef.Weidendorfer@gmx.de
 -AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English +AndrewColes
andrew_coles@yahoo.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-2004 -Josef Weidendorfer +2002-2004 +Josef Weidendorfer -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2004-07-27 -0.4.6 +2004-07-27 +0.4.6 -&tdecachegrind; is a profile data visualisation tool, written using the &kde; environment. +&tdecachegrind; is a profile data visualisation tool, written using the &kde; environment. -KDE -tdesdk -Cachegrind -Callgrind -Valgrind -Profiling +KDE +tdesdk +Cachegrind +Callgrind +Valgrind +Profiling -Introduction +Introduction -&kappname; is a browser for data produced by profiling tools. This chapter explains what profiling is for, how it is done, and gives some examples of profiling tools available. +&kappname; is a browser for data produced by profiling tools. This chapter explains what profiling is for, how it is done, and gives some examples of profiling tools available. -Profiling +Profiling -When developing a program, one of the last steps often involves performance optimisations. As it makes no sense to optimise functions rarely used, because that would be a waste of time, one needs to know in which part of a program most of the time is spent. +When developing a program, one of the last steps often involves performance optimisations. As it makes no sense to optimise functions rarely used, because that would be a waste of time, one needs to know in which part of a program most of the time is spent. -For sequential code, collecting statistical data of the programs runtime characteristic like time numbers spent in functions and code lines usually is enough. This is called Profiling. The program is run under control of a profiling tool, which gives the summary of an execution run at the end. In contrast, for parallel code, performance problems typically are caused when one processor is waiting for data from another. As this waiting time usually can not easily attributed, here it is better to generate timestamped event traces. KCachegrind can not visualise this kind of data. +For sequential code, collecting statistical data of the programs runtime characteristic like time numbers spent in functions and code lines usually is enough. This is called Profiling. The program is run under control of a profiling tool, which gives the summary of an execution run at the end. In contrast, for parallel code, performance problems typically are caused when one processor is waiting for data from another. As this waiting time usually can not easily attributed, here it is better to generate timestamped event traces. KCachegrind can not visualise this kind of data. -After analysing the produced profile data, it should be easy to see the hot spots and bottlenecks of the code: for example, assumptions about call counts can be checked, and identified code regions can be optimised. Afterwards, the success of the optimisation should be verified with another profile run. +After analysing the produced profile data, it should be easy to see the hot spots and bottlenecks of the code: for example, assumptions about call counts can be checked, and identified code regions can be optimised. Afterwards, the success of the optimisation should be verified with another profile run. -Profiling Methods +Profiling Methods -To exactly measure the time passed or record the events happening during the execution of a code region (e.g. a function), additional measurement code needs to be inserted before and after the given region. This code reads the time, or a global event count, and calculates differences. Thus, the original code has to be changed before execution. This is called instrumentation. Instrumentation can be done by the programmer itself, the compiler, or by the runtime system. As interesting regions usually are nested, the overhead of measurement always influences the measurement itself. Thus, instrumentation should be done selectively and results have to be interpreted with care. Of course, this makes performance analysis by exact measurement a very complex process. +To exactly measure the time passed or record the events happening during the execution of a code region (e.g. a function), additional measurement code needs to be inserted before and after the given region. This code reads the time, or a global event count, and calculates differences. Thus, the original code has to be changed before execution. This is called instrumentation. Instrumentation can be done by the programmer itself, the compiler, or by the runtime system. As interesting regions usually are nested, the overhead of measurement always influences the measurement itself. Thus, instrumentation should be done selectively and results have to be interpreted with care. Of course, this makes performance analysis by exact measurement a very complex process. -Exact measurement is possible because of hardware counters (including counters incrementing on a time tick) provided in modern processors, which are incremented whenever an event is happening. As we want to attribute events to code regions, without the counters, we would have to handle every event by incrementing a counter for the current code region ourself. Doing this in software is, of course, not possible; but, on the assumption that the event distribution over source code is similar when looking only at every n-th event instead of every event, a measurement method whose overhead is tunable has been developed: it is called Sampling. Time Based Sampling (TBS) uses a timer to regularly look at the program counter to create a histogram over the program code. Event Based Sampling (EBS) exploits the hardware counters of modern processors, and uses a mode where an interrupt handler is called on counter underflow to generate a histogram of the corresponding event distribution: in the handler, the event counter is always reinitialised to the 'n' of the sampling method. The advantage of sampling is that the code does not have to be changed, but it is still a compromise: the above assumption will be more correct if n is small, but the smaller the n, the higher the overhead of the interrupt handler. +Exact measurement is possible because of hardware counters (including counters incrementing on a time tick) provided in modern processors, which are incremented whenever an event is happening. As we want to attribute events to code regions, without the counters, we would have to handle every event by incrementing a counter for the current code region ourself. Doing this in software is, of course, not possible; but, on the assumption that the event distribution over source code is similar when looking only at every n-th event instead of every event, a measurement method whose overhead is tunable has been developed: it is called Sampling. Time Based Sampling (TBS) uses a timer to regularly look at the program counter to create a histogram over the program code. Event Based Sampling (EBS) exploits the hardware counters of modern processors, and uses a mode where an interrupt handler is called on counter underflow to generate a histogram of the corresponding event distribution: in the handler, the event counter is always reinitialised to the 'n' of the sampling method. The advantage of sampling is that the code does not have to be changed, but it is still a compromise: the above assumption will be more correct if n is small, but the smaller the n, the higher the overhead of the interrupt handler. -Another measurement method is to simulate things happening in the computer system when executing a given code, i.e. execution driven simulation. The simulation is always derived from a more or less accurate machine model; however, with very detailed machine models, giving very close approximations to reality, the simulation time can be unacceptably high in practise. The advantage of simulation is that arbitrarily complex measurement/simulation code can be inserted in a given code without perturbing results. Doing this directly before execution (called runtime instrumentation), using the original binary, is very comfortable for the user: no re-compilation is necessary. Simulation becomes usable when simulating only parts of a machine with a simple model; another advantage is that the results produced by simple models are often easier to understand: often, the problem with real hardware is that results include overlapping effects from different parts of the machine. +Another measurement method is to simulate things happening in the computer system when executing a given code, i.e. execution driven simulation. The simulation is always derived from a more or less accurate machine model; however, with very detailed machine models, giving very close approximations to reality, the simulation time can be unacceptably high in practise. The advantage of simulation is that arbitrarily complex measurement/simulation code can be inserted in a given code without perturbing results. Doing this directly before execution (called runtime instrumentation), using the original binary, is very comfortable for the user: no re-compilation is necessary. Simulation becomes usable when simulating only parts of a machine with a simple model; another advantage is that the results produced by simple models are often easier to understand: often, the problem with real hardware is that results include overlapping effects from different parts of the machine. -Profiling Tools - -Most known is the GCC profiling tool gprof: One needs to compile the program with option ; running the program generates a file gmon.out, which can be transformed into human-readable form with gprof. One disadvantage is the needed re-compilation step to prepare the executable, which has to be statically linked. The method used here is compiler-generated instrumention - which measures call arcs happening among functions and corresponding call counts - in conjunction with TBS - which gives a histogram of time distribution over the code. Using both pieces of information, it is possible to heuristically calculate inclusive time of functions, i.e. time spent in a function together with all functions called from it. - -For exact measurement of events happening, libraries exist with functions able to read out hardware performance counters. Most known here is the PerfCtr patch for Linux, and the architecture independent libraries PAPI and PCL. Still, exact measurement needs instrumentation of code, as stated above. Either one uses the libraries itself or uses automatic instrumentation systems like ADAPTOR (for FORTRAN source instrumentation) or DynaProf (code injection via DynInst). - -&oprofile; is a system-wide profiling tool for Linux using Sampling. - -In many aspects, a comfortable way of Profiling is using Cachegrind or Callgrind, which are simulators using the runtime instrumentation framework &valgrind;. Because there is no need to access hardware counters (often difficult with today's Linux installations), and binaries to be profiled can be left unmodified, it is a good alternative to other profiling tools. The disadvantage of simulation - slowdown - can be reduced by doing the simulation on only the interesting program parts, and perhaps only on a few iterations of a loop. Without measurement/simulation instrumentation, Valgrind's usage only has a slowdown factor in the range of 3 to 5. Also, when only the call graph and call counts are of interest, the cache simulator can be switched off. - -Cache simulation is the first step in approximating real times; as ,on modern systems, runtime is very sensitive to the exploitation of so called caches (small and fast buffers which accelerate repeated accesses to the same main memory cells.) &cachegrind; does cache simulation by catching memory accesses. The data produced includes the number of instruction/data memory accesses and 1st/2nd level cache misses, and relates it to source lines and functions of the run program. By combining these miss counts, using miss latencies from typical processors, an estimation of spent time can be given. - -Callgrind is an extension of &cachegrind; that builds up the call graph of a program on-the-fly, &ie; how the functions call each other and how many events happen while running a function. Also, the profile data to be collected can separated by threads and call chain contexts. It can provide profiling data on an instruction level to allow for annotation of disassembled code. +Profiling Tools + +Most known is the GCC profiling tool gprof: One needs to compile the program with option ; running the program generates a file gmon.out, which can be transformed into human-readable form with gprof. One disadvantage is the needed re-compilation step to prepare the executable, which has to be statically linked. The method used here is compiler-generated instrumention - which measures call arcs happening among functions and corresponding call counts - in conjunction with TBS - which gives a histogram of time distribution over the code. Using both pieces of information, it is possible to heuristically calculate inclusive time of functions, i.e. time spent in a function together with all functions called from it. + +For exact measurement of events happening, libraries exist with functions able to read out hardware performance counters. Most known here is the PerfCtr patch for Linux, and the architecture independent libraries PAPI and PCL. Still, exact measurement needs instrumentation of code, as stated above. Either one uses the libraries itself or uses automatic instrumentation systems like ADAPTOR (for FORTRAN source instrumentation) or DynaProf (code injection via DynInst). + +&oprofile; is a system-wide profiling tool for Linux using Sampling. + +In many aspects, a comfortable way of Profiling is using Cachegrind or Callgrind, which are simulators using the runtime instrumentation framework &valgrind;. Because there is no need to access hardware counters (often difficult with today's Linux installations), and binaries to be profiled can be left unmodified, it is a good alternative to other profiling tools. The disadvantage of simulation - slowdown - can be reduced by doing the simulation on only the interesting program parts, and perhaps only on a few iterations of a loop. Without measurement/simulation instrumentation, Valgrind's usage only has a slowdown factor in the range of 3 to 5. Also, when only the call graph and call counts are of interest, the cache simulator can be switched off. + +Cache simulation is the first step in approximating real times; as ,on modern systems, runtime is very sensitive to the exploitation of so called caches (small and fast buffers which accelerate repeated accesses to the same main memory cells.) &cachegrind; does cache simulation by catching memory accesses. The data produced includes the number of instruction/data memory accesses and 1st/2nd level cache misses, and relates it to source lines and functions of the run program. By combining these miss counts, using miss latencies from typical processors, an estimation of spent time can be given. + +Callgrind is an extension of &cachegrind; that builds up the call graph of a program on-the-fly, &ie; how the functions call each other and how many events happen while running a function. Also, the profile data to be collected can separated by threads and call chain contexts. It can provide profiling data on an instruction level to allow for annotation of disassembled code. -Visualisation +Visualisation -Profiling tools typically produce a large amount of data. The wish to easily browse down and up the call graph, together with fast switching of the sorting mode of functions and display of different event types, motivates a GUI application to accomplish this task. +Profiling tools typically produce a large amount of data. The wish to easily browse down and up the call graph, together with fast switching of the sorting mode of functions and display of different event types, motivates a GUI application to accomplish this task. -&kappname; is an visualisation for profile data fulfilling these wishes. Despite being programmed first with browsing the data from &cachegrind; and &calltree; in mind, there are converters available to be able to display profile data produced by other tools. In the appendix, a description of the Cachegrind/Callgrind file format is given. +&kappname; is an visualisation for profile data fulfilling these wishes. Despite being programmed first with browsing the data from &cachegrind; and &calltree; in mind, there are converters available to be able to display profile data produced by other tools. In the appendix, a description of the Cachegrind/Callgrind file format is given. -Besides a list of functions sorted according exclusive or inclusive cost metrics, and optionally grouped by source file, shared library or C++ class, &kappname; features various visualisation views for a selected function, namely -a call-graph view, which shows a section of the call graph around the selected function, +Besides a list of functions sorted according exclusive or inclusive cost metrics, and optionally grouped by source file, shared library or C++ class, &kappname; features various visualisation views for a selected function, namely +a call-graph view, which shows a section of the call graph around the selected function, -a tree-map view, which allows nested-call relations to be visualised, together with inclusive cost metric for fast visual detection of problematic functions, +a tree-map view, which allows nested-call relations to be visualised, together with inclusive cost metric for fast visual detection of problematic functions, -source code and disassembler annotation views, allowing to see details of cost related to source lines and assembler instructions. +source code and disassembler annotation views, allowing to see details of cost related to source lines and assembler instructions. @@ -198,409 +115,193 @@ -Using &tdecachegrind; +Using &tdecachegrind; -Generate Data to Visualise +Generate Data to Visualise -First, one wants to generate performance data by measuring aspects of the runtime characteristics of an application, using a profiling tool. &tdecachegrind; itself does not include any profiling tool, but is good in being used together with &callgrind;, and by using a converter, also can be used to visualise data produced with &oprofile;. Although the scope of this manual is not to document profiling with these tools, the next section provides short quickstart tutorials to get you started. +First, one wants to generate performance data by measuring aspects of the runtime characteristics of an application, using a profiling tool. &tdecachegrind; itself does not include any profiling tool, but is good in being used together with &callgrind;, and by using a converter, also can be used to visualise data produced with &oprofile;. Although the scope of this manual is not to document profiling with these tools, the next section provides short quickstart tutorials to get you started. -&callgrind; - -&callgrind; is available from http://tdecachegrind.sf.net. Note that it previously was called &calltree;, but that name was misleading. - -Most common use is to prefix the command line to start your application with callgrind, like in
callgrind myprogram myargs
At program termination, a file callgrind.out.pid will be generated which can be loaded into &tdecachegrind;. - -More advanced use is to dump out profile data whenever a given function of your application is called. E.g. for konqueror, to see profile data only for rendering a web page, you could decide to dump the data whenever you select the menu item View/Reload. This corresponds to a call to KonqMainWindow::slotReload. Use
callgrind --dump-before=KonqMainWindow::slotReload konqueror
This will produce multiple profile data files with an additional sequential number at the end of the filename. A file without such an number at the end (only ending in the process PID) will also be produced; by loading this file into &tdecachegrind;, all others are loaded too, and can be seen in the Parts Overview and Parts list. +&callgrind; + +&callgrind; is available from http://tdecachegrind.sf.net. Note that it previously was called &calltree;, but that name was misleading. + +Most common use is to prefix the command line to start your application with callgrind, like in
callgrind myprogram myargs
At program termination, a file callgrind.out.pid will be generated which can be loaded into &tdecachegrind;. + +More advanced use is to dump out profile data whenever a given function of your application is called. E.g. for konqueror, to see profile data only for rendering a web page, you could decide to dump the data whenever you select the menu item View/Reload. This corresponds to a call to KonqMainWindow::slotReload. Use
callgrind --dump-before=KonqMainWindow::slotReload konqueror
This will produce multiple profile data files with an additional sequential number at the end of the filename. A file without such an number at the end (only ending in the process PID) will also be produced; by loading this file into &tdecachegrind;, all others are loaded too, and can be seen in the Parts Overview and Parts list. -&oprofile; - -&oprofile; is available from http://oprofile.sf.net. Follow the installation instructions on the web site; but, before you do, check if your distribution does not already provide it as package (like SuSE). - -System-wide profiling is only permitted to the root user, as all actions on the system can be observed; therefore, the following has to be done as root. First, configure the profiling process, using the GUI oprof_start or the command-line tool opcontrol. Standard configuration should be timer mode (TBS, see introduction). To start the measurement, run opcontrol -s. Then run the application you are interested in and, afterwards, do a opcontrol -d. This will write out the measurement results into files under directory /var/lib/oprofile/samples/. To be able to visualise the data in &tdecachegrind;, do in an empty directory:
opreport -gdf | op2callgrind
This will produce a lot of files, one for every program which was running on the system. Each one can be loaded into &tdecachegrind; on its own. +&oprofile; + +&oprofile; is available from http://oprofile.sf.net. Follow the installation instructions on the web site; but, before you do, check if your distribution does not already provide it as package (like SuSE). + +System-wide profiling is only permitted to the root user, as all actions on the system can be observed; therefore, the following has to be done as root. First, configure the profiling process, using the GUI oprof_start or the command-line tool opcontrol. Standard configuration should be timer mode (TBS, see introduction). To start the measurement, run opcontrol -s. Then run the application you are interested in and, afterwards, do a opcontrol -d. This will write out the measurement results into files under directory /var/lib/oprofile/samples/. To be able to visualise the data in &tdecachegrind;, do in an empty directory:
opreport -gdf | op2callgrind
This will produce a lot of files, one for every program which was running on the system. Each one can be loaded into &tdecachegrind; on its own. -User Interface Basics - -When starting &tdecachegrind; with a profile data file as argument, or after loading one with File/Open, you will see a sidebar containing the function list at the left; and, on the right the main part, an area with visualisations for a selected function. This visualisation area can be arbitrarily configured to show multiple visualisations at once. - -At first start, this area will be divided into a top and a bottom part, each with different visualisations selectable by tabs. To move visualisation views, use the context menu of the tabs, and adjust the splitters between visualisations. To quickly switch between different visualisation layouts, use View/Layouts/Duplicate, change the layout and switch between layouts with View/Layout/Next (or, even better, use the corresponding keyboard shortcuts). - -The active event type is important for visualisation: for &callgrind;, this is, for example, Cache Misses or Cycle Estimation; for &oprofile;, this is "Timer" in the simplest case. You can change the event type via a combobox in the toolbar or in the Event Type view. A first overview of the runtime characteristics should be given when you select function main in the left list, and look at the call graph visualisation; there, you see calls happening in your program. Note that the call graph view only shows functions with high event count. By double-clicking a function in the graph, it will change to show the called functions around the selected one. - -To explore the GUI further, in addition to this manual, also have a look at the documentation section on the web site http://tdecachegrind.sf.net. Also, every widget in &tdecachegrind; has What's this help. +User Interface Basics + +When starting &tdecachegrind; with a profile data file as argument, or after loading one with File/Open, you will see a sidebar containing the function list at the left; and, on the right the main part, an area with visualisations for a selected function. This visualisation area can be arbitrarily configured to show multiple visualisations at once. + +At first start, this area will be divided into a top and a bottom part, each with different visualisations selectable by tabs. To move visualisation views, use the context menu of the tabs, and adjust the splitters between visualisations. To quickly switch between different visualisation layouts, use View/Layouts/Duplicate, change the layout and switch between layouts with View/Layout/Next (or, even better, use the corresponding keyboard shortcuts). + +The active event type is important for visualisation: for &callgrind;, this is, for example, Cache Misses or Cycle Estimation; for &oprofile;, this is "Timer" in the simplest case. You can change the event type via a combobox in the toolbar or in the Event Type view. A first overview of the runtime characteristics should be given when you select function main in the left list, and look at the call graph visualisation; there, you see calls happening in your program. Note that the call graph view only shows functions with high event count. By double-clicking a function in the graph, it will change to show the called functions around the selected one. + +To explore the GUI further, in addition to this manual, also have a look at the documentation section on the web site http://tdecachegrind.sf.net. Also, every widget in &tdecachegrind; has What's this help. -Basic Concepts +Basic Concepts -This chapter explains some concepts of the &tdecachegrind;, and introduces terms used in the interface. +This chapter explains some concepts of the &tdecachegrind;, and introduces terms used in the interface. -The Data Model for Profile Data +The Data Model for Profile Data -Cost Entities - -Cost counts of event types (like L2 Misses) are attributed to cost entities, which are items with relationship to source code or data structures of a given program. Cost entities not only can be simple code or data positions, but also position tuples. For example, a call has a source and a target, or a data address can have a data type and an code position where its allocation happened. - -The cost entities known to KCachegrind are given in the following. Simple Positions: Instruction. An assembler instruction at a specified address. Source Line of a Function. All instructions that the compiler (via debug information) maps to a given source line specified by source file name and line number, and which are executed in the context of some function. The latter is needed because a source line inside of an inlined function can appear in the context of multiple functions. Instructions without any mapping to an actual source line are mapped to line number 0 in file "???". Function. All source lines of a given function make up the function itself. A function is specified by its name and its location in some binary object if available. The latter is needed because binary objects of a single program each can hold functions with the same name (these can be accessed e.g. with dlopen/dlsym; the runtime linker resolves functions in a given search order of binary objects used). If a profiling tool can not detect the symbol name of a function, e.g. because debug information is not available, either the address of the first executed instruction typically is used, or "???". Binary Object. All functions whose code is inside the range of a given binary object, either the main executable or a shared library. Source File. All functions whose first instruction is mapped to a line of the given source file. Class. Symbol names of functions typically are hierarchically ordered in name spaces, e.g. C++ namespaces, or classes of object oriented languages; thus, a class can hold functions of the class or embedded classes itself. Profile Part. Some time section of a profile run, with a given thread ID, process ID, and command line executed. As can be seen from the list, a set of cost entities often defines another cost entity; thus, there is a inclusion hierarchy of cost entities which should be obvious from the description above. - -Positions tuples: Call from instruction address to target function. Call from source line to target function. Call from source function to target function. (Un)conditional Jump from source to target instruction. (Un)conditional Jump from source to target line. Jumps between functions are not allowed, as this makes no sense in a call graph; thus, constructs like exception handling and long jumps in C have to be translated to popping the call stack as needed. +Cost Entities + +Cost counts of event types (like L2 Misses) are attributed to cost entities, which are items with relationship to source code or data structures of a given program. Cost entities not only can be simple code or data positions, but also position tuples. For example, a call has a source and a target, or a data address can have a data type and an code position where its allocation happened. + +The cost entities known to KCachegrind are given in the following. Simple Positions: Instruction. An assembler instruction at a specified address. Source Line of a Function. All instructions that the compiler (via debug information) maps to a given source line specified by source file name and line number, and which are executed in the context of some function. The latter is needed because a source line inside of an inlined function can appear in the context of multiple functions. Instructions without any mapping to an actual source line are mapped to line number 0 in file "???". Function. All source lines of a given function make up the function itself. A function is specified by its name and its location in some binary object if available. The latter is needed because binary objects of a single program each can hold functions with the same name (these can be accessed e.g. with dlopen/dlsym; the runtime linker resolves functions in a given search order of binary objects used). If a profiling tool can not detect the symbol name of a function, e.g. because debug information is not available, either the address of the first executed instruction typically is used, or "???". Binary Object. All functions whose code is inside the range of a given binary object, either the main executable or a shared library. Source File. All functions whose first instruction is mapped to a line of the given source file. Class. Symbol names of functions typically are hierarchically ordered in name spaces, e.g. C++ namespaces, or classes of object oriented languages; thus, a class can hold functions of the class or embedded classes itself. Profile Part. Some time section of a profile run, with a given thread ID, process ID, and command line executed. As can be seen from the list, a set of cost entities often defines another cost entity; thus, there is a inclusion hierarchy of cost entities which should be obvious from the description above. + +Positions tuples: Call from instruction address to target function. Call from source line to target function. Call from source function to target function. (Un)conditional Jump from source to target instruction. (Un)conditional Jump from source to target line. Jumps between functions are not allowed, as this makes no sense in a call graph; thus, constructs like exception handling and long jumps in C have to be translated to popping the call stack as needed. -Event Types +Event Types -Arbitrary event types can be specified in the profile data by giving them a name. Their cost related to a cost entity is a 64-bit integer. -Event types whose costs are specified in a profile data file are called real events. Additionally, one can specify formulae for event types calculated from real events, which are called inherited events. +Arbitrary event types can be specified in the profile data by giving them a name. Their cost related to a cost entity is a 64-bit integer. +Event types whose costs are specified in a profile data file are called real events. Additionally, one can specify formulae for event types calculated from real events, which are called inherited events. -Visualisation State - -The Visualisation state of a KCachegrind window includes: the primary and secondary event type chosen for display, the function grouping (used in the Function Profile list and entity colouring), the profile parts whose costs are to be included in visualisation, an active cost entity (e.g. a function selected from the function profile dockable), a selected cost entity. This state influences visualisations. -Visualisations always are shown for one, the active, cost entity. When a given visualisation is not appropriate for a cost entity, it is disabled (e.g. when selecting an ELF object in the group list by double-clicking, source annotation for an ELF object make no sense). -For example, for an active function, the callee list shows all the functions called from the active one: one can select one of these functions without making it active; also, if the call-graph is shown nearside, it will automatically select the same function. +Visualisation State + +The Visualisation state of a KCachegrind window includes: the primary and secondary event type chosen for display, the function grouping (used in the Function Profile list and entity colouring), the profile parts whose costs are to be included in visualisation, an active cost entity (e.g. a function selected from the function profile dockable), a selected cost entity. This state influences visualisations. +Visualisations always are shown for one, the active, cost entity. When a given visualisation is not appropriate for a cost entity, it is disabled (e.g. when selecting an ELF object in the group list by double-clicking, source annotation for an ELF object make no sense). +For example, for an active function, the callee list shows all the functions called from the active one: one can select one of these functions without making it active; also, if the call-graph is shown nearside, it will automatically select the same function. -Parts of the GUI +Parts of the GUI -Sidedocks -Sidedocks (Dockables) are side windows which can be placed at any border of an KCachegrind window. They always contain a list of cost entities sorted in some manner. -Function Profile. The Function Profile is a list of functions showing inclusive and exclusive cost, call count, name and position of functions. -Parts Overview -Call Stack +Sidedocks +Sidedocks (Dockables) are side windows which can be placed at any border of an KCachegrind window. They always contain a list of cost entities sorted in some manner. +Function Profile. The Function Profile is a list of functions showing inclusive and exclusive cost, call count, name and position of functions. +Parts Overview +Call Stack -Visualisation Area -The visualisation area, typically the right part of a KCachegrind main window, is made up of one (default) or more Tab Views, either lined up horizontally or vertically. Each tab view holds different visualisation views of only one cost entity at a time. The name of this entity is given at the top of the tab view. If there are multiple tab views, only one is active. The entity name in the active tab view is shown in bold and determines the active cost entity of the KCachegrind window. +Visualisation Area +The visualisation area, typically the right part of a KCachegrind main window, is made up of one (default) or more Tab Views, either lined up horizontally or vertically. Each tab view holds different visualisation views of only one cost entity at a time. The name of this entity is given at the top of the tab view. If there are multiple tab views, only one is active. The entity name in the active tab view is shown in bold and determines the active cost entity of the KCachegrind window. -Areas of a Tab View -Each tab view can hold up to four view areas, namely Top, Right, Left, and Bottom. Each area can hold multiple stacked visualisation views. The visible view of an area is selected by a tab bar. The tab bars of the top and right area are at the top; the tab bars of the left and bottom area are at the bottom. You can specify which kind of visualisation should go into which area by using the context menus of the tabs. +Areas of a Tab View +Each tab view can hold up to four view areas, namely Top, Right, Left, and Bottom. Each area can hold multiple stacked visualisation views. The visible view of an area is selected by a tab bar. The tab bars of the top and right area are at the top; the tab bars of the left and bottom area are at the bottom. You can specify which kind of visualisation should go into which area by using the context menus of the tabs. -Synchronised Visualisation via Selected Entity in a Tab View -Besides an active entity, each tab view has an selected entity. As most visualisation types show multiple entities with the active one somehow centred, you can change the selected item by navigating inside a visualisation (by clicking with the mouse or using the keyboard). Typically, selected items are shown in an highlighted state. By changing the selected entity in one of the visualisations of a tab view, all other visualisations in the tab view accordingly highlight the new selected entity. +Synchronised Visualisation via Selected Entity in a Tab View +Besides an active entity, each tab view has an selected entity. As most visualisation types show multiple entities with the active one somehow centred, you can change the selected item by navigating inside a visualisation (by clicking with the mouse or using the keyboard). Typically, selected items are shown in an highlighted state. By changing the selected entity in one of the visualisations of a tab view, all other visualisations in the tab view accordingly highlight the new selected entity. -Synchronisation between Tab Views -If there are multiple tab views, a selection change in one tab view leads to an activation change in the next (to right/to bottom) tab view. This kind of linkage should, for example, allow for fast browsing in call graphs. +Synchronisation between Tab Views +If there are multiple tab views, a selection change in one tab view leads to an activation change in the next (to right/to bottom) tab view. This kind of linkage should, for example, allow for fast browsing in call graphs. -Layouts -The layout of all the tab views of a window can be saved (see menu item View/Layout). After duplicating the current layout (Ctrl+Plus or menu) and changing some sizes or moving a visualisation view to another area of an tab view, you can quickly switch between the old and the new layout via Ctrl+Left/Right. The set of layouts will be stored between KCachegrind sessions of the same profiled command. You can make the current set of layouts as the default one for new KCachegrind sessions, or restore to the default layout set. +Layouts +The layout of all the tab views of a window can be saved (see menu item View/Layout). After duplicating the current layout (Ctrl+Plus or menu) and changing some sizes or moving a visualisation view to another area of an tab view, you can quickly switch between the old and the new layout via Ctrl+Left/Right. The set of layouts will be stored between KCachegrind sessions of the same profiled command. You can make the current set of layouts as the default one for new KCachegrind sessions, or restore to the default layout set. -Sidedocks +Sidedocks -Flat Profile -The flat profile contains a group list and a function list. The group list contains all groups where cost is spent in, depending on the chosen group type. The group list is hidden when grouping is switched off. -The function list contains the functions of the selected group (or all functions if grouping is switched off), ordered by some column, e.g. inclusive or self costs spent therein. There is a maximal number of functions shown in the list, which is configurable in Settings/Configure KCachegrind. +Flat Profile +The flat profile contains a group list and a function list. The group list contains all groups where cost is spent in, depending on the chosen group type. The group list is hidden when grouping is switched off. +The function list contains the functions of the selected group (or all functions if grouping is switched off), ordered by some column, e.g. inclusive or self costs spent therein. There is a maximal number of functions shown in the list, which is configurable in Settings/Configure KCachegrind. -Parts Overview -In a profile run, multiple profile data files can be produced, which can be loaded together into KCachegrind. The Parts Overview dockable shows these, horizontally ordered according creation time; the rectangle sizes are proportional to the cost spent in the parts. You can select one or several parts to constrain the costs shown in the other KCachegrind views to these parts only. -The parts are further subdivided: there is a partitioning and an inclusive cost split mode: -Partitioning: You see the partitioning into groups for a profile data part, according to the group type selected. For example, if ELF object groups are selected, you see coloured rectangles for each used ELF object (shared library or executable), sized according to the cost spent therein. -Inclusive Cost Split: A rectangle showing the inclusive cost of the current active function in the part is shown. This, again, is split up to show inclusive costs of its callees. +Parts Overview +In a profile run, multiple profile data files can be produced, which can be loaded together into KCachegrind. The Parts Overview dockable shows these, horizontally ordered according creation time; the rectangle sizes are proportional to the cost spent in the parts. You can select one or several parts to constrain the costs shown in the other KCachegrind views to these parts only. +The parts are further subdivided: there is a partitioning and an inclusive cost split mode: +Partitioning: You see the partitioning into groups for a profile data part, according to the group type selected. For example, if ELF object groups are selected, you see coloured rectangles for each used ELF object (shared library or executable), sized according to the cost spent therein. +Inclusive Cost Split: A rectangle showing the inclusive cost of the current active function in the part is shown. This, again, is split up to show inclusive costs of its callees. -Call Stack -This is a purely fictional 'most probable' call stack. It is built up by starting with the current active function and adds the callers/callees with highest cost at the top and to bottom. -The 'Cost' and 'Calls' columns show the cost used for all calls from the function in the line above. +Call Stack +This is a purely fictional 'most probable' call stack. It is built up by starting with the current active function and adds the callers/callees with highest cost at the top and to bottom. +The 'Cost' and 'Calls' columns show the cost used for all calls from the function in the line above. -Visualisations +Visualisations -Event Types -This list shows all cost types available and the corresponding self and inclusive cost of the current active function for that event type. -By choosing an event type from the list, you change the type of costs shown all over KCachegrind to be the selected one. +Event Types +This list shows all cost types available and the corresponding self and inclusive cost of the current active function for that event type. +By choosing an event type from the list, you change the type of costs shown all over KCachegrind to be the selected one. -Call Lists -These lists show calls to/from the current active function. With ''all' callers/callees functions are meant which can be reached in caller/callee direction, even when other functions are in between. -Call list views include: -Direct Callers -Direct Callees -All Callers -All Callees +Call Lists +These lists show calls to/from the current active function. With ''all' callers/callees functions are meant which can be reached in caller/callee direction, even when other functions are in between. +Call list views include: +Direct Callers +Direct Callees +All Callers +All Callees -Maps -A treemap visualisation of the primary event type, up or down the call hierarchy. Each coloured rectangle represents a function; its size tries to be proportional to the cost spent therein while the active function is running (however, there are drawing constrains). -For the Caller Map, the graph shows the nested hierarchy of all callers of the current activated function; for the Callee Map, it shows the nested hierarchy of all callees of the current activated function. -Appearance options can be found in the in the context menu. To get exact size proportions, choose 'Hide incorrect borders'. As this mode can be very time consuming, you may want to limit the maximum drawn nesting level before. 'Best' determinates the split direction for children from the aspect ratio of the parent. 'Always Best' decides on remaining space for each sibling. 'Ignore Proportions' takes space for function name drawing before drawing children. Note that size proportions can get heavily wrong. -Keyboard navigation is available with the left/right arrow keys for traversing siblings, and up/down arrow keys to go a nesting level up/down. 'Return' activates the current item. +Maps +A treemap visualisation of the primary event type, up or down the call hierarchy. Each coloured rectangle represents a function; its size tries to be proportional to the cost spent therein while the active function is running (however, there are drawing constrains). +For the Caller Map, the graph shows the nested hierarchy of all callers of the current activated function; for the Callee Map, it shows the nested hierarchy of all callees of the current activated function. +Appearance options can be found in the in the context menu. To get exact size proportions, choose 'Hide incorrect borders'. As this mode can be very time consuming, you may want to limit the maximum drawn nesting level before. 'Best' determinates the split direction for children from the aspect ratio of the parent. 'Always Best' decides on remaining space for each sibling. 'Ignore Proportions' takes space for function name drawing before drawing children. Note that size proportions can get heavily wrong. +Keyboard navigation is available with the left/right arrow keys for traversing siblings, and up/down arrow keys to go a nesting level up/down. 'Return' activates the current item. -Call Graph -This view shows the call graph around the active function. The shown cost is only the cost which is spent while the active function was actually running; i.e. the cost shown for main() - if it's visible - should be the same as the cost of the active function, as that is the part of inclusive cost of main() spent while the active function was running. -For cycles, blue call arrows indicate that this is an artificial call added for correct drawing which actually never happened. -If the graph is larger than the widget area, a bird's eye view is shown in one edge. There are similar visualisation options as for the Call Treemap; the selected function is highlighted. +Call Graph +This view shows the call graph around the active function. The shown cost is only the cost which is spent while the active function was actually running; i.e. the cost shown for main() - if it's visible - should be the same as the cost of the active function, as that is the part of inclusive cost of main() spent while the active function was running. +For cycles, blue call arrows indicate that this is an artificial call added for correct drawing which actually never happened. +If the graph is larger than the widget area, a bird's eye view is shown in one edge. There are similar visualisation options as for the Call Treemap; the selected function is highlighted. -Annotations -The annotated source/assembler lists show the source lines/disassembled instructions of the current active function together with (self) cost spent while executing the code of a source line/instruction. If there was a call, lines with details on the call are inserted into the source: the (inclusive) cost spent inside of the call, the number of calls happening, and the call destination. -Select such a call information line to activate the call destination. +Annotations +The annotated source/assembler lists show the source lines/disassembled instructions of the current active function together with (self) cost spent while executing the code of a source line/instruction. If there was a call, lines with details on the call are inserted into the source: the (inclusive) cost spent inside of the call, the number of calls happening, and the call destination. +Select such a call information line to activate the call destination. @@ -608,128 +309,42 @@ -Command Reference +Command Reference -The main &tdecachegrind; window - +The main &tdecachegrind; window + -The <guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - &Ctrl;N File New - Opens an empty toplevel window into which you can load profile data. This action is not really needed, as File/Open will give you a new toplevel window when the current one shows already some data. + &Ctrl;N File New + Opens an empty toplevel window into which you can load profile data. This action is not really needed, as File/Open will give you a new toplevel window when the current one shows already some data. - &Ctrl;O File Open - Pops up the File Open Dialogue to choose a profile data file to be loaded. If there is some data already shown in the current toplevel window, this will open a new window; if you want to open additional profile data in the current window, use File/Add. -The name of profile data files usually ends in ..-, where and are optional and are used for multiple profile data files belonging to one application run. By loading a file ending only in ., eventually existing data files for this run, but with additional endings, are loaded too. -Example: If there exist profile data files cachegrind.out.123 and cachegrind.out.123.1, by loading the first, the second will be automatically loaded too. + &Ctrl;O File Open + Pops up the File Open Dialogue to choose a profile data file to be loaded. If there is some data already shown in the current toplevel window, this will open a new window; if you want to open additional profile data in the current window, use File/Add. +The name of profile data files usually ends in ..-, where and are optional and are used for multiple profile data files belonging to one application run. By loading a file ending only in ., eventually existing data files for this run, but with additional endings, are loaded too. +Example: If there exist profile data files cachegrind.out.123 and cachegrind.out.123.1, by loading the first, the second will be automatically loaded too. -File Add - Adds a profile data file to the current window. Using this, you can force multiple data files to be loaded into the same toplevel window even if they are not from the same run as given by the profile data file naming convention. This can, for example, be used for nearside comparison. +File Add + Adds a profile data file to the current window. Using this, you can force multiple data files to be loaded into the same toplevel window even if they are not from the same run as given by the profile data file naming convention. This can, for example, be used for nearside comparison. -File Reload - Reload the profile data. This is most interesting after another profile data file was generated for an already loaded application run. +File Reload + Reload the profile data. This is most interesting after another profile data file was generated for an already loaded application run. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Quits &kappname; + &Ctrl;Q File Quit +Quits &kappname; @@ -737,96 +352,33 @@ -The <guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu +The <guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu -View Primary Event Type -(To-do) +View Primary Event Type +(To-do) -View Secondary Event Type -(To-do) +View Secondary Event Type +(To-do) -View Grouping -(To-do) +View Grouping +(To-do) -View Layout -(To-do) +View Layout +(To-do) -View Split -(To-do) +View Split +(To-do) @@ -839,56 +391,44 @@ -Questions and Answers +Questions and Answers &reporting.bugs; &updating.documentation; -What is &tdecachegrind; for? I have no idea. +What is &tdecachegrind; for? I have no idea. -&tdecachegrind; is a helpful at a later stage in software development, called Profiling. If you don't develop applications, you don't need &tdecachegrind;. +&tdecachegrind; is a helpful at a later stage in software development, called Profiling. If you don't develop applications, you don't need &tdecachegrind;. -What is the difference between 'Incl.' and 'Self' ? +What is the difference between 'Incl.' and 'Self' ? -These are cost attributes for functions regarding some event type. As functions can call each other, it makes sense to distinguish the cost of the function itself ('Self Cost') and the cost including all called functions ('Inclusive Cost'). 'Self' is sometimes also referred to as 'Exclusive' costs. -So, for example, for main(), you will always have a inclusive cost of almost 100%, whereas the self cost is negligible when the real work is done in another function. +These are cost attributes for functions regarding some event type. As functions can call each other, it makes sense to distinguish the cost of the function itself ('Self Cost') and the cost including all called functions ('Inclusive Cost'). 'Self' is sometimes also referred to as 'Exclusive' costs. +So, for example, for main(), you will always have a inclusive cost of almost 100%, whereas the self cost is negligible when the real work is done in another function. -The toolbar/menubar of my KCachegrind looks so spartanic. Is this normal? +The toolbar/menubar of my KCachegrind looks so spartanic. Is this normal? -Obviously KCachegrind is wrongly installed on your system. It is recommended to compile it with the installation prefix to be your system wide KDE base directory like configure --prefix=/opt/kde3; make install. If you choose another directory like $HOME/kde, you should set the environment variable TDEDIR to this directory before running KCachegrind. +Obviously KCachegrind is wrongly installed on your system. It is recommended to compile it with the installation prefix to be your system wide KDE base directory like configure --prefix=/opt/kde3; make install. If you choose another directory like $HOME/kde, you should set the environment variable TDEDIR to this directory before running KCachegrind. -If I double-click on a function down in the Call Graph View, it shows for the function main the same cost as the selected function. Isn't this supposed to be constant 100% ? +If I double-click on a function down in the Call Graph View, it shows for the function main the same cost as the selected function. Isn't this supposed to be constant 100% ? -You have activated a function below main() with cost less than main(). For any function, only that part of the full cost of the function is shown, that is spent while the activated function is running; that is, the cost shown for any function can never be higher than the cost of the activated function. +You have activated a function below main() with cost less than main(). For any function, only that part of the full cost of the function is shown, that is spent while the activated function is running; that is, the cost shown for any function can never be higher than the cost of the activated function. @@ -897,59 +437,21 @@ -Glossary - -The following is a mixed list of terms. -Profiling: The process of collecting statistical information about runtime characteristics of program runs. -Tracing: The process of supervising a program run and storing events happening sorted by a timestap in a output file, the Trace. -Trace: A sequence of timestamped events that occurred while tracing a program run. Its size is typically linear to the execution time of the program run. -Profile Data File: A file containing data measured in a profile experiment (or part of) or produced by postprocessing a trace. Its size is typically linear to the code size of the program. -Profile Data Part (incorrectly used also: Trace Part): Data from a profile data file. -Profile Experiment: A program run supervised by a profiling tool, producing possibly multiple profile data files from parts and/or threads of the run. -Profile Project: A configuration for profile experiments used for one program which has to be profiled, perhaps in multiple versions. Comparisons of profile data typically only makes sense between profile data produced in experiments of one profile project. -Cost Entity: An abstract item related to source code to which event counts can be attributed. Dimensions for cost entities are code location (e.g. source line, function), data location (e.g. accessed data type, data object), execution location (e.g. thread, process) and tuples or triples of the aforementioned positions (e.g. calls, object access from statement, evicted data from cache). -Event Type: The kind of event of which costs can be attributed to a cost entity. There exist real event types and inherited event types. -Real Event Type: A event type that can be measured by a tool. This needs the existence of a sensor for the given event type. -Inherited Event Type: A virtual event type only visible in the visualisation which is defined by a formula to be calculated from real event types. -Event Costs: Sum of events of some event type occurring while the execution is related to some cost entity. The cost is attributed to the entity. +Glossary + +The following is a mixed list of terms. +Profiling: The process of collecting statistical information about runtime characteristics of program runs. +Tracing: The process of supervising a program run and storing events happening sorted by a timestap in a output file, the Trace. +Trace: A sequence of timestamped events that occurred while tracing a program run. Its size is typically linear to the execution time of the program run. +Profile Data File: A file containing data measured in a profile experiment (or part of) or produced by postprocessing a trace. Its size is typically linear to the code size of the program. +Profile Data Part (incorrectly used also: Trace Part): Data from a profile data file. +Profile Experiment: A program run supervised by a profiling tool, producing possibly multiple profile data files from parts and/or threads of the run. +Profile Project: A configuration for profile experiments used for one program which has to be profiled, perhaps in multiple versions. Comparisons of profile data typically only makes sense between profile data produced in experiments of one profile project. +Cost Entity: An abstract item related to source code to which event counts can be attributed. Dimensions for cost entities are code location (e.g. source line, function), data location (e.g. accessed data type, data object), execution location (e.g. thread, process) and tuples or triples of the aforementioned positions (e.g. calls, object access from statement, evicted data from cache). +Event Type: The kind of event of which costs can be attributed to a cost entity. There exist real event types and inherited event types. +Real Event Type: A event type that can be measured by a tool. This needs the existence of a sensor for the given event type. +Inherited Event Type: A virtual event type only visible in the visualisation which is defined by a formula to be calculated from real event types. +Event Costs: Sum of events of some event type occurring while the execution is related to some cost entity. The cost is attributed to the entity. @@ -957,52 +459,36 @@ -Credits and License +Credits and License -&kappname; -Thanks to Julian Seward for his excellent &valgrind;, and Nicholas Nethercote for the &cachegrind; addition. Without these programs, KCachegrind would not exist. Some ideas for this &GUI; were from them, too. -And thanks for all the bug reports/suggestions from different users. +&kappname; +Thanks to Julian Seward for his excellent &valgrind;, and Nicholas Nethercote for the &cachegrind; addition. Without these programs, KCachegrind would not exist. Some ideas for this &GUI; were from them, too. +And thanks for all the bug reports/suggestions from different users. &underFDL; -Installation +Installation -How to obtain &tdecachegrind; +How to obtain &tdecachegrind; -&tdecachegrind; is part of the &package; package of &kde;. For less supported interim releases, &callgrind; and further documentation, see the homepage at http://tdecachegrind.sf.net. Look there for further installation and compile instructions. +&tdecachegrind; is part of the &package; package of &kde;. For less supported interim releases, &callgrind; and further documentation, see the homepage at http://tdecachegrind.sf.net. Look there for further installation and compile instructions. -Requirements +Requirements -In order to successfully use &tdecachegrind;, you need &kde; 3.x. For generating profile data, &cachegrind; or &calltree;/&callgrind; is recommend. +In order to successfully use &tdecachegrind;, you need &kde; 3.x. For generating profile data, &cachegrind; or &calltree;/&callgrind; is recommend. -Compilation and Installation +Compilation and Installation &install.compile.documentation; -Configuration +Configuration -All configuration options are either in the configuration dialogue or in the context popup menus of the visualisations. +All configuration options are either in the configuration dialogue or in the context popup menus of the visualisations. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/authors.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/authors.docbook index 8978a5ae7c3..0d60d3f1396 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/authors.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/authors.docbook @@ -1,46 +1,15 @@ -Authors and History -This project was started by Paul Hensgen as one of his University projects. The original name of the application was UML Modeller. Paul did all the development until the end of 2001 when the program reached version 1.0. -Version 1.0 already offered a lot of functionality, but after the project had been reviewed at Paul's University, other developers could join and they started making valuable contributions to UML Modeller, like switching from a binary file format to an &XML; file, support for more types of &UML; Diagrams, Code Generation and Code Import just to name a few. -Paul had to retire from the development team in Summer 2002 but, as Free and Open Source Software, the program continues to improve and evolve and is being maintained by a group of developers from different parts of the world. In September 2002 the project changed its name from &UML; Modeller, to &umbrello;. There are several reasons for the change of names, the most important ones being that just uml — as it was commonly known — was a much too generic name and caused problems with some distributions. The other important reason is that the developers think Umbrello is a much cooler name. -The development of &umbrello; as well as discussions as to where the program should head for future versions is open and takes place over the Internet. If you would like to contribute to the project, please do not hesitate to contact the developers. There are many ways in which you can help &umbrello;: +Authors and History +This project was started by Paul Hensgen as one of his University projects. The original name of the application was UML Modeller. Paul did all the development until the end of 2001 when the program reached version 1.0. +Version 1.0 already offered a lot of functionality, but after the project had been reviewed at Paul's University, other developers could join and they started making valuable contributions to UML Modeller, like switching from a binary file format to an &XML; file, support for more types of &UML; Diagrams, Code Generation and Code Import just to name a few. +Paul had to retire from the development team in Summer 2002 but, as Free and Open Source Software, the program continues to improve and evolve and is being maintained by a group of developers from different parts of the world. In September 2002 the project changed its name from &UML; Modeller, to &umbrello;. There are several reasons for the change of names, the most important ones being that just uml — as it was commonly known — was a much too generic name and caused problems with some distributions. The other important reason is that the developers think Umbrello is a much cooler name. +The development of &umbrello; as well as discussions as to where the program should head for future versions is open and takes place over the Internet. If you would like to contribute to the project, please do not hesitate to contact the developers. There are many ways in which you can help &umbrello;: -Reporting bugs or improvements suggestions -Fixing bugs or adding features -Writing good documentation or translating it to other languages -And of course...coding with us! +Reporting bugs or improvements suggestions +Fixing bugs or adding features +Writing good documentation or translating it to other languages +And of course...coding with us! -As you see, there are many ways in which you can contribute. All of them are very important and everyone is welcome to participate. -The &umbrello; developers can be reached at uml-devel@lists.sourceforge.net. +As you see, there are many ways in which you can contribute. All of them are very important and everyone is welcome to participate. +The &umbrello; developers can be reached at uml-devel@lists.sourceforge.net. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/code_import_and_generation.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/code_import_and_generation.docbook index 429217884c1..ecb0b0354c7 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/code_import_and_generation.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/code_import_and_generation.docbook @@ -1,163 +1,82 @@ -Code Import and Code Generation -&umbrello; is a &UML; modelling tool, and as such its main purpose is to help you in the analysis and design of your systems. However, to make the transition between your design and your implementation, &umbrello; allows you to generate source code in different programming languages to get you started. Also, if you want to start using &UML; in an already started C++ project, &umbrello; can help you create a model of your system from the source code by analysing your source code and importing the classes found in it. +Code Import and Code Generation +&umbrello; is a &UML; modelling tool, and as such its main purpose is to help you in the analysis and design of your systems. However, to make the transition between your design and your implementation, &umbrello; allows you to generate source code in different programming languages to get you started. Also, if you want to start using &UML; in an already started C++ project, &umbrello; can help you create a model of your system from the source code by analysing your source code and importing the classes found in it. -Code Generation -&umbrello; can generate source code for various programming languages based on your &UML; Model to help you get started with the implementation of your project. The code generated consists of the class declarations, with their methods and attributes so you can fill in the blanks by providing the functionality of your classes' operations. -&umbrello; 1.2 comes with code generation support for ActionScript, Ada, C++, CORBA IDL, &Java;, JavaScript, PHP, Perl, Python, SQL and XMLSchema. +Code Generation +&umbrello; can generate source code for various programming languages based on your &UML; Model to help you get started with the implementation of your project. The code generated consists of the class declarations, with their methods and attributes so you can fill in the blanks by providing the functionality of your classes' operations. +&umbrello; 1.2 comes with code generation support for ActionScript, Ada, C++, CORBA IDL, &Java;, JavaScript, PHP, Perl, Python, SQL and XMLSchema. -Generating Code -In order to generate code with &umbrello;, you first need to create or load a Model containing at least one class. When you are ready to start writing some code, select the Code Generation Wizard entry from the Code menu to start a wizard which will guide you through the code generation process. -The first step is to select the classes for which you want to generate source code. By default all the classes of your model are selected, and you can remove the ones for which you do not want to generate code by moving them to the left-hand side list. -The next step of the wizard allows you to modify the parameters the Code Generator uses while writing your code. The following options are available: +Generating Code +In order to generate code with &umbrello;, you first need to create or load a Model containing at least one class. When you are ready to start writing some code, select the Code Generation Wizard entry from the Code menu to start a wizard which will guide you through the code generation process. +The first step is to select the classes for which you want to generate source code. By default all the classes of your model are selected, and you can remove the ones for which you do not want to generate code by moving them to the left-hand side list. +The next step of the wizard allows you to modify the parameters the Code Generator uses while writing your code. The following options are available: -Code Generation Options +Code Generation Options - Options for the Code Generation in &umbrello; + Options for the Code Generation in &umbrello; - Options for the Code Generation in &umbrello; + Options for the Code Generation in &umbrello; -Generation Options +Generation Options -Code Verbosity -The option Write documentation comments even if empty instructs the Code Generator to write comments of the /** blah */ style even if the comment blocks are empty. If you added documentation to your classes, methods or attributes in your Model, the Code Generator will write these comments as Doxygen documentation regardless of what you set here, but if you select this option &umbrello; will write comment blocks for all classes, methods and attributes even if there is no documentation in the Model, in which case you should document your classes later directly in the source code. -Write comments for sections even if section is empty causes &umbrello; to write comments in the source code to delimit the different sections of a class. For example public methods or Attributes before the corresponding sections. If you select this option &umbrello; will write comments for all sections of the class even if the section is empty. For example, it would write a comment saying protected methods even if there are no protected methods in your class. +Code Verbosity +The option Write documentation comments even if empty instructs the Code Generator to write comments of the /** blah */ style even if the comment blocks are empty. If you added documentation to your classes, methods or attributes in your Model, the Code Generator will write these comments as Doxygen documentation regardless of what you set here, but if you select this option &umbrello; will write comment blocks for all classes, methods and attributes even if there is no documentation in the Model, in which case you should document your classes later directly in the source code. +Write comments for sections even if section is empty causes &umbrello; to write comments in the source code to delimit the different sections of a class. For example public methods or Attributes before the corresponding sections. If you select this option &umbrello; will write comments for all sections of the class even if the section is empty. For example, it would write a comment saying protected methods even if there are no protected methods in your class. -Folders -Write all generated files to folder. Here you should select the folder where you want &umbrello; to put the generated sources. -The Include heading files from folder option allows you to insert a heading at the beginning of each generated file. Heading files can contain copyright or licensing information and contain variables that are evaluated at generation time. You can take a look at the template heading files shipped with &umbrello; to see how to use this variables for replacing your name or the current date at generation time. +Folders +Write all generated files to folder. Here you should select the folder where you want &umbrello; to put the generated sources. +The Include heading files from folder option allows you to insert a heading at the beginning of each generated file. Heading files can contain copyright or licensing information and contain variables that are evaluated at generation time. You can take a look at the template heading files shipped with &umbrello; to see how to use this variables for replacing your name or the current date at generation time. -Overwrite Policy +Overwrite Policy -This option tells &umbrello; what to do if the file it wants to create already exists in the destination folder. &umbrello; cannot modify existing source files, so you have to choose between overwriting the existing file, skipping the generation of that particular file or letting &umbrello; choose a different file name. If you choose the option to use a different name, &umbrello; will add a suffix to the file name. +This option tells &umbrello; what to do if the file it wants to create already exists in the destination folder. &umbrello; cannot modify existing source files, so you have to choose between overwriting the existing file, skipping the generation of that particular file or letting &umbrello; choose a different file name. If you choose the option to use a different name, &umbrello; will add a suffix to the file name. -Language -&umbrello; will by default generate code in the language you have selected as Active Language, but with the Code Generation Wizard you have the option to change this to another language. +Language +&umbrello; will by default generate code in the language you have selected as Active Language, but with the Code Generation Wizard you have the option to change this to another language. - + -Generation Wizard Generation -The third and last step of the wizard shows the status of the Code Generation process. You need only to click on the Generate button to get your classes written for you. -Note that the Options you select during the Code Generation Wizard are only valid for the current generation. The next time you run the wizard you will need to re-select all the options (your headings folder, overwrite policy, and so on). You can set the defaults used by &umbrello; in the Code Generation section of the &umbrello; settings, available at SettingsConfigure &umbrello;... -If you have set your Code Generation options to the right settings and want to generate some code right away without going through the wizard, you can select the entire Generate All Code from the Code menu. This will generate code for all the classes in your Model using the current settings (including Output Folder and Overwrite Policy, so use with care). +Generation Wizard Generation +The third and last step of the wizard shows the status of the Code Generation process. You need only to click on the Generate button to get your classes written for you. +Note that the Options you select during the Code Generation Wizard are only valid for the current generation. The next time you run the wizard you will need to re-select all the options (your headings folder, overwrite policy, and so on). You can set the defaults used by &umbrello; in the Code Generation section of the &umbrello; settings, available at SettingsConfigure &umbrello;... +If you have set your Code Generation options to the right settings and want to generate some code right away without going through the wizard, you can select the entire Generate All Code from the Code menu. This will generate code for all the classes in your Model using the current settings (including Output Folder and Overwrite Policy, so use with care). - - + + -Code Import -&umbrello; can import source code from your existing projects to help you build Model of your systems. &umbrello; 1.2 supports only C++ source code, but other languages should be available in future versions. -To import classes into your Model, select the entry Import Classes... from the Code menu. In the file dialogue select the files containing the C++ class declarations and press OK. The classes will be imported and you will find them as part of your Model in the Tree View. Note that &umbrello; will not create any kind of Diagram for showing your classes, they will only be imported into your Model so that you can use them later in any diagram you want. +Code Import +&umbrello; can import source code from your existing projects to help you build Model of your systems. &umbrello; 1.2 supports only C++ source code, but other languages should be available in future versions. +To import classes into your Model, select the entry Import Classes... from the Code menu. In the file dialogue select the files containing the C++ class declarations and press OK. The classes will be imported and you will find them as part of your Model in the Tree View. Note that &umbrello; will not create any kind of Diagram for showing your classes, they will only be imported into your Model so that you can use them later in any diagram you want. -Code Import +Code Import - Menu for importing source code in &umbrello; + Menu for importing source code in &umbrello; - Menu for importing source code in &umbrello; + Menu for importing source code in &umbrello; - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/credits.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/credits.docbook index b8a1c5500d9..384ee552c52 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/credits.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/credits.docbook @@ -1,11 +1,6 @@ -Copyright +Copyright -Copyright 2001, Paul Hensgen -Copyright 2002, 2003 The &umbrello; Authors. See http://uml.sf.net/developers.php for more information +Copyright 2001, Paul Hensgen +Copyright 2002, 2003 The &umbrello; Authors. See http://uml.sf.net/developers.php for more information &underFDL; &underGPL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/index.docbook index 055f079585c..117ec0d1d50 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/index.docbook @@ -1,14 +1,10 @@ Umbrello &UML; Modeller"> + Umbrello &UML; Modeller"> - UML"> + UML"> @@ -17,59 +13,43 @@ - + ]> -&umbrello; Handbook +&umbrello; Handbook -&umbrello; Authors +&umbrello; Authors -2001 -Paul Hensgen +2001 +Paul Hensgen -2002, 2003 -&umbrello; Authors +2002, 2003 +&umbrello; Authors -2003-10-15 -1.2 +2003-10-15 +1.2 -&umbrello; helps the software development process by using the industry standard Unified Modelling Language (&UML;) to enable you to create diagrams for designing and documenting your systems. +&umbrello; helps the software development process by using the industry standard Unified Modelling Language (&UML;) to enable you to create diagrams for designing and documenting your systems. -KDE -UML -modelling -diagrams -software development -development +KDE +UML +modelling +diagrams +software development +development diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/introduction.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/introduction.docbook index 1869425cc45..08cede5dc86 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/introduction.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/introduction.docbook @@ -1,57 +1,19 @@ -Introduction +Introduction -&umbrello; is a &UML; diagram tool that can support you in the software development process. Especially during the analysis and design phases of this process, &umbrello; will help you to get a high quality product. &UML; can also be used to document your software designs to help you and your fellow developers. -Having a good model of your software is the best way to communicate with other developers working on the project and with your customers. A good model is extremely important for medium and big-size projects, but it is also very useful for small ones. Even if you are working on a small one man project you will benefit from a good model because it will give you an overview that will help you code things right the first time. -&UML; is the diagramming language used to describing such models. You can represent your ideas in &UML; using different types of diagrams. &umbrello; 1.2 supports the following types: +&umbrello; is a &UML; diagram tool that can support you in the software development process. Especially during the analysis and design phases of this process, &umbrello; will help you to get a high quality product. &UML; can also be used to document your software designs to help you and your fellow developers. +Having a good model of your software is the best way to communicate with other developers working on the project and with your customers. A good model is extremely important for medium and big-size projects, but it is also very useful for small ones. Even if you are working on a small one man project you will benefit from a good model because it will give you an overview that will help you code things right the first time. +&UML; is the diagramming language used to describing such models. You can represent your ideas in &UML; using different types of diagrams. &umbrello; 1.2 supports the following types: -Class Diagram -Sequence Diagram -Collaboration Diagram -Use Case Diagram -State Diagram -Activity Diagram -Component Diagram -Deployment Diagram +Class Diagram +Sequence Diagram +Collaboration Diagram +Use Case Diagram +State Diagram +Activity Diagram +Component Diagram +Deployment Diagram -More information about &UML; can be found at the website of OMG, http://www.omg.org who create the &UML; standard. -We hope you enjoy &umbrello; and that it helps you create high quality software. &umbrello; is Free Software and available at no cost, the only thing we ask from you is to report any bugs, problems, or suggestions to the &umbrello; developers at uml-devel@lists.sourceforge.net or http://bugs.kde.org. +More information about &UML; can be found at the website of OMG, http://www.omg.org who create the &UML; standard. +We hope you enjoy &umbrello; and that it helps you create high quality software. &umbrello; is Free Software and available at no cost, the only thing we ask from you is to report any bugs, problems, or suggestions to the &umbrello; developers at uml-devel@lists.sourceforge.net or http://bugs.kde.org. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/other_features.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/other_features.docbook index 20fcfd9f765..ffdb636fd49 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/other_features.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/other_features.docbook @@ -1,72 +1,35 @@ -Other Features - -Other &umbrello; Features -This chapter will briefly explain some other features &umbrello; offers you. +Other Features + +Other &umbrello; Features +This chapter will briefly explain some other features &umbrello; offers you. -Copying objects as PNG images -Apart from offering you the normal copy, cut and paste functionality that you would expect to copy objects between different diagrams, &umbrello; can copy the objects as PNG pictures so that you can insert them into any other type of document. You do not need to do anything special to use this feature, just select an object from a diagram (Class, Actor, &etc;) and copy it (&Ctrl;C, or using the menu), then open a &kword; document (or any program into which you can paste images) and select Paste. This is a great feature to export parts of your diagram as simple pictures. +Copying objects as PNG images +Apart from offering you the normal copy, cut and paste functionality that you would expect to copy objects between different diagrams, &umbrello; can copy the objects as PNG pictures so that you can insert them into any other type of document. You do not need to do anything special to use this feature, just select an object from a diagram (Class, Actor, &etc;) and copy it (&Ctrl;C, or using the menu), then open a &kword; document (or any program into which you can paste images) and select Paste. This is a great feature to export parts of your diagram as simple pictures. -Exporting to an Image -You can also export a complete diagram as an image. The only thing you need to do is select the diagram you want to export, and then the option Export as Picture... from the Diagram menu. +Exporting to an Image +You can also export a complete diagram as an image. The only thing you need to do is select the diagram you want to export, and then the option Export as Picture... from the Diagram menu. -Printing -&umbrello; allows you to print individual diagrams. Press the Print button on the application toolbar or selecting the Print option from the File menu will give you a standard &kde; Print dialogue from where you can print your diagrams. +Printing +&umbrello; allows you to print individual diagrams. Press the Print button on the application toolbar or selecting the Print option from the File menu will give you a standard &kde; Print dialogue from where you can print your diagrams. -Logical Folders -To better organise your model, especially for larger projects, you can create logical folders in the Tree View. Just select the option NewFolder from the context menu of the default folders in the Tree View to create them. Folders can be nested, and you can move objects around by dragging them from one folder and dropping them into another. +Logical Folders +To better organise your model, especially for larger projects, you can create logical folders in the Tree View. Just select the option NewFolder from the context menu of the default folders in the Tree View to create them. Folders can be nested, and you can move objects around by dragging them from one folder and dropping them into another. -Organising your Model with Folders +Organising your Model with Folders - Organising a Model with Logical Folders in &umbrello; + Organising a Model with Logical Folders in &umbrello; - Organising a Model with Logical Folders in &umbrello; + Organising a Model with Logical Folders in &umbrello; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/uml_basics.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/uml_basics.docbook index dffaa498a57..ee4370f7f4d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/uml_basics.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/uml_basics.docbook @@ -1,378 +1,169 @@ -&UML; Basics +&UML; Basics -About &UML; -This chapter will give you a quick overview of the basics of &UML;. Keep in mind that this is not a comprehensive tutorial on &UML; but rather a brief introduction to &UML; which can be read as a &UML; tutorial. If you would like to learn more about the Unified Modelling Language, or in general about software analysis and design, refer to one of the many books available on the topic. There are also a lot of tutorials on the Internet which you can take as a starting point. - -The Unified Modelling Language (&UML;) is a diagramming language or notation to specify, visualise and document models of Object Orientated software systems. &UML; is not a development method, that means it does not tell you what to do first and what to do next or how to design your system, but it helps you to visualise your design and communicate with others. &UML; is controlled by the Object Management Group (OMG) and is the industry standard for graphically describing software. -&UML; is designed for Object Orientated software design and has limited use for other programming paradigms. -&UML; is composed of many model elements that represent the different parts of a software system. The &UML; elements are used to create diagrams, which represent a certain part, or a point of view of the system. The following types of diagrams are supported by &umbrello;: +About &UML; +This chapter will give you a quick overview of the basics of &UML;. Keep in mind that this is not a comprehensive tutorial on &UML; but rather a brief introduction to &UML; which can be read as a &UML; tutorial. If you would like to learn more about the Unified Modelling Language, or in general about software analysis and design, refer to one of the many books available on the topic. There are also a lot of tutorials on the Internet which you can take as a starting point. + +The Unified Modelling Language (&UML;) is a diagramming language or notation to specify, visualise and document models of Object Orientated software systems. &UML; is not a development method, that means it does not tell you what to do first and what to do next or how to design your system, but it helps you to visualise your design and communicate with others. &UML; is controlled by the Object Management Group (OMG) and is the industry standard for graphically describing software. +&UML; is designed for Object Orientated software design and has limited use for other programming paradigms. +&UML; is composed of many model elements that represent the different parts of a software system. The &UML; elements are used to create diagrams, which represent a certain part, or a point of view of the system. The following types of diagrams are supported by &umbrello;: -Use Case Diagrams show actors (people or other users of the system), use cases (the scenarios when they use the system), and their relationships - -Class Diagrams show classes and the relationships between them - -Sequence Diagrams show objects and a sequence of method calls they make to other objects. - -Collaboration Diagrams show objects and their relationship, putting emphasis on the objects that participate in the message exchange +Use Case Diagrams show actors (people or other users of the system), use cases (the scenarios when they use the system), and their relationships + +Class Diagrams show classes and the relationships between them + +Sequence Diagrams show objects and a sequence of method calls they make to other objects. + +Collaboration Diagrams show objects and their relationship, putting emphasis on the objects that participate in the message exchange -State Diagrams show states, state changes and events in an object or a part of the system - -Activity Diagrams show activities and the changes from one activity to another with the events occurring in some part of the system - -Component Diagrams show the high level programming components (such as KParts or Java Beans). - -Deployment Diagrams show the instances of the components and their relationships. +State Diagrams show states, state changes and events in an object or a part of the system + +Activity Diagrams show activities and the changes from one activity to another with the events occurring in some part of the system + +Component Diagrams show the high level programming components (such as KParts or Java Beans). + +Deployment Diagrams show the instances of the components and their relationships. - + - -&UML; Elements + +&UML; Elements -Use Case Diagram -Use Case Diagrams describe the relationships and dependencies between a group of Use Cases and the Actors participating in the process. -It is important to notice that Use Case Diagrams are not suited to represent the design, and cannot describe the internals of a system. Use Case Diagrams are meant to facilitate the communication with the future users of the system, and with the customer, and are specially helpful to determine the required features the system is to have. Use Case Diagrams tell, what the system should do but do not — and cannot — specify how this is to be achieved. +Use Case Diagram +Use Case Diagrams describe the relationships and dependencies between a group of Use Cases and the Actors participating in the process. +It is important to notice that Use Case Diagrams are not suited to represent the design, and cannot describe the internals of a system. Use Case Diagrams are meant to facilitate the communication with the future users of the system, and with the customer, and are specially helpful to determine the required features the system is to have. Use Case Diagrams tell, what the system should do but do not — and cannot — specify how this is to be achieved. -An example Use Case diagram. +An example Use Case diagram. - &umbrello; showing a Use Case Diagram + &umbrello; showing a Use Case Diagram - &umbrello; showing a Use Case Diagram + &umbrello; showing a Use Case Diagram -Use Case -A Use Case describes — from the point of view of the actors — a group of activities in a system that produces a concrete, tangible result. -Use Cases are descriptions of the typical interactions between the users of a system and the system itself. They represent the external interface of the system and specify a form of requirements of what the system has to do (remember, only what, not how). -When working with Use Cases, it is important to remember some simple rules: - Each Use Case is related to at least one actor - Each Use Case has an initiator (&ie; an actor) - Each Use Case leads to a relevant result (a result with business value) +Use Case +A Use Case describes — from the point of view of the actors — a group of activities in a system that produces a concrete, tangible result. +Use Cases are descriptions of the typical interactions between the users of a system and the system itself. They represent the external interface of the system and specify a form of requirements of what the system has to do (remember, only what, not how). +When working with Use Cases, it is important to remember some simple rules: + Each Use Case is related to at least one actor + Each Use Case has an initiator (&ie; an actor) + Each Use Case leads to a relevant result (a result with business value) -Use Cases can also have relationships with other Use Cases. The three most typical types of relationships between Use Cases are: +Use Cases can also have relationships with other Use Cases. The three most typical types of relationships between Use Cases are: -<<include>> which specifies that a Use Case takes place inside another Use Case -<<extends>> which specifies that in certain situations, or at some point (called an extension point) a Use Case will be extended by another. -Generalisation specifies that a Use Case inherits the characteristics of the Super-Use Case, and can override some of them or add new ones in a similar way as the inheritance between classes. +<<include>> which specifies that a Use Case takes place inside another Use Case +<<extends>> which specifies that in certain situations, or at some point (called an extension point) a Use Case will be extended by another. +Generalisation specifies that a Use Case inherits the characteristics of the Super-Use Case, and can override some of them or add new ones in a similar way as the inheritance between classes. -Actor -An actor is an external entity (outside of the system) that interacts with the system by participating (and often initiating) a Use Case. Actors can be in real life people (for example users of the system), other computer systems or external events. -Actors do not represent the physical people or systems, but their role. This means that when a person interacts with the system in different ways (assuming different roles) he will be represented by several actors. For example a person that gives customer support by the telephone and takes orders from the customer into the system would be represented by an actor Support Staff and an actor Sales Representative +Actor +An actor is an external entity (outside of the system) that interacts with the system by participating (and often initiating) a Use Case. Actors can be in real life people (for example users of the system), other computer systems or external events. +Actors do not represent the physical people or systems, but their role. This means that when a person interacts with the system in different ways (assuming different roles) he will be represented by several actors. For example a person that gives customer support by the telephone and takes orders from the customer into the system would be represented by an actor Support Staff and an actor Sales Representative -Use Case Description -Use Case Descriptions are textual narratives of the Use Case. They usually take the form of a note or a document that is somehow linked to the Use Case, and explains the processes or activities that take place in the Use Case. +Use Case Description +Use Case Descriptions are textual narratives of the Use Case. They usually take the form of a note or a document that is somehow linked to the Use Case, and explains the processes or activities that take place in the Use Case. - + -Class Diagram -Class Diagrams show the different classes that make up a system and how they relate to each other. Class Diagrams are said to be static diagrams because they show the classes, along with their methods and attributes as well as the static relationships between them: which classes know about which classes or which classes are part of another class, but do not show the method calls between them. +Class Diagram +Class Diagrams show the different classes that make up a system and how they relate to each other. Class Diagrams are said to be static diagrams because they show the classes, along with their methods and attributes as well as the static relationships between them: which classes know about which classes or which classes are part of another class, but do not show the method calls between them. -An example of a Class Diagram +An example of a Class Diagram - &umbrello; showing a Class Diagram + &umbrello; showing a Class Diagram - &umbrello; showing a Class Diagram + &umbrello; showing a Class Diagram -Class -A Class defines the attributes and the methods of a set of objects. All objects of this class (instances of this class) share the same behaviour, and have the same set of attributes (each object has its own set). The term Type is sometimes used instead of Class, but it is important to mention that these two are not the same, and Type is a more general term. -In &UML;, Classes are represented by rectangles, with the name of the class, and can also show the attributes and operations of the class in two other compartments inside the rectangle. +Class +A Class defines the attributes and the methods of a set of objects. All objects of this class (instances of this class) share the same behaviour, and have the same set of attributes (each object has its own set). The term Type is sometimes used instead of Class, but it is important to mention that these two are not the same, and Type is a more general term. +In &UML;, Classes are represented by rectangles, with the name of the class, and can also show the attributes and operations of the class in two other compartments inside the rectangle. -A Class in &UML; +A Class in &UML; - Visual representation of a Class in &UML; + Visual representation of a Class in &UML; - Visual representation of a Class in &UML; + Visual representation of a Class in &UML; -Attributes -In &UML;, Attributes are shown with at least their name, and can also show their type, initial value and other properties. Attributes can also be displayed with their visibility: +Attributes +In &UML;, Attributes are shown with at least their name, and can also show their type, initial value and other properties. Attributes can also be displayed with their visibility: -+ Stands for public attributes -# Stands for protected attributes -- Stands for private attributes ++ Stands for public attributes +# Stands for protected attributes +- Stands for private attributes -Operations -Operations (methods) are also displayed with at least their name, and can also show their parameters and return types. Operations can, just as Attributes, display their visibility: -+ Stands for public operations -# Stands for protected operations -- Stands for private operations +Operations +Operations (methods) are also displayed with at least their name, and can also show their parameters and return types. Operations can, just as Attributes, display their visibility: ++ Stands for public operations +# Stands for protected operations +- Stands for private operations -Templates -Classes can have templates, a value which is used for an unspecified class or type. The template type is specified when a class is initiated (&ie; an object is created). Templates exist in modern C++ and will be introduced in Java 1.5 where they will be called Generics. +Templates +Classes can have templates, a value which is used for an unspecified class or type. The template type is specified when a class is initiated (&ie; an object is created). Templates exist in modern C++ and will be introduced in Java 1.5 where they will be called Generics. -Class Associations -Classes can relate (be associated with) to each other in different ways: +Class Associations +Classes can relate (be associated with) to each other in different ways: -Generalisation -Inheritance is one of the fundamental concepts of Object Orientated programming, in which a class gains all of the attributes and operations of the class it inherits from, and can override/modify some of them, as well as add more attributes and operations of its own. -In &UML;, a Generalisation association between two classes puts them in a hierarchy representing the concept of inheritance of a derived class from a base class. In &UML;, Generalisations are represented by a line connecting the two classes, with an arrow on the side of the base class. -Generalisation +Generalisation +Inheritance is one of the fundamental concepts of Object Orientated programming, in which a class gains all of the attributes and operations of the class it inherits from, and can override/modify some of them, as well as add more attributes and operations of its own. +In &UML;, a Generalisation association between two classes puts them in a hierarchy representing the concept of inheritance of a derived class from a base class. In &UML;, Generalisations are represented by a line connecting the two classes, with an arrow on the side of the base class. +Generalisation - Visual representation of a generalisation in &UML; + Visual representation of a generalisation in &UML; - Visual representation of a generalisation in &UML; + Visual representation of a generalisation in &UML; @@ -380,35 +171,21 @@ -Associations -An association represents a relationship between classes, and gives the common semantics and structure for many types of connections between objects. -Associations are the mechanism that allows objects to communicate to each other. It describes the connection between different classes (the connection between the actual objects is called object connection, or link. -Associations can have a role that specifies the purpose of the association and can be uni- or bidirectional (indicates if the two objects participating in the relationship can send messages to the other, of if only one of them knows about the other). Each end of the association also has a multiplicity value, which dictates how many objects on this side of the association can relate to one object on the other side. -In &UML;, associations are represented as lines connecting the classes participating in the relationship, and can also show the role and the multiplicity of each of the participants. Multiplicity is displayed as a range [min..max] of non-negative values, with a star (*) on the maximum side representing infinite. -&UML; Association +Associations +An association represents a relationship between classes, and gives the common semantics and structure for many types of connections between objects. +Associations are the mechanism that allows objects to communicate to each other. It describes the connection between different classes (the connection between the actual objects is called object connection, or link. +Associations can have a role that specifies the purpose of the association and can be uni- or bidirectional (indicates if the two objects participating in the relationship can send messages to the other, of if only one of them knows about the other). Each end of the association also has a multiplicity value, which dictates how many objects on this side of the association can relate to one object on the other side. +In &UML;, associations are represented as lines connecting the classes participating in the relationship, and can also show the role and the multiplicity of each of the participants. Multiplicity is displayed as a range [min..max] of non-negative values, with a star (*) on the maximum side representing infinite. +&UML; Association - Visual representation of an Association in &UML; + Visual representation of an Association in &UML; - Visual representation of an Association in &UML; + Visual representation of an Association in &UML; @@ -416,367 +193,226 @@ -Aggregation -Aggregations are a special type of associations in which the two participating classes don't have an equal status, but make a whole-part relationship. An Aggregation describes how the class that takes the role of the whole, is composed (has) of other classes, which take the role of the parts. For Aggregations, the class acting as the whole always has a multiplicity of one. -In &UML;, Aggregations are represented by an association that shows a rhomb on the side of the whole. -Aggregation +Aggregation +Aggregations are a special type of associations in which the two participating classes don't have an equal status, but make a whole-part relationship. An Aggregation describes how the class that takes the role of the whole, is composed (has) of other classes, which take the role of the parts. For Aggregations, the class acting as the whole always has a multiplicity of one. +In &UML;, Aggregations are represented by an association that shows a rhomb on the side of the whole. +Aggregation - Visual representation of an Aggregation relationship in &UML; + Visual representation of an Aggregation relationship in &UML; - Visual representation of an Aggregation relationship in &UML; + Visual representation of an Aggregation relationship in &UML; -Composition -Compositions are associations that represent very strong aggregations. This means, Compositions form whole-part relationships as well, but the relationship is so strong that the parts cannot exist on its own. They exist only inside the whole, and if the whole is destroyed the parts die too. -In &UML;, Compositions are represented by a solid rhomb on the side of the whole. - -Composition +Composition +Compositions are associations that represent very strong aggregations. This means, Compositions form whole-part relationships as well, but the relationship is so strong that the parts cannot exist on its own. They exist only inside the whole, and if the whole is destroyed the parts die too. +In &UML;, Compositions are represented by a solid rhomb on the side of the whole. + +Composition - Visual representation of a Composition relationship in &UML; + Visual representation of a Composition relationship in &UML; - + - + -Other Class Diagram Items -Class diagrams can contain several other items besides classes. +Other Class Diagram Items +Class diagrams can contain several other items besides classes. -Interfaces -Interfaces are abstract classes which means instances can not be directly created of them. They can contain operations but no attributes. Classes can inherit from interfaces (through a realisation association) and instances can then be made of these classes. +Interfaces +Interfaces are abstract classes which means instances can not be directly created of them. They can contain operations but no attributes. Classes can inherit from interfaces (through a realisation association) and instances can then be made of these classes. -Datatypes -Datatypes are primitives which are typically built into a programming language. Common examples include integers and booleans. They can not have relationships to classes but classes can have relationships to them. +Datatypes +Datatypes are primitives which are typically built into a programming language. Common examples include integers and booleans. They can not have relationships to classes but classes can have relationships to them. -Enums -Enums are a simple list of values. A typical example is an enum for days of the week. The options of an enum are called Enum Literals. Like datatypes they can not have relationships to classes but classes can have relationships to them. +Enums +Enums are a simple list of values. A typical example is an enum for days of the week. The options of an enum are called Enum Literals. Like datatypes they can not have relationships to classes but classes can have relationships to them. -Packages -Packages represent a namespace in a programming language. In a diagram they are used to represent parts of a system which contain more than one class, maybe hundreds of classes. +Packages +Packages represent a namespace in a programming language. In a diagram they are used to represent parts of a system which contain more than one class, maybe hundreds of classes. - + -Sequence Diagrams +Sequence Diagrams -Sequence Diagrams show the message exchange (&ie; method call) between several Objects in a specific time-delimited situation. Objects are instances of classes. Sequence Diagrams put special emphasis in the order and the times in which the messages to the objects are sent. +Sequence Diagrams show the message exchange (&ie; method call) between several Objects in a specific time-delimited situation. Objects are instances of classes. Sequence Diagrams put special emphasis in the order and the times in which the messages to the objects are sent. -In Sequence Diagrams objects are represented through vertical dashed lines, with the name of the Object on the top. The time axis is also vertical, increasing downwards, so that messages are sent from one Object to another in the form of arrows with the operation name and optionally the actual parameter values. +In Sequence Diagrams objects are represented through vertical dashed lines, with the name of the Object on the top. The time axis is also vertical, increasing downwards, so that messages are sent from one Object to another in the form of arrows with the operation name and optionally the actual parameter values. -Sequence Diagram +Sequence Diagram - &umbrello; showing a Sequence Diagram + &umbrello; showing a Sequence Diagram - &umbrello; showing a Sequence Diagram + &umbrello; showing a Sequence Diagram -Messages can be either synchronous, the normal type of message call where control is passed to the called object until that method has finished running, or asynchronous where control is passed back directly to the calling object. Synchronous messages have a vertical box on the side of the called object to show the flow of program control. - +Messages can be either synchronous, the normal type of message call where control is passed to the called object until that method has finished running, or asynchronous where control is passed back directly to the calling object. Synchronous messages have a vertical box on the side of the called object to show the flow of program control. + -Collaboration Diagrams +Collaboration Diagrams -Collaboration Diagrams show the interactions occurring between the objects participating in a specific situation. This is more or less the same information shown by Sequence Diagrams but there the emphasis is put on how the interactions occur in time while the Collaboration Diagrams put the relationships between the objects and their topology in the foreground. +Collaboration Diagrams show the interactions occurring between the objects participating in a specific situation. This is more or less the same information shown by Sequence Diagrams but there the emphasis is put on how the interactions occur in time while the Collaboration Diagrams put the relationships between the objects and their topology in the foreground. -In Collaboration Diagrams messages sent from one object to another are represented by arrows, showing the message name, parameters, and the sequence of the message. Collaboration Diagrams are specially well suited to showing a specific program flow or situation and are one of the best diagram types to quickly demonstrate or explain one process in the program logic. +In Collaboration Diagrams messages sent from one object to another are represented by arrows, showing the message name, parameters, and the sequence of the message. Collaboration Diagrams are specially well suited to showing a specific program flow or situation and are one of the best diagram types to quickly demonstrate or explain one process in the program logic. -Collaboration +Collaboration - &umbrello; showing a Collaboration Diagram + &umbrello; showing a Collaboration Diagram - &umbrello; showing a Collaboration Diagram + &umbrello; showing a Collaboration Diagram - + -State Diagram -State Diagrams show the different states of an Object during its life and the stimuli that cause the Object to change its state. -State Diagrams exhibit Objects as state machines or finite automata that can be in one of a finite set of states and that can change its state via one of a finite set of stimuli. For example an Object of type NetServer can be in one of following states during its life: +State Diagram +State Diagrams show the different states of an Object during its life and the stimuli that cause the Object to change its state. +State Diagrams exhibit Objects as state machines or finite automata that can be in one of a finite set of states and that can change its state via one of a finite set of stimuli. For example an Object of type NetServer can be in one of following states during its life: -Ready -Listening -Working -Stopped +Ready +Listening +Working +Stopped -and the events that can cause the Object to change states are +and the events that can cause the Object to change states are -Object is created -Object receives message listen -A Client requests a connection over the network -A Client terminates a request -The request is executed and terminated -Object receives message stop -etc +Object is created +Object receives message listen +A Client requests a connection over the network +A Client terminates a request +The request is executed and terminated +Object receives message stop +etc -State Diagram +State Diagram - &umbrello; showing a State Diagram + &umbrello; showing a State Diagram - &umbrello; showing a State Diagram + &umbrello; showing a State Diagram -State -States are the building block of State Diagrams. A State belongs to exactly one class and represents a summary of the values the attributes of a class can take. A &UML; State describes the internal state of an object of one particular class. -Note that not every change in one of the attributes of an object should be represented by a State but only those changes that can significantly affect the workings of the object. -There are two special types of States: Start and End. They are special in that there is no event that can cause an Object to return to its Start state, in the same way as there is no event that can possibly take an Object out of its End state once it has reached it. +State +States are the building block of State Diagrams. A State belongs to exactly one class and represents a summary of the values the attributes of a class can take. A &UML; State describes the internal state of an object of one particular class. +Note that not every change in one of the attributes of an object should be represented by a State but only those changes that can significantly affect the workings of the object. +There are two special types of States: Start and End. They are special in that there is no event that can cause an Object to return to its Start state, in the same way as there is no event that can possibly take an Object out of its End state once it has reached it. - + -Activity Diagram -Activity Diagrams describe the sequence of activities in a system with the help of Activities. Activity Diagrams are a special form of State Diagrams, that only (or mostly) contains Activities. +Activity Diagram +Activity Diagrams describe the sequence of activities in a system with the help of Activities. Activity Diagrams are a special form of State Diagrams, that only (or mostly) contains Activities. -An example Activity Diagram. +An example Activity Diagram. - &umbrello; showing an Activity Diagram + &umbrello; showing an Activity Diagram - &umbrello; showing an Activity Diagram + &umbrello; showing an Activity Diagram -Activity Diagrams are similar to procedural Flux Diagrams, with the difference that all Activities are clearly attached to Objects. - -Activity Diagrams are always associated to a Class, an Operation or a Use Case. - -Activity Diagrams support sequential as well as parallel Activities. Parallel execution is represented via Fork/Wait icons, and for the Activities running in parallel, it is not important the order in which they are carried out (they can be executed at the same time or one after the other) +Activity Diagrams are similar to procedural Flux Diagrams, with the difference that all Activities are clearly attached to Objects. + +Activity Diagrams are always associated to a Class, an Operation or a Use Case. + +Activity Diagrams support sequential as well as parallel Activities. Parallel execution is represented via Fork/Wait icons, and for the Activities running in parallel, it is not important the order in which they are carried out (they can be executed at the same time or one after the other) -Activity -An Activity is a single step in a process. One Activity is one state in the system with internal activity and, at least, one outgoing transition. Activities can also have more than one outgoing transition if they have different conditions. -Activities can form hierarchies, this means that an Activity can be composed of several detail Activities, in which case the incoming and outgoing transitions should match the incoming and outgoing transitions of the detail diagram. +Activity +An Activity is a single step in a process. One Activity is one state in the system with internal activity and, at least, one outgoing transition. Activities can also have more than one outgoing transition if they have different conditions. +Activities can form hierarchies, this means that an Activity can be composed of several detail Activities, in which case the incoming and outgoing transitions should match the incoming and outgoing transitions of the detail diagram. - + -Helper Elements -There are a few elements in &UML; that have no real semantic value for the model, but help to clarify parts of the diagram. These elements are +Helper Elements +There are a few elements in &UML; that have no real semantic value for the model, but help to clarify parts of the diagram. These elements are -Text lines -Text Notes and anchors -Boxes - -Text lines are useful to add short text information to a diagram. It is free-standing text and has no meaning to the Model itself. - -Notes are useful to add more detailed information about an object or a specific situation. They have the great advantage that notes can be anchored to &UML; Elements to show that the note belongs to a specific object or situation. - -Boxes are free-standing rectangles which can be used to group items together to make diagrams more readable. They have no logical meaning in the model. +Text lines +Text Notes and anchors +Boxes + +Text lines are useful to add short text information to a diagram. It is free-standing text and has no meaning to the Model itself. + +Notes are useful to add more detailed information about an object or a specific situation. They have the great advantage that notes can be anchored to &UML; Elements to show that the note belongs to a specific object or situation. + +Boxes are free-standing rectangles which can be used to group items together to make diagrams more readable. They have no logical meaning in the model. - + -Component Diagrams -Component Diagrams show the software components (either component technologies such as KParts, CORBA components or Java Beans or just sections of the system which are clearly distinguishable) and the artefacts they are made out of such as source code files, programming libraries or relational database tables. +Component Diagrams +Component Diagrams show the software components (either component technologies such as KParts, CORBA components or Java Beans or just sections of the system which are clearly distinguishable) and the artefacts they are made out of such as source code files, programming libraries or relational database tables. -Components can have interfaces (&ie; abstract classes with operations) that allow associations between components. +Components can have interfaces (&ie; abstract classes with operations) that allow associations between components. -Deployment Diagrams +Deployment Diagrams -Deployment diagrams show the runtime component instances and their associations. They include Nodes which are physical resources, typically a single computer. They also show interfaces and objects (class instances). +Deployment diagrams show the runtime component instances and their associations. They include Nodes which are physical resources, typically a single computer. They also show interfaces and objects (class instances). - + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/working_with_umbrello.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/working_with_umbrello.docbook index ffa6cbf2bf7..2aeba7660cc 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/working_with_umbrello.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdesdk/umbrello/working_with_umbrello.docbook @@ -1,411 +1,188 @@ -Working with &umbrello; +Working with &umbrello; -This chapter will introduce you to &umbrello;'s user interface and will tell you all you need to know to start modelling. All actions in &umbrello; are accessible via the menu and the toolbars, but &umbrello; also makes extensive use of &RMB; context menus. You can &RMB; click on almost any element in &umbrello;'s work area or tree view to get a menu with the most useful functions that can be applied to the particular element you are working on. Some users find this a little confusing at the beginning because they are more used to working with the menu or tool bars, but once you get used to right clicking it will greatly speed up your work. +This chapter will introduce you to &umbrello;'s user interface and will tell you all you need to know to start modelling. All actions in &umbrello; are accessible via the menu and the toolbars, but &umbrello; also makes extensive use of &RMB; context menus. You can &RMB; click on almost any element in &umbrello;'s work area or tree view to get a menu with the most useful functions that can be applied to the particular element you are working on. Some users find this a little confusing at the beginning because they are more used to working with the menu or tool bars, but once you get used to right clicking it will greatly speed up your work. -User Interface -&umbrello;'s main window is divided in three areas that will help you keep an overview of your entire system and access the different diagrams quickly while working on your model. -These areas are called: +User Interface +&umbrello;'s main window is divided in three areas that will help you keep an overview of your entire system and access the different diagrams quickly while working on your model. +These areas are called: -Tree View -Work Area -Documentation Window +Tree View +Work Area +Documentation Window -&umbrello;'s User Interface +&umbrello;'s User Interface - &umbrello;'s User Interface + &umbrello;'s User Interface - &umbrello;'s User Interface + &umbrello;'s User Interface -Tree View -The Tree View is usually located on the top left hand side of the window and shows all the diagrams, classes, actors and use cases that build up your model. The Tree View allows you to have a quick overview of the elements composing your model. The Tree View also gives you a quick way to switch between the different diagrams in your model and inserting elements from your model into the current diagram. -If you are working on a model with more than just a few classes and diagrams, the Tree View may help you stay on top of things by organising your model elements in folders. You can create folders by selecting the appropriate option from the context menu (&RMB; click on one of the folders in the tree view) and you can organise your elements by moving them to the appropriate folder (drag and drop) +Tree View +The Tree View is usually located on the top left hand side of the window and shows all the diagrams, classes, actors and use cases that build up your model. The Tree View allows you to have a quick overview of the elements composing your model. The Tree View also gives you a quick way to switch between the different diagrams in your model and inserting elements from your model into the current diagram. +If you are working on a model with more than just a few classes and diagrams, the Tree View may help you stay on top of things by organising your model elements in folders. You can create folders by selecting the appropriate option from the context menu (&RMB; click on one of the folders in the tree view) and you can organise your elements by moving them to the appropriate folder (drag and drop) -Documentation Window -The Documentation Window is the small window located on the left bottom of &umbrello;, and it gives you a quick preview of the documentation for the currently selected item. The Documentation Window is rather small because it is intended to allow you just a quick pick into the element's documentation while taking as little screen space as possible. If you need to view the documentation in more detail you can always open the item's properties. +Documentation Window +The Documentation Window is the small window located on the left bottom of &umbrello;, and it gives you a quick preview of the documentation for the currently selected item. The Documentation Window is rather small because it is intended to allow you just a quick pick into the element's documentation while taking as little screen space as possible. If you need to view the documentation in more detail you can always open the item's properties. -Work Area -The Work Area is the main window in &umbrello; and is where the real action takes place. You use the Work Area to edit and view the diagrams in your model. The Work Area shows the currently active diagram. Currently only one diagram can be shown on the Work Area at any time. +Work Area +The Work Area is the main window in &umbrello; and is where the real action takes place. You use the Work Area to edit and view the diagrams in your model. The Work Area shows the currently active diagram. Currently only one diagram can be shown on the Work Area at any time. - + -Creating, Loading and Saving Models -The first thing you need to start doing something useful with &umbrello; is to create a model to work on. When you start &umbrello; it always loads the last used model or creates a new, empty model (depending on your preferences set in the configuration dialogue). This will allow you to start working right away. +Creating, Loading and Saving Models +The first thing you need to start doing something useful with &umbrello; is to create a model to work on. When you start &umbrello; it always loads the last used model or creates a new, empty model (depending on your preferences set in the configuration dialogue). This will allow you to start working right away. -New Model -If at any time you need to create a new model you can do this by selecting the New entry from the File menu, or by clicking on the New icon from the application toolbar. If you are currently working on a model which has been modified &umbrello; will ask you if it should save your changes before loading the new model. +New Model +If at any time you need to create a new model you can do this by selecting the New entry from the File menu, or by clicking on the New icon from the application toolbar. If you are currently working on a model which has been modified &umbrello; will ask you if it should save your changes before loading the new model. -Save Model -You can save your model at any time by selecting the option Save from the File Menu or by clicking on the Save button from the application toolbar. If you need to save your model under a different name you can use the option Save As from the File Menu. -For your convenience &umbrello; also offers you the option to automatically save your work each certain time period. You can configure if you want this option as well as the time intervals in the Settings from &umbrello; +Save Model +You can save your model at any time by selecting the option Save from the File Menu or by clicking on the Save button from the application toolbar. If you need to save your model under a different name you can use the option Save As from the File Menu. +For your convenience &umbrello; also offers you the option to automatically save your work each certain time period. You can configure if you want this option as well as the time intervals in the Settings from &umbrello; -Load Model -For loading an already existing model you may select the option Open from the File Menu or click on the Open icon from the application toolbar. The most recently used models are also available under the submenu Open Recent in the File Menu to speed up access to your most frequently used models. -&umbrello; can only work on one model at a time, so if you ask the program to load a model for you and your current model has been modified since the last time you save it, &umbrello; will ask you whether your changes should be saved to prevent any loss of work. You can start two or more instances of &umbrello; at any one time, you can also copy and paste between instances. +Load Model +For loading an already existing model you may select the option Open from the File Menu or click on the Open icon from the application toolbar. The most recently used models are also available under the submenu Open Recent in the File Menu to speed up access to your most frequently used models. +&umbrello; can only work on one model at a time, so if you ask the program to load a model for you and your current model has been modified since the last time you save it, &umbrello; will ask you whether your changes should be saved to prevent any loss of work. You can start two or more instances of &umbrello; at any one time, you can also copy and paste between instances. - + -Editing Models -In &umbrello;, there are basically two ways for editing the elements in your model. -Edit model elements directly through the Tree View -Edit model elements through a Diagram +Editing Models +In &umbrello;, there are basically two ways for editing the elements in your model. +Edit model elements directly through the Tree View +Edit model elements through a Diagram -Using the context menu of the different items in the Tree View you are able to add, remove, and modify almost all the elements in your model. Right clicking on the folders in the Tree View will give you options for creating the different types of diagrams as well as, depending on whether the folder is a Use Case View or a Logical View, Actors, Use Cases, Classes, etc. -Once you have added elements to your model you can also edit an element by accessing its properties dialogue, which you find by selecting the option Properties from the context menu shown when right clicking on the items in the Tree View. -You can also edit your model by creating or modifying elements through diagrams. More details on how to do this are given in the following sections. +Using the context menu of the different items in the Tree View you are able to add, remove, and modify almost all the elements in your model. Right clicking on the folders in the Tree View will give you options for creating the different types of diagrams as well as, depending on whether the folder is a Use Case View or a Logical View, Actors, Use Cases, Classes, etc. +Once you have added elements to your model you can also edit an element by accessing its properties dialogue, which you find by selecting the option Properties from the context menu shown when right clicking on the items in the Tree View. +You can also edit your model by creating or modifying elements through diagrams. More details on how to do this are given in the following sections. -Adding and Removing Diagrams -Your &UML; model consists of a set of &UML; elements and associations between them. However you cannot see the model directly, you use Diagrams to look at it. +Adding and Removing Diagrams +Your &UML; model consists of a set of &UML; elements and associations between them. However you cannot see the model directly, you use Diagrams to look at it. -Creating Diagrams -To create a new diagram in your model simply select the diagram type you need from the New submenu in the Diagram menu and give a name to it. The diagram will be created and made active, and you will immediately see it in the tree view. -Remember that &umbrello; makes extensive use of context menus: you can also &RMB; click on a folder in the Tree View and select the appropriate diagram type from the New submenu in the context menu. Note that you can create Use Case Diagrams only in Use Case View folders, and the other types of diagram can only be created in the Logical View folders. +Creating Diagrams +To create a new diagram in your model simply select the diagram type you need from the New submenu in the Diagram menu and give a name to it. The diagram will be created and made active, and you will immediately see it in the tree view. +Remember that &umbrello; makes extensive use of context menus: you can also &RMB; click on a folder in the Tree View and select the appropriate diagram type from the New submenu in the context menu. Note that you can create Use Case Diagrams only in Use Case View folders, and the other types of diagram can only be created in the Logical View folders. -Removing Diagrams -Should you need to remove a diagram from your model, you can do this by making it active and selecting Delete from the Diagram Menu. You can also achieve this by selecting Delete from the diagrams context menu in the Tree View -Since deleting a diagram is something serious that could cause loss of work if done by accident, &umbrello; will ask you to confirm the delete operation before actually removing the Diagram. Once a diagram has been deleted and the file has been saved there is no way to undo this action. +Removing Diagrams +Should you need to remove a diagram from your model, you can do this by making it active and selecting Delete from the Diagram Menu. You can also achieve this by selecting Delete from the diagrams context menu in the Tree View +Since deleting a diagram is something serious that could cause loss of work if done by accident, &umbrello; will ask you to confirm the delete operation before actually removing the Diagram. Once a diagram has been deleted and the file has been saved there is no way to undo this action. -Renaming Diagrams -If you want to change the name of an existing diagram you can easily do this by selecting the Rename option from its &RMB; menu in the Tree View. -Another way to rename a diagram is to do this via its properties dialogue, which you obtain by selecting Properties from its Context Menu or by double clicking on it in the Tree View. +Renaming Diagrams +If you want to change the name of an existing diagram you can easily do this by selecting the Rename option from its &RMB; menu in the Tree View. +Another way to rename a diagram is to do this via its properties dialogue, which you obtain by selecting Properties from its Context Menu or by double clicking on it in the Tree View. -Editing Diagrams -When working on a diagram, &umbrello; will try to guide you by applying some simple rules as to which elements are valid in the different types of diagrams, as well as the relationships that can exist between them. If you are an &UML; expert you will probably not even notice it, but this will help &UML; novices create standard-conformant diagrams. -Once you have created your diagrams it is time to start editing them. Here you should notice the (for beginners subtle) difference between editing your diagram, and editing the model. As you already know, Diagrams are views of your model. For example, if you create a class by editing a Class Diagram, you are really editing both, your Diagram and your model. If you change the colour or other display options of a Class in your Class Diagram, you are only editing the Diagram, but nothing is changed in your model. +Editing Diagrams +When working on a diagram, &umbrello; will try to guide you by applying some simple rules as to which elements are valid in the different types of diagrams, as well as the relationships that can exist between them. If you are an &UML; expert you will probably not even notice it, but this will help &UML; novices create standard-conformant diagrams. +Once you have created your diagrams it is time to start editing them. Here you should notice the (for beginners subtle) difference between editing your diagram, and editing the model. As you already know, Diagrams are views of your model. For example, if you create a class by editing a Class Diagram, you are really editing both, your Diagram and your model. If you change the colour or other display options of a Class in your Class Diagram, you are only editing the Diagram, but nothing is changed in your model. -Insert Elements -One of the first things you will do when editing a new diagram is to insert elements into them (Classes, Actors, Use Cases, &etc;) There is basically two ways of doing this: +Insert Elements +One of the first things you will do when editing a new diagram is to insert elements into them (Classes, Actors, Use Cases, &etc;) There is basically two ways of doing this: -Dragging existing elements in your model from the Tree View -Creating new elements in your model and adding them to your diagram at the same time, by using one of the edit Tools in the Work Toolbar +Dragging existing elements in your model from the Tree View +Creating new elements in your model and adding them to your diagram at the same time, by using one of the edit Tools in the Work Toolbar -To insert elements that already exist in your model, just drag them from the Tree View and drop them where you want them to be in your diagram. You can always move elements around in your Diagram using the Select Tool -The second way of adding elements to your diagram is by using the Work Toolbar's edit tools (note that this will also add the elements to your model). -The Work Toolbar was by default located on the far right of the application window, &umbrello; 1.2 has moved this to the top of the window. You can dock it into other edge or have it floating around if you prefer. The tools available on this toolbar (the buttons you see on it) change depending on the type of diagram you are currently working on. The button for the currently selected tool is activated in the toolbar. You can switch to the select tool by pressing the &Esc; key. -When you have selected an edit tool from the Work Toolbar (for example, the tool to insert classes) the mouse pointer changes to a cross, and you can insert the elements in your model by single clicking in your diagram. Note that elements in &UML; must have a Unique Name. So that if you have a class in one diagram whose name is ClassA and then you use the insert Class tool to insert a class into another diagram you cannot name this new class ClassA as well. If these two are supposed to be two different elements, you have to give them a unique name. If you are trying to add the same element to your diagram, then the Insert Class is not the right tool for that. You should drag and drop the class from the Tree View instead. +To insert elements that already exist in your model, just drag them from the Tree View and drop them where you want them to be in your diagram. You can always move elements around in your Diagram using the Select Tool +The second way of adding elements to your diagram is by using the Work Toolbar's edit tools (note that this will also add the elements to your model). +The Work Toolbar was by default located on the far right of the application window, &umbrello; 1.2 has moved this to the top of the window. You can dock it into other edge or have it floating around if you prefer. The tools available on this toolbar (the buttons you see on it) change depending on the type of diagram you are currently working on. The button for the currently selected tool is activated in the toolbar. You can switch to the select tool by pressing the &Esc; key. +When you have selected an edit tool from the Work Toolbar (for example, the tool to insert classes) the mouse pointer changes to a cross, and you can insert the elements in your model by single clicking in your diagram. Note that elements in &UML; must have a Unique Name. So that if you have a class in one diagram whose name is ClassA and then you use the insert Class tool to insert a class into another diagram you cannot name this new class ClassA as well. If these two are supposed to be two different elements, you have to give them a unique name. If you are trying to add the same element to your diagram, then the Insert Class is not the right tool for that. You should drag and drop the class from the Tree View instead. -Deleting Elements -You can delete any element by selecting the option Delete from its context menu. -Again, there is a big difference between removing an object from a diagram, and deleting an object from your model: If you delete an object from within a diagram, you are only removing the object from that particular diagram: the element will still be part of your model and if there are other diagrams using the same element they will not suffer any change. If, on the other hand, you delete the element from the Tree View, you are actually deleting the element from your model. Since the element no longer exist in your model, it will be automatically removed from all the diagrams it appears in. +Deleting Elements +You can delete any element by selecting the option Delete from its context menu. +Again, there is a big difference between removing an object from a diagram, and deleting an object from your model: If you delete an object from within a diagram, you are only removing the object from that particular diagram: the element will still be part of your model and if there are other diagrams using the same element they will not suffer any change. If, on the other hand, you delete the element from the Tree View, you are actually deleting the element from your model. Since the element no longer exist in your model, it will be automatically removed from all the diagrams it appears in. -Editing Elements -You can edit most of the &UML; elements in your model and diagrams by opening its Properties dialogue and selecting the appropriate options. To edit the properties of an object, select Properties from its context menu (&RMB; click). Each element has a dialogue consisting of several pages where you can configure the options corresponding to that element. For some elements, like actors you can only set a couple of options, like the object name and documentation, while for other elements, like classes, you can edit its attributes and operations, select what you want to be shown in the diagram (whole operation signature or just operation names, etc) and even the colours you want to use for the line and fill of the class' representation on the diagram. +Editing Elements +You can edit most of the &UML; elements in your model and diagrams by opening its Properties dialogue and selecting the appropriate options. To edit the properties of an object, select Properties from its context menu (&RMB; click). Each element has a dialogue consisting of several pages where you can configure the options corresponding to that element. For some elements, like actors you can only set a couple of options, like the object name and documentation, while for other elements, like classes, you can edit its attributes and operations, select what you want to be shown in the diagram (whole operation signature or just operation names, etc) and even the colours you want to use for the line and fill of the class' representation on the diagram. -For most &UML; elements you can also open the properties dialogue by double clicking on it if you are using the selection tool (arrow). The exception to this is Associations, in which case a double click creates an anchor point. For associations you need to use the &RMB; context menu to get the properties dialogue. +For most &UML; elements you can also open the properties dialogue by double clicking on it if you are using the selection tool (arrow). The exception to this is Associations, in which case a double click creates an anchor point. For associations you need to use the &RMB; context menu to get the properties dialogue. -Note that you can also select the properties option from the context menu of the elements in the Tree View. This allows you to also edit the properties for the diagrams, like setting whether the grid should be shown or not. +Note that you can also select the properties option from the context menu of the elements in the Tree View. This allows you to also edit the properties for the diagrams, like setting whether the grid should be shown or not. -Editing Classes -Even though editing the properties of all objects was already covered in the previous section, classes deserve a special section because they are a bit more complicated and have more options than most of the other &UML; elements. -In the properties dialogue for a class you can set everything, from the colour it uses to the operations and attributes it has. +Editing Classes +Even though editing the properties of all objects was already covered in the previous section, classes deserve a special section because they are a bit more complicated and have more options than most of the other &UML; elements. +In the properties dialogue for a class you can set everything, from the colour it uses to the operations and attributes it has. -Class General Settings -The General Settings page of the properties dialogue is self-explanatory. Here you can change the class' name, visibility, documentation, &etc; This page is always available. +Class General Settings +The General Settings page of the properties dialogue is self-explanatory. Here you can change the class' name, visibility, documentation, &etc; This page is always available. -Class Attribute Settings -In the Attributes Settings page you can add, edit, or delete attributes (variables) of the class. You can move attributes up and down the list by pressing the arrow button on the side. This page is always available. +Class Attribute Settings +In the Attributes Settings page you can add, edit, or delete attributes (variables) of the class. You can move attributes up and down the list by pressing the arrow button on the side. This page is always available. -Class Operations Settings -Similar to the Attribute Settings Page, in the Operation Settings Page you can add, edit, or remove operations for your class. When adding or editing an operation, you enter the basic data in the Operation Properties dialogue. If you want to add parameters to your operation you need to click the New Parameter button, which will show the Parameter Properties dialogue. This page is always available +Class Operations Settings +Similar to the Attribute Settings Page, in the Operation Settings Page you can add, edit, or remove operations for your class. When adding or editing an operation, you enter the basic data in the Operation Properties dialogue. If you want to add parameters to your operation you need to click the New Parameter button, which will show the Parameter Properties dialogue. This page is always available -Class Template Settings -This page allows you to add class templates which are unspecified classes or datatypes. In Java 1.5 these will be called Generics. +Class Template Settings +This page allows you to add class templates which are unspecified classes or datatypes. In Java 1.5 these will be called Generics. -Class Associations Page -The Class Associations page shows all the associations of this class in the current diagram. Double clicking on an association shows its properties, and depending on the type of association you may modify some parameters here such as setting multiplicity and Role name. If the association does not allow such options be be modified, the Association Properties dialogue is read-only and you can only modify the documentation associated with this association. -This page is only available if you open the Class Properties from within a diagram. If you select the class properties from the context menu in the Tree View this page is not available. +Class Associations Page +The Class Associations page shows all the associations of this class in the current diagram. Double clicking on an association shows its properties, and depending on the type of association you may modify some parameters here such as setting multiplicity and Role name. If the association does not allow such options be be modified, the Association Properties dialogue is read-only and you can only modify the documentation associated with this association. +This page is only available if you open the Class Properties from within a diagram. If you select the class properties from the context menu in the Tree View this page is not available. -Class Display Page -In the Display Options page, you can set what is to be shown in the diagram. A class can be shown as only one rectangle with the class name in it (useful if you have many classes in your diagram, or are for the moment not interested in the details of each class) or as complete as showing packages, stereotypes, and attributes and operations with full signature and visibility -Depending on the amount of information you want to see you can select the corresponding options in this page. The changes you make here are only display options for the diagram. This means that hiding a class' operations only makes them not to be shown in the diagram, but the operations are still there as part of your model. This option is only available if you select the class properties from within a Diagram. If you open the class properties from the Tree View this page is missing since such Display Options do not make sense in that case +Class Display Page +In the Display Options page, you can set what is to be shown in the diagram. A class can be shown as only one rectangle with the class name in it (useful if you have many classes in your diagram, or are for the moment not interested in the details of each class) or as complete as showing packages, stereotypes, and attributes and operations with full signature and visibility +Depending on the amount of information you want to see you can select the corresponding options in this page. The changes you make here are only display options for the diagram. This means that hiding a class' operations only makes them not to be shown in the diagram, but the operations are still there as part of your model. This option is only available if you select the class properties from within a Diagram. If you open the class properties from the Tree View this page is missing since such Display Options do not make sense in that case -Class Colour Page -In the Widget Colour page you can configure the colours you want for the line and the fill of the widget. This option obviously makes sense only for classes displayed in diagrams, and is missing if you open the class' properties dialogue from the Tree View. +Class Colour Page +In the Widget Colour page you can configure the colours you want for the line and the fill of the widget. This option obviously makes sense only for classes displayed in diagrams, and is missing if you open the class' properties dialogue from the Tree View. -Associations -Associations relate two &UML; objects to each other. Normally associations are defined between two classes, but some types of associations can also exist between use cases and actors. -To create an association select the appropriate tool from the Work Toolbar (generic Association, Generalization, Aggregation, &etc;) and single click on the first element participating in the association and then single click on the second item participating. Note that those are two clicks, one on each of the objects participating in the association, it is not a drag from one object to the other. -If you try to use an association in a way against the &UML; specification &umbrello; will refuse to create the association and you will get an error message. This would be the case if, for example, a Generalisation exists from class A to class B and then you try to create another Generalisation from Class B to class A -Right clicking on an association will show a context menu with the actions you can apply on it. If you need to delete an association simply select the Delete option from this context menu. You can also select the Properties option and, depending on the association type edit attributes such as roles and multiplicity. +Associations +Associations relate two &UML; objects to each other. Normally associations are defined between two classes, but some types of associations can also exist between use cases and actors. +To create an association select the appropriate tool from the Work Toolbar (generic Association, Generalization, Aggregation, &etc;) and single click on the first element participating in the association and then single click on the second item participating. Note that those are two clicks, one on each of the objects participating in the association, it is not a drag from one object to the other. +If you try to use an association in a way against the &UML; specification &umbrello; will refuse to create the association and you will get an error message. This would be the case if, for example, a Generalisation exists from class A to class B and then you try to create another Generalisation from Class B to class A +Right clicking on an association will show a context menu with the actions you can apply on it. If you need to delete an association simply select the Delete option from this context menu. You can also select the Properties option and, depending on the association type edit attributes such as roles and multiplicity. -Anchor Points -Associations are drawn, by default, as a straight line connecting the two objects in the diagram. -You can add anchor points to bend an association by double clicking some where along the association line. This will insert an anchor point (displayed as a blue point when the association line is selected) which you can move around to give shape to the association -If you need to remove an anchor point, double click on it again to remove it -Note that the only way to edit the properties of an association is through the context menu. If you try to double click on it as with other &UML; objects, this will only insert an anchor point. +Anchor Points +Associations are drawn, by default, as a straight line connecting the two objects in the diagram. +You can add anchor points to bend an association by double clicking some where along the association line. This will insert an anchor point (displayed as a blue point when the association line is selected) which you can move around to give shape to the association +If you need to remove an anchor point, double click on it again to remove it +Note that the only way to edit the properties of an association is through the context menu. If you try to double click on it as with other &UML; objects, this will only insert an anchor point. -Notes, Text and Boxes -Notes, Lines Of Text and Boxes are elements that can be present in any type of diagram and have no real semantic value, but are very helpful to add extra comments or explanations that can make your diagram easier to understand. -To add a Note or a Line Of Text, select the corresponding tool from the Work Toolbar and single click on the diagram where you want to put your comment. You can edit the text by opening the element through its context menu or in the case of notes by double clicking on them as well. +Notes, Text and Boxes +Notes, Lines Of Text and Boxes are elements that can be present in any type of diagram and have no real semantic value, but are very helpful to add extra comments or explanations that can make your diagram easier to understand. +To add a Note or a Line Of Text, select the corresponding tool from the Work Toolbar and single click on the diagram where you want to put your comment. You can edit the text by opening the element through its context menu or in the case of notes by double clicking on them as well. -Anchors -Anchors are used to link a text note and another &UML; Element together. For example, you normally use a text note to explain or make some comment about a class or a particular association, in which case you can use the anchor to make it clear that the note belongs to that particular element. -To add an anchor between a note and another &UML; element, use the anchor tool from the work toolbar. You first need to click on the note and then click on the &UML; element you want the note to be linked to. +Anchors +Anchors are used to link a text note and another &UML; Element together. For example, you normally use a text note to explain or make some comment about a class or a particular association, in which case you can use the anchor to make it clear that the note belongs to that particular element. +To add an anchor between a note and another &UML; element, use the anchor tool from the work toolbar. You first need to click on the note and then click on the &UML; element you want the note to be linked to. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeutils/kcontrol/kcmlowbatcrit/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeutils/kcontrol/kcmlowbatcrit/index.docbook index 95256fd3d72..bc9626f5140 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeutils/kcontrol/kcmlowbatcrit/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdeutils/kcontrol/kcmlowbatcrit/index.docbook @@ -2,86 +2,43 @@ - + ]>
- Mike McBride -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
KDE British Conversion + Mike McBride +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
KDE British Conversion -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -Battery -Power +KDE +KControl +Battery +Power -Low Battery Critical - +Information. --> -Use - +Use + -Section Author -This section written by Paul Campbell paul@taniwha.com -Converted to Docbook by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com -KDE British Conversion Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Author +This section written by Paul Campbell paul@taniwha.com +Converted to Docbook by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com +KDE British Conversion Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk -- cgit v1.2.1